Workshop Manual

Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index
NOTE: This alphabetical index only lists procedure titles. For a full text search of this entire Workshop Manual, please use
Search box above.
About This Manual

(Description and Operation, 100-00 General Information)
Acceleration Control - Overview
(Description and Operation, 310-02 Acceleration Control)
Acceleration Control
(Diagnosis and Testing, 310-02 Acceleration Control)
Accelerator Pedal
(Removal and Installation, 310-02 Acceleration Control)
Accessory Drive - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
(Removal and Installation, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Removal and Installation, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Accessory Drive Belt
m
Accessory Drive
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Accessory Drive
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
co
Accessory Drive
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Accessory Drive
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-05 Accessory Drive - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Active Grille Shutter - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-02 Front End Body Panels)
.
Active Grille Shutter - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 501-02 Front End Body
gn
Panels)
Active Grille Shutter Actuator
(Removal and Installation, 501-02 Front End Body Panels)
Active Grille Shutter
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-02 Front End Body Panels)
ia
Active Torque Coupling Configuration

(General Procedures, 308-07 Four-Wheel Drive Systems)
Adaptive Learning Drive Cycle
(General Procedures, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F35)
rd
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe

(Removal and Installation, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))

(Removal and Installation, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec
ca
(209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))

Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner
(Removal and Installation, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec
(227kW/301PS))
Air Cleaner
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment
(General Procedures, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch and Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Field Coil
(General Procedures, 412-00 Climate Control
System - General Information)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Removal and Installation, 412-00 Climate Control System
- General Information)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
(Removal and Installation, 412-00 Climate Control System -
General Information)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
(Removal and Installation, 412-00 Climate Control System
- General Information)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Belt
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Inlet Line - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Removal and Installation, 412-00 Climate
Control System - General Information)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Inlet Line - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
(Removal and Installation, 412-00 Climate Control
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Inlet Line - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
(Removal and Installation, 412-00 Climate Control
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Leak Detection
(General Procedures, 412-00 Climate Control System - General
Information)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Outlet Line - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Outlet Line - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Outlet Line - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Odor Treatment
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)/3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
(Removal and
Installation, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
(Removal and
Installation, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Flushing
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
(General Procedures, 412-00 Climate Control System -
Air Deflector
(Removal and Installation, 501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
Air Distribution Door Actuator
(Removal and Installation, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
m
Air Inlet Door Actuator
Airbag and Seatbelt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Component Location
(Description and Operation,
501-20 Supplemental Restraint System)
co
Airbag and Seatbelt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-20
Supplemental Restraint System)
Airbag and Seatbelt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 501-20 Supplemental Restraint System)
.
Airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-20 Supplemental Restraint System)
gn
All Terrain Control Module (ATCM)
(Removal and Installation, 308-07 Four-Wheel Drive Systems)
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Module
(Removal and Installation, 308-07 Four-Wheel Drive Systems)
Alternating Current (AC) Power Outlet Socket
(Removal and Installation, 414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter)
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
ia
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control - Overview

(Description and Operation, 206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) and Stability Control)
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and
rd
Operation, 206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control)

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control
(Diagnosis and Testing, 206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and
Stability Control)
ca
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module

(Removal and Installation, 206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control)
Anti-Theft Security Access
(General Procedures, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle
System)
(General Procedures, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS))
A-Pillar Trim Panel - Police
(Removal and Installation, 501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation)
A-Pillar Trim Panel
Audio Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Module
(Removal and Installation, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System -
General Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System)
Audio Front Control Module (ACM)
(Removal and Installation, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General
Information - Vehicles Without: SYNC)
Audio Input Jack
(Removal and Installation, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
With: SYNC Without Touchscreen)
Audio Unit Antenna Cable
(Removal and Installation, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display)
Vehicles Without: SYNC)
Audio Unit Antenna
Without: SYNC)
Autolamps
(Diagnosis and Testing, 417-01 Exterior Lighting)
Automatic Transmission - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55
(Diagnosis and
Testing, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Automatic Transmission - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS), 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55
(Diagnosis and
(Diagnosis and
Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35
(Specifications, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55
(Specifications, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Auxiliary Power Point
(Removal and Installation, 501-12 Instrument Panel and Console)
Auxiliary Steering Wheel Controls
(Description and Operation, 100-05 Police Equipment)
Axle Assembly
(Removal and Installation, 205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential)
Azimuth System Check
(General Procedures, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist)
(General Procedures, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid)
Balance Shaft Backlash
(General Procedures, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Ballast
(Removal and Installation, 417-01 Exterior Lighting)
Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
Battery and Cables - Overview
(Description and Operation, 414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables)
Battery and Cables - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 414-01 Battery, Mounting and
Cables)
Battery Cables - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Removal and Installation, 414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables)
Battery Cables - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
(Removal and Installation, 414-01 Battery,
Mounting and Cables)
Battery Cables - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Battery Charging
(General Procedures, 414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables)
m
Battery Current Sensor
Battery Disconnect and Connect
Battery Drain Check
co
Battery Energy Control Module B (BECMB)
(Removal and Installation, 501-20 Supplemental Restraint System)
Battery Tray
Battery, Mounting and Cables
(Specifications, 414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables)
Battery
(Diagnosis and Testing, 414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables)
.
Battery
gn
Bearing Inspection
(General Procedures, 303-00 Engine System - General Information)
Bezel Diagnostics
(General Procedures, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
Without: SYNC)
Blind Spot Information System - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 419-04 Side and Rear Vision)
ia
Blind Spot Information System - Overview

(Description and Operation, 419-04 Side and Rear Vision)
Blind Spot Information System - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 419-04 Side and
Rear Vision)
rd
Blind Spot Information System

(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-04 Side and Rear Vision)
Block Heater
(Removal and Installation, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Block Heater
(Removal and Installation, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
ca
Block Heater
Blower Motor Speed Control
Blower Motor
Body - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-00 Body System - General Information)
Body and Frame
(Description and Operation, 501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks)
Body Closures - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 501-03 Body Closures)
Body Closures - Overview
Body Closures - System Operation and Component Description
Body Closures
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-03 Body Closures)
Body Control Module (BCM)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules)
(Removal and Installation, 419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules)
Body Panel Sectioning
(General Procedures, 501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks)
Body Repair Health and Safety and General Precautions
Body Repairs - General Information
(Specifications, 501-25 Body Repairs - General Information)
Body System - General Information
(Specifications, 501-00 Body System - General Information)
Body System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-00 Body System - General Information)
B-Pillar Trim Panel
Brake and Clutch Systems Health and Safety Precautions
Brake Booster
(Removal and Installation, 206-07 Power Brake Actuation)
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
(Removal and Installation, 206-03 Front Disc Brake)
(Removal and Installation, 206-04 Rear Disc Brake)
Brake Caliper
Brake Caliper
Brake Disc Machining
(General Procedures, 206-00 Brake System - General Information)
Brake Disc Shield
Brake Disc Shield
Brake Disc
Brake Disc
Brake Master Cylinder
(Removal and Installation, 206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation)
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: 325 mm (13 in) Brakes
Brake Pads
Brake Pedal and Bracket
Brake Pedal Control Switch
Brake Shift Interlock Actuator - Vehicles With: Column Shift
(Removal and Installation, 307-05 Automatic Transmission
External Controls)
Brake Shift Interlock Actuator - Vehicles With: Floor Shift
(Removal and Installation, 307-05 Automatic Transmission External
Controls)
Brake Shift Interlock Actuator Manual Override - Vehicles With: Column Shift
(General Procedures, 307-05 Automatic
Transmission External Controls)
Brake Shift Interlock Actuator Manual Override - Vehicles With: Floor Shift
Brake System - General Information
(Specifications, 206-00 Brake System - General Information)
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Brake System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 206-00 Brake System - General Information)
Brake Vacuum Pump - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
Brake Vacuum Sensor
m
Cabin Air Filter
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
(Removal and Installation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
co
(Removal and Installation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS))
(257kW/350PS))
.
gn
(227kW/301PS))
Camshafts
(Removal and Installation, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Camshafts
(Removal and Installation, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Camshafts
ia
Camshafts
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
(Removal and Installation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Removal and Installation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
rd

Catalytic Converter LH
(Removal and Installation, 309-00 Exhaust System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
ca

(Removal and Installation, 309-00 Exhaust System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Catalytic Converter RH
Catalytic Converter
Center Registers
Charge Air Cooler (CAC) Cleaning
(General Procedures, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
Charge Air Cooler (CAC) Cleaning
(General Procedures, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
Charge Air Cooler (CAC)
(Removal and Installation, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
Charge Air Cooler (CAC)
(Removal and Installation, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
Charging System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 414-00 Charging System - General Information)
Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
Charging System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Charging System - Overview
(Description and Operation, 414-00 Charging System - General Information)
Charging System - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 414-00 Charging System -
Climate Control Housing
Climate Control System - General Information
(Specifications, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - Component Location
(Description and
Operation, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - Overview
412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - System Operation and Component
Description
(Description and Operation, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 412-00 Climate
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) - Component Location
(Description
and Operation, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) - Overview
(Description and
Operation, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) - System Operation and Component
Description
(Description and Operation, 412-00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 412-00
Climate Control System - General Information)
Climate Control System Health and Safety Precautions
Clockspring Adjustment
(General Procedures, 501-20 Supplemental Restraint System)
Clockspring
Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 419-03 Collision
Warning and Collision Avoidance System)
Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System - Overview
(Description and Operation, 419-03 Collision Warning and
Collision Avoidance System)
m
Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and
Operation, 419-03 Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System)
Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-03 Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance
System)
co
Communications Network - Overview
(Description and Operation, 418-00 Module Communications Network)
Communications Network - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 418-00 Module
Communications Network)
.
Communications Network
(Diagnosis and Testing, 418-00 Module Communications Network)
gn
Component Bleeding
Condenser - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
Condenser - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
Condenser - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
ia

Condenser Core Leak Check
Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Clearance
rd
Coolant Inlet Pipe

Coolant Inlet Pipe
Coolant Pump
ca
Coolant Pump
Coolant Pump
Cooler Bypass Valve - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Removal and Installation, 307-02 Transmission Cooling)
Cooler Bypass Valve - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
Cooler Bypass Valve - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Cooling System Draining, Vacuum Filling and Bleeding
(General Procedures, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(General Procedures, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS))
(General Procedures, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
Cooling System Flushing
(General Procedures, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(General Procedures, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(General Procedures, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Corrosion Prevention
(General Procedures, 501-25 Body Repairs - General Information)
Cowl Panel Grille
Cowl Panel
C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
C-Pillar Trim Panel - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts
C-Pillar Trim Panel
Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
(Removal and Installation, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Crankshaft Front Seal
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Clearance
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
(201kW/273PS))
(209kW/284PS))
(257kW/350PS))
(227kW/301PS))
Crankshaft Rear Seal with Retainer Plate
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Cruise Control - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 419-03 Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise
Control)
Cruise Control - Overview
(Description and Operation, 419-03 Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control)
(Description and Operation, 419-03 Cruise Control)
Cruise Control - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 419-03 Cruise Control - Vehicles
m
With: Adaptive Cruise Control)
(Description and Operation, 419-03 Cruise Control)
Cruise Control Module (CCM)
(Removal and Installation, 419-03 Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control)
co
Cruise Control Radar Alignment
(General Procedures, 419-03 Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control)
Cruise Control
(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-03 Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control)
Cruise Control
(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-03 Cruise Control)
Cylinder Block Core Plug Replacement
.
Cylinder Block Distortion
gn
Cylinder Bore Taper
Cylinder Head Distortion
Cylinder Head LH
Cylinder Head LH
ia
Cylinder Head LH

Cylinder Head RH
Cylinder Head RH
rd
Cylinder Head RH

Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
(201kW/273PS))
ca

(209kW/284PS))
(257kW/350PS))
(227kW/301PS))
Cylinder Head
(Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Cylinder Head
(Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Degas Bottle
Degas Bottle
Degas Bottle
Diagnosis By Symptom
(Diagnosis and Testing, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F50/6F55)
Diagnostic Methods
Diagnostic Trouble Code Charts
(Diagnosis and Testing, 100-00 General Information)
Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions
Differential Fluid Level Check
(General Procedures, 205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential)
Differential Housing Cover
Differential
(Description and Operation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Differential
(Description and Operation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Differential
(Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
- 6F35)
Differential
(Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
- 6F50/6F55)
Direct Clutch Assembly
(Description and Operation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F35)
6F50/6F55)
6F50/6F55)
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 414-05 Voltage
Converter/Inverter)
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter - Overview
(Description and Operation, 414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter)
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and
Operation, 414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter)
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
(Diagnosis and Testing, 414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter)
(Removal and Installation, 414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter)
Door Latch Lubrication
(General Procedures, 501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems)
Door Lock Cylinder
(Removal and Installation, 501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems)
Downshift Paddle Switch
(Removal and Installation, 307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls)
m
D-Pillar Speaker
With: Sony Audio System)
D-Pillar Trim Panel
co
Drive Pinion Seal
Driver Airbag
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Driver Door Window Control Switch - Police
(Removal and Installation, 501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)
.
Driver Door Window Control Switch
gn
Driver Front Seat Module (DSM)
(Removal and Installation, 501-10 Front Seats)
Driver Multi-Contour Seat Module [SCMG]
Driver Side Register
Driver Side Temperature Door Actuator
ia
Driveshaft Angle Measurement

(General Procedures, 205-01 Driveshaft)
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
(General Procedures, 205-01 Driveshaft)
Driveshaft
(Diagnosis and Testing, 205-01 Driveshaft)
rd
Driveshaft
(Specifications, 205-01 Driveshaft)
Electronic Engine Controls - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L
EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
ca

Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Electronic Engine Controls - Overview
(Description and Operation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec
(227kW/301PS))
Electronic Engine Controls - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 303-14 Electronic
Engine Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Electronic Engine Controls
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Electronic Leak Detection
Elevation System Check
(General Procedures, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid)
Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Specifications, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
(Specifications, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
(Specifications, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Engine - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
(Specifications, 303-01 Engine - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Engine - Overview
(Description and Operation, 303-00 Engine System - General Information)
Engine - Overview
(Description and Operation, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine - Overview
(Description and Operation, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine - Overview
Engine - Overview
Engine Component View
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
(201kW/273PS))
Engine Cooling - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Specifications, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
(Specifications, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine Cooling - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
(Specifications, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Engine Cooling - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
m
(Description and Operation, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Engine Cooling - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 2.3L
co

.
gn
Engine Cooling System Health and Safety Precautions
Engine Cooling
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine Cooling
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine Cooling
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-03 Engine Cooling - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
ia
Engine Emission Control - Component Location

(Description and Operation, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.5L Duratec
rd
(209kW/284PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
ca

(Description and Operation, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.7L Duratec
(227kW/301PS))
Engine Emission Control - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 303-08 Engine Emission
Control - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Control - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Control - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Control - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Engine Emission Control
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Engine Front Cover
Engine Front Cover
Engine Front Cover
Engine Front Cover
Engine Ignition - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Specifications, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine Ignition - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
(Specifications, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine Ignition - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
(Specifications, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Engine Ignition - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
(Specifications, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Engine Ignition - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Engine Ignition - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 2.3L
Engine Ignition
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine Ignition
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine Ignition
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Engine Ignition
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Engine Mount
Engine Mount
Engine Mount
Engine Mount
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor
(201kW/273PS))
Engine Undershield - Police
Engine Undershield
Engine
(Assembly, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
m
Engine
(Assembly, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine
(Assembly, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Engine
(Assembly, 303-01 Engine - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
co
Engine
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-00 Engine System - General Information)
Engine
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
.
Engine
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-01 Engine - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
gn
Engine
(Disassembly, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine
(Disassembly, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine
(Disassembly, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Engine
(Disassembly, 303-01 Engine - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
ia
Engine
(Installation, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine
(Installation, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Engine
(Installation, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
rd
Engine
(Installation, 303-01 Engine - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Engine
(Removal, 303-01 Engine - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Engine
(Removal, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
ca
Engine
(Removal, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Engine
(Removal, 303-01 Engine - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve
(Removal and Installation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(Removal and Installation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS))
(257kW/350PS))
(227kW/301PS))
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid
(201kW/273PS))
(209kW/284PS))
(257kW/350PS))
(227kW/301PS))
Evaporative Emission Canister Ventilation Filter
(201kW/273PS))
(209kW/284PS))
(257kW/350PS))
(227kW/301PS))
Evaporative Emission Canister
(Removal and Installation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Removal and Installation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Removal and Installation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
(Removal and Installation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
(General Procedures, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(General Procedures, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(General Procedures, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
(General Procedures, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Evaporative Emissions - Overview
(Description and Operation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Evaporative Emissions - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 303-13 Evaporative
Emissions - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Emissions - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
m
Emissions - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Emissions - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
co
Evaporative Emissions
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-13 Evaporative Emissions - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
.
Evaporator Core Leak Check
gn
Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Evaporator
Exhaust Flexible Pipe
Exhaust Flexible Pipe
ia
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection

Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold RH
rd
Exhaust System - Overview

(Description and Operation, 309-00 Exhaust System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Description and Operation, 309-00 Exhaust System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Description and Operation, 309-00 Exhaust System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
ca

(Description and Operation, 309-00 Exhaust System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Exhaust System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 309-00 Exhaust System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Exhaust System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 309-00 Exhaust System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Exhaust System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 309-00 Exhaust System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Exhaust System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 309-00 Exhaust System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Exhaust Y-Pipe
Exhaust Y-Pipe
Exterior Front Door Handle Reinforcement
Exterior Front Door Handle
Exterior Lighting - Overview
(Description and Operation, 417-01 Exterior Lighting)
Exterior Lighting - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 417-01 Exterior Lighting)
Exterior Mirror Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps
(Removal and Installation, 100-05 Police Equipment)
Exterior Mirror
(Removal and Installation, 501-09 Rear View Mirrors)
Exterior Rear Door Handle Reinforcement
Exterior Rear Door Handle
External Controls - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls)
External Controls - Overview
(Description and Operation, 307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls)
External Controls - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 307-05 Automatic Transmission
External Controls)
External Controls
(Diagnosis and Testing, 307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls)
Factory Mode Deactivation
(General Procedures, 419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules)
Fender Splash Shield
Fender
Final Drive
Final Drive
Finish Panel Repair
(General Procedures, 501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation)
Fixed Glass
(General Procedures, 501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)
Flasher Lighting Relay Panel
Flasher Lighting, Siren and Speaker System
(Description and Operation, 100-05 Police Equipment)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 100-05 Police Equipment)
Flasher Module
Flasher Switch Pad
Flexplate
Flexplate
Flexplate
Flexplate
Floor Console
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
Fog Lamps
Forward Clutch Assembly
6F35)
6F50/6F55)
6F50/6F55)
Four-Wheel Drive Systems - Overview
(Description and Operation, 308-07 Four-Wheel Drive Systems)
m
Four-Wheel Drive Systems - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 308-07 Four-Wheel
Drive Systems)
Four-Wheel Drive Systems
(Diagnosis and Testing, 308-07 Four-Wheel Drive Systems)
co
Frame Assembly - Overview
(Description and Operation, 502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System)
Front Active Park Assist Sensors
(Removal and Installation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist)
Front Brake Flexible Hose
Front Bumper Cover
(Disassembly and Assembly, 501-19 Bumpers)
.
Front Bumper Cover
(Removal and Installation, 501-19 Bumpers)
gn
Front Bumper
Front Camber Adjustment
(General Procedures, 204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
Front Control/Display Interface Module (FCDIM)
(Removal and Installation, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System -
General Information - Vehicles Without: SYNC)
ia
Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIMB)

Information - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display)
rd

Front Disc Brake
(Diagnosis and Testing, 206-03 Front Disc Brake)
Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
ca

Front Door Alignment
(General Procedures, 501-03 Body Closures)
Front Door Check Arm
(Removal and Installation, 501-03 Body Closures)
Front Door Glass Run and Bracket
Front Door Glass Top Run
Front Door Latch
Front Door Lock Control Switch
Front Door Moulding
(Removal and Installation, 501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation)
Front Door Side Impact Sensor
Front Door Skin Panel
(Removal and Installation, 501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs)
Front Door Speaker LH
Front Door Speaker RH
Front Door Trim Panel - Police
Front Door Trim Panel
Front Door Tweeter Speaker
Front Door Upper Moulding
Front Door Window Glass
Front Door Window Regulator and Motor
Front Door Window Regulator Motor
Front Door
Front Drive Halfshafts
(Diagnosis and Testing, 205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts)
(Specifications, 205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts)
Front Fender Moulding
Front Fog Lamp Bulb
Front Fog Lamp
Front Halfshaft LH
(Removal and Installation, 205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts)
Front Halfshaft RH - AWD
Front Halfshaft RH - FWD
Front Head Restraint Guide Sleeve
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Park/Turn/Warn Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps
Front Parking Aid Camera
(Removal and Installation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera)
Front Parking Aid Sensor
(Removal and Installation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid)
Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats
Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor
Front Seat Backrest Cover - Police
Front Seat Backrest Cover
Front Seat Control Switch - Police
Front Seat Control Switch
Front Seat Cushion Adjuster - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats
Front Seat Cushion Blower Motor
Front Seat Cushion Cover - Police
Front Seat Cushion Cover
Front Seat Lumbar Assembly - Police
m
Front Seat Power Lumbar Assembly - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats
Front Seat Power Lumbar Assembly
Front Seat Track - Police
co
Front Seat Track Motor - Police
Front Seat Track Motor
Front Seat Track
Front Seat
.
Front Seatbelt Anchor and Pretensioner
(Removal and Installation, 501-20 Seatbelt Systems)
gn
Front Seatbelt Buckle - Police
Front Seatbelt Buckle
Front Seatbelt Retractor and Pretensioner
Front Seats - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-10 Front Seats)
ia
Front Seats - System Operation and Component Description

(Description and Operation, 501-10 Front Seats)
Front Seats
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-10 Front Seats)
Front Side Member
(Removal and Installation, 501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs)
rd
Front Stabilizer Bar Link

(Removal and Installation, 204-01 Front Suspension)
Front Stabilizer Bar
Front Strut and Spring Assembly
(Disassembly and Assembly, 204-01 Front Suspension)
ca

Front Subframe
(Removal and Installation, 502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System)
Front Suspension
(Diagnosis and Testing, 204-01 Front Suspension)
Front Toe Adjustment
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Fuel Charging and Controls - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 2.3L
Fuel Charging and Controls - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 303-04 Fuel
Charging and Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Charging and Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Charging and Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Charging and Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Fuel Charging and Controls
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Fuel Filler Door Assembly
Fuel Filler Door Spring
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Injectors
(Removal and Installation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Fuel Injectors
(Removal and Installation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Fuel Injectors
Fuel Injectors
Fuel Level Sender
(Removal and Installation, 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Fuel Level Sender
(Removal and Installation, 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Level Sensor
Fuel Level Sensor
Fuel Level Sensor
Fuel Level Sensor
Fuel Lines
Fuel Lines
Fuel Lines
Fuel Lines
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
m
Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM)
(Removal and Installation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(209kW/284PS))
co
(Removal and Installation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 3.5L Duratec

.
(257kW/350PS))
gn
(Removal and Installation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - 3.7L Duratec
(227kW/301PS))
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
(201kW/273PS))
ia
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor

(257kW/350PS))
Fuel Rail
rd
Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail
ca
Fuel System - General Information - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)

(Specifications, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information
- 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Fuel System - Overview
(Description and Operation, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(Description and Operation, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS))
Fuel System Pressure Check
(General Procedures, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(General Procedures, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))

(257kW/350PS))
Fuel System Pressure Release

(201kW/273PS))
Fuel System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Fuel System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Fuel System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Fuel System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Fuel Tank and Lines - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Specifications, 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
Fuel Tank and Lines - Overview
(Description and Operation, 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Description and Operation, 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Fuel Tank and Lines
(Diagnosis and Testing, 310-01 Fuel Tank and Lines - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Fuel Tank Draining
(General Procedures, 310-00 Fuel System - General Information - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor and Tube
(201kW/273PS))
(209kW/284PS))
(257kW/350PS))
(227kW/301PS))
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank
Gasoline and Gasoline-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
(Description and Operation, 100-00 General
Information)
Gateway Module A (GWM)
(Removal and Installation, 418-00 Module Communications Network)
Generator - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Removal and Installation, 414-02 Generator and Regulator)
Generator - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
(Removal and Installation, 414-02 Generator and
m
Regulator)
Generator - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Generator and Regulator
(Specifications, 414-02 Generator and Regulator)
co
Generator Current Sensor
Generator Pulley
Generic Function Module (GFM)
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without: Programmable
.
Driver Seat - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)
gn
Driver Seat - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms)
ia
Driver Seat
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver Seat -
Overview
rd
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver Seat -
System Operation and Component Description
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver Seat
ca
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open Driver Window - Overview
501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open Driver Window - System Operation and Component
Description
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open Driver Window
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms)
Global Positioning System Module (GPSM)
Information - Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen)
Glove Compartment
Grille Mounted Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps
Group Flash Pattern Programming
(General Procedures, 100-05 Police Equipment)
Halfshaft Seal LH
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Halfshaft Seal LH
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Halfshaft Seal RH - AWD
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F35)
6F50/6F55)
Halfshaft Seal RH - FWD
6F35)
6F50/6F55)
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems)
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - System Operation and Component Description (Description and Operation, 501-
14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems)
Hands-Free Liftgate Actuation Lower Sensor
Hands-Free Liftgate Actuation Module
Hands-Free Liftgate Actuation Upper Sensor
Head Up Display (HUD) Module
(Removal and Installation, 419-03 Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System)
Headlamp Adjustment
(General Procedures, 417-01 Exterior Lighting)
Headlamp Assembly
Headlamp Bulb
Headlamp Control Module (HCM)
Headlamp Leveling Sensor
Headlamp Switch
Headlamps
Headliner - Lowering - Vehicles With: Roof Opening Panel
Headliner - Lowering
Headliner Mounted Front Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps
Headliner
Health and Safety Precautions
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
(201kW/273PS))
(257kW/350PS))
m
Heated Second Row Seat Module
(Removal and Installation, 501-10 Second Row Seats)
Heated Steering Wheel Module (HSWM)
(Removal and Installation, 211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical
Components)
co
Heated Window Grid Wire Repair
Heater Core Leak Check
Heater Core
.
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module
gn
High Mounted Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps
High Mounted Stoplamp
High-Pressure Fuel Pump Drive Unit
ia
(201kW/273PS))
High-Pressure Fuel Pump
High-Pressure Fuel Pump
rd
Hood Alignment
Hood Latch Release Cable
Hood Latch Release Handle
ca
Hood Latch
Hood
Horn - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 413-06 Horn)
Horn - Overview
Horn - System Operation and Component Description
Horn
(Diagnosis and Testing, 413-06 Horn)
Horn
(Removal and Installation, 413-06 Horn)
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Overview
(Description and Operation, 206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation)
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 206-06 Hydraulic
Brake Actuation)
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
(Diagnosis and Testing, 206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation)
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Identification Codes
(Description and Operation, 100-01 Identification Codes)
Ignition Coil-On-Plug
(Removal and Installation, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
(Removal and Installation, 303-07 Engine Ignition - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Ignition Lock Cylinder Housing
(Removal and Installation, 211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components)
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Ignition Switch - Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System
(Removal and Installation, 211-05 Steering Wheel and Column
Electrical Components)
Ignition Switch
Image Processing Module A (IPMA) Camera Heated Windshield Element
(Removal and Installation, 501-11 Glass, Frames
and Mechanisms)
Image Processing Module B (IPMB)
Individual Flash Pattern Programming
(General Procedures, 100-05 Police Equipment)
Information and Entertainment System - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 415-00 Information and
Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System)
Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen)
Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display)
Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles Without: SYNC)
Information and Entertainment System - Overview
(Description and Operation, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System -
General Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System)
General Information - Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen)
General Information - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display)
General Information - Vehicles Without: SYNC)
Information and Entertainment System - System Operation and Component Description
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System)
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen)
m
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display)
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles Without: SYNC)
co
Information and Entertainment System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General
Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System)
.
gn
Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
(Removal and Installation, 205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts)
ia
Input Shaft
Input Shaft
Inspection and Repair after a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
(General Procedures, 501-20 Supplemental
rd
Restraint System)
Install Idler Shaft Bearing Repair Kit
(General Procedures, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L
EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
ca
Instrument Panel and Interior Switches Illumination - Overview

(Description and Operation, 413-00 Instrument Panel and
Interior Switches Illumination)
Instrument Panel and Interior Switches Illumination - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and
Operation, 413-00 Instrument Panel and Interior Switches Illumination)
Instrument Panel and Interior Switches Illumination
(Diagnosis and Testing, 413-00 Instrument Panel and Interior Switches
Illumination)
Instrument Panel Center Finish Panel
Instrument Panel Center Speaker
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) - Overview
(Description and Operation, 413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
Chimes)
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) - System Operation and Component Description
Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes)
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Lens
(Removal and Installation, 413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
Chimes)
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
(Removal and Installation, 413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes)
Instrument Panel Upper Section
Instrument Panel
Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes
(Diagnosis and Testing, 413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and
Warning Chimes)
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - Overview
(Description and Operation, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L
Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - Overview (Description and Operation, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-12 Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
(201kW/273PS))
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
(257kW/350PS))
Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold
Interior Front Door Handle
Interior Lighting - Overview
(Description and Operation, 417-02 Interior Lighting)
Interior Lighting - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 417-02 Interior Lighting)
Interior Lighting
(Diagnosis and Testing, 417-02 Interior Lighting)
Interior Rear Door Handle
Interior Rear View Mirror
(Removal and Installation, 501-09 Rear View Mirrors)
Intermediate Clutch Assembly
(Description and Operation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
- 6F35)
- 6F50/6F55)
6F35)
m
6F50/6F55)
Intermediate Shaft Seal
(Removal and Installation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Intermediate Shaft Seal
(Removal and Installation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost
co
In-Vehicle Crossbeam
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
.
Jacking and Lifting - Overview
(Description and Operation, 100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
gn
Joining Techniques
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
(General Procedures, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles
With: Keyless Vehicle System)
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
(General Procedures, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS))
ia
Keyless Entry Keypad

Keyless Entry Rear Antenna
Knock Sensor (KS)
rd
Knock Sensor (KS)

Knock Sensor (KS)
Knock Sensor (KS)
ca
Lane Keeping System - Component Location

(Description and Operation, 419-07 Lane Keeping System)
Lane Keeping System - Overview
(Description and Operation, 419-07 Lane Keeping System)
Lane Keeping System - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 419-07 Lane Keeping
System)
Lane Keeping System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-07 Lane Keeping System)
Lead Terminal Repair
Leakage Inspection
Leakage Inspection
(Diagnosis and Testing, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Liftgate Alignment
Liftgate Anti-Pinch Switch
Liftgate Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps
Liftgate Latch Manual Release
Liftgate Latch
Liftgate Lock Cylinder
Liftgate Moulding
Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Trim Panel
Liftgate
Light Sensor
Lighting and Siren Control Module
Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) and Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
Loadspace Trim Panel - Police
Loadspace Trim Panel - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts
Loadspace Trim Panel
Locked Seatbelt Retractor Releasing
(General Procedures, 501-20 Seatbelt Systems)
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems)
Low One-Way Clutch Assembly
(Description and Operation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission - 6F35)
Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
6F35)
6F50/6F55)
Low/Reverse Clutch Assembly
- 6F35)
- 6F50/6F55)
6F35)
6F50/6F55)
Lower Arm Bushing
Lower Arm
Lower Arm
(Removal and Installation, 204-02 Rear Suspension)
m
Lower Intake Manifold
Lower Intake Manifold
Main Control Cover - 3.5L Duratec (212kW/278PS)
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)

co
Main Control Cover - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Main Control Cover - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)

.
gn
Main Control Cover
Main Control Valve Body
6F35)
ia
6F50/6F55)
(Overhaul, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
(Overhaul, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
rd

6F35)
ca
6F50/6F55)
Maintenance Schedules - Gasoline Engines
(Description and Operation, 100-03 Maintenance Schedules)
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
(201kW/273PS))
Manifold Absolute Pressure and Temperature (MAPT) Sensor
(Removal and Installation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls -
3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Message Center - Overview
(Description and Operation, 413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes)
Message Center - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 413-01 Instrumentation,
Message Center and Warning Chimes)
Microphone
(Removal and Installation, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With:
SYNC Without Touchscreen)
Microphone
(Removal and Installation, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display)
Module Configuration - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 418-01 Module
Configuration)
Module Controlled Functions - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules)
Module Controlled Functions - Overview
(Description and Operation, 419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules)
Module Controlled Functions - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 419-10 Multifunction
Electronic Modules)
Module Programming
(General Procedures, 418-01 Module Configuration)
Muffler and Tailpipe
No Communication Between the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) and the Vehicle
(General Procedures, 418-00 Module
Communications Network)
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
(Description and Operation, 100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness)
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness)
Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Police
Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats
(Removal and Installation, 501-20
Supplemental Restraint System)
Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor
Oil Cooler
Oil Cooler
Oil Filter Adapter
Oil Pan
Oil Pan
Oil Pan
Oil Pan
Oil Pressure Control Solenoid
Oil Pressure Switch
Oil Pressure Switch
Oil Pressure Switch
m
Oil Pump
Oil Pump
Oil Pump

co
Oil Pump
Oil Pump
(Removal and Installation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot

(Removal and Installation, 205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts)
.
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
gn
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Overdrive Clutch Assembly
ia
6F35)
6F50/6F55)
rd

6F35)
ca
6F50/6F55)
Overhead Console
Paintwork Defects and Damage
(General Procedures, 501-36 Paint - General Information)
Parameter Identification (PID) Chart
(Diagnosis and Testing, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Parameter Identification (PID) Chart
(Diagnosis and Testing, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Parking Aid - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist)
(Description and Operation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera)
(Description and Operation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid)
Parking Aid - Overview
(Description and Operation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist)
(Description and Operation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera)
(Description and Operation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid)
Parking Aid - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With:
Active Park Assist)
Parking Aid Camera)
Rear Parking Aid)
Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist
(Specifications, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist)
Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid
(Specifications, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid)
Parking Aid
(Diagnosis and Testing, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist)
Parking Aid (Diagnosis and Testing, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera)
Parking Aid
(Diagnosis and Testing, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid)
Parking Brake Cable LH
(Removal and Installation, 206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation)
Parking Brake Cable RH
Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
(General Procedures, 206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation)
Parking Brake Control
Parking Brake Front Cable
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Parking Brake
(Diagnosis and Testing, 206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation)
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Passenger Airbag
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Passenger Door Window Control Switch - Police
Passenger Door Window Control Switch
Passenger Knee Airbag
Passenger Side Register
Passenger Side Temperature Door Actuator
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System)
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Overview
(Description and Operation, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) -
Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System)
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Overview
(Description and Operation, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS))
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - System Operation and Component Description
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System)
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - System Operation and Component Description
m
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS))
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Center Antenna
(Removal and Installation, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) -
Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System)
Vehicle System)
co
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Transceiver
(Removal and Installation, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS))
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)

(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-01 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS))
.
Perimeter Anti-Theft Alarm - Overview
(Description and Operation, 419-01 Perimeter Anti-Theft Alarm)
gn
Perimeter Anti-Theft Alarm - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 419-01 Perimeter
Anti-Theft Alarm)
Perimeter Anti-Theft Alarm
(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-01 Perimeter Anti-Theft Alarm)
Pinpoint Test - DTC: A
ia
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AA

Pinpoint Test - DTC: AB
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AC
rd
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AD

Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF
ca
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AG

Pinpoint Test - DTC: AH
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AI
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AJ
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AK
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AL
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AM
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AN
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AO
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AP
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AQ
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AR
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AS
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AT
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AU
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AV
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AW
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AX
Pinpoint Test - DTC: AY
Pinpoint Test - DTC: B
Pinpoint Test - DTC: C
Pinpoint Test - DTC: D
Pinpoint Test - DTC: E
Pinpoint Test - DTC: F
Pinpoint Test - DTC: G
Pinpoint Test - DTC: H
Pinpoint Test - DTC: I
Pinpoint Test - DTC: J
Pinpoint Test - DTC: K
Pinpoint Test - DTC: L
Pinpoint Test - DTC: M
Pinpoint Test - DTC: N
Pinpoint Test - DTC: O
Pinpoint Test - DTC: P
Pinpoint Test - DTC: Q
Pinpoint Test - DTC: R
Pinpoint Test - DTC: S
Pinpoint Test - DTC: T
Pinpoint Test - DTC: U
Pinpoint Test - DTC: V
Pinpoint Test - DTC: W
Pinpoint Test - DTC: X
Pinpoint Test - DTC: Y
Pinpoint Test - DTC: Z
Piston Diameter
Piston Inspection
Piston Ring End Gap
m
Piston Selection
Piston
Piston
co
Piston
Piston
Planetary Assembly
Planetary Assembly
.
6F50/6F55)
gn
Plastic Repairs
(Description and Operation, 501-25 Body Repairs - General Information)
Plastic Repairs
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve
(Removal and Installation, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS))
ia

(Removal and Installation, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
(Removal and Installation, 303-08 Engine Emission Control - 3.7L Duratec
rd
(227kW/301PS))
Power Brake System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 206-07 Power Brake Actuation)
Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without:
ca
Programmable Driver Seat

Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver Seat
Power Fold Seat Control Switch
Power Fold Seat Control Switch
(Removal and Installation, 501-10 Third Row Seats)
Power Fold Seat Module (PFSM)
Power Fold Seat Motor
Power Fold Seat Motor
Power Liftgate Initialization
Power Liftgate Motor
Power Mirrors Synchronization
(General Procedures, 501-09 Rear View Mirrors)
Power Roof Opening Panel Initialization
(General Procedures, 501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
Power Steering - Overview
(Description and Operation, 211-02 Power Steering)
Power Steering - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 211-02 Power Steering)
Power Steering
(Diagnosis and Testing, 211-02 Power Steering)
Power Stow Seat Motor
Power Transfer Unit - Overview
(Description and Operation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Power Transfer Unit - Overview
(Description and Operation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L
Power Transfer Unit Cooler
(Removal and Installation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L
Power Transfer Unit Draining and Filling
(General Procedures, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Power Transfer Unit Draining and Filling
(General Procedures, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Power Transfer Unit Fluid Level Check
(General Procedures, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Power Transfer Unit Fluid Level Check
(General Procedures, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L
Power Transfer Unit Input Shaft Seal
Power Transfer Unit Input Shaft Seal
(Removal and Installation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec
Power Transfer Unit Oil Life Monitor Reset
(General Procedures, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
Power Transfer Unit Oil Life Monitor Reset
(General Procedures, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec
Power Transfer Unit Rear Seal
Power Transfer Unit Rear Seal
(Removal and Installation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L
Power Transfer Unit Vent
Power Transfer Unit
(Diagnosis and Testing, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Power Transfer Unit
(Diagnosis and Testing, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost
Power Transfer Unit
(Installation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Power Transfer Unit
(Installation, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost
Power Transfer Unit
(Overhaul, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost
Power Transfer Unit
(Removal, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
m
Power Transfer Unit
(Removal, 308-07 Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
(201kW/273PS))
(209kW/284PS))
co

.
(257kW/350PS))
gn
(227kW/301PS))
Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing
Pump Assembly
ia
Pump Assembly
Pyrotechnic Device Disposal
(General Procedures, 501-20 Supplemental Restraint System)
Pyrotechnic Device Health and Safety Precautions
rd
Quarter Window Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps

Quick Release Coupling
ca

Radiator
Radiator
Radiator
Radio Transceiver Module (RTM)
Rain Sensor
(Removal and Installation, 501-16 Wipers and Washers)
Rear Active Park Assist Sensors
(Removal and Installation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist)
Rear Air Distribution Door Actuator
(Removal and Installation, 412-02 Rear Climate Control)
Rear Blower Motor Speed Control
Rear Blower Motor
Rear Brake Flexible Hose
Rear Bumper Cover
(Disassembly and Assembly, 501-19 Bumpers)
Rear Bumper Cover
Rear Bumper
Rear Camber Adjustment
Rear Climate Control - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 412-02 Rear Climate Control)
Rear Climate Control - Overview
(Description and Operation, 412-02 Rear Climate Control)
Rear Climate Control - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 412-02 Rear Climate
Control)
Rear Climate Control Housing
Rear Differential Subframe Bushings
Rear Disc Brake
(Diagnosis and Testing, 206-04 Rear Disc Brake)
Rear Door Alignment
Rear Door Check Arm
Rear Door Fixed Window Glass
Rear Door Glass Run and Bracket
Rear Door Glass Top Run
Rear Door Latch
Rear Door Moulding
Rear Door Skin Panel
(Removal and Installation, 501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs)
Rear Door Speaker LH
Rear Door Speaker RH
Rear Door Trim Panel - Police
Rear Door Trim Panel
Rear Door Upper Moulding
Rear Door Window Control Switch - Police
Rear Door Window Control Switch
Rear Door Window Glass
Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor
Rear Door Window Regulator Motor
Rear Door
Rear Drive Axle and Differential
(Diagnosis and Testing, 205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential)
Rear Drive Axle/Differential
(Specifications, 205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential)
Rear Drive Halfshafts
(Diagnosis and Testing, 205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts)
m
Rear Drive Halfshafts
(Specifications, 205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts)
Rear Driveshaft
(Removal and Installation, 205-01 Driveshaft)
Rear Evaporator Inlet Line
co
Rear Evaporator Outlet Line
Rear Evaporator
Rear Gate Trunk Module (RGTM)
Rear Halfshaft Seal
.
Rear Halfshaft (Removal and Installation, 205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts)
gn
Rear Heater Core Inlet Line
Rear Heater Core Outlet Line
Rear Heater Core
Rear Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (RHVAC) Control Module
(Removal and Installation, 412-02 Rear Climate
ia
Control)
Rear Lamp Assembly
Rear Lamp Bulb
rd
Rear Parking Aid Camera

Rear Parking Aid Sensor
(Removal and Installation, 413-13 Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid)
Rear Quarter Panel Moulding
ca
Rear Quarter Panel Speaker

Rear Shock Absorber
Rear Side Marker Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps
Rear Side Member
(Removal and Installation, 501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs)
Rear Spoiler
Rear Stabilizer Bar Link
Rear Stabilizer Bar
Rear Subframe - AWD
Rear Subframe - FWD
Rear Suspension
(Diagnosis and Testing, 204-02 Rear Suspension)
Rear Temperature Door Actuator
Rear Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Rear Toe Adjustment
Rear Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
Rear View Mirrors - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-09 Rear View Mirrors)
Rear View Mirrors - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 501-09 Rear View Mirrors)
Rear View Mirrors
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-09 Rear View Mirrors)
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Rear Window Wiper Motor
Rear Window Wiper Pivot Arm
Receiver Drier - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)/3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Receiver Drier Element - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
Refrigerant Identification Testing
Refrigerant Oil Adding
Refrigerant System Tests - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
Information)
Refrigerant System Tests - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
Information)
Refrigerant System Tests - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Information)
Refrigerant System Tests - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
Information)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
(General Procedures, 501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems)
Reset the SYNC Module [APIM]
(General Procedures, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen)
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Reversing Lamps
Ride Height Measurement
Rocker Panel Moulding
Roll Restrictor LH - 3.5L Ecoboost™
Roll Restrictor RH - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
m
Roll Restrictor RH - 3.5L Ecoboost™
Roll Restrictor RH - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
co
Roll Restrictor RH
Roof Opening Panel - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
.
Roof Opening Panel Alignment
(General Procedures, 501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
gn
Roof Opening Panel Blind
Roof Opening Panel Control Switch
Roof Opening Panel Fixed Glass
Roof Opening Panel Frame
ia
Roof Opening Panel Glass

Roof Opening Panel Motor
Roof Opening Panel Shield Operating Cable and Guide
rd
Roof Opening Panel Shield

Roof Opening Panel
(Description and Operation, 501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
Roof Opening Panel
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
ca
Roof Opening Panel

(Specifications, 501-17 Roof Opening Panel)
Roof Panel - Vehicles With: Roof Opening Panel
(Removal and Installation, 501-28 Roof Sheet Metal Repairs)
Roof Panel
(Removal and Installation, 501-28 Roof Sheet Metal Repairs)
Roof Rail
RTV Sealing Surface Cleaning and Preparation
Safety Precautions - Overview
(Description and Operation, 204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Satellite Radio Antenna Cable
(Removal and Installation, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information
- Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen)
Seat Position Sensor - Police
Seat Position Sensor
Seatbelt Cleaning
Seatbelt Maintenance
Seatbelt Minder Deactivating/Activating
(General Procedures, 413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes)
Seatbelt Procedure After a Collision
Seatbelt Shoulder Height Adjuster
Seatbelt Systems - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-20 Seatbelt Systems)
Seatbelt Systems - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 501-20 Seatbelt Systems)
Seatbelt Systems
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-20 Seatbelt Systems)
Seatbelt Tongue Rotated On Belt
Seatbelt Twisted at the Seatbelt Guide
Second Row Center Seatbelt Buckle
Second Row Center Seatbelt Retractor
Second Row Double Seat Armrest
Second Row Double Seat Backrest Cover
Second Row Double Seat Cushion Cover
Second Row Double Seat Inner Recliner
Second Row Double Seat Outer Recliner
Second Row Double Seat Outer Seatbelt Buckle - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts
Seatbelt Systems)
Second Row Double Seat Outer Seatbelt Inflator - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts
Seatbelt Systems)
Second Row Double Seat
Second Row Outer Seatbelt Lower Retractor - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts
(Removal and Installation, 501-20 Seatbelt
Systems)
Second Row Outer Seatbelt Upper Retractor - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts
Systems)
Second Row Seat - Police
Second Row Seat Head Restraint Guide Sleeve
Second Row Seatbelt Buckle
Second Row Seatbelt Retractor
Second Row Seats - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-10 Second Row Seats)
Second Row Seats - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 501-10 Second Row Seats)
Second Row Seats
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-10 Second Row Seats)
Second Row Single Seat Backrest Cover
Second Row Single Seat Cushion Cover
Second Row Single Seat Inner Recliner
Second Row Single Seat Outer Recliner
m
Second Row Single Seat Outer Seatbelt Inflator - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts
Seatbelt Systems)
Second Row Single Seat Seatbelt Buckle - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts
Systems)
co
Second Row Single Seat
Selector Lever Assembly - Vehicles With: Column Shift
Controls)
.
Selector Lever Assembly - Vehicles With: Floor Shift
gn
Controls)
Selector Lever Boot
Selector Lever Cable - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35
(Removal and Installation, 307-05 Automatic Transmission
External Controls)
ia
Selector Lever Cable - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Vehicles With: Column Shift
(Removal and Installation,
307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls)
Selector Lever Cable - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Vehicles With: Floor Shift
(Removal and Installation,
rd
307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls)

Selector Lever Cable Adjustment - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35
ca
Selector Lever Cable Adjustment - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Vehicles With: Column Shift
(General
Procedures, 307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls)
Selector Lever Cable Adjustment - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Vehicles With: Floor Shift
(General
Procedures, 307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls)
Selector Lever Knob
Selector Lever Mechanism
Selector Shaft Seal
Selector Shaft Seal
6F50/6F55)
Side Airbag - Police
Side Airbag - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats
Side Airbag
Side Curtain Airbag
Side Impact Reinforcement - Police
Side Impact Reinforcement
Side Obstacle Detection Control Module
(Removal and Installation, 419-04 Side and Rear Vision)
Siren Speaker
Solenoid Body
Solenoid Body
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Solenoid
Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Speaker Audio Test
With: Touchscreen Display)
Spot Lamp
Spring Lock Couplings
Spring
Staged Unlock Programming
Starter Motor Drive Gear and Flywheel Ring Gear Inspection
(General Procedures, 303-06 Starting System - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
(General Procedures, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS))
(General Procedures, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
(General Procedures, 303-06 Starting System - 3.7L Duratec
(227kW/301PS))
Starter Motor
(Removal and Installation, 303-06 Starting System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Starter Motor
(Removal and Installation, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Starter Motor
(Removal and Installation, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Starter Motor
(Removal and Installation, 303-06 Starting System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Starting System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Specifications, 303-06 Starting System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Starting System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
(Specifications, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
m
Starting System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
(Specifications, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Starting System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
(Specifications, 303-06 Starting System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Starting System - Overview
(Description and Operation, 303-06 Starting System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
co
(Description and Operation, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
(Description and Operation, 303-06 Starting System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Starting System - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 303-06 Starting System - 2.3L
.
gn
ia

Starting System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-06 Starting System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
rd
Starting System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
Starting System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-06 Starting System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Starting System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-06 Starting System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
ca
Steering Column - Overview

(Description and Operation, 211-04 Steering Column)
Steering Column - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 211-04 Steering Column)
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
Components)
Steering Column Control Switch
Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Components)
Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Components)
Steering Column Shaft
(Removal and Installation, 211-04 Steering Column)
Steering Column Shrouds
Steering Column Tilt Motor
Steering Column
(Diagnosis and Testing, 211-04 Steering Column)
Steering Column
Steering Gear
(Removal and Installation, 211-02 Power Steering)
Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components - Overview
(Description and Operation, 211-05 Steering Wheel and
Column Electrical Components)
Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and
Operation, 211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components)
Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components
(Diagnosis and Testing, 211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical
Components)
Steering Wheel Cover Repair
(General Procedures, 211-04 Steering Column)
Steering Wheel Multifunction Switch
Steering Wheel
Stoplamp Switch
Stoplamps
Subwoofer Speaker
With: Sony Audio System)
Sunload Sensor
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
(General Procedures, 501-20 Supplemental Restraint
System)
Suspension System - General Information
(Specifications, 204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
Suspension System
(Diagnosis and Testing, 204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
Symbols Glossary
SYNC Module [APIM] Custom Programming
(General Procedures, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General
SYNC Module [APIM] Programming (General Procedures, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General
SYNC Module [APIM] Programming
SYNC Module [APIM] Replacement Programming
(General Procedures, 415-00 Information and Entertainment System -
General Information - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display)
SYNC Module [APIM] Standard Programming
SYNC Module [APIM] to Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Cable
(Removal and Installation, 415-00 Information and
SYNC Module [APIM] to Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port Cable
m
Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen)
SYNC Module [APIM] to Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port Cable
co
SYNC Module [APIM]
Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen)
SYNC Module [APIM]
.
Temperature Door Actuator
gn
Thermostat Housing
Thermostat Housing
Thermostat
Thermostat
ia
Thermostatic Expansion Valve - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)

Thermostatic Expansion Valve - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
rd

Thermostatic Expansion Valve - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
ca
Thermostatic Expansion Valve Manifold and Tube Assembly - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(Removal and Installation, 412-
00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Thermostatic Expansion Valve Manifold and Tube Assembly - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
Thermostatic Expansion Valve Manifold and Tube Assembly - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
(Removal and Installation, 412-
00 Climate Control System - General Information)
Third Row Power Fold Seat Manual Override
(General Procedures, 501-10 Third Row Seats)
Third Row Seat Backrest Cover
Third Row Seat Cushion Cover - Vehicles With: Power Seats
Third Row Seat Cushion Cover
Third Row Seat Head Restraint Cable Adjustment
(General Procedures, 501-10 Third Row Seats)
Third Row Seat Head Restraint
Third Row Seat Latch - Vehicles With: Power Seats
Third Row Seat
Third Row Seatbelt Buckle
Third Row Seatbelt Retractor
Third Row Seats - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-10 Third Row Seats)
Third Row Seats - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 501-10 Third Row Seats)
Third Row Seats
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-10 Third Row Seats)
Throttle Body
Throttle Body
Throttle Body
Throttle Body
Tie Rod End
Tie Rod
Timing Chain
Timing Chain
Timing Chain
Timing Chain
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 204-04 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS))
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Overview
(Description and Operation, 204-04 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS))
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - System Operation and Component Description
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS))
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
(General Procedures, 204-04 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS))
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Location Calibration
(General Procedures, 204-04 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS))
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
(Removal and Installation, 204-04 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS))
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(Diagnosis and Testing, 204-04 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS))
Toe Link
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
6F35)
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
6F50/6F55)
Torque Converter Housing
(Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
m
Touchscreen Calibration
With: Touchscreen Display)
co
Trailer Lamps
Trailing Arm
Transfer Shaft
(Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
.
Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
gn
Transmission - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Transmission - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
ia
Transmission Air Pressure Test
6F35)
rd
Transmission Air Pressure Test

6F50/6F55)
Transmission Case Bushing
ca
6F35)
Transmission Case Reseal
(General Procedures, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Transmission Case Reseal
6F50/6F55)
Transmission Case
Transmission Case
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Cooling - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 307-02 Transmission Cooling)
Transmission Cooling - Overview
(Description and Operation, 307-02 Transmission Cooling)
Transmission Cooling
(Diagnosis and Testing, 307-02 Transmission Cooling)
Transmission Description - Overview
Transmission Description - Overview
Transmission Description - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 307-01 Automatic
Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Transmission Description - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 307-01 Automatic
Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Transmission Description
6F35)
Transmission Description
6F50/6F55)
Transmission Fluid Auxiliary Cooler - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
Transmission Fluid Cooler - Backflushing and Cleaning
(General Procedures, 307-02 Transmission Cooling)
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
Transmission Fluid Cooler
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
6F35)
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
6F50/6F55)
Transmission Fluid Exchange
6F35)
Transmission Fluid Exchange
6F50/6F55)
Transmission Fluid Level Check
6F35)
Transmission Fluid Level Check
6F50/6F55)
Transmission Identification
(General Procedures, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Transmission Identification (General Procedures, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F50/6F55)
Transmission Internal Wiring Harness Frame
m
Transmission Line Pressure Test
6F35)
co
Transmission Line Pressure Test
6F50/6F55)
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
.
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
gn
Transmission Stall Speed Test
6F35)
Transmission Stall Speed Test
ia
6F50/6F55)
Transmission Strategy Download
6F35)
rd
Transmission Strategy Download

6F50/6F55)
Transmission Support Insulator - 3.5L Duratec (212kW/278PS)
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
ca

Transmission Support Insulator - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission -
6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Transmission Support Insulator - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Transmission Support Insulator
(Removal and Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
- 6F35)
Transmission
(Assembly, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Transmission
(Assembly, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Transmission
(Disassembly, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Transmission
(Disassembly, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Transmission
(Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Transmission
(Installation, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Transmission
(Overhaul, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Transmission
(Overhaul, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Transmission
Transmission
(Removal, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35)
Transmission
(Removal, 307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)
Transport Mode Deactivation
(General Procedures, 419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules)
Trough Assembly
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbocharger - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 2.3L
Turbocharger - Component Location
(Description and Operation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 3.5L
Turbocharger - Overview
(Description and Operation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS))
Turbocharger - Overview
(Description and Operation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 3.5L EcoBoost
(257kW/350PS))
Turbocharger - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls
- Turbocharger - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Turbocharger - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls
- Turbocharger - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Turbocharger Boost Pressure Sensor
(201kW/273PS))
Turbocharger Boost Pressure Sensor
(257kW/350PS))
Turbocharger Bypass Valve
Turbocharger Bypass Valve
Turbocharger Coolant Return Tube LH
(Removal and Installation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 3.5L
Turbocharger Coolant Return Tube RH
Turbocharger Coolant Return Tube
m
Turbocharger Coolant Supply Tube LH
co
Turbocharger Coolant Supply Tube RH
Turbocharger Coolant Supply Tube
.
Turbocharger LH
(Removal and Installation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 3.5L EcoBoost
gn
(257kW/350PS))
Turbocharger Oil Return Tube LH
Turbocharger Oil Return Tube RH
ia
Turbocharger Oil Return Tube
(201kW/273PS))
rd
Turbocharger Oil Supply Tube LH

Turbocharger Oil Supply Tube RH
ca
Turbocharger Oil Supply Tube
(201kW/273PS))
Turbocharger RH
(257kW/350PS))
Turbocharger
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Turbocharger
(Diagnosis and Testing, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS))
Turbocharger
(Removal and Installation, 303-04 Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS))
Turn Signal and Hazard Lamps
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Hub
Universal Transmitter - Overview
(Description and Operation, 419-02 Remote Convenience)
Universal Transmitter - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 419-02 Remote
Convenience)
Universal Transmitter
(Diagnosis and Testing, 419-02 Remote Convenience)
Upper Arm
Upper Intake Manifold
Upper Intake Manifold
Upshift Paddle Switch
Valve Clearance Adjustment
(General Procedures, 303-01 Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS))
(General Procedures, 303-01 Engine - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Valve Cover RH
Valve Cover RH
Valve Cover
Valve Guide Inner Diameter
Valve Stem Diameter
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
(Removal and Installation, 303-14 Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Unit
Vehicle Specific Body Construction
(Description and Operation, 501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and
Tolerance Checks)
Warning Chimes - Overview
(Description and Operation, 413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes)
m
Warning Chimes - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 413-01 Instrumentation,
Message Center and Warning Chimes)
Washer Hose Coupling
(General Procedures, 501-16 Wipers and Washers)
co
Washer Hose Repair
(General Procedures, 501-16 Wipers and Washers)
Wheel and Tire Health and Safety Precautions
Wheel and Tire
(Disassembly and Assembly, 204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Wheel and Tire
(Removal and Installation, 204-04 Wheels and Tires)
.
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - AWD
gn
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - FWD
Wheel Knuckle
Wheel Knuckle
Wheel Studs
ia
Wheel Studs
Wheel to Hub Runout Minimization
(General Procedures, 204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Wheel to Tire Runout Minimization
(General Procedures, 204-04 Wheels and Tires)
rd
Wheels and Tires

(Diagnosis and Testing, 204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Wheels and Tires
(Specifications, 204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Windshield Moulding
ca
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor

Windshield Washer Pump
Windshield Washer Reservoir
Windshield Wiper Motor
Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm
Wiper Linkage Assembly
Wipers and Washers - Overview
(Description and Operation, 501-16 Wipers and Washers)
Wipers and Washers - System Operation and Component Description
(Description and Operation, 501-16 Wipers and
Washers)
Wipers and Washers
(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-16 Wipers and Washers)
Copyright © 2017 Ford Motor Company

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
100-00 General Information
Description and Operation
About This Manual

Introduction
WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this manual, refer to health and safety warnings in
section 100-00 General Information. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
For additional information, refer to: Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
This manual describes and directs repair procedures specified by Ford Motor Company for the vehicle. Critical
health and safety precautions are included. Anyone who deviates from these instructions risks compromising
personal safety or vehicle integrity.
m
SECTION CONTENT
This manual is divided into groups, each containing sections numbered based on the component part number.
Section contents may include:
Specifications
. co
Fluid capacities, component specifications and torque values not covered in other procedures
gn
Overview of the system, component locations, and system operation
Diagnosis and Testing
ia
Symptom charts, DTC charts and diagnostic tests

See the Diagnosis and Testing Information in this document
General Procedures
rd
Service adjustments, electronic programming and other special procedures

Removal and Installation
ca
Component removal and installation instructions

Removal
Component removal instructions
Installation
Component installation instructions
Disassembly and Assembly
Component disassembly and assembly instructions
Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies
Assembly disassembly and assembly instructions
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
Section number 100-00 General Information contains the following important information (including this
document):
Critical Health and Safety Precautions - service safety precautions applicable to the entire manual.
For additional information, refer to: Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
A Symbols Glossary - definitions of the action directed by each symbol.
For additional information, refer to: Symbols Glossary (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Diagnostic Methods - support information for diagnostics.
For additional information, refer to: Diagnostic Methods (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Warnings, Notices and Notes
WARNINGS
Warnings provide information to avoid personal injury and to make sure service actions on critical safety systems
are performed correctly. Warnings that apply to an entire system or workshop manual section are located in section
100-00 Description and Operation, Health and Safety Precautions.
For additional information, refer to: Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
NOTICES (in some publications, CAUTIONS)
Notices provide information to avoid damage to the vehicle or a component.
NOTES
Notes provide information critical for a complete and effective repair.
Warnings, Notices, or Notes that apply to an entire procedure will be placed at the beginning of the procedure.
m
Warnings, Notices, or Notes that apply to a single step are placed at the beginning of the step. Those that apply to a
group of steps will be placed at the first step requiring it.
Safety Relevant Systems co

Repair of a vehicle safety relevant system is to be achieved only by replacement of the failed component(s), unless
.
specified otherwise in the procedure. Repair of a vehicle safety relevant system component should not be attempted.
gn
If directed during assembly of system components, lubricate any seal(s) only with the specified material. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in seal failure and leakage.
ia
Specified Chemicals or Materials

rd
Throughout this manual, chemicals or materials are specified that must be used to properly complete a service
procedure or diagnostic step. In the event a specific material is not readily available, a substitute material meeting
the same specification may be used. Ford has not reviewed third party products for compliance with environmental,
ca
health or safety regulations and is not responsible for their use. Use of third party products is at your own risk.
Additionally, such products may cause degraded performance, premature failures, and/or vehicle component
damage. All chemicals or materials used for vehicle servicing should be checked for compliance with local
environmental and health and safety regulations.
LH and RH Designations
All LH and RH designations are oriented from the driver's seat position looking forward.
Vehicle LH and RH definition

m
. co
gn
ia
Item Part Number Description

rd
1 — LH (left-hand)
2 — RH (right-hand)
ca
All LH and RH engine designations are oriented from the flywheel position looking toward the crankshaft pulley.
Powertrain LH and RH definition

m
. co
gn
ia

rd
1 — Front
2 — RH (right-hand)
ca
3 — Rear
4 — LH (left-hand)
Standard Practices
The following rules apply, unless specified differently in the procedure:
FASTENERS
Reuse standard fasteners.

Replace fasteners with self-locking features.
Examples of fastener self-locking coatings or mechanical locking (with the locking features highlighted
yellow) are shown in the illustration.
Replace fasteners with torque angle specifications (those tightened a specified number of degrees).
Examples of self-locking nuts and bolts

m
1
2
—
—
Completely coated self-locking bolt
Partially coated self-locking bolt
. co
gn
3 — Self-locking bolt with a locking washer
4 — Self-locking nut with a plastic locking insert
5 — Self-locking nut with thread deformation (3 indentations)
ia
6 — Self-locking nut with thread deformation (to oval shape)

7 — Self-locking nut with integrated locking ring
rd
ca
THREAD FORMING FASTENERS
The following is a general description of best practices to be followed during handling of thread forming fasteners
and mating components.
Manual Torque Application
Hand tools are required for installation of a thread forming fastener. Do NOT use power tools, as the possibility for
over-torqueing or stripped threads exists. If a fastener is over-torqued, the joint can fail.
Hand Start Fasteners in Reverse
To avoid the possibility of cross-threading pre-existing threads during fastener replacement, begin by first hand-
inserting the new fastener and rotating counter-clockwise. This reverse rotation allows for the location of existing
fastener threads to ensure the fastener does not cross-thread upon thread re-engagement. Once the existing fastener
threads are located, hand-start individual fasteners manually until finger tight.
Risks of Over-Torque
Consult the Workshop Manual procedure when torqueing thread forming fasteners and follow torque specification
as listed. Make sure the fastener is fully seated against the mating component with no gap during reassembly.
Corrosion
During fastener replacement, inspect both fastener and mating component for signs of rust or other corrosion. If
corrosion is found, replace corroded components with new components.
Stripped Threads
If internal (mating component) threads or external (fastener) threads appear stripped or galled, replace both fastener
and mating component. When tightening, if minimum torque is not reached, internal threads on mating component
may have stripped. Remove the fastener to inspect and replace mating component if stripped threads are found.
Face Seals
When replacing fasteners, inspect mating component surface for debris, damage, disturbance, wear, or abrasion and
replace any seals or gaskets if damage is found.
SEALS AND GASKETS
Replace seals and gaskets, unless specified differently in the procedure.
EXTERIOR TRIM PARTS
m
Replace exterior trim parts fastened with glue or adhesive tape, unless specified differently in the procedure.
Mechanical Procedures
co
Illustrations in this manual may be used instead of written step instructions. Color-coding (see color scheme
illustration) is used to communicate the required step action or actions. Service action icons may be used to add
.
information regarding the required action.
gn
For additional information, refer to: Symbols Glossary (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
Illustration Color-coding
ia
rd
ca
Part
Item Number Description
1 — Blue - Target or primary component to be removed/installed (or
disassembled/assembled).
2 — Green - Components that need to be removed prior to or
installed after the target/primary.
3 — Brown - Components that need to be removed prior to or
installed after the target/primary.
4 — Yellow - Components to be set aside for access, but not
removed. Also highlighted areas to inspect or adjust.
5 — Magenta - Electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts,
bolts, clamps, or clips to be: detached, attached, loosened,
moved, removed or installed.
6 — Pale Blue - Special tool(s), general equipment, or common
tools used in an uncommon way.
Other color coding
Alternating Blue and White

Chemical, adhesive or sealer apply areas
Red
m
Sectioned or cut-away areas
Grey
ILLUSTRATION TASK SEQUENCE

. co
Background components shown for location information
Components that must be removed or installed in a specific sequence are identified with a numbered callout. Any
gn
associated step text is numbered accordingly.
Simple procedure example showing color-coding and task sequence.

ia
rd
ca
Black arrows are used to draw attention to components (usually fasteners). Arrows with multiples specified (here,
x2) identify an identical number of fasteners or items. Callouts (numbers inside circles) show a required sequence or
tightening torque.
In the illustration, the callouts indicate the removal sequence, which is reversed for installation. The yellow
coloring of the hose indicates it is to be positioned aside (not removed). Two identical (magenta-colored) fasteners
are indicated by the x2 arrow. The fasteners in this illustration require different torques (same torque for the x2
fasteners) so numbered callouts are used to identify them with torque values in the associated step text. The
(magenta-colored) hose clamp is another fastener to be removed.
Examples of fastener removal sequence and an identical service action for 12 fasteners. Other possible
symbols are shown on the right.
m
. co
gn
ia
Example of fastener sequence information with two persons required for the service action
rd
ca
HIDDEN DETAILS
Separate detail boxes or transparent components may be used to show hidden items in an illustration.
Example of hidden fastener information
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
SERVICE ACTION ICONS
Service action icons may be used to add information regarding the required action.
Location symbols show the location of a component or system on the vehicle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Example of service action icons pointing to highlighted components.

m
co
Movement arrows and service action icons show three dimensional or rotational movements.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Instruction symbols are used to apply sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.
m
may include specific values.
. co
Measurement symbols provide the information required to perform a specific measurement. These symbols
gn
ia
rd
ca
SPECIAL TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND TORQUE VALUES
When Ford special tools are required for the procedure, the tool and tool number are shown in an illustration. Special
tool numbers, general equipment, materials or torque values for the procedure step are shown in the text steps.
Example of special service tool and symbol used to hold the gear shift in the required gear position. Other
possible symbols are shown on the right.
m
co
Example of two illustrations used together with sequence steps, service action icons and special service tools
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Tool symbols direct the use of standard tools. The tool size or dimension may be specified.
m
HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS
. co
Some procedures may contain health and safety symbols that are associated with a specific service action.
gn
Always read and understand all health and safety precautions found in Section 100-00 before beginning any
procedure. For additional information, refer to: Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information,
ia
Description and Operation).
ISO warning symbols may be used to indicate potential hazards.

rd
ca
These symbols prohibit various hazardous actions
m
co
These symbols direct the use of personal protection equipment
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Diagnosis and Testing Information
ELEMENTS OF DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
Diagnosis and Testing may include:
Preliminary Inspection
In older manuals, Inspection and Verification
Symptom Chart
DTC Chart
Pinpoint Tests
Component Tests
Some diagnostics may be contained in Symptom Based Diagnostics. Some engine performance and emission
diagnostics may be placed in a separately published PC/ED manual.
MODULE NAMES MATCH THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
Module names and PID names in this manual match the Ford diagnostic scan tool: IDS.
The same diagnostic scan tool module name is found in some DTC definitions (for example, U024B Lost
Communication with Seat Control Module "G").
MODULE DESCRIPTIVE NAMES
A descriptive name is sometimes added to the diagnostic scan tool name to clarify module function. The descriptive
name will be followed by the diagnostic scan tool acronym in brackets.
Example: “Driver Active Motion Seat Module [SCMG]”.

Driver Active Motion Seat Module is the descriptive name added to clarify the function of the SCMG.
m
The SCMG acronym is used by diagnostic scan tool, defined as “Seat Control Module G”.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
310-02 Acceleration Control 2017 Explorer
Acceleration Control - Overview
The acceleration controls consist of the accelerator pedal, APP sensor and bracket assembly.
The throttle is controlled by an APP sensor on the accelerator pedal assembly. The APP sensor sends a signal to the PCM in
response to throttle pedal movements initiated by the driver. The PCM sends a signal to the electronic throttle control which
increases and decreases throttle position.
The engine management system electronically operates the throttle of the engine in response to throttle pedal movements
initiated by the driver. In the event of a system failure, the engine management system provides a "limp home" mode which
allows the vehicle to be driven with limited performance.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
310-02 Acceleration Control 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Diagnosis and Testing Procedure revision date: 05/17/2015
Acceleration Control
Symptom Chart
REFER to the PC/ED. See Section 3, Symptom Charts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
310-02 Acceleration Control 2017 Explorer
Accelerator Pedal
Base Part Number: 9735
Removal
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
NOTE: To prevent setting DTC make sure the ignition is in the OFF position prior to disconnecting the accelerator pedal
electrical connector.
1.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Remove the bolts and the accelerator pedal.
Torque: 62 lb.in (7 Nm)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer
m
. co
gn
Item Description
1 Accessory drive belt tensioner
ia
2 Crankshaft belt pulley

3 Accessory drive belt
rd
4 Pulley - A/C compressor

5 Generator pulley
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Base Part Number: 6B209
Removal
NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be lubricated as potential
damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to
the accessory drive belt or pulleys.
1. Remove the accessory drive belt.

Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys be lubricated as potential
damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism will occur. Do not apply any fluids or belt dressing to
the accessory drive belt or pulleys.
1.
1. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTE: After installation, make sure the accessory drive belt is correctly seated on all the pulleys.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Accessory Drive
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.

Visual Inspection Chart
Mechanical
Damaged or contaminated accessory drive belt
Damaged or contaminated pulley(s)
Incorrect accessory drive belt
m
Incorrect fitment of the accessory drive belt
Generator
Air conditioning (A/C) compressor
Pulley(s)
Loose hardware
. co
gn
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the
next step.
ia
Accessory Drive Belt Concerns
NOTICE: Do not lubricate the accessory drive belt as potential damage to the accessory drive belt material
rd
construction may occur.
Cracking
ca
Accessory drive belts are made from rubber which hardens with time and can develop cracks. As the accessory drive belt runs
on the back of some of the pulleys, the cracks are opened up. Small cracks are not considered to be a failure of the accessory
drive belt. Only if the crack is deep enough to reach the bottom of the groove to expose the cord or any chunks are found to be
missing from the accessory drive belt, is the accessory drive belt condition considered to be unacceptable.
1. Check the accessory drive belt for cracks. If the damage exceeds the acceptable limit, install a new accessory drive belt.
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
Chunking
Chunking describes the condition where long lengths of rubber become detached from the ribs of the accessory drive belt. This
is considered to be a failure of the accessory drive belt.
2. Check the accessory drive belt for damage. If any chunks are found to be missing, install a new accessory drive belt.
Pilling
m
Pilling is dust that forms in between the ribs of the accessory drive belt from rubber that is worn off the accessory drive belt
when it is new. There may also be loose particles left on the accessory drive belt during the manufacturing process. These are
worn off and form into small balls of rubber that then get trapped in the grooves of the accessory drive belt. This condition will
co
usually clear itself within 4800 km - 8000 km (3000 miles - 5000 miles) of normal driving.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Check the accessory drive belt for pilling. The condition of the accessory drive belt should be compared against the
illustration.
1. Small scattered pills. Not considered a concern. No action required.
2. Small scattered pills. Not considered a concern. No action required.
3. Longer pills up to 50% of the rib height. Possible noise concern. INSTALL a new accessory drive belt if noise is
apparent.
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
4. Longer pills up to 50% of the rib height. Possible noise concern. INSTALL a new accessory drive belt if noise is
apparent.
Installation).
5. Heavy deposits in the grooves. Possible noise and stability concern. INSTALL a new accessory drive belt.
Installation).
6. Heavy deposits in the grooves. Possible noise and stability concern. INSTALL a new accessory drive belt.
Installation).
Incorrect fitment
m
Accessory drive belt noise can be generated by the accessory drive belt being incorrectly fitted on the pulley as shown in the
following illustration. Make sure that all the V grooves on the accessory drive belt contact correctly with the pulley.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Sources Action

Accessory drive belt Accessory Use a stethoscope or other listening device to
noise drive system determine the source of the noise. INSTALL new
components as necessary.
Accessory CHECK the accessory drive belt is correctly installed

drive belt in the pulley grooves. INSTALL a new accessory
incorrectly drive belt as necessary.
installed. REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory
Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
Pulley(s). CHECK the pulley(s) for damage, freedom of

rotation, stone entrapment and alignment. INSTALL
new components as necessary.
Lubricant or CHECK the accessory drive belt for contamination or
other damage. RECTIFY the source of the leak and
contamination. INSTALL a new accessory drive belt.
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory
Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
NOTE: Chirp is Pulley CHECK that the accessory drive belt is running
defined as a misalignment centrally on the flat pulleys.
twittering noise, often (usually
intermittent evident at CHECK the pulleys for excessive end float and bent
idle). flanges.
Accessory drive belt
chirp With the engine running at idle, use a stethoscope to
identify the source of the noise. INSTALL new
components as necessary.
NOTE: Rattle is Loose CHECK the components or hardware for correct

defined as a metallic components installation and tighten as necessary.
knocking noise or hardware.
Accessory drive belt

rattle
m
Component Tests
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Static Check co

The accessory drive belt tensioner may be checked statically as follows:
.
1. Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for lubricant or other contamination. Rectify any leaks
gn
before installing a new accessory drive belt tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is contaminated, do not
attempt to clean it as the damping mechanism inside may be damaged. INSTALL a new accessory drive belt tensioner
as necessary.
REFER to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner (303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
ia
Installation).
rd
2. Detach the accessory drive belt in the area of the accessory drive belt tensioner.
3. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner has a damping feature, which is usually a friction device, therefore some
ca
friction within the system is normal.
Using the correct tool, move the accessory drive belt tensioner from its relaxed position through its full stroke and back
to the relaxed position to make sure there is no excessive stick, grab or bind, and to make sure there is tension on the
accessory drive belt tensioner spring.
4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner pulley and check for damage, freedom of rotation and alignment. INSTALL a
new accessory drive belt tensioner as necessary.
Installation).
5. If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the accessory drive belt tensioner
dynamically. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the above criteria, INSTALL a new accessory drive belt
tensioner.
Installation).
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Dynamic Check
The accessory drive belt tensioner may be checked dynamically as follows:
1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive belt tensioner
should move (respond) when the engine is accelerated rapidly or when the A/C clutch cycles ON and OFF (the degree
of movement can be up to 4 mm). If the accessory drive belt tensioner movement is not constant without engine
acceleration or A/C clutch cycling, a pulley or shaft is possibly bent, out of round, or the damping mechanism inside the
accessory drive belt tensioner may be damaged. INSTALL a new accessory drive belt tensioner as necessary.
Installation).
2. Excessive accessory drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the accessory drive belt) may cause excessive
accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check the condition by installing a new accessory drive belt.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-02 Front End Body Panels 2017 Explorer
Active Grille Shutter - Overview
Overview
The active grille shutter system (when equipped) is comprised of the grille shutter assembly and the grille shutter actuator. The
active grille shutter system is primarily used to maximize fuel economy by reducing aerodynamic drag on the vehicle. The
active grille shutter system is also used to shorten engine warm-up time, increasing engine efficiency and providing heat to the
vehicle occupants in a timely manner. The grille shutter actuator receives position commands from the PCM. The active grille
shutter system carries out a calibration sequence whenever the engine is started, fully opening and closing the shutters before
being positioned in the programmed position as requested by the PCM.
PCM inputs/outputs that may be used for controlling of grille shutters are the:
ECT sensor
IAT sensor
A/C pressure transducer
APP sensor
ABS module (through the HS-CAN)
AAT (ambient air temperature) sensor
m
TCT (turbo charge temperature) sensor
MCT (manifold charge temperature) sensor
TOT (transmission oil temperature) sensor
Engine cooling fan motor
Engine oil temperature
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Active Grille Shutter - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram
m
Network Message Chart
. co

PCM Network Input Messages
gn
Broadcast Message Originating Module Message Purpose

ia
Vehicle speed ABS module Vehicle speed is used to determine positioning of the grille shutters.
rd

ca
The grille shutter actuator positions the grille shutters based on commands from the PCM. The grille shutter moves 90 degrees
from fully closed to fully open and, based on the position commanded by the PCM, is set in 1 of 16 positions (approximately 6
degrees between positions).
During normal operation, the grille shutter may be partially to fully open when the engine is off depending on the ambient
temperature. After an engine starting event, a calibration of the grille shutter system occurs which typically takes 15-20
seconds. The grille shutter system performs the calibration sequence by detecting the end positions, open and closed. The
calibration sequence can begin in either direction, open or closed, and continues until it is successful or a fault is sensed. A
long pause may occur between the 2 portions (open/close) of the calibration sequence. If certain faults are present (shutter
blocked or actuator error), a recalibration is initiated in an attempt to resolve the problem. If the problem is not resolved after a
calibrated number of attempts (usually 3 or 4), a timer starts and sets a DTC when the timer reaches a predetermined limit.
The PCM communicates the desired position (open or closed) of the grille shutter based on various PCM inputs (vehicle speed,
coolant temperature, ambient temperature, A/C system pressure, etc.). The PCM communicates to the grille shutter actuator
via a LIN. The LIN supports bi-directional communication between the grille shutter actuator and PCM, allowing the grille
shutter actuator to communicate position and fault information to the PCM.
The PCM sets grille shutter Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) when the fault information is communicated by the grille shutter
actuator for a predetermined amount of time. Any failures of the LIN for over 10 seconds continuously results in the grille
shutter actuator positioning the grille shutter fully open. There is no indication to the driver of the vehicle when a fault with the
grille shutter system is present or a grille shutter DTC is set in the PCM.
Component Description
Grille Shutter Actuator

The grille shutter actuator is a smart motor which receives position requests from the PCM via the LIN. One of the grille shutter
blinds connects to the grille shutter actuator using a retainer. The grille shutter actuator can be serviced individually or as an
entire assembly, which includes the grille shutter, grille shutter actuator, retainer and housing.
Grille Shutter
The grille shutter is comprised of shutter blinds which are linked to each other. One of the individual shutter blinds is fixed to the
grille shutter actuator. When the grille shutter actuator moves, it moves the attached shutter which causes the other linked
shutters to move. The grille shutter system is typically serviced as an entire assembly, which includes the grille shutter blinds,
grille shutter actuator, retainer and housing. Individual shutter blinds are not serviceable. The grille shutter actuator itself can be
replaced without replacing the entire grille shutter assembly.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Active Grille Shutter Actuator
Removal
1. Remove the front bumper cover.

Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3. Remove the screws and the active grille shutter actuator.

ca
Installation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
DTC Chart: Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Diagnostics in this manual assume a certain skill level and knowledge of Ford-specific diagnostic practices.
REFER to: Diagnostic Methods (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) DTC Chart
DTC Description Action

P059F Active Grille Air Shutter "A" Performance / GO to Pinpoint Test A
Stuck Off
P05A1 Active Grille Air Shutter "A" Position Sensor GO to Pinpoint Test A
Minimum / Maximum Stop Performance
m
P05A2 Active Grille Air Shutter "A" Control Circuit / INSTALL a new grille shutter actuator.
Open REFER to: Active Grille Shutter Actuator (501-02
P05A7
co
Active Grille Air Shutter Control Module "A"
Supply Voltage Circuit Low
. Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
GO to Pinpoint Test A
P05C0 Active Grille Air Shutter Module “A” Over INSTALL a new grille shutter actuator.
gn
Temperature REFER to: Active Grille Shutter Actuator (501-02
Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
U0046 Vehicle Communication Bus C GO to Pinpoint Test A
ia
U0284 Lost Communication With Active Grille Air GO to Pinpoint Test A

Shutter Module "A"
rd
All other Diagnostic - Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the
Trouble Codes (DTCs) procedure.
ca
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Active Grille Shutter

Symptom Chart
Condition Possible Sources Actions

The active grille shutter is inoperative or does not operate correctly Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test A
Pinpoint Test(s)
The Active Grille Shutter is Inoperative or Does Not Operate Correctly

Refer to Wiring Diagrams Cell 33 for schematic and connector information.
Normal Operation and Fault Conditions
REFER to: Active Grille Shutter - System Operation and Component Description (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Description
and Operation).

DTC Fault Trigger Conditions
DTC Description Fault Trigger Conditions

P059F Active Grille Air Shutter "A" When the grille shutter actuator senses it is unable to move the grille shutter, it sends a
Performance / Stuck Off message to the PCM via the LIN. The PCM sets this DTC when the fault is
communicated for a predetermined amount of time.
P05A1 Active Grille Air Shutter "A" When the grille shutter actuator senses it is unable to obtain a fully open or closed
Position Sensor Minimum / position of the grille shutter, it sends a message to the PCM via the LIN. The PCM then
Maximum Stop sets the DTC when the fault is communicated for a predetermined amount of time.
Performance
m
P05A7 Active Grille Air Shutter When the grille shutter actuator senses low voltage, it sends a message to the PCM via
Control Module "A" Supply the LIN. The PCM sets this DTC when the fault is communicated for a predetermined
Voltage Circuit Low amount of time.
U0284 Lost Communication With

co
U0046 Vehicle Communication Bus This DTC sets when the PCM detects a short to voltage, ground or open in the LIN.
C
When the PCM does not receive communication from the grille shutter actuator for a
.
Active Grille Air Shutter predetermined amount of time, the PCM sets this DTC.
gn
Module "A"
ia
Possible Causes
rd
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connectors
Grille shutter actuator
ca
Grille shutter assembly

PCM
Visual Inspection and Diagnostic Pre-checks
Verify BJB fuse 3 (20A) is OK.

Make sure the grille opening does not have any debris or other obstructions that inhibit operation of the grille shutter.
Make sure the grille shutter actuator electrical connector is not disconnected.
PINPOINT TEST A : THE ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTER IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
A1
RETRIEVE THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform PCM self-test.
Is DTC DTC P05A7, U0046 or U0284 present?
Yes GO to A2
No For DTC P059F or P05A1, GO to A7

For all other PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303
for the procedure.
A2
CHECK THE VOLTAGE SUPPLY TO THE GRILLE SHUTTER ACTUATOR
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Grille Shutter Actuator C1651.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
Click to display connectors

Positive Lead Measurement / Action Negative Lead
C1651-3 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 11 volts?
Yes GO to A3
No VERIFY BJB fuse 3 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams
m
manual to identify the cause of the circuit short.
Ignition OFF.
. co
A3
CHECK THE GRILLE SHUTTER ACTUATOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
gn
Measure:

ia
C1651-1 Ground
rd
ca
Is the resistance less than 3 ohms?
Yes For DTC U0046 or U0284, GO to A4

For DTC P05A7, GO to A9
No REPAIR the circuit.
A4
CHECK THE LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
For vehicles with a 3.5L Ti-VCT (Twin-independant Variable Cam Timing) engine, disconnect: PCM C175B.
For vehicles with a 2.3L GTDI (Gasoline Turbo Direct Injection) engine, disconnect: PCM C1381B.
For vehicles with a 3.5L Ti-VCT (Twin-independant Variable Cam Timing) engine, measure:

C1651-2 C175B-74
For vehicles with a 2.3L GTDI (Gasoline Turbo Direct Injection) engine, measure:

C1651-2 C1381B-50
Yes GO to A5
A5
CHECK THE LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
C1651-2 . co Ground
gn
Is any voltage present?
Yes REPAIR the circuit.

ia
No GO to A6
rd
A6
CHECK THE LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
ca
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1651-2 Ground
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes For DTC U0046 or U0284, GO to A10

For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), GO to A9
A7
VERIFY THE GRILLE SHUTTER OPERATION USING THE GRILLE SHUTTER A POSITION - COMMANDED
(GRILL_A_CMD) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Start the engine and allow it to idle for at least 30 seconds to allow for the grille shutter calibration to complete.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view PCM Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Using a diagnostic scan tool, select the PCM GRILL_A_CMD PID and active command the grille shutter from
100% (open) to 0% (closed) while observing the grille shutter operation from the front of the vehicle.
Does the grille shutter fully open and close when commanded by the diagnostic scan tool?
Yes The grille shutter system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by
debris/obstruction or the grille shutter actuator electrical connector. INSPECT the electrical connector
and REPAIR or REPLACE as necessary.
No GO to A8
A8
CHECK THE GRILLE SHUTTER FOR OBSTRUCTIONS AND/OR MECHANICAL BINDING CONCERNS
Ignition OFF.
Remove the grille shutter actuator.

REFER to: Active Grille Shutter Actuator (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
Manually open and close the grille shutter, removing any obstructions which can inhibit operation of the grille
m
shutter or linkage. The grille shutter should open and close easily with no binding.
Does the grille shutter operate freely with no binding or obstruction?
Yes GO to A9
. co
No REPAIR the binding/obstruction, or if necessary, INSTALL a new grille shutter assembly.
gn
REFER to: Active Grille Shutter (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
ia
A9
CHECK FOR CORRECT GRILLE SHUTTER ACTUATOR OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
rd
Disconnect: Grille Shutter Actuator C1651 (if not previously disconnected).
Inspect the grille shutter actuator electrical connector and jumper harness.
ca
Repair:
corrosion (install new connector or terminals - clean module pins)
damaged or bent pins - install new terminals/pins as necessary
pushed-out pins - install new pins as necessary
Reconnect the grille shutter actuator connector, jumper harness and all previously disconnected system
connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Operate the system and determine if the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes CHECK OASIS for any applicable Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs). If a TSB exists for this
concern, DISCONTINUE this test and FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new active grille shutter actuator.
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by module
connections. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues.
A10
CHECK FOR THE CORRECT GRILLE SHUTTER ACTUATOR OPERATION
Inspect the grille shutter actuator and PCM electrical connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the grille shutter actuator connector, jumper harness and all previously disconnected system
connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new active grille shutter actuator.
CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If the concern is still present,
INSTALL a new PCM. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the procedure.
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Removal

2. Remove the bolts and the pin-type retainer.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the bolts.

Torque: 36 lb.in (4.1 Nm)
m
4. Remove the active grille shutter bridge link bolt.
Torque: 12 lb.in (1.3 Nm) . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Position the active grille shutter forward.

m
6. NOTE: Radiator and condenser removed for clarity.
co
Release the retaining tabs and remove the active grille shutter bridge link.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the active grille shutter.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems 2017 Explorer
General Procedures
Active Torque Coupling Configuration
Configuration
1. NOTICE: If the ATC (Active Torque Coupling) solenoid bar code information is not correct, Rear Drive Unit
(RDU) damage or driveability concerns can occur.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, under the toolbox icon select Powertrain then select Automatic Traction Control Barcode
Entry. Follow the instructions displayed on the diagnostic scan tool.
2. Enter the 4-digit code found on the ATC solenoid wire harness connector. The scan tool verifies the digits entered are
valid and displays a message if the information is not valid.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
Check
1. NOTE: Always drive the vehicle in a safe manner according to driving conditions and obey all traffic laws.
Road test the vehicle. Carry out the AWD drive cycle after downloading the active torque coupling solenoid bar code
information to the PCM.
1. Carry out 3 accelerations from 0-30 mph (0-48 km/h) in a straight line
Perform this procedure at low, medium and full accelerator pedal position
Verify there is no perceived front wheel slip
2. On dry pavement, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) in a fully locked turn
Verify there is no driveline binding
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec 2017 Explorer
(227kW/301PS)
Removal
NOTE: 3.5L Duratec shown, 3.7L Duratec similar.
1.
1. Disconnect and position vent tube.
2. Detach and position the vent tube from the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Loosen the clamps and remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec 2017 Explorer
(227kW/301PS) 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Removal and Installation Procedure revision date: 03/5/2015
Air Cleaner
Removal
NOTE: 3.5L Duratec shown, 3.7L Duratec similar.
1.
1. Loosen the clamp and position the air cleaner outlet pipe.
2. Remove the bolts and the air cleaner housing.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
412-00 Climate Control System - General Information 2017 Explorer
General Procedures
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment
Activation
1. Remove the A/C clutch. Refer to Air Conditioning A/C Clutch and Air Conditioning A/C Clutch Field Coil procedure in
Group 412.
2. NOTE: Compressor with a spring rubber clutch shown others similar.
Check the A/C clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced places between the clutch plate and the A/C clutch pulley. Refer to
Specifications in Group 412.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Add or remove spacers between the clutch plate hub and the compressor shaft until the clearance is within specification.
Refer to Specifications in Group 412.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
General Procedures
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch and Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Field Coil
Base Part Number: 19D786
Special Tool(s) / General Equipment
412-001 (T71P-19703-B)
Remover, Compressor Pulley
Activation
1. Remove the A/C compressor. Refer to Air Conditioning A/C Compressor procedure in Group 412.
2. NOTE: If equipped with spring rubber clutch.
Using the universal clutch holding tool, hold the clutch and remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: If equipped with spring plate clutch.
Hold the A/C compressor shaft.

Rotate the A/C clutch hub counter clockwise to remove.
Torque: 24 lb.ft (33 Nm)
m
4. Remove the A/C compressor pulley snap ring.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. NOTE: Do not use air tools. Damage to the A/C clutch pulley or A/C compressor may result.
Remove the A/C compressor pulley.

Install Special Service Tool: 412-001 (T71P-19703-B) Remover, Compressor Pulley.
m
6. Remove the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector retainer.
Torque: 35 lb.in (4 Nm) . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the A/C clutch field coil snap ring, and remove the clutch field coil.
m
. co
gn
ia
8.
Visually inspect the A/C clutch disc and hub, compressor pulley and clutch field coil for damage.
rd
Inspect for physical damage, including cracked or melted components or discoloration due to excessive heat.
Inspect for excessive wear, including grooving in the A/C clutch disc and hub or the compressor pulley that is
more than fingernail depth.
ca
Inspect for roughness in the A/C compressor pulley bearing.
9. To install, reverse the steps in this procedure.
10. NOTE: Spring plate clutch similar.
Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding clutch disc and hub spacers. Refer to Air Conditioning A/C
Clutch Air Gap Adjustment procedure in Group 412.
m
. co
gn

ia
rd
ca
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil WSH-M1C231-B
YN-12-D
Removal
NOTICE: If installing a new A/C compressor due to an internal failure of the old unit, carry out the following
procedures to remove contamination from the A/C system. Failure to remove contamination from the A/C system, if
present, will result in poor A/C performance and/or damage to the new A/C compressor and other components.
If A/C flushing equipment is available, carry out flushing of the A/C system prior to installing a new A/C
compressor.
m
If A/C flushing equipment is not available, replace all contaminated components after a new A/C compressor
has been installed.
Install a new Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) as directed by the A/C flushing.
co
Install a new receiver drier element as directed by the A/C flushing.
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver drier element is not required when repairing the A/C system except when there is physical
evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver drier element.
.
gn
NOTE: A new A/C compressor may come equipped with an A/C clutch disc and hub, A/C compressor pulley and A/C clutch
field coil already installed. If these components are not pre-installed, it will be necessary to transfer these parts from the old A/C
compressor to the new compressor prior to installation of the A/C compressor if suitable for reuse.
ia
1. Recover the refrigerant.

rd
Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General
Information, General Procedures).
ca
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.

Refer to: Jacking and Lifting - Overview (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
3. Remove the retainers and the underbody shield.

m
. co
gn
ia
4. Rotate the A/C compressor belt tensioner clockwise and position the A/C compressor belt off the A/C compressor pulley.
rd
ca
5. Detach the wiring harness retainer, disconnect the electrical connectors.

m
6. NOTICE: Make sure that all openings are sealed.
seals.
. co
Remove the A/C compressor inlet and outlet line nuts and disconnect the fittings. Discard the O-ring seals and gasket
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the nut, studbolts, stud and the A/C compressor.

m
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. co

2. Tighten the A/C compressor stud, studbolts and nut in the sequence shown.
.
Torque:
gn
1:
80 lb.in (9 Nm)
2:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
3:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
4:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
ia
rd
ca
3. After installation, make sure the accessory drive belt is correctly seated on all the pulleys.
m
4. NOTICE: Only use the specified material to lubricate the seals.
Install new O-ring seals. co

Material: Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil / YN-12-D (WSH-M1C231-B)
.
5. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
gn
Refer to: Refrigerant Oil Adding (412-00) .

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
412-00 Climate Control System - General Information 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Materials
Name Specification
YN-12-D
Removal

m
3. Remove the retainers and the underbody shield.. co

gn
ia
rd
ca

Remove the A/C compressor inlet line nut and disconnect the fitting. Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
m
. co
Remove the A/C compressor inlet line nut, disconnect the fitting and remove the A/C compressor inlet line. Discard the
gn
O-ring seal and gasket seal.
ia
rd
ca
Installation

Install new O-ring seals.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
General Procedures Procedure revision date: 08/24/2016
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Leak Detection
Air Conditioning Service Unit

Electronic Leak Detector
Air Conditioning Adaptor Kit
Leak detection
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging procedure in Group
412.
2. Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the A/C compressor. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the
procedure.
3. Install the adapters from the A/C Flush Adapter Kit on the ports of the A/C compressor, using the existing retaining bolts.
m
219-00082 ACF-3000 33PC Adapter Kit - Revised 1st released 44pc kit
219-00083 A/C Flushing Adapter Kit 2 of 3 (Previously "Supplement A", 2nd released kit)
219-00084 A/C Flushing Adapter Kit 3 of 3
co
Use the General Equipment: Air Conditioning Adaptor Kit
4. Connect the high and low pressure lines of the air conditioning service unit to the corresponding fittings on the adapter.
.
265‐37887 Ritchie R134A A/C Refrigerant Hybrid Management System
gn
Use the General Equipment: Air Conditioning Service Unit
5. Charge the A/C compressor following the air conditioning service unit instructions. Open the low pressure valve, the high
pressure valve and set the refrigerant charge amount to 0.23 kg (8 oz).
ia
6. NOTE: Use a Rotunda-approved Electronic Leak Detector for R-134a refrigerant SAE Certified to J2791.
rd
Using the Refrigerant Leak Detector, check for leaks at the compressor shaft.
023‐22791 Robinair Infrared A/C Refrigerant Leak Detector w/Case
Use the General Equipment: Electronic Leak Detector
ca
7. When the leak test is complete, recover the refrigerant from the compressor.
8. If an external leak is found, install a new A/C compressor.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Materials
Name Specification
YN-12-D
Removal

m
3. Remove the retainers and the underbody shield.. co

gn
ia
rd
ca

Remove the A/C compressor outlet line nut and disconnect the fitting. Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
m
5. NOTICE: Make sure that all openings are sealed. co
Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector. Remove the A/C compressor outlet line nut, disconnect the
.
fitting and remove the A/C compressor outlet line. Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Air Conditioning (A/C) Odor Treatment
Base Part Number: YN-29
A/C Odor Remover Flexible Applicator
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® A/C Cooling Coil Coating -
YN-29
Inspection
NOTE: There are typically 4 types of objectionable odors found in a vehicle:
m
chemical odors
environmental odors
human and other interior-generated odors
microbiological odors co
Before determining that A/C odor treatment is required, determine the source and the circumstances under which the odor
occurs.
.
gn
NOTE: Chemical odors are usually constant regardless of the climate control system setting although they may be enhanced
by A/C operation. Most chemical odors are caused by fluid leaks or incorrectly cured adhesives. Chemical odors can be
eliminated by repairing the leaking component and removing any residue.
ia
NOTE: Environmental odors usually occur for a short time and diminish after the vehicle passes through the affected area.
These odors are typically only detected when the vehicle windows are open, or when the climate control system is operating in
a mode that allows for fresh air. Environmental odors cannot be eliminated because they are external in source, but they may
rd
be minimized by switching to a climate control setting that uses recirculated air.
NOTE: Human and other interior-generated odors occur while the source is present and may linger for a short time after. These
ca
odors may be more noticeable during A/C operation. Human odors may be eliminated by removing the source and cleaning the
affected area.
NOTE: Microbiological odors, if in the A/C system, usually last for about 30 seconds after the system is turned on. They are
detected while the A/C is turned on and using either outside or recirculated air. Microbiological odors that occur in areas other
than the A/C system (for example, water in doors or wet carpeting) may last indefinitely and are more intense when recirculated
air is used. Microbiological odors are not present at temperatures at or below 10° C (50° F).
Microbiological odors can be eliminated by removing the source and treating the affected area. Allow standing water to drain
and dry out. A/C systems may be treated by using Motorcraft® A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29) as described in the service
procedure below.
NOTE: Microbiological odors result from microbial growth supported by warm temperatures and moisture. Microbiological odors
are described as musty/mildew type smells and may occur on/in:
foam seals
rubber seals
adhesives
standing water
water soaked carpet/trim
1. Identify the type of odor present in the vehicle. Do not proceed with A/C odor treatment if the odor source is found to be
outside of the A/C system. Refer to the following list for examples.
Odor Source Odor Description
Chemical Odors
Coolant Sweet smell
Fuel Gasoline or diesel fuel smell
Oil Oil type or burning smell
Power Steering Fluid Oil type or burning smell
Transmission Fluid Oil type or burning smell
Washer Fluid Alcohol type smell
Gear Lube Garlic/sulfur smell
Refrigerant Oil Ether type smell
Carpet/trim Adhesives Fishy, urine or sweet smell
Evaporator Core Coating Wet cement type smell
Environmental Odors
Exhaust Exhaust, fuel or burning type smell
Industrial Pollutants Various smells
m
Dust Musty, mildew or wet cement type smell
Pollen Sweet smell
Tobacco
Human and Other Interior Generated Odors
co
Burning, tar smell
.
Body Secretions Body odor
gn
Perfuming Agents Sweet or fragrance smell
Clothing Musty, mildew or body odors
Food/Beverage Sweet, musty, mildew or fishy smell
ia
Microbiological Odors
rd
Microbiological Odors Occurring Inside of Musty, mildew smell lasting about 30 seconds after A/C is turned on
A/C System
Microbiological Odors Occurring Outside Musty, mildew smell lasting indefinitely and possibly more pronounced
ca
of A/C System when using recirculated air
Repair
1. NOTE: Identify the source of the odor.
Check the evaporator core drain tube for restriction.

Check the passenger and driver side carpet for moisture. If moisture is found, A/C odor treatment is not
necessary. Diagnose for a water leak as needed.
Check the cabin air filter and cabin air filter cover for moisture resulting from water bypassing the cowl baffling
system. If moisture is found, A/C odor treatment is not necessary. Diagnose for a water leak as needed.
Check the cowl top panel and air inlet screen for standing water or foreign material. If possible, remove any
standing water and clean the air inlet screen using a wet/dry vacuum.
2. Open all vehicle windows and doors.
3. Make sure the A/C is off.
4. Select REGISTER mode (A/C off).
5. Adjust the temperature setting to full warm.
6. Adjust the blower motor speed to HI.

7. Run the engine for 25 minutes to dry out the A/C system.
8. Turn the ignition OFF.
9. Remove the cabin air filter. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
10. NOTICE: To avoid damage, do not spill or spray this product on the blower motor speed control.
Remove the blower motor speed control. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
11. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the vehicle interior, do not spill or spray this product on any interior surface.
NOTE: Only Motorcraft® A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29) is approved for use on Ford vehicles. No other coating is
approved. Use of other coatings may cause damage to the factory coating and more odor issues.
Add one full bottle of Motorcraft® A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29) to the A/C Odor Remover Flexible Applicator tool.
258‐62644 A/C Odor Remover Flexible Applicator
Use the General Equipment: A/C Odor Remover Flexible Applicator
Material: Motorcraft® A/C Cooling Coil Coating / YN-29
12. Insert the nozzle into the evaporator housing and direct the spray toward the evaporator core face. Spray the entire
evaporator core face until empty.
13. Install the blower motor speed control. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
m
14. Repeat Steps 4 through 8 to cure the cooling coil coating.
15. Install the cabin air filter. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
Removal
1. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector and remove the A/C pressure transducer.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Flushing
Air Conditioning Flush and Purge Service Unit

Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® A/C System Flushing Solvent -
YN-23
Flushing
m
NOTICE: Use the Refrigerant Identification Equipment before recovering any of the vehicle's refrigerant. Failure to do
so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the
customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost,
co
use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C
refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations. For all
equipment, follow the equipment manufacturer procedures and instructions.
.
NOTICE: Before flushing the A/C system, remove the receiver drier or receiver drier element, front Thermostatic
gn
Expansion Valve (TXV) , rear TXV (if equipped) and hoses with mufflers. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it
impossible to correctly remove any residual-flushing agent. These components are typically discarded after A/C
system contamination. Hoses without mufflers can be reused unless they are clogged with foreign material. The 3.78L
(1 gal) of Motorcraft® A/C System Flushing Solvent (YN-23) and FL1-A filter used in A/C Flush and Purge Service Unit
ia
are intended for use on one vehicle only. They may be used to flush both the A/C condenser core and the A/C
evaporator core on an individual vehicle, but under no circumstances should they be used on more than one vehicle.
rd
NOTICE: Only the A/C Flush and Purge Service Unit and Motorcraft® A/C System Flushing Solvent (YN-23) are
approved for use on Ford vehicles. No other flushing device or solvent is approved for flushing heat exchangers ( A/C
condenser, A/C evaporator). Use of any other flusher or solvent may cause damage to the A/C system and the service
ca
unit.
NOTE: Prior to using the A/C Flush and Purge Service Unit for the first time, review the operating instructions.
NOTE: Never push shop air directly through an a/c system. Shop air is full of contaminants and must be run through the service
unit to clean and dry the air.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company has approved a procedure to provide technicians with a non-CFC method of flushing
contaminated A/C system heat exchangers. The procedure allows the specific components to be cleaned and flushed. The
types of contamination flushed include particle matter that results from A/C compressor or desiccant failure and gummy residue
that can form when refrigerant oil is overheated during A/C compressor seizure. The flushing process is a 2-step procedure that
involves using an A/C Flush and Purge Service Unit to:
circulate the flushing solvent through the heat exchanger in the reverse direction of normal refrigerant flow (back-
flushing). Particulate matter picked up during flushing is filtered from the returning solvent before the solvent is returned
to the reservoir for continued circulation.
remove the flushing solvent from the heat exchanger. In this step of the procedure the pressurized air 621-862 kPa (90-
125 psi), that is connected to the service unit is used to push and evaporate any remaining flush solvent from the heat
exchanger.
412.
2. Disconnect the refrigerant lines from the heat exchanger(s) (A/C condenser, A/C evaporator) to be flushed. Refer to the
appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
3. NOTE: Do not flush through the condenser integrated receiver drier element (if equipped), TXV (if equipped) or hoses
with mufflers. Internal plumbing and material make-up of these components make it impossible to correctly remove
foreign material or residual flushing solvent.
Use the correct adapters with the Rotunda-approved A/C Flush and Purge Service Unit to flush the heat exchanger.
357‐405 80004 00 Mahle - ACF-3100 - A/C Component Flush & Purge System
258-40001 A/C Flush Machine with Dual Tank and SoundSilence™ Technology
219-00082 - ACF-3000 - 33PC Adapter Kit - Revised 1st released 44pc kit
219-00083 A/C Flushing Adapter Kit 2 of 3 (Previously "Supplement A", 2nd released kit)
219-00084 A/C Flushing Adapter Kit 3 of 3
Use the General Equipment: Air Conditioning Flush and Purge Service Unit
4. NOTE: Use 3.78 L (1 gal) of Motorcraft® A/C System Flushing Solvent (YN-23) to flush the heat exchanger for a
minimum of 15 minutes. The flush solvent may be used for one or both heat exchangers in the A/C system. However,
the flush solvent is intended for one vehicle only. The filter used on the service unit is also intended for use on one
vehicle only.
Flush the heat exchanger for a minimum of 15 minutes.

Material: Motorcraft® A/C System Flushing Solvent / YN-23
5. Apply the pressurized air 621-862 kPa (90-125 psi) to the service unit, purge the component for a minimum of 30
m
minutes. The 30-minute purge time is required to force and evaporate all residual solvent from the A/C system
component. Failure to successfully remove all residual solvent within the component can result in system damage when
reconnected and operated. Dispose of the used flush solvent and filter in accordance with local, state and federal
regulations.
co
6. Install a new TXV (if equipped) in any vehicle being serviced for an internal A/C compressor or desiccant failure. Refer to
the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
.
gn
7. Install new refrigerant hoses with mufflers in any vehicle being serviced for an internal A/C compressor or desiccant
failure. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
8. Install a new receiver drier (if equipped) or receiver drier element (if equipped) in any vehicle being serviced for an
ia
internal A/C compressor or desiccant failure. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
9. Reconnect the heat exchanger(s) (A/C condenser, A/C evaporator) that were being serviced. Refer to the appropriate
rd
section in Group 412 for the procedure.
10. If a new A/C compressor is not being installed, lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
Refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding procedure in Group 412.
ca
11. If a new A/C compressor is not being installed, evacuate, leak test and charge the A/C system. Refer to the appropriate
12. If a new A/C compressor is being installed, install the A/C compressor. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for
the procedure.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Base Part Number: YN-19

Refrigerant Identification Equipment
Recovery
NOTICE: Use an A/C refrigerant analyzer before recovering any of the vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts
the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer
to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the
A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. Dispose of all contaminated
A/C refrigerant as hazardous waste in accordance with all federal, state and local regulations. For all equipment, follow
the manufacturer's instructions.
m
1. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment that meets the
requirements of the SAE J2788 standard.
co
Verify the refrigerant purity prior to recovery. Refer to Refrigerant Identification Testing procedure in Group 412.
198‐RI2012yfp A/C Refrigerant Analyzer for use with R134a and R1234yf vehicles
Use the General Equipment: Refrigerant Identification Equipment
.
2. Connect the tool to the low-side and high-side service gauge port valves following the manufacturer's instructions.
gn
3. NOTE: Never attempt to recover from only the low side service gauge port valve (solenoid valves in the system will not
ia
allow for full recovery).
Recover the refrigerant from the system following the manufacturer's instructions. Note the amount of oil removed during
rd
the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once repairs are complete. Refer to
Refrigerant Oil Adding procedure in Group 412.
ca
4. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes and observe the system vacuum reading. If the vacuum is not lost,
disconnect the recovery equipment.
5. If the system loses vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for 2 minutes.
6. Carry out the required repairs.
Evacuation
1. NOTICE: Use an A/C refrigerant analyzer before recovering any of the vehicle's refrigerant. Failure to do so puts
the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the
customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional
cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. Dispose
of all contaminated A/C refrigerant as hazardous waste in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations. For all equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions.
3. NOTE: Never attempt to recover from only the low side service gauge port valve (solenoid valves in the system will not
allow for full recovery).
Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to 101.1
kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
4. Turn off the vacuum pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 10 minutes to make sure the system vacuum is held.
Charging
1. NOTICE: Use an A/C refrigerant analyzer before recovering any of the vehicle's refrigerant. Failure to do so puts
the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the
customer to the service facility that carried out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional
cost, use the A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. Dispose
of all contaminated A/C refrigerant as hazardous waste in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations. For all equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. Refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding procedure in
Group 412.
4. Set the refrigerant charge amount and charge the refrigerant system following the manufacturer's instructions.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-17 Roof Opening Panel 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Air Deflector
Removal
1. Open the sunroof.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2.
Remove the air deflector.
1. Remove the 3 retaining screws.
ca
2. Lift the forward part of the air deflector from the frame.
3. Slide the air deflector forward out of the track assembly to remove.
m
Installation
2. Initialize the roof opening panel.

. co
Refer to: Power Roof Opening Panel Initialization (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, General Procedures).
gn

ia
rd
ca
Base Part Number: 19E616
Removal
1. Remove the brake pedal and bracket.

Refer to: Brake Pedal and Bracket (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the IPC.

Refer to: Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the air distribution door actuator bolt.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove the bolt, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the air distribution door actuator.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Interior Trim Remover
Removal
1. Remove the glove compartment.

Refer to: Glove Compartment (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
2. Release the clips and remove the RH finish panel.

Use the General Equipment: Interior Trim Remover
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
4. Remove the bolts, release the clips and remove the upper glove compartment assembly.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Disconnect the electrical connector, remove the bolts and the air inlet door actuator.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-20B Supplemental Restraint System 2017 Explorer
Airbag and Seatbelt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Component Location
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
1 LH and RH front impact severity sensors
2 Driver and passenger front door side impact sensors
3 BECMB
4 OCSM (includes OCS sensor and gel-filled bladder)
5 RH C-pillar side impact sensor
6 Clockspring
7 FCIM (includes PAD indicator)
8 Driver seat position sensor
9 RCM
10 LH C-pillar side impact sensor
11 Passenger seat position sensor
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
1 RH side air curtain
2 Driver airbag
3 LH side air curtain
4 Deployable steering column
5 Driver and passenger side airbags
6 Passenger airbag (includes canister vent)
7 Passenger knee airbag
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
1 LH rear outer seatbelt upper retractor (if equipped with inflatable seatbelts)
2 LH and RH rear outer seatbelt buckles (single seat) (if equipped with inflatable
seatbelts) (includes seatbelt buckle and buckle sensor)
3 Driver and passenger seatbelt anchor pretensioners
4 Driver and front passenger seatbelt buckles (each includes buckle sensor, front
passenger buckle also includes Belt Tension Sensor (BTS))
5 LH rear outer seatbelt lower retractor (if equipped with inflatable seatbelts)
6 LH rear outer seatbelt inflator (single seat) (if equipped with inflatable seatbelts)
7 LH rear outer seatbelt inflator (double seat) (if equipped with inflatable seatbelts)
8 LH rear outer seatbelt buckle assembly (double seat) (if equipped with inflatable
seatbelts) (includes seatbelt buckle and buckle sensor)
9 RH rear outer seatbelt lower retractor (if equipped with inflatable seatbelts)
10 RH rear outer seatbelt inflator (if equipped with inflatable seatbelts)
11 Driver and front passenger seatbelt retractors (each includes retractor
pretensioner, front passenger retractor also includes adaptive load limiter)
12 RH rear outer seatbelt upper retractor (if equipped with inflatable seatbelts)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-20B Supplemental Restraint System
Airbag and Seatbelt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Overview
Overview
The RCM continually receives and monitors inputs from the OCSM, BECMB and various other hard-wired switches and
sensors. If the RCM detects a sudden vehicle deceleration and/or lateral deceleration based on the information received from
the various sensors, and determines that deployment is necessary, the RCM applies voltage and current to deploy the
appropriate SRS components.
The SRS utilizes Connector Position Assurance (CPA) tabs on deployable component connectors. The tabs disengage the
shorting bars of the deployable component from its electrical pins and keep the harness connector securely attached to the
deployable component.
If the connector is attached to the deployable component yet the tab is not fully seated, the pins of the connector still make
contact with the deployable component pins. However, because the tab is not fully seated and the shorting bars are still applied
to the deployable component pins, the RCM detects a fault (circuit resistance below threshold) during self-diagnostics when the
vehicle is powered on (airbag warning indicator is illuminated).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Airbag and Seatbelt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
System Diagram - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Network Message Chart - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Module Network Input Messages - RCM
Broadcast Message Originating Message Purpose

Module
eCall confirmation APIM Used for SYNC® 911 Assist™ operation. Indicates whether eCall notification is in
progress after an airbag deployment.
Ignition status BCM Used to qualify certain faults during RCM self-diagnostics.
Airbag warning IPC Confirms airbag warning indicator status to the RCM.
indicator status
OCS vehicle OCSM Shares application-specific data for comparison purposes to make sure the correct
calibration data OCSM and RCM are installed.
OCS fault status OCSM Indicates an OCS fault, if present.
OCS sensor data OCSM OCS sensor readings.
OCS serial number OCSM OCSM serial number.
Restraints module BECMB Communicates BECMB fault status to the RCM.
power status
Vehicle configuration BCM Used for verifying vehicle configuration data.
data
System Diagram - Occupant Classification System (OCS)
m
. co
gn
ia
Network Message Chart - Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Module Network Input Messages
rd

ca
Front passenger seatbelt buckle status RCM Used for determining passenger airbag disable status.
RCM serial number RCM RCM serial number.
System Diagram - Extended Power Module [BECMB]

m
Network Message Chart - Extended Power Module [BECMB]

Module Network Input Messages - BECMB
. co
gn

Ignition status BCM Used for determining when it is appropriate to provide power to the SRS.
ia
Remote start status BCM Used for determining when it is appropriate to provide power to the SRS.
Vehicle speed PCM Used for determining when it is appropriate to provide power to the SRS.
rd
ca
Supplemental Restraint System
The SRS is controlled by the RCM, which continually monitors various inputs. When these inputs indicate a frontal or side
crash, the RCM may deploy some components, based upon the severity of the crash and the sensor inputs.
Although some deployable devices may not have activated for all occupants during a crash, it does not mean that something is
wrong with the SRS.
The RCM performs a self-test of the complete SRS during each startup. In addition to the self-test at start up, the RCM
continually monitors all of the SRS components and circuitry for correct operation.
Airbag Warning Indicator
The airbag warning indicator:
proves out by lighting for 6 seconds and then turning off.

flashes and/or illuminates based on the message the IPC receives from the RCM.
illuminates if the IPC does not receive a message from the RCM.
When the ignition is turned ON, the IPC illuminates the airbag warning indicator continuously for 6 seconds. If the SRS is free of
faults, the airbag warning indicator turns off and remains off. If a SRS fault exists, the airbag warning indicator illuminates and
remains illuminated for the rest of the ignition cycle. The RCM communicates with the IPC via the HS-CAN. The IPC illuminates
the airbag warning indicator based on messaging from the RCM. The IPC also illuminates the airbag warning indicator if there
is no communication between the RCM and IPC.
Event Notification Signal
The event notification feature provides other vehicle subsystems with information pertaining to SRS deployment or fuel cutoff
status. When an impact occurs which exceeds a pre-determined threshold, the RCM sends a signal on a dedicated circuit to
the BCM.
When the BCM receives the crash signal input, it initiates fuel cutoff to disable the fuel system.
After the fuel system is disabled, the vehicle can be re-started after carrying out the following steps:
Turn the ignition ON and wait 10 seconds.

Turn the ignition OFF.
Turn the ignition ON.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Turn the ignition ON.
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
The OCS classifies the size of the front passenger seat occupant and provides this information to the RCM.
Pressure is applied to the OCS bladder when weight of any occupant or object on the front passenger seat is present. The
pressure is then transferred through a tube and sensed by the OCS pressure sensor within the OCSM. The OCSM sends
information concerning the weight of any occupant or object on the front passenger seat to the RCM via the HS-CAN2. The
RCM uses this information when determining if the passenger airbag or side airbag needs to be deployed in the event of a
crash.
m
The OCS is also used for operation of the passenger Belt-Minder®. For information about Belt-Minder®,
Refer to: Seatbelt Systems - System Operation and Component Description (501-20A Seatbelt Systems, Description and
Operation).
To deactivate or reactivate the passenger Belt-Minder® feature,

co
Refer to: Seatbelt Minder Deactivating/Activating (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes, General
.
Procedures).
gn
Passenger Airbag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator
The RCM controls the PAD indicator through messages sent on the HS-CAN2 and HS-CAN3, based on information provided
ia
by the OCS. The PAD indicator illuminates to indicate the passenger airbag is disabled.
The RCM briefly activates the PAD indicator during prove out to verify the indicator function and confirm proper functional
rd
operation of the PAD indicator to the front occupants.
The following table indicates the passenger airbag and PAD indicator status based on the size of the front passenger occupant.
ca
Occupant Size Passenger Seatbelt Buckle Status Passenger Airbag Status PAD Indicator Status
Empty Buckled or Unbuckled Disabled OFF: Lit
ON: Unlit
Small Buckled or Unbuckled Disabled OFF: Lit
ON: Unlit
Large Buckled or Unbuckled Enabled OFF: Unlit
ON: Lit
Airbag Second Stage Deployment Check
The driver and passenger front airbags each have 2 deployment stages. After an airbag deployment, it is possible that stage 1
has deployed and stage 2 has not. If a front airbag has deployed, the front airbag must be remotely deployed using the
appropriate airbag disposal procedure to make sure both stages have been deployed. For information on driver airbag and/or
passenger airbag remote deployment,
Refer to: Pyrotechnic Device Disposal (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, General Procedures).
SOS Post-Crash Alert System™
The SOS Post-Crash Alert System™ is controlled by the BCM, but initiated by the RCM.
When a deployment or fuel cutoff event occurs, the RCM sends a message on the HS-CAN2 (via the GWM) to the BCM. The
BCM flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn (except when 911 Assist™ is active) until it is turned off. The system
can be turned off 10 seconds after a crash event by pressing the hazard switch. The BCM also unlocks the doors and
illuminates the courtesy lamps after a crash event.
Vehicle Spin-out Detection
When internal RCM sensors detect that the vehicle has spun out, the BCM activates the hazard warning flashers and displays a
message in the IPC to indicate the hazard warning flashers are activated due to the spin-out.
Extended Power Module [BECMB]
The BECMB provides system voltage to the RCM and OCSM when the ignition is ON. Additionally, the BECMB is designed to
ensure that the RCM and OCSM remain powered on if the ignition is turned off while the vehicle is moving at a speed greater
than 4 km/h (2.5 mph).
If the ignition is turned off while the vehicle is travelling at a speed above 4 km/h (2.5 mph), the BECMB maintains system
voltage on the RCM and OCSM power supply circuits. Once the vehicle speed drops below the threshold while the ignition is
off, the BECMB powers down the RCM and OCSM. If the vehicle speed rises above the threshold again, the BECMB does not
reactivate the power supply to the RCM and OCSM. They remain off until the ignition is turned on again.
m
If a vehicle is parked, with the ignition off, the BECMB does not provide power to the RCM and OCSM. If the vehicle begins to
move, while the ignition is still off, the BECMB does not power the RCM or OCSM.
co
When the vehicle has been started using the remote start feature (if equipped), the ignition status is off, but the BECMB powers
the RCM in order to detect a collision and disable the fuel pump, if necessary.
.
gn
Front Impact Severity Sensor
The front impact severity sensors measure acceleration (g-rate) and are hardwired to the RCM. Mounting position and
orientation is critical for correct operation of the front impact severity sensors.
ia
Occupant Classification System (OCS)

rd
The OCS is found only on the front passenger seat. The OCS classifies the size of the front passenger seat occupant.
The OCS is comprised of a silicone gel-filled bladder mounted between the seat cushion foam and pan, an OCSM which is
ca
mounted to the seat frame, and a pressure sensor that is internal to the OCSM. Pressure is applied to the OCS bladder when
weight of any occupant or object on the front passenger seat is present. The pressure is then transferred through a tube and
sensed by the OCS pressure sensor and OCSM. The components of an OCS bladder system (bladder, tube, and OCSM with
integrated pressure sensor) are serviced as an assembly, and the OCS bladder system is serviced as a kit with the seat
cushion and seat heater mat (if applicable).
Seatbelt Buckle Sensor
The seatbelt buckles contain integrated Hall-effect sensors, which are serviced with the seatbelt buckle.
On vehicles equipped with rear inflatable seatbelts, the buckle at each rear outboard seating position also includes a seatbelt
buckle sensor, which is serviced only as an assembly with the sensor.
Seatbelt Tension Sensor (SBTS)
The SBTS is a 3-wire Hall-effect sensor that is part of the front passenger seatbelt buckle and cannot be serviced separately
from the front passenger seatbelt buckle assembly.
Seat Position Sensor
The seat position sensor is a Hall-effect sensor which indicates the position of the seat along the seat track. The sensor detects
the presence of a shunt bracket on the track, indicating the seat has moved past a certain point in the adjustment range.
Side Impact Sensor - Front Door
The front door side impact sensors monitor air pressure within the door in order to detect certain crashes, such as a side
impact. They are hardwired to the RCM. Mounting position and orientation is critical for correct operation of the front door side
impact sensors.
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row
The second row side impact sensors measure acceleration (g-rate), and are hardwired to the RCM. Mounting position and
orientation is critical for correct operation of the second row side impact sensors.
Deployable Steering Column
The deployable steering column includes a device that, once deployed, reduces the amount of force necessary to collapse the
steering column during a crash event. The deployable device is activated by the RCM, depending on the driver seat position
and the force of the crash. After deployment, a new steering column must be installed.
Driver Airbag
The driver airbag is a dual-stage airbag. Upon receiving a flow of current, it deploys at 1 of 2 different rates, depending upon
vehicle impact severity and sensor input.
Passenger Knee Airbag
The passenger knee airbag is a single-stage airbag, located below the glovebox, which deploys upon receipt of current flow
from the RCM.
Passenger Airbag
m
The passenger airbag is a dual-stage airbag which deploys at 1 of 2 different rates depending upon vehicle impact severity and
sensor input.
Passenger Airbag Canister Vent co

The passenger airbag canister vent is a deployable device that is part of the passenger airbag. Canister venting controls the
.
inflation rate of the passenger airbag and the escape rate of gases from the airbag. The canister vent cannot be serviced
gn
separately from the passenger airbag.
Passenger Airbag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator
The PAD indicator is a LED which is part of the Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B). The PAD indicator cannot be
ia
serviced separately from the Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B).

rd
Seatbelt Anchor and Pretensioner
The seatbelt anchor pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess of webbing slack from the seatbelts when
deployed. One is included as part of each front row outboard seatbelt assembly and cannot be serviced separately.
ca
To diagnose any pretensioner Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),

Refer to: Airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis and Testing).
Seatbelt Inflator (if equipped)
The seatbelt inflator is a pyrotechnic device that deploys upon receipt of current flow initiated by the RCM. It is a canister that
releases inert gas to deploy the inflatable shoulder belt.
To diagnose any seatbelt inflator Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),

Seatbelt Retractor and Adaptive Load Limiter
The front passenger seatbelt retractor is equipped with the adaptive load limiting feature that works in conjunction with the
seatbelt buckle pretensioner to control the tension of the front passenger seatbelt in the event of a crash. The front passenger
seatbelt retractor is also referred to as the seatbelt load limiter.

For any concerns regarding seatbelt retractor function,

Refer to: Seatbelt Systems (501-20 Seatbelt Systems) .
Seatbelt Retractor and Pretensioner

The seatbelt retractor and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess of webbing slack from the seatbelts when
deployed. The retractor and pretensioner are serviced together with the front row outboard seatbelt assembly.

For any concerns regarding seatbelt retractor function,

Refer to: Seatbelt Systems (501-20 Seatbelt Systems) .
Side Air Curtain
The side air curtain is a single-stage airbag which is designed to provide head and upper body protection to the vehicle
occupant(s) during certain crashes.
Side Airbag
The side airbag is a single-stage airbag which is designed to provide protection for the seat occupant's torso. It deploys upon
receipt of current flow and is attached to the outboard side of each front seat. It is used in conjunction with the side air curtain.
Clockspring
The clockspring allows for continuous electrical connections between the driver airbag and the RCM. A spiral-wound cable
wraps around the center of the clockspring and as the steering wheel is turned, the spiral cable inside expands or contracts in
diameter as the 2 halves of the clockspring turn.
m
Extended Power Module [BECMB]
The BECMB supplies system voltage to the RCM and OCSM, based on HS-CAN1 inputs and the ignition input.
Restraints Control Module (RCM)

. co
The BECMB requires PMI when being replaced. Refer to the diagnostic scan tool instructions to carry out PMI.
gn
NOTE: This vehicle may be equipped with SYNC®, which contains the 911 Assist™ option. Refer to the Owner's Literature for
information about this feature.
The RCM monitors various sensor inputs and uses that data for controlling SRS outputs such as the event notification function
ia
and airbag deployment.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy the airbags in the event the
rd
ignition circuit is lost or damaged during impact. The backup power supply depletes its stored energy approximately one minute
after power and/or ground has been removed from the RCM.
The RCM requires PMI when being replaced. Refer to the diagnostic scan tool instructions to carry out PMI.
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
DTC Chart: Restraint Control Module (RCM)
NOTE: Unlisted Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are often retrieved as a result of incorrect repair procedures. Before
attempting any repairs for unlisted Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), check the vehicle service history for recent repairs. For
RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) not listed in this chart,
Repair all other RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) before attempting to repair any Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) not listed in this chart.
If no other RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are retrieved, CLEAR the RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
and REPEAT the self-test. If the RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) return, VERIFY that the RCM is the correct part
number for the vehicle application, and INSTALL As-Built data following scan tool instructions under Module
Programming > As-Built.
Inspect the RCM and RCM connectors for any damaged pins or connections.
m

RCM DTC Chart
DTC Description
. co Action
gn
B0001:11 Driver Frontal Stage 1
Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: A (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Circuit Short to Ground Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
Circuit Short to Battery Diagnosis and Testing).
rd

Circuit Open Diagnosis and Testing).
ca
B0001:1A Driver Frontal Stage 1

Circuit Resistance Below Diagnosis and Testing).
Threshold
B0001:2B Driver Frontal Stage 1
Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Signal Cross Coupled Diagnosis and Testing).
Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Incorrect Component Diagnosis and Testing).
Installed
Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: B (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Threshold
B0002:2B Driver Frontal Stage 2
Installed
B0005:11 Collapsible Steering
Column Deployment REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: C (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Control: Circuit Short to Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
Battery
m
Control: Circuit Open Diagnosis and Testing).
B0005:1A Collapsible Steering
Column Deployment
Control: Circuit
Resistance Below
Threshold
co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: C (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Diagnosis and Testing).
.
gn
B0005:2B Collapsible Steering
Column Deployment REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Control: Signal Cross Diagnosis and Testing).
Coupled
ia
B0005:4A Collapsible Steering

Column Deployment REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Control: Incorrect Diagnosis and Testing).
rd
Component Installed
B0010:11 Passenger Frontal Stage
ca
1 Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: D (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B0010:1A Passenger Frontal Stage
Threshold
B0010:2B Passenger Frontal Stage
1 Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
1 Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Installed
2 Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: E (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Threshold
B0011:2B Passenger Frontal Stage
2 Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
2 Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Installed
B0013:11 Passenger Knee Bolster
Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: F (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
m
Circuit Short to Battery
Deployment Control:
Diagnosis and Testing). co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: F (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
.
gn
B0013:1A Passenger Knee Bolster
ia
Threshold
B0013:2B Passenger Knee Bolster
rd

B0013:4A Passenger Knee Bolster
ca
Installed
B0050:11 Driver Seatbelt Sensor:
Circuit Short to Ground REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: G (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Circuit Short to Battery REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: G (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Circuit Open REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: G (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B0050:1D Driver Seatbelt Sensor:
Circuit Current Out of REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: G (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Range Diagnosis and Testing).
B0050:2B Driver Seatbelt Sensor:
Signal Cross Coupled REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B0050:4A Driver Seatbelt Sensor:
Incorrect Component REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Installed Diagnosis and Testing).
B0052:11 Passenger Seatbelt
Sensor: Circuit Short to REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: H (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Ground Diagnosis and Testing).
Sensor: Circuit Short to REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: H (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Battery Diagnosis and Testing).
Sensor: Circuit Open REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: H (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B0052:1D Passenger Seatbelt
Sensor: Circuit Current REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: H (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Out of Range Diagnosis and Testing).
B0052:2B Passenger Seatbelt
Sensor: Signal Cross REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Coupled Diagnosis and Testing).
B0052:4A Passenger Seatbelt
Sensor: Incorrect REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Component Installed Diagnosis and Testing).
B0070:11 Driver Seatbelt
Pretensioner "A" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: I (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
m
Deployment Control: and Testing).
Circuit Short to Ground
Pretensioner "A"
Deployment Control:
and Testing).
. co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: I (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis

gn
Circuit Open
ia
B0070:1A Driver Seatbelt

rd
Circuit Resistance Below

Threshold
B0070:2B Driver Seatbelt
ca
Pretensioner "A" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Deployment Control: Diagnosis and Testing).
Signal Cross Coupled
B0070:4A Driver Seatbelt
Pretensioner "A" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Incorrect Component
Installed
Pretensioner "A" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: J (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Circuit Open
Threshold
B0072:2B Passenger Seatbelt
Pretensioner "A" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Pretensioner "A" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Incorrect Component
Installed
B007E:11 Driver Seatbelt
Pretensioner "C" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: K (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
m
Circuit Open
B007E:1A Driver Seatbelt
Pretensioner "C"
co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: K (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
.
gn
Threshold
B007E:2B Driver Seatbelt
ia
Pretensioner "C" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
rd
B007E:4A Driver Seatbelt

Pretensioner "C" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
ca
Incorrect Component
Installed
B007F:11 Passenger Seatbelt
Pretensioner "C" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: L (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Circuit Open
B007F:1A Passenger Seatbelt
Threshold
B007F:2B Passenger Seatbelt
Pretensioner "C" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B007F:4A Passenger Seatbelt
Pretensioner "C" REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Incorrect Component
Installed
B0082:11 Passenger Seatbelt Load
Limiter Deployment REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: M (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Ground
Battery
Control: Circuit Open Diagnosis and Testing).
B0082:1A Passenger Seatbelt Load
Control: Circuit Diagnosis and Testing).
m
Resistance Below
Threshold
B0082:2B Passenger Seatbelt Load
Limiter Deployment
Control: Signal Cross
Coupled
. co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
gn
B0082:4A Passenger Seatbelt Load
Limiter Deployment REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Control: Incorrect Diagnosis and Testing).
Component Installed
ia
B00A0:09 Occupant Classification

System: Component REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: N (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Failures Diagnosis and Testing).
rd
B00A0:4A Occupant Classification

System: Incorrect REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: N (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
ca

System: Circuit / REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: N (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Component Protection Diagnosis and Testing).
Time-Out
System: Signal REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: N (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Plausibility Failure Diagnosis and Testing).
System: Event REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: N (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Information Diagnosis and Testing).
B00B5:11 Driver Seat Track
Position Restraints REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: O (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sensor: Circuit Short to Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
Battery
Sensor: Circuit Open Diagnosis and Testing).
B00B5:1D Driver Seat Track
Sensor: Circuit Current Diagnosis and Testing).
Out of Range
B00B5:2B Driver Seat Track
Position Restraints REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sensor: Signal Cross Diagnosis and Testing).
Coupled
B00B5:4A Driver Seat Track
Position Restraints REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sensor: Incorrect Diagnosis and Testing).
Component Installed
B00C5:11 Passenger Seat Track
Position Restraints REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: P (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Ground
Battery
m
Sensor: Circuit Open
B00C5:1D Passenger Seat Track
Position Restraints
co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: P (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sensor: Circuit Current Diagnosis and Testing).
.
gn
Out of Range
B00C5:2B Passenger Seat Track
Position Restraints REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sensor: Signal Cross Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
Coupled
B00C5:4A Passenger Seat Track
rd
Position Restraints REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sensor: Incorrect Diagnosis and Testing).
Component Installed
ca
B00D5:01 Restraint System The RCM has received a fault message from the Front Controls Interface Module-B
Passenger Disable (FCIM-B) indicating a fault in the PAD indicator. CARRY OUT a self-test of the Front
Indicator: General Controls Interface Module-B (FCIM-B) and REPAIR any Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Electrical Failure (DTCs). Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
B00D5:4A Restraint System
Passenger Disable REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Indicator: Incorrect Diagnosis and Testing).
Component Installed
B1193:00 Crash Event Storage Full This DTC indicates the vehicle has been in a crash. INSTALL a new RCM and impact
and Locked: No Sub sensors.
Type Information REFER to: Inspection and Repair after a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deployment (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, General Procedures).
B11CF:11 Passenger Frontal
Airbag Canister Vent: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: Q (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B11CF:1A Passenger Frontal
Threshold
B11CF:2B Passenger Frontal
Airbag Canister Vent: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B11CF:4A Passenger Frontal
Airbag Canister Vent: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Installed
B11D8:12 Restraint Event
Notification: Circuit Short REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: R (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
to Battery Diagnosis and Testing).
Notification: Circuit Short REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: R (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
to Ground or Open Diagnosis and Testing).
B1202:01 Restraint System The RCM has received a fault message from the Front Controls Interface Module-B
Passenger Enable (FCIM-B) indicating a fault in the PAD indicator. CARRY OUT a self-test of the Front
Indicator: General Controls Interface Module-B (FCIM-B) and REPAIR any Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Electrical Failure (DTCs). Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
m
B1202:4A Restraint System
Passenger Enable REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Indicator: Incorrect
Component Installed
B1404:11 Driver Side Airbag
co
Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: S (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
.
gn
ia

rd

B1404:1A Driver Side Airbag
ca

Threshold
B1404:2B Driver Side Airbag
B1404:4A Driver Side Airbag
Installed
B1405:11 Driver Side Curtain
Deployment Control 1: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: T (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1405:1A Driver Side Curtain
Threshold
B1405:2B Driver Side Curtain
Deployment Control 1: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1405:4A Driver Side Curtain
Deployment Control 1: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Installed
B1407:11 Passenger Side Airbag
Deployment Control: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: U (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1407:1A Passenger Side Airbag
m
Threshold
B1407:2B Passenger Side Airbag
B1407:4A Passenger Side Airbag
Deployment Control:
co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,

.
gn
Installed
B1408:11 Passenger Side Curtain
Deployment Control 1: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: V (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
ia

rd

ca
B1408:1A Passenger Side Curtain
Threshold
B1408:2B Passenger Side Curtain
Deployment Control 1: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1408:4A Passenger Side Curtain
Deployment Control 1: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Installed
B140C:11 Second Row Driver Side
Seatbelt Sensor: Circuit REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: W (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Short to Ground Diagnosis and Testing).
Short to Battery Diagnosis and Testing).
Open Diagnosis and Testing).
B140C:1D Second Row Driver Side
Current Out of Range Diagnosis and Testing).
B140C:2B Second Row Driver Side
Seatbelt Sensor: Signal REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Cross Coupled Diagnosis and Testing).
B140C:4A Second Row Driver Side
Seatbelt Sensor: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Installed
B140D:11 Second Row Passenger
Side Seatbelt Sensor: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: X (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
m
B140D:1D Second Row Passenger
Circuit Current Out of Diagnosis and Testing).
Range
B140D:2B Second Row Passenger
Side Seatbelt Sensor:
co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
.
gn
B140D:4A Second Row Passenger
Side Seatbelt Sensor: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
ia
Installed
B1413:11 Driver Frontal Restraints
Sensor: Circuit Short to REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: Y (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
rd

B1413:4A Driver Frontal Restraints
ca
Sensor: Incorrect REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1413:81 Driver Frontal Restraints INSTALL a new LH front impact severity sensor.
Sensor: Invalid Serial REFER to: Front Impact Severity Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Data Received Removal and Installation).
B1413:93 Driver Frontal Restraints
Sensor: No Operation REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: Y (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1413:96 Driver Frontal Restraints INSTALL a new LH front impact severity sensor.
Sensor: Component REFER to: Front Impact Severity Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Internal Failure Removal and Installation).
B1414:11 Driver Side Restraints
Sensor 1: Circuit Short to REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: Z (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1414:4A Driver Side Restraints
Sensor 1: Incorrect REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1414:81 Driver Side Restraints INSTALL a new driver door side impact sensor.
Sensor 1: Invalid Serial REFER to: Front Door Side Impact Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sensor 1: No Operation REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: Z (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1414:96 Driver Side Restraints INSTALL a new driver door side impact sensor.
Sensor 1: Component REFER to: Front Door Side Impact Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sensor 2: Circuit Short to REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AA (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1415:4A Driver Side Restraints
Sensor 2: Incorrect REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1415:81 Driver Side Restraints INSTALL a new LH C-pillar side impact sensor.
Sensor 2: Invalid Serial REFER to: C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sensor 2: No Operation REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AA (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1415:96 Driver Side Restraints INSTALL a new LH C-pillar side impact sensor.
Sensor 2: Component REFER to: C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
m
B1417:11 Passenger Frontal
Restraints Sensor: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AB (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1417:4A Passenger Frontal
Restraints Sensor:
Incorrect Component
co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
.
Installed
gn
B1417:81 Passenger Frontal INSTALL a new RH front impact severity sensor.
Restraints Sensor: REFER to: Front Impact Severity Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Invalid Serial Data Removal and Installation).
ia
Received
B1417:93 Passenger Frontal
Restraints Sensor: No REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AB (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
rd
Operation Diagnosis and Testing).

B1417:96 Passenger Frontal INSTALL a new RH front impact severity sensor.
ca
Restraints Sensor: REFER to: Front Impact Severity Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Component Internal Removal and Installation).
Failure
B1418:11 Passenger Side
Restraints Sensor 1: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AA (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1418:4A Passenger Side
Restraints Sensor 1: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Installed
B1418:81 Passenger Side INSTALL a new passenger door side impact sensor.
Restraints Sensor 1: REFER to: Front Door Side Impact Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Received
Restraints Sensor 1: No REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AA (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1418:96 Passenger Side INSTALL a new passenger door side impact sensor.
Restraints Sensor 1: REFER to: Front Door Side Impact Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Failure
Restraints Sensor 2: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: Z (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1419:4A Passenger Side
Installed
B1419:81 Passenger Side INSTALL a new RH C-pillar side impact sensor.
Restraints Sensor 2: REFER to: C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Received
Restraints Sensor 2: No REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: Z (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B1419:96 Passenger Side INSTALL a new RH C-pillar side impact sensor.
Restraints Sensor 2: REFER to: C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Failure
B141B:11 Second Row Driver Side
Inflatable Seatbelt REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AC (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
m
Inflatable Seatbelt
Deployment Control:
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AC (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,

.
gn
Circuit Open
B141B:1A Second Row Driver Side
ia
rd
Threshold
B141B:2B Second Row Driver Side
ca
Inflatable Seatbelt REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B141B:4A Second Row Driver Side
Inflatable Seatbelt REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Incorrect Component
Installed
B141C:11 Second Row Passenger
Side Inflatable Seatbelt REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AD (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Circuit Open
B141C:1A Second Row Passenger
Threshold
B141C:2B Second Row Passenger
Side Inflatable Seatbelt REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AE (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
B141C:4A Second Row Passenger
Side Inflatable Seatbelt REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AF (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Incorrect Component
Installed
B142D:00 Pyrotechnic End of Life INSTALL a new RCM and CARRY OUT PMI. Use As-Built data when carrying out PMI
Activation Performed: No for this DTC.
Sub Type Information REFER to: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
System, Removal and Installation).
B1469:4A Unused Satellite
Installed
B146A:4A Unused Satellite
m
Installed
C0061:68 Lateral Acceleration
Sensor: Event
Information
co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AG (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
.
gn
C0062:68 Longitudinal Acceleration
Sensor: Event REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AG (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
C0063:68 Yaw Rate Sensor: Event
ia
Information REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AG (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
rd
C0064:68 Roll Rate Sensor: Event

Information REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AG (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
ca
C0065:68 Vertical Acceleration

Sensor: Event REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AG (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
U0100:00 Lost Communication with
ECM/PCM A: No Sub REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AH (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Type Information Diagnosis and Testing).
Battery Energy Control REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AT (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Module "B": No Sub Diagnosis and Testing).
Type Information
Body Control Module: No REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AI (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Sub Type Information Diagnosis and Testing).
Restraints Occupation REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AJ (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Classification System Diagnosis and Testing).
Module: No Sub Type
Information
Instrument Panel Cluster REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AK (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
(IPC) Control Module: No Diagnosis and Testing).
Sub Type Information
U0253:00 Lost Communication
With Accessory Protocol REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AL (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Interface Module: No Diagnosis and Testing).
U0300:00 Internal Control Module CARRY OUT PMI. RETRIEVE RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). If RCM DTC
Software Incompatibility: U0300:00 is retrieved on-demand during self-test, INSTALL a new RCM.
No Sub Type Information REFER to: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
U0401:00 Invalid Data Received NOTE: This DTC sets in a module that is reporting a missing or invalid message from
From ECM/PCM A: No another module on the data bus. The module that reports the fault is not the problem
Sub Type Information module. Do not install a new RCM as part of the repair unless directed to do so in a
pinpoint test.
CHECK for additional RCM and PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). DIAGNOSE
and REPAIR any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that are retrieved. For RCM
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the RCM DTC Chart. To diagnose PCM
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for
the procedure.
From Battery Energy another module on the data bus. The module that reports the fault is not the problem
Control Module "B": No module. Do not install a new RCM as part of the repair unless directed to do so in a
m
Sub Type Information pinpoint test.
CHECK for additional RCM and BECMB Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
co
DIAGNOSE and REPAIR any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that are retrieved. For
RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the RCM DTC Chart. To diagnose
BECMB Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the BECMB DTC Chart.
.
gn
Control Module "B": module. Do not install a new RCM as part of the repair unless directed to do so in a
Invalid / Incompatible pinpoint test.
Configuration
ia
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AY (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,

rd
ca
Control Module "B": module. Do not install a new RCM as part of the repair unless directed to do so in a
Invalid / Incompatible pinpoint test.
Configuration
This DTC indicates that there is a BECMB fault present. CARRY OUT a self-test for the
BECMB. DIAGNOSE and REPAIR the BECMB Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
REFER to the BECMB DTC Chart.
From Body Control another module on the data bus. The module that reports the fault is not the problem
Module: No Sub Type module. Do not install a new RCM as part of the repair unless directed to do so in a
Information pinpoint test.
CHECK for additional RCM and BCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). DIAGNOSE
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the RCM DTC Chart. For BCM
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),
REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules,
From Body Control another module on the data bus. The module that reports the fault is not the problem
Module: Invalid Serial module. Do not install a new RCM as part of the repair unless directed to do so in a
Data Received pinpoint test.
CHECK for additional RCM and BCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). DIAGNOSE
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the RCM DTC Chart. For BCM
REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules,
U0554:00 Invalid Data Received CHECK for additional RCM and APIM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). For RCM
From Accessory Protocol Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the RCM DTC Chart. For APIM
Interface Module: No Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for
Sub Type Information the procedure.
U0557:82 Invalid Data Received CHECK for additional RCM and FCIM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). For RCM
From Front Controls Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), RETURN to the beginning of this chart. For FCIM
Interface Module "A": No Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for
Sub Type Information the procedure.
U2100:00 Initial Configuration Not CHECK vehicle history for recent service actions related to this module. This DTC sets
Complete: No Sub Type due to incomplete or improper PMI procedures. If there have been recent service
Information actions with this module, REPEAT the PMI procedure as directed by the diagnostic
scan tool using As-Built data.
U2101:00 Control Module CARRY OUT PMI using As-Built data. RETRIEVE RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Configuration (DTCs). If RCM DTC U2101:00 is retrieved on-demand, INSTALL a new RCM. Use As-
Incompatible: No Sub Built data when carrying out PMI for this DTC.
Type Information REFER to: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
m
U2200:00 Control Module INSTALL a new RCM. Use As-Built data when CARRYING OUT PMI during the RCM
Configuration Memory installation.
Corrupt: No Sub Type REFER to: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
Information
U2300:55 Central Configuration:
Not Configured
co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AM (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,

.
gn
U2300:64 Central Configuration:
Signal Plausibility Failure REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AM (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
ia
U3000:46 Control Module: INSTALL a new RCM. Use As-Built data when CARRYING OUT PMI during the RCM
Calibration / Parameter installation.
Memory Failure REFER to: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
rd

U3000:49 Control Module: Internal INSTALL a new RCM. Using a diagnostic scan tool, CARRY OUT RCM PMI. If DTC
ca
Electronic Failure U2200:00 is also present, USE As-Built data when CARRYING OUT PMI during the
RCM installation.
REFER to: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
U3003:16 Battery Voltage: Circuit
Voltage Below Threshold REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AN (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
U3003:17 Battery Voltage: Circuit
Voltage Above Threshold REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AN (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
DTC Chart: Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)

OCSM DTC Chart
Tension Sensor: REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AO (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Circuit Short To and Testing).
Ground
Circuit Short To and Testing).
Battery
Circuit Open and Testing).
Signal Plausibility and Testing).
Failure
B00A0:62 Occupant
Classification REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AQ (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
System: Signal and Testing).
Compare Failure
m
B00C0:11 Passenger Seat INSPECT the OCS for any damage and for correct installation.
Occupant If damage is found, REPAIR the root cause of the damage and INSTALL a new OCS,
Classification as necessary.
Sensor "A": Circuit
Short to Ground co
REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental
Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-
Contour Seats (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
.
REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Police (501-20B
gn
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
If any installation concerns are found, CORRECT the OCS installation, referring to
the OCS Removal and Installation procedure as needed to make sure the sensor
hose is correctly routed.
ia

rd
ca

If no damage or installation concerns are found, INSTALL a new OCS.
B00C0:12 Passenger Seat INSTALL a new OCS sensor.

Occupant REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
Classification System, Removal and Installation).
Sensor "A": Circuit REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour
Short to Battery Seats (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Police (501-20B Supplemental
Sensor "A": Circuit REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour
Voltage Below Seats (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
Threshold REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Police (501-20B Supplemental
Sensor "A": Internal REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour
Electronic Failure Seats (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
B00C0:7B Passenger Seat INSPECT the OCS for any damage and for correct installation.
Occupant If damage is found, REPAIR the root cause of the damage and INSTALL a new OCS,
Classification as necessary.
Sensor "A": Low REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental
Fluid Level Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
If any installation concerns are found, CORRECT the OCS installation, referring to
the OCS Removal and Installation procedure as needed to make sure the sensor
hose is correctly routed.
m
If no damage or installation concerns are found, INSTALL a new OCS.
co
.
gn
B00C2:11 Passenger Seat

ia
Occupant REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AP (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Classification and Testing).
Sensor "C": Circuit
rd
Short to Ground
B00C2:12 Passenger Seat
ca
Occupant REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AP (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Classification and Testing).
Sensor "C": Circuit
Short to Battery
B1193:00 Crash Event CLEAR the OCSM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and REPEAT the self-test. If DTC
Storage Full and B1193:00 returns, INSTALL a new OCS sensor. INSTALL a new OCS sensor.
Locked: No Sub REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
Type Information System, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour
Seats (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
U0100:00 Lost
Communication REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AH (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
with ECM/PCM A: and Testing).
No Sub Type
Information
U0151:00 Lost
Communication REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AS (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
with Restraints and Testing).
Control Module: No
Sub Type
Information
U024C:00 Lost
Communication REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AR (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
with Seat Control and Testing).
Module "H": No Sub
Type Information
U0401:00 Invalid Data CARRY OUT the PCM self-test. REFER to the appropriate workshop manual section. Refer
Received from to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the procedure.
ECM/PCM A: No
Sub Type
Information
U3000:41 Control Module: INSTALL a new OCS sensor.
General Checksum REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
Failure System, Removal and Installation).
U3000:42 Control Module: INSTALL a new OCS sensor.
General Memory REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
m
U3000:46 Control Module:
Calibration /
Parameter Memory
Failure
INSTALL a new OCS sensor.
co
REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
.
gn
U3000:54 Control Module: Using a diagnostic scan tool, CARRY OUT the OCS Reset. FOLLOW all instructions on the
ia
Missing Calibration diagnostic scan tool. If the OCS Reset was not successful, VERIFY correct installation of the
OCS. VERIFY the pressure sensor hose is correctly routed and CORRECT the installation
as necessary. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U3000:54 is still present, INSTALL a new OCS
rd
sensor.
REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
ca
U3003:16 Battery Voltage:
Circuit Voltage REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AN (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Below Threshold and Testing).
U3003:17 Battery Voltage:
Circuit Voltage REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AN (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Above Threshold and Testing).
DTC Chart: Extended Power Module [BECM-B]

BECMB DTC Chart
B00A0:11 Occupant
Classification REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AU (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
System: Circuit and Testing).
Short To Ground
B00A0:12 Occupant
Classification REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AU (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
System: Circuit and Testing).
Short To Battery
B1123:11 Restraints Ignition
Relay: Circuit Open REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AU (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
and Testing).
B1123:12 Restraints Ignition
Relay: Circuit REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AU (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Voltage Out of and Testing).
Range
B1142:62 Ignition Status 1:
Signal Compare REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AV (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Failure and Testing).
B13BF:12 Run/Start Input:
m
Circuit Short to REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AV (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
Battery and Testing).
with ECM/PCM A:
Missing Message
and Testing).
. co
REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AW (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
with Body Control REFER to: Pinpoint Test - DTC: AX (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis
gn
Module: Missing and Testing).
Message
U1000:00 Solid State Driver DIAGNOSE any other BECMB Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. CLEAR the
ia
Protection Active - Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U1000:00 returns,
Driver Disabled INSTALL a new BECMB.
REFER to: Battery Energy Control Module B (BECMB) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
rd

U2100:00 Initial Configuration CHECK vehicle history for recent service actions related to this module. This DTC sets due
Not Complete: No to incomplete or improper PMI procedures. If there have been recent service actions with
ca
Sub Type this module, REPEAT the PMI procedure as directed by the diagnostic scan tool using As-
Information Built data.
U3000:49 Control Module: INSTALL a new BECMB.
Internal Electronic REFER to: Battery Energy Control Module B (BECMB) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
DTC Chart: Body Control Module (BCM)

OCSM DTC Chart

B11D8:01 Restraint Event Notification: CARRY OUT the RCM self-test. DIAGNOSE and REPAIR the RCM
General Electrical Failure Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to DTC Chart: RCM.
All other BCM Diagnostic –
Trouble Codes (DTCs) REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction
Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and Testing).
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Supplemental Restraint System

Symptom Chart

A module does not Fuse
respond to the Diagnostic REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module
diagnostic scan tool scan tool Communications Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
DLC
Wiring,
terminals or
An audible tone sounds

connectors
Module
SRS fault or
. co
CARRY OUT the RCM and IPC self-tests. For RCM Diagnostic
within 60 seconds of airbag Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to DTC Chart: RCM. For IPC
gn
ignition ON warning Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),
indicator fault REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes
(413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes,
ia
The airbag indicator is SRS fault CARRY OUT the RCM, OCSM and BECMB self tests. REFER to
rd
flashing DTC Chart: RCM, REFER to DTC Chart: OCSM or REFER to DTC
Chart: BECMB.
ca
The airbag warning Fuse CARRY OUT the RCM, OCSM and BECMB self tests. REFER to
indicator is illuminated Wiring, DTC Chart: RCM, REFER to DTC Chart: OCSM or REFER to DTC
continuously terminals or Chart: BECMB.
connectors If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) were retrieved from the RCM,
IPC OCSM or BECMB,
RCM, OCSM REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes
or BECMB (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes,
If the RCM, OCSM or BECMB does not respond to the diagnostic
scan tool,
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module
Communications Network, Diagnosis and Testing).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Removal
1. Open the center console arm rest panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
2. NOTE: The electrical connector does not have to be disconnected to position the arm rest trim panel aside.
rd
Position the arm rest latch trim panel aside.

ca
3. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the upper finish panel to access the ATCM retaining tabs.
1. Remove the upper finish panel screw.

2. Lift the upper finish panel upward, releasing the rear retaining clips.
m
. co
4.
gn
1. Disconnect the ATCM electrical connector.
2. Press and release the ATCM retaining tabs inward.
3. Remove the ATCM from the upper finish panel.
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Module
Removal
1. Remove the LH load space trim panel.

Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - Police (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
2.
1. Disconnect the AWD module electrical connector.
2. Remove the AWD module push pin fasteners and the AWD module.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter 2017 Explorer
Alternating Current (AC) Power Outlet Socket
Removal
WARNING: Disconnect the 12 volt battery before servicing the direct current to alternating current (DC-AC) inverter
or alternating current (AC) powerpoint to prevent the risk of high voltage shock. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury.
1. Disconnect the battery.

Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
2. Remove the floor console rear trim panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Disconnect the auxiliary power point and AC power outlet socket electrical connector. Press the retainers inward and
remove the AC power outlet socket.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Base Part Number: 12A647
Removal
NOTE: If replacing the Ambient Air Temperature sensor a reset must be performed. Select the A/C and Recirc buttons
simultaneously, then release both, Within 2 seconds select A/C button again.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector. Detach and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control - Overview
Overview
The ABS and stability control systems are comprised of the following subsystems which assist the driver in maintaining control
of the vehicle:
ABS
Curve control
EBD
ESC
Hill descent control
Hill start assist
RSC
Terrain management system
Traction control
Trailer sway control
Supports adaptive cruise control
Supports collision avoidance
m
The ABS helps maintain steering control during hard braking by preventing wheel lock up. The ABS also includes a brake assist
function which provides maximum brake system pressure during a severe braking situation.
co
The curve control system helps maintain vehicle stability while traveling through a curve.
The EBD system helps maintain vehicle control by keeping a balanced braking condition between the front and rear wheels.
.
gn
The ESC system helps prevent skids or lateral slides by modulating brake fluid pressure to individual brake calipers and
reducing engine torque.
The hill descent control feature helps maintain a low vehicle speed while descending steep inclines on various surface
ia
conditions.
The hill start assist feature is designed to assist the driver during hill-starts. Using the ABS, the hill start assist system holds the
rd
vehicle on an incline for a short time, allowing the driver to release the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal without
needing to use the parking brake.
ca
The RSC system helps prevent excessive vehicle roll by modulating brake fluid pressure to individual brake calipers and
reducing engine torque.
The terrain management system helps maintain vehicle traction by adapting the responses of the engine, transmission, 4WD
system, the ABS and the stability control system to the demands of the terrain. For additional information on the terrain
management system,
Refer to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems - System Operation and Component Description (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems,
The traction control system helps prevent loss of traction by reducing drive-wheel spin during acceleration.
The trailer sway control system helps maintain vehicle stability while towing a trailer by detecting and aiding in the reduction of
conditions causing trailer sway.
The ABS supports the adaptive cruise control system by applying the brakes as necessary to maintain the distance gap set by
the driver. For information on the adaptive cruise control system,
Refer to: Cruise Control - System Operation and Component Description (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control, Description and Operation).
The ABS supports the collision avoidance system by monitoring information and precharging the brake system allowing the
vehicle to stop in the shortest distance possible. For information on the collision avoidance system,
Refer to: Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System - System Operation and Component Description (419-03C
Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System, Description and Operation).
Some noise from the system and pulsations in the brake pedal are normal conditions during most ABS and stability control
system activations. Longer than normal brake pedal travel may also be experienced immediately following an ABS or stability
control system activation.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Description and Operation Procedure revision date: 05/24/2016
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

Module Network Input Messages - ABS Module
Broadcast Originating Message Purpose

Message Module
Accelerator PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message provides the ABS
pedal module with the current accelerator pedal position and notifies the ABS module if the data is valid
position or invalid. The ABS module uses accelerator pedal position information for correct operation of
the traction control, ESC, RSC and hill start assist systems.
Adaptive CCM This message is sent by the CCM to inform the ABS module the driver has cancelled the adaptive
cruise cruise function.
control
cancel
request
Adaptive CCM This message contains the amount of deceleration currently required by the adaptive cruise
cruise control system to maintain the distance gap set by the driver.
control
deceleration
request
Adaptive CCM This message contains the distance level currently required by the adaptive cruise control system
cruise to maintain the distance gap set by the driver; level 1, level 2 or level 3.
control
distance
sensitivity
Ambient air PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
temperature module of the current ambient air temperature which the module uses for monitoring various
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
AWD locking PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
status module of the current transfer case locked status; OK, completely opened by command, inactive,
fault, warning, disabled, fully locked by command, torque limited by command, under external
m
torque control and undefined. The ABS module requests transfer case unlocking during traction
control, ESC and RSC operations.
Battery BCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
voltage
Brake pedal PCM

co
module of the current battery voltage which the module uses for monitoring various Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs).
This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. Used to inform the ABS module
.
applied the driver has pressed the brake pedal and notifies the ABS module if the data is valid or invalid.
gn
This message is used by the ABS module to check the brake pressure sensor located inside the
HCU and for traction control, ESC, RSC and hill start assist operations.
Cruise PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
ia
control module of the current cruise control system status: off, denied, standby or active; and the current
status cruise control mode: not active, keeping speed, accelerating, decelerating, resuming high,
resuming low, tap up waiting, tap down waiting.
rd
Door ajar BCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
status module when a door, the hood or the liftgate is opened. The ABS module resets the parameters
for ESC, RSC and hill start assist operations.
ca
Driver safety RCM This message provides the ABS module with the current driver safety belt buckle status; belted,
belt buckle unbelted, faulty or unknown. The ABS module uses the safety belt status for hill start assist
status operation.
Engine PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
torque module of the current amount of engine torque reduction available to assist with traction control,
available ESC and RSC.
Engine RPM PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. Used to inform the ABS module
of the current engine RPM. The ABS module uses this information for traction control, ESC, RSC
and hill start assist operations.
Engine PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
status module of the current engine start-stop status (if equipped); engine off, engine on, engine auto
stopped or not used.
EPAS status PSCM This message informs the ABS module of the current EPAS status; active or inactive.
Factory BCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
mode module of the current vehicle life cycle mode; normal, factory, transport or not used. The ABS and
stability control features operate differently depending on the current vehicle life cycle.
Gear lever PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
position module of which gear the driver has selected. This information is used for ESC, RSC and hill start
assist operations.
Hill descent ATCM This message informs the ABS module the driver has requested the hill descent control system to
control be activated or deactivated.
request
Hill start IPC This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
assist mode module the driver has requested the hill start assist system to be activated or deactivated.
request
Ignition BCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
status module of the current ignition status; off, accessory, run, start, unknown or invalid.
Odometer IPC This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
master value module of the current odometer value.
Parking BCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message provides the ABS
brake active module with the current parking brake status; applied or not applied. This information is used for
hill start assist operation.
Power pack PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
status module of the current engine torque status; power pack off - torque not available, power pack on -
torque not available, start in progress - torque not available or power pack on - torque available.
This information is used for the traction control, hill start assist, ESC and RSC feature operation.
Reverse PCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message informs the ABS
gear status module of the current reverse gear status; inactive not confirmed, inactive confirmed, active not
confirmed, active confirmed or fault. This information is used for ESC, RSC and hill start assist
operations.
m
RCM serial RCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. The ABS module stores the RCM
number serial number and verifies the serial number when the vehicle is started or the ignition is set to ON
or ACC. Over time, the ABS module learns the offset of the stability sensors inside the RCM.
co
When a new RCM serial number is found and the Interactive Vehicle Dynamics (IVD) Initialization
procedure is carried out using a diagnostic scan tool, the ABS module resets the offset values
learned for the yaw rate sensor, lateral accelerometer and roll rate sensor.
.
Steering PSCM The ABS module uses steering angle sensor information for ESC and RSC operation. This
gn
wheel angle message provides the ABS module with the current steering wheel angle in degrees as well as
the steering wheel angle count (number or revolutions).
Terrain ATCM This message informs the ABS module of the current driver requested terrain mode; sand mode,
ia
mode mud ruts mode, rock crawl mode, dynamic mode, undefined, fail-safe default or special operating
request mode off. The ABS module adjusts the operating parameters of the various stability control
systems depending on which terrain mode is selected.
rd
Vehicle BCM This message is sent to the GWM and then to the ABS module. This message provides the ABS
configuration module with the current optional and configured items such as tire size, axle ratio, manual or
data automatic transaxle, keyless entry and VIN.
ca
Vehicle RCM This message provides the ABS module with the current vehicle lateral acceleration data and
lateral notifies the ABS module if the data is valid or invalid. The ABS module uses the lateral
acceleration acceleration data for traction control, ESC and RSC feature operation.
data
Vehicle RCM This message provides the ABS module with the current vehicle longitudinal acceleration data
longitudinal and notifies the ABS module if the data is valid or invalid. The ABS module uses the longitudinal
acceleration acceleration data for ESC and RSC feature operation.
data
Vehicle roll RCM This message provides the ABS module with the current vehicle roll rate data and notifies the
rate data ABS module if the data is valid or invalid. The ABS module uses the longitudinal acceleration data
for RSC feature operation.
Vehicle yaw RCM This message provides the ABS module with the current vehicle yaw rate data and notifies the
rate data ABS module if the data is valid or invalid. The ABS module uses the yaw rate data for ESC and
RSC feature operation.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS module continuously monitors brake pedal input, lateral vehicle motion and the rotational speed of each wheel. The
PCM sends the brake pedal switch information to the GWM over the HS-CAN1, the GWM sends the information to the ABS
module over the HS-CAN2. The RCM sends lateral acceleration sensor information directly to the ABS module over the HS-
CAN2. Wheel speed information is retrieved by the ABS module using 4 active wheel speed sensors. When the ABS module
detects an impending wheel lock during a braking event, the ABS module modulates brake pressure to the appropriate brake
calipers by opening and closing the appropriate solenoid valves inside the HCU while the hydraulic pump motor is activated.
Once the affected wheel returns to the desired speed, the ABS module deactivates the hydraulic pump motor and returns the
solenoid valves to their normal position.
The ABS module has 2 self-test options, one uses a diagnostic scan tool and the other is carried out when the ABS module is
initialized (ignition ON). During either self-test the ABS module carries out a preliminary electrical check of the system sensors
and activates the hydraulic pump motor for approximately one-half second. During this time, a buzzing or humming noise may
be heard and a vibration may be felt in the brake pedal and is a normal condition. During the module initialized self-test, the
pump motor check is carried out at approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). Any malfunction detected in the system causes the ABS
module to set a DTC, disable the ABS function and send a message over the HS-CAN2 to the GWM. The GWM then sends the
message to the IPC over the HS-CAN3 to illuminate the ABS warning indicator. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) which
disable the ABSdo not disable the base hydraulic power-assist braking system.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
On initial application of the brake pedal, full pressure is applied to the rear brakes. The ABS module uses wheel speed sensor
inputs to evaluate rear wheel slip. Once the rear wheel slip exceeds a predetermined threshold, the ABS module commands
the HCU to close the appropriate isolation valves to hold the rear brake pressure constant while allowing the front brake
pressure to build. This creates a balanced braking condition between the front and rear wheels. If the rear wheel slip continues
and exceeds a second predetermined threshold, the ABS module commands the HCU to open the dump valves to decrease
the rear brake pressure and allow the rear wheels to recover. A slight bump sensation may be felt in the brake pedal when EBD
is active. If the ABS is disabled due to Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) being present in the ABS module, EBD continues to
m
function unless the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are for wheel speed sensors or the HCU solenoid valves. When EBD is
disabled, the ABS warning indicator, the red brake warning indicator and traction control indicator illuminate.
Supplemental Braking Assist

co
In addition to preventing wheel lock up during braking events, the ABS module is also able to provide supplemental hydraulic
brake assist through the use of the hydraulic pump motor and the HCU. This is done in the event of a severe vacuum loss at
.
the brake booster, to maintain the distance gap set by the adaptive cruise control system or to aid in the avoidance of forward
gn
collisions.
The ABS module utilizes the HCU and hydraulic pump motor to aid in bringing the vehicle to a safe, controlled stop in the event
of severe vacuum loss at the brake booster. The ABS module continually monitors the vacuum in the brake booster through the
ia
use of a vacuum sensor. When the vacuum sensor indicates vacuum is below a predetermined level, a DTC is set in the ABS
module. If this occurs during a braking event or if the driver attempts to stop the vehicle with a low vacuum condition in the
brake booster, the ABS module activates the hydraulic pump motor in the HCU to assist with vehicle braking.
rd
On vehicles equipped with adaptive cruise control, the CCM monitors the area forward of the vehicle. When an object enters
this area and closes the distance gap set by the driver, the CCM sends a deceleration request to the ABS module over the HS-
ca
CAN2 (either an adaptive cruise control deceleration request or a collision avoidance deceleration request). When the
deceleration request message is received, the ABS module activates the hydraulic pump motor and solenoid valves in the HCU
to slow the vehicle down to maintain the distance gap set by the driver. Once the distance gap set by the driver is achieved, the
CCM stops sending the deceleration request message and the ABS module deactivates the hydraulic pump motor and solenoid
valves in the HCU. If the CCM determines the amount of braking provided by the ABS module is insufficient, the CCM sends a
forward collision avoidance braking request message to the ABS module and warns the driver, both audibly and visually,
through the use of the HUD. After receiving the braking request message, the ABS module waits for brake pedal input and,
once received, applies maximum braking assist using the hydraulic pump motor and the HCU.
For additional information on the adaptive cruise control system,

Refer to: Cruise Control - System Operation and Component Description (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
For additional information on the collision avoidance system,

Refer to: Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System - System Operation and Component Description (419-03C
AdvanceTrac
The AdvanceTrac system is comprised of the traction control and ESC features.
Traction Control
The ABS module continuously monitors and compares the rotational speed of the drive wheels in relation to the non-driven
wheels. When the drive wheels begin to spin faster than the non-driven wheels, the ABS module modulates brake pressure to
the appropriate brake calipers by opening and closing the appropriate solenoid valves inside the HCU while the hydraulic pump
motor is activated. At the same time, the ABS module calculates how much engine torque reduction is required to eliminate the
wheel slip and sends this torque reduction message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2 which relays the message to the PCM over
the HS-CAN1. The ABS module also sends a traction event message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2 which relays this
message to the IPC over the HS-CAN3. When the PCM receives the torque reduction message, it adjusts engine timing and
decreases fuel injector pulses to reduce the engine torque to the requested level. When the IPC receives the traction event
message, it flashes the stability-traction control indicator (sliding car icon).
Once the driven wheel speed returns to the desired speed, the ABS module returns the solenoid valves in the HCU to their
normal position, deactivates the hydraulic pump motor and stops sending the traction event and torque reduction messages.
The PCM returns engine timing and fuel injectors to normal operation and the IPC extinguishes the stability-traction control
indicator (sliding car icon). Once vehicle speed exceeds 100 km/h (62 mph), traction control is accomplished only through the
PCM torque control.
The traction control system can be disabled by the driver through the menu in the message center. This is independent of the
ABS, ESC and RSC functions, which cannot be disabled by the driver. When the driver disables the traction control function
through the message center, the IPC responds by illuminating the stability-traction control disabled indicator (sliding car OFF
icon) and by sending a message to the GWM over the HS-CAN3. The GWM relays this message to the ABS module over the
HS-CAN2. The ABS module takes no further action in regards to traction control until the driver activates the function or until
the ignition is cycled from OFF to ON.
The ABS module disables traction control if there are any wheel speed sensor or solenoid valve Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) present in the ABS module. Traction control is also disabled if there is a communication error between the ABS module
and the PCM. When traction control is disabled, the ABS module sends a message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2. The GWM
m
relays this message to the IPC over the HS-CAN3 to illuminate the stability-traction control indicator (sliding car icon).
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

co
The ABS module continuously monitors the vehicle motion relative to the intended course. This is done by using sensors to
compare the steering wheel input and the yaw rate sensor input with the actual vehicle motion. The PSCM sends the steering
wheel angle information to the ABS module over the HS-CAN2. The RCM sends yaw rate sensor and lateral accelerometer
.
information to the ABS module also over the HS-CAN2. If the ABS module determines from the inputs the vehicle is unable to
gn
travel in the intended direction, it modulates brake pressure to the appropriate brake calipers by opening and closing the
appropriate solenoid valves inside the HCU while the hydraulic pump motor is activated. At the same time, the ABS module
calculates how much engine torque reduction is required to help stabilize the vehicle and sends this torque reduction message
to the GWM over the HS-CAN2 which relays the message to the PCM over the HS-CAN1. The ABS module also sends a
ia
vehicle stability event message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2 which relays this message to the IPC over the HS-CAN3. When
the PCM receives the torque reduction message, it adjusts engine timing and decreases fuel injector pulses to reduce the
rd
engine torque to the requested level. When the IPC receives the vehicle stability event message, it flashes the stability-traction
control indicator (sliding car icon).
Once the vehicle instability has been corrected, the ABS module returns the solenoid valves in the HCU to their normal
ca
position, deactivates the hydraulic pump motor and stops sending the traction event and torque reduction messages. The PCM
returns engine timing and fuel injectors to normal operation and the IPC extinguishes the stability-traction control indicator
(sliding car icon).
ESC does not operate with the transmission in REVERSE. The ABS module disables ESC if there are any wheel speed sensor,
stability sensor or steering angle sensor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present in the ABS module. ESC also is disabled if
there is a communication error between the ABS module and the PSCM or the ABS module and the RCM. When ESC is
disabled, the ABS module sends a message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2. The GWM relays this message to the IPC over
the HS-CAN3 to illuminate the stability-traction control indicator (sliding car icon).
Roll Stability Control (RSC)
compare the steering wheel input, yaw rate sensor input, lateral accelerometer input and roll sensor input with the actual
vehicle motion. The PSCM sends the steering wheel angle information to the ABS module over the HS-CAN2. The RCM sends
yaw rate sensor, lateral accelerometer and roll rate sensor information to the ABS module also over the HS-CAN2. If the ABS
module determines from the inputs the vehicle is becoming unstable, the ABS module modulates brake pressure to the
appropriate brake calipers by opening and closing the appropriate solenoid valves inside the HCU while the hydraulic pump
motor is activated. At the same time, the ABS module calculates how much engine torque reduction is required to help stabilize
the vehicle and sends this torque reduction message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2 which relays the message to the PCM
over the HS-CAN1. The ABS module also sends a vehicle stability event message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2 which relays
this message to the IPC over the HS-CAN3. When the PCM receives the torque reduction message, it adjusts engine timing
and decreases fuel injector pulses to reduce the engine torque to the requested level. When the IPC receives the vehicle
stability event message, it flashes the stability-traction control indicator (sliding car icon).
Once the vehicle instability has been corrected, the ABS module returns the solenoid valves in the HCU to their normal
position, deactivates the hydraulic pump motor and stops sending the traction event and torque reduction messages. The PCM
returns engine timing and fuel injectors to normal operation and the IPC extinguishes the stability-traction control indicator
(sliding car icon).
RSC does not operate with the transmission in REVERSE. The ABS module disables RSC if there are any wheel speed
sensor, stability sensor or steering angle sensor Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present in the ABS module. RSC also is
disabled if there is a communication error between the ABS module and the PSCM or the ABS module and the RCM. When
RSC is disabled, the ABS module sends a message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2. The GWM relays this message to the IPC
over the HS-CAN3 to illuminate the stability-traction control indicator (sliding car icon).
Trailer Sway Control
Trailer sway is the undesirable yaw force a trailer can apply to the towing vehicle. Trailer sway control is a unique function of
the stability control system using steering wheel angle information and yaw rate information to determine if a trailer sway event
is taking place. The PSCM sends the steering wheel angle information to the ABS module over the HS-CAN2. The RCM sends
yaw rate sensor and lateral accelerometer information to the ABS module also over the HS-CAN2. If the ABS module
determines from the inputs a trailer sway event is taking place, the ABS module modulates brake pressure to the appropriate
brake calipers by opening and closing the appropriate solenoid valves inside the HCU while the hydraulic pump motor is
activated. At the same time, the ABS module calculates how much engine torque reduction is required to eliminate the trailer
sway and sends this torque reduction message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2 which relays the message to the PCM over the
HS-CAN1. The ABS module also sends a trailer sway event message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2 which relays this
message to the IPC over the HS-CAN3. When the PCM receives the torque reduction message, it adjusts engine timing and
decreases fuel injector pulses to reduce the engine torque to the requested level. When the IPC receives the vehicle stability
m
event message, it flashes the stability-traction control indicator (sliding car icon) and displays TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED in the message center.
co
Once the trailer sway has been corrected, the ABS module returns the solenoid valves in the HCU to their normal position,
deactivates the hydraulic pump motor and stops sending the traction event and torque reduction messages. The PCM returns
engine timing and fuel injectors to normal operation and the IPC extinguishes the stability-traction control indicator (sliding car
icon) and stops displaying the trailer sway message in the message center. Trailer sway control only activates when vehicle
.
speed is greater than 65 km/h (40 mph). Any malfunction disabling RSC also disables trailer sway control.
gn
The driver can enable and disable the trailer sway control feature using the message center and steering wheel controls. For
additional information, refer to the Owner's Literature.
ia
Curve Control
rd
compare the steering wheel input, the yaw rate sensor input, the lateral acceleration sensor input and the longitudinal
acceleration sensor input with the actual vehicle motion. The PSCM sends the steering wheel angle information to the ABS
module over the HS-CAN2. The RCM sends yaw rate sensor and lateral accelerometer information to the ABS module also
ca
over the HS-CAN2. If the ABS module determines from the inputs the vehicle is experiencing over-steer or under-steer, the
ABS module modulates brake pressure to the appropriate brake calipers by opening and closing the appropriate solenoid
valves inside the HCU while the hydraulic pump motor is activated. At the same time, the ABS module calculates how much
engine torque reduction is required to help stabilize the vehicle and sends this torque reduction message to the GWM over the
HS-CAN2 which relays the message to the PCM over the HS-CAN1. The ABS module also sends a curve control event
message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2 which relays this message to the IPC over the HS-CAN3. When the PCM receives
the torque reduction message, it adjusts engine timing and decreases fuel injector pulses to reduce the engine torque to the
requested level. When the IPC receives the vehicle stability event message, it flashes the stability-traction control indicator
(sliding car icon).
The curve control function does not operate with the transmission in REVERSE. The ABS module disables the curve control
function if there are any wheel speed sensor, stability sensor or steering angle sensor Diagnostics Trouble Codes (DTCs)
present in the ABS module. The curve control function is also disabled, if there is a communication error between the ABS
module and the PSCM, or the ABS module and the RCM. When the curve control function is disabled, the ABS module sends a
message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2. The GWM relays this message to the IPC over the HS-CAN3 to illuminate the
stability-traction control indicator (sliding car icon).
Hill Start Assist
When the vehicle is stopped on an incline greater than 1.5 degrees (approximately a 3% grade), the ABS module holds the
brake pressure for approximately 1.5 seconds while the driver transitions from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. This is
accomplished by monitoring several HS-CAN messages and several sensors to determine if the vehicle is stopped, not parked,
and if the vehicle is on an appropriate incline. The brake pedal message sent from the PCM through the GWM over the HS-
CAN2 and the wheel speed sensor inputs allow the ABS module to determine the vehicle has come to a complete stop. The
transmission selector lever message sent by the PCM through the GWM over the HS-CAN2 informs the ABS module the
vehicle is not parked. The stability sensor messages sent by the RCM over the HS-CAN2 enable the ABS module to determine
if the vehicle is on an incline greater than 1.5 degrees (approximately a 3% grade). Once the above conditions have been met,
hill start assist automatically engages. Before the driver releases the brake pedal, the ABS module commands the HCU to
close the isolation valves which maintains the current brake system pressure, preventing the vehicle from rolling down the
incline. Once the driver presses the accelerator pedal and the engine RPM increases, the ABS module gradually releases the
brake pressure to make sure the vehicle is neither rolling back nor driving off until there is sufficient driving torque to accelerate
the vehicle forward (or backward if reversing up the incline).
The hill start assist system can be disabled by the driver through the menu in the message center.
Hill Descent Control
When the hill descent control switch is pressed, the ATCM sends a hill descent braking assist message to the ABS module over
the HS-CAN2. Once vehicle speed is between 5 km/h (3 mph) and 32 km/h (20 mph) and the transmission is in REVERSE or
any forward gear, the ABS module uses the hydraulic pump motor and the HCU solenoid valves to maintain the vehicle speed
set by the driver. If the vehicle speed is increased or decreased outside of the operational window, the system remains active
but descent speed cannot be set or maintained.
The hill descent control feature requires a cool down period after sustained use. The ABS module continually monitors the
descent speed, angle of descent, pump motor run time and solenoid valve use. Once the ABS module determines a cool down
period is needed, the module sends a message to the GWM over the HS-CAN2. The GWM relays the message to the IPC over
the HS-CAN3 to display HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF SYSTEM COOLING in the message center.
m
Hill descent control has 3 modes of operation:
At speeds below 32 km/h (20 mph): when the hill descent control switch is pressed and conditions are correct for hill
co
descent activation, the hill descent control system is enabled. The hill descent indicator illuminates solidly and the
message center indicates hill descent control is active.
At speeds below 32 km/h (20 mph): when the hill descent control switch is pressed and conditions are not correct for hill
descent activation; the hill descent control system is enabled, the hill descent control indicator illuminates solidly and a
.
message is displayed in the message center indicating the reason hill descent is not active.
gn
At speeds above 32 km/h (20 mph): when the hill descent control switch is pressed, the hill descent control system is
not enabled and the hill descent control indicator does not illuminate. Once the vehicle slows to below 32 km/h (20 mph),
the hill descent control switch must be pressed again to enable the hill descent control system.
ia
MyKey® Interaction
Through the MyKey® feature, traction control can be configured to be always on or to allow the driver to select the traction
rd
control function on or off. When the traction control function is configured to be always on and a MyKey® restricted key is in
use, the IPC ignores any requests made by the driver to disable the traction control function and does not send any traction
control disable messages to the GWM. Refer to the Owner's Literature for additional information on the various MyKey®
ca
settings.
Stability-Traction Control Indicator (Sliding Car Icon)
One or both of the stability-traction control indicators may illuminate as a result of momentary sensor disturbances due to
environmental or driving conditions (including severe vehicle maneuvers or extreme off road usage). Once Illuminated, the
indicator remains illuminated until the environmental or driving condition is no longer present and the ignition is cycled from ON
to OFF and then back to ON again. If there are no other customer concerns, symptoms, indicators or Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs), the stability-traction control indicator may have been illuminated due to these environmental or driving conditions.
Refer to: Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) - System Operation and Component Description (413-01 Instrumentation, Message
Center and Warning Chimes, Description and Operation).
Stability-Traction Control Disabled Indicator (Sliding Car OFF Icon)
The ABS module is attached directly to the HCU and is the ECU for the ABS and stability control systems. The module
monitors all sensor inputs and all HS-CAN messages relating to ABS and stability control, then directly controls the solenoid
valves and the hydraulic pump motor in the HCU.
The ABS module can be serviced separately from the HCU. When a new ABS is installed, the module must be programmed
with the current vehicle configuration information. For additional information on module programming,
Refer to: Module Configuration - System Operation and Component Description (418-01 Module Configuration, Description and
Operation).
When an ABS or stability control fault has been corrected or a new component has been installed, the ABS module must be
calibrated. The calibration procedure is required for the stability control sensors to learn the zero-position of the vehicle which
means the vehicle must be on a level surface and not moving. The calibration procedure (IVD Initialization) is carried out using
a diagnostic scan tool. The vehicle must also be driven over 20 km/h (12 mph) for at least 1 minute on a straight road so the
ABS module can find the steering angle center.
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor
The brake booster vacuum sensor is a piezoelectric device used by the ABS module to monitor the vacuum in the brake
booster. The sensor is hardwired to the ABS module by 3 circuits. One circuit is for the 5 volt sensor supply, one circuit is for
sensor ground and one circuit is for sensor output. The sensor output ranges from 0.3 volt to 4.7 volts, depending on the
amount of vacuum in the booster. The sensor is located on the front of the brake booster at the 7 o'clock position and can be
serviced separately from the brake booster.
Hill Descent Control Switch
The ATCM houses the hill descent control switch. The hill descent control switch is a momentary contact switch with a LED
used to indicate when the system has been enabled. For additional information on the ATCM,
m
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) co

The HCU contains the solenoid valves, the hydraulic pump motor and the pressure sensor used by the ABS for the ABS and
stability control systems. While the ABS module can be serviced separately from the HCU, a new HCU comes with a new ABS
.
gn
module.
Stability Control Sensors
The stability control sensors for the traction control and ESC functions consist of the yaw rate sensor, lateral accelerometer,
ia
longitudinal accelerometer and roll rate sensor. The sensors are housed in the RCM which sends sensor information to the
ABS module over the HS-CAN2. If any of the sensors are defective, a new RCM must be installed.
rd
The yaw rate sensor measures the yaw angle which is the difference between the direction the vehicle is pointing when
cornering and the direction the vehicle is actually moving.
The longitudinal accelerometer measures the acceleration and deceleration of the vehicle as it moves forward and
ca
backward.
The lateral accelerometer measures the centrifugal force created when a vehicle corners.
The roll rate sensor measures the rate of rotation of the vehicle along the centerline of the vehicle from front to back.
Lateral acceleration has 2 forms. The first is the centrifugal acceleration generated when the vehicle travels around in a circle.
The second is the centrifugal acceleration due to gravity. On level ground there is no lateral acceleration due to gravity.
However, if the vehicle is parked sideways on a bank or incline, the sensor measures some lateral acceleration due to gravity,
even though the vehicle is not moving.
Steering Wheel Angle Sensor
The steering wheel angle, rotation speed and direction of travel is calculated by the PSCM and is sent to the ABS module over
the HS-CAN2.
Wheel Speed Sensor
On vehicles not equipped with active park assist, all 4 wheel speed sensors are active (magneto resistive) sensors operating on
the Hall-effect principle to generate a square wave signal proportional to the rotational speed of the wheel. Because these are
active sensors, receiving voltage from the ABS module and then sending a varying voltage back to the ABS module, they are
able to detect much lower rotational speeds than passive (magnetic inductive) sensors. Each wheel speed sensor is connected
to the ABS module by 2 circuits which are used for both sensor power and sensor signal return.
On vehicles equipped with active park assist, both rear wheel speed sensors are active, bi-directional sensors. Each of the 2
sensors contain 2 sensing elements mounted side-by-side. Because the 2 sensing elements are mounted next to each other
the 2 voltage signals are slightly out of phase, which causes one element to generate a voltage signal before the other element.
This allows the ABS module to not only determine wheel speed, but also wheel direction for active park assist.
Wheel Speed Sensor Encoders
The wheel speed sensor encoders are several magnets arranged in a circle around one side of the wheel bearing in alternating
poles. As the bearing rotates, the wheel speed sensor is exposed to alternating north-south magnetic fields. The encoder is part
of the wheel bearing and is serviced with the bearing.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Base Part Number: 2C219
Removal
1. Remove the HCU.

Refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control, Removal and
Installation).
2. NOTICE: Make sure the HCU and ABS module are clean and free of brake fluid or foreign material before
separating the components. Do not allow any brake fluid or foreign material to enter the mating side of the ABS
module or component damage can occur.
Remove the bolts and the ABS module.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
419-01C Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Programming
NOTE: In order to gain module security access, the diagnostic scan tool must have an active connection to the internet. A
hardwired internet connection is strongly recommended.
NOTE: When programming keys, the RKE transmitter and the PATS portion of the key are programmed at the same time.
NOTE: Common anti-theft security access choices are:
Program Additional Key

Erase and Program Keys
Parameter Reset
Customer Spare Key Programming Enable/Disable
Unlimited Key Mode ON/OFF (vehicles with Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) only)
Program Unlimited Key Code (vehicles with Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) only)
1. NOTE: If no valid programmed keys are available and the perimeter alarm activates when the scan tool is connected,
m
carry out the following steps.
NOTE: It is necessary to establish a session using the blank path vehicle identification method.
co
Connect the scan tool to the DLC and begin a scan tool session. Select Body>Security> PATS Functions menu
but do not select the check mark box to proceed further. Ensure that the driver’s door is closed with the window
rolled down to access the data link connector.
.
Position the hood latch in the closed position if the hood is open for battery charging purposes.
gn
Disconnect and reconnect the battery followed by opening and closing the driver door to start the alarm event.
Wait 10 minutes after triggering the alarm. The battery saver function stops the alarm event after 5 minutes have
elapsed. To prevent this from occurring open and close the driver door 4.5 minutes from the time the alarm event
started. A single horn chirp sounds to indicate that a 1 minute data link access time period begins. The exterior
ia
lights also stop flashing to indicate that a 1 minute data link access time period has begun.
Press the push to START/STOP button once to change the ignition mode to ON.
rd
NOTE: On Mustang vehicles, the scan tool displays an error screen indicating this step was unsuccessful and a
communication failure has occurred returning to the diagnostic menu. Ignore this error and proceed to program
keys as follows:
ca
Place the first key in the backup starting location.

Press and hold the START/STOP button for approximately 6 seconds or until the door locks cycle
indicating the key is successfully programmed.
Remove the first key from the backup starting location.
Place the second key in the backup starting location.
Press and hold the START/STOP button for approximately 6 seconds or until the door locks cycle
indicating the key is successfully programmed.
Access the PATS functions to gain security access. Once security access is obtained select erase and program
keys.
Follow the procedure to establish a session with the vehicle.

Refer to: Diagnostic Methods (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
2. From the diagnostic scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select Body>Security> PATS Functions.
3. Select Yes when Gaining Security Access displays.
4. Select either Dealer or Aftermarket and enter a valid username and password when prompted.
5. Return to the diagnostic scan tool window.
6. NOTE: If programming a passive key, refer to the Owner's Literature for the backup starting passive key location. The
passive key must be placed in this location for the passive key to successfully program.
Select the appropriate procedure and follow the on-screen instructions.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Programming
NOTE: In order to gain module security access, the diagnostic scan tool must have an active connection to the internet. A
hardwired internet connection is strongly recommended.
NOTE: When programming keys, the RKE transmitter and the PATS portion of the key are programmed at the same time.
NOTE: Common anti-theft security access choices are:
Program Additional Key

Erase and Program Keys
Parameter Reset
Customer Spare Key Programming Enable/Disable
Unlimited Key Mode ON/OFF (vehicles with Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) only)
Program Unlimited Key Code (vehicles with Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) only)
1. Follow the procedure to establish a session with the vehicle.
m
Refer to: Diagnostic Methods (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
2. From the diagnostic scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select Body>Security> PATS Functions.
3. Select Yes when Gaining Security Access displays. co

4. Select either Dealer or Aftermarket and enter a valid username and password when prompted.
.
5. Return to the diagnostic scan tool window.
gn
6. NOTE: Unlimited Key Mode should only be used to program more than 8 keys for fleet vehicle purposes. The RKE
function only operates for the first 2 keys programmed when the Unlimited Key Mode is enabled. Enabling the Unlimited
Key Mode disables the RKE function until an Erase and Program Keys function is carried out. Disabling the Unlimited
ia
Key Mode restores the RKE function without the need to erase and reprogram keys.
rd
Select the appropriate procedure and follow the on-screen instructions.

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
A-Pillar Trim Panel - Police
Removal
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1.
Release the wedge nut.
1. Loosen the retainer 6 turns.
2. Push the retainer in to release the wedge nut.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the retainer.

m
3.
Position aside the spotlamp handle.
co
1. NOTE: To install, make sure the wedge nut aligns with the keyway on the spotlamp shaft.
.
Remove the wedge nut.
gn
2. Position aside the handle.
ia
rd
ca
4.
Remove the A-pillar trim panel.
1. Release the clips.
2. Disconnect the spotlamp electrical connector.
3. Remove the spotlamp handle and cover.
4. Lift up and back and remove the A-pillar trim panel.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
A-Pillar Trim Panel
Tin Snips
Long Nose Pliers
Removal
NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar.
1. Position aside the front door weatherstrip.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2.
1. Pull out and release the first stage of the retaining clip.
2. Squeeze the clip together and release second stage and detach the retaining clip.
Use the General Equipment: Long Nose Pliers
m
3.
co
2. Pry up and back to remove the A-pillar trim panel. .
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4.
1. Cut the retainer.
Use the General Equipment: Tin Snips
2. Cut the retainer.
Use the General Equipment: Tin Snips
3. Remove and discard the 2-stage high-retention clip.
m
Installation

. co
gn

ia
rd
ca
415-00D Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: 2017 Explorer
Sony Audio System 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Audio Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Module
Removal
1. NOTE: If installing a new module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the scan tool prior to
removing the module. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the DSP following the on-screen instructions.
2. Remove the RH loadspace trim panel.

and Installation).
3.
Remove the bolts and the DSP.
m
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. NOTE: This step is only required if the module is being replaced.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the DSP following the on-screen instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
415-00A Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles 2017 Explorer
Without: SYNC
Audio Front Control Module (ACM)
Removal
NOTE: Eject any media from the ACM. If a disc fails to eject, do not forceably remove the disc from the ACM.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the ACM following the on-screen instructions.
2. Remove the FCIM.

Refer to: Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIMB) (415-00B Information and Entertainment System - General
Information - Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information) .
m
3.
Remove the bolts and the ACM.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. NOTE: This step is only necessary if replacing the component.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the ACM following the on-screen instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
415-00B Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: SYNC 2017 Explorer
Without Touchscreen 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Audio Input Jack
Removal
All vehicles expect police vehicles
1. Open the media bin door.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2.
1. Remove the audio input jack bezel.
3. Remove the audio input jack from the bezel.
Police vehicles
3.
m
Remove the audio input jack bezel.
.co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4.
Release the tabs.
Remove the audio input jack.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: 2017 Explorer
Touchscreen Display 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Removal
Front antenna cable
1. Remove the FDIM.

Refer to: Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) (415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) (415-00D) .
2. Remove the ACM.

Refer to: Audio Front Control Module (ACM) (415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
Refer to: Audio Front Control Module (ACM) (415-00D Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
Vehicles With: Sony Audio System, Removal and Installation).
3. Release the clips and remove the RH scuff plate trim panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove the pin-type retainer and position the floor carpet aside.
m
5. Disconnect the front antenna cable connector from the rear antenna cable.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

7. Detach the retainers and remove the antenna cable following the routing shown.
m
Rear antenna cable
to replacement of the cable only by overlaying the cable.

. co
NOTE: The original equipment rear antenna cable is part of the wiring harness and cannot be removed. This procedure refers
8. Lower the headliner.

gn
Refer to: Headliner - Lowering (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Headliner - Lowering - Vehicles With: Roof Opening Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
ia
9. Disconnect the electrical connectors and release the pin-type retainers.

rd
ca
10. Remove the pin-type retainer and position the floor carpet aside.
11. Disconnect the rear antenna cable connector from the front antenna cable.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
Front antenna cable
Rear antenna cable
2. Install the rear antenna cable following the routing shown. Cut the ends off the old antenna cable. Overlay the new
antenna cable on the vehicle wiring harness following the routing shown. Secure the new antenna cable to the wiring
harness with tape or zip ties as necessary.
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Without: SYNC
Removal
Front antenna cable
1. Remove the ACM.

Refer to: Audio Front Control Module (ACM) (415-00B Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Audio Front Control Module (ACM) (415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
2. Release the clips and remove the RH front door scuff plate trim panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the pin-type retainer and position the carpet aside.

m
4. Disconnect the front antenna cable from the rear antenna cable.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the glove comartment.

6. Remove the antenna cable following the routing shown.

m
Rear antenna cable
to replacement of the cable only by overlaying the cable.

. co
NOTE: The original equipment rear antenna cable is part of the wiring harness and cannot be removed. This procedure refers
7. Lower the headliner.

gn
Refer to: Headliner - Lowering - Vehicles With: Roof Opening Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
ia
8. Disconnect the electrical connector and release the pin-type retainer.

rd
ca
9. Remove the pin-type retainer and position the carpet aside.

m
10. Disconnect the rear antenna cable from the front antenna cable.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
Front antenna cable
Rear antenna cable
2. Install the rear antenna cable following the routing shown. Cut the ends off the old antenna cable. Overlay the new
antenna cable on the vehicle wiring harness following the routing shown. Secure the new antenna cable to the wiring
harness with tape or zip ties as necessary
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Without: SYNC
Audio Unit Antenna
Removal
1. Lower the rear of the headliner.

2.
1. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2. Remove the bolt.
4. Remove the audio unit antenna.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTE: If installing a new audio unit antenna it is not necessary to remove the bolt from the audio unit antenna base.
Install harness through the opening and push down until the base is fully seated.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
417-01 Exterior Lighting 2017 Explorer
Autolamps
DTC Chart: BCM

BCM DTC Chart

B1A85:11 Ambient Light Sensor: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B
Short To Ground
B1A85:13 Ambient Light Sensor: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B
Open
m
For other BCM Diagnostic -
Trouble Codes (DTCs) REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10
. co Multifunction Electronic Modules) .
Symptom Chart(s)
gn
ia
Symptom Chart: Autolamps

Symptom Chart
rd

ca
A module does not respond to the Fuse

diagnostic scan tool Wiring, terminals or REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module
connectors Communications Network) .
Module
The autolamps are inoperative Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test A
The autolamps are on continuously Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test B
Pinpoint Tests
The Autolamps Are Inoperative
REFER to: Exterior Lighting - System Operation and Component Description (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Description and
Operation).
Possible Sources
Headlamp concern
Autolamp/sunload sensor
BCM
PINPOINT TEST A : THE AUTOLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE

A1
CHECK THE MANUAL HEADLAMP OPERATION
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS and then OFF positions.
Do the headlamps operate correctly?
Yes GO to A2
No
REFER to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
A2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LIGHT SENSOR
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect: Autolamp/Sunload Sensor C286.
Ignition ON.
Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS position.

. co
Measure:
gn
ia
C286-2 Ground
rd
Is the voltage approximately 5 volts?

ca
Yes INSTALL a new autolamp/sunload sensor.

REFER to: Light Sensor (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
No GO to A3
A3
CHECK FOR CORRECT BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect all BCM connectors.
Repair:
corrosion (install new connector or terminals – clean module pins)
damaged or bent pins – install new terminals/pins
pushed-out pins – install new pins as necessary
Reconnect the BCM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern,

Click here to access Guided Routine (BCM).
The Autolamps Are On Continuously
Operation).
m

DTC Description
co Fault Trigger Conditions
B1A85:11 Ambient Light Sensor: Circuit A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a
Short To Ground short to ground from the light sensor input circuit.
.
B1A85:13 Ambient Light Sensor: Circuit An on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects an open or short to voltage
gn
Open from the light sensor input circuit.
ia
Possible Sources

rd
Light sensor
BCM
ca
Inspect the headlamp switch for damage.

Inspect the light sensor for damage.
PINPOINT TEST B : THE AUTOLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY

B1
CHECK FOR BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the BCM self-test.
Is DTC B1A85:11 or B1A85:13 present?
Yes For DTC B1A85:11, GO to B3

For DTC B1A85:13, GO to B5
No GO to B2
B2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LIGHT SENSOR (NO DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) )
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS position.
Measure:

C286-2 Ground

No GO to B10
m
Ignition OFF.

. co
B3
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LIGHT SENSOR (DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) B1A85:11)
gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ia

rd
C286-2 Ground
ca

No GO to B4
B4
CHECK THE LIGHT SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: BCM C2280B.
Measure:

C286-2 Ground
Yes GO to B10
B5
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LIGHT SENSOR (DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) B1A85:13)
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C286-2 Ground
m
Yes GO to B6
. co
No GO to B8
gn
B6
CHECK THE LIGHT SENSOR FOR GROUND
ia
Measure:
rd

ca
C286-2 C286-4

No GO to B7
B7
CHECK THE LIGHT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C286-4 C2280B-22
Yes GO to B10
B8
CHECK THE LIGHT SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Measure:

C286-2 Ground
m

. co
No GO to B9
gn
B9
CHECK THE LIGHT SENSOR INPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ia
Measure:
rd

ca
C286-2 C2280B-24
Yes GO to B10
B10
Repair:


m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
DTC Chart: PCM

DTC Chart
DTC Description Component Action

P0218 Transmission Fluid Transmission NOTE: P0218 causes the powertrain to limit torque to prevent transmission
Temperature over overheating. The DTC P0218 may set in conjunction with DTC P1783.
Sensor "A" Over temperature
Temperature CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0218 returns, determine if this DTC was set in
m
Condition Engine conjunction with any transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit DTCs and
RESOLVE them first, otherwise,
REFER to: Transmission Cooling (307-02 Transmission Cooling, Diagnosis
P0657 Actuator Supply

Voltage "A"
Transmission
solenoid power
and Testing).
co
Power to all solenoids has been interrupted. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0657
returns, GO to Pinpoint Test F
Circuit/Open control
.
gn
P0701 Transmission Transmission Intermittent clutch on fault and may set with DTCs P2700, P2701, P2702,
Control System hydraulic and P2703 and/or P2704. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0701 returns,
Range/Performance clutch systems REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
(including non- Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
ia
electrical shift
solenoid faults,
main control
rd
valve body and

clutch(es)).
ca
P0706 Transmission TR sensor The TR sensor outputs a duty cycle indicating manual lever position. This
Range Sensor "A" DTC sets when the duty cycle is greater or less than the expected duty cycle
Circuit by 50 Hz or more. The engine may Not Crank. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC
Range/Performance P0706 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test J
P0707 Transmission TR sensor Engine may not crank, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0707 returns, GO to
Range Sensor "A" Pinpoint Test J
Circuit Low
P0708 Transmission TR sensor Engine may not crank, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0708 returns, GO to
Range Sensor "A" Pinpoint Test J
Circuit High
P0709 Transmission TR sensor The TR sensor outputs a duty cycle indicating manual lever position. This
Range Sensor "A" DTC sets when the duty cycle is greater or less than the expected duty cycle
Circuit Intermittent by 50 Hz or more. The engine may Not Crank. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC
P0709 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test J
P0710 Transmission Fluid TFT DTC P0710 may set. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0710 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Temperature Test G REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
Sensor "A" Circuit
P0711 Transmission Fluid TFT CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0711 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test G
Temperature
Sensor "A" Circuit
Range/Performance
Sensor "A" Circuit
Low
Sensor "A" Circuit
High
P0715 Turbine/Input Shaft TSS sensor DTC P0717 may set. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0715 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Speed Sensor "A" Test K REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
Circuit
P0717 Turbine/Input Shaft TSS sensor DTC P0717 may set. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0717 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Speed Sensor "A" Test K REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
Circuit No Signal
P0718 Turbine/Input Shaft TSS sensor CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0718 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test K
Speed Sensor "A"
Circuit Intermittent
P0720 Output Shaft Speed OSS sensor DTC P0722 may set. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0720 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Sensor Circuit Test L REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0721 Output Shaft Speed OSS sensor CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0721 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test L
m
Sensor Circuit
Range/Performance
P0722 Output Shaft Speed OSS sensor DTC P0720 may set. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0722 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Sensor Circuit No
Signal
P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect O/D clutch
co
Test L REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0729 returns,

.
Ratio system faults REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
gn
(includes non- Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
electrical SSD
faults, main
control valve
ia
body and clutch)

P0731 Gear 1 Incorrect O/D clutch CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0731 returns,
rd
electrical SSD
ca
faults, main
control valve
body and clutch)
electrical SSD
faults, main
control valve
body and clutch)
P0733 Gear 3 Incorrect Direct clutch CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0733 returns,
electrical SSB
faults, valve
body and clutch)
electrical SSD
faults, main
control valve
body and clutch)
P0735 Gear 5 Incorrect Direct clutch CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0735 returns,
electrical SSB
faults, valve
body and clutch)
P073D Unable to Engage Transmission This DTC may set when there is a mechanical/hydraulic concern with the
Neutral internal concern direct or forward clutch pack, possibly deformed clutch plates or a rolled
clutch seal allowing the direct clutch or the forward clutch to mechanically or
hydraulically apply in neutral. PLACE the transmission in neutral with the
engine running to see if there is any creep torque, this fault causes the
transmission to partially engage forward gear in neutral. This DTC may set
with P0752, P0757, P0762, and/or P0767. CLEAR the DTC . If the DTC
returns, check the transmission for internal failure.
REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Overhaul).
P0740 Torque Converter TCC solenoid DTC P0743 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0740 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Clutch Solenoid electrical faults Test H
Circuit/Open
P0741 Torque Converter TCC system CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0741 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test H
Clutch Solenoid faults (includes
m
Circuit TCC, main
Performance/Stuck control valve
Off body and non-
P0742 Torque Converter

electrical
solenoid faults)
TCC solenoid
co
DTC P0743 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0742 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Clutch Solenoid electrical faults Test H
.
gn
Circuit Stuck On
P0743 Torque Converter TCC solenoid DTC P0740, P0742 and/or P0744 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0743
Clutch Solenoid electrical faults returns, GO to Pinpoint Test H REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
Circuit Electrical
ia
P0744 Torque Converter TCC solenoid DTC P0743 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0744 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Clutch Solenoid electrical faults Test H REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
rd
P0748 Line Pressure LPC solenoid DTC P0960, P0962 and/or P0963 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0748
Control (LPC) electrical faults returns, GO to Pinpoint Test I REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
ca
Solenoid Electrical
P0750 Shift Solenoid "A" SSA electrical DTC P0751 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0750 returns, GO to Pinpoint
faults Test A REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0751 Shift Solenoid "A" Forward clutch DTC P2700 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0751 returns,
Performance/Stuck system faults REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Off (includes non- Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
electrical SSA
faults, valve
body and clutch)
P0752 Shift Solenoid "A" Forward clutch CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0752 returns,
Stuck On system faults REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
electrical SSA
faults, valve
body and clutch)
P0753 Shift Solenoid "A" SSA electrical DTC P0750, P0973 and/or P0974 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0753
Electrical faults returns, GO to Pinpoint Test A REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0754 Shift Solenoid "A" SSA electrical CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0754 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test A
Intermittent faults
P0755 Shift Solenoid "B" SSA electrical DTC P0756 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0755 returns, GO to Pinpoint
faults Test B REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0756 Shift Solenoid "B" Direct clutch DTC P2701 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0756 returns,
Performance/Stuck system fault REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Off (includes non- Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
electrical SSB
faults, valve
body and clutch)
P0757 Shift Solenoid "B" Direct clutch DTC P2701 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0757 returns,
Stuck On system fault REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
electrical SSB
faults, valve
body and clutch)
SSB electrical
faults SSB
electrical faults
P0758 Shift Solenoid "B" SSB electrical DTC P0755, P0976 and/or P0977 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0758
Electrical faults returns, GO to Pinpoint Test B REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0759 Shift Solenoid "B" SSB electrical CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0759 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test B
Intermittent faults
P0760 Shift Solenoid "C" SSC electrical DTC P0761 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0760 returns, GO to Pinpoint
faults Test C REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
m
P0761 Shift Solenoid "C" Intermediate DTC P2702 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0761 returns,
Performance/Stuck clutch system REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Off faults (includes
clutch, valve
body and non-
electrical SSC
. co
Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
faults)
gn
P0762 Shift Solenoid "C" Intermediate DTC P0763 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0762 returns,
Stuck On clutch system REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
faults (includes Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
ia
clutch, valve
body and non-
electrical SSC
rd
faults)
P0763 Shift Solenoid "C" SSC electrical DTC P0760, P0979 and/or P0980 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0763
Electrical faults returns, GO to Pinpoint Test C REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
ca
P0764 Shift Solenoid "C" SSC electrical CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0764 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test C
Intermittent faults
P0765 Shift Solenoid "D" SSD electrical DTC P0766 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0765 returns, GO to Pinpoint
faults Test D REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0766 Shift Solenoid "D" SSD electrical DTC P2704 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0766 returns,
Performance/Stuck faults REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Off Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
P0767 Shift Solenoid "D" O/D clutch DTC P07A9 and/or P2704 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0767 returns,
Stuck On system faults REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
electrical SSD
faults, valve
body and clutch)
P0768 Shift Solenoid "D" SSD electrical DTC P0765, P0982 and/or P0983 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0768
Electrical faults returns, GO to Pinpoint Test D REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0769 Shift Solenoid "D" SSD electrical CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0769 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test D
Intermittent faults
P0770 Shift Solenoid "E" SSE electrical DTC P0773 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0770 returns, GO to Pinpoint
faults Test E REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0771 Shift Solenoid "E" SSE non- DTC P0984 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0771 returns,
Performance/Stuck electrical faults ( REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Off SSE and main Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
control valve
body)
P0772 Shift Solenoid "E" SSE non- DTC P0984 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0772 returns,
Stuck On electrical faults ( REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
SSE and valve Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
body)
P0773 Shift Solenoid "E" SSE electrical DTC P0770 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0773 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Electrical faults Test E REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0774 Shift Solenoid "E" SSE electrical CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0774 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test E
Intermittent faults
P07A5 Transmission Direct clutch CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P07A5 returns,
Friction Element REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Stuck On Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
P07A8 Transmission Low/reverse CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P07A8 returns,
Friction Element clutch REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Stuck Off Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
P07A9 Transmission Low/reverse DTC P0767 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P07A9 returns,
Friction Element clutch REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
m
Stuck On Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
P07AA Transmission Overdrive clutch CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P07AA returns,
Friction Element REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Stuck Off
P0815 Upshift Switch
Circuit
Upshift switch
electrical
co
CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0815 returns,
REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External
.
Controls, Diagnosis and Testing).
gn
P0816 Downshift Switch Downshift CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0816 returns,
Circuit switch electrical REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External
Controls, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
P0867 Transmission Fluid Transmission CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0867 returns,
Pressure hydraulic and REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
clutch systems Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
rd
P0960 Line Pressure LPC solenoid DTC P0748 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0960 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Control (LPC) electrical faults Test I REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
ca
Solenoid Control
Circuit / Open
P0961 Line Pressure LPC solenoid CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0961 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test I
Control (LPC) electrical faults
Solenoid Control
Circuit/Open
Solenoid Control
Circuit Low
Solenoid Control
Circuit High
Control Circuit Low faults Test A REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
Control Circuit High faults Test A REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0976 Shift Solenoid "B" SSB electrical DTC P0758 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0976 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Control Circuit Low faults s Test B REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0977 Shift Solenoid "B" SSB electrical DTC P0758 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0977 returns, GO to Pinpoint
Control Circuit High faults Test B REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
Control Circuit Low faults Test C REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
Control Circuit High faults Test C REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
Control Circuit Low faults Test D REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
Control Circuit High faults Test D REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P0984 Shift Solenoid "E" SSE electrical DTC P0771 and/or P0772 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P0984 returns,
Range/Performance faults REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
P1001 KOEO Not Able to PCM RETRIEVE and RECORD all DTCs. REPAIR self-test or CMDTCs first.
Complete, KOER CLEAR the DTC. RERUN the KOER self-test. If the DTC returns,
Aborted REPROGRAM the PCM with the latest software. RERUN the KOER self-test.
If DTC P1001 returns, INSTALL a new PCM.
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14C Electronic Engine
Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
After installing the new PCM, PROGRAM it with the latest software and
PERFORM the Transmission Strategy Download,
m
REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic
Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, General
Procedures).
P1397 System Voltage Out System voltage
Of Self Test Range out of self test
range
co
INSPECT the PCM power and ground circuits for opens or short to ground.
INSPECT the PCM connector for damaged or pushed-out terminals,
corrosion or loose wires. CLEAR the DTC. RUN the KOEO self-test. If DTC
P1397 returns,
.
gn
REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00
Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
P1501 Vehicle Speed VSS Vehicle speed not at 0 during the KOEO and/or KOER self-test. CLEAR the
Sensor Out Of Self DTC and RERUN the KOEO and KOER self-test. If DTC P1501 returns,
ia
Test Range REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control (206-09 Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control) .
rd
P1502 Vehicle Speed VSS Cannot complete engine monitors. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P1502 returns,
Sensor Intermittent Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
P1636 Inductive Signature PCM CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P1636 returns, INSTALL a new PCM.
ca
Chip REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14C Electronic Engine
Communication Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
Error After installing the new PCM, PROGRAM it with the latest software and
Procedures).
P163E Transmission Transmission CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P163E returns, INSTALL a new PCM.
Control Module control module REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14C Electronic Engine
Programming Error programming Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
error After installing the new PCM, PROGRAM it with the latest software and
Procedures).
P163F Transmission ID Transmission ID Transmission ID is not programmed. REPROGRAM the original PCM.
Block Corrupted, memory block
Not Programmed corrupted, not
programmed
P1702 Transmission TR Sensor DTC P0706, P0707 and/or P0708 may set, CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P1702
Range Sensor Electrical Faults returns, GO to Pinpoint Test J REPAIR the more specific DTC first.
P1705 Transmission TR sensor The selector lever was not in park or neutral during the self-test. CLEAR the
Range Circuit Not DTC and RERUN the KOEO and KOER self-test.
Indicating
Park/Neutral During
Self Test
P1711 Transmission Fluid TFT sensor CLEAR the DTC and RERUN the KOEO and KOER self-test. If DTC P1711
Temperature returns, GO to Pinpoint Test G
Sensor Out Of Self
Test Range
P1744 Torque Converter TCC system DTC P1744 is a non-electrical DTC. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P1744 returns,
Clutch Solenoid faults (includes REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Circuit TCC, main Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
control valve
body and non-
electrical
solenoid faults)
P1780 Transmission Transmission
Control Switch (O/D control switch REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External
Cancel) Circuit Out Controls, Diagnosis and Testing).
Of Self Test Range
P1783 Transmission Transmission MONITOR the TFT sensor PID and TCC PID to VERIFY and MONITOR
m
Overtemperature over transmission fluid temperature and TCC solenoid electrical operation. CLEAR
Condition temperature the DTC. If the DTC returns, GO to Symptom Chart.
REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
P1910 Reverse Lamp

Control
Reverse lamp
control
co
CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P1910 returns, REFER to 417-01, reversing lamps.
Circuit/Open
.
gn
P1921 Transmission TR switch The engine may Not Crank. DTC P0706, P0707 and/or P0708 may set.
Range Signal CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P1921 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test J REPAIR the
more specific DTC first.
ia
P2700 Transmission Forward clutch DTC P2700 is a non-electrical DTC. DTC P0751 and/or P0752 may set.
Friction Element system faults CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P2700 returns,
Apply Time (includes non- REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
rd
Range/Performance electrical SSA Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .

SSA faults,
valve body and
ca
clutch)
P2701 Transmission Direct clutch DTC P2701 is a non-electrical DTC. DTC P0756 and/or P0757 may set.
Range/Performance electrical SSB Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
faults, valve
body and clutch)
P2702 Transmission Intermediate DTC P2702 is a non-electrical DTC. DTC P0761 and/or P0762 may set.
Friction Element clutch system CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P2702 returns,
Apply Time faults (includes REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Range/Performance clutch, valve Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
body and non-
electrical SSC
faults)
P2703 Transmission Low/reverse DTC P2703 is a non-electrical DTC. DTC P0766 and/or P0768 may set.
Friction Element clutch and OWC CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P2703 returns,
Apply Time faults REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Range/Performance Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
P2704 Transmission O/D clutch DTC P2704 is a non-electrical DTC. DTC P0771 and/or P0772 may set.
Range/Performance electrical SSD Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
faults, valve
body and clutch)
P2705 Transmission OWC faults DTC P2705 is a non-electrical DTC. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P2705 returns,
Friction Element (covers just the REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Apply Time clutches) Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
Range/Performance
P2760 Torque Converter TCC pressure CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P2760 returns, GO to Pinpoint Test H
Clutch Pressure control solenoid
Control Solenoid
Intermittent
P2783 Torque Converter Torque TCC control valve stuck in the apply position. CLEAR the DTC. If DTC P2783
Temperature Too converter returns,
High REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-
Pinpoint Tests
Power is routed through the transmission solenoid power control relay (inside the PCM) to all transmission solenoids. If the
power circuit to the transmission solenoids or the transmission solenoid power control relay fails open, all solenoids are failed
electrically off. Check for open, short to ground or the transmission connector disconnected. The transmission solenoid power
m
control relay disables power to the transmission solenoids when certain transmission DTCs are set.
Carry out KOEO and KOER procedures.

Retrieve and record all DTCs.
Repair all non-transmission DTCs first.
Repair all transmission DTCs second.
Clear all CMDTCs and attempt to repeat them.
. co
Repair all CMDTCs.
gn
If only pass codes are obtained,
REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)

ia

rd
Normal Operation
ca
The PCM applies and releases the various clutches in the transmission by actuating the shift solenoids in the solenoid body.
SSA is a Variable Force Solenoid (VFS).


P0750 SSA Open circuit in the solenoid or wire harness.
P0753 SSA Electrical Open circuit in the solenoid or wire harness.
P0754 SSA Intermittent Intermittent circuit in the solenoid or wire harness open, shorted to ground or shorted to
power.
P0973 SSA Control Circuit Short to ground in the solenoid or wire harness.
Low
P0974 SSA Control Circuit Open circuit or short to power in the solenoid or wire harness.
High
Possible Sources
Connectors damaged or pushed-out terminals, corrosion, loose wires and missing or damaged seals
SSA
Transmission internal wiring harness frame
PCM
PINPOINT TEST A : SHIFT SOLENOID A (SSA)

A1
RETRIEVE AND RECORD ALL DTCS
Using the diagnostic scan tool, retrieve all DTCs.
Are DTCs P0750, P0753, P0754, P0973 and/or P0974 present?
Yes For DTCs P0750, P0753 and/or P0754, GO to A2

For DTC P0973 and/or P0754, GO to A4
For DTCs P0974 and/or P0754, GO to A6
No
REFER to: Diagnosis By Symptom (307-01 Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission - 6F50/6F55) .
m
A2
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID A (SSA) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Transmission Vehicle Harness C168.
Disconnect PCM C175E.

. co
gn
Inspect the connectors for damaged or pushed-out terminals, corrosion, loose wires and missing or damaged
seals.
Measure:
ia

rd
C168-13 C175E-75
ca
Yes GO to A3
A3
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID A (SSA) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

Component side resistance pin 13. Component side resistance pin 15.
Is the resistance between 4 and 7.2 ohms?

Yes INSTALL a new PCM.
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
PERFORM the Transmission Strategy Download, REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-
01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, General Procedures).
No REMOVE the main control cover.

REFER to: Main Control Cover - 3.5L Duratec (212kW/278PS) (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-
Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
INSPECT the solenoid body for metal shavings on the exposed metal contacts or other components.
CLEAN the solenoid body and RECHECK the resistance value. If the resistance value is out of
specification and an open circuit is not found, INSTALL a new solenoid body. REFER to: Solenoid
Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal
and Installation).
PERFORM the Transmission Strategy Download procedure. REFER to: Transmission Strategy
Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55,
General Procedures).
A4
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID A (SSA) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
m
seals.
Measure:
. co
gn
C168-13 Ground
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to A5
A5
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID A (SSA) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

Component side resistance pin 13. Ground
Yes REMOVE the main control cover.

specification and a short to ground is not found, INSTALL a new solenoid body. REFER to: Solenoid
and Installation).
No INSTALL a new PCM.

A6
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID A (SSA) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Ignition OFF.
m
seals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

. co
gn
C168-13 Ground
ia

rd

ca

Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
SSB is a Variable Force Solenoid (VFS).

P0755 SSB Open circuit in the solenoid or wire harness.
P0758 SSB Electrical Open circuit in the solenoid or wire harness.
P0759 SSB Intermittent Intermittent circuit in the solenoid or wire harness open, shorted to ground or shorted to
power.
P0976 SSB Control Circuit Short to ground in the solenoid or wire harness.
Low
P0977 SSB Control Circuit Open circuit or short to power in the solenoid or wire harness.
High
Possible Sources
SSB
PCM
PINPOINT TEST B : SHIFT SOLENOID B (SSB)
m
B1

. co
gn
Yes For DTCs P0755, P0758 and/or P0759, GO to B2
For DTC P0976 and/or P0759, GO to B4
For DTCs P0977 and/or P0759, GO to B6
ia
No
rd
ca
B2
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID B (SSB) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Measure:

C168-16 C175E-74
Yes GO to B3

B3
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID B (SSB) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:


m
co
and Installation).
.
gn
ia
B4
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID B (SSB) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
rd
Ignition OFF.

ca
seals.
Measure:

C168-16 Ground
Yes GO to B5
B5
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID B (SSB) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:


and Installation).
m
co
.
gn
B6
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID B (SSB) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Ignition OFF.
ia

rd
seals.
ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-16 Ground

Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Normal Operation
SSC is a Variable Force Solenoid (VFS).


P0760 SSC Open circuit in the solenoid or wire harness.
P0763 SSC Electrical Open circuit in the solenoid or wire harness.
P0764 SSC Intermittent Intermittent circuit in the solenoid or wire harness open, shorted to ground or shorted to
power.
m
P0979 SSC Control Circuit Short to ground in the solenoid or wire harness.
Low
P0980 SSC Control Circuit
High
co
Open circuit or short to power in the solenoid or wire harness.
.
gn
Possible Sources
SSC
ia

PCM
rd
PINPOINT TEST C : SHIFT SOLENOID C (SSC)

ca
C1
Yes For DTCs P0760, P0763 and/or P0764, GO to C2

For DTC P0979 and/or P0764, GO to C4
For DTCs P0980 and/or P0764, GO to C6
No
C2
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID C (SSC) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Measure:

C168-17 C175E-73
Yes GO to C3
C3
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID C (SSC) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
m
. co
gn

ia

rd

ca

and Installation).
C4
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID C (SSC) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Measure:
C168-17 Ground
Yes GO to C5
C5
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID C (SSC) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

m
Is the resistance less than 3 ohms? co
.
gn
ia
and Installation).
rd
ca

C6
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID C (SSC) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-17 Ground

Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
m
Normal Operation
SSD is a Variable Force Solenoid (VFS). . co
gn


ia
P0765 SSD Open circuit in the solenoid or wire harness.

P0768 SSD Electrical Open circuit in the solenoid or wire harness.
rd
P0769 SSD Intermittent Intermittent circuit in the solenoid or wire harness open, shorted to ground or shorted to
power.
ca
P0982 SSD Control Circuit Short to ground in the solenoid or wire harness.
Low
P0983 SSD Control Circuit Open circuit or short to power in the solenoid or wire harness.
High
Possible Sources
SSD
PCM
PINPOINT TEST D : SHIFT SOLENOID D (SSD)

D1

Yes For DTCs P0765, P0768 and/or P0769, GO to D2
For DTC P0982 and/or P0769, GO to D4
For DTCs P0983 and/or P0769, GO to D6
No
D2
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID D (SSD) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Measure:

m
C168-12 C175E-72

. co
gn
Yes GO to D3

ia
D3
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID D (SSD) FOR AN OPEN
rd
Measure:
ca



and Installation).
D4
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID D (SSD) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Measure:

C168-12 Ground
m
Yes GO to D5
co
.
gn
D5
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID D (SSD) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
ia
Measure:

rd

ca

and Installation).

D6
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID D (SSD) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-12 Ground
m
No INSTALL a new PCM. co

.
gn
ia
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)

rd

ca
Normal Operation
SSE controls the multiplexing of the SSD low/reverse and overdrive clutch. If SSE fails off (no pressure) then 1st gear is failed
to 4th gear. If clutch select valve 2 sticks in the default position then 1st gear with engine braking is failed to 4th gear and
reverse is failed to neutral. SSE is an On/Off solenoid.


P0770 SSE Open, short to power or short to ground in the solenoid or wire harness.
P0773 SSE Electrical Open or short to ground in the solenoid or wire harness.
P0774 SSE Intermittent Intermittent circuit in the solenoid or wire harness open, shorted to ground or shorted to power.
Possible Sources
SSE
PCM
PINPOINT TEST E : SHIFT SOLENOID E (SSE)

E1
Are DTCs P0770, P0773 and/or P0774 present?
Yes GO to E2
No
E2
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID E (SSE) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
m
seals.
Measure:
. co
gn
C168-1 C175E-77
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to E3
E3
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID E (SSE) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C168-1 Ground
Yes GO to E4
E4
CHECK THE SHIFT SOLENOID E (SSE) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-1 Ground
No GO to E5
E5
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID E (SSE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
Component side resistance pin 1.
. co Measurement / Action Negative Lead
Ground
gn

ia

rd

ca
and Installation).
No GO to E6
E6
CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID E (SSE) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

Is the resistance between 20 and 34 ohms?


and Installation).
Transmission Solenoid Power Control
m
Normal Operation
co
The transmission solenoid power control relay controls vehicle power to all solenoids. Power is routed through the transmission
solenoid power control relay (inside the PCM) to all transmission solenoids. If the power circuit to the transmission solenoids or
the transmission solenoid power control relay fails open, all solenoids are failed electrically off. Check for open, short to ground
.
gn
or the transmission connector disconnected. The transmission solenoid power control relay disables power to the transmission
solenoids when certain transmission DTCs are set.
ia

rd

ca
P0657 Actuator Supply Voltage "A" Circuit/Open Open circuit on the transmission solenoid power circuit.
Possible Sources
PCM
PINPOINT TEST F : TRANSMISSION SOLENOID POWER CONTROL

F1
Is DTC P0657 present?
Yes GO to F2
No
F2
CHECK THE TRANSMISSION SOLENOID POWER CONTROL CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-15 Ground
m
co
INSPECT the solenoid body for metal shavings and debris on the exposed metal contacts or other
components. CLEAN the solenoid body. If the solenoid body was clean of debris, INSTALL a new
solenoid body. REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
.
Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
gn
ia
No GO to F3
rd
F3
CHECK THE TRANSMISSION SOLENOID POWER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
ca
seals.
Measure:

C168-15 C175E-91
Yes GO to F4
F4
CHECK THE TRANSMISSION SOLENOID POWER CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C168-15 Ground

m
TFT Sensor
Normal Operation
. co
The TFT sensor is located in the solenoid body leadframe. The resistance value of the TFT sensor varies with temperature
gn
change. The PCM monitors the voltage drop across the TFT sensor to determine the temperature of the transmission fluid.
When the ignition is turned to the run position, the PCM uses this initial input signal to determine whether a cold start shift
schedule is necessary. The cold start shift schedule allows delayed shifts when the transmission fluid is cold. The PCM inhibits
TCC operation at low transmission fluid temperatures and adjusts line pressure to temperature.
ia
rd

ca

P0710 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" TFT sensor circuit shorted to ground or open.
Circuit
P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" TFT sensor indicates a valid temperature but has not changed since
Circuit Range/Performance start up.
P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" TFT sensor circuit short to ground.
Circuit Low
P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor "A" TFT sensor circuit open.
Circuit High
P1711 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Out TFT sensor indicates too hot or too cold and must indicate a normal
Of Self Test Range temperature range during the KOER.
P1783 Transmission Overtemperature Condition TFT sensor indicates that the transmission is approaching an
overheating condition.
Possible Sources
TFT sensor
PCM
PINPOINT TEST G : TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

G1
Are DTCs P0710, P0711, P0712, P0713, P1711 and/or P1783 present?
Yes For DTCs P0710, P0712 and/or P0713, GO to G2

For DTCs P0711, P1711 and/or P1783, GO to G6
No
G2
CHECK THE TFT (TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE) SENSOR SIGNAL INPUT
Ignition OFF.
m
seals.
Ignition ON.
. co
Enter the following diagnostic mode: TFT and TFTV.
gn
Does the TFT PID display a temperature -39.9°F (-40°C) and the TFTV PID display 4.9 volts?
ia
Yes GO to G5
rd
ca
G3
CHECK THE TFT (TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE) SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Connect.

C168-2 C168-3
Does the TFT PID display a temperature 375.5°F (191°C) and the TFTV PID display 0.0 to 0.2 volts?
Yes GO to G5
No GO to G4
G4
CHECK THE TFT (TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE) SENSOR SIGNAL VOLTAGE
Measure:

C168-2 Ground
Is the voltage between 4.8 and 5.1 volts?
Yes GO to G5
No INSPECT and REPAIR the circuit. If an open circuit is not found, INSTALL a new PCM.
G5
CHECK THE TFT (TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE) SENSOR RESISTANCE
Measure:
m
. co
gn

Temperature
°F (°C) Ohms
ia
-39.9–-4.0°F (-40–-20°C) 1,076K-269K

-2.2–30.2°F (-19–-1°C) 309K-91K
rd
32.0–68.0°F (–20°C) 104K-35K

69.8–103.9°F (21–40°C) 40K-15K
ca
105.7–157.9°F (41–70°C) 17K-4.9K

159.7–193.9°F (71–90°C) 5.6K-2.5K
195.7–229.8°F (91–110°C) 3.0K-1.4K
231.6–265.8°F (111–130°C) 1.7K-0.8K
267.6–301.8°F (131–150°C) 0.97K-0.56K
Does the temperature to resistance specifications match?
Yes To diagnosis an overheating concern,

REFER to: Transmission Cooling (307-02 Transmission Cooling, Diagnosis and Testing).

INSPECT the solenoid body for metal shavings and debris on the exposed metal contacts or other
components. CLEAN the solenoid body. If the solenoid body was clean of debris, INSTALL a new
solenoid body. REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
G6
ON DEMAND SELF-TEST
Check and make sure the transmission vehicle harness C168 is fully seated, the terminals are engaged in the
connector and in good condition before proceeding.
Using the diagnostic scan tool, make sure the transmission fluid temperature is between 33.8°F (1°C) and
219.1°F (104°C).
Perform the KOER self-test.
Did DTC P0711, P1711 and/or P1783 set?
Yes For DTCs P0711 and P1711, INSTALL a new solenoid body.
REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
m
For DTC P1783,
REFER to: Transmission Cooling (307-02 Transmission Cooling, Diagnosis and Testing).
No co
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
.
gn
TCC Solenoid
ia

rd
The PCM controls torque converter lock-up by varying the amount of current applied to the TCC solenoid. When no current is
ca
applied to the TCC solenoid, the TCC is fully released. When maximum current is applied, the TCC is fully applied.


P0740 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Open circuit in the TCC solenoid or wiring harness.
Circuit/Open
P0742 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit Short to ground in the TCC solenoid or wiring harness.
Stuck On
P0743 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit Open or short to ground in the TCC solenoid or wiring harness.
Electrical
P0744 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit Short to power in the TCC solenoid or wiring harness.
Intermittent
P2760 Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Intermittent circuit in the TCC solenoid or wiring harness. Open, short
Solenoid Intermittent to ground or short to power.
Possible Sources
TCC solenoid
PCM
PINPOINT TEST H : TCC (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH) SOLENOID

H1
Yes For DTCs P0740, P0743 and/or P2760, GO to H2

For DTCs P0742, P0743 and/or P2760, GO to H4
For DTCs P0744, GO to H6
No
m
H2
CHECK THE TCC (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH) SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
seals.
ia
Measure:

rd

C168-14 C175E-14
ca
Yes GO to H3
H3
CHECK THE TCC (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH) SOLENOID CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:


No GO to H4
H4
CHECK THE TCC (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH) SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Measure:
m
C168-14 . co Ground
gn
Yes GO to H5
ia

rd
H5
CHECK THE TCC (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH) SOLENOID FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
ca
Measure:


and Installation).
H6
CHECK THE TCC (TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH) SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
POWER
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
C168-14 Ground
. co
gn

ia
rd
ca
Line Pressure Control (LPC) Solenoid
Normal Operation
The PCM controls the hydraulic line pressure by varying the amount of current applied to the LPC solenoid. When no current is
applied to the LPC solenoid, the solenoid, is fully opened, resulting in the maximum amount of hydraulic pressure to the main
pressure regulator valve. When maximum current is applied, the LPC solenoid is fully closed, resulting in minimum pressure to
the main pressure regulator valve.


P0748 LPC Solenoid Electrical LPC solenoid electrical circuit general fault. May set along with DTC P0960,
P0962 and P0963.
P0960 LPC Solenoid Control Circuit/Open Open circuit in solenoid or solenoid circuitry.
P0961 LPC Solenoid Control Circuit Intermittent short to ground in solenoid or solenoid circuitry.
Range/Performance
P0962 LPC Solenoid Control Circuit Low Short to ground in solenoid or solenoid circuitry.
P0963 LPC Solenoid Control Circuit High Short to power in solenoid circuitry.
Possible Sources
LPC solenoid
PCM
PINPOINT TEST I : LINE PRESSURE CONTROL (LPC) SOLENOID

I1
m
Yes For DTCs P0748 and/or P0960, GO to I2
No
For DTCs P0748 and/or P0962, GO to I4
For DTCs P0748 and/or P0963, GO to I6
. co
gn
ia
I2
CHECK THE LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
rd

ca
seals.
Measure:

C168-18 C175E-15
Yes GO to I3
I3
CHECK THE LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID FOR AN OPEN
Measure:


m
and Installation).
. co
I4
CHECK THE LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
gn
Ignition OFF.

ia

rd
seals.
Measure:
ca

C168-18 Ground
Yes GO to I5
I5
CHECK THE LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:


and Installation).

m
I6
CHECK THE LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
seals.
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Measure:

ca

C168-18 Ground

TR Sensor

Normal Operation
The TR sensor provides a fixed frequency duty cycle to the PCM for each manual control lever positions (PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and LOW). The PCM uses the TR sensor signal for LPC, shift scheduling and TCC operation. The PCM
transmits TR data on the High Speed (HS) CAN to the BCM for engine start and reverse lamp operation. To aid in identifying
the connectors on the solenoid body,
REFER to: Transmission Description - System Operation and Component Description (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-
Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Description and Operation).


P0706 Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit Mechanical or electrical fault. Input from the TR sensor did not
Range/Performance change or is intermittent.
P0707 Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit Low TR sensor circuit open or short to ground.
P0708 Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit High TR sensor circuit open.
P0709 Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit Intermittent Mechanical or electrical fault. Input from the TR sensor did not
m
change or is intermittent.
P1702 Transmission Range Sensor "A" Circuit Intermittent TR sensor circuit open or short to ground.
P1705 Transmission Range Sensor Not Indicating
Park/Neutral During Self-Test
P1921 Transmission Range Signal
. co
TR sensor misaligned or in wrong position during the self-test.
The PCM has detected a TR signal duty cycle out of range.

gn
Possible Sources
ia
TR sensor
rd
PCM
ca
PINPOINT TEST J : TR (TRANSMISSION RANGE) SENSOR

J1
Are DTCs P0706, P0707, P0708, P0709, P1702, P1705 and/or P1921 present?
Yes For DTCs P0706, P0708, P0709, P1702 and/or P1921, GO to J2

For DTC P1705, GO to J8
No
J2
CHECK THE TR (TRANSMISSION RANGE) SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR POWER
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the connector for damaged or pushed-out terminals, corrosion, loose wires and missing or damaged
seals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-4 Ground
C168-5 Ground
C168-7 Ground
m
Is the voltage greater than 9 volts on all circuits?
Yes GO to J3
No GO to J5
. co
gn
J3
CHECK THE TR (TRANSMISSION RANGE) SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR POWER
ia

rd

C168-6 Ground
ca
Is the voltage approximately 5 volts
Yes GO to J4
No GO to J5
J4
CHECK THE TR (TRANSMISSION RANGE) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure:

C168-4 C168-8
Is the voltage less than 9 volts?

No GO to J7
J5
CHECK THE TR (TRANSMISSION RANGE) SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Measure:

C168-4 C175B-9
C168-5 C175B-8
m
C168-6
. co C175E-30
gn
C168-7 C175B-32
ia
rd
ca
C168-8 C175E-22
Are all of the resistances less than 3 ohms?
Yes GO to J6
J6
CHECK THE TR (TRANSMISSION RANGE) SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C168-4 Ground
C168-5 Ground
C168-6 Ground
C168-7 Ground
m
Are any of the resistances less than 3 ohms?
Yes REPAIR the circuit(s).

. co
gn
ia
rd
J7
CHECK THE TR (TRANSMISSION RANGE) SENSOR SOLENOID BODY ASSEMBLY
Remove the main control cover.
REFER to: Main Control Cover - 3.5L Duratec (212kW/278PS) (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
ca
Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
Disconnect TR Sensor.
Inspect the connector for damaged or pushed-out terminals and loose wires.
Measure:

C168-4 TR connector pin 1 (solenoid body side)

m
Is the resistance less than 0.5 ohms?
Yes INSTALL a new TR sensor.

co
REFER to: Transmission Range (TR) Sensor (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
.
No INSTALL a new solenoid body.
gn
ia
rd
J8
ON DEMAND SELF-TEST
Check to make sure the transmission harness connector is fully seated, terminals are engaged in connector and
ca
in good condition before proceeding.
Make sure the selector lever is in the Park or Neutral position.
Using the diagnostic scan tool, perform the KOEO self-test.
Did DTC P1705 return?
Yes VERIFY selector lever cable adjustment.

REFER to: Selector Lever Cable Adjustment - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55,
Vehicles With: Column Shift (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, General
Procedures).
REFER to: Selector Lever Cable Adjustment - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55,
Vehicles With: Floor Shift (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, General Procedures).
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
TSS Sensor
Normal Operation
The TSS sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that sends a signal to the PCM that indicates transmission turbine shaft input speed.
The TSS sensor provides converter turbine speed information for TCC strategy.


P0715 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Sensor "A" Circuit No input from the TSS sensor.
P0717 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Sensor "A" Circuit No No input from the TSS sensor.
Signal
P0718 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Sensor "A" Circuit Unrealistic change in the TSS sensor signal, erratic or
Intermittent intermittently no input.
m
Possible Sources
TSS sensor
PCM
. co
PINPOINT TEST K : TSS (TURBINE SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR
gn
K1
ia
Are DTCs P0715, P0717, P0718 and/or P0720 present?

rd
Yes For DTCs P0715, P0717 and/or P0718, GO to K2

For DTC P0715 and P0720, GO to K7
ca
No
K2
CHECK THE TSS (TURBINE SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Measure:

C168-19 C175E-25
Yes GO to K3
K3
CHECK THE TSS (TURBINE SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C168-19 Ground
Yes GO to K4
m
co
K4
CHECK THE TSS (TURBINE SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
.
Ignition ON.
gn
Measure:

ia

C168-19 Ground
rd
ca
No GO to K5
K5
CHECK THE TSS (TURBINE SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Connect PCM C175E.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-19 C168-9
Is voltage less than 4.8 volts?
Yes INSPECT and REPAIR the circuit. If an open circuit is not found, INSTALL a new PCM.
No GO to K6
K6
CHECK THE SOLENOID BODY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.

Disconnect TSS sensor.
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
. co
Measurement / Action Negative Lead
TSS connector pin 3 (solenoid body side)
gn
Is the resistance greater than 0.5 ohms?

ia
Yes INSTALL a new solenoid body.

rd

ca
No INSTALL a new TSS.

REFER to: Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
K7
CHECK THE TSS (TURBINE SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR VEHICLE POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-20 Ground
Is the voltage less than 9.5 volts?

OSS Sensor
m
Normal Operation
co
The OSS sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that sends a signal to the PCM that indicates transmission output shaft speed. The OSS
sensor is used for TCC control and shift scheduling.
.
gn

ia

rd
P0720 Output Shaft Speed Sensor Circuit No input from the OSS sensor.
P0721 Output Shaft Speed Sensor Circuit Unrealistic change in the OSS sensor signal, erratic or intermittently
ca
Range/Performance no input.
P0722 Output Shaft Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal No input from the OSS sensor.
Possible Sources
OSS sensor
PCM
PINPOINT TEST L : OSS (OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR

L1
Are DTCs P0720, P0721, P0722 and/or P0715, present?
Yes For DTCs P0720, P0721 and/or P0722, GO to L2

For DTC P0715 and P0720, GO to L7
No
L2
CHECK THE OSS (OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Measure:

C168-10 C175E-26
m
Yes GO to L3

. co
gn
L3
CHECK THE OSS (OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:
ia

rd

C168-10 Ground
ca
Yes GO to L4
L4
CHECK THE OSS (OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO POWER
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-10 Ground
No GO to L5
L5
CHECK THE OSS (OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Connect PCM C175E.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-20 C168-9
m
Is voltage less than 4.8 volts?
co
.
gn
No GO to L6
ia
L6
CHECK THE SOLENOID BODY SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
rd
Ignition OFF.

ca
Disconnect OSS sensor.
Measure:

Component side resistance pin 10. OSS connector pin 1 (solenoid body side)
Is the resistance greater than 0.5 ohms?
Yes INSTALL a new solenoid body.

No INSTALL a new OSS.

REFER to: Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
L7
CHECK THE OSS (OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED) SENSOR VEHICLE POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
seals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C168-20 Ground
m
Is voltage less than 9.5 volts? co
.
gn
ia

rd

ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Specifications Procedure revision date: 09/21/2012
Specifications

Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Specifications
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-10-QLVC MERCON® LV

Capacities
m
Liters
Transmission fluid 11 qt (10.3 L)
. co
gn

General Specification
ia
Item Specification
Transmission Weight 220.46 lb (100 kg)
rd
ca

Solenoid Operation Chart
Base Selector PCM Commanded SSA NL SSB NH SSC NL SSD NH (L,R/C SSE (On/Off) TCC
Range Gear (1,2,3,4) (3,5,R) (2,6) 4,5,6) NC NL
P P Off On Off Off On Off
R R Off Off Off Off On Off
N N Off On Off Off On Off
D 1 On On Off Offa Onb Off
2 On On On On Off Off
3 On Off Off On Off Off
4 On On Off Off Off On/Off
5 Off Off Off Off Off On/Off
6 Off On On Off Off On/Off
Turns on above 8 km/h (5 mph).

Turns off above 8 km/h (5 mph).
NC = Normally closed
NH = Normally high
NL = Normally low

Clutch Application Chart
Gear Forward (1, 2, Direct (3, Intermediate Low / Reverse (1, Overdrive (4, 5, 6) Low - OWC
3, 4) 5, R) (2, 6) R)
Park H
Reverse D H
Neutral H
1st Gear D H H H
2nd Gear D H H
3rd Gear D H D
m
4th Gear D H D
5th Gear D D D
6th Gear D
1st Gear Manual H
H
. co
H
D
Planetary Front Sun Rear Sun Rear Sun Rear Rear Rear
gn
Component Carrier/Center Carrier/Center Ring Carrier/Center Ring
Ring
ia
H = Holding
D = Driven
rd
ca

Gear Ratio Chart
Gear Ratio
1st/low 4.484:1
2nd 2.872:1
3rd 1.842:1
4th 1.414:1
5th 1:1
6th 0.742:1
Reverse 2.882:1

Shift Speeds
Throttle Position Range Shift KM/H MPH
Light Throttle D 1-2 14-19 9-12
D 2-3 24-31 15-19
D 3-4 32-40 20-25
D 4-5 45-56 28-35
D 5-6 63-80 39-50
Medium Throttle D 1-2 37-47 23-29
D 2-3 58-71 36-44
D 3-4 74-93 46-58
D 4-5 108-135 67-84
D 5-6 169-211 105-131
Heavy Throttle D 1-2 55-69 34-43
D 2-3 84-105 52-65
D 3-4 127-158 79-98
D 4-5 167-208 104-129
D 5-6 179-222 111-138
m
co

Differential and Transfer Gear Bearing Preload Shim Selection Chart
.
gn
Differential Shim Part Number Transfer Gear Shim Part Number Shim Thickness
7T4Z-4067-A 7T4Z-7H367-A 0.0217 in (.55 mm)
ia
7T4Z-4067-B 7T4Z-7H367-B 0.0226 in (.575 mm)

7T4Z-4067-C 7T4Z-7H367-C 0.0236 in (.6 mm)
rd
7T4Z-4067-D 7T4Z-7H367-D 0.0246 in (.625 mm)

7T4Z-4067-E 7T4Z-7H367-E 0.0256 in (.65 mm)
ca
7T4Z-4067-F 7T4Z-7H367-F 0.0266 in (.675 mm)

7T4Z-4067-G 7T4Z-7H367-G 0.0276 in (.7 mm)
7T4Z-4067-H 7T4Z-7H367-H 0.0285 in (.725 mm)
7T4Z-4067-J 7T4Z-7H367-J 0.0295 in (.75 mm)
7T4Z-4067-K 7T4Z-7H367-K 0.0305 in (.775 mm)
7T4Z-4067-L 7T4Z-7H367-L 0.0315 in (.8 mm)
7T4Z-4067-M 7T4Z-7H367-M 0.0325 in (.825 mm)
7T4Z-4067-N 7T4Z-7H367-N 0.0335 in (.85 mm)
7T4Z-4067-P 7T4Z-7H367-P 0.0344 in (.875 mm)
7T4Z-4067-Q 7T4Z-7H367-Q 0.0354 in (.9 mm)
7T4Z-4067-R 7T4Z-7H367-R 0.0364 in (.925 mm)
7T4Z-4067-S 7T4Z-7H367-S 0.0374 in (.95 mm)
7T4Z-4067-T 7T4Z-7H367-T 0.0384 in (.975 mm)
7T4Z-4067-U 7T4Z-7H367-U 0.0394 in (1 mm)
7T4Z-4067-V 7T4Z-7H367-V 0.0404 in (1.025 mm)
7T4Z-4067-W 7T4Z-7H367-W 0.0413 in (1.05 mm)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-12 Instrument Panel and Console 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Auxiliary Power Point
501-194
Remover, Power Point
TKIT-2014D-FL_ROW
TKIT-2014D-ROW2
Removal
12v Receptcale
1. Open the power point cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Position the power point extractor so that it engages in the adjacent slots in the power point socket.
Use Special Service Tool: 501-194 Remover, Power Point.
m
3.
1. Install the receiver cup.
2. Install and tighten the wing nut. co
Use Special Service Tool: 501-194 Remover, Power Point.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Tighten the wing nut to pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5v Charging port
6.
1. Pull reaward to release the retainers.
2. Lift upward at the bottom to remove the front floor console rear trim panel.
m
7.
Remove the nuts and the USB charging module.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
12v Receptcale
1. Connect the electrical connector and push the new power point socket into the retainer.
5v Charging port

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
100-05 Police Equipment 2017 Explorer
Auxiliary Steering Wheel Controls
The steering wheel auxiliary controls use 2 switches labeled AUX and 4 positions labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. Each switch position
controls an output of the GFM. Each output of the module is switched to ground when commanded on. When the switch is
pressed to one of the positions, the IPC message center displays AUX1, AUX2, AUX3 or AUX4, depending on the position
selected, the GFM output will turn on and the outputs remain in that state until the switch is pressed again, then the outputs turn
off.
Steering Wheel Auxiliary Switches
The steering wheel auxiliary switches are located in the RH lower switch pack of the steering wheel. Each of the 2 switches are
a 2-way momentary contact switch.
GFM
The GFM receives input from the SCCM when the steering wheel switches are activated. The GFM then provides a grounded
output for any equipment connected to it.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Axle Assembly
Transmission Jack
Flat-Bladed Screwdriver
Removal
NOTE: Removal steps may contain installation instructions.
1. Remove the rear halfshafts.

Refer to: Rear Halfshaft (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the rear stabilizer bar.

Refer to: Rear Stabilizer Bar (204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
m
3. Remove and discard the driveshaft to rear differential flange bolts and washer assemblies.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. NOTE: Do not remove driveshaft from the pinion flange by pulling on the driveshaft tube. Damage to the CV joint can
result.
1. Mark the driveshaft CV joint coupling and RDU (Rear Drive Unit) flange.
Use the General Equipment: Flat-Bladed Screwdriver
2. Separate the driveshaft CV joint coupling from the RDU flange.
3. Position and support the driveshaft aside.
m
5. Disconnect the ATC (Automatic Torque Coupling) connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Remove the front RDU mounting bolts.

m
7. NOTICE: Securely strap the transmission hydraulic jack to the axle housing.
Use the General Equipment: Transmission Jack

. co
Remove the rear RDU mounting bolts and using the transmission jack, remove the RDU.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTICE: If replacing the axle assembly, the 4X4 control module will need to be reconfigured with the new Active
Torque Coupling (ATC) bar code information. If the new bar code information does not match the existing 4X4
control module information, driveline damage or driveability concerns can occur.
If installing a new RDU, re-configure the Active Torque Coupling (ATC).

Refer to: Active Torque Coupling Configuration (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, General Procedures).

3. Check the differential fluid level.
Refer to: Differential Fluid Level Check (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, General Procedures).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
413-13C Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist 2017 Explorer
General Procedures
Check
1. NOTE: Car shown, trucks are similar.
Turn the ignition ON, engine OFF.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2. Set the parking brake on.
3. For automatic transmission place the selector lever in DRIVE (D). For manual transmission place the gearshift lever in
ca
FIRST GEAR.
4. Place the test objects in position shown in the diagram. Refer to specifications in this section.
5. Monitor the suspect active park assist sensor Parameter Identifications (PIDs) to verify the PAM detects the objects
when placed within the specified locations and record the distances.
6. Confirm the recorded distances are within the specification ranges.
7. If the active park assist system does not detect the objects, refer to diagnosis and testing in this section.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
413-13A Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid 2017 Explorer
General Procedures
Check
1. NOTE: The object used in this system check can be fabricated using a 9 cm diameter (3 in I.D.) pipe, 100 cm (39 in) in
length (available as Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe, or similar from a hardware or plumbing supply.
NOTE: The following system check should be carried out with the vehicle on a level surface.
NOTE: Actual sensor arrangement may differ from the configuration shown.
Distribute the test objects evenly across the bumper as shown. Refer to the specifications in this section.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, engine off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Select REVERSE (R) for rear parking aid.
5. Select DRIVE (D) for front parking aid.
6. NOTE: The system provides audio warnings only when the vehicle is moving or when the vehicle is stationary and the
detected obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the bumper.
NOTE: If the PAM does not detect the object above, refer to Diagnosis and Testing.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the PAM parking aid sensor distance Parameter Identifications (PIDs) to verify the
PAM detects the objects when placed in the specified locations (P1, P2, P3, P4 and P5).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
417-01 Exterior Lighting 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Ballast
Removal
1. Remove the headlamp assembly.

Refer to: Headlamp Switch (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the screws and position the ballast.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the ballast.

ca
Installation
2. Using the VCM and IDS software, connect the diagnostic scan tool and execute the “ LED Lamp Driver Module
Initialization” routine. Follow the diagnostic scan tool directions.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
100-00 General Information 2017 Explorer
Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid and produce explosive gases. Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not
allow the battery to come in contact with flames, sparks or burning substances. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of
acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes, then get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Always lift a plastic-cased battery with a battery carrier or with hands on opposite corners. Excessive
pressure on the battery end walls may cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or
damage to the vehicle or battery.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after
handling. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables 2017 Explorer
Battery and Cables - Overview
Overview
The battery and cable system consists of the following:
Battery
Battery cable, with a battery current sensor and a generator current sensor
BJB
Battery tray
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Battery and Cables - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
Battery and Cables
The battery is a 12V DC source connected in a negative ground system and is a voltage stabilizer for the 12V electrical system.
The battery cable has a battery current sensor and a generator current sensor attached to the cable.
Refer to: Charging System - System Operation and Component Description (414-00 Charging System - General Information,
NOTE: The primary purpose of the battery eye is to be a quick indicator of the battery's state-of-charge for the dealership pre-
delivery process.
The battery eye indicates the battery state-of-charge by responding to the specific gravity of a single battery cell electrolyte. The
battery eye has a viewing plate, 2 colored balls of different specific gravity and a small passage. As the battery's state-of-charge
and specific gravity changes, the balls change their position in the passageway and display a different color in the viewing eye.
m
Do not install a new battery based only on the battery eye color. The battery eye color simply indicates the battery state-of-
charge, not its condition. For example, a red or yellow/black battery eye usually indicates the battery is discharged, not
defective. If the battery eye indicates the battery may be discharged, recharge the battery before testing its condition.
Red - low state-of-charge

Yellow/Black - between high and low state-of-charge
Green - high state-of-charge
. co
No color can occur after the battery has been in service for several years and some of the plate material has coated the
gn
balls
A clear battery eye can occur if the battery case becomes damaged and the electrolyte has fallen below the plates
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Battery Cables - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
Removal
NOTE: This procedure provides information about routing, retaining points and connectors of the cable. It does not include the
steps for removing components to gain access to the cable.


3.
1. Torque: 80 lb.in (9 Nm)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
5.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6.
1. AWD vehicles.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
General Procedures
Battery Charging
162-00036
GR-1-190 Diagnostic Charger
Charging
WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this section, refer to Safety Warnings in section 100-00
General Information. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Batteries will discharge due to normal parasitic key off-loads when the vehicle is on a dealer lot or parked by the
customer for an extended period of time. Vehicles still in dealer inventory or in long-term storage may be driven short distances
m
with heavy electrical loads. Over a period of time (30 days or more), this could result in vehicles having shallow or deeply
discharged batteries.
co
NOTE: The vehicle charging system is designed to supply the electrical power needed to maintain the battery near full charge
during normal vehicle use. The charging system is not capable of bringing a deeply discharged battery back to near full charge
in a short amount of time such as allowing the vehicle to idle for 15 minutes to recharge the battery. Use an external charger to
charge discharged batteries.
.
gn
NOTE: Cold batteries will not readily accept a charge. Allow batteries to warm to approximately 5°C (41°F) before charging.
This may require 4 to 8 hours at room temperature.

ia
2. Connect the positive (red) charger clamp to the positive battery post.
rd
Use Special Service Tool: 162-00036 GR-1-190 Diagnostic Charger.
3. Connect the negative (black) charger clamp to the negative battery post.
ca
4. Charge the battery following the battery charger manufacturer's instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
General Procedures
Battery Disconnect and Connect
Disconnect
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected and connected, some abnormal drive symptoms may occur while the vehicle relearns
its adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven to allow the PCM to relearn the adaptive strategy values.
NOTE: When disconnecting the battery ground cable to interrupt power to the vehicle electrical system, disconnect the battery
ground cable only. It is not necessary to disconnect the positive battery cable.
1.
1. Loosen, but do not remove the nut. Position the negative battery cable.
2. Position the battery cable terminal cover. Loosen, but do not remove the nut. Position the positive battery cable.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Connect
1. To connect, reverse the disconnect procedure.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
General Procedures
Battery Drain Check
Check
NOTE: No factory-equipped vehicle should have more than a 50 mA (0.050 amp) draw. Check for current drains on the battery
in excess of 50 mA (0.050 amp) with all the electrical accessories off and the vehicle at rest for at least 40 minutes. Current
drains can be tested with the following procedure.
NOTE: Many electronic modules draw 10 mA (0.010 amp) or more continuously.
NOTE: Typically, a drain of approximately 1 amp is attributed to an engine compartment lamp, glove compartment lamp or
interior lamp staying on continually. Other component failures or wiring shorts are located by selectively pulling fuses to pinpoint
the location of the current drain. When the current drain is found, the meter reading falls to an acceptable level.
NOTE: To accurately test the drain on a battery, an in-line ammeter must be used between the negative battery post and its
respective cable. Use of a test lamp or voltmeter is not an accurate method.
1. Make sure the junction box(es)/fuse panel(s) are accessible without turning on the interior lights or the underhood lights.
m
2. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 minutes over 48 km/h (30 mph) to activate the vehicle systems.
3. Allow the vehicle to sit with the ignition off for at least 40 minutes to allow the modules to time out/power down.
co
4. Connect a fused jumper wire (30A) between the negative battery cable and the negative battery post to prevent modules
from resetting.
5. Disconnect the negative battery cable from the negative battery post without breaking the connection of the fused jumper
.
wire.
gn
6. NOTE: It is very important that continuity is not broken between the battery and the negative battery cable when
connecting the meter. If this happens, repeat the time out/power down procedure.
ia
NOTE: The meter must be capable of reading milliamps and should have a 10 amp capability.
Connect a meter between the negative battery cable terminal and the negative battery post.
rd
7. NOTE: If the meter settings need to be switched or the test leads need to be moved to another jack, reinstall the fused
jumper wire to avoid breaking continuity.
ca
Remove the fused jumper wire.
8. Note the amperage draw. Draw varies from vehicle to vehicle depending on the equipment package. Compare to a
similar vehicle for reference.
9. NOTE: If the vehicle sits for an extended period of time and the battery drains, there is the possibility of a control module
staying alive and not going into sleep mode. If a control module stays alive, it can result in battery drain. If a control
module is suspected, isolate individual modules by disconnecting them one at a time and note if the excessive draw
goes away.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with aftermarket equipment containing electrical connections, disconnect the aftermarket
to factory connections to isolate the body from the chassis.
If the current draw is excessive, remove the fuses from the BJB one at a time and note the current drop. When the
current level drops to an acceptable level after removing a fuse, the circuit containing the excessive draw has been
located. The excessive draw can be isolated by continuing to pull subsystem fuses. Do not reinstall the fuses until testing
is finished. To correctly isolate each of the circuits, all of the fuses may need to be removed, then install one fuse and
note the amperage draw, remove the fuse and install the next fuse. Continue this process with each fuse.
10. Once the main circuit is identified, continue to remove the fuses from the BCM one at a time and note the current
reading. Do not reinstall the fuses until testing is finished. To correctly isolate each of the circuits, all of the fuses may
need to be removed, then install one fuse and note the amperage draw, remove the fuse and install the next fuse.
Continue this process with each fuse.
11. Check the Wiring Diagrams manual for any circuits that run from the battery without passing through the BJB or the
BCM. If the current draw is still excessive, disconnect these circuits until the draw is found. Also, disconnect the
generator electrical connections and retest if the draw cannot be located. The generator may be internally shorted,
causing the current drain.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Battery Energy Control Module B (BECMB)
Removal
WARNING: The following procedure prescribes critical repair steps required for correct restraint system operation
during a crash. Follow all notes and steps carefully. Failure to follow step instructions may result in incorrect
operation of the restraint system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
All vehicles
1. NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new component.
NOTE: The PMI process must begin with the current BECMB installed. If the current BECMB does not respond to the
diagnostic scan tool, the tool may prompt for As-Built Data as part of the repair.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the BECMB following the on-screen instructions.
m
2. Depower the SRS.
Refer to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
3. Remove the floor console. co

Refer to: Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
.
Non-police vehicles
gn
4.
2. Remove the nuts.
ia

3. Remove the BECMB and bracket.
rd
ca
Police vehicles
5.
2. Remove the nuts.
3. Remove the BECMB.
m
. co
gn
Installation

ia
2. Repower the SRS. For a new BECMB, do not prove out the SRS at this time.
rd
3. NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new BECMB.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the BECMB following the on-screen instructions.
ca
4.
If a new BECMB was installed, prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds,
then turn the ignition back to ON and monitor the airbag warning indicator with the airbag modules installed. The
airbag warning indicator illuminates continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turns off. If a SRS fault is
present, the airbag warning indicator either fails to light, remains lit continuously or flashes.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from OFF to ON.
This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the airbag warning indicator is
inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime sounds in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, diagnose and
repair the airbag warning indicator and any SRS faults.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Specifications
Specifications

General Specifications
Vehicles without a push button start system, except police vehicles

Item Specification
Voltage 12 Volts
Battery amps rating 58 amp/hr
Cold Cranking Amps (CCA) measured at -18 C (-0.4 F) 540 Cold Cranking Amps (CCA)
m
Vehicles with a push button start system, except police vehicles
Voltage
Item
. co 12 Volts
Specification

gn
ia
rd
Police vehicles
Item Specification
ca
Voltage 12 Volts

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Battery
Special Tool(s)
GR1 190 V3.0 Intelligent Diagnostic
Charger
162-00036
Battery Condition Test
Battery condition is determined by measuring battery terminal voltage after a specific discharge current is applied for a specified
time period.
m
Inspect wiring, terminals and connectors.

Inspect the battery.
. co
Inspect the battery mounting.

gn
Inspect the BJB connections.
PINPOINT TEST A : BATTERY CONDITION TEST

ia
A1
TEST THE BATTERY CONDITION
NOTE: A red test-eye indicates the battery is discharged, not necessarily damaged.
rd
NOTE: Failure to fully charge the battery before retesting may cause false readings.
Using the Intelligent Diagnostic Charger and the battery cables removed from the battery, verify the battery
ca
condition.
Is the battery OK?
Yes RETURN the battery to service.
No If the analyzer reads REPLACE BATTERY or REPLACE-BAD CELL, INSTALL a new battery.
REFER to: Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Battery
Removal

2. Remove the nuts and the battery hold-down bracket. Remove the battery.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. If equipped and replacing the battery, remove the battery cover.

m
Installation

2. If installing a new battery, use the scan tool to carry out the Battery Monitoring System (BMS) reset after the battery is
.
connected.
gn

ia
rd
ca
303-00 Engine System - General Information 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Bearing Inspection
Inspection
1.
1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot glazing - incorrect seating
3. Scratching - dirty engine oil
4. Base exposed - poor lubrication
5. Both edges worn - journal damaged
6. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not seated
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Without: SYNC
General Procedures
Bezel Diagnostics
Check
1. WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this section, refer to Health and Safety Precautions in
Refer to: Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
NOTE: If equipped with satellite radio, this procedure can be used to obtain the SIRIUS 12-digit ESN. If there is a concern with
one of the following components and bezel diagnostics and channel 0 cannot be accessed, obtain the ESN by referencing the
label attached to the ACM.
Inoperative (blank or does not power on) FCDIM (if equipped)

Inoperative (blank or does not power on) FDIM (if equipped)
Inoperative FCIM
Inoperative steering wheel switch (if applicable)
m
Refer to appropriate section in Group 415 to diagnose the inoperative component.
NOTE: If there is a concern with one of the following components and Bezel Diagnostics cannot be accessed, obtain the
co
module part number by referencing the label attached to the module.
Inoperative (blank or does not power on) FCDIM (if equipped)

Inoperative (blank or does not power on) FDIM (if equipped)
.
Inoperative FCIM
gn
Inoperative steering wheel switch (if applicable)
Refer to appropriate section in Group 415 to diagnose the inoperative component.

ia
2. Ignition ON.
3. Operate the audio system in AM/ FM mode.

rd
ca
• For vehicles with a CD player, press and hold the EJECT button, and within 1 second, press and hold the SEEK UP
button. If supported, the Speaker Walk-Around Test begins, and the display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
• For vehicles without a CD player, simultaneously press and hold the steering wheel SEEK UP switch and the FCIM
TUNE UP button. If supported, the Speaker Walk-Around Test begins, and the display indicates each speaker as it is
tested.
4. Once the Speaker Walk-Around Test completes, the following information is available:
Applicability Menu Submenu

Only for AHU Diagnostics (AHU refers to the ACM) Software Part Number
vehicles with a
Hardware Part Number
FCDIM.
Calibration Part Number
Radio Signal Strength (may need to
press OK for signal strength to display)
SIRIUS ESN
Speaker Walk-Around Test
EFP Diagnostics or EFP/ICP Diagnostics (EFP refers to the Software Part Number
FCIM that communicates on the CAN; ICP refers to the
FCIM that communicates on the LIN)
Exit Diagnostics
MFD Diagnostics - if supported (MFD refers to the FCDIM) Software Part Number
Display Test (if supported)
Only for APIM Diagnostics Part Numbers
vehicles with
Software Versions
FDIM
touchscreen. Configuration Status
GPS Information
Tones Test
Rear Tones Test (if equipped)
Touch Screen Calibration
Touch Screen Activation Test
m
Display Test Pattern
AHU Diagnostics (AHU refers to the ACM)

. co RGB Pixel Test
Exit Diagnostics
AHU Part Numbers / SIRIUS ESN or
may also appear as SIRIUS ESN (also
gn
displays AHU part numbers)
Radio Signal Strength
Speaker Walk-Around Test (if not
ia
equipped with audio DSP module)

Exit Diagnostics
rd
DSP Diagnostics (if equipped) DSP Part Numbers

Speaker Walk-Around Test
ca
Exit Diagnostics
EFP Diagnostics - if equipped (EFP refers to the FCIM that EFP Part Numbers
communicates on the CAN)
Exit Diagnostics
5. To exit the bezel diagnostics, press the FCIM On/Off button or select "Exit Diagnostics.”

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
419-04 Side and Rear Vision 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Blind Spot Information System - Component Location
Component Location - Blind Spot Monitoring System
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
1 RH exterior mirror
2 PDM (if equipped)
3 SODR
4 SODL
5 DDM (if equipped)
6 LH exterior mirror

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Blind Spot Information System - Overview
BLIS®
The BLIS® aids the driver in assessing whether another vehicle is present within a specific area (blind spot) to either side of the
vehicle, extending rearward approximately 6 m (20 ft) beyond the rear bumper while driving on roads and highways. The
system is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or objects. The BLIS® uses the exterior mirror BLIS® Light
Emitting Diodes (LEDs) to alert the driver that a vehicle has been detected. The BLIS® provides alerts when the vehicle is in
forward gear and the vehicle speed is greater than 10 km/h (6 mph).
CTA
When the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the CTA system alerts the driver of vehicles that are approaching from the side when
backing out of a front-in parking space or backing towards the road. The system can detect a vehicle approaching from 14 m
(45 ft) away at a speed up to 64 km/h (40 mph) from the left or right side of the vehicle. The CTA system uses the exterior
mirror BLIS® Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), a warning chime from the audio speakers and a message in the IPC message
center to notify the driver of approaching vehicles.
NOTE: If a MyKey® restricted key is in use, the BLIS® and CTA system cannot be turned off in the IPC.
m
NOTE: If the vehicle is towing a trailer the BLIS® or CTA system may detect the trailer and cause a false alert.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Blind Spot Information System - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
BLIS® and CTA
System Diagram - Vehicles Without Door Modules
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Network Message Chart - Vehicles Without Door Modules

ca

IPC Network Input Messages

Module
Cross traffic alert left SODL Used to command the CTA audio chime and the BLIS® RTT.
status
Cross traffic alert right SODR
status
Side obstacle sensor SODL Used to communicate the operating status of the SODL and to command the BLIS®/
status - left CTA message center displays.
Side obstacle sensor SODR Used to communicate the operating status of the SODR and to command the BLIS®/
status - right CTA message center displays.

ACM Network Input Messages
Chime mode IPC Used to command the CTA audio chimes on vehicles without Sony sound®.

DSP Network Input Messages

Chime mode IPC Used to command the CTA audio chimes on vehicles with Sony sound®.

SODL Network Input Messages

Module
m
Active park assist PAM Disables the CTA warnings during active park assist maneuvers.
system status
BLIS®/ CTA enable
command
Gear lever position
IPC
PCM
co
Used to enable/disable the BLIS® or CTA based on driver input.
Used to turn the BLIS® and CTA system on and off depending the gear lever position.
.
gn
Ignition key type BCM Used to disable the ability to turn OFF the BLIS® and CTA when a MyKey® restricted
key is in use.
Turn signal status SCCM Used to generate the secondary alert when a turn signal is activated.
ia
Vehicle speed PCM Used to activate the BLIS® after an ignition cycle and deactivate the CTA system when
the vehicle speed exceeds preset thresholds.
rd
VIN information BCM Contains VIN information.

Wiper status SCCM Used to determine ambient weather conditions for correct system operation.
ca

SODR Network Input Messages

Module
system status
BLIS®/ CTA enable IPC Used to enable/disable the BLIS® or CTA based on driver input.
command
Gear lever position PCM Used to turn the BLIS® and CTA system on and off depending the gear lever position.
key is in use.
Vehicle speed PCM Used to activate the BLIS® after an ignition cycle and deactivate the CTA system when
the vehicle speed exceeds preset thresholds.
System Diagram - Vehicles With Door Modules
m
. co
gn
Network Message Chart - Vehicles With Door Modules

ia

rd

Module
ca
Cross traffic alert left SODL Used to command the CTA audio chime and the BLIS® RTT.
status
Cross traffic alert right SODR
status
Side obstacle sensor SODL Used to communicate the operating status of the SODL and to command the BLIS®/
status - left CTA message center displays.
Side obstacle sensor SODR Used to communicate the operating status of the SODR and to command the BLIS®/
status - right CTA message center displays.

ACM Network Input Messages

Chime mode IPC Used to command the CTA audio chimes on vehicles without Sony sound®.

DSP Network Input Messages

Chime mode IPC Used to command the CTA audio chimes on vehicles with Sony sound®.

DDM Network Input Messages

BLIS®/ CTA LED command - left SODL Used to command the LH BLIS®/ CTA LED on and off.

PDM Network Input Messages
m
BLIS®/ CTA LED command - right SODR
. co
Used to command the RH BLIS®/ CTA LED on and off.
gn

SODL Network Input Messages
ia

rd
Module
system status
ca
BLIS®/ CTA IPC Used to enable/disable the BLIS® or CTA based on driver input.
enable/disable
command
BLIS® driver LED DDM Used to confirm the operating status of the LH exterior mirror BLIS® LED.
status
key is in use.
Vehicle speed PCM Used to activate the BLIS® after an ignition cycle and deactivate the CTA system
when the vehicle speed exceeds preset thresholds.

SODR Network Input Messages
Module
system status
BLIS®/ CTA IPC Used to enable/disable the BLIS® or CTA based on driver input.
enable/disable
command
BLIS® passenger LED PDM Used to confirm the operating status of the RH exterior mirror BLIS®) LED.
status
key is in use.
Vehicle speed PCM Used to activate the BLIS® after an ignition cycle and deactivate the CTA system
when the vehicle speed exceeds preset thresholds.
m
BLIS®
co
NOTE: If the vehicle is towing a trailer the BLIS® system may detect the trailer and cause a false alert.
The BLIS® provides alerts to the driver when the vehicle is in a forward gear and the vehicle speed is greater than 10 km/h (6
.
gn
mph).
The BLIS® can trigger an alert for vehicles that enter the blind zone from the rear, front, or merge into the blind zone from the
side. The exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED illuminates in the right and/or left exterior mirror when a target is present. For
vehicles that pass through the blind zone quickly, typically less than 2 seconds, the BLIS® may not trigger an alert.
ia
If a turn signal is active while BLIS® has detected a target in the blind zone, the BLIS®/ CTA LED flashes rapidly. When the
rd
turn signal is off, the BLIS® target warnings are a constant LED illumination.
NOTE: The BLIS® is not intended to detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, or objects such as fences, guard rails or trees.
ca
NOTE: There should be no bumper stickers or body filler material used on the rear side bumper cover in the vicinity of the
SODL or SODR.
Due to the nature of radar technology, false alerts may occur under certain circumstances. False alerts occur when the LED
illuminates with no target present. False alerts up to 3% (3 out of 100 targets) is considered normal operation. False alerts are
temporary and self-correcting. False alerts may be caused by sharp turns around a pole or building, jogging pedestrians or fast
moving shopping carts.
Missed targets occur when a target is present and the LED does not illuminate. Missed targets up to 1% (1 out of 100 targets)
is considered normal operation.
Circumstances that cause missed alerts are:
Debris build-up or bumper stickers on the rear bumper sides

Certain maneuvering of the vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone
Vehicles passing through the blind zone at high rates of speed
When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone
The BLIS® may not detect an adjacent target immediately when the vehicle accelerates from a standing start with another
vehicle alongside.
CTA System
NOTE: The CTA system is only active when reverse gear is selected.
NOTE: If the vehicle is towing a trailer the CTA system may detect the trailer and cause a false alert.
When the transmission is in reverse, the CTA system can detect a vehicle or a bicycle that is approaching at a speed between
8 km/h and 64 km/h (5 mph and 40 mph) and time to impact is between 1 and 2.5 seconds. The distance at which an alert is
generated varries depending on the speed of the approching vehicles or bicycles. The CTA system response time and
performance can degrade if vehicles are approaching at speeds greater than 64 km/h (40 mph).
An adjacent parked vehicle or object can affect the systems ability to detect approaching vehicles or bicycles (refer to figure 1).
Parking in at extreme angles can further affect the systems ability to detect approaching vehicles or bicycles (refer to figure 2).
Backing towards a curve road can also affect systems ability to detect approaching vehicles or bicycles (refer to figure 3).
CTA detection zones:
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
The CTA system is designed to detect any objects approaching the vehicle at a speed equal to or greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).
This includes vehicles and bicycles. The CTA system has some detection limitations due to the nature of the radar technology
used by the SODL and SODR. co
NOTE: The CTA system is not intended to detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, or objects such as fences, guard rails or trees.
.
NOTE: There should be no bumper stickers or body filler material used on the rear side bumper cover in the vicinity of the
gn
SODL or SODR.
Circumstances that may cause non-detection are:

ia

The rear quarter panel of the vehicle is obstructed or partially obstructed by an adjacently parked vehicle or object
Vehicle approaching at speeds greater than 64 km/h (40 mph)
rd
Driving in reverse faster than 12 km/h (7.5 mph)

Damage to sensor and/or sensor area
ca
Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances when the CTA system alerts the operator, when no
object or vehicle is present while backing up. This is known as a false alert. False alerts up to 3% of the time (3 times out of 100
reversals) are considered normal. A false alert may occur when backing out of a garage or backing into a parking space and
objects or vehicles are very close to the radar sensors. False alerts are temporary and self-correcting.
Missed targets occur when a target is present and the LED does not illuminate. Missed targets up to 1% (1 out of 100 targets)
is considered normal operation.
Circumstances that cause missed alerts are:

Certain maneuvering of the vehicles entering and exiting the detection zone
Vehicles passing through the detection zone at high rates of speed
When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the detection zone
Exterior Mirror Indication - Vehicles Without Door Modules
When the BLIS® or CTA system is active and an object is detected by the SODL and/or SODR, the SODL and/or SODR
supplies voltage to illuminate their respective exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED. The exterior mirrors provide ground to the
BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Each time the vehicle is started, the SODL and SODR command the exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
to illuminate for approximately 3 seconds, indicating the BLIS® and CTA system is operational.
If a BLIS® or CTA system fault is present, the exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) remains off, the IPC
BLIS® RTT illuminates and a message center warning displays BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT.
Exterior Mirror Indication - Vehicles With Door Modules
When the BLIS® or CTA system is active and an object is detected by the SODL or SODR, the BLIS®/ CTA LED command
message is sent from the SODL or SODR to the DDM or PDM. The DDM and PDM supply voltage and ground to illuminate
their respective exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED based on messages received from the SODL and SODR.
Each time the vehicle is started, the SODL and SODR command the DDM and PDM to illuminate the exterior mirror BLIS®/
CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for approximately 3 seconds, indicating the BLIS® and CTA system is operational.
If a BLIS® or CTA system fault is present, the exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) remains off, the IPC
BLIS® RTT illuminates and a message center warning displays BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT.
BLIS® and CTA Message Center Function
NOTE: CTA system faults may not be detected until the transmission is placed in reverse.
NOTE: The BLIS® and CTA system menus in the message center are not available when a MyKey® restricted key is in use.
The BLIS® can be turned off by using the blind spot on/off function in the message center. When the BLIS® has been turned
off by the driver or if a system fault is present, the BLIS® RTT in the message center remains on. When turning the system on
or off, the exterior mirror Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) flash 2 times. When the BLIS® is turned off, the driver cannot receive
any alerts. The system remains off until turned back on by the driver.
m
The CTA system can be turned off by selecting the CTA system on/off function in the message center. The system defaults to
on with each ignition cycle.
co
There are some system faults that set Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the SODL, SODR, DDM (if equipped) or PDM (if
equipped). These Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set a message in the IPC message center that displays BLIND SPOT
SYSTEM FAULT and/or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM FAULT. There are also symptom based faults that do not set a DTC.
.
Blocked Sensor
gn
NOTE: Blockage sensing becomes active after the wipers are activated.
NOTE: A blocked state is not a system fault. A blocked state is a normal mode of operation under blocked conditions.
ia
An excessive build-up of materials on the rear bumper sides, such as mud or snow, can cause the BLIS® or CTA system
functionality to degrade. Heavy rain can have the same affect on the system. If a blocked state is detected, the SODL and
rd
SODR blockage sensing senses the performance degradation and enters the SODL and SODR into a blocked state. The
performance degradation means alerting late on targets or additional missed targets. Upon entering a blocked state, the SODL
and/or SODR send a status message over the MS-CAN to the GWM. The GWM then sends the message to the IPC on the HS-
ca
CAN3. The message center displays BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED or CROSS TRAFFIC NOT
AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED and the LH and RH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) illuminate.
The message center warning can be cleared by the driver, but the amber BLIS® RTT in the IPC remains illuminated. A blocked
state will self clear when blockage sensing senses performance has returned to normal operation. The ignition can also be
cycled off to clear the blocked state. If the blockage is still present after the ignition cycle, or after some drive time the system
detects again that it is blocked, the blocked sensor message is displayed again in the message center and the amber BLIS® off
IPC RTT is illuminated again.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blocked sensor warning without the radar sensor being blocked.
This is rare and is known as a false blockage warning. A false blocked condition either self-clears or clears after an ignition
cycle.
SODL/ SODR
The SODL and SODR are radar based sensors that are located rearward of the rear wheel under the bumper cover. These
sensors detect targets for the BLIS® and CTA system. The modules are capable of storing Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
for the BLIS® or CTA system when a concern exists. The SODL and SODR communicate through the MS-CAN.
The SODL and SODR require PMI when replaced.

Refer to: Module Configuration (418-01 Module Configuration) .
BLIS®/ CTA LED

The BLIS®/ CTA LED is integral to the LH and RH exterior mirror glass.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Blind Spot Information System
DTC Chart(s)

SODL and SODR DTC Chart

B11D6:11 Driver Display Alert GO to Pinpoint Test E
LED: Circuit Short To
Ground
B11D6:15 Driver Display Alert If the LH or RH BLIS®/ CTA LED is inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test E
m
LED: Circuit Short To If the LH or RH BLIS®/ CTA LED is always on, GO to Pinpoint Test C
Battery or Open
With ECM/PCM "A":
No Sub Type
Information
GO to Pinpoint Test I
. co
gn
U0101:00 Lost Communication GO to Pinpoint Test I
with TCM: No Sub
Type Information
U0146:00 Lost Communication GO to Pinpoint Test J
ia
with Gateway "A": No

rd
U0199:00 Lost Communication GO to Pinpoint Test K

With "Door Control
Module A": No Sub
ca
Type Information
U0200:00 Lost Communication GO to Pinpoint Test L
With "Door Control
Module B": No Sub
Type Information
U0401:86 Invalid Data Received This continuous memory DTC sets when the SODL or SODR receives invalid network data
from ECM/PCM A: from the PCM. RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
Signal Invalid in the other modules on the network. If no PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) exist,
DIAGNOSE the observable symptom.
U0402:86 Invalid Data Received This continuous memory DTC sets when the SODL or SODR receives invalid transmission
from TCM: Signal range network data from the PCM. RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network Diagnostic
Invalid Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the other modules on the network. If no PCM Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTCs) exist, DIAGNOSE the observable symptom.
U049A:86 Invalid Data Received This continuous memory DTC sets when the SODL receives invalid network data from the
From "Door Control DDM. RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the
Module A": Signal other modules on the network. If no DDM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) exist,
Invalid DIAGNOSE the observable symptom.
U0501:86 Invalid Data Received This continuous memory DTC sets when the SODR receives invalid network data from the
From "Door Control PDM. RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the
Module B": Signal other modules on the network. If no PDM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) exist,
Invalid DIAGNOSE the observable symptom.
U2100:00 Initial Configuration This continuous memory DTC sets due to incomplete or incorrect PMI procedures.
Not Complete: No CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to this module.
Sub Type Information If there have been recent service actions with this module, INSTALL as-built
data from Professional Technician Society (PTS) following diagnostic scan
tool instructions under Module Programming>As-Built.
REFER to: Module Configuration (418-01 Module Configuration) .
If there have been no recent service actions, INSTALL a new module to
correct the failure to retain configuration data.
REFER to: Side Obstacle Detection Control Module (419-04 Side and Rear
Vision, Removal and Installation).
U2300:55 Central Configuration: This continuous memory DTC sets when the SODL or SODR does not detect the VIN
Not Configured information on the MS-CAN. RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTCs) in all other modules.
U3000:44 Control Module: Data CLEAR the SODL or SODR Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and REPEAT the
Memory Failure self-test. If DTC U3000:44 returns, INSTALL a new SODL or SODR.
REFER to: Side Obstacle Detection Control Module (419-04 Side and Rear Vision,
Removal and Installation).
U3000:45 Control Module: CLEAR the SODL or SODR Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and REPEAT the
Program Memory self-test. If DTC U3000:45 returns, INSTALL a new SODL or SODR.
Failure REFER to: Side Obstacle Detection Control Module (419-04 Side and Rear Vision,
m
Calibration/Parameter
Memory Failure
co
self-test. If DTC U3000:46 returns, INSTALL a new SODL or SODR.
REFER to: Side Obstacle Detection Control Module (419-04 Side and Rear Vision,
.
gn
Internal Electronic self-test. If DTC U3000:49 returns, INSTALL a new SODL or SODR.
Failure REFER to: Side Obstacle Detection Control Module (419-04 Side and Rear Vision,
ia
U3002:62 Vehicle Identification This DTC sets when the VIN stored in the SODL or SODR does not match the VIN
rd
Number: Signal that is broadcast on the network. CHECK the vehicle service history for recent
Compare Failure service actions related to this module.
If there have been recent service actions with this module, REPEAT the PMI
procedure as directed by the diagnostic scan tool.
ca

If there have been no recent service actions, INSTALL a new module to
correct the failure to retain configuration data.
REFER to: Side Obstacle Detection Control Module (419-04 Side and Rear
Vision, Removal and Installation).

DDM DTC Chart

B118C:11 Left Blind Spot Warning Indicator: GO to Pinpoint Test F
Circuit Short To Ground
B118C:15 Left Blind spot Warning Indicator: If the LH BLIS®/ CTA LED is inoperative, GO to
Circuit Short To Battery or Open Pinpoint Test F
If the LH BLIS®/ CTA LED is always on, GO to
Pinpoint Test D
All other DDM Diagnostic -

Trouble Codes (DTCs) REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems) .

PDM DTC Chart

B118D:11 Right Blind Spot Warning Indicator: GO to Pinpoint Test F
B118D:15 Right Blind spot Warning Indicator: If the RH BLIS®/ CTA LED is inoperative, GO to
m
Circuit Short To Battery or Open Pinpoint Test F
If the RH BLIS®/ CTA LED is always on, GO to
Pinpoint Test D
All other PDM Diagnostic

Trouble Codes (DTCs)
-
co REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems) .
.
gn
Symptom Chart(s)
ia
rd
ca

Symptom Chart - BLIS®
Condition Possible Sources Action

A module does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Fuse
Communication REFER to: Communications Network
concern (418-00 Module Communications
Wiring, Network) .
terminals or
connectors
Module
The BLIS® is inoperative or does not function correctly Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test A
Test
The BLIS® has poor or inconsistent performance Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test A
Test
The BLIS® message center warnings are not displayed and Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test A
the exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED does not illuminate Test
An exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED is always on Refer to the Pinpoint For vehicles without door
Test modules, GO to Pinpoint Test C
For vehicles with door modules,
GO to Pinpoint Test D
An exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED does not illuminate Refer to the Pinpoint For vehicles without door
Test modules, GO to Pinpoint Test E
For vehicles with door modules,
GO to Pinpoint Test F
The IPC message center displays a blocked sensor Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test G
message Test
The BLIS® cannot be turned off in the message center Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test H
Test

Symptom Chart - CTA

Communication REFER to: Communications Network
m
concern (418-00 Module Communications
Wiring, Network) .
. co terminals or
connectors
Module
The CTA system is inoperative or does not function correctly Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test B
gn
Test
The CTA system has poor or inconsistent performance Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test B
Test
ia
The CTA system message center warnings are not displayed Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test B
and the exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED does not illuminate Test
rd
An exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED does not illuminate when Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test B
the audio tone sounds for the CTA system Test
ca
An exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED is always on Refer to the Pinpoint For vehicles without door
Test modules, GO to Pinpoint Test
C
For vehicles with door
modules, GO to Pinpoint Test
D
An exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED does not illuminate Refer to the Pinpoint For vehicles without door
Test modules, GO to Pinpoint Test
E
For vehicles with door
modules, GO to Pinpoint Test
F
The IPC message center displays a blocked sensor message Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test G
Test
The CTA system cannot be turned off in the message center Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test H
Test
Pinpoint Tests
The BLIS® Is Inoperative Or Does Not Function Correctly
REFER to: Blind Spot Information System - System Operation and Component Description (419-04 Side and Rear Vision,
Possible Causes
Communication network concern

Obstruction or damage to the rear bumper cover sides
Configuration concern
SODL
SODR
IPC concern
PCM concern
GWM concern
DDM concern (for vehicles with door modules only)
PDM concern (for vehicles with door modules only)
Visual Inspection and Diagnostic Pre-Checks
m
Verify for obstruction or damage to the rear bumper cover sides.
FUNCTION CORRECTLY
. co
PINPOINT TEST A : THE BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ® IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT
A1
VERIFY THE LH (LEFT-HAND) AND RH (RIGHT-HAND) EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT
gn
INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Observe the LH and RH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
ia
Start the engine.

rd
Do the LH and RH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) illuminate and turn off after
approximately 3 seconds?
ca
Yes GO to A2
No • If either LED is inoperative for vehicles without door modules, GO to Pinpoint Test E
• If either LED is inoperative for vehicles with door modules, GO to Pinpoint Test F
• If either LED is always on for vehicles without door modules, GO to Pinpoint Test C
• If either LED is always on vehicles with door modules, GO to Pinpoint Test D
A2
VERIFY THE BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ® OPERATION
Verify the operation of the BLIS®.
Does the BLIS® operate correctly?
Yes The concern may have been caused by an intermittent condition such as poor weather conditions or
the customer's perception of proper BLIS operation. REVIEW the normal system operation with the
customer. REFER to the Owner's Literature.
No GO to A3
A3
CHECK FOR SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) OBSTRUCTIONS
Ignition OFF.
Check the lower rear side bumper cover for a build up of mud, bumper stickers or any obstruction.
Are any obstructions present?
Yes CLEAN and REMOVE all obstructions from the lower rear side bumper cover.
No GO to A4
A4
INSPECT THE REAR BUMPER COVER, SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND
SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) FOR DAMAGE
Inspect the lower rear side bumper cover and the SODL and SODR mounting brackets for damage.
Is any damage present?
Yes REPAIR or INSTALL new parts as necessary.
m
•
REFER to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
• co
REFER to: Side Obstacle Detection Control Module (419-04 Side and Rear Vision, Removal and
Installation).
.
No GO to A5
gn
A5
VERIFY THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
ia
DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) PASS THE NETWORK TEST

Ignition ON.
rd
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the network test.

ca
Do the SODL and SODR pass the network test?
Yes GO to A6
No
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network) .
A6
CHECK THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from the SODL and SODR.
Are any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes REFER to the SODL and SODR DTC chart in this section.
No GO to A7
A7
VERIFY THE MESSAGE CENTER FUNCTIONALITY
Verify the message center functions correctly.
Does the message center function correctly?
Yes GO to A8
No
REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation,
Message Center and Warning Chimes) .
A8
VERIFY THE BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ® IS ENABLED IN THE MESSAGE CENTER
NOTE: Verify a MyKey® is NOT in use.
Navigate to the BLIS® menu in the message center and verify the BLIS® is ON.
Is the BLIS® ON?
Yes GO to A9
No ACTIVATE the BLIS®. If the system cannot be activated, GO to A10
m
A9
CHECK FOR CORRECT GEAR INPUT
Apply the parking brake.
. co
While monitoring the reversing lamps, move the selector lever through the entire range.
gn
Do the reversing lamps illuminate only in reverse?

ia
Yes GO to A10
No
rd
REFER to: Reversing Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
ca
A10
PERFORM THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) KOEO (KEY ON, ENGINE OFF) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the PCM KOEO self-test.
Yes Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the procedure.
No GO to A11
A11
CHECK THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) CONTINUOUS MEMORY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(CMDTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, check the GWM Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
Yes
No • For vehicles without door modules, GO to A14

• For vehicles with door modules, GO to A12
A12
PERFORM THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the DDM self-test.
Yes • For DTC B118C:11 or DTC B118C:15, REFER to the DDM DTC chart in this section.
• For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),
REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems)
.
No GO to A13
A13
PERFORM THE PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the PDM self-test.
m
Yes • For DTC B118D:11 or DTC B118D:15, REFER to the PDM DTC chart in this section.
• For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), co
.
.
No GO to A14
gn
A14
ia
DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) CONFIGURATION

Check the vehicle service history for recent service action related to the SODL and SODR.
rd
Have there been any recent sevice actions related to the SODL or SODR?
ca
Yes INSTALL As-Built data into the SODLand SODR from Professional Technician Society (PTS)
following diagnostic scan tool instructions under Module Programming>As-Built.
No • For a SODL concern, GO to A15

• For a SODR concern, GO to A16
A15
CHECK FOR CORRECT SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SODL and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SODL and related in-line connectors. Make sure the connectors seat and latch correctly.

concern, DISCONTINUE this test and FOLLOW the TSB instructions. If no Technical Service
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SODL.
Installation).
No The system is operating correctly at this time. Concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues.
A16
CHECK FOR CORRECT SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SODR and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SODR and related in-line connectors. Make sure the connectors seat and latch correctly.
m
Is the concern still present? co

.
gn
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SODR.
Installation).
ia
rd
ca
The CTA System Is Inoperative Or Does Not Function Correctly
Possible Causes

Obstruction or damage to the rear bumper cover sides
Configuration concern
SODL
SODR
IPC concern
PCM concern
GWM concern
PAM concern (internal to the BCM)
DDM concern (for vehicles with door modules only)
PDM concern (for vehicles with door modules only)
Verify for obstruction or damage to the rear bumper cover sides.
PINPOINT TEST B : THE CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT FUNCTION
CORRECTLY
B1
VERIFY THE LH (LEFT-HAND) AND RH (RIGHT-HAND) EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Observe the LH and RH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Start the engine.
Do the LH and RH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) illuminate and turn off after
approximately 3 seconds?
Yes GO to B2
No • If either LED is inoperative for vehicles without door modules, GO to Pinpoint Test E
m
• If either LED is inoperative for vehicles with door modules, GO to Pinpoint Test F
• If either LED is always on for vehicles without door modules, GO to Pinpoint Test C
• If either LED is always on vehicles with door modules, GO to Pinpoint Test D
co
B2
VERIFY THE CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) SYSTEM OPERATION
.
gn
Verify the operation of the CTA system.
Does the CTA operate correctly?

ia
Yes The concern may have been caused by an intermittent condition such as poor weather conditions or
rd
the customer's perception of proper CTA system operation. REVIEW proper system operation with
the customer. REFER to the Owner's Literature.
No GO to B3
ca
B3
CHECK FOR SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) OBSTRUCTIONS
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the lower rear side bumper cover for a build up of dirt, debris, bumper stickers or other obstructions.
Are any obstructions present?
Yes CLEAN and REMOVE all obstructions from the lower rear side bumper cover.
No GO to B4
B4
Inspect the lower rear side bumper cover and the SODL and SODR mounting brackets for damage.

Yes REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary.
•
•
Installation).
No GO to B5
B5
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to B6
m
No

. co
B6
CHECK THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
gn
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from the SODL and SODR.

ia
rd
No GO to B7
ca
B7
VERIFY THE MESSAGE CENTER FUNCTIONALITY
Verify the message center functions correctly.
Yes GO to B8
No
B8
VERIFY THE CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) IS ENABLED IN THE MESSAGE CENTER
NOTE: Verify a MyKey® is NOT in use.
Navigate to the CTA menu in the message center and verify the CTA system is ON.
Is the CTA system ON?
Yes GO to B9
No ACTIVATE the CTA system. If the system cannot be activated, GO to B10
B9
CHECK FOR CORRECT GEAR INPUT
Apply the parking brake.
While monitoring the reversing lamps, move the selector lever through the entire range.
Do the reversing lamps illuminate only in reverse?
Yes GO to B10
No
REFER to: Reversing Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B10
PERFORM THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) KOEO (KEY ON, ENGINE OFF) SELF-TEST
m
Yes DIAGNOSE the PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Refer to the appropriate section in Group
No
303 for the procedure. co
• For vehicles without the active park assist system, GO to B12
• For vehicles with the active park assist system, GO to B11
.
gn
B11
PERFORM THE PAM (PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
ia
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the PAM self-test.

rd
Yes
ca
REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13A Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid, Diagnosis and
Testing).
No GO to B12
B12
(CMDTCS)
Yes
No • For vehicles without door modules, GO to B15

• For vehicles with door modules, GO to B13
B13
Yes • For DTC B118C:11 or DTC B118C:15, REFER to the DDM DTC chart in this section.
.
No GO to B14
B14
Yes • For DTC B118D:11 or DTC B118D:15, REFER to the PDM DTC chart in this section.
.
m
No GO to B15
DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) CONFIGURATION

. co
B15
Check the vehicle service history for recent service action related to the SODL and SODR.
gn
Have there been any recent sevice actions related to the SODL or SODR?
ia
Yes INSTALL As-Built data into the SODLand SODR from Professional Technician Society (PTS)
following diagnostic scan tool instructions under Module Programming>As-Built.
rd
No • For a SODL concern,GO to B16

• For a SODR concern, GO to B17
ca
B16
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Installation).
B17
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
Installation).
. co
gn
ia
An Exterior Mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED Is Always On (Without Door Modules)

rd
ca


B11D6:15 Driver Display Alert This DTC sets in continuous memory and on-demand in the SODL or SODR when a lower
LED: Circuit Short than expected current draw (such as a short to voltage) is detected on the LH or RH
To Battery or Open exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED output circuit for 500 mili-seconds.
Possible Causes

SODL
SODR
PINPOINT TEST C : AN EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) IS ALWAYS ON (WITHOUT DOOR MODULES)
C1
VERIFY THE EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) OPERATION
Start the engine.
Observe the exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for 10 seconds.
Is the always on condition still present?
Yes GO to C2
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by an intermittent
condition.
C2
CHECK THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION
CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) SELF-TESTS
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the SODL and SODR self-tests.
m
Are any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) recorded?
Yes • For DTC B11D6:15, GO to C3

co
• For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the SODL and SODR DTC chart in this
.
section.
gn
No GO to C3
ia
C3
CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
rd
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: SODL C4369. (LH LED concern).

ca
Disconnect: SODR C4370. (RH LED concern).
Ignition ON.
Measure:

SODL

C4369-4 Ground

SODR

C4370-4 Ground
No • For a LH LED concern, GO to C4

• For a RH LED concern, GO to C5
C4
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m

. co
gn
ia
Installation).
rd
ca
C5
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Installation).
An Exterior Mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED Is Always On (With Door Modules)

m
B118C:15 Left Blind Spot Warning This DTC sets in continuous memory and on-demand in the DDM when a lower than
Indicator: Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
B118D:15 Right Blind Spot Warning
co
expected current draw (such as a short to voltage) is detected on the LH exterior
mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED output circuit.
This DTC sets in continuous memory and on-demand in the PDM when a lower than
.
Indicator: Circuit Short To expected current draw (such as a short to voltage) is detected on the RH exterior
gn
Battery or Open mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED output circuit.
ia
Possible Causes
rd

DDM
PDM
ca
PINPOINT TEST D : AN EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) IS ALWAYS ON (WITH DOOR MODULES)
D1
VERIFY THE EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) OPERATION
Start the engine.
Observe the exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for 10 seconds.
Is the always on condition still present?
Yes If the LH LED is always on, GO to D2

If the RH LED is always on, GO to D4
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by an intermittent
condition.
D2
CHECK THE LH (LEFT-HAND) EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA
(CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect DDM C501B.
Ignition ON.
Does the BLIS®/ CTA LED turn off?
Yes GO to D6
No GO to D3
D3
CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN THE LH (LEFT-HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/
CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) OUTPUT CIRCUIT AND THE MEMORY POSITION
SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

m
C501B-5 C501B-19

. co
Yes GO to D6
gn
No REPAIR the circuits.

ia
D4
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA
(CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
rd
Ignition OFF.
ca
Disconnect PDM C652B.
Ignition ON.
Does the BLIS®/ CTA LED turn off?
Yes GO to D7
No GO to D5
D5
CHECK FOR A SHORT BETWEEN THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/
CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) OUTPUT CIRCUIT AND THE MEMORY POSITION
SENSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C652B-5 C652B-19
Yes GO to D7
D6
CHECK FOR CORRECT DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the DDM and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the DDM and related in-line connectors. Make sure the connectors seat and latch correctly.
m
co
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DDM.
.
gn
REFER to: Driver Door Module (DDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Removal and
Installation).
ia
rd
D7
CHECK FOR CORRECT PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) OPERATION
ca
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the PDM and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the PDM and related in-line connectors. Make sure the connectors seat and latch correctly.
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PDM.
REFER to: Passenger Door Module (PDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Removal and
Installation).
An Exterior Mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED Is Inoperative (Without Door Modules)


B11D6:11 Driver Display Alert This DTC sets in continuous memory and on-demand in the SODL or SODR when a higher
LED: Circuit Short To than expected current draw (such as a short to ground) is detected on the LH or RH
m
Ground exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED output circuit for 2.5 seconds.
B11D6:15 Driver Display Alert This DTC sets in continuous memory and on-demand in the SODL or SODR when an open
Battery or Open seconds.

. co
LED: Circuit Short To circuit is detected on the LH or RH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED output circuit for 2.5
gn
Possible Causes

ia
Exterior mirror
SODL
SODR
rd
Exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED (integral to the exterior mirror glass)
ca
PINPOINT TEST E : AN EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) IS INOPERATIVE (WITHOUT DOOR MODULES)
E1
CHECK THE BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) OPERATION
Start the engine.
Observe the left and right exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Do the left and right BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) illuminate and turn off after 3 seconds?
Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by an intermittent
fault condition. VERIFY the operation of the and CTA system.
No GO to E2
E2
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a network test.

Yes GO to E3
No
E3
CHECK THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION
Yes • For DTC B11D6:11 or DTC B11D6:15, GO to E4

• For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the SODL and SODR DTC chart in this
section.
No GO to E5
m
E4
Ignition OFF.
. co
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: SODL C4369 (LH LED concern).

gn
Disconnect: SODR C4370 (RH LED concern).
Measure:
ia

rd

SODL
ca

C4369-4 Ground

SODR

C4370-4 Ground
Yes GO to E5
E5
CHECK THE SUSPECTED EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) FOR ILLUMINATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: SODL C4369 (LH LED concern).
Disconnect: SODR C4370 (RH LED concern).
Connect a fused jumper wire:

LH Exterior Mirror LED

C4369-5 C4369-4
m

RH Exterior Mirror LED
Positive Lead
co
Measurement / Action
.
Negative Lead
C4370-5 C4370-4
gn
Ignition ON.
ia
Does the LED in question illuminate?

rd
Yes • REMOVE the fused jumper wire. For the LH LED, GO to E11
ca
• REMOVE the fused jumper wire. For the RH LED, GO to E12
No REMOVE the fused jumper wire, GO to E6
E6
CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR GLASS BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: LH BLIS®/ CTA LED C576 (LH LED concern).
Disconnect: RH BLIS®/ CTA LED C676 (RH LED concern).
Measure:


C576-1 (component side) C576-2 (component side)


Yes GO to E7
No INSTALL a new exterior mirror glass for the mirror in question.
REFER to: Exterior Mirror (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
m
E7
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

. co

gn

ia
C4369-4 C576-1
rd

ca


C4370-4 C676-1
Yes GO to E9
No GO to E8
E8
CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: LH Exterior Mirror C516 (LH LED concern).
Disconnect: RH Exterior Mirror C601 (RH LED concern).

Measure:


C4369-4 C516-13


C4370-4 C601-13
m
Yes GO to E13

. co
gn
E9
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ia
Measure:
rd

ca

C576-2 Ground


C676-2 Ground
Yes • For the LH LED, GO to E11

• For the RH LED, GO to E12
No GO to E10
E10
CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: LH Exterior Mirror C516 (LH LED concern).
Disconnect: RH Exterior Mirror C601 (RH LED concern).
Measure:


C516-7 Ground
m

Positive Lead
co
.
Negative Lead
gn
C601-7 Ground
ia

rd
Yes GO to E13
ca
E11
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all SODL and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SODL and related in-line connectors. Make sure all connectors seat and latch correctly.
Installation).
E12
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all SODR and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SODR and related in-line connectors. Make sure all connectors seat and latch correctly.
m
co
Installation).
.
gn
ia
E13
CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR JUMPER HARNESS
rd
Inspect the exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the mirror glass for:
Open or short circuits
Damaged or pushed out pins
ca
Corrosion
Is the harness OK?
Yes INSTALL a new exterior mirror.
No REPAIR the harness as necessary. If the harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new exterior
mirror.
An Exterior Mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED Is Inoperative (With Door Modules)



B118C:11 Left Blind Spot Warning This DTC sets in continuous memory and on-demand in the DDM when a higher
Indicator: Circuit Short To than expected current draw is detected on the LH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA
Ground LED output circuit.
B118C:15 Left Blind Spot Warning This DTC sets in continuous memory and on-demand in the DDM when an open
Indicator: Circuit Short To circuit is detected on the LH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED output circuit.
Battery or Open
B118D:11 Right Blind Spot Warning This DTC sets in continuous memory and on-demand in the PDM when a higher
Indicator: Circuit Short To than expected current draw is detected on the RH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA
Ground LED output circuit.
B118D:15 Right Blind Spot Warning This DTC sets in continuous memory and on-demand in the PDM when an open
Indicator: Circuit Short To circuit is detected on the RH exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED output circuit.
Battery or Open
m
Possible Causes

. co
gn
Exterior mirror
DDM
PDM
Exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA LED (integral to the exterior mirror glass)
ia
PINPOINT TEST F : AN EXTERIOR MIRROR BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC
rd
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) IS INOPERATIVE (WITH DOOR MODULES)

F1
CHECK THE BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) OPERATION
ca
Start the engine.
Observe the left and right exterior mirror BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Do the left and right BLIS®/ CTA Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) illuminate and turn off after 3 seconds?
fault condition. VERIFY the operation of the BLIS® and CTA system.
No GO to F2
F2
PERFORM A NETWORK TEST
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Do the DDM and PDM pass the network test?
Yes GO to F3
No
F3
CHECK FOR RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR
MODULE) OR PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the DDM ( LH LED concern) or PDM ( RH LED concern) self-tests.
Is DDM DTC B118C:11 or PDM DTC B118D:11 present?
Yes • For DTC B118C:11, GO to F4

• For DTC B118D:11, GO to F10
No •If the LH BLIS®/ CTA LED is inoperative, GO to F7

• If the RH BLIS®/ CTA LED is inoperative, GO to F13
F4
CHECK THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) WITH THE LH (LEFT-
HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING
DIODE) DISCONNECTED
m
Using the diagnostic scan tool, clear the DDM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect LH BLIS®/ CTA LED C576.

co
Ignition ON. NOTE: DTC B118C:11 may be set during this step, it can be ignored.
.
gn
Using the diagnostic scan tool, perform the DDM self-test.
Is DTC B118C:15 present?

ia
Yes INSTALL a new LH exterior mirror glass.

rd
No GO to F5
ca
F5
CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Using the diagnostic scan tool, clear the DDM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect LH Exterior Mirror C516.
Ignition ON. NOTE: DTC B118C:11 may set during this step, it can be ignored.
Using the diagnostic scan tool, perform the DDM self-test.
Yes REPAIR the exterior mirror jumper harness as necessary. If the harness cannot be repaired,
INSTALL a new exterior mirror.
No GO to F6
F6
CHECK THE LH (LEFT-HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DDM C501B.
Measure:

C501B-19 Ground
Yes GO to F16
m
F7
DIODE) CIRCUITS JUMPED TOGETHER

Ignition OFF.
. co
Disconnect LH BLIS®/ CTA LED C576.

gn
Connect fused jumper wire:

ia

C576-1 C576-2
rd
ca
Ignition ON.
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. INSTALL a new LH exterior mirror glass.
No REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to F8
F8
DIODE) CIRCUITS JUMPED TOGETHER AT THE LH (LEFT-HAND) EXTERIOR MIRROR
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect LH Exterior Mirror C516.

C516-13 C516-7
Ignition ON.
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to F18
F9
CHECK THE LH (LEFT-HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE)
AND THE LH (LEFT-HAND) EXTERIOR MIRROR.
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect DDM C501B.
Measure:

. co
gn
C516-13 C501B-19
C516-7 C501B-15
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to F16
No REPAIR the affected circuit.
F10
CHECK THE PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) WITH THE RH
(RIGHT-HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT
EMITTING DIODE) DISCONNECTED
Using the diagnostic scan tool, clear the PDM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect RH BLIS®/ CTA LED C676.
Ignition ON. NOTE: DTC B118D:11 may set during this step, it can be ignored.
Using the diagnostic scan tool, perform the PDM self-test.

Is DTC B118D:15 present?
Yes INSTALL a new RH exterior mirror glass.
No GO to F11
F11
CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Using the diagnostic scan tool, clear the PDM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect RH Exterior Mirror C601.
Ignition ON. NOTE: DTC B118D:11 may set during this step, it can be ignored.
Using the diagnostic scan tool, perform the PDM self-test.
m
Yes GO to F18
No GO to F12
co
F12
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC
.
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
gn
Ignition OFF.

ia
Measure:
rd

C652B-19 Ground
ca
Yes GO to F17
F13
(RIGHT-HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) ) LED (LIGHT
EMITTING DIODE) CIRCUITS JUMPED TOGETHER
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect RH BLIS®/ CTA LED C676.

C676-1 C676-2
Ignition ON.
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. INSTALL a new RH exterior mirror glass.
F14
(RIGHT-HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT) LED (LIGHT
EMITTING DIODE) CIRCUITS JUMPED TOGETHER AT THE LH (LEFT-HAND) EXTERIOR MIRROR
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect RH Exterior Mirror C601.

Positive Lead
co
.
Negative Lead
gn
C601-13 C601-7
ia
Ignition ON.

rd

ca
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. REPAIR the exterior mirror jumper harness as necessary. If the
harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new exterior mirror.
F15
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ®/ CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC
ALERT) LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE PDM (PASSENGER DOOR
MODULE) AND THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) EXTERIOR MIRROR.
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C601-19 C652B-19
C601-7 C652B-15
Yes GO to F17
F16
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all DDM and related in-line connectors.
m
Repair:
co
Reconnect the DDM and related in-line connectors. Make sure all connectors seat and latch correctly.
.
gn

ia
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DDM .
rd
Installation).
ca
F17
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all PDM and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the PDM and related in-line connectors. Make sure all connectors seat and latch correctly.
Installation).
F18
CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR JUMPER HARNESS
Inspect the exterior mirror jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the mirror glass for:
Open or short circuits
Damaged or pushed out pins
Corrosion
Is the harness OK?
Yes INSTALL a new exterior mirror.
m
No REPAIR the harness as necessary. If the harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new exterior
mirror.
co
.
gn
The IPC Message Center Displays A Blocked Sensor Message

ia
rd
Possible Causes
ca
Build-up of dirt or debris on the rear bumper cover sides

Damaged rear bumper cover
SODL
SODR
PINPOINT TEST G : THE IPC (INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) MESSAGE CENTER DISPLAYS A BLOCKED
SENSOR MESSAGE
G1
INSPECT THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) FOR DEBRIS, MUD, SNOW OR ICE
Inspect the rear bumper cover, SODL and SODR for any debris, mud, snow or ice that may be present.
Is the rear bumper cover, SODL or SODR blocked due to debris, mud, snow or ice?
Yes REMOVE and CLEAN the affected component(s). Once the repair is complete, PERFORM one key
cycle and DRIVE the vehicle. The SODL and SODR needs to detect 2 good targets while the vehicle
is being driven to clear the blocked condition.
No GO to G2
G2
Thoroughly inspect the rear bumper cover, SODL, SODR and the SODL and SODR mounting brackets for
damage.
Yes REPAIR or INSTALL new parts as necessary.
Installation).
No For a SODL concern, GO to G3

For a SODR concern, GO to G4
G3
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect and inspect all SODL and related in-line connectors.
Repair:

. co
gn
Reconnect the SODL and related in-line connectors. Make sure all connectors seat and latch correctly.

ia

rd
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SODL.
ca
Installation).
G4
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all SODR and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SODR and related in-line connectors. Make sure all connectors seat and latch correctly.

Installation).
The BLIS® and CTA System Cannot Be Turned Off In The Message Center.
Possible Causes
m
MyKey® in use
Message center concern
GWM concern
IPC concern
SODR concern
. co
SODL concern
gn
Verify if a MyKey® restricted key is in use. If a restricted key is in use, the BLIS® or the CTA system cannot be turned off in the
message center.
ia
PINPOINT TEST H : THE BLIS (BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM) ® AND CTA (CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT)
rd
SYSTEM CANNOT BE TURNED OFF IN THE MESSAGE CENTER

H1
VERIFY WHETHER A MYKEY® RESTRICTED KEY IS IN USE
ca
Verify whether a MyKey® restricted key is in use.
Is a MyKey® restricted key in use?
Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. INFORM the customer of normal operation. REFER to
the Owner's Literature.
No GO to H2
H2
PERFORM A NETWORK TEST
Ignition ON.
Do the IPC, GWM, SODL and SODR pass the network test?
Yes GO to H3
No
H3
(CMDTCS)
Yes
No GO to H4
H4
CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION
m
No GO to H5
co
H5
CHECK THE MESSAGE CENTER FOR CORRECT OPERATION
.
gn
Check the message center for correct operation while turning the BLIS® and CTA system on and off.

ia
fault condition.
rd
No
ca
DTC U0100:00, DTC U0101:00
The SODL and SODR communicate with the PCM through the GWM. The TCM is contained inside the PCM and cannot be
serviced separately.


U0100:00 Lost Communication with A continuous memory DTC that sets in in the SODL and SODR when messages
ECM/PCM "A": No Sub Type received from the PCM over the HS-CAN1 through the GWM are missing for 2
Information seconds or more.
TCM: No Sub Type
Information
Possible Causes

GWM concern
SODR concern
SODL concern
PCM concern
PCM
PINPOINT TEST I : DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U0100:00, DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U0101:00
I1
VERIFY THE CUSTOMER'S CONCERN
Ignition ON.
Verify if there is an observable symptom present.
Is an observable symptom present?
m
Yes GO to I2
No
co
The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network
traffic or an intermittent fault condition. CLEAR the DTC.
.
gn
I2
VERIFY THAT THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL COMMUNICATES WITH THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE)
Connect a diagnostic scan tool.
ia
Check that a vehicle session can be established using the diagnostic scan tool.
rd
Can a vehicle session be established?

ca
Yes GO to I3
No
I3
PERFORM THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the SODL and SODR self-test.
Clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Wait 10 seconds.
Repeat the SODL and SODR self-test.
Are any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes DIAGNOSE all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the SODL and SODR
DTC Chart in this section.
No GO to I4
I4
PERFORM THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Yes DIAGNOSE all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Refer to the appropriate section in
Group 303 for the procedure.
No GO to I5
I5
PERFORM THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the GWM self-test.
Yes
m
No GO to I6

. co
I6
RECHECK THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the SODL and SODR Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
gn
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
ia
Wait 10 seconds.
rd
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the continuous memory self-test.
Check the SODL and SODR Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

ca
Is DTC U0100:00 and/or DTC U0101:00 still present?
Yes GO to I7
No The system is operating correctly at this time. This DTC may have been set due to high network
traffic or an intermittent fault condition.
I7
CHECK FOR OTHER CAUSES OF COMMUNICATION NETWORK CONCERN
NOTE: If new modules were installed prior to the DTC being set, the module configuration may be incorrectly set during
the PMI , or the PMI may not have been carried out.
CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the PCM, SODL, SODR, or GWM. If
recent service history is found:
verify correct replacement module was installed
HVBOM may be used to verify correct part fitment
verify the configuration of replacement module was correct
re-configure module using as-built data if prior configuration is suspect
verify the module was not obtained from a like vehicle and installed into customer vehicle
return the swapped module to source vehicle and obtain new replacement module
Operate the system and determine if the observable symptom is still present.
Is the observable symptom still present?
Yes GO to I8
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been due to incorrect parts
replacement procedures or incorrect module configuration.
I8
CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all PCM and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the PCM and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
co
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM.
.
Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the procedure.
gn
ia
rd
DTC U0146:00

ca
The SODL and SODR communicate with the GWM through the MS-CAN.


U0146:00 Lost Communication with Gateway A continuous memory DTC that sets in in the SODL and SODR when
"A": No Sub Type Information messages received through the GWM are missing for 2 seconds or more.
Possible Causes

SODR concern
SODL concern
GWM concern
GWM
PINPOINT TEST J : DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U0146:00
J1
VERIFY THE CUSTOMER CONCERN
Ignition ON.
Verify there is an observable symptom present.
Yes GO to J2
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network
J2
CHECK THE COMMUNICATION NETWORK
Does the GWM pass the network test?
Yes GO to J3
m
No
co
J3
PERFORM THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
.
DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) SELF-TEST
gn
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the SODL and SODR self-test.
Clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

ia
Wait 10 seconds.
rd
Repeat the SODL and SODR self-test.

ca
DTC Chart in this section.
No GO to J4
J4
PERFORM THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, check the GWM continuous memory diagnostic trouble codes (CMDTCs).
Yes
No GO to J5
J5
RECHECK THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the SODL and SODR Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Check the SODL and SODR Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Is DTC U0146:00 still present?
Yes GO to J6
No The system is operating correctly at this time. This DTC may have been set due to high network
J6
m
CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the SODL, SODR, or GWM. If recent
service history is found:
verify correct replacement module was installed co
.
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to J7
ca
J7
CHECK FOR CORRECT GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the GWM and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the GWM and related in-line connectors. Make sure the connectors seat and latch correctly.
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new GWM.
REFER to: Gateway Module A (GWM) (418-00 Module Communications Network, Removal and
Installation).
DTC U0199:00
The SODL communicates with the DDM through the MS-CAN.

m
U0199:00 Lost Communication With "Door Control A continuous memory DTC that sets in the SODL when expected
Module A": No Sub Type Information messages from the DDM are missing for 2 seconds or more.
Possible Causes
. co
gn
SODL concern
DDM concern
DDM
ia
PINPOINT TEST K : DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U0199:00

rd
K1
Ignition ON.
ca
Yes GO to K2
K2
Does the DDM pass the network test?
Yes GO to K3
No
K3
PERFORM THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the SODL self-test.
DTC charts in this section.
No GO to K4
K4
Yes DIAGNOSE all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

.
m
No GO to K5
CODES (DTCS)
. co
K5
RECHECK THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
gn
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the SODL Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
ia
Wait 10 seconds.
rd
Check the SODL Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

ca
Yes GO to K6
K6
CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the DDM or SODL. If recent service history
is found:
Yes GO to K7
K7
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all DDM and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the DDM and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m

co
.
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DDM.
gn
Installation).
ia
rd
ca
DTC U0200:00
The SODR communicates with the PDM through the MS-CAN.

U0200:00 Lost Communication with Gateway A continuous memory DTC that sets in the SODR when expected
"A": No Sub Type Information messages from the PDM are missing for 2 seconds or more.
Possible Causes

SODR concern
PDM concern
PDM
PINPOINT TEST L : DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U0200:00

L1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to L2
L2
m
Does the PDM pass the network test?
Yes GO to L3
No co
.
gn
L3
PERFORM THE SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the SODR self-test.
ia

rd
DTC charts in this section.
ca
No GO to L4
L4

.
No GO to L5
L5
RECHECK THE SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the SODR Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Check the SODR Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Yes GO to L6
L6
CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the PDM or SODR. If recent service
history is found:
m
co
.
gn

ia
Yes GO to L7
rd
ca
L7
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all PDM and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the PDM and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Installation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Block Heater
Removal
1. Refer to: Engine Cooling System Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
2. Drain the cooling system.

Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Vacuum Filling and Bleeding (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS), General Procedures).
3. Detach the block heater electrical connector heat shield.
m
. co
gn
ia
4. Disconnect the block heater electrical connector.

rd
ca
5. Remove the block heater.

Installation
1. NOTICE: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot components, or
the wiring may be damaged.
m
2. Fill and bleed the cooling system.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Removal
1. Remove the bolts and the RH insulation panel. Disconnect the electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2. Disconnect the electrical connector, remove the bolts and the blower motor speed control.
ca
Installation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Blower Motor
Removal
m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
3. Remove the bolt and the blower motor vent tube.
m
co
4. Rotate the blower motor housing 45 degrees counterclockwise to release and remove the blower motor.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-00 Body System - General Information 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Body - Overview
Insulation
Insulation is used as a sound-deadener to reduce exterior road and powertrain noises from the interior of the vehicle. Mastic
insulators are also used as insulation. Insulation is installed:
under the roof.

above and below the instrument panel.
at the cowl side panels.
over the front and rear floorpans.
inside the B-, C- and D-pillar sections.
on the wheelhouse/quarter panel.
behind the rear quarter trim panel.
Other forms of insulation include:
front tunnel stiffening pad.

dash panel stiffener.
m
rear wheelhouse mastic pads.
It has heat-bonded mastic deadeners for improved NVH characteristics.
Body Sealer Types and Applications

. co
It also has sound dampeners located inside the D-pillar and plug holes in the inner rear quarter.
gn
Seam Sealer
heavy-bodied, non-sag adhesive/sealer used on standing cosmetic seams, truck bed seams, tooled door skin seams
and floorpans.
ia
can be used on water leaks and noise concerns.
Silicone Gasket and Sealant

rd
form-in-place gasket and multi-purpose adhesive/sealant.

room temperature curing silicone rubber.
ca
Silicone Spray Lubricant
keeps the door and window weatherstrip pliable and soft.

makes the door easier to close.
retards weatherstrip squeaks.
retards weatherstrip wear.
helps retain door window alignment by reducing friction between the glass frame and the rubber weatherstrip.
should not be used prior to painting.
Trim and Weatherstrip Adhesive
quick drying, strong adhesive designed to hold weatherstripping onto all body panels and surrounding metal.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Body and Frame
The body consists of the following:
High-Strength Low Alloy (HSLA) and mild steels

Roof outer panel constructed of mild steel
Aluminum hood
Body side outer panels constructed of mild steel
Dual Phase Steel (DP) in select body structure components
Bolted, removable front fenders, hinged doors and hood
Dent resistant steel fenders
Boron steel outer front bumper beam
Boron steel rear bumper beam
Front and rear subframe assemblies housing suspension and steering components
Underbody components constructed of mild, DP and High-Strength Steel (HSS)
Mastic pads used on floor pan for sound deadening
Body Dimensions
m
Body Margins - Front Panels
NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, margin dimensions apply to RH and LH side of vehicle.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description Margin Specification Flushness Specification

1 Hood-to-grille 5.0 mm 2.8 mm ± 3.0 mm
2 Grille-to-headlamp 4.5 mm ± 4.0 mm —
3 Headlamp-to-fascia 4.5 mm ± 2.7 mm —
4 Headlamp-to-hood 2.0 mm ± 1.5 mm —
5 Hood-to-fender 5.0 mm ± 2.0 mm 1.5 mm ± 1.8 mm
6 Front door cladding-to-fender cladding 3.4 mm ± 1.5 mm -0.5 mm ± 2.0 mm
7 Fender-to-front door 3.4 mm ± 1.5 mm -0.5 mm ± 2.0 mm
8 Front door to-A-pillar 3.8 mm ± 2.7 mm -3.0 mm ± 2.7 mm
9 Front door-to-bodyside 3.8 mm ± 2.0 mm -2.5 mm ± 2.4 mm
Body Margins - Rear Panels
NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, margin dimensions apply to RH and LH side of vehicle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Item Description Margin Specification Flushness Specification

1 Front door-to-rear door (upper) 4.5 mm ± 2.7 mm 0.0 mm ± 2.7 mm
ca
2 Front door-to-rear door (mid-panel) 4.2 mm ± 2.0 mm 0.0 mm ± 2.0 mm

3 Rear door-to-bodyside (upper panel) 3.8 mm ± 2.0 mm -2.5 mm ± 2.4 mm
4 Rear door-to-bodyside (mid-panel) 3.8 mm ± 2.0 mm -2.5 mm ± 2.4 mm
5 Rear door-to-bodyside (lower panel) 3.4 ± 1.5 mm 0.0 mm ± 2.0 mm
6 Tail lamp-to-bodyside 2.0 mm ± 2.0 mm 0.0 mm ± 2.0 mm
7 Tail lamp-to-rear fascia 2.0 mm ± 2.0 mm —
8 Tail lamp-to-liftgate 5.0 mm ± 2.0 mm —
9 Liftgate glass-to-D-pillar 5.0 mm ± 4.0 mm —
10 Liftgate-to-liftgate glass 3.0 mm ± 2.2 mm —
11 Liftgate-to-rear fascia 7.0 mm ± 3.4 mm —
Under Hood Dimensions
NOTE: All measurements are on center unless otherwise indicated.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Door Opening Dimensions

ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Rear Body Dimensions

ca
Under Body Dimensions
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Datum Height Dimensions

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-03 Body Closures 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Body Closures - Component Location
m
. co
gn
Item Description
1 RGTM
ia
2 Power liftgate latch

3 Power liftgate motor
rd
4 Liftgate anti-pinch switches

5 Hands-free liftgate actuation module (if equipped)
ca
6 Hands-free liftgate actuation upper sensor (if equipped)

7 Hands-free liftgate actuation lower sensor (if equipped)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Body Closures - Overview
Overview
The power liftgate feature allows power opening and closing of the liftgate using any of the following methods:
The front power liftgate switch (located on the instrument panel).

The rear interior power liftgate switch (located on the bottom of the liftgate trim panel) (close only).
The liftgate release switch (located in upper portion of the liftgate handle cavity).
The power liftgate hands-free feature (if equipped).
The liftgate button on a RKE transmitter.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Body Closures - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

RGTM Network Input Messages

Message Module
Liftgate request BCM Used by the RGTM to open/close the liftgate when the BCM receives a valid request from a
programmed RKE transmitter, the passive entry feature or the liftgate release switch.
Gear lever PCM Used by the RGTM to inhibit power liftgate operation if the transmission is not in PARK.
position
Power liftgate IPC Used by the RGTM to enable/disable the power liftgate operation from both rear power liftgate
mode switches.
command
Vehicle lock BCM Used by the RGTM to inhibit the power liftgate operation when the liftgate release switch is
status activated, unless the doors have been previously unlocked electronically.


Power liftgate chime request RGTM Used by the IPC to sound the power liftgate chime.
Power Liftgate
Power Open
The power liftgate power open operation begins when:
The RGTM detects the front power liftgate switch is pressed.

The RGTM detects the rear exterior liftgate release switch is pressed.
The RGTM receives a message from the BCM (indicating a request from a programmed RKE transmitter or a passive
m
entry feature request).
Once the RGTM receives an open request, the power liftgate opens by carrying out the following:
co
The RGTM checks the gear selector lever position and vehicle speed status from the messages received.
The RGTM supplies power to the unlatch/cinching motor until the sector gear switches indicate end of travel, releasing
the power liftgate latch.
.
The power liftgate detent switch, primary forkbolt switch and secondary forkbolt switch circuits are monitored for correct
gn
latch release states.
The RGTM performs 2 actions simultaneously.
The RGTM supplies power to the unlatch/cinching motor while monitoring the sector gear switches to return the
sector gear to the neutral position.
ia
The RGTM supplies power to the drive motor, opening the power liftgate.
While the power liftgate is opening, the RGTM monitors the position sensor for liftgate position and velocity. If an
obstruction is detected, the RGTM stops the liftgate drive motor.
rd
When the power liftgate reaches the full open position, the RGTM removes the power from the drive motor.
After the power is removed from the drive motor, the position sensor briefly continues to monitor the position of the
liftgate. If excessive movement in the closed direction is detected, power is reapplied to the motor and a continuous
ca
chime is initiated and remains on as the liftgate automatically closes
If any of the power liftgate switches or a double press of the button on a RKE transmitter occurs during a power open, the
liftgate stops and holds its position.
Power Close
The power liftgate power close operation begins when:
the RGTM detects the front power liftgate switch is pressed.

the RGTM detects the rear interior power liftgate switch is pressed.
the RGTM receives a message from the BCM (indicating a double button press from a RKE transmitter or a passive
entry feature request).
Once the close request is received, the power liftgate closes by carrying out the following:
The RGTM checks the gear selector lever position and vehicle speed status from the messages received.
The RGTM starts an audible chime via the audio system.
The RGTM supplies power to the drive motor.
While the power liftgate is closing, the RGTM monitors the position sensor (for liftgate position and velocity) and the anti-
pinch switches. If an obstruction is detected, the power liftgate stops and reverses.
The RGTM monitors the liftgate ajar state.
When the RGTM detects the latch has engaged the striker, power is supplied to the unlatch/cinching motor to pull the
liftgate into the primary latch position. When primary latch position is reached (indicating the latch has successfully
latched), power is removed from the drive motor.
When the RGTM detects the primary latch position has been reached (liftgate is fully closed), the RGTM reverses the
direction of the unlatch/cinching motor until the sector gear switches indicate the neutral position.
If any of the power liftgate switches is pressed or the button on the RKE transmitter is double pressed during a power close, the
liftgate stops and holds its position.
The power liftgate may not operate or operate correctly under the following conditions:
Excessive weight (such as snow or ice) is present on top of the liftgate.

A low voltage or drained battery.
A disconnected battery.
Repairs/adjustments have been made to the power liftgate strut, the power liftgate motor, the liftgate striker or the liftgate
hinges.
If any of these conditions have occurred, the power liftgate must be re-initialized.
Refer to: Power Liftgate Initialization (501-03 Body Closures, General Procedures).
Power Liftgate Open Height Programming
The power liftgate open height can be programmed to open to a height other than the full open position. To program the power
liftgate open height:
Open the liftgate.

Manually move the liftgate to the desired height.
Press and hold the rear power liftgate close switch until a chime is heard, indicating that the new power liftgate maximum
m
open height is successfully programmed.
The programmed power liftgate height is retained when the battery is disconnected.
Power Liftgate Chime

co
The power liftgate chime provides audible warnings to the operator. The power liftgate chime is sounded using the audio
.
system. The RGTM sends messages over the CAN to the ACM when requesting the chime to sound.
gn
Power Liftgate Hands Free Feature (if equipped)
In addition to the passive entry system, the power liftgate hands free feature utilizes a module and 2 capacitive sensors (located
ia
behind the rear bumper cover) for operation. The BCM sends a voltage signal to the hands free liftgate actuation module. The
hands free liftgate actuation module monitors the 2 sensors. When the correct motion is detected (forward and back such as a
kicking motion under the rear bumper), the hands free liftgate actuation module momentarily grounds the signal from the BCM.
rd
When the BCM detects the ground signal, the liftgate passive entry process begins (as though the liftgate release button was
pressed with the vehicle locked).
ca
The BCM verifies a valid programmed passive key is within range of the rear keyless entry antenna and sends a message to
the RGTM to open the liftgate.
Front Power Liftgate Switch
The front power liftgate switch (located on the instrument panel) is a momentary contact switch that routes the voltage signal
from the RGTM to ground when pressed. Pressing this switch opens, closes or stops the motion of the power liftgate.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
The rear interior power liftgate switch (located on the bottom of the liftgate trim panel) is a momentary contact switch that routes
the voltage signal from the RGTM to ground when pressed. Pressing this switch closes the power liftgate. The power liftgate
does not open or release the latch from the rear interior power liftgate switch.
Exterior Liftgate Release Switch
The exterior liftgate release switch is a momentary contact switch that routes the voltage signal to ground when pressed. The
signal is sent from the BCM and the RGTM.
If the doors were not previously electronically unlocked when the exterior liftgate release switch is pressed, the BCM activates
the liftgate passive entry feature. If the BCM detects a valid programmed passive key, the BCM sends a message to the RGTM
to open the liftgate. If no passive key is detected, the request is ignored.
If the doors were previously electronically unlocked when the liftgate switch is pressed, the RGTM opens the liftgate. The
RGTM receives the door lock/unlock status from the BCM over the CAN.
Any subsequent presses of the switch stops the motion or reverses direction.
Power Liftgate Latch
The power liftgate latch is responsible for unlatching, latching and cinching the liftgate. The power liftgate latch contains the
unlatch/cinching motor, detent switch, forkbolt primary and secondary switches, and the sector gear switches.
Unlatch/Cinching Motor
The latch uses a bi-directional motor to accomplish both unlatch and cinch operations. The motor is driven in one direction to
unlatch and in the opposite direction to cinch.
During an unlatch operation, power is supplied to the unlatch/cinching motor by the RGTM when a valid open command is
received.
During a cinch operation, power is supplied to the unlatch/cinching motor by the RGTM when the RGTM detects the latch has
engage the striker during a power close operation. When the motor activates, it pulls the liftgate into the primary latch position.
When the primary latch position is reached, the RGTM reverses the polarity to the unlatch/cinching motor until it reaches a
neutral position.
Forkbolt Primary and Secondary Switches
The forkbolt primary and secondary switches provide input to the RGTM to determine the liftgate latch position. The liftgate is in
m
the primary position when the liftgate is in the full closed position. The liftgate is in the unlatched position when the liftgate is
open and completely out of the striker. The RGTM receives input from the power liftgate forkbolt primary and secondary
switches in the following manner:
. co

Latch Switch States
gn
Latch Position Forkbolt Primary Switch Forkbolt Secondary Switch

ia
Fully Unlatched Closed Closed

Secondary Closed Open
rd
Primary Open Open

ca
Detent Switch and Sector Gear Switches
The detent and sector gear switches open and close to provide input to the RGTM to determine the position of the sector gear.
The sector gear is part of the latch assembly. It is driven by the latch motor and in turn drives the latch mechanism. During a
release operation, the RGTM deactivates the unlatch/cinching motor once the end of travel is reached. After a release
operation, the RGTM keeps the latch released until the RGTM detects the latch is fully unlatched. The RGTM then reverses the
direction of the unlatch/cinching motor until the sector gear switches indicate the sector gear has returned to the neutral
position. Refer to the following table for sector gear switch states:

Sector Gear Switch States
Sector Gear Position Detent Switch Sector Gear Open Switch Sector Gear Close Switch
End of Travel Open Closed Closed
Release Open Open Open
Cinch Open Closed Closed
Neutral Closed Open Open
Power Liftgate Motor
The power liftgate motor raises and lowers the liftgate. The power liftgate motor is bi-directional and contains a position sensor
that provides input to the RGTM for liftgate position and velocity.
Position Sensor
The RGTM provides power and ground to the hall-effect sensors within the position sensor. It also supplies voltage signals to
the position sensor on a valid open command or when the liftgate is in the open position. The position sensor has 2 data lines
the RGTM monitors to determine liftgate movement and position. The RGTM uses the liftgate position information to determine
which direction to power the liftgate (open or close) when a valid operation command is received. The movement is monitored
to identify obstructions.
RGTM
The RGTM sends voltage signals to the front and rear interior power liftgate switches and the exterior liftgate release switch.
The signal is routed to ground when a switch is pressed, pulling the signal low to indicate a request to open or close the liftgate.
The RGTM receives a messages from the BCM upon a valid request from the passive entry system or a RKE transmitter.
The RGTM controls the opening and closing of the power liftgate based on the inputs it receives.
The RGTM requires PMI when it is replaced.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Body Closures
DTC Charts

BCM DTC Chart

B1219:11 Interior Boot/Trunk Release Switch: Circuit Short GO to Pinpoint Test B
To Ground
B1495:11 Hands Free Liftgate/Decklid Input Sensor: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test I
Short To Ground
For all other Diagnostic Trouble -
Codes (DTCs) REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic
Modules, Diagnosis and Testing).
m

RGTM DTC Chart
. co
gn
B1306:11 Liftgate Ajar Switch: Circuit Short To DIAGNOSE the courtesy lamps not operating correctly.
Ground REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1306:12 Liftgate Ajar Switch: Circuit Short To DIAGNOSE the courtesy lamps not operating correctly.
Battery REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
B144D:29 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Position GO to Pinpoint Test A

Sensor 1: Signal Invalid
rd
B144E:29 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Position GO to Pinpoint Test A

Sensor 2: Signal Invalid
B144F:11 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Driver GO to Pinpoint Test A
Motor: Circuit Short To Ground
ca

Motor: Circuit Short To Battery
Motor: Circuit Open
Motor: Mechanical Linkage Failure
B1451:29 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Latch GO to Pinpoint Test J
Centering Position Switch: Signal
Invalid
B1453:29 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Latch GO to Pinpoint Test J
Position Switch: Signal Invalid
B1454:11 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Left Pinch GO to Pinpoint Test F
Strip: Circuit Short To Ground
B1454:13 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Left Pinch GO to Pinpoint Test F
Strip: Circuit Open
B1455:11 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Right GO to Pinpoint Test F
Pinch Strip: Circuit Short To Ground
B1455:13 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Right GO to Pinpoint Test F
Pinch Strip: Circuit Open
B145D:11 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Power GO to Pinpoint Test A
Cinch Striker Motor: Circuit Short To
Ground
Cinch Striker Motor: Circuit Short To
Battery
Cinch Striker Motor: Circuit Open
B1515:77 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk: This DTC sets when the RGTM an obstacle or other obstruction prevents the liftgate from closing within a
Commanded Position Not Reachable specified amount of time. DIAGNOSE the symptom present. REFER to the Symptom Chart: Power Liftgate in
this section.
B1515:7 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk: Alignment GO to Pinpoint Test C
or Adjustment Incorrect
B1A59:11 Sensor 5 Volt Supply: Circuit Short To GO to Pinpoint Test A
Ground
B1A59:13 Sensor 5 Volt Supply: Circuit Open GO to Pinpoint Test A
U0101:87 Lost Communication with TCM: GO to Pinpoint Test K
Missing Message
U0140:87 Lost Communication With Body GO to Pinpoint Test L
Control Module: Missing Message
U0294:87 Lost Communication With Powertrain GO to Pinpoint Test M
Control Monitor Module: Missing
Message
U201A:55 Control Module Main Calibration Data: CARRY OUT the PMI procedure using As-Built data. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
Not Configured REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U201A:55 returns, INSTALL a new RGTM.
REFER to: Rear Gate Trunk Module (RGTM) (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
U2300:55 Central Configuration: Not Configured CARRY OUT the PMI procedure using As-Built data. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U201A:55 returns, INSTALL a new RGTM.
U2300:56 Central Configuration: Invalid / CARRY OUT the PMI procedure using As-Built data. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
Incompatible REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U201A:55 returns, INSTALL a new RGTM.
m
U3000:09 Control Module: Component Failure INSTALL a new RGTM.
U3000:41 Control Module: General Checksum
Failure
U3003:16 Battery Voltage: Circuit Voltage Below

co
CARRY OUT the PMI procedure using As-Built data. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and
REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U3000:41 returns, INSTALL a new RGTM.
GO to Pinpoint Test N
.
Threshold
gn
U3003:17 Battery Voltage: Circuit Voltage Above GO to Pinpoint Test O
Threshold
ia
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart: Power Liftgate

rd
ca

The power liftgate does not operate Refer to the Pinpoint Test DIAGNOSE the inoperative RKE transmitter
from a RKE transmitter button.
REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
(501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
The power liftgate passive entry Refer to the Pinpoint Test DIAGNOSE the inoperative liftgate passive entry
feature is inoperative feature.
REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
(501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
The power liftgate is inoperative Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test A
The power liftgate is inoperative Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test B
from one of the power liftgate
control switches
The power liftgate stops in the Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test C
secondary latch position
The power liftgate stops during Mechanical binding Manually OPERATE the liftgate and CHECK for
power open operation The vehicle was started or taken out of park during a power mechanical binding.
open operation If mechanical binding exists, REPAIR as
necessary.
If no mechanical binding is found,
INITIALIZE the power liftgate.
REFER to: Power Liftgate Initialization
(501-03 Body Closures, General
Procedures).
The power liftgate stops and The power liftgate lost its full open position due to a INITIALIZE the power liftgate.
chimes at the full open position mechanical repair (hinge adjustment, liftgate striker REFER to: Power Liftgate Initialization (501-03
adjustment, liftgate motor adjusted or repaired) Body Closures, General Procedures).
The power liftgate reverses during Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test D
a power close operation
The power liftgate anti-pinch strip Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test E
does not stop or reverse the liftgate
The power liftgate does not power Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test F
close (power open OK)
The power liftgate does not power Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test G
open (power close OK)
The power liftgate closes (with a Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test H
continuous chime) immediately
after a power open
The power liftgate hands-free Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test I
actuation is inoperative
The power liftgate has excessive Mechanical binding Manually OPERATE the liftgate and CHECK for
noise during operation Liftgate alignment mechanical binding.
If mechanical binding exists, REPAIR as
necessary.
If no mechanical binding is found, ALIGN
the liftgate.
m
REFER to: Liftgate Alignment (501-03
Body Closures, General Procedures).
Pinpoint Tests
. co
The Power Liftgate Is Inoperative
gn

ia
REFER to: Body Closures - System Operation and Component Description (501-03 Body Closures, Description and Operation).
rd

RGTM DTC Fault Trigger Conditions
ca

B144D:29 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Position Sensor 1: Signal Sets when the RGTM receives no signal from the liftgate motor sensor 1 input or the sensor
Invalid inputs are out of phase.
B144E:29 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Position Sensor 2: Signal Sets when the RGTM receives no signal from the liftgate motor sensor 2 input or the sensor
Invalid inputs are out of phase.
B144F:11 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Driver Motor: Circuit Short To Sets when the RGTM detects a short to ground from the power liftgate motor circuitry.
Ground
B144F:12 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Driver Motor: Circuit Short To Sets when the RGTM detects a short to voltage from the power liftgate motor circuitry.
Battery
B144F:13 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Driver Motor: Circuit Open Sets when the RGTM detects an open from the power liftgate motor circuitry.
B144F:79 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Driver Motor: Mechanical Sets when the RGTM detects the power liftgate requires extra effort to open or the hydraulic
Linkage Failure strut does not keep the liftgate open.
B145D:11 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Power Cinch Striker Motor: Sets when the RGTM detects a short to ground from one of the liftgate latch motor circuits.
B145D:12 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Power Cinch Striker Motor: Sets when the RGTM detects a short to voltage from one of the liftgate latch motor circuits.
Circuit Short To Battery
B145D:13 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Power Cinch Striker Motor: Sets when the RGTM detects an open from one of the liftgate latch motor circuits.
Circuit Open
B1A59:11 Sensor 5 Volt Supply: Circuit Short To Ground Sets when the RGTM detects a short to ground from the power liftgate motor sensor voltage
supply circuit.
B1A59:13 Sensor 5 Volt Supply: Circuit Open Sets when the RGTM detects an open from the power liftgate motor sensor circuitry.
Possible Causes

Liftgate latch
Power liftgate motor
RGTM
PINPOINT TEST A : THE POWER LIFTGATE IS INOPERATIVE

NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
A1
CHECK THE OPERATION OF ALL THE POWER LIFTGATE INPUTS
Ignition ON.
Select PARK.
Unlock the doors using the door lock control switch.
Close the liftgate to the full closed position (manually if necessary).
Open and close the power liftgate using the front interior power liftgate switch (located on the instrument panel).
Open and close the power liftgate using a programmed RKE transmitter.
Open the power liftgate using the exterior liftgate release switch.
Close the power liftgate using the rear interior power liftgate switch (located on the bottom of the liftgate trim panel).
Does the power liftgate power open or power close from any input?
m
Yes GO to the Symptom Chart and DIAGNOSE the correct symptom.
No GO to A2
A2
CHECK FOR COMMUNICATION TO THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the network test.
. co
gn
Does the RGTM pass the network test?
Yes GO to A3
No
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
rd
A3
CHECK FOR RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) COMMUNICATION AND VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the RGTM self-test.
ca
Is DTC U0101:87, U0140:87, U0294:87, U3003:16 or U3003:17 present?
Yes For DTC U0101:87, GO to Pinpoint Test K

For DTC U0140:87, GO to Pinpoint Test L
For DTC U0294:87, GO to Pinpoint Test M
For DTC U3003:16, GO to Pinpoint Test N
For DTC U3003:17, GO to Pinpoint Test O
No GO to A4
A4
CHECK FOR POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
View the results from the RGTM self-test.
Is DTC B144F:11, B144F:12, B144F:13 or B144F:79 present?
Yes GO to A5
No GO to A9
A5
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect RGTM C4174A.
Disconnect Power Liftgate Motor C4223.

Ignition ON.
Measure:

C4174A-5 Ground
C4174A-6 Ground
Yes REPAIR the circuit in question.

No GO to A6
A6
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C4174A-5
C4174A-6
. co Ground
Ground
gn
ia
Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?

rd
Yes GO to A7
No REPAIR the circuit in question.

ca
A7
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C4174A-5 C4174A-6
Yes GO to A8
A8
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C4174A-5 C4223-1
C4174A-6 C4223-4
Are the resistances less than 3 ohms?
Yes GO to A10
A9
CHECK FOR POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR SENSOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Is DTC B144D:29, B144E:29, B1A59:11 or B1A59:13 present?
Yes GO to A10
No GO to A14
m
A10
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect RGTM C4174B.
Disconnect Power Liftgate Motor C4223.
Ignition ON.
. co
Measure:
gn
C4174B-7 Ground
ia
C4174B-8 Ground
rd
ca
C4174B-19 Ground
C4174B-20 Ground

No GO to A11
A11
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C4174B-7 Ground
C4174B-8 Ground
C4174B-19 Ground
C4174B-20 Ground
Yes GO to A12
m
Measure:

. co
A12
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER

gn
C4174B-7 C4174B-8
C4174B-7 C4174B-19
ia
rd
C4174B-7 C4174B-20
ca
C4174B-8 C4174B-19
C4174B-8 C4174B-20
C4174B-19 C4174B-20
Yes GO to A13
No REPAIR the circuits in question.
A13
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE MOTOR SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C4174B-7 C4223-6
C4174B-8 C4223-5
C4174B-19 C4223-2
C4174B-20 C4223-3
m
Yes INSTALL a power liftgate motor.

. co
REFER to: Power Liftgate Motor (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
gn
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to A20
ia
A14
CHECK FOR OTHER LIFTGATE LATCH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
rd
Are any RGTM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?

ca
Yes For DTC B145D:11, B145D:12 or B145D:13, GO to A16

For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the RGTM DTC chart in this section.
No GO to A15
A15
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) LIFTGATE MOTOR SENSOR PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
NOTE: If the liftgate motor sensor Parameter Identifications (PIDs) are not available or the liftgate latch does not release, proceed to the next step.
Open the liftgate to the full open position.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the RGTM Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the RGTM liftgate motor sensor PID.
From the full open position, slowly close the liftgate.
Does the PID change state when the liftgate starts moving?
Yes GO to A16
No GO to A10
A16
CHECK THE LIFTGATE LATCH MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Power Liftgate Latch C4819.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C4174A-2 Ground
C4174A-3 Ground

No GO to A17
m
A17
CHECK THE LIFTGATE LATCH MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
C4174A-2
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
C4174A-3 Ground
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to A18
A18
CHECK THE LIFTGATE LATCH MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C4174A-2 C4174A-3
Yes GO to A19
A19
CHECK THE LIFTGATE LATCH MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
C4174A-2 C4819-5
C4174A-3 C4819-7
Are the resistances less than 10,000 ohms?
Yes GO to Pinpoint Test J
A20
CHECK FOR CORRECT RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect all RGTM connectors.
Repair:
corrosion (install new connectors or terminals – clean module pins)
m
Reconnect all the RGTM connectors and make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Yes
co
CHECK OASIS for any applicable Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs). If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test and
.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RGTM.
gn
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by module connections. ADDRESS the root cause
of any connector or pin issues.
ia
The Power Liftgate Is Inoperative From One Of The Power Liftgate Control Switches
rd
ca

BCM DTC Fault Trigger Conditions

B1219:11 Interior Boot/Trunk Release Switch: Circuit Short To Sets when the BCM detects a short to ground from the exterior liftgate release switch input
Ground circuit.
Possible Causes

Front interior power liftgate switch
Rear interior power liftgate switch
Exterior liftgate release switch
BCM
RGTM
PINPOINT TEST B : THE POWER LIFTGATE IS INOPERATIVE FROM ONE OF THE POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL SWITCHES
NOTE: If the concern is with the exterior liftgate release switch, verify the concern is not passive entry related. If the liftgate opens from the liftgate release
switch after the vehicle has been electronically unlocked but does not open from the liftgate release switch when the vehicle is locked, the concern is not with
the power liftgate system.
B1
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE POWER LIFTGATE FROM ALL THE SWITCH INPUTS
Ignition OFF.
Select PARK.
Ignition ON.
Close the liftgate (manually if necessary).
Open and close the power liftgate using the front interior power liftgate switch (located on the instrument panel).
Open the power liftgate using the exterior liftgate release switch.
Close the power liftgate using the rear power liftgate switch (located on the bottom of the liftgate trim panel).
Does the power liftgate open or close from any input?
Yes GO to B2
No GO to Pinpoint Test A
B2
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the RGTM Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the following RGTM Parameter Identifications (PIDs):
m
Master_Open/Close_Switch (Master_Sw_St)
Handle_Signal (Handle_Sig)
Local_Open/Close_Switch (Local_SW_St)
Do any of the Parameter Identifications (PIDs) indicate a switch is pressed?
Yes GO to B3
. co
No GO to B6
gn
B3
ISOLATE THE SUSPECT POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH FOR A SHORT TO GROUND USING THE LIFTGATE SWITCH PID (PARAMETER
IDENTIFICATION)
ia
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect the suspect power liftgate switch.

rd
Ignition ON.
ca
Master_Open/Close_Switch (Master_Sw_St)
Handle_Signal (Handle_Sig)
Local_Open/Close_Switch (Local_SW_St)
Does the PID in question continue to indicate a switch is pressed?
Yes For the exterior liftgate release switch, GO to B4

For a front or rear interior power liftgate switch, GO to B5
No INSTALL a new power liftgate switch in question.
B4
ISOLATE THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WHILE CHECKING THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE)
HANDLE_SIGNAL (HANDLE_SIG) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect BCM C2280E.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the RGTM Handle_Sig PID.
Does the PID continue to indicate the switch is pressed?
Yes GO to B5
No GO to B9
B5
CHECK THE SUSPECT POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

Front Interior Power Liftgate Switch

C4174B-3 Ground

Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch

C4174B-11 Ground
m

C4174B-25
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia
Yes GO to B10
rd
B6
BYPASS THE SUSPECT POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
ca
Disconnect the suspect power liftgate switch.
NOTE: The liftgate must be open when carrying out this step if the rear interior power liftgate switch is the suspect component.
For the suspect power liftgate switch, connect:

Front Interior Liftgate Switch

C2114-7 C2114-1

Rear Interior Liftgate Control Switch

C4333-1 C4333-2


C4216-2 C4216-1
Does the liftgate open or close?
Yes INSTALL a new power liftgate switch in question.

No GO to B7
B7
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the suspect power liftgate switch, connect:

m
C2114-7 Ground

. co

Rear Interior Liftgate Control Switch
gn

C4333-1 Ground
ia
rd

ca

C4216-2 Ground
Does the liftgate open or close?

No GO to B8
B8
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
For the suspect liftgate switch, measure:


C2114-7 C4174B-3

Rear Interior Liftgate Switch

C4333-1 C4174B-11


C4216-2 C4174B-25
Yes GO to B10
m
B9
Repair:
. co
gn
Reconnect all the BCM connectors and make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ia

rd
Yes CHECK OASIS for any applicable Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs). If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test and
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern,
Click here to access
ca
Guided Routine (BCM).
B10
Repair:
The Power Liftgate Stops In The Secondary Latch Position


B1515:78 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk: Alignment or Adjustment Incorrect Sets when the RGTM detects the liftgate is unable to fully latch.
Possible Causes
Liftgate alignment
Liftgate striker alignment
Mechanical binding
PINPOINT TEST C : THE POWER LIFTGATE STOPS IN THE SECONDARY LATCH POSITION
C1
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) LATCH AND PAWL SWITCHES PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view RGTM Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
m
Latch_Primary_Switch (Ltch_Prim_Sw)
Latch_Secondary_Switch (Ltch_Sec_Sw)
Latch_Pawl_Switch (Ltch_Pwl_Sw)
co
NOTE: The liftgate is in the primary position when the liftgate is in the full closed position. The liftgate is in the unlatch position when the liftgate is open
and completely out of the striker.
.
Begin with the liftgate in the open position, then slowly close the liftgate to the secondary latch (first click) and then primary latch (second click)
gn
positions.
Liftgate Latch Position Ltch_Prim_Sw Ltch_Sec_Sw Ltch_Pwl_Sw

ia
Fully unlatched Active Active Inactive

Secondary (first click) Active Inactive Inactive
Primary (second click) Inactive Inactive Inactive
rd
ca
Do the switch states agree with the table?
Yes GO to C2
No GO to Pinpoint Test J
C2
CHECK THE MANUAL OPERATION OF THE LIFTGATE
Turn the power liftgate off (disable) from the message center.
While manually opening and closing the liftgate, check the liftgate for:
Liftgate/wedge alignment
Liftgate strut operation (strut should hold or push liftgate open when beyond half open)
Power liftgate motor (should move freely while manually opening and closing liftgate and be securely mounted to the liftgate and bracket)
Power liftgate latch (should latch completely)
Does the liftgate open and close correctly?
Yes GO to C3
No REPAIR as necessary.
C3
CHECK THE LIFTGATE LATCH AND STRIKER ALIGNMENT
Inspect the striker and latch for correct alignment.
Is the latch and striker aligned correctly?

No ALIGN the liftgate and striker.
REFER to: Liftgate Alignment (501-03 Body Closures, General Procedures).
The Power Liftgate Reverses During A Power Close Operation
Possible Causes
Liftgate alignment
Mechanical binding
PINPOINT TEST D : THE POWER LIFTGATE REVERSES DURING A POWER CLOSE OPERATION
D1
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) LATCH AND PAWL SWITCH PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view RGTM Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Latch_Primary_Switch (Ltch_Prim_Sw)
Latch_Secondary_Switch (Ltch_Sec_Sw)
Latch_Pawl_Switch (Ltch_Pwl_Sw)
m
NOTE: The liftgate is in the primary position when the liftgate is in the full closed position. The liftgate is in the unlatch position when the liftgate is open
and completely out of the striker.
positions.
. co
Begin with the liftgate in the open position, then slowly close the liftgate to the secondary latch (first click) and then primary latch (second click)
Liftgate Latch Position Ltch_Prim_Sw Ltch_Sec_Sw Ltch_Pwl_Sw

gn
Fully unlatched Active Active Inactive
Secondary (first click) Active Inactive Inactive
Primary (second click) Inactive Inactive Inactive
ia
rd
Do the switch states agree with the table?
Yes GO to D2
ca
D2
Ignition ON.
Liftgate strut operation (strut should hold or push liftgate open)

The Power Liftgate Anti-Pinch Strip Does Not Stop Or Reverse The Liftgate

Possible Causes
Liftgate anti-pinch switch

RGTM
PINPOINT TEST E : THE POWER LIFTGATE ANTI-PINCH STRIP DOES NOT STOP OR REVERSE THE LIFTGATE
E1
CHECK FOR RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Yes REFER to the RGTM DTC Chart in this section.

No GO to E2
E2
CHECK THE LIFTGATE ANTI-PINCH SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect the suspect liftgate anti-pinch switch.
m
While pressing firmly and releasing the liftgate anti-pinch switch, measure:
Positive Lead Measurement / Negative Lead

. co
Action
gn
ia
rd
ca
C4172, pin 1, component side

C4173, pin 1, component side C4173, pin 2, component side
m
Is the resistance between 0 to 200 ohms with the liftgate anti-pinch switch firmly pressed and between 5,700 and 6,700 ohms with the liftgate anti-pinch
switch released?
Yes
No
GO to E3
INSTALL a new liftgate anti-pinch switch for the one in question.
co
REFER to: Liftgate Anti-Pinch Switch (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
.
gn
E3
Repair:
ia

rd

ca
Yes CHECK OASIS for any applicable Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs). If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test and FOLLOW
TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RGTM.
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by module connections. ADDRESS the root cause of any
connector or pin issues.
The Power Liftgate Does Not Power Close (Power Open OK)


B1454:11 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Left Pinch Strip: Circuit Short To Ground Sets when the RGTM detects a short to ground from the left anti-pinch switch input.
B1454:13 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Left Pinch Strip: Circuit Open Sets when the RGTM detects an open from the left anti-pinch switch input.
B1455:11 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Right Pinch Strip: Circuit Short To Sets when the RGTM detects a short to ground from the right anti-pinch switch
Ground input.
B1455:13 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Right Pinch Strip: Circuit Open Sets when the RGTM detects an open from the right anti-pinch switch input.
Possible Causes

Liftgate alignment
Mechanical binding
Liftgate anti-pinch switch
RGTM
PINPOINT TEST F : THE POWER LIFTGATE DOES NOT POWER CLOSE (POWER OPEN OK)
F1
CHECK FOR RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) LIFTGATE ANTI-PINCH SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Is DTC B1454:11, B1454:13, B1455:11 or B1455:13 present?
Yes GO to F2
m
No GO to F7
F2
CHECK THE LIFTGATE ANTI-PINCH SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect the suspect liftgate anti-pinch switch.

. co
gn
While pressing firmly and releasing the liftgate anti-pinch switch, measure:

Action
ia
rd
ca

C4173, pin 1, component side C4173, pin 2, component side
m
Is the resistance between 0 to 200 ohms with the liftgate anti-pinch switch firmly pressed and between 5,700 and 6,700 ohms with the liftgate anti-pinch
switch released?
Yes
No
GO to F3
co
INSTALL a new liftgate anti-pinch switch for the one in question.
REFER to: Liftgate Anti-Pinch Switch (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
.
gn
F3
CHECK THE LIFTGATE ANTI-PINCH SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
ia
Measure:

rd

Left Liftgate Anti-Pinch Switch
ca

C4172-1 Ground
C4172-2 Ground

Right Liftgate Anti-Pinch Switch

C4173-1 Ground
C4173-2 Ground

No GO to F4
F4
CHECK THE LIFTGATE ANTI-PINCH SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:


C4172-1 Ground

m
C4173-1 Ground

. co
Yes GO to F5
gn
ia
F5
CHECK THE LIFTGATE ANTI-PINCH SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:
rd

ca

C4172-1 C4172-2


C4173-1 C4173-2
Yes GO to F6
F6
CHECK THE LIFTGATE ANTI-PINCH SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:


C4172-1 C4174B-12
C4172-2 C4174B-21


C4173-1 C4174B-14
C4173-2 C4174B-21
m
Yes GO to F9
. co
gn
F7
CHECK FOR OTHER RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
ia
Review the results from the RGTM self-test.

rd

No GO to F8
ca
F8

F9
Repair:

TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RGTM.
The Power Liftgate Does Not Power Open (Power Close OK)
Possible Causes
Liftgate alignment
Mechanical binding
PINPOINT TEST G : THE POWER LIFTGATE DOES NOT POWER OPEN (POWER CLOSE OK)
G1
m
Ignition ON.

. co
No GO to G2
gn
G2
CHECK THE LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE OPERATION
NOTE: Make sure the power liftgate is enabled from the message center.
ia
Ignition ON.
Select PARK.
rd
Unlock the doors using a door lock control switch.
Press the front interior power liftgate switch.

ca
Does the liftgate latch release?
Yes GO to G3
G3
Yes GO to Pinpoint Test A

The Power Liftgate Closes (With A Continuous Chime) Immediately After A Power Open

Possible Causes
Excessive weight on the liftgate, such as snow, ice or a bicycle rack

Liftgate strut
Power liftgate initialization
PINPOINT TEST H : THE POWER LIFTGATE CLOSES (WITH A CONTINUOUS CHIME) IMMEDIATELY AFTER A POWER OPEN
H1
NOTE: Make sure there is no excessive weight on the liftgate, such as snow, ice or a luggage rack.
Ignition ON.

No GO to H2
H2
CHECK THE LIFTGATE STRUT
Verify there is no excessive weight on the liftgate, such as snow, ice or a bicycle rack.
m
Operate the liftgate manually to verify the liftgate strut holds the liftgate open in various positions.
Does the liftgate strut hold the liftgate open correctly?
Yes GO to H3
. co
No INSTALL a new liftgate strut. INITIALIZE the power liftgate.
gn
REFER to: Power Liftgate Initialization (501-03 Body Closures, General Procedures).
H3
INITIALIZE THE POWER LIFTGATE AND RECHECK THE OPERATION
ia
Initialize the power liftgate.

REFER to: Power Liftgate Initialization (501-03 Body Closures, General Procedures).
rd
Operate the power liftgate using the front interior power liftgate switch.
Does the liftgate close with a continuous chime immediately after a power open?
ca
Yes GO to H4
No The system is operating correctly. The concern may have been caused by an incorrectly initialized RGTM or weight on the liftgate.
H4
Repair:
The Power Liftgate Hands-Free Actuation Is Inoperative

BCM DTC Fault Trigger Conditions

B1495:11 Hands Free Liftgate/Decklid Input Sensor: Circuit Short To Sets when the BCM detects a short to ground from the hands-free liftgate actuation
Ground module input.
Possible Causes

Hands-free liftgate actuation module
Hands-free liftgate actuation lower sensor
Hands-free liftgate actuation upper sensor
BCM
m
PINPOINT TEST I : THE POWER LIFTGATE HANDS-FREE ACTUATION IS INOPERATIVE
I1
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE OPERATION FROM THE EXTERIOR LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH
NOTE: Make sure the power liftgate is enabled from the message center.
Ignition ON.
. co
Unlock the doors from the door lock control switch.
gn
Press the exterior liftgate release switch on the liftgate.
Does the power liftgate open?

ia
Yes GO to I2
No GO to Pinpoint Test B
rd
I2
CHECK THE LIFTGATE PASSIVE ENTRY OPERATION
ca
NOTE: Make sure the passive entry feature is enabled from the message center.
Ignition OFF.
Close the liftgate.
Lock the doors using the RKE transmitter.
With a valid programmed passive key within 1 meter (3 feet) of the rear bumper, press the exterior liftgate release switch on the liftgate.
Yes GO to I3
No DIAGNOSE the liftgate passive entry feature.
REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
I3
VERIFY THE CONCERN IS PRESENT
Close the liftgate.
With the passive key within 1 meter (3 feet) of the rear bumper, move your foot towards and then away (similar to a kicking motion) near the center of
the rear bumper.
Yes The system is operating correctly. INFORM the customer of the operation of the hands-free liftgate actuation.
No GO to I4
I4
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE HANDS-FREE ACTUATION MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect Hands-Free Liftgate Actuation Module C4401.
Measure:

C4401-2 Ground
Yes GO to I5
I5
CHECK THE POWER LIFTGATE HANDS-FREE ACTUATION MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C4401-2 C4401-3
m
Yes GO to I6
. co
gn
I6
BYPASS THE HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE ACTUATION MODULE
NOTE: If the fuse in the jumper wire fails, refer to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
ia
Place a programmed passive key within 1 meter (3 feet) of the rear bumper.
Connect:
rd

ca
C4401-1 C4401-3
Yes GO to I9
No GO to I7
I7
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) HANDS-FREE INPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C4401-1 Ground
Yes GO to I8
I8
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) HANDS-FREE INPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C4401-1 C2280E-29
Yes GO to I11
I9
CHECK THE HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE ACTUATION LOWER SENSOR
INSTALL a new hands-free liftgate actuation lower sensor.
REFER to: Hands-Free Liftgate Actuation Lower Sensor (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
Check the operation of the hands-free liftgate actuation.
m
Does the hands-free liftgate actuation operate?
Yes The system is operating correctly. The concern was caused by the hands-free liftgate actuation lower sensor.
No GO to I10
I10
CHECK THE HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE ACTUATION UPPER SENSOR
. co
INSTALL a new hands-free liftgate actuation upper sensor.
gn
REFER to: Hands-Free Liftgate Actuation Upper Sensor (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
Check the operation of the hands-free liftgate actuation.

ia
Does the hands-free liftgate actuation operate?
Yes The system is operating correctly. The concern was caused by the hands-free liftgate actuation upper sensor.
rd
No INSTALL a new hands-free liftgate actuation module.

REFER to: Hands-Free Liftgate Actuation Module (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
ca
I11
Repair:
B1451:29, B1453:29


B1451:29 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Latch Sets when the RGTM detects the sector gear open/close switch(es) are not in the correct state at the
Centering Position Switch: Signal Invalid beginning of self-test, or no sector gear switch transition during releasing/cinching.
B1453:29 Tailgate/Liftgate/Boot/Trunk Latch Position Sets when the RGTM detects the sector gear open/close switch(es) are not in the correct state at the
Switch: Signal Invalid beginning of self-test, or no sector gear switch transition during releasing/cinching.
Possible Sources

Liftgate latch
RGTM
PINPOINT TEST J : B1451:29, B1453:29

J1
CHECK FOR OTHER RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
m
Are any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present other than B1451:29 or B1453:29?
Yes
No
co
DIAGNOSE all other RGTM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. REFER to the RGTM DTC Chart in this section.
GO to J2
.
gn
J2
CHECK THE LIFTGATE LATCH INPUT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
ia
Disconnect Liftgate Latch C4819.

rd
Measure:

ca
C4819-1 Ground
C4819-2 Ground
C4819-3 Ground
C4819-4 Ground
C4819-6 Ground
Yes GO to J3
J3
CHECK THE LIFTGATE LATCH INPUT CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO EACH OTHER
Measure:

C4819-1 C4819-2
C4819-1 C4819-3
C4819-1 C4819-4
m
C4819-1 C4819-6
C4819-2
. co C4819-3
gn
C4819-2 C4819-4
ia
rd
C4819-2 C4819-6
ca
C4819-3 C4819-4
C4819-3 C4819-6
C4819-4 C4819-6
Yes GO to J4
No REPAIR the circuits in question.
J4
CHECK THE LIFTGATE LATCH INPUT CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C4819-1 C4174B-18
C4819-2 C4174B-16
C4819-3 C4174B-17
C4819-4 C4174B-2
m
C4819-6 C4174B-5
. co
gn

ia
Yes INSTALL a new liftgate latch.

REFER to: Liftgate Latch (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to J5
rd

ca
J5
Repair:
U0101:87
The RGTM and the PCM communicate through the CAN. Messages are exchanged between the modules for the purposes of determining what functions are carried
out.


U0101:87 Lost Communication with TCM: Missing Sets by the RGTM if expected transmission range data messages received from the PCM over the CAN
Message are missing.
Possible Causes
Network communication concern

PCM
RGTM
PINPOINT TEST K : U0101:87

K1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to K2
m
No CLEAR the DTC. The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network traffic or intermittent
fault condition.
K2
. co
gn
Does the PCM pass the network test?
Yes GO to K3
No
ia
rd
K3
CARRY OUT THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the PCM KOEO and KOER self-tests.
ca
Yes DIAGNOSE all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the PCM DTC Chart in the appropriate 303-14 section.
No GO to K4
K4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) SELF-TEST
Yes DIAGNOSE all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the RGTM DTC Chart in this section.
No GO to K5
K5
RECHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the RGTM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the continuous memory self-test.
Check the RGTM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Yes GO to K6
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network traffic or intermittent fault condition.
K6
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the PCM. If recent service history is found:
HVBOM may be used to verify correct part number
Yes GO to K7
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been due to incorrect parts replacement procedures or incorrect
module configuration.
m
K7
Disconnect and inspect all PCM connectors.
Repair:
. co
gn
Reconnect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ia
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to the PCM
rd
Removal and Installation procedure in the appropriate 303-14 section.
ca
U0140:87
The RGTM and the BCM communicate through the CAN. Messages are exchanged between the modules for the purposes of determining what functions are carried
out.


U0140:87 Lost Communication With Body Control Module: Missing Sets by the RGTM if expected data messages received from the BCM over the CAN are
Message missing.
Possible Causes

RGTM
BCM
PINPOINT TEST L : U0140:87

L1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to L2
fault condition.
L2
Does the BCM pass the network test?
Yes GO to L3
No
L3
CARRY OUT THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the BCM self-test.
m
Yes
No
DIAGNOSE all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). co
REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and Testing).
GO to L4
.
gn
L4
ia
rd
No GO to L5
ca
L5
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to L6
L6
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the BCM. If recent service history is found:
Yes GO to L7
L7
Repair:
m
U0294:87
. co
gn
The RGTM and the PCM communicate through the CAN. Messages are exchanged between the modules for the purposes of determining what functions are carried
out.
ia

rd

U0294:87 Lost Communication With Powertrain Control Monitor Module: Sets by the RGTM if expected data messages received from the PCM over the
ca
Missing Message CAN are missing.
Possible Causes

RGTM
PCM
PINPOINT TEST M : U0294:87

M1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to M2
fault condition.
M2
Yes GO to M3
No
M3
CARRY OUT THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the PCM KOEO and KOER self-tests.
Yes DIAGNOSE all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the PCM DTC Chart in the appropriate 303-14 section.
No GO to M4
M4
No GO to M5
m
M5
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
. co
gn
Wait 10 seconds.

ia

rd
Yes GO to M6
ca
M6
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the PCM. If recent service history is found:
Yes GO to M7
M7
Repair:
Reconnect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat and latch correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to the PCM
Removal and Installation procedure in the appropriate 303-14 section.
U3003:16
The RGTM monitors its high current voltage supply circuit. If a fault is detected, the RGTM disables the power liftgate function.

m
U3003:16 Battery Voltage: Circuit Voltage Below Threshold Sets when the RGTM detects the high current voltage supply circuit is less than 8 volts.
Possible Causes
High circuit resistance

. co
Charging system concern
gn
RGTM
PINPOINT TEST N : U3003:16

ia
N1
Ignition ON.
rd
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
Wait 30 seconds.
ca
Yes GO to N2
No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to a previous low battery voltage condition.
N2
CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) SET IN OTHER MODULES
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve the Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all modules.
Is any other battery or charging system related DTC set in other modules?
Yes Diagnose the charging system concern. REFER to the appropriate Diagnosis and Testing in section 414-00.
No GO to N3
N3
CHECK THE BATTERY CONDITION AND STATE OF CHARGE
Ignition OFF.
Check the battery condition and verify the battery is fully charged.
REFER to: Battery (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Diagnosis and Testing).
Is the battery OK and fully charged?

Yes GO to N4
No DIAGNOSE the battery.

N4
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) POWER_SUPPLY_POWER_VBATT (GATE_PWR_V) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Ignition ON.
Measure and record the voltage at the battery.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the RGTM Gate_Pwr_V PID.
Is the voltage within 0.2 volt of the recorded battery voltage?
Yes GO to N7
No GO to N5
N5
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C4174A-4 Ground

. co
gn
Yes GO to N6
ia
N6
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Measure:
rd

C4174A-1 Ground
ca
Yes GO to N7
N7
Repair:
U3003:17
The RGTM monitors its high current voltage supply circuit. If a fault is detected, the RGTM disables the power liftgate function.


U3003:17 Battery Voltage: Circuit Voltage Above Threshold Sets when the RGTM detects the high current voltage supply circuit is more than 16.5 volts.
Possible Causes

RGTM
m
PINPOINT TEST O : U3003:17
NOTE: DTC U3003:17 may be stored in the module memory due to previous battery charging or vehicle jump starting event.
O1
CHECK FOR OVER VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) SET IN OTHER MODULES
Ignition ON. co
.
gn
Are any over voltage Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) set in other modules?
Yes DIAGNOSE an overcharging condition. REFER to the appropriate Diagnosis and Testing in section 414-00.
No GO to O2
ia
O2
CHECK THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
rd
Turn off all interior/exterior lights and accessories.
Start and run the engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for 3 minutes while monitoring the battery voltage.
ca
Does the battery voltage rise to 15.5 volts or higher?
Yes DIAGNOSE an overcharging condition. REFER to the appropriate Diagnosis and Testing in section 414-00.
No GO to O3
O3
RECHECK FOR DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U3003:17
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and repeat the RGTM self-test.
Yes INSTALL a new RGTM.

No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously during battery charging or while jump starting
the vehicle.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
DTC Chart: Body Control Module (BCM)
NOTE: Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) which are not listed in the DTC charts are often retrieved as a result of incorrect repair procedures. Before attempting any
repairs for unlisted Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs):
repair all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
if no other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are retrieved, CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and REPEAT the self-test.
if the unlisted Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) return, VERIFY that the correct part number module is installed for the vehicle and if correct, install As-Built
data from Professional Technician Society (PTS) following the diagnostic scan tool instructions under Module Programming > As-Built.

BCM DTC Chart

B1026:04 Steering Column Lock:
System Internal Failure REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
m
System Programming REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B1026:09
Failure
Steering Column Lock:
Component Failure
co
REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
.
gn
Internal Electronic Failure REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B1026:51 Steering Column Lock: Not
Programmed REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
ia

Invalid / Incompatible REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
Configuration Diagnosis and Testing).
rd

Commanded Position Not REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
Reachable Diagnosis and Testing).
ca

Missing Message REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
Performance or Incorrect REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B1026:93 Steering Column Lock: No
Operation REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
Component Internal REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
Failure Diagnosis and Testing).
B1046:11 Front Fog Lamp Control
Switch: Circuit Short To REFER to: Fog Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
B1047:11 Rear Fog Lamp Control
Switch: Circuit Short To REFER to: Fog Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
B1048:01 Brake Fluid Level Switch:
General Electrical Failure REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
Chimes, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1048:7B Brake Fluid Level Switch:
Low Fluid Level REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
B1051:11 Front Washer Switch:
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B1052:11 Rear Washer Switch:
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B108A:01 Start Button: General
Electrical Failure REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B108A:24 Start Button: Signal Stuck
High REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B10AB:00 Remote Keyless Entry
Synchronization: No Sub REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Type Information
B10AD:01 Rain Sensor: General
Electrical Failure REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
B10AD:02 Rain Sensor: General
Signal Failure REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
B10AD:08 Rain Sensor: Bus Signal /
Message Failure REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
B10AD:49 Rain Sensor: Internal
Electronic Failure REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
B10AD:55 Rain Sensor: Not
Configured REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
B10AD:9A Rain Sensor: Component
or System Operating REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
Conditions
m
B10B2:12 Engine Running Relay:
Circuit Short To Battery REFER to: Trailer Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B10B2:14 Engine Running Relay:
B10C6:01 Exterior Trunk Antenna:

General Electrical Failure
co
Circuit Short To Ground or REFER to: Trailer Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open
.
B10C7:01 Interior Trunk Antenna: For a starting concern,
gn
General Electrical Failure REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01C Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless
Vehicle System, Diagnosis and Testing).
For a luggage compartment lid passive entry feature concern,
REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and
Testing).
ia
B10C8:01 Interior Centre Antenna:

General Electrical Failure REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01C Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle
rd
System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B10D5:13 PATS Antenna: Circuit
Open REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
ca
B10D7:05 PATS Key: System For vehicles without push button start,
Programming Failure REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
For vehicles with push button start,
REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01C Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless
B10D7:51 PATS Key: Not

Programmed REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
B10D7:55 PATS Key: Not Configured For vehicles without push button start,
REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
B10D7:87 PATS Key: Missing

Message REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
B10D7:8F PATS Key: Erratic
REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
B10D8:00 PATS Key Less Than For vehicles without push button start,
Minimum Programmed: No REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
Sub Type Information For vehicles with push button start,
B10D9:87 PATS Transponder:

Missing Message REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
B10DA:51 PATS Target Identifier: For vehicles without push button start,
Not Programmed REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
B10F1:14 Key In Switch: Circuit

Short To Ground or Open REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
B10F3:11 Left front position light:
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B10F3:15 Left front position light:
Circuit Short To Battery or REFER to: Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open
B10F4:11 Right front position light:
B10F4:15 Right front position light:
Open
B1115:11 High Mounted Stop Lamp
control: Circuit Short To REFER to: Stoplamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
B1115:15 High Mounted Stop Lamp
control: Circuit Short To REFER to: Stoplamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Battery or Open
B1131:01 Wiper motor module:
General Electrical Failure REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
General Signal Failure REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
B1131:08 Wiper motor module: Bus
Signal / Message Failure REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1131:55
Internal Electronic Failure
Wiper motor module: Not
Configured
co
REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
.
B1131:9A Wiper motor module:
Component or System REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
gn
Operating Conditions
B1142:29 Ignition Status 1: Signal
Invalid REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
ia
B1147:11 Left Front Fog Lamps:

Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Fog Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1147:15 Left Front Fog Lamps:
rd
Circuit Short To Battery or REFER to: Fog Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open
B1148:11 Right Front Fog Lamps:
ca
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Fog Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1148:15 Right Front Fog Lamps:
Circuit Short To Battery or REFER to: Fog Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open
B115E:01 Camera Module: General
Electrical Failure REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera, Diagnosis and Testing).
B115E:02 Camera Module: General
Signal Failure REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera, Diagnosis and Testing).
B115E:08 Camera Module: Bus
Signal / Message Failure REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera, Diagnosis and Testing).
B115E:49 Camera Module: Internal
Electronic Failure REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera, Diagnosis and Testing).
B115E:55 Camera Module: Not
Configured REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera, Diagnosis and Testing).
B115E:9A Camera Module:
Component or System REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1175:01 Drivers Door Ajar Switch:
General Electrical Failure REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1176:01 Passenger Door Ajar
Switch: General Electrical REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Failure
B1178:01 Boot/Trunk Ajar Switch:
General Electrical Failure REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
B1182:00 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System: No Sub Type REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Diagnosis and
Information Testing).
B1182:55 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System: Not Configured REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Diagnosis and
Testing).
B1184:11 Steering Column Lock
Output: Circuit Short To REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B1184:15 Steering Column Lock
Output: Circuit Short To REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
Battery or Open Diagnosis and Testing).
B11C0:01 Driver Side Rear Door Ajar
Switch: General Electrical REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Failure
B11C1:01 Passenger Side Rear Door
Ajar Switch: General REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Electrical Failure
Notification: General REFER to: Airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis and Testing).
Electrical Failure
B11D9:16 Battery Voltage: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test J
Voltage Below Threshold
B11D9:17 Battery Voltage: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test K
Voltage Above Threshold
B11DC:11 Rear Wiper Mode Switch:
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
B1218:00 Transmitter Identification
Code: No Sub Type REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Information
B1219:11 Interior Boot/Trunk
Release Switch: Circuit
Short To Ground
co With Power Liftgate:
REFER to: Body Closures (501-03 Body Closures, Diagnosis and Testing).
, with Manual Liftgate: REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
.
B121A:11 Keypad Illumination
gn
Output: Circuit Short To REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
B121A:15 Keypad Illumination
Output: Circuit Short To REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
Battery or Open
B121B:01 Keypad Input Switch:
General Electrical Failure REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
rd
B123A:11 Left Front Turn Indicator:

Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Turn Signal and Hazard Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B123A:15 Left Front Turn Indicator:
ca
Circuit Short To Battery or REFER to: Turn Signal and Hazard Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open
B123B:11 Right Front Turn Indicator:
B123B:15 Right Front Turn Indicator:
Open
B1240:11 Start Button Mode
Indicator: Circuit Short To REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B1240:15 Start Button Mode
Indicator: Circuit Short To REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
Battery or Open Diagnosis and Testing).
B1247:11 Left Rear Turn Indicator:
B1247:15 Left Rear Turn Indicator:
Open
B1248:11 Right Rear Turn Indicator:
B1248:15 Right Rear Turn Indicator:
Open
B124A:11 Right Daytime Running
Light: Circuit Short To REFER to: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
B124A:15 Right Daytime Running
Battery or Open
B124B:11 Left Daytime Running
Ground
B124B:15 Left Daytime Running
Battery or Open
B124D:02 Tire Pressure Sensor:
General Signal Failure REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Diagnosis and
Testing).
B1251:00 Tire Pressure Sensor Low
Battery: No Sub Type REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Diagnosis and
Information Testing).
B1254:51 Right Rear (Outside on
Dual Wheel) Tire Pressure REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Diagnosis and
Sensor and Transmitter Testing).
Assembly: Not
Programmed
B1255:51 Left Rear (Outside On
Dual Wheel) Tire Pressure REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Diagnosis and
Sensor and Transmitter Testing).
Assembly: Not
Programmed
B1265:01 Left Rear Turn Lamp
Feedback: General REFER to: Turn Signal and Hazard Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Electrical Failure
m
B1266:01 Right Rear Turn Lamp
Feedback: General REFER to: Turn Signal and Hazard Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Electrical Failure
B126A:01 Drivers Door Interior Lock
Switch: General Electrical
Failure
B126C:11 Decklid/Boot/Trunk Key
co
.
Cylinder Switch: Circuit REFER to: Perimeter Anti-Theft Alarm (419-01A Perimeter Anti-Theft Alarm, Diagnosis and Testing).
gn
Short To Ground
B1277:11 Reverse Lamp: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Reversing Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1277:15 Reverse Lamp: Circuit
ia
Short To Battery or Open REFER to: Reversing Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12C2:11 Puddle Lamp: Circuit Short
To Ground REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
rd
B12C2:15 Puddle Lamp: Circuit Short

To Battery or Open REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12E8:11 Liftgate/Tailgate
ca
Control/Release Switch: REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12EE:11 Liftgate/Tailgate/Trunk
Release: Circuit Short To REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
B12EE:15 Liftgate/Tailgate/Trunk
Release: Circuit Short To REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Battery or Open
B12F4:12 Vehicle Speed Output:
Circuit Short To Battery REFER to: Flasher Lighting, Siren and Speaker System (100-05 Police Equipment, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12F4:14 Vehicle Speed Output:
Circuit Short To Ground or REFER to: Flasher Lighting, Siren and Speaker System (100-05 Police Equipment, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open
B1305:01 Hood Switch: General
Electrical Failure REFER to: Perimeter Anti-Theft Alarm (419-01A Perimeter Anti-Theft Alarm, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1306:01 Liftgate Ajar Switch:
General Electrical Failure REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B130C:12 Load Shed Control: Circuit
Short To Battery REFER to: Charging System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).
, or REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).
, or REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information,
or REFER to: Charging System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).
B130C:14 Load Shed Control: Circuit
Short To Ground or Open REFER to: Charging System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).
, or REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).
and Testing).
B130F:12 Run Accessory Control:
Circuit Short To Battery REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
B130F:14 Run Accessory Control:
Circuit Short To Ground or REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open
B1310:12 Run/Start Control: Circuit
Short To Battery REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B1310:14 Run/Start Control: Circuit
Short To Ground or Open REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
B1313:11 Interior Lighting Output:
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1313:15 Interior Lighting Output:
Circuit Short To Battery or REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open
B1315:11 Backlighting (Non
Reflective Controls) REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
Illumination Output: Circuit Chimes, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
Short To Ground
B1315:15 Backlighting (Non
Reflective Controls) REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
B1317:11
Illumination Output: Circuit Chimes, Diagnosis and Testing).
Short To Battery or Open
Third Row Power Fold
Seat Output: Circuit Short
co
REFER to: Third Row Seats (501-10C Third Row Seats, Diagnosis and Testing).
.
To Ground
gn
B1319:11 Shift Interlock (BSI) Output
Circuit: Circuit Short To REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
B1319:15 Shift Interlock (BSI) Output
ia
Circuit: Circuit Short To REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, Diagnosis and Testing).
Battery or Open
B1323:11 Horn Switch: Circuit Short
rd
To Ground REFER to: Horn (413-06 Horn, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1330:01 DC/AC Inverter Module:
General Electrical Failure REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Diagnosis and Testing).
ca

General Signal Failure REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Diagnosis and Testing).
Bus Signal / Message REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Diagnosis and Testing).
Failure
Internal Electronic Failure REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Diagnosis and Testing).
Not Configured REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1330:9A DC/AC Inverter Module:
Component or System REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1336:01 Left Front Door External
Antenna: General REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Electrical Failure
B1337:01 Right Front Door External
Antenna: General REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Electrical Failure
B1381:11 Left Front Door Handle
Proximity Sensor: Circuit REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Short To Ground
Proximity Sensor: Signal REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Invalid
B1382:11 Right Front Door Handle
Short To Ground
Proximity Sensor: Signal REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Invalid
B139A:11 Front Wiper Slow Mode
Input Signal: Circuit Short REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
To Ground
B139B:11 Front Wiper Intermittent
Mode Input Signal: Circuit REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
Short To Ground
B139C:15 Front Wiper Variable
Intermittent Mode Input REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
Signal: Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
B13A4:11 Front Wiper Fast Mode
Input: Circuit Short To REFER to: Wipers and Washers (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
B1430:12 Power Point Relay Reset GO to Pinpoint Test S
Output: Circuit Short To
Battery
B1430:14 Power Point Relay Reset GO to Pinpoint Test S
m
Ground or Open
B1435:12 Power Point Relay Set GO to Pinpoint Test S
B1435:14
Battery
Power Point Relay Set
Ground or Open
GO to Pinpoint Test S
. co
B1436:01 Digital Dimmer Switch
gn
Input: General Electrical REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
Failure Chimes, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1438:03 Battery Current Sensor:
FM (Frequency REFER to: Charging System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis
ia
Modulated) / PWM (Pulse and Testing).

Width Modulated) Failure , or REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).
rd

and Testing).
ca
B143A:11 Crash Event Detection GO to Pinpoint Test M

Output : Circuit Short To
Ground
B143B:11 Autolamp On Input: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Autolamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B143C:11 Headlamp Off Input:
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B143D:11 Headlamp On Input:
B143E:11 Headlamp Switch Input:
B143E:15 Headlamp Switch Input:
Circuit Short To Battery or REFER to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open
B1444:11 Left Rear Stop/Position
Lamp Output: Circuit Short REFER to: Stoplamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
To Ground
B1444:15 Left Rear Stop/Position
Lamp Output: Circuit Short REFER to: Stoplamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
To Battery or Open
B1445:11 Rear Park Lamps Output:
B1445:15 Rear Park Lamps Output:
Open
B1446:11 Front Park Lamps Output:
B1446:15 Front Park Lamps Output:
Open
B1447:11 Parklamp On Switch Input:
B1448:11 Right Rear Stop/Position
Lamp Output: Circuit Short REFER to: Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
To Ground
B1448:15 Right Rear Stop/Position
Lamp Output: Circuit Short REFER to: Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
To Battery or Open
B1449:12 Trailer Tow Park/Tail
Lamp Output: Circuit Short REFER to: Trailer Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
To Battery
B1449:14 Trailer Tow Park/Tail
Lamp Output: Circuit Short REFER to: Trailer Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
To Ground or Open
B145C:11 Ambient Lighting Power
Supply Output: Circuit REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Short To Ground
B145C:15 Ambient Lighting Power
Supply Output: Circuit REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1465:00 Ambient Lighting Bus 1:
No Sub Type Information REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
B1467:00 Ambient Lighting Bus 3:
No Sub Type Information REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1472:12
B1472:14
Ignition Key Removal
Inhibit: Circuit Short To
Battery
Ignition Key Removal
Inhibit: Circuit Short To
co
.
Ground or Open Diagnosis and Testing).
gn
B1495:11 Hands Free
Liftgate/Decklid Input REFER to: Body Closures (501-03 Body Closures, Diagnosis and Testing).
Sensor : Circuit Short To
Ground
ia
B149E:11 Left Front

Position/Sidemarker: REFER to: Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
rd
B149E:15 Left Front

Circuit Short To Battery or
Open
ca
B149F:11 Right Front

B149F:15 Right Front
Open
B14A8:11 Dome Switch Input: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B14AA:11 Demand Lamp Output:
B14AA:15 Demand Lamp Output:
Open
B14B2:11 Left Position Lamps:
B14B2:15 Left Position Lamps:
Open
B14B3:11 Right Position Lamps:
B14B3:15 Right Position Lamps:
Open
B14E5:01 Left Front Enhanced
Exterior Lighting System: REFER to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
Bus Signal / Message
Failure
B14E5:1C Left Front Enhanced
Circuit Voltage Out of
Range
Not Configured
Signal Calculation Failure
B14E7:01 Right Front Enhanced
Bus Signal / Message
Failure
B14E7:1C Right Front Enhanced
m
Circuit Voltage Out of
Range
B14E7:49
B14E7:55
Right Front Enhanced
Right Front Enhanced

Exterior Lighting System:
co

.
Not Configured
gn
Signal Calculation Failure
B14E9:01 Liftgate Unlock Switch:
ia
General Electrical Failure REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1512:11 Police Idle Switch: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Flasher Lighting, Siren and Speaker System (100-05 Police Equipment, Diagnosis and Testing).
rd
B1A79:11 Rear Fog Lamp: Circuit

Short To Ground REFER to: Fog Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1A79:15 Rear Fog Lamp: Circuit
ca
Short To Battery or Open REFER to: Fog Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1A85:11 Ambient Light Sensor:
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Autolamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1A85:13 Ambient Light Sensor:
Circuit Open REFER to: Autolamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1C55:12 Horn Relay: Circuit Short
To Battery REFER to: Horn (413-06 Horn, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1C55:14 Horn Relay: Circuit Short
To Ground or Open REFER to: Horn (413-06 Horn, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1D00:11 Left Low Beam: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1D00:15 Left Low Beam: Circuit
Short To Battery or Open REFER to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1D01:11 Right Low Beam: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1D01:15 Right Low Beam: Circuit
Short To Battery or Open REFER to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1D02:11 Left High Beam Circuit:
B1D02:15 Left High Beam Circuit:
Open
B1D03:11 Right High Beam Circuit:
B1D03:15 Right High Beam Circuit:
Open
B1D35:11 Hazard Switch: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Turn Signal and Hazard Lamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
C0040:12 Brake Pedal Switch "A":
Circuit Short To Battery REFER to: Stoplamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
C1017:11 Boot/Trunk Primary
Switch: Circuit Short To REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Ground
C113A:11 Wakeup Control: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
C113A:15 Wakeup Control: Circuit
Short To Battery or Open REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
C1A56:51 Left Front Tire Pressure
Sensor and Transmitter REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Diagnosis and
Assembly: Not Testing).
Programmed
C1A58:51 Right Front Tire Pressure
Sensor and Transmitter REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Diagnosis and
Assembly: Not Testing).
Programmed
C1D00:11 Park Brake Apply Switch :
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
P0230:12 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit: Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual., section 5 and PERFORM pinpoint test KC for DTC
Circuit Short To Battery P025A.
m
P0230:14 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit: GO to Pinpoint Test I
Circuit Short To Ground or
Open
U0100:87 Lost Communication With
ECM/PCM "A": Missing
Message
GO to Pinpoint Test B
. co
Anti-Lock Brake System
gn
(ABS) Control Module:
Missing Message
U0131:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test C
Power Steering Control
ia
Module: Missing Message

U0151:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test D
Restraints Control Module:
rd
Missing Message
U0155:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test E
Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC) Control Module:
ca
Missing Message
U0166:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test T
Auxiliary Heater Control
U0184:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test F
Radio: Missing Message
U0199:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test G
"Door Control Module A":
Missing Message
U0200:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test H
"Door Control Module B":
Missing Message
U0208:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test L
"Seat Control Module A":
Missing Message
U0212:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test N
Steering Column Control
U0230:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test U
Rear Gate Module:
Missing Message
U0253:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test O
Accessory Protocol
Interface Module: Missing
Message
U0256:87 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test P
Front Controls Interface
Module "A" : Missing
Message
Radio Transceiver: REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
Missing Message
U0559:56 Invalid Data Received
From Radio Transceiver: REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Diagnosis and
Invalid / Incompatible Testing).
Configuration
U1000:00 Solid State Driver GO to Pinpoint Test Q
Protection Active: Driver
Disabled: No Sub Type
Information
U1A4C:55 Build / End of Line mode If the IPC message center indicates the vehicle has entered factory mode,
Active: Not Configured REFER to: Factory Mode Deactivation (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, General Procedures).
If the IPC message center does not indicate the vehicle has entered factory mode, CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTCs) and REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC is retrieved again,
Click here to access Guided
Routine (BCM).
U2005:85 Vehicle Speed: Signal Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the BCM entry level requirements (found on the diagnostic scan tool self-test screen)
Above Allowable Range are met prior to performing the self-test. A speed signal is detected during the self-test. DIAGNOSE any observable
symptoms that are present. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the BCM self-test. If the DTC returns,
diagnose any PCM or ABS Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) causing a false vehicle speed signal.
U2100:00 Initial Configuration Not CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to this module. This DTC sets due to incomplete or
Complete: No Sub Type incorrect PMI procedures. INSTALL As-Built data from Professional Technician Society (PTS) following diagnostic scan tool
Information instructions under Module Programming>As-Built.
m
U2101:00 Control Module CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to this module. This DTC sets due to incomplete or
Configuration incorrect PMI procedures. INSTALL As-Built data from Professional Technician Society (PTS) following diagnostic scan tool
Incompatible: No Sub instructions under Module Programming>As-Built.
Type Information
U2200:00 Control Module
Configuration Memory
Corrupt: No Sub Type
Information
again,
co
INSTALL As-Built data from Professional Technician Society (PTS) following diagnostic scan tool instructions under Module
Programming>As-Built. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If BCM U2200:00 is retrieved

.
U3000:49 Control Module: Internal ADDRESS all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-
gn
Electronic Failure test. If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are retrieved, INSTALL a new .
BCM BCM Click here to

access Guided Routine (BCM).
U3006:16 Control Module Input GO to Pinpoint Test J
Power "A": Circuit Voltage
ia
Below Threshold
U3006:17 Control Module Input GO to Pinpoint Test K
rd
Above Threshold
U3006:1C Control Module Input GO to Pinpoint Test R
ca
Out of Range
Power "B": Circuit Voltage
Below Threshold
Power "B": Circuit Voltage
Above Threshold
U300A:01 Ignition Switch: General
Electrical Failure REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
Power "C": Circuit Voltage
Below Threshold
Power "C": Circuit Voltage
Above Threshold
Power "D": Circuit Voltage
Below Threshold
Power "D": Circuit Voltage
Above Threshold
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart: Multifunction Electronic Modules


diagnostic scan tool Wiring, terminals or REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network,
connectors Diagnosis and Testing).
Module
Pinpoint Tests
U0100:87
REFER to: Communications Network - System Operation and Component Description (418-00 Module Communications Network, Description and Operation).

m
U0100:87 Lost Communication With ECM/PCM "A": A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if powertrain data messages from the PCM over the
Missing Message HS-CAN1 are missing.
Possible Sources
. co
gn
PCM
BCM
ia
PINPOINT TEST A : U0100:87

NOTE: If new modules were installed prior to the DTC being set, the module configuration may be incorrectly set during the PMI or the PMI may not have
been carried out.
rd
A1
VERIFY THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL COMMUNICATES WITH THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE)
Ignition ON.
Connect the diagnostic scan tool.

ca
Check that a vehicle session can be established using the diagnostic scan tool.
Yes GO to A2
No DIAGNOSE the PCM not communicating with the diagnostic scan tool.
A2
RECHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) CONTINUOUS MEMORY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (CMDTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Wait 10 seconds.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, check the BCM Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
Is DTC U0100:00 or U0100:87 retrieved again?
Yes GO to A3
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network traffic or an intermittent fault
condition.
A3
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) KOEO (KEY ON,
ENGINE OFF) SELF-TEST
Are any voltage system related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to A4
A4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Yes REFER to the BCM DTC Chart in this section.
m
No GO to A5
A5
CHECK FOR DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U0100 SET IN OTHER MODULES
Ignition OFF.
. co
Ignition ON.
gn
Wait 10 seconds.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve all Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
ia
Is DTC U0100 set in any other module?

rd
Yes GO to A6
No GO to A7
ca
A6
Disconnect and inspect the PCM connectors.
Repair:
damaged or bent pins - install new terminals/pins
Reconnect the PCM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM.
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS), Removal and
Installation).
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS), Removal and
Installation).
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
A7
Disconnect and inspect the BCM connectors.
Repair:
m
U0121:87

co
.
gn

ia

U0121:87 Lost Communication With Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Control A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the ABS module
Module: Missing Message through the GWM are missing.
rd
Possible Sources
ca

Battery voltage concern
ABS module
BCM
PINPOINT TEST B : U0121:87

been carried out.
B1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to B2
No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network traffic or an intermittent fault
condition. CLEAR the DTC.
B2
Does the ABS module pass the network test?

Yes GO to B3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the ABS module.
B3
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) CONTINUOUS MEMORY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (CMDTCS)
Wait 10 seconds.
Is DTC U3006:16, U3006:17, U3007:16, U3007:17, U3013:16, U3013:17, U3014:16 or U3014:17 recorded?
Yes For DTC U3006:16, U3007:16, U3013:16 or U3014:16, GO to Pinpoint Test J

For DTC U3006:17, U3007:17, U3013:17 or U3014:17, GO to Pinpoint Test K
No GO to B4
B4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) MODULE SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the ABS module self-test.
m
Yes
REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control (206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control) .
No GO to B5
co
B5
.
gn
Wait 10 seconds.
ia
Yes GO to B6
rd
condition.
ca
B6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to B7
No GO to B8
B7
CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect the ABS module connector.
Repair:
Reconnect the ABS module connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new ABS module.
REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module (206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control, Removal and
Installation).
B8
Repair:
m
No
co
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by module connections. ADDRESS the root cause
.
gn
U0131:87

ia
rd

ca

U0131:87 Lost Communication With Power Steering Control Module: A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the PSCM through the
Missing Message GWM are missing.
Possible Sources
Communication network concernHCM

PSCM
BCM
PINPOINT TEST C : U0131:87

been carried out.
C1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to C2
C2
Does the PSCM pass the network test?
Yes GO to C3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the PSCM.
C3
Wait 10 seconds.

m
No GO to C4
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the PSCM self-test.

. co
C4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE PSCM (POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
gn
Yes
No GO to C5
ia
C5
rd
Wait 10 seconds.
ca
Yes GO to C6
condition.
C6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to C7
No GO to C8
C7
CHECK FOR CORRECT PSCM (POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect the PSCM connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the PSCM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Guided Routine (EPAS).
C8
Repair:
m

. co
gn
ia

rd
U0151:87
ca


U0151:87 Lost Communication With Restraints Control Module: A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if SRS messages from the RCM through the
Missing Message GWM are missing.
Possible Sources

RCM
BCM
PINPOINT TEST D : U0151:87

been carried out.
D1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to D2
D2
Does the RCM pass the network test?
Yes GO to D3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the RCM.
D3
Wait 10 seconds.
m
co

.
No GO to D4
gn
D4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE RCM (RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the RCM self-test.
ia
rd
Yes
REFER to: Airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to D5
ca
D5
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to D6
condition.
D6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to D7
No GO to D8
D7
CHECK FOR CORRECT RCM (RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect the RCM connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the RCM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RCM.
REFER to: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
m
D8
Repair:
. co
gn

ia
rd
ca
U0155:87


U0155:87 Lost Communication With Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Control A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the IPC
Module: Missing Message through the GWM are missing.
Possible Sources

IPC
BCM
PINPOINT TEST E : U0155:87
been carried out.
E1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to E2
E2
Does the IPC pass the network test?
Yes GO to E3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the IPC.
m
Wait 10 seconds.
. co
E3
gn

ia
No GO to E4
rd
E4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE IPC (INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the IPC self-test.
ca
Yes
REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes,
No GO to E5
E5
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to E6
condition.
E6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to E7
No GO to E8
E7
CHECK FOR CORRECT IPC (INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect the IPC connector.
Repair:
Reconnect the IPC connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
m
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, For vehicles with the police package,
INSTALL a new IPC.
For vehicles without the police package,

. co
REFER to: Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes, Removal and
Installation).

Click here to access Guided Routine (IPC).
gn
E8
ia
Repair:
rd

ca
U0184:87


U0184:87 Lost Communication With Radio: Missing A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the ACM through the GWM are
Message missing.
Possible Sources

GWM concern
ACM
BCM
PINPOINT TEST F : U0184:87

been carried out.
F1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to F2
m
F2
Does the ACM pass the network test?

. co
Yes GO to F3
gn
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the ACM.
ia
F3
rd
Wait 10 seconds.
ca

No GO to F4
F4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE ACM (AUDIO FRONT CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the ACM self-test.
Yes Without Sync™,

REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00A Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
Without: SYNC, Diagnosis and Testing).
Without Touchscreen,
REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00B Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
With: SYNC Without Touchscreen, Diagnosis and Testing).
With Touchscreen,
REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
With: Touchscreen Display, Diagnosis and Testing).
With Sony® audio system,

REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00D Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to F5
F5
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to F6
condition.
F6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
m
Yes
No
GO to F7
GO to F8
. co
gn
F7
CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM (AUDIO FRONT CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect the ACM connectors.
ia
Repair:
rd
Reconnect the ACM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ca
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new ACM.
Without Sync™,
REFER to: Audio Front Control Module (ACM) (415-00A Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
Without: SYNC, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Audio Front Control Module (ACM) (415-00B Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With:
SYNC Without Touchscreen, Removal and Installation).
With Touchscreen,
REFER to: Audio Front Control Module (ACM) (415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
With: Touchscreen Display, Removal and Installation).

REFER to: Audio Front Control Module (ACM) (415-00D Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System, Removal and Installation).
F8
Repair:
U0199:87
m

DTC Description
U0199:87 Lost Communication With "Door Control Module A":
Missing Message
A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the DDM over the MS-CAN
through the GWM are missing.
.
gn
Possible Sources

GWM concern
ia
DDM
BCM
rd
PINPOINT TEST G : U0199:87

been carried out.
ca
G1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to G2
G2
Does the DDM pass the network test?
Yes GO to G3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the DDM.
G3
Wait 10 seconds.

No GO to G4
G4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) SELF-TEST
Yes
No GO to G5
G5
m
Wait 10 seconds.

. co
Yes GO to G6
gn
condition.
ia
G6
rd
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
ca
Yes GO to G7
No GO to G8
G7
Disconnect and inspect the DDM connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the DDM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DDM.
REFER to: Driver Door Module (DDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Removal and Installation).
G8
Repair:
m
U0200:87
co
.
gn


ia
U0200:87 Lost Communication With "Door Control Module B": Missing A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the PDM through the
Message GWM are missing.
rd
Possible Sources

ca

GWM concern
PDM
BCM
PINPOINT TEST H : U0200:87

been carried out.
H1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to H2
H2
Does the PDM pass the network test?

Yes GO to H3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the PDM.
H3
Wait 10 seconds.

No GO to H4
H4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) SELF-TEST
m
Yes
No GO to H5
co
H5
.
gn
Wait 10 seconds.
ia
Yes GO to H6
rd
condition.
ca
H6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to H7
No GO to H8
H7
Disconnect and inspect the PDM connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the PDM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PDM.
REFER to: Passenger Door Module (PDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Removal and Installation).
H8
Repair:
m
. co
gn
P0230:14

ia
The BCM provides a ground to the coil side of the BJB fuel pump relay.
rd

ca

P0230:14 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit: Circuit Short To A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to ground or open from the
Ground or Open fuel pump relay coil circuit.
Possible Sources
Fuse
Fuel pump relay
BCM
Inspect BJB fuse 63 (30A).
PINPOINT TEST I : P0230:14

I1
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: BCM C2280F.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2280F-26 Ground
Yes GO to I3
No VERIFY BJB fuse 63 (30A) is OK. If OK, GO to I2 If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagram manual to identify the possible causes for
the short circuit.
I2
CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT
Disconnect BJB C1035B.
Measure:

C2280F-26 C1035B-17
m
Yes INSTALL a new BJB.
No Repair the circuit.
I3
. co
gn
Repair:
ia
Reconnect all connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

rd
ca
BCM Input Power Voltage Below Threshold
Vehicle Ground Information
Vehicle Power Information
The BCM receives voltage at all times from the BJB.


B11D9:16 Vehicle Battery: Circuit Voltage Below A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects lower than expected battery
Threshold voltage on the voltage supply input circuit.
U3006:16 Control Module Input Power “A”: Circuit A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects lower than expected battery
Voltage Below Threshold voltage on the voltage supply input circuit.
U3007:16 Control Module Input Power "B": Circuit A continuous DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects lower than expected battery voltage on the
Voltage Below Threshold voltage supply input circuit.
U3013:16 Control Module Input Power "C": Circuit A continuous DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects lower than expected battery voltage on the
U3014:16 Control Module Input Power "D": Circuit A continuous DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects lower than expected battery voltage on the
Possible Sources

Battery concern
BJB
BCM
PINPOINT TEST J : BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) INPUT POWER VOLTAGE BELOW THRESHOLD
J1
RECHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
m
Wait 10 seconds.
Is DTC B11D9:16, U3006:16, U3007:16, U3013:16 or U3014:16 still present?
Yes GO to J2
. co
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to a previous low battery voltage condition. CLEAR the DTC.
gn
J2
ia
Are any charging system Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) recorded?

rd
Yes DIAGNOSE the charging system concern.
REFER to: Charging System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
ca
, or REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
, or REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
or REFER to: Charging System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to J3
J3
Yes GO to J4
No If the battery is discharged, DIAGNOSE the cause of the low battery condition.
If the battery condition fails, INSTALL a new battery.
J4
COMPARE THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BATTERY VOLTAGE (V_BATT_BCM) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE ACTUAL
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Start the engine.
Turn on accessories (climate control blower on high speed, exterior lights).
With the engine running at idle, measure and record battery voltage:

Action
m
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the BCM PID V_BATT_BCM.
. co
gn
Is the recorded battery voltage within 0.2 volt of the PID?
Yes TURN the accessories and engine off, GO to J7

ia
No GO to J5
rd
J5
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
ca
Disconnect BCM C2280G.
Disconnect BCM C2280H.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2280G-17 Ground
C2280G-21 Ground
C2280G-22 Ground

C2280H-1 Ground
Are the voltages within 0.2 volt of the recorded battery voltage?
Yes GO to J6
No REPAIR the circuit in question for high resistance.
J6
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) PROCESSOR GROUNDS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect BCM C2280C.
Measure:

C2280C-6 Ground
C2280C-7 Ground
m
C2280C-10
. co Ground
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to J7

ca
J7
Repair:
TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern,

Click here to access Guided Routine
(BCM).
BCM Input Power Voltage Above Threshold



B11D9:17 Vehicle Battery: Circuit Voltage Above A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects higher than expected battery
Threshold voltage on the voltage supply input circuit.
U3006:17 Control Module Input Power “A”: Circuit A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects higher than expected battery
Voltage Above Threshold voltage on the voltage supply input circuit.
U3007:17 Control Module Input Power "B": Circuit A continuous DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects higher than expected battery voltage on the
Voltage Above Threshold voltage supply input circuit.
U3013:17 Control Module Input Power "C": Circuit A continuous DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects higher than expected battery voltage on the
U3014:17 Control Module Input Power "D": Circuit A continuous DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects higher than expected battery voltage on the
m
Possible Sources

BCM
co
PINPOINT TEST K : BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) INPUT POWER VOLTAGE ABOVE THRESHOLD
.
NOTE: B11D9:17, U3006:17, U3007:17, U3013:17 or U3014:17 may be stored in the module memory due to previous battery charging or vehicle jump starting events.
gn
K1
CHECK FOR OVERCHARGING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) SET IN OTHER MODULES
Ignition ON.
ia

rd
ca
No GO to K2
K2

Action
Does the battery voltage rise to 16 volts or higher?
m
Yes DIAGNOSE the over-charging system concern.
co
REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
.
gn
REFER to: Charging System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS) (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to K3
ia
K3
rd
Wait 10 seconds.
ca
Is DTC B11D9:17, U3006:17, U3007:17, U3013:17 or U3014:17 present?
Yes GO to K4
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been caused by module connections or may have been set previously
during battery charging or while jump starting the vehicle. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues.
K4
Repair:

(BCM).
U0208:87


U0208:87 Lost Communication With "Seat Control Module A": Missing A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the DSM through the
Message GWM are missing.
Possible Sources
m
GWM concern
DSM
BCM
co
.
been carried out.
gn
L1
Ignition ON.

ia

rd
Yes GO to L2
ca
L2
Does the DSM pass the network test?
Yes GO to L3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the DSM.
L3
Wait 10 seconds.

No GO to L4
L4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the DSM self-test.
Yes
REFER to: Front Seats (501-10A Front Seats, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to L5
L5
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to L6
condition.
m
L6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
. co
Wait 10 seconds.
gn

ia
Yes GO to L7
No GO to L8
rd
L7
CHECK FOR CORRECT DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) OPERATION
ca
Disconnect and inspect the DSM connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the DSM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DSM.
REFER to: Driver Front Seat Module (DSM) (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
L8
Repair:
B143A:11
The BCM transmits an event notification signal which communicates crash status and SRS deployment status to the PCM by turning on the fuel pump on Field Effect
Transistor (FET). When the PCM receives this event notification signal it initiates fuel cut-off.
m


B143A:11 Crash Event Detection Output: Circuit
Short To Ground
co
A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM senses a short to ground on the
event notification signal circuit to the PCM.
.
gn
Possible Sources

PCM
BCM
ia
PINPOINT TEST M : B143A:11

M1
CONFIRM THAT THE DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) RESETS
rd
Ignition ON.
ca
Wait 10 seconds.
Is DTC B143A:11 still present?
Yes GO to M2
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been falsely set by a BCM self-test, causing the signal to
momentarily stop and set the DTC.
M2
CHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect PCM C1381B (2.3L EcoBoost).
Disconnect PCM C1551B (3.5L EcoBoost).
Disconnect PCM C175B (3.5L or 3.7L Duratec).
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Is DTC B143A:11 still present?

Yes GO to M3
No GO to M4
M3
CHECK THE EVENT NOTIFICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: BCM C2280F
Measure:

C2280F-29 Ground
Yes GO to M5
M4
m
Disconnect and inspect the PCM connectors.
Repair:
. co
gn

ia
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM.
rd
Installation).
ca
Installation).
Installation).
M5
Repair:
U0212:87


U0212:87 Lost Communication With Steering Column Control Module: A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the SCCM through
Missing MessagePSCM the GWM are missing.
m
Possible Sources

GWM concern
SCCM
BCM
. co
gn
N1
Ignition ON.

ia

rd
Yes GO to N2
ca
N2
Does the SCCM pass the network test?
Yes GO to N3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the SCCM.
N3
Wait 10 seconds.

No GO to N4
N4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the SCCM self-test.
Yes
No GO to N5
N5
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to N6
condition.
m
N6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
. co
Wait 10 seconds.
gn

ia
Yes GO to N7
No GO to N8
rd
N7
CHECK FOR CORRECT SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
ca
Disconnect and inspect the SCCM connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SCCM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCCM.
REFER to: Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components, Removal and
Installation).
N8
Repair:
U0253:87
m

DTC Description
U0253:87 Lost Communication With Accessory Protocol Interface Module:
Missing Message
. co Fault Trigger Conditions
A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the APIM through
the GWM are missing.
gn
Possible Sources

ia
GWM concern
APIM
BCM
rd

O1
ca
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to O2
O2
Does the APIM pass the network test?
Yes GO to O3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the APIM.
O3
Wait 10 seconds.

No GO to O4
O4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE APIM (SYNC MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the APIM self-test.
Yes Without Touchscreen,

With Touchscreen,

m
No GO to O5
. co
O5
Wait 10 seconds.
gn

ia
Yes GO to O6
rd
condition.
ca
O6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to O7
No GO to O8
O7
CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM (SYNC MODULE) OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect the APIM connector.
Repair:
Reconnect the APIM connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.

Guided Routine (APIM).
O8
Repair:
m
U0256:87
. co
gn

ia
rd

ca

U0256:87 Lost Communication With Front Controls Interface Module "A" : A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the FCIM through
Missing Message the GWM are missing.
Possible Sources

GWM concern
FCIM
BCM
PINPOINT TEST P : U0256:87

P1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to P2
P2
Does the FCIM pass the network test?
Yes GO to P3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the FCIM.
P3
Wait 10 seconds.

No GO to P4
m
P4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE FCIM (FRONT CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the FCIM self-test.
Yes Without Sync™,

. co
REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00A Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
gn
Without: SYNC, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
With Touchscreen,
rd

ca
No GO to P5
P5
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to P6
condition.
P6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to P7
No GO to P8
P7
CHECK FOR CORRECT FCIM (FRONT CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE) OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect the FCIM connector.
Repair:
Reconnect the FCIM connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new FCIM.
Without Sync™,
With Touchscreen,
m
P8
. co
Repair:
gn
ia

rd
ca
U1000:00
The BCM uses solid state drivers (Field Effect Transistors (FET)) to control the output of several vehicle systems. When an overload occurs on any of these drivers,
the BCM disables the output and tracks the number of repetitive faults on each of these circuits. The module compares this number of overloads to 3 progressive
thresholds established for each circuit. At each threshold, DTC U1000:00 sets along with the DTC associated with the affected circuit.
REFER to: Module Controlled Functions - System Operation and Component Description (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Description and Operation).


U1000:00 Solid State Driver Protection Active: Driver Disabled: A continuous memory DTC that sets when the BCM has disabled a circuit due to a repetitive circuit
No Sub Type Information overload and a progressive threshold is met.
Possible Sources
BCM output circuit short
BCM
PINPOINT TEST Q : U1000:00

Q1
REVIEW THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Review the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from the BCM self-test.
Are any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present besides U1000:00?
Yes CORRECT the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the BCM DTC Chart in this section.
No GO to Q2
Q2
REPEAT THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Wait 10 seconds.
Repeat the BCM self-test.
Yes

m
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The circuit short has been repaired.
U3006:1C

. co
gn

ia

rd
REFER to: Charging System - System Operation and Component Description (414-00 Charging System - General Information, Description and Operation).
ca


U3006:1C Control Module Input Power "A": Circuit Voltage A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if the BCM detects out of range voltage on the
Out of Range voltage supply input circuits.
Possible Sources

Battery concern
BJB
BCM
PINPOINT TEST R : U3006:1C

R1
CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) IN THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Yes REFER to the BCM DTC Chart in this section.

No GO to R2
R2
Ignition ON.
No GO to R3
R3

Action
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Does the battery voltage rise to 16 volts or higher?
Yes DIAGNOSE the over-charging system concern.
No GO to R4
R4
RECHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, check the BCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Is DTC U3006:1C present?

Yes GO to R5
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been caused by module connections or may have been set previously
during battery charging or while jump starting the vehicle. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues.
R5
Yes GO to R6
No If the battery is discharged, DIAGNOSE the cause of the low battery condition.
If the battery condition fails, INSTALL a new battery.
m
R6
COMPARE THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BATTERY VOLTAGE (V_BATT_BCM) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE ACTUAL
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Start the engine.
Turn on accessories (climate control blower on high speed, exterior lights).
With the engine running at idle, measure and record battery voltage:

. co
gn
ia
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the BCM PID V_BATT_BCM.
Is the recorded battery voltage within 0.2 volt of the PID?

rd
Yes TURN the engine off, GO to R9
No GO to R7
ca
R7
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect BCM C2280G.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2280G-17 Ground
C2280G-21 Ground
C2280G-22 Ground
C2280H-1 Ground
Yes GO to R8
No REPAIR the circuit for high resistance.
R8
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) PROCESSOR GROUNDS
Ignition OFF.
m
Measure:

C2280C-6
C2280C-7
. co Ground
Ground
gn
C2280C-10 Ground
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to R9
R9
Repair:

(BCM).
Power Points are Never or Always Powered
REFER to: Module Controlled Functions - System Operation and Component Description (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Description and Operation).


B1430:12 Power Point Relay Reset Output: Circuit Short To A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to voltage from the power
Battery point relay coil circuit.
B1430:14 Power Point Relay Reset Output: Circuit Short To A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to ground or open from
Ground or Open the power point relay coil circuit.
B1435:12 Power Point Relay Set Output: Circuit Short To A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to voltage from the power
Battery point relay coil circuit.
B1435:14 Power Point Relay Set Output: Circuit Short To A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to ground or open from
Ground or Open the power point relay coil circuit.
m
Possible Sources
BCM
BJB
Power point
. co
gn
Inspect BJB fuse 60 (20A), fuse 62 (20A), fuse 65 (20A), fuse 67 (20A) and fuse 85 (5A).
PINPOINT TEST S : POWER POINTS ARE NEVER OR ALWAYS POWERED

ia
S1
VERIFY BATTERY
Perform battery test.
rd
Did battery pass test?

ca
Yes GO to S2
No REPLACE battery.
S2
CHECK BJB (BATTERY JUNCTION BOX) FUSES
Check BJB fuse 60 (20A), fuse 62 (20A), fuse 65 (20A), fuse 67 (20A) and fuse 85 (5A).
Are the fuses OK?
Yes GO to S4
No REPLACE fuses as necessary. GO to S3
S3
RECHECK BJB (BATTERY JUNCTION BOX) FUSES
Check BJB fuse 60 (20A), fuse 62 (20A), fuse 65 (20A), fuse 67 (20A) and fuse 85 (5A).
Are the fuses OK?
Yes GO to S4
No REPAIR the circuit short.
S4
CHECK THE POWER POINT WITH KEY OFF
Ignition OFF.
Connect a known good device to each power point.
Are all power points off?
Yes GO to S5
No GO to S6
S5
CHECK THE POWER POINT OPERATION WITH KEY ON
Ignition ON.
Connect a known good device to each power point and verify the device works.
Are all the power points operational?
Yes The system is operating normally at this time.

No If no power points are operational, GO to S6
If some power points are inoperative, CORRECT the open circuit as necessary.
m
S6
CHECK FOR BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Is BCM DTC B1430:12 , B1430:14, B1435:12, or B1435:14 present?
Yes For BCM DTC B1430:12 or B1435:12, GO to S7

For BCM DTC B1430:14 or B1435:14, GO to S9
. co
No GO to S11
gn
S7
CHECK THE BJB (BATTERY JUNCTION BOX) FOR INTERNAL SHORT
Ignition OFF.
ia
Disconnect BJB C1035B.
Ignition ON.
rd
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) the and repeat the BCM self-test.
ca
Is DTC B1430:12 or DTC B1435:12 still present?
Yes GO to S8
No INSTALL a new BJB.
S8
CHECK THE POWER POINT CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect BCM C2280F.
Using the Terminal Release Kit, release and temporarily remove BCM C2280F-23 and C2280F-33.
Connect BCM C2280F.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C1035B-20 Ground
C1035B-24 Ground

No Turn ignition off. INSTALL C2280F-13 and C2280F-14 and GO to S9
S9
CHECK THE POWER POINT CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect BJB C1035B if necessary.
Disconnect BCM C2280F if necessary.
Measure:

C1035B-20 Ground
C1035B-24 Ground
m
Yes
No
GO to S10
REPAIR the circuit.

. co
gn
S10
CHECK THE POWER POINT CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR OPENS
Measure:

ia

C2280F-23 C1035B-20
rd
C2280F-33 C1035B-24
ca
No Repair the circuit.
S11
CHECK THE POWER POINT SET CIRCUIT FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Momentarily connect a fused jumper wire:

C2280F-23 Ground

Are all the power points operational?
Yes GO to S12
S12
CHECK THE POWER POINT RESET CIRCUIT FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Momentarily connect a fused jumper wire:

C2280F-33 Ground
Are all power points off?
Yes

m
U0166:87
co
.
gn


ia
U0166:87 Lost Communication With Auxiliary Heater Control Module: Missing Sets in the BCM if messages from the RHVAC control module over the HS-CAN
rd
Possible Sources
ca

RHVAC control module
BCM
PINPOINT TEST T : U0166:87

T1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to T2
T2
Does the RHVAC module pass the network test?
Yes GO to T3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the RHVAC control module.

T3
Wait 10 seconds.

No GO to T4
T4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR
CONDITIONING) MODULE SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the RHVAC control module self-test.
Yes
REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) (412-00 Climate Control System -
m
General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to T5
. co
REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (412-00 Climate Control System
- General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
gn
T5
Wait 10 seconds.
ia

rd
Yes GO to T6
ca
condition.
T6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to T7
No GO to T8
T7
CHECK FOR CORRECT RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect RHVAC Control Module C3198.
Repair:
Reconnect the RHVAC Control Module connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RHVAC Control Module.
REFER to: Rear Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (RHVAC) Control Module (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
T8
Repair:
m
No
Guided Routine (BCM). co
.
gn
U0230:87
ia
rd
ca


U0230:87 Lost Communication With Rear Gate Module: Missing A continuous memory DTC that sets in the BCM if messages from the RGTM through the GWM
Possible Sources

RGTM module
BCM
PINPOINT TEST U : U0230:87

U1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to U2
U2
Does the RGTM pass the network test?
Yes GO to U3
No DIAGNOSE no communication with the RGTM.
U3
Wait 10 seconds.

No GO to U4
m
U4
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the RGTM self-test.

. co
Yes
gn
No GO to U5
ia
U5
rd
Wait 10 seconds.
ca
Yes GO to U6
condition.
U6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to U7
No GO to U8
U7
Disconnect and inspect the RGTM connector.
Repair:
Reconnect the RGTM connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
U8
Repair:
m
Yes
co
.
gn
ia
rd

ca
Removal
1. NOTE: If the BCM did not respond to the diagnostic scan tool, As-Built Data may need to be entered as part of the
repair. This step is only necessary if the BCM is being replaced
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the BCM following the on-screen instructions.
2. NOTE: The PAM is integral to the BCM. This step is only necessary if the BCM is being replaced.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the PAM following the on-screen instructions.
3.
Remove the nut and the BCM.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTE: If installing a new BCM on vehicles equipped with push button start, the ignition cannot be turned on until 2 keys
are programmed to the vehicle. The BCM still communicates with the diagnostic scan tool with the ignition off. If
necessary, use the previous diagnostic scan tool session or start a diagnostic scan tool session using the PCM part
number or tear tag number located on the PCM.
NOTE: If installing a new BCM, verify at least 2 of the vehicle keys are available prior to carrying out this procedure.
NOTE: Carry out the remaining steps only if installing a new BCM.
2. NOTE: A diagnostic scan tool should not be used to program keys for this specific step.
Program the keys.

Place the first key in the ignition lock cylinder or the backup starting location.
Refer to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Component Location (419-01C Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) -
Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System, Description and Operation).
Turn the ignition lock cylinder to the RUN position or press the START/STOP button and wait approximately 6
seconds.
Turn the ignition lock cylinder to the OFF position or press the START/STOP button and remove the first key.
Place the second key in the ignition lock cylinder or the backup starting location.
Turn the ignition lock cylinder to the RUN position or press the START/STOP button.
3. Carry out the parameter reset.

Refer to: Anti-Theft Security Access (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS), General Procedures).
Refer to: Anti-Theft Security Access (419-01C Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle
System, General Procedures).
4. Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the BCM following the on-screen instructions.
5. Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the Configuration Engine Immobilizer (CEI) configuration following the on-screen
instructions (Toolbox > Body > Service Functions > CEI Lock Configuration).
6. Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the battery monitor sensor reset following the on-screen instructions (Toolbox >
Body > BMS Reset).
7. If equipped with video rear parking aid, using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the new module initialization following the
on-screen instructions (Toolbox > Electrical > Service Functions > LIN New Module Initialization).
8. Configure the customer preference programmable parameters.

Refer to: Module Programming (418-01 Module Configuration, General Procedures).
m
9. Train the tire pressure sensors.
Refer to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Location Calibration (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS), General Procedures). co
10. Carry out the BCM self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to confirm all DTC have
been cleared.
.
gn
11. Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the PAM following the on-screen instructions.

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Body Panel Sectioning
Resistance Spotwelding Equipment

MIG/MAG Welding Equipment
Spot Weld Drill Bit
Materials
Name Specification
Seam Sealer -
TA-2-B, 3M 08308, FUSOR 805 DTM
Activation
m
NOTICE: Do not begin removal of the vehicle body side until the replacement panel is available for reference.
NOTICE: Do not carry out body side sectioning repairs in areas of door hinge, safety belt or striker anchoring points.
Welding within 50 mm (1.96 in) of door hinge or striker locations may compromise structural integrity during a
collision. co
NOTICE: Sectioning within the door hinge portion of the A-pillar, B-pillar or dog leg portion of the quarter panel is not
.
approved by Ford Motor Company.
gn
1. Only remove as much of the outer body side panel material as necessary using available tools.
Refer to: Joining Techniques (501-25 Body Repairs - General Information, General Procedures).
ia
2. Bodyside replacement panels are released as 2-part panels.

rd
ca
3. Detrim the vehicle as necessary and remove spot welds from the damaged area.
Use the General Equipment: Spot Weld Drill Bit
4. NOTE: Use resistance spotwelding equipment where possible. This will produce a higher quality repair.
NOTE: When welding overlapping surfaces or substrates, apply a high quality weld-through primer between the surfaces
prior to welding.
Where possible, create a lap-joint backer plate using a portion of the old panel. This will create a stronger joint.
Use the General Equipment: Resistance Spotwelding Equipment
Use the General Equipment: MIG/MAG Welding Equipment
5. Rough finish all sectioning joints with a fibre-based body filler, final finish sectioning joints and plug welds with a
conventional body filler.
6. Properly seal all horizontal joints to prevent moisture intrusion. Water and moisture migrate toward horizontal joints and
corrosion tends to occur more rapidly in these areas.
Material: Seam Sealer / TA-2-B, 3M 08308, FUSOR 805 DTM
7. Proceed with the refinishing process using a Ford approved paint system and manufacturers recommendations.
8. Restore corrosion protection.

Refer to: Corrosion Prevention (501-25 Body Repairs - General Information, General Procedures).
9. Reinstall vehicle trim as necessary.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Body Repair Health and Safety and General Precautions
WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear protective
equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and chemically resistant gloves.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always wear protective equipment including eye protection with side shields, and a dust mask when
sanding or grinding. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry out body side sectioning repairs in areas of door hinge or striker anchoring points.
Welding within 50 mm (1.96 in) of door hinge or striker locations may compromise structural integrity during a
collision. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
WARNING: Invisible ultraviolet and infrared rays emitted in welding can injure unprotected eyes and skin. Always
use protection such as a welder's helmet with dark-colored filter lenses of the correct density. Electric welding will
produce intense radiation, therefore, filter plate lenses of the deepest shade providing adequate visibility are
recommended. It is strongly recommended that persons working in the weld area wear flash safety goggles. Also wear
m
protective clothing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: All safety belt components must be inspected and corrected as part of any collision repair. Inspect all
co
safety belt components as prescribed by Safety Belt Inspection and Repair After a Collision found in Section 501-20A
General Procedures of this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the safety belt
system and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if
gn
equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production
configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash.
ia
WARNING: Collision damage repair must conform to the instructions contained in this workshop manual.
Replacement components must be new, genuine Ford Motor Company parts. Recycled, salvaged, aftermarket or
rd
reconditioned parts (including body parts, wheels or safety restraint components) are not authorized by Ford.
Departure from the instructions provided in this manual, including alternate repair methods or the use of substitute
ca
components, risks compromising crash safety. Failure to follow these instructions may adversely affect structural
integrity and crash safety performance, which could result in serious personal injury to vehicle occupants in a crash.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-25 Body Repairs - General Information 2017 Explorer
Specifications
Specifications

Item Specification
Plug Weld hole 8 mm (0.315 in)
Weld Wire ER70S-3 0.9 mm (0.0354 in) - 1.1 mm (0.0433 in)
Weld Wire ER70S-6 0.9 mm (0.0354 in) - 1.1 mm (0.0433 in)
m

Weld Nugget Chart
Test Thickness of Metal

0.7 mm (0.0276 in) + 0.7 mm (0.0276 in)
. co Nugget Size
4.3 mm (0.1693 in)
0.7 mm (0.0276 in) + 0.7 mm (0.0276 in) + 0.7 mm (0.0276 in) 4.3 mm (0.1693 in)
gn
0.9 mm (0.0354 in) + 0.9 mm (0.0354 in) 4.7 mm (0.185 in)
1 mm (0.0394 in) + 1 mm (0.0394 in) 5.2 mm (0.2047 in)
ia
1 mm (0.0394 in) + 1 mm (0.0394 in) + 1 mm (0.0394 in) 5.2 mm (0.2047 in)

rd
2 mm (0.0787 in) + 2 mm (0.0787 in) 7.1 mm (0.2795 in)

ca
3 mm (0.1181 in) + 3 mm (0.1181 in) 8.7 mm (0.3425 in)

3 mm (0.1181 in) + 0.7 mm (0.0276 in) 4.3 mm (0.1693 in)
0.7 mm (0.0276 in) + 3 mm (0.1181 in) + 1 mm (0.0394 in) 5.2 mm (0.2047 in)
2 mm (0.0787 in) + 2 mm (0.0787 in) + 0.7 mm (0.0276 in) 4.3 mm (0.1693 in)
0.9 mm (0.0354 in) + 0.9 mm (0.0354 in) + 2 mm (0.0787 in) 4.7 mm (0.185 in)
2 mm (0.0787 in) + 0.9 mm (0.0354 in) + 1 mm (0.0394 in) 5.2 mm (0.2047 in)

Ford Recommended Steel Repairability Matrix
Grade Trade Descriptions Welding Method Cold Use of Temperature Maximum

Repairs Heat Range Heat
MIG Squeeze- MIG
for
Type Braze
Repair
Resistance
Spot
Welding
(STRW)
Mild Steel Mild Yes Yes N/A Yesa Yes Up to 650° C 90
(1,200° F) seconds x
2
Laminate Steel Quiet Steel No Yes No Yesa NA NA NA
Bake Bake Hardened Steel (BH) 180, Yes Yes Yesb Yesa Yes Up to 650° C 90
Hardened 200, 210, 220, 250, 280 (1,200° F) seconds x
Steel (BH) 2
Solid Solution - Yes Yes Yesb Yesa Yes Up to 650° C 90
Strengthened (1,200° F) seconds x
2
High-Strength High-Strength Low Alloy (HSLA) Yes Yes Yesb Yesa Yes Up to 650° C 90
Low Alloy 200, High-Strength Low Alloy (1,200° F) seconds x
(HSLA) (HSLA 250, High-Strength Low 2
Alloy (HSLA 260, High-Strength
Low Alloy (HSLA 300, High-
m
Strength Low Alloy (HSLA 340,
High-Strength Low Alloy (HSLA
350, High-Strength Low Alloy
Dual Phase
(HSLA 500, High-Strength Low
Alloy (HSLA) 550
Dual Phase Steel (DP) 500, Dual
.
Yes
co
Yes Yesb Yesa No NA NA
Steel (DP) Phase Steel (DP) 600
gn
Dual Phase Dual Phase Steel (DP) 700, Dual Yesd Yes Yesb No No NA NA
Steel (DP)c Phase Steel (DP) 900 and Dual
Phase Steel (DP) 1,000
ia
Ultra High Boron, Martensitic Yesa Yes Yesb No No NA NA

Strength Steel
rd
(UHSS)
(Martensitic,
Boron)e
ca
Transformation Transformation Induced Plasticity NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Induced Steel (TRIP) 590, Transformation
Plasticity Steel Induced Plasticity Steel (TRIP) 780,
(TRIP) Transformation Induced Plasticity
Steel (TRIP) 980
aCold repairs can be performed if damage excludes kinks. May section only if approved procedure in workshop manual.
bMetal Inert Gas (MIG) braze allowed for non-structural applications only.
cDual phase steels DP 700 class, DP 900 class and DP 1,000 class must be replaced at factory joints, no sectioning unless
approved procedure in workshop manual.
dFor DP 900, 1,000 and Boron use Metal Inert Gas (MIG) plug welding only, no stitch welding.
eBoron and Ultra High Strength Steel (UHSS)-Mortensite components must be replaced at factory joints, no sectioning allowed.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Specifications
Materials
Name Specification
Seam Sealer -
TA-2-B, 3M 08308, FUSOR 805 DTM
Silicone Spray Lubricant ESR-M13P4-A
XL-6
Permatex® Trim and Weatherstrip Adhesive -
81850
Silicone Gasket and Sealant WSE-M4G323-A4
TA-30
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Body System
Symptom Chart(s)
Dust and Water Leaks
Most dust and water leaks occur due to missing or incorrectly installed body sealer or components. The source of the leak is
detected by:
pressurizing the vehicle and testing with soapy water.

Locate and tape off the body vents.
Turn the blower motor to HI.
Turn the air recirculation OFF.
Close the windows and doors.
Open the hood and spray soapy water along body seams and grommets. Make sure to test the areas around the
A-pillar at the fender and the hood hinge area.
m
Check for bubbles.
inspecting for a dust pattern or water path near and above the area in question.
removing any trim or carpet in the general area of the leak.
road testing or water-hose testing the vehicle.
co
placing a bright light under the vehicle, removing any necessary trim or carpet and inspecting the interior of the body at
joints and weld lines.
.
Wind noise
gn
Most wind noise leaks occur at the corners of the windows or in the doors. Wind noise is detected by driving the vehicle at
highway speeds or at speeds as specified by the customer. The vehicle should be driven in 4 different directions, with all the
windows closed, the radio off and the A/C blower motor off.
ia
Squeak and Rattle

rd
Squeak and rattle noises are generally caused by loose parts, contact or relative movement between 2 surfaces or loose wires
and connectors. The source of the noise can be detected by stopping movement of the suspect part by hand or by using
dampening or low friction materials.
ca
Symptom Chart: Body System - General Information
NOTE: All conditions, possible sources or actions do not apply to every vehicle due to variability in features, options and parts
content.

Draft/wind noise and Loose fit seal PINCH the seal carrier to improve retention on the seal flange.
water leak around
Seal installed REINSTALL the seal.
door perimeter
incorrectly
Door misaligned REALIGN the door. CHECK the door gaps and fit in the door opening and
ADJUST as necessary.
REFER to: Front Door Alignment (501-03 Body Closures, General Procedures).
REFER to: Rear Door Alignment (501-03 Body Closures, General Procedures).
Scuff plate installed REINSTALL the scuff plate.
incorrectly
Seal or seal INSTALL a new seal/pushpins.
pushpins damaged
Sheet metal joints in SEAL leaks with seam sealer.
the door or door
opening
Draft/wind noise and Door glass ADJUST the door glass.
water leak around misaligned
glass run
Glass run installed REINSTALL the glass run.
incorrectly or not REFER to: Front Door Glass Run and Bracket (501-11 Glass, Frames and
fully seated Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Front Door Glass Top Run (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Rear Door Glass Run and Bracket (501-11 Glass, Frames and
REFER to: Rear Door Glass Top Run (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
Leak path behind INSTALL foam rope behind the glass run.
the glass run
Glass run channel PINCH the glass run channel to reduce size of opening.
spread wide
Glass run damaged INSTALL a new glass run.
REFER to: Front Door Glass Run and Bracket (501-11 Glass, Frames and
m
REFER to: Front Door Glass Top Run (501-11 Glass, Frames and
co
.
Glass run REINSTALL the glass run. INSTALL new part as necessary.
gn
overstuffed in REFER to: Front Door Glass Run and Bracket (501-11 Glass, Frames and
corners creating Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
pucker REFER to: Front Door Glass Top Run (501-11 Glass, Frames and
ia
rd

Inner glass run REINSTALL the glass run. INSTALL new part as necessary.
ca
reveal lip not REFER to: Front Door Glass Run and Bracket (501-11 Glass, Frames and
contacting the sheet Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
metal REFER to: Front Door Glass Top Run (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Inner belt REINSTALL the inner belt and INSTALL foam rope behind the inner lip of the
overstuffed creating glass run at the belt. INSTALL new glass run as necessary.
a gap between the
glass and glass run
Draft/wind noise and Belt line seal ADJUST the seal (do not bend the flange).
water leak at inner installed incorrectly
belt line on flange
No contact with the ADJUST the door glass.
side glass
No contact with the ADJUST the belt line seal or ADD foam at the seal ends.
glass runs at both
ends of the belt line
seal
Belt line seal INSTALL a new seal.
damaged
Draft/wind noise and Belt line seal ADJUST the seal.
water leak at outer installed incorrectly
belt line on flange (no glass
contact)
Belt line seal does ADJUST the door glass.
not contact the glass
No contact with the ADJUST the belt line seal or ADD foam at the seal ends.
glass runs at both
ends of the belt line
seal
Belt line seal INSTALL a new seal.
damaged
Draft/wind noise at Hole in the SEAL hole with suitable tape.
inner door weathershield
handle/speaker
Weathershield REALIGN the weathershield. INSTALL a new weathershield if the pressure
opening
misaligned sensitive adhesive fails.
Exterior door handle REALIGN or INSTALL a new seal as necessary.
seal
misaligned/damaged
m
Speaker or speaker REPAIR the speaker seal or INSTALL a new door speaker.
seal missing or
Draft/wind noise and

water leaks at floor
damaged
co
Missing or damaged CHECK plugs/grommets for correct installation or damage. INSTALL new
plugs/grommets plugs/grommets if necessary.
pan and grommets
.
gn
Road noise Missing mastic CHECK for missing mastic insulators.
insulators
Missing body CHECK for missing body insulators.
ia
insulators
Rattles in body/doors Loose wires/cables CHECK that all wires/cables are correctly routed and inserted in correct
and instrument panel retainers.
rd
Loose CHECK the doors by carefully striking underside of the doors with a rubber
objects/components mallet while listening for rattles in the doors and the pillars. REMOVE or
ca
in door wells, pillars TIGHTEN loose objects/components.

quarter trim panels
Buzz from the IDENTIFY which components of the instrument panel are buzzing.
instrument panel SECURE/FASTEN components as necessary, ADD foam or felt as needed if
components rattle persists.
Door drain holes Holes clogged with CLEAN the drain holes of foreign material with a punch or screwdriver. CHECK
collecting water mud or road tar the drain holes regularly.
Wind noise from Exterior mirror REALIGN with edges shingled to airflow, with no gaps.
exterior rear view housing misaligned
mirror
Mirror sail gasket REINSTALL with gasket unfolded and aligned correctly.
folded/misaligned
Mirror housing trim REINSTALL with edges shingled to airflow.
cap installed
incorrectly
Inner sail trim REINSTALL the sail trim. ADJUST the door trim.
installed incorrectly
Inner sail REINSTALL the trim cover with gasket/barrier aligned correctly.
gasket/barrier
Air path through BLOCK the air path(s) with foam/tape.
wiring
bundle/fastener
access holes
Exposed fastener INSTALL a new cap if missing.
access hole on
mirror housing/sail
Mirror housing trim INSTALL a new exterior mirror.
cap under-flush to REFER to: Exterior Mirror (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
the housing causing Installation).
whistle
Rattle/vibration from Mirror mounting nuts TIGHTEN the mirror mounting nuts
exterior rear view loose REFER to: Exterior Mirror (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
mirror Installation).
Aftermarket air If possible, REMOVE the aftermarket air deflector/stone shield, then ROAD
deflector/stone TEST vehicle. If the concern is no longer present, ADVISE the customer the
shields aftermarket component was causing concern.
Draft/wind noise and Air traveling up INSTALL foam rope full length of the A-pillar.
water leak around windshield molding
perimeter of all fixed along the A-pillar
glass
Gaps in the sealant Install new windshield/rear glass.
m
bead of REFER to: Fixed Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General
windshield/rear Procedures).
glass
Windshield/rear
glass misaligned or
not installed
co
Install new windshield/rear glass.
REFER to: Fixed Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General
Procedures).
correctly
.
gn
Rear hood seal at REALIGN or INSTALL a new seal as necessary.
base of windshield
misaligned/damaged
ia
High mounted CHECK the high mounted stoplamp seal. REPAIR or INSTALL as necessary.
stoplamp
A-pillar applique INSPECT the attachment clips for damage and REINSTALL part. INSTALL new
rd
along windshield part as necessary.

lifting
ca
Draft/wind noise and Loose fit seal PINCH seal carrier to improve retention on seal flange or INSERT foam in
water leak around carrier.
liftgate/luggage
Seal misaligned or REINSTALL seal.
compartment
perimeter
Liftgate/luggage REALIGN the liftgate. CHECK the liftgate fit in body opening and ADJUST as
compartment necessary.
misaligned REFER to: Liftgate Alignment (501-03 Body Closures, General Procedures).
Scuff plate REINSTALL the scuff plate.
misaligned
Seal or seal INSTALL a new seal or pushpins.
pushpins damaged
Draft/water leak or Roof opening Refer to the Symptom Chart: NVH for diagnosis.
noise from roof panel/components REFER to: Roof Opening Panel (501-17 Roof Opening Panel, Diagnosis and
opening panel Testing).
Wind noise created Fender splash shield REALIGN the fender splash shield.
by airflow over or misaligned
behind body panels
Body panel REALIGN the appropriate body panel.
misaligned (exposed
edge)
Hood misaligned CHECK the hood gaps and fit. ADJUST the hood as necessary.
(front margin) REFER to: Hood Alignment (501-03 Body Closures, General Procedures).
Front grille edge APPLY foam in hollow areas behind louvers.
noise
Wind noise created Grille fit to the If possible, ADJUST the grille opening panel forward to eliminate wind noise.
by grille opening leading edge on
panel hood
Sharp edges due to REMOVE the sharp edges (no visible surface damage).
material
imperfections
Wind noise from air Air extractor housing REINSTALL the air extractor housing.
extractor (body vent) seated incorrectly
Air extractor housing INSTALL a new air extractor.
or flaps damaged
Wind noise from bug Turbulence created DETERMINE if the component is an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
shield/exterior by location and part or aftermarket. If aftermarket, ADVISE the customer accordingly. If Original
windshield sun visor shape Equipment Manufacturer (OEM), VERIFY correctly installed. If the noise is
abnormal REPAIR or INSTALL new as required.
Wind noise from cowl Leaf screen rubber REINSTALL the part. If the part still does not fit, CHECK for damaged
panel (leaf screen) lip not touching the attachment clips. INSTALL new part as necessary.
windshield
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
B-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
Upper and Lower
1. Release the clips and remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Release the clips and remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
m
3.
Disconnect the safety belt anchor pretensionser.
1. Turn the locking screw. co
2. Disconnect the anchor pretensioner and position the safety belt aside.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove the anchor pretensioner boot.

5.
Position aside the lower B-pillar trim panel.
1. Release the tab.
m
2. Release the tab.
3. Release the upper clips and detach the lower B-pillar trim panel from the upper B-pillar trim panel.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Release the clips and remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
m
Upper
co
7. Release the tabs and position aside the grab handle bolt covers.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. Remove the bolts and the grab handle.

m
. co
gn
ia
9.
Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.
rd
1. Position aside the weatherstrip.

2. Position aside the weatherstrip.
3. Release the lower clips.
ca
4. Release the upper clip and remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Brake and Clutch Systems Health and Safety Precautions
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do
not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system
contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not breathe dust or use compressed air to blow dust from storage containers or friction
components. Remove dust using government-approved techniques. Friction component dust may be a cancer and
lung disease hazard. Exposure to potentially hazardous components may occur if dusts are created during repair of
friction components, such as brake pads and clutch discs. Exposure may also cause irritation to skin, eyes and
respiratory tract, and may cause allergic reactions and/or may lead to other chronic health effects. If irritation persists,
seek medical attention or advice. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: If the brake fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold
water.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
206-03 Front Disc Brake 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Removal
All vehicles
1. Remove the brake pads.

Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: 352 mm (14 in) Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: 352 mm (14 in) Brakes (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
Vehicles with 352 mm (14 in) brakes
2. Remove the bolt and position the brake caliper aside.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
All vehicles
3. NOTE: 352 mm (14 in) brakes shown, 325 mm (13 in) brakes similar.
Remove the bolts and the brake caliper anchor plate. Discard the bolts.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
206-04 Rear Disc Brake 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Removal
1. Remove the brake pads.
Refer to: Brake Pads (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the bolts and the brake caliper anchor plate. Discard the bolts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake Caliper
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid WSS-M6C65-A2
PM-20
Removal
NOTICE: If the fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
NOTICE: Do not allow grease, oil, brake fluid or other contaminants to contact the pad lining material, or damage to
components may occur. Do not install contaminated pads.
NOTE: 352 mm (14 in) brakes shown, 325 mm (13 in) brakes similar.
m
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. NOTE: Make sure all openings are sealed.

. co
Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04A Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and position the brake hose aside. Discard the washers.
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTICE: Make sure the brake caliper guide pin bolts are clean and free of debris or a binding condition may
occur.
NOTICE: Make sure the caliper pin boots are correctly seated to prevent corrosion to the guide pins.
Remove the bolts and the brake caliper.

Torque:
325 mm (13 in) brakes ::
53 lb.ft (72 Nm)
352 mm (14 in) brakes ::
55 lb.ft (75 Nm)
m
Installation
. co
1. NOTICE: Make sure that the brake hose is not twisted when installing the brake caliper or damage to the brake
gn
flexible hose may occur.
2. Lubricate the brake caliper flow bolt threads and new washers with clean specified brake fluid before installing the brake
ia
caliper flow bolt into the brake caliper.

Material: Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid / PM-20 (WSS-M6C65-A2)
rd
3. Bleed the brake system.

Refer to: Brake System Pressure Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake Caliper
Removal
1. Release the parking brake cable tension.

Refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).

3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake caliper lever and bracket.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove the rear brake flexible hose.

Refer to: Rear Brake Flexible Hose (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
5. Remove the 2 bolts and the brake caliper.

m
6. NOTICE: Brake pads with adhesive on the insulator are one-time use only. When the brake pads are separated
co
from the brake caliper, new brake pads must be installed to prevent brake noise and shudder.
NOTE: For 13.5 in (345 mm) brakes, note the orientation of the inner and outer brake pads for reference during
installation. Outer brake pads will have OTR stamped on the top of the backing. Inner brake pads (Police vehicles only)
.
will have INR stamped on the top of the backing.
gn
Remove and discard the brake pads.
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove and discard the brake pad clips.

m
Installation
co
1. NOTICE: The brake pad-to-anchor plate contact points must be cleaned using a wire brush prior to installation
of the brake pad slide clips or uneven brake pad wear may result.
.
Clean and inspect the brake caliper anchor plate. Install a new anchor plate as necessary.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. NOTICE: During installation, make sure that the brake flexible hose does not become twisted or damage to hose
may occur.
NOTE: If equipped, verify correct installation of the brake flexible hose protective sleeve and tie strap.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
206-00 Brake System - General Information 2017 Explorer
General Procedures
Brake Disc Machining
Repair
NOTE: On-Vehicle Brake Lathe Training Videos
1. Vehicle preparation.
Click here to view a video version of this procedure.
2. Mounting the machine.
m
3. Lateral runout adjustment.

. co
gn
4. Making the cut.

ia

rd
5. Cutting the opposite side.

ca
6. Lathe maintenance.
Repair
NOTE: On-Vehicle Brake Disc Machining
NOTE: Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs. Use an on-vehicle brake lathe only. Read the entire operating
manual and/or view the video shipped with the lathe before installing, operating or repairing the lathe.
NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct adjustment of the on-
vehicle brake lathe will make sure that these dimensions are within specification.
1. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04A Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may occur.
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper.
Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside, as required. Support
the brake caliper using mechanic's wire.
3. NOTICE: On some vehicle applications the axle on the opposing side may rotate during the machining process.
On these applications the brake disc must be secured or damage may occur.
If necessary, secure the opposing brake disc by installing 2 wheel nuts finger tight.
4.
Install the hub adapter using four wheel nuts on a 4, 7 or 8-stud wheel hub.
Install the hub adapter using five wheel nuts on a 5 or 10-stud wheel hub.
Install the hub adapter using six wheel nuts on a 6-stud wheel hub.
5. Install the cutting lathe.
6. NOTE: An on-vehicle brake lathe with an automatic runout adjustment feature is preferred. However, if the lathe is not
self adjusting, the lathe oscillation must be adjusted using a dial indicator. The total indicated runout target is 0.000 mm
(0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in). If the runout adjustment
(automatic or manual) is carried out correctly prior to machining, then the final brake disc runout will be within
specification and a runout measurement is not necessary after machining.
If the lathe is not self-adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator.
m
7. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector/silencer.
8. NOTE: The depth of the cut should be between 0.10 and 0.40 mm (0.004 and 0.015 in). Lighter cuts will cause the bit to
Machine the brake disc.

. co
heat up and wear faster. Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish.
9. Remove the lathe and the silencer.

gn
10. Remove the wheel nuts and hub adapter.
11. Remove the metal shavings.

ia
12. Measure the brake disc thickness. If the measurement is below the minimum specification, install a new brake disc.
Refer to: Brake Disc (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
rd
Refer to: Brake Disc (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
13. NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material is within specifications.
ca
Position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly and install the bolts.
Refer to: Brake Caliper Anchor Plate (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Brake Caliper Anchor Plate (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
14. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04A Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake Disc Shield
Removal
1. Remove the brake disc.

2. Remove the bolts and the brake disc shield.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake Disc Shield
Removal
1. Remove the wheel hub and bearing.

Refer to: Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - AWD (204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - FWD (204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the bolts and the brake disc shield.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake Disc
Materials
Name Specification
Metal Brake Parts Cleaner -
PM-4-A, PM-4-B
Removal
NOTE: 352 mm (14 in) brakes shown, 325 mm (13 in) brakes similar.

m
2. NOTICE: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake flexible hose or damage to the hose may occur.
Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. Discard the bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: If necessary, thread a M10 bolt into the brake disc removal hole and tighten to press the disc off the hub.
Remove the screw and the brake disc. Discard the screw.
m
Installation
co
1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign material.
Clean the brake disc mating surfaces using a wire brush and the specified material.
.
Material: Metal Brake Parts Cleaner / PM-4-A, PM-4-B
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake Disc
Materials
Name Specification
PM-4-A, PM-4-B
Removal
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation instructions.

2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
m
NOTICE: Care must be taken when servicing rear brake components without disconnecting the parking brake
cable from the brake caliper lever. Carefully position the caliper aside using a suitable support or damage to the
parking brake cable end fittings may occur.
co
Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. Discard the bolts.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: If necessary, thread a M10 bolt into the brake disc removal hole and tighten to press the disc off the hub.
Remove the screw and the brake disc. Discard the screw.
m
Installation
co
1. NOTICE: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign material.
Clean the brake disc mating surfaces using a wire brush and the specified material.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Materials
Name Specification
PM-20
Removal
m
2. Compress the brake caliper pistons.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTICE: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake flexible hose and or damage to the hose may
occur.
NOTICE: Make sure the brake caliper guide pin bolts are clean and free of debris or a binding condition may
occur.
NOTICE: Do not allow the brake flexible hose to get twisted when the caliper is repositioned on the brake caliper
anchor plate or damage to the hose may occur.
Remove the guide pin bolts and position the brake caliper aside.
m
4. NOTE: During installation, the coil in the center of the wire spreader spring must lie against the anchor plate and must
co
not be in the raised position. If the coil in the center of the wire spreader spring does not rest against the caliper anchor
plate, the spring is installed incorrectly and must be repositioned.
Remove the brake pads and springs.

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the brake pad clips.

m
Installation
co
NOTICE: Make sure the caliper pin boots are correctly seated to prevent corrosion to the guide pins
1. NOTE: If installing new brake pads, make sure to install all new hardware and lubricant supplied with the brake pad kit.
.
Refer to the brake pad instruction sheet when applying lubricant.
gn
2. Depress the brake pedal several times, check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir and add the specified
brake fluid as necessary.
ia
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Materials
Name Specification
PM-20
Removal
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may occur. If brake fluid is
spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
m
2. Compress the brake caliper pistons.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTICE: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake flexible hose and or damage to the hose may
occur.
NOTICE: Make sure the brake caliper guide pin bolts are clean and free of debris or a binding condition may
occur.
NOTICE: Do not allow the brake flexible hose to get twisted when the caliper is repositioned on the brake caliper
anchor plate or damage to the hose may occur.
Remove the lower caliper bolt, swing the brake caliper upward and support the caliper.
m
4. Remove the brake pads. . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the brake pad clips.

m
. co
gn
ia
Installation
rd
1. NOTICE: Make sure the caliper pin boots are correctly seated to prevent corrosion to the guide pins.
NOTE: If installing new brake pads, make sure to install all new hardware and lubricant supplied with the brake pad kit.
ca
Refer to the brake pad instruction sheet when applying lubricant.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake Pads
Brake Caliper Piston Retractor
Materials
Name Specification
PM-20
PM-4-A, PM-4-B
Removal
m
components may occur. Do not install contaminated pads. co


.
gn
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken when servicing rear brake components without disconnecting the parking brake
ia
cable from the brake caliper lever. Carefully position the caliper aside using a suitable support or damage to the
parking brake cable end fittings may occur.
rd
NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may occur.
NOTE: Use hand force and a rocking motion to separate the brake caliper from the brake pads.
ca
Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper aside.

m
3. NOTICE: Brake pads with adhesive on the insulator are one-time use only. When the brake pads are separated
co
from the brake caliper, new brake pads must be installed to prevent brake noise and shudder.
NOTE: For 13.5 in (345 mm) brakes, note the orientation of the inner and outer brake pads for reference during
installation. Outer brake pads will have OTR stamped on the top of the backing. Inner brake pads (Police vehicles only)
.
will have INR stamped on the top of the backing.
gn
Remove and discard the brake pads.
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove and discard the brake pad clips.

m
Installation
co
1. NOTICE: The brake pad-to-anchor plate contact points must be cleaned using a wire brush prior to installation
of the brake pad slide clips or uneven brake pad wear may result.
.
Clean the brake pad-to-anchor plate contact points using a wire. Visually check the brake pad-to-anchor plate contact
gn
points for cleanliness before installation.
ia
rd
ca
2. NOTICE: Clean all residual pad adhesive from the brake caliper piston and the finger area of the brake caliper or
brake noise may occur.
Remove the residual brake pad adhesive.

m
3. NOTE: A moderate to heavy force toward the caliper piston must be applied. If sufficient force is not applied, the internal
Rotate and compress the brake caliper piston.

Use the General Equipment: Brake Caliper Piston Retractor
. co
park brake mechanism clutch cone will not engage and the piston will not compress.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Install the new brake pad clips.

m
5. NOTICE: Install the inner and outer brake pads in the correct position or uneven brake pad wear and/or
component damage may occur.
Install the new brake pads.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. NOTICE: Make sure the brake flexible hose does not become twisted. A twisted brake hose may make contact
with other components causing damage to the hose.
Position the brake caliper making sure the alignment pin on the inner brake pad is aligned with the notch in the caliper
piston. Install the bolts.
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal
NOTE: Adjustable pedals shown, fixed pedals similar.
1. Remove the steering column.

Refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
2. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp switch. The
switch must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. The switch plunger must be compressed
for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during
pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch.
Remove the stoplamp switch.

Refer to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
m
3.
1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal electrical connector.
2. If equipped.
co
Disconnect the adjustable pedals electrical connector.
3. Detach the wiring retainers and position the wiring retainers aside.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4.
1. NOTICE: The booster push rod clevis locking pin is a one-time use only part. Any time the pin is
removed, a new one must be installed.
NOTE: An 11 mm, 12-point socket or wrench can be used to compress the 2 tabs on the locking pin.
Press inward on the tabs and remove and discard the clevis pin.
2. Remove the brake pedal bracket nuts.
m
5. Remove the lower brake pedal bracket bolt.
Torque: 18 lb.ft (25 Nm) . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. If equipped.
Remove the screw and position the ambient light.
m
7. Remove the upper brake pedal bracket bolts and the brake pedal, accelerator pedal and bracket assembly.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp switch. The switch
must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest
position. Installing the switch with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment and
may damage the switch.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Brake Pedal Control Switch
Removal
1. Remove the screws, detach the clips and remove the instrument panel lower steering column cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
2. Remove the screws, detach the upper steering column shroud, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the lower
steering column shroud.
rd
ca
3. Press inward on the tabs and remove the brake pedal control switch.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Brake Shift Interlock Actuator - Vehicles With: Column Shift
Removal
1. Remove the selector lever mechanism.

Refer to: Selector Lever Mechanism (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the brake shift interlock actuator screw.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3. Gently pry the clip out and remove the brake shift interlock actuator from the selector lever mechanism.
ca
4.
Remove the park position switch.
1. Press the park position switch spring loaded pin.
2. While pressing in on the spring loaded pin, rotate the park position switch clockwise and remove it from the
selector lever mechanism.
m
. co
gn
Installation
1.
Install the park position switch.
ia
1. Place the large plunger on the park position switch in the locating hole and position the switch as shown.
2. Rotate the park position switch counterclockwise making sure the tab locks under the housing lip.
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
2. Verify the park position switch spring loaded pin is fully extended.
rd
ca
3. Install the brake shift interlock actuator in the selector lever mechanism.
m
4. Install the brake shift interlock actuator screw.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Install the selector lever mechanism.

Refer to: Selector Lever Mechanism (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, Removal and Installation).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake Shift Interlock Actuator - Vehicles With: Floor Shift
Removal
1. NOTE: The brake shift interlock actuator is not serviced separately. If a new brake shift interlock actuator is required,
install a new floor shift selector lever assembly.
Install a new floor shift selector lever assembly.

Refer to: Selector Lever Assembly - Vehicles With: Floor Shift (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls,
Installation
1. NOTE: The brake shift interlock actuator is not serviced separately. If a new brake shift interlock actuator is required,
install a new floor shift selector lever assembly.
Install a new floor shift selector lever assembly.

Refer to: Selector Lever Assembly - Vehicles With: Floor Shift (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls,
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Brake Shift Interlock Actuator Manual Override - Vehicles With: Column Shift
Activation
NOTE: If it is necessary to use the brake shift interlock actuator override procedure to move the selector lever out of the P
position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving the vehicle, verify the brake
lights are working.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock actuator feature that prevents the selector lever from being moved out of the
P position when the ignition is in the ON position until the brake pedal is applied. If the selector lever cannot be moved out of
the P position when the ignition is in the ON position and the brake pedal is applied:
1. Fully apply the parking brake.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Set the ignition switch to the 0 position (ignition off) and remove the key.
m
3. NOTICE: Make sure to use extra care when detaching the selector lever boot clips from steering column
The selector lever boot is not serviceable separately. co

shrouds or damage to the selector lever boot may occur causing replacement of the selector lever assembly.
Push forward on the selector lever boot at the areas indicated, remove the boot from the upper and lower steering
.
column shrouds and position the boot aside.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. NOTE: The brake shift interlock actuator spindle can be accessed through the selector lever boot opening.
Move the brake shift interlock actuator spindle outward, apply the brake pedal and position the selector lever into N.
m
5. NOTICE: Make sure to use extra care and follow the installation sequence when installing the selector lever
co
boot to the steering column shrouds or damage to the boot may occur causing replacement of the selector
lever assembly. The selector lever boot is not serviceable separately.
.
Install the selector lever boot in the sequence shown.
gn
1. Install the front of the selector lever boot.
2. Install the bottom of the selector lever boot.
3. Install the top of the selector lever boot.
4. Install the back of the selector lever boot.
ia
rd
ca
6. Start the vehicle.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake Shift Interlock Actuator Manual Override - Vehicles With: Floor Shift
Activation
NOTE: If it is necessary to use the brake shift interlock actuator override procedure to move the selector lever out of the P
position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving the vehicle, verify the brake
lights are working.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock actuator feature that prevents the selector lever from being moved out of the
P position when the ignition is in the ON position until the brake pedal is applied. If the selector lever cannot be moved out of
the P position when the ignition is in the ON position and the brake pedal is applied:
1. Fully apply the parking brake.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Open the forward storage compartment and remove the rubber protective cover.
m
3. Carefully remove the brake shift interlock actuator access cover.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. From the front of the selector lever, locate the brake shift interlock actuator, apply the brake, pull and hold the brake shift
interlock actuator lever while moving the selector lever into N.
m
5. Install the brake shift interlock actuator access cover.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Install the rubber protective cover and close the forward storage compartment.
m
7. Press the brake pedal, start the vehicle and release the parking brake.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Specifications
Specifications

Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Item Specification
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid / PM-20 WSS-M6C65-A2

Torque Specifications
m
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Front caliper bleeder screw 11 - 97
Rear caliper bleeder screw
Master cylinder brake tube fittings
. co 10
30
-
22
89
-
gn
ia

rd
Item Specification
Front brake disc minimum thickness (325 mm (13 in) brakes) 1.122 in (28.5 mm)
ca
Front brake disc minimum thickness (352 mm (14 in) brakes) 1.181 in (30 mm)
Rear brake disc minimum thickness (330 mm (13 in) brakes) 0.394 in (10 mm)
Rear brake disc minimum thickness (345 mm (13.5 in) brakes) 0.689 in (17.5 mm)
Brake pad minimum thickness 0.118 in (3 mm)
Brake pad maximum taper wear (in any direction) 0.118 in (3 mm)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
General Procedures
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Brake/Clutch System Pressure Bleeder/Filler

Fluid Container
Bleeding
All vehicles
NOTE: The HCU bleeding procedure and a second brake system pressure bleed must be carried out if a new HCU has been
installed.
1. NOTE: Make sure the area around the master cylinder cap is clean and free of foreign material.
m
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Make sure the fluid reservoir is filled with clean specified brake fluid.
Refer to: Specifications (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Specifications).
m
3.
co
1. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure
bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on
gn
the adapter.
Use the General Equipment: Brake/Clutch System Pressure Bleeder/Filler
2. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding
ia
operation.
Open the valve on the bleeder tank and apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
rd
4. Bleeding steps must be followed in the order indicated in the graphic.

ca
m
. co
gn
ia
5. If equipped, remove the bleeder screw cap.

rd
ca
6. Partially fill a clean brake fluid container with clean specified brake fluid.
Use the General Equipment: Fluid Container
7. Submerge a hose into the brake fluid in the container and connect the hose to bleeder screw.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8.
1. Loosen the bleeder screw.
Loosen:
:
180°
2. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the bleeder screw.
m
9.
co
1. Disconnect the hose and tighten the bleeder screw to specification.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
10. Repeat steps 8-10 at the remaining wheel ends.
Vehicles with rear integral parking brake calipers
11. NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the rear integral parking brake calipers, it is necessary to apply and
release the parking brake during the bleed procedure.
1. Apply and release the parking brake 5 times.

2. Loosen the bleeder screw.
Loosen: 180°
3. Leave open until clear, bubble-free fluid flows and then tighten the bleeder screw to specification.
4. Repeat as necessary.
m
All vehicles
. co
12. If equipped, install the bleeder screw cap.
gn
ia
rd
ca
13. Lower the vehicle.
14. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure.
Remove the General Equipment: Brake/Clutch System Pressure Bleeder/Filler
15. Fill the reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.

m
16. Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Vehicles with new hydraulic control unit (HCU) installed
NOTE: The HCU bleeding procedure and a second brake system pressure bleed must be carried out if a new HCU has been
installed.
17. Using the diagnostic scan tool, follow the ABS Service Bleed instructions.
18. Repeat brake system pressure bleeding steps.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Brake System
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Brake System

The red brake warning indicator Diagnostic Trouble CHECK for ABS diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
and the yellow ABS warning Codes (DTCs) in the REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control
indicator are illuminated ABS (206-09) .
The red brake warning indicator is Brake fluid
always/never on level switch REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes
m
Parking brake (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes,
switch Diagnosis and Testing).
Wiring,
terminals or
connectors
IPC
. co
BCM
gn
Vehicle pulls or drifts during Brake calipers INSPECT the brake system components. INSTALL new
braking and/or guide components as necessary.
pins
ia
Brake flexible
hose
rd
Brake pads
Brake discs
ca
Tires
REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04A Wheels and Tires,
Suspension
component(s) and/or REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension System -
wheel alignment General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Brake pedal goes down fast or Brake fluid leaks INSPECT the system for leaks. REPAIR as necessary. BLEED the
eases down slowly and/or air in the system.
system REFER to: Brake System Pressure Bleeding (206-00 Brake
System - General Information, General Procedures).
Brake master CARRY OUT the Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
cylinder Component Test.
HCU
REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control
(206-09) .
Brake pedal INSPECT the brake pedal simulator spring, cam and interface-to-
booster. INSTALL a new brake pedal and bracket as necessary.
Brakes lock up under light brake Brake pads INSPECT the brake system components. INSTALL new
pedal force Brake flexible components as necessary.
hose
Brake disc
Brake calipers
and/or guide
pins
ABS
(206-09) .
Excessive brake pedal travel Brake fluid leaks INSPECT the system for leaks. REPAIR as necessary. BLEED the
(low/spongy pedal) and/or air in the system.
system REFER to: Brake System Pressure Bleeding (206-00 Brake
Brake master CARRY OUT the Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
Brake calipers and/or INSPECT the brake calipers and guide pins. INSTALL new
guide pins components as necessary.
Brake flexible hose INSPECT the brake flexible hoses during brake application.
INSTALL a new brake hose as necessary.
REFER to: Front Brake Flexible Hose (206-03 Front Disc Brake,
REFER to: Rear Brake Flexible Hose (206-04 Rear Disc Brake,
m
Erratic brake pedal travel Brake pedal INSPECT the brake pedal for binding, obstructions and correct
interface to booster rod. REPAIR as necessary. CHECK the brake
pedal fasteners for correct torque.
ABS
. co
REFER to: Brake Pedal and Bracket (206-06 Hydraulic Brake
Actuation, Removal and Installation).

gn
(206-09) .
Brake drag Parking brake INSPECT the parking brake system. INSTALL new components as
component necessary.
ia
Brake caliper INSPECT the brake system components. INSTALL new

and/or guide components as necessary.
rd
pins
Brake flexible
hose
ca
Brake booster
Brake master CARRY OUT the Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control
(206-09) .
Stoplamp switch VERIFY correct installation of the stoplamp switch.
REFER to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal
and Installation).
Excessive brake pedal effort Insufficient CARRY OUT the Brake Booster Component Test in this section.
vacuum for
brake booster
operation
Brake booster
manifold
vacuum hose
Brake booster
Brake booster
check valve
Brake booster
vacuum pump
Brake pads INSPECT the brake pads. INSTALL new components as
necessary.
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: 325 mm (13 in) Brakes
(206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: 352 mm (14 in) Brakes
(206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Brake Pads (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
Symptom Chart: NVH

Vibration when the brakes are Brake disc(s) GO to Pinpoint Test A
applied Suspension
m
components
Brake vibration/shudder — Brake drag REFER to Symptom Chart: Brake System

occurs when the brake pedal
is released
Rattling noise Caliper guide
. co
INSPECT the caliper guide pins and guide pin bolts. INSTALL
pins or guide new components as necessary.
gn
pin bolts INSPECT the brake pads for missing clips or broken springs.
Missing or INSTALL new components as necessary.
damaged TIGHTEN the brake disc shield bolts to specification.
anti-rattle REFER to: Brake Disc Shield (206-03 Front Disc Brake,
ia
clips or Removal and Installation).

springs REFER to: Brake Disc Shield (206-04 Rear Disc Brake,
Loose brake Removal and Installation).
rd
disc shield
Squealing noise — occurs on Brake pads Acceptable condition. Caused by humidity and low brake pad
ca
first (morning) brake temperature.

application
Squealing noise — a Brake pads INSPECT the brake pads. INSTALL new components as necessary.
continuous squeal REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: 325 mm (13 in) Brakes (206-
03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: 352 mm (14 in) Brakes (206-
03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Brake Pads (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and
Installation).
Squealing noise — an Brake pads Acceptable condition. Caused by cold, heat, water, mud or snow.
intermittent squeal
Groaning noise — occurs at Brake pads Acceptable condition.
low speeds with brake lightly
applied (creeping)
Grinding/moaning noise — Brake pads INSPECT the brake pads, brake discs and attaching hardware for
continuous Brake disc damage. VERIFY brake components are within specifications.
INSTALL new components as necessary.
Pinpoint Tests
Vibration When Brakes Are Applied
During moderate to heavy braking, noise from the HCU and pulsation in the brake pedal can be observed. Pedal pulsation
coupled with noise during heavy braking or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy surfaces is acceptable and indicates correct
functioning of the ABS. Pedal pulsation or steering wheel nibble when the brakes are applied (frequency is proportioned to the
vehicle speed) indicates a concern with a brake or suspension component.
PINPOINT TEST A : VIBRATION WHEN BRAKES ARE APPLIED

A1
ROAD TEST THE VEHICLE -LIGHT BRAKING
Road test the vehicle. Warm the brakes by slowing the vehicle from 80 to 32 km/h (50 to 20 mph) using light
brake force. At highway speeds of 89-97 km/h (55-60 mph), apply the brake using light pedal force.
Is there a vibration/shudder felt in the steering wheel, seat or brake pedal?
Yes GO to A4
No GO to A2
m
A2
ROAD TEST THE VEHICLE -MODERATE TO HEAVY BRAKING co
Road test the vehicle. At highway speeds of 89-97 km/h (55-60 mph), apply the brake using a moderate to heavy
pedal force.
.
gn
Is there a vibration/shudder?
Yes GO to A3
ia
No The concern is not present at this time.

rd
A3
CHECK ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) OPERATION
ca
NOTE: During moderate to heavy braking, noise from the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) and pulsation in the brake pedal
can be observed. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise during heavy braking or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy
surfaces is acceptable and indicates correct operation of the ABS. Pedal pulsation or steering wheel nibble with the
frequency proportional to vehicle speed indicates a concern with a brake or suspension component.
Road test the vehicle and apply the brakes on a dry, firm surface, then apply the brakes on a wet, snowy or loose
surface (such as gravel).
Is the vibration/shudder only present on a wet, snowy or loose surface?
Yes This is a normal operating condition of the ABS.

No GO to A5
A4
ISOLATE BRAKE VIBRATION
NOTE: This test step is not applicable to vehicles with drum-in-hat type or electronic parking brakes. For vehicles with
drum-in-hat or electronic parking brakes, proceed to the next test step. For all other vehicles, apply the parking brake to
identify if the problem is in the front or rear brake.
Apply the parking brake to identify if the problem is in the front or rear brake. At highway speeds of 89-97 km/h
(55-60 mph), lightly apply the parking brake until the vehicle slows down. Release the parking brake immediately
after the test.
Is there a vibration/shudder?
Yes GO to A7
No GO to A5
A5
CHECK THE FRONT SUSPENSION
Check the front suspension.
Are all the suspension components in satisfactory condition?
Yes GO to A6
No REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
A6
CHECK THE FRONT BRAKE DISCS
m
Inspect the front brake discs. MACHINE or INSTALL new brake discs as necessary.
REFER to: Brake Disc Machining (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
Road test the vehicle.

. co
REFER to: Brake Disc (206-03 Front Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
gn
Is the vibration/shudder present?
Yes GO to A7
ia
No The concern has been repaired.

rd
A7
CHECK THE REAR SUSPENSION
Check the rear suspension.
ca
Are all the suspension components in satisfactory condition?
Yes INSPECT the rear brake discs. MACHINE or INSTALL new brake discs as necessary.
REFER to: Brake Disc Machining (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General
Procedures).
REFER to: Brake Disc (206-04 Rear Disc Brake, Removal and Installation).
No REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
Component Test- Brake Booster
1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum sensor/check valve from the brake booster and connect a suitable
vacuum/pressure tester to the booster side of the vacuum sensor/check valve.
2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL.
Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
3. Verify that vacuum is available at the vacuum sensor/check valve with engine running at normal idle speed.
The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg).
If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum sensor/check valve and continue with Step
5.
If specified vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4.
4. Disconnect the vacuum sensor/check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that the specified vacuum is available at
the hose with the engine at idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL.
If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step 5.
For vehicles equipped with a brake vacuum pump, if specified vacuum is not available, inspect the vacuum hose
and install new as necessary. If the vacuum hose is ok, install a new vacuum pump.
REFER to: Brake Vacuum Pump - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS) (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and
Installation).
For vehicles not equipped with a brake vacuum pump, if specified vacuum is not available, stop the engine,
connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and diagnose the no/low vacuum condition.
REFER to: Engine (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system.
6. Apply the brake pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the brake pedal moves
downward after the engine starts.
If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly.
If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster.
REFER to: Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
m
7. Operate the engine a minimum of 20 seconds at idle. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes, then
co
apply the brake pedal. The brake pedal feel should be the same as that noted with the engine operating.
If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new brake booster vacuum sensor/check valve and retest.
If condition still exists, install a new brake booster.
.
gn
If the brake pedal feels the same as noted with the engine operating, the vacuum sensor/check valve is
functioning properly.
Component Test- Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition

ia
1. Inspect the master cylinder.

rd
2. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
3. NOTE: Make sure the outlet port plugs do not show signs of leakage.
ca
Plug the outlet ports of the master cylinder.
4. Lightly apply the brakes and hold for 10 seconds. Release the brakes and then reapply with heavy force. If brake pedal
height cannot be maintained, the brake master cylinder has an internal leak and a new brake master cylinder must be
installed.
If brake pedal height is maintained, reinstall brake tubes and tighten to specification.
REFER to: Brake Master Cylinder (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
After installation, bleed the brake system. REFER to: Brake System Pressure Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General
Component Test- Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
1. Inspect the master cylinder.
2.
REFER to: Jacking and Lifting - Overview (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
3. Apply and release the brakes.
4. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at multiple wheels, continue to Step 5.

If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake caliper, brake wheel
cylinder or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as necessary.
5. Check the brake stoplamp switch and the brake pedal free play to verify the brake pedal is not partially applied.
6. Loosen the brake master cylinder nuts and position the brake master cylinder away from the brake booster.
7. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
If the brake drag is no longer present, install a new brake booster.

If the brake drag is still present, install a new master cylinder.
REFER to: Brake Master Cylinder (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
206-07 Power Brake Actuation 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Brake Vacuum Sensor
Removal
1. Disconnect the vacuum sensor electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
2. Remove the vacuum sensor.

rd
ca
Installation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Cabin Air Filter
Base Part Number: 19N619
Removal
1. Remove the glove compartment door.

2. Release the clips and remove the cabin air filter cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the cabin air filter.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Base Part Number: 12K073
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil WSS-M2C945-A
XO-5W20-QSP
Removal
RH (right-hand) Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensors
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe

Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L
Duratec (227kW/301PS), Removal and Installation).
m
2.
Disconnect the intakeCMP sensor electrical connector and remove the retainer and the CMP sensor.
Material: Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil / XO-5W20-QSP (WSS-M2C945-A)
co
Disconnect the exhaust CMP sensor electrical connector and remove the retainer and the CMP sensor.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
LH (left-hand) Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensors
3. Remove the air cleaner.

Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec
4.
Disconnect the exhaust CMP sensor electrical connector and remove the retainer and the CMP sensor.
Disconnect the intake CMP sensor electrical connector and remove the retainer and the CMP sensor.
m
. co
Installation
gn
NOTE: Before installation, lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.

ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Camshafts
205-142 (T80T-4000-J)
Installer, Differential Bearing Cone
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Handle
303-102
m
Installer, Crankshaft Pulley
303-1247
. co
VCT Spark Plug Tube Seal Remover and Installer
gn
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
ia
303-1248
Camshaft holding tools
rd
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
ca
303-1251
Installer, Front Seal
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
303-1530
Tool, Chain Tensioner Hold Down
TKIT-2010A-F
TKIT-2010A-LM
TKIT-2010A-ROW
303-335 (T88T-6701-A)
Installer, Front Cover Oil Seal
TKIT-1988-F
TKIT-1988-FLM
303-409 (T92C-6700-CH)
Remover, Crankshaft Seal
TKIT-1992-FH/FMH/FLMH
TKIT-1993-LMH/MH
307-399
Alignment Pins, Transmission Fluid Pump
TKIT-2000AP-FLM/LM
TKIT-2002N-DEW
307-569
Disconnect Tool TOC Line (1/2)
TKIT-2006U-F/FM
TKIT-2006U-FLM/LM
TKIT-2006U-ROW1
TKIT-2006U-ROW2
Feeler Gauge
Strap Wrench
Adjustable Mounting Arm
m
Plastic Scraper
Oil Drain Equipment
Hose Clamp Remover/Installer
Puller
Powertrain Jack
. co
gn
Materials
Name Specification
ia

XO-5W20-QSP
rd
Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone WSE-M4G323-A6

TA-357
Motorcraft® Silicone Gasket Remover -
ca
ZC-30-A
Motorcraft® Metal Surface Prep -
ZC-31-B
PM-4-A, PM-4-B
Removal
All camshafts

2. Release the fuel system pressure.

Refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release (310-00C Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
3. Evacuate the A/C system.

4. Remove the following items:

1. Air cleaner outlet pipe.
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Removal and Installation).
2. Air cleaner.
3. Battery tray.
Refer to: Battery Tray (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
4. Cowl panel.
Refer to: Cowl Panel (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
5. Using a holding device, hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position.
m
. co
gn
ia
6.
Remove the oil filler cap.
rd
Remove the retainers and the engine appearance cover.

ca
7. Remove the nut and the power feed cable.
m
8. co
Disconnect the engine harness electrical connector and wiring harness retainer.
Remove the stud bolt and the ground cable.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Remove the cover.

m
10. Remove the nuts and the power feed cables.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Remove the bolt and the battery tray support bracket.
m
12. Remove the front wheels and tires.
co
13. NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Remove the RH and LH lower pin-type retainers from the engine splash shields and position the shields aside.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. NOTE: If equipped.
Remove the retainers and the underbody air duct.

m
Remove the retainers and the underbody shield.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

17. Drain the engine cooling system.

18.
Remove the bolt and ground wire.
Detach the wiring harness retainer.
m
19. NOTE: Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C tube.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
20. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch electrical connector.

m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
22. Remove the degas bottle.

Refer to: Degas Bottle (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
23. Disconnect the quick release coupling and remove the coolant hose.
m
24. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the upper intake manifold.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
25. Disconnect the EVAP tube and fuel supply tube quick release couplings.
Refer to: Quick Release Coupling (310-00C Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), General
Procedures).
m
26. Disconnect the engine harness and the PCM electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
27.
Push the wiring harness retainer tab in.
Slide the wiring harness up and out of the bulkhead and position aside.
m
. co
gn
ia
28. Disconnect the coolant hoses.

rd
ca
29. Disconnect the transmission control cable from the control lever.
m
30. Disconnect the transmission control cable from the shift cable bracket and detach the wiring harness retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
31. If equipped, detach the engine block heater harness from the radiator support wiring harness.
32. NOTICE: Do not allow the intermediate shaft to rotate while it is disconnected from the gear or damage to the
clockspring can occur. If there is evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be
removed and recentered. Refer to Section 501-20B.
Remove and discard the steering intermediate shaft bolt.

Separate the steering intermediate shaft from the steering gear.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
33. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe.

Refer to: Exhaust Y-Pipe (309-00C Exhaust System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
34. Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil.
Use the General Equipment: Oil Drain Equipment
m
35. Remove and discard the engine oil filter.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
36. Remove the LH catalytic converter support bracket nuts.

m
37. Remove the bolts and the LH catalytic converter support bracket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
38. NOTE: Index-mark the driveshaft for installation.
If equipped, remove and discard the bolts and support the driveshaft with a length of mechanic's wire.
m
39. Disconnect the coolant tubes.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
40. If equipped with oil cooler, disconnect the oil cooler hoses.
Use the General Equipment: Hose Clamp Remover/Installer
m
41. If equipped, unlatch the cooler hose retainer latch and pry up on the oil cooler hose retainer to release the retainer and
remove it from the subframe. . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
42. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube secondary latches.

m
43. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass
valve.
co
Use Special Service Tool: 307-569 Disconnect Tool TOC Line (1/2).
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
44. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the bolt and the wheel speed sensor.

m
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer link nut.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the bolts and position aside the calipers.

Support the calipers.
m
. co
gn
Using a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the front and rear subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations on
both side.
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: Do not discard at this time.
Remove the LH and RH halfshaft nuts.

m
Separate the LH and RH halfshaft from the wheel hubs.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
50.
Position a 2 x 6 board, 36 in (914.4 mm) in length and two 2 x 6 boards 24 in (609.6 mm) in length onto the
powertrain jack.
Use the General Equipment: Powertrain Jack
Position the powertrain jack with the long board towards the rear of the subframe and the short boards under the
engine and transmission.
m
51. Install the adjustable mounting arm from the powertrain jack to the LH engine-to-transmission bolt hole.
Use the General Equipment: Adjustable Mounting Arm
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
52. Install a ratchet strap from the front of the subframe under the powertrain jack to the rear of the subframe, to secure the
subframe to the powertrain jack.
53.
NOTE: The halfshafts are not being remove from the transmission.
Remove the nuts and bolts.

Remove the strut from the wheel knuckle and the halfshafts from the wheel knuckle.
m
54. Remove the transmission support insulator-to-frame rail bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
55. Remove the nuts, the bolt and the transmission support insulator assembly.
m
56. Remove the engine mount nuts, the engine mount bolts and the engine mount.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the subframe bracket-to-body bolts.

m
co
Remove the rear subframe bolts and the subframe brackets.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the front subframe bolts.

m
60. NOTE: Make sure the transmission cooler tubes are free and clear when lowered.

. co
Using the powertrain jack, lower the powertrain and subframe as an assembly.
gn
ia
rd
ca
61.
Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
Discard the bolt.
m
62. Using a 3 Jaw Puller, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Use the General Equipment: Puller . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
63. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal.
Use Special Service Tool: 303-409 (T92C-6700-CH) Remover, Crankshaft Seal.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
65. Remove the crankcase vent tube.

66. Disconnect the wire harness retainers and position aside the wire harness.
m
. co
gn
ia
67. Disconnect the EOP switch electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer.
rd
ca
m
co.
gn
ia
68. Remove the bolt and the ground wire.

rd
ca
69. Disconnect the wire harness retainer.

m
70.
Position aside the engine wiring harness.

. co
Disconnect the engine wiring harness electrical connectors and the retainers.
gn
ia
rd
ca
71. Disconnect the electrical connectors and wire retainer.

m
72. Disconnect the electrical connector and wire retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
73. Disconnect the EVAP tube and detach the retainers.

Procedures).
m
74. Disconnect the retainers for the coolant hose.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
75. Disconnect the engine vent hose.

m
76. Remove the bolts and the upper intake manifold bracket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
77. NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically including valve or piston
damage, check the intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in engine damage.
Remove the bolts and the upper intake manifold.

m
78. Remove and discard the upper intake manifold gaskets.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
79. Remove the engine vent hose.

m
80.
Position aside the engine wiring harness.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
81. Remove the bolt and position the fuel supply tube bracket aside.
82. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coil-on-plugs.

Remove the oil level indicator.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
83. Inspect the coil seals for rips, nicks or tears and replace if necessary.
m
. co
gn
ia
84. NOTICE: While removing the valve cover do not apply excessive force to the VCT oil control solenoid or
damage may occur.
rd
NOTICE: If the VCT oil control solenoid sticks to the VCT seal, carefully wiggle the valve cover until the bond
breaks free or damage to the VCT seal and VCT oil control solenoid may occur.
ca
Loosen the bolts and remove the LH valve cover.
85. Remove and discard the gasket.

86. NOTE: Inspect the VCT solenoid seals. Remove any damaged seals.
Using the special tools, remove and discard the seal(s).

Use Special Service Tool: 205-142 (T80T-4000-J) Installer, Differential Bearing Cone. , 205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Handle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
87. NOTE: Inspect the spark plug tube seals. Remove any damaged seals.

Use Special Service Tool: 205-153 (T80T-4000-W) Handle. , 303-1247 VCT Spark Plug Tube Seal Remover and
Installer.
m
88. Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign material.
Use the General Equipment: Plastic Scraper

co
Refer to: RTV Sealing Surface Cleaning and Preparation (303-00 Engine System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Material: Motorcraft® Silicone Gasket Remover / ZC-30-A

.
gn
Material: Motorcraft® Metal Surface Prep / ZC-31-B
ia
rd
ca
damage may occur.
Loosen the bolts and remove the RH valve cover.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
Handle.
m
co
Installer.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Procedures).
m
94. Remove the engine front cover bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
95. Using a pry tool, locate the pry pads shown and pry the engine front cover loose and remove.
m
96. NOTICE: Only use a 3M™ Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528) in a suitable tool turning at the
any other power abrasive disk to clean front cover. co

recommended speed of 15,000 rpm, to clean the engine front cover. Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes or
Make sure that the mating faces of the front cover are clean and free of foreign material.
.
gn
Procedures).
ia
Thoroughly wash the engine front cover to remove any foreign material, including any abrasive particles created
during the cleaning process.
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
97. NOTICE: Place clean, lint-free shop towels over exposed engine cavities. Carefully remove the towels so foreign
material is not dropped into the engine. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning
rd
gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure.
NOTICE: Do not use wire brushes, power abrasive discs or 3M™ Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white part number
ca
07528) to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. They also
cause contamination that will cause premature engine failure. Remove all traces of the gasket.
Make sure that the mating faces of the engine block and oil pan are clean and free of foreign material.
Procedures).
m
98. NOTE: Rotate the crankshaft in a clockwise direction only.
co
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the intake VCT units as shown.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
99. Remove the bolts and the LH oil tube.

m
100. NOTE: The Camshaft Holding Tool will hold the camshafts in the TDC position.
co
Install Special Service Tool: 303-1248 Camshaft holding tools.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
101. Remove the bolts and the RH oil tube.

m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: The following 3 steps are for primary timing chains that the colored links are not visible.
103. Mark the timing chain link that aligns with the timing mark on the LH intake VCT unit as shown.
m
104. Mark the timing chain link that aligns with the timing mark on the RH intake VCT unit as shown.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
105. NOTE: The crankshaft sprocket timing mark should be between the 2 colored links.
Mark the timing chain links that aligns with the timing mark on the crankshaft sprocket as shown.
m
106. Remove the bolts and the timing chain tensioner.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
107. Remove the timing chain tensioner arm.

m
. co
gn
ia
108. Remove the bolts and the lower LH timing chain guide.
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
109. NOTE: Removal of the VCT oil control solenoids will aid in the removal of the timing chain.
rd
NOTE: A slight twisting motion will aid in the removal of the VCT oil control solenoid.
NOTE: Keep the VCT oil control solenoid clean of dirt and debris.
ca
Remove the bolts and the VCT oil control solenoids.
110. Remove the timing chain.

m
. co
gn
ia
LH camshafts
rd
111. NOTE: The 2 VCT oil control solenoids are removed for clarity.
Install Special Service Tool: 303-1530 Tool, Chain Tensioner Hold Down.
ca
112. Remove and discard the LH VCT unit bolts.
m
co
113. Remove the LH VCT units and the secondary timing chain.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
114. Remove Special Service Tool: 303-1530 Tool, Chain Tensioner Hold Down.
m
115. Remove Special Service Tool: 303-1248 Camshaft holding tools.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
116. NOTE: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps are numbered to verify that they are assembled in their original positions.
NOTE: Mark the exhaust and intake camshafts for installation into their original locations.
Remove the bolts, camshaft cap and the camshafts.

RH camshafts
117. NOTE: The 2 RH VCT oil control solenoids are removed for clarity.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
118. Remove and discard the RH VCT unit bolts.

m
119. Remove the RH VCT units and the secondary timing chain.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
120. Remove Special Service Tool: 303-1530 Tool, Chain Tensioner Hold Down.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the bolts, camshaft caps and the camshafts.

Installation
RH camshafts
1. NOTE: Coat the camshafts with clean engine oil prior to installation.
m
Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil and position the camshafts onto the RH cylinder head in the neutral
position as shown.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. NOTICE: The crankshaft must remain in the freewheeling position (crankshaft dowel pin at 9 o'clock) until after
the camshafts are installed and the valve clearance is checked/adjusted. Do not turn the crankshaft until
instructed to do so. Failure to follow this process will result in severe engine damage.
Rotate counterclockwise to the 9 o'clock position.
m
co
3. NOTICE: The camshaft seal gaps must be at the 12 o'clock position or damage to the engine may occur.
.
Position the RH camshaft seal gaps as shown.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the camshaft caps, oil tube and the bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
5. Loosen the camshaft cap bolts.
m
. co
gn
ia
6. Tighten the camshaft cap bolts.

rd
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
ca
7. NOTICE: If any components are installed new, the engine valve clearance must be checked/adjusted or engine
damage may occur.
Confirm that the valve tappet clearances are within specification. If valve tappet clearances are not within specification,
the clearance must be adjusted by installing new valve tappet(s) of the correct size.
Refer to: Valve Clearance Adjustment (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), General Procedures).
Use the General Equipment: Feeler Gauge
m
8. Remove the bolts and the oil tube.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Rotate the RH camshafts to the TDC position as shown.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
m
co
12. Align the colored links with the timing marks and assemble the RH VCT units.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
13. NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the camshafts slightly, to install the RH secondary timing assembly.
Position the RH VCT units and the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts by aligning the holes in the VCT units with
the dowel pins in the camshafts.
m
14. Install the new RH VCT unit bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
30 lb.ft (40 Nm)
Stage 2:
Loosen::
1 turn(s)
Stage 3:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
. co
Stage 4:
180°
gn
ia
rd
ca
Make sure the secondary timing chain is centered on the timing chain tensioner guides.
Remove Special Service Tool: 303-1530 Tool, Chain Tensioner Hold Down.
m
LH camshafts
co
Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil and position the camshafts onto the LH cylinder head in the neutral
position as shown.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Rotate counterclockwise to the 9 o'clock position.

ca
m
Position the LH camshaft seal gaps as shown.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
20. Loosen the camshaft bolts.
m
. co
gn
ia

rd
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
ca
damage may occur.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
24. Rotate the LH camshafts to the TDC position as shown.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
m
co
27. Align the colored links with the timing marks and assemble the LH VCT units.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
28. NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the camshafts slightly, to install the LH secondary timing assembly.
Position the LH VCT units and the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts by aligning the holes in the VCT units with
m
29. Install the new LH VCT unit bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
30 lb.ft (40 Nm)
Stage 2:
Loosen::
1 turn(s)
Stage 3:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
. co
Stage 4:
180°
gn
ia
rd
ca
Make sure the secondary timing chain is centered on the timing chain tensioner guides.
m
All camshafts
co
31. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 60 degrees to the TDC position (crankshaft dowel pin at 11 o'clock).
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
32. NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the camshafts slightly, to align the timing marks.
Install the timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT units and the crankshaft sprocket.
m
33. Install the lower LH timing chain guide and the bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
34. Install the timing chain tensioner arm.

m
. co
gn
ia
35.
1. Position the tensioner in a soft-jawed vise.
rd
2. Using pliers, squeeze the ends of the ratchet wire clip together.
3. Using the soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger to the reset position.
4. Install a locking pin in the 2 holes of the tensioner body to hold the plunger in place.
ca
m
36. NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the camshafts slightly to remove slack from the timing chain to install the tensioner.
1. Install the timing chain tensioner and the bolts.

2. Remove the lockpin.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
37.
As a post-check, verify correct alignment of all timing marks.
There are 48 links in between the RH intake VCT assembly colored link (1) and the LH intake VCT assembly
colored link (2).
There are 35 links in between LH intake VCT assembly colored link (2) and the 2 crankshaft sprocket links (3).
m
38. NOTICE: Do not use excessive force when installing the VCT oil control solenoid. Damage to the mega cap
co
could cause the cylinder head to be inoperable. If difficult to install the VCT oil control solenoid, inspect the
bore and VCT oil control solenoid to ensure there are no burrs, sharp edges or contaminants present on the
mating surface. Only clean the external surfaces as necessary.
.
Install the VCT oil control solenoids and the bolts.
gn
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
20 °
ia
rd
ca

m
40. Install the RH oil tube and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
60 °
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
42. Install the LH oil tube and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
60 °
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
43. Install Special Service Tool: 307-399 Alignment Pins, Transmission Fluid Pump.
m
44. NOTICE: Failure to use Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone may cause the engine oil to foam
excessively and result in serious engine damage.
co
NOTE: The engine front cover and bolts must be installed within 4 minutes of the initial sealant application. The
remainder of the engine front cover bolts must be installed and tightened within 35 minutes of the initial sealant
.
application. If the time limits are exceeded, the sealant must be removed, the sealing area cleaned and sealant
gn
reapplied. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Failure to follow this
procedure can cause future oil leakage.
Apply a 3.0 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front cover
ia
sealing surfaces including the inner bolt bosses.

Material: Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone / TA-357 (WSE-M4G323-A6)
Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the oil pan-to-cylinder
rd
block joint and the cylinder block joint areas of the engine front cover in places as indicated.
ca
45. NOTE: Make sure the 2 locating dowel pins are seated correctly in the cylinder block.
Install the engine front cover and the bolts.

m
. co
46. Remove Special Service Tool: 307-399 Alignment Pins, Transmission Fluid Pump.
gn
ia
rd
ca
47. Install the remaining engine front cover bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
Tighten bolts 1 through 22 to::
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
Tighten bolts 23, 24 and 25 to::
133 lb.in (15 Nm)
Stage 3:
Tighten bolt 26 to::
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 4:
Loosen bolt 26::
1 turn(s)
Stage 5:
Tighten bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft) plus an additional::
90°
Stage 6:
Tighten bolts 1 through 22 to 20 Nm (177 lb-in) plus an additional::
45°
Stage 7:
Tighten bolt 26 to 10 Nm (89 lb-in) plus an additional::
45 °
m
co
48. NOTE: Installation of new seals is only required if damaged seals were removed.
If removed, using the special tools, install the spark plug tube seals.
.
Use Special Service Tool: 303-1247 VCT Spark Plug Tube Seal Remover and Installer. , 205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
gn
Handle.
ia
rd
ca
If removed, using the special tools, install the VCT oil control solenoid seals.
Handle.
m
50. NOTE: If the valve cover is not installed and the fasteners tightened within 4 minutes, the sealant must be removed and
follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. co

the sealing area cleaned. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Failure to
Apply an 8 mm (0.31 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front cover-to-
.
cylinder head joints.
gn
ia
rd
ca
51. Install a new valve cover gasket.

52. Install the valve cover and tighten the bolts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
53. Make sure the VCT seals in the valve cover are below the top of the VCT oil control solenoid electrical connector or the
VCT seal may leak oil.
ca
Handle.
m
. co
gn
ia
Handle.
rd
ca
follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
60.
Install the coil-on-plugs and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
62 lb.in (7 Nm)
Stage 2:
50 °
Install the oil level indicator.
m
61. Position the fuel supply tube bracket and install the bolt.
gn
ia
rd
ca
62.
Position the engine wiring harness.
Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connectors and the retainers.
m
63. Install the engine vent hose.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
64. Install the upper intake manifold gaskets.

m
.co
gn
ia
65. Install the intake manifold and the bolts.

Torque:
rd
Stage 1:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
Bolts 1 and 3-7:
45°Bolt 2:
90°
ca
66. Install the upper intake manifold bracket and the bolts.
m
67. Connect the engine vent hose.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
68. Attach the coolant hose retainers.

m
69. Connect the EVAP tube and attach the retainers.
Procedures).
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
70. Connect the wire retainer and the electrical connector.

m
71. Connect the wire retainer and the electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
72.
Position the engine wiring harness.
Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connectors and the retainers.
73. Connect the wire harness retainer.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
74. Install the ground wire and the bolt.

m
75. Connect the EOP switch electrical connector and attach the wiring harness retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
76. Attach the wire harness retainers.

77. Install the crankcase vent tube.
m
. co
gn
ia
NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically including valve or piston
rd
damage, check the intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in engine damage.
ca
78. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the bolts.
m
. co
gn
ia
79. Lubricate the crankshaft front seal bore with clean engine oil.
rd
ca
80. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front seal.
Use Special Service Tool: 303-102 Installer, Crankshaft Pulley. , 303-1251 Installer, Front Seal.
m
co
81. Lubricate the crankshaft front seal and the crankshaft pulley with clean engine oil.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
82. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft pulley.
Use Special Service Tool: 303-102 Installer, Crankshaft Pulley. , 303-335 (T88T-6701-A) Installer, Front Cover Oil
Seal.
m
83. Install the new crankshaft bolt and the washer.
. co
Use the General Equipment: Strap Wrench
gn
Torque:
Stage 1:
89 lb.ft (120 Nm)
Stage 2:
Loosen::
1 turn(s)
Stage 3:
37 lb.ft (50 Nm)
ia
Stage 4:
90°
rd
ca
84. Using the powertrain jack, raise the subframe and powertrain assembly into the vehicle.
m
85. Position the engine mount onto the engine studs and install the nuts and bolts hand tight.
Torque:
Bolts:
66 lb.ft (90 Nm)
Nuts:
46 lb.ft (63 Nm)
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
86. Install the transmission support insulator assembly, the nuts and bolt.
Torque:
Nuts:
46 lb.ft (63 Nm)
Bolt:
59 lb.ft (80 Nm)
m
87. Install the transmission support insulator-to-frame rail bolts.
Torque:
Bottom bolts:
41 lb.ft (55 Nm)
Top bolts:
52 lb.ft (70 Nm)
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Align the subframe and install the new bolts.

m
co
Install the rear subframe brackets and the new subframe bracket-to-body bolts, finger tight at this stage.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the new bolt.

m
Tighten the bolts.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
92. Remove the ratchet strap from the front of the subframe and the rear of the subframe.
93. Remove the adjustable mounting arm and the powertrain jack.
m

. co
Install the strut to the wheel knuckle and install the nuts and bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the brake caliper and bolts.

Torque:
432 mm (17 in) brakes:
53 lb.ft (72 Nm)
457 mm (18 in) brakes: 55 lb.ft (75 Nm)
m
96. NOTICE: Do not tighten the wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to
co
specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel
bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied.

.
gn
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Using the previously removed wheel hub nut, seat the LH and RH halfshafts.
ia
Remove and discard the wheel hub nuts.

rd
ca
97. NOTICE: The wheel hub nut contains a one time locking chemical that is activated by the heat created when it is
tightened. Install and tighten the new wheel hub nut to specification within 5 minutes of starting it on the
threads. Always install a new wheel hub nut after loosening or when not tightened within the specified time or
damage to the components can occur.
Install a new wheel hub nuts.

m
. co
gn

ia
Install the new upper stabilizer link nut.

rd
ca
m
.co
gn
ia

rd
Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt.

ca
100. Connect the transmission cooler tubes and install the secondary latches.
m
co
101. If equipped, install the cooler hose retainer to the subframe.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
102. If equipped connect the oil cooler hoses.

m
103. Connect the coolant tubes.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
104. If equipped, align the index marks on the rear driveshaft to the index marks on the PTU flange made during removal and
install the new bolts.
m
105. Install the LH catalytic converter support bracket and the bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
106. Install the LH catalytic converter support bracket nuts.

m
107. NOTE: Do not lubricate the engine oil filter seal.
Install a new engine oil filter.

Torque:
Stage 1:
44 lb.in (5 Nm)
. co
Stage 2:
180°
gn
ia
rd
ca
108. Install the exhaust Y-pipe.

clockspring may occur. If there is evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be
removed and recentered.
Align and connect the steering column shaft to the steering gear and install the bolt.
m
co
110. If equipped, attach the engine block heater harness to the radiator support wiring harness.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
111. Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainer and connect the transmission control cable to the shift cable bracket.
m
112. Connect the transmission control cable to the control lever.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
113. Connect the coolant hoses.

m
114. Slide the wiring harness down onto the bulkhead until the retainer tabs is engaged.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
115. Connect the engine harness and the PCM electrical connectors.
m
116. Connect the EVAP tube and the fuel supply tube quick release couplings.
Procedures).
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
117. Connect the vacuum hose to the upper intake manifold.

m
118. Install the coolant hose and connect the quick release coupling.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
119. Install the degas bottle.

120. Using a new O-ring seal and gasket seal, connect the A/C tube and install the nut.
m
121. Connect the A/C pressure switch electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
123.
Install the ground wire and bolt.
Attach the wiring harness retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
124. Install the accessory dive belt.

125. If equipped.
Install the underbody shield and the retainers.
m
126. If equipped.
Install the underbody air duct and the retainers.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the RH and LH lower pin-type retainers for the engine splash shields.
m
128. Install the front wheels and tires.
129. Install the battery tray support bracket and the bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
130. Install the power feed cables and the nuts.

m
131. Install the cover.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
132.
Connect the engine harness electrical connector and wiring harness retainer.
Install the ground cable and the stud bolt.
m
133. Install the power feed cable and the nut.
gn
ia
rd
ca
134.
Install the engine appearance cover and the retainers.
Install the oil filler cap.
m
135. Install the following items:
1. Cowl panel.
2. Battery tray.
co
Refer to: Cowl Panel (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Battery Tray (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
.
3. Air cleaner.
gn
4. Air cleaner outlet pipe,
Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec
ia
136. Remove the holding device.

rd
ca
137. NOTICE: Do not expose the Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to engine oil for at least 90
minutes after installing the oil pan. Failure to follow these instructions may cause engine oil leakage.
Fill the engine with clean engine oil.

Refer to: Specifications (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Specifications).
m
. co
gn
ia
139. Recharge the A/C system.

rd
140. Use the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Misfire Monitor Profile Correction routine in the diagnostic scan tool.
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Base Part Number: 9G444
303-476 (T94P-9472-A)
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
TKIT-1994-F
TKIT-1994-FLM/FM
TKIT-1994-LM/M
Materials
Name Specification
High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant -
m
XL-2
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant -
XL-1
Removal
co
All sensors
.
gn
2. If Equipped
ia

rd
ca
Catalyst monitor sensor
3.
Disconnect the electrical connector and clip.
Apply penetrating oil to sensor, using the special tool remove the Catalyst monitor sensor.
Use Special Service Tool: 303-476 (T94P-9472-A) Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor.
Material: Penetrating and Lock Lubricant / XL-1
m
. co
gn
4. Remove the twist lock retainers and the underbody air duct.
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia

rd
ca
6. Apply penetrating oil to sensor, using the special tool remove the Catalyst monitor sensor.
Material: Penetrating and Lock Lubricant / XL-1
m
Installation

. co
gn
1. Apply anti-seize to thread of sensor, using special tool install the Catalyst monitor sensor.
Material: High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant / XL-2
ia
rd
ca
2. Connect the electrical connector.

m
3. co
Apply anti-seize to thread of sensor, using special tool install the Catalyst monitor sensor.
.
Material: High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant / XL-2
gn
Connect the electrical connector and clip.
ia
rd
ca
All sensors
4. Install the retainers and the underbody splash shield.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
309-00C Exhaust System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Removal
NOTE: Clean all exhaust connections before reassembly.

2. Release the retainers and remove the engine appearance cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Disconnect the LH HO2S electrical connector.

m
4. Remove the bolts and the heat shield.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove and discard the top LH catalytic converter top retainers.

m
6. Disconnect the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the exhaust Y-Pipe.

8. Remove and discard the lower LH catalytic converter retainers.

m
9. Remove the LH catalytic converter bracket bolts. Remove the LH catalytic converter.
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
11. Remove and discard the studs.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Tighten the LH catalytic converter nuts in 2 stages in this sequence.

Torque:
Stage 1:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
Stage 2:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
m
3. Check the exhaust system for leaks.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Removal
All vehicles

2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring clip.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the RH HO2S.

Refer to: Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal
and Installation).
4. Remove the retainers and the RH front underbody splash shield.

m
5. Remove the exhaust Y-Pipe.
co
6. Remove the bolts and the RH catalytic converter heat shield.

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
7.
1. Remove the EPAS gear flap heat shield bolt.
2. Position aside the EPAS gear flap heat shield.
m
AWD
8. Remove the roll restrictor RH - 3.5L Duratec. co

Refer to: Roll Restrictor RH - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
.
gn
All vehicles
9. Remove and discard the nuts. Remove the RH catalytic converter.

ia
rd
ca

m
11. Remove and discard the studs.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Tighten the RH catalytic converter nuts in 2 stages in this sequence.

Torque:
Stage 1:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
Stage 2:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
m
3. Check the exhaust system for leaks.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Center Registers
Base Part Number: S018B08
Removal
1. Remove the FCIM.

Refer to: Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIMB) (415-00A Information and Entertainment System - General
Information - Vehicles Without: SYNC, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIMB) (415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General
Information - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIMB) (415-00D Information and Entertainment System - General
Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the retainers, release the clips and remove the center registers assembly.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
414-00 Charging System - General Information 2017 Explorer
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the charging system.
2. Before diagnosing or repairing the charging system inspect the following items:
Check the battery for loose, damaged or corroded connections.

Check the generator for loose, damaged or corroded connections.
Check engine and battery grounds for loose, damaged or corroded connections.
Check BJB for loose or corroded connections.
Verify fuses or fusible links.
Inspect wiring, terminals and connectors.
3. Check the battery condition and state of charge.

4. Check for abnormal ignition-off current drain(s).

REFER to: Battery Drain Check (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
m
5. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding.
6. Using the diagnostic scan tool, retrieve all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Refer to the appropriate DTC Chart in this section.
DTC Charts

BCM DTC Chart
NOTE: Diagnose all PCM DTCs first.

. co
gn
B130C:12 Load Shed Control Circuit Short To Battery GO to Pinpoint Test I
B130C:14 Load Shed Control Circuit Short To Ground or Open GO to Pinpoint Test I
ia
B1438:03 Battery Current Sensor: FM (Frequency Modulated) / PWM (Pulse GO to Pinpoint Test I
Width Modulated) Failure
All Other —
rd
DTCs REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic
Modules, Diagnosis and Testing).
ca

PCM DTC Chart

P0562 System Voltage Low GO to Pinpoint Test B
P0563 System Voltage High GO to Pinpoint Test A
P0620 Generator Control Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test F
P0625 Generator Field Terminal Circuit Low GO to Pinpoint Test G
P0626 Generator Field Terminal Circuit High GO to Pinpoint Test G
P065B Generator Control Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test F
Range/performance
P0A5A Generator Current Sensor Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test E
Range/Performance
P0A5B Generator Current Sensor Circuit Low GO to Pinpoint Test E
P0A5C Generator Current Sensor Circuit High GO to Pinpoint Test E
P1397 System Voltage Out Of Self-Test Range If combined with P0562, GO to Pinpoint Test B If combined with P0563, GO to Pinpoint Test A
All Other —
DTCs REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Charging System

Symptom Chart
Condition Possible Actions

Sources
System voltage high Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test A
Pinpoint Test
System voltage low or battery is discharged Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test B
Pinpoint Test
The generator is noisy Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test C
Pinpoint Test
Radio interference Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test D
Pinpoint Test
Charging system warning indicator is never Wiring, RETRIEVE Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from all modules. If any Diagnostic Trouble Codes
or always on terminals (DTCs) are found, Refer to DTC Chart in this section. If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are
or found,
connectors REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation,
IPC Message Center and Warning Chimes, Diagnosis and Testing).
Generator
m
PCM
Load Shed Message Displays in IPC Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test H

message center and/or centerstack Pinpoint Test
infotainment display
Battery Saver - System Off displays in
centerstack infotainment display
Refer to the
Pinpoint Test
co
GO to Pinpoint Test H
.
gn
Pinpoint Tests
System Voltage High

ia
NOTE: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0563 can be set if the vehicle has been recently jump started or the battery has been recently charged. The battery may
rd
become discharged due to excessive load(s) on the charging system from aftermarket accessories or if vehicle accessories have been operating for an extended
period of time without the engine running.

ca
With the engine running, the charging system supplies voltage to the battery and the vehicle electrical system through the BJB and battery B+ cable. The voltage that
is supplied to the vehicle electrical system is used for the operation of the various vehicle systems and modules. Many modules monitor this voltage and if it rises
above or below their calibrated setpoints, a DTC sets.

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Fault Trigger Conditions

P0563 System Voltage High This DTC sets in the PCM when the PCM detects voltage from the charging system greater than 15.9 volts with vehicle speed
above 8 km/h (5 mph).
P1397 System Voltage Out of If the voltage rises above or drops below the calibrated set point, the PCM sets this DTC. This DTC may also be set if the vehicle
Self-Test Range has been recently jump started or has had a discharged battery.
Possible Sources
Battery
Generator
Engine, generator or battery ground
PCM

Inspect grounds G100 and G101 for loose, damaged or corroded connections.
Inspect the BJB for loose or corroded connections.
PINPOINT TEST A : SYSTEM VOLTAGE HIGH

NOTE: Make sure battery voltage is greater than 12.2 volts prior to and during this pinpoint test.
NOTE: Do not have a battery charger attached during vehicle testing.
A1
PERFORM INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
Perform Inspection and Verification procedure in this section.
Was an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern found?
Yes CORRECT the cause as necessary.

No GO to A2
A2
RETRIEVE THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the PCM self-test.
Is DTC P0620, P0625 or P0626 present?
Yes For DTC P0620, GO to Pinpoint Test F

For Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0625 and P0626, GO to Pinpoint Test G
m
No GO to A3
With the engine running at idle, measure and record:

. co
A3
COMPARE THE GENERATOR VOLTAGE DESIRED (GENVDSD) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH BATTERY VOLTAGE

gn
Action
ia
rd
ca
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the PCM PID GENVDSD.
Is the recorded battery voltage within ±0.5 volt of the PID?
Yes GO to A6
No GO to A4
A4
MEASURE THE "A" SENSE VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Generator C102A.
Ignition ON.
Measure and record:

Action
m
Measure:
. co
gn
C102A-3 Ground
ia
Is the "A" sense voltage equal to the recorded battery voltage?

rd
Yes GO to A5
No VERIFY the BJB fuse 93 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible
ca
causes of the circuit short.
A5
"A" SENSE CIRCUIT LOAD TEST
NOTICE: The following step uses a test light to simulate normal circuit loads. Use only the test light recommended in the Special Tools table at the
beginning of this section. To avoid connector terminal damage, use the Flex Probe Kit for the test light probe connection to the vehicle. Do not use the test
light probe directly on any connector.
NOTE: This step puts a load on the "A" sense circuit. If there are corroded or loose connections, loading the circuit may help show the fault. A 250-350 mA
incandescent 12 volt test lamp is required for this step. This circuit cannot be loaded correctly using an LED-style test lamp.
Ignition ON.
Measure and record:

Action
Connect the load to the circuit and measure:
m
C102A-3 Ground
co
Is the "A" sense voltage within ±0.5 volt of the recorded battery voltage?
.
gn
Yes GO to A6
ia
A6
CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT IN THE REGULATOR CIRCUIT
Connect Generator C102A.
rd
Start the engine.
With the engine running at idle, headlamps on and heater blower on high, measure:
ca

Action
Perform a wiggle test on the generator wiring and following connections while measuring voltage:
Generator C102A
Inline C139
Does battery voltage change more than 0.5 volt?
Yes INSPECT and REPAIR any corrosion in the generator B+ circuit, positive battery cable and C102A connections.
No GO to A7
A7
CHECK THE VOLTAGE DROP IN THE VEHICLE GROUNDS
Connect Generator C102A.
Start the engine.

Action
m
. co
gn
Generator case
ia
rd
ca
Is the voltage drop less than 0.5 volt?
Yes GO to A8
No INSPECT and REPAIR the engine ground, generator ground or the battery ground for corrosion.
A8
MONITOR THE GENERATOR COMMAND (GENCMD), GENERATOR MONITOR (GENMON) AND GENERATOR VOLTAGE DESIRED (GENVDSD)
PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect PCM C175B.

C102A-1 C102A-2
Start the engine.
Using the active command, set the PID GENVDSD to 14 volts.

Monitor the PCM Parameter Identifications (PIDs) GENMON and GENVDSD.
Do the Parameter Identifications (PIDs) read within 5% of each other?
Yes GO to A9
No GO to A12
A9
COMPARE THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) SUPPLY VOLTAGE PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
With the engine running at idle, measure and record:

Action
m
. co
gn
ia
Monitor the PCM PID VPWR.

rd
Does the PID accurately display battery voltage within ±0.5 volt of the recorded battery voltage?
ca
the TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new generator.
REFER to: Generator - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS) (414-02 Generator and Regulator, Removal and
Installation).
No GO to A10
A10
CHECK PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUITS
Turn the headlamps and heater blower off.
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect BJB PCM power relay.

Action
BJB PCM Relay pin 3
BJB PCM Relay pin 5
m
Measure and record:

. co
Action
gn
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: The following step will load test the circuit. A headlamp bulb would be an effective load. To avoid connector terminal damage, use the Flex Probe Kit for
connector connections.
Connect the load to a suitable ground connection.
Connect the load to each circuit and measure:

C175B-97 Ground
C175B-99 Ground
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire and GO to A11
No REPAIR the affected circuit(s).
A11
CHECK PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) GROUND FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Connect the load to a suitable 12 volt power connection.

C175B-5 Ground
C175B-100 Ground
m
C175B-102 Ground
C175B-103
. co Ground
gn
ia
Yes GO to A12
rd

ca
A12
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Connect all connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
the TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM and CLEAR all Diagnostic Trouble
Codes (DTCs) in all modules.
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
System Voltage Low or Battery is Discharged

With the engine running, the charging system supplies voltage to the battery and the vehicle electrical system through the BJB and battery B+ cable. The PCM
monitors this B+ voltage through its own voltage supply circuit.


P0562 System Voltage Low If voltage drops 1.5 volts or more below the generator voltage desired (calculated by the PCM), this DTC sets after 30 seconds.
P1397 System Voltage Out of If the voltage rises above or drops below the calibrated set point, the PCM sets this DTC This DTC may also be set if the vehicle
Self-Test Range has been recently jump started or has had a discharged battery.
Possible Sources
Battery
Fuses or fusible links
Generator
PCM
BJB
m
Inspect for abnormal ignition-off current drain(s).

Inspect the battery.
Verify BJB fuse 93 (10A).
Inspect the generator clutch.
. co
PINPOINT TEST B : SYSTEM VOLTAGE LOW OR BATTERY IS DISCHARGED
gn
B1
ia

rd
No GO to B2
ca
B2
RETRIEVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Is DTC P0620, P0625 or P0626 present?
Yes For DTC P0620, GO to Pinpoint Test F

For DTC P0625 or P0626, GO to Pinpoint Test G
No GO to B3
B3
CHECK THE GENERATOR CONNECTIONS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect all of the generator connectors and inspect for:

Reconnect the generator connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Measure and record:

Action
Measure:
m
C102B-1 Ground
. co
gn
Yes GO to B4
No TIGHTEN or INSTALL a new generator B+ nut as needed.
ia
Installation).
VERIFY BJB fuse 101 (325A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible
rd

ca
B4
CHECK THE VOLTAGE DROP IN THE GENERATOR B+ CIRCUIT
Start the engine.
With the engine running at idle, headlamps on and blower on high, measure:

C102B-1
Perform a wiggle test of the generator wiring and connections while measuring voltage drop.
Yes GO to B5
No INSPECT and REPAIR any corrosion in the generator B+ circuit and positive battery cable connections.
B5
CHECK THE VOLTAGE DROP IN THE VEHICLE GROUNDS

Action
Generator case
m
Yes GO to B6
No INSPECT and REPAIR the engine ground, generator ground or the battery ground for corrosion.
co
B6
MONITOR THE GENERATOR VOLTAGE DESIRED (GENVDSD) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WHILE COMMANDED
.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the PCM GENVDSD PID.
gn
Using a diagnostic scan tool active command, set the PCM PID GENVDSD to 14 volts.
With the engine running at idle, measure battery and record:

ia

Action
rd
ca
Is the recorded battery voltage within ±0.5 volt of the PID?
Yes GO to B7
No INSTALL a new generator.
Installation).
B7
COMPARE THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) SUPPLY VOLTAGE (VPWR) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
With the engine running at idle, headlamps on and blower on high, measure and record:

Action
m
. co
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the PCM PID VPWR.
gn
Does the PID accurately display battery voltage within ±0.5 volt of the recorded battery voltage?
Yes GO to B8
ia
No REPAIR high resistance or loose connections in the affected PCM power circuit(s).
rd
B8
CHECK PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
ca
Disconnect BJB PCM power relay.

Action
BJB PCM Relay pin 3

BJB PCM Relay pin 5
m
Measure and record:

. co
Action
gn
ia
rd
ca

C175B-97 Ground
C175B-99 Ground
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to B9
B9
CHECK PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) GROUND FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

C175B-5 Ground
C175B-100 Ground
m
C175B-102 Ground
C175B-103
. co Ground
gn
ia
Yes GO to B10
rd

ca
B10
CHECK BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) SUPPLY VOLTAGE CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect all of the BCM connectors.
Measure and record:

Action
m
C2280H-1
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
C2280G-17 Ground
ia
rd
C2280G-21 Ground
ca
C2280G-22 Ground
Yes GO to B11
B11
CHECK BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) GROUND FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

C2280C-6 Ground
C2280C-7 Ground
Yes GO to B12
B12
MONITOR THE SUPPLY VOLTAGE (VPWR) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
NOTE: Measure battery voltage at the battery.
With the engine running at idle, turn off all accessory loads.
Measure and record:

Action
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view PCM PID VPWR and record.
Momentarily accelerate the engine to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and release. Repeat this step 4-5 times while continuing to monitor the PID
Does the PID stay within 0.5 volt of the recorded battery voltage when the engine Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) are increased?
Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. INSPECT and REPAIR
any connector or pin issues found. If no connector or pin issues are found, Perform the battery drain test.
REFER to: Battery Drain Check (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
No GO to B13
B13
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ADDRESS the root
cause of any connector or pin issues.
Generator Noise or Mechanical Performance
The generator is belt-driven by the engine accessory drive system. There are several sources of generator noise which include bearing noise, electrical fault noise,
generator or belt pulley misalignment. A generator with certain types of diode or stator failures can also produce an audible noise.
Possible Sources
FEAD belt
Loose bolts/brackets
Generator/pulleys
m
Inspect the FEAD belt.
Inspect for loose bolts/brackets.
Inspect the generator/pulley.
C1
CHECK FOR ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT NOISE AND LOOSE MOUNTING BRACKETS
. co
PINPOINT TEST C : GENERATOR NOISE OR MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE
Ignition OFF.
gn
Check the FEAD belt and tensioner for damage and correct installation.
REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
Is the accessory drive OK?

ia
Yes GO to C2
rd
ca
C2
CHECK THE GENERATOR MOUNTING
Check the generator mounting for loose bolts or misalignment.
Is the generator mounted correctly?
Yes GO to C3
C3
CHECK THE GENERATOR FOR NOISE
Start the engine.
With the engine running, use a stethoscope or equivalent listening device to probe the generator and the accessory drive area for unusual mechanical
noise.
Is the generator the noise source?
Yes INSTALL a new generator.
Installation).
No Diagnose the source of the engine noise.

Radio Interference
The generator radio suppression equipment reduces interference transmitted through the speakers by the vehicle electrical system.
NOTE: If the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) Audio Control Module (ACM) has been replaced with an aftermarket unit, the vehicle may not pass this test.
Return the vehicle to Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) condition before following this pinpoint test.
NOTE: If the engine is operated at greater than 2,000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) momentarily, the generator self-excites. Make sure when the generator is
disconnected the engine rpm stays below 2,000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). If it rises above 2,000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM), turn the ignition to the OFF
position and start the test over again.
NOTE: Inspect for any aftermarket accessories that have been added to the vehicle. Check the wiring for these accessories and be sure they have not been attached
to the generator circuits and are positioned away from the generator wiring.
Possible Sources
Generator
In-vehicle entertainment system
Inspect the generator.

Inspect the in-vehicle entertainment system.
PINPOINT TEST D : RADIO INTERFERENCE
m
D1
VERIFY THE GENERATOR IS THE SOURCE OF THE AUDIO SYSTEM INTERFERENCE
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to idle.
Tune the audio system to a station where interference is present.
Ignition OFF.
. co
gn
Disconnect Generator C102B.
Start the engine.

ia
Allow the engine to idle.
Is the interference present with the generator disconnected?

rd
Yes CONTINUE diagnosis, REFER to

ca

(without touch screen), or REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00C Information and Entertainment System -
General Information - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display, Diagnosis and Testing).
(with touch screen), or REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00D Information and Entertainment System - General
Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System, Diagnosis and Testing).
(with Sony® audio system).
Installation).
Generator Current Sensor Faults
The generator current sensor is a Hall-effect sensor attached to the generator B+ cable. It is supplied a 5 volt reference and ground from the PCM. The PCM reads the
generator current sensor feedback voltage to determine how much current is flowing through the generator B+ cable.


P0A5A Generator Current Sensor Circuit Sets in the PCM when the PCM does not detect current through the generator current sensor and there are no
Range/Performance generator current sensor circuit Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) set.
P0A5B Generator Current Sensor Circuit Sets in the PCM when the PCM senses lower than expected voltage on the generator current sensor feedback circuit,
Low indicating an open or a short directly to ground.
P0A5C Generator Current Sensor Circuit Sets in the PCM when the PCM senses higher than expected voltage on the generator current sensor feedback circuit,
High indicating a short directly to voltage.
Possible Sources
Generator current sensor

PCM
Inspect the generator current sensor.

Inspect the generator current sensor connector.
PINPOINT TEST E : GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR FAULTS

E1
RETRIEVE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the PCM self-test
m
Is DTC P0562 present?
Yes
No
For DTC P0A5B, GO to E2

For DTC P0A5B, GO to E3
For DTC P0A5C, GO to E5
. co
gn
E2
CHECK THE GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR
Ignition OFF.
ia
Inspect the generator current sensor for the following:

physical damage
corrosion
disconnected electrical connector
rd
correct generator current sensor installation.

REFER to: Generator Current Sensor (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
debris between the generator current sensor and the generator B+ cable
ca
Are any of these conditions found during inspection?
Yes REPAIR as necessary or INSTALL a new generator current sensor.

No GO to E9
E3
CHECK THE GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Generator current sensor C1645.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C1645-1 Ground
Yes GO to E4
No If the voltage is less than 4.8 volts, REPAIR the circuit for an open or high resistance. If the voltage is greater than 5.2 volts, REPAIR
the circuit for a short to voltage.
E4
CHECK THE GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C1645-1 C1645-2
Yes GO to E5
No REPAIR the circuit for an open or high resistance.
E5
CHECK THE GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
m
Measure:
C1645-3
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia
No GO to E6
rd
E6
CHECK THE GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C1645-3 Ground
Yes GO to E7
E7
CHECK THE GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE SIGNAL RETURN OR VOLTAGE REFERENCE
CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1645-3 C1645-1
C1645-3 C1645-2
Yes GO to E8
E8
CHECK THE GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C175B-53 C1645-3
m
Yes GO to E9
E9
CHECK THE GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR CONNECTION
. co
Ignition OFF.
gn
Disconnect Generator current sensor C1645.
Inspect the generator current sensor connector for the following:

ia
Connect and correctly seat all connectors.

rd
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in all modules.
ca
Did the DTC return?
Yes REPAIR as necessary or INSTALL a new generator current sensor.

CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC returns, GO to E10
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by an intermittently loose or corroded connector.
ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues.
E10
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
FOLLOW the TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM and CLEAR all
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in all modules.
Installation).
DTC P0620, P065B
The PCM monitors the generator output via the generator monitor (GENMON) circuit. The PCM uses the generator command (GENCOM) circuit to command the
generator to either increase or decrease output. If the GENCOM circuit (generator control circuit) or the "A" sense circuit are open or shorted to ground, the PCM will
not be able to control the generator output. When the engine speed is greater than 2,000 rpm, the generator defaults to a steady voltage output of 13.5 volts and the
PCM sends a request to the IPC to illuminate the charging system warning indicator. A GENCOM circuit fault can be confirmed by viewing the PCM PID generator
command line fault (GENCMD_LF) (YES status indicator fault).

m
P0620 Generator Control Circuit The PCM sets this DTC if the GENCOM circuit, "A" sense circuit, or B+ circuit is open or shorted to ground.
P065B Generator Control Circuit Range/performance The PCM sets this DTC when the generator reports an internal regulator failure.
Possible Sources
. co
Fuses
gn
Generator
PCM

ia

rd
PINPOINT TEST F : DTC P0620, P065B

ca
F1

No GO to F2
F2
Ignition OFF.

Measure and record:

Action
Measure:
m
C102B-1 Ground
co
.
gn
Yes GO to F3
ia
Installation).
rd
F3
ca
Start the engine.

C102B-1
Yes GO to F4
F4
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure and record:

Action
m
. co
Install a test lamp between:
gn
C102A-3 Ground
ia
Perform a wiggle test on the generator wiring and measure:

rd

ca
C102A-3 Ground
Yes GO to F5
F5
CHECK THE GENERATOR COMMAND CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.

C102A-2 Ground

No GO to F6
F6
CHECK THE GENERATOR COMMAND CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.

C102A-2 Ground
Yes GO to F7
F7
CHECK THE GENERATOR COMMAND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
m
C175B-13
Positive Lead
. co
C102A-2
Negative Lead
gn
Yes GO to F8
ia

rd
F8
COMPARE THE GENERATOR MONITOR (GENMON) AND GENERATOR COMMAND (GENCMD) PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Ignition OFF.
ca
Connect PCM C175B.

C102A-1 C102A-2
Start the engine.
Monitor the PCM Parameter Identifications (PIDs) GENMON and GENCMD.
Perform a wiggle test of the generator wiring and connections.
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. INSTALL a new generator.
Installation).
F9
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
DTC P0625, P0626
m
co
The PCM monitors the generator output via the generator monitor (GENMON) circuit (generator field terminal circuit). If the PCM cannot read the GENMON circuit due
to an open or short to ground, when the engine speed is greater than 2,000 rpm, the generator defaults to a steady voltage of 13.5 volts and the PCM sends a request
to the IPC to illuminate the charging system warning indicator. A GENMON duty cycle of 3% or less indicates a short to ground fault is present and results in DTC
P0625 setting in the PCM A GENMON duty cycle of 98% or more indicates an open or short to voltage fault is present and results in DTC P0626 setting in the PCM.
.
gn

ia

P0625 Generator Field Terminal The PCM sets this DTC if the GENMON circuit is shorted to ground, the "A" sense circuit is open or the B+ circuit is open. This
Circuit Low DTC also sets by a faulted PCM or generator.
rd
P0626 Generator Field Terminal The PCM sets this DTC if the GENMON circuit is open or shorted to power. This DTC can also be set by a faulted PCM or
Circuit High generator.
ca
Possible Sources
Battery
Fuses or Fusible Links
Generator
PCM
Inspect for abnormal ignition-off current drain(s).

PINPOINT TEST G : DTC P0625, P0626

G1
No GO to G2
G2
Ignition OFF.
Measure and record:

Action
m
. co
gn
Measure:

ia
C102B-1 Ground
rd

ca
Yes GO to G3
Installation).
G3
Start the engine.

C102B-1
Yes For DTC P0625, GO to G4

For DTC P0626, GO to G5
G4
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure and record:

Action
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Install a test lamp between:

ca

C102A-3 Ground

C102A-3 Ground
Yes GO to G5
G5
CHECK THE GENERATOR MONITOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.

Ignition ON.

C102A-1 Ground

No GO to G6
G6
CHECK THE GENERATOR MONITOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.

C102A-1 Ground
m
Yes
No
GO to G7
REPAIR the circuit.
. co
gn
G7
CHECK THE GENERATOR MONITOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ia

C175B-59 C102A-1
rd
ca
Yes GO to G8
G8
CHECK THE GENERATOR B+ INTERNAL RESISTANCE
Disconnect Generator C102B.
Measure:

Generator B+ Terminal Generator case
Is the resistance greater than 25K ohms?
Yes GO to G9
Installation).
G9
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE VOLTAGE REGULATOR INTERNAL CIRCUITS
Measure:

Generator pin 1 (Component Side) Generator case
Yes GO to G10
m
Installation).
co
G10
COMPARE THE GENMON PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) AND THE GENCMD PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
.
Connect PCM C175B.
gn

ia
C102A-1 C102A-2
rd
Start the engine.

ca
Using the active command, set the PID GENVDSD to 14 volts.
Monitor the PCM Parameter Identifications (PIDs) GENMON and GENCMD.
Perform a wiggle test of the generator wiring and connections.
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. INSTALL a new generator.
Installation).
No REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to G11
G11
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

Load Shed Message Displays in Message Center
When the engine is off and the key is in ON or accessory mode, and the BCM determines the battery state of charge is below 40%, or 45 minutes have elapsed, a
load shed message is sent over the CAN. This message turns off the audio/navigation system to save the remaining battery charge. Under this condition, a load shed
message will be displayed to notify the driver that battery protection actions are active:
System Off to Save Battery Turn Ignition Off displays on the FCDIM (without touchscreen controls)
SYSTEM OFF TO SAVE BATTERY PLEASE TURN IGNITION OFF OR START ENGINE displays on the FDIM (with touchscreen controls)
Battery Saver - System Off displays on the FDIM (with Sync)
m
These messages displaying may be normal operation and not indicate a fault. Refer to the Owner Literature and
Load shed messages displaying with the engine running or only on the FCDIM or the FDIM (with touchscreen controls) indicates the audio system has detected a
fault.
Possible Sources
Normal operation
Audio system
. co
Battery
gn
BCM
Fuses or Fusible Links
Generator

ia

Inspect the battery for loose or corroded connections.
rd
Inspect the generator for loose or corroded connections.

Inspect C139 for loose or corroded connections.
Inspect battery and engine grounds for loose or corroded connections.
ca
PINPOINT TEST H : LOAD SHED MESSAGE DISPLAYS IN MESSAGE CENTER

H1

No GO to H2
H2
Verify the customer concern by operating the charging system.
Did the customer indicate battery saver message only appeared in the centerstack with the engine running?
Yes Without touchscreen,

With touchscreen,

No GO to H3
H3
VERIFY THE NETWORK
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the Network Test.
Did the APIM, BCM, and PCM pass the Network Test?
Yes GO to H4
No
H4
PERFORM PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) SELF TEST
Ignition ON.
Were any battery or charging system related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) retrieved?
Yes REFER to PCM DTC chart in this section.
m
No GO to H5
H5
RETRIEVE ALL CONTINUOUS MEMORY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (CMDTCS)
Ignition ON.
co
.
gn
Were any battery or charging system related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) retrieved?
Yes For BCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) refer to BCM DTC Chart in this section.
For APIM or ACM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to
ia
(without touch screen), or REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00C Information and Entertainment System -
rd
(with touch screen), or REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00D Information and Entertainment System - General
Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System, Diagnosis and Testing).
(with Sony® audio system).
For other battery or charging system related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),
ca
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code Charts (100-00 General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to H6
H6
CHECK BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BAT_ST_CHRG PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the BCM Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Monitor the BCM BAT_ST_CHRG PID.
Does the PID indicate 40% or more?
Yes GO to H8
No GO to H7
H7
RELEARN BATTERY STATE OF CHARGE
NOTE: The battery state of charge is too low and needs to be relearned. Refer to the Description and Operation in this section for more information on battery
state of charge.
Remove all accessories from the lighter, all power outlets and DC/AC inverter (if equipped).
NOTE: The key should not be left in the vehicle but should be left in a secure location away from the vehicle such as a lock box.
Allow vehicle to sit undisturbed for at least 6 hours.

Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the BCM Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Monitor the BCM BAT_ST_CHRG PID.
Does the PID indicate 40% or more?
Yes The concern may have been caused by too low of a battery state of charge. REVIEW Energy Management operation with customer
and return vehicle to customer.
No GO to H8
H8
VERIFY INLINE CONNECTOR
Inspect inline connector C139 for secure connection.
Disconnect Inline connector C139.
Inspect for:
Were any concerns present?
m
No GO to H9
H9
Ignition OFF.

. co
Repair:
gn
ia

rd
ca
FOLLOW the TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern,
Battery Current Sensor Faults
For information on the battery current sensor,



B130C:12 Load Shed Control Circuit Short To Battery This DTC sets in the BCM when the BCM senses a short in the battery current
sensor control circuit.
B130C:14 Load Shed Control Circuit Short To Ground or Open This DTC sets in the BCM when the BCM senses an open or ground in the battery
current sensor control circuit.
B1438:03 Battery Current Sensor, FM (Frequency Modulated) / PWM (Pulse This DTC sets in the BCM when the BCM does not indicate current from the battery
Width Modulated) Failure current sensor.
Possible Sources
Battery current sensor

Inspect the battery current sensor

Inspect the battery current sensor connector
PINPOINT TEST I : BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR FAULTS

I1
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
Inspect the battery current sensor for the following:
physical damage
corrosion
disconnected electrical connector
battery ground cable routed through the battery current sensor
debris between the battery current sensor and the battery ground cable
Are any of these conditions found during inspection?
m
Yes REPAIR as necessary or INSTALL a new battery current sensor.
REFER to: Battery Current Sensor (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
No GO to I2
I2
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
. co
Ignition OFF.
gn
Disconnect Battery current sensor C1646.
Ignition ON.
ia
Measure:

rd

C1646-1 Ground
ca
Yes GO to I6
No If the voltage is less than 4.8 volts, GO to I4 If the voltage is greater than 5.2 volts, GO to I3
I3
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Using the Terminal Release Kit, release and temporarily remove BCM C2280F-3.
Connect BCM C2280F.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C1646-1 Ground

No INSTALL C2280F-3 and GO to I14
I4
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1646-1 Ground
Yes GO to I5
I5
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
m
Measure:
C1646-1
Positive Lead
. co
C2280F-3
Negative Lead
gn
Yes GO to I13
ia

rd
I6
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUIT
Measure:
ca

C1646-1 C1646-2
Yes GO to I9
No GO to I7
I7
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
Measure:

C1646-2 Ground

No GO to I8
I8
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1646-2 C2280F-19
Yes GO to I13
I9
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
m
Measure:

C1646-3
. co Ground
gn
No GO to I10
ia
I10
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
rd
Ignition OFF.

ca
Measure:

C1646-3 Ground
Yes GO to I11
I11
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C1646-3 C2280F-8

Yes GO to I12
I12
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO THE SIGNAL RETURN OR REFERENCE CIRCUIT
Measure:

C1646-3 C1646-1
C1646-3 C1646-2
Yes GO to I13
m
I13
CHECK THE BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR CONNECTION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Battery Current Sensor C1646, if necessary.
Inspect the battery current sensor connector for:

. co
gn
Connect Battery Current Sensor C1646.
Connect BCM C2280F.

ia
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in all modules.
rd
Did the DTC return?

ca
Yes REPAIR as necessary or INSTALL a new battery current sensor.

REFER to: Battery Current Sensor (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC returns, GO to I14
I14
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
FOLLOW the TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern,
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Charging System - Overview
Overview
The generator is driven by the FEAD belt. When the engine is started, the generator begins to generate AC voltage which is
internally converted to DC voltage. The DC voltage level is controlled by the voltage regulator (located on the rear of the
generator) and is supplied to the battery.
The PCM controls the voltage regulation setpoint and communicates this information to the generator internal voltage regulator
over a generator communication (GENCOM) communication circuit. The PCM receives generator load and error conditions
from the generator over the generator monitor (GENMON) circuit.
This vehicle is equipped with an Electrical engergy management system (load shed strategy). With the engine off, the BCM
monitors the battery state of charge using the battery current sensor. With the engine running, the PCM monitors system
voltage on the VPWR circuits and PSCM load.
The PCM monitors the generator current using the generator current sensor attached to the generator B+ battery cable. The
information supplied to the PCM from the generator current sensor is used by the PCM to adjust the engine idle stability and
torque control.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Charging System - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram
m
. co
gn

Module Network Input Messages — Body Control Module (BCM)
ia

Alternator fault PCM The PCM has detected a fault in the generator or generator circuits.
rd
ca

Module Network Input Messages — Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)

Message Module
Power system BCM Reports any generator/charging system faults. Used for charging system fault
status indicator.
Load Shed Request BCM Used to indicate what level of load shed is commanded.

Module Network Input Messages — Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

Load Shed Request BCM Used to indicate what level of load shed is commanded.
Charging System
The PCM controlled Smart Charge charging system determines the optimal voltage setpoint for the charging system and
communicates this information to the voltage regulator. The Smart Charge charging system sets Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) when a charging system fault is present. All of the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) can set continuous faults, but not
all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) set as on-demand faults.
This system uses 2 communication lines between the PCM and the generator/voltage regulator: A generator communication
(GENCOM) line communicates the desired setpoint from the PCM to the voltage regulator, and a generator monitor (GENMON)
line communicates the generator load and error conditions to the PCM. Both of these use PWM. The PCM sends the GENCOM
command only when it is necessary to adjust the voltage setpoint. If the setpoint does not need to be changed, several seconds
may elapse between PCM GENCOM commands. This normal operation appears in the PID as occasional bursts of pulse-width
commands. In addition to these two circuits, a third pin on the voltage regulator, the "A" circuit pin, is dedicated to monitor, or
sense, the battery voltage.
The PCM simultaneously controls and monitors the generator output. When the current consumption is high or the battery is
discharged, the PCM raises engine speed as needed to increase generator output. The generator charges the battery and at
the same time supplies power for all of the electrical loads. The battery is more effectively charged with a higher voltage when
the battery is cold and a lower voltage when the battery is warm.
The PCM turns off the generator during cranking to reduce the generator load and improve cranking speed. Once the engine
starts, the PCM slowly increases generator output to the desired voltage.
The PCM reports any charging system faults and sends a message through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
m
to the BCM. The BCM controls the charging system warning indicator by sending a message over the Medium Speed Controller
Area Network (MS-CAN) to the IPC. The IPC then controls charging system warning indication based on the message from the
PCM through the BCM. The status of the PCM charging system warning indicator and/or message is confirmed by viewing
co
PCM PID generator fault indicator lamp (GENFIL). Any charging system fault detected by the PCM results in 1 or more
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) being set and the PID GENFIL having a status of On. If equipped with a charging system
warning indicator, the IPC turns the indicator on or off. If equipped with a message center, the IPC displays a CHECK
.
CHARGING SYSTEM message. In some instances, the CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message may not display if the ignition
gn
is on and the engine is off.
Under certain circumstances, the charging system may have a concern but still keeps the battery charged and the vehicle
running. GENCOM normally initiates charging but with a fault in this circuit, the generator can self-excite and start charging on
ia
its own. The charging system warning indicator is illuminated and/or the CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message is displayed,
and the generator operates in a default mode (approximately 13.5 volts).
rd
Electrical Energy Management
NOTICE: When any vehicle module is being programmed, connect an external battery charger to make sure the
module programming is completed without interruption due to the load shedding feature becoming active. The
ca
external battery charger must maintain a system voltage above 13 volts. This may require a charger setting higher
than the lowest charge setting. The external battery charger negative connection must be made to an engine or vehicle
chassis ground and not the negative battery terminal. If the connection is to the negative battery terminal, load
shedding may begin and module programming may be corrupted. After charging has begun, start the engine to clear
any load shed states and then turn the engine off and proceed with programming.
This vehicle is equipped with an Electrical Energy Management system which manages battery charging and monitors the
battery state of charge. The Electrical Energy Management system software is housed in the BCM. It has the algorithms and
control structure for the Smart Regenerative Charging, and Load Shed Control Strategy. The Electrical Energy Management
system is equipped with 2 unique sensors to monitor the battery depending on the vehicle system features / operation.
Battery current sensor

Generator current sensor
These sensors serve as input to the Electrical Energy Management system software. If the sensors malfunction due to wiring
issues or failure, a DTC will be set. In most cases the Electrical Energy Management system functions will be turned off until
the sensor operation is restored.
Battery State of Charge
The BCM uses the battery current sensor to keep track of the battery state of charge. The battery current sensor is a Hall-effect
sensor attached to the battery ground cable. During a drive cycle the Electrical Energy Management software adjusts the
battery state of charge by monitoring the charge and discharge current and adjusting the state of charge up during charging,
and down during discharge. During rest periods (key off with no electrical loads) when the vehicle enters sleep mode, the
battery voltage is sampled to calibrate the State of Charge. The BCM automatically executes this calibration anytime the vehicle
enters sleep mode and when the total vehicle current draw is below 300mA. It takes 8 hours in the sleep mode to calibrate the
battery state of charge to high accuracy. If the system draw does not allow the battery state of charge calibration over the
previous 7 to 10 days the State of Charge quality factor changes to flag this and some Electrical Energy Management
Functions which rely on the accuracy of the battery state of charge may be temporarily turned off until a calibration takes place.
Engine Off Load Shed
When the engine is off, and the BCM determines the battery state of charge is below 40% or 10% of the charge has been
drained or 45 minutes have elapsed, a load shed message is sent over the CAN. This message turns off the audio/navigation
system to save the remaining battery charge. Under this condition, the FDIM displays SYS OFF TO SAVE BATT (without
navigation) or BATTERY SAVER — SYSTEM OFF PLEASE START THE ENGINE (with navigation) to notify the driver that
battery protection actions are active.
Engine off load shed occurs when the engine is not running, and the ignition is in the ACC or RUN position. To clear the load
shed state, restart the engine.
NOTE: To maintain correct operation of the load shed system, any electrical devices or equipment must be grounded to the
engine or chassis ground and not the negative battery terminal. A connection to the negative battery terminal may cause an
inaccurate measurement of the battery state of charge and may cause incorrect load shed system operation.
When the ignition is in the RUN position and load shed occurs, the IPC message center displays either TURN POWER OFF TO
SAVE BATT (base message center) or TURN POWER OFF TO SAVE BATTERY (optional message center). The
audio/navigation system will shut down after the message center displays it's warning.
m
If a fault occurs with the battery current sensor or circuit(s), the only engine off load shed strategy is a 45 minute timer. After 45
minutes have elapsed, the audio/navigation system turns off. To clear the load shed state, restart the engine.
Engine Running Load Shed co

When the BCM and/or PSCM voltage is low, with the engine running, a message is sent by the BCM to either minimize or shut
down the climate controlled seats, rear defrost, heated mirrors and DATC blower motor to improve system voltage. Under this
.
gn
condition, the IPC message center displays either LOW BATTERY LESS FEATURES (base message center) or LOW
BATTERY FEATURES TEMPORARILY TURNED OFF (optional message center) to notify the driver that battery protection
actions are active.
For more information on message center messages, Refer to the Owner's Literature or
ia
Refer to: Message Center - System Operation and Component Description (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and
Warning Chimes, Description and Operation).
rd
ca

There are 3 states of engine running load shed:
Load Shed Entry Conditions Impact to Features Clear Conditions

State
Load shed If vehicle speed is below 16 km/h (10 mph), These loads are incrementally reduced (if Voltage to the
1 and voltage to the PSCM is less than 11.5 volts equipped): Heated steering wheel and BCM is greater
or the PSCM measures current draw greater climate controlled seats. These loads are than 12.7 volts or
than 0 amps. If vehicle speed is above 16 kp/h turned off (if equipped): smart trailer tow the generator
(10 mph), and the voltage to the BCM is less battery charge, heated mirrors, heated field duty cycle is
than 11.6 volts. backglass, and heated windshield. less than 88%.
Load shed PSCM indicating reduced voltage and If equipped, climate controlled seats Voltage to the
2 transient increased current. System voltage less than 11 are disabled, but the indicators remain BCM is greater
volts illuminated. than 12.4 volts.
If equipped, rear defrost and heated
mirrors are disabled, but the indicator
remain illuminated.
Load shed Load Shed 2 Transient condition in excess of If equipped, climate controlled seats Voltage to the
2 20 seconds are disabled and the indicators are off. BCM is greater
continuous If equipped, rear defrost and heated than 12.4 volts
mirrors are disabled and the indicator for more than 60
is off. seconds.
If equipped with DATC, the blower
motor is reduced to 50% speed.
If equipped, DC/AC inverter (AC
powerpoint) is disabled.
The base IPC message center
displays LOW BATTERY LESS
FEATURES.
The optional IPC message center
displays LOW BATTERY FEATURES
TEMPORARILY TURNED OFF.
Battery Charging
When charging the vehicle battery by connecting the charger to engine or chassis ground, the negative charger clamp
must be connected to an unpainted chassis surface or a solid engine component such as a generator mount or engine lifting
eye. In this instance, after charging, the BMS Reset is not required. Through this method of charging the BCM updates the
battery state of charge during the charging process.
When charging the vehicle battery by connecting the charger to the negative battery terminal is necessary, such as when
using a combination battery charger and battery tester/analyzer, like the GR 1 190 V3.0 Intelligent Diagnostic Charger, the
m
BCM does not immediately update the battery state of charge. In this instance, the BMS Reset must be carried out using a
diagnostic scan tool. This reset is needed for proper engine off load shedding and to prevent invoking of engine off load
shedding earlier than normal.
co
If the reset is not carried out, when the battery is charged by connecting the charger to the negative battery terminal, it takes
approximately 8 hours for the BCM to learn the new battery state of charge. During this 8 hour period, the vehicle must be
undisturbed, with no doors opened or keyless entry button presses. If the vehicle is used before the BCM is allowed to learn the
.
new battery state of charge, engine off load shedding can still occur and a message may be displayed.
gn
Jump Starting
When it is necessary to jump start the vehicle it is important to connect the cables properly in order for the Electrical Energy
ia
Management system to measure the energy input to the system to keep an accurate state of charge. Connect the positive
cable to the battery positive post and the jump start negative cable to a vehicle ground. Do not connect to the negative battery
terminal. Connecting directly to the battery negative post bypasses the ability of the vehicle to measure the input current, and
rd
does not adjust the battery state of charge accordingly. For a good connection point, follow the negative cable from the battery
monitoring sensor to the vehicle body connection (typically on the shock tower sheet metal). If the vehicle was improperly jump
started, the Electrical Energy Management system calibrates the battery state of charge after about 8 hours.
ca
Battery Replacement
If the vehicle battery is replaced, it is very important to perform the BMS Reset using a diagnostic scan tool. If the BMS Reset is
not carried out, it holds the old battery parameters and time in service counter in memory. Additionally it tells the system the
battery is in an aged state and may limit the Electrical Energy Management system functions. For more information,
Refer to: Battery and Cables - System Operation and Component Description (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
Generator
The generator is equipped with an electronic internal voltage regulator.
The generator current sensor is attached to the generator B+ cable. It is supplied a 5-volt reference voltage and a ground from
the PCM. The generator current sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that supplies an analog feedback signal to the PCM. The PCM
uses this information for battery charging strategy and idle stability and torque control.
Battery Current Sensor
The battery current sensor is attached to the battery negative cable. It is supplied a 5-volt reference voltage and a ground from
the BCM. The battery current sensor is a Hall-effect sensor that supplies an analog feedback signal to the BCM. The BCM
reads the battery current sensor feedback voltage to determine how much current is flowing through the battery ground cable.
The BCM uses this information for battery state of charge.
The PCM monitors and controls the charging system.
Generator Clutch
Vehicles with the 2.3L engine are equipped with an overrunning alternator decoupler pulley. The primary function is to separate
the generator rotor inertia from the FEAD belt, lowering belt tension at high engine deceleration rates and reducing NVH. The
generator pulley is serviced separately from the generator.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel.

Refer to: Instrument Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
2. Position the instrument panel with the passenger side supported as shown.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
4. Remove the nuts and the RFA module.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring harness retainer.
m
6. Detach the wiring harness retainers and disconnect the electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Disconnect the electrical connectors, detach the wiring harness retainer and position the instrument panel wiring aside.
m
8. Remove the bolts and the floor duct.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Remove the climate control housing bolts.

m
10. Remove the climate control housing bolts.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Remove the climate control housing.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - Component Location
NOTE: Shown with Rear Climate Control, other vehicles similar.
m
. co
gn
Item Description
ia
1 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

2 Condenser
rd
3 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Manifold and Tube Assembly

4 A/C Compressor Inlet Line
ca
5 Thermostatic Expansion Valve

6 Sunload Sensor
7 Climate Control Housing
8 In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
9 HVAC Control Module
10 Floor Duct
11 Rear Foot Well Duct
12 Rear HVAC Control Module
13 Rear A/C Duct
14 Rear A/C Roof Line Duct
15 Rear Climate Control Housing
16 Rear Evaporator Inlet Line
17 Rear Heater Core Inlet Line
18 Rear Evaporator Outlet Line
19 Rear Heater Core Outlet Line
20 Receiver Drier
21 A/C Compressor Outlet Line
22 A/C Compressor
23 A/C Pressure Transducer
m
. co
gn
Item Description
ia
2 Sunload Sensor
rd

ca
m
Item Description
1
2
3
Evaporator
. co
gn
4 Air Distribution Door Actuator
5 Heater Core
6 Passenger Side Temperature Door Actuator
ia
7 Air Inlet Door Actuator

8 Cabin Air Filter
rd
9 Blower Motor
10 Blower Motor Speed Control
ca
2.3L and 3.5L EcoBoost

m
Item Description
1
2
3
A/C Compressor
Receiver Drier
co
Thermostatic Expansion Valve Manifold and Tube Assembly
.
gn
ia
7 Condenser
rd

ca
3.5L and 3.7L Duratec

m
Item Description
1
2
3
A/C Compressor
. co
gn
ia

8 Condenser
rd
9 Receiver Drier Element

ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - Overview
Overview
The DATC system maintains the selected vehicle interior temperature by heating and/or cooling the air depending on the HVAC
control panel selection.
The driver may override the automatic mode of operation.

The temperature control setting is the desired cabin air temperature.
The blower motor control override buttons vary the blower motor speed.
The driver side and passenger side temperature settings can be individually controlled.
During A/C operation, the system reduces the relative humidity of the air inside the vehicle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - System Operation and
System Operation
System Diagram
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

Module Network Input Messages - APIM
Broadcast Originating Module Message Purpose

Message
Driver Front Controls Interface This message contains the HVAC temperature setting for the touch screen
temperature Module B (FCIM-B) display.
setting
Front blower Front Controls Interface This message contains the HVAC blower motor setting for the touch screen
request Module B (FCIM-B) display.
Driver HVAC control module This message contains the HVAC driver temperature setting.
temperature units
Passenger HVAC control module This message contains the HVAC passenger temperature setting.
temperature units
Front fan bar HVAC control module This message contains the HVAC blower motor setting.
display
Outside Air HVAC control module This message contains the Ambient Air Temperature information for the
Temperature FDIM touchscreen outside air temperature display.

Module Network Input Messages - Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B)

Module
Climate control touchscreen APIM This message contains both the climate control system voice commands as well
m
and voice requests as all climate control system touch screen inputs.
Climate control status HVAC This message contains the HVAC mode status for the mode indicators.
control
module
. co
gn

Module Network Input Messages - HVAC control module
ia

rd
Climate control Front Controls Interface This message contains all climate control system controls requests
requests Module B (FCIM-B) except blower motor speed.
ca
Climate control seat Front Controls Interface This message contains the climate control system controls request
requests Module B (FCIM-B) for blower motor speed.
Climate control Front Controls Interface This message contains the climate control system controls request
information status Module B (FCIM-B) from the MyTemp button.
Remote start status BCM This message contains the climate control system controls request
for remote start.
A/C clutch status PCM This message contains the A/C compressor clutch status.
Ambient air PCM This message contains raw value from the ambient temperature
temperature sensor.

Module Network Input Messages - PCM

Message Module
A/C request HVAC control This message requests the A/C compressor to be engaged.
module
Evaporator HVAC control This message contains the evaporator temperature. The PCM uses the evaporator
temperature module temperature to determine the A/C compressor output.
The Refrigerant Cycle
For information regarding basic HVAC system refrigerant operation, refer to the current Ford Web Based Technical Training
courses. The following diagram shows the refrigerant system state in each component.
The following are characteristics of the DATC system:
The PCM controls the A/C clutch relay.

The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the air that has passed through the evaporator core and
sends a signal to the PCM. If the temperature of the evaporator core discharge air is low enough to cause the
condensed water vapor to freeze, the PCM disengages the A/C clutch relay.
The line pressure is monitored so that A/C compressor operation is interrupted if the system pressure becomes too high
or too low.
The A/C compressor relief valve opens and vents refrigerant to relieve unusually high system pressure.
A/C Flow and State (2.3L and 3.5L EcoBoost)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
1 High pressure liquid
2 Low pressure liquid
3 High pressure vapor
4 Low pressure vapor
A/C Flow and State (3.5L and 3.7L Duratec)
m
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
Control System Logic
The DATC system controls are in one or more locations depending on vehicle option content:
Front Controls Interface Control Module B (FCIM-B)

Touchscreen FDIM (part of APIM)
When the FDIM touchscreen or voice commands are used and A/C is selected, the APIM sends the request message over the
HS-CAN3 to the GWM. The GWM sends the request to the PCM over the HS-CAN1. The PCM controls the A/C clutch relay.
The GWM also sends the request to the HVAC control module over the MS-CAN.
When the customer inputs an A/C request into the Front Controls Interface Control Module B (FCIM-B), the module sends the
request to the GWM over the HS-CAN3. The GWM sends the request to the PCM over the HS-CAN1. The PCM controls the
A/C clutch relay. The GWM also sends the request to the HVAC control module over the MS-CAN.
The HVAC control module requires PMI when it is replaced.
A/C Request
When an A/C request is received by the PCM, the PCM engages the A/C clutch relay when all of the following conditions are
met:
the refrigerant pressure is not excessively high or low.

the engine coolant temperature is not excessively high.
the ambient air temperature is above approximately 0°C (32°F).
m
a WOT condition is not present.
the evaporator discharge air temperature is above approximately 1°C (33.8°F).
co
The PCM does not detect temperatures from the Mass Airflow/Intake Air Temperature sensor that does not correlate
with other temperature sensor readings at ignition ON. (Most Mass Airflow (MAF) sensors have an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor).
.
The PCM monitors multiple temperature sensors correlation (AAT, CHT, ECT IAT, MAF...). The PCM runs this logic after an
gn
engine off and a calibrated soak period, typically 6 to 8 hours. This soak period allows the Ambient Air Temperature (AAT)
sensor and the other temperature sensors to stabilize and not differ by greater than a calibrated value, typically 18ºC (32.4ºF). If
a sensor input is found to be reporting a temperature imbalance the PCM does not allow the A/C clutch to engage. For more
information on PCM sensors, Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
ia
The PCM monitors the discharge pressure measured by the A/C pressure transducer. The PCM interrupts A/C compressor
operation in the event the A/C pressure transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low
rd
charge conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the PCM does not allow the
A/C clutch to engage.
ca
Rear Climate Control
For system operation and component description information on the rear climate control system,
Refer to: Rear Climate Control - System Operation and Component Description (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Description and
Operation).
Heating and Ventilation
The heating and ventilation system:
controls the temperature of the air inside the vehicle.

reduces the relative humidity of the air inside the vehicle (during A/C compressor operation).
delivers heated or cooled air to maintain the vehicle interior temperature and comfort level.
The heating and ventilation system uses a reheat method to provide conditioned air to the passenger compartment.
Temperature blending is controlled by temperature doors, which regulate the amount of air that flows through and around the
heater core, where it is then mixed and distributed. All airflow from the blower motor passes through the A/C evaporator core.
Air Handling
There are 4 door actuators that control the air flow into the passenger compartment:
Air distribution
Air inlet
Driver side temperature
Passenger side temperature
All of the door actuators contain a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The potentiometer circuit consists of a 5-volt
reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a signal ground connected to the other. A signal circuit is
connected to a contact wiper, which is driven along the variable resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal to the HVAC control
module from the contact wiper indicates the position of the actuator door. The HVAC control module powers the actuator
motors to move the doors to the desired positions. The desired door positions are calculated by the HVAC control module
based on the set temperature, in-vehicle temperature, ambient air temperature and sunload.
When an airflow mode, desired temperature, fresh air, or recirculation mode is selected, the HVAC control module moves the
actuator motor in the desired direction.
The HVAC control module may adjust the air inlet door based on the in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor information to
maintain the desired humidity of the passenger cabin air.
The HVAC control module sends a PWM signal to the blower motor speed control to regulate the blower speed as necessary.
The blower motor speed control provides variable ground feed for the blower motor based on the input from the HVAC control
module. A delay function provides a gradual increase or decrease in blower motor speed under all conditions.
AUTO
When AUTO is selected:
the HVAC system operates in a manner to achieve and maintain the temperature set by the operator.
the driver and passenger side temperature doors are automatically controlled by the HVAC control module based on the
temperature setting.
m
the A/C compressor is automatically controlled by the PCM from information sent by the HVAC control module, based on
the temperature setting. The A/C compressor operates as long as the outside temperature is above approximately 0°C
(32°F).
co
the blower motor speed is automatically controlled through the blower motor speed control that receives a PWM signal
from the HVAC control module based on the temperature setting, but can be manually overridden.
the HVAC control module controls the air inlet door to recirculate, partially recirculate or open to the fresh air position
depending on the in-car temperature and humidity sensor inputs.
.
gn
OFF
When OFF is selected:

ia
the air inlet door closes, preventing outside air and allowing only recirculated air.
the blower motor is off.
rd
MAX A/C
When MAX A/C is selected:

ca
the recirculated air indicator is illuminated (recirculated air forced on).
the footwell vent doors and defrost vent/register doors operate in combination to direct airflow to the instrument panel
registers.
the temperature doors move to the full cool position. Air temperature can be manually overridden.
the A/C button is illuminated.
the A/C compressor operates as long as the outside temperature is above approximately 0°C (32°F).
the blower motor is commanded to the highest speed. The blower motor speed is adjustable.
PANEL
When PANEL mode is selected:
the recirculated air request button is enabled. If the recirculated air request button is selected (indicator on), the air inlet
door closes, preventing outside air from entering the passenger compartment. If the recirculated air request button is not
selected (indicator off), the air inlet door opens, allowing only outside air into the passenger compartment.
registers.
blended air temperature is available. Only when A/C compressor operation has been selected by pressing the A/C
button (indicator on) can the airflow temperature be cooled below the outside air temperature.
the blower motor is on and the speed is adjustable.
PANEL/FLOOR
When PANEL/FLOOR mode is selected:
the air distribution doors operate in combination to direct airflow to the floor duct and the instrument panel registers. A
small amount of airflow from the side window demisters and defrost duct is present.
FLOOR
When FLOOR mode is selected:
the air distribution doors operate in combination to direct airflow to the floor duct. A small amount of airflow from the
defroster duct and side window demisters is present.
m
FLOOR/DEFROST
When FLOOR/DEFROST mode is selected:
co
.
the air distribution doors operate in combination to direct airflow to the floor duct, the defroster duct and the side window
gn
demisters.
ia
MAX DEFROST
rd
When MAX DEFROST mode is selected:
the recirculated air request button is disabled. The air inlet door opens, allowing only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
ca
the air distribution doors operate in combination to direct airflow to the defroster duct and side window demisters. A small
amount of airflow from the floor duct is present.
the A/C is turned on in defrost mode. The A/C compressor operates as long as the outside temperature is above
approximately 0°C (32°F).
the temperature is set to the highest setting and is not adjustable.
the fan is set to the highest speed and is not adjustable.
MAX DEFROST can be exited by pressing the AUTO button.
MyTemp
The MyTemp feature can be used to store and recall a preset driver's temperature. This feature is provided so this temperature
can be quickly adjusted to a frequently used setting with a single button press. For additional information about MyTemp, refer
to the Owner's Literature.
Remote Start - Message Center Set To Auto
Remote start is an optional feature available on this vehicle. In addition to being able to start the vehicle remotely, the remote
start feature also utilizes other vehicle systems to increase the level of comfort to the vehicle occupants upon entering the
vehicle. For additional information on the remote start feature and the other vehicle systems, refer to the Owner's Literature.
Set the climate control to operate in Auto mode through the information display controls: Remote Start > Climate Control >
Heater–A/C > Auto. The climate control system automatically sets the interior temperature to 72°F (22°C). Refer to the Owner's
Literature for more information.
When the factory remote start feature is used, the DATC system automatically sets certain parameters in an attempt to achieve
a comfortable cabin temperature. These parameters are set based on multiple inputs including the in-vehicle temperature and
humidity, sunload and outside air temperature sensors.
Remote Start - Message Center Set To Last User Settings
Set the climate control to operate using the last climate control settings through the information display controls: Remote Start >
Climate Control > Heater–A/C > Last Settings. The climate control system automatically uses the settings last selected before
the vehicle was turned off. The climate control system cannot be adjusted during remote start operation. Turn the ignition on to
return the system to its previous settings. Refer to the Owner's Literature for more information.
HVAC Control Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC)
The DATC system uses the HVAC control module, and it also controls the outputs for rear window defrost and climate
controlled seats. For details on the HVAC control module communication, refer to Control System Logic in this section.
The HVAC control module utilizes a Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protective circuit strategy for its actuator outputs. Output load
(current level) is monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and is shut down (turns off the voltage or ground
provided by the module) when a fault event is detected. A short circuit DTC is stored at the fault event and a cumulative counter
is started.
m
When the demand for the output is no longer present, the module resets the Field-Effect Transistor (FET) circuit protection to
allow the circuit to function. The next time the driver requests a circuit to activate that has been shut down by a previous short
circuit again and the cumulative counter advances.

co
(Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protection) and the circuit is still shorted, the Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protection shuts off the
When the excessive circuit load occurs often enough, the module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out.
.
The Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protected circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance based on the harmful effect
gn
of each circuit fault on the Field-Effect Transistor (FET) and the ability of the Field-Effect Transistor (FET) to withstand it. A
module lifetime level of fault events is established based upon the durability of the Field-Effect Transistor (FET). If the total
tolerance level is determined to be 600 fault events, the 3 predefined levels would be 200, 400 and 600 fault events.
ia
When each tolerance level is reached, the short circuit DTC that was stored on the first failure cannot be cleared by a command
to clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). The module does not allow the DTC to be cleared or the circuit to be restored to
rd
normal operation until a successful self-test proves that the fault has been repaired. After the self-test has successfully
completed (no on-demand Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present), DTC U1000:00 and the associated DTC (the DTC
related to the shorted circuit) automatically clears and the circuit function returns.
ca
When each level is reached, the DTC associated with the short circuit sets along with DTC U1000:00. These Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) can be cleared using the module self-test, then the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool. The module
never resets the fault event counter to zero and continues to advance the fault event counter as short circuit fault events occur.
If the number of short circuit fault events reach the third level, then Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) U1000:00 and U3000:49
set along with the associated short circuit DTC. DTC U3000:49 cannot be cleared and a new module must be installed after the
repair.
The HVAC control module requires Programmable Module Installation (PMI) when it is replaced.
Outside Air Temperature Display
The Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor is hardwired to the PCM through separate input and return circuits. The PCM
provides a reference voltage to the Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor and monitors the change in voltage resulting from
changes in resistance as determined by outside air temperature. The PCM filters the ambient air temperature input and sends
the data to the GWM through the HS-CAN1. The GWM sends the air ambient temperature filtered message to the HVAC
control module over the MS-CAN. The HVAC control module returns the message as the Outside Air Temperature message to
the GWM. The GWM sends outside air temperature message to the APIM for the touchscreen to display the outside air
temperature.
The PCM is programmed to update the messaged outside temperature data at different rates depending on several criteria to
prevent false temperature displays due to a condition known as heat soaking. Heat soaking is where the outside air
temperature is hotter in the location of the Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor than the actual outside air temperature.
When the sensed outside temperature rises, the display updates slowly at varying rates based on vehicle speed. When the
sensed outside temperature drops, the display updates more quickly following the drop experienced by the Ambient Air
Temperature (AAT) sensor.
After replacing an Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor, the sensor data must be reset by either driving the vehicle at speeds
consistently about 20 MPH for at least 5 minutes to update the filtered data or perform the multiple button press reset procedure
to update to the current raw value.
The multiple button reset for the Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor is as follows:
On the HVAC panel controls, press the A/C and Recirc buttons simultaneously, then, release both.
Within 2 seconds press the A/C button again.
Blower Motor
The blower motor pulls air from the air inlet and forces it into the climate control housing where it is mixed and distributed.
The blower motor speed control uses a PWM signal from the HVAC control module to determine the desired blower speed and
varies the ground feed for the blower motor to control the speed.
Evaporator Core
The evaporator core is an aluminum tube and fin design heat exchanger located in the climate control housing. A mixture of
liquid refrigerant and oil enters through the evaporator core inlet tube and exits out of the evaporator core through the
m
evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower motor is cooled and
dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins.
Heater Core
co
The heater core, located in the climate control housing, consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine
coolant and transfer it to air passing through the heater core.
.
gn
The climate control housing directs airflow from the blower motor through the evaporator core and heater core. All airflow from
the blower motor passes through the evaporator core. The airflow is then directed through or around the heater core by the
ia
temperature door(s). After passing through the heater core, the airflow is distributed to the selected outlet by the airflow mode
doors.
rd
The air distribution door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The potentiometer allows the HVAC
ca
control module to monitor the position of the airflow mode door.
The air inlet door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The potentiometer allows the HVAC control
module to monitor the position of the airflow mode door.
The driver side temperature door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and potentiometer. The potentiometer allows the
HVAC control module to monitor the position of the temperature door.
Passenger Side Temperature Door Actuator
The passenger side temperature door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and potentiometer. The potentiometer allows
the HVAC control module to monitor the position of the temperature door.
A/C Pressure Transducer
The PCM monitors the discharge pressure measured by the A/C pressure transducer. As the refrigerant pressure changes, the
resistance of the A/C pressure transducer changes. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant before removing the A/C
pressure transducer.
A 5-volt reference voltage is supplied to the A/C pressure transducer from the PCM. The A/C pressure transducer receives a
ground from the PCM. The A/C pressure transducer then sends a voltage to the PCM to indicate the A/C refrigerant pressure.
The evaporator temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The sensor varies its resistance with the temperature. As the
temperature rises, the resistance falls. As the temperature falls, the resistance rises. The evaporator temperature sensor is an
input to the HVAC control module and the information is relayed to the PCM over the CAN. If the evaporator temperature is
below approximately 1°C (33.8°F), the PCM does not allow the A/C compressor to operate.
In-Vehicle Temperature And Humidity Sensor
The in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor contains a thermistor and a sensing element which separately measures the
in-vehicle air temperature and the humidity, then sends those readings to the HVAC control module. The in-vehicle temperature
and humidity sensor has an electric fan within the sensor that draws in-vehicle air across the two sensing elements. The HVAC
control module may adjust the air inlet door based on the in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor information to maintain
the desired humidity of the passenger cabin air.
Sunload Sensor
The sunload sensor supplies information to the HVAC control module indicating the intensity of the sun on the vehicle. The
HVAC control module compensates high sun load with higher blower and reduced discharge temperatures.
Externally Controlled Variable Displacement A/C Compressor
NOTE: Variable compressors operate at lower pressures (compared to fixed compressors) and depend on correct system
charge for normal operation.
m
The externally controlled variable displacement compressor has:
a non-serviceable shaft seal.

co
a non-serviceable pressure relief valve installed in the rear of the compressor to protect the refrigerant system against
excessively high refrigerant pressures.
Uses Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D. This oil contains special additives required for the A/C
compressor. The oil may have some slightly dark-colored streaks while maintaining normal oil viscosity. This is normal
.
for this A/C compressor because of break-in wear that can discolor the oil.
gn
Variable displacement compressors have a swash plate that rotates to reciprocate pistons, which compresses refrigerant.
Variable displacement compressors change the swash plate angle to change the refrigerant displacement. The externally
controlled variable displacement compressor changes the swash plate angle in response to an electrical signal from the PCM.
ia
The externally controlled variable displacement compressor manages displacement by controlling refrigerant differential
pressure before and after a throttle at the discharge side; achieving precise cooling capability control in response to cabin
rd
environment and driving conditions.
The PCM sends a PWM signal to the solenoid in the compressor to control the compressor displacement based upon the:
ca
Ambient air temperature

Evaporator temperature
Engine RPM
Vehicle speed
A/C high side pressure
Temperature and mode settings of the climate control head
Intake air temperature
Condenser
The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-tube design heat exchanger. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to
pass over fins and tubes to extract heat, and condenses gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
Receiver Drier
The receiver drier stores high-pressure liquid and the desiccant bag mounted inside the receiver drier removes any retained
moisture from the refrigerant.
The receiver drier is remotely mounted on the 2.3L EcoBoost and the 3.5L EcoBoost.
The receiver drier is incorporated onto the LH side of the A/C condenser on the 3.5L Duratec and 3.7L Duratec.
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
The Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the center rear of the engine
compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the refrigerant flow and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure sides of
the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes through the TXV through 2 separate flow
paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and
adjusts an internal pin-type valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases
the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the amount of refrigerant entering
the evaporator core at higher temperatures.
Service Gauge Port Valves
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description Torque

1 Low-pressure service gauge port valve cap 0.8 Nm (7 lb-in)
2 Low-pressure service gauge port valve —
3 Low-pressure Schrader-type valve 2.26 Nm (20 lb-in)
4 High-pressure Schrader-type valve 3.4 Nm (30 lb-in)
5 High-pressure service gauge port valve —
6 High-pressure service gauge port valve cap 0.8 Nm (7 lb-in)
The service gauge port fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component.
Prior to leak testing, blow air over the service gauge port valves to ensure an accurate test.
Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports.
A very small amount of leakage around the Schrader-type valve with the service gauge port valve cap removed is
considered normal. Install a new Schrader-type valve core if the seal leaks excessively.
The A/C service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent leakage through
the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten the A/C service gauge port valve
caps to the correct torque after they are removed.
Follow the procedure and the notes for electronic leak testing.
Refer to: Electronic Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information) .
Refrigerant System Dye
A fluorescent dye wafer is added to the receiver drier desiccant bag at the factory to assist in refrigerant system leak diagnosis.
This fluorescent dye wafer dissolves after about 30 minutes of continuous A/C operation. It is not necessary to add additional
dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of refrigerant has been removed from the
system.
Refer to: Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information) .
Replacement desiccant bags, either separately or part of the receiver drier assembly, are equipped with a new fluorescent dye
wafer. It is not necessary to add additional dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks. If the system has been out of
refrigerant through the winter the dye at the leak point may have oxidized and may not fluoresce. If this happens, recharge and
operate the A/C system to circulate the oil and allow any residual dye to show up at the leak point. It is important to understand
that dye adheres to the oil not the refrigerant; the refrigerant carries the oil out of the leak point.
NOTE: Check for leaks using a Rotunda-approved UV lamp and dye enhancing glasses.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC)
DTC Chart: HVAC Control Module - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC)
Network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) (U-codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as damaged wiring or low
battery voltage occurrences. Additionally, vehicle repair procedures, such as module reprogramming, often set network
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is unlikely to resolve the concern. To prevent
repeat network DTC concerns, inspect all network wiring, especially connectors. Test the vehicle battery.

HVAC Control Module - DATC DTC CHART
m
B1034:11 Left Front Seat
Heater Element:
Circuit Short To
Ground
co

.
gn
Heater Element:
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
B1036:11 Right Front Seat
ia
Heater Element:
Circuit Short To
Ground
rd

Heater Element:
ca
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
Heater Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Heater Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
B103A:11 Right Front Seat
Heater Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Heater Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
B1081:07 Left Temperature INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new driver side temperature door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Driver Side Temperature Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System -
General Information, Removal and Installation).
B1081:11 Left Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test I
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
B1082:07 Right Temperature INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new passenger side temperature door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Passenger Side Temperature Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System -
B1082:11 Right Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test J
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
B1082:12 Right Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test J
m
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
B1082:13 Right Temperature
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
GO to Pinpoint Test J
. co
B1083:07 Recirculation INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
gn
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new air inlet door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Air Inlet Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
ia
B1083:11 Recirculation GO to Pinpoint Test D

Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
rd
Ground
Damper Motor:
ca
Circuit Short To
Battery
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
B1086:07 Air Distribution INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new air distribution door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Air Distribution Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General
Information, Removal and Installation).
B1086:11 Air Distribution GO to Pinpoint Test E
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
B10AF:12 Blower Fan Relay: GO to Pinpoint Test K
Circuit Short To
Battery
B10AF:14 Blower Fan Relay: For an inoperative blower motor, GO to Pinpoint Test K
Circuit Short To For all other blower motor symptoms, GO to Pinpoint Test L
Ground or Open
B10B0:12 Rear Blower Fan GO to Pinpoint Test S
Relay: Circuit Short
To Battery
B10B0:14 Rear Blower Fan For an inoperative rear blower motor, GO to Pinpoint Test S
Relay: Circuit Short For all other rear blower motor symptoms, GO to Pinpoint Test T
To Ground or Open
B10B7:12 Rear Air Discharge GO to Pinpoint Test V
Temperature:
Circuit Short To
Battery
B10B7:14 Rear Air Discharge GO to Pinpoint Test V
Temperature:
Circuit Short To
Ground or Open
B10B9:12 Blower Control: GO to Pinpoint Test K
m
Circuit Short To
Battery
B10B9:14 Blower Control: For an inoperative blower motor, GO to Pinpoint Test K
Circuit Short To
Ground or Open
B10BA:12 Rear Blower GO to Pinpoint Test S
. co
For all other blower motor symptoms, GO to Pinpoint Test L
Control: Circuit
gn
Short To Battery
B10BA:14 Rear Blower GO to Pinpoint Test S
Control: Circuit
ia
Short To Ground or
Open
B11E3:07 Rear HVAC INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
rd
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new rear temperature door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Rear Temperature Door Actuator (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
ca
B11E3:11 Rear HVAC GO to Pinpoint Test V

Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
B11E4:07 Rear Air Distribution INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new rear air distribution door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Rear Air Distribution Door Actuator (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
B11E4:11 Rear Air Distribution GO to Pinpoint Test U
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
B11E5:12 Left HVAC Damper GO to Pinpoint Test I
Position Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
Position Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Ground or Open
B11E6:12 Right HVAC GO to Pinpoint Test J
Damper Position
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Battery
B11E6:14 Right HVAC GO to Pinpoint Test J
Damper Position
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Ground or
m
Open
B11E7:12 Air Distribution GO to Pinpoint Test E
Damper Position
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Battery
co
.
gn
Damper Position
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Ground or
Open
ia
B11F0:12 Air Intake Damper GO to Pinpoint Test D

Position Sensor:
Circuit Short To
rd
Battery
ca
Position Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Ground or Open
B1A61:11 Cabin Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test M
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Ground
B1A61:15 Cabin Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test M
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Battery or
Open
B1A63:11 Right Solar Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test N
Circuit Short To
Ground
B1A63:15 Right Solar Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test N
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
B1A64:11 Left Solar Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test N
Circuit Short To
Ground
B1A64:15 Left Solar Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test N
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
B1A69:11 Humidity Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test M
Circuit Short To
Ground
B1A69:15 Humidity Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test M
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
B1B71:11 Evaporator GO to Pinpoint Test O
Temperature
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Ground
B1B71:15 Evaporator GO to Pinpoint Test O
Temperature
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Battery or
Open
B1B7D:12 Rear Air Distribution GO to Pinpoint Test U
Actuator: Circuit
Short To Battery
B1B7D:14 Rear Air Distribution GO to Pinpoint Test U
m
Actuator: Circuit
Short To Ground or
Open
B1C83:12 Rear Defog Relay:
Circuit Short To
Battery
co
REFER to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and
Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without: Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms, Diagnosis and Testing).
.
gn
Circuit Short To
REFER to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open Driver
Ground or Open
Window (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, Diagnosis and Testing).
rd
C1B14:11 Sensor Supply GO to Pinpoint Test P

Voltage A: Circuit
ca
Short To Ground
C1B14:12 Sensor Supply GO to Pinpoint Test P
Voltage A: Circuit
Short To Battery
U0140:00 Lost GO to Pinpoint Test W
Communication
With Body Control
Module: No Sub
Type Information
U0165:00 Lost GO to Pinpoint Test X
Communication
With HVAC Control
Module - Rear: No
Sub Type
Information
U0401:68 Invalid Data RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the
Received from PCM
ECM/PCM A: Event
Information REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L
EcoBoost (201kW/273PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
U0401:81 Invalid Data
Received from
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
ECM/PCM A:
Invalid Serial Data
Received
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
U0401:82 Invalid Data Duratec (209kW/284PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
Received from
ECM/PCM A: Alive / REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L
Sequence Counter Duratec (227kW/301PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
Incorrect / Not
Updated
U0422:68 Invalid Data RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the BCM.
Received From REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules,
Body Control Diagnosis and Testing).
Module: Event
Information
Module: Invalid
Serial Data
Received
U1000:00 Solid State Driver The HVAC control module has temporarily disabled an output because an excessive current
m
Protection Active - draw exists (such as a short to ground). The HVAC control module cannot enable the output
Driver Disabled: No until the cause of the short is corrected. ADDRESS all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Sub Type (DTCs) first. After the cause of the concern is corrected, CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble
Information
U2100:00 Initial Configuration
Not Complete: No
co
Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test.
CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to this module. This
DTC sets due to incomplete or incorrect PMI procedures. If there have been recent service
Sub Type actions with this module, REPEAT the PMI procedure as directed by the scan tool. If there
.
gn
Information have been no recent service actions, INSTALL a new module to correct the failure to retain
configuration data.
U3000:49 Control Module: ADDRESS all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble
Internal Electronic Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U3000:49 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new
ia
Failure HVAC control module.

REFER to: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module (412-00
Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and Installation).
rd
U3002:62 Vehicle CARRY OUT PMI on the HVAC control module using the diagnostic scan tool.
Identification REFER to: Module Configuration - System Operation and Component Description (418-01
ca
Number: Signal Module Configuration, Description and Operation).

Compare Failure
U3003:16 Battery Voltage: GO to Pinpoint Test Y
Circuit Voltage
Below Threshold
U3003:17 Battery Voltage: GO to Pinpoint Test Y
Circuit Voltage
Above Threshold


P0532 A/C GO to Pinpoint Test A
Refrigerant
Pressure
Sensor “A”
Circuit Low
Refrigerant
Pressure
Sensor “A”
Circuit High
P0645 A/C Clutch GO to Pinpoint Test B
Relay Control
Circuit
P06A0 Variable A/C GO to Pinpoint Test Q
Compressor
Control
Circuit
P1464 A/C Demand If the HVAC selector was not powered off, POWER the HVAC off, CLEAR the Diagnostic
Out Of Self Trouble Codes (DTCs) and REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC does not return, IGNORE the
Test Range DTC and continue diagnosing other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or symptoms. If the
DTC returns, GO to Pinpoint Test H
m
P193E A/C Clutch GO to Pinpoint Test R
Request
Signal
All Other
PCM
Diagnostic
— co
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L
.
Trouble
gn
Codes REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
(DTCs) EcoBoost (257kW/350PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
Duratec (209kW/284PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L
rd

ca
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Climate Control - Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC)

Symptom Chart

A module does not communicate Fuse(s)
with the diagnostic scan tool Wiring, REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module
terminals or Communications Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
connectors
Externally Controlled Variable Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test Q

Displacement Compressor
(EVDC) poor performance/does
not operate correctly
Unable To Duplicate The Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test C
Customer Concern And No
Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) Present
HVAC functions are Communication
inoperative/do not operate network REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00C
correctly from touchscreen only Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
APIM Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display, Diagnosis and Testing).
Reduced outlet airflow Plugged cabin air filter INSPECT the cabin air filter.
REFER to: Cabin Air Filter (412-00 Climate Control System -
If OK, DIAGNOSE for low refrigerant charge, A/C always
commanded on or blower motor not operating correctly.
Improper refrigerant CARRY OUT the refrigerant system tests.
level REFER to: Refrigerant System Tests - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS) (412-00 Climate Control System - General
REFER to: Refrigerant System Tests - 3.5L Duratec
m
REFER to: Refrigerant System Tests - 3.5L EcoBoost
. co
gn
If refrigerant charge is OK, GO to Pinpoint Test H
Blower motor GO to Pinpoint Test L
ia
The air inlet door is inoperative Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test D
Incorrect or erratic direction of Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test E
rd
airflow from outlets

Insufficient, erratic or no heat Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test F
ca
The A/C is inoperative Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test G

The A/C is always on — A/C Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test H
mode always commanded ON
Temperature control is Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test I
inoperative/does not operate
correctly — driver side
Temperature control is Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test J
correctly — passenger side
The front blower motor is Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test K
inoperative
The front blower motor does not Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test L
operate correctly
The rear blower motor is Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test S
inoperative Test
The rear blower motor does not Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test T
operate correctly Test
Insufficient A/C cooling Improper refrigerant CARRY OUT the refrigerant system tests.
If OK, DIAGNOSE for a temperature door actuator not operating
correctly.
Temperature door For inadequate temperature out of the driver side, GO to
actuator Pinpoint Test I
For inadequate temperature out of the passenger side,GO
to Pinpoint Test J
A/C pressure relief valve A/C pressure relief CHECK the high side system pressure. If the pressure is
discharging valve below the A/C pressure relief valve open pressure (500-600
psi), INSTALL a new A/C Compressor.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 2.3L

EcoBoost (201kW/273PS) (412-00 Climate Control System
m
- General Information, Removal and Installation).
Duratec (209kW/284PS) (412-00 Climate Control System -
. co General Information, Removal and Installation).
gn
ia
High system pressure CHECK the high side system pressure. If the system pressure is
above the A/C pressure relief valve open pressure (500-600 psi),
rd
REPAIR the A/C system for a restriction.

Climate control does not operate IPC information VERIFY Remote Start - Message Center Set To Auto, or
only when remote start is used display settings Remote Start - Message Center Set To Last User Settings.
ca
Non-Ford REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual

approved Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - System
remote start Operation and Component Description (412-00 Climate
system Control System - General Information, Description and
installed Operation).
VERIFY module communications network operation.
DIAGNOSE Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) if present.
Symptom Chart: Noise, Vibration, and Harshness (NVH)

Symptom Chart

Sources
Noisy A/C compressor A/C compressor INSPECT the A/C compressor pulley bearing for roughness. If bearing
pulley bearing roughness is found, INSTALL a new A/C compressor pulley.
worn REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch and Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch
Field Coil (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Excessive hissing from Incorrect A/C INSPECT for leaks.
the plenum when the A/C refrigerant level REFER to: Electronic Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System -
is on General Information, General Procedures).
REFER to: Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control
CARRY OUT the refrigerant system tests.
REFER to: Refrigerant System Tests - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)
(412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).
REFER to: Refrigerant System Tests - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
Procedures).
Procedures).
Procedures).
m
Pinpoint Test(s)
P0532, P0533
. co
gn
Normal operation and Fault Conditions

ia
The A/C pressure transducer receives a ground from the PCM. A 5-volt reference voltage is supplied to the A/C pressure
transducer from the PCM. The A/C pressure transducer then sends a voltage to the PCM to indicate the A/C pressure.
rd
ca


P0532 A/C Refrigerant The A/C pressure transducer inputs a feedback voltage to the PCM. This DTC sets if the
Pressure Sensor "A" feedback voltage is less than 0.26 volt for at least 2 seconds and the ambient air temperature
Circuit Low is greater than 0°C (32°F).
Pressure Sensor "A" feedback voltage is greater than 4.95 volts for at least 2 seconds and the ambient air
Circuit High temperature is greater than 0°C (32°F).
Possible Sources

PCM
Inspect for loose or corroded PCM and A/C pressure transducer connections.
PINPOINT TEST A : P0532, P0533
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct probe
adapter(s) may damage the connector.
A1
COMPARE THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) (A/C) PRESSURE SENSOR (ACP_PRESS) PID
(PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE MANIFOLD GAUGE SET READINGS
Allow the A/C system to stabilize to the outside ambient temperature.
Ignition ON.
With the manifold gauge set connected, compare the pressure readings of the manifold gauge set and the PCM
PID ACP_PRESS.
Are the pressure values of the manifold gauge set and the ACP_PRESS PCM PID within ± 15 psi (103 kPa)?
Yes IGNORE the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the Symptom Chart in this section.
No GO to A2
m
A2
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect A/C pressure transducer C1260.

. co
Disconnect PCM 2.3L EcoBoost C1381B, 3.5L EcoBoost C1551B or 3.5L/3.7L Duratec C175B.
gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ia

rd
C1260-1 Ground
C1260-2 Ground
ca
C1260-3 Ground
No GO to A3
A3
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1260-1 Ground
C1260-2 Ground
C1260-3 Ground
m
Yes GO to A4
. co
gn
A4
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
ia
Measure:

rd

2.3L EcoBoost
ca

C1260-1 C1381B-18
C1260-2 C1381B-52
C1260-3 C1381B-11

3.5L EcoBoost
C1260-1 C1551B-18
C1260-2 C1551B-52
C1260-3 C1551B-11
m

3.5L/3.7L Duratec
C1260-1
Positive Lead
. co
C175B-51
C1260-2 C175B-33
gn
ia
C1260-3 C175B-52
rd
ca
Yes GO to A5
A5
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Disconnect Generator Current sensor C1645.
Disconnect Turbocharger Boost Pressure (TCBP) sensor C1140 (if equipped).
Disconnect Crankcase Pressure sensor C1647 (if equipped).
Disconnect Turbocharger Boost Pressure/Charge Air Cooler Temperature (TCBP/CACT) sensor C1588 (if
equipped).
Measure:

C1260-1 C1260-2
C1260-1 C1260-3
C1260-2 C1260-3
m
Yes INSTALL a new A/C pressure transducer.

co
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)/3.5L
EcoBoost (257kW/350PS) (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and
Installation).
.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec
gn
(227kW/301PS) (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and Installation).
ia
rd
A6
Ignition OFF.
ca
Repair:
Connect all PCM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM.
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec
P0645
Voltage is provided to the A/C clutch relay coil. When A/C is requested and A/C line pressures allow, a ground is provided to
the A/C clutch relay coil from the PCM, energizing the A/C clutch relay.

m
P0645 A/C Clutch The DTC sets when the PCM grounds the relay circuit and more voltage than expected is detected on
Relay the relay circuit. The DTC also sets when the relay circuit is off and no voltage is detected on the relay
Control circuit. The PCM expects to detect voltage coming through the relay coil to the relay circuit when it is
Circuit not grounding it.
. co
gn
Possible Sources

A/C clutch relay
ia
PCM

rd
Inspect BJB fuses 3 (20A) and 16 (10A)

ca
PINPOINT TEST B : P0645

NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when taking measurements. Failure to use the
correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
B1
CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect A/C clutch relay.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

A/C clutch relay socket 1 Ground

Are the voltages greater than 11 volts?
Yes GO to B2
No VERIFY BJB fuses 3 (20A) and 16 (10A) are OK. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual
to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. If OK, REPAIR the circuits.
B2
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY
Carry out the component test on the A/C clutch relay.
m
Does the relay pass the component test?
Yes GO to B3
No INSTALL a new A/C clutch relay.
. co
gn
B3
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
ia
rd
Disconnect Grille shutter actuator C1651.
Disconnect AWD relay module C4379.

ca
Disconnect Externally controlled variable displacement compressor C1110.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

No GO to B4
B4
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

Yes GO to B5
B5
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
m

2.3L EcoBoost
Positive Lead
A/C clutch relay socket 2
co
. Negative Lead
C1381B-2
gn

ia

3.5L EcoBoost
rd

A/C clutch relay socket 2 C1551B-2
ca

3.5L/3.7L Duratec

Yes GO to B6

B6
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
No
(227kW/301PS), Removal and Installation). co
.
gn
ia
Unable To Duplicate The Customer Concern And No Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) Present
This diagnostic procedure tests the functions of the HVAC system and identifies the correct HVAC symptom pinpoint test.
rd

ca
System Operation,
REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - System Operation and
Component Description (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Description and Operation).
PINPOINT TEST C : UNABLE TO DUPLICATE THE CUSTOMER CONCERN AND NO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODES (DTCS) PRESENT
C1
CHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a scan tool, perform PCM self-test.
Are any climate control related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes REFER to the PCM DTC chart in this section.

No GO to C2
C2
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE FOR
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform HVAC control module self-test.
Yes REFER to the HVAC control module DTC chart in this section.
No GO to C3
C3
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Select panel mode.
Observe blower motor operation and select each blower motor speed.
Does the blower motor operate in all ranges?
Yes GO to C4
m
No If the blower motor does not operate in any setting, GO to Pinpoint Test K
If the blower motor does not correctly change speeds or shut off, GO to Pinpoint Test L
C4
CHECK AIRFLOW OPERATION
co
Select the highest blower motor setting.
.
gn
While observing the airflow, select each of the airflow positions (panel, panel/floor, floor, floor/defrost, defrost).
Is the airflow directed to the correct outlets?

ia
Yes GO to C5
rd
No GO to Pinpoint Test E
ca
C5
VERIFY FRONT TEMPERATURE CONTROL OPERATION
Start the vehicle and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
With the A/C off, select panel mode.
Change the driver and passenger temperature settings from the coldest to the warmest and back to the coldest.
Does the temperature change between very warm to cool?
Yes GO to C6
No If the temperature does not get very warm, GO to Pinpoint Test F
If the LH temperature does not change at all, GO to Pinpoint Test I
If the RH temperature does not change at all, GO to Pinpoint Test J
C6
VERIFY THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR DOES NOT ENGAGE WITH A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) OFF
With the engine running and the A/C off, select panel mode.
Select the coldest temperature setting.

Is the outlet temperature close to ambient air temperature?
Yes GO to C7
No If the LH temperature is warmer than ambient air temperature,GO to Pinpoint Test I

If the RH temperature is warmer than ambient air temperature, GO to Pinpoint Test J
If the outlet temperature is significantly colder than ambient air temperature and the A/C compressor
clutch is engaged, GO to Pinpoint Test H
C7
VERIFY THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR IS OPERATIONAL IN THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING)
MODE
Make sure the ambient air temperature is above approximately 0°C (32°F).
With the engine running, select panel mode.
Press the A/C button (indicator on).
Is the A/C compressor operational when the panel and A/C button (indicator on) is pressed?
Yes GO to C8
m
No GO to Pinpoint Test G
C8
CHECK THE RECIRCULATED AIR OPERATION
. co
With the engine running, press the recirculated air button (indicator off).
gn
Select panel mode.

ia
Observe airflow noise.
Press the recirculated air button (indicator on).

rd
Does the airflow noise increase when the recirculated air mode is selected (indicator on)?
ca
Yes GO to C9
No GO to Pinpoint Test D
C9
CHECK THE REAR CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Using the front and rear climate blower motor controls, observe blower motor operation and select each rear
climate blower motor speed.
Does the rear climate blower motor operate in all selections and change speed in each?
Yes GO to C10
No If the rear climate blower motor does not operate in any setting, GO to Pinpoint Test S
If the rear climate blower motor does not properly change speeds or shut OFF using both the front
and rear climate controls, GO to Pinpoint Test T
C10
VERIFY REAR CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM TEMPERATURE/MODE OPERATION
Select the highest rear climate blower motor setting.
Using the front and rear climate controls, change the rear climate temperature/mode setting from the coldest to
the warmest/floor and back to the coldest/overhead.
Does the rear climate temperature change between very warm to cool and rear climate airflow to the floor when
warm is selected and headliner when cool is selected?
Yes GO to C11
No GO to Pinpoint Test V
C11
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE INTERIOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (INT_TEMP) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Using a scan tool view the HVAC control module Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Monitor the INT_TEMP PID.
Is the air temperature at the cabin temperature sensor similar to the PID?
Yes GO to C12
m
No GO to Pinpoint Test M
C12
CHECK THE TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLS OPERATION
. co
Using the touchscreen controls, select each climate control function.
gn
Using the touchscreen controls, select each audio control function.
Do all touchscreen controls operate?

ia
Yes The system is operating correctly.

rd
No
REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00C Information and Entertainment System -
ca
The Air Inlet Door Is Inoperative
To rotate the air inlet door actuator, the HVAC control module supplies voltage and ground to the air inlet door actuator through
the door actuator motor circuits. To reverse the air inlet door actuator rotation, the HVAC control module reverses the voltage
and ground circuits. The air inlet door actuator feedback resistors are supplied a ground from the HVAC control module by the
air inlet door actuator return circuits and a 5-volt reference voltage on the air inlet door actuator reference circuits. The HVAC
control module reads the voltage on the air inlet door actuator feedback circuits to determine the air inlet door actuator position
by the position of the actuator feedback resistor wiper arm.
During an actuator calibration cycle, the HVAC control module drives the air inlet door until the door reaches both internal stops
in the HVAC control module case. If the air inlet door is temporarily obstructed or binding during a calibration cycle, the HVAC
control module may interpret this as the actual end of travel for the door. When this condition occurs and the HVAC control
module commands the actuator to its end of travel, the air intake may not be from the expected source.


B1083:11 Recirculation Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
Circuit Short To Ground actuator motor circuit when voltage is applied to drive the motor, indicating a
short to ground.
B1083:12 Recirculation Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Circuit Short To Battery actuator motor circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a
short to voltage.
B1083:13 Recirculation Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor circuit
Circuit Open when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a open circuit.
B11F0:12 Air Intake Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Sensor: Circuit Short to Battery actuator feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage.
B11F0:14 Air Intake Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the
Sensor: Circuit Short to Ground actuator feedback circuit, indicating an open circuit or a short to ground.
or Open
m
Possible Sources

Air inlet door actuator
Air inlet door binding or stuck
HVAC control module
. co
gn
PINPOINT TEST D : THE AIR INLET DOOR IS INOPERATIVE

ia
D1
CHECK THE AIR INLET DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
rd
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect HVAC control module C228A.

ca
Disconnect Air distribution door actuator C236.
Disconnect Air inlet door actuator C289.
Disconnect Driver side temperature door actuator C2091.
Disconnect Evaporator temperature sensor C296.
Disconnect In-vehicle temperature/humidity sensor C2247.
Disconnect Passenger side temperature door actuator C2092.
Disconnect Rear temperature door actuator C3004.
Disconnect Rear air distribution door actuator C3044.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C289-1 Ground
C289-2 Ground
C289-3 Ground
C289-5 Ground
C289-6 Ground
m
. co
Is there any voltage present?
gn

ia
No GO to D2
rd
D2
CHECK THE AIR INLET DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C289-1 Ground
C289-2 Ground
C289-3 Ground
C289-5 Ground
C289-6 Ground
Yes GO to D3
m
D3
CHECK THE AIR INLET DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

. co
gn
C289-1 C228A-24
C289-2 C228A-16
ia
rd
C289-3 C228A-23
ca
C289-5 C228A-2
C289-6 C228A-3

Yes GO to D4
D4
CHECK THE AIR INLET DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C289-1 C289-2
C289-1 C289-3
C289-1 C289-5
m
C289-1
. co C289-6
gn
C289-2 C289-3
ia
rd
ca
C289-2 C289-5
C289-2 C289-6
C289-3 C289-5
C289-3 C289-6
C289-5 C289-6
Yes INSTALL a new air inlet door actuator.

REFER to: Air Inlet Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal
and Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to D5
m
OPERATION
. co
D5
CHECK FOR CORRECT HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE
Ignition OFF.
gn
Disconnect and inspect all HVAC control module connectors.
Repair:
ia

rd
Connect all HVAC control module connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HVAC control module.
REFER to: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module (412-00 Climate Control
System - General Information, Removal and Installation).
Incorrect Or Erratic Direction Of Airflow From Outlets

To rotate the air distribution door actuator, the HVAC control module supplies voltage and ground to the air distribution door
actuator through the door actuator motor circuits. To reverse the air distribution door actuator rotation, the HVAC control
module reverses the voltage and ground circuits. The air distribution door actuator feedback resistors are supplied a ground
from the HVAC control module by the air distribution door actuator return circuits and a 5-volt reference voltage on the air
distribution door actuator reference circuits. The HVAC control module reads the voltage on the air distribution door actuator
feedback circuits to determine the air distribution door actuator position by the position of the actuator feedback resistor wiper
arm.
During an actuator calibration cycle, the HVAC control module drives the air distribution door until the door reaches both
internal stops in the HVAC case. If the air distribution door is temporarily obstructed or binding during a calibration cycle, the
HVAC control module may interpret this as the actual end of travel for the door. When this condition occurs and the HVAC
control module commands the actuator to its end of travel, the airflow may not be from the expected outlets.


B1086:11 Air Distribution Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
Circuit Short to Ground actuator motor circuit when voltage is applied to drive the motor, indicating a
short to ground.
m
B1086:12 Air Distribution Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Circuit Short to Battery actuator motor circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a
short to voltage.
B1086:13 Air Distribution Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
co
This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor
circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a open circuit.
.
B11E7:12 Air Distribution Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
gn
Sensor: Circuit Short To Battery actuator feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage.
B11E7:14 Air Distribution Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the
Sensor: Circuit Short To Ground actuator feedback circuit, indicating an open circuit or a short to ground.
or Open
ia
rd
Possible Sources

ca
Air distribution door actuator

Air distribution door binding or stuck
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST E : INCORRECT OR ERRATIC DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW FROM OUTLETS

E1
CHECK THE AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.

Ignition ON.
Measure:

C236-1 Ground
C236-2 Ground
C236-3 Ground
m
C236-4 Ground
. co
gn
C236-6 Ground
ia
rd
ca
No GO to E2
E2
CHECK THE AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C236-1 Ground
C236-2 Ground
C236-3 Ground
C236-4 Ground
C236-6 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to E3
ia

rd
E3
CHECK THE AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C236-1 C228A-7
C236-2 C228A-24
C236-3 C228A-23
C236-4 C228A-21
C236-6 C228A-6
Yes GO to E4
m
E4
CHECK THE AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

. co
gn
C236-1 C236-2
C236-1 C236-3
ia
rd
C236-1 C236-4
ca
C236-1 C236-6
C236-2 C236-3
C236-2 C236-4
C236-2 C236-6
C236-3 C236-4
C236-3 C236-6
m
C236-4
. co C236-6
gn
ia
rd
Yes INSTALL a new air distribution door actuator,

ca
REFER to: Air Distribution Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to E5
E5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

Insufficient, Erratic Or No Heat
When the engine is at operating temperature hot coolant flows from the engine through the heater core and back to the engine.
Correct coolant temperatures are critical for good heater performance.
Possible Sources

Temperature door actuator(s)
m
Heater core
Inspect for low engine coolant level. co

PINPOINT TEST F : INSUFFICIENT, ERRATIC OR NO HEAT
.
gn
F1
CHECK FOR CORRECT ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Ignition OFF.
Check the engine coolant level.

ia
Is the engine coolant at the correct level as indicated on the engine coolant recovery reservoir?
rd
Yes GO to F3
ca
No GO to F2
F2
CHECK THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
Pressure test the cooling system for leaks. Refer to the appropriate procedure in section 303-03.
Does the engine cooling system leak?
Yes REPAIR the engine coolant leak. Refer to the appropriate procedure in section 303-03. TEST the
system for normal operation.
No FILL and BLEED the cooling system. Refer to the appropriate procedure in section 303-03.
After filling and bleeding the cooling system, GO to F3
F3
CHECK FOR COOLANT FLOW TO THE HEATER CORE
Run the motor until it reaches normal operating temperature. Select the floor position on the HVAC control
assembly. Set the temperature control to full warm and the blower to the lowest setting.
Using a suitable temperature measuring device, check the heater core inlet hose to see if it is hot.
Is the heater core inlet hose hot?
Yes GO to F4
No DIAGNOSE the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. Refer to the appropriate
procedure in section 303-03.
F4
CHECK FOR A PLUGGED OR RESTRICTED HEATER CORE
Using a suitable temperature measuring device, measure the heater core outlet hose temperature.
Is the heater core outlet hose temperature similar to the inlet hose temperature (within approximately 6-17°C
[10-30°F])?
Yes DIAGNOSE for a blend door actuator not operating correctly.

For inadequate temperature out of the LH side, GO to Pinpoint Test I
For inadequate temperature out of the RH side, GO to Pinpoint Test J
No INSTALL a new heater core.

REFER to: Heater Core (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and
Installation).
m
The A/C Is Inoperative
. co
gn

ia

rd

A/C system discharged or low refrigerant charge
ca
Network concerns
Evaporator temperature sensor
Electric cooling fan
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) / Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor
Active grille shutters (if equipped)
A/C compressor clutch air gap
A/C compressor clutch field coil
A/C clutch relay
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST G : THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) IS INOPERATIVE

NOTE: Some PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may inhibit A/C operation. If any PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) are retrieved, diagnose those first. Refer to the DTC Chart: PCM.
G1
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) SYSTEM PRESSURE
Ignition OFF.
With the R-134a manifold gauge set connected, check the A/C system pressure.
Is the A/C system pressure above 290 kPa (42 psi)?
Yes GO to G2
No CHECK the A/C system for leaks.

INSPECT for leaks.
REFER to: Electronic Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).
REFER to: Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
After leak is repaired, RECHARGE the A/C system.

REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate
Control System - General Information, General Procedures).
G2
Ignition ON.
m
Yes GO to G3
. co
Do the FCIM, HVAC control module and the PCM pass the network test?
No DIAGNOSE the FCIM, HVAC control module or PCM does not communicate.
gn
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).
ia
G3
CHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) (A/C) PRESSURE SENSOR (ACP_PRESS) PID
rd
(PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Ignition ON.
ca
With a manifold gauge set connected, compare the pressure readings of the manifold gauge set and the PCM
ACP_PRESS PID.
Yes GO to G4
No DIAGNOSE the pressure transducer. GO to Pinpoint Test A
G4
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN FUNCTIONAL CHECK
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the PCM KOEO self-test.
Does the electric cooling fan operate sometime during the KOEO self-test?
Yes GO to G5
No DIAGNOSE the electric cooling fan operation. REFER to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
(PC/ED) manual. Section 3 Symptom Charts.
G5
COMPARE THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) PID
(PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) AND THE OTHER TEMPERATURE SENSOR READINGS TO THE PCM
(POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (AAT) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
NOTE: Compare multiple engine sensor readings to the ambient temperature to determine sensors are reading
correctly. A faulty sensor can cause the PCM to disable the A/C with or without a DTC.
Allow the vehicle exterior and interior to stabilize to ambient temperature. This can take a soak period of at least 6
hours.
Monitor the AAT, CACT, CHT, ECT, IAT, IAT2, MAF, MAPT, TCB and TCIPT Parameter Identifications (PIDs) (as
applicable).
Are the temperature values similar (typically within 18ºC (32.4ºF)?
Yes GO to G6
No DIAGNOSE the suspect temperature sensor. REFER to Section 413-01 for Ambient Air Temperature
m
(AAT) sensor or Outside Air Temperature Display concerns. For all other temperature sensor
concerns, REFER to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
co
G6
COMPARE THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (EVAP_TEMP) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) TO THE PCM (POWERTRAIN
.
CONTROL MODULE) AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (AAT) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
gn
Ignition OFF.
Allow the vehicle exterior and interior to stabilize to the outside ambient temperature.
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the PCM Parameter Identification (PIDs).
Monitor and record the PCM PID AAT.

ca
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the HVAC control module Parameter Identification (PIDs).
Monitor and record the HVAC control module PID EVAP_TEMP.
Yes If equipped with the active grille shutter system, GO to G7

If not equipped with the active grille shutter system, GO to G8
No DIAGNOSE the evaporator temperature sensor. GO to Pinpoint Test O
G7
VERIFY THE GRILLE SHUTTER OPERATION USING THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) GRILL
SHUTTER A POSITION - COMMANDED (GRILL_A_CMD) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view PCM PID.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, select the PCM PID GRILL_A_CMD and command the grille shutter from 100%
(open) to 0% (closed) while observing the grille shutter operation from the front of the vehicle.
Does the grill shutter fully open and close when commanded by the scan tool?
Yes GO to G8
No DIAGNOSE the active grille shutter is inoperative or does not operate correctly.
REFER to: Active Grille Shutter (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Diagnosis and Testing).
G8
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE A/C (AIR
CONDITIONING) SWITCH (CC_SW_AC) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR
CONDITIONING) ON
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view HVAC control module Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Monitor the CC_SW_AC PID.
On the HVAC controls, select PANEL and then press the A/C button (indicator on).
Does the PID display Active with the A/C button pressed on?
Yes GO to G9
No GO to G17
m
co
G9
CHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) AIR CONDITIONING REQUEST SIGNAL (AC_REQ)
PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) ON
Start the engine.
.
gn
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the PCM AC_REQ PID.
ia
Does the PID display Yes when the button is pressed?

rd
Yes GO to G11
No GO to G10
ca
G10
RESET THE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (AAT) SENSOR
On the HVAC controls, press the A/C (air conditioning) and Recirc buttons simultaneously, then release both.
Within 2 seconds press A/C button again.
Start the engine.
On the HVAC controls, set the temperature to full cold, select PANEL and select the A/C button (indicator on).
Does the A/C compressor turn on?
Yes RETEST the A/C system for normal operation. CARRY OUT the refrigerant system tests. Refer to
the appropriate Refrigerant System Tests procedure in Group 412.
No GO to G11
G11
CHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR COMMANDED
STATE (ACC_CMD) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMMANDED ON
Using a diagnostic scan tool, activate the PCM ACC_CMD PID.
Yes GO to G18
No GO to G12
G12
CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect the A/C clutch relay.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

m
. co
gn

ia
Yes GO to G13
rd
to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
ca
G13
BYPASS THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY
Ignition OFF.

A/C clutch relay socket 3 A/C clutch relay socket 5
Ignition ON.
Does the A/C compressor clutch engage?
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. INSTALL a new A/C clutch relay.
No LEAVE the fused jumper wire installed. GO to G14

G14
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR CLUTCH FIELD COIL VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect A/C compressor clutch field coil C100.
Measure:

C100-1 Ground
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to G15

No REMOVE the fused jumper wire. REPAIR the circuit.
G15
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR CLUTCH FIELD COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN
m
OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

. co
gn
C100-2 Ground
ia

rd
Yes GO to G16
ca
G16
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR CLUTCH AIR GAP
Measure the A/C compressor clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced locations between the clutch hub and the A/C
compressor clutch pulley.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment (412-00 Climate Control System - General
Is the A/C compressor clutch air gap greater than 0.6 mm (0.0236 in)?
Yes ADJUST the A/C compressor clutch air gap.

REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment (412-00 Climate Control System -
General Information, General Procedures).
No INSTALL a new A/C compressor clutch field coil.

REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch and Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Field Coil (412-00 Climate
G17
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
G18
CHECK FOR AN INPUT DISABLING THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY
NOTE: The PCM strategy may disable the A/C compressor operation. If the A/C compressor clutch can be commanded
.
on using IDS PCM Parameter Identifications (PIDs) Active Commands, PCM replacement will not resolve the condition.
gn
Diagnose the PCM not energizing the A/C clutch relay using the suggestions in the table below. Refer to the
reference value information in Section 6 of the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
ia
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because strategy has not yet detected hardware that indicates vehicle is
equipped with A/C
rd
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the strategy is operating in Ignition System Failure Mode
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the (ECU) received a Request to Command the A/C Off
ca
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the engine has not yet reached a stable running mode after
starting
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the A/C Discharge (Head) Pressure is Too High
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the Engine Coolant Temperature is Too High
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Prevent Frost and Ice Build Up on the Evaporator
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Prevent an Engine Stall during a Low Engine Speed condition
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Protect the Compressor from a Compressor Over-speed condition
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to temporarily make more power available when Accelerator Pedal is Fully
Depressed
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because Low A/C Refrigerant Charge has been detected
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Protect the Compressor from Operating at Too Low of an Ambient
Temperature
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited due to Missing Climate Control Message
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the strategy is operating in Failsafe Cooling Mode
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Protect the Clutch from Damage because the Compressor Load and
Speed are Too High
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited by the off portion of the A/C Cycling Strategy invoked to manage High
Engine Temperature
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited due to Low Battery State of Charge
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Protect the Variable Displacement Compressor from Operating at Too
Low of a Temperature
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to improve Brake Booster Vacuum
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because Evaporator Temperature is sufficiently low and compressor was at
minimum displacement
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited (Disabled) because the Evaporator Temperature is sufficiently below the
target temperature
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to satisfy A/C Clutch minimum off time
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited Due to Request from Torque Control Strategy (to Temporarily Make More
Power Available)
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Prevent Engine Stalling
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited Due to Request to Disable A/C from Stop-Start Strategy
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited (Delayed) to make Power Available for Power Steering
A/C Clutch Engagement Is Inhibited Due To State Of Auxiliary A/C Disable (Typically A Pressure Or
Temperature) Switch 1 input
m
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited due to state of auxiliary A/C Disable (Typically a Pressure or Temperature)
Switch 2 input
co
Are any of the conditions described above not within normal parameters?
.
gn
Yes DIAGNOSE the condition found to be disabling the A/C clutch relay. REFER to the appropriate
Workshop Manual (WSM) section or the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
No The A/C compressor clutch can be commanded on using the IDS PCM Active command PID. The
ia
A/C inoperative concern may be caused by an intermittent condition due to a component or module
connection, wiring or pin issue. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues. CHECK the
rd
vehicle service history for recent service actions that have replaced modules. This condition may be
due to incomplete or incorrect PMI procedures.
ca
The A/C Is Always On - A/C Mode Always Commanded On



P1464 A/C Demand Out Of Self Test Range This DTC sets when the PCM senses an A/C request during a PCM self-test.
A/C clutch relay
HVAC control module
PCM
PINPOINT TEST H : THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) IS ALWAYS ON - A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) MODE ALWAYS
COMMANDED ON
H1
RECHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Make sure the HVAC control module is powered off.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Does DTC P1464 return?
m
Yes GO to H2
No co
IGNORE the DTC and CONTINUE diagnosing other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or symptoms.
GO to the DTC Chart: PCM or Symptom Chart – Climate Control in this section.
.
gn
H2
ia
Did the relay pass the component test?

rd
Yes GO to H3
ca
H3
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C100-1 Ground
No GO to H4
H4
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
m
Yes GO to H5
No
co
DIAGNOSE the evaporator temperature sensor. GO to Pinpoint Test O
.
gn
H5
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR (ACP_PRESS) PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION
(PID)
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Parameter Identification (PID) ACP_PRESS.
ca
Are the pressure values of the manifold gauge set and the Parameter Identification (PID) within ± 103 kPa (15
psi)?
Yes GO to H6
H6
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE A/C SWITCH
STATUS (CC_SW_AC) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) OFF
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the HVAC control module CC_SW_AC PID.
Using the HVAC controls, select PANEL then press and release the A/C button (indicator off).
Does the PID display On or Active when the A/C button is pressed and Off or Inactive when released?
Yes GO to H7
No GO to H9
H7
CHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) REQUEST SIGNAL
(AC_REQ) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) OFF
Using the HVAC controls, deactivate the A/C.
Does the PID display OFF?
Yes GO to H9
No GO to H8
H8
(AC_REQ) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR
CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
co
.
gn
Yes GO to H9
ia
No GO to H10
rd
H9
OPERATION
ca
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
H10
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
corrosion (replace connector or terminals – clean module pins)
damaged or bent pins – replace terminals/pins
pushed-out pins – replace pins as necessary
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
m
co
.
gn
ia
The Temperature Control Is Inoperative Or Does Not Operate Correctly - Driver Side
rd

ca
Temperature Door Actuator - Driver side,

During an actuator calibration cycle, the module drives the temperature door until the door reaches both internal stops in the
HVAC case. If the temperature door is temporarily obstructed or binding during a calibration cycle, the module may interpret
this as the actual end of travel for the door. When this condition occurs and the module commands the actuator to its end of
travel, the airflow may not be the expected temperature.


B1081:11 Left Temperature Damper This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
Motor: Circuit Short To Ground actuator motor circuit when voltage is applied to drive the motor, indicating a
short to ground.
B1081:12 Left Temperature Damper This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Motor: Circuit Short To Battery actuator motor circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a
short to voltage.
B1081:13 Left Temperature Damper This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor circuit
Motor: Open Circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a open circuit.
B11E5:12 Left HVAC Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
B11E5:14 Left HVAC Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the
or Open
Possible Sources

Driver side temperature door actuator
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST I : THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY -
DRIVER SIDE
m
I1
CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn

ia

rd

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2091-1 Ground
C2091-2 Ground
C2091-3 Ground
C2091-5 Ground
C2091-6 Ground
No GO to I2
m
I2
CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
gn
C2091-1 Ground
ia
C2091-2 Ground
rd
ca
C2091-3 Ground
C2091-5 Ground
C2091-6 Ground
Yes GO to I3
I3
CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2091-1 C228A-23
C2091-2 C228A-20
C2091-3 C228A-24
m
C2091-5
. co C228A-9
gn
ia
C2091-6 C228A-8
rd
ca
Yes GO to I4
I4
CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C2091-1 C2091-2
C2091-1 C2091-3
C2091-1 C2091-5
C2091-1 C2091-6
C2091-2 C2091-3
m
C2091-2
.co C2091-5
gn
C2091-2 C2091-6
ia
rd
ca
C2091-3 C2091-5
C2091-3 C2091-6
C2091-5 C2091-6

Yes INSTALL a new driver side temperature door actuator.
REFER to: Driver Side Temperature Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to I5
I5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
The Temperature Control Is Inoperative Or Does Not Operate Correctly - Passenger Side
ca
Temperature Door Actuator - Passenger side,



B1082:11 Right Temperature Damper This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
short to ground.
B1082:12 Right Temperature Damper This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
short to voltage.
B1082:13 Right Temperature Damper This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor circuit
B11E6:12 Right HVAC Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
B11E6:14 Right HVAC Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the
or Open
Possible Sources

Passenger side temperature door actuator
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST J : THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY -
PASSENGER SIDE
m
Ignition OFF.
. co
J1
CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE

gn
Disconnect HVAC control module C228B.

ia

rd

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2092-1 Ground
C2092-2 Ground
C2092-3 Ground
C2092-5 Ground
C2092-6 Ground
m
No GO to J2
. co
gn
J2
CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
ia
Measure:

rd

C2092-1 Ground
ca
C2092-2 Ground
C2092-3 Ground
C2092-5 Ground
C2092-6 Ground
Yes GO to J3
J3
CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
m
C2092-1 C228A-24
C2092-3 . co C228A-23
gn
ia

rd

C2092-2 C228B-4
ca
C2092-5 C228B-13
C2092-6 C228B-12

Yes GO to J4
J4
CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C2092-1 C2092-2
C2092-1 C2092-3
C2092-1 C2092-5
m
C2092-1
. co C2092-6
gn
C2092-2 C2092-3
ia
rd
ca
C2092-2 C2092-5
C2092-2 C2092-6
C2092-3 C2092-5
C2092-3 C2092-6
C2092-5 C2092-6
Yes INSTALL a new passenger side temperature door actuator.

REFER to: Passenger Side Temperature Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General
m
OPERATION
. co
J5
Ignition OFF.
gn
Repair:
ia

rd
ca
The Front Blower Motor Is Inoperative

When the blower motor relay coil receives ground from the HVAC control module, the relay coil is energized and voltage is
delivered to the blower motor speed control and the blower motor. Ground for the blower motor is provided by the blower motor
speed control. The HVAC control module sends a PWM signal to the blower motor speed control to control the blower motor
speed.


B10AF:12 Blower Fan This DTC sets when the module senses voltage on the relay coil voltage circuit when the relay is
Relay: Circuit energized by the module, indicating a short directly to battery. The blower motor is inoperative.
Short To
Battery
B10AF:14 Blower Fan This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the relay coil voltage circuit when the relay
Relay: Circuit is energized by the module, indicating a short directly to ground or an open circuit. Blower relay is
Short To permanently inactive if circuit is open; blower relay will be energized at all times if circuit is
Ground or shorted to ground.
Open
B10B9:12 Blower Control: This DTC sets when the module senses high voltage on the blower motor control PWM circuit,
m
Circuit Short indicating a short directly to voltage. The blower motor is inoperative.
To Battery
B10B9:14 Blower Control: This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the blower motor control PWM circuit,
Circuit Short
To Ground or
Open
co
indicating a short directly to ground or an open circuit. The blower motor runs at full speed if the
circuit is shorted to ground. The blower motor is inoperative if the circuit is open.
.
gn
Possible Sources
ia

Fuse
Blower motor relay
rd
Blower motor
Blower motor speed control
HVAC control module
ca
PINPOINT TEST K : THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR IS INOPERATIVE

K1
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Blower motor relay.
Check the blower motor relay.

Yes GO to K2
No INSTALL a new blower motor relay.
K2
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY SUPPLY VOLTAGES
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Blower motor relay socket 1 Ground
m
Yes GO to K3
No For blower motor relay socket 1 concern, Refer to the appropriate Symptom Chart to DIAGNOSE No
Power in ON. co
REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column
Electrical Components, Diagnosis and Testing).
.
gn
For blower motor relay socket 3 concern, VERIFY BJB fuse 43 (40A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the
circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit
short.
ia
K3
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
rd
Ignition ON.
ca
Measure:

No GO to K4
K4
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
Blower motor relay socket 2 C228A-11
Yes GO to K5
K5
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
Disconnect Blower motor speed control C271.
Connect Blower motor relay.
Connect HVAC control module C228A.
Ignition ON.
m
Select PANEL on the HVAC controls.
Measure:
. co
gn
C271-4 Ground
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to K6
K6
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C271-1 Ground
Yes GO to K7
K7
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR A
SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228A-1 Ground
No GO to K8
m
K8
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
gn
C228A-1 C271-3
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to K9
K9
CHECK THE OUTPUTS TO THE BLOWER MOTOR
Disconnect Blower motor C2004.
Connect Blower motor speed control C271.
Connect HVACcontrol module C228A.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2004-1 C2004-2
Yes INSTALL a new blower motor.

REFER to: Blower Motor (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and
Installation).
No GO to K10
K10
CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE BLOWER MOTOR FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

m
C271-4 C2004-1
C271-2 C2004-2
. co
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to K11

ca
K11
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C271-4 C271-2
Yes INSTALL a new blower motor speed control.

REFER to: Blower Motor Speed Control (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to K12
K12
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
. co
The Front Blower Motor Does Not Operate Correctly
gn

ia
rd
speed.
ca


Open
Circuit Short indicating a short directly to ground or an open circuit. The blower motor runs at full speed if the
To Ground or circuit is shorted to ground. The blower motor will be inoperative with an open circuit.
Open
Possible Sources

Blower motor relay
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST L : THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
L1
VERIFY THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Select panel on the HVAC controls.
Observe the blower motor operation while selecting each blower motor speed.
Does the blower motor operate at any setting?
Yes GO to L2
No GO to Pinpoint Test K
m
L2
CHECK THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ia

rd

C228A-1 Ground
ca
No GO to L3
L3
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C228A-1 Ground
Yes GO to L4
L4
CHECK THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition ON.
Measure:

m
No GO to L5
. co
gn
L5
CHECK THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION WITH THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
ia

rd
Ignition ON.
ca
Does the fan still operate all the time?
Yes REPAIR the blower motor speed control voltage circuit CH402 (YE/GN) for a short to voltage.
No GO to L6
L6
CHECK FOR CORRECT FRONT BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the blower motor speed control connector.
Repair:
Connect the blower motor speed control connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.


TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to L7
L7
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
B1A61:11, B1A61:15, B1A69:11, B1A69:15
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor,



B1A61:11 Cabin Temperature This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the in-vehicle
Sensor: Circuit Short to temperature and humidity sensor feedback circuit, indicating a short to ground.
Ground
B1A61:15 Cabin Temperature This DTC sets when the module senses greater than expected voltage on the in-
Sensor: Circuit Short to vehicle temperature and humidity sensor feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage
Battery or Open or an open circuit or sensor.
B1A69:11 Humidity Sensor: Circuit This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the in-vehicle
Short To Ground temperature and humidity sensor humidity input circuit, indicating a short to ground.
B1A69:15 Humidity Sensor: Circuit This DTC sets when the module senses greater than expected voltage on the in-
Short To Battery or Open vehicle temperature and humidity sensor humidity input circuit, indicating a short to
voltage or an open circuit or sensor.
Possible Sources
Fuse
In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
HVAC control module
Make sure BCM fuse 21 (5A) is OK.

Make sure the in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor harness is not chaffed.
m
PINPOINT TEST M : B1A61:11, B1A61:15, B1A69:11, B1A69:15
M1
CHECK THE IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
. co
gn

ia
Disconnect BCM C2280A.

rd

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2247-2 Ground
C2247-3 Ground
C2247-4 Ground
C2247-5 Ground
C2247-6 Ground
m
. co
gn

ia
No GO to M2
rd
M2
CHECK THE IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C2247-2 Ground
C2247-3 Ground
C2247-4 Ground
C2247-5 Ground
C2247-6 Ground
Yes GO to M3
m
M3
CHECK THE IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

. co
gn
C2247-3 C228A-24
C2247-5 C228A-23
ia
rd
ca

C2247-2 C228B-29
C2247-4 C228B-18

C2247-1 Ground

C2247-6 C2280A-6
m
Yes GO to M4

. co
gn
M4
CHECK THE IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
ia
Measure:

rd

C2247-1 C2247-2
ca
C2247-1 C2247-3
C2247-1 C2247-4
C2247-1 C2247-5
C2247-1 C2247-6
C2247-2 C2247-3
C2247-2 C2247-4
C2247-2 C2247-5
m
C2247-2 co. C2247-6
gn
C2247-3 C2247-4
ia
rd
ca
C2247-3 C2247-5
C2247-3 C2247-6
C2247-4 C233-5
C2247-4 C2247-6
C2247-5 C2247-6
Yes GO to M5
m
M5
CHECK FOR CORRECT IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the disconnected connectors.

. co
Repair:
gn
ia
Connect all disconnected connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

rd

ca
Yes INSTALL a new in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.

REFER to: In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor (412-00 Climate Control System - General
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to M6
M6
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

B1A63:11, B1A63:15, B1A64:11, B1A64:15
Sunload Sensor,
m

. co
gn

B1A63:11 Right Solar Sensor: This DTC sets when the control module senses lower than expected voltage on the
ia
Circuit Short To Ground RH sensor feedback circuit, indicating a short to ground.

B1A63:15 Right Solar Sensor: This DTC sets when the control module senses higher than expected voltage on the
rd
Circuit Short To Battery or RH sensor feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage or an open circuit or sensor.
Open
B1A64:11 Left Solar Sensor: Circuit This DTC sets when the control module senses lower than expected voltage on the LH
ca
Short To Ground sensor feedback circuit, indicating a short to ground.

B1A64:15 Left Solar Sensor: Circuit This DTC sets when the control module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Short To Battery or Open LH sensor feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage or an open circuit or sensor.
Possible Sources

Sunload sensor
HVAC control module
Inspect loose or corroded HVAC control module and sunload sensor connections.
PINPOINT TEST N : B1A63:11, B1A63:15, B1A64:11, B1A64:15

N1
CHECK THE SUNLOAD SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Sunload sensor C286.

Disconnect BCM C2280B.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C286-1 Ground
C286-2 Ground
C286-3 Ground
m
C286-4 Ground
. co
gn
ia

rd
No GO to N2
ca
N2
CHECK THE SUNLOAD SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C286-1 Ground
C286-2 Ground
C286-3 Ground
C286-4 Ground
Yes GO to N3
m
N3
CHECK THE SUNLOAD SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

. co
gn
C286-1 C228B-22
C286-3 C228B-23
ia
rd
ca

C286-2 C2280B-24
C286-4 C2280B-22

Yes GO to N4
N4
CHECK THE SUNLOAD SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO EACH OTHER
Measure:

C286-1 C286-2
C286-1 C286-3
C286-1 C286-4
m
C286-2
. co C286-3
gn
C286-2 C286-4
ia
rd
ca
C286-3 C286-4
Yes INSTALL a new sunload sensor.

REFER to: Sunload Sensor (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to N5
N5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
B1B71:11, B1B71:15
co
.
gn
Evaporator Temperature Sensor,

ia
rd

ca

B1B71:11 Evaporator Temperature The module senses excessive voltage drop on the sensor reference voltage circuit,
Sensor: Circuit Short To indicating a short directly to ground. The module disables automatic-recirculation and
Ground the compressor is shut off.
B1B71:15 Evaporator Temperature The module senses no voltage drop on the sensor reference voltage circuit, indicating
Sensor: Circuit Short To a short directly to voltage or an open circuit. The module disables automatic-
Battery or Open recirculation and the compressor is shut off.
Possible Sources

HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST O : B1B71:11, B1B71:15

O1
CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:

m
C296-1 Ground
C296-2 Ground
. co
gn
ia

rd
No GO to O2
ca
O2
CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C296-1 Ground
C296-2 Ground

Yes GO to O3
O3
CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C296-1 C228A-19
C296-2 C228A-23
m
Yes GO to O4

. co
gn
O4
CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:
ia

rd
C296-1 C296-2
ca
Yes INSTALL a new evaporator temperature sensor.

REFER to: Evaporator Temperature Sensor (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to O5
O5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
C1B14:11, C1B14:12
m
A 5-volt reference voltage and ground is supplied to the climate control sensors and actuators from the HVAC control module.
. co

gn

ia
C1B14:11 Sensor Supply Voltage A: This DTC sets when the module senses less than 5 volts on the sensor reference
Circuit Short to Ground voltage circuit, indicating a short to ground.
rd
C1B14:12 Sensor Supply Voltage A: This DTC sets when the module senses greater than 5 volts on the sensor
Circuit Short to Battery reference voltage circuit, indicating a short to voltage.
ca
Possible Sources

HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST P : C1B14:11, C1B14:12

P1
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Is DTC C1B14:11 or C1B14:12 present?
Yes GO to P2
No VERIFY a customer concern. REFER to the symptom chart in this section.

P2
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE REFERENCE
VOLTAGE AND SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228A-23 Ground
C228A-24 Ground
m

. co
No GO to P3
gn
P3
ia
VOLTAGE AND SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Ignition OFF.
rd
Measure:
ca

C228A-23 Ground
C228A-24 Ground
Yes GO to P4
P4
CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT AND THE SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT
TOGETHER
Measure:

C228A-23 C228A-24
Is the resistance greater than 200 ohms?
Yes GO to P6
No GO to P5
P5
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPONENTS
Measure:

m
C228A-23 C228A-24
co
While measuring the resistance, disconnect the following components one at a time, in order. Stop disconnecting
components if the measured resistance rises above 200 ohms.
.
Air distribution door actuator C236
gn
Air inlet door actuator C289
Driver side temperature door actuator C2091
Evaporator temperature sensor C296
In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor C2247
ia
Passenger side temperature door actuator C2092

Rear temperature door actuator C3004
rd
Rear air distribution door actuator C3044
Did the resistance rise above 200 ohms?

ca
Yes INSTALL a new sensor or actuator (the last one to be disconnected). Refer to the appropriate section
in Group 412 for the procedure. When installing an actuator, CONNECT the actuator electrical
connector before the HVAC control module. This allows the actuator to be calibrated when the HVAC
control module is connected.
P6
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

P06A0
Externally controlled variable displacement compressor
m

. co
gn

P06A0 Variable A/C Compressor The PCM senses greater than expected voltage on the sensor feedback circuit, indicating
ia
Control Circuit a short to voltage or an open circuit or sensor.

rd
Possible Sources
ca
Improper refrigerant level

A/C compressor
PCM
Inspect BJB fuse 3 (20A)

Inspect for loose or corroded PCM and A/C compressor connections.
PINPOINT TEST Q : P06A0

Q1
EXTERNALLY CONTROLLED VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT COMPRESSOR (EVDC) PERFORMANCE CHECK
NOTE: Variable displacement compressors operate at lower pressures (compared to fixed compressors) and depend on
correct system charge for normal operation.
NOTE: The performance check test is used to determine if the Externally Controlled Variable Displacement Compressor
(EVDC) is able to change the displacement by measuring the amperage to the solenoid and monitoring the manifold
pressure gauges soon after the air conditioning clutch is engaged.
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect BJB fuse 3 (20A).
Measure:

CBJB fuse 3 (20A) CBJB fuse 3 (20A)
With a manifold gauge set connected, monitor the low side and high side pressures.
Start the engine. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
Select the floor position on the HVAC controls. Set the temperature control to full warm and the blower to the
lowest setting. Set the A/C to off. Run for 5 minutes to heat up the climate control housing.
Monitor the multi meter and the manifold gauges. Select the PANEL position on the HVAC controls. Set the
temperature control to full cold and the blower to the highest setting. Set the A/C to on.
Record the highest amperage measurement and the A/C pressures.
Did the amperage initially increase approximately 0.8A, and did the low side pressure decrease and the high
m
side pressure increase and after a few minutes did the amperage and high side pressure decrease and low side
pressure increase?
displacement. CHECK refrigerant charge amount.

co
Yes The Externally Controlled Variable Displacement Compressor (EVDC) is able to change the
REFER to: Specifications (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Specifications).
.
gn
No GO to Q2
ia
Q2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR CONTROL SOLENOID
Ignition OFF.
rd
Connect BJB fuse 3 (20A).
Disconnect A/C Compressor Control Solenoid C1110.

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C1110-2 Ground
Yes GO to Q3
No VERIFY the BJB fuse 3 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
Q3
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR DISPLACEMENT CONTROL SOLENOID PWM
(PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1110-1 Ground
Yes GO to Q4
m
Q4
(PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:
. co
gn
C1110-1 Ground
ia
rd

ca
No GO to Q5
Q5
(PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

2.3L EcoBoost

C1110-1 C1381B-41

3.5L EcoBoost

C1110-1 C1551B-41

3.5L/3.7L Duratec

C1110-1 C175B-2
m
Yes INSTALL a new A/C compressor.

co
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS) (412-00 Climate
Control System - General Information, Removal and Installation).
.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (412-00 Climate
gn
ia
CLEAR the DTC and REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC returns, GO to Q6
rd

ca
Q6
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
P193E
Control system logic,

m

DTC Description
. co
Fault Trigger Conditions
P193E A/C Clutch Request Signal This DTC sets when the PCM does not receive the A/C request message from the BCM.
gn
Possible Sources
ia
Network concerns
BCM
rd
HVAC control module

PCM
ca
PINPOINT TEST R : P193E

R1
Ignition ON.
Verify that there is an observable symptom present.
Yes GO to R2
R2
Ignition ON.
Do the BCM, HVAC control module and PCM pass the network test?
Yes GO to R3
No DIAGNOSE the BCM, HVAC control module or PCM does not communicate with the diagnostic scan
tool.
Testing).
R3
PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Start the engine.
On the HVAC controls, select PANEL mode, then press the A/C button (indicator ON).
Does the AC_REQ PID display YES when the A/C button indicator is illuminated?
Yes GO to R7
No GO to R4
m
(CC_SW_AC) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) co
R4
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the HVAC control module CC_SW_AC PID while pressing and releasing the
.
A/C button.
gn
Does the PID display Active when the A/C button indicator is illuminated?
ia
Yes GO to R6
No GO to R5
rd
ca
R5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
R6
VERIFY CORRECT BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all BCM electrical connectors.
Repair:
damaged or bent pins – install new terminals or pins
Reconnect all BCM electrical connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern,
co
.
R7
gn
Ignition OFF.

ia
Repair:
rd

ca
The Rear Blower Motor Is Inoperative
Voltage is supplied to the rear blower motor relay from the BJB. When the rear blower motor relay coil receives ground from the
HVAC control module, the relay coil is energized and voltage is delivered to the rear blower motor speed control and the rear
blower motor. Ground for the rear blower motor is provided by the rear blower motor speed control. The HVAC control module
sends a PWM signal to the rear blower motor speed control to control the rear blower motor speed.


B10B0:12 Rear Blower Fan This DTC sets when the module senses high voltage on the relay coil control circuit when the
Relay: Circuit module is energizing the circuit. Customer rear blower will not function.
Short To Battery
B10B0:14 Rear Blower Fan This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the relay coil control circuit when the
m
Relay: Circuit relay is energized by the module, indicating an open or short to ground. Customer rear blower
Short To Ground will not function when circuit is open, rear blower will be on all the time when circuit is shorted
or Open to ground.
B10BA:12 Rear Blower
Control: Circuit
Short To Battery
co
This DTC sets when the module senses high voltage on the rear blower control PWM circuit.
The rear blower will not function.
.
B10BA:14 Rear Blower This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the rear blower control PWM circuit.
gn
Control: Circuit The rear blower will not function when circuit is open or when circuit is shorted to ground.
Short To Ground
or Open
ia
rd
Possible Sources

Fuse
ca
Rear blower motor relay

Rear blower motor
Rear blower motor speed control
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST S : THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR IS INOPERATIVE

S1
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Rear blower motor relay.
Check the rear blower motor relay.


Yes GO to S2
No INSTALL a new rear blower motor relay.
S2
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY SUPPLY VOLTAGES
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Rear blower motor relay socket 1 Ground
m
Yes GO to S3
. co
No For Rear blower motor relay socket 1 concern, Refer to the appropriate Symptom Chart to
gn
DIAGNOSE No Power in ON.
ia
For Rear blower motor relay socket 3 concern, VERIFY BJB fuse 41 (40A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the
short.
rd
ca
S3
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:

No GO to S4
S4
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

Rear blower motor relay socket 2 C228B-20
Yes GO to S5
S5
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
Disconnect Rear blower motor speed control C3002.
m
Connect Rear blower motor relay.
Connect HVAC control module C228B.
Ignition ON.
Select rear PANEL on the HVAC controls.

. co
Select the highest rear blower motor setting.
gn
Measure:

ia

C3002-2 Ground
rd
ca
Yes GO to S6
S6
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3002-6 Ground

Yes GO to S7
S7
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR
A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228B-19 Ground
m
No GO to S8 . co
S8
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR A
gn
SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
ia

rd

C228B-19 Ground
ca
Yes GO to S9
S9
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
Measure:

C228B-19 C3002-5
Yes GO to S10
S10
CHECK THE OUTPUTS TO THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR
Disconnect Rear blower motor C3021.
Connect Rear blower motor speed control C3002.
Connect HVACcontrol module C228B.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
C3021-1 C3021-2
. co
gn
Yes INSTALL a new rear blower motor.

REFER to: Rear Blower Motor (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and Installation).
ia
No GO to S11
rd
S11
CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR FOR AN OPEN
ca
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3002-2 C3021-2
C3002-1 C3021-1
Yes GO to S12
S12
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C3002-1 C3002-2
Yes INSTALL a new rear blower motor speed control.

REFER to: Rear Blower Motor Speed Control (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to S13
m
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
. co
S13

gn
Repair:
ia
rd

ca
The Rear Blower Motor Does Not Operate Correctly


Short To Ground requests will not function when circuit is open, rear blower will be on all the time when circuit is
or Open shorted to ground.
Possible Sources

Fuse
Rear blower motor
m
HVAC control module
co
PINPOINT TEST T : THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
.
T1
VERIFY THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
gn
Ignition ON.

ia
Observe the rear blower motor operation while selecting each rear blower motor speed.
rd
Does the rear blower motor operate at any setting?
Yes GO to T2
ca
No GO to Pinpoint Test S
T2
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:


Yes GO to T3
T3
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION WITH THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Does the rear fan still operate all the time?
Yes REPAIR the rear blower motor speed control voltage circuit CHA02 (BN/GN) for a short to voltage.
No GO to T4
m
T4
CHECK FOR CORRECT REAR BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL OPERATION
Ignition OFF. co
Disconnect and inspect the rear blower motor speed control connector.
.
gn
Repair:
ia
Connect the rear blower motor speed control connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
rd

ca

Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to T5
T5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Rear Climate Control - Incorrect Or Erratic Direction Of Airflow From Outlets
m
To rotate the rear air distribution door actuator, the HVAC control module supplies voltage and ground to the rear air distribution
door actuator through the door actuator motor circuits. To reverse the rear air distribution door actuator rotation, the HVAC
control module reverses the voltage and ground circuits. The rear air distribution door actuator feedback resistors are supplied
co
a ground from the HVAC control module by the rear air distribution door actuator return circuits and a 5-volt reference voltage
on the rear air distribution door actuator reference circuits. The HVAC control module reads the voltage on the rear air
distribution door actuator feedback circuits to determine the rear air distribution door actuator position by the position of the
.
actuator feedback resistor wiper arm.
gn
During an actuator calibration cycle, the HVAC control module drives the rear air distribution door until the door reaches both
internal stops in the rear climate control housing. If the rear air distribution door is temporarily obstructed or binding during a
calibration cycle, the HVAC control module may interpret this as the actual end of travel for the door. When this condition
ia
occurs and the HVAC control module commands the actuator to its end of travel, the airflow may not be from the expected
outlets.
rd

ca

B11E4:11 Rear Air Distribution Damper This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
Motor: Circuit Short to Ground actuator motor circuit when voltage is applied to drive the motor, indicating a short
to ground.
B11E4:12 Rear Air Distribution Damper This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Motor: Circuit Short to Battery actuator motor circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a short
to voltage.
B11E4:13 Rear Air Distribution Damper This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor circuit
Motor: Circuit Open when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a open circuit.
B1B7D:12 Rear Air Distribution Actuator: This DTC sets when the module senses greater than 5 volts on the actuator
Circuit Short to Battery feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage.
B1B7D:14 Rear Air Distribution Actuator: This DTC sets when the module senses less than 1 volt on the actuator feedback
Circuit Short To Ground or circuit, indicating an open circuit or a short to ground.
Open
Possible Sources
Rear air distribution door actuator
Rear air distribution door binding or stuck
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST U : REAR CLIMATE CONTROL - INCORRECT OR ERRATIC DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW FROM
OUTLETS
U1
CHECK THE REAR AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
m

. co

gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ia

rd

C3044-1 Ground
ca
C3044-2 Ground
C3044-3 Ground
C3044-5 Ground
C3044-6 Ground
No GO to U2
U2
CHECK THE REAR AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C3044-1
C3044-2
. co Ground
Ground
gn
ia
C3044-3 Ground
rd
ca
C3044-5 Ground
C3044-6 Ground
Yes GO to U3

U3
CHECK THE REAR AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3044-1 C228A-23
C3044-3 C228A-24

m
C3044-2 C228B-8
. co
gn
C3044-5 C228B-25
ia
rd
C3044-6 C228B-26
ca
Yes GO to U4
U4
CHECK THE REAR AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C3044-1 C3044-2
C3044-1 C3044-3
C3044-1 C3044-5
C3044-1 C3044-6
C3044-2 C3044-3
m
C3044-2
.co C3044-5
gn
C3044-2 C3044-6
ia
rd
ca
C3044-3 C3044-5
C3044-3 C3044-6
C3044-5 C3044-6

Yes INSTALL a new rear air distribution door actuator,
REFER to: Rear Air Distribution Door Actuator (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to U5
U5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
Rear Climate Control Temperature Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly

ca
To rotate the rear temperature door actuator, the HVAC control module supplies voltage and ground to the rear temperature
door actuator through the door actuator motor circuits. To reverse the rear temperature door actuator rotation, the HVAC control
module reverses the voltage and ground circuits. The rear temperature door actuator feedback resistors are supplied a ground
from the HVAC control module by the rear temperature door actuator return circuits and a 5-volt reference voltage on the rear
temperature door actuator reference circuits. The HVAC control module reads the voltage on the rear temperature door
actuator feedback circuits to determine the rear temperature door actuator position by the position of the actuator feedback
resistor wiper arm.
During an actuator calibration cycle, the HVAC control module drives the rear temperature door until the door reaches both
internal stops in the rear climate control housing. If the rear temperature door is temporarily obstructed or binding during a
occurs and the module commands the actuator to its end of travel, the airflow may not be the expected temperature.

B10B7:12 Rear Air Discharge This DTC sets when the module senses greater than 5 volts on the actuator
Temperature: Circuit Short to feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage.
Battery
B10B7:14 Rear Air Discharge This DTC sets when the module senses less than 1 volt on the actuator feedback
Temperature: Circuit Short To circuit, indicating an open circuit or a short to ground.
Ground or Open
B11E3:11 Rear HVAC Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
short to ground.
B11E3:12 Rear HVAC Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Circuit Short to Battery actuator motor circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a short
to voltage.
B11E3:13 Rear HVAC Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor circuit
Possible Sources
m
Rear temperature door actuator
Rear temperature door binding or stuck
HVAC control module
CORRECTLY
. co
PINPOINT TEST V : REAR CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE
gn
V1
CHECK THE REAR TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
ia
Ignition OFF.

rd

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3004-1 Ground
C3004-2 Ground
C3004-3 Ground
C3004-5 Ground
C3004-6 Ground
m
. co
gn

ia
No GO to V2
rd
V2
CHECK THE REAR TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C3004-1 Ground
C3004-2 Ground
C3004-3 Ground
C3004-5 Ground
C3004-6 Ground
Yes GO to V3
m
V3
CHECK THE REAR TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
gn
C3004-1 C228A-23
ia
C3004-3 C228A-24
rd
ca

C3004-2 C228B-7
C3004-5 C228B-27
C3004-6 C228B-28
Yes GO to V4
V4
CHECK THE REAR TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:
m
C3004-1 C3004-2
C3004-1 . co C3004-3
gn
C3004-1 C3004-5
ia
rd
C3004-1 C3004-6
ca
C3004-2 C3004-3
C3004-2 C3004-5
C3004-2 C3004-6
C3004-3 C3004-5
C3004-3 C3004-6
C3004-5 C3004-6
m
. co
gn
Yes INSTALL a new rear temperature door actuator,

REFER to: Rear Temperature Door Actuator (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
ia
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to V5
rd

ca
V5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
U0140:00
With the ignition ON, the BCM sends messages to the HVAC control module over the MS-CAN. If the HVAC control module
does not receive these messages within the specified time frame, the module sets a DTC. This can be due to a BCM failure, a
circuit failure on the MS-CAN or an excessive load on the network.

m
U0140:00 Lost Communication With Body Control This DTC sets in continuous memory if data messages received from
Module: No Sub Type Information the BCM over the MS-CAN are missing for 5 seconds or more.
Possible Sources
. co
gn
Over or undervoltage concerns
BCM
ia
HVAC control module

rd
Inspect for loose or corroded BCM and HVAC control module connections.
ca
PINPOINT TEST W : U0140:00

W1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to W2
No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network
W2

Yes GO to W3
No DIAGNOSE the BCM does not communicate with the diagnostic scan tool,
Testing).
W3
CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) IN THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Is DTC U3003:16 or DTC U3003:17 present in the BCM?
Yes
REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and
Testing).
No GO to W4
W4
RECHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE
m
the PMI or the PMI may not have been carried out.
Ignition OFF.
. co
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the HVAC control module Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Wait 10 seconds.
gn
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the HVAC control module self-test.
ia

rd
Yes GO to W5
ca
W5
Using the diagnostic scan tool, carry out the self-test for all modules.
Retrieve and record the Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all modules.
Is DTC U0140 set in 1 or more modules in addition to the HVAC control module?
Yes GO to W6
No GO to W7
W6
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all BCM electrical connectors (if not previously disconnected).
Repair:
corrosion (install new connector or terminal - clean module pins)
damaged or bent pins - install new terminals or pins
Connect all BCM electrical connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

W7
OPERATION
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all HVAC control module electrical connectors (if not previously disconnected).
Repair: co
.
gn
Connect all HVAC control module electrical connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ia

rd
ca
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HVAC control module.
U0165:00
The RHVAC control module sends messages to the HVAC control module over the MS-CAN. If the RHVAC temperature and
mode switch message is not received by the HVAC control module for 5 seconds or more a DTC is set. For a complete list of all
network messages, refer to Section 418-00.

U0165:00 Lost Communication With HVAC This DTC sets in continuous memory if data messages received from the
Control Module - Rear: No Sub Type RHVAC control module over the MS-CAN are missing for 5 seconds or
Information more.
Possible Sources

HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST X : U0165:00

X1
Ignition ON.
m
Does the RHVAC control module pass the network test?
Yes GO to X2
No
co
DIAGNOSE the RHVAC control module does not communicate with the diagnostic scan tool,
.
Testing).
gn
X2
CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) IN THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR
ia
CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE

rd
Is DTC U3003:16 or DTC U3003:17 present in the HVAC control module?

ca
Yes GO to Pinpoint Test Y
No GO to X3
X3
Ignition OFF.
Wait 10 seconds.
Ignition ON.

Yes GO to X4
X4
CHECK FOR DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U0165:00 SET IN OTHER MODULES
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Is DTC U0165:00 set in 1 or more modules in addition to the HVAC control module?
Yes GO to X5
No GO to X6
m
X5
CHECK FOR CORRECT RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL
MODULE OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the RHVAC control module connector.

. co
Repair:
gn
ia
Reconnect the RHVAC control module connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.

rd

ca
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RHVAC control module.
REFER to: Rear Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (RHVAC) Control Module (412-02 Rear
Climate Control, Removal and Installation).
X6
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
U3003:16, U3003:17
m
The HVAC control module is supplied constant battery voltage and ground.

. co
gn
U3003:16 Battery Voltage: Circuit This CMDTC and on-demand DTC sets in the HVAC control module when battery
Voltage Below Threshold voltage is less than 8 volts for more than 10 seconds.
ia
Voltage Above Threshold voltage is greater than 16 volts for more than 10 seconds.
rd
ca
Possible Sources

HVAC control module
Inspect loose or corroded HVAC control module connections.
PINPOINT TEST Y : U3003:16, U3003:17

Y1
CLEAR THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE DIAGNOSTIC
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Is DTC U3003:16 or U3003:17 present?

Yes GO to Y2
No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to a previous battery
condition.
Y2
RETRIEVE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Start the engine.
Are any charging system Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present in the PCM?
Yes DIAGNOSE the charging system. Refer to the appropriate procedure in section 414-00.
No GO to Y3
Y3
CHECK BATTERY CONDITION
Ignition OFF.
m
Carry out the Battery Condition Test.
Did the battery pass the condition test?

. co
Yes GO to Y4
gn
No INSTALL a new battery.
ia
Y4
CHECK THE CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE
rd
NOTE: Do not allow the engine to exceed 2,000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) while carrying out this step or the
generator may self-excite, resulting in default charging system output voltage. If engine exceeds 2,000 Revolutions Per
Minute (RPM), shut the vehicle off and restart the engine before carrying out this step.
ca
Start the engine.
Measure:

For DTCU3003:16, turn the headlights on, set the HVAC fan on high and run engine at 1,500 Revolutions Per
Minute (RPM) for a minimum of 2 minutes.
For DTCU3003:17, turn off all accessories and run the engine at 1,500 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) for a
minimum of 2 minutes.
Is the battery voltage between 13-15.2 volts?
Yes For DTCU3006:16, GO to Y5

For DTCU3006:17, GO to Y7
No DIAGNOSE the charging system.

Y5
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE VOLTAGE
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228A-26 Ground
m
Yes GO to Y6
co
Y6
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
.
gn
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
ia

rd
C228A-10 Ground
ca
Yes GO to Y7
Y7
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) - Component Location
NOTE: Shown with Rear Climate Control, other vehicles similar.
m
. co
gn
Item Description
ia

2 Condenser
rd
3 Thermostatic Expansion Valve Manifold and Tube Assembly

ca

6 Sunload Sensor
10 Floor Duct
11 Rear Foot Well Duct
13 Rear A/C Duct
14 Rear A/C Roof Line Duct
15 Rear Climate Control Housing
16 Rear Evaporator Inlet Line
17 Rear Heater Core Inlet Line
18 Rear Evaporator Outlet Line
19 Rear Heater Core Outlet Line
20 Receiver Drier
22 A/C Compressor
m
. co
gn
Item Description
ia
2 Sunload Sensor
rd

ca
m
Item Description
1
2
3
Evaporator
. co
gn
4 Air Distribution Door Actuator
5 Heater Core
6 Air Inlet Door Actuator
ia
7 Cabin Air Filter

8 Blower Motor
rd
9 Blower Motor Speed Control

ca
2.3L and 3.5L EcoBoost

m
Item Description
1
2
3
A/C Compressor
Receiver Drier
co
.
gn
ia
7 Condenser
rd

ca
3.5L and 3.7L Duratec

m
Item Description
1
2
3
A/C Compressor
. co
gn
ia

8 Condenser
rd
9 Receiver Drier Element

ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) - Overview
Overview
The EMTC system heats or cools the vehicle depending on the HVAC control panel selection.
The control panel selection determines heating or cooling, air distribution and enables blower motor operation.
The temperature control setting determines the outlet air temperature.
The blower motor switch varies the blower motor speed.
During A/C operation, the system reduces the relative humidity of the air inside the vehicle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) - System Operation and
System Operation
System Diagram
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

Module Network Input Messages - APIM

Message
Driver Front Controls Interface This message contains the HVAC temperature setting for the touch screen
temperature Module B (FCIM-B) display.
setting
Front blower Front Controls Interface This message contains the HVAC blower motor setting for the touch screen
request Module B (FCIM-B) display.
Driver HVAC control module This message contains the HVAC driver temperature setting.
temperature
units
Front fan bar HVAC control module This message contains the HVAC blower motor setting.
display
Outside Air HVAC control module This message contains the Ambient Air Temperature information for the FDIM
Temperature touchscreen outside air temperature display.
m

Module Network Input Messages - Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B)
Broadcast Message Originating

. co Message Purpose
Module
gn
Climate control touchscreen APIM This message contains both the climate control system voice commands as well
and voice requests as all climate control system touch screen inputs.
Climate control status HVAC This message contains the HVAC mode status for the mode indicators.
ia
control
module
rd
ca

Module Network Input Messages - HVAC control module

Climate control Front Controls Interface This message contains all climate control system controls requests
requests Module B (FCIM-B) except blower motor speed.
Climate control seat Front Controls Interface This message contains the climate control system controls request
requests Module B (FCIM-B) for blower motor speed.
Climate control Front Controls Interface This message contains the climate control system controls request
information status Module B (FCIM-B) from the MyTemp button.
Remote start status BCM This message contains the climate control system controls request
for remote start.
A/C clutch status PCM This message contains the A/C compressor clutch status.
Ambient air PCM This message contains filtered value from the ambient temperature
temperature filtered sensor.

Module Network Input Messages - PCM

Message Module
A/C request HVAC control This message requests the A/C compressor to be engaged.
module
Evaporator HVAC control This message contains the evaporator temperature. The PCM uses the evaporator
temperature module temperature to determine the A/C compressor output.
The Refrigerant Cycle
For information regarding basic HVAC system refrigerant operation, refer to the current Ford Web Based Technical Training
courses. The following diagram shows the refrigerant system state in each component.
The following are characteristics of the EMTC system:
The PCM controls the A/C clutch relay.

The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the air that has passed through the evaporator core and
sends a signal to the PCM. If the temperature of the evaporator core discharge air is low enough to cause the
condensed water vapor to freeze, the PCM disengages the A/C clutch relay.
m
The line pressure is monitored so that A/C compressor operation is interrupted if the system pressure becomes too high
or too low.
The A/C compressor relief valve opens and vents refrigerant to relieve unusually high system pressure.
A/C Flow and State (2.3L and 3.5L EcoBoost)

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
A/C Flow and State (3.5L and 3.7L Duratec)

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
When the customer inputs an A/C request into the Front Controls Interface Control Module B (FCIM-B), the module sends the
request to the GWM over the HS-CAN3. The GWM sends the request to the PCM over the HS-CAN1. The PCM controls the
A/C clutch relay. The GWM also sends the request to the HVAC control module over the MS-CAN.
A/C Request
When an A/C request is received by the PCM, the PCM engages the A/C clutch relay when all of the following conditions are
met:
the refrigerant pressure is not excessively high or low.
the engine coolant temperature is not excessively high.
the ambient air temperature is above approximately 0°C (32°F).
a WOT condition is not present.
the evaporator discharge air temperature is above approximately 1°C (33.8°F).
The PCM does not detect temperatures from the Mass Airflow/Intake Air Temperature sensor that does not correlate
with other temperature sensor readings at ignition ON. (Most Mass Airflow (MAF) sensors have an integrated Intake Air
Temperature (IAT) sensor).
The PCM monitors multiple temperature sensors correlation (AAT, CHT, ECT IAT, MAF...). The PCM runs this logic after an
engine off and a calibrated soak period, typically 6 to 8 hours. This soak period allows the Ambient Air Temperature (AAT)
sensor and the other temperature sensors to stabilize and not differ by greater than a calibrated value, typically 18ºC (32.4ºF). If
a sensor input is found to be reporting a temperature imbalance the PCM does not allow the A/C clutch to engage. For more
information on PCM sensors, Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
The PCM monitors the discharge pressure measured by the A/C pressure transducer. The PCM interrupts A/C compressor
operation in the event the A/C pressure transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low
charge conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the PCM does not allow the
A/C clutch to engage.
Rear Climate Control
For system operation and component description information on the rear climate control system,
Refer to: Rear Climate Control - System Operation and Component Description (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Description and
m
Operation).
Heating and Ventilation
The heating and ventilation system:
controls the temperature of the air inside the vehicle.

. co
reduces the relative humidity of the air inside the vehicle (during A/C compressor operation).
gn
delivers heated or cooled air to maintain the vehicle interior temperature and comfort level.
The heating and ventilation system uses a reheat method to provide conditioned air to the passenger compartment.
Temperature blending is controlled by the temperature door, which regulates the amount of air that flows through and around
ia
the heater core, where it is then mixed and distributed. All airflow from the blower motor passes through the A/C evaporator
core.
rd
Air Handling
There are 3 door actuators that control the air flow into the passenger compartment:
ca
Air distribution
Air inlet
Temperature
All of the door actuators contain a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The potentiometer circuit consists of a 5-volt
reference signal connected to one end of a variable resistor, and a signal ground connected to the other. A signal circuit is
connected to a contact wiper, which is driven along the variable resistor by the actuator shaft. The signal to the HVAC control
module from the contact wiper indicates the position of the actuator door. The HVAC control module powers the actuator
motors to move the doors to the desired positions. The desired door positions are calculated by the HVAC control module
based on the set temperature, in-vehicle temperature and ambient air temperature.
When an airflow mode, desired temperature, fresh air, or recirculation mode is selected, the HVAC control module moves the
actuator motor in the desired direction.
The HVAC control module may adjust the air inlet door based on the in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor information to
maintain the desired humidity of the passenger cabin air.
The HVAC control module sends a PWM signal to the blower motor speed control to regulate the blower speed as necessary.
The blower motor speed control provides variable ground feed for the blower motor based on the input from the HVAC control
module. A delay function provides a gradual increase or decrease in blower motor speed under all conditions.
OFF
When OFF is selected:

the blower motor is off.
MAX A/C
When MAX A/C is selected:
the air inlet door closes allowing only recirculated air.

the recirculated air indicator is illuminated (recirculated air forced on).
registers.
the temperature door moves to the full cool position. Air temperature can be manually overridden.
the A/C button is illuminated.
the A/C compressor operates if the outside temperature is above approximately 0°C (32°F).
the blower motor is commanded to the highest speed. The blower motor speed is adjustable.
PANEL
When PANEL mode is selected:
m
registers.
blended air temperature is available. The airflow temperature is only cooled below the outside air temperature when the
A/C is commanded on.
PANEL/FLOOR
. co
When PANEL/FLOOR mode is selected:
gn
ia
the air distribution doors operate in combination to direct airflow to the floor duct and the instrument panel registers. A
small amount of airflow from the side window demisters and defrost duct is present.
rd

ca
FLOOR
When FLOOR mode is selected:
the air distribution doors operate in combination to direct airflow to the floor duct. A small amount of airflow from the
defroster duct and side window demisters is present.
FLOOR/DEFROST
When FLOOR/DEFROST mode is selected:
the air distribution doors operate in combination to direct airflow to the floor duct, the defroster duct and the side window
demisters.
MAX DEFROST
When MAX DEFROST mode is selected:
the recirculated air request button is disabled. The air inlet door opens, allowing only outside air into the passenger
compartment.
the air distribution doors operate in combination to direct airflow to the defroster duct and side window demisters. A small
amount of airflow from the floor duct is present.
the A/C is turned on in defrost mode. The A/C compressor operates as long as the outside temperature is above
approximately 0°C (32°F).
the temperature is set to the highest setting and is not adjustable.
the fan is set to the highest speed and is not adjustable.
MAX DEFROST can be exited by pressing the AUTO button.
Remote Start
When the factory remote start feature is used, the EMTC system runs at the setting it was set to when the vehicle was last
turned off. You cannot adjust the climate control system during remote start operation. Turn the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings.
m
Set the climate control to operate using the last climate control settings through the information display setting: Remote Start >
Climate Control > Heater–A/C > Last Settings, refer to the Owner's Literature for more information.
HVAC Control Module - Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC)

co
The EMTC system uses the HVAC control module, and it also controls the outputs for rear window defrost and climate
.
gn
controlled seats. For details on the HVAC control module communication, refer to Control System Logic in this section.
The HVAC control module utilizes a Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protective circuit strategy for its actuator outputs. Output load
(current level) is monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and is shut down (turns off the voltage or ground
provided by the module) when a fault event is detected. A short circuit DTC is stored at the fault event and a cumulative counter
ia
is started.
rd
When the demand for the output is no longer present, the module resets the Field-Effect Transistor (FET) circuit protection to
allow the circuit to function. The next time the driver requests a circuit to activate that has been shut down by a previous short
(Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protection) and the circuit is still shorted, the Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protection shuts off the
circuit again and the cumulative counter advances.
ca
When the excessive circuit load occurs often enough, the module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out.
The Field-Effect Transistor (FET) protected circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit tolerance based on the harmful effect
of each circuit fault on the Field-Effect Transistor (FET) and the ability of the Field-Effect Transistor (FET) to withstand it. A
module lifetime level of fault events is established based upon the durability of the Field-Effect Transistor (FET). If the total
tolerance level is determined to be 600 fault events, the 3 predefined levels would be 200, 400 and 600 fault events.
When each tolerance level is reached, the short circuit DTC that was stored on the first failure cannot be cleared by a command
to clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). The module does not allow the DTC to be cleared or the circuit to be restored to
normal operation until a successful self-test proves that the fault has been repaired. After the self-test has successfully
completed (no on-demand Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present), DTC U1000:00 and the associated DTC (the DTC
related to the shorted circuit) automatically clears and the circuit function returns.
When each level is reached, the DTC associated with the short circuit sets along with DTC U1000:00. These Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) can be cleared using the module self-test, then the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool. The module
never resets the fault event counter to zero and continues to advance the fault event counter as short circuit fault events occur.
If the number of short circuit fault events reach the third level, then Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) U1000:00 and U3000:49
set along with the associated short circuit DTC. DTC U3000:49 cannot be cleared and a new module must be installed after the
repair.
Outside Air Temperature Display

The Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor is hardwired to the PCM through separate input and return circuits. The PCM
provides a reference voltage to the Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor and monitors the change in voltage resulting from
changes in resistance as determined by outside air temperature. The PCM filters the ambient air temperature input and sends
the data to the GWM through the HS-CAN1. The GWM sends the air ambient temperature filtered message to the HVAC
control module over the MS-CAN. The HVAC control module returns the message as the Outside Air Temperature message to
the GWM. The GWM sends outside air temperature message to the APIM for the touchscreen to display the outside air
temperature.
The PCM is programmed to update the messaged outside temperature data at different rates depending on several criteria to
prevent false temperature displays due to a condition known as heat soaking. Heat soaking is where the outside air
temperature is hotter in the location of the Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor than the actual outside air temperature.
When the sensed outside temperature rises, the display updates slowly at varying rates based on vehicle speed. When the
sensed outside temperature drops, the display updates more quickly following the drop experienced by the Ambient Air
Temperature (AAT) sensor.
After replacing an Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor, the sensor data must be reset by either driving the vehicle at speeds
consistently about 20 MPH for at least 5 minutes to update the filtered data or perform the multiple button press reset procedure
to update to the current raw value.
The multiple button reset for the Ambient Air Temperature (AAT) sensor is as follows:
On the HVAC panel controls, press the A/C and Recirc buttons simultaneously, then, release both.
Within 2 seconds press the A/C button again.
m
Blower Motor
The blower motor pulls air from the air inlet and forces it into the climate control housing where it is mixed and distributed.

co
The blower motor speed control uses a PWM signal from the HVAC control module to determine the desired blower speed and
.
varies the ground feed for the blower motor to control the speed.
gn
Evaporator Core
The evaporator core is an aluminum tube and fin design heat exchanger located in the climate control housing. A mixture of
ia
liquid refrigerant and oil enters through the evaporator core inlet tube and exits out of the evaporator core through the
evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower motor is cooled and
dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins.
rd
Heater Core
ca
The heater core, located in the climate control housing, consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine
coolant and transfer it to air passing through the heater core.
The climate control housing directs airflow from the blower motor through the evaporator core and heater core. All airflow from
the blower motor passes through the evaporator core. The airflow is then directed through or around the heater core by the
temperature door(s). After passing through the heater core, the airflow is distributed to the selected outlet by the airflow mode
doors.
The air distribution door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The potentiometer allows the HVAC
control module to monitor the position of the airflow mode door.
The air inlet door actuator contains a reversible electric motor and a potentiometer. The potentiometer allows the HVAC control
module to monitor the position of the airflow mode door.
The EMTC system has one temperature door actuator on the HVAC case. The temperature door actuator contains a reversible
electric motor and potentiometer. The potentiometer allows the HVAC control module to monitor the position of the temperature
door.
The evaporator temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The sensor varies its resistance with the temperature. As the
temperature rises, the resistance falls. As the temperature falls, the resistance rises. The evaporator temperature sensor is an
input to the HVAC control module and the information is relayed to the PCM over the CAN. If the evaporator temperature is
below approximately 1°C (33.8°F), the PCM does not allow the A/C compressor to operate.
In-Vehicle Temperature And Humidity Sensor
The in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor contains a thermistor and a sensing element which separately measures the
in-vehicle air temperature and the humidity, then sends those readings to the HVAC control module. The in-vehicle temperature
and humidity sensor has an electric fan within the sensor that draws in-vehicle air across the two sensing elements. The HVAC
control module may adjust the air inlet door based on the in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor information to maintain
the desired humidity of the passenger cabin air.
A/C Pressure Transducer
The PCM monitors the discharge pressure measured by the A/C pressure transducer. As the refrigerant pressure changes, the
resistance of the A/C pressure transducer changes. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant before removing the A/C
pressure transducer.
A 5-volt reference voltage is supplied to the A/C pressure transducer from the PCM. The A/C pressure transducer receives a
ground from the PCM. The A/C pressure transducer then sends a voltage to the PCM to indicate the A/C refrigerant pressure.
Externally Controlled Variable Displacement A/C Compressor
m
NOTE: Variable compressors operate at lower pressures (compared to fixed compressors) and depend on correct system
charge for normal operation.
The externally controlled variable displacement compressor has:
a non-serviceable shaft seal.

. co
a non-serviceable pressure relief valve installed in the rear of the compressor to protect the refrigerant system against
gn
excessively high refrigerant pressures.
Uses Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D. This oil contains special additives required for the A/C
compressor. The oil may have some slightly dark-colored streaks while maintaining normal oil viscosity. This is normal
for this A/C compressor because of break-in wear that can discolor the oil.
ia
Variable displacement compressors have a swash plate that rotates to reciprocate pistons, which compresses refrigerant.
Variable displacement compressors change the swash plate angle to change the refrigerant displacement. The externally
rd
controlled variable displacement compressor changes the swash plate angle in response to an electrical signal from the PCM.
The externally controlled variable displacement compressor manages displacement by controlling refrigerant differential
pressure before and after a throttle at the discharge side; achieving precise cooling capability control in response to cabin
ca
environment and driving conditions.
The PCM sends a PWM signal to the solenoid in the compressor to control the compressor displacement based upon the:
Ambient air temperature

Evaporator temperature
Engine RPM
Vehicle speed
A/C high side pressure
Temperature and mode settings of the climate control head
Intake air temperature
Condenser
The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-tube design heat exchanger. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to
pass over fins and tubes to extract heat, and condenses gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
Receiver Drier
The receiver drier stores high-pressure liquid and the desiccant bag mounted inside the receiver drier removes any retained
moisture from the refrigerant.
The receiver drier is remotely mounted on the 2.3L EcoBoost and the 3.5L EcoBoost.
The receiver drier is incorporated onto the LH side of the A/C condenser on the 3.5L Duratec and 3.7L Duratec.
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
The Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the center rear of the engine
compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the refrigerant flow and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure sides of
the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes through the TXV through 2 separate flow
paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and
adjusts an internal pin-type valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases
the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the amount of refrigerant entering
the evaporator core at higher temperatures.
Service Gauge Port Valves
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description Torque

1 Low-pressure service gauge port valve cap 0.8 Nm (7 lb-in)
2 Low-pressure service gauge port valve —
3 Low-pressure Schrader-type valve 2.26 Nm (20 lb-in)
4 High-pressure Schrader-type valve 3.4 Nm (30 lb-in)
5 High-pressure service gauge port valve —
6 High-pressure service gauge port valve cap 0.8 Nm (7 lb-in)
The service gauge port fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component.
Prior to leak testing, blow air over the service gauge port valves to ensure an accurate test.
Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports.
A very small amount of leakage around the Schrader-type valve with the service gauge port valve cap removed is
considered normal. Install a new Schrader-type valve core if the seal leaks excessively.
The A/C service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent leakage through
the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten the A/C service gauge port valve
caps to the correct torque after they are removed.
Follow the procedure and the notes for electronic leak testing.
Refer to: Electronic Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information) .
Refrigerant System Dye
A fluorescent dye wafer is added to the receiver drier desiccant bag at the factory to assist in refrigerant system leak diagnosis.
This fluorescent dye wafer dissolves after about 30 minutes of continuous A/C operation. It is not necessary to add additional
dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of refrigerant has been removed from the
system.
Refer to: Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information) .
Replacement desiccant bags, either separately or part of the receiver drier assembly, are equipped with a new fluorescent dye
wafer. It is not necessary to add additional dye to the refrigerant system before diagnosing leaks. If the system has been out of
refrigerant through the winter the dye at the leak point may have oxidized and may not fluoresce. If this happens, recharge and
operate the A/C system to circulate the oil and allow any residual dye to show up at the leak point. It is important to understand
that dye adheres to the oil not the refrigerant; the refrigerant carries the oil out of the leak point.
NOTE: Check for leaks using a Rotunda-approved UV lamp and dye enhancing glasses.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
412-00 Climate Control System - General Information
Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC)
DTC Chart: HVAC Control Module - Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC)
1FM5K7D8XHGA34356 Procedure
revision date: 01/26/2017
Network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) (U-codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as damaged wiring or low
battery voltage occurrences. Additionally, vehicle repair procedures, such as module reprogramming, often set network
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is unlikely to resolve the concern. To prevent

HVAC Control Module - EMTC DTC CHART
m
Heater Element:
Circuit Short To
Ground
co

.
gn
Heater Element:
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
ia
Heater Element:
Circuit Short To
Ground
rd

Heater Element:
ca
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
Heater Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Heater Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
Heater Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Heater Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Battery or Open
B1081:07 Left Temperature INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new driver side temperature door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Driver Side Temperature Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System -
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
B1083:07 Recirculation INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new air inlet door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Air Inlet Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
m
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
B1083:13 Recirculation
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
GO to Pinpoint Test D
. co
B1086:07 Air Distribution INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
gn
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new air distribution door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Air Distribution Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General
ia

Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
rd
Ground
Damper Motor:
ca
Circuit Short To
Battery
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
B10AF:12 Blower Fan Relay: GO to Pinpoint Test J
Circuit Short To
Battery
B10AF:14 Blower Fan Relay: For an inoperative blower motor, GO to Pinpoint Test J
Circuit Short To For all other blower motor symptoms, GO to Pinpoint Test K
Ground or Open
B10B0:12 Rear Blower Fan GO to Pinpoint Test Q
Relay: Circuit Short
To Battery
B10B0:14 Rear Blower Fan For an inoperative rear blower motor, GO to Pinpoint Test Q
Relay: Circuit Short For all other rear blower motor symptoms, GO to Pinpoint Test R
To Ground or Open
B10B7:12 Rear Air Discharge GO to Pinpoint Test T
Temperature:
Circuit Short To
Battery
B10B7:14 Rear Air Discharge GO to Pinpoint Test T
Temperature:
Circuit Short To
Ground or Open
B10B9:12 Blower Control: GO to Pinpoint Test J
Circuit Short To
Battery
B10B9:14 Blower Control: For an inoperative blower motor, GO to Pinpoint Test J
Circuit Short To For all other blower motor symptoms, GO to Pinpoint Test K
Ground or Open
B10BA:12 Rear Blower GO to Pinpoint Test Q
Control: Circuit
Short To Battery
B10BA:14 Rear Blower GO to Pinpoint Test Q
Control: Circuit
Short To Ground or
Open
B11E3:07 Rear HVAC INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new rear temperature door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Rear Temperature Door Actuator (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
m
Installation).
B11E3:11 Rear HVAC GO to Pinpoint Test T
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
. co
Damper Motor:
gn
Circuit Short To
Battery
ia
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
B11E4:07 Rear Air Distribution INSPECT for a loose connector, binding/damaged linkage or door. REPAIR as necessary. If
rd
Damper Motor: no condition is found, INSTALL a new rear air distribution door actuator.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Rear Air Distribution Door Actuator (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
ca
B11E4:11 Rear Air Distribution GO to Pinpoint Test S

Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Ground
Damper Motor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
Damper Motor:
Circuit Open
Position Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
Position Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Ground or Open
Damper Position
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Battery
Damper Position
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Ground or
Open
Position Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Battery
Position Sensor:
Circuit Short To
Ground or Open
B1A61:11 Cabin Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test L
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Ground
B1A61:15 Cabin Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test L
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Battery or
m
Open
B1A69:11 Humidity Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test L
Circuit Short To
Ground
B1A69:15 Humidity Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test L
co
Circuit Short To
.
gn
Battery or Open
B1B71:11 Evaporator GO to Pinpoint Test M
Temperature
Sensor: Circuit
ia
Short To Ground
B1B71:15 Evaporator GO to Pinpoint Test M
rd
Temperature
Sensor: Circuit
Short To Battery or
ca
Open
B1B7D:12 Rear Air Distribution GO to Pinpoint Test S
Actuator: Circuit
Short To Battery
B1B7D:14 Rear Air Distribution GO to Pinpoint Test S
Actuator: Circuit
Short To Ground or
Open
Circuit Short To REFER to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and
Battery Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without: Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms, Diagnosis and Testing).
Circuit Short To
REFER to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open Driver
Ground or Open
Window (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Diagnosis and Testing).
Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, Diagnosis and Testing).
C1B14:11 Sensor Supply GO to Pinpoint Test N

Voltage A: Circuit
Short To Ground
C1B14:12 Sensor Supply GO to Pinpoint Test N
Voltage A: Circuit
Short To Battery
U0140:00 Lost GO to Pinpoint Test U
Communication
With Body Control
Module: No Sub
Type Information
U0165:00 Lost GO to Pinpoint Test V
Communication
With HVAC Control
Module - Rear: No
Sub Type
Information
U0401:68 Invalid Data RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the
Received from PCM
ECM/PCM A: Event
Information REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L
Received from
m
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
ECM/PCM A:
Invalid Serial Data
Received
Received from
ECM/PCM A: Alive /
co
.
Sequence Counter Duratec (227kW/301PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
gn
Incorrect / Not
Updated
ia
Module: Event
rd
Information
ca

Module: Invalid
Serial Data
Received
U1000:00 Solid State Driver The HVAC control module has temporarily disabled an output because an excessive current
Protection Active - draw exists (such as a short to ground). The HVAC control module cannot enable the output
Driver Disabled: No until the cause of the short is corrected. ADDRESS all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Sub Type (DTCs) first. After the cause of the concern is corrected, CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble
Information Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test.
U2100:00 Initial Configuration CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to this module. This
Not Complete: No DTC sets due to incomplete or incorrect PMI procedures. If there have been recent service
Sub Type actions with this module, REPEAT the PMI procedure as directed by the scan tool. If there
Information have been no recent service actions, INSTALL a new module to correct the failure to retain
configuration data.
U3000:49 Control Module: ADDRESS all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble
Internal Electronic Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U3000:49 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new
Failure HVAC control module.
REFER to: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module (412-00
Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and Installation).
U3002:62 Vehicle CARRY OUT PMI on the HVAC control module using the diagnostic scan tool.
Identification REFER to: Module Configuration - System Operation and Component Description (418-01
Number: Signal Module Configuration, Description and Operation).
Compare Failure
U3003:16 Battery Voltage: GO to Pinpoint Test W
Circuit Voltage
Below Threshold
U3003:17 Battery Voltage: GO to Pinpoint Test W
Circuit Voltage
Above Threshold

m
Refrigerant
Pressure
P0533
Sensor “A”
Circuit Low
A/C GO to Pinpoint Test A
. co
Refrigerant
gn
Pressure
Sensor “A”
Circuit High
P0645 A/C Clutch GO to Pinpoint Test B
ia
Relay Control
Circuit
rd
P06A0 Variable A/C GO to Pinpoint Test O

Compressor
Control
ca
Circuit
P1464 A/C Demand If the HVAC selector was not powered off, POWER the HVAC off, CLEAR the Diagnostic
Out Of Self Trouble Codes (DTCs) and REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC does not return, IGNORE the
Test Range DTC and continue diagnosing other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or symptoms. If the
DTC returns, GO to Pinpoint Test H
P193E A/C Clutch GO to Pinpoint Test P
Request
Signal
All Other —
PCM REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L
Diagnostic EcoBoost (201kW/273PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
Trouble
Codes REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
(DTCs) EcoBoost (257kW/350PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Climate Control - Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC)

Symptom Chart

A module does not communicate Fuse(s)
with the diagnostic scan tool Wiring, REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module
terminals or Communications Network, Diagnosis and Testing).
connectors
Externally Controlled Variable Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test O

Displacement Compressor
m
(EVDC) poor performance/does
not operate correctly
Unable To Duplicate The Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test C
Customer Concern And No
Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) Present
. co
HVAC functions are Communication
gn
inoperative/do not operate network REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00C
correctly from touchscreen only Information and Entertainment System - General Information -
APIM Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
Reduced outlet airflow Plugged cabin air filter INSPECT the cabin air filter.
REFER to: Cabin Air Filter (412-00 Climate Control System -
rd

If OK, DIAGNOSE for low refrigerant charge, A/C always
commanded on or blower motor not operating correctly.
ca
Improper refrigerant CARRY OUT the refrigerant system tests.

If refrigerant charge is OK, GO to Pinpoint Test H
Blower motor GO to Pinpoint Test K
The air inlet door is inoperative Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test D
Incorrect or erratic direction of Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test E
airflow from outlets
Insufficient, erratic or no heat Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test F
The A/C is inoperative Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test G
The A/C is always on — A/C Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test H
mode always commanded ON
Temperature control is Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test I
correctly — driver side
The front blower motor is Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test J
inoperative
The front blower motor does not Refer to Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test K
operate correctly
The rear blower motor is Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test Q
inoperative Test
The rear blower motor does not Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test R
operate correctly Test
Insufficient A/C cooling Improper refrigerant CARRY OUT the refrigerant system tests.
m
. co
If OK, DIAGNOSE for a temperature door actuator not operating
correctly.
gn
Temperature door GO to Pinpoint Test I
actuator
A/C pressure relief valve A/C pressure relief CHECK the high side system pressure. If the pressure is
ia
discharging valve below the A/C pressure relief valve open pressure (500-600
psi), INSTALL a new A/C Compressor.
rd

ca

High system pressure CHECK the high side system pressure. If the system pressure is
above the A/C pressure relief valve open pressure (500-600 psi),
REPAIR the A/C system for a restriction.
Climate control does not operate IPC information VERIFY Remote Start - Message Center Set To Auto, or
only when remote start is used display settings Remote Start - Message Center Set To Last User Settings.
Non-Ford REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual
approved Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) - System
remote start Operation and Component Description (412-00 Climate
system Control System - General Information, Description and
installed Operation).
VERIFY module communications network operation.
DIAGNOSE Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) if present.
Symptom Chart: Noise, Vibration, and Harshness (NVH)

Symptom Chart

Sources
Noisy A/C compressor A/C compressor INSPECT the A/C compressor pulley bearing for roughness. If bearing
pulley bearing roughness is found, INSTALL a new A/C compressor pulley.
worn REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch and Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch
Field Coil (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Excessive hissing from Incorrect A/C INSPECT for leaks.
the plenum when the A/C refrigerant level REFER to: Electronic Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System -
m
is on General Information, General Procedures).
REFER to: Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control
. co
CARRY OUT the refrigerant system tests.
Procedures).
gn
Procedures).
ia
Procedures).
rd

Procedures).
ca
Pinpoint Test(s)
P0532, P0533
The A/C pressure transducer receives a ground from the PCM. A 5-volt reference voltage is supplied to the A/C pressure
transducer from the PCM. The A/C pressure transducer then sends a voltage to the PCM to indicate the A/C pressure.


Pressure Sensor "A" feedback voltage is less than 0.26 volt for at least 2 seconds and the ambient air temperature
Circuit Low is greater than 0°C (32°F).
Pressure Sensor "A" feedback voltage is greater than 4.95 volts for at least 2 seconds and the ambient air
Circuit High temperature is greater than 0°C (32°F).
Possible Sources

PCM
Inspect for loose or corroded PCM and A/C pressure transducer connections.
PINPOINT TEST A : P0532, P0533

A1
COMPARE THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) (A/C) PRESSURE SENSOR (ACP_PRESS) PID
(PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE MANIFOLD GAUGE SET READINGS
m
Allow the A/C system to stabilize to the outside ambient temperature.
Ignition ON.
co
With the manifold gauge set connected, compare the pressure readings of the manifold gauge set and the PCM
PID ACP_PRESS.
.
gn
ia
Yes IGNORE the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the Symptom Chart in this section.
No GO to A2
rd
A2
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
ca
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect A/C pressure transducer C1260.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C1260-1 Ground
C1260-2 Ground
C1260-3 Ground
No GO to A3
A3
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C1260-1
C1260-2
. co Ground
Ground
gn
ia
C1260-3 Ground
rd
ca
Yes GO to A4
A4
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

2.3L EcoBoost

C1260-1 C1381B-18
C1260-2 C1381B-52
C1260-3 C1381B-11

3.5L EcoBoost
m
C1260-1 C1551B-18
C1260-2 C1551B-52
. co
gn
C1260-3 C1551B-11
ia
rd
ca

3.5L/3.7L Duratec

C1260-1 C175B-51
C1260-2 C175B-33
C1260-3 C175B-52
Yes GO to A5
A5
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Disconnect Generator Current sensor C1645.
Disconnect Turbocharger Boost Pressure (TCBP) sensor C1140 (if equipped).
Disconnect Crankcase Pressure sensor C1647 (if equipped).
Disconnect Turbocharger Boost Pressure/Charge Air Cooler Temperature (TCBP/CACT) sensor C1588 (if
equipped).
Measure:
m
C1260-1 C1260-2
C1260-1 . co C1260-3
gn
C1260-2 C1260-3
ia
rd
ca
Yes INSTALL a new A/C pressure transducer.

REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)/3.5L
EcoBoost (257kW/350PS) (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and
Installation).
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Transducer - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec
(227kW/301PS) (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and Installation).
A6
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
P0645
. co
gn
Voltage is provided to the A/C clutch relay coil. When A/C is requested and A/C line pressures allow, a ground is provided to
the A/C clutch relay coil from the PCM, energizing the A/C clutch relay.
ia
rd

ca

P0645 A/C Clutch The DTC sets when the PCM grounds the relay circuit and more voltage than expected is detected on
Relay the relay circuit. The DTC also sets when the relay circuit is off and no voltage is detected on the relay
Control circuit. The PCM expects to detect voltage coming through the relay coil to the relay circuit when it is
Circuit not grounding it.
Possible Sources

A/C clutch relay
PCM
Inspect BJB fuses 3 (20A) and 16 (10A)
PINPOINT TEST B : P0645

NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when taking measurements. Failure to use the
correct probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
B1
CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect A/C clutch relay.
Ignition ON.
Measure:


m
. co
gn
Yes GO to B2
ia
to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. If OK, REPAIR the circuits.
rd
B2
ca

Yes GO to B3
B3
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Externally controlled variable displacement compressor C1110.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

No GO to B4
B4
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
A/C clutch relay socket 2
co
. Ground
gn
Yes GO to B5
ia

rd
B5
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ca
Measure:

2.3L EcoBoost


3.5L EcoBoost


3.5L/3.7L Duratec

Yes GO to B6
B6
Ignition OFF.
m
Repair:

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

Unable To Duplicate The Customer Concern And No Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) Present
This diagnostic procedure tests the functions of the HVAC system and identifies the correct HVAC symptom pinpoint test.
System Operation,
REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) - System Operation and
PINPOINT TEST C : UNABLE TO DUPLICATE THE CUSTOMER CONCERN AND NO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODES (DTCS) PRESENT
C1
CHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Are any climate control related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes REFER to the PCM DTC chart in this section.

No GO to C2
C2
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE FOR
Ignition ON.
m
No GO to C3
. co
Yes REFER to the HVAC control module DTC chart in this section.
gn
C3
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Ignition ON.
ia
Select panel mode.
Observe blower motor operation and select each blower motor speed.
rd
Does the blower motor operate in all ranges?

ca
Yes GO to C4
No If the blower motor does not operate in any setting, GO to Pinpoint Test J
If the blower motor does not correctly change speeds or shut off, GO to Pinpoint Test K
C4
CHECK AIRFLOW OPERATION
While observing the airflow, select each of the airflow positions (panel, panel/floor, floor, floor/defrost, defrost).
Is the airflow directed to the correct outlets?
Yes GO to C5
No GO to Pinpoint Test E
C5
VERIFY FRONT TEMPERATURE CONTROL OPERATION
Start the vehicle and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
With the A/C off, select panel mode.
Change the driver temperature settings from the coldest to the warmest and back to the coldest.
Does the temperature change between very warm to cool?
Yes GO to C6
No If the temperature does not get very warm, GO to Pinpoint Test F
If the temperature does not change at all, GO to Pinpoint Test I
C6
VERIFY THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR DOES NOT ENGAGE WITH A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) OFF
With the engine running and the A/C off, select panel mode.
Select the coldest temperature setting.
Is the outlet temperature close to ambient air temperature?
Yes GO to C7
m
No If the LH temperature is warmer than ambient air temperature,GO to Pinpoint Test I
If the outlet temperature is significantly colder than ambient air temperature and the A/C compressor
clutch is engaged, GO to Pinpoint Test H
co
C7
VERIFY THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR IS OPERATIONAL IN THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING)
.
MODE
gn
Make sure the ambient air temperature is above approximately 0°C (32°F).
With the engine running, select panel mode.

ia
Press the A/C button (indicator on).

rd
Is the A/C compressor operational when the panel and A/C button (indicator on) is pressed?
ca
Yes GO to C8
No GO to Pinpoint Test G
C8
CHECK THE RECIRCULATED AIR OPERATION
With the engine running, press the recirculated air button (indicator off).
Select panel mode.
Observe airflow noise.
Press the recirculated air button (indicator on).
Does the airflow noise increase when the recirculated air mode is selected (indicator on)?
Yes GO to C9
No GO to Pinpoint Test D
C9
CHECK THE REAR CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Using the front and rear climate blower motor controls, observe blower motor operation and select each rear
climate blower motor speed.
Does the rear climate blower motor operate in all selections and change speed in each?
Yes GO to C10
No If the rear climate blower motor does not operate in any setting, GO to Pinpoint Test Q
If the rear climate blower motor does not properly change speeds or shut OFF using both the front
and rear climate controls, GO to Pinpoint Test R
C10
VERIFY REAR CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM TEMPERATURE/MODE OPERATION
Select the highest rear climate blower motor setting.
Using the front and rear climate controls, change the rear climate temperature/mode setting from the coldest to
the warmest/floor and back to the coldest/overhead.
Does the rear climate temperature change between very warm to cool and rear climate airflow to the floor when
m
warm is selected and headliner when cool is selected?
Yes GO to C11
No GO to Pinpoint Test T
. co
gn
C11
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE INTERIOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (INT_TEMP) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Using a scan tool view the HVAC control module Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
ia
Monitor the INT_TEMP PID.

rd
Is the air temperature at the cabin temperature sensor similar to the PID?
ca
Yes GO to C12
No GO to Pinpoint Test L
C12
CHECK THE TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLS OPERATION
Using the touchscreen controls, select each climate control function.
Using the touchscreen controls, select each audio control function.
Do all touchscreen controls operate?
Yes The system is operating correctly.
No
The Air Inlet Door Is Inoperative

To rotate the air inlet door actuator, the HVAC control module supplies voltage and ground to the air inlet door actuator through
the door actuator motor circuits. To reverse the air inlet door actuator rotation, the HVAC control module reverses the voltage
and ground circuits. The air inlet door actuator feedback resistors are supplied a ground from the HVAC control module by the
air inlet door actuator return circuits and a 5-volt reference voltage on the air inlet door actuator reference circuits. The HVAC
control module reads the voltage on the air inlet door actuator feedback circuits to determine the air inlet door actuator position
by the position of the actuator feedback resistor wiper arm.
During an actuator calibration cycle, the HVAC control module drives the air inlet door until the door reaches both internal stops
in the HVAC control module case. If the air inlet door is temporarily obstructed or binding during a calibration cycle, the HVAC
control module may interpret this as the actual end of travel for the door. When this condition occurs and the HVAC control
module commands the actuator to its end of travel, the air intake may not be from the expected source.

m
B1083:11 Recirculation Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
Circuit Short To Ground actuator motor circuit when voltage is applied to drive the motor, indicating a
B1083:12 Recirculation Damper Motor:

short to ground.
co
This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
actuator motor circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a
.
short to voltage.
gn
B1083:13 Recirculation Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor circuit
B11F0:12 Air Intake Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
ia
Sensor: Circuit Short to Battery actuator feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage.
B11F0:14 Air Intake Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the
rd
Sensor: Circuit Short to Ground actuator feedback circuit, indicating an open circuit or a short to ground.
or Open
ca
Possible Sources

Air inlet door actuator
Air inlet door binding or stuck
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST D : THE AIR INLET DOOR IS INOPERATIVE

D1
CHECK THE AIR INLET DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.

Ignition ON.
Measure:

C289-1 Ground
C289-2 Ground
C289-3 Ground
m
C289-5
. co Ground
gn
ia
C289-6 Ground
rd
ca
No GO to D2
D2
CHECK THE AIR INLET DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C289-1 Ground
C289-2 Ground
C289-3 Ground
C289-5 Ground
C289-6 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to D3
ia

rd
D3
CHECK THE AIR INLET DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
ca

C289-1 C228A-24
C289-2 C228A-16
C289-3 C228A-23
C289-5 C228A-2
C289-6 C228A-3
Yes GO to D4
m
D4
CHECK THE AIR INLET DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

. co
gn
C289-1 C289-2
C289-1 C289-3
ia
rd
C289-1 C289-5
ca
C289-1 C289-6
C289-2 C289-3
C289-2 C289-5
C289-2 C289-6
C289-3 C289-5
C289-3 C289-6
m
C289-5
. co C289-6
gn
ia
rd
Yes INSTALL a new air inlet door actuator.

ca
REFER to: Air Inlet Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal
and Installation).
D5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

Incorrect Or Erratic Direction Of Airflow From Outlets
To rotate the air distribution door actuator, the HVAC control module supplies voltage and ground to the air distribution door
actuator through the door actuator motor circuits. To reverse the air distribution door actuator rotation, the HVAC control
module reverses the voltage and ground circuits. The air distribution door actuator feedback resistors are supplied a ground
from the HVAC control module by the air distribution door actuator return circuits and a 5-volt reference voltage on the air
m
distribution door actuator reference circuits. The HVAC control module reads the voltage on the air distribution door actuator
feedback circuits to determine the air distribution door actuator position by the position of the actuator feedback resistor wiper
arm.
co
During an actuator calibration cycle, the HVAC control module drives the air distribution door until the door reaches both
internal stops in the HVAC case. If the air distribution door is temporarily obstructed or binding during a calibration cycle, the
HVAC control module may interpret this as the actual end of travel for the door. When this condition occurs and the HVAC
.
control module commands the actuator to its end of travel, the airflow may not be from the expected outlets.
gn
ia

rd

B1086:11 Air Distribution Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
ca
short to ground.
B1086:12 Air Distribution Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Circuit Short to Battery actuator motor circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a
short to voltage.
B1086:13 Air Distribution Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor
Circuit Open circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a open circuit.
B11E7:12 Air Distribution Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
B11E7:14 Air Distribution Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the
or Open
Possible Sources

Air distribution door actuator
Air distribution door binding or stuck
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST E : INCORRECT OR ERRATIC DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW FROM OUTLETS
E1
CHECK THE AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
m
Measure:
C236-1
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
C236-2 Ground
gn
ia
C236-3 Ground
rd
ca
C236-4 Ground
C236-6 Ground

No GO to E2
E2
CHECK THE AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C236-1 Ground
C236-2 Ground
C236-3 Ground
m
C236-4
. co Ground
gn
C236-6 Ground
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to E3
E3
CHECK THE AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C236-1 C228A-7
C236-2 C228A-24
C236-3 C228A-23
C236-4 C228A-21
C236-6 C228A-6
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to E4
ia

rd
E4
CHECK THE AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:
ca

C236-1 C236-2
C236-1 C236-3
C236-1 C236-4
C236-1 C236-6
C236-2 C236-3
C236-2 C236-4
C236-2 C236-6
m
C236-3
. co C236-4
gn
C236-3 C236-6
ia
rd
ca
C236-4 C236-6
Yes INSTALL a new air distribution door actuator,

REFER to: Air Distribution Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to E5
E5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
Insufficient, Erratic Or No Heat

. co
When the engine is at operating temperature hot coolant flows from the engine through the heater core and back to the engine.
gn
Correct coolant temperatures are critical for good heater performance.
Possible Sources
ia

Temperature door actuator(s)
Heater core
rd
Inspect for low engine coolant level.

ca
PINPOINT TEST F : INSUFFICIENT, ERRATIC OR NO HEAT

F1
CHECK FOR CORRECT ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Ignition OFF.
Check the engine coolant level.
Is the engine coolant at the correct level as indicated on the engine coolant recovery reservoir?
Yes GO to F3
No GO to F2
F2
CHECK THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
Pressure test the cooling system for leaks. Refer to the appropriate procedure in section 303-03.
Does the engine cooling system leak?

Yes REPAIR the engine coolant leak. Refer to the appropriate procedure in section 303-03. TEST the
system for normal operation.
No FILL and BLEED the cooling system. Refer to the appropriate procedure in section 303-03.
After filling and bleeding the cooling system, GO to F3
F3
CHECK FOR COOLANT FLOW TO THE HEATER CORE
Run the motor until it reaches normal operating temperature. Select the floor position on the HVAC control
assembly. Set the temperature control to full warm and the blower to the lowest setting.
Using a suitable temperature measuring device, check the heater core inlet hose to see if it is hot.
Is the heater core inlet hose hot?
Yes GO to F4
No DIAGNOSE the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. Refer to the appropriate
procedure in section 303-03.
m
F4
CHECK FOR A PLUGGED OR RESTRICTED HEATER CORE
Using a suitable temperature measuring device, measure the heater core outlet hose temperature.
[10-30°F])?
. co
Is the heater core outlet hose temperature similar to the inlet hose temperature (within approximately 6-17°C
gn
Yes DIAGNOSE for a blend door actuator not operating correctly.
For inadequate temperature out of the LH side, GO to Pinpoint Test I
No INSTALL a new heater core.
ia
REFER to: Heater Core (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and
Installation).
rd
ca
The A/C Is Inoperative


A/C system discharged or low refrigerant charge
Network concerns
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) / Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor
Active grille shutters (if equipped)
A/C compressor clutch air gap
A/C compressor clutch field coil
A/C clutch relay
HVAC control module

PINPOINT TEST G : THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) IS INOPERATIVE

NOTE: Some PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may inhibit A/C operation. If any PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) are retrieved, diagnose those first. Refer to the DTC Chart: PCM.
G1
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) SYSTEM PRESSURE
Ignition OFF.
With the R-134a manifold gauge set connected, check the A/C system pressure.
Is the A/C system pressure above 290 kPa (42 psi)?
Yes GO to G2
No CHECK the A/C system for leaks.

INSPECT for leaks.
REFER to: Electronic Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
m
Procedures).
REFER to: Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
After leak is repaired, RECHARGE the A/C system. co

REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate
.
gn
G2
ia
Ignition ON.

rd
Do the FCIM, HVAC control module and the PCM pass the network test?
ca
Yes GO to G3
No DIAGNOSE the FCIM, HVAC control module or PCM does not communicate.
Testing).
G3
CHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) (A/C) PRESSURE SENSOR (ACP_PRESS) PID
(PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Ignition ON.
ACP_PRESS PID.
Yes GO to G4

G4
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN FUNCTIONAL CHECK
Ignition ON.
Does the electric cooling fan operate sometime during the KOEO self-test?
Yes GO to G5
No DIAGNOSE the electric cooling fan operation. REFER to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
G5
COMPARE THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) PID
(PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) AND THE OTHER TEMPERATURE SENSOR READINGS TO THE PCM
(POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (AAT) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
NOTE: Compare multiple engine sensor readings to the ambient temperature to determine sensors are reading
correctly. A faulty sensor can cause the PCM to disable the A/C with or without a DTC.
Allow the vehicle exterior and interior to stabilize to ambient temperature. This can take a soak period of at least 6
m
hours.
applicable).
. co
Monitor the AAT, CACT, CHT, ECT, IAT, IAT2, MAF, MAPT, TCB and TCIPT Parameter Identifications (PIDs) (as
gn
Yes GO to G6
ia
No DIAGNOSE the suspect temperature sensor. REFER to Section 413-01 for Ambient Air Temperature
(AAT) sensor or Outside Air Temperature Display concerns. For all other temperature sensor
concerns, REFER to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
rd
ca
G6
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes If equipped with the active grille shutter system, GO to G7

If not equipped with the active grille shutter system, GO to G8
No DIAGNOSE the evaporator temperature sensor. GO to Pinpoint Test M

G7
VERIFY THE GRILLE SHUTTER OPERATION USING THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) GRILL
SHUTTER A POSITION - COMMANDED (GRILL_A_CMD) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view PCM PID.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, select the PCM PID GRILL_A_CMD and command the grille shutter from 100%
(open) to 0% (closed) while observing the grille shutter operation from the front of the vehicle.
Does the grill shutter fully open and close when commanded by the scan tool?
Yes GO to G8
No DIAGNOSE the active grille shutter is inoperative or does not operate correctly.
G8
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE A/C (AIR
CONDITIONING) SWITCH (CC_SW_AC) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR
CONDITIONING) ON
m
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view HVAC control module Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Monitor the CC_SW_AC PID.

co
.
Does the PID display Active with the A/C button pressed on?
gn
Yes GO to G9
No GO to G17
ia
rd
G9
PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) ON
ca
Start the engine.
Does the PID display Yes when the button is pressed?
Yes GO to G11
No GO to G10
G10
RESET THE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE (AAT) SENSOR
On the HVAC controls, press the A/C (air conditioning) and Recirc buttons simultaneously, then release both.
Within 2 seconds press A/C button again.
Start the engine.
On the HVAC controls, set the temperature to full cold, select PANEL and select the A/C button (indicator on).

Yes RETEST the A/C system for normal operation. CARRY OUT the refrigerant system tests. Refer to
the appropriate Refrigerant System Tests procedure in Group 412.
No GO to G11
G11
CHECK THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR COMMANDED
STATE (ACC_CMD) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMMANDED ON
Using a diagnostic scan tool, activate the PCM ACC_CMD PID.
Yes GO to G18
No GO to G12
G12
CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
Measure:
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to G13
to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. If OK, REPAIR the circuit.
G13
BYPASS THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY
Ignition OFF.

A/C clutch relay socket 3 A/C clutch relay socket 5
Ignition ON.
Does the A/C compressor clutch engage?
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. INSTALL a new A/C clutch relay.
No LEAVE the fused jumper wire installed. GO to G14
G14
FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C100-1 Ground
m
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to G15

No
co
REMOVE the fused jumper wire. REPAIR the circuit.
.
gn
G15
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR CLUTCH FIELD COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
ia
Ignition OFF.
rd
Measure:

ca

C100-2 Ground
Yes GO to G16
G16
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR CLUTCH AIR GAP
Measure the A/C compressor clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced locations between the clutch hub and the A/C
compressor clutch pulley.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment (412-00 Climate Control System - General
Is the A/C compressor clutch air gap greater than 0.6 mm (0.0236 in)?
Yes ADJUST the A/C compressor clutch air gap.
REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment (412-00 Climate Control System -
No INSTALL a new A/C compressor clutch field coil.

REFER to: Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch and Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Field Coil (412-00 Climate
G17
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
G18
CHECK FOR AN INPUT DISABLING THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) CLUTCH RELAY
NOTE: The PCM strategy may disable the A/C compressor operation. If the A/C compressor clutch can be commanded
ca
on using IDS PCM Parameter Identifications (PIDs) Active Commands, PCM replacement will not resolve the condition.
Diagnose the PCM not energizing the A/C clutch relay using the suggestions in the table below. Refer to the
reference value information in Section 6 of the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because strategy has not yet detected hardware that indicates vehicle is
equipped with A/C
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the strategy is operating in Ignition System Failure Mode
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the (ECU) received a Request to Command the A/C Off
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the engine has not yet reached a stable running mode after
starting
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the A/C Discharge (Head) Pressure is Too High
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the Engine Coolant Temperature is Too High
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Prevent Frost and Ice Build Up on the Evaporator
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Prevent an Engine Stall during a Low Engine Speed condition
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Protect the Compressor from a Compressor Over-speed condition
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to temporarily make more power available when Accelerator Pedal is Fully
Depressed
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because Low A/C Refrigerant Charge has been detected
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Protect the Compressor from Operating at Too Low of an Ambient
Temperature
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited due to Missing Climate Control Message
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because the strategy is operating in Failsafe Cooling Mode
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Protect the Clutch from Damage because the Compressor Load and
Speed are Too High
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited by the off portion of the A/C Cycling Strategy invoked to manage High
Engine Temperature
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited due to Low Battery State of Charge
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Protect the Variable Displacement Compressor from Operating at Too
Low of a Temperature
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to improve Brake Booster Vacuum
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited because Evaporator Temperature is sufficiently low and compressor was at
minimum displacement
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited (Disabled) because the Evaporator Temperature is sufficiently below the
target temperature
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to satisfy A/C Clutch minimum off time
m
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited Due to Request from Torque Control Strategy (to Temporarily Make More
Power Available)
co
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited to Prevent Engine Stalling
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited Due to Request to Disable A/C from Stop-Start Strategy
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited (Delayed) to make Power Available for Power Steering
.
gn
A/C Clutch Engagement Is Inhibited Due To State Of Auxiliary A/C Disable (Typically A Pressure Or
Temperature) Switch 1 input
A/C Clutch Engagement is inhibited due to state of auxiliary A/C Disable (Typically a Pressure or Temperature)
ia
Switch 2 input
rd
Are any of the conditions described above not within normal parameters?
ca
Yes DIAGNOSE the condition found to be disabling the A/C clutch relay. REFER to the appropriate
Workshop Manual (WSM) section or the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
No The A/C compressor clutch can be commanded on using the IDS PCM Active command PID. The
A/C inoperative concern may be caused by an intermittent condition due to a component or module
connection, wiring or pin issue. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues. CHECK the
vehicle service history for recent service actions that have replaced modules. This condition may be
due to incomplete or incorrect PMI procedures.
The A/C Is Always On - A/C Mode Always Commanded On



P1464 A/C Demand Out Of Self Test Range This DTC sets when the PCM senses an A/C request during a PCM self-test.
Possible Sources
A/C clutch relay

PCM
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST H : THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) IS ALWAYS ON - A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) MODE ALWAYS
COMMANDED ON
m
H1
Ignition ON.
Make sure the HVAC control module is powered off. co

Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the PCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
.
gn
Does DTC P1464 return?

ia
Yes GO to H2
No IGNORE the DTC and CONTINUE diagnosing other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or symptoms.
rd
GO to the DTC Chart: PCM or Symptom Chart – Climate Control in this section.
ca
H2
Did the relay pass the component test?
Yes GO to H3
H3
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C100-1 Ground
No GO to H4
H4
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.

. co
gn

ia

rd
Yes GO to H5
No DIAGNOSE the evaporator temperature sensor. GO to Pinpoint Test M
ca
H5 CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) PRESSURE SENSOR (ACP_PRESS) PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION
(PID)
Ignition ON.
Parameter Identification (PID) ACP_PRESS.
Are the pressure values of the manifold gauge set and the Parameter Identification (PID) within ± 103 kPa (15
psi)?
Yes GO to H6
H6
STATUS (CC_SW_AC) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) OFF
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the HVAC control module CC_SW_AC PID.
Using the HVAC controls, select PANEL then press and release the A/C button (indicator off).
Does the PID display On or Active when the A/C button is pressed and Off or Inactive when released?
Yes GO to H7
No GO to H9
H7
(AC_REQ) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) OFF
Using the HVAC controls, deactivate the A/C.
Yes GO to H9
m
No GO to H8
co
H8
(AC_REQ) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) WITH THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR
.
CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED
gn
Ignition OFF.

ia
Ignition ON.

rd

ca
Yes GO to H9
No GO to H10
H9
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

H10
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
corrosion (replace connector or terminals – clean module pins)
damaged or bent pins – replace terminals/pins
pushed-out pins – replace pins as necessary
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
The Temperature Control Is Inoperative Or Does Not Operate Correctly - Driver Side
Temperature Door Actuator - Driver side,


B1081:11 Left Temperature Damper This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
short to ground.
B1081:12 Left Temperature Damper This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
short to voltage.
B1081:13 Left Temperature Damper This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor circuit
B11E5:12 Left HVAC Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
B11E5:14 Left HVAC Damper Position This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the
or Open
Possible Sources
m
Driver side temperature door actuator
HVAC control module
DRIVER SIDE
. co
PINPOINT TEST I : THE TEMPERATURE CONTROL IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY -
gn
I1
CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
ia

rd

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2091-1 Ground
C2091-2 Ground
C2091-3 Ground
C2091-5 Ground
C2091-6 Ground
m
No GO to I2
. co
gn
I2
CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
ia
Measure:
rd

C2091-1 Ground
ca
C2091-2 Ground
C2091-3 Ground
C2091-5 Ground
C2091-6 Ground
Yes GO to I3
I3
CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
m
C2091-1 C228A-23
C2091-2 . co C228A-20
gn
C2091-3 C228A-24
ia
rd
C2091-5 C228A-9
ca
C2091-6 C228A-8
Yes GO to I4
I4
CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C2091-1 C2091-2
C2091-1 C2091-3
C2091-1 C2091-5
C2091-1 C2091-6
m
C2091-2
. co C2091-3
gn
C2091-2 C2091-5
ia
rd
ca
C2091-2 C2091-6
C2091-3 C2091-5
C2091-3 C2091-6
C2091-5 C2091-6
Yes INSTALL a new driver side temperature door actuator.

REFER to: Driver Side Temperature Door Actuator (412-00 Climate Control System - General
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to I5
I5
OPERATION
m
Ignition OFF.
Repair: co
.
gn

ia

rd
ca

The Front Blower Motor Is Inoperative
speed.


B10AF:12 Blower Fan This DTC sets when the module senses voltage on the relay coil voltage circuit when the relay is
Relay: Circuit energized by the module, indicating a short directly to battery. The blower motor is inoperative.
Short To
Battery
Open
B10B9:12 Blower Control: This DTC sets when the module senses high voltage on the blower motor control PWM circuit,
Circuit Short indicating a short directly to voltage. The blower motor is inoperative.
To Battery
To Ground or circuit is shorted to ground. The blower motor is inoperative if the circuit is open.
Open
m
Possible Sources

Fuse
Blower motor relay
. co
Blower motor
gn
HVAC control module

ia

rd
PINPOINT TEST J : THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR IS INOPERATIVE

ca

J1
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Ignition OFF.
Check the blower motor relay.

Yes GO to J2
No INSTALL a new blower motor relay.
J2
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY SUPPLY VOLTAGES
Ignition ON.
Measure:
Yes GO to J3
No For blower motor relay socket 1 concern, Refer to the appropriate Symptom Chart to DIAGNOSE No
Power in ON.
m
For blower motor relay socket 3 concern, VERIFY BJB fuse 43 (40A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the
short.
co
J3
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
.
gn
Ignition ON.
ia
Measure:

rd

ca
No GO to J4
J4
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

Blower motor relay socket 2 C228A-11
Yes GO to J5
J5
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
Connect Blower motor relay.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
C271-4 Ground
. co
gn
Yes GO to J6
ia

rd
J6
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C271-1 Ground
Yes GO to J7
J7
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR A
SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228A-1 Ground
No GO to J8
J8
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C228A-1
. co C271-3
gn
Yes GO to J9
ia

rd
J9
CHECK THE OUTPUTS TO THE BLOWER MOTOR
ca
Disconnect Blower motor C2004.
Connect HVACcontrol module C228A.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2004-1 C2004-2
Yes INSTALL a new blower motor.

REFER to: Blower Motor (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and
Installation).
No GO to J10
J10
CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE BLOWER MOTOR FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C271-4 C2004-1
C271-2 C2004-2
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to J11

ia
J11
CHECK THE BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
rd
Measure:

ca

C271-4 C271-2

J12
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.

Repair:
m
The Front Blower Motor Does Not Operate Correctly

. co
gn
speed.
ia
rd

ca

Open
To Ground or circuit is shorted to ground. The blower motor will be inoperative with an open circuit.
Open
Possible Sources

Blower motor relay
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST K : THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
K1
VERIFY THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Select panel on the HVAC controls.
Observe the blower motor operation while selecting each blower motor speed.
Does the blower motor operate at any setting?
Yes GO to K2
K2
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
Measure:

. co
gn
C228A-1 Ground
ia

rd

ca
No GO to K3
K3
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C228A-1 Ground
Yes GO to K4
K4
CHECK THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition ON.
Measure:

No GO to K5
m
K5
CHECK THE FRONT BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION WITH THE BLOWER MOTOR RELAY DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
Ignition ON.

ia
Does the fan still operate all the time?

rd
Yes REPAIR the blower motor speed control voltage circuit CH402 (YE/GN) for a short to voltage.
No GO to K6
ca
K6
CHECK FOR CORRECT FRONT BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the blower motor speed control connector.
Repair:
Connect the blower motor speed control connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.

TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to K7
K7
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
No
co
.
gn
ia
B1A61:11, B1A61:15, B1A69:11, B1A69:15

rd

ca
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor,



B1A61:11 Cabin Temperature This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the in-vehicle
Sensor: Circuit Short to temperature and humidity sensor feedback circuit, indicating a short to ground.
Ground
B1A61:15 Cabin Temperature This DTC sets when the module senses greater than expected voltage on the in-
Sensor: Circuit Short to vehicle temperature and humidity sensor feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage
Battery or Open or an open circuit or sensor.
B1A69:11 Humidity Sensor: Circuit This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on the in-vehicle
Short To Ground temperature and humidity sensor humidity input circuit, indicating a short to ground.
B1A69:15 Humidity Sensor: Circuit This DTC sets when the module senses greater than expected voltage on the in-
Short To Battery or Open vehicle temperature and humidity sensor humidity input circuit, indicating a short to
voltage or an open circuit or sensor.
Possible Sources
Fuse
In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
HVAC control module
Make sure BCM fuse 21 (5A) is OK.

Make sure the in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor harness is not chaffed.
PINPOINT TEST L : B1A61:11, B1A61:15, B1A69:11, B1A69:15

L1
CHECK THE IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect BCM C2280A.

. co
gn

ia

rd

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2247-2 Ground
C2247-3 Ground
C2247-4 Ground
C2247-5 Ground
C2247-6 Ground
No GO to L2
m
L2
CHECK THE IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
gn
C2247-2 Ground
ia
C2247-3 Ground
rd
ca
C2247-4 Ground
C2247-5 Ground
C2247-6 Ground
Yes GO to L3
L3
CHECK THE IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2247-3 C228A-24
C2247-5 C228A-23
m
C2247-2
Positive Lead
. co
C228B-29
gn
ia
C2247-4 C228B-18
rd
ca

C2247-1 Ground

C2247-6 C2280A-6
Yes GO to L4
L4
CHECK THE IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:
m
C2247-1 C2247-2
C2247-1 . co C2247-3
gn
C2247-1 C2247-4
ia
rd
C2247-1 C2247-5
ca
C2247-1 C2247-6
C2247-2 C2247-3
C2247-2 C2247-4
C2247-2 C2247-5
C2247-2 C2247-6
C2247-3 C2247-4
m
C2247-3
.co C2247-5
gn
C2247-3 C2247-6
ia
rd
ca
C2247-4 C233-5
C2247-4 C2247-6
C2247-5 C2247-6

Yes GO to L5
L5
CHECK FOR CORRECT IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the disconnected connectors.
Repair:
Connect all disconnected connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
Yes INSTALL a new in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
REFER to: In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor (412-00 Climate Control System - General
No
co
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to L6
.
gn
L6
OPERATION
ia
Ignition OFF.
rd
Repair:
ca

B1B71:11, B1B71:15
Evaporator Temperature Sensor,



B1B71:11 Evaporator Temperature The module senses excessive voltage drop on the sensor reference voltage circuit,
Sensor: Circuit Short To indicating a short directly to ground. The module disables automatic-recirculation and
Ground the compressor is shut off.
B1B71:15 Evaporator Temperature The module senses no voltage drop on the sensor reference voltage circuit, indicating
Sensor: Circuit Short To a short directly to voltage or an open circuit. The module disables automatic-
Battery or Open recirculation and the compressor is shut off.
m
Possible Sources

HVAC control module
. co
gn
PINPOINT TEST M : B1B71:11, B1B71:15
ia
M1
CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
rd

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C296-1 Ground
C296-2 Ground
No GO to M2
M2
CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C296-1
C296-2
. co Ground
Ground
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to M3
M3
CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C296-1 C228A-19
C296-2 C228A-23

Yes GO to M4
M4
CHECK THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C296-1 C296-2
Yes INSTALL a new evaporator temperature sensor.

REFER to: Evaporator Temperature Sensor (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
m
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to M5
co
M5
.
OPERATION
gn
Ignition OFF.

ia
Repair:
rd
ca
C1B14:11, C1B14:12

A 5-volt reference voltage and ground is supplied to the climate control sensors and actuators from the HVAC control module.


C1B14:11 Sensor Supply Voltage A: This DTC sets when the module senses less than 5 volts on the sensor reference
Circuit Short to Ground voltage circuit, indicating a short to ground.
C1B14:12 Sensor Supply Voltage A: This DTC sets when the module senses greater than 5 volts on the sensor
Circuit Short to Battery reference voltage circuit, indicating a short to voltage.
Possible Sources

HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST N : C1B14:11, C1B14:12
m

Ignition ON.
. co
N1
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE DIAGNOSTIC
gn
Is DTC C1B14:11 or C1B14:12 present?

ia
Yes GO to N2
rd
No VERIFY a customer concern. REFER to the symptom chart in this section.

ca
N2
VOLTAGE AND SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228A-23 Ground
C228A-24 Ground
No GO to N3
N3
VOLTAGE AND SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C228A-23 Ground
C228A-24 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to N4

ia
rd
N4
CHECK THE REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT AND THE SIGNAL RETURN CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT
TOGETHER
Measure:
ca

C228A-23 C228A-24
Is the resistance greater than 200 ohms?
Yes GO to N6
No GO to N5
N5
CHECK THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPONENTS
Measure:

C228A-23 C228A-24
components if the measured resistance rises above 200 ohms.
Air distribution door actuator C236
Air inlet door actuator C289
Driver side temperature door actuator C2091
Evaporator temperature sensor C296
In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor C2247
Rear temperature door actuator C3004
Rear air distribution door actuator C3044
Did the resistance rise above 200 ohms?
Yes INSTALL a new sensor or actuator (the last one to be disconnected). Refer to the appropriate section
in Group 412 for the procedure. When installing an actuator, CONNECT the actuator electrical
connector before the HVAC control module. This allows the actuator to be calibrated when the HVAC
control module is connected.
m
N6
OPERATION
Ignition OFF. co
.
gn
Repair:
ia
rd

ca
P06A0
Externally controlled variable displacement compressor



P06A0 Variable A/C Compressor The PCM senses greater than expected voltage on the sensor feedback circuit, indicating
Control Circuit a short to voltage or an open circuit or sensor.
Possible Sources
Improper refrigerant level

A/C compressor
PCM
Inspect BJB fuse 3 (20A)

Inspect for loose or corroded PCM and A/C compressor connections.
m
PINPOINT TEST O : P06A0
adapter(s) may damage the connector. co

O1
EXTERNALLY CONTROLLED VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT COMPRESSOR (EVDC) PERFORMANCE CHECK
.
NOTE: Variable displacement compressors operate at lower pressures (compared to fixed compressors) and depend on
gn
correct system charge for normal operation.
NOTE: The performance check test is used to determine if the Externally Controlled Variable Displacement Compressor
(EVDC) is able to change the displacement by measuring the amperage to the solenoid and monitoring the manifold
ia
pressure gauges soon after the air conditioning clutch is engaged.
Ignition OFF.
rd
Disconnect BJB fuse 3 (20A).

ca
Measure:

CBJB fuse 3 (20A) CBJB fuse 3 (20A)
With a manifold gauge set connected, monitor the low side and high side pressures.
Start the engine. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
Select the floor position on the HVAC controls. Set the temperature control to full warm and the blower to the
lowest setting. Set the A/C to off. Run for 5 minutes to heat up the climate control housing.
Monitor the multi meter and the manifold gauges. Select the PANEL position on the HVAC controls. Set the
temperature control to full cold and the blower to the highest setting. Set the A/C to on.
Record the highest amperage measurement and the A/C pressures.
Did the amperage initially increase approximately 0.8A, and did the low side pressure decrease and the high
side pressure increase and after a few minutes did the amperage and high side pressure decrease and low side
pressure increase?
Yes The Externally Controlled Variable Displacement Compressor (EVDC) is able to change the
displacement. CHECK refrigerant charge amount.
REFER to: Specifications (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Specifications).
No GO to O2
O2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE A/C (AIR CONDITIONING) COMPRESSOR CONTROL SOLENOID
Ignition OFF.
Connect BJB fuse 3 (20A).
Disconnect A/C Compressor Control Solenoid C1110.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C1110-2 Ground
m
Yes GO to O3
. co
gn
ia
O3
(PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
rd
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C1110-1 Ground
Yes GO to O4
O4
(PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C1110-1 Ground
No GO to O5
O5
(PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
m
Measure:

2.3L EcoBoost
. co
gn
C1110-1 C1381B-41
ia
rd

3.5L EcoBoost
ca

C1110-1 C1551B-41

3.5L/3.7L Duratec

C1110-1 C175B-2
Yes INSTALL a new A/C compressor.

CLEAR the DTC and REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC returns, GO to O6
O6
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
P193E
Control system logic,


P193E A/C Clutch Request Signal This DTC sets when the PCM does not receive the A/C request message from the BCM.
Possible Sources
Network concerns
BCM
HVAC control module
PCM
PINPOINT TEST P : P193E

P1
Ignition ON.
Verify that there is an observable symptom present.
m
Yes GO to P2
No
co
.
gn
P2
Ignition ON.

ia
Do the BCM, HVAC control module and PCM pass the network test?
rd
Yes GO to P3
ca
No DIAGNOSE the BCM, HVAC control module or PCM does not communicate with the diagnostic scan
tool.
Testing).
P3
PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Start the engine.
On the HVAC controls, select PANEL mode, then press the A/C button (indicator ON).
Does the AC_REQ PID display YES when the A/C button indicator is illuminated?
Yes GO to P7
No GO to P4
P4
(CC_SW_AC) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the HVAC control module CC_SW_AC PID while pressing and releasing the
A/C button.
Does the PID display Active when the A/C button indicator is illuminated?
Yes GO to P6
No GO to P5
P5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
P6
VERIFY CORRECT BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all BCM electrical connectors.
Repair:
damaged or bent pins – install new terminals or pins
Reconnect all BCM electrical connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

P7
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
(257kW/350PS), Removal and Installation). co
.
gn
ia
rd
The Rear Blower Motor Is Inoperative

ca


B10B0:12 Rear Blower Fan This DTC sets when the module senses high voltage on the relay coil control circuit when the
Relay: Circuit module is energizing the circuit. Customer rear blower will not function.
Short To Battery
Short To Ground will not function when circuit is open, rear blower will be on all the time when circuit is shorted
or Open to ground.
B10BA:12 Rear Blower This DTC sets when the module senses high voltage on the rear blower control PWM circuit.
Control: Circuit The rear blower will not function.
Short To Battery
B10BA:14 Rear Blower This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the rear blower control PWM circuit.
Control: Circuit The rear blower will not function when circuit is open or when circuit is shorted to ground.
Short To Ground
or Open
Possible Sources

Fuse
Rear blower motor relay
Rear blower motor
HVAC control module
m
PINPOINT TEST Q : THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR IS INOPERATIVE
Q1
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
. co
Ignition OFF.
gn
Check the rear blower motor relay.

ia
rd
Yes GO to Q2
ca
No INSTALL a new rear blower motor relay.
Q2
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY SUPPLY VOLTAGES
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Yes GO to Q3
No For Rear blower motor relay socket 1 concern, Refer to the appropriate Symptom Chart to
DIAGNOSE No Power in ON.
For Rear blower motor relay socket 3 concern, VERIFY BJB fuse 41 (40A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the
short.
Q3
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
. co
gn
No GO to Q4
ia
rd
Q4
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

Rear blower motor relay socket 2 C228B-20
Yes GO to Q5
Q5
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3002-2 Ground
Yes GO to Q6
m
Q6
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

. co
gn
C3002-6 Ground
ia

rd
Yes GO to Q7
ca
Q7
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR
A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228B-19 Ground

No GO to Q8
Q8
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR A
SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C228B-19 Ground
Yes GO to Q9
m
Q9
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL PWM (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION) CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
Measure:
. co
gn
C228B-19 C3002-5
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to Q10
Q10
CHECK THE OUTPUTS TO THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR
Disconnect Rear blower motor C3021.
Connect Rear blower motor speed control C3002.
Connect HVACcontrol module C228B.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3021-1 C3021-2
Yes INSTALL a new rear blower motor.

REFER to: Rear Blower Motor (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and Installation).
No GO to Q11
Q11
CHECK THE CIRCUITS TO THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3002-2 C3021-2
m
C3002-1 C3021-1
. co
gn

ia
Yes GO to Q12
rd

ca
Q12
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C3002-1 C3002-2

Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to Q13
Q13
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
The Rear Blower Motor Does Not Operate Correctly

. co
gn

ia
rd
ca


Short To Ground requests will not function when circuit is open, rear blower will be on all the time when circuit is
or Open shorted to ground.
Possible Sources

Fuse
Rear blower motor
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST R : THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
R1
VERIFY THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Observe the rear blower motor operation while selecting each rear blower motor speed.
Does the rear blower motor operate at any setting?
Yes GO to R2
No GO to Pinpoint Test Q
R2
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY COIL CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to R3
ca
R3
CHECK THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR OPERATION WITH THE REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Does the rear fan still operate all the time?
Yes REPAIR the rear blower motor speed control voltage circuit CHA02 (BN/GN) for a short to voltage.
No GO to R4
R4
CHECK FOR CORRECT REAR BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the rear blower motor speed control connector.
Repair:
Connect the rear blower motor speed control connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.

Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to R5
m
R5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
co
.
gn
Repair:
ia
rd

ca
Rear Climate Control - Incorrect Or Erratic Direction Of Airflow From Outlets
To rotate the rear air distribution door actuator, the HVAC control module supplies voltage and ground to the rear air distribution
door actuator through the door actuator motor circuits. To reverse the rear air distribution door actuator rotation, the HVAC
control module reverses the voltage and ground circuits. The rear air distribution door actuator feedback resistors are supplied
a ground from the HVAC control module by the rear air distribution door actuator return circuits and a 5-volt reference voltage
on the rear air distribution door actuator reference circuits. The HVAC control module reads the voltage on the rear air
distribution door actuator feedback circuits to determine the rear air distribution door actuator position by the position of the
actuator feedback resistor wiper arm.
During an actuator calibration cycle, the HVAC control module drives the rear air distribution door until the door reaches both
internal stops in the rear climate control housing. If the rear air distribution door is temporarily obstructed or binding during a
occurs and the HVAC control module commands the actuator to its end of travel, the airflow may not be from the expected
outlets.


B11E4:11 Rear Air Distribution Damper This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
Motor: Circuit Short to Ground actuator motor circuit when voltage is applied to drive the motor, indicating a short
to ground.
B11E4:12 Rear Air Distribution Damper This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Motor: Circuit Short to Battery actuator motor circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a short
m
to voltage.
B11E4:13 Rear Air Distribution Damper This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor circuit
Motor: Circuit Open
co
when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a open circuit.
B1B7D:12 Rear Air Distribution Actuator: This DTC sets when the module senses greater than 5 volts on the actuator
Circuit Short to Battery feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage.
.
B1B7D:14 Rear Air Distribution Actuator: This DTC sets when the module senses less than 1 volt on the actuator feedback
gn
Circuit Short To Ground or circuit, indicating an open circuit or a short to ground.
Open
ia
Possible Sources
rd

Rear air distribution door actuator
Rear air distribution door binding or stuck
ca
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST S : REAR CLIMATE CONTROL - INCORRECT OR ERRATIC DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW FROM
OUTLETS
S1
CHECK THE REAR AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.

Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3044-1 Ground
C3044-2 Ground
C3044-3 Ground
m
C3044-5 Ground
. co
gn
C3044-6 Ground
ia
rd
ca
No GO to S2
S2
CHECK THE REAR AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3044-1 Ground
C3044-2 Ground
C3044-3 Ground
C3044-5 Ground
C3044-6 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to S3
ia

rd
S3
CHECK THE REAR AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C3044-1 C228A-23
C3044-3 C228A-24

C3044-2 C228B-8
C3044-5 C228B-25
C3044-6 C228B-26
m
Yes GO to S4

. co
gn
S4
CHECK THE REAR AIR DISTRIBUTION DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:
ia

rd
C3044-1 C3044-2
C3044-1 C3044-3
ca
C3044-1 C3044-5
C3044-1 C3044-6
C3044-2 C3044-3
C3044-2 C3044-5
C3044-2 C3044-6
C3044-3 C3044-5
m
C3044-3
. co C3044-6
gn
C3044-5 C3044-6
ia
rd
ca
Yes INSTALL a new rear air distribution door actuator,

REFER to: Rear Air Distribution Door Actuator (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to S5
S5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Rear Climate Control Temperature Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly
m
co
To rotate the rear temperature door actuator, the HVAC control module supplies voltage and ground to the rear temperature
door actuator through the door actuator motor circuits. To reverse the rear temperature door actuator rotation, the HVAC control
module reverses the voltage and ground circuits. The rear temperature door actuator feedback resistors are supplied a ground
from the HVAC control module by the rear temperature door actuator return circuits and a 5-volt reference voltage on the rear
.
temperature door actuator reference circuits. The HVAC control module reads the voltage on the rear temperature door
gn
actuator feedback circuits to determine the rear temperature door actuator position by the position of the actuator feedback
resistor wiper arm.
During an actuator calibration cycle, the HVAC control module drives the rear temperature door until the door reaches both
ia
internal stops in the rear climate control housing. If the rear temperature door is temporarily obstructed or binding during a
occurs and the module commands the actuator to its end of travel, the airflow may not be the expected temperature.
rd
ca


B10B7:12 Rear Air Discharge This DTC sets when the module senses greater than 5 volts on the actuator
Temperature: Circuit Short to feedback circuit, indicating a short to voltage.
Battery
B10B7:14 Rear Air Discharge This DTC sets when the module senses less than 1 volt on the actuator feedback
Temperature: Circuit Short To circuit, indicating an open circuit or a short to ground.
Ground or Open
B11E3:11 Rear HVAC Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses lower than expected voltage on an
short to ground.
B11E3:12 Rear HVAC Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses higher than expected voltage on the
Circuit Short to Battery actuator motor circuit when ground is applied to drive the motor, indicating a short
to voltage.
B11E3:13 Rear HVAC Damper Motor: This DTC sets when the module senses no voltage on the actuator motor circuit
Possible Sources

Rear temperature door actuator
Rear temperature door binding or stuck
HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST T : REAR CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE

CORRECTLY
T1
CHECK THE REAR TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
m

. co
gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ia

rd

C3004-1 Ground
ca
C3004-2 Ground
C3004-3 Ground
C3004-5 Ground
C3004-6 Ground
No GO to T2
T2 CHECK THE REAR TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C3004-1
C3004-2
. co Ground
Ground
gn
ia
C3004-3 Ground
rd
ca
C3004-5 Ground
C3004-6 Ground
Yes GO to T3

T3
CHECK THE REAR TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3004-1 C228A-23
C3004-3 C228A-24

m
C3004-2 C228B-7
. co
gn
C3004-5 C228B-27
ia
rd
C3004-6 C228B-28
ca
Yes GO to T4
T4
CHECK THE REAR TEMPERATURE DOOR ACTUATOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C3004-1 C3004-2
C3004-1 C3004-3
C3004-1 C3004-5
C3004-1 C3004-6
C3004-2 C3004-3
m
C3004-2
.co C3004-5
gn
C3004-2 C3004-6
ia
rd
ca
C3004-3 C3004-5
C3004-3 C3004-6
C3004-5 C3004-6

Yes INSTALL a new rear temperature door actuator,
REFER to: Rear Temperature Door Actuator (412-02 Rear Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to T5
T5
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
U0140:00
ca
With the ignition ON, the BCM sends messages to the HVAC control module over the MS-CAN. If the HVAC control module
does not receive these messages within the specified time frame, the module sets a DTC. This can be due to a BCM failure, a
circuit failure on the MS-CAN or an excessive load on the network.


U0140:00 Lost Communication With Body Control This DTC sets in continuous memory if data messages received from
Module: No Sub Type Information the BCM over the MS-CAN are missing for 5 seconds or more.
Possible Sources
Over or undervoltage concerns
BCM
HVAC control module
Inspect for loose or corroded BCM and HVAC control module connections.
PINPOINT TEST U : U0140:00

U1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to U2
m
U2
. co
gn
Yes GO to U3
ia
No DIAGNOSE the BCM does not communicate with the diagnostic scan tool,
Testing).
rd
ca
U3
CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) IN THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Is DTC U3003:16 or DTC U3003:17 present in the BCM?
Yes
Testing).
No GO to U4
U4
Ignition OFF.
Wait 10 seconds.
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to U5
U5
Retrieve and record the Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all modules.
Is DTC U0140 set in 1 or more modules in addition to the HVAC control module?
Yes GO to U6
m
No GO to U7
U6
Ignition OFF.
. co
gn
Disconnect and inspect all BCM electrical connectors (if not previously disconnected).
Repair:
ia

rd
Connect all BCM electrical connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ca

U7
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
U0165:00
m
The RHVAC control module sends messages to the HVAC control module over the MS-CAN. If the RHVAC temperature and
network messages, refer to Section 418-00.

. co
mode switch message is not received by the HVAC control module for 5 seconds or more a DTC is set. For a complete list of all
gn

ia

U0165:00 Lost Communication With HVAC This DTC sets in continuous memory if data messages received from the
rd
Control Module - Rear: No Sub Type RHVAC control module over the MS-CAN are missing for 5 seconds or
Information more.
ca
Possible Sources

HVAC control module
PINPOINT TEST V : U0165:00

V1
Ignition ON.
Does the RHVAC control module pass the network test?
Yes GO to V2
No DIAGNOSE the RHVAC control module does not communicate with the diagnostic scan tool,
Testing).
V2
CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) IN THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR
CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE
Is DTC U3003:16 or DTC U3003:17 present in the HVAC control module?
Yes GO to Pinpoint Test W
No GO to V3
V3
Ignition OFF.
m
Wait 10 seconds.
Ignition ON.
co
.
gn
Yes GO to V4
ia

rd
V4
CHECK FOR DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U0165:00 SET IN OTHER MODULES
ca
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Is DTC U0165:00 set in 1 or more modules in addition to the HVAC control module?
Yes GO to V5
No GO to V6
V5
CHECK FOR CORRECT RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL
MODULE OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the RHVAC control module connector.
Repair:
Reconnect the RHVAC control module connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RHVAC control module.
V6
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
m
Repair:
co
.
gn

ia

rd
ca
U3003:16, U3003:17
The HVAC control module is supplied constant battery voltage and ground.

Voltage Below Threshold voltage is less than 8 volts for more than 10 seconds.
Voltage Above Threshold voltage is greater than 16 volts for more than 10 seconds.
Possible Sources

HVAC control module
Inspect loose or corroded HVAC control module connections.
PINPOINT TEST W : U3003:16, U3003:17

W1
CLEAR THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE DIAGNOSTIC
m
Ignition ON.
co

.
gn
Is DTC U3003:16 or U3003:17 present?
Yes GO to W2
ia
No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to a previous battery
condition.
rd
W2
RETRIEVE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
ca
Start the engine.
Yes DIAGNOSE the charging system. Refer to the appropriate procedure in section 414-00.
No GO to W3
W3
CHECK BATTERY CONDITION
Ignition OFF.
Carry out the Battery Condition Test.

Did the battery pass the condition test?
Yes GO to W4
W4
CHECK THE CHARGING SYSTEM VOLTAGE
NOTE: Do not allow the engine to exceed 2,000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) while carrying out this step or the
generator may self-excite, resulting in default charging system output voltage. If engine exceeds 2,000 Revolutions Per
Minute (RPM), shut the vehicle off and restart the engine before carrying out this step.
Start the engine.
Measure:

For DTCU3003:16, turn the headlights on, set the HVAC fan on high and run engine at 1,500 Revolutions Per
Minute (RPM) for a minimum of 2 minutes.
m
For DTCU3003:17, turn off all accessories and run the engine at 1,500 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) for a
minimum of 2 minutes.
Is the battery voltage between 13-15.2 volts?

. co
Yes For DTCU3006:16, GO to W5
gn
For DTCU3006:17, GO to W7
No DIAGNOSE the charging system.

ia
W5
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE VOLTAGE
rd
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Ignition OFF.
ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228A-26 Ground
Yes GO to W6
W6
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C228A-10 Ground
Yes GO to W7
W7
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
m
Repair:

. co
gn

ia

rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
100-00 General Information
Climate Control System Health and Safety Precautions
WARNING: Air conditioning liquid refrigerant R-134a and R-1234yf are capable of harming eyes or freezing skin.
Always wear safety goggles and avoid contact with liquid refrigerant. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Air conditioning refrigerant R-134a and R-1234yf gases are capable of displacing the air necessary for
breathing in a confined space and can produce toxic gasses if burned at high temperatures. Do not release a large
quantity of R-134a or R-1234yf gas within a confined space or allow it to be exposed to a high temperature flame (such
as a torch). Consult the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for further information. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Use extreme care and observe all safety and service precautions related to the use of refrigerants as
outlined on refrigerant tank and on recovery and charging equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before disconnecting any heater water hoses, shut OFF the engine and wait until engine is fully cool.
m
Failure to comply with this warning may result in serious injury or burns from hot liquid escaping from the engine
cooling system.
co
WARNING: The electric booster heater may become hot during use and can burn unprotected skin. Allow enough
time for the heater to cool before servicing. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
General Procedures
Clockspring Adjustment
Adhesive Tape
WARNING: If the clockspring is not correctly centralized, it may fail prematurely. If in doubt, repeat the centralizing
procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Typical clockspring shown, others similar.
1.
1. NOTICE: Do not over-rotate the clockspring rotor. The internal ribbon wire is connected to the
clockspring rotor. The internal ribbon wire acts as a stop and can be broken from its internal connection.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Turn the clockspring rotor counterclockwise, carefully feeling for resistance to turning.
m
2. Turn the clockspring rotor clockwise so the electrical connector is in the 12 o'clock position.
3. Turn the clockspring rotor clockwise through 5 complete turns ending with the clockspring rotor electrical
connector in the 12 o'clock position.
co
4. NOTE: After final positioning, do not allow the clockspring rotor to rotate from this position.
Turn the clockspring rotor counterclockwise through 2 complete turns ending with the clockspring rotor electrical
.
connector in the 12 o'clock position.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Apply adhesive tape to keep the clockspring rotor from turning after final positioning.
Use the General Equipment: Adhesive Tape
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Clockspring
Removal
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details .
1. NOTE: Follow the unique instructions or graphic for this step in installation.
Refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
2. Refer to: Steering Column Shrouds (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
m
2. Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3.
1. Remove the clockspring screws.
2. Remove the clockspring.
m
Installation

2. NOTICE: If installing a new clockspring, do not remove the clockspring anti-rotation key until the steering wheel
.
is installed. If the anti-rotation key has been removed before installing the steering wheel, the clockspring must
gn
be centered. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: This step is only necessary if adjustment or centralizing is required.
Adjust the clockspring.

ia
Refer to: Clockspring Adjustment (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, General Procedures).
3. NOTE: To install, remove the anti-rotation key from a new clockspring after installing the steering wheel.
rd
Install the steering wheel.

Refer to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
419-03C Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System - Component Location
m
. co
gn
Item Description
1 HUD module
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System - Overview
Overview
The forward collision warning system alerts the driver of a collision risk with a red warning LED indicator bar (which is part of
the HUD module) located above the instrument panel and an audible warning chime from the IPC.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram
m
. co
gn

Network Input Messages - ACM
ia

Message Module
rd
Instrument panel IPC Data used to command a warning chime during possible collision event and audio mute
cluster chime so that the warning chime can be heard.
ca

Network Input Messages - CCM

HUD data HUD module Used for HUD module active, available and fault status.

Network Input Messages - HUD

HUD flash command CCM Flashes the HUD module LED array when commanded.
Ignition status BCM Used for ignition switch position input.

Network Input Messages - IPC

Module
Forward collision chime CCM Data used to command warning chime during possible collision event. When this
request message is received, the IPC sends the audio mute message to the ACM.
Forward collision CCM Data used to command warning chime and messages during possible collision event.
warning message
request
Forward Collision Warning System Operation
The forward collision warning system works in conjunction with the adaptive cruise control system. During a possible collision
event, the CCM commands:
the HUD to flash red warning Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).

the IPC to activate a chime and commands.
m
the ACM to mute audio volume.
The forward collision warning system is activated when the vehicle is moving forward at a speed greater than 8 kmh (5 mph).
co
The CCM determines the distance and relative speed of the vehicle that is in the path of travel, utilizing a radar sensor (integral
to the CCM) to detect other vehicles that are moving in the same direction. If the CCM determines that a collision is possible,
the CCM commands the HUD module Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) to flash and the IPC to chime.
.
The forward collision system has three levels of sensitivity detection (HIGH, NORMAL and LOW) that can be changed in the
gn
message center display in the IPC.
When a system fault is detected with the forward collision warning system, the message COLLISION WARNING NOT
AVAILABLE, COLLISION WARNING NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL, or COLLISION WARNING
ia
MALFUNCTION is displayed in the IPC message center.
rd
CCM
ca
The CCM contains a radar sensor unit that determines the distance and relative speed of the vehicle that is in the path of travel.
HUD
The HUD contains the red Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that warn the driver of a possible collision event when commanded by
the CCM.
There are certain situations when the warning Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) cannot be seen, such as strong sunlight or when
wearing sunglasses. The HUD module has a temperature sensor circuit that is integral to the module that senses the
temperature of the Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) internal to the module. When a high passenger compartment temperature
such as strong sunlight is sensed by the temperature sensor, the warning Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) can be temporarily
disengaged. If this occurs, only the audible warning chime is used.
Warnings may not appear if there is little distance to the vehicle ahead or abrupt steering wheel and pedal movements are
made.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System
DTC Charts

HUD DTC Chart

U0104:00 Lost Communication With Cruise GO to Pinpoint Test C
Control Module: No Sub Type
Information
U0146:00 Lost Communication With Gateway "A": GO to Pinpoint Test D
m
No Sub Type Information
U0405:68 Invalid Data Received From Cruise RETRIEVE and FOLLOW non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Control Module: Event Information . co
(DTCs) from the CCM.
REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With:
Adaptive Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the CCM,
gn
U0447:68 Invalid Data Received From Gateway RETRIEVE and FOLLOW non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes
"A": Event Information (DTCs) from the GWM.
REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications
ia
Network, Diagnosis and Testing).

If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the GWM,
rd
U210A:16 Temperature Sensor: Circuit Voltage GO to Pinpoint Test F

Below Threshold
ca
U210A:17 Temperature Sensor: Circuit Voltage GO to Pinpoint Test F

Above Threshold
U3000:41 Control Module: General Checksum CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If
Failure DTC U3000:41 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new HUD module.
REFER to: Head Up Display (HUD) Module (419-03C Collision Warning
and Collision Avoidance System, Removal and Installation).
U3003:16 Battery Voltage: Circuit Voltage Below GO to Pinpoint Test G
Threshold
U3003:1C Battery Voltage: Circuit Voltage Out of GO to Pinpoint Test H
Range

CCM DTC Chart

C1132:4B Head Up Display: GO to Pinpoint Test E
Over Temperature
All other Diagnostic -
Trouble Codes (DTCs) REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With:
Adaptive Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
Symptom Chart

Symptom Chart

Module does not respond to the Fuse
diagnostic scan tool Wiring, terminals or REFER to: Communications Network (418-00
connectors Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
HUD module Testing).
m
The forward collision warning system is Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test A
inoperative
The HUD module is inoperative
COLLISION WARN NOT AVAILABLE
SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL
CCM
co
Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test B
REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03B Cruise Control -

message in the IPC message center Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control, Diagnosis
.
gn
and Testing).
Too many forward collision warning A MyKey® restricted VERIFY whether a MyKey® restricted key is
events occur key is in use in use. With an admin key, VERIFY forward
Forward collision collision warning system normal operation.
ia
warning sensitivity is CHECK the forward collision warning

set to the most sensitivity setting in the message center
sensitive value menu.
rd
ca
Pinpoint Tests
The Forward Collision Warning System Is Inoperative
REFER to: Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System - System Operation and Component Description (419-03C
Possible Sources

CCM
HUD module
IPC
PINPOINT TEST A : THE FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE

A1
VERIFY THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) AND HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE PASS THE
NETWORK TEST
Do both the CCM and the HUD module pass the network test?
Yes GO to A2
No
Testing).
A2
CHECK THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE SELF-
TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the HUD module self-test.
Are any HUD module Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) recorded?
m
Yes REFER to HUD Module DTC Chart in this section.
No GO to A3
co
A3
CHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the CCM self-test.
gn
Are any CCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) recorded?

ia
Yes REPAIR all CCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). If DTC C1132:4B is present, GO to Pinpoint
Test E For all other CCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),
rd
REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control,
No GO to A4
ca
A4
CHECK THE MESSAGE CENTER FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Check the IPC message center for correct operation.
Does the message center operate correctly?
Yes GO to A5
No
Message Center and Warning Chimes, Diagnosis and Testing).
A5
CHECK FOR CORRECT HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect HUD module connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the HUD module connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HUD module.
REFER to: Head Up Display (HUD) Module (419-03C Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance
The Head Up Display (HUD) Module Is Inoperative
m

co
.
gn
Possible Sources
CCM
ia
HUD module
rd
PINPOINT TEST B : THE HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) MODULE IS INOPERATIVE

B1
CHECK FOR HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE LED PROVE OUT TEST
ca
NOTE: Remove the vehicle from the extreme heat source or sunload condition prior to testing the vehicle.
Ignition ON.
While placing the ignition switch in RUN, observe the HUD module Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Do the HUD module Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) illuminate?
Yes The HUD module Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are operating correctly at this time. The concern may
have been caused by extreme temperatures.
No GO to B2
B2
Ignition ON.
Does the HUD module pass the network test?

Yes GO to B3
No
Testing).
B3
CHECK THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE SELF-
TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a HUD module self-test.
Yes REFER to the HUD Module DTC Chart in this section.

No GO to B4
B4
CHECK THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) SELF-
TEST
m
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a CCM self-test.
(DTCs),
. co
Yes If DTC C1132:4B is present, GO to Pinpoint Test E For all other CCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes
gn
No GO to B5
ia
B5
rd
Ignition OFF.
ca
Repair:
U0104:00


U0104:00 Lost Communication With Cruise Control Sets in the HUD module if data messages received from the
Module: No Sub Type Information CCM over the HS-CAN2 are missing.
m
Possible Sources
CCM
HUD module
co
PINPOINT TEST C : U0104:00
.
C1
gn
Ignition ON.

ia

rd
Yes GO to C2
ca
C2
Does the CCM pass the network test?
Yes GO to C3
No
Testing).
C3
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL
MODULE) SELF-TEST
Yes If DTC C1132:4B is recorded, GO to Pinpoint Test E For any other Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs),
No GO to C4
C4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY)
MODULE SELF-TEST
Yes DIAGNOSE all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the DTC Chart in this
section.
No GO to C5
m
C5
RECHECK THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition OFF.
. co
Ignition ON.
gn
Wait 10 seconds.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve the HUD module Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes
ia
(CMDTCs).
rd
Yes GO to C6
ca
C6
the Programmable Module Installation (PMI), or the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) may not have been carried
out.
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the HUD module and CCM.
re-configure module using As-Built data if prior configuration is suspect
return the swapped module to source vehicle and obtain a new replacement module

Yes GO to C7
C7
CHECK FOR CORRECT CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect CCM connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the CCM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new CCM.
No
co
REFER to: Cruise Control Module (CCM) (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise
Control, Removal and Installation).
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by module
.
gn
ia
U0146:00
rd

ca


U0146:00 Lost Communication With Gateway "A": No Sets in the HUD module if data messages received from the GWM
Sub Type Information over the HS-CAN2 are missing.
Possible Sources
HUD module
GWM
PINPOINT TEST D : U0146:00

D1
Ignition ON.
Verify there is an observable concern.
Yes GO to D2
D2
Does the GWM pass the network test?
Yes GO to D3
m
No
Testing).
co
D3
CHECK GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) CONTINUOUS MEMORY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (CMDTCS)
.
gn
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve GWM Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
Are any Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) recorded?

ia
Yes
rd
Testing).
No GO to D4
ca
D4
PERFORM THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE SELF-TEST
Are non-network any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) recorded?
Yes DIAGNOSE the non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the HUD Module DTC
Chart in this section.
No GO to D5
D5
RECHECK THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Repeat the HUD module self-test.
Yes GO to D6
D6
out.
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the HUD module and GWM.
m

. co
Yes GO to D7
gn
ia
D7
rd
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect GWM connector and related in-line connectors.

ca
Repair:
Reconnect the GWM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new GWM.
Installation).
C1132:4B
The HUD module is designed with a temperature sensor internal to the module. Due to extremely hot weather conditions, the
temperature sensor circuit allows the HUD module to disable under high temperature conditions, which could damage the HUD
module Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs). The HUD module is designed with a LED prove-out test. Upon each ignition cycle when
the ignition switch is in RUN, the Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) illuminate for a period of time indicating the HUD module is
functional.


C1132:4B Head Up Display: Over Sets as a continuous memory and on-demand DTC in the CCM if the HUD module
Temperature is over-temperature.
m
Possible Sources
HUD module
. co
PINPOINT TEST E : C1132:4B
gn
E1
Ignition ON.

ia

rd
Yes GO to E2
ca
No
Testing).
E2
CHECK FOR HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) PROVE-OUT TEST
NOTE: Remove the vehicle from the extreme heat source or sunload condition prior to testing the vehicle.
Ignition ON.
While placing the ignition switch in RUN, observe the HUD module Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Do the HUD module light emitting diodes (LEDs) illuminate?
Yes The HUD module Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are operating correctly at this time. The concern may
have been caused by extreme temperatures.
No GO to E3
E3
CHECK THE DTCS FROM THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE SELF-TEST
Are any HUD module Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) recorded?
Yes REFER to the HUD Module DTC Chart in this section.
No GO to E4
E4
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
U210A:16 Or U210A:17
ca


U210A:16 Temperature Sensor: Circuit Sets in continuous memory in the HUD module when the internal temperature
Voltage Below Threshold sensor circuit is below the lowest valid temperature value.
U210A:17 Temperature Sensor: Circuit Sets in continuous memory in the HUD module when the internal temperature
Voltage Above Threshold sensor circuit is above the highest valid temperature value.
Possible Sources
HUD module
PINPOINT TEST F : U210A:16 OR U210A:17
F1
CHECK FOR HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Engine OFF.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the HUD module Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
Retrieve Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
Is DTC U210A:16 or U210A:17 recorded?
Yes GO to F2
No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously due to an
internal intermittent fault with the temperature sensor circuit.
F2
Ignition OFF.
m
Repair:

. co
gn

ia

rd
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HUD.
ca
U3003:16


U3003:16 Battery Voltage: Circuit Set by the HUD module in continuous memory if the HUD module detects low
Voltage Below Threshold battery voltage below 7 volts for more than 500 ms.
Possible Sources

Battery
Generator
PCM
HUD module
PINPOINT TEST G : U3003:16

G1
CHECK THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Repeat the HUD module self-test.
m
Yes GO to G2
No
co
The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to a previous low
battery voltage condition.
.
gn
G2
CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) IN THE PCM (POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE)
ia

rd

ca
Yes For 2.3L GTDI,

REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - 2.3L EcoBoost
For 3.5L GTDI, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
For 3.5L TiVCT, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
For 3.7L TiVCT, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L
No GO to G3
G3
Yes GO to G4
No
G4
CHECK THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect HUD module C2395.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2395-5 Ground
m
Yes GO to G5
. co
G5
CHECK THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
gn
Measure:

ia

C2395-5 C2395-1
rd
ca
Yes GO to G6
G6
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

U3003:1C
m

DTC Description
U3003:1C Battery Voltage: Circuit Voltage Out
of Range
Sets in continuous memory if the HUD module detects battery voltage
outside the valid range.
.
gn
Possible Sources
ia

Battery
rd
Generator
HUD module
ca
PINPOINT TEST H : U3003:1C

NOTE: DTC U3003:1C may be stored in the module memory due to past battery charging or vehicle jump starting
events.
H1
CHECK FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) SET IN OTHER MODULES
Ignition ON.
Retrieve the Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all modules.
Do any charging system Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) set in more than one module?
Yes For 2.3L GTDI,

REFER to: Charging System - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS) (414-00 Charging System - General
Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
For 3.5L GTDI, REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS) (414-00 Charging
System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
For 3.5L TiVCT, REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging
No GO to H2
H2
Turn off all the interior/exterior lights and accessories.
Yes For 2.3L GTDI,

No GO to H3
m
H3
RECHECK FOR DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U3003:1C
Engine OFF.
Ignition ON. co
Clear the HUD module Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
.
gn
Is DTC U3003:1C still present?

ia
Yes GO to H4
rd
No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously during battery
charging or while jump starting the vehicle.
ca
H4
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
418-00 Module Communications Network 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Communications Network - Overview
Overview
Multiplexing is a method of sending 2 or more signals simultaneously over a single circuit. Multiplexing allows 2 or more
electronic modules (nodes) to communicate over a twisted wire pair [data (+) and data (-)] network. The information or
messages that can be communicated on these wires consists of commands, status or data. Multiplexing reduces the weight of
the vehicle by reducing the number of redundant components and electrical wiring.
The vehicle has 2 module communication networks connected to the DLC, located under the instrument panel. The
communication networks are:
HS-CAN1
HS-CAN2
The vehicle has 2 module communication networks that communicate on the network, but do not communicate directly with the
diagnostic scan tool. The GWM translates the messages on these 2 networks, and transfers the signals to the HS-CAN2 to
communicate with the diagnostic scan tool. The communication networks are:
m
HS-CAN3
MS-CAN)
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Communications Network - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
Module Network Chart
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

Module Network Chart
Module Name Network Type Terminating Module

APIM HS-CAN1 No
HS-CAN3 No
ATCM (if equipped) HS-CAN2 No
ABS module HS-CAN2 No
ACM HS-CAN3 No
Audio DSP (if equipped) HS-CAN3 No
BECMB HS-CAN1 No
BCM HS-CAN1 No
CCM (if equipped) HS-CAN2 No
DACMC (if equipped) (integral with ACM) HS-CAN3 No
DDM (if equipped) MS-CAN No
DSM (if equipped) MS-CAN No
SCMG (if equipped) MS-CAN No
SCMH (if equipped) MS-CAN No
FCIMB HS-CAN3 No
FCDIM (if equipped) HS-CAN3 No
SCME (if equipped) (integral with DSM) MS-CAN No
GWM HS-CAN1 Yes
HS-CAN2 Yes
HS-CAN3 Yes
m
MS-CAN Yes
GFM (Police option only) HS-CAN3 No
GPSM (if equipped)
HCM (if equipped)
. co MS-CAN
HS-CAN1
No
No
HUD module (if equipped) HS-CAN2 No
gn
HSWM (if equipped) MS-CAN No
HVAC module MS-CAN Yes
ia
IPC HS-CAN3 Yes

IPMA (if equipped) HS-CAN2 No
rd
IPMB (if equipped) HS-CAN2 No

OCS module HS-CAN2 No
ca
PAM (if equipped) (integral with BCM) HS-CAN1 No

PSCM HS-CAN2 No
PCM HS-CAN1 Yes
PDM (if equipped) MS-CAN No
RTM MS-CAN No
RGTM (if equipped) MS-CAN No
RHVAC module (if equipped) MS-CAN No
RCM HS-CAN2 No
SODL (if equipped) MS-CAN No
SODR (if equipped) MS-CAN No
SCCM HS-CAN2 Yes
Network Termination
The CAN uses network termination to improve communication reliability. Termination modules are located at both ends of the
network. As network messages are broadcast in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the
termination resistors.
Each termination module has an internal 120 ohm resistor that bridges across the positive and negative bus connection. With
two 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or total resistance, is 60 ohms.
Network termination improves bus message reliability by stabilizing bus voltage and eliminating electrical interference.
Gateway Module
The GWM is mounted under the driver side instrument panel. A DLC is fitted to the GWM for diagnostic scan tool access.
The GWM acts as a central gateway to translate messages across all 4 vehicle controller area networks (CANs), and vice
versa. The GWM is the only module on this vehicle with this ability.
The 2 module communication networks connected directly to the DLC are HS-CAN1 and HS-CAN2. These 2 networks
communicate directly with the diagnostic scan tool. The other 2 communication networks, HS-CAN3 and MS-CAN,
communicate on the network, but do not communicate directly with the diagnostic scan tool. The GWM translates the
messages from these 2 networks to the HS-CAN2, which transfers the signals to the diagnostic scan tool.
m
. co
gn
ia
High Speed Controller Area Network 1 and 2 (HS-CAN1, HS-CAN2)

rd
The HS-CAN1 and HS-CAN2 operate at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps and are designed for real time powertrain
and driver feature information transfer and control. Modules on the HS-CAN1 and HS-CAN2 communicate using bussed
messages. The HS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool
ca
communication, the HS-CAN allows sharing of information between all modules on each HS-CAN.
With the addition of more modules, network traffic has increased. This has created the need for an additional HS-CAN to
manage the increased bus data carried on each network.
The GWM is used as a gateway for the messages to transfer between the scan tool and the modules on the HS-CAN1 and the
modules on the HS-CAN2.
The scan tool communicates with the vehicle communication networks directly through the HS-CAN1 and HS-CAN2.
High Speed Controller Area Network 3 (HS-CAN3)
The HS-CAN3, or the Infotainment Controller Area Network (I-CAN), operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps
and is designed for real time audio, multimedia and driver information transfer and control. Modules on the HS-CAN3
communicate using bussed messages. HS-CAN3 uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits,
and allows sharing of information between all modules on the network.
The GWM is used as a gateway for the messages to transfer between the scan tool and the modules on the HS-CAN3.
The GWM translates the diagnostic messages from the HS-CAN2 to the HS-CAN3 and vice versa, allowing communication
beween the modules on the HS-CAN3 and the scan tool.
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
The MS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 125 Kbps and is designed for general information transfer.
Modules on the MS-CAN communicate using bussed messages. The MS-CAN uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus
(+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, the MS-CAN allows sharing of information between all
modules on the network.
The GWM is used as a gateway for the messages to transfer between the scan tool and the modules on the MS-CAN.
The GWM translates the diagnostic messages from the HS-CAN2 to the MS-CAN and vice versa, allowing communication
between the modules on the MS-CAN and the scan tool.
Controller Area Network (CAN) Fault Tolerance
NOTE: The oscilloscope traces shown are from the IDS oscilloscope taken using the IDS pre-configured CAN settings. The
traces are for both data (+) and data (-) taken simultaneously (2-channel) at a sample rate of 1 mega-sample per second
(1MS/s) or greater.
Fault Tolerance Normal Operation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
The data (+) and data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested network traffic. As
ca
messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is
reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a message is sent.
Successful communication of a message can usually be identified by the slight spike at the end of a message transmission.
Any signals that are significantly different than the normal CAN waveform may cause network Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs) (U-codes) to set or may cause a complete network outage.
CAN Circuits Shorted Together

m
In the event the data (+) and data (-) circuits become shorted together, the signal stays at base voltage (2.5V) continuously and
all communication capabilities are lost.
CAN (+) Circuit Shorted to Ground

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
In the event the data (+) circuit becomes shorted to ground, both the data (+) and data (-) circuits are pulled low (0V) and all
communication capabilities are lost.
CAN (-) Circuit Shorted to Ground

m
In the event the data (-) circuit becomes shorted to ground, the data (-) circuit is pulled low (0V) and the data (+) circuit reaches
near-normal peak voltage (3.0V) during communication but falls to 0V instead of normal base voltage (2.5V). Communication
may continue but at a degraded level.
CAN (+) Circuit Shorted to Battery Voltage

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
In the event the data (+) circuit becomes shorted to battery voltage, the data (+) circuit is pulled high (12V) and the data (-)
circuit falls to abnormally high voltage (above 5V) during communication and reaches battery voltage (12V) for peak voltage.
Communication may continue but at a degraded level.
CAN (-) Circuit Shorted to Battery Voltage

m
In the event the data (-) circuit becomes shorted to battery voltage, both the data (+) and data (-) circuits are pulled high (12V)
and all communication capabilities are lost.
CAN Circuit Signal Corruption

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Rhythmic oscillations, inductive spikes or random interference can corrupt the network communications. The corruption signal
source may be outside electrical interference such as motors or solenoids or internal interference generated from a module on
the network. In some cases, an open in either the data (+) or data (-) circuit to a network module may cause the module to emit
interference on the one circuit which is still connected. The trace shown is an example of a "sawtooth" pattern transmitted from
a module with one open network circuit.
Other corruptions may be present when a module is intermittently powered up and down. The module on power up may initiate
communication out of sync with other modules on the network causing momentary communication outages.
Controller Area Network (CAN) Multiplex Messages

Network Message Originating Module Network Type Receiving Module(s)
911 Assist™ override status IPC HS-CAN3 APIM
A/C clutch status PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
A/C clutch status GWM MS-CAN HVAC module
A/C clutch status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
ABS active ABS module HS-CAN2 RCM

CCM
PSCM
GWM
ABS active GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

PAM
ABS warning indicator request ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
ABS warning indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
m
ABS warning indicator request GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Accelerator pedal position PCM

. co HS-CAN1 BCM
GWM
Accelerator pedal position GWM HS-CAN2 RCM

gn
ABS module
OCS module
CCM
ia
Accelerator pedal position GWM HS-CAN3 DACMC

ACM
rd
APIM
Accessory delay BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

ca
Accessory delay GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
Accessory delay GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

DACMC
IPC
ACM track information ACM HS-CAN3 APIM

IPC
Active noise audio status DACMC HS-CAN3 DSP

ACM
Active park assist chime request PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Active park assist chime request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Active park assist mode request APIM HS-CAN3 GWM
Active park assist mode request GWM HS-CAN1 PAM

Active park assist mode status PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Active park assist mode status GWM HS-CAN3 FCDIM

IPC
Active park assist status PAM HS-CAN1 BCM

GWM
Active park assist status GWM HS-CAN2 IPMB
Active park assist status GWM MS-CAN SODL

SODR
Active park assist status GWM HS-CAN3 FCDIM

APIM
IPC
Active park assist steering angle control status PSCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Active park assist steering angle control status GWM HS-CAN1 PAM
m
Active park assist steering angle request PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Active park assist steering angle request
Adaptive cruise control cancel request

GWM
CCM
. co
HS-CAN2
HS-CAN2
PSCM
ABS module
GWM
gn
Adaptive cruise control cancel request GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

ia
Adaptive cruise control deceleration request CCM HS-CAN2 ABS

RCM
rd
Adaptive cruise control distance sensitvity CCM HS-CAN2 ABS

RCM
ca
Adaptive cruise control enabled IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Adaptive cruise control enabled GWM HS-CAN2 CCM
Adaptive cruise control engine status PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Adaptive cruise control engine status GWM HS-CAN2 CCM
Adaptive cruise control follow mode CCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Adaptive cruise control follow mode GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Adaptive cruise control gap distance display CCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Adaptive cruise control gap distance display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Adaptive cruise control gap select SCCM HS-CAN2 CCM
Adaptive cruise control resume enabled CCM HS-CAN2 GWM

Adaptive cruise control resume enabled GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Adaptive cruise control service required CCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Adaptive cruise control service required GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Adaptive cruise control switch commands SCCM HS-CAN2 CCM

GWM
Adaptive cruise control switch commands GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Adaptive cruise control warning request CCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Adaptive cruise control warning request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Adaptive headlamp fault status HCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Adaptive headlamp fault status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Airbag deployment status RCM HS-CAN2 GWM
m
Airbag deployment status GWM HS-CAN1 APIM
Airbag warning indicator request
Airbag warning indicator request

RCM
GWM
. co HS-CAN2
HS-CAN3
GWM
IPC
gn
Airbag warning indicator status IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Airbag warning indicator status GWM HS-CAN2 RCM

ia
AWD lock request ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM

rd
AWD lock request GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

ca
Ambient air temperature PCM HS-CAN1 GWM

PAM
BCM
Ambient air temperature GWM MS-CAN HVAC module
Ambient air temperature GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Ambient air temperature GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

SCCM
Ambient air temperature filtered PCM HS-CAN1 BCM

PAM
GWM
Ambient air temperature filtered GWM HS-CAN2 IPMA
Ambient air temperature filtered GWM MS-CAN HVAC module

RGTM
Ambient air temperature filtered GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

Ambient light color/intensity BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Ambient light color/intensity GWM HS-CAN3 APIM
Ambient light color/intensity request APIM HS-CAN3 GWM
Ambient light color/intensity request GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Ambient light sensor SCCM HS-CAN2 IPMA

GWM
Ambient light sensor GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

HCM
Audio front control module alert ACM HS-CAN3 IPC
Audio settings IPC HS-CAN3 ACM

APIM
Audio source select IPC HS-CAN3 ACM
m
Audio source status ACM HS-CAN3 APIM
DSP
IPC
Audio system response status ACM

. co
HS-CAN3
FCIMB
APIM
DSP
gn
IPC
Auto high beam indication request IPMA HS-CAN2 GWM

ia
Auto high beam indication request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

rd
Auxiliary lamp request (Police option only) GFM HS-CAN3 IPC

ca
AWD locked wheel display PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
AWD locked wheel display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
AWD locking status PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
AWD locking status GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module
AWD locking status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
AWD service required PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
AWD service required GWM HS-CAN2 RCM
AWD service required GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
AWD status display PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
AWD status display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
AWD terrain mode command PCM HS-CAN1 GWM

AWD terrain mode command GWM HS-CAN2 ATCM
AWD terrain mode command GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Backlit LED status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Backlit LED status GWM HS-CAN3 FCDIM

FCIMB
Backlit LED status GWM HS-CAN2 ATCM
Backlit LED status GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
RHVAC module
Battery low state of charge BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Battery low state of charge GWM MS-CAN HVAC module
Battery low state of charge GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
m
FCDIM
APIM
Battery shed level request

.BCM co
HS-CAN1 PCM
GWM
Battery shed level request GWM HS-CAN2 SCCM

gn
Battery shed level request GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
HVAC module
ia
Battery shed level request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

rd
APIM
FCDIM
ca
Bezel diagnostics APIM HS-CAN3 ACM

DSP
FCIMB
BLIS® Driver LED status DDM MS-CAN SODL

SODR
BLIS® Passenger LED status PDM MS-CAN SODL

SODR
BLIS® enable request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
BLIS® enable request GWM MS-CAN SODL

SODR
BLIS®/CTA® LED command-left SODL MS-CAN DDM

PDM
GWM
BLIS®/CTA® LED command-left GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
BLIS®/CTA® LED command-right SODR MS-CAN DDM

PDM
GWM
BLIS®/CTA® LED command-right GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Body service required request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Body service required request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Brake (red) warning indicator request ABS module HS-CAN2 RCM

GWM
Brake (red) warning indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Brake (red) warning indicator request GWM HS-CAN1 PAM
Brake fluid level low message request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Brake fluid level low message request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Brake pedal applied PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
m
Brake pedal applied GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module
. co CCM
RCM
OCS module
gn
Brake pedal applied GWM HS-CAN3 APIM
IPC
Brake pedal movement ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM

ia
Brake pedal movement GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

rd
Calculated steering angle IPMA HS-CAN2 PSCM

ca
Camera defog request IPMA HS-CAN2 GWM
Camera defog request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Camera settings BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Camera settings GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

IPC
Camera settings request APIM HS-CAN3 GWM
Camera settings request GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Camera settings status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Camera settings status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Camera status IPMA HS-CAN2 GWM
Camera status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

Check fuel fill inlet message request PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Check fuel fill inlet message request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Child lock message display request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Child lock message display request GWM MS-CAN DDM
Child lock message display request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Child lock request DDM MS-CAN GWM
Child lock request GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Chime source IPC HS-CAN3 ACM

Audio DSP
Climate control button status HVAC module MS-CAN GWM
Climate control button status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
m
FCIMB
Climate control seat settings request
Climate control seat settings status

.
SCME
co
HVAC module MS-CAN
MS-CAN
SCME
HVAC module
gn
Climate control temperature request HVAC module MS-CAN GWM
Climate control temperature request GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

ia
Collision mitigation by braking decleration ABS module HS-CAN2 CCM

rd
Collision mitigation by braking event status display CCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Collision mitigation by braking event status display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

ca
Compass direction (with touchscreen) APIM HS-CAN3 IPC
Courtesy battery saver BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Courtesy battery saver GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
Courtesy battery saver GWM HS-CAN3 ACM

DSP
Crash event status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Crash event status GWM MS-CAN HVAC module
Cross traffic alert enable request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Cross traffic alert enable request GWM MS-CAN SODL

SODR
Cross traffic alert left status SODL MS-CAN DDM

PDM
GWM
Cross traffic alert left status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Cross traffic alert right status SODR MS-CAN DDM

PDM
GWM
Cross traffic alert right status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Cross traffic alert track left SODL MS-CAN SODR
Cross traffic alert track right SODR MS-CAN SODL
Cruise control disable command ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Cruise control disable command GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Cruise control mode PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
m
Cruise control mode GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module
Cruise control override
Cruise control override

.PCM
GWM
co HS-CAN1
HS-CAN3
GWM
IPC
gn
Cruise control override GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module
CCM
RCM
ia
Cruise control set speed display PCM HS-CAN1 GWM

rd
Cruise control set speed display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Cruise control speed request PCM HS-CAN1 GWM

ca
Cruise control speed request GWM HS-CAN2 CCM

PSCM
Cruise control speed request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Cruise control status PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Cruise control status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Cruise control status GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

CCM
RCM
OCS module
Cruise control switch commands SCCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Cruise control switch commands GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Date/time settings APIM HS-CAN3 IPC

Audio DSP
Day/night status BCM HS-CAN1 PAM
GWM
Day/night status GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
RHVAC module
Day/night status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

ACM
APIM
FCIMB
Day/night status GWM HS-CAN2 CCM

IPMA
Daytime running lamps status BCM HS-CAN1 HCM

GWM
Daytime running lamps status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Display language request APIM HS-CAN3 IPC
m
Display speed offset data IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Display speed offset data
Do not disturb override status

.GWM
IPC
co
HS-CAN1
HS-CAN3
PCM
APIM
gn
Driver door ajar status BCM HS-CAN1 PAM
GWM
ia
Driver door ajar status GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

IPMA
CCM
rd
IPMB
ca
Driver door ajar status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
DACMC
FCDIM
Driver door ajar status GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
RSM
Driver door lock switch status DDM MS-CAN GWM
Driver door lock switch status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Driver massage seat adjustment SCMG MS-CAN GWM
Driver massage seat adjustment GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Driver massage seat status SCMG MS-CAN GWM
Driver massage seat status GWM HS-CAN3 APIM
Driver safety belt status RCM HS-CAN2 GWM

Driver safety belt status GWM HS-CAN1 APIM
Driver safety belt buckle status RCM HS-CAN2 ABS module

CCM
GWM
Driver safety belt buckle status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Driver safety belt buckle status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

PCM
DSP chime request DSP HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
ACM
Easy entry request DSM MS-CAN SCMG

SCMH
eCall confirmation APIM HS-CAN1 BCM

GWM
m
eCall confirmation GWM HS-CAN2 RCM
eCall notification
eCall notification
RCM
GWM
. co HS-CAN2
HS-CAN1
GWM
APIM
gn
Emergency brake lamp request ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Emergency brake lamp request GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

ia
Engine coolant temperature data PCM HS-CAN1 GWM

BCM
rd
Engine coolant temperature data GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

ca
Engine coolant temperature data GWM MS-CAN HVAC module
Engine idle shutdown request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Engine idle shutdown request GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Engine idle shutdown status PCM HS-CAN1 BCM

GWM
Engine idle shutdown status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Engine oil life PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Engine oil life GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Engine oil life data reset IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Engine oil life data reset GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Engine overheat indication request PCM HS-CAN1 GWM

Engine overheat indication request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Engine rpm data PCM HS-CAN1 GWM

BCM
HCM
Engine rpm data GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

DACMC
Engine rpm data GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

RCM
Engine rpm data GWM MS-CAN HVAC module
Engine service required request PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Engine service required request GWM HS-CAN2 RCM
Engine service required request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
m
Engine status PCM HS-CAN1 BCM
GWM
Engine status
Engine status
GWM
GWM
. co HS-CAN2
MS-CAN
ABS module
HVAC module
gn
Engine status GWM HS-CAN3 ACM
APIM
DACMC
DSP
ia
English/metric mode IPC HS-CAN3 GWM

rd
English/metric mode GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

ca
English/metric mode GWM MS-CAN HVAC module
EPAS data PSCM HS-CAN2 GWM
EPAS data GWM HS-CAN1 PAM
EPAS failure PSCM HS-CAN2 GWM
EPAS failure GWM HS-CAN1 PAM
EPAS failure GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Evaporator temperature HVAC module MS-CAN GWM
Evaporator temperature GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Factory mode BCM HS-CAN1 PCM

PAM
HCM
GWM
Factory mode GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module
CCM
Factory mode GWM MS-CAN DDM

HVAC module
HSWM
PDM
RGTM
RHVAC module
RTM
Factory mode GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
ACM
DSP
FCIMB
Folder/track information request IPC HS-CAN3 ACM
Forward collision chime request CCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Forward collision chime request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
m
Forward collision warning message request CCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Forward collision warning message request GWM coHS-CAN3 IPC
Forward distance alert display CCM HS-CAN2 GWM

.
gn
Forward distance alert display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Front blower status FCIMB HS-CAN3 GWM

ia
Front blower status GWM MS-CAN HVAC module

rd
Front camera status IPMB HS-CAN2 GWM

ca
Front camera status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Front fog lamp indicator request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Front fog lamp indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Front massage seat adjustment request APIM HS-CAN3 GWM
Front massage seat adjustment request GWM MS-CAN SCMG

SCMH
Front park aid enable request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Front park aid enable request GWM HS-CAN1 PAM
Front parking aid chime request PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Front parking aid chime request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
FCDIM
Front passenger detect status RCM HS-CAN2 OCS module
GWM
Front passenger detect status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Front wiper status SCCM HS-CAN2 CCM

IPMA
GWM
Front wiper status GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

BCM
HCM
Front wiper status GWM MS-CAN HVAC module

SODL
SODR
Front wiper status GWM HS-CAN3 APIM
Frost warning IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
m
Frost warning GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Fuel flow volume display PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Fuel flow volume display GWM

. co
HS-CAN3 IPC
APIM
gn
Gear lever position PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
BCM
PAM
HCM
ia
Gear lever position GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

rd
CCM
RCM
SCCM
ca
Gear lever position GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Gear lever position GWM MS-CAN DDM

DSM
HVAC module
GPSM
PDM
RGTM
SODL
SODR
SCMG
SCMH
GPS compass direction (without touchscreen GPSM MS-CAN GWM

RSM
GPS compass direction GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
GPS data (without touchscreen) GPSM MS-CAN GWM

RSM
GPS data GWM HS-CAN3 APIM
Grill shutter position command PCM HS-CAN1 BCM

GWM
Grill shutter position command GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Hands off status PSCM HS-CAN2 IPMA

GWM
Hands off status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Head up display menu option status HUD module HS-CAN3 IPC
Head up display flash rate CCM HS-CAN2 HUD module

IPMA
Head up display flash command CCM HS-CAN2 HUD module
Head up display data HUD module HS-CAN2 CCM

GWM
m
Head up display data GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Head up display fault

. co
HUD module HS-CAN2 CCM
GWM
gn
Head up display fault GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Head up display LED bulb check IPC HS-CAN3 GWM

ia
Head up display LED bulb check GWM HS-CAN2 HUD module

rd
Headlamp flash to pass status SCCM HS-CAN2 IPMA

GWM
ca
Headlamp flash to pass status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

HCM
Headlamp high status BCM HS-CAN1 HCM

GWM
Headlamp high status GWM HS-CAN2 IPMA
Headlamp low beam out BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Headlamp low beam out GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Headlamp low status BCM HS-CAN1 HCM

GWM
Headlamp low status GWM HS-CAN2 SCCM
Headlamp on warning chime BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Headlamp on warning chime GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

Headlamp switch status BCM HS-CAN1 HCM
GWM
Headlamp switch status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Headlamp switch status GWM HS-CAN2 IPMA
Heated steering wheel command status HVAC module MS-CAN GWM
Heated steering wheel command status GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

IPC
FCIMB
High beam status BCM HS-CAN1 PCM

HCM
GWM
High beam status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Hill start assist mode request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
m
Hill start assist mode request GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module
Hill start assist status ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Hill start assist status GWM

. co HS-CAN1 PCM
Hill start assist status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

gn
Home safe lamp indicator request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

ia
Home safe lamp indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

rd
Hood ajar status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Hood ajar status GWM HS-CAN3 DACMC

ca
IPC
Hood ajar status GWM MS-CAN RSM
HVAC A/C request HVAC module MS-CAN GWM
HVAC A/C request GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
HVAC front/rear blower status HVAC module MS-CAN GWM
HVAC front/rear blower status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
HVAC remote start request HVAC module HS-CAN1 GWM
HVAC remote start request GWM MS-CAN PCM
Ignition key type BCM HS-CAN1 PCM

PAM
GWM
Ignition key type GWM MS-CAN SODL

SODR
RSM
Ignition key type GWM HS-CAN2 CCM

IPMA
Ignition key type GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Ignition status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

PCM
PAM
HCM
BECMB
Ignition status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

ACM
APIM
DSP
DACMC
FCDIM
Ignition status GWM MS-CAN DDM
m
DSM
HVAC module
GPSM
. co HSWM
PDM
RGTM
RHVAC module
gn
RSM
RTM
SODL
SODR
ia
SCME
SCME
SCMH
rd
Ignition status GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

SCCM
ca
RCM
OCS module
PSCM
HUD module
IPMA
CCM
ATCM
Illumination dimming level BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Illumination dimming level GWM HS-CAN2 ATCM
Illumination dimming level GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
RHVAC module
Illumination dimming level GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

ACM
APIM
FCIMB
Immobilizer message request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

Immobilizer message request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Input controller button activation FCIMB HS-CAN3 APIM
Input controller button state SCCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Input controller button state GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
IPC chime request IPC HS-CAN3 ACM

DSP
Key-in-ignition status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Key-in-ignition status GWM MS-CAN DSM

RSM
RTM
SCMG
SCMH
m
Key-in-ignition status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Key-in-ignition indicator status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Key-in-ignition indicator status GWM

. coHS-CAN3 IPC
Keypad code BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

gn
Keypad code GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

ia
Lane departure warning status request IPMA HS-CAN2 PSCM
Lane keeping alert request IPMA HS-CAN2 PSCM

rd
GWM
Lane keeping alert request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

ca
Lane keeping system available PSCM HS-CAN2 IPMA

GWM
Lane keeping system available GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Lane keeping system status display IPMA HS-CAN2 GWM
Lane keeping system status display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Lane keeping aid intervention request IPMA HS-CAN2 GWM

PSCM
Lane keeping aid intervention request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Lane keeping system hands off display IPMA HS-CAN2 GWM
Lane keeping system hands off display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Lane keeping system ramp type request IPMA HS-CAN2 PSCM

Lane keeping system status display IPMA HS-CAN2 GWM
Lane keeping system status display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Lane keeping system switch status IPMA HS-CAN2 GWM
Lane keeping system switch status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Language update status IPC HS-CAN3 APIM
Left rear door ajar status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

PAM
Left rear door ajar status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

DACMC
APIM
Left rear door ajar status GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

IPMB
Left rear door ajar status GWM MS-CAN DDM
m
PDM
RSM
Left turn lamp request BCM

. co
HS-CAN1 GWM
HCM
Left turn lamp request GWM HS-CAN2 SCCM

gn
IPMA
Left turn lamp request GWM MS-CAN DDM

ia
PDM
Liftgate ajar status BCM HS-CAN1 PAM

rd
GWM
ca
Liftgate ajar status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

DACMC
Liftgate ajar status GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

IPMB
Liftgate ajar status GWM MS-CAN RSM
Liftgate command RGTM MS-CAN GWM
Liftgate command GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Liftgate request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Liftgate request GWM MS-CAN RGTM
Manual mirror override DDM MS-CAN DSM
Memory feedback request DSM MS-CAN GWM
Memory feedback request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

Memory seat auto movement cancel DSM MS-CAN DDM
PDM
SCMG
Memory seat switch request DSM MS-CAN GWM
Memory seat switch request GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Memory seat switch status DDM MS-CAN DSM
Message center display IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Message center display GWM HS-CAN2 SCCM

IPMA
IPMB
CCM
Message center display GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

HCM
Message center display GWM MS-CAN DDM
m
HVAC module
DSM
Message center feature configuration
Message center feature configuration

IPC
GWM
. co HS-CAN3
HS-CAN2
GWM
SCCM
IPMA
gn
IPMB
CCM
ia
Message center feature configuration GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

HCM
rd
Message center feature configuration GWM MS-CAN DDM

HVAC module
DSM
ca
MIL request PCM HS-CAN1 BCM

GWM
MIL request GWM HS-CAN2 RCM
MIL request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Mirror heat on request HVAC module MS-CAN DDM

PDM
MyKey® Beltminder audio mute IPC HS-CAN3 ACM

APIM
DSP
MyKey® change key type request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
MyKey® change key type request GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Navigation information APIM HS-CAN3 IPC

Neutral tow mode request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Neutral tow mode request GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
OCS fault status OCS module HS-CAN2 RCM
OCS sensor data OCS module HS-CAN2 RCM

GWM
OCS sensor data GWM MS-CAN HVAC module

SCMG
SCMH
OCS serial number OCS module HS-CAN2 RCM
OCS vehicle calibration data OCS module HS-CAN2 RCM
Odometer count PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Odometer count GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
m
Odometer master value IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
APIM
Odometer master value GWM

. co HS-CAN2 ABS module
PSCM
IPMA
gn
Odometer master value GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

PCM
ia
Odometer master value GWM MS-CAN RGTM

rd
Odometer trip programming data IPC HS-CAN3 GWM

ca
Odometer trip programming data GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Odometer trip verify PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Odometer trip verify GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Oil pressure warning indicator request PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Oil pressure warning indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Outside air temperature HVAC module MS-CAN DDM

PDM
GWM
Outside air temperature GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

PAM
Outside air temperature GWM HS-CAN2 CCM
Outside air temperature GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

IPC
DSP
FCIMB
Park brake active BCM HS-CAN1 PCM

PAM
GWM
Park brake active GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module
Park brake active GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

FCDIM
Park detect status IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Park detect status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Parking aid audio mute request PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Parking aid audio mute request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
FCDIM
m
Parking aid enable request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Parking aid enable request GWM HS-CAN1 PAM
Parking aid enable status

.PAM
co
HS-CAN1 GWM
Parking aid enable status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

gn
Parking aid fault status PAM HS-CAN1 BCM

GWM
ia
Parking aid fault status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

rd
APIM
FCDIM
ca
Parking aid message center data PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Parking aid message center data GWM HS-CAN2 IPMB
Parking aid message center data GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
FCDIM
Parking aid rear status PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Parking aid rear status GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

FCDIM
IPC
Parking aid sensor data PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Parking aid sensor data GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
FCDIM
Parking aid sensor data GWM HS-CAN2 IPMB

Parking aid warning indicator PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Parking aid warning indicator GWM HS-CAN3 FCIMB
Parking brake chime request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Parking brake chime request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Parking brake (red) indicator request ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Parking brake (red) indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Parking brake (yellow) indicator request ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Parking brake (yellow) indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Parking brake message request ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Parking brake message request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
m
Parking brake status ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Parking brake status GWM MS-CAN HVAC module
Parking brake status GWM

. co HS-CAN1 BCM
Parking brake status GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

gn
FCDIM
Parklamp status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

ia
Parklamp status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

ACM
rd
APIM
FCIMB
ca
Parklamp status GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
SODL
SODR
RHVAC module
Passenger door ajar status BCM HS-CAN1 PAM

GWM
Passenger door ajar status GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

IPMB
Passenger door ajar status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

DACMC
APIM
FCDIM
Passenger door ajar status GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
RSM
Passenger door lock switch status PDM MS-CAN GWM

Passenger door lock switch status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Passenger massage seat adjustment SCMH MS-CAN GWM
Passenger massage seat adjustment GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Passenger massage seat status SCMH MS-CAN GWM
Passenger massage seat status GWM HS-CAN2 OCS module
Passenger massage seat status GWM HS-CAN3 APIM
Passenger mirror command DDM MS-CAN PDM
Passenger rear window lock command DDM MS-CAN PDM
Passenger restraints indicator request RCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Passenger restraints indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 FCIMB
m
Passenger restraints indicator status FCIMB HS-CAN3 GWM
Passenger restraints indicator status
Passenger safety belt buckle status

GWM
RCM
. co HS-CAN2
HS-CAN2
RCM
GWM
gn
Passenger safety belt buckle status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Passenger window command DDM MS-CAN PDM

ia
PATS control command BCM HS-CAN1 PCM

rd
PATS immobilized target ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM

ca
PATS immobilized target GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
PATS start request target data PCM HS-CAN1 BCM

GWM
PATS start request target data GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module
Perimeter alarm chime request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Perimeter alarm chime request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Police idle mode message request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Police idle mode message request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Police idle mode status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Police idle mode status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Power liftgate chime request RGTM MS-CAN GWM

Power liftgate chime request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Power liftgate mode command IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Power liftgate mode command GWM MS-CAN RGTM
Power liftgate mode status RGTM MS-CAN GWM
Power liftgate mode status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Power liftgate switch status RGTM MS-CAN GWM
Power liftgate switch status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Power pack status PCM HS-CAN1 BCM

PAM
HCM
GWM
Power pack status GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

CCM
m
HUD module
IPMA
OCS module
. co PSCM
SCCM
Power pack status GWM MS-CAN DDM

gn
PDM
DSM
HVAC module
HSWM
ia
RGTM
RTM
RHVAC module
rd
RSM
SCME
SCMG
ca
SCMH
Power pack status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
ACM
DACMC
DSP
Power up chime modules IPC HS-CAN3 ACM

DSP
DACMC
Powertrain cooling message request PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Powertrain cooling message request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Powertrain driver mode status PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Powertrain driver mode status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

DACMC
Puddle lamp activation BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

Puddle lamp activation GWM MS-CAN DDM
PDM
Rear climate control adjustment status HVAC module MS-CAN RHVAC module
GWM
Rear climate control adjustment status GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

FCIMB
Rear climate control selection status RHVAC module MS-CAN HVAC module
Rear heated seat adjustment HVAC module MS-CAN RHVAC module

GWM
Rear heated seat adjustment GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

FCIMB
Rear park aid enable request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Rear park aid enable request GWM HS-CAN1 PAM
m
Rear parking aid chime request PAM HS-CAN1 GWM
Rear parking aid chime request GWM

. co HS-CAN3 IPC
APIM
FCDIM
gn
Red brake warning indicator request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Red brake warning indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

ia
Remote device feedback BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

rd
Remote device feedback GWM MS-CAN RTM

ca
Remote start quiet mode HVAC module MS-CAN GWM
Remote start quiet mode GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Remote start request RSM MS-CAN GWM
Remote start request GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Remote start status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Remote start status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
FCIMB
Remote start status GWM HS-CAN2 RCM
Remote start status GWM MS-CAN HVAC module

RHVAC module
RSM
RCM serial number RCM HS-CAN2 ABS module

OCS module
Restraint impact event status RCM HS-CAN2 OCS module

CCM
IPMA
GWM
Restraint impact event status GWM MS-CAN HVAC module
Restraint impact event status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

PCM
Restraint module power fault BECMB HS-CAN1 GWM
Restraint module power fault GWM HS-CAN2 RCM
Right rear door ajar status BCM HS-CAN1 PAM

GWM
Right rear door ajar status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

DACMC
m
APIM
Right rear door ajar status GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module
Right rear door ajar status

.
GWM
co MS-CAN
IPMB
DDM
PDM
gn
RSM
Right turn lamp request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

ia
Right turn lamp request GWM HS-CAN3 ACM

DSP
rd
IPC
RKE data BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

ca
RKE data GWM MS-CAN RTM
Road curvature IPMA HS-CAN2 PSCM
Seat memory command DSM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
SCMG
SCMH
GWM
Seat memory command GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Set point volume FCIMB HS-CAN3 APIM

DSP
Side obstacle detect status-left SODL MS-CAN SODR

GWM
Side obstacle detect status-left GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

Side obstacle detect status-right SODR MS-CAN SODL
GWM
Side obstacle detect status-right GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Side obstacle sensor status-left SODL MS-CAN DDM

PDM
SODR
GWM
Side obstacle sensor status-left GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Side obstacle sensor status-right SODR MS-CAN DDM

PDM
SODL
GWM
Side obstacle sensor status-right GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Stability-traction control event in progress ABS module HS-CAN2 CCM

GWM
PSCM
m
RCM
Stability-traction control event in progress GWM

co HS-CAN1 PCM
PAM
Stability-traction control chime request ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM

.
gn
Stability-traction control chime request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Stability-traction control indicator request ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM

ia
RCM
CCM
rd
Stabililty-traction control indicator request GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

PAM
ca
Stabililty-traction control indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Starting system fault message request PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Starting system fault message request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Steering column position switch status SCCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Steering column position switch status GWM MS-CAN DSM
Steering column torque PSCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Steering column torque GWM HS-CAN1 PAM
Steering wheel angle ABS module HS-CAN2 CCM

IPMA
IPMB
PSCM
RCM
SCCM
GWM
Steering wheel angle GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
PCM
PAM
HCM
Steering wheel angle GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

IPC
Steering wheel angle control PSCM HS-CAN2 ABS module

GWM
Steering wheel angle control GWM HS-CAN1 HCM
Steering wheel heat request HVAC module MS-CAN HSWM
Steering wheel heat status HSWM MS-CAN HVAC module
Steering wheel lock message request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Steering wheel lock message request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
m
Steering wheel message center switch data SCCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Steering wheel message center switch data GWM co HS-CAN3 IPC
Steering wheel switch speed control SCCM HS-CAN2 CCM

.
GWM
gn
Steering wheel switch speed control GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

ia
Stoplamp brake request ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM

rd
Stoplamp brake request GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Stoplamp request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

ca
Stoplamp request GWM MS-CAN RSM
Terrain mode PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Terrain mode GWM HS-CAN2 ATCM
Terrain mode display PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Terrain mode display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Terrain mode request ATCM HS-CAN2 GWM
Terrain mode request GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Time adjustment request APIM HS-CAN3 IPC
Tire pressure data BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Tire pressure data GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
Tire pressure data GWM MS-CAN RTM
Tire pressure information BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Tire pressure information GWM MS-CAN RTM
Tire pressure reset request IPC HS-CAN3 GWM
Tire pressure reset request GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Tire pressure system status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Tire pressure system status GWM MS-CAN RTM
Tire pressure system status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

APIM
Tire pressure warning indicator BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Tire pressure warning indicator GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
m
APIM
Tire pressure warning indicator
Traction control mode

GWM
co
ABS module
MS-CAN
HS-CAN2
RTM
CCM
RCM
.
gn
GWM
Traction control mode GWM HS-CAN1 PAM

PCM
ia
Traction control mode GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

rd
Trailer sway status ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM

ca
Trailer sway status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Transmission gear display PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Transmission gear display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Transmission not in park indicator request BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Transmission not in park indicator request GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Transmission service required PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Transmission service required GWM HS-CAN2 RCM
Transmission service required GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Transmission shift mode display PCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Transmission shift mode display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Transport mode BCM HS-CAN1 PCM

PAM
HCM
GWM
Transport mode GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

CCM
Transport mode GWM MS-CAN DDM

HVAC module
HSWM
PDM
RGTM
RTM
RHVAC module
Transport mode GWM HS-CAN3 APIM

IPC
ACM
DSP
FCIMB
Turn indication request BCM HS-CAN1 PCM
m
HCM
PAM
GWM
Turn indication request

.GWM
co HS-CAN3 IPC
APIM
Audio DSP
gn
Turn signal switch status SCCM HS-CAN2 CCM

IPMA
PSCM
ia
GWM
rd
Turn signal switch status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

PAM
HCM
ca
Turn signal switch status GWM MS-CAN SODL

SODR
Turn signal switch status GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Valet mode status APIM HS-CAN3 GWM
Valet mode status GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Valet mode status GWM MS-CAN DSM
Vehicle braking command ABS module HS-CAN2 PSCM

GWM
Vehicle braking command GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

PCM
PAM
Vehicle braking command GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Vehicle configuration data BCM HS-CAN1 GWM

HCM
PAM
PCM
Vehicle configuration data GWM HS-CAN2 ABS module

CCM
HUD module
OCS module
PSCM
RCM
SCCM
Vehicle configuration data GWM MS-CAN DDM

HVAC module
GPSM
PDM
RTM
RGTM
SODL
SODR
Vehicle configuration data GWM HS-CAN3 ACM
m
APIM
FCDIM
IPC
Vehicle dynamics SOS

. co
ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Vehicle dynamics SOS GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

gn
Vehicle dynamics SOS GWM HS-CAN1 BCM
Vehicle lateral acceleration RCM HS-CAN2 GWM

ia
IPMA
ABS module
rd
CCM
Vehicle lateral acceleration ABS module HS-CAN2 PSCM

ca
GWM
Vehicle lateral acceleration GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Vehicle lateral acceleration GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Vehicle lock message display BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Vehicle lock message display GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Vehicle lock requestor BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Vehicle lock requestor GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
RSM
Vehicle lock status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Vehicle lock status GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
RGTM
RSM
Vehicle lock status GWM HS-CAN3 APIM
IPC
Vehicle longitudinal acceleration RCM HS-CAN2 ABS module

CCM
IPMA
GWM
Vehicle longitudinal acceleration ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Vehicle longitudinal acceleration GWM HS-CAN1 PAM
Vehicle longitudinal acceleration GWM HS-CAN1 PCM
Vehicle longitudinal acceleration GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Vehicle speed PCM HS-CAN1 PAM

BCM
HCM
BECMB
m
GWM
Vehicle speed GWM HS-CAN3 IPC

. co ACM
Audio DSP
Vehicle speed GWM MS-CAN DSM

gn
DDM
PDM
RTM
RGTM
ia
HVAC module
GPSM
SODL
rd
SODR
SCMG
SCMH
ca
Vehicle speed GWM HS-CAN2 RCM

BECMB
OCS module
CCM
HUD module
SCCM
PSCM
IPMA
IPMB
PSCM
SCCM
Vehicle temperature display units APIM HS-CAN3 IPC
Vehicle trip display units APIM HS-CAN3 IPC
Vehicle yaw rate ABS module HS-CAN2 CCM

PSCM
GWM
Vehicle yaw rate GWM HS-CAN1 PCM

PAM
Vehicle yaw rate GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Voice recognition audio request APIM HS-CAN3 ACM
Voice recognition Bluetooth response data APIM HS-CAN3 IPC
Voice recognition status APIM HS-CAN3 IPC
Wheel rotation count ABS module HS-CAN2 GWM
Wheel rotation count GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

PAM
Wheel rotation count GWM MS-CAN GPSM

SODL
SODR
Wheel rotation count GWM HS-CAN3 APIM
m
Wheel rotation direction ABS module HS-CAN2 CCM
GWM
Wheel rotation direction GWM co HS-CAN1 PAM
Wheel rotation direction GWM MS-CAN GPSM

.
gn
Wheel rotation direction GWM HS-CAN3 APIM
Wheel speed data ABS module HS-CAN2 PSCM

ia
CCM
GWM
rd
Wheel speed data GWM HS-CAN1 BCM

PCM
ca
PAM
Wheel torque PCM HS-CAN1 BCM

PAM
HCM
GWM
Wheel torque GWM HS-CAN3 IPC
Window global open command BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Window global open command GWM MS-CAN DDM

PDM
Window lockout status BCM HS-CAN1 GWM
Window lockout status GWM MS-CAN RGTM

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Communications Network
DTC Chart: Gateway Module (GWM)

U2100:00 Initial Configuration CHECK the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to this module. This DTC
Not Complete: No sets due to incomplete or incorrect PMI procedures. INSTALL As-Built data from Professional
Sub Type Technician Society (PTS) following diagnostic scan tool instructions under Module
Information Programming>As-Built.
U3000:44 RAM Error During CLEAR then RETRIEVE all Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs). If
Normal Operation: DTC U3000:44 is retrieved, INSTALL a new GWM.
m
Data Memory REFER to: Gateway Module A (GWM) (418-00 Module Communications Network, Removal
Failure and Installation).
If DTC U3000:44 is not retrieved, the module is operating correctly at this time. The concern
U3000:45 RAM Error During

Normal Operation:
co
may have been caused by an intermittent concern.
CLEAR then RETRIEVE all Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs). If
DTC U3000:45 is retrieved, INSTALL a new GWM.
.
Program Memory REFER to: Gateway Module A (GWM) (418-00 Module Communications Network, Removal
gn
U3000:49 RAM Error During CLEAR then RETRIEVE all Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs). If
ia
Normal Operation: DTC U3000:49 is retrieved, INSTALL a new GWM.

Internal Electronic REFER to: Gateway Module A (GWM) (418-00 Module Communications Network, Removal
rd

ca
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Communication Network

Symptom Chart

Sources
The vehicle does not start with the diagnostic scan tool connected to the DLC and/or multiple Refer to the GO to
malfunction indicators are only on when the diagnostic scan tool is connected to the DLC Pinpoint Test Pinpoint
Test AN
No HS-CAN1 communication, all modules are not responding Refer to the GO to
Pinpoint Test Pinpoint
Test AJ
Test AK
Test AL
No MS-CAN communication, all modules are not responding Refer to the GO to
Test AM
The PCM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test A
The ABS module does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test B
The RCM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test C
The OCS module does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
m
Test D
The BECMB does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the GO to
The SCCM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool

. co Refer to the
Test E
GO to
Test F
gn
The IPC does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test G
ia
The BCM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
rd
Test H
The HVAC module does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
ca
Test I
The RHVAC module does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test J
The ACM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test K
The FCDIM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test L
The FCIM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test M
The HSWM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test N
The IPMA does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test O
The IPMB does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test P
The GPSM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test Q
The APIM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test R
The DSP does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test S
The DACMC does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool (integrated with the ACM) Refer to the GO to
Test K
The RTM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test T
The PSCM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test U
The DSM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
m
Test V
. co
The SCME does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool (integrated with the DSM) Refer to the GO to
Test V
The SCMG does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
gn
Test W
The SCMH does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
ia
Test X
The DDM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
rd

Test Y
The PDM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
ca

Test Z
The SODL does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test AA
The SODR does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test AB
The CCM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test AC
The HUD module does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test AD
The HCM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test AE
The PAM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool (integrated with the BCM) Refer to the GO to
Test H
The RGTM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test AF
The ATCM does not respond the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test AG
The GFM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool (Police option only) Refer to the GO to
Test AH
The GWM does not respond to the diagnostic scan tool Refer to the GO to
Test AI
No power to the DLC Refer to the GO to
Test AN
Pinpoint Tests
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
m
co
.
gn

ia
The PCM communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN1. An IDS session cannot be established if the PCM
rd
communication fails when attempting to identify the vehicle.
Possible Sources
ca
Fuse
Wiring, terminals and connectors
PCM
PINPOINT TEST A : THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
SCAN TOOL
A1
VERIFY WHETHER OTHER HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) MODULES PASS
THE NETWORK TEST
Is the text "pass" or a DTC listed next to any of the following modules (if equipped): APIM, BCM, HCM or PCM?
Yes If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to the PCM, a network fault is not currently present.
If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to one or more modules other than the PCM, GO to A2
No No modules are currently communicating on the HS-CAN1. GO to Pinpoint Test AJ
A2
PC/ED (POWERTRAIN CONTROL/EMISSIONS DIAGNOSIS) MANUAL PINPOINT TEST QA VERIFICATION
CHECK
Verify PC/ED manual pinpoint test QA has been performed.
Has pinpoint test QA been performed?
Yes GO to A3
No Refer to PC/ED manual.
A3
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) TERMINATION RESISTANCE
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C251-6 C251-14
m
Yes GO to A5
No GO to A4
. co
gn
A4
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM
(POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect PCM C1381B (2.3L GTDI), C1551B (3.5L GTDI) or C175B (3.5L/3.7L TiVCT).
ia
Measure:
rd

2.3L GTDI
ca

C1381B-69 C251-6
C1381B-68 C251-14

3.5L GTDI

C1551B-69 C251-6
C1551B-68 C251-14

3.5L/3.7L TiVCT

C175B-75 C251-6
C175B-76 C251-14
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to A5

ia
A5
rd
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the PCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
ca
Repair:
Reconnect the PCM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM. For 2.3L GTDI,
For 3.5L GTDI,

For 3.5L TiVCT,

For 3.7L TiVCT,

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The ABS module communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
m
Possible Sources
Fuse
ABS module
. co
gn
Verify BJB fuses 26 (30A), 32 (10A) and 52 (60A) are OK.
ia
PINPOINT TEST B : THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
B1
CHECK THE ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
rd
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: ABS module C135

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C135-1 Ground
C135-30 Ground
C135-35 Ground
Yes GO to B2
No VERIFY BJB fuses 26 (30A), 32 (10A) and 52 (60A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If
not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
B2
CHECK THE ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C135-14 Ground
m
Yes GO to B3
. co
gn
B3
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ABS
(ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) MODULE AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
ia

rd

C135-42 C251-3
ca
C135-43 C251-11
Yes GO to B4
B4
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the ABS module connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the ABS module connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new ABS module.
REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module (206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and
Stability Control, Removal and Installation).
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
m
co
.
gn
The RCM communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Possible Causes
ia
Fuse
rd
RCM
BECMB concern
ca
Verify BCM fuse 35 (5A) is OK.
PINPOINT TEST C : THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
SCAN TOOL
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on airbag, Safety Canopy® or side air curtain assemblies.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these assemblies, which increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with seat belt deployable components, including pretensioners,
load limiters and inflators. Never back probe deployable device electrical connectors. Tampering or back
probing may cause an accidental deployment and result in personal injury or death.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the
vehicle to the customer.
C1
CHECK THE RCM (RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE) CONNECTION
Ignition OFF.
Depower the SRS.

REFER to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering (501-20 Supplemental Restraint
System) .
Disconnect: RCM C310A and C310B.
Are RCM C310A pin 19 and C310B pins 47 and 48 OK?
Yes GO to C2
No INSTALL a new wiring harness. REPOWER the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
REFER to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering (501-20
Supplemental Restraint System) .
C2
CHECK FOR BECMB (EXTENDED POWER MODULE) NETWORK CONNECTION
Ignition ON.
Does the BECMB pass the network test?
Yes GO to C3
No DIAGNOSE a module communication concern. GO to Pinpoint Test E
m
C3
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a BECMB self-test.
. co
gn
Yes DIAGNOSE the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

REFER to: Airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
ia
No GO to C4
rd
C4
CHECK THE RCM (RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ca
Repower the SRS.

System) .
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C310A-19 Ground
Yes GO to C5
No VERIFY the BCM fuse 35 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
C5
CHECK THE RCM (RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE) CASE GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure the resistance between the RCM case and a good chassis ground.
Yes GO to C6
No REPAIR the RCM case ground as necessary.
C6
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE RCM
(RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Depower the SRS.
Measure:

m
C310B-48 C251-3
C310B-47 C251-11
. co
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to C7

ca
C7
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the RCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the RCM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Repower the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

System) .
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RCM.
REFER to: Restraints Control Module (RCM) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal
and Installation).
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Module Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The OCS module communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Possible Sources
m
Fuse
Wiring, terminals and connector
OCS module

. co
gn
PINPOINT TEST D : THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (OCS) MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
ia
D1
CHECK THE OCS (OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM) MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
rd
Ignition OFF.
Wait one minute.

ca
Disconnect: OCS module C3159
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3159-1 Ground
Yes GO to D2
D2
CHECK THE OCS (OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM) MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3159-4 Ground
Yes GO to D3
D3
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE OCS
(OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM) MODULE AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
m
C3159-2
C3159-3
. co C251-3
C251-11
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to D4
D4
CHECK FOR CORRECT OCS (OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM) MODULE OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the OCS module connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the OCS module connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new OCS module.
REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-
20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
For Police option,

REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Police (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
The BECMB Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
m
The BECMB communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN1.
Possible Sources
Fuse
. co
BECMB
gn
Verify BCM fuse 14 (10A) and 35 (5A) are OK.

ia
PINPOINT TEST E : THE BECMB (EXTENDED POWER MODULE) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
rd
SCAN TOOL
E1
CHECK THE BECMB (EXTENDED POWER MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ca
Ignition OFF.
Wait one minute.
Disconnect: BECMB C2518
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2518-4 Ground
C2518-11 Ground
Yes GO to E2
No VERIFY BCM fuse 14 (10A) or fuse 35 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to
the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
E2
CHECK THE BECMB (EXTENDED POWER MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C2518-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to E3
No REPAIR the circuit. . co
E3
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE BECMB
gn
(EXTENDED POWER MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

ia

rd
C2518-8 C251-6
C2518-2 C251-14
ca
Yes GO to E4
E4
CHECK FOR CORRECT BECMB (EXTENDED POWER MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the BECMB connector.
Repair:
Reconnect the BECMB connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new BECMB.
REFER to: Battery Energy Control Module B (BECMB) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
The Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
m

. co
The SCCM communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
gn
Possible Causes
Fuse
ia

SCCM
rd
Verify BCM fuse 13 (7.5A) is OK.

ca
PINPOINT TEST F : THE STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE (SCCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
F1
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect the diagnostic scan tool cable from the DLC.
Measure:

C251-3 C251-11
Yes GO to F3
No GO to F2
F2
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SCCM
(STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect SCCM C2414A
Measure:

Without Police Option

C2414A-14 C251-3
C2414A-15 C251-11
m

With Police Option
. co
gn

C2414A-1 C251-3
ia
C2414A-14 C251-11
rd
ca
Yes GO to F5
F3
CHECK THE SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition ON.
Measure:


C2414A-10 Ground

With Police Option

C2414A-5 Ground
Yes GO to F4
No VERIFY the BCM fuse 13 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
m
F4
CHECK THE SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
gn

ia

rd
C2414A-13 Ground
ca

With Police Option

C2414A-2 Ground
Yes GO to F5
F5
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the SCCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SCCM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCCM.
REFER to: Steering Column Control Module (SCCM) (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical
Components, Removal and Installation).
m
co
The Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool

.
gn

ia
The IPC communicates on the HS-CAN3, and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
messages are sent/received through the HS-CAN2 circuits at the DLC, and translated through the GWM to the HS-CAN3.
rd
Possible Sources
Fuse
ca

IPC
PINPOINT TEST G : THE INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER (IPC) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN
TOOL
G1
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect negative battery cable.
Disconnect GWM C2431
Measure:

C2431-16 C2431-15
Yes GO to G3
No GO to G2
G2
CHECK THE HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IPC
(INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect IPC C220
Measure:

C220-25 C2431-16
m
C220-26 C2431-15
. co
gn

ia
Yes GO to G5
rd

ca
G3
CHECK THE IPC (INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Disconnect: IPC C220.
Connect negative battery cable.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C220-21 Ground
Yes GO to G4
G4
CHECK THE IPC (INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) GROUND CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C220-5 Ground
Yes CONNECT negative battery cable. GO to G5

m
G5
Ignition OFF. co
Disconnect and inspect the IPC connector and related in-line connectors.
.
Repair:
gn
ia
Reconnect the IPC connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

rd

ca
(TSBs) address this concern: For vehicles with the Police package, INSTALL a new IPC.
REFER to: Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning
Chimes, Removal and Installation).
For vehicles without the Police package,

(IPC).
The Body Control Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool

The BCM communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN1.
Possible Causes
Fuse
BCM
Verify High Current BJB fuse 100 (125A) is OK.
PINPOINT TEST H : THE BODY CONTROL MODULE (BCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN
TOOL
H1
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
C2280H-1
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia
Yes Connect BCM C2280H. GO to H2

rd
No VERIFY the High Current BJB fuse 100 (125A) is OK. If OK, repair the circuit in question. If not OK,
REFER to the Wiring Diagrams Manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
ca
H2
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C C2280C-6 Ground
C C2280C-7 Ground
C2280C-10 Ground
Yes GO to H3
H3
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE BCM
(BODY CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: BCM C2280G.
Measure:
m
C2280G-10
C2280G-9
. co C251-6
C251-14
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to H4
H4
Disconnect and inspect the BCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the BCM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
The Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The HVAC module communicates on the MS-CAN, and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Diagnostic messages are sent/received through the HS-CAN2 circuits at the DLC, and translated through the GWM to the MS-
CAN.
Possible Sources
m
Fuse
HVAC module

co
.
gn
PINPOINT TEST I : THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE DOES NOT
RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
ia
I1
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) TERMINATION RESISTANCE
Ignition OFF.
rd

ca
Disconnect: GWM C2431.
Measure:

C2431-23 C2431-22
Yes GO to I3
No GO to I2
I2
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE HVAC
(HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN
OPEN
Disconnect HVAC module C228A.
Measure:

C228A-12 C2431-23
C228A-13 C2431-22
Yes GO to I5
m
CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
. co
I3
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:

ia

rd
C228A-26 Ground
ca
Yes GO to I4
I4
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C228A-10 Ground
Yes CONNECT negative battery cable. GO to I5
I5
CHECK FOR CORRECT HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the HVAC module connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the HVAC module connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
co
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HVAC module.
.
gn
ia
rd
The Rear Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (RHVAC) Module Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
ca
The RHVAC module communicates on the MS-CAN, and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Diagnostic messages are sent/received through the HS-CAN2 circuits at the DLC, and translated through the GWM to the MS-
CAN.
Possible Sources
Fuse
RHVAC module
PINPOINT TEST J : THE RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE DOES NOT
RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
J1
CHECK THE RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE VOLTAGE
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3198-6 Ground
Yes GO to J2
m
J2
CHECK THE RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
Measure:

ia
C3198-5 Ground
rd
ca
Yes CONNECT negative battery cable. GO to J3

J3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE RHVAC
(REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A)
FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect RHVAC module C3198.
Measure:

C3198-1 C2431-23
C3198-2 C2431-22
Yes GO to J4
J4
CHECK FOR CORRECT RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the RHVAC module connectors and related in-line connectors.
m
Repair:
pushed-out pins - install new pins as necessary co
Reconnect the RHVAC module connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch
.
correctly.
gn

ia
rd
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RHVAC module.
ca
The Audio Control Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The ACM communicates on the HS-CAN3, and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
Possible Sources
Fuse
ACM
PINPOINT TEST K : THE AUDIO CONTROL MODULE (ACM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN
TOOL
K1
CHECK THE ACM (AUDIO FRONT CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: ACM C240A.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C240A-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to K2
. co
gn
ia
K2
CHECK THE ACM (AUDIO FRONT CONTROL MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
rd
Measure:

ca

C240A-13 Ground
Yes GO to K3
K3
CHECK THE HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ACM
(AUDIO FRONT CONTROL MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect GWM C2431.
Measure:

C240A-14 C2431-16
C240A-15 C2431-15
Yes GO to K4
K4
CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM (AUDIO FRONT CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect and inspect all the ACM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
. co
Reconnect the ACM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
gn

ia
rd
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new ACM. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for
the procedure.
ca
The Front Control/Display Interface Module (FCDIM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The FCDIM communicates on the HS-CAN3, and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Diagnostic messages are sent/received through the HS-CAN2 circuits at the DLC, and translated through the GWM to the HS-
CAN3.
Possible Sources
Fuse
FCDIM
PINPOINT TEST L : THE FRONT CONTROL/DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FCDIM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
L1
CHECK THE FCDIM (FRONT CONTROL/DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: FCDIM C2123.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2123-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to L2
. co
gn
ia
L2
CHECK THE FCDIM (FRONT CONTROL/DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
rd
Measure:
ca

C2123-9 Ground
Yes GO to L3
L3
CHECK THE HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE FCDIM
(FRONT CONTROL/DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2123-4 C2431-16
C2123-5 C2431-15
Yes GO to L4
L4
CHECK FOR CORRECT FCDIM (FRONT CONTROL/DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect and inspect all the FCDIM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:

. co
Reconnect the FCDIM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
gn

ia
rd
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new FCDIM. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415
for the procedure.
ca
The Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) communicates on the HS-CAN3, and communicates with the diagnostic scan
tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic messages are sent/received through the HS-CAN2 circuits at the DLC, and translated
through the GWM to the HS-CAN3.
Possible Sources
Fuse
Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B)
PINPOINT TEST M : THE FRONT CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE B (FCIM-B) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
M1
CHECK THE FRONT CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE B (FCIM-B) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) C2402.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2402-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to M2
. co
gn
ia
M2
CHECK THE FRONT CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE B (FCIM-B) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
rd
Measure:
ca

C2402-6 Ground
Yes GO to M3
M3
CHECK THE HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE FRONT
CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE B (FCIM-B) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2402-4 C2431-16
C2402-5 C2431-15
Yes GO to M4
M4
CHECK FOR CORRECT FRONT CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE B (FCIM-B) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect and inspect all the Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) connectors and related in-line
connectors.
Repair:

. co
gn
Reconnect the Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure
they seat and latch correctly.

ia

rd
ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) . Refer to
The Heated Steering Wheel Module (HSWM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The HSWM communicates on the MS-CAN, and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
messages are sent/received through the HS-CAN2 circuits at the DLC, and translated through the GWM to the MS-CAN.

PINPOINT TEST N : THE HEATED STEERING WHEEL MODULE (HSWM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
N1
CHECK THE HSWM (HEATED STEERING WHEEL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: HSWM C2406.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2406-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to N2
No VERIFY BCM fuse 37 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
co
.
N2
CHECK THE HSWM (HEATED STEERING WHEEL MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
gn
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
ia

rd
C2406-14 Ground
ca
Yes GO to N3
N3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE HSWM
(HEATED STEERING WHEEL MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2406-4 C2431-23
C2406-3 C2431-22
Yes GO to N4
N4
CHECK FOR CORRECT HSWM (HEATED STEERING WHEEL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the HSWM connector and related in-line connectors.
m
Repair:
co
Reconnect the HSWM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
.
gn

ia
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HSWM.
rd
REFER to: Heated Steering Wheel Module (HSWM) (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical
ca
The Image Processing Module A (IPMA) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The IPMA communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Possible Sources
Fuse
IPMA

PINPOINT TEST O : THE IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE A (IPMA) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
SCAN TOOL
O1
CHECK THE IPMA (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE A) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: IPMA C911.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C911-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to O2
No co
VERIFY the BCM fuse 36 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
.
gn
O2
CHECK THE IPMA (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE A) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
ia
Measure:

rd

C911-7 Ground
ca
Yes GO to O3
O3
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IPMA
(IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE A) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C911-12 C251-3
C911-13 C251-11
Yes GO to O4
O4
CHECK FOR CORRECT IPMA (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE A) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the IPMA connector and related in-line connectors.
m
Repair:
co
Reconnect the IPMA connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
.
gn

ia
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new IPMA.
rd
REFER to: Interior Rear View Mirror (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
ca
The Image Processing Module B (IPMB) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The IPMB communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Possible Sources
Fuse
IPMB

PINPOINT TEST P : THE IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE B (IPMB) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
SCAN TOOL
P1
CHECK THE IPMB (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE B) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: IPMB C2515A.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2515A-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to P2
No
co
VERIFY the BJB fuse 34 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
.
gn
P2
CHECK THE IPMB (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE B) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
ia

rd

C2515A-11 Ground
ca
Yes GO to P3
P3
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IPMB
(IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE B) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect IPMB C2512B.
Measure:

C2515B-7 C251-3
C2515B-6 C251-11
Yes GO to P4
P4
CHECK FOR CORRECT IPMB (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE B) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the IPMB connector and related in-line connectors.
m
Repair:
co
Reconnect the IPMB connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
.
gn

ia
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new IPMB.
rd
REFER to: Image Processing Module B (IPMB) (413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid
Camera, Removal and Installation).
ca
The Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The GPSM communicates on the MS-CAN, and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
PINPOINT TEST Q : THE GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM MODULE (GPSM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
Q1
CHECK THE GPSM (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: GPSM C2398.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2398-1 Ground
Yes GO to Q2
No VERIFY BCM fuse 32 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
m
Ignition OFF.
. co
Q2
CHECK THE GPSM (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
gn

ia
C2398-6 Ground
rd
ca
Yes GO to Q3
Q3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE GPSM
(GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2398-2 C2431-23
C2398-3 C2431-22
Yes GO to Q4
Q4
CHECK FOR CORRECT GPSM (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the GPSM connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the GPSM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m

co
.
gn
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new GPSM. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415
for the procedure.
ia
rd
The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
ca
The APIM communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN1 and communicates with other modules through
the HS-CAN3. Diagnostic messages to modules on the HS-CAN3 are sent/received between the DLC and the diagnostic scan
tool through the HS-CAN2 circuits at the DLC, and translated through the GWM.
Possible Sources
Fuse
APIM
PINPOINT TEST R : THE ACCESSORY PROTOCOL INTERFACE MODULE (APIM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
R1
CHECK THE APIM (SYNC MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: APIM C2383.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2383-1 Ground
Yes GO to R2
m
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
R2
CHECK THE APIM (SYNC MODULE) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
gn

4.2-inch display
ia

rd
C2383-37 Ground
C2383-38 Ground
ca

8-inch touchscreen

C2383-37 Ground
Yes GO to R3
R3
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE APIM
(SYNC MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2383-53 C251-6
C2383-54 C251-14
m
Yes GO to R4

. co
gn
R4
CHECK THE HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE APIM
(SYNC MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect GWM C2431
ia
Measure:
rd

4.2-inch display
ca

C2383-16 C2431-16
C2383-17 C2431-15

8-inch touchscreen

C2383-19 C2431-16
C2383-20 C2431-15
Yes GO to R5
R5
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the APIM connector and related in-line connectors.
m
Repair:
co
Reconnect the APIM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
.
gn

ia
rd

Click here to access Guided Routine (APIM).
ca
The Audio Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Module Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The Audio DSP communicates on the HS-CAN3 and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Diagnostic messages are sent/received through the HS-CAN2 circuits at the DLC, and are translated through the GWM to the
HS-CAN3.
Possible Sources
Fuse
Audio DSP
Verify BCM fuse 28 (20A) (Sony® Sound) or fuse 29 (30A) (Sony® Plus) is OK.
PINPOINT TEST S : THE AUDIO DSP (AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING MODULE) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
S1
CHECK THE AUDIO DSP (AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Audio DSP C3154C.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Sony® Sound
m
C3154C-5 Ground
C3154C-6 Ground
. co
gn
ia

rd

Sony® Plus
ca

C3154C-6 Ground
C3154C-7 Ground
C3154C-8 Ground
Yes GO to S2
No VERIFY BCM fuse 28 (20A) (Sony® Sound) or fuse 29 (30A) (Sony® Plus) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the
short.
S2
CHECK THE AUDIO DSP (AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

Sony® Sound

C3154C-15 Ground
C3154C-16 Ground
m
. co
gn

Sony® Plus
ia

C3154C-14 Ground
rd
C3154C-15 Ground
ca
C3154C-16 Ground
Yes GO to S3
S3
CHECK THE AUDIO HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE
DSP (AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Audio DSP C3154A.
Measure:

C3154A-1 C2431-16
C3154A-11 C2431-15
m
Yes GO to S4

co
S4
CHECK FOR CORRECT AUDIO DSP (AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING MODULE) OPERATION
.
gn
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the audio DSP connector and related in-line connectors.
ia
Repair:
rd
Reconnect the audio DSP connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new audio DSP. Refer to the appropriate section in Group
415 for the procedure.
The Radio Transceiver Module (RTM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The RTM communicates on the MS-CAN and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
messages are sent/received through the HS-CAN2 circuits at the DLC, and are translated through the GWM to the MS-CAN.
Possible Sources
Fuse
RTM
PINPOINT TEST T : THE RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE (RTM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
SCAN TOOL
T1
CHECK THE RTM (RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: RTM C3156.
Ignition ON.
m
Measure:
C3156-6
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia
Yes GO to T2
rd
ca
T2
CHECK THE RTM (RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3156-1 Ground
Yes GO to T3
T3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE RTM
(RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C3156-4 C2431-23
C3156-3 C2431-22
Yes GO to T4
m
T4
CHECK FOR CORRECT RTM (RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
. co
gn
Disconnect and inspect all the RTM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
ia

rd
Reconnect the RTM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RTM.
The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The PSCM communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Possible Sources
Fuse
PSCM
Verify high current BJB fuse 102 (100A) and BJB fuse 31 (10A) are OK.
PINPOINT TEST U : THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE (PSCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
U1
CHECK THE PSCM (POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: PSCM C1463A and C1463B.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
C1463A-3 Ground
Measure:
. co
gn
C1463B-1 Ground
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to U2
No VERIFY high current BJB fuse 102 (100A) or BJB fuse 31 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If
not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
U2
CHECK THE PSCM (POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1463B-2 Ground
Yes GO to U3
U3
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PSCM
(POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C1463A-1 C251-3
C1463A-2 C251-11
m
Yes GO to U4

. co
gn
U4
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the PSCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
ia
Repair:
rd

ca
Reconnect the PSCM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, REFER to the EPAS Symptom Chart.

Click here to
access Guided Routine (EPAS).
The Driver Seat Module (DSM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool

The DSM communicates on the MS-CAN and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
Possible Sources
Fuse
DSM
PINPOINT TEST V : THE DRIVER SEAT MODULE (DSM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
V1
CHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DSM C341B.
m
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Positive Lead
co
.
Negative Lead
C341B-3 Ground
gn
C341B-6 Ground
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to V2
V2
CHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect DSM C341C.
Measure:

C341C-3 Ground
C341C-6 Ground
Yes GO to V3
V3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE DSM
(DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect DSM C341F.
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
C341F-8
. co
C2431-23
gn
C341F-7 C2431-22
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to V4
V4
CHECK FOR CORRECT DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the DSM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the DSM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DSM.
The SCMG Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The SCMG communicates on the MS-CAN and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
m
The multi-contour seat relay is integral to the BJB.
Possible Sources
Fuse
SCMG
. co
gn

ia
PINPOINT TEST W : THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
rd
W1
CHECK THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN
OPEN
ca
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: SCMG C3385.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3385-1 Ground
Yes GO to W3
No VERIFY the BJB fuse 92 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to W2 If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams
manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
W2
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT RELAY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect BJB C1035D.
Measure:

C1035D-10 C3385-1
Yes GO to W6
W3
CHECK THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
m
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

co
.
gn
C3385-16 Ground
ia

rd
Yes GO to W4
ca
W4
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SCMG
(DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C3385-8 C2431-23
C3385-7 C2431-22
Yes GO to W5
W5
CHECK FOR CORRECT SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the SCMG connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SCMG connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
No
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCMG. co
REFER to: Driver Multi-Contour Seat Module [SCMG] (501-10 Front Seats) .
.
gn
W6
CHECK OPERATION OF THE INTERIOR LIGHTING
ia
Check operation of the interior lamps (dome lamp, courtesy lamps, luggage compartment lamp, etc).
rd
Are the interior lamps operating normally?

ca
Yes GO to W7
No DIAGNOSE the demand LP/battery saver relay.
REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
W7
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C2280C-14 C1035D-16

Yes GO to W8
W8
CHECK FOR CORRECT BJB (BATTERY JUNCTION BOX) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the BJB connector.
Repair:
Reconnect the BJB connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
m
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new BJB. The multi-contour seat relay is not serviceable.
No
co
.
gn
The SCMH Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool

ia

rd

ca
The SCMH communicates on the MS-CAN and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
The multi-contour seat relay is integral to the BJB.
Possible Sources
Fuse
SCMH
PINPOINT TEST X : THE SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
X1
CHECK THE SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN
OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: SCMH C3386.

Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3386-1 Ground
Yes GO to X3
No VERIFY the BJB fuse 92 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to X2 If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams
X2
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect BJB C1035D.
Measure:

Positive Lead
co
.
Negative Lead
C1035D-10 C3386-1
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to X6

ca
X3
CHECK THE SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3386-16 Ground
Yes GO to X4
X4
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SCMH
(PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C3386-8 C2431-23
C3386-7 C2431-22
m
Yes GO to X5
co
X5
CHECK FOR CORRECT SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) OPERATION
.
Ignition OFF.
gn
Disconnect and inspect all the SCMH connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
ia

rd
Reconnect the SCMH connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCMH.
X6
CHECK OPERATION OF THE INTERIOR LIGHTING
Check operation of the interior lamps (dome lamp, courtesy lamps, luggage compartment lamp, etc).
Are the interior lamps operating normally?
Yes GO to X7
No DIAGNOSE the demand LP/battery saver relay.
REFER to: Interior Lighting (417-02 Interior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
X7
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C2280C-14 C1035D-16
Yes GO to X8
m
X8
CHECK FOR CORRECT BJB (BATTERY JUNCTION BOX) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
. co
Disconnect and inspect the BJB connector.
gn
Repair:
ia
Reconnect the BJB connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
rd

ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new BJB. The multi-contour seat relay is not serviceable.
The Driver Door Module (DDM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The DDM communicates on the MS-CAN and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
Possible Sources
Fuse
DDM
PINPOINT TEST Y : THE DRIVER DOOR MODULE (DDM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
Y1
CHECK THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DDM C501A.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

m
C501A-1 Ground

. co
gn
Yes GO to Y2
ia
rd
Y2
CHECK THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C501A-2 Ground
Yes GO to Y3
Y3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE DDM
(DRIVER DOOR MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
C501A-7 C2431-23
C501A-6 C2431-22
Yes GO to Y4
Y4
m
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
co
Disconnect and inspect all the DDM connectors and related in-line connectors.

.
gn
Reconnect the DDM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ia
rd
ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DDM.
The Passenger Door Module (PDM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The PDM communicates on the MS-CAN and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
Possible Sources
Fuse
PDM
PINPOINT TEST Z : THE PASSENGER DOOR MODULE (PDM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN
TOOL
Z1
CHECK THE PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: PDM C652A.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C652A-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to Z2
. co
gn
ia
Z2
CHECK THE PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
rd
Measure:
ca

C652A-2 Ground
Yes GO to Z3
Z3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PDM
(PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C652A-7 C2431-23
C652A-6 C2431-22
Yes GO to Z4
Z4
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect and inspect all the PDM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:

. co
Reconnect the PDM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
gn

ia
rd
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PDM.
ca
The Side Obstacle Detection Control Module LH (SOD-L) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The SODL communicates on the MS-CAN and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
Possible Sources
Fuse
SODL
PINPOINT TEST AA : THE SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH (SOD-L) DOES NOT RESPOND
TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
AA1
CHECK THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS
FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: SODL C4369.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C4369-5 Ground
m
Yes GO to AA2
No
co
VERIFY the BJB fuse 34 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
.
gn
AA2
CHECK THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN
ia
OPEN
Ignition OFF.
rd
Measure:

ca

C4369-8 Ground
Yes GO to AA3
AA3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SODL
(SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C4369-6 C2431-23
C4369-7 C2431-22
Yes GO to AA4
AA4
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect and inspect the SODL connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
. co
Reconnect the SODL connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
gn

ia
rd
ca
Installation).
The Side Obstacle Detection Control Module RH (SOD-R) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The SODR communicates on the MS-CAN and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
Possible Sources
Fuse
SODR
PINPOINT TEST AB : THE SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH (SOD-R) DOES NOT RESPOND
TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
AB1
CHECK THE SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS
FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: SODR C4370.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C4370-5 Ground
m
Yes GO to AB2
. co
gn
ia
AB2
CHECK THE SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
rd
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
ca

C4370-3 Ground
C4370-8 Ground
Yes GO to AB3

AB3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SODR
(SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnet: GWM C2431.
Measure:

C4370-6 C2431-23
C4370-7 C2431-22
m
Yes GO to AB4
co
AB4
.
Ignition OFF.
gn
Disconnect and inspect all the SODR connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
ia

rd
Reconnect the SODR connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SODR.
Installation).
The Cruise Control Module (CCM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool

The CCM communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Possible Sources
Fuse
CCM
PINPOINT TEST AC : THE CRUISE CONTROL MODULE (CCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN
TOOL
AC1
CHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: CCM C1582.
Ignition ON.
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
C1582-10
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia
Yes GO to AC2
rd
ca
AC2
CHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1582-4 Ground
Yes GO to AC3
AC3
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE CCM
(CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C1582-8 C251-3
C1582-7 C251-11
Yes GO to AC4
m
AC4
Ignition OFF.
co
Disconnect and inspect the CCM connector and related in-line connectors.
.
Repair:
gn
ia

rd

ca
The Head Up Display (HUD) Module Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The HUD module communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2.
Possible Sources
Fuse
HUD module
Verify BCM fuse 15 (10A) and fuse 21 (5A) are OK.
PINPOINT TEST AD : THE HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN
TOOL
AD1
CHECK THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: HUD Module C2395.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

m
C2395-4 Ground
C2395-5 . co Ground
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to AD2
No VERIFY the BCM fuse 15 (10A) or fuse 21 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER
ca
to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
AD2
CHECK THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C2395-1 Ground
Yes GO to AD3
AD3
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE HUD
(HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2395-3 C251-3
C2395-2 C251-11
Yes GO to AD4
m
AD4
CHECK FOR CORRECT HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
. co
gn
Disconnect and inspect the HUD module connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
ia

rd

ca
The Headlamp Control Module (HCM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The HCM communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN1.
Possible Sources
Fuse
HCM
PINPOINT TEST AE : THE HCM (HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
SCAN TOOL
AE1
CHECK THE HCM (HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: HCM C2129.
Ignition ON.
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
C2129-24
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia
Yes GO to AE2
rd
ca
AE2
CHECK THE HCM (HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C2129-4 Ground
Yes GO to AE3
AE3
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE HCM
(HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2129-7 C251-6
C2129-19 C251-14
Yes GO to AE4
m
AE4
CHECK FOR CORRECT HCM (HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
co
Disconnect and inspect the HCM connector and related in-line connectors.
.
Repair:
gn
ia
Reconnect the HCM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

rd

ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HCM.
REFER to: Headlamp Control Module (HCM) (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
The Rear Gate Trunk Module (RGTM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The RGTM communicates on the MS-CAN and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
Verify BJB fuse 69 (30A) and BCM fuse 10 (5A) are OK.
PINPOINT TEST AF : THE REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE (RGTM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
SCAN TOOL
AF1
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: RGTM C4174A.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C4174A-4 Ground
C4174A-9 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to AF2
ia
No VERIFY BJB fuse 69 (30A) or BCM fuse 10 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER
to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
rd
AF2
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ca
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C4174A-1 Ground
Yes GO to AF3
AF3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE RGTM
(REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: RGTM C4174B.
Measure:

C4174B-24 C2431-23
C4174B-23 C2431-22
Yes GO to AF4
m
AF4
Ignition OFF.
co
Disconnect and inspect the RGTM connectors and related in-line connectors.
.
gn
Repair:
ia
Reconnect the RGTM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
rd

ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RGTM.
The All Terrain Control Module (ATCM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The ATCM communicates on the HS-CAN2.

PINPOINT TEST AG : THE ATCM (ALL TERRAIN CONTROL MODULE) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
SCAN TOOL
AG1
CHECK THE ATCM (ALL TERRAIN CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: ATCM C3639.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3639-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to AG2
No
co
VERIFY BCM fuse 21 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
.
gn
AG2
CHECK THE ATCM (ALL TERRAIN CONTROL MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
ia

rd

C3639-7 Ground
ca
Yes GO to AG3
AG3
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ATCM
(ALL TERRAIN CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C3639-3 C2431-23
C3639-6 C2431-22
Yes GO to AG4
AG4
CHECK FOR CORRECT ATCM (ALL TERRAIN CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the ATCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
m
Repair:
co
Reconnect the ATCM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
.
gn

ia
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new ATCM.
rd
REFER to: All Terrain Control Module (ATCM) (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Removal and
Installation).
ca
The Generic Function Module (GFM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The GFM communicates on the HS-CAN3, and communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN2. Diagnostic
The GFM is only available with the Police option.
Possible Sources
Fuse
GFM
PINPOINT TEST AH : THE GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC
SCAN TOOL
AH1
CHECK THE GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: GFM C2464.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2464-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to AH2
. co
gn
ia
AH2
CHECK THE GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
rd
Measure:

ca

C2464-14 Ground
Yes GO to AH3
AH3
CHECK THE HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE GFM
(GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2464-6 C2431-16
C2464-13 C2431-15
Yes GO to AH4
AH4
CHECK FOR CORRECT GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect and inspect all the GFM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
. co
Reconnect the GFM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
gn

ia
rd
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new GFM.
ca
The Gateway Module (GWM) Does Not Respond To The Diagnostic Scan Tool
The GWM communicates with the diagnostic scan tool through the HS-CAN1 and HS-CAN2. The GWM operates as a gateway
for communication between the modules on HS-CAN1, HS-CAN2, HS-CAN3 and MS-CAN.
Verify BCM fuses 13 (7.5A) and 15 (10A) are OK.
PINPOINT TEST AI : THE GATEWAY MODULE (GWM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL
AI1
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C251-6 C251-14
Yes GO to AI3
No GO to AI2
AI2
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE GWM
(GATEWAY MODULE A) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
. co
gn
C2431-20 (component side) C251-6
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to AI3
No GO to AI9
AI3
Connect GWM C2431, if previously disconnected.
Measure:

C251-3 C251-11

Yes GO to AI5
No GO to AI4
AI4
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE GWM
(GATEWAY MODULE A) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

m
Yes GO to AI5
. co
gn
No GO to AI9
ia
AI5
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) TERMINATION RESISTANCE,
COMPONENT SIDE
rd
Measure:

ca

Yes GO to AI6
No GO to AI9
AI6
CHECK THE HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) TERMINATION RESISTANCE,
COMPONENT SIDE
Measure:

Yes GO to AI7
No GO to AI9
AI7
CHECK THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2431-24 Ground
m
Yes GO to AI8
No
co
VERIFY BCM fuse 13 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring
.
gn
AI8
CHECK THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
ia
Measure:
rd

ca
C2431-14 Ground
Yes GO to AI9
AI9
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all GWM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Installation).
No High Speed Controller Area Network 1 (HS-CAN1) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
m
The HS-CAN1 modules communicate with the diagnostic scan tool directly through the DLC circuits.
Possible Sources
Fuse
. co
APIM
gn
BECMB
BCM
GWM
HCM (if equipped)
ia
PCM
rd
PINPOINT TEST AJ : NO HIGH SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1 (HS-CAN1) COMMUNICATION, ALL
MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING
ca
NOTE: Various modules set network DTCs during this test procedure. Clear DTCs from all modules after completing the
diagnostic procedure.
AJ1
CHECK THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) PINS FOR DAMAGE
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the DLC pins 6 and 14 for damage.
Are DLC pins 6 and 14 OK?
Yes GO to AJ2
No REPAIR the DLC as necessary.
AJ2
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Measure:

C251-6 C251-14
Yes GO to AJ3
No GO to AJ5
AJ3
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) (+) AND HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C251-6 Ground
m
C251-14 Ground
. co
gn

ia
Yes GO to AJ4
rd
No GO to AJ11
ca
AJ4
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Connect the negative battery cable.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C251-6 Ground
C251-14 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 6 volts on either circuit?
No GO to AJ12
AJ5
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) TERMINATION RESISTOR
Measure:

C251-6 C251-14
Yes GO to AJ6
m
No GO to AJ8
co
AJ6
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) TERMINATION RESISTOR WITH
THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) DISCONNECTED
Disconnect: PCM C1351B (2.3L GTDI), C1551B (3.5L GTDI) or C175B (3.5L/3.7L TiVCT).
.
gn
Measure:

ia

C251-6 C251-14
rd
ca
Yes GO to AJ7
No GO to AJ19
AJ7
CHECK THE HS-CAN1 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM
(POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

2.3L GTDI

C1381B-69 C251-6
C1381B-68 C251-14

3.5L GTDI

C1551B-69 C251-6
C1551B-68 C251-14
m
. co
gn

3.5L/3.7L TiVCT

ia
C175B-75 C251-6
C175B-76 C251-14
rd
ca
Yes GO to AJ12
AJ8
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C251-6 C251-14
Yes GO to AJ10
No GO to AJ9
AJ9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) (-) CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C251-6 C251-14
m
Yes REPAIR the DLC or REPAIR the circuit in question.
No co
A capacitor internal to a module can still be draining, causing irregular resistance readings. WAIT 5
minutes. REPEAT the pinpoint test. If the concern is still present, REPAIR the circuit.
.
gn
AJ10
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE MODULES
DISCONNECTED
ia
Measure:

rd

C251-6 C251-14
ca
Disconnect modules one at a time until the resistance is greater than 3 ohms.
APIM C2383
BECMB C2518
BCM C2280G
HCM C2129
PCM C1381B (2.3L GTDI), C1551B (3.5L GTDI) or C175B (3.5L/3.7L TiVCT)
Did the resistance change to greater than 3 ohms with one of the modules disconnected?
Yes For the APIM, GO to AJ22

For the BECMB, GO to AJ23
For the BCM, GO to AJ21
For the HCM, GO to AJ24
For the PCM, GO to AJ20
No REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT all modules.
AJ11
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 1) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE MODULES
DISCONNECTED
Measure:

C251-6 Ground
C251-14 Ground
Disconnect modules one at a time until the resistance to ground is greater than 1,000 ohms.
APIM C2383
BECMB C2518
BCM C2280G
HCM C2129
m
PCM C1381B (2.3L GTDI), C1551B (3.5L GTDI) or C175B (3.5L/3.7L TiVCT)
Yes For the APIM, GO to AJ22

For the BECMB, GO to AJ23
. co
Did the resistance change to greater than 1,000 ohms with one of the modules disconnected?
For the BCM, GO to AJ21

gn
For the HCM, GO to AJ24
For the PCM, GO to AJ20

ia
rd
AJ12
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE)
DISABLED
ca
NOTE: Establish an IDS session prior to disabling the PCM in this test step. If the PCM has failed communication during
multiple attempts to identify the vehicle, first identify the vehicle manually by entering a PCM part number, calibration
number or tear tag when prompted by IDS. When a vehicle is manually identified by a PCM part number, calibration
number or tear tag, the IDS does not automatically run a network test. Manually select and run the network test. When
re-running the network test, close the network test application first or the screen display reverts back to the prior network
test results.
Disconnect: BJB fuse 1 (20A) and fuse 33 (10A) (except 2.3L GTDI).
Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test A

No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to AJ13
AJ13
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, close the network test application first or the screen display reverts back to the
prior network test results.
Disconnect: BCM fuse 13 (7.5A).

Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test AI

AJ14
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
DISABLED
Disconnect: BJB fuse 48 (50A) to disable the BCM.
Do all other HS-CAN1 modules pass the network test?
m
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test H
co
AJ15
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE BECMB (EXTENDED POWER
.
MODULE) DISABLED
gn
Disconnect:BCM fuse 14 (10A) and fuse 35 (5A) to disable the BECMB.

ia

rd

ca
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test E
AJ16
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE APIM (SYNC MODULE) DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 32 (10A) to disable the APIM.
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test R
AJ17
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS
Inspect the vehicle for adaptive headlamps.
Is the vehicle equipped with adaptive headlamps?
Yes GO to AJ18
No INSTALL the removed fuse. The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have
been caused by module connections. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues.
AJ18
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE HCM (HEADLAMP CONTROL
MODULE) DISABLED
Disconnect: BJB fuse 30 (10A) to disable the HCM.
m
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test AE
No INSTALL the removed fuse. The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have
co
been caused by module connections. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues.
.
AJ19
gn
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the GWM connector and related in-line connectors and related in-line connectors.
ia
Repair:
rd

ca
Installation).
AJ20
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the PCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
For 3.5L GTDI, REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls -
3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS), Removal and Installation).
For 3.5L TiVCT, REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls -
3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
For 3.7L TiVCT, REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls -
m
AJ21
Ignition OFF.
co
Disconnect and inspect the BCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
.
gn
Repair:
ia
rd

ca

AJ22
Ignition OFF.
Repair:


AJ23
CHECK FOR CORRECT BECMB (EXTENDED POWER MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the BECMB connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
m
Reconnect the BECMB connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

. co
gn
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new BECMB.
REFER to: Battery Energy Control Module B (BECMB) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
ia
rd
ca
AJ24
CHECK FOR CORRECT HCM (HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the HCM connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the HCM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HCM.
REFER to: Headlamp Control Module (HCM) (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
The HS-CAN2 modules communicate with the diagnostic scan tool directly through the DLC circuits.
Possible Sources
Fuse
ABS module
ATCM (if equipped)
CCM (if equipped)
GWM
HUD module (if equipped)
IPMA (if equipped)
IPMB (if equipped)
m
OCS module
PSCM
SCCM
RCM
. co
PINPOINT TEST AK : NO HIGH SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2 (HS-CAN2) COMMUNICATION, ALL
gn
ia
AK1
Ignition OFF.
rd

ca
Yes GO to AK2
AK2
Measure:

C251-3 C251-11

Yes GO to AK3
No GO to AK5
AK3
Measure:

C251-3 Ground
C251-11 Ground
m
Yes GO to AK4
No GO to AK11
. co
gn
AK4
ia

rd
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ca

C251-3 Ground
C251-11 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 6 volts on either circuit?
No GO to AK12
AK5
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) TERMINATION RESISTOR
Measure:

C251-3 C251-11
Yes GO to AK6
No GO to AK8
AK6
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) TERMINATION RESISTOR WITH
THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) DISCONNECTED
Measure:
m
C251-3
. co C251-11
gn
Yes GO to AK7
ia
No GO to AK28
rd
AK7
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SCCM
ca
(STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) AND THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: SCCM C2414A.
Measure:

Non-Police option

C2414A-14 C251-3
C2414A-15 C251-11
Measure:

Police option

C2414A-1 C251-3
C2414A-14 C251-11
Yes GO to AK36
m
Measure:
. co
AK8
gn
C251-3 C251-11
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to AK10
No GO to AK9
AK9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) (-) CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C251-3 C251-11
Yes REPAIR the DLC or REPAIR the circuit in question.
No A capacitor internal to a module can still be draining, causing irregular resistance readings. WAIT 5
minutes. REPEAT the pinpoint test. If the concern is still present, REPAIR the circuit.
AK10
CHECK THE HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) (+) AND HS-CAN2 (HIGH
SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE MODULES
DISCONNECTED
Measure:

C251-3 C251-11
ABS module C135
ATCM C3639 (if equipped)
CCM C1582 (if equipped)
HUD module C2395 (if equipped)
IPMA C911 (if equipped)
IPMB C2515B (if equipped)
OCS module C3159
m
PSCM C1463A
RCM C310B
SCCM C2414A
co
.
Yes For the ABS module, GO to AK26
gn
For the ATCM, GO to AK27
For the CCM, GO to AK29
For the HUD module, GO to AK30
For the IPMA, GO to AK31
ia
For the IPMB, GO to AK32

For the OCS module, GO to AK34
rd
For the PSCM, GO to AK33

For the RCM, GO to AK35
For the SCCM, GO to AK36
ca
AK11
SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE MODULES
DISCONNECTED
Measure:

C251-3 Ground
C251-11 Ground
ABS module C135
ATCM C3639 (if equipped)
CCM C1582 (if equipped)
HUD module C2395 (if equipped)
IPMA C911 (if equipped)
IPMB C2515B (if equipped)
OCS module C3159
PSCM C1463A
RCM C310B
SCCM C2414A
Yes For the ABS module, GO to AK26

For the ATCM, GO to AK27
For the CCM, GO to AK29
For the HUD module, GO to AK30
For the IPMA, GO to AK31
For the IPMB, GO to AK32
For the OCS module, GO to AK34
For the PSCM, GO to AK33
For the RCM, GO to AK35
m
For the SCCM, GO to AK36
co
AK12
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) AND THE SCCM
.
(STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) DISABLED
gn
NOTE: When re-running the network test, close the network test application first or the screen display reverts
back to the prior network test results.

ia

rd

ca
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to AK13
No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to AK14
AK13
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE)
DISCONNECTED
Yes CONNECT the SCCM. GO to Pinpoint Test F
No CONNECT the SCCM. GO to Pinpoint Test AI
AK14
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) MODULE
DISABLED
Disconnect: BJB fuses 26 (30A), 32 (10A) and 52 (60A).
Yes INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test B
No INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to AK15
AK15
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - IPMA (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE A)
Inspect the vehicle for an IPMA.
Is the vehicle equipped with an IPMA?
m
Yes GO to AK16
No GO to AK17
co
AK16
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE IPMA (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE
.
A) DISABLED
gn
Disconnect: BCM fuse 36 (15A) to disable the IPMA (if equipped)

ia

rd

ca
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test O
AK17
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE PSCM (POWER STEERING CONTROL
MODULE) DISABLED
Disconnect: High Current BJB fuse 102 (100A) and BJB fuse 31 (10A) to disable the PSCM.
Yes INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test U
No INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to AK18
AK18
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE RCM (RESTRAINTS CONTROL
MODULE) DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 35 (5A) to disable the RCM.
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test C
AK19
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE OCS (OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION
SYSTEM) MODULE DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 22 (5A) to disable the OCS module.
m
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test D

. co
gn
ia
AK20
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - ALL TERRAIN CONTROL MODULE
Inspect the vehicle for an ATCM.
rd
Is the vehicle equipped with an ATCM?

ca
Yes GO to AK21
No GO to AK22
AK21
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE ATCM (ALL TERRAIN CONTROL MODULE)
DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 21 (5A).
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test AG

AK22
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL OR SPLIT VIEW CAMERA
Inspect the vehicle for an adaptive cruise control system or a split view camera.
Is the vehicle equipped with adaptive cruise control or a split view camera?
Yes GO to AK23
AK23
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE)
AND IPMB (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE B) DISABLED
Disconnect: BJB fuse 34 (10A) to disable the CCM and IPMB (if equipped).
m
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to AK24

. co
gn
AK24
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE)
DISCONNECTED
ia
Disconnect: CCM C1582 (if equipped).

rd

ca
Yes For restored communication with the CCM disconnected, GO to Pinpoint Test AC
No CONNECT the modules. If equipped with an IPMB, GO to Pinpoint Test P

If not equipped with an IPMB, GO to AK25
AK25
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY) MODULE
DISCONNECTED
Disconnect: HUD module C2395.
Do all other HS-CAN2 modules pass the network test with the module disconnected?
Yes GO to Pinpoint Test AD
No CONNECT the module. The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been
caused by module connections. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues.
AK26
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the ABS module connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the ABS module connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
No
co
.
gn
AK27
CHECK FOR CORRECT ATCM (ALL TERRAIN CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
ia
Disconnect and inspect the ATCM connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
rd

ca
Reconnect the ATCM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new ATCM.
REFER to: All Terrain Control Module (ATCM) (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Removal and
Installation).
AK28
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the GWM connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Installation).
AK29
Ignition OFF.
m
Repair:

. co
gn

ia

rd
ca
AK30
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

AK31
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the IPMA connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the IPMA module connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
AK32
CHECK FOR CORRECT IPMB (IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE B) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
ca
Disconnect and inspect the IPMB connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the IPMB module connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new IPMB.
REFER to: Image Processing Module B (IPMB) (413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid
Camera, Removal and Installation).
AK33
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the PSCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the PSCM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, REFER to the EPAS Symptom Chart.

Click here to
access Guided Routine (EPAS).
m
Ignition OFF.
. co
AK34
CHECK FOR CORRECT OCS (OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM) MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect the OCS module connector and related in-line connectors.
gn
Repair:
ia

rd
Reconnect the OCS module connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new OCS module. For non-Police option,
REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-
20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
For Police option,

REFER to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Police (501-20B Supplemental Restraint
AK35
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the RCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
and Installation).
AK36
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect and inspect all the SCCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:

. co
gn

ia

rd
ca
Diagnostic messages sent/received between the diagnostic scan tool and the HS-CAN3 modules are accessed through the HS-
CAN2 circuits on the DLC.
Possible Sources
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or conectors
ACM
APIM (if equipped)
Audio DSP (if equipped)
Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B)
FCDIM (if equipped)
GFM (Police option only)
IPC
GWM
PINPOINT TEST AL : NO HIGH SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3 (HS-CAN3) COMMUNICATION, ALL
AL1
Igntion OFF.
m
Yes GO to AL2

. co
AL2
CHECK FOR HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) COMMUNICATION
gn
ia
Yes GO to AL3
rd
No GO to Pinpoint Test AK
ca
AL3
Measure:

C2431-16 C2431-15
Yes GO to AL5
No GO to AL7
AL4
CHECK THE HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) TERMINATION RESISTOR,
COMPONENT SIDE
Measure:

Yes GO to AL5
No GO to AL28
AL5
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
C2431-16
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
C2431-15 Ground
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to AL6
No GO to AL10
AL6
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2431-16 Ground
C2431-15 Ground
No GO to AL11
AL7
CHECK THE HS-CAN3 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IPC
(INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C220-25 C2431-16
C220-26 C2431-15
m
. co
gn

ia
Yes GO to AL8

rd
ca
AL8
Measure:

C2431-16 C2431-15
Yes GO to AL9
No GO to AL11
AL9
CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE MODULES
DISCONNECTED
Measure:
C2431-16 C2431-15
APIM C2383 (4.2-inch display) or C2342 (8-inch touchscreen)
ACM C240A
Audio DSP C3154A (if equipped)
Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) C2402
FCDIM C2123 (if equipped)
GFM C2464 (Police option only)
IPC C220
Yes For the APIM, GO to AL21

For the ACM, GO to AL22
For the Audio DSP, GO to AL23
m
For the Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B), GO to AL24
For the FCDIM, GO to AL25
For the GFM (Police option), GO to AL26
No
For the IPC, GO to AL27
REPAIR the circuits in question.

. co
gn
AL10
SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 3) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE MODULES
DISCONNECTED
ia
Measure:

rd

C2431-16 Ground
ca
C2431-15 Ground
APIM C2383 (4.2-inch display) or C2342 (8-inch touchscreen)
ACM C240A
Audio DSP C3154A (if equipped)
Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) C2402
FCDIM C2123 (if equipped)
GFM C2464 (Police option)
IPC C220
Yes For the APIM, GO to AL21

For the ACM, GO to AL22
For the Audio DSP, GO to AL23
For the Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B), GO to AL24
For the FCDIM, GO to AL25
For the GFM (Police option), GO to AL26
For the IPC, GO to AL27
AL11
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) AND IPC
(INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 13 (7.5A) to disable the IPC and GWM.
Yes INSTALL the fuse. GO to AL12
m
No INSTALL the fuse. GO to AL13
DISCONNECTED
. co
AL12
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE IPC (INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER)
gn

ia
rd
Yes CONNECT the IPC. GO to Pinpoint Test G

ca
No CONNECT the IPC. GO to Pinpoint Test AI
AL13
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) (POLICE OPTION)
Inspect the vehicle for a GFM (police option).
Is the vehicle equipped with a GFM?
Yes GO to AL14
No GO to AL15
AL14
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) (POLICE
OPTION) DISABLED

Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test AH
No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to AL15
AL15
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE APIM (SYNC MODULE) AND FCDIM (FRONT
CONTROL/DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE) DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 32 (10A) to disable the APIM and FCDIM (if equipped).
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. If equipped with a FCDIM, GO to AL16

If not equipped with a FCDIM, GO to Pinpoint Test R
m
MODULE) DISCONNECTED
. co
AL16
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE FCDIM (FRONT CONTROL/DISPLAY INTERFACE
gn
Disconnect: FCDIM C2123.

ia

rd

ca
Yes CONNECT the FCDIM. GO to Pinpoint Test L
No CONNECT the FCDIM. GO to Pinpoint Test R
AL17
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE FRONT CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE B
(FCIM-B) DISABLED
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test M
AL18
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE ACM (AUDIO FRONT CONTROL MODULE)
DISABLED
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test K
AL19
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - AUDIO DSP (AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING MODULE)
Inspect the vehicle for an Audio DSP.
Is the vehicle equipped with an Audio DSP?
m
Yes GO to AL20
co
.
AL20
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE DSP (AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
gn
MODULE) DISABLED
ia

rd

ca
Yes INSTALL removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test S
No INSTALL removed fuses. The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been
caused by module connections. ADDRESS the root cause of any connector or pin issues.
AL21
CHECK THE APIM (SYNC MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:


AL22
CHECK THE ACM (AUDIO FRONT CONTROL MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the ACM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the ACM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
co
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new ACM. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for
the procedure.
.
gn
ia
AL23
CHECK THE AUDIO DSP (AUDIO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
rd
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the Audio DSP connectors and related in-line connectors.
ca
Repair:
Reconnect the Audio DSP connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new Audio DSP. Refer to the appropriate section in Group
415 for the procedure.
AL24
CHECK THE FRONT CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE B (FCIM-B) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B) connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure
they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIM-B). Refer to
m
AL25
CHECK THE FCDIM (FRONT CONTROL/DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
co
Disconnect and inspect the FCDIM connector and related in-line connectors.
.
Repair:
gn
ia
Reconnect the FCDIM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

rd

ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new FCDIM. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415
for the procedure.
AL26
CHECK THE GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the GFM connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the GFM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new GFM. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for
the procedure.
AL27
CHECK THE IPC (INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m

.
gn
ia

(IPC).
rd
ca
AL28
CHECK THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Installation).
No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
Diagnostic messages sent/received between the diagnostic scan tool and the MS-CAN modules are accessed through the HS-
CAN2 circuits on the DLC.
Possible Sources
Fuse
DDM (if equipped)
DSM (if equipped)
GPSM (if equipped)
m
GWM
HSWM (if equipped)
HVAC module
PDM (if equipped)
RGTM (if equipped)
RTM
co
RHVAC module (if equipped)
.
gn
SCMG (if equipped)
SCMH (if equipped)
SODL (if equipped)
SODR (if equipped)
ia
PINPOINT TEST AM : NO MEDIUM SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (MS-CAN) COMMUNICATION, ALL
rd

ca
AM1
Ignition OFF.
Yes GO to AM2
AM2
CHECK FOR HS-CAN2 (HIGH SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK 2) COMMUNICATION
Yes GO to AM3
No GO to Pinpoint Test AK
AM3
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) TERMINATION RESISTANCE
Measure:

C2431-23 C2431-22
Yes GO to AM4
No GO to AM7
m
AM4
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) TERMINATION RESISTOR,
COMPONENT SIDE
Measure:
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to AM5
No GO to AM32
AM5
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) (+) AND MS-CAN (MEDIUM
SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C2431-23 Ground
C2431-22 Ground
Yes GO to AM6
No GO to AM10
AM6 CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) (+) AND MS-CAN (MEDIUM
SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Connect the negative battery cable.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2431-23 Ground
C2431-22 Ground
m
. co
gn

ia
No GO to AM11
rd
AM7
CHECK THE MS-CAN (MEDIUM SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE HVAC
ca
(HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE AND THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) FOR AN
OPEN
Disconnect: HVAC module C228A
Measure:

C228A-12 C2431-23
C228A-13 C2431-22
Yes GO to AM8
AM8
SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C2431-23 C2431-22
Yes GO to AM9
No GO to AM11
m
AM9
SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH MODULES
DISCONNECTED
Measure:
. co
gn
C2431-23 C2431-22
ia
rd
DDM C501A (if equipped)

DSM C341D (if equipped)
GPSM C2398 (if equipped)
ca
HSWM C2406 (if equipped)

HVAC module C228A
PDM C652A (if equipped)
RGTM C4174B (if equipped)
RHVAC module C3198 (if equipped)
RTM C3156
SCMG C3385 (if equipped)
SCMH C3386 (if equipped)
SODL C4369 (if equipped)
SODR C4370 (if equipped)
Yes For the DDM, GO to AM30

For the DSM, GO to AM31
For the GPSM, GO to AM33
For the HSWM, GO to AM34
For the HVAC module, GO to AM35
For the PDM, GO to AM36
For the RGTM, GO to AM37
For the RHVAC module, GO to AM38
For the RTM, GO to AM39
For the SCMG, GO to AM40
For the SCMH, GO to AM41
For the SODL, GO to AM42
For the SODR, GO to AM43
AM10
SPEED-CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK) (-) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE MODULES
DISCONNECTED
Measure

C2431-23 Ground
C2431-22 Ground
m
DDM C501A (if equipped)
DSM C341D (if equipped)
. co
GPSM C2398 (if equipped)

gn
HSWM C2406 (if equipped)
HVAC module C228A
PDM C652A (if equipped)
RGTM C4174B (if equipped)
ia
RHVAC module C3198 (if equipped)

RTM C3156
SCMG C3385 (if equipped)
rd
SCMH C3386 (if equipped)

SODL C4369 (if equipped)
SODR C4370 (if equipped)
ca
Yes For the DDM, GO to AM30

For the DSM, GO to AM31
For the GPSM, GO to AM33
For the HSWM, GO to AM34
For the HVAC module, GO to AM35
For the PDM, GO to AM36
For the RGTM, GO to AM37
For the RHVAC module, GO to AM38
For the RTM, GO to AM39
For the SCMG, GO to AM40
For the SCMH, GO to AM41
For the SODL, GO to AM42
For the SODR, GO to AM43
AM11
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, close the Network Test application first or the screen display reverts
back to the prior run Network Test results.
Disconnect BCM fuse 13 (7.5A).
Do all other MS-CAN modules pass the network test?
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test AI
No INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to AM12
AM12
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND
AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 12 (7.5A) to disable the HVAC module.
m
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test I

co
AM13
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) AND PDM (PASSENGER DOOR
.
MODULE)
gn
Inspect the vehicle for a DDM and PDM.
ia
Is the vehicle equipped with a DDM and PDM?
Yes GO to AM14
rd
No GO to AM15
ca
AM14
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) AND
PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) DISABLED
Disable modules one at a time until other MS-CAN modules pass the network test. Skip to the end once network
operation is restored.
Disconnect: BCM fuse 25 (30A) to disable the DDM.
Disconnect:BCM fuse 26 (30A) to disable the PDM.
Yes INSTALL the removed fuses.

For restored communication with the DDM disabled, GO to Pinpoint Test Y
For restored communication with the PDM disabled, GO to Pinpoint Test Z
No INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to AM15
AM15
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE GPSM (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
MODULE) AND RTM (RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE) DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 32 (10A) to disable the GPSM (without touchscreen) and RTM.
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. If not equipped with a touchscreen, GO to AM16
If equipped with a touchscreen, GO to Pinpoint Test T
AM16
CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE RTM (RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE)
m
DISCONNECTED
Disconnect: RTM C3156.

. co
gn

ia
Yes CONNECT the module. GO to Pinpoint Test T
No CONNECT the module. GO to Pinpoint Test Q

rd
ca
AM17
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE)
Inspect the vehicle for a DSM.
Is the vehicle equipped with a DSM?
Yes GO to AM18
No GO to AM19
AM18
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE)
DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 2 (7.5A) to disable the DSM (if equipped).

Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test V
No GO to AM19
AM19
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - MULTI-CONTOUR SEATS
Inspect the vehicle for multi-contour seats.
Is the vehicle equipped with multi-contour seats?
Yes GO to AM20
No GO to AM21
AM20
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR
SEAT MODULE) AND SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) DISABLED
Disable modules one at a time until other MS-CAN modules pass the network test. Skip to the end once network
m
operation is restored.
Disconnect: BJB fuse 92 (15A) to disable the SCMG (if equipped).

co
Disconnect: BJB fuse 92 (15A) to disable the SCMH (if equipped).
.
gn

ia
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. For restored communication with the SCMG disconnected, GO to
rd
Pinpoint Test W
For restored communication with the SCMH disconnected, GO to Pinpoint Test X
No GO to AM21
ca
AM21
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - HSWM (HEATED STEERING WHEEL MODULE)
Inspect the vehicle for a HSWM.
Is the vehicle equipped with a HSWM?
Yes GO to AM22
No GO to AM23
AM22
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE HSWM (HEATED STEERING WHEEL
MODULE) DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 37 (15A) to disable the HSWM (if equipped).

Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test N
No GO to AM23
AM23
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE)
Inspect the vehicle for a RGTM.
Is the vehicle equipped with a RGTM?
Yes GO to AM24
No GO to AM25
AM24
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE)
DISABLED
m
Disconnect: BJB fuse 69 (30A) and BCM fuse 10 (5A) to disable the RGTM (if equipped).

. co
gn
Yes INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test AF

No GO to AM25
ia
rd
AM25
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING)
MODULE
ca
Inspect the vehicle for a RHVAC module.
Is the vehicle equipped with a RHVAC module?
Yes GO to AM26
No GO to AM27
AM26
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE RHVAC (REAR HEATING,
VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE DISABLED
Disconnect: BCM fuse 11 (5A) to disable the RHVAC module (if equipped).
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test J

No GO to AM27
AM27
VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) AND
SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH)
Inspect the vehicle for a SODL and SODR.
Is the vehicle equipped with a SODL and SODR?
Yes GO to AM28
AM28
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION
CONTROL MODULE LH) AND SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) DISABLED
m
Disconnect: BJB fuse 34 (10A) to disable the SODL and SODR (if equipped).

. co
Yes INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to AM29
gn
ia
AM29
CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK COMMUNICATION WITH THE SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION
rd
CONTROL MODULE RH) DISCONNECTED

ca
Disconnect: SODR C4370 (if equipped).
Yes CONNECT the SODR. GO to Pinpoint Test AB

No CONNECT the SODR. GO to Pinpoint Test AA
AM30
CHECK THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the DDM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the DDM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DDM.
AM31
CHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the DSM module connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
m
Reconnect the DSM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
co
.
gn
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DSM.
ia
rd

ca
AM32
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Installation).
AM33
CHECK THE GPSM (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the GPSM connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the GPSM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new GPSM. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415
for the procedure.
No
co
.
gn
AM34
CHECK THE HSWM (HEATED STEERING WHEEL MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
ia
Disconnect and inspect all the HSWM module connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
rd

ca
Reconnect the HSWM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HSWM.
REFER to: Heated Steering Wheel Module (HSWM) (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical
AM35
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE FOR CORRECT
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the HVAC module connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the HVAC module connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Yes CHECK OASIS or any applicable Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs). If a TSB exists for this concern,
DISCONTINUE this test and FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs)
address this concern, INSTALL a new HVAC module.
AM36
CHECK THE PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the PDM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
co
.
gn
Reconnect the PDM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ia

rd
ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PDM.

AM37
CHECK THE RGTM (REAR GATE TRUNK MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the RGTM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the RGTM connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RGTM.
AM38
CHECK THE RHVAC (REAR HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE FOR CORRECT
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the RHVAC module connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the RHVAC module connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch
correctly.
m

co
.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RHVAC module.
gn
ia

rd
AM39
CHECK THE RTM (RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
ca
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the RTM connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the RTM connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new RTM.
AM40
CHECK THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SCMG connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SCMG connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCMG.
m
AM41
CHECK THE SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF. co
Disconnect and inspect the SCMH connectors and related in-line connectors.
.
gn
Repair:
ia
Reconnect the SCMH connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
rd

ca
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCMH.
AM42
CHECK THE SODL (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE LH) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SODL connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SODL connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

Installation).
AM43
CHECK THE SODR (SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE RH) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SODR connector and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
m
Reconnect the SODR connector and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

. co
gn
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SODR.
ia
Installation).
rd

ca
No Power To The Data Link Connector (DLC)
The diagnostic scan tool is connected to the DLC to communicate with the HS-CAN1 and HS-CAN2. The GWM translates
diagnostic messages for the HS-CAN3 and the MS-CAN from the HS-CAN2. A loss of ground or poor ground at the DLC can
result in network faults while the diagnostic scan tool is connected.
Possible Sources
Fuse
Wiring, terminals or connector
DLC
Diagnostic scan tool
Verify BCM fuse 13 (7.5A) and fuse 15 (10A) are OK.
PINPOINT TEST AN : NO POWER TO THE DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

AN1
Ignition OFF.
Inspect DLC pins 4, 5 and 16 for damage.
Are DLC pins 4, 5 and 16 OK?
Yes GO to AN2
AN2
CHECK THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) VOLTAGE SUPPLY FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C251-16 Ground
m
Yes GO to AN4
. co
No GO to AN3
gn
AN3
CHECK THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) VOLTAGE SUPPLY FOR AN OPEN
ia
Measure:
rd

ca
C2431-24 Ground
Yes GO to AN5
No VERIFY BCM fuse 13 (7.5A) or fuse 15 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to
the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
AN4
CHECK THE DLC (DATA LINK CONNECTOR) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C251-4 Ground
C251-5 Ground
Yes REPAIR the diagnostic scan tool.
No GO to AN5
AN5
CHECK THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
m
C2431-1
C2431-14
. co Ground
Ground
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes REPAIR the diagnostic scan tool.
No GO to AN6
AN6
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Installation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
General Procedures
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder Bleeding Set
Bleeding
Master Cylinder
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed, it should be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
1. NOTE: Make sure the area around the master cylinder cap is clean and free of foriegn material.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca

m
3. Loosen and remove the brake tube fittings.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Install the master cylinder bleeding set.

Use the General Equipment: Master Cylinder Bleeding Set
m
5. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal slowly until clear bubble free fluid flows from the brake tubes.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Remove the master cylinder bleeding set.

Use the General Equipment: Master Cylinder Bleeding Set
m
7. Tighten the brake tube fittings.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
9. Refer to: Brake System Pressure Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
Brake Caliper, Wheel Cylinder, Brake Hose or Brake Tube co

10. NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is required anytime a hydraulic brake system component has been
.
disconnected.
gn

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Materials
Name Specification
YN-12-D
Removal

m
2. Remove the radiator.
Refer to: Radiator (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
Remove the condenser inlet nut and disconnect the fitting.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the condenser outlet nut and disconnect the fitting.

m
5. Release the clamps, disconnect the transmission cooler lines and remove the condenser.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Condenser Core Leak Check

Inspection
412.
2. Disconnect the condenser from the A/C system. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
3. Use the correct adapters with the A/C Service Unit to test the condenser.
219-00082 ACF-3000 33PC Adapter Kit - Revised 1st released 44pc kit.
219-00083 A/C Flushing Adapter Kit 2 of 3 (Previously "Supplement A", 2nd released kit).
219-00084 A/C Flushing Adapter Kit 3 of 3.
m
4. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some hoses do not open when connected to the fittings. If available, use hoses
co
without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the adapter
fittings. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open.
Connect the hoses from the A/C Service Unit to the adapter fittings on the condenser.
.
gn
5. Open both valves and start the vacuum. Allow the A/C Service Unit to vacuum for a minimum of 45 minutes after the low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil
ia
left in the condenser. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and
appear as a refrigerant leak.
rd
6. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves are open and the A/C Service Unit
is operating, close the valves and observe the low pressure reading. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is
indicated. Recheck the adapter fitting connections before installing a new condenser.
ca
7. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the valves and stop the service unit. Observe the low pressure gauge; it should
remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark.
If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg)
position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the service unit with the valves open for an additional 30 minutes to
remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the condenser. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check for vacuum
loss.
8. If the condenser leaks, as verified by the above procedure, install a new condenser. Refer to Condenser procedure in
Group 412.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Clearance
Check
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Section 303-01 for the specification.
1. NOTE: The crankshaft connecting rod journals must be within specifications to check the connecting rod bearing journal
clearance.
Remove the connecting rod bearing cap and connecting rod bearing.
2. Position a piece of Plastigage across the bearing surface.
m
. co
gn
ia
3. NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft during this step.

rd
Install and tighten to specifications, then remove the connecting rod bearing cap.
4. Measure the Plastigage to get the connecting rod bearing journal clearance. The Plastigage should be smooth and flat.
ca
A changing width indicates a tapered or damaged connecting rod or connecting rod bearing.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Coolant Inlet Pipe
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Orange Concentrated Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D
VC-3-B
Removal
1. WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this section, refer to Safety Warnings in section 100-
00 General Information. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Refer to: Engine Cooling System Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
2. Remove the lower intake manifold.

Refer to: Lower Intake Manifold (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
m
3. Disconnect the thermostat housing from the cooling inlet pipe and position aside.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Disconnect the coolant hose.
5. Remove the coolant inlet pipe and discard the O-ring seals.
m
Installation
co
1. Install new O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine coolant. Install the coolant inlet pipe.
Material: Motorcraft® Orange Concentrated Antifreeze/Coolant / VC-3-B (WSS-M97B44-D)
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Connect the coolant hose.

3. Connect the thermostat housing to the coolant inlet pipe.
m
. co
gn
ia
4. Install the lower intake manifold.

rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Coolant Pump
303-1248
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
303-1530
TKIT-2010A-F
TKIT-2010A-LM
TKIT-2010A-ROW
m
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any
1.
co
material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may
cause engine failure.
WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this section, refer to Safety Warnings in section 100-
.
gn
Refer to: Engine Cooling System Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
ia
2. Remove the engine front cover.

Refer to: Engine Front Cover (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
rd
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the intake VCT assemblies as shown.
ca
4. Remove the bolts and the LH valve train oil tube.

Install 303-1248 onto the flats of the LH camshafts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Remove the bolts and the RH valve train oil tube.
Install 303-1248 onto the flats of the RH camshafts.

8. Mark the timing chain link that aligns with the timing mark on the LH intake VCT assembly as shown.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
9. Mark the timing chain link that aligns with the timing mark on the RH intake VCT assembly as shown.
ca
Mark the 2 timing chain links that align with the timing mark on the crankshaft sprocket as shown.
11. Remove the bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner.
m
. co
gn
ia
12. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner arm.

rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
13. Remove the bolts and the primary timing chain tensioner arm.
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
14. NOTE: A slight twisting motion will aid in the removal of the VCT oil control solenoid.
rd
NOTE: Keep the VCT oil control solenoid free of dirt and debris.
Remove the bolt and the LH intake VCT oil control solenoid.
ca
15. NOTE: A slight twisting motion will aid in the removal of the VVT oil control solenoid.
NOTE: Keep the VCT oil control solenoid free of dirt and debris.
Remove the bolt and the RH intake VCT oil control solenoid.
16. Remove the primary timing chain.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
17. NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove the bolt or damage to the LH primary timing chain guide may occur.
Remove the bolt and the upper LH primary timing chain guide.
18. NOTE: The VCT oil control solenoids are removed for clarity.
NOTE: 303-1530 is inserted through a hole in the top of the mega cap.
Compress the RH secondary timing chain tensioner guide and let install 303-1530 in the hole on the rear of the
secondary timing chain tensioner guide and let it hold against the mega cap to retain the tensioner in the collapsed
position.
m
co
19. Remove and discard the RH (right-hand) VCT assembly bolts.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
20. Remove the RH (right-hand) VCT assemblies and the secondary timing chain.
21. NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove the bolt or damage to the RH primary timing chain guide may occur.
Remove the bolt and the RH primary timing chain guide.
22. Place clean lint-free shop towels in the oil pan opening to prevent coolant from entering the oil pan during coolant pump
removal.
m
23. Remove the bolts and the coolant pump.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
24. Discard the gaskets.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces.
Install new gaskets.
2. Tighten the coolant pump bolts in the sequence shown in 2 stages.

Torque:
m
Stage 1:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove all of the shop towels from the oil pan opening.
4. NOTICE: Any coolant that has accumulated in the oil pan must be drained from the pan and any residual
coolant cleaned from the front of the engine and oil pan. Failure to remove all traces of the coolant can result in
oil contamination and severe engine damage.
NOTE: Remove any residual coolant from the front of the engine and the oil pan using regulated, compressed air and
clean, lint-free shop towels.
Remove the oil pan drain plug and allow any accumulated coolant to drain.
5. Install the oil pan drain plug.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
6. Install the RH primary timing chain guide and the bolt.

ca
7. Align the colored links with the timing marks.

Position the RH (right-hand) VCT assemblies and secondary timing chain on the camshafts by aligning the holes in the
VCT assemblies with the dowel pins in the camshafts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
9. Install the new RH (right-hand) VCT assembly bolts and tighten in 4 stages.
ca
Torque:
Stage 1:
30 lb.ft (40 Nm)
Stage 2:
Loosen::
1 turn(s)
Stage 3:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
Stage 4:
180°
10. NOTE: Make sure the secondary timing chain is centered on the timing chain tensioner guides.
Compress the RH secondary timing chain tensioner and remove 303-1530 .
11. Install the upper LH timing chain guide and the bolt.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the primary timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT assemblies and the
crankshaft sprocket.
m
13. Install the lower LH primary timing chain guide and the bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. Install the primary timing chain tensioner arm.

m
. co
gn
ia
15.
Release the ratchet detent.
rd
Using a soft-jawed vise, compress the ratchet plunger.

Align the hole in the ratchet plunger with the hole in the tensioner housing.
Install a lockpin.
ca
m
. co
gn

Remove the lockpin.
ia
rd
ca
17.
There are 48 links in between the RH intake VVT assembly colored link (1) and the LH intake VVT assembly
colored link (2).
There are 35 links in between LH intake VVT assembly colored link (2) and the 2 crankshaft sprocket links (3).
m
18. NOTICE: Do not use excessive force when installing the VVT oil control solenoid. Damage to the mega cap
co
could cause the cylinder head to be inoperable. If difficult to install the VVT oil control solenoid, inspect the
bore and VVT oil control solenoid to ensure there are no burrs, sharp edges or contaminants present on the
.
Install the LH intake VCT oil control solenoid and the bolt.
gn
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
20°
ia
rd
ca
19. NOTICE: Do not use excessive force when installing the VVT oil control solenoid. Damage to the mega cap
could cause the cylinder head to be inoperable. If difficult to install the VVT oil control solenoid, inspect the
bore and VVT oil control solenoid to ensure there are no burrs, sharp edges or contaminants present on the
Install the RH intake VCT oil control solenoid and the bolt.
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
20°
20. Remove the RH 303-1248.
Remove Special Service Tool: 303-1248 Camshaft holding tools.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
21. Install the RH valve train oil tube and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
ca
Stage 2:
45°
22. Remove the LH 303-1248.

23. Install the LH valve train oil tube and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
24. Install the engine front cover.

ca
Refer to: Engine Front Cover (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
26. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installation.

Torque:
Stage 1:
44 lb.in (5 Nm)
Stage 2:
180°
27. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
307-02 Transmission Cooling 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
307-569
TKIT-2006U-F/FM
TKIT-2006U-FLM/LM
TKIT-2006U-ROW1
TKIT-2006U-ROW2
Removal

2. Remove the air cleaner.

m
3. NOTE: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
Completely loosen the cooler bypass valve tube fittings.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove the cooler bypass valve quick connect coupling secondary latches.
m
5. Remove the nuts and detach the cooler bypass valve from the stud bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. NOTE: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
Using the special tool, disconnect the quick connect couplings and remove the cooler bypass valve.
m
Installation
co
1. Position the cooler bypass valve in the vehicle and connect the quick connect couplings.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Attach the cooler bypass valve to the studs and install the nuts.
m
3. Install the cooler bypass valve quick connect coupling secondary latches.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque. Refer to Torque Wrench Adapter Formula in the
Apex.
Tighten the cooler bypass valve tube fittings.
m
5. Install the air cleaner.
6. Check the transmission fluid level and adjust as necessary.

. co
Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
gn
6F50/6F55, General Procedures).

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
1.
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube.
2. Disconnect the vent hose.
3. Loosen the clamp.
4. Remove the bolts and remove the air cleaner assembly.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. If equipped.
Unclip the retainers and position the block heater harness aside.
3. Release the clip and position hood release cable aside.

4. Detach and position the coolant hose aside.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
5. Remove the coolant hose support bracket.

ca
6. Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainers, disconnect the electrical connectors, and position the wiring harness aside.
m
7. Remove the bolts and remove the cooling fan motor and shroud.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
ROB75240
Coolant/Battery Refractometer (Fahrenheit)
Fluid Container
Cooling System Vacuum Tester and Refiller
Materials
Name Specification
m
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant WSS-M97B44-D2
VC-3DIL-B
VC-3-B
Draining
. co
gn
NOTICE: The coolant must be recovered in a suitable, clean container for reuse. If the coolant is contaminated, it must
be recycled or disposed of correctly. Using contaminated coolant may result in damage to the engine or cooling
system components.
ia
NOTICE: The vehicle cooling system is filled with Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant. Do not mix coolant types.
Mixing coolant types degrades the corrosion protection of the coolant. Failure to follow these instructions may
damage the engine or cooling system.
rd
NOTICE: Always fill the cooling system with the manufacturer's specified coolant. Chemically flush the cooling system
if a non-specified coolant has been used. Refer to Cooling System Flushing. Failure to follow these instructions may
ca
damage the engine or cooling system.
NOTE: During normal vehicle operation, Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant may change color from orange to pink or light
red. As long as the engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine coolant has
degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
NOTE: Less than 80% of coolant capacity can be recovered with the engine in the vehicle. Dirty, rusty or contaminated coolant
requires replacement.
1.
WARNING: When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a thick
cloth.
Remove the pressure relief cap.

3. If equipped
Remove the retainers and the skid plate.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. If equipped
m
5.
WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.

. co
gn
Use a hose to drain the coolant.
Open the radiator drain valve and drain the engine coolant in a suitable, clean container.
Use the General Equipment: Fluid Container
ia
rd
ca
Filling
Filling and Bleeding with a Vacuum Cooling System Filler
1.
NOTICE: The cooling system is filled with Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant. Do not mix coolant
types. Mixing coolant types degrades the corrosion protection of the coolant. Failure to follow these
instructions may damage the engine or cooling system.
NOTICE: Engine coolant provides boil protection, corrosion protection, freeze protection, and cooling
efficiency to the engine and cooling components. In order to obtain these protections, maintain the
engine coolant at the correct concentration and fluid level in the degas bottle.
NOTE: Add Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent.
NOTE: Do not add or mix with any other type of engine coolant. Mixing coolants may degrade the coolant's
corrosion protection.
NOTE: Do not add alcohol, methanol, or brine, or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.
These can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally
equipped with Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
When adding or topping off the engine coolant:

Measure the coolant concentration in the vehicle.
Use Special Service Tool: ROB75240 Coolant/Battery Refractometer (Fahrenheit).
Determine the concentration desired based on the vehicle duty cycle of extreme hot or cold operating conditions.
Add, top-off or adjust the coolant as follows:
m
For concentrations measured 48/52 to 50/50 (freeze protection -34˚C to -37˚C [-30˚F to -34˚F]) use Motorcraft®
Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted to maintain a coolant concentration in this same range.
Material: Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant / VC-3DIL-B (WSS-M97B44-D2)
get to the desired concentration.

co
For all other concentrations, use Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Concentrated and/or distilled water to

.
When refilling the engine coolant after a flush procedure, use a mixture of Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant
gn
Concentrated and distilled water to get to the desired concentration.
2. Close the radiator drain valve.

ia
rd
ca
3. If equipped
m
4. If equipped
Install the skid plate and the retainers. . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Install the Airlift Cooling System Tester UVU550000 or equivalent and follow the manufacturer's instructions to fill and
bleed the system.
Use the General Equipment: Cooling System Vacuum Tester and Refiller
6. Recommended coolant concentration is 48/52 to 50/50 engine coolant to distilled water (freeze protection -34˚C to -37˚C
[-30˚F to -34˚F]).
7.
For extremely cold climates (less than -37˚C [-34˚F]):
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%.
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
Maximum coolant concentration is 60/40 for cold weather areas.
A coolant concentration of 60% provides freeze protection down to -50˚C (-58˚F)
Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may damage the engine.
8.
For extremely hot climates:
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40%.
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
Minimum coolant concentration is 40/60 for warm weather areas.
Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion and freeze protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may damage the engine.
9. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 48/52 to 50/50 (freeze protection -34˚C to -37˚C [-30˚F
to -34˚F]) mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection.
m
. co
gn
10. Fill the degas bottle to the MAX FILL line.
11. Install the degas bottle cap until at least 1 audible click is heard.
ia
12. Turn the climate control system off.

rd
13. Start the engine and increase the engine speed to 3,500 rpm and hold for 30 seconds.
14. Turn the engine off for and wait for 1 minute to purge any large air pockets from the cooling system.
ca
15. WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do not unscrew the coolant
pressure relief cap when the engine is operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under
pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
Check the engine coolant level in degas bottle and if necessary fill to the top of the MAX FILL line on the degas bottle if
the engine is warm or to the top of the MIN FILL LEVEL if the engine is cold.
16. Start the engine and let it idle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature and the thermostat is fully open. A
fully open thermostat is verified by the cooling fan cycling on at least once.
17. Increase the engine speed to 3,500 rpm and hold for 30 seconds.
18. Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
19. Turn the engine off for 1 minute.
20. Repeat steps 17 through 19 a total of 10 times to remove any remaining air trapped in the system.
Check the engine coolant level in degas bottle and if necessary fill to the top of the MAX FILL line on the degas bottle.
Filling and Bleeding without a Vacuum Cooling System Filler
m
23.
NOTICE: The cooling system is filled with Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant. Do not mix coolant
types. Mixing coolant types degrades the corrosion protection of the coolant. Failure to follow these
co
instructions may damage the engine or cooling system.
NOTICE: Engine coolant provides boil protection, corrosion protection, freeze protection, and cooling
.
efficiency to the engine and cooling components. In order to obtain these protections, maintain the
gn
engine coolant at the correct concentration and fluid level in the degas bottle.
NOTE: Add Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent.
NOTE: Do not add or mix with any other type of engine coolant. Mixing coolants may degrade the coolant's
ia
corrosion protection.
rd
NOTE: Do not add alcohol, methanol, or brine, or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.
These can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally
ca
equipped with Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
When adding or topping off the engine coolant:

Measure the coolant concentration in the vehicle.
Use Special Service Tool: ROB75240 Coolant/Battery Refractometer (Fahrenheit).
Determine the concentration desired based on the vehicle duty cycle of extreme hot or cold operating conditions.
Add, top-off or adjust the coolant as follows:
For concentrations measured 48/52 to 50/50 (freeze protection -34˚C to -37˚C [-30˚F to -34˚F]) use Motorcraft®
Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted to maintain a coolant concentration in this same range.
For all other concentrations, use Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Concentrated and/or distilled water to
get to the desired concentration.
When refilling the engine coolant after a flush procedure, use a mixture of Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant
Concentrated and distilled water to get to the desired concentration.
24. Close the radiator drain valve.

m
25. If equipped
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
26. If equipped
Install the skid plate and the retainers.
m
27. Fill the degas bottle to the MAX FILL line.
[-30˚F to -34˚F]).
. co
28. Recommended coolant concentration is 48/52 to 50/50 engine coolant to distilled water (freeze protection -34˚C to -37˚C
29.
gn
For extremely cold climates (less than -37˚C [-34˚F]):
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%.
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
ia
A coolant concentration of 60% provides freeze protection down to -50˚C (-58˚F)

Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may damage the engine.
rd
30.
For extremely hot climates:
ca
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40%.

NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion and freeze protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may damage the engine.
31. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 48/52 to 50/50 (freeze protection -34˚C to -37˚C [-30˚F
to -34˚F]) mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection.
33. Turn the climate control system off.
34. Start the engine and increase the engine speed to 3,500 rpm and hold for 30 seconds.
35. Turn the engine off for and wait for 1 minute to purge any large air pockets from the cooling system.
Check the engine coolant level in degas bottle and if necessary fill to the top of the MAX FILL line on the degas bottle if
the engine is warm or to the top of the MIN FILL LEVEL if the engine is cold.
37. Start the engine and let it idle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature and the thermostat is fully open. A
fully open thermostat is verified by the cooling fan cycling on at least once.
38. Increase the engine speed to 3,500 rpm and hold for 30 seconds.
39. Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
40. Turn the engine off for 1 minute.
41. Repeat steps 38 through 40 a total of 10 times to remove any remaining air trapped in the system.
Check the engine coolant level in degas bottle and if necessary fill to the top of the MAX FILL line on the degas bottle.
m
. co
gn
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Premium Cooling System Flush ESR-M14P7-A
VC-1
Flushing
WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do not unscrew the coolant
pressure relief cap when the engine is operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure;
steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: To remove rust, sludge and other foreign material from the cooling system, use cooling system flush that is safe for use
with aluminum radiators. This cleaning restores cooling system efficiency and helps prevent overheating. A pulsating or
reversed direction of flushing water will loosen sediment more quickly than a steady flow in the normal coolant flow direction. In
m
severe cases where cleaning solvents will not clean the cooling system efficiently, it will be necessary to use the pressure
flushing method using cooling system flusher. Dispose of old coolant and flushing water contaminated with antifreeze and
cleaning chemicals in accordance with local, state or federal laws.
co
1. Add Motorcraft® Premium Cooling System Flush to the cooling system and follow the directions on the package.
Material: Motorcraft® Premium Cooling System Flush / VC-1 (ESR-M14P7-A)
.
gn
2. Drain the cooling system.
3. Remove the radiator.

ia
rd
4. NOTICE: Radiator internal pressure must not exceed 138 kPa (20 psi). Damage to the radiator can result.
Position the radiator upside down and with a high pressure hose in the lower radiator hose opening, backflush the
radiator.
ca
5. Remove the thermostat.

Refer to: Thermostat (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
6. Install the coolant inlet connection without the thermostat.

7. Backflush the engine. Position the high-pressure water hose into the engine through the upper radiator hose and
backflush the engine.
8. Install the thermostat.

Refer to: Thermostat (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
9. Install the radiator.



ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-25 Body Repairs - General Information 2017 Explorer
General Procedures
Corrosion Prevention
300-SAT12740
UBE Gun
300-SAT9795
HRS Rust Gun
m
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Metal Surface Prep
ZC-31-A
- co
ValuGard™ Premium Undercoating -
.
VG101, VG101A
gn
ValuGard™ Rust Inhibitor -

VG104, VG104A
ia
Repair
NOTE: Undercoating
rd
NOTE: The following illustrations are not vehicle specific and are intended for reference only.
ca
1. WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this section, REFER to Safety Warnings in section
100-00 General Information. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Refer to: Body Repair Health and Safety and General Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
2. Wire brush the area and make sure the surfaces are free of oil, dirt and other foreign material. Carry out the
undercoating process in the following sequence.
3. Thoroughly clean and degrease metal surfaces to remove wax and grease.
Material: Motorcraft® Metal Surface Prep / ZC-31-A
4. For best results, the vehicle should be at room temperature.
5. Canister attaches directly to the dispensing gun. Attach the undercoating canister to the special tool .
Use Special Service Tool: 300-SAT12740 UBE Gun.
Material: ValuGard™ Premium Undercoating / VG101, VG101A
6. Undercoating should be applied after the welding and refinishing process. Product cannot be welded through.
7. Air pressure setting for applicator gun is 552 kPa (80.06 psi) – 621 kPa (90.07 psi).
8. Apply light mist coats, applicator sprays in fogging pattern. Material displaces moisture.
9. Clean up any overspray with a mild solvent such as mineral spirits or bug and tar remover.
10. NOTE: Frame rail exterior spot-weld flange view.
Apply Premium Undercoating material to the exterior exposed edges after carrying out the welding and refinishing
process.
11. NOTE: Cross section view of typical unibody frame rail shown.
m
Apply Rust Inhibitor to the inner surfaces of the rail after carrying out welding process. Depress trigger and wait 2-3
seconds and slowly pull the wand to make sure the area is completely fogged.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. NOTE: Full frame vehicle, front rail-to-mid rail section repair shown.
Apply Premium Undercoating to the exposed surfaces after carrying out the welding process. Make sure to completely
cover any bare metal areas.
m
Repair
NOTE: Rust Inhibitor co

1. The surfaces must be free of oil, dirt and other foreign material. Carry out the process in the following sequence.
.
2. Thoroughly clean and degrease metal surfaces to remove wax and grease.
gn
Material: Motorcraft® Metal Surface Prep / ZC-31-A
3. For best results, the vehicle should be at room temperature. Attach the rust inhibitor canister to the special tool .
Use Special Service Tool: 300-SAT9795 HRS Rust Gun.
ia
Material: ValuGard™ Rust Inhibitor / VG104, VG104A
4. Rust inhibitor should be applied after the welding and refinishing process. Product cannot be welded through.
rd
5. Air pressure setting for applicator gun is 448 kPa (64.97 psi) - 517 kPa (74.98 psi).
ca
6. Use the appropriate length wand when spraying enclosed areas. Insert the wand as far as possible into the access hole,
pull the trigger and wait 2-3 seconds and slowly pull the wand out of the access hole. Apply the material in light mist
coats. Material displaces moisture.
7. Clean up any overspray with a mild solvent such as mineral spirits or bug and tar remover.
8. NOTE: Door assembly lower view.
Apply as shown to the inside of the door shell on all the interior metal surfaces using the most suitable applicator wand.
Apply material to the exposed edges after carrying out the welding process. Make sure horizontal surfaces are well
protected as they are more susceptible to corrosion. Keep door drain holes clear to prevent moisture buildup.
m
9. NOTE: Quarter panel inner view.
co
Apply to the closed channel portion of the spot weld flange areas. Apply to the exposed edges after carrying out the
welding process. Make sure horizontal surfaces are well protected as they are more susceptible to corrosion.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
10. NOTE: Door frame opening view.
Apply to the closed channel portion of the spot weld flange areas. Make sure horizontal surfaces are well protected as
they are more susceptible to corrosion.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-02 Front End Body Panels 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.

Refer to: Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16 Wipers and Washers, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the pin-type retainers.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3.
Remove the cowl panel grille.
ca
1. Pull up to release the clips on the cowl panel grille.

2. Remove the cowl panel grille.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Cowl Panel
Removal
1. Remove the cowl panel grille.

Refer to: Cowl Panel Grille (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the clips.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3. Remove the washer hose from the retainer clips on the RH side of the vehicle and position aside.
ca
4. Pull up to release the pin-type retainers and remove the cowl panel.
m
Installation

. co
gn

ia
rd
ca
C-Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this manual, refer to health and safety warnings in
Refer to: Pyrotechnic Device Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
m
2. Depower the SRS.
co
3. Release the clips and remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Non-police vehicle
4.
Place the seat backrest to the fold flat position.
1. Lift the recliner handle to release the seat backrest.
2. Fold the seat to the fold flat position.
m
5. Position the second row seat to the easy entry position.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Police vehicle
6. Remove the bolts and the loadspace floor panel.

m
7. Remove the load compartment foam insert.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. If equipped.
Remove the lighting and siren control module.
Refer to: Lighting and Siren Control Module (100-05 Police Equipment, Removal and Installation).
9. NOTE: LH double seat shown throughout, RH single seat similar.
Remove the seat-to-floor rear nuts.

m
10. Remove the outboard seat-to-floor bolt.
gn
ia
rd
ca
11.
Place the seat backrest to the fold flat position.
1. Lift the recliner handle to release the seat backrest.
2. Fold the seat to the fold flat position.
m
12. Place the seat in the easy entry position.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
All vehicles
13.
1. Remove the pin-type retainer.
2. Release the retainers and pull the loadspace trim panel away enough to access the side impact sensor.
m
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
14.
2. Remove the bolt.
3. Remove the side impact sensor.
m
Installation

. co
1. NOTE: The impact sensor mating surfaces must be smooth and allow for a flush attachment to each other.
2. Repower the SRS.

gn
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
C-Pillar Trim Panel - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts
Removal
1. Remove the loadspace trim panel.

and Installation).
2. Slide the safety belt tongue cover down to disengage from the retainers and remove.
m
. co
gn
ia
3. Pry out at the outer edges, slide back and remove the safety belt tongue cover.
rd
ca
4.
1. Position aside the rear door weatherstrip.
2. Remove the bolt.
3. Release the clips and the magnets.
4. Slide down and out and remove the C-pillar trim panel.
m
Installation
accessible to the occupants.

. co
1. NOTE: During installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are

gn

ia
rd
ca
C-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal

2. Remove the second row safety belt anchor bolt and position aside the safety belt.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3.
1. Position aside the rear door weatherstrip.
2. Remove the bolt.
3. Release the clips and the magnets.
4. Slide down and out and remove the C-pillar trim panel.
m
Installation
accessible to the occupants.

. co
1. NOTE: During installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are

gn

ia
rd
ca
303-102
303-1251
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
303-335 (T88T-6701-A)
m
TKIT-1988-F
TKIT-1988-FLM
co
303-409 (T92C-6700-CH)
.
gn
TKIT-1993-LMH/MH
ia
Strap Wrench
rd
Puller
Materials
ca
Name Specification
XO-5W20-QSP
Removal


1. RH splash shield.
Refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
2. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
3.
Discard the bolt.
m
Use the General Equipment: Puller . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
Installation
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft front seal.

m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

Use Special Service Tool: 303-335 (T88T-6701-A) Installer, Front Cover Oil Seal. , 303-102 Installer, Crankshaft
Pulley.
m
. co
Torque:
gn
Stage 1::
89 lb.ft (120 Nm)
Stage 2: Loosen: :
1 turn(s)
Stage 3::
37 lb.ft (50 Nm)
Stage 4::
90°
ia
rd
ca

1. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
2. RH splash shield.
7. After completing the repairs, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure using a diagnostic scan
tool.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Clearance
Check
1. NOTE: Crankshaft main bearing journals must be within specifications before checking journal clearance.
Remove the crankshaft main bearing cap and crankshaft main bearing.
2. Position a piece of Plastigage across the crankshaft main bearing surface.
m
. co
gn
3. NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft while carrying out this procedure.
ia
Install and tighten to specifications, then remove the crankshaft main bearing cap.
rd
4. Measure the Plastigage to get the crankshaft main bearing clearance. The Plastigage should be smooth and flat. A
changing width indicates a tapered or damaged crankshaft or crankshaft bearing.
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal

2. Remove the nut, the bolt and the heat shield.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Position aside the CKP sensor access plug.

m
4. NOTE: Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor from the bell housing before disconnecting the electrical connector to
prevent the CKP sensor from falling in the bell housing.
co
Remove the bolt, disconnect the CKP sensor electrical connector and remove the sensor.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following the on-screen
instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Base Part Number: 6K301
Plastic Scraper
Materials
Name Specification
XO-5W20-QSP
TA-357
ZC-30-A
m
ZC-31-B
Metal Brake Parts Cleaner
PM-4-A, PM-4-B
. - co
Removal
gn
material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may
ia
1. Remove the flexplate.

Refer to: Flexplate (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
rd
2. Remove the crankshaft sensor ring.

ca
3. Disconnect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
m
4. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove oil pan-to-crankshaft rear seal bolts.

m
6.
Remove the bolts and the crankshaft rear seal.
Discard the seal.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. NOTICE: Do not use wire brushes, power abrasive discs or 3M™ Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number
07528) to clean the sealing surfaces of the engine block. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make
leak paths. They also cause contamination that causes premature engine failure. Remove all traces of the
gasket.
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign material.
Procedures).
m
Installation co
.
gn
NOTE: The crankshaft rear seal retainer must be installed and the bolts tightened within 10 minutes of sealant
application.
Apply 5 mm (0.196 in) bead of silicone sealant.

ia

rd
ca
application.
Apply 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of silicone sealant.

m
. co
gn
3. Lubricate the crankshaft rear seal with clean engine oil.
ia
rd
ca
4.
1. Install the crankshaft rear seal retainer at an angle above the oil pan flange to avoid scraping off the sealer.
2. Tilt the seal retainer up and onto the rear of the cylinder block.
m
5. Install the bolts and tighten in sequence shown.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Install oil pan-to-crankshaft rear seal bolts.

m
7. Install the CKP sensor and the bolt.
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.

m
9. Install the crankshaft sensor ring.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
10. Install the flexplate.

Refer to: Flexplate (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Cruise Control - Component Location
m
. co
gn
Item Description
1 CCM
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Overview
The cruise control system is controlled by the PCM.
The cruise control modes are selected from the steering wheel mounted switches (ON/OFF, SET+, SET-, GAP+, GAP- and
CAN/RES), which are integrated into the LH steering wheel switch.
The cruise control system maintains a selected vehicle speed between 29 km/h (18 mph) and the maximum limited vehicle
speed. When a MyKey® restricted key is in use and max speed limiter is turned on, vehicle speed is limited to 129 km/h (80
mph).
During normal driving, the vehicle speed can vary slightly from the set speed due to road conditions. The vehicle speed can
fluctuate when driving up and down a steep hill. If the vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below the set
speed, the cruise control disengages.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
419-03A Cruise Control 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Overview
The cruise control system is controlled by the PCM.
The cruise control mode is selected from the steering wheel mounted switches (ON, OFF, SET+, SET-, RES and CNCL), which
are integrated into the LH steering wheel switch.
The cruise control system maintains a selected vehicle speed between 32 km/h (20 mph), or 29 km/h (18 mph) (metric cluster),
and the maximum limited vehicle speed. When a MyKey® restricted key is in use and max speed limiter is turned on, vehicle
speed is limited to 129 km/h (80 mph).
During normal driving, the vehicle speed can vary slightly from the set speed due to road conditions. The vehicle speed can
fluctuate when driving up and down a steep hill. If the vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below the set
speed, the cruise control disengages.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
System Operation
Adaptive Cruise Control
m
. co
gn

Network Input Messages - ABS Module
ia

Module
rd
Adaptive cruise control brake deceleration CCM Used for cruise control automatic braking.
request
Brake pedal applied PCM Used for brake switch input.
ca
Vehicle lateral acceleration RCM Deactivates cruise control automatic braking when
requested.
Vehicle longitudinal acceleration

Network Input Messages - CCM

Module
Accelerator pedal position PCM Used for accelerator pedal status.
Adaptive cruise control switch SCCM Used for steering wheel switch command status.
commands
Brake pedal applied PCM Used for brake switch input.
Cruise control override PCM Driver overriding cruise control with accelerator pedal.
Ignition status BCM Used for ignition switch position input.
Stability/traction control event in ABS module Deactivates cruise control when requested.
progress
Vehicle yaw rate
Vehicle lateral acceleration RCM Deactivates cruise control when requested.
Vehicle configuration data BCM Used for comparison checking adaptive cruise control
configuration.


Module
Adaptive cruise control gap CCM Data used to generate message center display indicating adaptive cruise
distance display control gap setting.
Cruise control status PCM Data used for speed control indicator status.
m
Cruise control set speed display PCM Data used to display the driver selected vehicle speed.
. co

Network Input Messages - PCM
gn

ia
Module
Adaptive cruise control commands CCM Used for cruise control enable/disable and operating mode
request.
rd
Stability/traction control event in ABS module Deactivates speed control when requested.
progress
ca
Vehicle yaw rate

Vehicle lateral acceleration RCM Deactivates speed control when requested.
Cruise Control Operation
NOTE: For a complete illustration of the adaptive cruise control indicators and graphic displays, refer to the Owner's Literature.
The adaptive cruise control system functions much like a standard cruise control system. The adaptive cruise control system
automatically adjusts the vehicle speed to maintain a set distance gap from the front of the vehicle and the vehicle in the same
path of travel. When the adaptive cruise control system is on and is following a vehicle or a vehicle enters the same driving
lane, a follow vehicle graphic is displayed in the message center.
The adaptive cruise control system does not function if the vehicle speed is below 20 km/h (12 mph). As the vehicle slows down
during automatic braking, the adaptive cruise control system discontinues braking at 20 km/h (12 mph). At that speed, an
audible alarm sounds and the automatic braking from the ABS module is released. The driver must take over the vehicle
braking control.
The cruise control deactivator switch (which is integral to the BPP switch) is an additional safety feature. When the brake pedal
is pressed, the cruise control system deactivator switch opens and removes the ground signal from the PCM input circuit,
releasing the throttle and immediately deactivating the system.
The CCM monitors the yaw rate signal from the ABS module and compares it to the wheel speed and steering wheel angle
signals. If the ABS module determines the yaw rate is invalid, the CCM disables the adaptive cruise control. The message
center displays the message COLLISION WARNING MALFUNCTION and/or ADAPTIVE CRUISE MALFUNCTION.
The CCM monitors the environment in front of the vehicle while active. If the radar beam is obstructed by a buildup of snow, ice,
rain or other debris, or the vehicle is driven in a desert environment with no other traffic for extended periods of time, the sensor
will trigger the message ADAPTIVE CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE SENSOR BLOCKED SEE MANUAL and will disable the
adaptive cruise control. The adaptive cruise control will resume once the obstruction is cleared and the radar is able to detect
targets, or upon a key cycle.
The ABS module estimates brake temperature by monitoring applied brake pressure over a period of time and sends a
message to the CCM when the estimated temperature is above a given threshold. An alarm sounds and the adaptive cruise
control system is deactivated until the estimated brake temperature returns to cooler operating conditions. This condition can
happen in a hilly or mountainous driving terrain.
Cruise Control Indicator
The adaptive cruise control indicator located in the IPC illuminates and the previous gap setting and SET graphic is displayed
indicating the system is in standby mode. This notifies the driver the system is ready and the vehicle can be accelerated to the
desired speed. When the desired speed is obtained and the SET+ switch is pressed, a green indicator light, current gap setting
and desired set speed will appear in the instrument cluster.
Steering Wheel Switch Function
m
The adaptive cruise control steering wheel mounted switches are momentary contact switches that toggle up and down for the
cruise control switch state. Pressing and releasing the steering wheel cruise control ON/OFF switch turns the cruise control
system on. Pressing up and releasing the SET+ switch sets the vehicle's speed and stores the set speed in memory. The
co
adaptive cruise control indicator illuminates and the message center displays the set speed and gap setting graphic.
There are 2 ways to change the set speed. The first way is to accelerate or brake to the desired speed and press and release
the SET cruise control switch until the desired set speed is shown on the message center. The second way is by tapping the
.
SET+ or the SET- switch while in the set mode, increasing or decreasing the displayed set speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) per tap.
gn
If the respective button is pressed and held, the displayed set speed continues to increase or decrease until the button is
released. The adaptive cruise control system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle down to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the message center while the adaptive cruise control system is active.
ia
Pressing and releasing the OFF switch, or switching the ignition to OFF, turns the adaptive cruise control system off. The
adaptive cruise control set speed memory is erased.
rd
Pressing the brake pedal or pressing the CNCL switch puts the adaptive cruise control system in standby mode and the last set
speed is displayed in the message center with a strike through. Pressing the RES button when the adaptive cruise control
system is in standby mode causes the vehicle to accelerate to the last set speed. The set speed continuously displays in the
ca
message center while the adaptive cruise control system is active. The RES button does not function if the OFF button is
pressed, the ignition is cycled OFF, or if the current vehicle speed is below the minimum operational speed.
The adaptive cruise control system has the capability for the driver to change from adaptive cruise control to standard cruise
control. The LH 5-way steering wheel switch is used to switch from the adaptive cruise control system to standard cruise control
system within the message center. For information on selecting the standard cruise control in the message center, refer to
Owner's Literature. Once the driver has selected the standard cruise control in the message center, the adaptive cruise control
indicator is replaced by the standard cruise control indicator. The vehicle no longer responds to lead vehicles or automatic
braking. Upon the next vehicle ignition cycle, the vehicle defaults back to the adaptive cruise control system.
Gap Setting
When a vehicle ahead enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
automatically to maintain a preset distance gap. A bar graph graphic with 4 preset distance gap settings are displayed in the
message center. Pressing up (decrease) or down (increase) on the steering wheel cruise control gap switch increases or
decreases the distance from the vehicle ahead. If all of the bars are illuminated, this is the longest gap setting. If only one bar is
illuminated, that is the shortest gap setting.
The vehicle maintains the distance gap to the vehicle ahead until:
the vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.

the vehicle ahead moves out of the lane or out of view.
the vehicle speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).
a new gap distance is set.
After each ignition cycle, the previous gap setting is remembered and the system is set to that gap setting.
The distance gap can be overridden by pressing the accelerator pedal. The follow vehicle graphic is not displayed in the
message center and the green indicator illuminates. When the accelerator pedal is released, the adaptive cruise control system
returns to normal operation and the vehicle speed decreases to the set speed or a lower speed if following a vehicle ahead.
Deceleration Control
The CCM commands the ABS module, which controls the brakes, to automatically apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle in front.
Steering Wheel Switches
The cruise control steering wheel mounted switches are momentary contact switches that toggle up and down for the switch
state. The switches are an input to the SCCM.
Brake Switch
When the brake pedal is applied, the cruise control deactivator switch opens and removes the ground signal from the PCM
input circuit releasing the throttle, immediately deactivating the system.
Cruise Control Module (C-CM)
The CCM contains a radar sensing unit which measures the relative speed and the distance between the front of the vehicle
and the vehicle being followed. The CCM is responsible for requesting the PCM to increase vehicle speed and the ABS module
m
to brake, when necessary.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
System Operation
Non-Adaptive Cruise Control
m
. co
gn

ia

rd
Cruise control status PCM Data used for speed control indicator status.
Cruise control set speed display PCM Data used to display the driver selected vehicle speed
ca

Network Input Messages - PCM

Module
Cruise control switch commands SCCM Used for cruise control enable/disable and operating mode
request.
Stability/traction control event in ABS module Deactivates speed control when requested.
progress
Vehicle lateral acceleration RCM Deactivates speed control when requested.
Vehicle yaw rate
Cruise Control Operation

The cruise control functions include:
turning on the cruise control system.

setting and maintaining the desired vehicle speed.
accelerating the vehicle speed.
coasting down to a lower speed.
resuming the prior vehicle speed.
turning off the cruise control system.
The cruise control system maintains a selected vehicle speed within a range between 32 km/h (20 mph), or 30 km/h (18 mph) if
equipped with a metric cluster, and the maximum limited vehicle speed. When a MyKey® restricted key is in use, the vehicle
speed will not exceed the MyKey® maximum limited speed. During normal driving conditions, the vehicle speed can fluctuate
slightly from the selected set speed due to road conditions. The vehicle speed can fluctuate more noticably when driving up and
down steep hills.
Certain conditions cause the cruise control system to deactivate:
Application of the parking brake

Transmission gear selector is placed into a position other than D or OD
Cruise control set speed is overridden with the accelerator pedal for a period longer than 5 minutes
Cruise control switch is pressed or stuck longer than 2 minutes
Vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below the set speed
ABS fault
m
The BPP switch assembly (contains the stoplamp switch and cruise control deactivator switch) and APP sensor are hardwired
inputs to the PCM.
co
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) command is a hardwired output of the PCM.
The vehicle speed is controlled by the PCM through the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) subsystem.
.
The cruise control system provides self-diagnostics. Cruise control is disabled anytime an error is detected in the system. No
gn
IPC indicator or message center messages are displayed when faults occur. Fault codes are logged by the PCM or SCCM.
An Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system fault also causes the cruise control system to be disabled. In this case, an
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system powertrain malfunction (wrench) warning indicator is displayed.
ia
Cruise Control Indicator

rd
The cruise control indicator, located in the IPC, illuminates to indicate the cruise control system is active.
Steering Wheel Switch Function

ca
Cruise control switch inputs are received by the SCCM and sent to the PCM through the GWM to the HS-CAN1.
Pressing (ON) and releasing the ON/OFF switch turns the cruise control system on. Pressing (SET+) or (SET-) on the SET
switch while the vehicle is traveling at the desired speed activates the cruise control system.
Pressing up or down on the SET switch while in the active mode increases or decreases the maintained vehicle speed by 2
kmh per press when displayed units are "kmh" and 1 mph per press when displayed units are "mph". If the respective switch is
pressed and held, the vehicle speed continues to accelerate or decelerate until the switch is released.
Pressing down (OFF) and releasing the ON/OFF switch, or turning the ignition switch to the OFF position, turns the cruise
control system off. While the cruise control system is active, applying the brake pedal or pressing the CNCL (CANCEL) switch
puts the cruise control system into standby mode. Pressing the RES (RESUME) switch when the cruise control system is in
standby mode causes the vehicle to accelerate to the last speed. Resume does not function if the OFF switch is pressed, the
ignition switch is cycled OFF, or if the current vehicle speed is below the minimum operational speed.
Steering Wheel Switches
The cruise control steering wheel mounted switches are momentary contact switches that toggle up and down for the switch
state. The switches are an input to the SCCM.
Brake Switch
When the brake pedal is applied, the cruise control deactivator switch, integrated in the BPP switch, opens and removes the
ground signal from the PCM input circuit releasing the throttle, immediately deactivating the cruise control system.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Cruise Control Module (CCM)
Removal
All vehicles

Cruise control module (CCM)
2. Disconnect the CCM electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Separate the grommets and remove the CCM.

m
4. Inspect the grommets for damage.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Replace any damaged grommets.

m
Cruise control module (CCM) bracket
6. Disconnect the CCM electrical connector.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7.
Remove the CCM an bracket assembly.
1. Remove the rear bolt.
2. Remove the front bolts.
3. Position the CCM and bracket assembly to the left and down to release the assembly from the bumper.
m
Installation
2. Align the CCM.

co
Refer to: Cruise Control Radar Alignment (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control, General
.
Procedures).
gn

ia
rd
ca
Cruise Control Radar Alignment
Activation
Vertical Alignment
NOTE: In order to align the CCM, the front bumper cover must be removed to access the sensor and the vehicle must be in a
wheel alignment bay station so that the vehicle is level.
NOTE: Damage to the CCM bracket may affect correct alignment. When aligning the CCM, inspect the CCM bracket for
damage and repair as necessary before carrying out the alignment procedure.

2. Place the vehicle on a wheel alignment bay station.
3. Locate the CCM alignment screw.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Place a combination square level on the face of the CCM and check the alignment.
m
5. Keeping the combination square level on the face of the CCM, adjust the pitch by using an E20 Torx® bit to adjust the
screw until the CCM is vertical and level. . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. NOTE: Prior to installing the front bumper cover, clean and remove any debris on the front or back of the cover.
Install the front bumper cover.
Horizontal Alignment
NOTE: The horizontal alignment for the CCM is a software calibration. No manual adjustment is needed for this procedure. The
scan tool calibrates the CCM through the CCM procedure in programmable parameters.
7. NOTICE: The vehicle's engine must be running during the horizontal alignment procedure. Failure to leave the
engine running throughout the entire procedure results in the cancellation of the alignment procedure and the
system remains non-functional.
Start the engine.
8. Follow the scan tool on-screen instructions to carry-out the CCM calibration procedure located in IDS under Toolbox >
Electrical > Cruise Control > CCM Calibration.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Cruise Control
DTC Charts

PCM DTC Chart

P0504 Brake Switch A / B Correlation GO to Pinpoint Test B
P0572 Brake Switch A Circuit Low GO to Pinpoint Test B
P0573 Brake Switch A Circuit High GO to Pinpoint Test B
P1703 Brake Switch Out Of Self-Test Range GO to Pinpoint Test B
m
P193D Cruise Control Multi-Function Input Signal GO to Pinpoint Test C
U0104 Lost Communication With Cruise Control GO to Pinpoint Test E
U0121
Module co
Lost Communication With Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) Module
. GO to Pinpoint Test D
gn
All other Diagnostic Trouble – Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303
Codes (DTCs) for the procedure.
ia
DTC Chart: Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)

rd

SCCM DTC Chart
ca

B137F:09 Steering Wheel Left Switch GO to Pinpoint Test A
Pack: Component Failure
Pack: Circuit Short to Ground
Pack: Circuit Voltage Above
Threshold
All other Diagnostic –
Trouble Codes REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05
(DTCs) Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components, Diagnosis and
Testing).
DTC Chart: Cruise Control Module (CCM)

Cruise Control Module (CCM) DTC Chart

B142E:78 Forward Looking Sensor GO to Pinpoint Test F
Horizontal Alignment:
Alignment or Adjustment
Incorrect
B1432:78 Forward Looking Sensor This DTC can only be set at the assembly plant during the plant alignment process.
Vertical Alignment: If DTC B1432:78 sets, a reflash of the CCM and the vertical and horizontal aim
Alignment or Adjustment procedure must be performed.
Incorrect REFER to: Cruise Control Radar Alignment (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With:
Adaptive Cruise Control, General Procedures).
B1433:54 Forward Looking Sensor GO to Pinpoint Test F
Alignment: Missing
Calibration
C0072:00 Brake Temperature Too This DTC sets when the CCM detects the brake temperature is too high. WAIT for
High: No Sub Type the brake temperature to cool and RETEST the cruise control system for correct
Information operation.
C1001:08 Vision System Camera: Bus This DTC sets when the CCM receives invalid network data from the IPMA, which
Signal/Message Failure disables the adaptive cruise control system. To diagnose the IPMA,
REFER to: Lane Keeping System (419-07 Lane Keeping System) .
C1132:4B Head Up Display: Over
Temperature REFER to: Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System (419-03C Collision
Warning and Collision Avoidance System, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
C1A67:96 Forward Looking Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test G
Component Internal Failure
C1A67:97 Forward Looking Sensor:
Component or System
Operation Obstructed or
GO to Pinpoint Test Hco
Blocked
.
gn
C1A67:98 Forward Looking Sensor: The CCM was over-temperature. This may occur during extended use in extremely
Component or System Over high weather temperatures. The adaptive cruise control system operation resumes
Temperature after the CCM cools.
ia
U0001:88 High Speed CAN A HS-CAN2 fault was present as a point in time. The fault is not currently present
Communication Bus: Bus since the module is communicating with the diagnostic scan tool. CLEAR the DTC.
Off REPEAT the network test with the diagnostic scan tool. VERIFY the integrity of the
rd
connectors and wiring. Refer to Wiring Diagrams Cell 14 for schematic and
connector information.
U0100:00 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test I
ca
ECM/PCM "A": No Sub

Type Information
U0121:00 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test D
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Control Module: No
U0140:00 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test J
Body Control Module: No
U0151:00 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test K
Restraints Control Module:
U0155:00 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test L
(IPC) Control Module: No
U0158:00 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test M
Head Up Display: No Sub
Type Information
U0212:00 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test N
Steering Column Control
Module: No Sub Type
Information
U0265:00 Lost Communication With GO to Pinpoint Test O
Image Processing Module
Sensor A: No Sub Type
Information
U0401:86 Invalid Data Received From RETRIEVE and FOLLOW non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from the
ECM/PCM "A": Signal PCM. Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual. If no
Invalid Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the PCM, DIAGNOSE the
observable symptom.
Brake System Control ABS module.
Module "A": Signal Invalid REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control (206-09 Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control) .
If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the ABS module, DIAGNOSE
the observable symptom.
U0423:82 Invalid Data Recevied From GO to Pinpoint Test S
Control Module:
Alive/Sequence Counter
Incorrect/ Not Updated
m
Steering Column Control SCCM.
Module: Signal Invalid REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering
co
Wheel and Column Electrical Components, Diagnosis and Testing).
If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the SCCM, DIAGNOSE the
observable symptom.
.
gn
Restraints Control Module: RCM.
Signal Invalid REFER to: Airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20 Supplemental
Restraint System) .
If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the RCM, DIAGNOSE the
ia
observable symptom.
U053B:64 Invalid Data Received From RETRIEVE and FOLLOW non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from the
rd
Image Processing Module IPMA.

A: Signal Plausibility Failure REFER to: Lane Keeping System (419-07 Lane Keeping System) .
If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the IPMA, DIAGNOSE the
ca
observable symptom.
U053B:83 Invalid Data Received From RETRIEVE and FOLLOW non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from the
Image Processing Module IPMA.
A: Value of Signal REFER to: Lane Keeping System (419-07 Lane Keeping System) .
Protection Calculation If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the IPMA, DIAGNOSE the
Incorrect observable symptom.
U2018:51 Control Module Software This DTC sets when the CCM configuration has not been completed. CARRY OUT
#3: Not Programmed the PMI (when the original module is not available) for the module in question as
directed by the diagnostic scan tool.
U2100:00 Initial Configuration Not This DTC sets when the CCM configuration has not been completed. CARRY OUT
Complete: No Sub Type the PMI (when the original module is not available) for the module in question as
Information directed by the diagnostic scan tool.
U2300:55 Central Configuration: Not This DTC sets when the CCM detects the BCM is not configured correctly. CARRY
Configured OUT the PMI procedure (when the original module is not available) for the module in
question as directed by the diagnostic scan tool.
U2300:64 Central Configuration: This DTC sets when the CCM detects the BCM is not configured correctly. CARRY
Signal Plausibility Failure OUT the PMI procedure (when the original module is not available) for the module in
question as directed by the diagnostic scan tool.
U3000:41 Control Module: General CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). RETEST the adaptive cruise control
Checksum Failure system. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U3000:41 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new
CCM.
REFER to: Cruise Control Module (CCM) (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With:
Adaptive Cruise Control, Removal and Installation).
U3000:42 Control Module: General CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). RETEST the adaptive cruise control
Memory Failure system. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U3000:42 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new
CCM.
U3000:44 Control Module: Data CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). RETEST the adaptive cruise control
Memory Failure system. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U3000:44 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new
CCM.
U3000:49 Control Module: Internal CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). RETEST the adaptive cruise control
Electronic Failure system. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U3000:49 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new
CCM.
U3000:63 Control Module: GO to Pinpoint Test P
m
Circuit/Component
Protection Time-Out
U3002:62 Vehicle Identification
Number: Signal Compare
Failure
co
This DTC sets when the stored VIN in the CCM does not match the VIN defined in
the BCM. This may indicate that the original CCM is not installed in the vehicle, and
has not been configured correctly. CARRY OUT the PMI (when the original module
is not available) for the module in question as directed by the diagnostic scan tool.
.
gn
U3003:16 Battery Voltage: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test Q
U3003:17 Battery Voltage: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test R
Voltage Above Threshold
ia
rd
DTC Chart: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module

ABS Module DTC Chart
ca

U0405:41 Invalid Data Received This DTC sets when the ABS module receives invalid network data from the CCM.
From Cruise Control RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non network diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in the CCM.
Module: General
Checksum Failure
U0405:82 Invalid Data Received This DTC sets when the ABS module receives invalid network data from the CCM.
From Cruise Control RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in the CCM.
Module:
Alive/Sequence
Counter Incorrect/Not
Updated
U2107:00 Collision Mitigation By This DTC sets in the ABS module due to long and too frequent collision mitigation brake
Braking: No Sub Type requests from the CCM. RETRIEVE and REPAIR all non-network Diagnostic Trouble
Information Codes (DTCs) in the CCM and other modules on the network.
U2107:68 Collision Mitigation By This DTC is set in the ABS module due to a high acceleration value detected that differs
Braking: Event from request, which can be caused by an abrupt vehicle stop or module failure.
Information RETRIEVE and REPAIR all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the CCM and ABS
module.
U2108:68 Adaptive Cruise This DTC is set in the ABS module when the module detects over-braking during
Control: Event automated vehicle deceleration. If the vehicle deceleration exceeds the 3.2 m/s²
Information threshold, the DTC is stored and the adaptive cruise control is deactivated until the next
ignition cycle. RETRIEVE and REPAIR all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) in the CCM
and ABS module.
All other –
Diagnostic REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control (206-09 Anti-Lock Brake
Trouble System (ABS) and Stability Control) .
Codes
(DTCs)
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Adaptive Cruise Control

Symptom Chart
m
The adaptive cruise

control is inoperative
Sources
Refer to the
Pinpoint Test
co
.
The cruise control switch Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test A
gn
is inoperative/does not Pinpoint Test
operate correctly
The adaptive cruise Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test H
ia
control does not function in Pinpoint Test

rain or snow conditions
ADAPTIVE CRUISE NOT Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test H
rd
AVAILABLE SENSOR Pinpoint Test

BLOCKED SEE MANUAL
message in the IPC
ca
message center
The adaptive cruise Wiring,
control indicator lamp is terminals REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
never/ always on and Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes) .
connectors
PCM
IPC
Unexpected adaptive CCM The adaptive cruise control system can occasionally detect and respond to
cruise control braking Front out-of path vehicles, especially on curves, entry/exit ramps or when changing
bumper lanes. CHECK the CCM and front bumper cover for damage. RETEST the
cover adaptive cruise control system.
Lack of adaptive cruise CCM The adaptive cruise control system may not detect and respond to vehicles
control braking Front performing close cut-ins or on tight curves (especially for vehicles on the
bumper passenger side) due to limited CCM field of view. CHECK the CCM and front
cover bumper cover for damage. If no damage is observed, RETEST the adaptive
cruise control system.
Noise during adaptive Low The driver can detect some noise at low speeds when adaptive cruise control
cruise control braking speeds braking occurs. If braking noise continues,
Brake REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General Information,
concern Diagnosis and Testing).
The cruise control cannot A MyKey® VERIFY whether a MyKey® restricted key is in use. With an admin key,
set above 105 kmh (65 restricted key is VERIFY if MyKey® max speed limiter is turned on. REFER to the Owner's
mph), 113 kmh (70 mph), in use and Literature. If necessary, VERIFY cruise control normal operation with an
121 kmh (75 mph), or 129 MyKey® max admin key.
kmh (80 mph) speed limiter is
turned on
Pinpoint Tests
The Adaptive Cruise Control Is Inoperative
REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components - System Operation and Component Description (211-05
Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components, Description and Operation).
m
REFER to: Cruise Control - System Operation and Component Description (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive

DTC Fault Trigger Conditions - SCCM
. co
gn

B137F:09 Steering Wheel Left Switch Pack: A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when one or more of the
ia
Component Failure cruise control switches are stuck.

B137F:11 Steering Wheel Left Switch Pack: Circuit A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the cruise control
Short to Ground switch circuits are shorted to ground.
rd
Voltage Above Threshold switch circuits are shorted to voltage.
ca
Possible Sources

Cruise control switch
BPP switch
Digital TR sensor
Stoplamp switch
Vehicle speed signal
PCM
ABS module
BCM
CCM
SCCM
PINPOINT TEST A : THE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL IS INOPERATIVE

A1
CHECK FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform SCCM self-test.

Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform CCM self-test.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform ABS module self-test.
Yes For CCM and ABS module Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the DTC Charts in this
section.
For SCCM DTC B137F:09, B137F:11 or B137F:17, GO to A4
For all other SCCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),
No GO to A2
A2
CHECK FOR LOST COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Clear Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all modules.
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
co
Wait at least 10 seconds. Retrieve Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all modules.
Are any lost communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) set in the CCM?
.
gn
Yes REFER to the DTC Chart in this section.
No GO to A3
ia
A3
CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH (BOO1) AND CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH (BOO2)
rd

ca
Using the table, monitor the Parameter Identifications (PIDs) BOO1 (stoplamp switch) and BOO2 (cruise control
deactivator switch) while applying and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake Pedal Position BOO1 PID BOO2 PID

Released On On
Applied lightly On Off
Applied firmly Off Off
Do the PID values agree with the brake pedal position?
Yes GO to A4
A4
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view SCCM Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Using the table, press each cruise control switch while monitoring the cruise control switch PID.
Cruise Control Switch PID Value

ON/OFF (pressed/released) On/Off
RES/CAN (pressed/released) On/Off
SET + (pressed/released) On/Off
SET - (pressed/released) On/Off
GAP + (pressed/released) On/Off
GAP - (pressed/released) On/Off
Does the PID value agree with the switch position?
Yes GO to A5
m
No If only one switch does not display the correct PID value, INSTALL a new LH steering wheel switch.
REFER to: Steering Wheel Multifunction Switch (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical
co
If multiple switches do not display the correct PID value, GO to A6
.
gn
A5
MONITOR THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) TR (TRANSMISSION RANGE) PID
Monitor the PCM PID: TR.

ia
Select DRIVE.
rd
Does the PID value agree with the TR selector lever position?
ca
Yes GO to A10
No
REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, Diagnosis and
Testing).
A6
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE CRUISE CONTROL SWITCHES
Ignition OFF.
Remove the driver airbag.

REFER to: Driver Airbag (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
Disconnect LH Steering Wheel Switch C2490.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2490-4 C2490-5
C2490-6 C2490-5
C2490-7 C2490-5
Yes TURN the ignition off and WAIT one minute. INSTALL a new LH steering wheel switch.
m
INSTALL the driver airbag.
No GO to A7 . co
A7
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH HARNESS FOR AN OPEN
gn
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Clockspring C218B.

ia
Measure:

rd

C2490-4 C218B-15
ca
C2490-5 C218B-8
C2490-6 C218B-6
C2490-7 C218B-7
Yes GO to A8
No Install a new steering wheel.

REFER to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
A8
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH CIRCUITS THROUGH THE CLOCKSPRING FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect Clockspring C218G.
Measure:

C218B-6 (component side) C218G-5 (component side)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to A9
No Install a new clockspring.

REFER to: Clockspring (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
A9
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all SCCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:

Yes CHECK OASIS for any applicable TSBs. If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test
and FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no TSBs address this concern, INSTALL a new SCCM.
A10
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all PCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
m

.
gn
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PCM. For 2.3L,
ia

rd
ca
P0504, P0572, P0573 OR P1703


P0504 Brake A DTC that sets when the PCM does not sense the correct sequence of the brake pedal input signal
Switch A / B from both the cruise control deactivator and stoplamp switches when the brake pedal is pressed and
Correlation released.
P0572 Brake A DTC that sets when the PCM detects an open in the stoplamp switch signal. The PCM monitors the
Switch A vehicle speed, the engine speed, the engine torque and the stoplamp input during start and stop driving
Circuit Low cycles. If the stoplamp switch input to the PCM is always off during start and stop driving cycles, this
DTC sets in continuous memory.
P0573 Brake A DTC that sets when the PCM detects a short to voltage on the stoplamp switch signal. The PCM
Switch A monitors the vehicle speed, the engine speed, the engine torque and the stoplamp switch input during
Circuit High start and stop driving cycles. If the stoplamp lamp switch input to the PCM is always on during start and
stop driving cycles, this DTC sets in continuous memory.
P1703 Brake A DTC that sets in the PCM during the self-test when the stoplamp switch input signal is high or does
Switch Out not cycle high and low.
Of Self -
Test Range
Possible Sources

Stoplamp switch
m
PCM
co
PINPOINT TEST B : P0504, P0572, P0573 OR P1703
.
B1
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE STOPLAMPS
gn
Ignition ON.
Operate the stoplamps.

ia
Do the stoplamps and high mounted stoplamp operate correctly?

rd
Yes GO to B2
No
ca
REFER to: Stoplamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).
B2

Released Off Off
Applied firmly On On

Yes GO to B8
No For an incorrect BOO1 PID value, GO to B3

For an incorrect BOO2 PID value, GO to B4
B3
CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
While applying and releasing the brake pedal, measure:

2.3L GTDI

C1381B-66 Ground
m
co

3.5L GTDI
.
gn

C1551B-66 Ground
ia
rd

ca

3.5L/3.7L TiVCT

C175B-67 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 11 volts with the brake pedal applied and no voltage with the brake pedal released?
Yes GO to B8
B4
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
While firmly applying and releasing the brake pedal, measure:


2.3L GTDI

C1381B-65 Ground

3.5L GTDI

C1551B-65 Ground
m

3.5L/3.7L TiVCT
co
.
gn
C175B-66 Ground
ia
Is the resistance less than 3 ohms with the brake pedal released, and greater than 10,000 ohms with the brake
rd
pedal firmly applied?
Yes GO to B8
ca
No GO to B5
B5
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: BPP switch C278.
Measure:

C278-3 Ground
Yes GO to B6
B6
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C278-2 Ground
Yes GO to B7
B7
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
m
C278-2
. co C278-3
gn
Measure:

ia

2.3L GTDI
rd

C1381B-65 Ground
ca

3.5L GTDI

C1551B-65 Ground

3.5L/3.7L TiVCT

C175B-66 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new BPP switch.

REFER to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
No REPAIR the signal circuit for an open.
B8
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m

co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
P193D
REFER to: Cruise Control - System Operation and Component Description (419-03A Cruise Control, Description and
Operation).

PCM DTC Fault Trigger Conditions

P193D Cruise Control Multi- Sets when the PCM is not receiving the cruise control switch signal from the GWM on the
Function Input Signal HS-CAN1 or from the SCCM on the HS-CAN2.
Possible Sources

Communication concern
Steering wheel switch
SCCM
GWM
PCM
PINPOINT TEST C : P193D

C1
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH PID
Ignition ON.
m
ON/OFF (pressed/released) On/Off
RES/CAN (pressed/released)
SET + (pressed/released)
SET - (pressed/released)
. co On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
gn
GAP + (pressed/released) On/Off
GAP - (pressed/released) On/Off
ia
rd
Yes GO to C2
ca
C2
Yes GO to C3
No
C3
CHECK FOR RECORDED GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

Yes
No GO to C4
C4
CHECK FOR RECORDED SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a SCCM self-test.
Yes DIAGNOSE any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). If DTC B137F:09, B137F:11 or
B137F:17 is present, GO to Pinpoint Test A. For all other SCCM DTCs,
No GO to C5
C5
m
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
co
Wait 10 seconds.
.
gn
Using a diagnostic scan tool, repeat the PCM KOEO self-test.
Is DTC P193D still present?

ia
Yes GO to C6
rd
traffic or an intermitten fault condition.
ca
C6
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
U0121:00 Or U0121
m

DTC Fault Trigger Condition-CCM
. co
gn

U0121:00 Lost Communication with Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Sets in the CCM if data messages received from the
ia
Control Module: No Sub-Type Information ABS module over the HS-CAN2 are missing.
rd
ca

DTC Fault Trigger Condition-PCM

U0121 Lost Communication With Anti-Lock Sets in the PCM if data messages received from the ABS module over the
Brake System (ABS) Control Module HS-CAN2 or from the GWM over the HS-CAN1 are missing.
Possible Sources
ABS module
CCM
GWM
PCM
PINPOINT TEST D : U0121:00 OR U1021

D1
Ignition ON.

Yes GO to D2
D2
Does the ABS module pass the network test?
Yes GO to D3
No
D3
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
m
SYSTEM) MODULE SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a ABS module self-test
Are any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) recorded?

. co
gn
REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control (206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) and Stability Control) .
No GO to D4
ia
rd
D4
MODULE) AND PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TESTS
ca
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a PCM self-test
Yes DIAGNOSE all non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the DTC Charts in this
section.
No GO to D5
D5
CHECK THE GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve the GWM Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
Yes
No GO to D6
D6
RECHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) AND PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). Repeat the CCM and PCM self-tests.
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve the CCM and PCM Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(CMDTCs).
Is CCM DTC U0121:00 or PCM DTC U0121 still present?
Yes GO to D7
m
D7
NOTE: If new modules were installed prior to the DTC being set, the module configuration can be incorrectly set during
co
the Programable Module Installation (PMI) or the Programable Module Installation (PMI) may not have been carried out.
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the ABS module, CCM or PCM.
.
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to D8
D8
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all ABS module connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the ABS module connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

U0104
m

. co
gn
U0104 Lost Communication With Sets in the PCM if data messages received from the CCM over the HS-CAN2 or from
Cruise Control Module the GWM over the HS-CAN1 are missing for greater than 5 seconds.
ia
rd
Possible Sources
CCM
ca
PCM
GWM
PINPOINT TEST E : U0104

E1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to E2
E2
Ignition ON.

Does the CCM pass the network test?
Yes GO to E3
No
E3
CHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) FOR BATTERY VOLTAGE OUT-OF-RANGE DIAGNOSTIC
Is DTC U3003:16 or DTC U3003:17 recorded?
Yes For DTC U3003:16, GO to Pinpoint Test Q

For DTC U3003:17, GO to Pinpoint Test R
No GO to E4
m
E4

. co
gn
Yes
No GO to E5
ia
rd
E5
Clear all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
ca
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Is DTC U0104 still present?
Yes GO to E6
E6
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the CCM or PCM.
Yes GO to E7
E7
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m

. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
B142E:78 or B1433:54


B142E:78 Forward Looking Sensor Horizontal Set by the CCM as a continuous memory and on-demand DTC if the CCM
Alignment: Alignment or Adjustment detects a misalignment of the radar due to the horizontal alignment angle
Incorrect being out of range.
B1433:54 Forward Looking Sensor Horizontal Set by the CCM as a continuous memory and on-demand DTC if the CCM
Alignment: Missing Calibration detects a misalignment of the radar due to the alignment angle being out of
range.
Possible Sources
CCM alignment
CCM bracket
CCM
PINPOINT TEST F : B142E:78 OR B1433:54

F1
INSPECT THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) BRACKET
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Remove the front bumper cover.
Inspect for damage to the CCM bracket.
m
Is the CCM bracket damaged?
Yes REPAIR or INSTALL a new CCM bracket as necessary.
No GO to F2
. co
gn
F2
PERFORM THE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT
NOTE: Remove the front bumper cover to carry-out the vertical alignment procedure.
ia
Perform the alignment procedures for the CCM.

rd
REFER to: Cruise Control Radar Alignment (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control,
ca
Does the CCM align correctly?
Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern was caused by a misaligned sensor.
No INSTALL a new CCM.

C1A67:96


C1A67:96 Forward Looking Sensor: Component Sets when the CCM detects an internal failure or invalid radar data
Internal Failure with the radar sensor.
Possible Sources
CCM
PINPOINT TEST G : C1A67:96

G1
CHECK THE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM BOTH THE CONTINUOUS AND ON-DEMAND
CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TESTS
Igntion ON.
Clear Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all modules.
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
Wait at least 10 seconds.

co
Check the CCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from the continuous and on-demand self-tests.
.
gn
Is DTC C1A67:96 recorded?

ia
Yes GO to G2
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to an intermittent
rd
fault condition. CHECK the CCM connector and the HS-CAN2 bus wires for corrosion.
ca
G2
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
The Adaptive Cruise Control Does Not Function In Rain Or Snow Conditions Or Radar Sensor Is Blocked

m
C1A67:97 Forward Looking Sensor: Set by the CCM as a continuous memory and on-demand DTC if the CCM detects
Component Or System an obstruction or if the sensor is blocked. This DTC may also set when the CCM
Operation Obstructed Or does not see a vehicle or object on the road for an extended period.
Blocked . co
Possible Sources
gn
Front bumper cover

Blockage or obstruction
CCM mounting bracket
ia
CCM alignment
CCM
rd
PINPOINT TEST H : THE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL DOES NOT FUNCTION IN RAIN OR SNOW CONDITIONS
OR RADAR SENSOR IS BLOCKED
ca
H1
INSPECT THE FRONT BUMPER COVER FOR DAMAGE
Inspect for damage on the front and back of the front bumper cover.
Is the front bumper cover damaged?
Yes REPAIR or INSTALL a new front bumper cover as necessary. If installing a new front bumper cover,
REFER to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
No GO to H2
H2
INSPECT THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) AND FRONT BUMPER COVER FOR DEBRIS, MOISTURE,
SNOW OR ICE
Inspect for debris, moisture, snow or ice on the front and back of the front bumper cover and radar sensor.
Is the CCM obstructed or blocked?

Yes CLEAN the front bumper cover and radar sensor portion as necessary.
No GO to H3
H3
INSPECT THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) BRACKET FOR CORRECT MOUNTING
Inspect the CCM bracket for a loose connection or damage at the connection points.
Is the CCM bracket loose, bent or damaged?
Yes Correctly INSTALL the bracket or INSTALL new grommets as necessary. ALIGN the sensor.
REFER to: Cruise Control Radar Alignment (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control, General Procedures).
No GO to H4
H4
INSPECT THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) FOR EXTREME VERTICAL MISALIGNMENT
Visually inspect the CCM for extreme vertical misalignment. The CCM plastic face should be perpendicular to the
ground.
m
Is the CCM visually misaligned vertically?
co
Yes PERFORM vertical alignment and horizontal alignment test procedures.
REFER to: Cruise Control Radar Alignment (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive
Cruise Control, General Procedures).
.
gn
No GO to H5
ia
H5
PERFORM HORIZONTAL AIM
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the horizontal aim procedure.
rd

ca
Does horizontal aim procedure finish successfully without setting DTC C1A67:97?
Yes The system is operating normally at this time. This condition may have been cause by previous snow
or water build up or driving on very sparse rural roads.
No INSTALL a new CCM.

U0100:00


U0100:00 Lost Communication With Sets in continuous memory if data messages received from the PCM over the HS-
ECM/PCM "A": No Sub Type CAN1 or from the GWM over the HS-CAN2 to the CCM are missing for more than
Information 5 seconds.
Possible Sources
CCM
PCM
GWM
PINPOINT TEST I : U0100:00
m
I1
Ignition ON.
Verify whether an observable symptom is present. co

.
gn
Yes GO to I2
ia

rd
I2
VERIFY THAT THE DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL COMMUNICATES WITH THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE)
ca
Using a diagnostic scan tool, verify a vehicle session can be established.
Yes GO to I3
No
I3
CHECK FOR CONTINOUS MEMORY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (CMDTCS) FROM THE PCM
(POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) KOEO (KEY ON, ENGINE OFF) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a PCM KOEO self-test.
Yes DIAGNOSE any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). For 2.3L,
For 3.5L GTDI, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
For 3.5L TiVCT, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
For 3.7L TiVCT, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L
No GO to I4
I4
CHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Yes DIAGNOSE any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the DTC Symptom Chart
in this section.
No GO to I5
I5
m
Yes
co
.
gn
No GO to I6
ia
I6
RECHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the CCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
rd
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
ca
Wait 10 seconds.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve the CCM Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
Yes GO to I7
I7
the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) or the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) may not have been carried
out.
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the CCM or PCM.
Yes GO to I8
I8
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

U0140:00


U0140:00 Lost Communication With Body Control Sets in the CCM if data messages received from the BCM over the HS-
Module: No Sub Type Information CAN1 or from the GWM over the HS-CAN2 are missing.
Possible Sources
BCM
CCM
GWM
PINPOINT TEST J : U0140:00

J1
Ignition ON.
m
Yes GO to J2
No
co
The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network
.
gn
J2
ia

rd

ca
Yes GO to J3
No
J3
Yes
No GO to J4
J4
MODULE) AND BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the CCM and BCM self-test.
Yes DIAGNOSE any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). For BCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTCs),
REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules) .
For CCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the DTC Charts in this section.
No GO to J5
J5
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
m
Yes GO to J6
No
co
.
gn
J6
ia
out.
rd
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the CCM or BCM.
ca

Yes GO to J7
J7
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all BCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:

U0151:00
m

. co
gn
ia

rd

ca
U0151:00 Lost Communication With The yaw rate sensor is integral to the RCM. This DTC sets in the CCM if yaw
Restraints Control Module: rate sensor data messages received from the RCM over the HS-CAN2 are
Missing Message missing.
Possible Sources
CCM
RCM
PINPOINT TEST K : U0151:00

K1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to K2
K2
Yes GO to K3
No
K3
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE RCM (RESTRAINTS
CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the RCM self-test.
m
REFER to: Airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
No GO to K4
. co
gn
K4
CHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
ia

rd
section.
ca
No GO to K5
K5
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear all CCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to K6
K6
out.
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the CCM or RCM.
Yes GO to K7
m
K7
Ignition OFF.
co
Disconnect and inspect all RCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
.
Repair:
gn
ia

rd

ca
and Installation).
U0155:00


U0155:00 Lost Communication With Instrument Panel Sets in the CCM if data messages received from the IPC over
Cluster (IPC) Control Module: No Sub Type the HS-CAN3 or from the GWM over the HS-CAN2 are
Information missing.
Possible Sources
CCM
IPC
GWM
m
L1
Ignition ON.
Verify there is an observable symptom present. co

.
gn
Yes GO to L2
ia

rd
L2
ca
Yes GO to L3
No
L3
Yes
No GO to L4
L4
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE IPC (INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLUSTER) SELF-TEST

No GO to L5
L5
MODULE) SELF-TEST
Yes DIAGNOSE any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to the DTC Chart in this
m
section.
No GO to L6
co
L6
.
gn
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
ia
Wait 10 seconds.
rd
ca
Yes GO to L7
L7
out.
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the CCM or IPC.
Yes GO to L8
L8
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
(IPC).
ia
rd
ca
U0158:00


U0158:00 Lost Communication With Head Up Display: Sets in the CCM if data messages received from the HUD module
No Sub Type Information over the HS-CAN2 are missing.
Possible Sources
CCM
HUD module
PINPOINT TEST M : U0158:00

M1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to M2
m
M2

. co
Yes GO to M3
gn
No
ia
M3
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE HUD (HEAD UP DISPLAY)
rd
MODULE SELF-TEST
ca

REFER to: Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System (419-03C Collision Warning and
Collision Avoidance System, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to M4
M4
MODULE) SELF-TEST
section.
No GO to M5
M5
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to M6
M6
m
out.
co
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the CCM or HUD module.
.
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to M7
ca
M7
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
U0212:00
m

DTC Description
. co Fault Trigger Conditions
gn
U0212:00 Lost Communication With Steering Column Control Sets in the CCM if data messages received from the
Module: No Sub Type Information SCCM over the HS-CAN2 are missing.
ia
Possible Sources
rd
CCM
SCCM
ca

N1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to N2
N2

Yes GO to N3
No
N3
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE SCCM (STEERING
COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Are there any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?

No GO to N4
N4
MODULE) SELF-TEST
m
co
Are there any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
.
section.
gn
No GO to N5
ia
N5
rd
Ignition OFF.
ca
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to N6
N6
out.
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the CCM or SCCM.
Yes GO to N7
N7
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SCCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
m
co

.
gn
ia

rd
ca
U0265:00


U0265:00 Lost Communication With Image Processing Module Sets in the CCM if data messages received from the
Sensor A: No Sub Type Information IPMA over the HS-CAN2 are missing.
Possible Sources
CCM
IPMA

O1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to O2
m
O2
Does the IPMA pass the network test?

. co
gn
Yes GO to O3
No
ia
rd
O3
RETRIEVE THE RECORDED DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) FROM THE IPMA (IMAGE
PROCESSING MODULE A) SELF-TEST
ca
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the IPMA self-test.

REFER to: Lane Keeping System (419-07 Lane Keeping System) .
No GO to O4
O4
MODULE) SELF-TEST
section.
No GO to O5
O5
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes GO to O6
O6
m
out.

co
Check the vehicle service history for recent service actions related to the CCM or IPMA.

.
gn
ia
rd
Yes GO to O7
ca
O7
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the IPMA connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the IPMA connectors and related in-line connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
U3000:63

m
U3000:63 Control Module:
Circuit/Component Protection
Time-Out
co
Set by the CCM as a continuous memory and on-demand DTC if the CCM
detects too many collision mitigation by braking activation requests.
.
gn
Possible Sources
ia
Front bumper cover

CCM mounting bracket
CCM
rd
PINPOINT TEST P : U3000:63

ca
P1
INSPECT THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) , BRACKET AND FRONT BUMPER COVER
Inspect for damage to the CCM, bracket and front bumper cover.
Is the CCM, bracket or front bumper cover damaged?
Yes REPAIR or REPLACE the CCM, bracket or front bumper cover as necessary. For the CCM or
bracket,
For the front bumper cover,

REFER to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and Installation).
No If a software update is available, update the CCM to the latest software level. PERFORM the module
programming. REFER to direction provided by the diagnostic scan tool.
If a software update is not available, INSTALL a new CCM.
U3003:16


U3003:16 Battery Voltage: Circuit Set by the CCM as a continuous memory and on-demand DTC if the CCM detects
Voltage Below Threshold low battery voltage below 9.5 volts for more than 500 ms.
Possible Sources
m
Battery
Generator
CCM
PCM
. co
gn
PINPOINT TEST Q : U3003:16
ia
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed results in false resistance readings. Refer to Section 414-01.
Q1
rd
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the self-test.

ca
Yes GO to Q2
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to a previous low
battery voltage condition.
Q2
CHECK FOR CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) IN THE PCM (POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE)
Yes For 2.3L GTDI,

No GO to Q3
Q3
Yes GO to Q4
Q4
CHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) VOLTAGE SUPPLY
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect CCM C1581.
Ignition ON.
co
.
gn
Measure:

ia

C1581-10 Ground
rd
ca
Yes GO to Q5
Q5
CHECK THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) GROUND CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1581-4 Ground

Yes GO to Q6
Q6
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Reconnect the CCM connector and related in-line connector. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
No
co
.
gn
ia
U3003:17
rd

ca


U3003:17 Battery Voltage: Circuit Voltage Sets as a continuous memory and on-demand DTC if the CCM detects high
Above Threshold battery voltage above 16.5 volts for 500 ms.
Possible Sources
Generator
CCM
PCM
PINPOINT TEST R : U3003:17

NOTE: DTC U3003:17 may be stored in the module memory due to past battery charging or vehicle jump starting
events.
R1
CHECK FOR DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U3003:17, P0563 OR P0626 SET IN OTHER MODULES
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve the Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all
modules.
Is DTC U3003:17, P0563 ( PCM) or P0626 ( PCM) set in more than one module?
Yes For 2.3L GTDI,

For 3.7 TiVCT, REFER to: Charging System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS) (414-00 Charging
No GO to R2
m
R2
Turn off all the interior/exterior lights and accessories. co
.
gn
Yes For 2.3L GTDI,

ia
rd

ca
For 3.7 TiVCT, REFER to: Charging System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS) (414-00 Charging
No GO to R3
R3
RECHECK FOR DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE) U3003:17
Turn the engine off.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the DTC Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
Yes INSTALL a new CCM.

No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set previously during battery
charging or while jump starting the vehicle.
U0423:82


U0423:82 Invalid Data Received From Instrument Sets in continuous memory in the CCM if adaptive cruise control
m
Panel Cluster Control Module: data received from the GWM over the HS-CAN2 or from the IPC
Alive/Sequence Counter Incorrect/Not over the HS-CAN3 is missing for 5 seconds or longer.
Updated
Possible Sources
. co
gn
CCM
IPC
GWM
ia
PINPOINT TEST S : U0423:82

rd
S1
Ignition ON.
ca
Yes GO to S2
S2
Yes GO to S3
No
S3
Yes
No GO to S4
S4
PERFORM THE IPC (INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER) SELF-TEST
Yes
m
No GO to S5
S5
PERFORM THE CCM (CRUISE CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
. co
gn
Are any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) other than U0423:82 present?
Yes REFER to CCM DTC Chart in this section.

ia
No GO to S6
rd
S6
ca
out.
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Repeat the CCM self-test.
Yes For vehicles with the Police package, INSTALL a new IPC.

(IPC).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Cruise Control
DTC Charts

PCM DTC Chart

P0504 Brake Switch A / B GO to Pinpoint Test B
Correlation
P0572 Brake Switch A GO to Pinpoint Test B
Circuit Low
m
P0573 Brake Switch A GO to Pinpoint Test B
Circuit High
P1703 Brake Switch Out Of GO to Pinpoint Test B
P193D
Self-Test Range
Cruise Control Multi-
Function Input Signal
co
GO to Pinpoint Test C
.
gn
All other Diagnostic – For 2.3L TiVCT,
Trouble Codes REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls -
(DTCs) 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
For 3.5L TiVCT, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic
ia
Engine Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS), Diagnosis and Testing).

For 3.5L GTDI, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic
Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
rd
For 3.7L, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine
Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
ca
DTC Chart: Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)

SCCM DTC Chart

Pack: Component Failure
Pack: Circuit Short to Ground
Pack: Circuit Voltage Above
Threshold
All other Diagnostic –
Trouble Codes REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05
(DTCs) Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Cruise Control

Symptom Chart

The cruise control is inoperative Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test A
Test
The cruise control switch is Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test A
inoperative/does not operate Test
correctly
The cruise control indicator lamp Wiring,
is never/always on terminals and REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes
connectors (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes) .
PCM
m
IPC
The cruise control cannot set

above 105 kmh (65 mph), 113
kmh (70 mph), 121 kmh (75
mph), or 129 kmh (80 mph)
A MyKey® restricted
key is in use and
MyKey® max speed
limiter is turned on
. co
VERIFY whether a MyKey® restricted key is in use. With an admin
key, VERIFY if MyKey® max speed limiter is turned on. REFER to
the Owner's Literature. If necessary, VERIFY cruise control normal
operation with an admin key.
gn
Pinpoint Tests
ia
The Cruise Control Is Inoperative

rd

ca
REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components - System Operation and Component Description (211-05
Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components, Description and Operation).
Operation).

DTC Fault Trigger Conditions - SCCM

B137F:09 Steering Wheel Left Switch Pack: A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when one or more of the
Component Failure cruise control switches are stuck.
Short to Ground switch circuits are shorted to ground.
Voltage Above Threshold switch circuits are shorted to voltage.
Possible Sources

Cruise control switch
Digital TR sensor
PCM
SCCM
BPP switch
PINPOINT TEST A : THE CRUISE CONTROL IS INOPERATIVE

A1
Yes If SCCM DTC B137F:09, B137F:11 or B137F:17 was retrieved, GO to A3 For other SCCM
m
No GO to A2 . co
A2
gn
ia

rd

Released Off Off
ca
Applied On On
Yes GO to A3
A3
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)

Cruise On (pressed/released) On/Off
Cruise Off (pressed/released) On/Off
Resume (pressed/released) On/Off
Cancel (pressed/released) On/Off
SET + (pressed/released) On/Off
SET - (pressed/released) On/Off
Yes GO to A4
No If only one switch does not display the correct PID value, INSTALL a new LH steering wheel switch.
If multiple switches do not display the correct PID value, GO to A5
A4
MONITOR THE PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) TR (TRANSMISSION RANGE) PID (PARAMETER
IDENTIFICATION)
m
Monitor the PCM PID: TR.
Select DRIVE.
. co
gn
Does the PID value agree with the TR selector lever position?
Yes GO to A9
ia
No
REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, Diagnosis and
Testing).
rd
ca
A5
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE CRUISE CONTROL SWITCHES
Ignition OFF.
Remove the driver airbag.

Disconnect LH Steering Wheel Switch C2490.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2490-4 C2490-5
C2490-6 C2490-5
C2490-7 C2490-5
Yes TURN the ignition off and WAIT one minute. INSTALL a new LH steering wheel switch.
INSTALL the driver airbag.

No GO to A6
m
A6
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH HARNESS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
gn
C2490-4 C218B-15
ia
C2490-5 C218B-8
rd
ca
C2490-6 C218B-6
C2490-7 C218B-7
Yes GO to A7
No Install a new steering wheel.

REFER to: Steering Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and Installation).
A7
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH CIRCUITS THROUGH THE CLOCKSPRING FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect Clockspring C218G.
Measure:

m
. co
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to A8
No Install a new clockspring.

ca
A8
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all SCCM connectors and related in-line connectors.
Repair:
Yes CHECK OASIS for any applicable TSBs. If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test
and FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no TSBs address this concern, INSTALL a new SCCM.
A9
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia

rd
ca
P0504, P0572, P0573 OR P1703
Operation).


P0504 Brake A DTC that sets when the PCM does not sense the correct sequence of the brake pedal input signal
Switch A / B from both the cruise control deactivator and stoplamp switches when the brake pedal is pressed and
Correlation released.
P0572 Brake A DTC that sets when the PCM detects an open in the stoplamp switch signal. The PCM monitors the
Switch "A" vehicle speed, the engine speed, the engine torque and the stoplamp input during start and stop driving
Circuit Low cycles. If the stoplamp switch input to the PCM is always off during start and stop driving cycles, this
DTC sets in continuous memory.
P0573 Brake A DTC that sets when the PCM detects a short to voltage on the stoplamp switch signal. The PCM
Switch "A" monitors the vehicle speed, the engine speed, the engine torque and the stoplamp switch input during
Circuit High start and stop driving cycles. If the stoplamp lamp switch input to the PCM is always on during start and
stop driving cycles, this DTC sets in continuous memory.
P1703 Brake A DTC that sets in the PCM during the self-test when the stoplamp switch input signal is high or does
Switch Out not cycle high and low.
Of Self -
Test Range
Possible Sources

Stoplamp switch
PCM
PINPOINT TEST B : P0504, P0572, P0573 OR P1703

m
B1
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE STOPLAMPS
Ignition ON.
Operate the stoplamps.

. co
Do the stoplamps and high mounted stoplamp operate correctly?
gn
Yes GO to B2
No
ia
REFER to: Stoplamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).

rd
B2
ca

Released Off Off
Applied firmly On On
Yes GO to B8
No For an incorrect BOO1 PID value, GO to B3

For an incorrect BOO2 PID value, GO to B4
B3
CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
While applying and releasing the brake pedal, measure:

2.3L GTDI

C1381B-66 Ground
m

3.5L GTDI
Positive Lead
C1551B-66
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia

3.5L/3.7L TiVCT
rd

C175B-67 Ground
ca
Is the voltage greater than 11 volts with the brake pedal applied and no voltage with the brake pedal released?
Yes GO to B8
B4
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
While firmly applying and releasing the brake pedal, measure:

2.3L GTDI
C1381B-65 Ground

3.5L GTDI

C1551B-65 Ground

3.5L/3.7L TiVCT
m
C175B-66 Ground
. co
Is the resistance less than 3 ohms with the brake pedal released, and greater than 10,000 ohms with the brake
gn
pedal firmly applied?
Yes GO to B8
ia
No GO to B5
rd
B5
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ca
Disconnect: BPP switch C278.
Measure:

C278-3 Ground
Yes GO to B6
B6
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C278-2 Ground
Yes GO to B7
B7
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

C278-2 C278-3
m
Measure:

2.3L GTDI
. co
gn

C1381B-65 Ground
ia
rd

ca

3.5L GTDI

C1551B-65 Ground

3.5L/3.7L TiVCT

C175B-66 Ground

Yes INSTALL a new BPP switch.
REFER to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
No REPAIR the signal circuit for an open.
B8
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
P193D
Operation).

PCM DTC Fault Trigger Conditions

P193D Cruise Control Multi- Sets when the PCM is not receiving the cruise control switch signal from the GWM on the
Function Input Signal HS-CAN1 or from the SCCM on the HS-CAN2.
Possible Sources

Communication concern
SCCM
GWM
PCM
PINPOINT TEST C : P193D

C1
CHECK THE CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH PID
Ignition ON.

Cruise On (pressed/released) On/Off
Cruise Off (pressed/released) On/Off
m
Resume (pressed/released) On/Off
Cancel (pressed/released) On/Off
SET + (pressed/released)
SET - (pressed/released)
. co On/Off
On/Off
gn

ia
Yes GO to C2
rd
ca
C2
Yes GO to C3
No
C3
CHECK FOR RECORDED GWM (GATEWAY MODULE A) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
Yes
No GO to C4
C4
CHECK FOR RECORDED SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
(DTCS)
Yes DIAGNOSE any non-network Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). If DTC B137F:09, B137F:11 or
B137F:17 is present, GO to Pinpoint Test A For all other SCCM DTCs,
No GO to C5
C5
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
co
Using a diagnostic scan tool, repeat the PCM KOEO self-test.
.
Is DTC P193D still present?
gn
Yes GO to C6
ia
traffic or an intermitten fault condition.

rd
C6
Ignition OFF.
ca
Repair:
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Cylinder Block Core Plug Replacement
100-001 (T50T-100-A)
Slide Hammer
Materials
Name Specification
Threadlock 262 WSK-M2G351-A6
TA-26
m
Repair
All core plugs
co
1. NOTE: Cylinder block core plug shown, cylinder head core plug similar.
Using the Slide Hammer and a commercially available body dent puller attachment or commercially available freeze plug
.
puller remove the core plug.
gn
Use Special Service Tool: 100-001 (T50T-100-A) Slide Hammer.
ia
rd
ca
2. NOTE: Oversize plugs are identified by the OS stamped in the flat located on the cup side of the plug.
Inspect the core plug bore for any damage that would interfere with the correct sealing of the plug. If the core plug bore
is damaged, bore for the next oversize plug.
Cup-type
3. NOTE: Use care during this procedure so as not to disturb or distort the cup sealing surface.
NOTE: When installed, the flanged edge must be below the chamfered edge of the bore to effectively seal the bore.
Coat the cup-type core plug and bore lightly with sealant and install the core plug using a freeze plug installer. Remove
the excess sealant after installation.
Material: Threadlock 262 / TA-26 (WSK-M2G351-A6)
Expansion-type
4. NOTE: Do not contact the crown when installing an expansion-type core plug. This could expand the plug before seating
and result in leakage.
Coat the expansion-type core plug and bore lightly with sealant and install the core plug using a freeze plug installer.
m
Remove the excess sealant after installation.
Material: Threadlock 262 / TA-26 (WSK-M2G351-A6)
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
303-00 Engine System - General Information
General Procedures
Cylinder Block Distortion

1FM5K7D8XHGA34356 Procedure
Feeler Gauge revision date: 08/28/2012
Check
1. NOTE: Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) per running foot
of length, such as Snap-On® GA438A or equivalent. For example, if the Straightedge is 61 cm (24 in) long, the
machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) from end to end.
Use a Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set to inspect the cylinder block for flatness.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Cylinder Bore Taper
Check
1. Measure the cylinder bore at the top, middle and bottom of piston ring travel in 2 directions as indicated. Verify the
cylinder bore is within the wear limit. The difference indicates the cylinder bore taper. If the cylinder bore taper does not
meet specification, bore the cylinder to the next oversize limit.
m
. co
gn

ia
rd
ca
Cylinder Head Distortion
Feeler Gauge
Check
1. NOTE: Make sure all cylinder head surfaces are clear of any gasket material, silicone sealant, oil and coolant. The
cylinder head surface must be clean and dry before running a flatness check.
NOTE: Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) per running foot
Using a Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set, inspect the cylinder head for flatness in the sequence shown.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Cylinder Head LH
Materials
Name Specification
XO-5W20-QSP
Removal
material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, can
NOTE: If the cylinder head is replaced, a new secondary timing chain tensioner will need to be installed.
1. Remove the LH camshafts.

Refer to: Camshafts (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
m
Remove the heat shield. . co

gn
ia
rd
ca
Disconnect the block heater electrical connector.

Remove the block heater wiring harness from the engine.
m
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors and the wire harness retainers.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the bolts and the CMP sensors.

m
6.

. co
Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connectors.
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the fasteners and the A/C compressor.

m
8.
Disconnect the EOP sensor electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
10.
Remove the nuts and LH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
11.
Remove and discard the exhaust manifold gasket.
rd
Remove and discard the studs.

ca
12. Clean and inspect the catalytic converter manifold.
Refer to: Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection (303-00 Engine System - General Information, General Procedures).
13. Remove the LH block coolant drain plug and allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
m
14. Remove the RH block coolant drain plug or block heater and allow coolant to drain from the cylinder block.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
15. Remove the thermostat housing bolts.

m
co
NOTICE: Make sure that the fuel rail and the fuel injectors do not come out of the lower intake manifold.
.
gn
Remove the bolts and the lower intake manifold.
ia
rd
ca
17. Remove and discard the lower intake manifold gaskets.

m
. co
gn
ia
18. Remove and discard the thermostat housing gasket.

rd
ca
19. NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove the bolt or damage to the upper LH primary timing chain guide may
occur.
Remove the bolt and the upper LH timing chain guide.
m
installation into their original locations.
. co
20. NOTE: If the components are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in the same positions. Mark the components for
Remove the valve tappets.

gn
ia
rd
ca
21. Inspect and install new components as necessary.

m
22. Remove and discard the M6 bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
23. NOTICE: Aluminum surfaces are soft and can be scratched easily. Never place the cylinder head gasket surface,
unprotected, on a bench surface
NOTE: The cylinder head bolts must be discarded and new bolts must be installed. They are tighten-to-yield designed
and cannot be reused.
Remove and discard the bolts from the cylinder head.

Remove the cylinder head.
m
24. Remove and discard the head gasket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
25. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the
sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to
remove all traces of the head gasket.
Support the cylinder head on a bench with the head gasket side up. Check the cylinder head distortion.
Refer to: Cylinder Head Distortion (303-00 Engine System - General Information, General Procedures).
NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the
m
Check the cylinder block distortion.
co
Refer to: Cylinder Block Distortion (303-00 Engine System - General Information, General Procedures).
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. Install a new cylinder head gasket.

2. NOTE: If the cylinder head is replaced, a new secondary timing chain tensioner will need to be installed.
Install the LH cylinder head and new bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
177 lb.in (20 Nm)
Stage 2:
26 lb.ft (35 Nm)
m
Stage 3:
90°
Stage 4:
90°
Stage 5:
45°
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Install the M6 bolt.

m
4. NOTE: The valve tappets must be installed in their original positions.
Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and install.co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Install the upper LH timing chain guide.

m
6. Install a new thermostat housing gasket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Install the new lower intake manifold gaskets.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the lower intake manifold and the bolts.

9. Install the thermostat housing bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
90 °
m
10.
Tighten the cylinder block drain plug to:
Torque:
. co
Stage 1:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
gn
Stage 2:
720°
If equipped, tighten the block heater to:
ia
rd
ca
m
co.
gn
ia
11. Install the LH block coolant drain plug.

Torque:
rd
Stage 1:
142 lb.in (16 Nm)
Stage 2:
180°
ca
12.
Install the new studs.
Install the new exhaust manifold gasket.
13. Install LH catalytic converter and the new nuts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. Install the heat shield and the bolts.

m
15.
Connect the EOP sensor electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
16. Install the A/C compressor and the fasteners.
m
17.
Connect the A/C compressor electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
18. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean engine oil.
Install the CMP sensors and the bolts.

m
19. Connect the wire harness retainers and the electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
20. Install the LH camshafts.


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)
Removal and Installation 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356 Procedure
revision date: 04/11/2015
Cylinder Head RH
Materials
Name Specification
XO-5W20-QSP
Removal
NOTE: If the cylinder head is replaced, a new secondary timing chain tensioner will need to be installed.
1. Remove the RH camshafts.

m
Remove the heat shield. . co

gn
ia
rd
ca

m
4. Disconnect the CMP electrical connectors.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the bolts and the CMP sensors.

m
6. Remove the bolt and position aside the ground cable.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
8.
Remove the bolts and the heat shield.

. co
Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor wiring from the heat shield clip.
gn
ia
rd
ca
9.
Remove the nuts and the RH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts.
m
10.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Clean and inspect the catalytic converter flange.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Remove the bolt and the RH timing chain guide.

ca
14. Remove the bolts and the engine lift eye.
m
Remove the bolt and the upper intake manifold bracket.
. co
15. NOTE: Index-mark the location of the bracket on the cylinder head for installation.
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
gn
ia
19. Remove and discard the thermostat housing gasket.

rd
ca
20. Remove the CHT jumper harness.

m
Remove the valve tappets.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
24. NOTICE: Place clean shop towels over exposed engine cavities. Carefully remove the towels so foreign material
is not dropped into the engine. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket
surfaces) that enters the oil passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure.
NOTICE: Aluminum surfaces are soft and can be scratched easily. Never place the cylinder head gasket surface,

m
25. Remove and discard the head gasket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Support the cylinder head on a bench with the head gasket side up. Check the cylinder head distortion.
m
Check the cylinder block distortion.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. Install a new cylinder head gasket.

Install the RH cylinder head and new bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
177 lb.in (20 Nm)
Stage 2:
26 lb.ft (35 Nm)
m
Stage 3:
90°
Stage 4:
90°
Stage 5:
45°
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and install.co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Install the CHT jumper harness.

m
6. Install a new thermostat housing gasket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca


Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
90 °
m
Install the upper intake manifold bracket and the bolt.
. co
10. NOTE: Align bracket with the index mark made during removal.

gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Install the engine lifting eye and the bolts.

m
12. Install the RH timing chain guide and the bolt.
gn
ia
rd
ca
13.
Torque:
Stage 1:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
720°
m
. co
gn
ia
14.
rd

ca
15. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the exhaust manifold nuts to specification a second time will cause the exhaust
manifold to develop an exhaust leak.
Install the RH catalytic converter and new nuts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
Stage 2:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
m
. co
gn
ia
16.
Install the heat shield and the bolts.
rd

Connect the catalyst monitor sensor wiring to the heat shield clip.
ca
Torque:
Stage 1:
142 lb.in (16 Nm)
Stage 2:
180°
m
. co
18. Position back the ground cable and install the bolt.
gn
ia
rd
ca
19. NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean engine oil.
Install the CMP sensor and the bolts.

m
20. Connect the CMP electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the block heater wiring harness onto the engine.

Connect the block heater electrical connector.
m
Install the heat shield.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
23. Install the RH camshafts.


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
1. Remove the lower intake manifold.

2. Disconnect the CHT electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: Do not reuse the CHT sensor, install a new sensor.
Remove and discard the CHT sensor.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies Procedure revision date: 04/11/2015
Cylinder Head
303-1249
Valve Spring Compressor
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
303-300 (T87C-6565-A)
Set, Valve Spring Compressor
T88C-1000-ST
TKIT-1988-FESTIVA
TKIT-1988-TRACER
TKIT-2009TC-F
m
303-350 (T89P-6565-A)
Compressor, Valve Spring
TKIT-1989-F
TKIT-1989-FLM
TKIT-1989-FM
co
TKIT-1990-LMH
.
gn
303-470 (T94P-6510-CH)
Installer, Valve Stem Oil Seal
TKIT-1994-LMH/MH2
ia
TKIT-2009TC-F
rd
Materials
ca
Name Specification
XO-5W20-QSP
DISASSEMBLY
LH cylinder head
NOTICE: If replacing the cylinder head, do not reuse the secondary timing chain tensioners, they must be replaced or
damage to the engine may occur. Refer to Timing Drive Components.
1. Remove the timing chain guide pin.

2. NOTICE: If a spark plug is dropped, internal damage may result and the spark plug must be discarded. The use
of a damaged spark plug may cause cylinder misfire resulting in engine damage.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
RH cylinder head
3. Remove the timing chain tensioner arm and timing chain guide pins.
4. Remove and discard the CHT sensor.

m
co
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
All cylinder heads
Using the special tools, remove the valve collet, valve spring retainer and the valve spring.
Use Special Service Tool: 303-300 (T87C-6565-A) Set, Valve Spring Compressor. , 303-350 (T89P-6565-A)
Compressor, Valve Spring. , 303-1249 Valve Spring Compressor.
m
7. Remove the valve stem seal.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. Remove the valve.

9. Repeat the above steps for each valve.
ASSEMBLY
All cylinder heads
m
1. Install the valve.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Lubricate with clean engine oil and using the special tool, install the valve stem seal.
Use Special Service Tool: 303-470 (T94P-6510-CH) Installer, Valve Stem Oil Seal.
m
3. Using the special tools, install the valve spring, valve spring retainer and the valve collet.
co
Use Special Service Tool: 303-300 (T87C-6565-A) Set, Valve Spring Compressor. , 303-350 (T89P-6565-A)
Compressor, Valve Spring. , 303-1249 Valve Spring Compressor.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Repeat the above steps for each valve.
RH cylinder head
Install the spark plugs.

6. Install a new CHT sensor.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Install the timing chain tensioner arm and timing chain guide pins.
LH cylinder head
Install the spark plugs.

m
9. Install the timing chain guide pin.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Symptom Chart
NOTE: Before begining diagnostics, refer to Description and Operation in this section for proper DRL operation.

m
Module
The DRL are inoperative or always on Refer to the Pinpoint Test

. co GO to Pinpoint Test A
gn
Pinpoint Tests
The DRL Are Inoperative Or Always On

ia

rd
Operation).
ca
Possible Sources

BCM
Inspect the LH multifunction switch for damage.
PINPOINT TEST A : THE DRL (DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS) ARE INOPERATIVE OR ALWAYS ON
NOTE: For police equipped vehicles, when Police Silent Mode is activated through the instrument cluster message
center, the DRL will not illuminate. DRL operation will return to normal when Police Silent Mode is deactivated.
A1
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE HEADLAMPS
Ignition ON.
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS position and observe the headlamps.
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position and observe the headlamps.
Do the headlamps operate correctly?

Yes GO to A2
No If one or both of the headlamps are inoperative or always on at full intensity,

If one or both of the both headlamps are always on at a reduced intensity, GO to A5
A2
CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE DRL (DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS)
Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS position while making sure there is enough ambient light to
prevent the headlamps from turning on.
Apply and hold the brake pedal.
Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL.
Observe the headlamp low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Are both low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) the illuminated?
Yes GO to A5
m
No If both of the low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are inoperative, GO to A4
If a single low beam LED is inoperative, GO to A3
A3
CHECK THE HEADLAMP INTERNAL HARNESS
co
CHECK the internal headlamp harness for open or shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins.
.
gn
Is the headlamp internal harness OK?

ia
Yes INSTALL a new ballast.

REFER to: Ballast (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for
rd
normal operation. If the condition returns, GO to A5

No REPAIR the harness. If the harness cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new headlamp assembly.
ca
REFER to: Headlamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
A4
CHECK THAT THE DRL (DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS) ARE ENABLED
For conventional DRL, check if the DRL are enabled through the IPC.
For configurable DRL, check if the DRL are enabled through a diagnostic scan tool.
Are the DRL enabled?
Yes GO to A5
No For conventional DRL, Using a diagnostic scan tool, ENABLE the DRL.
For configurable DRL, ENABLE the DRL. REFER to the Owner's Literature for information on
enabling the DRL.
A5
Repair:

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Degas Bottle
Fluid Suction Gun

Locking Pliers
Materials
Name Specification
VC-3DIL-B
m
VC-3-B
Removal
co
.
gn
1. Remove the pressure relief cap.

ia
rd
ca
2. Using general tools clamp the lower degas bottle hose and syphon the coolant from the degas bottle.
Use the General Equipment: Fluid Suction Gun
Use the General Equipment: Locking Pliers
3. Release the clamps, disconnect the degas bottle coolant hoses.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
4. Unclip the A/C line retainer, remove the bolts, and remove the degas bottle.
ca
Installation
2. Fill the degas bottle with the recommended coolant mixture and fill level.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Automatic Transmission
In most circumstances the PCM sets a DTC to help guide with diagnostics. Refer to the DTC Chart before using the Symptom
Chart. The Symptom column lists the vehicle condition. The Possible Sources column lists a detailed vehicle condition. The
Action column lists the action to be performed to determine the cause of the condition. Each action lists the components that
can cause the symptom and the individual components in that system. The components are listed in order of disassembly. Use
the list of components and the required action to focus on disassembly inspections for the root cause of the concern.

Engagement No Forward Forward clutch damaged or worn.
Concerns REFER to: Forward Clutch Assembly (307-01B
m
Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Diagnosis and Testing).
No Reverse
. co
Direct clutch damaged or worn
REFER to: Direct Clutch Assembly (307-01B
gn
Damaged center support.
REFER to: Low/Reverse Clutch Assembly (307-01B
ia
Harsh Reverse Direct clutch damaged or worn.

rd

ca
Harsh Forward Forward clutch damaged or worn.

REFER to: Forward Clutch Assembly (307-01B
Damaged center support.

Delayed/Soft Reverse Direct clutch damaged or worn.

Lo/reverse clutch damaged or worn.

REFER to: Low/Reverse Clutch Assembly (307-01B
Delayed Soft/Forward Forward clutch damaged or worn.

No Forward and No Check the transmission fluid level.

Reverse REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-
01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission - 6F50/6F55, General Procedures).
Filter or pump assembly.

REFER to: Pump Assembly (307-01B Automatic
Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
6F50/6F55, Description and Operation).
Delayed/Soft Forward Filter or pump assembly.

and Reverse REFER to: Pump Assembly (307-01B Automatic
6F50/6F55, Description and Operation).
Neutral after Launch Low one-way clutch assembly damaged.

REFER to: Low One-Way Clutch Assembly (307-
Shift No 1-2 Intermediate clutch damaged or worn.
m
Concerns Shift/Harsh/Soft/Slipping REFER to: Intermediate Clutch Assembly (307-01B
. co
Low one-way clutch assembly damaged.
gn
Forward clutch assembly damaged or worn.

ia

rd
No 2-3 Direct clutch damaged or worn.

Shift/Harsh/Soft/Slipping REFER to: Direct Clutch Assembly (307-01B
ca

Intermediate clutch damaged or worn.

REFER to: Intermediate Clutch Assembly (307-01B
No 3-4 Overdrive clutch assembly damaged or worn.

Shift/Harsh/Soft/Slipping REFER to: Overdrive Clutch Assembly (307-01B

Direct clutch damaged or worn.

No 4-5 Direct clutch damaged or worn.

Shift/Harsh/Soft/Slipping REFER to: Direct Clutch Assembly (307-01B
Overdrive clutch damaged or worn.

REFER to: Overdrive Clutch Assembly (307-01B
Forward clutch damaged or worn.

No 5-6 Intermediate clutch assembly damaged or worn.

Shift/Harsh/Soft/Slipping REFER to: Intermediate Clutch Assembly (307-01B
m
Direct clutch assembly damaged or worn.
. co
Overdrive clutch damaged or worn.

gn
Only Gears 1, 2, 3, 4 Forward clutch assembly stuck on.

Available REFER to: Forward Clutch Assembly (307-01B
ia

Only Gears 5, 6, R Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Diagnosis and Testing).
Available
rd
Forward clutch assembly does not apply.

ca
Only Gears 3, 5, and R Direct clutch assembly stuck on.

Available REFER to: Direct Clutch Assembly (307-01B
Only Gears 1, 2, 4, 6 Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Diagnosis and Testing).
Available
Direct clutch assembly does not apply.
Only Gears 2 and 6 Intermediate clutch assembly stuck on.

Available REFER to: Intermediate Clutch Assembly (307-01B
Only Gears 1, 3, 4, 5, R Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Diagnosis and Testing).
Available
Intermediate clutch assembly does not apply.
REFER to: Intermediate Clutch Assembly (307-01B
Only Gears 4, 5, 6 Overdrive clutch assembly stuck on.

Available REFER to: Overdrive Clutch Assembly (307-01B
Only Gears 1, 2, 3, R Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Diagnosis and Testing).
Available
Overdrive clutch assembly does not apply.
Only Gears 1 and R Low/reverse clutch stuck on.

Available REFER to: Low/Reverse Clutch Assembly (307-01B
Low one-way clutch assembly damaged.

No Engine Braking in Low/reverse clutch damaged or worn.

Low REFER to: Low/Reverse Clutch Assembly (307-01B
m
Torque No Apply TCC damaged or worn.
Converter REFER to: Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) (307-
Operation
Concerns
. co
Always Applied (engine TCC damaged or worn.

gn
stalls) REFER to: Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) (307-
ia
Cycling/Shutter/Chatter TCC damaged or worn.

REFER to: Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) (307-
rd
Other Selector lever high effort Selector lever cable routed wrong, binding or
ca
concerns damaged.
REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic
Transmission External Controls, Diagnosis and
Testing).
No start/TR indicates R Selector lever cable routed wrong, binding or

when selector lever is in damaged.
P REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic
Testing).
Transmission Stuck in Selector lever cable routed wrong, binding or

Park damaged.
Testing).
No Park Range Inspect the selector lever cable for correct

alignment/adjustment.
Testing).
Transfer shaft or final drive.
Transmission Stuck in Selector lever cable routed wrong, binding or

Drive damaged.
Testing).
External Leaks Damaged or worn seals.

REFER to: Leakage Inspection (307-01B Automatic
6F50/6F55, Diagnosis and Testing).
Noise Engine drive accessories, suspension, CV joints,

REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
(100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis
and Testing).
Vibration Engine drive accessories, suspension, CV joints,

REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
(100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis
and Testing).
m
Overheating Transmission fluid cooling system damaged.
REFER to: Transmission Cooling (307-02
co
Transmission Cooling, Diagnosis and Testing).

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Diagnostic Methods
Effective Diagnostic Techniques
NOTE: Do not use this document in place of Ford-prescribed Symptom Based Diagnostics or Workshop Manual diagnostics.
Diagnostic Methods is intended to provide Ford vehicle diagnostic information only for support of Ford-prescribed diagnostics.
The following diagnostic process is critical for consistently successful diagnoses. Random methods work inconsistently and
often lead to multiple repairs and the accompanying frustration.
Understand and verify the symptom.

Understanding a symptom requires understanding normal operation.
Duplicate the concern. Recreate the same conditions that demonstrated the original concern (road testing may be
necessary).
Determine the responsible system.
Gather data, such as a visual inspection and an OASIS report.
Perform system tests, such as pressure tests or DTC retrieval.
Identify the responsible component.
Test the suspect component and related parts.
m
Determine the root cause
Examine related components (wiring faults, misalignments, incorrect adjustments) that may be the actual cause
or may have caused the component failure.
co
Repair all related faults to avoid repeat failures.
Verify the repair has corrected the concern (and not created any new ones) using the identical conditions that
demonstrated the original concern.
.
Diagnostic Scan Tool Testing
gn
Network Test
Performing a network test is always recommended for analysis of electronic system concerns. Always solve network issues
ia
before addressing individual symptoms or DTCs.
Recommended Practices: Refer to section 418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and Testing, to diagnose a
rd
network outage or no response from an individual module (or modules).
Diagnostic Trouble Code Retrieval

ca
Generally, a good diagnostic strategy is to resolve all on-demand codes related to the system concern. Retrieving all
continuous DTCs can also be beneficial to understand historic issues or issues outside of the suspect system that may be
affecting your concern. On-demand testing should be done to ensure the fault represented by a continuous DTC is still present.
Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Modules that produce diagnostic trouble codes have a program that evaluates system conditions, normally while the vehicle or
system is in use. Module inputs can be checked for values indicating an electrical fault with the monitoring circuit or component.
Module outputs can be monitored for correct function. Codes are stored when predefined limits are exceeded and retained
even if the ignition is turned off (generally a DTC is retained for 40+ ignition cycles). Not all continuous codes have a matching
on-demand code - and vice versa. This varies with different modules. For example, some network communication codes are
continuous only. It is important to note that the presence of a continuous DTC does not guarantee that the fault currently exists.
Clearing Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Continuous Memory DTCs caused by the issue being repaired or created during the diagnosis and repair must be cleared or
they will confuse future diagnosis. NOTE: Do not clear DTCs from unresolved vehicle issues.
Ford On-Demand Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Ford Motor Company modules have a unique feature that performs a special diagnostic program at the request of the
technician (using a diagnostic scan tool). This "On-demand" diagnostic program can exercise system outputs not normally
running when the car is parked and record observed faults. These diagnostic codes are communicated to the scan tool, but are
not recorded in module memory. An on-demand test is an effective tool for evaluating real input and output conditions during
module activity – activity that might not normally be occurring during service bay conditions. For example, an air suspension
module on-demand test can run the compressor, vent the system, and observe the report from the height sensor even when
the car is already at correct trim height and not requiring height adjustment.
Network Communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Network DTCs (U-prefix codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as damaged wiring or low battery voltage
occurrences. Additionally, vehicle repair procedures (such as module reprogramming or diagnostics with modules
disconnected) often set network DTCs. Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is unlikely to resolve the concern. To
prevent recurrence of intermittent network concerns, inspect all network wiring, especially in-line and module connectors. Test
the vehicle battery to make sure the vehicle voltage will be stable.
Recommended practice: Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC repeats, test the vehicle communication network.
DTC Nomenclature (SAE J2012 and ISO 14229)
Many modules use 5-character DTCs followed by a 2-character failure-type code. The failure-type (sometimes called "fault
byte") codes provide information about specific fault conditions such as opens or shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs
have an additional 2-character DTC status code suffix to assist in determining DTC history.
Integrated Diagnostic System Scan Tool Usage
If The Integrated Diagnostic System Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With The Vehicle Communication Module
1. Check the Vehicle Communication Module connection and power from the DLC.
m
2. Check the communication between the scan tool and the Vehicle Communication Module.
3. Follow scan tool instructions to retry.

co
If The Integrated Diagnostic System Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With The Vehicle
.
The IDS scan tool first attempts to communicate with the PCM. After establishing communication with the PCM, the scan tool
gn
then attempts to communicate with all other modules on the vehicle.
1. Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.

ia
2. Verify the ignition is ON.
3. If an IDS session cannot be established with the vehicle, ( IDS may state "No communication can be established with the
rd
PCM"):
Choose "NO" when the scan tool prompts to retry communication.
Enter a PCM engineering part number, tear tag, or calibration number to identify the vehicle and start a session.
ca
These identifying numbers may be found:

The PCM engineering part number and the 4-character tear tag are printed on the PCM label.
(PTS website users only) The PCM engineering part number can be determined from OASIS using the
VIN. Choose “HVBoM” from the OASIS tab menu and search Powertrain engine modules for the PCM
engineering part number (If the first character is a "P" in the part number, enter only the characters
following the "P" into IDS).
Establish a session based on the PCM information (above).
4. Using the tool box menu, run the network test.

Determine if all modules on the network are unresponsive or if only the PCM does not communicate.
Recommended practice: Refer to section 418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and Testing, to
diagnose the network outage or no response from the PCM.
Measuring Automotive Circuits
Wiring Pin (Terminal) Fit And The Use Of Rotunda Flex Probes
To avoid wiring pin (terminal) damage, Rotunda Flex Probes NUD105-R025D or Terminal Probe Kit 29-011A must be
used to connect test equipment or jumper wires to pins (terminals).
Male to female pin (terminal) fit is critical for correct connection and durability.
Pin (terminal) fit may be checked by using the mating pin (terminal) to test for normal separation force (a
damaged pin or terminal will have very low separation force from the mating pin or terminal)
Correctly checking the separation force of small pins (terminals) may require removal of the connector terminal
guide/retainer if it adds drag to the pin (terminal) insertion or removal
Replace damaged connectors or pins (terminals).
Checking Power-Providing Circuits
Measuring a power wire with the intended load disconnected using a Digital Multimeter (DMM) will only find open circuits
(open fuse or wire).
Recommended practice: Circuits carrying approximately 200-1000 mA* may be loaded with a 250-350 mA test light.
Measure circuit voltage with a Digital Multimeter (DMM) while the test light is connected and illuminated. A reduction in
the voltage present during test-light-loading indicates excessive circuit resistance.
Recommended practice: Circuits carrying more than one ampere* should be loaded with a device requiring similar
current (e.g., a headlamp bulb may be effective). A reduction in the voltage present during loading indicates excessive
resistance.
*Circuit current is matched to wire gauge/size; Examples:
Conductor sizes of 24 gauge (.5 mm) or smaller are generally used to carry approximately 1 ampere (1000 mA)
or less. Use of the test light to load these circuits is appropriate.
Conductor sizes of 20 gauge (.8 mm) or larger are generally used to carry approximately 5 amperes (5000 mA) or
more. Match the substitute load (measure substitute load current first as necessary) to this current level.
Checking Ground-Providing Circuits
The best method of checking ground circuits is to measure the circuit voltage drop during component operation (or
attempted operation).
An ohmmeter may be accurately used if the battery has been disconnected.
Recommended practice: Expect less than 2 ohms for most small diameter (18 gauge and smaller) wires.
Ohmmeter accuracy is limited to circuits carrying less than approximately 5 amperes (this is due to the fact that very
small resistances, undetectable by a Digital Multimeter (DMM), cause significant voltage loss in higher current circuits).
m
Digital Multimeter (DMM) ohmmeter readings are easily corrupted by the normal voltage present (battery connected) in
many ground circuits.
Recommended practice: Reverse the leads and check for changes in the measurement. Reversing the Digital
co
Multimeter (DMM) lead connections should never change the resistance measurement (unless the circuit contains
a semi-conductor). Measurement (non-semi-conductor) differences when leads are interchanged at the test
points indicate invalid test results. The presence of voltage corrupts the reading, and causes the meter reading to
.
change when the leads are reversed.
gn
Checking Circuit Continuity
Recommended practice: Expect less than 2 ohms of resistance for most wires.
Ohmmeter low-resistance resolution (approximately 0.1 ohm) limits its use to circuits carrying less than approximately 5
ia
amperes. This is due to the fact that very small resistances, below the resolution of a Digital Multimeter (DMM), cause
significant voltage loss in higher current circuits.
rd
The Digital Multimeter (DMM) applies a small amount of voltage to the circuit or component to calculate resistance. As a
result, Digital Multimeter (DMM) ohmmeters are very sensitive to any level of voltage present. Voltage present in the
circuit will corrupt the Digital Multimeter (DMM) reading.
ca
Checking For Unintended Continuity (Shorts) To Other Circuits
A Digital Multimeter (DMM) ohmmeter may be used to detect undesired circuit connections to:
Ground
Other unpowered circuits
Recommended practice: Expect greater than 10,000 ohms of resistance between two separate circuits; the best result
is an open circuit Digital Multimeter (DMM) indication (no detected resistance).
Shorts to voltage are checked with a voltmeter
Recommended practice: Turn ignition on (with battery connected) and measure the circuit for any voltage present
(none should be present)
Checking Circuits By Back-Probing A Connector
Back-probing should be a testing method of last resort. It should only be employed where a diagnostic step requires a
circuit to be tested under actual operating conditions. Back-probing is a risky testing method due to the uncertainty of the
probe connection and the possibility of damaging terminals.
Do not force test leads or other probes into connectors. Adequate care must be exercised to avoid connector terminal
damage while ensuring that good electrical contact is made with the circuit or terminal. Failure to follow these
instructions may cause damage to wiring, terminals, or connectors and subsequent electrical faults.
Use back probes specifically designed for the purpose to assist in making a good test connection and to prevent
connector or terminal damage during back-probing.
Do not test for the presence of voltage at a single point where zero volts is a possible result (you cannot tell the
difference between a bad probe contact and a zero volt result).
Do not test for continuity/opens (using an ohmmeter) between two points (you cannot tell the difference between bad
probe contacts and an open circuit).
Back-probing may be used where the circuit must be analyzed with the voltage-drop method (if the circuit carries greater
than 5 amperes and no other means of testing will definitively eliminate circuit resistance as a possible fault). A zero-volt
result indicates incorrect test conditions (no current flow) or bad back-probe connections.
Occasionally, module failure mode behavior will change the operation of a circuit when it is opened for testing. Back-
probing is an acceptable remedy for these testing dilemmas.
Circuit Analysis Using Jumper Wires (Creating Substitute Circuits)
Jumper wires may be employed for circuit analysis.

Cautions:
Always use fused jumper wires — the recommended universal-testing jumper wire fuse is 2-5 amperes; larger
fuse ratings should be used only in special circumstances.
Use flex probes or equivalent to prevent connector terminal damage (flex probes are not intended to carry higher
currents necessary to operate motors such as a cooling fan or blower motor).
Follow workshop manual testing directions when using jumper wires to avoid component or harness damage due
to incorrect jumper connections.
Never repair a circuit by adding a new wire in parallel to the old one (overlaying the circuit) without fully
understanding what caused the circuit to fail. Always find, examine, and repair the fault to correct the root cause
and to repair any adjacent wiring that has been damaged.
Checking Modules
Generally, module failure rate is very low and therefore replacement modules usually do not resolve the root cause.
m
Incorrect replacement of a module is often the result of inadequate testing.
Understand the correct module function.
Make sure programmable parameters are set correctly for the function in question (Refer to 418-01 Module
Configuration for more information).
Test all inputs, both hard-wired and networked.

co
Resolve DTCs first — as directed by Diagnostic Routines.
Test outputs (see "Checking module switching circuits" below).

.
Check applicable TSBs for module software changes (flash programming).
gn
Checking module switching circuits.
Using the scan tool module-output command function (for example, IDS Output State Control) to activate
components is a fast way to confirm an output is capable of being switched on by the module. Testing that
reveals normal module-output function confirms the need to analyze the module inputs.
ia
Don't apply ground or power directly to module-switched components with jumper wires (unless directed by a
workshop manual procedure), as the component could be damaged by a direct connection to ground/power.
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Diagnostic Trouble Code Charts
Master DTC Index
ABS module
REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control (206-09) .
APIM For SYNC without touchscreen display,
REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00B Information and Entertainment System -
General Information - Vehicles With: SYNC Without Touchscreen, Diagnosis and Testing).
For touchscreen display,
For Sony® audio system,
REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00D Information and Entertainment System -
General Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
ATCM
REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
ACM For AM/FM/CD,
co
REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00A Information and Entertainment System -
General Information - Vehicles Without: SYNC, Diagnosis and Testing).
For SYNC without touchscreen display,
.
gn
ia

rd
BECMB
REFER to: Airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
ca

BCM
REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and Testing).
CCM
REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control, Diagnosis and
Testing).
DACMC
(integrated with REFER to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00D Information and Entertainment System -
ACM) General Information - Vehicles With: Sony Audio System, Diagnosis and Testing).
DDM
REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
DSM
Audio DSP
FCIMB For AM/FM/CD,
FCDIM For AM/FM/CD,

GWM
GFM (Police
option only) REFER to: Flasher Lighting, Siren and Speaker System (100-05 Police Equipment, Diagnosis and Testing).
GPSM For SYNC without touchscreen display,
m
co
.
HCM Refer to: Headlamps, Diagnosis and Testing in Section 417-01.
gn
HUD
REFER to: Collision Warning and Collision Avoidance System (419-03C Collision Warning and Collision
Avoidance System, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
HSWM
rd
HVAC module For DATC,

REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC)
ca
(412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).

For EMTC,
REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC)
IPC
REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01 Instrumentation, Message
Center and Warning Chimes, Diagnosis and Testing).
IPMA
REFER to: Lane Keeping System (419-07 Lane Keeping System, Diagnosis and Testing).
IPMB
REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera, Diagnosis and Testing).
OCS module
PAM
(integrated with REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13A Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid, Diagnosis and Testing).
BCM)
PSCM
REFER to: Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Diagnosis and Testing).
PCM For 2.3L GTDI,
For 3.5L GTDI,
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L EcoBoost
For 3.5L TiVCT,
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec
For 3.7L TiVCT,
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec
PDM
REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
RTM
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (204-04B Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS),
RCM
RGTM
m
SCME
DSM)
SCMG
. co
(integrated with REFER to: Front Seats (501-10A Front Seats, Diagnosis and Testing).
gn
SCMH
SCCM
ia
rd
SODL
REFER to: Blind Spot Information System (419-04 Side and Rear Vision, Diagnosis and Testing).
SODR
ca
REFER to: Blind Spot Information System (419-04 Side and Rear Vision, Diagnosis and Testing).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions
WARNING: Vehicles with scheduled remote start technology may start at any time. Make sure the scheduled
remote start system is disabled when servicing or working in close proximity to rotating engine parts. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not work on the fuel system until the pressure has been released and the engine has cooled. Fuel in
the high-pressure fuel system is hot and under very high pressure. High-pressure fuel may cause cuts and contact
with hot fuel may cause burns. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Differential Fluid Level Check
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant WSP-M2C197-A
XY-80W90-QL
Check

2. Remove the filler plug. If empty, fill the rear axle with 0.55L (1.15 pt) of rear axle lubricant. If fluid level is low, fill to 3-5
mm (0.118-0.196 in) below the bottom of the filler hole and install the filler plug.
Material: Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant / XY-80W90-QL (WSP-M2C197-A)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Differential Housing Cover
Removal

2. Remove the differential housing cover bolts and the cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing and the differential housing cover are clean and free
of oil before installing the new silicone sealant. Cover the inside of the rear axle when cleaning the machined surface to
prevent contamination.
Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing and the differential housing cover.
m
Installation
co
1. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the silicone, or new silicone
must be applied. If possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone has correctly cured.
Apply the differential cover gasket material in a continuous bead.

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Install the differential housing cover and the differential housing cover bolts.
m
3. Fill the differential fluid.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Differential
Differential Exploded View
m
Item Description
co
1 Differential housing
.
gn
2 Pinion shaft
3 Pinion gears
4 Side gears
ia
rd
Differential
The differential allows the half shafts and wheels to rotate at different speeds during cornering and transfers power to the
ca
transfer case for AWD vehicles. The differential assembly consists of the following components:
Differential case (part of the final drive carrier)

Two pinion gears supported by a pinion shaft
Two side gears supported by the differential case and half shafts
When driving in a straight line, both front wheels rotate at relatively the same speed. This means both side gears are rotating at
the same speed, as well, while both pinion gears revolve (but do not rotate) with the side gears. During cornering, the wheel on
the outside of the turn is forced to rotate faster than the wheel on the inside of the turn. Since the side gears must now rotate at
different speeds, the pinion gears rotate on the pinion shaft allowing the drive axles to rotate at different speeds while still
transferring output torque.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies Procedure revision date: 02/15/2016
Differential
204-069 (T81P-1104-C)
Remover/Installer, Front Wheel Hub
307-587
Differential bearing installer and guide
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
Hydraulic Press
Bearing Separator
m
DISASSEMBLY
1. NOTE: AWD shown, FWD similar.

co
Inspect the differential bearings for damage or excessive wear. Install new bearings if necessary.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Using Step Plate 205-D015 and special tools, remove the right differential carrier bearing from the differential assembly.
Use Special Service Tool: 204-069 (T81P-1104-C) Remover/Installer, Front Wheel Hub.
Use the General Equipment: Bearing Separator
m
3. NOTE: AWD shown, FWD similar.
co
Using Step Plate 205-D015 and special tools, remove the left differential carrier bearing from the differential assembly.
Use Special Service Tool: 204-069 (T81P-1104-C) Remover/Installer, Front Wheel Hub.
Use the General Equipment: Bearing Separator
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. NOTE: If replacing the ring gear, it is also necessary to replace the transfer shaft.
Inspect the differential assembly and the ring gear for damage and install new, if necessary.
5. Remove and discard the differential ring gear bolts.
m
. co
gn
ia
6. Remove the differential ring gear.

rd
ca
ASSEMBLY
1. NOTE: Do not torque the 4 ring gear bolts.
Hand-start 4 new ring gear bolts to align the holes in the ring gear and the differential case. Evenly tighten the 4 bolts to
seat the ring gear onto the differential case.
2. Install the remaining new differential ring gear bolts and tighten in 2 stages.
Torque:
Stage 1:
24 lb.ft (33 Nm)
Stage 2:
60 °
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3. Using the special tools, press new differential carrier bearings on the differential assembly.
ca
Use Special Service Tool: 307-587 Differential bearing installer and guide.
Use the General Equipment: Hydraulic Press
m
. co
gn
ia
4. Select a new differential shim.

Refer to: Torque Converter Housing (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55,
rd
Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies).

ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Direct (3, 5, R) Clutch Exploded View
m
Item Description
co
1 Snap ring - direct clutch cylinder
.
gn
2 Direct clutch cylinder
3 Direct clutch piston
4 Return spring - direct clutch piston
ia
5 Direct clutch piston seals

6 Input shaft (part of direct/overdrive clutch assembly)
rd
7 Direct clutch friction plates

8 Direct clutch wave spring
ca
9 Direct clutch steel plates

10 Direct clutch pressure plate
11 Direct clutch snap ring
12 Rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly
Direct (3, 5, R) Clutch Mechanical Operation
The direct clutch is a drive clutch that transfers power from the direct/overdrive hub and shaft assembly to the rear sun gear.
The direct clutch is applied in 3rd and 5th gear and reverse.
Hydraulic pressure from the regulator valve in the valve body pushes the direct clutch piston against the direct clutch pack to
apply the clutch. The input shaft transfers torque to the rear planetary sun gear as a result of the clutch being applied.
Direct (3, 5, R) Clutch Hydraulic Circuits (Applied in REVERSE)

m
When the direct (3, 5, R) clutch is applied in REVERSE, LINE pressure from the pump is directed to the multiplex manual valve
by the manual valve through the REV hydraulic circuit. The multiplex manual valve supplies the direct (3, 5, R) clutch regulator
co
valve with pressure through the REV SUPPLY and C35R SUPPLY hydraulic circuits. To apply the direct (3, 5, R) clutch, SSB
applies varying solenoid pressure to the C35R clutch regulator and boost valves. As the C35R regulator valve moves, it
supplies the direct (3, 5, R) clutch and C35R boost valve with regulated line pressure through the C35R circuit. The C35R boost
.
valve directs the regulated line pressure to the opposite side of the C35R clutch regulator valve through the C35R FDBK circuit
gn
for controlled direct (3, 5, R) clutch engagement.
Direct (3, 5, R) Clutch Hydraulic Circuits (Applied in 3rd and 5th Gear)
ia
rd
ca
When the direct (3, 5, R) clutch is applied in 3rd and 5th gears, LINE pressure from the pump is directed to the multiplex shift
valve by the manual valve through the DRIVE 1 hydraulic circuit. The multiplex shift valve directs the pressure to the direct (3,
5, R) clutch regulator valve through the DRIVE 2/C35R SUPPLY circuits. To apply the direct (3, 5, R) clutch, SSB applies
varying solenoid pressure to the C35R clutch regulator and boost valves. As the C35R regulator valve moves, it supplies the
direct (3, 5, R) clutch and C35R boost valve with regulated line pressure through the C35R circuit. The C35R boost valve
directs the regulated line pressure to the opposite side of the C35R clutch regulator valve through the C35R FDBK circuit for
gradual direct (3, 5, R) clutch engagement.
For details on valve body hydraulic circuits and solenoid operation.

For additional information, refer to: Transmission Description - System Operation and Component Description (307-01B
Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Description and Operation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Direct Clutch
For direct (3,5,R) clutch operation,

REFER to: Direct Clutch Assembly (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55,

Direct Clutch

Direct (3,5,R) clutch Solenoid body filter CLEAN or INSTALL a new solenoid body filter screen.
does not apply blocked to SSB REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
m
SSB is mechanically INSTALL a new solenoid body.
stuck OFF REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
co
PERFORM the Transmission Strategy Download, REFER to: Transmission
Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
.
Direct (3,5,R) clutch REMOVE the main control valve body.
gn
regulator valve REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
stuck OFF Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the direct (3,5,R) clutch regulator valve.
REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
ia

If bore or valve is damaged, INSTALL a new main control valve body. REFER to:
rd
Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic

SSB SIG, C35R, REMOVE the main control valve body.
ca
C35R SUP REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
hydraulic circuits Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
blocked/leaking DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the main control valve body and separator plate
passages for debris/blockage. REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B
Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55,
CLEAN as necessary.
REV REMOVE the main control valve body.
SUPPLY/DRIVE 2 REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
to C35R SUP check Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
ball INSPECT the check ball missing/damage. REFER to: Main Control Valve Body
missing/damaged (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
C35R supply DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the transmission cover and support tower
hydraulic circuit passages for debris/blockage.
blocked or leaking REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Overhaul).
CLEAN as necessary.
Rear planetary sun INSPECT the sun gear and shell for wear and damage. INSTALL new
gear and shell components necessary.
assembly REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Direct (3,5,R) clutch DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the direct (3,5,R) clutch friction and steel plates.
friction plates INSTALL new components as necessary.
REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Direct (3,5,R) clutch INSTALL a new direct (3,5,R) clutch piston and seals.
piston seal leakage REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Direct (3,5,R) clutch Solenoid body filter INSTALL a new solenoid body filter screen.
always applied seal damaged at REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
SSB Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
SSB mechanically INSTALL a new solenoid body.
stuck ON REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
stuck ON Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the direct (3,5,R) clutch regulator valve
and bias spring. REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic
m
Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and
Installation).
SSB SIG, C35R,

co
REMOVE the main control valve body.
.
gn
blocked/leaking DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the main control and separator plate passages for
leakage. REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission -
6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
ia
CLEAN as necessary.
Rear planetary sun INSPECT the sun gear and shell for damage that would prevent free rotation.
gear and shell INSTALL new components as necessary.
rd
assembly REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic

ca
Direct (3,5,R) clutch INSPECT the return spring for damage. INSTALL new components as necessary.
piston return spring
Direct (3,5,R) clutch Incorrect PERFORM the Transmission Strategy Download,
delayed/soft/slipping Transmission REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission -
apply Strategy 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, General Procedures).
programmed into
PCM
Solenoid body filter INSTALL a new solenoid body filter screen.
seal damaged at REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
SSB Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
sticking REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
sticking Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the direct (3,5,R) clutch regulator valve.
boost valve stuck REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
ON Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the direct (3,5,R) clutch boost valve and
bias spring.REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic
Installation).
If bore, valve or spring is damaged, INSTALL a new main control. REFER to:
m
REV
co
CLEAN as necessary.
REMOVE the main control valve body.
SUPPLY/DRIVE 2 REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
.
gn
to C35R SUP check Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
ball INSPECT the check ball missing/damage. REFER to: Main Control Valve Body
missing/damaged (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
ia
C35R supply DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the transmission cover and support tower
hydraulic circuit passages for debris/blockage.
blocked or leaking REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
rd

CLEAN as necessary.
ca
Direct (3,5,R) clutch INSTALL a new direct (3,5,R) clutch piston and seals.
piston seal leakage REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Direct (3,5,R) clutch Incorrect PERFORM the Transmission Strategy Download,
harsh apply Transmission REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission -
Strategy 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, General Procedures).
programmed into
PCM
sticking REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the direct (3,5,R) clutch regulator valve
Installation).
If bore, valve or spring is damaged, INSTALL a new main control valve body.
boost valve sticking REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the direct (3,5,R) clutch boost valve and
bias spring. REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic
Installation).
m
CLEAN as necessary.
friction plates co
.
Direct (3,5,R) clutch INSPECT the return spring for proper installation and damage. INSTALL new
gn
piston return spring components as necessary.
ia
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter - Component Location
m
. co
gn
Item Description
1 Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
ia
2 AC Power Outlet Socket

rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter - Overview
Overview
The direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power AC devices rated 150
watts or less.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter - System Operation and Component Description
System Diagram
m
System Operation

. co
gn
Power pack torque status PCM Used to determine if the engine is started.
ia
A/C OUTLETS (POWER POINTS)

rd
This vehicle is equipped with a 110v A/C outlet on the center floor console. The AC outlet is equipped with an amber LED that
indicates the system status. The LED is illuminated continuously when the inverter is ON and the system is operating normally.
ca
If the LED has a series of three flashes, the power point is overloaded. The LED flashes constantly if the ignition is on and a
fault is detected.
DC/AC INVERTER
The direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter converts 12 volts DC to 110 volts AC to power AC devices rated 150
watts or less.
The 110 volts AC created by the inverter measures differently than conventional, utility generated AC with some multi-meters.
SYSTEM OPERATION
When the ignition is turned to RUN and the engine started, the LED flashes as the inverter runs a self-test. The LED illuminates
constantly and the inverter supplies 110 volts to the AC outlet. The engine must be started for the AC outlet to begin to
operate. In accessory delay mode, the direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter shuts off after 13 minutes. When the
direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter stops receiving information from the BCM over the LIN circuit indicating the
engine is started, it begins counting the elapsed time. After 13 minutes the direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter
shuts down. Cycling the ignition from RUN to OFF and back to RUN, resets the timer. The inverter is powered back on, but only
for another 13 minutes. This prevents the 12-volt battery from being fully discharged. If the vehicle is started, the inverter
operation is not time-limited.
The direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter has a self-protection feature for the following conditions:
Short circuits on the inverter output circuits: The inverter shuts down if it detects a short on the output circuit(s). After 6
seconds, it restarts and checks for a short condition. If the condition still exists, the inverter shuts down again. The
inverter restarts 5 times and if the short still exists on the 5th restart, the inverter disables AC output and the LED
indicator flashes.
Low voltage input: The inverter does not operate when the input voltage is less than 11 volts.
High voltage input: The inverter does not operate when the input voltage is greater than 16 volts.
Load exceeds 150 watts
High temperature: The inverter does not operate if it has overheated or if ambient (cabin) temperatures exceed 75 C
(167 F).
If the self-protection feature is activated, the LED indicator flashes and the direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter
does not provide power output to the AC outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected before direct
current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter operation resumes.
Refer to the Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical loads and devices.
COMPONENT OPERATION
The AC power outlet and inverter module are replaced as separate components. The AC outlets are standard 3-prong outlets,
similar to a standard wall outlet. The contacts of the outlet exert a more powerful grip on the plug so that it does not shake loose
on poor road surfaces.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Before diagnosing or repairing the Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter system refer to the Owner's Literature and
REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter - System Operation and Component Description (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Description and
Operation).
for proper system operation.
DTC Chart

Body Control Module (BCM) DTC Chart

B1330:01 DC/AC Inverter GO to Pinpoint Test A
Module: General
Electrical Failure
m
B1330:02 DC/AC Inverter GO to Pinpoint Test C
Module: General Signal
Failure
B1330:08 DC/AC Inverter GO to Pinpoint Test C
Module: Bus Signal /
Message Failure
B1330:49 DC/AC Inverter
Module: Internal
co
CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC B1330:49 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new Direct Current/Alternating
Current (DC/AC) Inverter.
.
Electronic Failure REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Removal and Installation).
gn
B1330:55 DC/AC Inverter CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-test. If DTC B1330:55 is retrieved again, INSTALL a new Direct Current/Alternating
Module: Not Current (DC/AC) Inverter.
Configured REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Removal and Installation).
B1330:9A DC/AC Inverter ADDRESS all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. If no other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present
ia
Module: Component or ADDRESS any symptoms. REFER to SYMPTOM CHART in this section. If no symptoms are present clear the DTC. If the
System Operating DTC returns and no symptoms are present INSTALL a new Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter.
Conditions REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Removal and Installation).
rd
All Other —
DTCs REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and Testing).
ca
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Symptom Possible Action

Sources
The AC power point Refer to DISCONNECT all electrical accessories from the AC outlet and VERIFY that cabin
LED indicator is the temperature is below 75°C (167°F). CYCLE the ignition. TEST the system for normal
always flashing with Pinpoint operation. If the system is operating normally, RETURN the vehicle to the customer. If the
the key in the ON Test AC outlet LED indicator is still flashing, GO to Pinpoint Test A
position.
No power at the AC Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test A

power point the
Pinpoint
Test
The AC power point Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test B

LED indicator is the
never on Pinpoint
Test
The AC power point Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test C

turns off after 13 the
minutes Pinpoint
Test
Pinpoint Tests
No Power at the AC Power Point or the AC Power Point LED Indicator Flashes with the Key in the ON Position
The engine must be started for the AC outlet to begin to operate. No power is provided to the AC outlet when the LED is flashing.
Operation).
NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts.
NOTE: If the LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted. Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the
ignition. Refer to the Owner's Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point.


B1330:01 DC/AC Inverter Module: General Electrical Sets in the BCM when the general electrical fault is detected by the direct current/alternating current
m
Failure (DC/AC) inverter.
Possible Sources
Fuse(s)
Direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter
. co
AC Outlet
gn
Verify that any device being used in the AC outlet is rated at less than 150 watts.
Verify the AC outlet is not being used with the engine off for a period longer than 13 minutes without starting the engine or cycling the ignition.
ia
Verify the cabin temperature is less than 75ºC (167ºF).

Verify the BCM fuse 23 (10A) is OK.
Verify the BJB fuse 56 (40A) is OK.
rd
Inspect the AC outlet for damage.
PINPOINT TEST A : NO POWER AT THE AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) POWER POINT OR THE AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) POWER POINT
LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) INDICATOR FLASHES WITH THE KEY IN THE ON POSITION
ca
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when taking measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may
damage the connector.
A1
CHECK THE POWER OUTLET LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) STATUS
Start the engine.
Check the LED on the AC outlet
Is the LED flashing?
Yes GO to A2
No GO to A3
A2
DETERMINE IF THE DC/AC INVERTER IS OVERHEATED
Determine if the direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter is overheated.
Is the vehicle cabin temperature is greater than 75º C (167º F) or has the inverter been in continuous use for a long period of time?
Yes The inverter does not operate if it has overheated or if ambient (cabin) temperatures have exceeded 75º C (166.9º F). Cycle the
ignition off and ALLOW to cool. Test the system for normal operation.
No GO to A3
A3
CHECK AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) POWER OUTLET OPERATION
Start the engine.
With the engine running, plug a device rated less than 150 watts into AC power outlet.
Is the device operating?
Yes If the 110V device is operating and the LED is NOT illuminated, GO to Pinpoint Test B If the device is operating and the LED is
illuminated solid, the AC power outlet is operating correctly at this time.
No GO to A4
A4
CHECK THE INVERTER MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Direct current/Alternating current (DC/AC) Inverter C3501.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3501-5 Ground
C3501-6 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to A5
No VERIFY BCM fuse 23 (10A) and BJB fuse 56 (40A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the open circuit or high resistance on the affected
circuit(s). If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible cause of the circuit short.
ia
rd
A5
CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
ca

C3501-12 Ground
Yes GO to A6
A6
CHECK THE AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect AC Outlet C301.
Disconnect Direct current/Alternating current (DC/AC) Inverter C3501.
Measure:

C3501-1 C301-1
C3501-7 C301-6
Yes GO to A7
A7
CHECK THE AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C3501-1 C3501-7
m
Yes GO to A8

. co
A8
CHECK THE AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
gn
Measure:

ia
C3501-1 Ground
C3501-7 Ground
rd
ca
Yes GO to A9
A9
CHECK AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) OUTLET FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

pin 1 (component side) pin 6 (component side)

pin 2 (component side) pin 1 (component side)
Yes INSTALL a new direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter.

REFER to: Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Removal and Installation).
No INSTALL a new AC Outlet.
REFER to: Alternating Current (AC) Power Outlet Socket (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Removal and Installation).
The AC Power Point LED Indicator is Never On
The engine must be started for the AC outlet to begin to operate. The DC/AC inverter supplies 12V DC and ground to the indicator LED.
m
Operation).
Possible Sources
Fuse(s)
Direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter
AC power point
. co
gn
Verify the BCM fuse 23 (10A) is OK.
Inspect the AC outlet for damage.
ia
PINPOINT TEST B : THE AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when taking measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may damage
rd
the connector.
B1
CHECK AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) POWER OUTLET OPERATION
Start the engine.
ca
With the engine running, plug a device rated less than 150 watts into the AC power outlet.
Is the device operating?
Yes GO to B2
B2
CHECK THE POWER OUTLET LED CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) Inverter C3501.
Disconnect AC Outlet C301.
Measure:

C3501-10 C301-4
C3501-11 C301-3
Yes GO to B3
B3
CHECK THE AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) OUTLET LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
Measure the diode in both directions:
NOTE: This step requires using the Diode test position on an approved multimeter.
Positive Lead Measurement Negative Lead

/ Action
Diode Test
m
. co
gn
ia
pin 3 (component side)

rd
ca
pin 4 (component side)
Is the voltage between 1.5v and 2.0v in one direction?
Yes INSTALL a new direct current/alternating current (DC/AC) inverter.

No INSTALL a new AC outlet.
REFER to: Alternating Current (AC) Power Outlet Socket (414-05 Voltage Converter/Inverter, Removal and Installation).
The AC Power Point Turns Off After 13 Minutes
The DC/ AC inverter receives a signal from the BCM over the LIN whenever the engine is running. If the DC/ AC inverter does not receive this message for 13
minutes, the inverter stops supplying 110 volts to the power outlet and the LED indicator flashes. The system can be reset by cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and back to ON, however the system only operates for another 13 minutes unless the signal is received from the BCM that the engine is running.


B1330:02 DC/AC Inverter Module: General Signal Failure Sets in the BCM when sets when a general signal failure occurs on the LIN.
B1330:08 DC/AC Inverter Module: Bus Signal / Message Failure Sets in the BCM when there is a LIN communication fault from the DC/ AC inverter.
Possible Sources

DC/ AC inverter
BCM
Verify the concern by monitoring the AC outlet LED indicator for 13 minutes with the engine running. If the LED indicator starts to flash after 13 minutes,
continue to the pinpoint test. If the system continues to operate normally after 13 minutes, make sure the customer is aware of the DC/ AC inverter time-out
function.
PINPOINT TEST C : THE AC (ALTERNATING CURRENT) POWER POINT TURNS OFF AFTER 13 MINUTES
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) from the Flex Probe Kit when taking measurements. Failure to use the correct probe adapter(s) may
damage the connector.
C1
RETRIEVE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
m
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform BCM self-test.
Is DTC U0100:00 present?
Yes
co
REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Removal and Installation).
.
No GO to C2
gn
C2
CHECK THE LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
ia
Disconnect DC/ AC Inverter module C3501.

rd
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ca

C3501-9 Ground

No GO to C3
C3
CHECK THE LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3501-9 Ground

Yes GO to C4
C4
CHECK THE LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C3501-9 C2280E-37
Yes INSTALL a new DC/ AC inverter module.

TEST the system for normal operation. If the AC outlet still turns off after 13 minutes when the engine is running,
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Removal
1. Position the passenger front seat.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. WARNING: Disconnect the 12 volt battery before servicing the direct current to alternating current (DC-AC)
inverter or alternating current (AC) powerpoint to prevent the risk of high voltage shock. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Disconnect the battery.

3. Remove the retainers and lower the RH instrument panel lower insulator panel.
m
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the lower RH instrument panel lower insulator panel.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Position the RH front floor covering.

m
6. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the nuts and the Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) inverter.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Door Latch Lubrication
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray ESB-M1C93-B
XL-5-A
Activation
NOTE: Typical left front door shown, others similar.
1. Open the door.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, fully close the latch (2 clicks).

m
3. NOTICE: Do not over-lubricate the latch. Using excessive grease may damage the internal lock motor.
co
Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds.
Material: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / XL-5-A (ESB-M1C93-B)
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. NOTE: Some exterior door handles are operated mechanically while other exterior door handles are operated
electronically.
Open the latch using the exterior door handle.

m
5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Open the door.

m
7. Wipe off any excess grease.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Door Lock Cylinder
Removal
1. NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a new lock cylinder using
the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the current
key code of the vehicle.
Remove the exterior front door handle.

Refer to: Exterior Front Door Handle (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
2. Release the tab and remove the door lock cylinder.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTE: Upon installation, make sure that the d-slot in the lock cylinder lines up with the d-slot in the lock cylinder lever.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Downshift Paddle Switch
Removal
1. NOTE: The downshift paddle switch is serviced as part of the steering wheel multifunction switch.
Remove the downshift paddle switch.

Refer to: Steering Wheel Multifunction Switch (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components, Removal and
Installation).
Installation
1. NOTE: The downshift paddle switch is serviced as part of the steering wheel multifunction switch.
Install the downshift paddle switch.

Refer to: Steering Wheel Multifunction Switch (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components, Removal and
Installation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
415-00D Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: 2017 Explorer
Sony Audio System 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
D-Pillar Speaker
Removal
1. Remove the D-Pillar trim panel.

Refer to: D-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the screws and the speaker.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
D-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal

and Installation).
2.
1. Position aside the liftgate weatherstrip.
2. Remove the bolt.
m
3. Release the clips and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
4. If equipped.
Disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Drive Pinion Seal
Base Part Number: 3N134
205-126 (T78P-4851-A)
Holding Fixture, Drive Pinion Flange
205-133
Installer, Drive Pinion Seal
m
Two Leg Puller
Materials
. co
gn
Name Specification
Premium Long-Life Grease ESA-M1C75-B
XG-1-E1
ia
Removal
rd

2. Remove and discard the driveshaft to rear drive unit (RDU) bolt and washer assemblies.
ca

m
3. NOTICE: Do not remove driveshaft from the pinion flange by pulling on the driveshaft tube. Damage to the CV-
joint can result.
1. Mark the driveshaft and RDU flange alignment.

co
2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the driveshaft from the RDU flange.
.
gn
3. Remove the driveshaft from the RDU flange.
ia
rd
ca
4. Using the special tool, remove and discard the pinion flange nut.
Use Special Service Tool: 205-126 (T78P-4851-A) Holding Fixture, Drive Pinion Flange.
m
5. Index mark the location of the pinion to the pinion flange.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Using the two leg puller, remove the pinion flange.

Use the General Equipment: Two Leg Puller
m
7. Remove and discard the drive pinion seal.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the new drive pinion seal.
Use Special Service Tool: 205-133 Installer, Drive Pinion Seal.
m
2. Apply grease on the splines of the pinion flange. Align the index marks and position the pinion flange to the pinion.
Material: Premium Long-Life Grease / XG-1-E1 (ESA-M1C75-B)
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Using the special tool, install the pinion flange nut.

Use Special Service Tool: 205-126 (T78P-4851-A) Holding Fixture, Drive Pinion Flange.
m
4. Position the rear driveshaft to the RDU and align the reference mark made during removal.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Install the new rear driveshaft flange bolts.

m
6. Check the RDU fluid level.
co

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Driver Airbag
Removal
1. WARNING: The following procedure prescribes critical repair steps required for correct restraint system
operation during a crash. Follow all notes and steps carefully. Failure to follow step instructions may result in
incorrect operation of the restraint system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
2. Depower the SRS.

3. At the side of the steering wheel cover, locate the hole and insert a 3 mm (0.125 inch) Allen key.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. NOTE: The driver airbag has been removed for clarity.
Align the Allen key to contact the spring clip.

m
5.
co
1. Push in on the steering wheel spring clip to release the driver airbag retainer.
2. Pull the driver airbag out and separate it from the steering wheel.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. At the side of the steering wheel cover, locate the hole and insert a 3 mm (0.125 inch) Allen key.
m
7. NOTE: The driver airbag has been removed for clarity.
Align the Allen key to contact the spring clip.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8.
1. Push in on the steering wheel spring clip to release the driver airbag retainer.
2. Pull the driver airbag out and separate it from the steering wheel.
m
9. Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the driver airbag.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
WARNING: Incorrect repair techniques or actions can cause an accidental Supplemental Restraint System
deployment. Make sure the restraint system is depowered before reconnecting the component. Refer to the
Supplemental Restraint System depowering General Procedure in section 501-20B. Failure to precisely follow
depowering instructions could result in serious personal injury from an accidental deployment.
1. Connect the electrical connectors.

m
2. Align the driver airbag to the steering wheel and push in, engaging the driver airbag retainers to the spring clips.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Repower the SRS.


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
1. NOTE: If installing a new module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the diagnostic scan
tool prior to removing the module. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the DDM following the on-screen instructions.
2. Remove the front door trim panel.

Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
3.
Remove the bolts and the DDM.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the DDM following the on-screen instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Driver Door Window Control Switch - Police
Removal
1.
Remove the driver door window control switch and bezel assembly.
1. Release the retaining tabs from the driver door window control switch and bezel assembly.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the driver door window control switch and bezel assembly.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the screws and the driver door window control switch from the bezel.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Driver Door Window Control Switch
Removal
1.
Remove the front door window control switch.
1. Remove the front door window control switch and the bezel assembly.
2. Disconnect the front door window control switch electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
Remove the front door window control switch.

1. Remove the retainers.
2. Remove the front door window control switch from the bezel.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-10A Front Seats 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Driver Front Seat Module (DSM)
Removal
NOTE: The SCME is integral to the DSM. PMI is required on both the DSM and the SCME when a new DSM is installed.
NOTE: The PMI process must begin with the current DSM installed. If the current DSM does not respond to the
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the DSM following the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: The PMI process must begin with the current SCME installed. If the current SCME does not respond to the
m
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the SCME following the on-screen instructions.
co
3. NOTE: The DSM outboard mounting tab is located under the front seat front shield.
Remove the screws, disconnect the electrical connectors and remove the DSM.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the DSM following the on-screen instructions.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the SCME following the on-screen instructions.
Operate the seat in all directions through the full range of travel to set the soft stops.
If equipped with memory adjustable pedals, operate the adjustable pedals in both directions through the full range of
travel to set the soft stops.
If equipped with memory adjustable steering column, operate the steering column in all directions through the full range
of travel to set the soft stops.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Driver Multi-Contour Seat Module [SCMG]
Base Part Number: 14F548
Removal
NOTE: Drivers seat SCMG shown, passenger seat SCMH similar.
NOTE: The PMI process must begin with the current SCMG installed. If the current SCMG does not respond to the
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the SCMG following the on-screen instructions.
2. Move the front seat to the full upward position.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Detach the electrical connector retainers and position the wire harnesses aside.
m
4.
1. Detach the backrest cover straps.
co
2. Route the backrest cover straps through the backrest blower motor snorkel.
3. Position the backrest cover upward.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. NOTICE: To install, gradually alternate the left and right seat backrest cover zippers to prevent damage to the
seat backrest cover.
1. Unzip the backrest cover zipper on each side.

m
6. Position the backrest blower motor snorkel aside.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. NOTE: Follow the color codes of the hoses and locks as indicated below. Tube colors noted are from left to right.
Release the locking tabs and disconnect the hose and lock assemblies from the SCMG.
Orange lock: black - transparent blue - blue - green
Blue lock: yellow - transparent green - red - clear
m
8.
Remove the SCMG.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector. co
2. Lift upwards on the SCMG to release the rear locking clip.
3. Rotate the SCMG to release the side locking clips.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the SCMG following the on-screen instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Driver Side Register
Removal
1. Release the clips and remove the LH instrument panel side trim panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the LH instrument panel finish panel.

m
3. Release the clips and remove the driver side register assembly.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
1. Disconnect the electrical connector, remove the bolts and the driver side temperature door actuator.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Installation

ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
205-01 Driveshaft 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Driveshaft Angle Measurement
Check
NOTE: This procedure does not apply to CV joints, flex couplers or double cardan joints that are used in some driveshafts. This
check is for single-cross and roller-style joints found in the driveshafts.
NOTE: Prior to checking driveline angularity, inspect the U-joints for correct operation.
NOTE: An incorrect driveline angle can cause a vibration or shudder.
NOTE: Driveline angularity is the angular relationship between the engine crankshaft, the driveshaft and the rear axle pinion.
Factors determining driveline angularity include ride height, rear spring and engine mounts.
1. NOTE:
Special Tool(s): Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor 164-R2402. Carry out the following preliminary
setup steps:
1. Inspect the U-joints for correct operation.
m
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface such as a drive-on hoist, or back onto a front end alignment rack.
3. Verify the curb position ride height is within specifications with the vehicle unloaded and all of the tires are inflated
to their normal operating pressures.
frame rail and press the ALT-ZERO button.

. co
4. Calibrate the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor by placing it on a clean, flat level section of the
Vehicles with flat-flanged, split-pin or slip-flanged U-joints

gn
2. NOTE: If equipped, remove the snap ring to allow access to the base of the U-joint cup. Make sure the Anglemaster II
Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor is seated against the U-joint cup.
NOTE: Rotate the driveshaft until the flange U-joint cup is parallel with the floor. This will simplify taking measurements.
ia
Special Tool(s): Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor 164-R2402. Check and record the flange angle as angle
rd
A.
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
3. Special Tool(s): Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor 164-R2402. Measure the slope of the connecting
component. Record the measurement of the component angle as angle B.
rd
ca
Multiple piece driveshafts
4. NOTE: Repeat this step for each center support bearing on the driveshaft.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the U-joint snap ring, if equipped, for these measurements.
Special Tool(s): Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor 164-R2402. Measure the slope of the components in
front and behind the center support bearing U-joint in the area indicated. Record the front component as angle A and the
rear component as angle B.
All vehicles
5. NOTE: When 2 connected components slope in the same direction, subtract the smallest number from the larger
number to find the U-joint operating angle. When 2 connected components slope in the opposite direction, add the
measurements to find the U-joint operating angle.
m
Calculate the difference in the slope of the components to determine the U-joint operating angle.
6. NOTE:
co
The U-joint operating angle is the angle formed by 2 yokes connected by a cross and bearing kit. Ideally, the
operating angles on each connection of the driveshaft must:
.
1. be equal or within one degree of each other.
gn
2. have a 3 degree maximum operating angle.
3. have at least one-half of one degree continuous operating angle.
7. If the angle is not within specifications, repair or adjust to obtain the correct angle. Inspect the engine mounts,
ia
transmission mounts, center support bearing mounting, rear suspension, rear axle, rear axle mounting or the frame for
wear or damage.
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
100-002 (TOOL-4201-C)
Holding Fixture with Dial Indicator Gauge
Inspection
NOTE: Driveline vibration exhibits a higher frequency and lower amplitude then high-speed shake. Driveline vibration is directly
related to the speed of the vehicle and is noticed at various speeds. Driveline vibration can be perceived as a tremor in the
floorpan or heard as a rumble, hum or boom.
m
NOTE: Refer to Specifications in this section for runout specifications.
1. NOTE: Do not make any adjustments before carrying out a road test. Do not change the tire pressure or the vehicle
load. co
Carry out a visual inspection of the vehicle. Operate the vehicle and verify the condition by reproducing it during
.
the road test.
gn
The concern should be directly related to vehicle road speed. not affected by acceleration or deceleration or could
be reduced by coasting in NEUTRAL.

ia
rd
3. NOTE: The driveshaft should be kept at an angle equal to or close to the curb-weighted position. Use a twin-post hoist
or a frame hoist with jackstands.
Inspect the driveshaft for damage, undercoating or incorrectly seated U-joints. Rotate the driveshaft slowly by
ca
hand and feel for binding or end play in the U-joint trunions. Remove the driveshaft. Inspect the slip yoke splines
for any galling, dirt, rust or incorrect lubrication. Clean the driveshaft or install new U-joints as necessary. Install a
new driveshaft if damaged. After any corrections or new components are installed, recheck for the vibration at the
road test speed.
If the vibration persists after inspection, measure the driveshaft runout.
Check
1. NOTE:
Measure and check for the specified maximum value. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. Rotate
the driveshaft by turning the axle and measure the runout at the front, center and rear of the driveshaft. Multiple
piece driveshaft measure each section at the front, center and rear.
1. If the runout exceeds 1 mm (0.040 in) at the front or center, install a new driveshaft.
Use Special Service Tool: 100-002 (TOOL-4201-C) Holding Fixture with Dial Indicator Gauge.
2. If the front and center is within 1 mm (0.040 in) , but the rear runout is not, index-mark the rear runout high point
and proceed to step 2.
3. If the runout is within 1 mm (0.040 in) at all points, recheck for vibration at road test speed. If the vibration
persists, balance the driveshaft. Refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this procedure.
m
. co
gn
2. NOTE: Circular pinion flanges can be turned in 90 degree or one-fourth increments. Half-round pinion flanges are limited
to 2 positions. CV joint pinion flanges that have 6 bolts, can be turned in 60 degree or one-sixth increments.
ia
Index-mark the driveshaft to the pinion flange. Disconnect the driveshaft and rotate it 180 degrees. Reconnect the
driveshaft. Recheck the runout at the rear of the driveshaft.
rd
1. If the runout is still over specification, mark the high point and proceed to Step 3.
2. If the runout is within specification, check for the vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration is still present,
balance the driveshaft. Refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this procedure.
ca
3. NOTE:
Excessive driveshaft runout can originate in the driveshaft itself or from the pinion flange. To find the source,
compare the 2 high points previously determined.
1. If the index marks are close together, within 25 mm (1 in), the driveshaft is eccentric. Install a new driveshaft.
2. If the marks are on opposite sides of the driveshaft, 180 degrees apart, the slip yoke or pinion flange is
responsible. Check the pinion flange runout. If the pinion flange runout exceeds specifications, a bent pinion is
indicated.
Refer to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and Testing).
3. If the pinion flange and pinion runouts are within specifications, road test and check for the vibration at the road
test speed. If the vibration persists, balance the driveshaft. Refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this procedure.
m
. co
gn
ia
Driveshaft Balancing – Using the Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix)
rd
4. Special Tool(s): Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) 257-00018. Working
under the vehicle, install an accelerometer. The accelerometer can be attached and mounted near either the
transmission or differential end of the driveshaft.
ca
5. NOTE:
Clean an area of the driveshaft and install the reflective tape, then install the photo-tachometer sensor. The
sensor should be placed at approximately a 20-degree angle from perpendicular to the surface of the reflective
tape. Make sure the sensor does not get moved during the balance procedure.
1. Reflective tape.
2. Photo-tachometer sensor.
6. Special Tool(s): Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) 257-00018. Run a
driveshaft balance test with the driveshaft unmodified.
Vehicles with tapped pinion flanges
m
7. Label the tapped holes in the pinion flange numerically, starting at the top hole as 1. Mark the remaining holes 2, 3, 4,
(depending on flange type, 5 and 6 may also be needed). Label in the direction of rotation.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. Special Tool(s): Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) 257-00018. Run a
second test with the 12 mm (0.47 in) test weight set screw in the No. 1 hole, previously marked on the pinion flange.
9. Remove the test weight, then install the weight combination directed by the Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline
Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix).
Vehicles without tapped pinion flanges
10. NOTE:
Special Tool(s): Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) 257-00018. Run
a second test with a test weight. Using a metal band, secure the test weight to the end of the driveshaft. The
weight should be placed at the end of the driveshaft tube, as close to the tube-to-yoke weld seam as possible.
Mark the location of the test weight on the driveshaft, as shown in the figure below.
1. Test weight.
2. Tube-to-yoke weld seam.
3. Driveshaft pinion flange.
Select the test weight based on driveshaft size. Larger driveshafts use 10 g (0.353 oz). Smaller driveshafts use 5
g (0.176 oz).
11. NOTE:
Remove the test weight, then install the recommended weight at the position directed by the Mastertech® Series
MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix). Using a metal band and epoxy, secure the test weight
to the driveshaft, as shown in the figure below.
m
1. Test weight.
2. Measure in this direction.
3. Driveshaft diameter.
4.
5.
Directional rotation.
Balance weight relative to test weight centerline.co
The results are displayed with respect to the location to where the test weight was placed.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
All vehicles
12. Special Tool(s): Mastertech® Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) 257-00018. Run a third
test to verify the repair.
Driveshaft Balancing – Hose Clamp Method
13. Install 1 or 2 hose clamps on the driveshaft, near the rear. Position of the hose clamp head(s) can be determined
through trial and error.
14. Mark the rear of the driveshaft into 4 approximately equal sectors and number the marks 1 through 4. Install a hose
clamp on the driveshaft with its head at position No. 1, as shown in the figure below. Check for vibration at road speed.
Recheck with the clamp at each of the other positions to find the position that shows minimum vibration. If 2 adjacent
positions show equal improvement, position the clamp head between them.
15. If the vibration persists, add a second clamp at the same position and recheck for vibration.
m
. co
gn
ia
16. If no improvement is noted, rotate the clamps in opposite directions, equal distances from the best position determined in
rd
Step 14. Separate the clamp heads about 13 mm (1/2 in) and recheck for vibration at the road speed.
ca
17. Repeat the process with increasing separation until the best combination is found or the vibration is reduced to an
acceptable level.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Driveshaft
1. Visually inspect the CV joints for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
next step
3. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and REFER to Symptom Chart: NVH.
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: NVH
m

Symptom Chart
REVERSE to DRIVE
Condition
Driveline clunk - loud clunk when shifting from
. co
Possible Sources
Damaged or
worn
Actions
INSPECT the Constant Velocity (CV) joints for
wear or damage. INSTALL a new driveshaft as
Constant necessary.
gn
Velocity (CV) REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
joints Removal and Installation).
ia
Damaged INSPECT the insulator for wear or damage.

driveshaft INSTALL a new driveshaft as necessary.
center REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
rd
bearing Removal and Installation).

support
ca
Driveline clunk — occurs as the vehicle starts to Worn INSPECT the CV joint for a worn condition.
move forward following a stop driveshaft CV INSTALL a new driveshaft if necessary.
joint with REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
excessive Removal and Installation).
play
Damaged INSPECT the insulator for wear or damage.

driveshaft INSTALL a new driveshaft as necessary.
center REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
bearing Removal and Installation).
support
Buzz – buzzing noise is the same at cruise or Incorrect CHECK for correct driveline angles. REPAIR
coast/deceleration driveline as necessary.
angles REFER to: Driveshaft Angle Measurement
(205-01 Driveshaft, General Procedures).
Rumble or Boom – noise occurs at coast/ Driveshaft CHECK the driveshaft for damage, missing
deceleration, usually driveshaft speed-related out of weights or undercoating. INSTALL a new
and noticeable over a wide range of speeds balance driveshaft as necessary.
REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
Grunting — normally associated with a shudder Driveshaft INSTALL a new driveshaft as necessary.
experienced during acceleration from a CV joint REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
complete stop binding Removal and Installation).
Driveline shudder – occurs during acceleration Driveline CHECK for correct driveline angles.
from a slow speed or stop angles out of REFER to: Driveshaft Angle Measurement
specification (205-01 Driveshaft, General Procedures).
Binding or INSPECT the driveshaft CV joints and coupling

damaged shaft for wear or damage. INSTALL a new
driveshaft CV driveshaft as necessary.
joint REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
Driveline vibration - occurs at cruising speeds Worn or CHECK the insulator for damage or wear.
damaged ROTATE the driveshaft and CHECK for rough
driveshaft operation. INSTALL a new driveshaft as
center necessary.
bearing REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
support Removal and Installation).
Loose axle INSPECT the axle pinion flange. TIGHTEN the
m
pinion flange pinion flange bolts to specification.
bolts REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
. co
Excessive
axle pinion
CARRY OUT a runout check. REPAIR as
necessary.
flange runout REFER to: Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
gn
Driveshaft is CHECK the driveshaft for damage, missing

out of balance weights or undercoating. CHECK the
ia
balance driveshaft balance.

REFER to: Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
rd
CARRY OUT a driveline vibration test.

ca
Binding or INSPECT the driveshaft CV joint for wear or

damaged damage. INSTALL a new driveshaft as
driveshaft CV necessary.
joint REFER to: Rear Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft,
Excessive CARRY OUT a runout check.

driveshaft REFER to: Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
runout (205-01 Driveshaft, General Procedures).
Driveline CHECK for correct driveline angles. REPAIR

angles out of as necessary.
specification REFER to: Driveshaft Angle Measurement

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
205-01 Driveshaft 2017 Explorer
Specifications
Specifications

Torque
Description Torque
Inner center bearing bolts 20 Nm (177 lb-in)

Specifications
m
Description Measurement
Driveshaft runout 1.0 mm (0.040 in)
Driveshaft to PTU joint angle @ curb ride height
Driveshaft center bearing joint angle @ curb ride height
. co 2.51 degrees
2.18 degrees
Driveshaft to RDU joint angle @ curb ride height 2.73 degrees
gn

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Electronic Engine Controls- Front
m
. co
gn
Item Description
ia
1 RH intake VCT oil control solenoid

2 RH exhaust VCT oil control solenoid
rd
3 MAPT sensor
4 LH exhaust VCT oil control solenoid
ca
5 LH intake VCT oil control solenoid

6 Catalyst monitor sensor
Electronic Engine Controls - Rear

m
Item Description
1
2
3
Left hand CMP exhaust sensor
Left hand CMP intake sensor
KS
. co
gn
4 CHT sensor
5 Right hand CMP intake sensor
6 Right hand CMP exhaust sensor
ia
7 CKP sensor
8 HO2S Left hand
rd
9 HO2S Right hand

10 Catalyst monitor sensor
ca

m
Item Description
1 PCM
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Overview
The EEC system provides optimum control of the engine through the enhanced capability of the powertrain control module
(PCM). The EEC system also has an on board diagnostic (OBD) monitoring system with features and functions to meet federal
regulations on exhaust emissions. The EEC system has two major divisions: hardware and software. The hardware includes
the PCM, sensors, switches, actuators, solenoids, and interconnecting terminals. The software in the PCM provides the
strategy control for outputs (engine hardware) based on the values of the inputs to the PCM. The PCM receives information
from a variety of sensor and switch inputs. Based on the strategy and calibration stored within the PCM, the PCM generates the
appropriate output. The system is designed to minimize emissions and optimize fuel economy and driveability. The software
strategy controls the basic operation of the engine, provides the OBD strategy, controls the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL),
communicates to the scan tool over the data link connector (DLC), allows for flash electrically erasable programmable read only
memory (EEPROM), provides idle air and fuel trim, and controls failure mode effects management (FMEM).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
System Operation
Refer to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) Manual Section 1 Description and Operation.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)


P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temp
For Closed Loop Fuel REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
Control Diagnosis and Testing).
P0128 Coolant Thermostat
m
(Coolant Temp Below REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
Thermostat Regulating Diagnosis and Testing).
Temperature)
P0217 Engine Coolant
Overtemperature
Condition
co
REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
.
gn
P0218 Transmission Fluid
Temperature Sensor "A" REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Over Temperature Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Condition Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor A First, Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual. If sent here from
Circuit the PC/ED manual,
rd
Range/Performance REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes, Diagnosis and Testing).
ca
Circuit Low the PC/ED manual,

REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
Circuit High the PC/ED manual,
REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
P0504 Brake Switch A / B Without adaptive cruise control,
Correlation REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03A Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
With adaptive cruise control, REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03B Cruise Control -
Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
P0532 A/C Refrigerant Pressure With DATC,
Sensor “A” Circuit Low REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control
(DATC) (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
With EMTC,
REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature
Control (EMTC) (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).
P0533 A/C Refrigerant Pressure With DATC,
Sensor “A” Circuit High REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control
With EMTC,
Testing).
P0562 System Voltage Low
REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System -
P0563 System Voltage High
P0572 Brake Switch A Circuit Without adaptive cruise control,
Low REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03A Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
P0573 Brake Switch A Circuit Without adaptive cruise control,
High REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03A Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
P0579 Cruise Control Multi- Without adaptive cruise control,
Function Input "A" Circuit REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03A Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
Range/Performance With adaptive cruise control, REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03B Cruise Control -
m
P0581 Cruise Control Multi- Without adaptive cruise control,
Function Input "A" Circuit REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03A Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
High
P0620 Generator Control Circuit

co
.
gn
P0625 Generator Field Terminal
Circuit Low REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System -
ia
P0626 Generator Field Terminal

Circuit High REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System -
rd

With DATC,
REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control
ca
A/C Clutch Relay Control
P0645 With EMTC,
Circuit
Testing).
P0657 Actuator Supply Voltage
"A" Circuit/Open REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls,
P065B Generator Control Circuit
Range/Performance REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System -
With DATC,
Variable A/C Compressor
P06A0 With EMTC,
Control Circuit
Testing).
P06E4 Control Module Wake-up
Circuit Performance REFER to: Starting System (303-06C Starting System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
P06E9 No engine rotation
detected during crank REFER to: Starting System (303-06C Starting System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
event Diagnosis and Testing).
P0701 Transmission Control
System REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Range/Performance Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
System Electrical REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
P0705 Transmission Range
Sensor "A" Circuit REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
(PRNDL Input) Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Sensor "A" Circuit REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Sensor "A" Circuit High REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
m
Sensor "A" Circuit
Intermittent
co
REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
.
gn
Circuit Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
ia

Circuit Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
rd
Range/Performance Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Diagnosis and Testing).

ca
Circuit Low Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Circuit High Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
P0715 Turbine/Input Shaft
Speed Sensor "A" Circuit REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
No Signal Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Intermittent Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
P0720 Output Shaft Speed
Sensor Circuit REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Sensor Circuit No Signal REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio
m

co

.
gn
ia

rd
P0740 Torque Converter Clutch

Solenoid Circuit/Open REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
ca

Solenoid Circuit REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Performance/Stuck Off Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Solenoid Circuit Stuck REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
On Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Solenoid Circuit Electrical REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P0748 Pressure Control
Solenoid "A" Electrical REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P0750 Shift Solenoid "A"
Performance/Stuck Off REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P0752 Shift Solenoid "A" Stuck
On REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Electrical REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Intermittent REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P0755 Shift Solenoid "B"
m
Performance/Stuck Off
co
.
gn
P0757 Shift Solenoid "B" Stuck
ia

rd

ca

P0760 Shift Solenoid "C"
P0762 Shift Solenoid "C" Stuck
P0765 Shift Solenoid "D"
P0767 Shift Solenoid "D" Stuck
m
P0770 Shift Solenoid "E"
co
.
gn
P0772 Shift Solenoid "E" Stuck
ia

rd

ca

P07A5 Transmission Friction
Element "B" Stuck On REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Element "D" Stuck Off REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Element "D" Stuck On REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P07AA Transmission Friction
Element "E" Stuck Off REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P0815 Upshift Switch Circuit
REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls,
P0816 Downshift Switch Circuit
REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls,
Pressure REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P0960 Line Pressure Control
(LPC) A Control REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Circuit/Open Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Solenoid "A" Control REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Circuit/Open Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Solenoid "A" Control REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
m
Circuit Low Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Solenoid "A" Control
Circuit High
co
.
P0973 Shift Solenoid "A" Control
gn
Circuit Low REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
ia
P0974 Shift Solenoid "A" Control

Circuit High REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
rd

P0976 Shift Solenoid "B" Control
ca

P0977 Shift Solenoid "B" Control
P0979 Shift Solenoid "C" Control
P0980 Shift Solenoid "C" Control
P0982 Shift Solenoid "D" Control
P0983 Shift Solenoid "D" Control
Range/Performance REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P0A5A Generator Current
Sensor Circuit REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System -
Range/Performance General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
P0A5B Generator Current
Sensor Circuit Low REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System -
P0A5C Generator Current
Sensor Circuit High REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System -
P1001 KOEO Not Able to RETRIEVE and RECORD all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPAIR any self-test or
Complete, KOER Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) first. CLEAR the DTC. RERUN
Aborted the KOERself-test. If the DTC returns, REPROGRAM the PCM with the latest software.
REFER to: Module Programming (418-01 Module Configuration, General Procedures).
RERUN the KOER self-test. If the DTC returns, INSTALL a new PCM,
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L
m
After installing the new PCM PROGRAM it with the latest software.
P1299 Cylinder Head
Overtemperature
Protection Active
P1397 System Voltage Out Of
REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
Self Test Range REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) (414-00 Charging System -
.
gn
With DATC,
ia
A/C Demand Out Of Self

P1464 With EMTC,
Test Range
rd
Testing).
Vehicle Speed Sensor
P1501
ca
Out Of Self Test Range REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control (206-09) .
This DTC sets when the PCM detects low air pressure after the air filter. CHECK the Air
Cleaner (ACL) element, Air Cleaner (ACL) inlet and outlet pipes for restrictions, water or
Engine Air Filter contamination. REPAIR as necessary. RETRIEVE and REPAIR all other Diagnostic
P1548
Restriction Trouble Codes (DTCs).
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code Charts (100-00 General Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).
P1594 Forced engine shutdown
– remote start system REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and
fault, No unattended Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
vehicle timeout
P1595 Forced engine shutdown
– remote start system REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and
fault, transmission range Entry Systems, Diagnosis and Testing).
not in park
P161A Incorrect Response from Without keyless vehicle system,
Immobilizer Control REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01B Passive Anti-Theft System
Module (PATS), Diagnosis and Testing).
With keyless vehicle system, REFER to: Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) (419-01C
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) - Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System, Diagnosis
and Testing).
P1636 Inductive Signature Chip
Communication Error REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P163E Transmission Control
Module Programming REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Error Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
P163F Transmission ID Block
Corrupted, Not REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Programmed Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
P164D All Wheel Drive ID Block
Corrupted, Not REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Diagnosis
Programmed and Testing).
P1703 Brake Switch Out Of Without adaptive cruise control,
Self-Test Range REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03A Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
Circuit Not Indicating
Park/Neutral During Self
Test
co
P1709 Park Neutral Position
.
gn
Switch Out Of Self Test REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Range Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
ia
Temperature Sensor Out REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Of Self Test Range Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
rd

ca

Switch (O/D Cancel) REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls,
Circuit Out Of Self Test Diagnosis and Testing).
Range
P1783 Transmission
Overtemperature REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Condition Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
P181F Clutch Control System
Performance REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Diagnosis
and Testing).
P182B Transfer Case Fluid
Temperature Sensor REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Diagnosis
Circuit and Testing).
Range/Performance
P182C Transfer Case Fluid
Circuit Low and Testing).
P182D Transfer Case Fluid
Circuit High and Testing).
P187B Tire Size Out of
Acceptable Range - REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Diagnosis
AWD Disabled / Limited and Testing).
Function
P188B All Wheel Drive Clutch
Control Circuit REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Diagnosis
and Testing).
P188C All Wheel Drive Relay
Module Communication REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Diagnosis
Circuit and Testing).
P188D All Wheel Drive Relay
Module Feedback Circuit REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Diagnosis
and Testing).
Signal REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
P193D Cruise Control Multi- Without adaptive cruise control,
m
Function Input Signal REFER to: Cruise Control (419-03A Cruise Control, Diagnosis and Testing).
P193E A/C Clutch Request
Signal
With DATC, co
With EMTC,
.
gn
Testing).
P2066 Fuel Level Sensor "B"
ia
Circuit REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
Range/Performance Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes, Diagnosis and Testing).
rd

Circuit Low REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
ca

Circuit High REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
P25B0 Fuel Level Sensor "A"
Stuck REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
P25B1 Fuel Level Sensor "B"
Stuck REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
P25B2 Fuel Level Sensor "A" or
"B" Stuck REFER to: Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes (413-01
P26C3 Internal Control Module
Transmission Range REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Sensor Performance Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
P2700 Transmission Friction
Element "A" Apply Time REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Element "B" Apply Time REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Element "C" Apply Time REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Element "D" Apply Time REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Element "E" Apply Time REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Element "F" Apply Time REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
Pressure Control REFER to: Automatic Transmission - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), 6-Speed Automatic
m
Solenoid Intermittent Transmission - 6F50/6F55 (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
P2783 Torque Converter
Temperature Too High co
.
gn
U0121 Lost Communication GO to Pinpoint Test A
With Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) Control
Module
ia
U0164 Lost Communication GO to Pinpoint Test C

With HVAC Control
Module
rd
U0212 Lost Communication GO to Pinpoint Test B

With Steering Column
ca
Control Module
All — Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual. Section 3 Symptom
Other Charts.
DTCs
Pinpoint Tests
U0121


U0121 Lost Communication With Anti-Lock Brake The PCM sets this DTC if data messages from the ABS module
System (ABS) Control Module through the GWM are missing.
REFER to: Communications Network - System Operation and Component Description (418-00 Module Communications
Network, Description and Operation).
Possible Sources
Communications network concern

ABS module
BCM
GWM
PCM
PINPOINT TEST A : U0121

A1
Ignition ON.
m
Yes GO to A2
. co
A2
gn

ia
Did the ABS module pass the network test?

rd
Yes GO to A3
No
ca
Testing).
A3
PERFORM ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM) CONTROL MODULE SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a ABS control module self-test.
Yes
REFER to: Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control (206-09) .
No GO to A4
A4
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve the BCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

Yes
Testing).
No GO to A5
A5
Is DTC P0562 or DTC P0563 recorded?
Yes REFER to PCM DTC Chart in this section.
No GO to A6
A6
the PMI, or the PMI may not have been carried out.
m
Wait 10 seconds.
Repeat the PCM self-test.

. co
gn
Yes GO to A7
ia

rd
A7
ca
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, retrieve all Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all
modules.
Is DTC U0121:00 set in any other module?
Yes GO to A8
No GO to A9
A8
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all ABS control module connectors.

Repair:
Reconnect all the ABS control module connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
A9
m
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
co
.
gn
Reconnect all PCM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

ia

rd
ca

U0212


U0212 Lost Communication With Steering Column The PCM sets this DTC if data messages from the SCCM through the
Control Module GWM are missing.
Possible Sources

BCM
GWM
PCM
SCCM
PINPOINT TEST B : U0212

B1
Ignition ON.
m
Yes GO to B2
No
co
.
gn
B2
ia
Did the SCCM module pass the network test?

rd
Yes GO to B3
No
ca
Testing).
B3
PERFORM SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) SELF-TEST
Yes
No GO to B4
B4

Yes
Testing).
No GO to B5
B5
No GO to B6
B6
m
Wait 10 seconds.

. co
gn
Yes GO to B7
ia
rd
B7
ca
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
modules.
Yes GO to B8
No GO to B9
B8
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all SCCM connectors.

Repair:
Reconnect all the SCCM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
B9
m
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
co
.
gn

ia

rd
ca
U0164


U0164 Lost Communication With The FCIM controls the HVAC control module functions. The PCM sets this DTC if data
HVAC Control Module messages from the HVAC control module from the GWM are missing.
Possible Sources

BCM
GWM
HVAC control module
PCM
PINPOINT TEST C : U0164

C1
Ignition ON.
m
Yes GO to C2
No
co
.
gn
C2
ia
Did the HVAC control module pass the network test?

rd
Yes GO to C3
No
ca
Testing).
C3
PERFORM HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) CONTROL MODULE SELF-TEST
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform a HVAC control module self-test.
Yes
REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC)
, or REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control
(EMTC) (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to C4
C4
Yes
Testing).
No GO to C5
C5
No GO to C6
C6
m
Wait 10 seconds.
. co

gn

ia
Yes GO to C7
rd

ca
C7
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
modules.
Yes GO to C8
No GO to C9
C8
OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Reconnect all the HVAC control module connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
C9
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
Repair:
ia
rd

ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Electronic Leak Detection
Electronic Leak Detector
Inspection
1. NOTE: Use a Rotunda-approved Electronic Leak Detector for R-134a refrigerant SAE Certified to J2791.
NOTE: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding
air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector indicates this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals
such as antifreeze, disc brake cleaner or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. Using a fan to ventilate
the area to be tested before proceeding with the leak detection procedure is helpful in removing small traces of
contamination from the air, but the fan should be turned off during actual testing.
NOTE: If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector indicates this gas all the time. Odors
from other chemicals such as antifreeze, disc brake cleaner or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem.
m
NOTE: R-134a, if present, is heavier than air, and tends to move down from the source of the leak. It is possible that a
leak may not be detected if the leak detector tip is held above the leaking fitting, line or component. Always be sure to
thoroughly leak test below, above and around the fitting, line or component for the presence of R-134a.
co
Leak check the service ports. Remove caps and blow air over the service ports to remove trapped refrigerant before leak
testing ports.
023‐22791 Robinair Infrared A/C Refrigerant Leak Detector w/Case
.
Use the General Equipment: Electronic Leak Detector
gn
2. NOTE: The system pressure should be 413-551 kPa (60 - 80 psi) at 24° C (75.2° F) with the engine off and cool. The
pressure reading may be higher if the engine is hot.
ia
Leak test the refrigerant system. Follow the instructions included with the Electronic Leak Detector for handling and
operation techniques.
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
General Procedures
Elevation System Check
Check
1. Turn the ignition ON, engine OFF.
m
2. Set the parking brake.
. co
3. Place the gearshift in REVERSE (R) for rear parking aid sensors.
gn
4. Place the gearshift in DRIVE (D) for front parking aid sensors.
5. Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the PAM parking aid sensor distance Parameter Identifications (PIDs) to verify the
PAM detects no objects.
ia
6. If the audible warning is heard or if the Parameter Identifications (PIDs) indicate an object is detected, check to make
rd
sure the bumper is correctly installed and is not tilted downward so the sensor is pointing at the ground. Refer to
Diagnosis and Testing.
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Specifications

Engine
Item Specification
Displacement 3.496L (214 CID)
No. of cylinders 6
Bore/stroke 3.641/3.413 in (92.5/86.7 mm)
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Spark plug 12405
Spark plug gap 0.049-0.053 in (1.25-1.35 mm)
m
Compression ratio 10.8:1
Engine weight (without accessory drive components) 354.9 lb (161 kg)
. co
Engine and transaxle assembly weight (without accessory drive components) 575.0 lb (260.8 kg)
gn

Lubricants
ia
Item Specification
rd
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil (US); Motorcraft® SAE 5W- XO-5W20-QSP (US); CXO-5W20-
20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) LSP12 (Canada)
ca

Engine Oil Capacity
Item Specification
Service fill including oil filter 6.0 qt (5.68 L)

Oil Pressure
Item Specification
Oil pressure @ 1,500 rpm with engine at normal operating temperature 30.0 psi (206.8 kPa)

Cylinder Head and Valve Train
Item Specification
Cylinder head gasket surface flatness Flat within 0.08 mm (0.003 in) length end to end, area 150 mm (5.9 in) x 150
mm (5.9 in) (or full width) should be less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Valve tappet clearance - intake 0.006–0.010 in (.15–.25 mm)
Valve tappet clearance - exhaust - Engine must 0.014–0.018 in (.36–.46 mm)
be at room temperature before measuring
Valve guide bore inner diameter 0.217–0.218 in (5.519–5.549 mm)
Valve stem diameter - intake 0.2157–0.2164 in (5.479–5.497 mm)
Valve stem diameter - exhaust 0.2152–0.2159 in (5.466–5.484 mm)
Valve stem-to-guide clearance - intake 0.0009–0.0028 in (.022–.07 mm)
Valve stem-to-guide clearance - exhaust 0.0014–0.0033 in (.035–.083 mm)
Valve head diameter - intake 1.46 in (37 mm)
Valve head diameter - exhaust 1.22 in (31 mm)
Valve face runout 0.002 in (.05 mm)
m
Valve face angle 45.25–45.75°
Valve seat width - intake 0.051–0.063 in (1.3–1.6 mm)
Valve seat width - exhaust
Valve seat runout
co
0.067–0.079 in (1.7–2 mm)
0.002 in (.04 mm)
.
Valve seat angle 44.5–45.5°
gn
Valve spring free length (approx.) 1.890 in (48 mm)
Valve spring compression pressure (N @ spec. 525 N @ 27.0 mm (114.7 lb @ 1.06 in)
length)
ia
Valve spring installed height 1.457 in (37 mm)

rd
Valve spring installed height pressure (N @ 235 N @ 37.0 mm (53 lb @ 1.45 in)
spec. length)
Valve spring installed pressure — service limit 10% force loss @ specified height
ca

Camshaft
Item Specification
Theoretical valve lift (intake @ 0 lash) 0.394 in (10 mm)
Theoretical valve lift (exhaust @ 0 lash) 0.38 in (9.68 mm)
Lobe lift - intake 0.394 in (10 mm)
Lobe lift - exhaust 0.38 in (9.68 mm)
Allowable lobe lift loss 0.0024 in (.062 mm)
Camshaft journal bore inside diameter — 1st journal 1.537–1.538 in (39.0375–39.0625 mm)
Camshaft journal bore inside diameter — intermediate journals 1.023–1.024 in (25.9875–26.0125 mm)
Camshaft bearing outside diameter — 1st journal 1.535–1.536 in (38.99–39.01 mm)
Camshaft bearing outside diameter — intermediate journals 1.021–1.022 in (25.937–25.963 mm)
Camshaft journal-to-bearing clearance, 1st journal — service limit 0.0029 in (.0725 mm)
Camshaft journal-to-bearing clearance, intermediate journals — service limit 0.0030 in (.0755 mm)
Runout 0.0016 in (.04 mm)
End play - standard 0.0011–0.0067 in (.027–.17 mm)
End play - service limit 0.0075 in (.19 mm)

Cylinder Block
Item Specification
Cylinder bore diameter 3.642–3.643 in (92.5–92.52 mm)
Cylinder bore 0.0005 in (.013 mm)
roundness
Cylinder bore taper 0.0004 in (.01 mm)
(per 25.4 mm (1 in)
Block main bore 0.0003 in (.008 mm)
m
roundness
Main bearing bore 2.850–2.851 in (72.4–72.424 mm)
inside diameter
Head gasket surface
flatness
co
Flat within 0.150 mm (0.005 in) overall 0.050 mm (0.001 in) per 150 mm (5.905 in) x 150 mm (5.905
in) 0.025 mm (0.0009 in) per 25 mm (0.98 in) x 25 mm (0.98 in)
.
gn

Crankshaft
ia
rd
Item Specification
Main bearing journal diameter 2.657 in (67.5 mm)
ca
Main bearing journal maximum taper 0.1575 in (.004 m)

Main bearing journal maximum out-of-round 0.0002 in (.006 mm)
Main bearing journal-to-main bearing clearance 0.0010–0.0016 in (.026–.041 mm)
Connecting rod journal diameter 2.204–2.205 in (55.983–56.003 mm)
Connecting rod journal maximum taper 0.0002 in (.004 mm)
Connecting rod journal maximum out-of-round 0.0002 in (.006 mm)
Crankshaft maximum end play 0.0040–0.0115 in (.101–.291 mm)

Piston and Connecting Rod
Item Specification
Piston diameter - single grade 3.6408–3.6413 in (92.476–92.49 mm)
Piston-to-cylinder bore clearance 0.0004–0.0017 in (.01–.044 mm)
Piston ring end gap - compression (top, gauge diameter) 0.0067–0.0106 in (.17–.27 mm)
Piston ring end gap - compression (bottom, gauge diameter) 0.0118–0.0217 in (.3–.55 mm)
Piston ring end gap — oil ring (steel rail, gauge diameter) 0.0059–0.0177 in (.15–.45 mm)
Piston ring groove width - compression (top) 0.0484–0.0492 in (1.23–1.25 mm)
Piston ring groove width — compression (bottom) 0.0602–0.0610 in (1.53–1.55 mm)
Piston ring groove width - oil ring 0.0996–0.1004 in (2.53–2.55 mm)
Piston ring width - upper compression ring 0.0461–0.0469 in (1.17–1.19 mm)
Piston ring width - lower compression ring 0.0579–0.0587 in (1.47–1.49 mm)
Piston ring-to-groove clearance (upper and lower compression rings) 0.0016–0.0031 in (.04–.08 mm)
Piston pin bore diameter 0.9057–0.9058 in (23.004–23.008 mm)
Piston pin diameter 0.9054–0.9055 in (22.997–23 mm)
Piston pin length 2.204 in (55.975 mm)
Piston pin-to-piston fit 0.0002–0.0004 in (.004–.011 mm)
Piston-to-connecting rod clearance 0.1 in (2.7 mm)
Connecting rod-to-pin clearance - standard 0.0003–0.0009 in (.007–.022 mm)
Connecting rod pin bore diameter 0.9058–0.9063 in (23.007–23.019 mm)
Connecting rod length (center-to-center) 6.01 in (152.68 mm)
m
Connecting rod maximum allowed bend 0.0015 in (.038 mm)
Connecting rod maximum allowed twist 0.0020 in (.05 mm)
Connecting rod bearing bore diameter - grade 1
Connecting rod bearing bore diameter - grade 2
. co 2.3569–2.3572 in (59.866–59.872 mm)
2.3572–2.3574 in (59.873–59.879 mm)
Connecting rod bearing bore diameter - grade 3 2.3575–2.3577 in (59.88–59.886 mm)
gn
Connecting rod bearing-to-crankshaft clearance 0.0008–0.0021 in (.02–.054 mm)
Connecting rod side clearance (assembled to crank) - standard 0.0069–0.0167 in (.175–.425 mm)
ia
Connecting rod side clearance (assembled to crank) - service limit 0.0069–0.0167 in (.175–.425 mm)
rd
ca

Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Block oil gallery plug — LHa 48 35 —
Block oil gallery plug — reara 85 63 —
Block oil gallery plug — RHa 32 24 —
aDiscard original plug and O-ring seal. Install a new plug and O-ring seal to specified torque, no sealer or lubricant required.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Engine - Overview
Base Part Number: 6L084
Engine Information
NOTE: When repairing engines, all parts must be contamination free. If contamination/foreign material is present when
repairing an engine, premature engine failure may occur.
NOTE: Specifications show the expected minimum or maximum condition. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the
specifications.
NOTE: If a component fails to meet the specifications, it is necessary to refinish it or install a new component. Wear limits are
provided as an aid to determine if the component can be refinished. A new component must be installed when any component
fails to meet specifications and cannot be refinished.
NOTE: This section contains information, steps and procedures that may not be specific to this engine.
This section covers general procedures and diagnosis and testing of the engine system, except for exhaust emission control
m
devices, which are covered in the PC/ED manual.
The engine incorporates the following features: Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the procedure.
Crankcase ventilation or breather system

Exhaust emission control system
EVAP
. co
Some engines incorporate a fail-safe cooling system. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the procedure.
gn
The engine, fuel system, ignition system, emissions system and exhaust system all affect exhaust emission levels and must be
maintained according to the maintenance schedule. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.
ia
Correct engine identification is required to order parts. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the procedure.
For complete vehicle and engine identification codes,

rd
Refer to: Identification Codes (100-01 Identification Codes, Description and Operation).
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Engine - Overview
Overview
The 3.5L (4V) is a V-6 engine with the following features:
Dual overhead camshafts

Four valves per cylinder
Sequential Multi-Port Fuel Injection (SFI)
Composite upper and lower intake manifold
Aluminum cylinder head
An aluminum, 60-degree V-cylinder block
Timing chain driven coolant pump
Twin independent variable cam timing (Ti-VCT)
An electronic ignition system with 6 ignition coils
Engine Identification
m
For quick identification, refer to the safety certification decal.
The decal is located on the LH front door lock face panel.
Engine Code Information Label

. co
The engine code information label, located on the front side of the valve cover, contains the following:
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
1 Engine part number
2 Engine plant (Cleveland)
3 Engine displacement
4 Engine configuration
5 Twin independent VCT
6 Bar code
7 Bar code
8 Running number
9 Engine build date (DDMMYY)
10 Plant shift line
11 Derivative code
Engine Cylinder Identification
m
.co
gn
ia
rd
ca
System Operation
Lubrication System
m
Item Description
Yellow
Blue
High pressure oil flow
Oil return/low pressure oil flow
. co
gn
Oil Pump
The engine lubrication system is of the force-feed type in which oil is supplied under full pressure to the crankshaft, connecting
rod bearings, timing chain tensioners, piston oil cooling jets and VCT solenoids. The flow of oil to the valve tappets and valve
ia
train is controlled by a restricting orifice located in the cylinder head, front camshaft cap.
The lubrication system is designed to provide optimum oil flow to critical components of the engine through its entire operating
rd
range.
The heart of the system is a positive displacement internal gear oil pump.
ca
Generically, this design is known as a gerotor pump, which operates as follows:
The oil pump is mounted on the front face of the cylinder block.
The inner rotor is piloted on the crankshaft post and is driven through flats on the crankshaft.
System pressure is limited by an integral, internally-vented relief valve which directs the bypassed oil back to the inlet
side of the oil pump.
Oil pump displacement has been selected to provide adequate volume to make sure of correct oil pressure both at hot
idle and maximum speed.
The relief valve calibration protects the system from excessive pressure during high-viscosity conditions.
The relief valve is designed to provide adequate connecting rod bearing lubrication under high temperature and high-
speed conditions.
Valve Train
The valve train uses direct acting mechanical buckets (DAMB). The camshaft lobes are positioned directly above mechanical
buckets which are positioned on top of the valves.
Twin Independent Variable Cam Timing (Ti-VCT)
The twin independent VCT system allows variable control of the valves that optimizes combustion at full load providing
improved power and low speed torque (broadening the torque curve) which enables variable valve overlap which provides
better fuel economy and emissions and provides optimized cold start operation with improved exhaust emissions

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Engine Upper
m
. co
gn
ia

1 9424 Upper intake manifold
rd
2 9F797 Fuel rail

3 9J444 Upper intake manifold support bracket
ca
4 9J447 Lower intake manifold

5 8A586 Thermostat housing
6 9N271 Coolant tube
7 12A699 Knock Sensor (KS)
8 8A561 Coolant transfer connector bracket
Engine Front
m
1
2
W701512
N806165
Crankshaft pulley bolt
Crankshaft pulley washer
. co
3 6316 Crankshaft pulley
gn
4 6700 Crankshaft front seal
5 6B209 Accessory drive belt tensioner
ia
6 6019 Engine front cover

rd
Engine Upper — LH Cylinder Head

ca
m
1
2
6083
6050
LH cylinder head gasket
LH cylinder head
. co
3 12405 Spark plug (3 required)
gn
4 6500 Valve tappet (12 required)
5 6A269 LH exhaust camshaft
ia
6 6A267 LH intake camshaft

7 6C525 Exhaust camshaft Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Unit
rd
8 6C524 Intake camshaft VCT unit

9 6C256 LH secondary timing chain
ca
10 6B297 Exhaust camshaft VCT oil control solenoid

11 6B297 Intake camshaft VCT oil control solenoid
12 6B280 Camshaft mega cap
13 6K297 LH secondary tensioner shoe
14 6A258 LH camshaft cap (6 required)
15 6K602 Valve train oil feed tube
16 6C270 LH secondary timing chain tensioner
17 6K273 LH valve cover
18 6750 Oil level indicator
Engine Upper — RH Cylinder Head

m
1
2
6051
14B485
RH cylinder head gasket co
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor jumper harness
.
3 6G004 CHT sensor
gn
4 6049 RH cylinder head
5 12405 Spark plug (3 required)
ia
6 6500 Valve tappet (12 required)

7 6A266 RH intake camshaft
rd
8 6A268 RH exhaust camshaft

9 6A258 RH camshaft cap (8 required)
ca
10 6K602 Valve train oil feed tube

11 6C525 Exhaust camshaft VCT unit
12 6C524 Intake camshaft VCT unit
13 6C256 RH secondary timing chain
14 6B280 Camshaft mega cap
15 6K297 RH secondary tensioner shoe
16 6B297 Exhaust camshaft VCT unit oil control solenoid
17 6B297 Intake camshaft VCT unit oil control solenoid
18 6C270 RH secondary timing chain tensioner
19 6K271 RH valve cover
Timing Drive Components

m
1
2
6268
6306
Timing chain
Crankshaft timing sprocket
. co
3 6L266 Primary timing chain tensioner
gn
4 6K255 Primary timing chain tensioner arm
5 6B274 LH lower primary timing chain guide
ia
6 6K297 RH primary timing chain guide

7 6K297 LH upper primary timing chain guide
rd
8 8501 Coolant pump

ca
Lower Engine Block (View 1)

m
1
2
6675
6622
Oil pan
Oil pump screen and pickup tube
. co
3 6625 Oil pump screen and pickup tube O-ring seal
gn
4 6621 Oil pump
5 6010 Cylinder block
ia
6 6D327 Crankshaft rear seal retainer

7 12A227 Crankshaft sensor ring
rd
8 6375 Flexplate
9 9278 Oil pressure switch
ca
10 6881 Oil filter adapter

11 6714 Engine oil filter
12 6A642 Oil cooler assembly
Lower Engine Block (View 2)

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

1 — Piston compression upper ring (part of 6148) (6 required)
2 — Piston compression lower ring (part of 6148) (6 required)
3 — Piston oil control upper segment ring (part of 6148) (6 required)
4 — Piston oil control spacer (part of 6148) (6 required)
5 — Piston oil control lower segment ring (part of 6148) (6 required)
6 6140 Piston pin retainer (12 required)
7 6135 Piston pin (6 required)
8 6110 Piston (6 required)
9 6200 Connecting rod (6 required)
10 6211 Connecting rod upper bearing (6 required)
11 6211 Connecting rod lower bearing (6 required)
12 — Connecting rod cap (part of 6200) (6 required)
13 6010 Cylinder block
14 6K868 Piston oil cool valve (6 required)
15 6333 Cylinder block crankshaft main bearing (4 required)
16 6A341 Crankshaft upper thrust washer (2 required)
17 6303 Crankshaft
18 6A338 Lower crankshaft main bearings (4 required)
19 6K302 Crankshaft lower thrust washer
20 6325 Lower crankshaft main bearing caps (4 required)
21 6C364 Main bearing cap support brace
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Specifications

Materials
Description Specification
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Concentrated VC-3-B WSS-M97B44-D
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2
Motorcraft® Premium Cooling System Flush VC-1 ESR-M14P7-A
m

Cooling System Capacities
Description
Without oil cooler
. co Specification
(11.1L) 11.73 qt
With oil cooler (12.1L) 12.79 qt
gn
ia

Cooling System Pressure
rd
Complete cooling system maximim pressure 145 kPa (21 psi)

ca
Pressure relief cap 110 kPa (16 psi)

Radiator pressure test (removed from the vehicle) 138 kPa (20 psi)

Thermostat Opening Temperatures
Starts to open 79.5° - 83.3°C (175.1° - 181.9°F)

Fully open 94.5°C (202°F)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
NOTE: Coolant temperature will vary with ambient temperature and load. Temperatures shown are for ambient temperature of
38° C (100° F). Red arrows indicate a temperature over 90° C (194° F), Orange arrows indicate a temperature of approximately
90° C (194° F), Blue arrows indicate a temperature below 90° C (194° F).
m
. co
gn
ia
Item Description
1 Auxiliary heater core
rd
2 Auxiliary heater tube assembly

3 Heater core
ca
4 Heater hose assembly

5 Thermostat housing-to-degas bottle hose
6 Lower intake manifold
7 Coolant inlet tube
8 LH cylinder head
9 Thermostat housing
10 Oil cooler (trailer tow equipped vehicles only)
11 Lower radiator hose (trailer tow equipped vehicles only)
12 Oil cooler hose assembly (trailer tow equipped vehicles only)
13 Lower radiator hose
14 Upper radiator hose
15 Radiator
16 Cylinder block
17 RH cylinder head
18 Coolant pump
19 Degas bottle-to-coolant inlet tube hose
20 Degas bottle
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
System Operation
Engine coolant flows primarily from the engine to the radiator circuit and back to the coolant pump. Coolant is sent from the
coolant pump through the engine block and cylinder heads. Separate circuits from the engine also feed the heater core with
coolant. The coolant pump, operated by engine rotation through the timing chain, circulates the coolant. The coolant thermostat
is a control valve actuated by coolant temperature. When the thermostat is closed, coolant flow bypasses the radiator circuit
and returns to the coolant pump. When the thermostat is opened, coolant flows through the radiator circuit to transfer engine-
generated heat to the outside air.
For 3.5L/3.7L Ti-VCT (Twin Independent Variable Cam Timing) the coolant pump is located under the engine front cover
mounted to the block. A weep hole is provided on the front left side of the engine behind the generator. It is adjacent to a 13.5
mm (0.531 in) cup plug. This plug and the weep hole create a reservoir for normal coolant seepage and evaporation. Every
coolant pump will have some leakage past the dynamic mechanical seal. Dampness and crusting around the weep hole is
acceptable and an expected result of normal engine operation. Coolant spray or leakage amounts great enough to puddle
should be addressed.
The engine uses a cold side thermostat. This means the thermostat is located at the lower radiator hose connection to the
m
engine, where coolant enters the engine after being cooled by the radiator. During initial warm-up, the cooler coolant from the
radiator quickly closes the thermostat after the warm coolant in the engine opens the thermostat slightly. The thermostat opens
and closes several times before the coolant coming from the radiator is warm enough to allow the thermostat to remain open.
co
The engine must run much longer than a vehicle with a hot side thermostat before the thermostat remains fully opened.
The degas bottle holds surplus coolant and removes air from the cooling system. It also allows for coolant expansion and
system pressurization, replenishes coolant to the cooling system and serves as the location for service fill.
.
gn
The thermostat monitor is a function of the PCM and is designed to verify correct thermostat operation. The monitor executes
once per drive cycle and has a monitor run duration of 300-800 seconds. If a malfunction occurs, DTC P0125 or P0128 sets,
and the MIL illuminates.
ia
Fail Safe Cooling
A strategy called Fail Safe Cooling is built into the PCM that will control the engine if it starts to overheat.
rd
Stage 1 of the strategy commences if the engine starts to overheat. The CHT sensor transmits a signal to the PCM, which
moves the temperature gauge pointer into the red zone.
ca
If the engine is not switched off and the temperature continues to rise, the Powertrain Check Lamp is illuminated. This indicates
to the driver that the engine is approaching critical limits and should be stopped. At this point DTC P1285 is set in the PCM
which can be retrieved using a scan tool.
Stage 2 of the strategy commences if the lamp and temperature gauge are ignored by the driver. The PCM will start to control
the engine by cutting out 3 cylinders and restricting the RPM to below 3,000 RPM. Simultaneously the MIL illuminates. This
indicates that long term engine damage can occur and vehicle emissions will be affected. At this point DTC P1299 is set in the
PCM which can be retrieved using a scan tool.
Air is drawn into the deactivated cylinders. This helps to control the temperature of the engine internal components. The
deactivated cylinders are alternated to allow even cooling of all the cylinders.
NOTE: If the driver is using a high percentage of throttle travel (for example, an overtaking maneuver) when the PCM starts
engine deactivation (Stage 2), the deactivation will be delayed for 10 seconds.
NOTE: After 3-cylinder operation has begun, the engine will not revert to 6-cylinder operation, even if the temperature should
fall, until the ignition is switched off and then on again.
NOTE: The MIL can only be extinguished by using a scan tool after the fault has been rectified and the DTC cleared.
Stage 3 of the strategy will commence if the engine temperature continues to rise. This results in the engine being totally
disabled before major engine damage or seizure occurs. The Powertrain Check Lamp will begin to flash, indicating to the driver
that the engine will be switched off after 30 seconds. This allows the driver time to choose a suitable parking place.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Engine Cooling System Health and Safety Precautions
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Engine Cooling
Materials
Name Specification
VC-3DIL-B
VC-3-B
Special Tool(s)
3-Way HD Antifreeze Coolant Test Kit
328-2050-62291 or equivalent
m
Coolant/Battery Refractometer
300-ROB75240 or equivalent . co
gn
Radiator Tester
014-R1072 or equivalent
ia
rd
UView® Combustion Leak Tester

UVU560000-R
ca

DTC Chart
WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this section, refer to Safety Warnings in section 100-00
General Information. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
REFER to: Engine Cooling System Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).

PCM DTC Chart

P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temp For Closed GO to Pinpoint Test C
Loop Fuel Control
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Coolant Temp GO to Pinpoint Test C
Below Thermostat Regulating
Temperature)
P0217 Engine Coolant Overtemperature GO to Pinpoint Test B
Condition
P0480 Fan 1 Control Circuit Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED)
manual.
P0481 Fan 2 Control Circuit Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED)
manual.
P1285 Cylinder Head Overtemperature GO to Pinpoint Test B
Condition
P1299 Cylinder Head Overtemperature GO to Pinpoint Test B
m
Protection Active
All Other PCM —
Diagnostic Trouble REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic
Codes (DTCs)
. co
Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Diagnosis
and Testing).
gn
NOTICE: The engine cooling system is filled with Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant. Always fill the cooling
ia
system with the manufacturer's specified coolant. Chemically flush the cooling system if a non-specified coolant has
been used. Failure to follow these instructions may damage the engine or cooling system.
rd
NOTE: During normal vehicle operation, Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant may change color from orange to pink or light
red. As long as the engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine coolant has
degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
ca
2. Visually check the engine coolant level at the degas bottle when the system is cold.
3. Make sure the pressure relief cap is installed correctly.
4. Record any cooling system Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) retrieved. Refer to the PCM DTC chart in this section for
DTC descriptions.
5. NOTE: Take note of any coolant odor or steam coming from cooling system components.
If the system coolant is filled correctly and no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) associated with fail-safe cooling are
retrieved, verify the customer concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition.
6. Visually inspect for obvious signs of any mechanical or electrical damage.

Visual Inspection Chart
Mechanical Electrical
Leaks or weeps at: Inoperative or damaged:
Hoses Active grill shutter
Tubes Electric cooling fan
Hose clamps Wiring, connectors, relays or
Engine gaskets (may leak internally or externally) modules
Thermostat coolant connection CHT sensor
Radiator
Pressure relief cap
Coolant pump (leaking from engine block weep hole)
Heater core (wet floor or coolant odor in vehicle)
Engine oil cooler (may leak internally or externally) (if
equipped)
Degas bottle
Cylinder block core plugs
Cylinder head core plugs
Block heater (if equipped)
Cracked or damaged:
Hoses
Tubes
Hose clamps
Thermostat coolant connection
Engine oil cooler (if equipped)
Radiator
Pressure relief cap
m
Coolant pump
Degas bottle
Restricted airflow through the A/C condenser/radiator
. co
Excessive white or light gray exhaust smoke (may have burnt coolant
gn
odor)
Coolant in engine oil
Engine oil in coolant
ia
rd
7. If the inspection reveals an obvious concern that can be readily identified, repair it as necessary.
8. Inspect the coolant condition.

ca
1. Inspect the coolant color.

Discoloration may indicate that incorrect coolant may have been added to the system. Use of incorrect
(green or yellow in color) coolant degrades the corrosion protection of Motorcraft® Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant. Addition of Motorcraft® Specialty Green Engine Coolant may cause the color to
appear to be a murky green-brown color. The addition of Motorcraft® Gold Antifreeze/Coolant, however,
may not change the color or appearance of the orange colored coolant. Detection of contamination with
Motorcraft® Gold Antifreeze/Coolant is determined by the presence of nitrite. If contamination with
Motorcraft® Gold Antifreeze/Coolant is suspected, test the coolant with the 3-Way HD Antifreeze Coolant
Test Kit. Follow the nitrite testing directions in the kit to determine if nitrite is present in the system. If nitrite
is present, flush the system and refill with the correct mixture of distilled water and Motorcraft® Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant Concentrated.
REFER to: Cooling System Draining, Vacuum Filling and Bleeding (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L
Duratec (209kW/284PS), General Procedures).
A darker orange with the presence of debris could indicate a commercially available stop leak may have
been used and could result in loss of coolant flow to critical parts of the engine. If sediment is present,
flush the system and refill with the correct mixture of distilled water and Motorcraft® Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant Concentrated.
A light or reddish brown color indicates that rust may be present in the cooling system. Flush the system
and refill with the correct mixture of distilled water and Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant
Concentrated.
An iridescent sheen on top of the coolant could indicate a trace of oil is entering the system. For engine
diagnosis,
Flush the system and refill with the correct mixture of distilled water and Motorcraft® Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant Concentrated. REFER to: Cooling System Draining, Vacuum Filling and Bleeding (303-
03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), General Procedures).
A milky brown color may indicate that engine oil is entering the cooling system. Pressure test the cooling
system. Refer to component tests in this section. If engine oil is suspected, the cause of the leak may be
internal to the engine. For engine diagnosis,
Flush the system and refill with the correct mixture of distilled water and Motorcraft® Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant Concentrated. REFER to: Cooling System Draining, Vacuum Filling and Bleeding (303-
03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), General Procedures).
2. If the engine coolant appearance is acceptable, test the engine coolant freezing point range with the
Coolant/Battery Refractometer. Maintain the coolant concentration within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -34˚C and -37˚C (-30˚F and -34˚F). If the vehicle is driven in cold climates less than -37°C (-34°F),
it may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration to get adequate freeze protection. Recommended
coolant concentration is 48/52 to 50/50 (freeze protection -34°C to -37°C [-30°F to -34°F]) engine coolant to
m
distilled water.
3. Adjust coolant range and level if necessary:
co
If coolant is low, add specified coolant mixture only.
If the engine coolant tests too weak, remove some of the engine coolant and add Motorcraft® Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant Concentrated until the readings are within acceptable levels.
.
If the engine coolant tests strong, remove some of the engine coolant and add distilled water until the
gn
readings are within acceptable levels.
9. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause and test the system for normal
operation before proceeding to the next step.
ia
Symptom Chart
rd
ca

Loss of coolant Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test A
Test
The engine overheats. Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test B
Test
The engine does not reach normal Refer to the Pinpoint GO to Pinpoint Test C
operating temperature. Test
The block heater does not operate Block heater CHECK continuity in all 3 power cable circuits. If any
correctly. power cable circuit measures more than 5 ohms, INSTALL a new
Block heater power cable.
CHECK the resistance of the block heater. If the
resistance does not measure between 30 and 40 ohms,
INSTALL a new block heater.
REFER to: Block Heater (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L
The electric cooling fan is inoperative Wiring Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED)
in one or more speeds or does not Relays manual.
operate correctly. Fuses
Cooling fan
motor
Cooling fan
resistor
The electric cooling fan stays on all Wiring Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED)
the time. Relays manual.
Noisy electric cooling fan operation. Foreign REMOVE the foreign material from the cooling fan and
material shroud. TEST the system for normal operation. If still
contamination noisy, INSTALL a new cooling fan assembly.
Fan motor REFER to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (303-03C
Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal
and Installation).
Fan blade INSTALL a new cooling fan assembly.

detached REFER to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (303-03C
from fan Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal
motor and Installation).
m
Pinpoint Tests
Loss of Coolant

co
The engine cooling system is a closed system providing for coolant expansion and contraction as well as changes in pressure
.
as coolant warms and cools with engine operation. Various gaskets, seals, hoses and clamps contain coolant within the cooling
gn
system and keep other fluids and contaminants from entering the cooling system.
Possible Sources
ia
Coolant hoses or tubes

Hose clamps
Thermostat housing
rd
Thermostat housing O-ring seals

Oil cooler (may leak internally or externally)
Coolant pump gasket
ca
Radiator
Pressure relief cap
Coolant pump (leaking from engine block weep hole)
Heater core
Engine gaskets (may leak internally or externally)
Degas bottle
PINPOINT TEST A : PINPOINT TEST
A1
CARRY OUT INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
Carry out Inspection and Verification.
Are any concerns present?

Yes REPAIR as needed.
No GO to A2
A2
CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL AND PRESSURE TEST THE ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
NOTE: Allow the engine to cool before checking the engine coolant level.
Ignition OFF
Visually inspect the engine coolant level at the degas bottle and adjust as necessary. Pressure test the engine
cooling system. Refer to Component Tests, Cooling System Pressure Test in this section.
Does the engine cooling system leak externally?
Yes REPAIR or INSTALL new components.
No GO to A3
A3
CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT FOR AN INTERNAL LEAK
m
Inspect the engine coolant in the degas bottle for signs of engine oil.
Is engine oil evident in the engine coolant?
Yes
. co
gn
No GO to A4
ia
A4
CHECK THE ENGINE OIL FOR COOLANT
Remove the oil level indicator from the engine.
rd
Is coolant evident in the oil?

ca
Yes
No GO to A5
A5
CHECK THE COOLING SYSTEM FOR COMBUSTION GASES
NOTE: Use UView® Combustion Leak Tester part number UVU560000-R or equivalent.
Using a cooling system combustion gas leak tester, following the instructions supplied with the tester, check the
coolant for combustion gases.
Are combustion gases present?
Yes
No The cooling system is operational
The Engine Overheats
The engine cooling system maintains the engine temperature during operation. Correct coolant flow through the engine,
radiator and remainder of cooling system passages and components is essential to maintaining a correct engine temperature.
coolant pump through the engine block and cylinder heads. A separate circuit from the engine also feeds the heater core with
coolant. The coolant pump circulates the coolant. The coolant thermostat is a control valve actuated by coolant temperature.
When the thermostat is closed, coolant flow bypasses the radiator circuit and returns to the coolant pump. When the thermostat
is opened, coolant flows through the radiator circuit to transfer engine-generated heat to the outside air.
Engine overheating generally occurs when there is a disruption in the ability to control either coolant flow at the correct rate, the
inability to transfer heat from the engine through the coolant (including low coolant) or an inability to transfer engine-generated
heat to the outside air through the radiator.
Possible Sources
Low coolant level

External engine coolant leak
Airlock in system
Pressure relief cap installation
Restricted airflow through A/C condenser/radiator
m
Internal engine coolant leak
Coolant condition/concentration
Non-OEM engine enhancement components
CHT sensor
Radiator
. co
Thermostat
gn
Temperature gauge
Coolant pump
Coolant flow restriction
Active grill shudder
ia
rd

ca

P0217 Engine Coolant Sets in the PCM when an engine overheat condition was sensed by the CHT sensor.
Overtemperature
Condition
P1299 Cylinder Head Sets in the PCM when an engine overheat condition was sensed by the CHT sensor. A
Overtemperature failure mode effects strategy called fail-safe cooling was activated to cool the engine.
Protection Active
PINPOINT TEST B : PINPOINT TEST

B1
Carry out the Inspection and Verification procedure in this section.
Are any concerns present?
No GO to B2
B2
CHECK FOR PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) DTCS
Ignition ON.
Is DTC P0217 and/or P1299 present?
Yes GO to B3
No Actual engine overheating has not been verified. CHECK the engine coolant temperature gauge
operation.
If any other PCM DTCs are retrieved,
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec
B3
CHECK FOR ACTIVE GRILL SHUDDER DTCS
Review the PCM DTCs.
m
Are any active grill shudder DTCs present?
Yes
co
.
No GO to B4
gn
B4
CHECK FOR AN AIRFLOW OBSTRUCTION AND MISSING AIR DEFLECTORS
ia
NOTE: Verify no vehicle front end damage is present.

rd
Check the radiator or A/C condenser for an external obstruction such as leaves or cardboard and verify all air
deflectors are present.
ca
Is an airflow obstruction present or air deflectors missing?
Yes REPAIR as necessary.
No GO to B5
B5
CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL AND PRESSURE TEST THE COOLING SYSTEM
Ignition OFF.
Visually check the engine coolant level in the coolant expansion tank and adjust as necessary. Pressure test the
cooling system.
Does the engine cooling system leak externally?
Yes REPAIR or INSTALL new components.
No GO to B6
B6
CHECK THE ENGINE COOLANT FOR AN INTERNAL LEAK
Inspect the engine coolant in the coolant expansion tank for signs of engine oil.
Is engine oil evident in the coolant?
Yes
No GO to B7
B7
CHECK THE ENGINE OIL FOR COOLANT
Remove the oil level indicator from the engine.
Is coolant evident in the oil?
Yes
No GO to B8
m
B8
CHECK THE COOLING SYSTEM FOR COMBUSTION GASES
co
NOTE: Use UView® Combustion Leak Tester part number UVU560000-R or equivalent.
Using a cooling system combustion gas leak tester, following the instructions supplied with the tester, check the
coolant for combustion gases.
.
gn
Are combustion gases present?
Yes
ia
No GO to B9
rd
ca
B9
CHECK COOLANT CONDITION
Check the coolant for dirt, rust or contamination and check the coolant concentration.
Is the coolant condition OK?
Yes GO to B10
No FLUSH the engine cooling system.
REFER to: Cooling System Flushing (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
B10
CHECK THE ELECTRIC COOLING FAN OPERATION
Start the engine.
Place the climate control function selector in the MAX A/C position and the blower motor switch in the HI position.
Did the electric cooling fan operate?
Yes GO to B11
No DIAGNOSE the electric cooling fan operation. Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
B11
CHECK THE COOLANT PUMP OPERATION
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to run for 30 minutes. Place the climate control function selector in the MAX HEAT position. Feel
the heater outlet hose.
Is the heater outlet hose hot?
Yes GO to B12
No INSTALL a new coolant pump.
REFER to: Coolant Pump (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
B12
CHECK THE THERMOSTAT OPERATION
m
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to run for 30 minutes. Place the climate control function selector in the MAX HEAT position. Feel
the lower radiator hose.
Is the lower radiator hose hot?

. co
gn
Yes CHECK the temperature gauge operation.
ia
No GO to B13
rd
B13
VISUALLY INSPECT THE THERMOSTAT
Carry out the Thermostat Visual Inspection in the Component Tests portion of this section.
ca
Is the thermostat damaged?
Yes INSTALL a new thermostat.

REFER to: Thermostat (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
No INSTALL a new thermostat.

Installation).
If the engine still overheats, INSTALL a new radiator. REFER to: Radiator (303-03C Engine Cooling -
The Engine Does Not Reach Normal Operating Temperature
The engine cooling system maintains engine temperature during operation. Correct coolant flow through the engine, radiator
and remainder of cooling system passages and components is essential to maintaining a correct engine temperature.
coolant pump through the engine block and cylinder heads. A separate circuit from the engine also feeds the heater core with
coolant. The coolant pump circulates the coolant. The coolant thermostat is a control valve actuated by coolant temperature.
When the thermostat is closed, coolant flow bypasses the radiator circuit and returns to the coolant pump. When the thermostat
is opened, coolant flows through the radiator circuit in order to transfer engine generated heat to the outside air.
Concerns of engine inability to reach normal operating temperature typically occur when the rate of coolant flow through some
coolant circuits (radiator, heater core) is more than expected given the conditions. Heat is not allowed to build in the engine
because a heat exchanger is removing too much heat, including the radiator and heater core. In addition, perceived concerns
that the engine does not reach normal operating temperature can be related to a low coolant level or trapped air which does not
allow for hot coolant to be available at the heater core, an inoperative climate control system, or for concerns perceived or
related to an incorrect engine temperature gauge indication.
Possible Sources
Low coolant level

Thermostat
Temperature gauge

m
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temp for Sets in the PCM when the CHT sensor has not achieved the required
Closed Loop Fuel Control
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Coolant

co
temperature level to enter closed loop operating conditions within a specified
amount of time after starting the engine.
Sets in the PCM when the thermostat monitor has not achieved the required
.
Temp Below Thermostat engine operating temperature within a specified amount of time after starting the
gn
Regulating Temperature) engine.
ia
PINPOINT TEST C : PINPOINT TEST

rd
ca

C1
Carry out the Inspection and Verification procedure in this section.
Were any concerns found?
No GO to C2
C2
CHECK FOR DTC P0125 OR P0128
Using a scan tool, perform the PCM self-test.
Is DTC P0125 or P0128 present?
Yes GO to C3
No The cooling system is operational. If an inoperative temperature gauge is suspected, CHECK the
temperature gauge operation.
If an inoperative climate control system is suspected, CHECK the climate control system operation.
For Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC), REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles
With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) (412-00 Climate Control System - General
For Electronic Manual Temperature control (EMTC), REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles
With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (412-00 Climate Control System - General
If any other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are retrieved, REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls
(303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
C3
CHECK THE COOLANT LEVEL
NOTE: Allow the engine to cool before checking the coolant expansion tank.
Visually check the engine coolant level in the coolant expansion tank
Is the engine coolant level within specification?
Yes INSTALL a new thermostat.

m
Installation).
CLEAR Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). If the DTC returns check for correct CHT sensor
operation.
. co
gn
Component Tests
Cooling System Pressure Test

ia
rd
ca
NOTE: Vehicles have a pressure relief cap on the degas bottle and no radiator cap.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Check the engine coolant level and adjust as necessary.
3. Remove the degas bottle cap. Inspect the degas bottle cap and degas bottle for any issues that would cause improper
sealing, such as for cross-threading, burrs, damaged O-ring, etc. If any issues are found, INSTALL a new cap and/or
degas bottle.
4. Attach the Pressure Tester and adaptor (Snap-On TA53 or equivalent), to the degas bottle cap. The cap must hold
pressure of 145 kPa +/- 21 kPa (21 PSI +/- 3 PSI). If any issues are found, INSTALL a new cap.
5. Attach the Pressure Tester and adaptor (Snap-On TA52, AST ASSFZ-47, Redline RDL95-0750 or equivalent) to the
degas bottle.
m
. co
gn
ia
NOTICE: Do not pressurize the cooling system beyond the maximum pressure listed in the specifications table in this
section, or cooling system components can be damaged.
rd
NOTE: If the plunger of the pressure tester is pressed too fast, an erroneous pressure reading will result.
6. To pressurize the engine cooling system, slowly press the plunger of the pressure test pump and increase the pressure
ca
to between 124 - 138 kPa (18 - 20 PSI). Observe the gauge reading for approximately 2 minutes. Pressure should not
drop during this time. If the pressure drops within this time, inspect for leaks and repair as necessary.
7. If no leaks are found and the pressure drops, the leak may be internal to the engine. Inspect the coolant for engine oil
and the engine oil for coolant.
8. If the pressure does not drop remove the cooling system Pressure Tester and adaptor from degas bottle.
9. Install the degas bottle cap until it contacts the hard stop.
Thermostat
Install a new thermostat only after at least one of the following tests and checks have been carried out:
Pinpoint Test B or C
Thermostat Visual Inspection
Thermostat Visual Inspection
1. Remove the thermostat.
2. Examine the thermostat for signs of damage including:

Valve not fully seated (light visible through the valve)
Foreign material lodged in the main valve
Bent or broken frame or flange
Bent or broken spring
Wax leaking from wax reservoir or a bulge in the reservoir
Any other damage or distortion
3. NOTE: If no damage is found during the inspection, do not attempt to open the thermostat using hot water or other heat
sources. This method is not an accurate means to test the function of the thermostat and may damage the thermostat.
If damage is found during the inspection, remove any foreign material or broken pieces and install a new thermostat.
Radiator Leak Test, Removed From Vehicle
NOTICE: Never leak test an aluminum radiator in the same water that copper/brass radiators are tested in. Flux and
caustic cleaners may be present in the cleaning tank and they will damage aluminum radiators.
NOTE: Clean the radiator before leak testing to avoid contamination of tank.
1. Leak test the radiator in clean water with air pressurized to the maximum pressure listed in the Specifications table.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
303-08C Engine Emission Control - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
3.5L Duratec
m
. co
gn
Item Description
ia
1 PCV valve
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
303-08C Engine Emission Control - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer
System Operation
For System Operation, Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual. See Section 1 Description and
Operation.
For Component Description, Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual. See Section 1 Description and
Operation.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
303-08C Engine Emission Control - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Diagnostics in this manual assume a certain skill level and knowledge of Ford-specific diagnostic practices. For information
about these,
For a PCM DTC,

REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C Electronic Engine Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Diagnosis and
Testing).
For driveability symptoms without a DTC, Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual. See Section 3,
Symptom Charts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Engine Front Cover
307-399
TKIT-2000AP-FLM/LM
TKIT-2002N-DEW
Oil Drain Equipment

Trolley Jack
Wooden Block
Materials
m
Name Specification
XO-5W20-QSP
Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone
TA-357
. co
WSE-M4G323-A6

gn
ZC-30-A
ZC-31-B
ia

PM-4-A, PM-4-B
rd
Removal
ca

2. Recover the A/C system.


4. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

5. Remove the RH fender splash shield.


m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca


1. Crankshaft front seal.
Refer to: Crankshaft Front Seal (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
2. Accessory drive belt tensioner.
Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner (303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal
and Installation).
3. Degas bottle.
10. Remove the degas bottle hose.
m
11. Remove the plug and drain the engine oil.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. Remove and discard the oil filter.

m
13.
Discard the O-ring seal.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
14.
Remove the fuel tube-to-engine bolt.
Disconnect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling.
Refer to: Quick Release Coupling (310-00C Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
m
15. Remove the LH and RH valve covers.
16.
co
Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
.
Remove the nut.
gn
Remove the stud.
Loosen the bolt.
Position out the generator.
ia
rd
ca
17. Position a floor jack with a block of wood under the front of the oil pan.
Use the General Equipment: Wooden Block
Use the General Equipment: Trolley Jack
m
18. Remove and discard the engine mount nuts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
19.
Remove and discard the engine mount bolts.
Remove the engine mount.
m
20.
co
NOTICE: Do not allow the A/C compressor to contact the subframe. Failure to follow this direction may
result in damage to the A/C compressor.
Using the floor jack, lower the engine to access the lower engine front cover bolt.
.
gn
Remove the lower M10 engine front cover bolt.
ia
rd
ca
21. Using the floor jack, raise the engine 100 mm (3.937).
m
22. Remove the M10 engine front cover bolts.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
23. Remove the M6 engine front cover bolt.

m
24. Remove the remaining engine front cover bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
26. NOTICE: Only use a 3M™ Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528) to clean the engine front cover.
co
Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes or any other power abrasive disk to clean front cover.
Clean the engine front cover using a 3M™ Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528) in a suitable tool
turning at the recommended speed of 15,000 rpm.
.
gn
Procedures).
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Procedures).
m
Installation
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: The engine front cover and bolts 7, 8, 15, 17, 18, 21 and 22 must be installed within 4 minutes of the initial
sealant application. The remainder of the engine front cover bolts must be installed and tightened within 35 minutes of
the initial sealant application. If the time limits are exceeded, the sealant must be removed, the sealing area cleaned and
sealant reapplied. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Failure to follow this
Apply a 3.0 (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front cover
Apply a 5.5 (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the oil pan-to-cylinder block
joint and the cylinder block joint areas of the engine front cover in the places indicated.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4.
Remove Special Service Tool: 307-399 Alignment Pins, Transmission Fluid Pump.
m
5. NOTE: Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
Install the M6 engine front cover bolt. co.

gn
ia
rd
ca
6. NOTE: Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Install the M10 engine front cover bolts.

7.
NOTICE: Do not allow the A/C compressor to contact the subframe. Failure to follow this direction may
result in damage to the A/C compressor.
NOTE: Do not tighten the bolt at this time.
m
Using the floor jack, lower the engine to allow installation of the M10 engine front cover bolt.
Install the lower M10 engine front cover bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
minutes after installing the engine front cover. Failure to follow this instruction may cause oil leakage.
Install the remaining engine front cover bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
Tighten bolts 1 through 22 to:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
Tighten bolts 23, 24 and 25 to:
133 lb.in (15 Nm)
Stage 3:
Tighten bolt 26 to:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 4:
Loosen bolt 26:
1 turn(s)
Stage 5:
Tighten bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft) plus an additional:
90°
Stage 6:
Tighten bolts 1 through 22 to 20 Nm (177 lb-in) plus an additional:
45°
Stage 7:
Tighten bolt 26 to 10 Nm (89 lb-in) plus an additional:
45 °
m
9. Use the floor jack raise the engine to the installed position.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
10. Install the engine mount and the bolts.

m
11. Install the engine mount nuts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. Remove the floor jack and the block of wood from under the front of the oil pan.
m
13.
1. Position back the generator.
2. Install the stud.
3. Install the nut.
. co
gn
4. Tighten the bolt.
ia
rd
ca
14. Install the LH and RH valve covers.

Refer to: Valve Cover LH (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
15. Using a new O-ring, connect the A/C tube fitting and install the nut.
m
16.
1. Install the fuel tube-to-engine bolt.
co
2. Connect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
17. Install the degas bottle hose.

m

Torque:
Stage 1:
44 lb.in (5 Nm)
. co
Stage 2:
180°
gn
ia
rd
ca

1. Degas bottle.
2. Accessory drive belt tensioner.
Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner (303-05C Accessory Drive - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal
and Installation).
3. Crankshaft front seal.
Refer to: Crankshaft Front Seal (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).

m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
22. Install the RH fender splash shield.


m
24. Connect the battery ground cable.
25. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system.

co
.
gn
26. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system.
ia
27. Use the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Misfire Monitor Profile Correction routine in the diagnostic scan tool.
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
303-07C Engine Ignition - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Specifications

Item Specification
Spark plug 12405
Spark plug gap 0.049–0.053 in (1.25–1.35 mm)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3.5L Duratec
m
. co
gn
Item Description
ia
1 Ignition coil-on-plug(s)
2 Spark plug(s)
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
System Operation
Operation.
Operation.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Engine Ignition
about these,
For a PCM DTC,

Testing).
Symptom Charts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Engine Mount
Trolley Jack
Wooden Block
Removal

2.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. NOTICE: Failure to position the wood block and floor jack as illustrated can result in damage to the oil pan.
Support the engine with a floor jack and a wooden block.

m
6. Remove and discard the engine mount nuts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7.
Remove and discard the engine mount bolts.
Remove the engine mount.
m
Installation
1. Install the engine mount and the bolts.

co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Install the engine mount nuts.

m
3. Remove the floor jack and the wooden block.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Engine Undershield - Police
1. Remove the bolts.

m
. co
gn
ia
2. Remove the bolts and the engine undershield.

rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Engine Undershield
1. Loosen the turn fasteners and remove the engine undershield.
m
. co
gn

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Assembly Procedure revision date: 12/15/2016
Engine
100-002 (TOOL-4201-C)
Holding Fixture with Dial Indicator Gauge
205-142 (T80T-4000-J)
m
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Handle
. co
gn
303-102
ia
rd
303-103 (T74P-6375-A)
Holding Tool, Flywheel
T74P-77000-A
ca
TKIT-2009TC-F
303-1247
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
303-1248
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
303-1251
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
303-1529
Lift Eye, Engine
TKIT-2010A-F
TKIT-2010A-LM
TKIT-2010A-ROW
303-1530
TKIT-2010A-F
TKIT-2010A-LM
TKIT-2010A-ROW
303-335 (T88T-6701-A)
TKIT-1988-F
TKIT-1988-FLM
m
307-399
TKIT-2000AP-FLM/LM
Feeler Gauge
TKIT-2002N-DEW . co
Strap Wrench
gn
Floor Crane
Mounting Stand
ia
Round-Ended Steel Rule

rd
Piston Ring Compressor
Materials
ca
Name Specification
XO-5W20-QSP
Thread Sealant with PTFE WSK-M2G350-A2
TA-24-B
TA-357
ZC-30-A
ZC-31-B
VC-3-B
material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may
NOTE: Assembly of the engine requires various inspections/measurements of the engine components. These
inspections/measurements will aid in determining if the engine components will require replacement. Refer to Section 303-00.
NOTE: If the cylinder head(s) is replaced, a new secondary timing chain tensioner will need to be installed.
1. Using a hex bit, install the oil piston cool valves.

m
. co
2. NOTE: This step is for selecting the correct main bearings.
gn
NOTE: The #1 main bearing is at the front of the engine block.
Select the crankshaft main bearings for each crankshaft journal.

Record the code that is on the cylinder block face.
ia
Record the code that is on the crankshaft flange.

The first letter is for main No. 1 and the next letters are for mains 2, 3 and 4.
rd
ca
3. NOTE: This chart is continued in the next step.

NOTE: This chart is for selecting main bearings 1 and 4 only.
Using the data recorded earlier and the Bearing Select Fit Chart, Standard Bearings, determine the required
bearing grade for main bearings 1 and 4.
Read the first letter of the engine block main bearing code and the first letter of the crankshaft main bearing code.
Read down the column below the engine block main bearing code letter and across the row next to the crankshaft
main bearing code letter, until the 2 intersect. This is the required bearing grade(s) for the No. 1 crankshaft main
bearing.
As an example, if the engine block code letter is "M" and the crankshaft code letter is "M", the correct bearing
grade for this main bearing is a "2" for the upper bearing and a "2" for the lower bearing.
Repeat the above steps using the fourth letter of the block and crankshaft codes to select the No. 4 bearing.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. NOTE: This chart is for selecting main bearings 1 and 4 only.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. NOTE: This chart is continued in the next step.
NOTE: This chart is for selecting main bearings 2 and 3 only.
Using the data recorded earlier and the Bearing Select Fit Chart, Standard Bearings, determine the required
bearing grade for main bearings 2 and 3.
Read the second letter of the engine block main bearing code and the second letter of the crankshaft main
bearing code.
Read down the column below the engine block main bearing code letter and across the row next to the crankshaft
main bearing code letter, until the 2 intersect. This is the required bearing grade for the No. 2 crankshaft main
bearing.
As an example, if the engine block code letter is "N" and the crankshaft code letter is "H", the correct bearing
grade for this main bearing is "2".
Repeat the above steps using the third letter of the block and crankshaft codes to select the No. 3.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. NOTE: This chart is for selecting main bearings 2 and 3 only.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. NOTICE: The rod cap installation must keep the same orientation as marked during disassembly or engine
damage may occur.
NOTE: Use the original connecting rod cap bolts.
Using the original rod cap bolts, install the connecting rod caps and bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
17 lb.ft (23 Nm)
Stage 2:
32 lb.ft (43 Nm)
Stage 3:
90°
m
8. Measure the connecting rod large end bore in 2 directions.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9.
Remove the bolts and the rod cap.
Discard the bolts.
m
10. Measure each of the crankshaft connecting rod bearing journal diameters in at least 2 directions.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Using the chart, select the correct connecting rod bearings for each crankshaft connecting rod journal.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. NOTE: Before assembling the cylinder block, all sealing surfaces must be free of chips, dirt, paint and foreign material.
Also, make sure the coolant and oil passages are clear.
Lubricate the upper crankshaft main bearings with clean engine oil and install in the cylinder block.
m
13. NOTE: Do not install the upper thrust bearings until the crankshaft is installed.
co
NOTE: Lubricate the thrust surfaces of the crankshaft with clean engine oil.
Install the crankshaft.

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. NOTE: Make sure the side of the thrust washer, with the wide oil grooves, faces the crankshaft thrust surface.
Push the crankshaft rearward and install the rear crankshaft upper thrust washer at the back of the No. 4 rear bulkhead.
m
co
Push the crankshaft forward and install the front crankshaft upper thrust washer at the front of the No. 4 rear bulkhead.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
16. Lubricate the crankshaft lower main bearings with clean engine oil and install them into the main bearing caps. Check
the seating and squarness of the bearings to make sure of proper seating in the caps.
m
17. Position the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 main bearing caps on the cylinder block and, keeping the caps as square as
co
possible, alternately draw the caps down evenly using the new bolts until the main bearing caps are seated.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: To aid in assembly, apply petroleum jelly to the back of the crankshaft thrust washer.
Install the lower crankshaft thrust washer to the back side of the No. 4 rear main bearing cap, with the tab aligned with
the cutout in the main bearing cap.
m
19. Position main bearing cap No. 4 on the cylinder block and keeping the cap as square as possible, alternately draw the
co
cap down evenly using the new bolts until the main bearing cap is seated.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
20. NOTE: While tightening the main bearing vertical bolts, push the crankshaft forward and the No. 4 main bearing cap
rearward to seat the crankshaft thrust washers.
Tighten the main bearing bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
24 lb.ft (33 Nm)
Stage 2:
135°
m
21. Install the new main bearing cap side bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
33 lb.ft (45 Nm)
Stage 2:
90°
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
22.
1. Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block.
2. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge.
3. Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Measure and record the crankshaft end play.
m
damage may occur.
Prepare the connecting rod and cap.

Insert the new bolts in the rod cap.
. co
Insert the upper and lower rod bearings into the rod and cap.
gn
ia
rd
ca
24.
1. Center line of the piston parallel to the wrist pin bore.
2. Upper compression ring gap location.
3. Upper oil control segment ring gap location.
4. Lower oil control segment ring gap location.
5. Expander ring and lower compression ring gap location.
m
. co
gn
ia
25. NOTICE: Be sure not to scratch the cylinder wall or crankshaft journal with the connecting rod. Push the piston
down until the connecting rod bearing seats on the crankshaft journal.
rd
NOTE: Lubricate the pistons, piston rings, connecting rod bearings and the entire cylinder bores with clean engine oil.
ca
NOTE: Make sure the piston rings are positioned to specifications for installation. Refer to Piston in this section.
NOTE: If the piston and or connecting rod are being installed new, the piston rod orientation marks and the arrow on the
top of the dome of the piston should be facing toward the front of the engine block.
NOTE: If the piston and connecting rod are to be reinstalled, they must be installed in the same orientation as
disassembled.
Using the Piston Ring Compressor, install the piston and the connecting rod assemblies. Repeat until all piston
assemblies are installed.
Use the General Equipment: Piston Ring Compressor
m
damage may occur.
co
NOTE: After installation of each piston, connecting rod, rod cap and bolts, rotate the crankshaft to verify smooth
operation.
.
gn
Install the connecting rod cap and the new bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
17 lb.ft (23 Nm)
Stage 2:
32 lb.ft (43 Nm)
ia
Stage 3:
90°
rd
ca
27. Install the main bearing cap support brace and the new bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
18 lb.ft (24 Nm)
Stage 2:
180°
application.
m
Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the sealing surface of the
crankshaft rear seal retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
29. Lubricate the crankshaft rear seal with clean engine oil.
m
30. Install the crankshaft rear seal and the bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
31. Prime the oil pump. Add 2 tablespoons of clean engine oil to the oil pump and rotate the oil pump by hand.
32. Install the oil pump and the bolts.

m
33. Install a new oil pump screen and pickup tube O-ring seal.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
34. Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube and the bolts.
m
35. NOTE: The A/C compressor must be installed on the cylinder block and the 2 bolts tightened prior to installing the oil
pan.
Install the A/C compressor and the stud bolts.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the sealing surface of the oil pan.
m
co
Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the 2 crankshaft seal retainer
plate-to-cylinder block joint areas on the sealing surface of the oil pan.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
38. Install the oil pan and the bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
27 lb.in (3 Nm)
Stage 2:
Loosen::
180°
m
39. Position the oil pan so the mounting boss is against the A/C compressor and using a Ended Steel Rule, align the oil pan
Use the General Equipment: Round-Ended Steel Rule

. co
flush with the rear of the cylinder block at the 2 areas shown.
gn
ia
rd
ca
40. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.

m
41. Install the remaining oil pan bolts.
Torque:
co
Stage 1:
Tighten bolts 1-9 and 11-14 to:
18 lb.ft (24 Nm)
Stage 2:
Tighten bolt 10 to:
177 lb.in (20 Nm)
Stage 3:
Tighten bolt 10 an additional :
90°
.
Stage 4:
Tighten bolt 15 and 16 to:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
gn
ia
rd
ca
42. Install the A/C compressor stud and nut.

Torque:
Stud:
80 lb.in (9 Nm)
Nut:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
m
43. Install the coolant pump and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
44. Install the KS and the bolts.

m
45. Install the RH cylinder head gasket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the RH cylinder head and the new bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
177 lb.in (20 Nm)
Stage 2:
26 lb.ft (35 Nm)
Stage 3:
90°
Stage 4:
90°
Stage 5:
45°
m
gn
ia
rd
ca
48. Install the LH cylinder head gasket.

m
Install the LH cylinder head and the new bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
177 lb.in (20 Nm)
. co
Stage 2:
26 lb.ft (35 Nm)
gn
Stage 3:
90°
Stage 4:
90°
Stage 5:
45°
ia
rd
ca

m
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.

. co
NOTE: Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation.
Install the valve tappets.

gn
ia
rd
ca
52. Install the RH primary timing chain guide and the bolt.
m
53. Install the engine lifting eye and the bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Position the crankshaft dowel pin in the 9 o'clock position.

m
position as shown.
co
Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil and position the camshafts onto the RH cylinder head in the neutral
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Position the RH camshaft seal gaps as shown.

ca

Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
damage may occur.
NOTE: Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
62. Rotate the RH camshafts to TDC.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
65. Align the colored links with the timing marks and assemble the RH VCT units.
m

. co
Position the RH VCT units and the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts by aligning the holes in the VCT units with
gn
ia
rd
ca
67. Install the new RH VCT unit bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
30 lb.ft (40 Nm)
Stage 2:
Loosen::
1 turn(s)
Stage 3:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
Stage 4:
180°
m
co
NOTE: The VCT oil control solenoids are removed for clarity.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil and position the camshafts onto the LH cylinder head in the neutral
position as shown.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Position the LH camshaft seal gaps as shown.

ca

Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
damage may occur.
NOTE: Use a camshaft sprocket bolt to turn the camshafts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
76. Rotate the LH camshafts to TDC.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
79. Align the colored links with the timing marks and assemble the LH VCT units.
m
80. NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the camshafts slightly, to install the LH secondary timing assembly.

. co
Position the LH VCT units and the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts by aligning the holes in the VCT units with
gn
ia
rd
ca
81. Install the new LH VCT unit bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
30 lb.ft (40 Nm)
Stage 2:
Loosen::
1 turn(s)
Stage 3:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
Stage 4:
180°
m
co
NOTE: The VCT oil control solenoids are removed for clarity.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
83. Install the upper LH timing chain guide and the bolt.
m
84. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise 60 degrees to the TDC position (crankshaft dowel pin at 11 o'clock).
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
85. Install the crankshaft sprocket.

m
co
Install the timing chain with the colored links aligned with the timing marks on the VCT units and the crankshaft sprocket.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
87. Install the lower LH timing chain guide and the bolts.
m
co.
gn
ia
88. Install the timing chain tensioner arm.

rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
89.
1. Position the tensioner in a soft-jawed vise.
rd
2. Using pliers, squeeze the ends of the ratchet wire clip together.
3. Using the soft-jawed vise, compress the plunger to the reset position.
4. Install a locking pin in the 2 holes of the tensioner body to hold the plunger in place.
ca
m
1. Install the timing chain tensioner and the bolts.

2. Remove the lockpin.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
91.
There are 48 links in between the RH intake VCT assembly colored link (1) and the LH intake VCT assembly
colored link (2).
There are 35 links in between LH intake VCT assembly colored link (2) and the 2 crankshaft sprocket links (3).
m
92. NOTICE: Do not use excessive force when installing the VCT oil control solenoid. Damage to the mega cap
co
could cause the cylinder head to be inoperable. If difficult to install the VCT oil control solenoid, inspect the
bore and VCT oil control solenoid to ensure there are no burrs, sharp edges or contaminants present on the
.
Install the VCT oil control solenoids and the bolts.
gn
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
20 °
ia
rd
ca

m
94. Install the RH oil tube and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
60 °
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
96. Install the LH oil tube and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
60 °
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
co
NOTE: The engine front cover and bolts must be installed within 4 minutes of the initial sealant application. The
remainder of the engine front cover bolts must be installed and tightened within 35 minutes of the initial sealant
.
application. If the time limits are exceeded, the sealant must be removed, the sealing area cleaned and sealant
gn
reapplied. To clean the sealing area, use silicone gasket remover and metal surface prep. Failure to follow this
Apply a 3.0 mm (0.11 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the engine front cover
ia

Apply a 5.5 mm (0.21 in) bead of Motorcraft® High Performance Engine RTV Silicone to the oil pan-to-cylinder
rd
block joint and the cylinder block joint areas of the engine front cover in places as indicated.
ca

m
. co
100. Remove Special Service Tool: 307-399 Alignment Pins, Transmission Fluid Pump.
gn
ia
rd
ca
101. Install the remaining engine front cover bolts.

Torque:
Stage 1:
Tighten bolts 1 through 22 to::
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
Tighten bolts 23, 24 and 25 to::
133 lb.in (15 Nm)
Stage 3:
Tighten bolt 26 to::
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 4:
Loosen bolt 26::
1 turn(s)
Stage 5:
Tighten bolts 23, 24 and 25 to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft) plus an additional::
90°
Stage 6:
Tighten bolts 1 through 22 to 20 Nm (177 lb-in) plus an additional::
45°
Stage 7:
Tighten bolt 26 to 10 Nm (89 lb-in) plus an additional::
45 °
m
102. Install the CHT jumper harness.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Handle.
m
co
Handle.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
m
.co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
co
.
gn
Handle.
ia
rd
ca
Handle.
m
follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage. co

.
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
115.
Install the coil-on-plugs and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
62 lb.in (7 Nm)
Stage 2:
50 °
Install the oil level indicator.
m
. co
gn
116. Install the oil pressure switch.

Material: Thread Sealant with PTFE / TA-24-B (WSK-M2G350-A2)
ia
Torque:
Stage 1:
124 lb.in (14 Nm)
Stage 2:
180°
rd
ca
117. If equipped with oil cooler, install a new oil filter adapter gasket.
m
118. If equipped with oil cooler, install the oil filter adapter and the bolts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
45°
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
119. If equipped with oil cooler, install a new oil cooler O-ring gaskets.
m
120. If equipped with oil cooler, install the new oil cooler and the bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
121. If equipped without oil cooler, install a new oil filter adapter gasket.
m
122. If equipped without oil cooler, install the oil filter adapter and the bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
123. Install new O-ring seals and apply clean coolant the O-rings.
m
124. Install the coolant tube assembly.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
127. Install the fuel supply tube bracket bolt.

Torque:
Stage 1:
71 lb.in (8 Nm)
Stage 2:
90 °
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
129. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the CMP sensor O-ring seals.
Install the RH CMP sensors and bolts.

m
130. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the CMP sensor O-ring seals.
Install the LH CMP sensors and bolts. co

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
131. Install the cover and the pin-type retainer.

m
Torque:
Stage 1:
142 lb.in (16 Nm)
Stage 2:
180°
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
133.
Torque:
Stage 1:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
720°
m
. co
gn
ia
134.
rd

ca
135. Install the LH catalytic converter and the new nuts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
137.
Position the engine wire harness on the engine.
Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connectors and the wire harness retainers.
138. Connect the EOP switch electrical connector and attach the wiring harness retainer.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
139.
Install the generator and the stud.
Install the nut and bolt.
m
140. Install the CKP sensor and bolt.
gn
ia
rd
ca
141. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.

m
142. Position back the wire harness grommet.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
143. Install the wiring harness retainer stud bolt.

m
144. Install the heat shield, nut and bolt.
gn
ia
rd
ca
145. Connect the RH CMP and KS electrical connectors. Connect the wire harness retainer.
m
146. Install the engine vent hose.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically including valve or piston
damage, check the intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in engine damage.
147. Install the upper intake manifold gaskets.

m
.co
gn
ia
148. Install the intake manifold and the bolts.

Torque:
rd
Stage 1:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Stage 2:
Bolts 1 and 3-7:
45°Bolt 2:
90°
ca
149. Install the upper intake manifold bracket and the bolts.
m
150. Connect the engine vent hose.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
151. Attach the coolant hose retainers.

m
152. Connect the EVAP tube and attach the retainers.
Procedures).
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
153. Connect the wire retainer and the electrical connector.

m
154. Connect the wire retainer and the electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
155. Connect the LH CMP and the CMS (catalyst monitor sensor) electrical connectors. Connect the wire harness retainers.
m
156. Connect the engine wiring harness electrical connectors and the retainers.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
157. Install the ground wire and the bolt.

m
158. Install the crankcase vent tube.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
159. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the bolts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
161. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front seal.
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Use Special Service Tool: 303-102 Installer, Crankshaft Pulley. , 303-335 (T88T-6701-A) Installer, Front Cover Oil
Seal.
m
. co
gn
Torque:
Stage 1:
89 lb.ft (120 Nm)
Stage 2:
Loosen::
1 turn(s)
Stage 3:
37 lb.ft (50 Nm)
ia
Stage 4:
90°
rd
ca

Install the block heater wiring harness onto the engine.
Connect the block heater electrical connector.
m
. co
Install the heat shield.
gn
ia
rd
ca
167.
Install Special Service Tool: 303-1529 Lift Eye, Engine.
m
168. Install the floor crane.
Use the General Equipment: Floor Crane .co
gn
ia
rd
ca
169. Remove the engine from the mounting stand.

Use the General Equipment: Mounting Stand
m
. co
gn
ia
170. Install the crankshaft sensor ring.

rd
ca
171.
NOTE: One of the 8 flexplate holes are offset so the flexplate can only be installed in one position
Using the special tool, install the flexplate and the bolts.
Remove Special Service Tool: 303-103 (T74P-6375-A) Holding Tool, Flywheel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Engine
Inspection and Verification - Engine Performance
NOTE: There are 2 diagnostic paths that can be followed depending on the type of engine concern. Carry out Inspection and
Verification - Engine Performance or Inspection and Verification - NVH.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the DLC.
m
5. NOTE: The VCM LED prove out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:

check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
co
check for No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
.
gn
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:

verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
ia
to diagnose no response from the PCM,

rd
7. Carry out the network test.

If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules,
ca
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to the appropriate 303-14 section.
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart - Engine Performance.
Inspection and Verification - NVH
1. NVH symptoms should be identified using the diagnostic tools and techniques that are available. For a list of these
techniques, tools, an explanation of their uses and a glossary of common terms,
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and Testing).
Since it is possible that any one of multiple systems may be the cause of the symptom, it may be necessary to use a
process of elimination type of diagnostic approach to pinpoint the responsible system.
2. Verify the customer concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition.
3. Check the engine oil level and check the oil for contamination. Low engine oil level or contaminated oil are a common
cause of engine noise. If the oil is contaminated, the source of the contamination must be identified and repaired as
necessary.
4. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.

5. If the inspection reveals obvious concerns that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
6. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the DLC.
7. NOTE: The VCM LED prove out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:

check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
check for No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
8. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:

verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
to diagnose no response from the PCM,
9. Carry out the network test.

If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules,
m
If the network test passes, retrieve and record continuous memory DTCs.
co
10. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
11. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the appropriate 303-14 section.
.
gn
12. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, continue the inspection and verification if a noise concern is related to
the engine. For vibration concerns and noise concerns such as powertrain mounts, air intake system and starter GO to
Symptom Chart - NVH.
ia
In some cases, a noise may be a normal characteristic of that engine type. In other cases the noise may require further
investigation. Comparing the noise to a similar year/model vehicle equipped with the same engine will aid in determining if the
noise is normal or abnormal.
rd
Once a customer concern has been identified as an abnormal engine noise, it is critical to determine the location of the specific
noise. Use the EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope (the noise will always be louder closer to the noise source) to isolate
ca
the location of the noise to one of the following areas.
Fuel injector(s)
Upper end of engine
Lower end of engine
Front of engine
Rear of engine
Fuel injector noise
A common source of an engine ticking noise can be related to the fuel injection pump Gasoline Turbocharged Direct Injection
(GTDI) engine or fuel injector(s). This is normal engine noise that can be verified by listening to another vehicle. If the injector
noise is excessive or irregular, use the EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope to isolate the noise to a specific fuel injector.
Upper end engine noise
A common source of upper end engine noise (ticking, knocking or rattle) include the camshaft(s) and valve train. Upper end
engine noise can be determined using the EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope on the valve cover bolts. If the noise is
loudest from the valve cover bolts, then the noise is upper end. The EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope can be used to
further isolate the noise to the specific cylinder bank and cylinder. Removal of the valve covers will be required to pinpoint the
source of the noise.
Lower end engine noise
A common source of lower end engine noise (ticking or knocking) include the crankshaft, connecting rod(s) and bearings.
Lower end noises can be determined by using the oil pan or lower cylinder block. If the noise is loudest from these areas, then
the noise is lower end. If an engine noise is isolated to the lower end, some disassembly of the engine may be required to
inspect for damage or wear.
Front of engine noise
A common source of noise from the front of the engine (squeal, chirp, whine or hoot) is the FEAD components. To isolate
FEAD noise, carry out the Engine Accessory Test,
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and Testing).
Some other noises from the front of the engine (ticking, tapping or rattle) may be internal to the engine. Use the
EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope on the engine front cover to determine if the noise is internal to the engine. Removal of
the engine front cover may be necessary to inspect internal engine components.
Rear of engine noise
A common source of noise from the rear of the engine (knocking) is the flywheel/flexplate. Inspection of the flywheel/flexplate
will be necessary.
Some engines have timing drive components at the rear of the engine and may be the source of noise (ticking, knocking or
rattle). Use the EngineEAR/ChassisEAR or stethoscope on the rear of the engine if the noise is suspected to be internal to the
engine. Some disassembly of the engine may be required to inspect for damage or wear.
Turbocharger noise (Gasoline Turbocharged Direct Injection (GTDI) engine)
A common source of noise is the turbocharger. Some whine or air rush noise is an acceptable condition.
m
13. After the noise is localized, note the characteristics of the noise, including type of noise, frequency and conditions when
the noise occurs and GO to Symptom Chart - NVH.
Symptom Chart - Engine Performance co

Symptom Chart - Engine Performance
.
gn
Difficult starting Inoperative or Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the
damaged ignition procedure. Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions
system Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
ia
Air or vacuum leak

rd
Inoperative or
damaged fuel
system
ca
Inoperative or
damaged starting
system
Damaged charging
system/ battery REFER to: Charging System - 2.3L EcoBoost
(201kW/273PS) (414-00 Charging System - General
or REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L Duratec
or REFER to: Charging System - 3.5L EcoBoost
or REFER to: Charging System - 3.7L Duratec
Burnt valve INSTALL a new cylinder head. TEST the system for
normal operation after the repair.
Worn piston INSTALL a new piston. TEST the system for normal
operation after the repair.
Worn piston rings INSTALL new piston rings. TEST the system for
Worn cylinder INSTALL a new cylinder block. TEST the system for
Damaged head INSTALL a new cylinder head gasket. TEST the

gasket system for normal operation after the repair.
Inoperative or Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the

damaged cooling procedure.
system
Fail-safe cooling Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis

invoked (if (PC/ED) manual.
equipped)
Poor idling Vacuum leaks Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the
procedure. Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions
Inoperative or Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
damaged EGR
m
system

damaged ignition
system
co
procedure.
.
gn
damaged cooling procedure.
system
Inoperative or
ia
damaged fuel
system
rd

equipped)
ca
Incorrect valve ADJUST valve clearance. Refer to the appropriate

clearance section in Group 303 for the procedure. TEST the
system for normal operation after the repair.
Incorrect valve-to- INSTALL a new cylinder head. TEST the system for
valve seat contact normal operation after the repair.
Damaged head INSTALL a new cylinder head gasket. TEST the

gasket system for normal operation after the repair.
Engine runs Inoperative or Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the
rough damaged fuel procedure.
system
Air or vacuum
leaks
EGR system fault
Inoperative or
damaged cooling
system
Inoperative or
damaged ignition
system

equipped)
Burnt or sticking INSTALL a new valve. TEST the system for normal
valve operation after the repair.
Weak or broken INSTALL a new valve spring. TEST the system for
valve spring normal operation after the repair.
Carbon ELIMINATE carbon buildup. TEST the system for

accumulation in normal operation after the repair.
combustion
chamber
Excessive oil Leaking oil REPAIR oil leakage. TEST the system for normal
consumption operation after the repair.
m
Blocked or INSPECT the turbocharger drain pipe. REPAIR as
restricted necessary. TEST the system for normal operation
turbocharger oil after the repair.
drain pipe
Damaged or
co
Tighten hoses clamps. INSPECT for damage and
.
collapsed air intake REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal
gn
hoses and tubes operation after the repair.
Damaged exhaust INSPECT for leaks. Leaks can be detected audibility

or exhaust leaks at or visually, by a discoloration caused by escaping
ia
turbocharger hot exhaust gases. REPAIR as necessary. TEST

housing or exhaust the system for normal operation after the repair.
manifold.
rd
Turbocharger oil REFER to Turbocharger Internal Oil Leak Test.

ca
seals leaking REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04E Fuel Charging

and Controls - Turbocharger - 2.3L EcoBoost
or REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04F Fuel Charging
TEST the system for normal operation after the
repair.
Inoperative PCV REPAIR or INSTALL new components as

system necessary. TEST the system for normal operation
after the repair.
Incorrect oil CHANGE oil to correct specification. TEST the

Worn valve stem INSTALL a new valve stem seal. TEST the system
seal for normal operation after the repair.
Worn valve stem or INSTALL a new cylinder head. TEST the system for
valve guide normal operation after the repair.
Sticking piston INSTALL new piston rings. TEST the system for
rings normal operation after the repair.
Worn piston ring INSTALL a new piston and piston pin. TEST the
groove system for normal operation after the repair.
Worn piston or INSTALL a new piston or cylinder block. TEST the

cylinder system for normal operation after the repair.
Oil in coolant Leaking head INSPECT the engine components. INSTALL new
gasket engine components as necessary. Refer to the
Damaged cylinder TEST the system for normal operation after the
block repair.
Damaged cylinder
head
Leaking oil cooler INSPECT the oil cooler and seal for damage.
INSTALL new components as necessary. Refer to
the appropriate section in Group 303 for the
procedure.
Coolant in oil Leaking head INSPECT the engine components. INSTALL new
m
gasket engine components as necessary. Refer to the
Damaged cylinder
block
Damaged cylinder
co
repair.
head
.
gn
Insufficient power Inoperative or Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the
damaged ignition procedure. Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions
system Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
ia
Air intake system

blockage
rd
Lubrication system
blockage
ca
Inoperative or
damaged fuel
system
Turbocharger INSPECT the turbocharger. REFER to the Check

turbine or for Free Rotation— Off Vehicle.
compressor wheel REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04E Fuel Charging
damage and Controls - Turbocharger - 2.3L EcoBoost
repair.
Damaged exhaust INSPECT for leaks. Leaks can be detected audibility

or exhaust leaks at or visually, by a discoloration caused by escaping
turbocharger hot exhaust gases. REPAIR as necessary. TEST
housing or exhaust the system for normal operation after the repair.
manifold
Malfunctioning Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis

turbocharger (PC/ED) manual.
bypass valve
Oil level too high DRAIN oil to correct level.
Incorrect engine oil INSTALL correct specification engine oil. TEST the
Excessive Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the

accessory drive procedure.
belt loading
Inoperative or
damaged cooling
system

equipped)
Damaged or INSPECT exhaust system. TEST the system for

plugged exhaust normal operation after the repair.
system
m
Incorrect tire size
REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension
co
System - General Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Dragging brakes
.
gn
REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System -
Slipping Refer to the appropriate section in Group 307 for the

ia
transmission procedure.
Slipping clutch Refer to the appropriate section in Group 308 for the
rd
procedure.
ca
Incorrect valve ADJUST valve clearance. Refer to the appropriate

clearance section in Group 303 for the procedure. TEST the
Worn or damaged INSTALL a new valve tappet. TEST the system for
valve tappet normal operation after the repair.
Damaged valve INSTALL a new cylinder head assembly. TEST the

guide system for normal operation after the repair.
Compression
leakage at valve
seat
Seized valve stem
Weak or broken INSTALL a new valve spring. TEST the system for
valve spring normal operation after the repair.
Worn or damaged INSTALL a new camshaft. TEST the system for

cam normal operation after the repair.
Damaged head INSTALL a new head gasket. TEST the system for
gasket normal operation after the repair.
Cracked or INSTALL a new cylinder head assembly. TEST the

distorted cylinder system for normal operation after the repair.
head
Damaged, worn or INSTALL a new piston ring(s). TEST the system for
sticking piston normal operation after the repair.
ring(s)
Worn or damaged INSTALL a new piston and piston pin. TEST the
piston system for normal operation after the repair.
Engine emits Clogged Air INSTALL a new ACL element. TEST the system for
excessive black Cleaner (ACL) normal operation after the repair.
smoke element
(black/blue/white)
Incorrect type or DRAIN and FILL with specified oil.

grade of oil
Blocked or INSPECT the turbocharger oil drain pipe. REPAIR
m
restricted as necessary. TEST the system for normal
turbocharger oil operation after the repair.
drain pipe
Damaged/restricted
or leaking
. co
REPAIR or INSTALL a new tube as necessary.
turbocharger intake repair.
gn
tube assembly
Engine wear REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal

(piston rings, valve operation after the repair.
ia
guides)
rd
Plugged crankcase Visually INSPECT the crankcase ventilation system.

ventilation system
ca
Turbocharger oil REFER to Turbocharger Internal Oil Leak Test.

seals leaking REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04E Fuel Charging
repair.
Symptom Chart - NVH
Symptom Chart - NVH

Drone type noise Powertrain CARRY OUT the Powertrain/Drivetrain
mount(s) Mount Neutralizing procedure.
REFER to: Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount
Neutralizing (303-00 Engine System -
TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
Drumming noise - occurs Engine vibration CARRY OUT the Powertrain/Drivetrain
inside the vehicle during excites the body Mount Neutralizing procedure.
idle or high idle, hot or cold. resonances REFER to: Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount
Very low-frequency inducing interior Neutralizing (303-00 Engine System -
drumming is very rpm noise General Information, General Procedures).
dependent TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
Engine drumming noise - Powertrain CARRY OUT the Powertrain/Drivetrain

accompanied by vibration mount(s) Mount Neutralizing procedure.
REFER to: Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount
Neutralizing (303-00 Engine System -
the repair.
Rattle - occurs at idle or at Powertrain CHECK the powertrain mounts for damage.
light acceleration from a mount(s) INSTALL new mounts as necessary. For
stop engine, Refer to the appropriate section in
Group 303 for the procedure. For transaxle,
Refer to the appropriate section in Group
307 or Group 308 for the procedure. TEST
the system for normal operation after the
m
repair.
Whine/moan type noise - Powertrain CHECK the powertrain mounts for damage.
pitch increases or changes
with vehicle speed
mount(s)
. co
INSTALL new mounts as necessary. For
engine, Refer to the appropriate section in
gn
repair.
ia
Clunk - occurs when Powertrain CHECK the powertrain mounts for damage.
shifting from PARK or mounts INSTALL new mounts as necessary. For
between REVERSE and engine, Refer to the appropriate section in
rd
DRIVE Group 303 for the procedure. For transaxle,

ca

repair.
Idle speed is too CHECK for the correct idle speed. TEST the
high system for normal operation after the repair.
Accessory drive bearing Accessory drive CARRY OUT the Engine Cold Soak
hoot - occurs at idle or high idler or tensioner procedure.
idle in cold temperatures of pulley bearing is REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness
approximately 4°C (40°F) experiencing (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and
or colder at the first start of stick/slip Harshness, Diagnosis and Testing).
the day between ball
bearings and the PLACE the EngineEAR probe directly on the
bearing race idler/ tensioner center post or bolt to verify
which bearing is making the noise. INSTALL
new parts as necessary. Refer to the
appropriate section in Group 303 for the
procedure. TEST the system for normal
Accessory drive belt noise, Defective/worn CARRY OUT the Engine Accessory Test.
squeal or chirping or incorrect REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness
accessory drive (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and
belt Harshness, Diagnosis and Testing).
INSPECT components and INSTALL new
Misaligned parts as necessary. Refer to the appropriate
pulley(s) section in Group 303 for the procedure.
Pulley runout the repair.
Damaged or
worn accessory
drive component
or idler
Fluid
contamination of
the accessory
drive belt or
pulleys
Damaged or
worn accessory
drive belt
tensioner
Damaged pulley
grooves
m
Clunking noise Coolant pump CHECK the coolant pump for excessive end
has excessive
end play or
imbalance
. co
play. INSPECT the coolant pump for
imbalance with the drive belt off. INSTALL a
new coolant pump as necessary. Refer to
gn
Whine/hum - occurs when Fuel pump Acceptable condition. Fuel pump module
ia
unlocking the vehicle or module turns on before engine starts to prime the
opening the door with the fuel system.
engine off Gasoline
rd
Turbocharged Direct
Injection (GTDI) only
ca
Whine or moaning noise Air intake system CHECK the air cleaner and ducts for correct
fit. INSPECT the air intake system for leaks
or damage. REPAIR as necessary. TEST
repair.
Whistling noise - normally Air intake system CHECK the air intake ducts, air cleaner,
accompanied with poor idle throttle body and vacuum hoses for leaks
condition and correct fit. REPAIR or ADJUST as
necessary. TEST the system for normal
Turbocharger REPAIR or INSTALL a new tube as

intake tube necessary. TEST the system for normal
assembly operation after the repair.
leaking
Loose TIGHTEN hose clamps. INSPECT for

connections or damage and REPAIR as necessary. TEST
damage to air the system for normal operation after the
intake hoses and repair.
tubes
Air leaks at INSPECT for leaks. Leaks can usually be
turbine housing, detected audibility or visually, by a
blown joints or discoloration caused by escaping hot
damaged exhaust gases. REPAIR as necessary.
exhaust TEST the system for normal operation after
the repair.
Carbon build up INSPECT the turbocharger. REFER to the

in the turbine Check for Free Rotation - Off Vehicle.
housing REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04E Fuel
Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - 2.3L
EcoBoost (201kW/273PS), Diagnosis and
Testing).
or REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04F Fuel
Testing).
the repair.
Turbocharger REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for

imbalance due normal operation after the repair.
to foreign
m
object/damage
Turbine bearing INSPECT the turbocharger. REFER to the

failure
. co
Check for Free Rotation - Off Vehicle.
REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04E Fuel
gn
Testing).
or REFER to: Turbocharger (303-04F Fuel
ia
Testing).
the repair.
rd
Inoperative Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions

turbocharger Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
ca
bypass valve
Whine or air rush type Turbocharger Acceptable condition. Some whine or air
noise noise is common.
Chrip or whoosh sound Turbocharger CHECK the turbocharger bypass valve.

bypass valve REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for
Hissing noise - occurs Vacuum leak Use the Ultrasonic Leak

during idle or high idle that Detector/EngineEAR to locate the source.
is apparent with the hood Scan the air intake system from the inlet to
open each cylinder intake port. DISCARD the
leaking parts, and INSTALL a new
component. TEST the system for normal
Vehicles with a Acceptable condition. Some plastic

plastic intake manifolds exhibit this noise, which is the
manifold effect of the plastic manifold.
Grinding noise - occurs Incorrect starter INSPECT the starter motor for correct
during engine cranking motor mounting mounting. REPAIR as necessary. Refer to
Starter motor CHECK the starter motor. INSTALL a new

starter motor as necessary. Refer to the
Incorrect starter INSPECT the starter motor drive for wear or

motor drive damage. INSTALL a new starter motor as
engagement necessary. Refer to the appropriate section
in Group 303 for the procedure. TEST the
INSPECT the flywheel/flexplate for wear or

damage. INSTALL a new flywheel/flexplate
as necessary. Refer to the appropriate
the repair.
m
Engine noise, front of Damaged or CHECK for obvious signs of damage or
engine - knocking noise separated wobble during operation. INSTALL new as
from lower front of engine crankshaft
pulley/damper
. co
necessary. Refer to the appropriate section
gn
Engine noise, front of Timing drive REMOVE the accessory drive belt. Refer to
engine - ticking, tapping or components the appropriate section in Group 303 for the
rattling noise from the front procedure.
of the engine
ia
USE the EngineEAR to isolate the noise to

the engine front cover.
rd
REMOVE the engine front cover and

INSPECT the timing drive components.
INSTALL new parts as necessary. Refer to
ca

Engine noise, upper end - Fuel rail clip CHECK for loose or damaged fuel rail
ticking noise near the fuel clip(s). REPAIR as necessary.
rail and intake manifold Fuel injector
USE the EngineEAR to isolate the noisy
injector(s). INSTALL a new injector(s) as
necessary. Refer to the appropriate section
Fuel injection This is a normal engine noise that can be

pump (GTDI verified by listening to another vehicle. If
only) noise is excessive, REPAIR as necessary.
the repair.
Engine noise, upper end - Valve train noise CARRY OUT the Valve Train Analysis
ticking, knocking or rattle (bled down Component Test in this section. INSTALL
noise that occurs during lifter/lash new parts as necessary. Refer to the
idle or high idle during the adjuster) appropriate section in Group 303 for the
first cold start of the day procedure. TEST the system for normal
and may disappear as the operation after the repair.
engine warms
Engine noise, upper end - Worn or REMOVE the spark plugs. INSPECT and
occurs mostly with a warm damaged spark INSTALL new as necessary. Refer to the
engine at light/medium plugs appropriate section in Group 303 for the
acceleration procedure. TEST the system for normal
Engine noise, upper end - Low oil level CHECK the oil level. FILL as necessary.
rattling noise from the valve
train. Worse when the
engine is cold
Thin or diluted oil INSPECT the oil for contamination. If the oil
is contaminated, CHECK for the source.
REPAIR as necessary. CHANGE the oil and
filter. TEST the system for normal operation
after the repair.
Low oil pressure CARRY OUT the Oil Pressure Test in this
section. If not within specifications,
m
REMOVE the engine oil pan. Refer to the
procedure. INSPECT for a blocked oil pick
Worn valve train

. co
up tube. TEST the system for normal
CARRY OUT the Valve Train Analysis

components Component Test in this section. INSTALL
gn
new parts as necessary. Refer to the
ia
Worn valve CARRY OUT the Valve Guide Inner

rd
guides Diameter procedure.

REFER to: Valve Guide Inner Diameter
(303-00 Engine System - General
ca
Excessive runout INSPECT for abnormalities on the valve face

of the valve and valve seat. INSTALL a new cylinder
seats on the head assembly if abnormalities are found.
valve face
Engine noise, upper end - Gasoline octane VERIFY with customer the type of gasoline
pinging noise too low used. CORRECT as necessary. TEST the
KS operation CHECK the KS operation. INSTALL a new

KS. Refer to the appropriate section in
Group 303 for the procedure. TEST the
Incorrect spark CHECK the spark timing. REPAIR as

timing necessary. TEST the system for normal
High operating INSPECT the cooling system for leaks.

temperature CHECK the coolant level. REFILL as
necessary. CHECK the coolant for the
correct mix ratio. DRAIN and REFILL as
needed. VERIFY the engine operating
temperature is within specifications. REPAIR
as necessary. TEST the system for normal
Spark plug CHECK the spark plugs. REPAIR or

INSTALL new spark plugs as necessary.
the repair.
Catalytic Compare with a similar vehicle for what is

converter acceptable noise.
Engine noise, lower end - Oil pump USE the EngineEAR to verify the oil pump
ticking or knocking noise as the source of the noise at low rpm.
near the oil filter adapter REPAIR as necessary. Refer to the
Engine noise, lower end - Excessive CARRY OUT the Piston Diameter
m
light knocking noise, also clearance procedure.
described as piston slap. between the REFER to: Piston Diameter (303-00 Engine
Noise is most noticeable piston and the System - General Information, General
when the engine is cold
with light to medium
acceleration. The noise
disappears as the engine
cylinder wall
. co
Procedures).
Measure the cylinder bore diameter.
Subtract the piston diameter from the
cylinder bore diameter to find the piston-to-
warms cylinder bore clearance. REFER to the
gn
appropriate 303-01 Section for
specifications.
Engine noise, lower end - Excessive MEASURE the piston pin bore and the
ia
light double knock or sharp clearance piston pin in 2 directions on each side.
rap sound. Occurs mostly between the REFER to the appropriate 303-01 Section
rd
with a warm engine at idle piston and the for specifications.

or low speeds in drive. piston pin
Increases in relation to
ca
engine load. Associated

with a poor lubrication
history
Engine noise, lower end - Excessive CARRY OUT the Connecting Rod Bearing
light knocking noise. The clearance Journal Clearance procedure.
noise is most noticeable between the REFER to: Connecting Rod Bearing Journal
when the engine is warm. connecting rod Clearance (303-00 Engine System - General
The noise tends to bearings and the Information, General Procedures).
decrease when the vehicle crankshaft
is coasting or in neutral
Engine noise, lower end - Worn or CARRY OUT the Crankshaft Main Bearing
deep knocking noise. The damaged Journal Clearance procedure.
noise is most noticeable crankshaft main REFER to: Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal
when the engine is warm, bearings Clearance (303-00 Engine System - General
at lower rpm and under a Information, General Procedures).
light load and then at float
Engine noise, rear of Damaged INSPECT the flywheel/flexplate for wear or

engine - knocking noise at flywheel/flexplate damage. INSTALL a new flywheel/flexplate
rear of engine as necessary. Refer to the appropriate
the repair.
Engine vibration - vibration Excessive CARRY OUT the Engine Accessory Test.
felt at all times engine pulley REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness
runout (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and
Harshness, Diagnosis and Testing).
INSTALL a new engine pulley as necessary.
303 for the procedure. TEST the system for
Damaged or CARRY OUT the Engine Accessory Test.

worn accessory REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness
component (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and
REPAIR or INSTALL a new component as
necessary. TEST the system for normal
Engine vibration - at idle, a Cylinder misfire Using the scan tool, CARRY OUT the
low-frequency vibration (5- cylinder power balance and the relative
20 Hz) or mild shake that is compression test. REPAIR as necessary.
felt through the seat/ Refer to the appropriate section in Group
m
floorpan 303 for the procedure. TEST the system for
Engine or torque
converter out of
balance
. co
VERIFY the torque converter to crankshaft
pilot clearance is correct. REPAIR as
necessary. RE-INDEX the torque converter
on the flex plate by 120 degrees for a 3- bolt
gn
converter or 180 degrees for a 4-bolt
converter. Refer to the appropriate section in
Group 307 for the procedure. TEST the
ia
Engine vibration - is felt Powertrain CHECK the powertrain mounts for damage.
rd
with increases and mount(s) INSTALL new mounts as necessary. For

decreases in engine rpm engine, Refer to the appropriate section in
ca

repair.
Engine or INSPECT the powertrain/ drivetrain for

transmission correct clearances. REPAIR as necessary.
grounded to TEST the system for normal operation after
chassis the repair.
Engine vibration - Engine out-of- CARRY OUT the NERU Test.

increases intensity as the balance REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness
engine rpm is increased (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and
ROTATE the torque converter, 120 degrees
for 3- bolt or 180 degrees for 4- bolt.
INSPECT the torque converter pilot outer
diameter-to-crankshaft pilot inner diameter.
REPAIR as necessary. Refer to the
Engine vibration - mostly at Combustion CHECK the ignition system. INSTALL new
coast/neutral coast. instability components as necessary. Refer to the
Condition improves with appropriate section in Group 303 for the
vehicle acceleration procedure. TEST the system for normal
Engine vibration or shudder Worn or INSPECT the spark plugs for cracks, high
- occurs with light to damaged spark resistance or broken insulators. INSTALL a
medium acceleration above plugs new spark plug(s) as necessary. Refer to the
56 km/h (35 mph) appropriate section in Group 303 for the
Plugged fuel REPAIR or INSTALL a new injector as

injector necessary. Refer to the appropriate section
Contaminated INSPECT the fuel for contamination. DRAIN

fuel the fuel system and refill. TEST the system
for normal operation after the repair.
Component Tests
m
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Engine Oil Leaks

co
NOTE: If an overnight drive is done, the fan air or road air blast can cause erroneous readings.
.
NOTE: When diagnosing engine oil leaks, the source and location of the leak must be positively identified prior to repair.
gn
Prior to carrying out this procedure, clean the cylinder block, cylinder heads, valve covers, oil pan and flywheel/flexplate with a
suitable solvent to remove all traces of oil.
ia
Engine Oil Leaks - Fluorescent Oil Additive Method
NOTE: If the factory fill engine oil with dye is present, change the engine oil and the oil filter prior to using the Dye-Lite® Oil-
rd
Based Fluid Dye (164-TP33200601).
Use the UV Long-Wave W/12-foot Cord & Alligator Clips (164-R3748) or Leak Tracker UV-LED Leak Detection Flashlight (164-
TP8695) to carry out the following procedure for oil leak diagnosis.
ca
1. Add 29.6 ml (1 oz) of Dye-Lite® Oil-Based Fluid Dye (164-TP33200601) to a minimum of 0.47L (1/2 qt) and a maximum
of 0.95L (1 qt) engine oil. Thoroughly premix the oil based fluid dye or it will not have enough time to reach the
crankcase, oil galleries and seal surfaces during this particular 15 minute test. The additive must be added through the
oil fill. Check the level on the oil level indicator to determine what amount of oil to premix. If it is in the middle of the
crosshatch area or below the full mark, use 0.95L (1 qt). If it is at the full mark, use 0.47L (1/2 qt).
2. NOTE: For best results allow the customer to drive the vehicle for a day.
Run the engine for 15 minutes. Stop the engine and inspect all seal and gasket areas for leaks using the UV Leak
Detector Kit. A fluoresces white area will identify the leak. For extremely small leaks, several hours may be required for
the leak to appear.
3. At the end of test, make sure the oil level is within the upper and lower oil indicator marks. Remove oil as necessary if it
registers above the full mark.
Leakage Points - Underhood
Examine the following areas for oil leakage:
Valve cover gaskets

Cylinder head gaskets
Oil cooler, if equipped
Oil filter adapter
Engine front cover
Oil filter adapter and filter body
Oil level indicator tube connection
Oil pressure switch or EOP sensor
Turbocharger oil tubes
Leakage Points - Under Engine, With Vehicle on Hoist
Oil pan gaskets

Oil pan sealer
Engine front cover gasket
Crankshaft front seal
Crankshaft rear oil seal
Oil filter adapter and filter body
Oil cooler, if equipped
Turbocharger oil tubes
Leakage Points - With Transmission and Flywheel/Flexplate Removed
Crankshaft rear oil seal

Rear main bearing cap parting line
Flexplate mounting bolt holes (with flexplate installed)
m
Pipe plugs at the end of oil passages
Compression Test
co
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly
charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position, then remove all the spark plugs.
.
gn
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.

ia
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary
starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
rd
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes.
ca
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the
highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the
pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase
compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this
condition. Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading is
within 75% of the highest reading.
Cylinder Leakage Detection
When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of a cylinder leakage tester will be helpful in pinpointing the exact cause.
The leakage tester is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to TDC on the compression stroke, and
compressed air is admitted.
Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, the leakage tester gauge will read the percentage of leakage. Leakage
exceeding 20% is excessive.
While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the intake valve will be heard in the
Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the tailpipe. Leakage past the piston rings will be audible at the
PCV connection. If air is passing through a blown head gasket to an adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark
plug hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking. Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into the cooling system may
be detected by a stream of bubbles in the radiator.
Excessive Engine Oil Consumption
Nearly all engines consume oil, which is essential for normal lubrication of the cylinder bore walls and pistons and rings.
Determining the level of oil consumption may require testing by recording how much oil is being added over a given set of
miles.
Customer driving habits greatly influence oil consumption. Mileage accumulated during towing or heavy loading generates extra
heat. Frequent short trips, stop-and-go type traffic or extensive idling, prevent the engine from reaching normal operating
temperature. This prevents component clearances from reaching specified operating ranges.
The following diagnostic procedure may be utilized to determine internal oil consumption. Make sure that the concern is related
to internal oil consumption, and not external leakage, which also consumes oil. Verify there are no leaks before carrying out the
test. Once verified, the rate of internal oil consumption can be tested.
A new engine may require extra oil in the early stages of operation. Internal piston-to-bore clearances and sealing
characteristics improve as the engine breaks in. Engines are designed for close tolerances and do not require break-in oils or
additives. Use the oil specified in the Owner's Literature. Ambient temperatures may determine the oil viscosity specification.
Verify that the correct oil is being used for the vehicle in the geographic region in which it is driven.
Basic Pre-checks
m
1. For persistent complaints of oil consumption, interview the customer to determine the oil consumption characteristics. If
possible, determine the brand and grade of oil currently in the oil pan. Look at the oil filter or oil-change station tags to
co
determine if Ford-recommended maintenance schedules have been followed. Make sure that the oil has been changed
at the specified mileage intervals. If vehicle mileage is past the first recommended drain interval, the Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) production filter should have been changed.
.
2. Ask how the most current mileage was accumulated. That is, determine whether the vehicle was driven under the
gn
following conditions:
Extended idling or curbside engine operation
Stop-and-go traffic or taxi operation
ia
Towing a trailer or vehicle loaded heavily

Frequent short trips (engine not up to normal operating temperature)
Excessive throttling or high engine-rpm driving
rd
3. Verify that there are no external leaks. If necessary, review the diagnostic procedure under Engine Oil Leaks in the
Diagnosis and Testing portion of this section.
ca
4. Inspect the crankcase ventilation system for:

disconnected hoses at the valve cover or TB.
loose or missing valve cover fill cap.
missing or incorrectly seated engine oil level indicator.
incorrect or dirty PCV valve.
a PCV valve grommet unseated in the valve cover (if so equipped).
5. Inspect for signs of sludge. Sludge affects PCV performance and can plug or restrict cylinder head drainback wells. It
can also increase oil pressure by restricting passages and reducing the drainback capability of piston oil control rings.
Sludge can result from either excessive water ingestion in the crankcase or operation at extremely high crankcase
temperatures.
6. Inspect the air filter for dirt, sludge or damage. A hole in the filter element will allow unfiltered air to bypass into the air
induction system. This can cause premature internal wear (engine dusting), allowing oil to escape past rings, pistons,
valves and guides.
7. If the engine is hot or was recently shut down, wait at least 10-minutes to allow the oil to drain back. Ask the customer if
this requirement has been followed. Adding oil without this wait period can cause an overfill condition, leading to
excessive oil consumption and foaming which may cause engine damage.
8. Make sure the oil level indicator (dipstick) is correctly and fully seated in the indicator tube. Remove the oil level indicator
and record the oil level.
Detailed Pre-checks
1. Check the thermostat opening temperature to make sure that the cooling system is operating at the specified
temperature. If it is low, internal engine parts are not running at specified internal operating clearances.
2. Verify the spark plugs are not oil saturated. Oil leaking into one or more cylinders will appear as an oil soaked condition
on the plug. If a plug is saturated, a compression check may be necessary at the conclusion of the oil consumption test.
Oil Consumption Test
1. NOTE: Once all of the previous conditions are met, carry out an oil consumption test.
Drain the engine oil and remove the oil filter. Install a new manufacturer-specified oil filter. Make sure the vehicle is
positioned on a level surface. Refill the oil pan to a level one liter (quart) less than the specified fill level, using
manufacturer-specified oil.
2. Run the engine for 3 minutes (if hot) or 10 minutes (if cold). Allow for a minimum 10-minute drainback period and then
record the oil level shown on the oil level indicator. Place a mark on the backside of the oil level indicator noting the oil
level location.
3. Add the final one liter (quart) to complete the normal oil fill. Restart the engine and allow it to idle for 2 minutes. Shut the
engine down.
4. After a 10-minute drainback period, record the location of the oil level again. Mark the oil level indicator with the new oil
level location. (Note: Both marks should be very close to the MIN-MAX upper and lower limits or the upper and lower
holes on the oil level indicator. These marks will exactly measure the engine's use of oil, with a one quart differential
between the new marks.) Demonstrate to the customer that the factory-calibrated marks on the oil level indicator are
m
where the oil should fall after an oil change with the specified fill amount. Explain however, that this may vary slightly
between MIN-MAX or the upper and lower holes on the oil level indicator.
5. Record the vehicle mileage.

co
6. Advise the customer that oil level indicator readings must be taken every 320 km (200 mi) or weekly, using the revised
marks as drawn. Remind the customer that the engine needs a minimum 10-minute drainback for an accurate reading
.
and that the oil level indicator must be firmly seated in the tube prior to taking the reading.
gn
7. When the subsequent indicator readings demonstrate a full liter (quart) has been used, record the vehicle mileage. The
mileage driven should not be less than 4,800 km (3,000 mi). The drive cycle the vehicle has been operated under must
be considered when making this calculation. It may be necessary to have the customer bring the vehicle in for a periodic
ia
oil level indicator reading to closely monitor oil usage.
Post Checks, Evaluation and Corrective Action

rd
1. If test results indicate excessive oil consumption, carry out a cylinder compression test. The cylinder compression test
should be carried out with a fully charged battery and all spark plugs removed. See the Compression Test Chart in this
ca
section for pressure range limits.
2. Compression should be consistent across all cylinders. Refer to the Compression Testing portion of this section. If
compression tested within the specifications found in this section, the excessive oil consumption may be due to wear on
the valve guides, valves or valve seals.
3. A cylinder leak detection test can be carried out using a cylinder leakage detector. This can help identify valves, piston
rings, or worn valve guides/valve stems, inoperative valve stem seals or other related areas as the source of oil
consumption.
4. NOTE: An oil-soaked appearance on the porcelain tips of the spark plugs also indicates excessive oil use. A typical
engine with normal oil consumption will exhibit a light tan to brown appearance. A single or adjoining, multiple cylinder
leak can be traced by viewing the tips.
If an internal engine part is isolated as the root cause, determine if the repair will exceed cost limits and proceed with a
repair strategy as required.
5. Once corrective action to engine is complete and verifying that all pre-check items were eliminated in the original
diagnosis, repeat the Oil Consumption Test as described above and verify consumption results.
Intake Manifold Vacuum Test
Bring the engine to normal operating temperature. Connect the Vacuum/Pressure Tester to the intake manifold. Run the engine
at the specified idle speed.
The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) depending upon the engine condition and the altitude at
which the test is conducted. Subtract 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8 m (1,000 feet) of elevation
above sea level.
The reading should be steady. If necessary, adjust the gauge damper control (where used) if the needle is fluttering rapidly.
Adjust the damper until the needle moves easily without excessive flutter.
Intake Manifold Vacuum Test - Interpreting Vacuum Gauge Readings
A careful study of the vacuum gauge reading while the engine is idling will help pinpoint trouble areas. Always conduct other
appropriate tests before arriving at a final diagnostic decision. Vacuum gauge readings, although helpful, must be interpreted
carefully.
Most vacuum gauges have a normal band indicated on the gauge face. The following are potential gauge readings. Some are
normal; others should be investigated further.
The following are potential gauge readings. Some are normal; others should be investigated further.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
1. NORMAL READING: Needle between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg) and holding steady.
2. NORMAL READING DURING RAPID ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION: When the engine is rapidly accelerated
(dotted needle), the needle will drop to a low reading (not to zero). When the throttle is suddenly released, the needle will
snap back up to a higher than normal figure.
3. NORMAL FOR HIGH-LIFT CAMSHAFT WITH LARGE OVERLAP: The needle will register as low as 51 kPa (15 in-Hg)
but will be relatively steady. Some oscillation is normal.
4. WORN RINGS OR DILUTED OIL: When the engine is accelerated (dotted needle), the needle drops to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg).
Upon deceleration, the needle runs slightly above 74 kPa (22 in-Hg).
5. STICKING VALVES: When the needle (dotted) remains steady at a normal vacuum but occasionally flicks (sharp, fast
movement) down and back about 13 kPa (4 in-Hg), one or more valves may be sticking.
6. BURNED OR WARPED VALVES: A regular, evenly-spaced, downscale flicking of the needle indicates one or more
burned or warped valves. Insufficient valve clearance will also cause this reaction.
7. POOR VALVE SEATING: A small but regular downscale flicking can mean one or more valves are not seating.
8. WORN VALVE GUIDES: When the needle oscillates over about a 13 kPa (4 in-Hg) range at idle speed, the valve guides
could be worn. As engine speed increases, the needle will become steady if guides are responsible.
9. WEAK VALVE SPRINGS: When the needle oscillation becomes more violent as engine rpm is increased, weak valve
springs are indicated. The reading at idle could be relatively steady.
10. LATE VALVE TIMING: A steady but low reading could be caused by late valve timing.
11. IGNITION TIMING RETARDING: Retarded ignition timing will produce a steady but somewhat low reading.
12. INSUFFICIENT SPARK PLUG GAP: When spark plugs are gapped too close, a regular, small pulsation of the needle
can occur.
13. INTAKE LEAK: A low, steady reading can be caused by an intake manifold or Throttle Body (TB) gasket leak.
14. BLOWN HEAD GASKET: A regular drop of fair magnitude can be caused by a blown head gasket or warped cylinder
head-to-cylinder block surface.
15. RESTRICTED EXHAUST SYSTEM: When the engine is first started and is idled, the reading may be normal, but as the
engine rpm is increased, the back pressure caused by a clogged muffler, kinked tailpipe or other concerns will cause the
m
needle to slowly drop to 0 kPa (0 in-Hg). The needle then may slowly rise. Excessive exhaust clogging will cause the
needle to drop to a low point even if the engine is only idling.
co
When vacuum leaks are indicated, search out and correct the cause. Excess air leaking into the system will upset the fuel
mixture and cause concerns such as rough idle, missing on acceleration or burned valves. If the leak exists in an accessory unit
such as the power brake booster, the unit will not function correctly. Always fix vacuum leaks.
.
Oil Pressure Test
gn
1. Disconnect and remove the oil pressure switch. Refer to the appropriate 303-01 engine section.
2. Connect a commercially available gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port.
ia
3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached.

rd
4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading.
5. The oil pressure should be within specifications, refer to the specification chart in the appropriate 303-01 engine section.
ca
6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources:
Insufficient oil
Oil leakage
Worn or damaged oil pump
Oil pump screen cover and tube
Excessive main bearing clearance
Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
Chain tensioner leak
7. Remove the commercially available oil pressure gauge.
8. Install and connect the oil pressure switch. Refer to the appropriate 303-01 engine section.
Valve Train Analysis
The following component tests are used to diagnose valve train concerns.
Valve Train Analysis - Engine Off, Valve Cover Removed
Check for damaged or severely worn parts and correct assembly. Make sure correct parts are used with the static engine
analysis as follows.
Valve Train Analysis - Camshafts and Valve Tappets
Check for broken or damaged parts.

Check for loose mounting bolts on camshaft caps.
Check for worn or damaged valve tappets.
Valve Train Analysis - Valve Springs, Valve Tappets Removed
Check for broken or damaged parts.
Valve Train Analysis - Valve Spring Retainer and Valve Spring Retainer Keys, Valve Tappets Removed
Check for correct seating of the valve spring retainer key on the valve stem and in valve spring retainer.
Check for correct seating on the valve stem.
Valve Train Analysis - Valves and Cylinder Head, Valve Tappets Removed
Check for plugged oil drain back holes.

Check for worn or damaged valve tips.
Check for missing or damaged valve stem seals or guide-mounted valve stem seal.
Check for missing or worn valve spring seats.
Valve Train Analysis - Camshaft Lobe Lift
Check the lift of each camshaft lobe in consecutive order and make a note of the readings.
1. Remove the spark plugs. Refer to the appropriate 303-07 section.
m
2. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture so the rounded tip of the dial indicator is on top of the camshaft lobe
and on the same plane as the valve tappet.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Rotate the crankshaft using a breaker bar and socket attached to the crankshaft pulley retainer bolt. Rotate the
crankshaft until the base circle of the camshaft lobe is reached.
4. Zero the dial indicator. Continue to rotate the crankshaft until the high-lift point of the camshaft lobe is in the fully raised
position (highest indicator reading).
5. To check the accuracy of the original dial indicator reading, continue to rotate crankshaft until the base circle is reached.
The indicator reading should be zero. If zero reading is not obtained, repeat Steps 2 through 5.
6. If the lift on any lobe is below specified service limits, install a new camshaft and camshaft roller followers or valve
tappets.
7. Install the spark plugs. Refer to the appropriate 303-07 section.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Engine
1. For basic mechanical concerns.

For driveability concerns. Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Disassembly Procedure revision date: 05/20/2016
Engine
205-142 (T80T-4000-J)
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Handle
m
303-103 (T74P-6375-A)
T74P-77000-A
TKIT-2009TC-F
. co
gn
303-1247
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
ia
rd
303-1248
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
ca
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
303-1529
Lift Eye, Engine
TKIT-2010A-F
TKIT-2010A-LM
TKIT-2010A-ROW
303-1530
TKIT-2010A-F
TKIT-2010A-LM
TKIT-2010A-ROW
303-409 (T92C-6700-CH)
TKIT-1993-LMH/MH
Floor Crane
Mounting Stand
Plastic Scraper
Puller
Materials
Name Specification
ZC-30-A
ZC-31-B
m
PM-4-A, PM-4-B
co
.
NOTE: If the cylinder head(s) is replaced, a new secondary timing chain tensioner will need to be installed.
gn
NOTE: Refer to the exploded view under the Engine Component View in the Description and Operation.
1.
ia
Install Special Service Tool: 303-103 (T74P-6375-A) Holding Tool, Flywheel.

Remove the bolts and the flexplate.
rd

ca
2. Remove the crankshaft sensor ring.
m
Mount the engine to the mounting stand.
. co
3. NOTE: Install the engine stand bolts into the cylinder block only. Do not install the bolts into the oil pan.
Use the General Equipment: Mounting Stand

gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
4. Remove the floor crane.

Use the General Equipment: Floor Crane
rd
ca
5. Remove Special Service Tool: 303-1529 Lift Eye, Engine.

m
Remove the heat shield.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
8.
Discard the bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

Use the General Equipment: Puller
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
co.
gn
ia
12. Remove the crankcase vent tube.

rd
ca
13. Remove the bolt and the ground wire.

m
14. Disconnect the LH electrical connectors and wire harness retainers.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
15.
Disconnect the LH CMP and CMS (catalyst monitor sensor) electrical connectors.
Disconnect the wire harness retainers.
m
16. Disconnect the electrical connectors and wire retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
17. Disconnect the electrical connector and wire retainer.

m
18. Disconnect the EVAP tube and detach the retainers.
Procedures).
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
19. Disconnect the retainers for the coolant hose.

m
20. Disconnect the engine vent hose.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
21. Remove the bolts and the upper intake manifold bracket.
m
co
Remove the bolts and the upper intake manifold.

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
23. Remove and discard the upper intake manifold gaskets.

m
. co
gn
ia
24. Remove the engine vent hose.

rd
ca
25.
Disconnect the RH CMP and KS sensor electrical connectors.
Disconnect the wire harness retainer.
m
26. Remove the nut, bolt and the heat shield.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
27. Remove the wiring harness retainer stud bolt.

m
28. Remove the wiring harness grommet.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
29. Disconnect the CKP electrical connector.

m
30. Remove the bolt and the CKP sensor.
.co
gn
ia
rd
ca
31.
Remove the nut and the bolt.
Remove the stud and the generator.
m
32. Disconnect the EOP switch electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
33.
Remove the engine wiring harness.
34. Remove the nut, the stud bolts and the A/C compressor.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
35. Remove the stud bolt from the oil pan.

m
36. Remove the bolts and the LH heat shield.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
37.
Remove the nuts and the LH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts.
m
38.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
39. Clean and inspect the catalytic converter flange.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
42. Remove the pin-type retainer and the cover.

m
43. Remove the bolts and the LH CMP sensors.
.co
gn
ia
rd
ca
44. Remove the bolts and the RH CMP sensors.

m
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
46. Remove the fuel supply tube bracket bolt.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
co.
gn
ia
49. Remove the coolant tube assembly.

rd
ca
50. Remove and discard the O-ring seals.

m
51. If equipped without oil cooler, remove the bolts and the oil filter adapter.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
52. If equipped without oil cooler, discard the oil filter adapter gasket.
m
53. NOTICE: If metal or aluminum material is present in the oil cooler, mechanical concerns exist. Failure to correct
these concerns may cause engine failure.
co
If equipped with oil cooler, remove the bolts and the oil cooler.
Discard the oil cooler.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
54. If equipped with oil cooler, remove and discard the oil cooler O-ring gaskets.
m
55. If equipped with oil cooler, remove the bolts and the oil filter adapter.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
56. If equipped with oil cooler, remove and discard the oil filter adapter gasket.
m
57. Remove the oil pressure switch.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
58. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal.
Remove the bolts and the ignition coil-on-plugs.

Remove the oil level indicator.
m
59. Inspect the coil seals for rips, nicks or tears and replace if necessary.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
damage may occur.
Loosen the bolts and remove the LH valve cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

Handle.
m
co
Installer.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Procedures).
m
damage may occur.
co
.
gn
Loosen the bolts and remove the RH valve cover.
ia
rd
ca


Handle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

Installer.
m

co
Procedures).

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
70. Remove the CHT jumper harness.

m
71. Remove the engine front cover bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
73. NOTICE: Only use a 3M™ Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528) in a suitable tool turning at the
any other power abrasive disk to clean front cover. co

recommended speed of 15,000 rpm, to clean the engine front cover. Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes or
Make sure that the mating faces of the front cover are clean and free of foreign material.
.
gn
Procedures).
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Make sure that the mating faces of the engine block and oil pan are clean and free of foreign material.
Procedures).
m
co
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and align the timing marks on the intake VCT units as shown.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
76. Remove the bolts and the LH oil tube.

m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
78. Remove the bolts and the RH oil tube.

m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
80. Mark the timing chain link that aligns with the timing mark on the LH intake VCT unit as shown.
m
81. Mark the timing chain link that aligns with the timing mark on the RH intake VCT unit as shown.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Mark the timing chain links that aligns with the timing mark on the crankshaft sprocket as shown.
m
83. Remove the bolts and the timing chain tensioner.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
84. Remove the timing chain tensioner arm.

m
. co
gn
ia
85. Remove the bolts and the lower LH timing chain guide.
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
86. NOTE: Removal of the VCT oil control solenoids will aid in the removal of the timing chain.
rd
NOTE: A slight twisting motion will aid in the removal of the VCT oil control solenoid.
NOTE: Keep the VCT oil control solenoid clean of dirt and debris.
ca
Remove the bolts and the VCT oil control solenoids.
87. Remove the timing chain.

m
. co
gn
ia
88. Remove the crankshaft sprocket.

rd
ca
89. NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove the bolt or damage to the LH primary timing chain guide may occur.
Remove the bolt and the upper LH timing chain guide.
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
91. Remove and discard the LH VCT unit bolts.

m
92. Remove the LH VCT units and the secondary timing chain.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
93.
m
94.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
97. Remove and discard the RH VCT unit bolts.

m
98. Remove the RH VCT units and the secondary timing chain.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
99.
m
100.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

Remove the valve tappets from the cylinder heads.
m
. co
gn
ia

rd
ca
Remove the bolt and the RH timing chain guide.
m
105. Remove the bolts and the engine lifting eye.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
co
.
gn

ia

rd
ca
Make sure that the mating faces of the cylinder head are clean and free of foreign material.
109. Remove and discard the cylinder head gasket.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Make sure that the mating faces of the engine block are clean and free of foreign material.
m
co
.
gn
ia

rd

ca
Make sure that the mating faces of the cylinder head are clean and free of foreign material.
114. Remove and discard the cylinder head gasket.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
116. Support the cylinder head on a bench with the head gasket side up. Check the cylinder head distortion.
117. Remove the bolts and the KS.

m
118. Remove the bolts and the coolant pump.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
119. Inspect and replace if necessary.

m
. co
gn
120. Remove the oil pan bolts.

ia
rd
ca
121. Using a pry tool, locate the pry pads at the LH and RH side of the oil pan and pry the oil pan loose and remove.
122. NOTICE: Only use a 3M™ Roloc® Bristle Disk (2-in white, part number 07528) to clean the oil pan and engine
front cover. Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes or any other power abrasive disk to clean. These tools
cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths.
Make sure that the mating faces of the oil pan are clean and free of foreign material.
m
Procedures).
co
Thoroughly wash the oil pan to remove any foreign material, including any abrasive particles created during the
cleaning process.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
gasket.
Procedures).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
124. Remove the bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
ca
125. Remove and discard the oil pump screen and pickup tube O-ring seal.
m
126. Remove the bolts and the oil pump.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
127.
Remove the bolts and the crankshaft rear seal.
Discard the crankshaft rear seal.
m
co
gasket.
.
Make sure that the mating faces is clean and free of foreign material.
gn
Procedures).
ia

rd
ca
129. Inspect and clean the specified component with a abrasive pad.
m
130.
Remove the main bearing cap support brace.

. co
Remove and discard the bolts in the sequence shown.
gn
ia
rd
ca
131. NOTE: The connecting rod cap bolts are a torque-to-yield design. The original connecting rod cap bolts will be used
when measuring the connecting rod large end bore during assembly. The connecting rod cap bolts will be discarded
after measurement.
NOTE: Clearly mark the position and orientation of the connecting rods, connecting rod caps and connecting rod
bearings for reassembly.
Remove the connecting rod cap bolts and caps.

132. NOTICE: Do not scratch the cylinder walls or crankshaft journals with the connecting rod.
Remove the piston/rod assembly from the engine block.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
133. Inspect the pistons.

Refer to: Piston Inspection (303-00 Engine System - General Information, General Procedures).
134. NOTE: Clearly mark the position and orientation of the main bearing caps for reassembly.
Remove and discard the main bearing cap bolts in the sequence shown.
m
135. NOTE: If the main bearings are being reused, mark them for correct position and orientation for reassembly.
Remove the main bearing caps.

. co
NOTE: Note the position of the thrust washer on the outside of the No. 4 rear main bearing cap.
gn
ia
rd
ca
136. Remove the lower crankshaft thrust washer from the back side of the No. 4 rear main bearing cap.
m
co
Remove the crankshaft main bearing from the main bearing caps.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
138. NOTE: Note the position of the 2 thrust washers on the inside and outside of the rear main bearing bulkhead.
Remove the crankshaft.

m
139. Remove the crankshaft thrust bearings from the rear main bearing bulkhead.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the crankshaft main bearings from the cylinder block.

m
141. Using a hex bit, remove the piston oil cool valves.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
142. Check the cylinder block distortion.


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Installation Procedure revision date: 04/11/2015
Engine
303-1245
Engine Lift Eye
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
307-346 (T97T-7902-A)
Retainer, Torque Converter
TKIT-1997-F/FLM/LT
TKIT-1998-LM (NavigatoR)
Lifting Bracket
m
Floor Crane
Powertrain Jack
. co
gn
Materials
Name Specification
ia
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray ESB-M1C93-B

XL-5-A
rd
XO-5W20-QSP
2WD/4WD
ca
1. Remove Special Service Tool: 307-346 (T97T-7902-A) Retainer, Torque Converter.

m
2. Lubricate the torque converter pilot hub.
co
Material: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray / XL-5-A (ESB-M1C93-B)
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Inspect the dowel pins and replace if necessary.

m
4.
Use the General Equipment: Lifting Bracket

Install the transmission-to-engine bolts.
. co
Using the floor crane and spreader bar, align the engine to the transmission.

gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Install the bolts.

6. Install the bolts and the RH halfshaft support bracket.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Install the intermediate shaft bracket nuts and the studs.

Torque:
Studs:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
Nuts:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
m
engine lift eye.

. co
Install the ratchet strap from the front subframe to the LH engine lift eye and from the rear of the subframe to the RH
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Using the floor crane and spreader bar, install the powertrain and subframe as an assembly onto the powertrain jack.
m
. co
gn
Remove the ratchet strap from the front subframe to the LH engine lift eye and from the rear of the subframe to the RH
engine lift eye.
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
11. Install the adjustable mounting arm

rd
ca
4WD
13. Position the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) support bracket in place and install the bolts.
m
. co
gn
2WD/4WD
14.
Install the new exhaust manifold studs.
ia

rd
ca
15. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the exhaust manifold nuts to specification a second time will cause the exhaust
manifold to develop an exhaust leak.
Install the RH catalytic converter and new nuts.
Torque:
Stage 1:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
Stage 2:
Retighten:
18 lb.ft (25 Nm)
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
17. Connect the RH electrical connectors and the wire retainer.

m
18. Attach the wire harness retainer to the transmission stud bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
19. Connect the transmission electrical connector.

m
20. Attach the wire harness retainers.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
21. Install the generator B+ cable and the nut.

m
22. Position back the cover and connect the electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
23. Connect the A/C compressor electrical connectors and the wiring harness retainer.
m
24. Install ground wire and the bolt.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
25. Install the starter , the stud and the bolt.

m
26. Connect the wiring harness retainer to the starter motor stud bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
27. Attach the starter wire terminals and nuts.

Torque:
B+ terminal nut:
106 lb.in (12 Nm)
S-terminal nut:
44 lb.in (5 Nm)
m
28. Install the starter motor solenoid cover.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
29. Remove the spreader bar and floor crane.

m
30. Remove the Special Tool(s):
Use Special Service Tool: 303-1245 Engine Lift Eye.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
31. Using the powertrain jack, raise the subframe and powertrain assembly into the vehicle.
m
32. Position the engine mount onto the engine studs and install the nuts and bolts hand tight.
Torque:
Bolts:
66 lb.ft (90 Nm)
Nuts:
46 lb.ft (63 Nm)
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
33. Install the transmission support insulator assembly, the nuts and bolt.
Torque:
Nuts:
46 lb.ft (63 Nm)
Bolt:
59 lb.ft (80 Nm)
m
34. Install the transmission support insulator-to-frame rail bolts.
Torque:
Bottom bolts:
41 lb.ft (55 Nm)
Top bolts:
52 lb.ft (70 Nm)
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Align the subframe and install the new bolts.

m
co
Install the rear subframe brackets and the new subframe bracket-to-body bolts, finger tight at this stage.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the new bolt.

m
Tighten the bolts.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
39. Remove the ratchet strap from the front of the subframe and the rear of the subframe.
40. Remove the adjustable mounting arm and the powertrain jack.
m

. co
Install the strut to the wheel knuckle and install the nuts and bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the brake caliper and bolts.

Torque:
53 lb.ft (72 Nm)
55 lb.ft (75 Nm)
m
43. NOTICE: Do not tighten the wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to
co

.
gn
Using the previously removed wheel hub nut, seat the LH and RH halfshafts.
ia
Remove and discard the wheel hub nuts.

rd
ca
44. NOTICE: The wheel hub nut contains a one time locking chemical that is activated by the heat created when it is
Install a new wheel hub nuts.

m
. co
gn

ia
Install the new upper stabilizer link nut.

rd
ca
m
.co
gn
ia

rd
Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt.

ca
47. Connect the transmission cooler tubes and install the secondary latches.
m
co
48. If equipped, install the cooler hose retainer to the subframe.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
49. If equipped connect the oil cooler hoses.

m
50. Connect the coolant tubes.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4WD
51. Align the index marks on the rear driveshaft to the index marks on the PTU flange made during removal and install the
new bolts.
m
2WD/4WD

. co
52. Install the LH catalytic converter support bracket and the nuts.
gn
ia
rd
ca

Torque:
Stage 1:
44 lb.in (5 Nm)
Stage 2:
180°
m
Torque: 35 lb.ft (48 Nm) .co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
gn
ia
rd
ca
57. Install the exhaust Y-pipe.

clockspring may occur. If there is evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be
removed and recentered.
Align and connect the steering column shaft to the steering gear and install the bolt.
m
59. If equipped, attach the engine block heater harness to the radiator support wiring harness.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
60. Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainer and connect the transmission control cable to the shift cable bracket.
m
61. Connect the transmission control cable to the control lever.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
63. Slide the wiring harness down onto the bulkhead until the retainer tabs is engaged.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
64. Connect the engine harness and the PCM electrical connectors.
m
65. Connect the EVAP tube and fuel supply tube quick release couplings.
Procedures).
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
66. Connect the vacuum hose to the upper intake manifold.

m
67. Install the coolant hose and connect the quick release coupling.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
68. Install the degas bottle.

m
70. Connect the A/C pressure switch electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
72.
Install the ground wire and bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
73. Install the accessory dive belt.

74. If equipped.
m
75. If equipped.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Install the RH and LH lower pin-type retainers for the engine splash shields.
m
77. Install the front wheels and tires.
78. Install the battery tray support bracket and the bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
79. Install the power feed cables and the nuts.

m
80. Install the cover.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
81.
Connect the engine harness electrical connector and wiring harness retainer.
Install the ground cable and the stud bolt.
m
82. Install the power feed cable and the nut.
gn
ia
rd
ca
83.
m
co
1. Refer to: Cowl Panel (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
2. Refer to: Battery Tray (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec
.
4. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec
gn
85. Remove the holding device.

ia
rd
ca

m
87. Fill and bleed the cooling system. co
.
gn
88. Recharge the A/C system.
ia
tool.
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal Procedure revision date: 04/11/2015
Engine
303-1245
Engine Lift Eye
TKIT-2006UF-FLM
TKIT-2006UF-ROW
307-346 (T97T-7902-A)
Retainer, Torque Converter
TKIT-1997-F/FLM/LT
TKIT-1998-LM (NavigatoR)
307-569
m
TKIT-2006U-F/FM
TKIT-2006U-FLM/LM
TKIT-2006U-ROW1
TKIT-2006U-ROW2
co
Lifting Bracket
.
gn
Floor Crane
Oil Drain Equipment
ia

Powertrain Jack
rd
2WD/4WD
ca


3. Using a holding device, hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position.
m
4. Evacuate the A/C system.

. co
1. Refer to: Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec
gn
2. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12C Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec
3. Refer to: Battery Tray (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Removal and Installation).
ia
4. Refer to: Cowl Panel (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
6.
rd

ca
7. Remove the nut and the power feed cable.
m
8.
co
Disconnect the engine harness electrical connector and wiring harness retainer.
Remove the stud bolt and the ground cable.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Remove the cover.

m
10. Remove the nuts and the power feed cables.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Remove the bolt and the battery tray support bracket.
m
co
Remove the RH and LH lower pin-type retainers from the engine splash shields and position the shields aside.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca


18.
Remove the bolt and ground wire.
m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
20. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch electrical connector.

m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
22. Remove the degas bottle.

23. Disconnect the quick release coupling and remove the coolant hose.
m
24. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the upper intake manifold.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
25. Disconnect the EVAP tube and fuel supply tube quick release couplings.
Procedures).
m
26. Disconnect the engine harness and the PCM electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
27.
Push the wiring harness retainer tab in.
Slide the wiring harness up and out of the bulkhead and position aside.
m
. co
gn
ia

rd
ca
29. Disconnect the transmission control cable from the control lever.
m
30. Disconnect the transmission control cable from the shift cable bracket and detach the wiring harness retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
31. If equipped, detach the engine block heater harness from the radiator support wiring harness.
clockspring can occur. If there is evidence that the intermediate shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be
removed and recentered. Refer to Section 501-20B.
Remove and discard the steering intermediate shaft bolt.

Separate the steering intermediate shaft from the steering gear.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
33. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe.

34. Remove the retainers and the inspection cover.

m
35. Remove and discard the torque converter bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
36. Remove the oil pan-to-transmission bolts.

m
37. Remove the drain plug and drain the engine oil.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
39. Remove the nuts and the LH catalytic converter support bracket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4WD
40. NOTE: Index-mark the driveshaft for installation.
Remove and discard the bolts and support the driveshaft with a length of mechanic's wire.
m
2WD/4WD
41. Disconnect the coolant tubes.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
42. If equipped, disconnect the oil cooler hoses.

m
43. If equipped, unlatch the cooler hose retainer latch and pry up on the oil cooler hose retainer to release the retainer and
remove it from the subframe. . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
44. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube secondary latches.

m
45. Using the special tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the transmission fluid cooler thermal bypass
valve.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the bolt and the wheel speed sensor.

m
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer link nut.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the bolts and position aside the calipers.

Support the calipers.
m
. co
gn
Using a wax pencil, mark the relationship of the front and rear subframe to the underbody at the mounting locations on
both side.
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: Do not discard at this time.
Remove the LH and RH halfshaft nuts.

m
Separate the LH and RH halfshaft from the wheel hubs.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
52.
Position a 2 x 6 board, 36 in (914.4 mm) in length and two 2 x 6 boards 24 in (609.6 mm) in length onto the
powertrain jack.
Position the powertrain jack with the long board towards the rear of the subframe and the short boards under the
engine and transmission.
m
53. Install the adjustable mounting arm from the powertrain jack to the LH engine-to-transmission bolt hole.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
55.
NOTE: The halfshafts are not being remove from the transmission.
Remove the nuts and bolts.

Remove the strut from the wheel knuckle and the halfshafts from the wheel knuckle.
m
co
56. Remove the transmission support insulator-to-frame rail bolts.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
57. Remove the nuts, the bolt and the transmission support insulator assembly.
m
58. Remove the engine mount nuts, the engine mount bolts and the engine mount.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the subframe bracket-to-body bolts.

m
co
Remove the rear subframe bolts and the subframe brackets.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the front subframe bolts.

m
62. NOTE: Make sure the transmission cooler tubes are free and clear when lowered.

. co
Using the powertrain jack, lower the powertrain and subframe as an assembly.
gn
ia
rd
ca
63. Install Special Service Tool: 303-1245 Engine Lift Eye.

m
64. Install the spreader bar and floor crane.
Use the General Equipment: Floor Crane co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
65. Remove the starter motor solenoid cover.

m
66. Remove the nuts and the starter motor wiring terminals.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
67. Disconnect the wiring harness retainer from the starter motor stud bolt.
m
68. Remove the bolt, stud bolt and the starter.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
69. Remove the bolt and the ground wire from the RH cylinder head.
m
70. Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical connectors and wiring harness retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
71. Disconnect the generator electrical connector and position the generator B+ cable cover aside.
m
72. Remove the nut and disconnect the generator B+ cable.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
73. Disconnect the wire harness retainers and position aside the wire harness.
74. Disconnect the transmission electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
75. Detach the wire harness retainer from the transmission stud bolt.
m
76. Disconnect the RH electrical connectors and the wire retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
78.
Remove the nuts and the RH catalytic converter.
Discard the nuts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
79.
Remove and discard the exhaust manifold studs.
m
4WD
co
80. Remove the bolts and the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) support bracket.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2WD/4WD
81. Remove the adjustable mounting arm.

m
82. Remove the ratchet strap from the front of the subframe under the powertrain jack to the rear of the subframe.
83. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. co

Install the ratchet strap from the front subframe to the LH engine lift eye and from the rear of the subframe to the RH
.
engine lift eye.
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
84.
Using the floor crane and spreader bar, remove the powertrain and subframe as an assembly from the powertrain
rd
jack and set on the ground.

ca
Position wood blocks under the engine and transmission.

m
engine lift eye.

. co
Remove the ratchet strap from the front subframe to the LH engine lift eye and from the rear of the subframe to the RH
gn
ia
rd
ca
86. Remove the intermediate shaft bracket nuts and the studs.
m
87. Remove the bolts and the RH halfshaft support bracket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
88. Remove the engine-to-transmission bolts.

m
89.
Remove the transmission-to-engine bolts.

. co
Using the floor crane and spreader bar, separate the engine from the transmission.
gn
ia
rd
ca
90. Install Special Service Tool: 307-346 (T97T-7902-A) Retainer, Torque Converter.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
303-13C Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Removal
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures may be present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures may be present and may be ignited.

m
2. Release the retainers and remove the engine appearance cover.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3.
1. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling.
m
4. Remove the retainers and the EVAP canister purge valve.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
1. The EVAP canister vent solenoid is serviced with the EVAP canister ventilation filter.
Refer to: Evaporative Emission Canister Ventilation Filter (303-13C Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec
Installation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Removal
1. Remove the EVAP canister.

Refer to: Evaporative Emission Canister (303-13C Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
2. Release the tabs and remove the EVAP canister ventilation filter.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures may be present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures may be present and may be ignited.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission
(EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures may be present and may be ignited. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
m
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

co
.
gn
3.
1. Disconnect the EVAP canister electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the vent hose.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister quick connect couplings.
ia
4. Detach the retainer.
rd
ca
4. Remove the retainers and the EVAP canister.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Activation
Phase 1 - Leak Verification
1. Run the EVAP Test with the scan tool.
2. NOTE: Some small leaks may not be detected using the EVAP Test. If the system has passed the test but a leak is still
suspected, then proceed to Phase 2.
If the EVAP system failed the EVAP Test, then proceed to Phase 2.
Phase 2 - System Leak Check
3. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling.
Procedures).
4. Connect the VACUTEC Smoke Machine Fuel EVAP Emissions System Tester to the fuel vapor tube quick connect
m
coupling. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
5. NOTE: The battery ground cable was previously disconnected in the fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling procedure.
Connect the battery ground cable.

co
.
6. Close the canister vent solenoid with the scan tool.
gn
7. NOTE: The supplemental refueling adapter is located in the jack storage compartment.
Install the supplemental refueling adapter into the Easy FuelTM (capless) fuel tank filler pipe assembly.
ia
8. NOTE: If smoke does not exit the fuel tank filler pipe neck area after the system is pressurized, open the canister vent
solenoid with the scan tool to allow the air to purge. Once smoke is seen at the canister vent solenoid, close the canister
rd
vent solenoid with the scan tool.
Introduce smoke from the VACUTEC Smoke Machine Fuel EVAP Emissions System Tester into the EVAP system and
ca
verify that smoke is exiting the fuel tank filler pipe neck area. For additional information, refer to the manufacturer's
instructions.
9. Remove the supplemental refueling adapter once smoke is observed exiting the fuel tank filler pipe neck area.
10. Continue to enter smoke into the system for 60 seconds to obtain pressure.
11. Press and release the remote start button in intervals of 15 seconds ON and 15 seconds OFF while checking for exiting
smoke.
12. Use the halogen light provided with the VACUTEC Smoke Machine Fuel EVAP Emissions System Tester to follow the
EVAP system path and look for smoke exiting at the source of the leak(s).
13. Repair any leaks as necessary.
14. Repeat the leak test until the system passes.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Overview
The EVAP system prevents hydrocarbon emissions from entering the atmosphere by storing fuel vapors and routing the vapors
to the engine to be consumed during normal engine operation.
The EVAP system consists of:
EVAP canister
EVAP canister purge valve
EVAP canister vent solenoid
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor and tube
Easy Fuel (capless) fuel tank filler pipe
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
System Operation
Refer to the PC/ED manual section 1 Description and Operation.
System Diagram
m
. co
gn
ia
Item Description
rd
1 LH Valve cover
2 Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe
ca
3 EVAP canister purge valve

4 Upper intake manifold
5 PCV
6 RH valve cover
7 EVAP canister
8 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor and tube
9 Fuel tank
10 Fuel level sensors
11 Fuel tank filler pipe
12 EVAP canister vent solenoid
13 Fuel pump and sender assembly
14 Fresh air hose

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Engine Diagnostic Information
For PCM DTC,

Testing).
For driveability symptoms without DTC, Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual. See Section 3,
Symptom Charts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Evaporator Core Leak Check

Inspection
412.
2. Disconnect the evaporator from the A/C system. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
3. Use the correct adapters with the A/C Service Unit to test the evaporator.
219-00082 ACF-3000 33PC Adapter Kit - Revised 1st released 44pc kit.
219-00083 A/C Flushing Adapter Kit 2 of 3 (Previously "Supplement A", 2nd released kit).
219-00084 A/C Flushing Adapter Kit 3 of 3.
m
4. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some hoses do not open when connected to the fittings. If available, use hoses
co
without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the adapter
fittings. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open.
Connect the hoses from the A/C Service Unit to the adapter fittings on the evaporator.
.
gn
5. Open both valves and start the vacuum. Allow the A/C Service Unit to vacuum for a minimum of 45 minutes after the low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil
ia
left in the evaporator. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and
appear as a refrigerant leak.
rd
6. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves are open and the A/C Service Unit
is operating, close the valves and observe the low pressure reading. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is
indicated. Recheck the adapter fitting connections before installing a new evaporator.
ca
7. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the valves and stop the service unit. Observe the low pressure gauge; it should
remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark.
If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg)
position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the service unit with the valves open for an additional 30 minutes to
remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the evaporator. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check for vacuum
loss.
8. If the evaporator leaks, as verified by the above procedure, install a new evaporator. Refer to Evaporator procedure in
Group 412.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
NOTE: The evaporator temperature sensor is available only as part of the climate control housing.

Refer to: Climate Control Housing (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and Installation).
Installation
1. Transfer the components from the old housing to the new housing as required.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Evaporator
Removal
NOTE: The evaporator is available only as part of the climate control housing.

Refer to: Climate Control Housing (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal and Installation).
Installation
1. Transfer the components from the old housing to the new housing as required.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
Feeler Gauge
Cleaning
1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the gasket sealing surfaces.
Inspection
1. NOTE: New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed when an exhaust manifold is serviced.
NOTE: Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm (0.0002 in) per running foot
Using the Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface for warpage. If the warpage
m
is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 in), install a new exhaust manifold.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Overview
NOTICE: Do not use leaded fuel in a vehicle equipped with a catalytic converter. In a vehicle that is continually
misfueled, the lead in the fuel will be deposited in the catalytic converter and completely blanket the catalyst. Lead
reacts with platinum to "poison" the catalyst. Continuous use of leaded fuel can destroy the catalyst and render the
catalytic converter useless. The addition of lead to the catalytic converter can also solidify the catalyst, causing
excessive back pressure in the exhaust system and possibly causing engine damage.
NOTICE: Extremely high temperatures of 1,100°C (2,012°F) or above due to misfiring or an over-rich fuel/air mixture
will cause the ceramic substrate to sinter or burn, destroying the catalytic converter. Do not continue to operate the
vehicle if the engine is misfiring, there is a power loss or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine
overheating and backfiring.
NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the isolators. These lubricants may cause deterioration of the
rubber. This can lead to separation of the isolator from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
The exhaust system provides an exit for exhaust gases and reduces engine noise by passing exhaust gases through the
m
catalytic converters and a muffler assembly. The catalytic converters also play a major role in reducing air pollutants.
The exhaust system consists of:
co
a LH one-piece catalytic converter manifold that is mounted to the LH cylinder head.
a RH one-piece catalytic converter manifold that is mounted to the RH cylinder head.

.
gn
an exhaust y-pipe.
a muffler and tailpipe assembly with isolators.
The catalytic converter plays a major role in the emission control system by operating as a gas reactor. Its function is to speed
ia
the heat-producing chemical reaction of components in the exhaust gases in order to reduce air pollutants.
rd
The catalyst material inside the catalytic converter consists of a ceramic substrate.
The catalytic converter is designed to provide a long life. No maintenance is necessary.

ca
Sound insulators and shields, attached to the underbody and exhaust system to protect the vehicle from exhaust system heat
and should be inspected at regular intervals to make sure they are not dented or out of position. If a sound insulator and shield
is damaged or shows evidence of deterioration, install a new insulator and shield. The sound insulators and shields for the
muffler, muffler pipe, resonator and catalytic converter pipe are installed separately.
Some exhaust fasteners must be discarded and new ones installed as indicated in the procedures. Discard any damaged or
heavily corroded fasteners and install new ones as necessary. Some exhaust fasteners are of a prevailing torque design. Use
only new fasteners with the same part number as the original. Tighten the fasteners to the specified torque during reassembly
to make sure of correct retention of exhaust components.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Exhaust System
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Symptom Chart - Exhaust System
Verify the customer concern. Inspect the components of the exhaust system for obvious signs of damage or other mechanical
concerns using the following chart.

Visual Inspection Chart - Mechanical
Mechanical
Exhaust pipe pinched or crushed
Damaged muffler
m
Broken or damaged exhaust hanger brackets
Damaged catalytic converter
Loose or damaged heat shields
. co
Verify the exhaust system is installed correctly, with clamps correctly located and tightened to specifications. If the fault is not
gn
visually evident, determine the symptom. GO to the Symptom Chart below.
ia

Symptom Chart
rd

ca
Vehicle has low or no Exhaust pipe REFER to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
power — vehicle pinched or
performance complaint crushed
Damaged
catalytic
converter
Loose
obstruction in
exhaust
Restricted exhaust CHECK drain holes for foreign material. PARK the vehicle inside to thaw.
(possible frozen TEST the vehicle for normal operation. If the concern is still present, REFER
condensate in to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
muffler)
Burning smell — usually Foreign INSPECT the exhaust system for foreign material or missing heat shields.
occurs at idle, with material REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary.
possible traces of caught in
smoke exhaust
system
Missing heat
shields
Odor — described as a Catalytic At times, a slight sulfur smell is normal for catalytic converters. The cause is
sulfur or rotten egg converter the sulfur content in the gasoline being used. ADVISE the customer no repair
smell Excessive is required.
sulfur
content in
fuel
Rich fuel REFER to the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.

conditions
Misfire
conditions
Visible rust on surface Catalytic Surface rust is a characteristic of materials used on exhaust systems.
of exhaust pipes converter/exhaust Exposure to heat or road salt may result in surface rust. INSPECT for
system perforations. If there are no perforations, the condition is normal.
Symptom Chart: Symptom Chart - NVH

Symptom Chart
m
Sources
Rattle, squeaks or buzz Loose or INSPECT the exhaust system for loose or missing heat shields or foreign
type noise — from the
bottom of the vehicle
damaged heat
shield co
material trapped between the heat shields and the exhaust system
components. If any heat shields are loose, INSTALL worm gear clamp 7L5Z-
5A231-AA and tighten to 7 Nm. If the heat shields are missing or a rattle, noise
or buzz condition persists, INSTALL a new heat shield or component as
.
necessary.
gn
Loose or VERIFY the exhaust isolators are correctly installed. INSPECT the exhaust
damaged exhaust isolators for wear or damage. INSTALL new isolators as necessary.
isolators
ia
Damaged INSPECT the exhaust system components for damage or broken hangers.
exhaust isolator INSTALL new components as necessary. CHECK for loose or damaged
rd
hanger bracket exhaust hanger brackets or fasteners. TIGHTEN the bolts to specification or
Loose or MOVE the exhaust system to simulate the bouncing action of the vehicle,
ca
damaged checking for exhaust-to-body contact while moving the exhaust system. Using
catalytic a rubber mallet, TAP on the exhaust components to duplicate the noise
converter or concern. Lightly TAP on the muffler, then the catalytic converter. DETERMINE
muffler if there are loose or broken baffles in the muffler or a loose or broken element
in the catalytic converter. REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary.
Exhaust INSPECT for signs of exhaust components-to-body contact. REPAIR or
grounded to INSTALL new components as necessary.
chassis
Drone or clunk type Loose or INSPECT the exhaust isolators for wear or damage. INSTALL new isolators as
noise — from the bottom damaged exhaust necessary.
of the vehicle isolators
Exhaust INSPECT for signs of exhaust components-to-body contact. REPAIR or
grounded to INSTALL new components as necessary.
chassis
Whistles, boom, hum or Exhaust system INSPECT the entire exhaust system for leaks. CHECK for punctures, loose or
ticking type noise — leak damaged clamps/fasteners, gaskets, sensors or broken welds. EXAMINE the
noise tends to change as chassis for grayish-white or black exhaust soot, which indicates exhaust
the engine warms. The leakage at that point. To magnify a small leak, have an assistant hold a shop
noises are often towel over the tail pipe outlet while listening for a leak. REPAIR or INSTALL
accompanied by exhaust new components as necessary.
fumes
Catalytic MOVE the exhaust system to simulate the bouncing action of the vehicle,
converter checking for exhaust-to-body contact while moving the exhaust system. Using
a rubber mallet, TAP on the exhaust components to duplicate the noise
concern. Lightly TAP on the muffler and the catalytic converter. DETERMINE if
there are loose or broken baffles in the muffler, or a loose or broken element in
the catalytic converter. REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary.
Exhaust CONFIRM the drain holes are the noise source. INSTALL new components as
muffler/resonator necessary.
drain hole
enlarged due to
corrosion
Hissing or rushing noise Exhaust system CHECK the exhaust system for leaks. Using a rubber mallet, TAP on the
— high frequency sound Exhaust flow exhaust components to duplicate the noise concern. Lightly TAP on the muffler
and the vehicle through pipes and the catalytic converter. DETERMINE if there are loose or broken baffles in
performance is the muffler, or a loose or broken element in the catalytic converter. REPAIR or
unaffected INSTALL new components as necessary.
Pinging noise — occurs Catalytic Cool down pinging is a result of the exhaust system expanding and contracting
when exhaust system is converter/exhaust during heating and cooling. This is a normal condition.
hot, engine turned off system
Vibration — occurs at Loose or INSPECT the exhaust isolators for wear or damage. INSTALL new isolators as
idle and at low speeds. damaged exhaust necessary.
Also accompanied by a isolator
m
clunk or buzz type noise
Loose or INSPECT the exhaust isolator hanger brackets for wear or damage. INSTALL
damaged exhaust or REPAIR as necessary.
isolator hanger
brackets
Exhaust system
grounded to
co
REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary.
.
chassis
gn
Engine drumming noise Damaged or INSPECT the exhaust system for loose or damaged fasteners or isolators.
— normally misaligned REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary.
accompanied by exhaust system
ia
vibration
Sputter type noise — Damaged or worn INSPECT the exhaust system for leaks or damage. REPAIR as necessary.
noise worse when cold, exhaust system
rd
lessens or disappears
when the vehicle is at
operating temperature
ca
Thumping noise — from Misaligned CHECK the exhaust system to chassis clearance. CHECK the exhaust system
the bottom of the vehicle, exhaust system isolators for damage. REPAIR as necessary.
worse during
acceleration
Engine vibration — is felt Strain on exhaust REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary.
with increases and system isolators
decreases in engine rpm
Drumming noise — Exhaust system REPAIR or INSTALL new components as necessary.
occurs inside the vehicle vibration excites
during idle or high idle, the body
hot or cold. Very low- resonances
frequency drumming is inducing interior
very rpm dependent noise

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Exhaust Y-Pipe
Removal

2. If equipped.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: Note the position of the locator tab on the exhaust Y-Pipe for installation.
Loosen the muffler and tailpipe clamp.

m
4. NOTE: Use soapy water so not to damage or tear the isolator during removal.
Detach the exhaust Y-Pipe isolator.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove and discard the LH catalytic converter retainers. Discard the gasket.
m
6. Remove and discard the RH catalytic converter retainers. Remove the exhaust Y-Pipe.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Check exhaust system for leaks.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Exterior Front Door Handle Reinforcement
Removal
1. Remove the front door latch.

Refer to: Front Door Latch (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement.

1. Release the clip and position aside the exterior front door handle actuating rod.
2. If equipped, detach and position aside the lock cylinder rod from the lock cylinder lever.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement form the carrier.
1. Remove the wiring harness retainer and position aside the wiring harness.
2. Release the tab and remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Exterior Front Door Handle
Removal
Vehicles with push button start

Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel - Police (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the front door watershield.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
All vehicles
3. Remove the grommet.

m
4. Remove the lock cylinder door handle cover.
1. Hold the front door handle open. co

2. While turning the release screw 8 turns. The handle will release around 6 to 6.5 turns. You must continue to the
.
full 8 revolutions for installation.
gn
3. Remove the door lock cylinder and door handle cover assembly.
ia
rd
ca
5. NOTICE: Do not pull the door handle out of the door too far without disconnecting the handle from the
connector, or damage to the harness will occur.
Disconnect the exterior front door handle connector from the handle from inside the door and remove the exterior front
door handle.
m
Vehicles without push button start
. co
gn
6. Remove the front exterior door handle.
ia
rd
ca
Installation
Vehicles without push button start
1. Install the front exterior door handle.

m
handle in the front door opening.

. co
2. Connect the exterior front door handle connector to the handle from inside the door and partially install the front door
gn
ia
rd
ca
All vehicles
3. Install the lock cylinder door handle cover.

1. Install the lock cylinder and door handle cover assembly to the front door.
2. Release the front door handle.
3. Apply light pressure to the front door handle while turning the release screw 8 turns. The handle will engage and
go in around 6 to 6.5 turns. You must continue to the full 8 revolutions for installation then torque to the specified
value.
m
4. Install the grommet.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Install the front door lower watershield.

m
6. Install the front door trim panel.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Exterior Lighting - Overview
Headlamps
The headlamp system consists of:
Headlamp assemblies
Ballasts (headlamp modules)
Headlamp switch
LH steering column multifunction switch
HCM
BCM
SCCM
The LED headlamp system is a quad-beam pattern system. It consists of a non-replaceable LED low beam and a replaceable
halogen high beam bulb in each headlamp assembly. The park/turn lamp is integrated into the headlamp assembly and the
bulb is individually replaceable. The side marker Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are integrated into the headlamp assembly and
are not individually replaceable.
m
The headlamp system may also be equipped with automatic high beams.
Signature Lighting
co
The headlamp LED signature lamps system consists of an illuminated ring surrounding each headlamp assembly on 3 sides.
The signature lamp Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are integrated into the headlamp assembly and are not replaceable.
.
The signature lamps illuminate when the ignition is in ON or START. The signature lamps operate at a reduced intensity when
gn
the parking lamps are activated.
DRL
ia
The DRL system consists of:
Low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

rd
BCM
The DRL system operates the low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) at a reduced intensity.
ca
Autolamps
The autolamp system consists of:
Light sensor
Headlamp switch
BCM
The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on/off control of the exterior lamps. The autolamp system keeps the
exterior lamps on for a preselected period of time after the ignition is turned OFF (20 seconds is the factory default setting). The
preselected time is adjustable up to 3 minutes by using the IPC message center controls.
Stoplamps
The stoplamp system consists of:
Stoplamp switch
Rear lamp assemblies
High mounted stoplamp
BCM
The stoplamp switch is located on the brake pedal assembly. Voltage is supplied to the rear lamps and high mounted stoplamp
when the brake pedal is applied.

The turn lamp system consists of:
Front turn lamps (part of the headlamp assembly)

Exterior rear view mirrors
LH steering column multifunction switch
Hazard flasher lamp switch (part of the FCIM)
BCM
SCCM
DDM
PDM
When the LH steering column multifunction switch is placed in the LH TURN or RH TURN position, the corresponding turn
lamps flash on and off.
When the hazard function is active, all the turn lamps flash on and off.
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
The parking, rear and license plate lamp system consists of:
Front side marker Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) (part of the headlamp assembly)
Headlamp LED signature lamps
Front parking lamps (part of the headlamp assembly)
m
License plate lamps
Headlamp switch
BCM
co
The front side marker and headlamp LED signature lamps are integrated into the headlamp assemblies and are not individually
replaceable.
.
gn
Front park/turn lamp bulbs are replaceable and are integrated into the headlamp assembly.
Fog Lamps
The front fog lamp system consists of:

ia
Front fog lamps

rd
Front fog lamp switch (integrated into the headlamp switch)

BCM
The front fog lamps can be turned on when the ignition is in RUN, the parking lamps are on, and the high beams are off.
ca
Reversing Lamps
The reverse lamp system consists of:
Reverse lamp bulbs

PCM
BCM
When the transmission is placed in REVERSE, the reversing lamps are illuminated.
Trailer Lamps
The trailer tow system consists of the following components:
Trailer tow connector

Trailer tow parking lamps (integrated into the BJB and not individually replaceable)
Trailer tow reversing lamps relay (integrated into the BJB and not individually replaceable)
Trailer tow stop/turn lamps relays (integrated into the BJB and not individually replaceable)
Trailer tow charging relay
BJB
BCM
The BJB trailer tow parking lamps relay supplies voltage to the trailer parking lamps.
The BJB trailer tow reversing lamps relay supplies voltage to the trailer reversing lamps.
The BJB trailer tow stop/turn lamps relay supplies voltage to the trailer stop/turn lamps.
The BJB trailer tow charging relay supplies voltage to the trailer charging circuit.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Exterior Lighting - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
Headlamps
System Diagram
m
. co
gn

BCM Network Input Messages
ia

Headlamp flash to pass status GWM Indicates to the BCM a request for the high beams or flash-to-pass.
rd
ca

GWM Network Input Messages

Module
Headlamp flash to pass SCCM Indicates to the GWM a request for the high beams or flash-to-pass.
status
Auto high beam request IPMA Indicates to the GWM a request for the high beams based on the IPMA
camera input.
Low Beams
The BCM monitors the headlamp switch position by sending voltage signals on multiple circuits to the headlamp switch. There
is one circuit for each headlamp switch position. At any given time, one of the signal circuits is switched to ground to indicate
the headlamp switch position.
The BCM turns the parking lamps and headlamps on when the ignition is in ON and the BCM detects a fault from the headlamp
switch or wiring. This is normal behavior of the BCM when a fault has been detected with the inputs from the headlamp switch.
When the vehicle is in ON, the BCM supplies voltage to the ballast (headlamp module) attached to each headlamp assembly.
This ballast (headlamp module) is used to control the low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and headlamp LED signature
lamps.
When a new ballast (headlamp module) and/or the headlamp assembly is installed, Using the VCM and IDS software, connect
the diagnostic scan tool and execute the “ LED Lamp Driver Module Initialization” routine. Follow the diagnostic scan tool
directions.
When the BCM receives a message requesting the headlamps on, it sends a low beam message over the LIN circuit to the
ballast (headlamp module) attached to each headlamp assembly.
The BCM also provides Field Effect Transistor (FET) protection of the low beam output circuits. When an excessive current
draw is detected, the BCM disables the affected circuit driver.
Refer to: Module Controlled Functions - System Operation and Component Description (419-10 Multifunction Electronic
Modules, Description and Operation).
High Beams
The SCCM monitors the LH steering column multifunction switch for a high beam request. When the LH steering column
multifunction switch is in the HIGH BEAMS position, the SCCM sends a message over the HS-CAN2 to the GWM, then the
GWM sends the message to the BCM over the HS-CAN1.
When the low beams are on and the BCM receives a request for high beams, the low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
remains powered on and the halogen high beam bulbs are also illuminated. This changes the headlamp beam pattern to
m
illuminate a greater distance.
The BCM also provides Field Effect Transistor (FET) protection of the exterior lamps switched voltage and high beam output
co
circuits. When an excessive current draw is detected, the BCM disables the affected circuit driver.
.
gn
Automatic High Beams
The automatic high beam system uses an interior rear view mirror mounted camera to monitor surrounding traffic conditions
ia
and high beam usage. The camera is hardwired to the IPMA and serviced with the interior rear view mirror assembly. The IPMA
communicates light information over the HS-CAN2 to the GWM then the GWM sends the information to the BCM over the HS-
CAN1.
rd
The automatic high beam feature is active only when the headlamp switch is in the AUTOLAMPS position.
ca
During nighttime driving, the automatic high beam system automatically turns the high beams on if it is dark enough and no
other traffic is present. When the system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or a preceding vehicle's rear lamps, the
system turns off the high beams. When the approaching vehicle's headlamps or the preceding vehicle's rear lamps are no
longer detected, the high beams automatically turn back on.
The IPMA turns the high beam headlamps on when the following conditions are met:
The feature has been enabled using the message center

The headlamp switch is in the AUTOLAMPS position and the autolamps feature has turned the exterior lamps on
The vehicle speed is greater than 51 km/h (32 mph)
The IPMA determines the ambient lighting conditions are dark enough
The IPMA does not detect any light source that can be interpreted as an illuminated vehicle lamp
The IPMA turns the high beams off if any of the following occur:
The IPMA detects any light source that can be interpreted as an illuminated vehicle lamp
The IPMA determines the ambient lighting conditions are not dark enough
The vehicle speed falls below 44 km/h (27 mph)
The autolamps are turned off
The IPMA determines the view is blocked
Flash-To-Pass
The SCCM monitors the LH steering column multifunction switch for a flash-to-pass request. When the LH steering column
multifunction switch is in the FLASH-TO-PASS position, the SCCM sends a message over the HS-CAN2 to the GWM then the
GWM sends the message to the BCM over the HS-CAN1.
When the ignition is in RUN and the flash-to-pass is requested, the high beams are activated as long as the LH steering column
multifunction switch is held in the flash-to-pass position.
Headlamp Exit Delay
When the ignition is OFF and the LH steering column multifunction switch is placed in the FLASH-TO-PASS position and
released, the parking lamps and low beams are illuminated. They remain illuminated until:
3 minutes have elapsed with a door open.

30 seconds have elapsed after all doors are closed.
the LH steering column multifunction switch is placed in the flash-to-pass position again.
the ignition switches to RUN.
Within the 30 second delay and all the doors closed, opening any door results in the 3 minute timer restarting.
Signature Lighting
The headlamp LED signature lamps illuminate when the ignition is ON.
This ballast (headlamp module) is used to control the low beams and headlamp LED signature lamps.
When a new ballast (headlamp module) and/or the headlamp assembly is installed, Using the VCM and IDS software, connect
m
the diagnostic scan tool and execute the “ LED Lamp Driver Module Initialization” routine. Follow the diagnostic scan tool
directions.
co
When the BCM receives a message requesting the parking lamps on, it sends a message over the LIN circuit to the ballast
(headlamp module) attached to each headlamp assembly to reduce the intensity of the headlamp LED signature lamps.
When the parking lamps are off, the headlamp LED signature lamps illuminate at full intensity.
.
gn
The RH headlamp is supplied voltage to the address input of the ballast (headlamp module). This voltage is not supplied to the
LH headlamp ballast (headlamp module). The purpose of this circuit is to identify the RH headlamp assembly and ballast
(headlamp module) from the LH. This is necessary when the BCM sends a turn signal message through the LIN to the
headlamp ballasts (headlamp modules).
ia
DRL
rd
System Diagram
ca


Message Module
Gear position PCM Indicates the GSM request to the BCM. When the GSM has selected any position other than
park, the BCM activates the DRL.
DRL
The DRL system utilizes the existing circuitry and components from the headlamp low beam system.
This ballast (headlamp module) is used to control the low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
The DRL system operates the low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) at a reduced intensity.
The BCM monitors the ignition status, the headlamp switch and autolamp status.
There are two types of DRL, Conventional (where it is required) and configurable.
When equipped with conventional DRL, the DRL are active in any headlamp switch position except the HEADLAMPS position.
The conventional DRL are activated when the following conditions are met:
the ignition is ON
the headlamps switch is in OFF, PARKLAMPS or AUTOLAMPS position and the headlamps have not been turned on by
the autolamp system.
the transmission is not in PARK
m
When equipped with configurable DRL, the DRL may be enabled through the IPC message center. When enabled, the DRL are
active only in the AUTOLAMPS headlamp position. When autolamps request the headlamps on, the DRL are de-activated.
the ignition is ON.

. co
The configurable DRL are activated when the following conditions are met:
the headlamps switch is in AUTOLAMPS position and the headlamps have not been turned on by the autolamp system.
gn
the transmission is not in PARK.
When the transmission is in not in PARK, the PCM sends a message over the HS-CAN1 to the BCM indicating the transmission
is not in PARK.
ia
For police equipped vehicles, when Police Silent Mode is activated through the instrument cluster message center, the DRL will
not illuminate. DRL operation will return to normal when Police Silent Mode is deactivated. For more information on Police
rd
Silent Mode function, activation and deactivation,

ca
Autolamps
System Diagram


Message Module
Front wiper status SCCM The BCM uses the wiper status information for the operation of the wiper activated
headlamps feature.
Autolamps
The BCM monitors the light sensor with a voltage signal. The light sensor input to the BCM varies with the ambient light
conditions.
The BCM monitors the headlamp switch circuits to indicate the headlamp switch position.
When the BCM receives a headlamp switch status indicating a request for the autolamps, the BCM monitors the light sensor for
the ambient light condition. If the BCM determines the ambient light level is dark, the BCM supplies voltage to the exterior
lamps.
Headlamps On With Wipers On Function
When the headlamp switch is in the autolamps position, the exterior lamps turn on when the front wipers are in low or high. This
m
feature does not activate the exterior lamps during a mist wipe, while the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash
condition or if the wipers are in automatic or intermittent modes.
co
The exterior lamps turn off when the ignition switches OFF or to ON mode, the headlamp switch is placed in the OFF position,
or the front wipers are turned off. The exception to this is when the exterior lights are on because of darkness determined by
the autolamp system.
.
Stoplamps
gn
System Diagram
ia
rd
ca
Stoplamps
The BCM monitors the input from the stoplamp switch. When the brake pedal is applied, voltage is routed to the BCM,
indicating a request for the stoplamps. The BCM then supplies voltage to the stoplamps.
The BCM does not activate the stoplamps when the ignition is in OFF.
The BCM uses 3 separate output circuits. The LH stoplamp output circuit, RH stoplamp output circuit and high-mounted
stoplamp output circuit.
The BCM also provides Field Effect Transistor (FET) protection of the stoplamp output circuits. When an excessive current
draw is detected, the BCM disables the affected stoplamp circuit driver.
System Diagram
m
. co
gn

ia

Message Module
rd
Turn signal GWM Indicates the turn signal stalk position on the LH steering column multifunction switch (left/right
switch lane change or turn signal on or off). The BCM activates the left/right turn signals based on this
ca
status input.


Message Module
Turn signal SCCM Indicates the turn signal stalk position on the LH steering column multifunction switch
switch status (left/right lane change or turn signal on or off).
Turn indication BCM A command to activate/deactivate the exterior mirror turn indicator.
request

DDM and PDM Network Input Messages
Module
Turn indication GWM A command to the DDM or PDM to activate/deactivate the exterior mirror turn
request indicator.
Turn Signals
The SCCM monitors the LH steering column multifunction switch position. When the LH steering column multifunction switch is
in the LH TURN or RH TURN position, the SCCM sends a message over the HS-CAN2 to the GWM then the GWM sends the
message to the BCM over the HS-CAN1 indicating a request for the LH or RH turn signal.
When the BCM receives a request for a turn signal, the BCM supplies on/off voltage to the appropriate turn lamps.
When equipped with memory mirrors, the BCM sends a turn indicator command message over the HS-CAN1 to the GWM then
the MS-CAN to the door modules for the exterior mirror turn lamps.
The timed on/off cycle for turn lamps is determined by the BCM and is set to flash approximately 70 times per minute if both the
front and rear turn signal lamps operate correctly.
If a front or rear turn signal lamp is inoperative, the BCM fast flashes the remaining turn lamp(s) approximately 150 times per
minute to indicate a bulb outage to the driver.
m
The LH steering column multifunction switch has 2 detents for the left turn position and 2 detents for the right turn position.
When placed in the first detent and released, the corresponding turn signals flash 3 times and turn off. When the LH steering
column multifunction switch is moved to the second detent, the turn signal flashes until the steering wheel is turned in the
opposite direction. co
The BCM also provides Field Effect Transistor (FET) protection of the turn lamp output circuits. When an excessive current
draw is detected, the BCM disables the affected turn lamp circuit driver.
.
gn
ia
Hazard Lamps
The BCM sends a voltage signal to the hazard flasher lamp switch to monitor for a hazard lamp function request. When the
rd
hazard flasher lamp switch is pressed, the voltage signal is routed to ground, indicating a request to activate or deactivate the
hazard lamp function.
ca
When the BCM receives a request for the hazard lamps, the BCM supplies on/off voltage to all the turn lamps.
The timed on/off cycle for the hazard lamps is approximately 70 times per minute, regardless of bulb outage.
Parking, Rear, and License Plate Lamps
System Diagram
Parking Lamps
If the BCM detects a fault from the headlamp switch or loses communication with the headlamp switch, the BCM turns the
parking and headlamps on. This is normal behavior of the BCM when a fault has been detected with the inputs from the
headlamp switch.
When the BCM receives an input requesting the parking lamps on, it provides voltage to the parking lamps.
This ballast (headlamp module) is used to control the low beams and headlamp LED signature lamps.
When the BCM receives a message requesting the parking lamps on, it sends a message over the LIN circuit to the ballast
(headlamp module) attached to each headlamp assembly to reduce the intensity of the headlamp LED signature lamps.
The BCM also provides Field Effect Transistor (FET) protection of the parking lamps output circuits. When an excessive current
draw is detected, the BCM disables the affected parking lamps circuit driver.
m
Fog Lamps
System Diagram
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Fog Lamps
When the BCM receives input from the headlamp switch indicating a request for the front fog lamps, the BCM provides voltage
to the front fog lamps.
The BCM also provides Field Effect Transistor (FET) protection of the rear fog lamp output circuit. When an excessive current
draw is detected, the BCM disables the front fog lamp output circuit driver.
Reversing Lamps
System Diagram

m
Message Module
Gear PCM Indicates the transmission is in reverse gear to the BCM. When the transmission is in REVERSE
position and the ignition in RUN, the BCM provides voltage to the reversing lamps.
. co
Reversing Lamps
gn
When the transmission is in REVERSE, the PCM sends a message over the HS-CAN1 to the BCM indicating the transmission
is in REVERSE. The BCM provides voltage to the reversing lamps when it receives the message that the transmission is in
REVERSE and the ignition is in RUN.
ia
The BCM also provides Field Effect Transistor (FET) protection of the reversing lamps output circuit. When an excessive
current draw is detected, the BCM disables the affected reversing lamps circuit driver.
rd
ca
Trailer Lamps
System Diagram


Message Module
Gear PCM Indicates the transmission is in reverse gear to the BCM. When the transmission is in REVERSE
position and the ignition in RUN, the BCM provides voltage to the reversing lamps.


Message Module
Turn signal SCCM Indicates the turn signal stalk position on the LH steering column multifunction switch
switch status (left/right lane change or turn signal on or off).
Parklamp status BCM A command to activate/deactivate the park lamps output.
Turn indication BCM A command to activate/deactivate the trailer tow stop/turn relay.
m
request
Stoplamp brake BCM A command to activate/deactivate the trailer tow stop/turn relay.
request . co
Trailer Stop-Turn Lamps
gn
The SCCM monitors the LH steering column multifunction switch position. When the LH steering column multifunction switch is
in the left or right turn position, the SCCM sends a message over the HS-CAN2 to the GWM then the GWM sends the message
to the BCM over the HS-CAN1 indicating a request for the LH or RH turn signal.
ia
When the BCM receives a request for a turn signal, the BCM provides a switched ground path to the LH or RH stop/turn trailer
tow relay (integrated into the BJB and not individually replaceable). When the BCM provides ground the LH or RH stop/turn
rd
trailer tow relay, the relay is energized and the relay provides turn lamp voltage to the trailer tow connector.
When the BCM receives input from the stoplamp switch indicating that the brake pedal is being pressed, the BCM provides a
ca
ground path to the LH and RH stop/turn trailer tow relay (integrated into the BJB and not individually replaceable). When the
BCM provides ground the LH and RH stop/turn trailer tow relay, the relay is energized and the relay provides stoplamp voltage
to the trailer tow connector.
Trailer Parking Lamps
When the parking lamps or headlamps position is selected, the BCM provides a ground path to the parking lamps trailer tow
relay (integrated into the BJB and not individually replaceable). When the BCM provides ground the parking lamps trailer tow
relay, the relay is energized and the relay provides parking lamp voltage to the trailer tow connector.
Trailer Reversing Lamps
When the transmission is in REVERSE, the PCM sends a message over the HS-CAN1 to the BCM indicating the transmission
is in REVERSE. The BCM provides ground to the reversing lamps trailer tow relay (integrated into the BJB and not individually
replaceable) when it receives the message that the transmission is in REVERSE and the ignition is in RUN. When the BCM
provides ground the reversing lamps trailer tow relay, the relay is energized and the relay provides reversing lamp voltage to
the trailer tow connector.
Trailer Battery Charging
The TRM provides voltage to the trailer tow connector for trailer battery charging when the ignition is ON.
The BCM provides ground to the trailer battery charging relay when the ignition is ON and no load shed condition is present.
When the BCM provides ground the trailer battery charging relay, the relay is energized and the relay provides voltage to the
trailer tow connector.
Headlamp Assembly
The headlamps utilize a ballast (headlamp module) that is used to control the low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and
headlamp LED signature lamps.
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this
design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur if the
temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a thin mist forms on the interior of the lens. The thin mist eventually
clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. The amount of time it takes to clear the lens of acceptable mist
varies with ambient humidity and lamp types. Normal condensation clears from any lamp in 48 hours under dry conditions.
Do not replace a lamp assembly with acceptable levels of condensation such as:
presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets are present)
fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp housing leak):
water puddling inside the lamp
m
large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens
Headlamp Switch
co
.
gn
Ballast
This ballast (headlamp module) is used to control the low beam Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and headlamp LED signature
lamps.
ia
Light Sensor
rd
The BCM sends a voltage signal to the light sensor. The light sensor provides resistance between the voltage signal and
ground. The resistance varies depending on the amount of ambient light detected by the light sensor. The brighter the ambient
light, the lower the resistance. By varying the resistance, the BCM can determine the amount of ambient light.
ca
Stoplamp Switch
The stoplamp switch is a normally open switch and is provided voltage at all times. When the brake pedal is applied, the switch
closes and routes voltage to the BCM.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Exterior Mirror Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps
Removal
WARNING: Place a shop towel between the hands and the exterior mirror glass for protection in case of glass
breakage during mirror service. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
1. Position the exterior mirror glass to the full upward and inward position.
m
. co
gn
ia
2.
Remove the exterior mirror glass using a screwdriver to release the tabs starting at the lower outboard side of mirror and
rd
continuing around the mirror until all the tabs are released.
ca
3. Remove the screws and the exterior mirror bezel.
m
4.
Remove the exterior mirror cover.
2. Release the tabs.
. co
3. Separate the exterior mirror cover from the exterior mirror assembly.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the screws and the exterior mirror flashing LED lamp
m
Installation

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-09 Rear View Mirrors 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Exterior Mirror
Removal
Exterior mirror assembly
1. Remove the front door interior trim sail panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Disconnect the exterior mirror electrical connector.

3. Remove the front door interior trim panel.
4. NOTE: The assembly aid hook is used only for production purposes. If the hook is broken or missing, the existing mirror
can be installed without the assembly aid hook.
Remove the exterior mirror assembly.

1. Remove the mirror assembly mounting bolt and nuts.
2. Release the assembly aid hook.
m
. co
gn
ia
Exterior mirror glass
WARNING: Place a shop towel between the hands and the exterior mirror glass for protection in case of glass
rd
breakage during mirror service. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
5. Position the exterior mirror glass to the full upward and inward position.
ca
6.
Remove the exterior mirror glass using a screwdriver to release the tabs starting at the lower outboard side of mirror and
continuing around the mirror until all the tabs are released.
m
Exterior mirror motor
. co
7. Remove the exterior mirror glass.
gn
8. Remove the screws and the exterior mirror motor.

ia
rd
ca

m
Exterior mirror cover
10. Remove the exterior mirror glass.
11. Remove the screws and the exterior mirror bezel.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. Release the tabs and remove the exterior mirror cover.
m
Mirror mounted turn signal
13. Remove the exterior mirror cover.
14.
Remove the mirror mounted turn signal.
Release the tabs.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Puddle lamp
15.
Remove the puddle lamp.
1. Using a screwdriver, release the tab and position the puddle lamp down.
m
Installation
Exterior mirror assembly

. co
Exterior mirror glass
gn
2. If required, install the 2 dampners on the LH exterior mirror glass.

ia
rd
ca
3. WARNING: Place a shop towel between the hands and the exterior mirror glass for protection in case of
glass breakage during mirror service. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Firmly press the exterior mirror glass until it snaps onto the exterior mirror motor
Connect the electrical connectors.
Position the exterior mirror glass onto the exterior mirror motor.
m
Exterior mirror motor

. co
gn
Exterior mirror cover

ia
Mirror mounted turn signal

rd
Puddle lamp

ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Exterior Rear Door Handle Reinforcement
Removal
1. Remove the rear door latch.

Refer to: Rear Door Latch (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).

2. Release the tab and remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Exterior Rear Door Handle
Removal
1.
Remove the grommet.
1. Release the retainers and position aside the weatherstrip.
2. Remove the grommet.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the rear door handle cover assembly.

1. Hold the rear door handle open.
2. While turning the release screw 8 turns. The handle will release around 6 to 6.5 turns. You must continue to the
full 8 revolutions for installation.
3. Remove the rear door handle cover assembly.
m
3. Remove the rear exterior door handle.
co.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. Install the rear exterior door handle.

m
2. Install the rear door handle cover assembly.
1. Install the rear door handle cover assembly to the door.
2. Release the rear door handle. co
3. Apply light pressure to the door handle while turning the release screw 8 turns. The handle will engage and go in
around 6 to 6.5 turns. You must continue to the full 8 revolutions for installation then torque to the specified value.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
3.
Install the grommet.
1. Install the grommet.
2. Position the weatherstrip and install the retainers.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
External Controls - Overview
Overview
The transmission selector lever linkage consists of:
a selector lever cable that connects the transmission manual control lever to the selector lever assembly.
a brake shift interlock actuator that is integral to the selector lever assembly.
The selector lever assembly:
locks the transmission selector lever in the P position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
requires the transmission selector lever to be in the P position to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
The steering wheel:
has SelectShift™ paddle switches mounted to it that allow the driver to manually shift the transmission.
A TCS (if equipped) is a momentary contact switch mounted to the LH lower instrument panel.
m
A Grade Assist switch (if equipped) is a momentary contact switch mounted to the selector lever knob.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
External Controls - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
This transmission has 5 range positions P, R, N, D and S with SelectShift™ paddle switches mounted on the steering wheel.
Park
In the P position:
there is no powerflow through the transmission.

the parking pawl locks the final drive.
the engine may be started.
the ignition key may be removed.
Reverse
In the R position:
the vehicle may be operated in a rearward direction, at a reduced gear ratio.
m
reversing lamps are illuminated.
engine braking will occur.
Neutral
In the N position:
. co
there is no powerflow through the transmission.
gn
the output shaft is disengaged from the drive wheels.
the engine may be started.
Drive
ia
The range selector in D position provides:

rd
automatic shifts — 1st through 6th gears.

maximum fuel economy during normal operation.
ca
Manual S Position
In manual S position:
the transmission provides maximum engine braking.

gears 1 through 6 are available.
the driver can manually shift the transmission to gears 1 through 6 using the SelectShift™ switches located on the
steering wheel.
sport mode is activated.
the transmission will select gears that will provide the engine braking desired, based on the vehicle inputs, which will
increase engine rpm during engine braking.
Brake Shift Interlock System
The brake shift interlock actuator inhibits the selector lever movement from the P position by mechanically blocking the detent
pawl of the selector lever mechanism. When the brake pedal is pressed ( BPP switch closed) with the ignition key in the
RUN/START position and the transmission in P, the brake shift interlock actuator is energized by the BCM, which allows the
selector lever to be moved out of the P position.
Selector Lever
a selector lever knob.

Brake Shift Interlock Actuator
The brake shift interlock actuator system consists of:
an ignition switch.
a BPP switch.
a BCM.
Selector Lever Cable
The selector lever cable consists of:
a cable that connect the transmission manual control lever to the selector lever assembly.
a cable grommet that is fastened to the floor pan.
an adjuster locking tab at the transmission manual control lever.
TCS and Grade Assist Switch
Drive with grade assist is activated when the TCS (if equipped) or grade assist switch (if equipped) is pressed. The TCS is
located on the LH lower instrument panel. The grade assist switch (if equipped) is located on the selector lever knob. When the
either switch is pressed, the 6th gear or (id=241)O/D upshift is prevented or the transmission shifts down to 5th gear. The TCS
(if equipped) or grade assist switch (if equipped) is meant to be used when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from 6th
to other gears such as hilly terrain, mountainous areas or when engine braking is required.
m
The TCS (if equipped) or grade assist switch (if equipped):
Improves vehicle handling in hilly terrain or mountainous areas by providing engine braking and extending lower gear
operation on uphill climbs.
co
Additional engine braking is provided through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs
(vehicle acceleration, accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed).
The transmission will select gears that will provide the engine braking desired, based on the vehicle inputs, this will
.
increase engine rpm during engine braking.
gn
It is recommended to return to O/D mode on flat terrain to provide the best fuel economy and transmission function. The
transmission returns to O/D when the TCS (if equipped) or grade assist switch (if equipped) is pressed again or anytime the key
is turned OFF.
ia
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
External Controls
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Mechanical Electrical
Transmission selector lever cable BCM
m
Manual control lever Brake Shift Interlock Actuator (BSIA)
Selector lever or selector lever knob Damaged paddle shift or tow haul switch
Selector lever slider bunching or binding
--
. co
Damaged wiring harness
Loose or damaged connections
gn
DTC Chart - BCM
ia
rd

ca
B1319:11 Brake Shift Interlock Output Circuit Short To Ground GO to Pinpoint Test A
B1319:15 Brake Shift Interlock Output Circuit Short To Battery or Open GO to Pinpoint Test A
DTC Chart - PCM
NOTE: These DTCs apply to the 6F50/55 transmission only, for 6F35 transmission concerns refer to the symptom chart.

P0815 Upshift Switch Concerns, Open Or Shorted Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B
P0816 Downshift Switch Concerns, Open Or Shorted Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B
Symptom Chart
In most circumstances the PCM sets a DTC to help guide with diagnostics. Refer to the DTC Charts before using the Symptom
Chart. The Symptom column lists the vehicle condition. The Possible Sources column lists a detailed vehicle condition. The
Action column lists the action to be performed to determine the cause of the condition. Each action lists the components that
can cause the system and the individual components in that system. The components are listed in order of disassembly. Use
the list of components and the required action to focus on disassembly inspections for the root cause of the concern.

Selector lever difficult to Selector lever VERIFY the selector lever cable is fully
move - requires excessive cable binding at seated in the cable bracket on the
effort transmission transmission.
Selector lever VERIFY the selector lever cable is fully

cable binding at seated in the cable bracket at the front of
selector lever the selector lever.
Selector lever VERIFY the selector lever cable is properly

cable routed and all retaining clips are present
incorrectly and secure.
routed
Brake shift interlock system Selector lever VERIFY the selector lever cable is fully
does not release/lock cable not seated in the cable bracket on the
correctly secured to the transmission.
m
bracket at the
transmission
Brake shift interlock system

does not release/lock
correctly
Selector lever
cable not
secured to the
co VERIFY the selector lever cable is fully
seated in the cable bracket at the front of
the selector lever .
bracket at the
.
gn
selector lever
Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test A

Diagnostic
ia
Routine
Brake Shift INSTALL a new selector lever assembly.

rd
Interlock REFER to: Selector Lever Assembly -

Actuator (BSIA) Vehicles With: Column Shift (307-05
solenoid Automatic Transmission External Controls,
ca

REFER to: Selector Lever Assembly -
Vehicles With: Floor Shift (307-05
Automatic Transmission External Controls,
Selector lever CHECK the selector lever cable

cable adjustment.
REFER to: Selector Lever Cable
Adjustment - 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission - 6F35 (307-05 Automatic
Transmission External Controls, General
Procedures).
Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Vehicles With:
Column Shift (307-05 Automatic
Procedures).
Floor Shift (307-05 Automatic Transmission
External Controls, General Procedures).
Paddle Shift Does Not Selector lever If the selector lever won't move into sport
Operate Correctly not fully mode,
engaging in S REFER to: Selector Lever Cable
position Adjustment - 6-Speed Automatic
Selector lever Transmission External Controls, General
damaged Procedures).
Paddle shift Adjustment - 6-Speed Automatic
does not Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Vehicles With:
operate Column Shift (307-05 Automatic
correctly, does Transmission External Controls, General
not upshift or Procedures).
downshift REFER to: Selector Lever Cable
Vehicles With: Column Shift (307-05
m
. co
gn
TCS (Tow Haul Switch)/Low Wiring, GO to Pinpoint Test C
Gear Select Switch Does Not terminals or
Operate Correctly connectors
ia
Tow haul switch

(in center stack)
rd
Low Gear
Select switch
(in gear
ca
selector lever)
PCM
Selector lever linkage is out Selector lever

of correct gear relationship linkage out of REFER to: Selector Lever Cable
adjustment Adjustment - 6-Speed Automatic
Procedures).
Column Shift (307-05 Automatic
Procedures).
Manual control REMOVE the manual control lever nut and

lever not CHECK the alignment of the manual
aligned control lever.
correctly on the
TR sensor (flat
surfaces do not
line up)
Loose selector CHECK the selector lever cable bracket.

lever cable TIGHTEN as necessary.
bracket
Vibration — a high frequency Selector lever CHECK the selector lever cable.
(20-80 Hz) that is felt through cable REFER to: Selector Lever Assembly -
the seat or selector lever. incorrectly Vehicles With: Column Shift (307-05
Changes with engine speed routed, Automatic Transmission External Controls,
grounded out or Removal and Installation).
loose REFER to: Selector Lever Assembly -
The ignition key cannot be Selector lever VERIFY the selector lever cable is fully
returned to the OFF position cable binding at seated in the cable bracket on the
m
or the ignition key can be the transmission.
turned to the OFF position transmission
when the selector lever is not
in P
Selector lever
. co
VERIFY the selector lever cable is fully
gn
the selector the selector lever.
lever

ia

rd
routed
Wiring,
ca
terminals or REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column

connectors Electrical Components (211-05 Steering
Wheel and Column Electrical Components,
Ignition lock Diagnosis and Testing).
cylinder
Key removal
inhibit solenoid
(part of the
ignition switch)
Park detect
switch (part of
the selector
lever)
Selector lever
cable
Mechanical
damage to the
selector lever,
selector lever
cable or
selector lever
knob
The PRNDL indicator does Selector lever VERIFY the selector lever cable is fully
not illuminate P cable binding at seated in the cable bracket on the
the transmission.
transmission
Selector lever VERIFY the selector lever cable is fully

the selector the selector lever.
lever

routed
Wiring,
terminals or
connectors
PCM concern
m
IPC
Park detect
switch (part of
the selector
lever assembly)
. co
gn
Pinpoint Tests
DTCS B1319:11, B1319:15

ia

rd
The BCM provides power to the Brake Shift Interlock Actuator (BSIA). When the BCM receives a brake pedal applied input,
ca
voltage is applied to the brake shift interlock solenoid. When the solenoid is energized, the plunger is pulled inward allowing the
selector lever to move from the park position. The selector lever should not release when the ignition is on and the brake pedal
is not applied.


B1319:11 Brake Shift Interlock Output Circuit Short To Short to ground in the Brake Shift Interlock Actuator (BSIA)
Ground circuitry.
B1319:15 Brake Shift Interlock Output Circuit Short To Short to power or open in the Brake Shift Interlock Actuator
Battery or Open (BSIA) circuitry.
Possible Sources
Circuitry open or shorted to power

BCM
PINPOINT TEST A : DTCS B1319:11, B1319:15
A1
TEST THE SELECTOR LEVER NORMAL OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Operate the selector lever, with the brake pedal applied.
Does the selector lever release and change gears?
Yes GO to A2
No GO to A3
A2
TEST THE SELECTOR LEVER LOCK OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Operate the selector lever, with the brake pedal not applied.
Does the selector lever release and change gears?
m
Yes GO to A5
No The issue may not be the BSIA system. REFER to Symptom Chart.
co
A3
CHECK THE BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK ACTUATOR POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
.
gn
Disconnect Floor Shifter C3245.
Disconnect Column Shifter C2008.
Disconnect BCM C2280B.

ia
Inspect for damaged or pushed-out terminals.

rd
Measure:

ca

Floor Shift

C3245-3 C2280B-46
Measure:

Column Shift

C2008-4 C2280B-46

Yes GO to A4
A4
CHECK THE BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK ACTUATOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

Floor Shift

C3245-7 Ground
Measure:
m

Column Shift
C2008-1
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
gn
ia
Yes GO to A5
rd

ca
A5
CHECK THE BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK ACTUATOR POWER CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal for this test.
Measure:

Floor Shift

C3245-3 Ground
Measure:

Column Shift
C2008-4 Ground
No INSTALL a new selector lever assembly.

REFER to: Selector Lever Assembly - Vehicles With: Column Shift (307-05 Automatic Transmission
External Controls, Removal and Installation).
REFER to: Selector Lever Assembly - Vehicles With: Floor Shift (307-05 Automatic Transmission
External Controls, Removal and Installation).
Paddle Shift Does Not Operate Correctly
m
Normal Operation and Fault Conditions co

Each paddle shift switch is a momentary contact switch integral to the steering wheel. When the selector lever is placed in the
sport shift position, the upshift/downshift feature becomes activated and allows the operator to upshift or downshift without
.
removing their hands from the steering wheel. Under normal operation the PCM PID displays a voltage high signal with the
gn
paddle shift switch open (not depressed) and low voltage signal when an upshift is requested.
ia

DTC Fault Trigger Conditions 6F50/55 Transmissions Only
rd

ca
P0815 Upshift Switch Circuit This DTC sets when the PCM detects an open or short to ground in the upshift switch circuit.
P0816 Downshift Switch This DTC sets when the PCM detects an open or short to ground in the downshift switch
Circuit circuit.
Possible Sources
Circuitry open/shorted
Clockspring
Paddle shift switches
SCCM
PCM
PINPOINT TEST B : PADDLE SHIFT DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY

B1
MONITOR SHIFT SELECT PIDS
Ignition ON.
Enter the following diagnostic mode: Datalogger.
Monitor the PCM PIDs, SST_D and SST_U while depressing the upshift and downshift switches.
Do both the upshift and downshift PIDs SST_D and SST_U show high when their respective switch is not
depressed and low when the switch is depressed?
Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
connector.
No If the Upshift switch PID reads high when the switch is pressed, or if the Upshift PID reads low when
the switch is not pressed, GO to B2
If the Downshift switch PID reads high when the switch is pressed, or if the Downshift PID reads low
when the switch is not pressed, GO to B9
If the PIDs for both switches show no change (high) when both of the switches are pressed, GO to
B16
B2
CHECK THE UPSHIFT PADDLE SWITCH
Remove the driver air bag module.
Disconnect Upshift Paddle Switch Connector C2428.
Measure:
m
. co Component side resistance pin 2.
gn
Is the resistance less than 1.5 ohms with upshift switch pressed and greater than 10,000 ohms when released?
Yes GO to B3
ia
No INSTALL a new upshift paddle switch.

REFER to: Upshift Paddle Switch (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, Removal and
rd
Installation).
ca
B3
CHECK THE UPSHIFT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Upshift Paddle Shifter, C2428.
Inspect the connector for damaged or pushed-out terminals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2428-1 Ground
Yes GO to B16
No GO to B4
B4
CHECK THE UPSHIFT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect PCM.
Inspect the connectors for damaged or pushed-out terminals.
For the 2.3L engine, measure:

Component Side C218B-12 C1381B-89
For the 3.5L GTDi engine, measure:
m
For the 3.5L/3.7L TiVCT engines, measure:

. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to B6
B5
CHECK THE UPSHIFT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A OPEN CIRCUIT
Measure:

C218B-12 C2428-1
Yes GO to B6

B6
CHECK THE UPSHIFT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C218B-12 Ground
Yes GO to B7
B7
CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect Clockspring C218C.
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
Component Side C218C-2
. co
C218B-12
gn

ia
Yes GO to B8
No INSTALL a new clockspring.

rd

ca
B8
CHECK THE SCCM FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect SCCM C2414AC2414D.
Measure:

Component Side C2414A-3 C2414D-2
Yes REPAIR the open in the circuit between the SCCM and the PCM if no open circuit is found, INSTALL
a new PCM. INSTALL a new PCM.
REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01A Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission - 6F35, General Procedures).
REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
No INSTALL a new SCCM.

B9
CHECK THE DOWNSHIFT PADDLE SWITCH
Remove the driver air bag module.
Disconnect Downshift Paddle Switch Connector C2429.
Measure:
m
Component side resistance pin 3 Component side resistance pin 4
. co
gn
Is the resistance less than 1.5 ohms with upshift switch pressed and greater than 10,000 ohms when released?
Yes GO to B10
ia
No INSTALL a new downshift paddle switch.

REFER to: Downshift Paddle Switch (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, Removal
and Installation).
rd
ca
B10
CHECK THE DOWNSHIFT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the connector for damaged or pushed-out terminals.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2429-4 Ground
Yes GO to B16
No GO to B11
B11
CHECK THE DOWNSHIFT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect PCM.
Inspect the connectors for damaged or pushed-out terminals.
For the 2.3L engine, measure:

For the 3.5L GTDi engine, measure:

m
For the 3.5L/3.7L TiVCT engines, measure:

Positive Lead
. co
gn
ia
Yes GO to B12
rd

ca
B12
CHECK THE DOWNSHIFT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A OPEN CIRCUIT
Measure:

C218B-5 C2429-4
Yes GO to B13
B13
CHECK THE DOWNSHIFT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:
C218B-5 Ground
Yes GO to B14
B14
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
Component Side C218C-3 C218B-5
. co
gn
Yes GO to B15
ia

rd
B15
ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Component Side C2414A-4 C2414D-3
a new PCM.

B16
CHECK THE RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A OPEN CIRCUIT
Disconnect Driver's Airbag
.
Disconnect Paddle switches C2428C2429.
Measure:
m
Positive Measurement / Negative Lead
Lead Action
C218B-13
co
For the upshift signal return circuit, C2428-2 For the downshift signal return
circuit, C2429-3
.
gn

ia
Yes GO to B17

rd
B17
CHECK THE RETURN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
ca
Measure:

C218B-13 Ground
Yes GO to B18
B18
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Component Side C218C-4 C218B-13
Yes GO to B19

B19
Ignition ON.
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
Component Side C2414A-5
. co
C2414D-4
gn

ia
rd
a new PCM. INSTALL a new PCM.

ca


Tow Haul Switch/Low Gear Selector Switch (Police only)

Normal Operation
The TCS (Tow Haul switch) is a momentary contact switch located in the center stack switch assembly. Pressing the TCS (Tow
Haul switch) engages or disengages the Tow Haul function of the transmission. When the TCS (Tow Haul switch) is engaged,
the Tow Haul icon illuminates on the IPC. Each time the ignition switch is cycled, the PCM disengages the Tow Haul operation
regardless of the switch position the last time the engine was running.
TCS (Low Gear Selector Switch) (Police only)
The TCS (Low Gear Select) is a momentary contact switch located on the column shift selector lever. Pressing the Low Gear
Select switch will engage or disengage the Low Gear function of the transmission. When Low Gear is engaged, a Low Gear
icon illuminates on the IPC. Each time the ignition switch is cycled, the PCM disengages the Low Gear operation regardless of
the switch position the last time the engine was running.
Possible Sources
Circuitry open/shorted
TCS (Tow Haul Switch) (In dashboard center stack assembly with trailer tow only)
TCS (Low Gear Selector Switch) (Police only)
PCM
PINPOINT TEST C : TOW HAUL SWITCH/LOW GEAR SELECTOR SWITCH

C1
MONITOR SHIFT SELECT PIDS
m
Ignition ON.
Enter the following diagnostic mode: Datalogger.
switch.
. co
Monitor the PCM PIDs, SST_D and SST_U while depressing and releasing the towhaul or low gear selector
gn
Do the PIDs SST_D and SST_U show high when the switch is not depressed and low when the switch is
depressed?
ia
Yes The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose
connector.
rd
No If the PID reads high when the switch is pressed, or if the PID reads low when the switch is not
pressed, GO to C2
ca
C2
CHECK FOR POWER AT TOW HAUL SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect For vehicles equipped with trailer tow, C2114.
Disconnect For vehicles equipped with police option, C2804.
Ignition ON.
For vehicles equipped with trailer tow, measure:

C2114-8 Ground
For vehicles equipped with police option, measure:

C2804-1 Ground
Is the voltage 11 volts or greater?
Yes GO to C3
No VERIFY the BJB fuse 19 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the open circuit. If not OK, REFER to the
Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
C3
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT TO PCM
Ignition ON.
For vehicles equipped with column shift, measure:

C2804-2 C2804-1
m
For vehicles equipped with floor shift, measure:

. co
gn
C2114-4 C2114-8
ia
Is the voltage 11 volts or greater?

rd
Yes For vehicles equipped with trailer tow, INSTALL a new tow/haul switch.
REFER to: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls,
ca

For vehicles equipped with police option, INSTALL a new selector lever. REFER to: Selector Lever
Assembly - Vehicles With: Floor Shift (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls, Removal
and Installation).
No GO to C4
C4
TEST THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect If equipped with 3.5L GTDI engine, PCM C1551B-90.
Disconnect If equipped with 3.5L TiVCT engine, PCM C175B.
For vehicles equipped with column shift (police option), measure:

3.5L Engine GTDI

C1551B-90 C2804-2

/3.5L Engine TIVCT

C175B-93 C2804-2
Yes GO to C5
m
C5
CHECK THE TOW HAUL OR LOW GEAR SELECTOR SWITCH
For vehicles equipped with floor shift and trailer tow, measure:

Positive Lead
. co
Measurement /
Action
Negative Lead
Tow haul switch, component side, C2114- Tow haul switch, component side, C2114-
gn
8 4
ia

rd

ca
Gear selector component side, C2804-1 Gear selector component side, C2804-2
Is the resistance less than 1.5 ohms with upshift selected and greater than 10,000 ohms when released?
Yes INSTALL a new PCM

Download (307-01A Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35, General
Procedures).

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Factory Mode Deactivation
Deactivation
NOTE: During vehicle build, some modules, such as the IPC and BCM module are set in factory mode. Factory mode reduces
the drain on the battery during longer periods where the vehicle is not used. While in the factory mode, various systems may be
altered or disabled and the IPC displays FACTORY MODE CONTACT DEALER in the message center. If the vehicle is in
factory mode, the system automatically reverts to Transport mode after 60 ignition cycles. If the IPC displays TRANSPORT
MODE CONTACT DEALER, refer to the Transport Mode Deactivation procedure in this section.
1. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Verify the battery is fully charged.

Refer to: Battery Charging (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
3. Without push button start, cycle the ignition from off to on 60 times.
4. NOTE: One IKTmust be in the vehicle.
m
With push button start, press the Engine Start/Stop button 120 times.
5. Refer to the Transport Mode Deactivation procedure in this section.

Refer to: Transport Mode Deactivation (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, General Procedures).
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Fender Splash Shield
Removal

2. If equipped.
Remove the retainers and the upper shield.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. If equipped.
Remove the bolts and the lower shield.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5.
1. Remove the screws.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
8. Remove the fender splash shield.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Fender
Knife
Materials
Name Specification
Fusor® Flexible Foam Repair -
3M™ 08463, Fusor® 121
Removal
m
1. Remove the front fender moulding.
Refer to: Front Fender Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).

co

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove the cowl panel grille filler panel.

m
5. Release the tabs and remove the windshield applique.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Open the door.

m
7. Remove the bolt.
Torque: 80 lb.in (9 Nm) .co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. Close the door.

m
Torque: 106 lb.in (12 Nm) .co
gn
ia
rd
ca
10. Remove the bolt.

m
11. NOTE: Follow the unique installation step when installing the fender.
Cut the foam sealant.

Use the General Equipment: Knife
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
13. Separate the bumper cover from the fender.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. NOTE: Bumper cover removed for clarity.
Remove the bolts.

m
15. Remove the bolt.
gn
ia
rd
ca
16.
1. Remove the bolt.
m
17. Remove the bolts and separate the headlight assembly from the fender.
gn
ia
rd
ca
18. Remove the fender.

m
19. Remove any excess debris left on the body.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Before installation of the fender, apply a continuous stream of Fusor® 121 material along the entire span of the baffle-
body attachment area.
Material: Fusor® Flexible Foam Repair / 3M™ 08463, Fusor® 121
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Final Drive
Final Drive Gearset Exploded View
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Item Description
1 Front planetary carrier hub
2 Transfer shaft drive gear
3 Transfer shaft drive gear bearing
4 Stator support assembly
5 Transfer shaft
6 Transfer gear
7 Differential assembly
8 Differential ring gear
Final Drive Gearset
The final drive consists of a gearset that transfers and multiplies torque from the planetary gearsets to the differential.
The final drive consists of the following components:
Transfer shaft drive gear

Transfer shaft and gear assembly
Differential assembly
Ring gear
m
The planetary gear set transfers power to the transfer shaft drive gear through the front planetary carrier hub. The transfer shaft
drive gear is part of the stator support assembly. The transfer shaft drive gear turns the transfer shaft and gear assembly which
multiplies torque through gear reduction and turns the differential ring gear.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation
General Procedures
Finish Panel Repair
Repair
NOTE: Mouldings located on the front and rear window frames may experience minor scratches from vehicle shipment or car
wash racks. The imperfections may be repaired instead of replacing components by following the steps below.
NOTE: Scratches deep enough to cause a thumb nail to catch cannot be repaired and the component must be replaced.
1. Clean with a mild soap and water wash, and dry the affected panels.
2. Apply protective masking to adjacent components.
3. Apply a small amount of clear coat and plastic formulated polishing compound (obtain locally) to a 3 inch polisher with an
appropriate foam pad attached.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the polishing compound to dry while polishing the component.
Thoroughly polish the component.
m
5. Reclean with a mild soap and water wash and dry the polished panels.
If the scratches are repaired return the vehicle.
If the scratches remain, continue with the following steps.
6. Choose a sandpaper grit appropriate to the scratch severity.

co
For very minor scratches, use a 3 inch 3000 grit sandpaper (obtain locally).
For minor scratches, use a 3 inch 1000 grit sandpaper (obtain locally).
.
For heavier scratches that do not catch a thumb nail when pulled across the scratch, use a 3 inch 800 grit
gn
sandpaper (obtain locally).
For scratches that are too deep to remove with 800 grit sandpaper, install a new component.
7. NOTICE: Do not remove any more material than necessary or component replacement will be required.
ia
Apply the appropriate sandpaper to a 3 inch Dual Action (D/A) sander and carefully sand the component until all the
rd
damage has been removed.
8. Use progressively finer sandpaper with the 3 inch D/A sander and repeat the process. Finish the sanding with 3000 grit
sandpaper.
ca
9. Apply a small amount of clear coat and plastic formulated rubbing compound (obtain locally) to a 3 inch polisher with an
appropriate foam pad attached.
10. NOTE: Do not allow the rubbing compound to dry while polishing the component.
Buff the component until the sanding scratches have been completely removed.
11. Apply a small amount of clear coat and plastic formulated polishing compound (obtain locally) to a 3 inch polisher with an
appropriate clean foam pad attached.
12. NOTE: Do not allow the rubbing compound to dry while polishing the component.
Polish the component until the buffing swirl marks are removed.
13. Continue polishing the component until the original level of shine is present.
14. Apply a small amount of clear coat and plastic formulated hand glaze (obtain locally) to a soft and clean shop cloth and
hand polish to remove swirl marks left by the 3 inch polisher.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms 2017 Explorer Procedure revision date:
General Procedures 10/29/2014
Fixed Glass
Glass Cut-Out Wire

Power Caulk Gun
Power Fixed Glass Removal Tool
Cold Knife
Knife
Vacuum Cleaner
Materials
Name Specification
m
Betaseal™ Express Dow Urethane Adhesive -
Sika Tack ASAP Urethane Adhesive
Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer

-
-
. co
Betaprime™ 5500/5500A/5500SA
gn
Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer -
Sika 206 G+P
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ESR-M14P5-A
ia
ZC-23
Bare Metal Etch Primer -
rd
BETAPRIME 5201
Body Primer -
ca
BETASEAL™ 43538
Repair
1. NOTE: Some interior trim, exterior trim and/or components may require removal based on the tools and removal method
used.
NOTE: In some instances repair methods may be combined to achieve the best results.
Choose the best repair method for the type of glass being replaced.
1. Cold knife method – uses the cold knife to cut the urethane from the outside of a vehicle provided the blade can
reach the bead.
Use the General Equipment: Cold Knife
2. Power tool method – uses various power tools from inside the vehicle using a cutting or paddle type blade.
Use the General Equipment: Power Fixed Glass Removal Tool
3. Piano wire method – uses the piano wire to cut the urethane from inside and outside of a vehicle using an
assistant.
Use the General Equipment: Glass Cut-Out Wire
2. When using the cold knife method, apply tape to protect the perimeter of the window opening from paint damage.
Multiple layers of tape may be required.
3.
NOTICE: New fixed glass must be installed within 2 hours of cutting the urethane adhesive. Cut or scraped
urethane becomes oxidized and inactive beyond 2 hours, reducing the effectiveness of the repair bond.
NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or damage the pinch weld
during glass removal.
NOTICE: Take precautions to prevent damage to other components when cutting urethane.
NOTE: Fixed glass must be discarded once removed. A new fixed glass is required.
NOTE: Fixed glass may have locating pins that vary in location. It may be necessary to cut these pins with a utility knife.
Remove the fixed glass and discard.

Use the General Equipment: Power Fixed Glass Removal Tool
Use the General Equipment: Cold Knife
4.
m
co
WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural component of the
vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
.
gn
NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld following
manufacturer's instructions for the product being used. Use the same brand pinch weld primer, glass primer and
urethane adhesive.
ia
NOTE: Touching the adhesive surface impairs the rebonding.
NOTE: Make sure the mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material.
rd
Prep the pinch weld area to install the new fixed glass.
1. Trim the original urethane adhesive using a utility knife, leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in) base on the
ca
pinch weld.
2. Remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld using a soft brush or vacuum.
Use the General Equipment: Vacuum Cleaner
5. NOTE: Minimize applying bare metal primer over areas with remaining urethane adhesive and observe a minimum flash
time of 30 minutes.
If the paint layer was damaged on the pinch weld extending into bare metal, apply bare metal primer to those areas only.
Material: Bare Metal Etch Primer / BETAPRIME 5201
6. NOTE: Minimize applying body primer over areas with remaining urethane adhesive and observe a minimum flash time
of 30 minutes.
Apply body primer as necessary.

1. Apply body primer to those areas only previously primed with bare metal primer.
Material: Bare Metal Etch Primer / BETAPRIME 5201
2. If the clearcoat layer was damaged on the pinch weld but not extending into bare metal, apply body primer to
those areas only.
Material: Body Primer / BETASEAL™ 43538
7. Clean the inside of the new fixed glass with glass cleaner.
Material: Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner / ZC-23 (ESR-M14P5-A)
8.
Apply glass primer according to the manufacturer's instructions to the new fixed glass. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
Material: Dow Urethane One Step Glass Primer / Betaprime™ 5500/5500A/5500SA
Material: Sika Urethane Metal and Glass Primer / Sika 206 G+P
9.
Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.

Material: Betaseal™ Express Dow Urethane Adhesive
Material: Sika Tack ASAP Urethane Adhesive
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
10.
ca
NOTICE: Make sure the urethane bead is uniform to prevent air and water leaks.
NOTE: The fixed glass must be installed within 10 minutes of applying the urethane adhesive.
NOTE: Use a power caulk gun that applies the urethane adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply a urethane adhesive bead.

1. Start and end at the original overlap points to prevent air and water leaks.
2. NOTE: Take care in applying urethane on vehicles without peripheral moldings as urethane expulsion could
become an appearance issue.
Apply a urethane adhesive bead 14 mm (0.551 in) high and 8 mm (0.314 in) wide on top of the existing trimmed
urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld.
Use the General Equipment: Power Caulk Gun
Material: Betaseal™ Express Dow Urethane Adhesive
Material: Sika Tack ASAP Urethane Adhesive
3. Make sure there are no gaps in the bead.
11. NOTICE: The door windows must be left open during the adhesive curing time.
Open the vehicle windows to prevent the air pressure of closing doors from compromising the urethane adhesive bond.
m
12.
co
WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane adhesive
manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely
.
affect glass retention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
gn
NOTE: If equipped, the adhesive strip backings must be removed from the A-pillar mouldings before installing the fixed
glass.
ia
Install the fixed glass to the vehicle.

1. Install the fixed glass, pressing firmly by hand to ensure a good bond.
2. Secure the fixed glass in the correct position with tape until the urethane adhesive has cured.
rd
13. If necessary, remove excess uncured urethane adhesive from the interior and exterior surface of the fixed glass.
Material: Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner / ZC-23 (ESR-M14P5-A)
ca
14. Install any removed components as needed.
15. If equipped, carry out the IPMA camera alignment.

Refer to: Lane Keeping System - System Operation and Component Description (419-07 Lane Keeping System,

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Flasher Lighting Relay Panel
Removal
1. Remove the bolts and the loadspace floor panel.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2. Disconnect the relay center electrical connectors.

ca
3. Remove the push pins and the relay center and bracket assembly.
m
4. Remove the nuts and bolts and remove the relay center.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Overview
Spotlamps
The spotlamps provide an exterior illumination source that can be directed by an interior control handle to illuminate the desired
object.
Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
The flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are used to visually alert individuals to the vehicle's presence. The number and
placement of flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) varies based on the police package ordered.
Siren and Speaker System
The siren and speaker system is used as an audible alert to the vehicles presence.
Police Idle
m
The Police Idle system allows you to leave the engine running and prevents your vehicle from unauthorized use when you are
outside of your vehicle. When you remove the key from the ignition, the engine remains idling.
Spotlamps
. co
The LH and RH spotlamps are mounted on the A-pillers and can be equipped with a halogen bulb or Light Emitting Diodes
gn
(LEDs). The spotlamps are provided battery voltage from BJB fuse 98 (20A) and are grounded to the vehicle body through the
spotlamp mount.
Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

ia
The flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are turned on and off by zones. There are 3 zones for the flashing Light Emitting
Diodes (LEDs):
rd
Grille, WARN, front side marker, exterior mirror and front auxiliary flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
Rear lamp, rear quarter glass, high mount and liftgate flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
ca
High beam wig-wag function
High Beam Wig-Wag Function
The high beams are alternately turned on and off by the wig-wag module. The wig-wag module receives input from the lighting
relay center or the lighting and siren control module on pattern and synchronization with the grille, WARN, front side marker,
exterior mirror and front auxiliary flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) Flash Patterns
The LED flash patterns are preset from the factory and can be changed in 2 groups.
For additional information, refer to: Group Flash Pattern Programming (100-05 Police Equipment, General Procedures).
The 2 groups are:
When a flashing LED is replaced, the flash pattern of the replacement LED may be different than the rest in the group.
For additional information, refer to: Individual Flash Pattern Programming (100-05 Police Equipment, General Procedures).
Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) Synchronization
The flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are synchronized into 3 groups:
The 3 groups are:

WARN flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
Each flashing LED assembly contains a module that controls the flash pattern and synchronizes the flashing LED with the other
flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) in the group.
Flashing LED Controls
The flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are driven and controlled by the following:
Lighting relay center or lighting and siren control module - controls the grille, front corner, tail lamp, high mount and
liftgate flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
WARN module - controls the front park/turn/WARN LED assemblies.
Police Idle
The Police Idle system is activated and deactivated by pressing the Police Idle switch located on the LH lower instrument panel
under the headlamp switch.
The switch can turn on the system any time, but will only activate when the vehicle has stopped and the gear selector is in
PARK. The instrument panel indicator will illuminate yellow before the vehicle is in PARK and will illuminate green when in
PARK.
m
Activate the system by following these steps in order:
Place the gear selector is in PARK.

Press the Police Idle switch (if not previously pressed).
Place the ignition in OFF and remove the key.

. co
Wait for the indicator on the instrument panel to illuminate green.
While the system is active and the key is removed:

gn
The power window switches are disabled and the windows remain in their current state.
The power door lock controls are disabled and all doors remain in their current locking state.
The liftgate or luggage compartment switches are disabled.
ia
The vehicle will shutdown if the Police Idle switch is pressed.

The vehicle will shutdown if the gear selector is moved from PARK.
rd
Deactivate the system by following these steps in order:
Insert the key and place the ignition in ON.

Press the Police Idle switch.
ca
Wait for the indicator on the instrument panel to turn off.
Front Park/Turn/WARN LED Assembly
The front park/turn/WARN assemblies are mounted in the headlamp assemblies. The standard park or turn bulb is replaced
with an LED assembly that functions as a parking and turn signal lamp, as well as a WARN flasher. The LH and RH front
park/turn/WARN assemblies are optically unique and not interchangeable. The WARN Control Module controls the WARN
portion of the front park/turn/WARN assemblies flash rate and synchronization. The BCM controls the park or turn function of
the front park/turn/WARN assemblies.
Tail Lamp Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
The tail lamp flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are mounted in the tail lamp assemblies. The tail lamp flashing Light
Emitting Diodes (LEDs) operate independently of the park, turn and stoplamps.
Grille, High Mounted and Decklid Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
Each of the grille, high mount and liftgate flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) consist of 6 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that
flash in a variety of patterns.
WARN Module
The WARN module controls the output to the front park/turn/WARN Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) as well as the flashing
pattern.
Wig-Wag Module
The wig-wag module controls the output to the high beams, as well as the flashing pattern.
Lighting Relay Center
The vehicle is equipped with a lighting relay center when not equipped with a factory installed siren.
The lighting relay center controls the flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs). A switch pad, installed by the customer, controls
the internal relays to turn the 4 flashing LED zones on and off.
Lighting And Siren Control Module
The lighting and siren control module controls the flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and siren/speaker system. It uses a
switch pad, installed by the customer, to control outputs to turn up to 4 flashing LED zones on and off. It also has a microphone
input and a built-in amplifier to power the siren/speaker system.
The lighting and siren control module controls the siren/speaker system. It has a microphone input and a built-in amplifier to
power the siren and speaker system.
Siren and Speaker System
The lighting and siren control module generates the siren pattern and receives input from the microphone and an output to the
m
underhood siren speaker.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
DTC Chart: BCM

BCM DTC Chart

B1512:11 Police Idle Switch: Circuit Short To Ground GO to Pinpoint Test I
m
DTC Chart: GFM
co
.
gn

GFM DTC Chart

ia
B1457:11 Auxiliary Switch GO to Pinpoint Test H

1: Circuit Short
rd
To Ground
1: Circuit Short
ca
To Battery or
Open
1: Signal Stuck
Low
2: Signal Stuck
Low
3: Circuit Short
To Ground
3: Circuit Short
To Battery or
Open
3: Signal Stuck
Low
B145A:23 Auxiliary Switch GO to Pinpoint Test H
4: Signal Stuck
Low
B146B:12 Auxiliary Output GO to Pinpoint Test H
1: Circuit Short
To Battery
B146B:19 Auxiliary Output GO to Pinpoint Test H
1: Circuit Current
Above Threshold
B146C:12 Auxiliary Output GO to Pinpoint Test H
2: Circuit Short
To Battery
B146C:19 Auxiliary Output GO to Pinpoint Test H
2: Circuit Current
Above Threshold
B146D:12 Auxiliary Output GO to Pinpoint Test H
3: Circuit Short
To Battery
B146D:19 Auxiliary Output GO to Pinpoint Test H
3: Circuit Current
Above Threshold
B146E:12 Auxiliary Output GO to Pinpoint Test H
4: Circuit Short
m
To Battery
B146E:19 Auxiliary Output GO to Pinpoint Test H
4: Circuit Current
Above Threshold
U1000:00 Solid State Driver
co
The module has temporarily disabled an output because an excessive current draw exists
Protection Active (such as a short to ground). The GFM cannot enable the output until the cause of the short is
.
-Driver Disabled: corrected. ADDRESS all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. After the cause of the
gn
No Sub Type concern is corrected, CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test.
Information
U3000:49 Control Module: The module has permanently disabled an output because an excessive current draw fault
ia
Internal (such as a short to ground) has exceeded the limits that the GFM can withstand. The cause of
Electronic Failure the excessive current draw MUST be corrected before a new GFM is installed. ADDRESS all
other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. After the cause of the concern is corrected,
rd
INSTALL a new GFM.

REFER to: Generic Function Module (GFM) (100-05 Police Equipment, Removal and
Installation).
ca
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Flasher Lighting, Siren and Speaker System

Symptom Chart

Wiring, REFER to: Communications Network
terminals or (418-00 Module Communications
connectors Network) .
Module
A spotlamp is inoperative or always on Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test A

Pinpoint Test
All flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are inoperative Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test B
Pinpoint Test
An individual or group of flashing Light Emitting Diodes Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test C
(LEDs) is inoperative or always on Pinpoint Test
An individual or group of flashing Light Emitting Diodes Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test D
(LEDs) do not synchronize correctly or display an incorrect Pinpoint Test
pattern
The front park/turn/WARN Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test E
inoperative or do not operate correctly Pinpoint Test
The wig-wag function does not operate the high beams Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test F
correctly Pinpoint Test
The siren speaker is inoperative Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test G
Pinpoint Test
The steering wheel auxiliary controls are inoperative or do not Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test H
operate correctly Pinpoint Test
The police idle system will not activate or is always active Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test I
Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Tests
m
A Spotlamp Is Inoperative Or Always On

. co
gn
REFER to: Flasher Lighting, Siren and Speaker System (100-05 Police Equipment, Description and Operation).
Possible Sources
ia
Fuse
rd
Spotlamp

ca
Inspect the spotlamp assembly for damage.

VERIFY BCM fuse 98 (20A) is OK.
PINPOINT TEST A : A SPOTLAMP IS INOPERATIVE OR ALWAYS ON

A1
DETERMINE IF THE SPOTLAMP IS ALWAYS ON
Ignition ON.
Observe the spotlamp while turning the switch to the ON and OFF positions.
Is the spotlamp always illuminated?
Yes INSTALL a new spotlamp.

REFER to: Spot Lamp (100-05 Police Equipment, Removal and Installation).
No VERIFY BCM fuse 98 (20A) is OK. If OK, GO to A2 If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams
A2
CHECK THE SPOTLAMP VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Inoperative LH Spotlamp C3657 or RH Spotlamp C3658.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

LH Spotlamp

C3657-2 Ground

RH Spotlamp
m
C3658-2 Ground
co
.
gn
Yes INSPECT the spotlamp mounting for a loose or corroded condition. If no condition is found, INSTALL
a new spotlamp.
REFER to: Spot Lamp (100-05 Police Equipment, Removal and Installation).
ia

rd
ca
All Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) Are Inoperative
Possible Sources
Fuse(s)
Control head
Lighting relay center
Lighting and siren control module
VERIFY BJB fuse 89 (20A) is OK.

VERIFY the lighting relay center or lighting and siren control module main power fuses are OK.
VERIFY the lighting relay center or lighting and siren control module 10A output fuses are OK.
Check for stuck or broken buttons on the control head.
PINPOINT TEST B : ALL FLASHING LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LEDS) ARE INOPERATIVE
B1
CHECK THE LIGHTING CONTROL VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Inline C4808A.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C4808A-1 Ground
Yes GO to B2
No VERIFY BJB fuse 89 (20A) is OK. If OK, INSTALL the fuse and GO to B3 If not OK, REFER to the
m
Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
B2
CHECK THE LIGHTING CONTROL GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure:
. co
gn
C4808A-1 C4808A-10
ia
rd

ca
Yes VERIFY the lighting and siren control module (if equipped) main power fuses in the lighting relay
center or lighting and siren control module 10A output fuses are OK.
If OK, GO to B4
If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
B3
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: BJB C1035C.
Measure:

C4808A-1 C1035C-7
B4
CHECK THE CONTROL HEAD
Replace the suspect control head with a known good control head.
Yes INSTALL a new communication cable between the control head and the lighting relay center or
lighting and siren control module. TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern returns, GO
to B5
No INSTALL a new control head.
m
B5
CHECK FOR CORRECT LIGHTING CONTROL OPERATION
For vehicles with lighting and siren control, disconnect and inspect all the lighting and siren control module
connectors and jumpers.
co
For vehicles with lighting control only, disconnect and inspect all the lighting relay center connectors and jumpers.
.
Repair:
gn
ia
For vehicles with lighting and siren control, reconnect all the lighting and siren control module connectors and
jumpers and all previously disconnected exterior system connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
rd
For vehicles with lighting control only, reconnect the lighting relay center connectors and all previously
disconnected exterior system connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
ca
(TSBs) address this concern, CONTACT Whelen Service/Diagnostics at 1-860-526-9504, extension
8308.
An Individual Or Group Of Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) Is Inoperative Or Always On
Possible Sources
Fuse
Flashing LED
Control head
Check for stuck or broken buttons on the control head.
PINPOINT TEST C : AN INDIVIDUAL OR GROUP OF FLASHING LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LEDS) IS INOPERATIVE
OR ALWAYS ON
C1
Ignition ON.
Activate and observe all the flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
m
Is only an individual flashing LED inoperative?
Yes For a front park/turn/WARN LED concern, GO to Pinpoint Test E
For a high mount or liftgate flashing LED, GO to C4

co
For a grille, front side marker, exterior mirror or front auxiliary flashing LED, GO to C2
For a rear lamp or rear quarter glass flashing LED, CHECK the flashing LED jumper harness
.
between the vehicle harness and the flashing LED for open circuits and damaged or pushed-out
gn
pins. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new flashing LED. REFER to the appropriate
procedure in this section.
For rear lamp or rear quarter glass flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), GO to C4
No If both the LH rear lamp and the LH rear quarter glass flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) or both
ia
the RH rear lamp and the RH rear quarter glass flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are
inoperative, GO to C4
rd
For all other inoperative flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), GO to C6

For flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) always on, GO to C7
ca
C2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE FRONT FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Inoperative Flashing LED.
Ignition ON.
Activate the suspect flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Measure:

LH Grill Flashing LED

C1826-1 Ground

RH Grill Flashing LED

C1827-1 Ground

LH Side Marker Flashing LED

C1852-1 Ground
m

RH Side Marker Flashing LED
Positive Lead
co
.
Negative Lead
C1853-1 Ground
gn
ia

rd

LH Auxiliary Flashing LED
ca

C1705-1 Ground

RH Auxiliary Flashing LED

C1707-1 Ground

LH Exterior Mirror Flashing LED

C598-1 Ground

RH Exterior Mirror Flashing LED

C698-1 Ground
Yes GO to C3
m
C3
CHECK FOR GROUND TO THE FRONT FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
Measure:

. co
gn


ia
C1826-1 C1826-4
rd
ca


C1827-1 C1827-4


C1852-1 C1852-4


C1853-1 C1853-4


C1705-1 C1705-4
m

Positive Lead
co
.
Negative Lead
C1707-1 C1707-4
gn
ia

rd

ca

C598-1 C598-4


C698-1 C698-4
Yes INSTALL a new flashing LED. REFER to the appropriate procedure in this section.

C4
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE REAR FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: For High Mount and Liftgate Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), Inoperative Flashing LED.
Disconnect: For Rear and Quarter Glass Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), Inoperative LH Rear Lamp and
Quarter Glass Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) C4412 or RH Rear Lamp and Quarter Glass Flashing Light
Emitting Diodes (LEDs) C4413.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

LH High Mount Flashing LED

C4809-1 Ground
m
. co

RH High Mount Flashing LED
gn

ia
C4810-1 Ground
rd

ca

LH Liftgate Flashing LED

C4811-1 Ground

RH Liftgate Flashing LED

C4812-1 Ground

LH Rear Lamp and Quarter Glass Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

C4412-1 Ground

RH Rear Lamp and Quarter Glass Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

C4413-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to C5
No REPAIR the circuit. . co
C5
CHECK FOR GROUND TO THE REAR FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
gn
Measure:

ia

rd

C4809-1 C4809-4
ca


C4810-1 C4810-4


C4811-1 C4811-4


C4812-1 C4812-4


C4412-1 C4412-4
m
Click to display connectors co

.
gn

C4413-1 C4413-4
ia
rd

ca
C6
CHECK THE FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) ZONE VOLTAGE FEED CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Lighting/Siren Control Module C4808A.
Connect a fused jumper:

For Park/Turn/WARN Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

C4808A-2 C4808A-1

For Grill Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

C4808A-3 C4808A-1

For High Mount and Liftgate Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

C4808A-7 C4808A-1
m
co

For Side Marker, Exterior Mirror, Rear Lamp and Quarter Glass Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
Positive Lead Measurement / Action

.
Negative Lead
gn
C4808A-8 C4808A-1
ia
Do the suspect flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) operate?

rd
Yes REMOVE the jumper wire. Verify the lighting relay center or lighting and siren control module 10A
output fuses are OK.
ca
If OK, GO to C8
No REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR the circuit.
C7
CHECK THE FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) ZONE VOLTAGE FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Measure:


C4808A-2 Ground


C4808A-3 Ground


C4808A-7 Ground
m
co

.
gn
C4808A-8 Ground
ia

rd

ca
No GO to C8
C8
to C9
C9
Repair:
8308.
m
co
An Individual Or Group Of Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) Do Not Synchronize Correctly Or Display An
Incorrect Pattern
.
gn

ia
rd
Possible Sources
ca

Flashing LED
PINPOINT TEST D : AN INDIVIDUAL OR GROUP OF FLASHING LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LEDS) DO NOT
SYNCHRONIZE CORRECTLY OR DISPLAY AN INCORRECT PATTERN
D1
Ignition ON.
Activate and observe all the flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Does the suspect flashing LED or Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) display the same pattern as the others in the
group?
Yes For a front park/turn/WARN LED concern, GO to Pinpoint Test E

For a grille, front side marker, exterior mirror or front auxiliary flashing LED, GO to D2
For a high mount or liftgate flashing LED, GO to D4
For a rear lamp or rear quarter glass flashing LED, CHECK the flashing LED jumper harness
between the vehicle harness and the flashing LED for open circuits and damaged or pushed-out
pins. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new flashing LED. REFER to the appropriate
procedure in this section.
For rear lamp or rear quarter glass flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), GO to D4
No If both the LH rear lamp and the LH rear quarter glass flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) or both
the RH rear lamp and the RH rear quarter glass flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are
inoperative, GO to D4
For all other inoperative flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), GO to D6
For flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) always on, GO to D7
D2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE FRONT FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Inoperative Flashing LED.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

m
C1826-1 Ground
. co
gn

ia

C1827-1 Ground
rd
ca


C1852-1 Ground


C1853-1 Ground


C1705-1 Ground


C1707-1 Ground
m

co
.
gn
C598-1 Ground
ia

rd

ca

C698-1 Ground
Yes GO to D3
D3
CHECK FOR GROUND TO THE FRONT FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
Measure:


C1826-1 C1826-4


C1827-1 C1827-4

m
C1852-1 C1852-4
. co
gn

ia

C1853-1 C1853-4
rd
ca


C1705-1 C1705-4


C1707-1 C1707-4


C598-1 C598-4


C698-1 C698-4
m

. co
gn
D4
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE REAR FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
Ignition OFF.
ia
Disconnect: For High Mount and Liftgate Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), Inoperative Flashing LED.
Disconnect: For Rear and Quarter Glass Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), Inoperative LH Rear Lamp and
rd
Quarter Glass Flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) C4412 or RH Rear Lamp and Quarter Glass Flashing Light
Emitting Diodes (LEDs) C4413.
Ignition ON.
ca
Measure:


C4809-1 Ground


C4810-1 Ground


C4811-1 Ground

m
C4812-1 Ground

. co
gn


ia
C4412-1 Ground
rd
ca


C4413-1 Ground
Yes GO to D5
D5
CHECK FOR GROUND TO THE REAR FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
Measure:


C4809-1 C4809-4


C4810-1 C4810-4
m

C4811-1
Positive Lead
. co
C4811-4
gn

ia

rd

ca
C4812-1 C4812-4


C4412-1 C4412-4


C4413-1 C4413-4
D6
CHECK THE FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) ZONE VOLTAGE FEED CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.

m
C4808A-2
. co C4808A-1
gn

ia

rd
C4808A-3 C4808A-1
ca


C4808A-7 C4808A-1


C4808A-8 C4808A-1
Do the suspect flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) operate?
Yes REMOVE the jumper wire. Verify the lighting relay center or lighting and siren control module 10A
output fuses are OK.
If OK, GO to D8
D7
CHECK THE FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) ZONE VOLTAGE FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m

Positive Lead
C4808A-2
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia

rd

C4808A-3 Ground
ca


C4808A-7 Ground


C4808A-8 Ground
No GO to D8
D8
to D9
m
D9
CHECK FOR CORRECT LIGHTING CONTROL OPERATION co
.
gn
Repair:
ia

rd
ca
8308.
The Front Park/Turn/WARN Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) Are Inoperative Or Do Not Operate Correctly

Possible Sources
Fuse
Flashing LED
Control head
PINPOINT TEST E : THE FRONT PARK/TURN/WARN LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LEDS) ARE INOPERATIVE OR DO
NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
E1
CHECK THE FLASHING LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LEDS)
Ignition ON.
m
Activate and observe the park/turn/WARN flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Deactivate and observe the park/turn/WARN flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Is only an individual park/turn/WARN flashing LED inoperative?

. co
Yes GO to E7
gn
No If both park/turn/WARN flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are inoperative, GO to E2

If the park/turn/WARN flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) are not synchronized properly, REPAIR
the flashing LED synchronization circuit between the LH and RH park/turn/WARN flashing Light
ia
Emitting Diodes (LEDs).

If one park/turn/WARN flashing LED is always on, GO to E10
rd
If the park/turn/WARN function is always on, GO to E11

ca
E2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE WARN MODULE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: WARN Module C1830.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C1830-5 Ground
Yes GO to E3
E3
CHECK THE WARN MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure:

C1830-5 C1830-8
Yes GO to E4
E4
CHECK FOR CONTROL VOLTAGE TO THE WARN MODULE
Activate the park/turn/WARN flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
m
Measure:

Positive Lead
C1830-1
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia
Yes CHECK the WARN module jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the WARN module for
open or shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a
rd
new WARN module. If the jumper harness is not OK, REPAIR or INSTALL a new jumper harness.
No Verify the lighting relay center or lighting and siren control module 10A output fuses are OK.
If OK, GO to E5
ca
E5
CHECK THE WARN MODULE CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1830-1 Ground
Yes GO to E6
E6
CHECK THE WARN MODULE CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C1830-1 C4808A-2
Yes GO to E12
E7
CHECK FOR GROUND TO THE FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE)
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Inoperative LH Park/Turn/WARN Flashing LED C1706 or RH Park/Turn/WARN Flashing LED C1708.
Measure:

. co
gn

LH Park/Turn/WARN Flashing LED

ia
C1706-4 Ground
rd
ca

RH Park/Turn/WARN Flashing LED

C1708-4 Ground
Yes GO to E8
E8 CHECK THE FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) VOLTAGE FEED CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:


C1706-2 Ground


C1708-2 Ground
m
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms? co
Yes GO to E9
.
gn
ia
E9
CHECK THE FLASHING LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) VOLTAGE FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
rd

ca


C1706-2 Ground


C1708-2 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new park/turn/WARN flashing LED.

REFER to: Front Park/Turn/Warn Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps (100-05 Police Equipment,
E10
CHECK THE WARN MODULE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Is the suspect park/turn/WARN flashing LED still on?
Yes REPAIR the circuit in question for a short to voltage.
No INSTALL a new park/turn/WARN flashing LED.

REFER to: Front Park/Turn/Warn Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps (100-05 Police Equipment,
m
E11
CHECK THE WARN MODULE CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ia

rd
C1830-1 Ground
ca
No GO to E12
E12
to E13
E13
Repair:
m
No
8308.
co
.
gn
The Wig-Wag Function Does Not Operate The High Beams Correctly
ia
rd

ca
Possible Sources
Fuse(s)
Wig-Wag module
Control head
VERIFY BJB fuse 89 (20A) is OK.
PINPOINT TEST F : THE WIG-WAG FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE THE HIGH BEAMS CORRECTLY
F1
VERIFY THE WIG-WAG OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Activate the high beam wig-wag function and observe the high beams.
Deactivate the high beam wig-wag function and observe the high beams.
Is the wig-wag function always on?
Yes GO to F9
No GO to F2
F2
VERIFY THE HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS ON position.
Place the LH steering column multifunction switch in the HIGH BEAM position while observing the headlamps.
Place the LH steering column multifunction switch in the LOW BEAM position while observing the headlamps.
Do the high beam headlamps illuminate correctly?
Yes GO to F3
m
No
F3
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE WIG-WAG MODULE
. co
gn
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Wig-Wag Module C1824.
Ignition ON.
ia
Measure:
rd

ca
C1824-5 Ground
Yes GO to F4
No VERIFY BJB fuse 89 (20A) is OK. If OK, INSTALL the fuse and REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
F4
CHECK THE WIG-WAG HIGH BEAM VOLTAGE FEED CIRCUIT

LH Wig-Wag

C1824-2 C1824-5

RH Wig-Wag

C1824-3 C1824-5
Does the suspect high beam operate?
Yes REMOVE the jumper wire. GO to F5
m
F5
CHECK THE WIG-WAG MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure:

. co
gn
C1824-5 C1824-8
ia

rd
Yes GO to F6
ca
F6
CHECK FOR CONTROL VOLTAGE TO THE WIG-WAG MODULE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Activate the high beam wig-wag function.
Measure:

C1824-1 Ground

Yes CHECK the wig-wag jumper harness between the vehicle harness and the wig-wag module for open
or shorted circuits and damaged or pushed-out pins. If the jumper harness is OK, INSTALL a new
wig-wag module. If the jumper harness is not OK, REPAIR or INSTALL a new jumper harness.
No Verify the lighting relay center or lighting and siren control module 10A output fuses are OK.
If OK, GO to F7
F7
CHECK THE WIG-WAG MODULE CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C1824-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to F8
. co
gn
F8
CHECK THE WIG-WAG MODULE CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
ia

rd

C1824-1 C4808A-2
ca
Yes GO to F10
F9
CHECK THE WIG-WAG MODULE CONTROL VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C1824-1 Ground
No GO to F10
F10
m
to F11
F11
. co
gn
ia
Repair:
rd

ca
8308.
The Siren Speaker Is Inoperative

Possible Sources
Fuse
Siren speaker
Control head
VERIFY the lighting and siren control module 20A siren fuse is OK.
PINPOINT TEST G : THE SIREN SPEAKER IS INOPERATIVE

G1
CHECK THE SIREN SPEAKER FUNCTIONALITY
Ignition ON.
m
Activate the siren.
Deactivate the siren and use the loudspeaker function.
Are both the siren and loudspeaker functions inoperative?

. co
Yes VERIFY the lighting and siren control module 20A siren fuse is OK. If OK, GO to G3 If not OK,
gn
REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
No If the loudspeaker function is inoperative and the siren function operates normally, GO to G2
If the siren function is inoperative and the loudspeaker function operates normally, GO to G6
ia
rd
G2
CHECK THE MICROPHONE
Test the loudspeaker function with a known good microphone.
ca
Does the loudspeaker system operate?
Yes INSTALL a new microphone.
No GO to G6
G3
CHECK THE MODULE OPERATION
Activate the siren.
Listen to the lighting and siren control module.
Does the lighting and siren control module make any audible siren sound?
Yes GO to G4
No GO to G6
G4
CHECK SIREN SPEAKER INPUT
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Siren Speaker C1471.
Ignition ON.
Activate the siren.
Measure:

C1471-1 C1471-4
Is AC voltage present?
Yes INSTALL a new siren speaker.

REFER to: Siren Speaker (100-05 Police Equipment, Removal and Installation).
m
No GO to G5
G5
CHECK SIREN SPEAKER INPUT
Disconnect: Lighting/Siren Control Module C4808B.
. co
gn
Measure:

ia
C1471-1 C4808B-1
C1471-4 C4808B-2
rd
ca
Yes Verify the lighting and siren control module 20A siren fuse is OK.
If OK, GO to G6
G6
Disconnect and inspect all the lighting and siren control module connectors and jumpers.
Repair:
Reconnect all the lighting and siren control module connectors and jumpers and all previously disconnected
exterior system connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
8308.
The Steering Wheel Auxiliary Controls Are Inoperative Or Do Not Operate Correctly
m

co
.
gn

ia

rd
B1457:11 Auxiliary Switch 1: A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects a short to
Circuit Short To ground on the AUX 1/AUX 2 steering wheel auxiliary control switch input circuit.
Ground
ca
Circuit Short To voltage or an open on the AUX 1/ AUX 2 steering wheel auxiliary control switch input circuit.
Battery or Open
B1457:23 Auxiliary Switch 1: An on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects the AUX 1 steering wheel auxiliary
Signal Stuck Low control switch is detected as being pressed for 2 consecutive minutes.
Circuit Short To ground on the AUX 3/AUX 4 steering wheel auxiliary control switch input circuit.
Ground
Circuit Short To voltage or an open on the AUX 3/ AUX 4 steering wheel auxiliary control switch input circuit.
Battery or Open
B145A:23 Auxiliary Switch 4: An on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects the AUX 4 steering wheel auxiliary
B146B:12 Auxiliary Output 1: A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects a short to
Circuit Short To voltage on the auxiliary output 1 circuit.
Battery
B146B:19 Auxiliary Output 1: A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects a excessive
Circuit Current current draw on the auxiliary output 1 circuit.
Above Threshold
B146C:12 Auxiliary Output 2: A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects a short to
Battery
B146C:19 Auxiliary Output 2: A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects a excessive
Above Threshold
B146D:12 Auxiliary Output 3: A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects a short to
Battery
B146D:19 Auxiliary Output 3: A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects a excessive
Above Threshold
B146E:12 Auxiliary Output 4: A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects a short to
Battery
B146E:19 Auxiliary Output 4: A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the GFM detects a excessive
m
Above Threshold
U1000:00 Solid State Driver This DTC sets when the GFM has temporarily shut down the output driver. The module has
Protection Active - temporarily disabled an output because an excessive current draw exists (such as a short to
Driver Disabled:
No Sub Type
Information
co
ground). The GFM cannot enable the output until the cause of the short is corrected, the
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) have been cleared and a successful self-test is run.
.
U3000:49 Control Module: This DTC sets when the GFM has permanently shut down the output driver. The module has
gn
Internal Electronic permanently disabled an output because an excessive current draw fault (such as a short to
Failure ground) has exceeded the limits that the GFM can withstand. CORRECT the cause of the
excessive current draw before installing a new GFM.
ia
rd
Possible Sources

ca
GFM
PINPOINT TEST H : THE STEERING WHEEL AUXILIARY CONTROLS ARE INOPERATIVE OR DO NOT OPERATE
CORRECTLY
H1
CHECK FOR GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the GFM self-test.
Are GFM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) present?
Yes For DTC B1457:11 or B1459:11, GO to H2

For DTC B1457:15 or B1459:15, GO to H8
For DTC B146B:12, B146B:19, B146C:12, B146C:19, B146D:12, B146D:19, B146E:12 or B146E:19,
GO to H15
For DTC B1457:23, B1458:23, B1459:23 or B145A:23, button held too long may set the DTC.
ATTEMPT to clean buttons. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If
the code returns, INSTALL a new RH steering wheel switch.
No GO to H17
H2
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO THE RETURN CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: RH Steering Wheel Switch C2999.
Measure:

C2464-4 C2464-7
C2464-10 C2464-7
m
. co
Yes GO to H3
gn
No GO to H6
ia
H3
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:
rd

ca
C2464-4 Ground
C2464-10 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new RH steering wheel switch.

CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If the code returns, GO to H18
No GO to H4
H4
CHECK THE SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C2464-4 Ground
C2464-10 Ground
Yes GO to H5
m
Connect: SCCM C2414A.
. co
H5
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WHILE DISCONNECTING COMPONENTS
Connect: RH Steering Wheel Switch C2999.

gn
Measure:

ia

C2464-4 Ground
rd
C2464-10 Ground
ca
components if the measured resistance rises above 10,000 ohms.
RH Steering Wheel Switch C2999
Clockspring C218B (steering wheel harness)
Clockspring C218C
Did the resistance rise above 10,000 ohms?
Yes If the resistance increased when the steering wheel switch was disconnected, INSTALL a new RH
steering wheel switch.
If the resistance increased when the steering wheel harness was disconnected, REPAIR the steering
wheel harness.
If the resistance increased when the clockspring was disconnected, INSTALL a new clockspring.

H6
CHECK THE SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) FOR A SHORT
Measure:

C2464-4 C2464-7
C2464-10 C2464-7
m
. co
Yes GO to H7
gn
ia
H7
CHECK FOR A SHORT WHILE DISCONNECTING COMPONENTS
rd

ca
Measure:

C2464-4 C2464-7
C2464-10 C2464-7
Clockspring C218C
Did the resistance rise above 10,000 ohms?

Yes If the resistance increased when the steering wheel switch was disconnected, INSTALL a new RH
If the resistance increased when the steering wheel harness was disconnected, REPAIR the steering
wheel harness.
If the resistance increased when the clockspring was disconnected, INSTALL a new clockspring.

H8
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
m
Measure:
C2464-4
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
C2464-10 Ground
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to H9
No GO to H11
H9
CHECK THE SCCM (STEERING COLUMN CONTROL MODULE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2464-4 Ground
C2464-10 Ground
No GO to H10
H10
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE WHILE DISCONNECTING COMPONENTS
m
Measure:
C2464-4
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
C2464-10 Ground
gn
ia
rd
ca

Clockspring C218C
Yes INSTALL a new SCCM.

No If the voltage went away when the steering wheel switch was disconnected, INSTALL a new RH
If the voltage went away when the steering wheel harness was disconnected, REPAIR the steering
wheel harness.
If the voltage went away when the clockspring was disconnected, INSTALL a new clockspring.
H11
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C2464-4 C2999-4
C2464-10 C2999-7
C2464-7 C2999-1
m
. co
gn
Yes INSTALL a new RH steering wheel switch.
CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If the code returns, GO to H18
ia
No GO to H12
rd
H12
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL HARNESS CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
ca
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218B.
Measure:

C218B-12 C2999-4
C218B-5 C2999-7
C218B-13 C2999-1
Yes GO to H13
H13
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Clockspring C218C.
Measure:

C218B-12 C218C-2
C218B-5 C218C-3
m
C218B-13
. co C218C-4
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to H14

H14
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL SWITCH INSTRUMENT PANEL HARNESS CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2464-4 C2414A-10
C2464-10 C2414A-11
C2464-7 C2414A-12
Yes INSTALL a new SCCM.

H15
CHECK CUSTOMER INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
Ignition ON.
m
Disconnect all customer installed equipment controlled by the suspect auxiliary steering wheel switch output
(AUX1, AUX2, AUX3 or AUX4).
Ignition ON.
co
Using a diagnostic scan tool, CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs) and perform the GFM self-test.
.
gn
Does the GFM DTC return?
Yes For DTC B146B:12, B146C:12, B146D:12 or B146E:12, GO to H16

For DTC B146B:19, B146C:19, B146D:19 or B146E:19, GO to H17
ia
No DIAGNOSE the customer-installed equipment.

rd
H16
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL CONTROL GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR
ca
A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2464-3 Ground
C2464-5 Ground
C2464-9 Ground
C2464-11 Ground
No GO to H18
m
H17
CHECK THE STEERING WHEEL CONTROL GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR
AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
Disconnect: Inline C2238.
Ignition ON.
ia
Measure:

rd

C2464-3 C2238-2
ca
C2464-5 C2238-3
C2464-9 C2238-4
C2464-11 C2238-5
Yes GO to H18
H18
CHECK THE GFM (GENERIC FUNCTION MODULE) FOR CORRECT OPERATION
Disconnect and inspect the GFM and inline connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the GFM and inline connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
(TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new GFM.
REFER to: Generic Function Module (GFM) (100-05 Police Equipment, Removal and Installation).
No
co
.
gn
The Police Idle System Will Not Activate Or Is Always Active

ia
rd

ca


B1512:11 Police Idle Switch: Circuit A continuous memory DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to ground from
Short To Ground the police idle switch input circuit.
Possible Sources

Police idle switch (part of the center stack switch assembly)
BCM
PINPOINT TEST I : THE POLICE IDLE SYSTEM WILL NOT ACTIVATE OR IS ALWAYS ACTIVE
I1
CHECK FOR BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a scan tool, perform the BCM self-test.
Is DTC B1512:11 present?
Yes GO to I2
No GO to I4
I2
ISOLATE THE POLICE IDLE SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Center Stack Switch Assembly C2114.
Ignition ON.
Using a scan tool, clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and repeat the BCM self-test.
Is DTC B1512:11 retrieved again?
m
Yes GO to I3
No GO to I6 . co
I3
CHECK THE POLICE IDLE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
gn
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: BCM C2280E.

ia
Measure:
rd

C2114-7 Ground
ca
Yes GO to I7
I4
CHECK FOR A VOLTAGE SIGNAL TO THE POLICE IDLE SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Center Stack Switch Assembly C2114.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C2114-7 Ground
Yes GO to I5
No GO to I6
I5
CHECK THE POLICE IDLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C2114-7 C2114-1
m
Yes INSTALL a new center stack switch assembly. co

REFER to: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls,
.
gn
I6
CHECK THE POLICE IDLE SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ia
Ignition OFF.
rd
Disconnect: BCM C2280E.
Measure:
ca

C2114-7 C2280E-30
Yes GO to I7
I7
Disconnect and inspect all BCM and related inline connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the BCM and related inline connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Flasher Module
Removal
1. Remove the screws, disconnect the electrical connector and remove the flasher (warn) module.
m
. co
gn
ia
Installation
rd

ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Flasher Switch Pad
Removal
NOTE: Lighting and siren control module switch pad shown, lighting relay center switch pad similar.
NOTE: The switch pad is mounted by the individual police department and the mounting location will vary.
1. NOTE: The U-bracket is not shown due to individual police department installations.
Position the switch pad.

Release the switch pad from the U-bracket.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the switch pad.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer Procedure revision date:
Removal and Installation 04/11/2015
Flexplate
303-103 (T74P-6375-A)
T74P-77000-A
TKIT-2009TC-F
Removal
1. Remove the transmission.

Refer to: Transmission - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS) (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
m
2.
Install Special Service Tool: 303-103 (T74P-6375-A) Holding Tool, Flywheel.
Remove the bolts and the flexplate. . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTE: One of the 8 flexplate holes are offset so the flexplate can only be installed in one position.
Install the flexplate and the bolts.


m
2. Install the transmission.
co
.
gn
tool.
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-12 Instrument Panel and Console 2017 Explorer Procedure revision date:
Removal and Installation 05/6/2015
Floor Console
Removal
Front floor console
1. Place the selector lever to the full rearward position.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2.
ca
1. Position both front seats fully rearward.

2. Fully recline both front seats
m
3. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side simialr.
Remove the front floor console side trim panels.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. NOTE: Floor console upper finish panel shown removed for clarity.
Disconnect the shifter cable from the selector lever.

m
5. Disconnect the shifter cable from the front floor console bracket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Disconnect the electrical connectors, release the harness retainer and position aside the harness.
m
7. Detach the LH and RH carpet push pins from the front floor console.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. Remove the bolts and the floor console.

m
Front floor console: Police Vehicles
co
9. Release the clips, push pin and remove the lower instrument panel side panels.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
10. NOTE: Seats shown removed for clarity.
Remove the front console plate bolts and the front console plate.
m
Rear floor console
Fold and tilt the second row passenger seats forward.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. Remove the bolts and the rear floor console.

m
Rear floor console: Police vehicles
13. Remove the 2nd row seat. co

Refer to: Second Row Seat - Police (501-10B Second Row Seats, Removal and Installation).
.
14. Release the clips, push pin and remvoe the lower instrument panel side panels.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the front console plate bolts and the front console plate.
m

. co
Remove the rear console plate bolts and the front console plate.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
412-00 Climate Control System - General Information 2017 Explorer Procedure revision date:
General Procedures 08/24/2016
UV Leak Detector
Fluorescent Dye Injector
Activation
Fluorescent Dye Injection Using a R-134a Air Conditioning Service Unit and Dye Injector — Vehicles Requiring R-134a
Addition
NOTE: This method of fluorescent dye injection requires the addition of R-134a from a R-134a Air Conditioning Service Unit or
R-134a Manifold Gauge Set hooked to an external tank to charge the dye into the refrigerant system. If adding fluorescent dye
to a refrigerant system that is already fully charged, use the method R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector - Vehicles Not Requiring
R-134a Addition.
NOTE: Fluorescent refrigerant system dye is added to the refrigerant system at the factory to assist in refrigerant system leak
m
diagnosis using a Rotunda-approved UV lamp. It is not necessary to add additional dye to the refrigerant system before
diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of refrigerant has been removed from the system. Replacement suction
accumulators, receiver driers and receiver drier elements are shipped with a fluorescent dye wafer included in the desiccant
co
bag which dissolves after approximately 30 minutes of continuous A/C operation. It is not necessary to add dye after flushing
the refrigerant system because a new suction accumulator, receiver drier or receiver drier element is installed as part of the
flushing procedure.
.
NOTE: If the system has been out of refrigerant through the winter the dye at the leak point may have oxidized and may not
gn
fluoresce. If this happens, recharge and operate the A/C system to circulate the oil and allow any residual dye to show up at the
leak point. It is important to understand that dye adheres to the oil not the refrigerant; the refrigerant carries the oil out of the
leak point.
ia
NOTE: Before using the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector for the first time, refer to the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE: Only connect the dye/lubricant injector from the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector when fluorescent dye is to be injected.
rd
The dye/lubricant injector has a one-way check valve that prevents refrigerant system recovery and evacuation.
1. NOTE: If no R-134a pressure is present in the refrigerant system, evacuate the system before carrying out the injection
ca
procedure.
Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging procedure in Group
412.
2. Connect a R-134a Air Conditioning Service Unit or R-134a Air Conditioning Manifold Gauge Set to the refrigerant system
service port valves.
3. Verify the valves on the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector are closed.
219‐703710 A/C Refrigerant R134A Loop/Add On Injector Kit‐Set
Use the General Equipment: Fluorescent Dye Injector
4. Fill the R-134a fluorescent dye injector reservoir with 7.4 ml (0.25 fl oz) of fluorescent dye.
m
. co
gn
ia
5. Install the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector between the low-pressure service gauge port valve and the R-134a Air
rd
Conditioning Service Unit or R-134a Air Conditioning Manifold Gauge Set.
6. NOTE: Following fluorescent dye injection, the refrigerant system should be fully charged to make sure of correct
ca
movement of the dye. The dye moves with the oil not the refrigerant. The oil moves with the refrigerant.
Open all valves and inject the fluorescent dye into the refrigerant system by charging the refrigerant system with the
required amount of R-134a.
7. When fluorescent dye injection is complete, close all valves.
8. Recover the refrigerant from the dye/lubricant injector.
9. Remove the dye/lubricant injector from the low-pressure service gauge port valve and the R-134a Air Conditioning
Service Unit or R-134a Air Conditioning Manifold Gauge Set.
Fluorescent Dye Injection Using a R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector — Vehicles Not Requiring R-134a Addition
NOTE: Fluorescent refrigerant system dye is added to the refrigerant system at the factory to assist in refrigerant system leak
diagnosis using a Rotunda-approved UV lamp. It is not necessary to add additional dye to the refrigerant system before
diagnosing leaks, even if a significant amount of refrigerant has been removed from the system. Replacement suction
accumulators, receiver driers and receiver drier elements are shipped with a fluorescent dye wafer included in the desiccant
bag which dissolves after approximately 30 minutes of continuous A/C operation. It is not necessary to add dye after flushing
the refrigerant system because a new suction accumulator, receiver drier or receiver drier element is installed as part of the
flushing procedure.
leak point.
NOTE: Before using the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector for the first time, refer to the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE: Refrigerant system pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24° C (75° F) with the engine off and cool.
10. Verify the valves on the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector are closed.
219‐703710 A/C Refrigerant R134A Loop/Add On Injector Kit‐Set
Use the General Equipment: Fluorescent Dye Injector
m
co
11. Fill the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector reservoir with 7.4 ml (0.25 fl oz) of fluorescent dye.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. Install the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector between the high-pressure and low-pressure service gauge port valves.
13. NOTICE: Make sure all tools and hoses are clear of the engine cooling fan and drive belt before starting the
engine. Failure to keep tools and hoses clear from the engine cooling fan and drive belt results in damage to the
tools and/or vehicle.
With the A/C off, start the engine. Allow engine speed to stabilize below 1,000 rpm.
14. Set the A/C to the ON position.
15. Open the high-pressure service valve.

16. NOTE: To prevent pressure spike/liquid slug, slowly open the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector valves and inject the
fluorescent dye into the refrigerant system.
Open the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector valves and inject the fluorescent dye into the refrigerant system.
m
. co
gn
ia
17. Close the high-pressure service valve to allow the pressure inside the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector to equalize with
rd
the suction side of the refrigerant system.

ca
18. NOTE: Close the valves on the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector while the A/C compressor is operating.
Close the valves on the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector.

19. NOTE: Make sure all of the valves on the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector remain closed when not in use.
Disconnect the high-pressure and low-pressure service valves and remove the R-134a Fluorescent Dye Injector from the
vehicle.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a fluorescent dye installed in the refrigerant system from the
factory. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the fluorescent dye under a UV lamp. Since
more than one leak can exist, inspect each component, line and fitting in the refrigerant system for a leak.
m
NOTE: Use of dye-enhancing glasses or goggles greatly improves the detection of the dye under the UV lamp.
co
NOTE: Not all UV lamps will fluoresce the dye used in Ford vehicles. All Rotunda UV lamps are optimized to fluoresce the dye.
.
gn
leak point.
20. Check for leaks using a Rotunda-approved UV lamp and dye enhancing glasses.
ia
21. Inspect all components, lines and fittings of the refrigerant system.
22. After the leak(s) is repaired, remove any traces of fluorescent dye with a general purpose oil solvent.
rd
23. Verify the repair by running the vehicle for a short period of time and rechecking the area of the leak with a Rotunda-
approved UV lamp.
ca
UVU413025 UV Leak Detection Light U‐View

Use the General Equipment: UV Leak Detector

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
417-01 Exterior Lighting 2017 Explorer
Fog Lamps
DTC Chart: BCM

B1046:11 Front Fog GO to Pinpoint Test C
Lamp Control
Switch:
Circuit Short
To Ground
B1147:11 Left Front Fog GO to Pinpoint Test B
m
Lamps:
Circuit Short
To Ground
B1147:15 Left Front Fog
Lamps:
Circuit Short
co
If the fog lamp is inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test B
If the fog lamp is always on, GO to Pinpoint Test C
.
To Battery or
gn
Open
B1148:11 Right Front GO to Pinpoint Test B
Fog Lamps:
Circuit Short
ia
To Ground
B1148:15 Right Front If the fog lamp is inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test B
rd
Fog Lamps: If the fog lamp is always on, GO to Pinpoint Test C

Circuit Short
To Battery or
ca
Open
U1000:00 Solid State The module has temporarily disabled an output because an excessive current draw exists (such
Driver as a short to ground). The BCM cannot enable the output until the cause of the short is corrected.
Protection ADDRESS all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. After the cause of the concern is
Active -Driver corrected, CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. For additional
Disabled: No information on BCM Field Effect Transistor (FET) protection,
Sub Type REFER to: Module Controlled Functions - System Operation and Component Description (419-10
Information Multifunction Electronic Modules, Description and Operation).
U3000:49 Control The module has permanently disabled an output because an excessive current draw fault (such
Module: as a short to ground) has exceeded the limits that the BCM can withstand. The cause of the
Internal excessive current draw MUST be corrected before a new BCM is installed. ADDRESS all other
Electronic Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. After the cause of the concern is corrected,
Failure For additional information on
Click here to access Guided Routine (BCM). BCM
Field Effect Transistor (FET) protection,
REFER to: Module Controlled Functions - System Operation and Component Description (419-10
Multifunction Electronic Modules, Description and Operation).
All other -
BCM REFER to: Body Control Module (BCM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules) .
Diagnostic
Trouble
Codes
(DTCs)
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart: Fog Lamps

Symptom Chart

Module
Both front fog lamps are inoperative Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test A
m
An individual front fog lamp is Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test B
inoperative
The front fog lamps are on
continuously
. co
Refer to the Pinpoint Test GO to Pinpoint Test C
gn
Pinpoint Tests
Both Front Fog Lamps Are Inoperative

ia

rd

ca
Operation).
Possible Sources

Headlamp switch
Headlamps concern
BCM
PINPOINT TEST A : BOTH FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE

A1
CHECK THE LOW BEAM OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Place the headlamp switch in the HEADLAMPS then the OFF position.
Do the low beams operate correctly?

Yes GO to A2
No
A2
CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205.
Carry out the headlamp switch component test.

Does the headlamp switch pass the component test?
Yes GO to A3
No INSTALL a new headlamp switch.
REFER to: Headlamp Switch (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
m
A3
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) FOG LAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
gn
C205-14 C2280B-20
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to A4
A4
Repair:
An Individual Front Fog Lamp Is Inoperative
Operation).

m
B1147:11 Left Front Fog
Lamps: Circuit
Short To Ground
co
A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to
ground from the LH fog lamp output circuit.
.
B1147:15 Left Front Fog A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects an open from
gn
Lamps: Circuit the LH fog lamp output circuit.
Short To Battery or
Open
ia
B1148:11 Right Front Fog A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to
Lamps: Circuit ground from the RH fog lamp output circuit.
Short To Ground
rd
B1148:15 Right Front Fog A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects an open from
Lamps: Circuit the RH fog lamp output circuit.
Short To Battery or
ca
Open
U1000:00 Solid State Driver This DTC sets when the BCM has temporarily shut down the output driver. The module has
Protection Active - temporarily disabled an output because an excessive current draw exists (such as a short to
Driver Disabled: ground). The BCM cannot enable the output until the cause of the short is corrected, the
No Sub Type Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) have been cleared and a successful self-test is run.
Information
U3000:49 Control Module: This DTC sets when the BCM has permanently shut down the output driver. The module has
Internal Electronic permanently disabled an output because an excessive current draw fault (such as a short to
Failure ground) has exceeded the limits that the BCM can withstand. CORRECT the cause of the
excessive current draw before installing a new BCM.
Possible Sources
Bulb
BCM
Inspect the bulbs and make sure they are OK.

PINPOINT TEST B : AN INDIVIDUAL FRONT FOG LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
B1
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE FOG LAMP
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Inoperative LH Fog Lamp C152 or RH Fog Lamp C162.
Ignition ON.
Place the headlamp switch in the PARKLAMPS position and engage the fog lamp switch.
Measure:

LH Fog Lamp

C152-B Ground
m

RH Fog Lamp
Positive Lead
co
.
Negative Lead
gn
C162-B Ground
ia

rd
Yes GO to B3
No GO to B2
ca
B2
REPEAT THE ON-DEMAND SELF-TEST AND CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE FOG LAMP
Clear the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and repeat the self-test (required to enable the lamp output driver if
DTC U1000:00 is present).
Measure:

LH Fog Lamp

C152-B Ground

RH Fog Lamp

C162-B Ground
Yes INSTALL a new front fog lamp bulb.

REFER to: Front Fog Lamp Bulb (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
No GO to B4
B3
CHECK THE INOPERATIVE FOG LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
m

LH Fog Lamp
C152-B
Positive Lead
. co
C152-A
Negative Lead
gn
ia

RH Fog Lamp
rd

ca
C162-B C162-A
Yes INSTALL a new front fog lamp bulb.

REFER to: Front Fog Lamp Bulb (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
B4
CHECK FOG LAMP VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

LH Fog Lamp

C152-B Ground

RH Fog Lamp

C162-B Ground
m
Yes GO to B5
No REPAIR the circuit. After the repair:
co
If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present, TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC U1000:00 is present, CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and REPEAT the self-test
(required to enable the lamp output driver if DTC U1000:00 is present).
.
gn
If DTC U3000:49 is present,
ia
B5
CHECK FOG LAMP VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
rd

LH Fog Lamp
ca

C152-B C2280G-12

RH Fog Lamp

C162-B C2280G-5
Yes GO to B6
B6
Repair:

m
. co
The Front Fog Lamps Are On Continuously
gn

ia

rd
Operation).
ca


B1046:11 Front Fog Lamp Control Switch: A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to
Circuit Short To Ground ground on the headlamp switch input circuits.
B1147:15 Left Front Fog Lamps: Circuit A continuous memory and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects
Short To Battery or Open an open from the LH fog lamp output circuit.
B1148:15 Right Front Fog Lamps: Circuit A continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the BCM detects a short to
Short To Battery or Open voltage from the RH fog lamp beam output circuit.
Possible Sources

Headlamp switch
BCM

PINPOINT TEST C : THE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY

C1
CHECK THE HEADLAMP SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Headlamp Switch C205.
Carry out the headlamp switch component test.

Does the headlamp switch pass the component test?
Yes GO to C2
No INSTALL a new headlamp switch.
REFER to: Headlamp Switch (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Removal and Installation).
C2
CHECK THE FOG LAMP VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
m
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
. co
Do the fog lamps continue to illuminate?
gn
Yes REPAIR the circuits.
No GO to C3
ia
rd
C3
CHECK THE BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) FOG LAMP SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
ca
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C205-14 Ground
Yes GO to C4
C4
Repair:

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) Clutch Exploded View
m
. co
gn
ia
Item Description
1 Low One-Way Clutch (OWC) snap ring
rd
2 Low One-Way Clutch (OWC)

3 Forward clutch friction plates
ca
4 Forward clutch steel plates

5 Forward clutch waved cushion spring
6 Forward clutch piston snap ring
7 Forward clutch piston return spring
8 Forward clutch piston
9 Front sun gear and shell assembly
10 Transmission case
Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) Clutch Mechanical Operation
The forward clutch is a brake clutch that holds the front sun gear and shell assembly. The forward clutch is applied in 1st, 2nd,
3rd and 4th gear.
Hydraulic pressure from the regulator valve in the valve body pushes the forward clutch piston against the forward clutch pack
to apply the clutch. The forward clutch pack is pushed against the low One-Way Clutch (OWC) when it is applied. The rear sun
gear and shell assembly is held stationary to the transmission case as a result of the clutch being applied.
Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) Clutch Hydraulic Circuits (Applied in 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th Gear Above 8 km/h [5 mph])
m
When the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch is applied in 1st (above 8 km/h (5 mph), 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears, LINE pressure from the
pump is directed to the multiplex shift valve by the manual valve through the DRIVE 1 hydraulic circuit. The multiplex shift valve
co
supplies the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch regulator valve with pressure through the DRIVE 2, CB26FD/CB1234FD and CB1234
SUP hydraulic circuits. The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch regulator valve directs regulated pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch
through the CB1234 hydraulic circuit.
.
gn
Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) Clutch Hydraulic Circuits (Applied in LOW and 1st Gear Below 8 km/h [5 mph])
ia
rd
ca
When the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch is applied in LOW position and 1st gear below 8 km/h (5 mph), LINE pressure from the
pump is directed to the multiplex shift valve by the manual valve through the DRIVE 1 hydraulic circuit. The multiplex shift valve
directs the pressure to the multiplex manual valve through the REV DRIVE B circuit. The multiplex manual valve directs the
REV DRIVE B pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch regulator valve through the DRIVE B, CB26FD/CB1234FD and
CB1234 SUP circuits. SSA supplies varying solenoid pressure to the CB1234 clutch regulator and boost valves. As the CB1234
clutch regulator valve moves, it supplies the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and CB1234 boost valve with regulated line pressure
through the CB1234 circuit. The CB1234 boost valve directs the regulated line pressure to the opposite side of the regulator
valve through the CB1234 FDBK circuit for controlled forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch engagement.
For details on valve body hydraulic circuits and solenoid operation.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Description - System Operation and Component Description (307-01B
Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Description and Operation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Symptom Chart
Forward Clutch
For forward (1,2,3,4) clutch operation,

REFER to: Forward Clutch Assembly (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55,

Forward Clutch

Forward (1,2,3,4) Solenoid body CLEAN or INSTALL a new solenoid body filter screen.
m
clutch does not filter blocked to REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
apply SSA Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
SSA is INSTALL a new solenoid body.
mechanically
stuck OFF
co
REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
PERFORM the Transmission Strategy Download, REFER to: Transmission Strategy
Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission -
.
gn
Forward (1,2,3,4) REMOVE the main control valve body.
clutch regulator REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
valve stuck OFF Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
ia
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the forward (1,2,3,4) clutch regulator valve.
rd
ca
SSA SIG, REMOVE the main control valve body.

CB1234, CB1234 REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
SUP hydraulic Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
circuits DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the main control and separator plate passages for
blocked/leaking debris/blockage. REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic
Installation).
CLEAN as necessary.
CB1234 seal REMOVE the main control valve body,
leaking REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
INSPECT the CB1234 circuit seal between the main control valve body and the
transmission case for missing or damaged seal. INSTALL a new seal.
Front planetary INSPECT the sun gear and shell for wear and damage. INSTALL new components
sun gear and as necessary.
shell assembly REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Low One-Way INSPECT the low One-Way Clutch (OWC) snap ring for proper seating in case.
Clutch (OWC) REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
snap ring Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Overhaul).
Low One-Way DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the forward (1,2,3,4) clutch steel plates. INSTALL
Clutch new components as necessary.
(OWC)/Forward REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
(1,2,3,4) clutch Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Overhaul).
steel plate
Low One-Way DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the forward (1,2,3,4) clutch friction and steel plates.
Clutch INSTALL new components as necessary.
friction plates
Forward (1,2,3,4) INSTALL a new forward (1,2,3,4) clutch piston.
clutch piston seal REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
leakage. Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Overhaul).
Forward (1,2,3,4) Solenoid body INSTALL a new solenoid body filter screen.
clutch always filter seal REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
applied damaged at SSA Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
SSA INSTALL a new solenoid body.
mechanically REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
stuck ON Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
m
Forward (1,2,3,4) REMOVE the main control valve body,
valve stuck ON Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
co
.
gn
SSA SIG, REMOVE the main control valve body,
ia

circuits DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the main control valve body and separator plate
blocked/leaking passages for leakage. INSPECT the CB1234 check ball for blocked passage.
rd
CLEAN as necessary.
ca
Front planetary INSPECT the sun gear and shell for wear and damage. INSTALL new components
sun gear and necessary.
shell assembly REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Forward (1,2,3,4) DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the forward (1,2,3,4) clutch friction and steel plates.
clutch friction INSTALL new components as necessary.
plates REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Forward (1,2,3,4) INSPECT the return spring for proper installation and damage. INSTALL new
clutch piston components as necessary.
return spring REFER to: Transmission (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
Forward (1,2,3,4) Incorrect PERFORM the Transmission Strategy Download,
clutch Transmission REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-
delayed/soft/slipping Strategy Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, General Procedures).
apply programmed into
PCM
Solenoid body INSTALL a new solenoid body filter screen.
filter seal REFER to: Solenoid Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic
damaged at SSA Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
stuck Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
valve sticking Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
clutch boost valve REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
stuck ON Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the forward (1,2,3,4) clutch boost valve and
bias spring. REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission
- 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
m
SUP hydraulic
circuits
blocked/leaking
co
DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the main control valve body and separator plate
Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal
.
gn
and Installation).
CLEAN as necessary.
CB1234 seal REMOVE the main control valve body,
leaking REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
ia

INSPECT the CB1234 circuit seal between the main control valve body and the
transmission case for missing or damaged seal. INSTALL a new seal. REFER to:
rd

ca
Low One-Way DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the low One-Way Clutch (OWC)/forward (1,2,3,4)
Clutch clutch pressure plate. INSTALL new components as necessary.
pressure plate
Forward (1,2,3,4) Incorrect PERFORM the Transmission Strategy Download,
clutch harsh apply Transmission REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-
Strategy Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, General Procedures).
programmed into
PCM
sticking Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
valve sticking Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the forward (1,2,3,4) clutch regulator valve
Installation).
clutch boost valve REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed
DISASSEMBLE, CLEAN and INSPECT the forward (1,2,3,4) clutch boost valve and
bias spring. REFER to: Main Control Valve Body (307-01B Automatic Transmission
- 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, Removal and Installation).
m
circuits DISASSEMBLE and INSPECT the main control and separator plate passages for
blocked/leaking co
leakage. INSPECT CB1234 check ball for blocked passage. CLEAN as necessary.
.
gn
ia

rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Four-Wheel Drive Systems - Overview
NOTE: The AWD system may be referred to as a 4WD system or Active Torque Coupling (ATC) system in other service
information, owner literature, or messages located on the message center.
The AWD system consists of the following:
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)

Rear halfshafts
Driveshaft
AWD relay module
Rear Drive Unit (RDU)
Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid (integral to the Rear Drive Unit (RDU)
PCM for system control logic
The AWD system is an active system, which means it not only responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also
has the ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels before the slip occurs. The AWD system is active
all the time and requires no input from the operator.
m
The AWD system continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the torque distribution between the front
and rear wheels. During normal operation, most of the torque is delivered to the front wheels. If wheel slip between the front
and rear wheels is detected, the vehicle is under heavy acceleration or if the vehicle is in a handling event, the AWD system
co
increases the duty cycle to the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid. The ATC solenoid engages a pilot clutch in the Rear
Drive Unit (RDU) which in turn sets a ball ramp device in motion. The ball ramp device applies the main clutch pack in the RDU
and increases torque to the rear wheels as necessary. When the AWD system is functioning properly, there should be no
perceived speed difference between the front and rear axles when launching or driving the vehicle on any uniform surface.
.
Traction should be similar to a part time 4WD system operating in 4H (4X4 HIGH), but have no binding in turns.
gn
ia

AWD Gear Ratios
rd
Engine Rear Drive Unit (RDU) Gear Ratio Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
2.3L GTDI 2.58 0.38:1
ca
3.5L TiVCT/GTDI 2.92 0.34:1

3.7L TiVCT 2.92 0.34:1

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Four-Wheel Drive Systems - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram
m
. co
gn
ia
rd

PCM Module Network Input Messages
ca

Message Module
Vehicle yaw rate RCM The PCM uses lateral acceleration and yaw rate information for the four-wheel drive system
to determine percentage of torque to be transferred to the rear wheels.
Vehicle RCM Provides the AWD system with longitudinal acceleration data via the HS-CAN. Data is used
longitudinal by the PCM in determining AWD system operation.
acceleration
Vehicle lateral RCM Provides the AWD system with lateral acceleration data via the HS-CAN. Data is used by
acceleration the PCM in determining AWD system operation.
Wheel speed data ABS The PCM uses wheel speed information for the four-wheel drive system to determine
module percentage of torque to be transferred to the rear wheels.
Steering wheel ABS Provides the AWD system with steering wheel angle data via the HS-CAN. Data is used by
component angle module the PCM in determining AWD system operation.
ePRNDL mode IPC Provides the AWD system with gear selector mode via the HS-CAN. Data is used by the
PCM in determining AWD system operation.
Accelerator pedal PCM The PCM uses pedal information for the four-wheel drive system to determine percentage of
position torque to be transferred to the rear wheels.
Engine RPM PCM The PCM provides engine RPM data via the HS-CAN. Data is used by the AWD system to
help determine torque application.
Spare Tire And Mismatched Tire Sizes
If the spare tire is installed, the AWD system may disable automatically and enter FWD only mode to protect driveline
components. If the AWD systems detects 1 tire is 5% larger or smaller than the other tires, it may also disable the AWD system.
This condition may be indicated by AWD OFF message in the message center. If there is a AWD OFF message in the
message center from using the spare tire, this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road
tire and cycling the ignition OFF and ON. It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to FWD
or damage the AWD system. If this condition occurs, a DTC is set and a Check AWD message is displayed on the message
center.
AWD Control And Fault Indicators
The AWD system consists of a power transfer unit, driveshaft, front and rear halfshafts, AWD relay module, Rear Drive Unit
(RDU) with integral Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid, and includes the PCM for AWD control logic. Using inputs from
various module/systems, the PCM sends a command to the AWD relay module which controls the amount of torque sent to the
rear wheels by sending a PWM duty cycle to the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid. AWD system faults are be indicated
by a driveline icon indicator in the IPC or wrench light as well as the Check AWD message in the message center.
m
Heat Protection - Rear Drive Unit (RDU)
During aggressive on road driving, the AWD system may implement a heat protection mode to protect the AWD clutch from
co
damage. Without power transfer unit or Rear Drive Unit (RDU) temperature sensors, the PCM performs calculations to
determine the need for the heat protection mode. If the AWD system detects an overheat condition, it enters a locked mode. If
the heat in the Rear Drive Unit (RDU) continues to rise once in the locked mode, the PCM disables the Active Torque Coupling
(ATC) solenoid. This condition may be indicated by an AWD Temporarily Disabled message or AWD OFF message in the
.
message center. To resume normal operation, stop the vehicle in a safe location and turn the engine off for at least 10 minutes.
gn
After the engine is restarted and the AWD system has adequately cooled down, the AWD Temporarily Disabled message turns
off and normal AWD operation returns. In the event the engine is not stopped, the AWD Temporarily Disabled message turns
off when the system cools. Normal AWD operation returns once the message center displays AWD Restored or AWD OFF
message disappears.
ia
The utility police interceptor with a 3.5L GTDI engine may be equipped with an optional PTU cooling system. The PTU cooling
system consists of a PTU fluid pump and cooler. When PTU fluid temperature reaches 125° C (257° F) the cooling pump is
rd
activated and continues operating until the temperature reaches 100° C (212° F).
Heat Protection - Power Transfer Unit

ca
During excessive use or trailer towing the AWD system may implement a heat protection mode to protect the power transfer
unit from damage. Without power transfer unit temperature sensors, the PCM performs calculations to determine the need for
the heat protection mode. The AWD system reduces commanded torque only to situation deemed critical for minimal function.
Once the maximum temperature limit is reached, then FWD only is commanded and the AWD Temporarily Disabled or AWD
OFF message is displayed.
AWD Bar Code Identification
The AWD system on this vehicle uses a solenoid to control the Active Torque Coupling (ATC). Due to response rate differences
within the AWD hardware, the PCM must know the torque characterization of the ATC. This can be done by programming the
ATC bar code data into the PCM. The PCM uses this bar code information to match the clutch characteristics of the ATC
solenoid with the desired output torque. If the bar code information does not match the PCM information, driveline damage or
driveability concerns can occur. Therefore, if the PCM needs to be replaced, the new PCM needs to be configured with the
existing ATC solenoid bar code information. If the rear drive axle need to be replaced, the existing PCM needs to be configured
with the new ATC solenoid bar code information.
Automatic Torque Coupling Configuration Bar Code Label Location 2.3L, 3.5L/3.7L Engine
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

2.3L, 3.5L, 3.7L Engine
Item Description
1 Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid bar code label
Automatic Torque Coupling Configuration
NOTICE: If the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid bar code information is not correct, Rear Drive Unit (RDU)
damage or driveability concerns can occur.
NOTE: The 4-digit alpha numeric bar code is located on the label attached to the Rear Drive Unit (RDU).
Refer to: Active Torque Coupling Configuration (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, General Procedures).
AWD Drive Cycle
NOTE: Always drive the vehicle in a safe manner according to driving conditions and obey all traffic laws.
1. Carry out 3 accelerations from 0-48 km/h (0-30 mph) in a straight line.
Perform this procedure at low, medium and full accelerator pedal position.
Verify there is no perceived front wheel slip.
2. On dry pavement, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) in a fully locked turn.
Verify there is no driveline binding.
m
PCM
co
The PCM is the logic module for the four-wheel drive system. Multiple modules/system inputs are used for the four-wheel drive
system to determine the percentage of torque to be transferred to the rear wheels.
.
Power Transfer Unit
gn
The power transfer unit is a gearbox that attaches to the transmission. The power transfer unit directs power to the rear
driveshaft and the Rear Drive Unit (RDU). For more information on the power transfer unit,
ia
AWD Relay Module

rd
The AWD relay module receives the command from the PCM, and in turn supplies a PWM output to the Automatic Torque
Coupling (ATC) solenoid for the requested torque to be applied.
ca
Automatic Torque Coupling (ATC) Solenoid
The Automatic Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid is integral to the Rear Drive Unit (RDU), and applies clutch pressure as
controlled by the AWD relay module to increase or decrease torque to the rear wheels. The Rear Drive Unit (RDU) transfers
torque from the drive shaft to the rear wheels depending on the specific request from the FWD system module ( PCM). The
Rear Drive Unit (RDU) and Automatic Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid are serviced in Chassis, Driveline section.
Refer to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and Testing).
Based on road conditions, the driver selects what mode the system is in by moving the ATCM switch. The ATCM sends
information via the HS-CAN to the:
IPC
ABS Module
PCM
The AWD system adapts the responses of the vehicle’s engine, transmission, suspension and stability control systems to
match the demands of the terrain based on the ATCM switch positions:
NOTE: Cruise control is available only in Normal and Snow modes.
NOTE: Use Normal mode when towing a trailer.
Normal - This mode is for on-road conditions. If not already active, Normal should be selected before driving on surfaces
which are similar to a hard road surface. This mode should be selected once the need for a special mode has passed.
Grass/Gravel/Snow - This mode should be used where a firm surface is covered with loose or slippery material.
Surfaces covered in packed snow, ice, water, grass, gravel, or a thin coating of sand for example. For deep gravel, it is
recommended that the Sand mode is selected. If the vehicle is unable to gain traction in deep snow, switching traction
control off may help. Traction control should be switched on again as soon as the difficulty is overcome.
NOTE: The Mud/Ruts and Sand modes are for off-road use only.
Sand - This mode should be used for soft dry sand, or deep gravel terrain. If the sand to be crossed is damp/wet, and
sufficiently deep enough to cause the wheels to sink into the surface, the Mud/Ruts mode should be selected.
Mud/Ruts - This mode should be used for muddy, rutted, soft, or uneven terrain.
If the terrain management system becomes inoperable due to a system malfunction, all of the mode indicators on the control
turns off and the message center displays one of the these messages:
TERRAIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FAULT: If this message is displayed, cycling the key may clear the fault.
MODE CHANGE NOT ACCEPTED, RETRY: If this message is displayed, a vehicle system cannot support a mode
change at the time of driver request. Try the mode change again.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Four-Wheel Drive Systems
DTC Chart: AWD System - PCM
Network DTCs (U-codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as damaged wiring or low battery voltage occurrences. Additionally, vehicle repair
procedures, such as module reprogramming, often set network DTCs. Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is unlikely to resolve the concern. To prevent

DTC Chart - PCM

P164D AWD ID Block Corrupted, Not Programmed PROGRAM the PCM with the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid bar code information using
Automatic Torque Coupling Configuration.
REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems - System Operation and Component Description (308-07A Four-
Wheel Drive Systems, Description and Operation).
P181F Clutch Control System Performance This is an internal AWD relay module fault. INSTALL a new AWD relay module.
REFER to: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Module (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Removal and
m
Installation).
P182B Transfer Case Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B
Range/Performance
P182C Transfer Case Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B
Low
P182D Transfer Case Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B
High
. co
gn
P183D Transfer Case Fluid Over Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test G
P183F Driveline Cooling Pump Control Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test G
P187B Tire Size Out of Acceptable Range - AWD GO to Pinpoint Test C
Disabled / Limited Function
ia
P188B AWD Clutch Control Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test D

P188C AWD Relay Module Communication Circuit CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC returns, GO to Pinpoint Test E
rd
P188D AWD Relay Module Feedback Circuit CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC returns, GO to Pinpoint Test E
ca
DTC Chart: ATCM
Network DTCs (U-codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as damaged wiring or low battery voltage occurrences. Additionally, vehicle repair
procedures, such as module reprogramming, often set network DTCs. Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is unlikely to resolve the concern. To prevent

DTC Chart - PCM

B142F:67 Wheel Change Manager All Terrain System State: Signal CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC returns, INSTALL a new all terrain
Incorrect After Event setting control module.
C1A02:23 Rotary Encoder Stuck In Intermediate Position: Signal Stuck CLEAR the DTC. REPEAT the self-test. If the DTC returns, enter the ID located on the
Low RDU and program into the PCM.
Symptom Chart
In most circumstances, the PCM sets DTCs to help guide with diagnostics. Refer to the DTC Chart before using the symptom chart. The Symptom column lists the
vehicle condition. The Possible Sources column lists a detailed vehicle condition. The Action column lists the action to be performed to determine the cause of the
condition. Each action lists the components that can cause the system and the individual components in that system. The components are listed in order of
disassembly. Use the list of components and the required action to focus on disassembly inspections for the root cause of the concern.

Symptom Chart - Four-Wheel Drive Systems

Unable to duplicate customer concern; The concern description CARRY OUT the AWD System Functional Test. GO to Pinpoint Test A
no DTC present is inaccurate
Vehicle has no or inadequate torque at Fuse GO to Pinpoint Test D
rear wheels Wiring, terminals
or connectors
Active Torque
Coupling (ATC)
solenoid
AWD Relay
Module
PCM
Wheels/tires Check wheels and tires for damage.

REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04A Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and Testing).
Rear axle Check rear axle for damage.
REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and
Testing).
PTU mechanical failure Check PTU for damage.
m
REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Vehicle binds in a turn or resists Wheels/tires Check wheels and tires for damage.
turning/pulsates or shudders in a straight
line
Wiring, terminals or
connectors
Driveshaft
. co
REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04A Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and Testing).
REFER to: Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Diagnosis and Testing).

gn
Wiring, terminals GO to Pinpoint Test F
or connectors
Active Torque
Coupling (ATC)
solenoid
ia
AWD Relay
Module
rd
PTU mechanical failure Check PTU for damage.

REFER to: Power Transfer Unit (308-07C Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec
(209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Diagnosis and
Testing).
ca
Driveshaft Check the driveshaft for damage.

REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).
Wheel bearings Check the wheel bearings for damage.
REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).
ABS Check the ABS.
- Halfshafts Check the rear halfshafts for damage.
REFER to: Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Diagnosis and Testing).
Tire/axle out of acceptable range Wheels/tires GO to Pinpoint Test C
ABS
Pinpoint Tests
AWD System Functional Test
The AWD system is an active system, which means it not only responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the ability to anticipate wheel slip
and transfer torque to the rear wheels before the slip occurs. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator. The AWD system
continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the torque distribution between the front and rear wheels. During normal operation, most of the
torque is delivered to the front wheels. If wheel slip between the front and rear wheels is detected, if the vehicle is under acceleration or if the vehicle is in a handling
event, the AWD system increases and distributes torque to the rear wheels as needed. When the AWD system is functioning properly, there should be no perceived
speed difference between the front and rear axles when launching or driving the vehicle on any uniform surface. Traction should be similar to a part time 4WD system
in 4H (4X4 HIGH), but have no binding in turns.
Possible Sources
ABS sensor wiring
Constant velocity joints
Driveshaft
Halfshafts
Tire wear
U-joints
Visual Inspection and Pre-Checks
Inspect for uniform tire size
PINPOINT TEST A : AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL TEST
WARNING: When directed to drive the vehicle as part of this test, drive the vehicle on a hard surface in an area without traffic to prevent a
crash. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Check related modules for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). If Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are set in other modules, diagnose those
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first before continuing.
A1
CHECK FOR ACTIVE TORQUE COUPLING SOLENOID LOCK
Drive the vehicle on a dry, hard surface in turns while applying the accelerator pedal.
Is driveline wind-up present in turns?
Yes GO to Pinpoint Test F

No GO to A2
m
A2
CHECK PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) WHEEL SPEEDS
Using a scan tool, drive the vehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h) and monitor the following wheel speed sensor PIDs.
Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor (LF_WSPD)
Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (LR_WSPD)
Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor (RF_WSPD)
Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (RR_WSPD)
. co
Are all 4 wheel speeds within 1.2 mph (2 km/h) of each other?
gn
Yes GO to A3
No
ia
rd
A3
CHECK VEHICLE ACCELERATION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
Perform 3 accelerations from mph ( km/h) to 30 mph (48 km/h) in a straight line (1 each with low, medium and full accelerator pedal application).
ca
Does the vehicle pulsate or shudder while accelerating?

No GO to A4
A4
CHECK VEHICLE TURNING ABILITY
Drive the vehicle in a fully locked turn, on dry pavement, at 5 mph (8 km/h).
Does the vehicle bind in the turn or resist turning?

No GO to A5
A5
CHECK TORQUE AT THE REAR WHEELS
Using the diagnostic scan tool, energize the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid to a constant 90% applied.
On dry pavement, drive the vehicle in a fully locked turn at 5 mph (8 km/h).
Does the vehicle bind in the turn or resist turning?
Yes END the active command. CLEAR all DTCs if set. End of System Functional Test. The system is operating correctly at this time.
No CHECK the Power transfer unit (PTU).
REFER to: Power Transfer Unit (308-07C Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)/3.7L
DTC P182B, P182C, P182D
This transfer case oil temperature sensor is located in the PTU. It is a temperature-sensitive device called a thermistor. The resistance value of the sensor varies with
temperature change. The PCM monitors the voltage across the transfer case oil temperature sensor to determine the temperature of the PTU oil temperature.


P182B Transfer Case Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit The PCM is reporting the transfer case fluid temperature sensor has an in-range fault.
Range/Performance
P182C Transfer Case Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Low The PCM is reporting the transfer case fluid temperature sensor voltage has failed low, (low
voltage, high temperature).
P182D Transfer Case Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit High The PCM is reporting the transfer case fluid temperature sensor has failed high, (high voltage, low
temperature).
m
Possible Sources
Transfer case fluid temperature sensor

PCM
. co
gn
PINPOINT TEST B : P182B, P182C, P182D
B1
ia
Is DTC P182B, P182C and/or P182D present?
Yes GO to B2
rd
No
REFER to: Power Transfer Unit (308-07C Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)/3.7L Duratec
ca
B2
CHECK THE TRANSFER CASE FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect PTU C1831.
Inspect the connector for damaged or pushed-out terminals, corrosion, loose wires and missing or damaged seals.
Ignition ON.
For vehicles equipped with the 2.3L engine, measure:

C1831-1 Ground
For vehicles equipped with the 3.5L GTDI, 3.5L/3.7L TiVCT engines, measure:

C1834-1 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 4.1 volts?

Yes GO to B3
No GO to B4
B3
CHECK THE TRANSFER CASE FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN

C1831-1 C1831-2

C1834-1 C1834-2
Is the voltage greater than 4.1 volts?
Yes GO to B5
m
Ignition OFF.
. co
B4
CHECK THE TRANSFER CASE FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect PCM.
gn

ia
C1831-1 C1381-95
rd
For vehicles equipped with the 3.5L/3.7L TiVCT engines, measure:

ca

C1834-1 C175B-11
For vehicles equipped with the 3.5L GTDI engine, measure:

C1834-1 C1551B-95
Yes GO to B5
B5
CHECK THE TRANSFER CASE FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

C1831-1 Ground

C1834-1 Ground
Yes GO to B6
B6
CHECK THE TRANSFER CASE FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR RESISTANCE
Measure:

Action
m
. co
gn
Transfer Case Fluid Temperature Sensor Component side, pin 1

ia
rd
ca
Transfer Case Fluid Temperature Sensor Component side, pin 2
Temperature C Temperature F MIN Ohms MAX Ohms MIN Volts MAX Volts
-40 -40 2.541M 4.545M 4.96 4.98
-30 -22 1.367M 2.337M 4.93 4.96
-20 -4 766K 1.255M 4.87 4.92
-10 14 444.9K 701.4K 4.78 4.86
0 32 267.1K 406.2K 4.65 4.77
10 50 164K 241.2K 4.46 4.62
20 68 103.6K 147.8k 4.19 4.40
25 77 83.21K 116.9k 4.03 4.27
30 86 67.23K 116.9k 3.85 4.12
40 104 44.67K 93.12k 3.45 3.75
50 122 30.35K 60.22k 3.01 3.33
60 140 21.04K 39.88k 2.56 2.87
70 158 14.86K 26.99k 2.13 2.14
80 176 10.68K 18.64k 1.74 1.98
90 194 7.79K 13.11k 1.40 1.60
100 210 5,781 93.85k 1.12 1.27
110 230 4,345 5,038 0.89 1.01
120 248 3,308 3,771 0.71 0.79
130 266 2,549 2,859 0.57 0.63
140 284 1,987 2,194 0.45 0.49
150 302 1,565 1,703 0.36 0.39
Does the temperature to resistance specifications match?
Yes REPLACE the PCM.

Installation).
Installation).
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Removal and Installation).
PROGRAM the PCM with the latest calibration. PERFORM the Solenoid Body Strategy Data Download procedure.
REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01A Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35, General
Procedures).
REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, General
Procedures).
PROGRAM the PCM with the ATC solenoid bar code information,
REFER to: Active Torque Coupling Configuration (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, General Procedures).
m
PERFORM the AWD Drive Cycle.
No REPLACE the transfer case fluid temperature sensor.
DTC P187B
. co
gn
The AWD system uses input data from the ABS module wheel speed sensor inputs to the PCM. A dissimilar spare tire size (other than the spare tire provided) or
major dissimilar tire sizes or improperly inflated tires between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to malfunction.
ia
rd

ca

P187B Tire Size Out of Acceptable Range - When the PCM detects an inappropriate size wheels/tires (greater than 7% difference in size across the front and
AWD Disabled / Limited Function rear axle or greater than 14% difference in size at one wheel on either the front or rear axle) installed.
Possible Sources

Wheels/tires
PCM
ABS
Inspect for correct tire size and inflation.
PINPOINT TEST C : DTC P187B

C1
CHECK FOR RECENT DIFFERENT SIZED TIRE USAGE
Check with customer about recent tire changes or installation.
Was a tire recently installed on the vehicle that was not originally supplied with the vehicle or has the mini spare been used?
Yes The concern may have been caused by the previously mismatched tires. VERIFY the tires do not exceed Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) recommendations and all 4 tires are the same size.
No GO to C2
C2
CHECK TIRE SIZE AND BRAND
Check the tire size and brand.
Are all 4 tires the same size and brand?
Yes GO to C3
No Tire size should not exceed Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) recommendations and all 4 tires should be the same size and
brand. INSTALL new tire(s) as necessary.
C3
CHECK TIRE AIR PRESSURES
Check the air pressure in all 4 tires.
Are all 4 tires at the recommended air pressure?
Yes GO to C4
No ADJUST tire air pressures to specifications.
C4
CHECK PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) WHEEL SPEEDS
Drive the vehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), monitor the following wheel speed sensor PIDs:
m
Yes
No
GO to C5
The ABS module is sending invalid wheel speed data to the PCM,
. co
gn
C5
CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM (POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE) AND AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) SYSTEM OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
ia
Disconnect all PCM, AWD relay module, and Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid connectors.
Check for the following:

rd

ca
Reconnect all PCM, AWD relay module, and Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Yes CHECK OASIS for any applicable TSBs. If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test and FOLLOW TSB instructions. If
no TSBs address this concern. REPLACE the PCM.
Installation).
Installation).
Installation).
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Removal and
Installation).
Procedures).
REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55,
PROGRAM the PCM with the ATC solenoid bar code information.
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by module connections. Address the root cause of
any connector or pin issues.
DTC P188B
The AWD system uses data from other systems as inputs to the PCM. The PCM uses the inputs to determine the appropriate time to send a signal and have the AWD
relay module energize the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid.


P188B AWD Clutch Control When the PCM detects an open, a short to ground or voltage on the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid voltage supply and/or
Circuit return circuit.
Possible Sources

Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid
AWD relay module
PCM
m
Active torque coupling (ATC) solenoid harness
D1
CHECK THE ATC SOLENOID CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect AWD Relay Module C4379.
. co
PINPOINT TEST D : DTC P188B
Disconnect ATC Solenoid C4347.

gn
Inspect the connectors for damaged or pushed out terminals, corrosion, loose wires and missing or damaged seals.
Measure:
ia

C4379-5 C4347-1
rd
C4379-8 C4347-2
ca
Yes GO to D2
D2
CHECK THE ACTIVE TORQUE COUPLING SOLENOID CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C4379-5 Ground
C4379-8 Ground
Yes GO to D3
D3
CHECK THE ATC SOLENOID CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C4379-5 C4379-8
Yes GO to D4
D4
CHECK THE ATC SOLENOID CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO POWER
m
Ignition ON.
Measure:
C4379-5
C4379-8
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
ia
rd
Is any voltage detected?
Yes REPAIR the circuits.

ca
No GO to D5
D5
CHECK THE ATC SOLENOID
Ignition OFF.
Measure the component side resistance between.

Action
C4347-1
C4347-2
m
Is the resistance between 1 to 5 ohms?
Yes GO to D6
No INSTALL a new ATC solenoid. co

REFER to: Axle Assembly (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
.
gn
D6
Ignition OFF.
ia

rd

ca
Reconnect the PCM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Operate the system and verify the concern is still present
Yes CHECK OASIS for any applicable TSBs. If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test and FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no TSBs
address this concern, PCM.
Installation).
Installation).
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Removal and Installation).
Procedures).
REFER to: Transmission Strategy Download (307-01B Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55, General
Procedures).
AWD Information Circuits Fault

The AWD system uses data from other systems as inputs to the PCM. The PCM uses the inputs to determine the appropriate time to send a signal and have the AWD
relay module energize the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid.


P188C AWD Relay Module Communication Circuit This DTC sets when the PCM detects an open, a short to ground or voltage on the command circuit.
P188D AWD Relay Module Feedback Circuit This DTC sets when the PCM detects an open, a short to ground or voltage on the feedback circuit.
Possible Sources

AWD relay module
PCM
BJB fuse 3 (20A)
m
PINPOINT TEST E : AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) INFORMATION CIRCUITS FAULT
E1
CHECK THE AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) RELAY VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.

. co
NOTE: Fuse 3 (20A) protects multiple components. Check related systems that may be inoperative.
Inspect the connectors for damaged or pushed out terminals, corrosion, loose wires and missing or damaged seals.
gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ia

C4379-1 Ground
rd
ca
Yes GO to E2
No VERIFY BJB fuse 3 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the open circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify
possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs.
E2
CHECK THE AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) RELAY MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C4379-1 C4379-4
Yes GO to E3
E3
CHECK THE AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) RELAY MODULE COMMAND AND FEEDBACK CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect PCM Connectors.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C4379-6 Ground
C4379-3 Ground

No GO to E4
E4
CHECK THE AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) RELAY MODULE COMMAND AND FEEDBACK CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:
m
C4379-6 Ground
C4379-3
. co Ground
gn
ia
Yes GO to E5
rd

ca
E5
CHECK THE AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) RELAY MODULE COMMAND AND FEEDBACK CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

For 2.3L

C4379-6 C1381B-46
C4379-3 C1381B-60

For 3.5L GTDI

C4379-6 C1551B-46
C4379-3 C1551B-60

For 3.5L/3.7L TiVCT

C4379-6 C175B-24
C4379-3 C175B-63
m
Yes GO to E6
Measure:
. co
E6
CHECK THE AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) RELAY MODULE COMMAND AND FEEDBACK CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
gn
C4379-6 C4379-3
ia
rd
Yes GO to E7

ca
E7
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect all PCM connectors.


REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems - System Operation and Component Description (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Description and
Operation).
and determine if the concern is still present.
Yes CHECK OASIS for any applicable TSBs. If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test and FOLLOW TSB instructions. If
no TSBs address this concern, INSTALL a new AWD relay module.
REFER to: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Module (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Removal and Installation).
CLEAR the DTCs. PERFORM the AWD Drive Cycle
REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems - System Operation and Component Description (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems,
If the DTC returns, INSTALL a new PCM.
Installation).
Installation).
Installation).
REFER to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Removal and
Installation).
Procedures).
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ADDRESS the
root cause of any connector or pin issues.
Vehicle Binds In A Turn Or Resists Turning/Pulsates Or Shudders In A Straight Line
The AWD system is an active system, which means it not only responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the ability to anticipate wheel slip
m
and transfer torque to the rear wheels before the slip occurs. The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator. The AWD system
continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the torque distribution between the front and rear wheels. During normal operation, most of the
torque is delivered to the front wheels. If wheel slip between the front and rear wheels is detected, if the vehicle is under acceleration or if the vehicle is in a handling
in 4H (4X4 HIGH), but have no binding in turns.
Possible Sources
. co
event, the AWD system increases and distributes torque to the rear wheels as needed. When the AWD system is functioning properly, there should be no perceived
speed difference between the front and rear axles when launching or driving the vehicle on any uniform surface. Traction should be similar to a part time 4WD system

gn
Wheels/tires
AWD relay module
ABS module
PCM
ia
Wheel speed sensor wiring harness

rd
PINPOINT TEST F : VEHICLE BINDS IN A TURN OR RESISTS TURNING/PULSATES OR SHUDDERS IN A STRAIGHT LINE
WARNING: When directed to drive the vehicle as part of this test, drive the vehicle on a hard surface in an area without traffic to prevent a
ca
crash. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.

F1
CHECK FOR TORQUE AT THE REAR WHEELS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid C4347.
Drive the vehicle in a straight line on dry pavement.
Is a pulsation or shudder still present?
Yes
REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and Testing).
No GO to F2
F2
MONITOR THE CLUTCH STATUS PID
Ignition OFF.
Connect Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid C4347.
Ignition ON.
Using the diagnostic scan tool, monitor the PID, AWD_CLTCH_CMD#.
Drive the vehicle at a constant 5 mph (8 km/h) in tight turns on dry pavement while monitoring the Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid duty cycle.
Is the duty cycle greater than 20%?
Yes GO to F3
No GO to Pinpoint Test C
F3
CHECK FOR THE CORRECT WHEEL SPEEDS
Drive the vehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), monitor the following wheel speed sensor PIDs:
Yes GO to F4
No GO to Pinpoint Test C
F4
CHECK FOR CORRECT AWD (ALL-WHEEL DRIVE) RELAY MODULE OPERATION
Disconnect Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid C4347.
m
Connect AWD Relay Module C4379.

co
Connect Active Torque Coupling (ATC) solenoid C4347 and make sure it seats correctly.

.
REFER to: Four-Wheel Drive Systems - System Operation and Component Description (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Description and
Operation).
gn
and determine if the concern is still present.

ia
Yes INSTALL a new AWD relay module.

REFER to: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Module (308-07A Four-Wheel Drive Systems, Removal and Installation).
rd
No The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or corroded connector. ADDRESS the
root cause of any connector or pin issues.
ca
P183D, P183F
The utility police interceptor with a 3.5L GTDI engine may be equipped with an optional power transfer unit (PTU) cooling system. The PTU cooling system consists of
a PTU gear oil pump, relay module, and a PTU cooler. When PTU gear oil temperature reaches 125° C (257° F) the cooling pump is activated and continues operating
until the temperature decreases to 100° C (212° F). If the PTU gear oil becomes contaminated with metal shavings it may restrict or even block the PTU cooler lines,
hoses or PTU cooler. Under this condition the PTU gear oil pump may appear to be operating but the gear oil may not be circulating.


P183D Transfer Case Fluid Over Temperature The PCM is reporting the PTU gear oil temperature has exceeded the operating temperature.
P183F Driveline Cooling Pump Control Circuit The PCM is reporting the PTU gear oil pump relay control circuit is shorted to ground or open.
Possible Sources
Fuses
PTU gear oil pump
Restricted PTU cooler, cooler lines or hoses.
PCM
Relay module
Fuses
PINPOINT TEST G : P183D, P183F

G1
NOTE: If DTCs P182B, P182C, P182D are present, diagnose them first.
Is DTC P183D or P183F present?
Yes For DTC P183F or if both DTCs are present, GO to G2 For DTC P183D only, GO to G5
No REFER to the symptom chart for further diagnosis,
G2
CHECK THE PTU GEAR OIL PUMP RELAY POWER CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect BJB C1035C.
m
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Positive Lead
. co
C1035C-13 Ground
gn

ia
Yes GO to G3
rd
No VERIFY BJB fuse 3 (10A), if the fuse is OK, REPAIR the open circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the
possible causes of the circuit short.
ca
G3
CHECK THE PTU GEAR OIL PUMP RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C1035C-16 C1551B-5
Yes GO to G4
G4
BYPASS THE PCM CONTROL FUNCTION
Connect BJB C1035C.
Ignition ON.
Jumper:

C1551B-5 Ground
Does the PTU gear oil pump operate when the jumper is connected and stop when the jumper is removed?

Installation).
No If the PTU gear oil pump runs all the time, repair the short to ground. If the PTU gear oil pump does not run, INSTALL a new relay
module.
G5
CARRY OUT THE PTU GEAR OIL PUMP ACTIVE COMMAND USING THE SCAN TOOL
Ignition OFF.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the PCM PIDs.
Select TRANCASE_PUMP, and COMMAND the PTU gear oil pump motor ON.
Does the PTU gear oil pump operate?
Yes GO to G6
m
No GO to G7
G6
CHECK THE PTU GEAR OIL PUMP OUTPUT
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect The PTU Gear Oil Pump Return Line .

. co
gn
Direct the PTU pump gear oil return hose into a clean container.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the PCM PIDS.

ia
Select TRANCASE_PUMP, and COMMAND the PTU gear oil pump motor ON.
rd
Does the PTU fluid pump operate and pump oil into the container?
Yes INSPECT the PTU gear oil for signs of metal contamination, if the PTU gear oil is contaminated with metal,
ca

RESOLVE any issues in the PTU and flush out the PTU cooler, lines and hoses. If the PTU gear oil is clean, road test the vehicle and
confirm the PTU gear oil pump activates when PTU gear oil temperature reaches 125° C (257° F) and continues operating until the
temperature decreases to 100° C (212° F). 211.9°F (100°C). No INSTALL a new PTU gear oil pump. INSPECT the PTU gear oil for
signs of metal contamination, if PTU gear oil is contaminated with metal, REFER to: Power Transfer Unit (308-07C Power Transfer
Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Diagnosis and Testing).
. RESOLVE any issues in the PTU and flush out the PTU cooler and lines.
No INSTALL a new PTU gear oil pump. INSPECT the PTU gear oil for signs of metal contamination, if PTU gear oil is contaminated with
metal,
. RESOLVE any issues in the PTU and flush out the PTU cooler, lines and hoses.
G7
CHECK THE PTU GEAR OIL PUMP CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
Disconnect PTU Gear Oil Pump C1717.
Select TRANCASE_PUMP, and COMMAND the PTU gear oil pump motor ON, measure:

C1717-1 Ground
C1717-2 Ground
Are both voltages 11 volts or greater?
Yes GO to G8
No GO to G9
G8
CHECK THE PTU GEAR OIL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure:

C1717-6 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new PTU gear oil pump.

m
G9
CHECK THE PTU GEAR OIL PUMP RELAY POWER FUSE
Ignition OFF.
CHECK BJB fuse 72 (20A).
Is the BJB fuse 72 (20A) OK?

. co
Yes GO to G10
gn
No GO to G11
ia
G10
CHECK PTU GEAR OIL PUMP MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect BJB C1035C.

rd
Measure:

ca

C1035C-4 C1717-1
Yes INSTALL a new relay module.

G11
TEST PTU GEAR OIL PUMP CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C1035C-4 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new relay module.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System 2017 Explorer
Frame Assembly - Overview
Overview
The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
aid in structural support.

provide mounting surfaces for the steering gear.
provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension lower control arms, the transmission roll restrictor and for the front
stabilizer bar.
The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
aid in structural support.

provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension lower arms and upper arms.
For body dimension specifications,

Refer to: Body and Frame (501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks, Description and
Operation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
413-13C Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist 2017 Explorer
Front Active Park Assist Sensors
Removal

2. Disconnect the front active park assist sensor electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3.
Remove the front active parking aid sensor.
ca

2. Remove the front active parking aid sensor.
m
Installation
2. Carry out the azimuth system check.

. co
Refer to: Azimuth System Check (413-13C Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist, General Procedures).
gn
3. If any sensor fails the checks, diagnose the sensor fault.
Refer to: Parking Aid (413-13C Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Active Park Assist, Diagnosis and Testing).
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Brake Flexible Hose
Materials
Name Specification
PM-20
Removal
NOTE: Make sure all openings are sealed.
m
hose installation and the brake caliper bleeding.

. co
2. NOTICE: Make sure to protect the brake pads from contamination from the brake fluid during the brake flexible
1. Detach the wheel speed sensor harness.

gn
2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting.
3. Remove the brake hose bracket bolt.
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and position the brake hose aside. Discard the washers.
m
Installation

2. Lubricate the brake caliper flow bolt threads and new washers with clean brake fluid before installing the brake caliper
.
flow bolt into the brake caliper.
gn
3. Bleed the brake system.

ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-19 Bumpers 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure revision date: 05/4/2015
Front Bumper Cover
DISASSEMBLY
All vehicles

2. Remove the front bumper reinforcement.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Disconnect the front bumper cover wiring harness connectors.

m
4. Separate the front bumper cover wiring harness retainers and remove the harness.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Vehicles equipped with foglamps
5. On both sides.
Remove the screws and the foglamp assembly.
m
All vehicles
6. On both sides.
Remove the rivets and the bumper cover bracket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the parking aid sensors.

m
8. Remove the active park assist sensors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Remove the clips, release the tabs and remove the radiator grille.
m
10. Remove the screws and the lower valence.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Release the tabs and remove the lower radiator grille.
m
12. Release the tabs and remove the front bumper trim panel.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
13. On both sides.

Drill out the rivets.
m
14. Release the tabs and remove the center front bumper cover.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
15. On both sides.

Remove the screw, release the tabs and remove the air duct.
m
ASSEMBLY
1. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.

co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Bumper Cover
Removal


m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. On both sides.
Remove the fender liner screws.
m
4. On both sides.
co
Position the front of the exterior fender moulding outward.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. On both sides.
Position the fender liner aside.
Remove the scrivets.
Position the front of the fender liner aside.
m
6. Disconnect the front bumper cover harness electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Disconnect the washer hose.

8. On both sides.
Remove the front bumper cover to fender bolts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Remove the pin-type retainers, the screws and the radiator sight shield.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Bumper
Removal

2. If equipped, remove the CCM and bracket assembly.

Refer to: Cruise Control Module (CCM) (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control, Removal and
Installation).
3. If equipped, remove the active grille shutters.

Refer to: Active Grille Shutter (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
4. NOTE: The front bumper beam is tack-welded to the vehicle body during vehicle assembly. It is not necessary to re-weld
for installation.
m
On both sides.
Remove the bolts and the front bumper.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. Restore corrosion protection to any bare metal components before installation.

2. On both sides.
Loosely install one bolt on eash side.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. On both sides.
Install the bolts and the front bumper.
m
. co
gn
ia
4. If equipped, install the active grille shutters.

rd
Refer to: Active Grille Shutter (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
5. If equipped, install the CCM and bracket assembly.

Refer to: Cruise Control Module (CCM) (419-03B Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Cruise Control, Removal and
ca
Installation).
6. Install the front bumper cover.


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
204-00 Suspension System - General Information 2017 Explorer
General Procedures
Front Camber Adjustment
Wheel Alignment System
Adjustment
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts that affect the performance of vital components and systems. Failure
of these fasteners may result in major service expense. Use the same or equivalent parts if replacement is necessary.
Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Tighten fasteners as specified.
NOTE: Before carrying out a camber adjustment, check the tires for the correct pressure. Inspect the tires for incorrect wear or
damage. Inspect the front suspension components for wear or damage.
1. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, measure the front camber.
Use the General Equipment: Wheel Alignment System
2. NOTE: The stabilizer bar links are designed with low friction ball joints that have a low breakaway torque.
m
NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link
nut.
co
Remove and discard the stabilizer bar link upper nut and disconnect the stabilizer bar link.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove and discard the upper strut mount nuts.

m
4. NOTE: Do not rotate the strut mount to any other position than 180 degrees from its original position, the notch (located
1. Push the upper strut mount downward.

. co
on top of the strut mount) must either point inward (towards the engine) or outward (towards the fender).
2. NOTE: When rotated 180 degrees from the original position, camber changes by 0.5 degrees.
gn
Rotate the strut mount 180 degrees.
ia
rd
ca
5. Position the upper strut mount.

m
6. Install the new upper strut mount nuts.
Torque: 46 lb.ft (62.5 Nm) . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. NOTE: The stabilizer bar links are designed with low friction ball joints that have a low breakaway torque.
NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Connect the stabilizer bar link and install the new stabilizer bar link upper nut.
m
8. Recheck the camber settings and adjust as necessary.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Without: SYNC
Front Control/Display Interface Module (FCDIM)
Removal
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the FCDIM following the on-screen instructions.
2. Remove the FCIM.

3.
Remove the bolts and the FCDIM.
Disconnect the electical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the FCDIM following the on-screen instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: 2017 Explorer
Touchscreen Display 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Removal
1. Release the clips and remove the instrument panel center finish panels.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2.
Remove the bolts, release the clips and remove the FCIMB.
m
3. NOTE: This step is only necessary when replacing the FCIMB.
co
Remove the retainers, release the clips and remove the center registers assembly from the FCIMB.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Without: SYNC
Removal
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the FCIMB following the on-screen instructions.
2. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.

Refer to: Instrument Panel Center Finish Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console, Removal and Installation).
3.
Remove the bolts and the FCIMB.
Disconnect the electical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the FCIMB following the on-screen instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Disc Brake
REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With:
Touchscreen Display
Removal
1. Remove the FCIMB.

Refer to: Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIMB) (415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General
Information - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display, Removal and Installation).
2.
Remove the bolts and the FDIM.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: This step is only necessary when replacing the FDIM.

Remove the screws and separate the APIM from the FDIM.
m
Installation
2. Calibrate the touchscreen.

. co
Refer to: Touchscreen Calibration (415-00C Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles
gn
With: Touchscreen Display, General Procedures).

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-03 Body Closures
General Procedures
Front Door Alignment
Inspection
1. Inspect the front door-to-body dimensions.

Operation).
Adjustment
All alignments
1. Open the door.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the bolts and the striker assembly.

Torque: 17 lb.ft (22.5 Nm)
m
Front door in and out, up and down alignment
3. Loosen the bolts to permit movement of the door.

Loosen:
:
2 turn(s)
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Adjust the door to specification.

Operation).
m
5. Tighten the bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment
6. Disconnect the front door electrical connector.

m
7. Loosen the bolts to permit movement of the door.
Loosen:
:
2 turn(s)
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. Carefully close the door.

m
9. Adjust the door to specification.
Operation).
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
10. Carefully open the door.

m
Torque:
1.:
22 lb.ft (30 Nm)
2.:
89 lb.in (10 Nm)
.co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. Connect the front door electrical connector.

m
All alignments
13. Install the striker assembly.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. Loosen the bolts to permit movement of the striker assembly.

Loosen:
:
2 turn(s)
m
Torque: 17 lb.ft (22.5 Nm) . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
16. Inspect the body-to-front door dimensions.

Operation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Door Check Arm
Removal
1. Open the door.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Vehicles without police package

ca
2. Remove the check arm bolt.

m
Vehicles with police package

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

5. NOTE: Door removed from vehicle for clarity.
Remove the front door speaker.

2. Remove the bolts and the speaker.
m
6. Remove the front door check arm nuts.
.co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the front door check arm assembly.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Door Glass Run and Bracket
Removal
Fore front door glass run

2. Remove the front door speaker.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector and position aside the wiring harness.
2. Remove the retainers and remove the front door speaker.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the bolt and the fore front door glass run.
m
Aft front door glass run
4. Remove the front door latch. co

Refer to: Front Door Latch (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
.
5.
gn
Position aside the wiring harness.
1. Remove the wiring harness retainers and position aside the wiring harness.
ia
rd
ca
6.
Remove the aft front door glass run and bracket.
1. Detach the wiring harness retainer and position aside the wiring harness.
2. Release the tab and remove the aft front door glass run from the front door latch.
m
Installation

2. If the door is equipped with one touch up/down, carry out the power window initialization.
.
Refer to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable
gn
Driver Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Door Glass Top Run
Removal
1. Remove the front door window glass.

Refer to: Front Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the Front door glass top run.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Door Latch
Removal
1. Remove the exterior front door handle.

Refer to: Exterior Front Door Handle (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
2. If equipped, remove the door lock cylinder.

Refer to: Door Lock Cylinder (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).

4. Remove the front door watershield.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. If equipped, disconnect the keyless entry keypad electrical connector.

m
6. Disconnect the front door latch actuator electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7.
Remove the front door lock push rod.
1. Remove the front door lock push rod from the door lock rod.
2. Route the interior front door lock rod grommet.
m
co
Route the interior front door handle cable through the door.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
10. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement screw.
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Remove the front door latch bolts.

m
12. Remove the front door latch.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the interior front door handle cable from the front door latch.
m

co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
Remove the front door latch.

1. Remove the tab.
. co
2. Release the tab and remove the front door latch.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Door Lock Control Switch
Removal

2.
Remove the front door lock control switch.
1. Release the retaining clips.
2. Remove the front door lock control switch.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Front Door Moulding
Removal
NOTE: LH door shown, RH door similar.
1. NOTE: Do not use excessive force when removing retainers, to avoid damage to moulding.
Using a non-marring trim tool, disengage the retainers attaching moulding to the door.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the moulding.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Door Side Impact Sensor
Removal
1. WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this manual, refer to health and safety warnings in
Refer to: Pyrotechnic Device Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
2. Depower the SRS.

m
4.
. co
gn
3. Remove the front door side impact sensor.
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTE: The impact sensor mating surfaces must be smooth and allow for a flush attachment to each other.
2. Repower the SRS.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs 2017 Explorer
Front Door Skin Panel
Grinder
Hot Air Gun
Knife
MIG/MAG Welding Equipment
Locking Pliers
Materials
Name Specification
Metal Bonding Adhesive -
TA-1, 3M™ 08115, Fusor® 108B
m
Seam Sealer -
TA-2-B, 3M 08308, FUSOR 805 DTM
Fusor® Flexible Foam Repair
3M™ 08463, Fusor® 121
Removal
- . co
gn
1. Inspect the upper and lower door hinges for wear, install new or rebuild as necessary.
ia
rd
ca

Remove the front door glass.
Remove the front door handle.
Refer to: Exterior Front Door Handle (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and
Installation).
Remove the front door.
Refer to: Front Door (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
Remove the exterior mirror.
Refer to: Exterior Mirror (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
Remove the front door upper moulding.
Refer to: Front Door Upper Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Remove the front door moulding.
Refer to: Front Door Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
3. Carefully cut through the outer panel only.

Use the General Equipment: Grinder
m
. co
gn
4. Remove the outer door panel.
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the remaining portion of the front door skin hem flange.
Use the General Equipment: Hot Air Gun
m
Installation
co
1. Remove all adhesive and foreign materials from the door shell to outer door panel mating surfaces.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the e-coat from the mating surface.

m
3. Apply adhesive to the door shell mating surface.
co
Material: Metal Bonding Adhesive / TA-1, 3M™ 08115, Fusor® 108B
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Apply anti-flutter NVH expanding foam as indicated.

Material: Fusor® Flexible Foam Repair / 3M™ 08463, Fusor® 121
m
5. Install the outer door panel and partially crimp the flange.
Use the General Equipment: Locking Pliers . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Temporarily install the door on the vehicle.

m
7. Check for proper alignment and adjust as necessary.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. Carefully open the door and tack weld to lock panel in place.
Use the General Equipment: MIG/MAG Welding Equipment
m
9. Remove the door from the vehicle.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
10. NOTE: Smooth any residual adhesive squeeze-out in to the seam to act as a sealer.
Complete the flanging process.

m
11. Remove all foreign material from the flange area.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. Apply a Ford approved primer to the flange area.

m
13. Sealing work: All areas must be sealed to production level.
Material: Seam Sealer / TA-2-B, 3M 08308, FUSOR 805 DTM
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. Refinish the door shell flange using a Ford approved paint system.

16. Install the door.

Refer to: Front Door (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
17. Sand and refinish the exterior repair area using a Ford approved paint system.

Install the front door glass.
Install the front door handle.
Refer to: Exterior Front Door Handle (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and
Installation).
Install the exterior mirror.
Refer to: Exterior Mirror (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
Install the front door upper moulding.
Refer to: Front Door Upper Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Install the front door moulding.
Refer to: Front Door Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Without: SYNC
Front Door Speaker LH
Removal

2.
Remove the bolts and the speaker.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Without: SYNC
Front Door Speaker RH
Removal

2.
Remove the bolts and the speaker.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Door Trim Panel - Police
Removal
1. Release the clips and remove the sail panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2. Release the clips and remove the interior door handle bolt cover.
ca
3. Remove the interior door handle bolt.
m
. co
4. Release the tabs and remove the door trim panel bolt cover.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the front door trim panel bolts.

m
6. Remove the front door trim panel lower bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Release the front door trim panel clips.

m
8.
Remove the front door trim panel.
2. If equipped.
co
1. Lift up and outward and to release the door trim panel from the front door.
Disconnect the front door tweeter speaker electrical connector.

.
3. Disconnect the front door lock switch electrical connector.
gn
4. Disconnect the front door window control switch electrical connector.
5. Release the interior front door handle cable from the retainer and disconnect from the interior front door handle.
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Door Trim Panel
Removal
1. Release the clips and remove the sail panel.
m
. co
gn
2. Remove the window control switch.

ia
Refer to: Driver Door Window Control Switch (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Passenger Door Window Control Switch (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
rd
3. Release the clips and remove the interior door handle bolt cover.
ca
4. Remove the trim panel bolts.
m
5. Remove the trim panel lower screws.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6.
2. If equipped.
Disconnect the trim panel electrical connectors.
3. Disconnect the latch cable and remove the front door trim panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Without: SYNC
Front Door Tweeter Speaker
Removal

2. Release the tabs and remove the speaker.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Door Upper Moulding
Removal
NOTE: LH side shown, RH similar.
All vehicles
1. Remove the upper belt moulding screw at rear of the door.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Using a non-marring trim tool, disengage the moulding from the channel in the door and remove the moulding.
m
Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System
3. Remove the LHF door trim panel. co

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
All vehicles
5. NOTE: Application of adhesive solvent may aid in releasing the adhesive tape.
Pull lightly to release the tape strips and use a non-marring trim tool to disengage the retainer clips.
m
6. Remove the door moulding.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Clean the door sheet metal with a 50 % water/alcohol solution.

m
Installation
Vehicles With: Keyless Vehicle System

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Install the LHF door trim panel.

All vehicles
3. Remove the adhesive tape liners and align the moulding locators to the door. Press to engage the clips and, using a
hand held roller, apply 15 lbs minimum force along the length of the moulding to secure.
m
4. Install the upper belt moulding.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Install the upper belt moulding screw at rear of the door.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Door Window Glass
Removal

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the watershield.

m
4. Install the front door window control switch and lower the glass to full down position.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the inner belt moulding.

m
6. Raise the rear door window glass to the one-quarter position.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7.
Remove the front door window glass bolts.
1. Remove the adhesive cover.
m
8. Remove the front door window glass.
co
1. Rotate the front door window glass 45 degrees clockwise.
2. Remove the front door window glass through the top inboard side of the door.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Door Window Regulator and Motor
Removal
NOTE: For non-functional front door window regulators and motors with the window in the 40 mm open to full closed position,
cut the front door window regulator cables to allow window movement.

m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the watershield.

m
4. Install the front door window control switch and lower the glass to full down position.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the inner belt moulding.

m
6. Raise the front door window glass to the one-quarter position.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the front door window glass bolts.

1. Remove the adhesive cover.
m
8. Tape the front door window glass in place.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Remove the adhesive cover, disconnect the electrical connector and position aside the wiring harness.
m
10. Remove the nuts.
1. Loosen the bolt 2 turns counterclockwise.
2. Remove the nuts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Remove the front door window regulator.

m
Remove the retainers and the front door window regulator motor.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
1. Remove the front door window regulator and motor.

Refer to: Front Door Window Regulator and Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
Remove the retainers and the front door window regulator motor.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Door
Removal
1. Open the door.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Disconnect the front door electrical connector.

m
5. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
Remove the door hinge pivot bolts.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
Remove the door.

m
Installation

.
Check the door-to-body alignment. Align the door as necessary.
gn
Refer to: Front Door Alignment (501-03 Body Closures, General Procedures).

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
1. Visually inspect the CV joints, housing, boots, and clamps for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
next step
3. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and REFER to Symptom Chart: NVH.
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: NVH

Symptom Chart
m
Axle howling or whine – front or rear axle
co
Damaged or worn
wheel hub bearings
CHECK for abnormal wheel hub bearing
play or roughness.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub (204-01 Front Suspension,
.
gn
Driveline clunk - loud clunk when shifting Damaged or worn INSPECT the Constant Velocity (CV)
from REVERSE to DRIVE Constant Velocity (CV) joints for wear or damage. INSTALL a
ia
joints new halfshaft or driveshaft as

necessary.
REFER to: Front Halfshaft RH - FWD
rd
(205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal

and Installation).
REFER to: Front Halfshaft RH - AWD
ca

and Installation).
REFER to: Front Halfshaft RH - 3.5L
Ecoboost™, AWD (205-04) .
REFER to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04
Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and
Installation).
Loose hub nut CHECK the torque on the hub nut.

REPLACE the hub nut if the torque is
not at specification. For front hub nuts.
and Installation).
and Installation).
Installation).
Driveline clunk (Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Damaged or worn INSPECT the inner Constant Velocity
vehicles) — occurs during acceleration or Constant Velocity (CV) (CV) joint and boot. INSTALL a new
from cruise to coast/deceleration joints halfshaft as necessary.
and Installation).
and Installation).
Installation).
Loose hub nut CHECK the torque on the hub nut.

REPLACE the hub nut if the torque is
not at specification.
and Installation).
m
and Installation).
. co REFER to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04
Installation).
gn
Driveline clunk — occurs as the vehicle Loose hub nut CHECK the torque on the hub nut.
starts to move forward following a stop REPLACE the hub nut if the torque is
not at specification.
ia

and Installation).
rd

and Installation).
ca

Installation).
Clicking, popping or grinding - occurs while Inadequate or CHECK the Constant Velocity (CV)
the vehicle is turning contaminated boots and joints for wear or damage.
lubrication in the INSTALL new components as
Constant Velocity (CV) necessary.
joints REFER to: Front Halfshaft RH - FWD
and Installation).
and Installation).
Installation).
Another component CHECK the halfshafts and the area

contacting the halfshaft around the halfshafts. REPAIR as
necessary.
Grunting — normally associated with a Halfshaft Constant CHECK the outer Constant Velocity
shudder experienced during acceleration Velocity (CV) joint (CV) joint for correct seating into the
from a complete stop binding hub. REPAIR as necessary.
and Installation).
and Installation).
Installation).
Driveline vibration - occurs at cruising Incorrectly seated CHECK the outer CV joint for correct
speeds Constant Velocity (CV) seating into the hub. REPAIR as
joint in the wheel hub necessary.
and Installation).
m
and Installation).
. co REFER to: Front Halfshaft RH - 3.5L
gn
Installation).
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub (204-01 Front Suspension,
ia
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts 2017 Explorer
Specifications
Specifications

Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Halfshaft support bracket-to-engine block bolts a 40 30 –
Halfshaft support bracket-to-engine block bolts b 48 35 –
Halfshaft support bracket studs 15 – 133
aAll vehicle except, 2.3L GTDI AWD
m
bVehicle with, 2.3L GTDI AWD
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Fender Moulding
Removal
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the screws and pushpins.

m
3. Using a non-marring trim tool, detach the retainer clips.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove the moulding.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Fog Lamp Bulb
Removal
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side is similar.
1. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly.

2. Remove the push pin and the foglamp bulb access cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector.

m
4. Remove the fog lamp bulb.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Fog Lamp
Removal

2. Remove the front bumper reinforcement.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3. Disconnect the front bumper cover wiring harness connectors.

ca
4. On both sides.
Remove the screws and the foglamp assembly.
m
Installation
. co
gn

ia
rd
ca
205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Front Halfshaft RH - AWD
204-161 (T97P-1175-A)
Installer, Halfshaft
TKIT-1997-F/FM2
TKIT-1997-FLM2
TKIT-1997-LM2
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B)
Remover, Front Wheel Hub
Removal
m
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts that affect performance of vital components and systems. Failure of
these fasteners may result in major service expense. Use the same or equivalent parts if replacement is necessary. Do
not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Tighten fasteners as specified.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. co

.
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside. Discard the anchor plate bolts.
m
4. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel
knuckle may result.
co
NOTICE: Use care when installing the tie rod separator or damage to the tie rod end boot may occur.
.
NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent turning of the stud while installing the tie rod end nut.
gn
1. Remove and discard the tie rod end nut.
2. Separate the tie rod end from the wheel knuckle.
ia
rd
ca
5. NOTICE: Do not use a prying device or separator fork between the ball joint and the wheel knuckle. Damage to
the ball joint or ball joint seal may result. Only use the pry bar by inserting it into the lower arm body opening.
NOTICE: Use care when releasing the lower arm and wheel knuckle into the resting position or damage to the
ball joint seal may occur.
NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the stud from turning while installing the lower ball joint nut.
1. Remove and discard the lower ball joint nut.

2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
m
. co
6. NOTICE: Do not bend the inner joint more than 18 degrees and the outer joint more than 45 degrees. Damage to
gn
the shaft will occur.
Install the special tool and press the halfshaft from the front wheel bearing and wheel hub.
Use Special Service Tool: 205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) Remover, Front Wheel Hub.
ia
rd
ca
7. If equipped, remove the underbody shield.

m
8. Remove and discard the halfshaft retaining nuts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Remove the halfshaft.

m
Installation
1. Inspect the inboard end of the halfshaft. co.

gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Inspect the outboard end of the halfshaft.

3. Install a new halfshaft seal.
Refer to: Intermediate Shaft Seal (308-07C Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost
4.
1. NOTE: Do not fully install the shaft at this time.
Install the seal protector.

2. Insert the halfshaft splines through the seal protector.
3. Remove the seal protector.
m
. co
gn
ia
5. Insert the intermediate shaft until the intermediate shaft bearing bracket is seated to the intermediate shaft support
rd
bracket.
ca
6. Install the new halfshaft retaining nuts.
m
co
7. Pull the halfshaft into the front wheel bearing and wheel hub.
Use Special Service Tool: 204-161 (T97P-1175-A) Installer, Halfshaft.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the stud from turning while installing the lower ball joint nut.
1. Attach the lower ball joint to the wheel knuckle.

2. Install the new lower ball joint nut.
m
9. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent turning of the stud while installing the tie rod end nut.
1. Attach the tie rod end to the wheel knuckle.

2. Install the new tie rod end nut.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Position the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly. Install the new caliper anchor plate bolts.
m
11. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to
co
NOTICE: Install and tighten the new wheel hub nut to specification in a continuous rotation. Always install a
.
new wheel hub nut after loosening or when not tightened to specification in a continuous rotation or damage to
gn
the components may occur.

ia
While an assistant applies the brake, install the new wheel hub nut.
rd
ca
12. Check the transmission fluid level.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01A Automatic Transmission - 6-Speed Automatic Transmission - 6F35,
13. If equipped, install the underbody shield and the retainers.
m
. co
gn
14. Install the wheel and tire.
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Head Restraint Guide Sleeve
Flat Headed Screw Driver
Removal
NOTE: Typical head restraint guide sleeve shown, others similar.
1.
Remove the head restraint.
1. Insert a straightened paper clip into the access hole of the RH head restraint guide sleeve and release the
internal locking spring.
2. Depress the LH head restraint guide sleeve locking tab.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Depress the locking tabs and remove the head restraint.

m
All vehicles
3. Remove the headrest restraint guide sleeves.

Use the General Equipment: Flat Headed Screw Driver
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Discard the head restraint guide sleeves.

m
Installation
co
1. NOTICE: Always install new head restraint guide sleeves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
difficult adjustment of the head restraint or component failure.
NOTICE: The head restraint guide sleeves are not interchangeable. Failure to install the correct head restraint
.
guide sleeves at the correct position may result in component failure.
gn
Allow the head restraint guide sleeve to slide freely through the backrest foam and backrest trim cover, using hand
pressure, twist the head restraint guide sleeve while pushing it into the backrest frame hole until fully seated and locked.
ia
rd
ca
2. Depress the locking tabs and install the head restraint.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
413-13B Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Parking Aid Camera
Front Parking Aid Camera
Removal

2. Disconnect the front parking aid camera electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3.
Remove the front parking aid camera.
ca
1. Remove the front parking aid camera bracket screw.

2. Remove the front parking aid bracket.
3. Remove the front parking aid camera.
m
Installation
2. Cycle the ignition from off to run, to initialize the camera.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Parking Aid Sensor
Removal

2. Disconnect the front bumper cover wiring harness connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3.
Remove the front parking aid sensor.
ca

2. Remove the sensor.
m
Installation
2. Carry out the azimuth system check.

. co
Refer to: Azimuth System Check (413-13A Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid, General Procedures).
gn
3. Carry out the elevation system check.
Refer to: Elevation System Check (413-13A Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid, General Procedures).
4. If any sensor fails the checks, diagnose the sensor fault.

ia
Refer to: Parking Aid (413-13A Parking Aid - Vehicles With: Rear Parking Aid, Diagnosis and Testing).
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats
Removal
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
NOTE: Seat backrest blower motor without snorkel shown, unless otherwise called out.
NOTE: Methods are common among all options unless otherwise specified.
1. Move the front seat to the full upward position.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Depower the SRS.

Refer to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .
m
4. NOTE: Seat backrest blower motor with snorkel shown.
1. Detach the backrest cover straps. co

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Position the backrest blower motor snorkel aside.

m
co
NOTE: Follow the unique instructions or graphics for this step in the installation for backrest blower motor snorkel
routing.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. NOTE: Seat with power lumbar assembly shown, multi-contour seat similar.
Release the backrest cover J-clips from the lumbar support springs and position the backrest cover to the access the
blower motor.
m
8. Remove the tie strap.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. NOTE: Seat with power lumbar assembly shown, multi-contour seat similar.
Detach the backrest wire harness retainer and disconnect the blower motor electrical connector.
m
10. Disconnect the blower motor manifold from the backrest cushion.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. NOTE: The backrest cover and foam have been removed for clarity.
Remove the blower motor.

1. Release the blower motor horizontal retainer.
2. Release the blower motor vertical retainers.
m
Installation
2. Position the blower motor snorkel as shown.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Repower the SRS.

Refer to: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering (501-20 Supplemental Restraint System) .

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor
Hog Ring Plier
Removal
NOTE: Seat backrest blower motor without snorkel shown, unless otherwise called out.
NOTE: Methods are common among all options unless otherwise specified.
1. Remove the front seat.

Refer to: Front Seat (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3.
m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the backrest cover pin-type retainers and release the backrest cover lower J-clip.
m
6. Remove the backrest cover insert.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-
loop strips may be torn from the seat backrest foam.
Partially invert the backrest cover enough to access the first row of hog rings.
1. Release the hook-and-loop strips.
2. Invert the backrest cover.
m
8. NOTE: Follow the unique instructions or graphic for this step in the installation.
Remove the first row of hog rings.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Release the backrest cover J-clips from the lumbar support springs while partially inverting the backrest cover.
m
10. Detach the backrest wire harness retainer and disconnect the blower motor electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Disconnect the blower motor manifold from the backrest cushion.
m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Use the General Equipment: Hog Ring Plier

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Seat Backrest Cover - Police
Hog Ring Plier
Removal
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side airbags cannot be repaired.
A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat
side airbag deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Power driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.

m
2. Remove the head restraint guide sleeves.
Refer to: Front Head Restraint Guide Sleeve (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
co
3. If equipped, adjust the manual lumbar to the fully relaxed position.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Detach the seat cushion cover rear J-clip from the seat track.
m
5. Release the backrest cover lower J-clip.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. NOTE: The stab shield pocket is shown in the opened position.
From inside the backrest cover.

Release the backrest cover hook-and-loop strips and open the stab shield pocket.
7. Remove the stab shield.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8.
Position the side airbag wire harness aside.
1. Release the locking tab and disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Detach the electrical connector retainer from the seat track.
3. Detach the wire harness connector retainer from the seat track spring.
4. Detach the wire harness retainer from the seat track.
9. Detach the side airbag wire harness retainer from the seat backrest frame and route the harness through the seat
cushion cover and backrest cover openings.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
1. Release the hook and loop strips.
m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Partially invert the backrest cover to the second row of hog rings.
m
Remove the second row of hog rings.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Fully invert the backrest cover to access the backrest cover rear J-clip.
m
15. Release the rear J-clip and remove the seat backrest cover.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. WARNING: Inspect the seat side airbag, airbag cavity, mounting surface and deployment chute for damage
or the presence of foreign material. Remove all foreign material. Install a new side airbag if it is damaged. Install
a new deployment chute if the deployment chute is damaged. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
the seat side airbag deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Seat Backrest Cover
Hog Ring Plier
Removal
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side airbags cannot be repaired.
A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat
side airbag deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Power driver seat shown, all other seats similar.
All seats
m
2. Remove the head restraint guide sleeves.

co
Refer to: Front Head Restraint Guide Sleeve (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4.
2. If equipped.
Route the backrest cover straps through the backrest blower motor snorkel.
m
Multi-contour seat

. co

gn
ia
rd
ca
All seats
If equipped.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. NOTE: Base seat shown, multi-contour seat similar.
NOTE: For multi-contour seat, this step is only necessary if installing a new component.
Remove the backrest cover insert.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
11. Release the backrest cover J-clips from the lumbar support springs while partially inverting the backrest cover.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. Release the backrest cover upper J-clip.

m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the hog rings and the backrest cover.

m
Installation

. co
1. NOTE: Transfer components to the new backrest cover as necessary.

gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat Control Switch - Police
Removal
NOTE: Driver seat control switch shown, passenger seat control switch similar.
1. Remove the clip and the manual lumbar knob.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2. NOTICE: Do not pull out at the front of the seat control switch bezel. Otherwise, the seat control switch bezel
ca
retainers can be damaged.
Position the seat control switch bezel out of the side shield.
1. From under the side shield.
Push out from behind the seat control switch bezel to start detachment.
2. Slide the seat control switch bezel rearward.
m
3. Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector and remove the seat control switch and bezel.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the seat control switch knob.

m
Release the locking tabs and remove the seat control switch.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat Control Switch
Removal
NOTE: Driver seat control switch shown, all others similar.
1. If equipped.
Remove the clip and the recline handle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the side shield screws.

m
3.
Remove the side shield.
2. Push the side shield forward.

. co
1. Lift up on the rear of the side shield and pull outward.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove the seat control switch knob(s).

m
5. NOTE: 10-way seat control switch shown, all others similar.
Remove the screws and the seat control switch.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat Cushion Adjuster - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats
Removal
NOTE: For passenger seat, the front seat cushion adjuster is not serviced separately. If a new front seat cushion adjuster is
needed, install an OCS service kit equipped with a front seat cushion adjuster.
NOTE: When equipped with an OCS service kit, the seat cushion adjuster is adhered to the bottom of the seat cushion foam.
This requires the cushion cover, foam, seat cushion adjuster and OCS to be removed and replaced as an assembly.
For passenger seat, install a new OCS.

Refer to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-20 Supplemental
Restraint System) .
2. Remove the front seat cushion cover and foam as an assembly.
m
Refer to: Front Seat Cushion Cover (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
Position the backrest cover upward.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Detach the multi-contour seat cushion hose retainer.

m
5. Release the locking tab, and disconnect the hose coupling assembly (orange) from the SCMG.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Remove the seat cushion adjuster pin-type retainers.

m
7. Remove the seat cushion adjuster while routing out the hoses.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. To install reverse the removal procedure.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat Cushion Blower Motor
Removal
1. Remove the front seat cushion cover and foam as an assembly.

2. If equipped with multi-contour seat.

Remove the pin-type retainers and position the front of the seat cushion adjuster upward.
m
. co
gn
3. For passenger seat.

ia
Release the pin-type retainers and position the front of the OCS upward.
rd
ca
4. Remove the front seat cushion blower motor screws.

m
5.
Remove the front seat cushion blower motor.
co
1. Disconnect the front seat cushion blower motor electrical connector.
2. Release the locking tabs.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat Cushion Cover - Police
Removal
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, carry out the OCS reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover is installed or an OCS service kit is installed. Use a diagnostic scan tool to carry out the OCS reset
command.
NOTE: OCS components (seat cushion foam and OCS) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The
OCS components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS, or seat cushion foam are needed, a new OCS service kit
must be installed.
NOTE: Power driver seat shown, passenger seats similar.
m
All seats

co
2. If equipped.
.
Remove the clip and the manual lumbar knob.
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
4. If equipped.
co
Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the seat control switch and bezel.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the clip and the recliner handle.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the side shield rear screw.

m
8. Remove the side shield center screw and rear retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Remove the side shield front screw.

m
10. Release the spring retainers and remove the side shield.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
12.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
14. Remove the seat cushion cover inboard pin-type retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
15. Release the seat cushion cover inboard hook and loop strip.
m
16. Detach the rear of seat cushion cover from the seat track.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
17. Release the seat cushion cover inboard J-clips.

m
18. Release the seat cushion cover outboard J-clips.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
19. Release the seat cushion cover front J-clips.

m
Passenger seat
co
20. Lift the seat cushion foam. If the seat cushion foam and OCS are adhered together, then the OCS is a service kit. If
nothing is adhered together, then the OCS is original equipment.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Driver seat or passenger seat without OCS service kit
21. Remove the seat cushion cover and foam as an assembly.

m
Passenger seat with OCS service kit
co
22. NOTICE: Using excessive force when bending the bracket tab can damage the OCS sensor housing.
NOTE: Follow the unique instructions or graphic for this step in the installation.
.
Disconnect the electrical connector, bend the bracket tab away and slide the OCS sensor off the bracket.
gn
ia
rd
ca
23. NOTE: Original equipment OCS shown for clarity, service kit similar.
Remove the OCS pin-type retainers.

m
24. NOTE: Note the location of the OCS hose as it passes through the seat cushion support for proper installation.
co
Route out the OCS hose, sensor and sensor bracket from between the seat cushion support wires and remove the OCS.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
All seats
25. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion from the hook-and-arrow or the hook may be torn from the
seat cushion foam.
NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new component.
Remove the seat cushion cover.

1. Invert the seat cushion cover.
2. Release the hook-and-arrows.
m
Installation
All seats

. co
Passenger seat
gn
2. Bend the OCS sensor bracket tab back.

ia
rd
ca
All seats
3. Install the front seat. If the passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time.
Passenger seat
4. WARNING: Occupant Classification System (OCS) parts are calibrated as an assembly and must only be
replaced in the configuration they are sold. Never separate parts of an assembly. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components
(head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle
before using System Reset to rezero the seat weight. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect
operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: Inspect the OCS bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before
installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. Remove any foreign objects. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in incorrect operation of the OCS and may cause system failure.
NOTICE: Do not trap the pressure sensor hose incorrectly over the seat's suspension or spring. Route the hose
so that it lays in a natural bend, and is not twisted due to being forced into an unnatural position. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, take the following precautions before carrying out the OCS reset.
Make sure the voltage to the OCSM is greater than 8 volts and less than 18 volts.
Make sure the OCS is not below 6º C (42.8º F) or above 36º C (96.7º F) when initiating the OCS reset
process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be
m
exposed and kept at a temperature between 6º C (42.8º F) to 36º C (96.7º F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before and during the OCS reset process.
ignition switch on. co

Prior to carrying out the OCS reset, make sure a minimum of 8 seconds has elapsed after cycling the
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the OCS reset. Cycle the ignition switch after the OCS reset.
.
gn
5. If the first system reset attempt was successful, proceed to prove out the SRS.
6. If the first system reset attempt was not successful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the OCS connector and
wiring for damage, pressure sensor hose for kinks and or damage, and seat-related wiring harness and body wiring
harness terminals and connectors for damage. Repair any concerns found and proceed to the next step.
ia
7. Carry out a second OCS reset. Cycle the ignition switch after the OCS reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful,
rd
install a new OCS service kit.

Refer to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Police (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal
and Installation).
ca
8. Prove out the SRS. Verify all airbags are installed and connected and the ignition is OFF. Wait 10 seconds then turn the
ignition ON and monitor the airbag warning indicator. The airbag warning indicator illuminates continuously for
approximately 6 seconds and turns off. Continue to monitor the airbag warning indicator for approximately 30 seconds,
as this is the time required for the RCM to complete testing of the SRS.
9.
If a SRS fault is present, the airbag warning indicator either fails to light, remains lit continuously or flashes. The
flashing may not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from OFF to ON. If this
occurs, diagnose and repair any SRS faults before proceeding with other repairs.
If, after the ignition has been turned on for 30 seconds, the airbag warning indicator remains unlit with no chime or
SRS message displayed in the message center, no SRS fault is present.
If the airbag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime sounds in a pattern of 5 sets of 5
beeps or a message displays in the message center. If this occurs, diagnose and repair the airbag warning
indicator and any SRS faults before proceeding with other repairs.
10. Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear all Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all modules.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat Cushion Cover
Removal
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, carry out the OCS reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a
new trim cover is installed or an OCS service kit is installed. Use a diagnostic scan tool to carry out the OCS reset
command.
NOTICE: The cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat is not serviced separately. If a new cushion heater mat is
needed on the front passenger seat, install an OCS service kit equipped with a heater mat. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS.
NOTE: OCS components (seat cushion foam, OCS, heater mat (if equipped) or seat cushion adjuster (if equipped)) are
calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS components are not to be installed separately. If a new
OCS, seat cushion foam, heater mat (if equipped) or seat cushion adjuster (if equipped) are needed, a new OCS service kit
m
must be installed.
All seats
. co
gn
2. If equipped.
ia
Remove the clip and the recliner handle.

rd
ca
3. Remove the side shield screws.

m
Passenger manual seat
4.
1. Pull the rear of the side shield out.
. co
2. Firmly grasp the side shield, lift up and out, separating the side shield from the recliner bracket.
gn
3. From underneath, squeeze the retainers together and pull out on the side shield.
4. Slide the side shield forward.
ia
rd
ca
Power seat
5.
1. Lift up on the rear of the side shield and pull outward.
2. Push the side shield forward.
m
All seats
6.
. co
Position the backrest wire harness(es) aside.
gn
1. Release the electrical connector retainer(s) from the seat track.
2. Release the locking tab(s) and disconnect the backrest wire harness electrical connector(s).
ia
rd
ca
7.
2. If equipped.
m
8. Detach the cushion cover J-clips and position the cushion cover aside.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. If equipped.
Disconnect the cushion heater mat electrical connector and detach the harness locator.
m
10. If equipped, remove the DSM.
11.
Detach the seat cushion cover J-clips.
. co
Refer to: Driver Front Seat Module (DSM) (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
1. On both sides.
gn
Detach the cushion cover side J-clips.
2. Detach the cushion cover front J-clip.
ia
rd
ca
Passenger seat
12. NOTE: When equipped with an OCS service kit, either the seat cushion adjuster (with multi-contour seat) or the OCS
(without multi-contour seat) is adhered to the bottom of the seat cushion foam. This requires the cushion cover, foam,
seat cushion adjuster (with multi-contour seat) and OCS to be removed as an assembly.
Lift the cushion foam. If the cushion foam, OCS and the seat cushion adjuster (if equipped) are adhered together, then
the OCS is a service kit. If nothing is adhered together, then the OCS is original equipment.
m
Driver seat or passenger seat without OCS service kit
. co
13. Remove the seat cushion cover and foam as an assembly.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Passenger seat with OCS service kit and without multi-contour seat
14. Disconnect the OCS sensor.

m
15. NOTE: Original equipment OCS shown for clarity, service kit similar.
co
Remove the pin-type retainers and raise the front of the OCS.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
16. Remove the OCS bracket screw.

m
17. NOTE: Note the location of the OCS hose and heater mat pigtail (if equipped) as it passes through the seat cushion
support for proper installation.
co
Route out the OCS hose, sensor, sensor bracket and heated seat cushion mat wiring pigtail (if equipped) from between
the seat cushion support wires and remove the OCS.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Multi-contour passenger seat with OCS service kit

m
19. If equipped.
Position the blower motor snorkel as shown. . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
20. Detach the multi-contour seat cushion hose retainer.

m
21. Release the locking tab and disconnect the hose coupling assembly (orange) from the SCMH.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
22. Disconnect the OCS sensor.

m
23.
1. Remove the multi-contour seat pin-type retainers.
co
2. Lift the front of the multi-contour seat cushion assembly to access the OCS pin-type retainers.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
24.
Position the OCS upward to access the OCS bracket screw.
1. Remove the OCS pin-type retainers.
2. Lift the OCS up off the seat track assembly.
m
25. Remove the OCS bracket screw.
gn
ia
rd
ca
26. Route the multi-contour seat hose assembly out from between the seat cushion and backrest.
m
27. NOTE: Note the location of the OCS hose as it passes through the seat cushion support for proper installation.
cushion assembly.
. co
Route out the OCS hose, sensor and sensor bracket from between the seat track support wires and remove the seat
gn
ia
rd
ca
All seats
Invert the rear portion of the seat cushion cover.

m
29. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion from the hook-and-arrow or the hook may be torn from the
seat cushion foam.
co
NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion from the hook-and-loop or the hook may be torn from the
seat cushion foam.
.
gn
NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new component.
Remove the seat cushion cover.

ia
1. Invert the seat cushion cover.

3. Release the hook-and-arrows.
rd
ca
Installation
All seats
2. Install the front seat. If the passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time.
Passenger seat
3. WARNING: Occupant Classification System (OCS) parts are calibrated as an assembly and must only be
replaced in the configuration they are sold. Never separate parts of an assembly. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components
(head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle
before using System Reset to rezero the seat weight. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect
operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: Inspect the OCS bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before
installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. Remove any foreign objects. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in incorrect operation of the OCS and may cause system failure.
m
NOTICE: Do not trap the pressure sensor hose incorrectly over the seat's suspension or spring. Route the hose
so that it lays in a natural bend, and is not twisted due to being forced into an unnatural position. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure.
co
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, take the following precautions before carrying out the OCS reset.
Make sure the voltage to the OCSM is greater than 8 volts and less than 18 volts.
.
Make sure the OCS is not below 6º C (42.8º F) or above 36º C (96.7º F) when initiating the OCS reset
gn
process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be
exposed and kept at a temperature between 6º C (42.8º F) to 36º C (96.7º F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before and during the OCS reset process.
Prior to carrying out the OCS reset, make sure a minimum of 8 seconds has elapsed after cycling the
ia
ignition switch on.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, carry out the OCS reset. Cycle the ignition switch after the OCS reset.
rd
4. If the first system reset attempt was successful, proceed to prove out the SRS.
ca
5. If the first system reset attempt was not successful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the OCS connector and
wiring for damage, pressure sensor hose for kinks and or damage, and seat-related wiring harness and body wiring
harness terminals and connectors for damage. Repair any concerns found and proceed to the next step.
6. Carry out a second OCS reset. Cycle the ignition switch after the OCS reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful,
install a new OCS service kit.
Refer to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and
Installation).
Refer to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-20 Supplemental
Restraint System) .
7. Prove out the SRS. Verify all airbags are installed and connected and the ignition is OFF. Wait 10 seconds then turn the
ignition ON and monitor the airbag warning indicator. The airbag warning indicator illuminates continuously for
approximately 6 seconds and turns off. Continue to monitor the airbag warning indicator for approximately 30 seconds,
as this is the time required for the RCM to complete testing of the SRS.
8.
If a SRS fault is present, the airbag warning indicator either fails to light, remains lit continuously or flashes. The
flashing may not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from OFF to ON. If this
occurs, diagnose and repair any SRS faults before proceeding with other repairs.
If, after the ignition has been turned on for 30 seconds, the airbag warning indicator remains unlit with no chime or
SRS message displayed in the message center, no SRS fault is present.
If the airbag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime sounds in a pattern of 5 sets of 5
beeps or a message displays in the message center. If this occurs, diagnose and repair the airbag warning
indicator and any SRS faults before proceeding with other repairs.
9. Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear all Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs) from all modules.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Seat Lumbar Assembly - Police
Hog Ring Plier
Removal
1. Remove the driver front seat.

2. Adjust the manual lumbar to the fully relaxed position.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the clip and the manual lumbar knob.

m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the seat control switch and bezel.
m
6. Remove the clip and the recline handle.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
11. Release the spring retainers and remove the side shield.
m
12. Detach the J-clips and position the seat cushion cover upward.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
13. NOTICE: Make sure that metal shavings do not get into the seat track. Failure to follow this instruction can
result in seat track damage and failure.
Remove the manual lumbar actuator.

1. Detach the lumbar cable retainer.
2. Disconnect the lumbar cable from the actuator.
3. Remove the actuator rivets.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
15. NOTE: The stab shield pocket is shown in the opened position.
From inside the backrest cover.

Release the backrest cover hook-and-loop strips and open the stab shield pocket.
16. Remove the stab shield.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
17.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
22.
Remove the lumbar assembly.
2. Detach the LH lumbar assembly spring retainer.
3. Detach the RH lumbar assembly spring retainer.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Seat Power Lumbar Assembly - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats
Removal
1. Remove the SCMG or SCMH.

Refer to: Driver Multi-Contour Seat Module [SCMG] (501-10A) .
2. Remove the front seat backrest blower motor.

Refer to: Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor (501-10A) .
3. Remove the RH backrest cover pin-type retainer, release the backrest cover lower J-clip and partially invert the RH side
of the backrest cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Release the backrest wire harness from the power lumbar spring and position the wire harness aside.
m
5. Disconnect the power lumbar pump electrical connector and release the connector from the power lumbar spring.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6.
Remove the seat power lumbar assembly.
1. Release the lower retainers.
2. Position the cushion cover and foam outward to access the seat power lumbar assembly pin-type retainer.
3. Remove the pin-type retainer.
4. Release the upper J-hook.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Hog Ring Plier
Removal
All seats

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3.
2. If equipped.
m
If equipped.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
6. Remove the backrest cover insert.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. NOTE: Seat backrest blower motor without snorkel shown.
Release the backrest cover J-clips from the lumbar support springs while partially inverting the backrest cover.
m
co
Partially invert the backrest cover to the second row hog rings.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Climate controlled seat
Detach the backrest wire harness retainer and disconnect the blower motor electrical connector.
m
co
Disconnect the blower motor manifold from the backrest cushion.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: Seat backrest blower motor without snorkel shown.

m
All seats
co
14. Disconnect the electrical connector, release the J-hooks and remove the power lumbar assembly.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag, air bag cavity, mounting surface and deployment chute for damage
or the presence of foreign material. Remove all foreign material. Install a new side air bag if it is damaged.
Install a new seat backrest trim cover and deployment chute if the deployment chute is damaged. Position the
deployment chute properly and make sure it is closed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat
side air bag deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Seat Track - Police
Blind Rivet Gun
Removal
1. Remove the front seat cushion and cover as an assembly.

Refer to: Front Seat Cushion Cover - Police (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
2. NOTE: This step is only necessary when the passenger seat is equipped with an original equipment OCS.
Remove the OCS.

Refer to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Police (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal
m
and Installation).
3.
2. Remove the actuator rivets.

Use the General Equipment: Blind Rivet Gun
. co
Position the manual lumbar actuator and cable away from the seat track.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Remove the bolts and the front seat backrest.

m
Installation
1. NOTE: Transfer components to the new seat track as necessary.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Seat Track Motor - Police
Electric Drill
Removal
1. NOTE: Positioning the seat fully upward provides access to service the seat track motor with the seat in the vehicle.
Move the front seat to the full upward position.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. If equipped.
Remove the clip and the manual lumbar knob.
m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the seat control switch and bezel.
m
5. Remove the clip and the recliner handle.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
10. Release the retainers and remove the side shield.

m
11. Remove the long drive cable.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12.
13. Remove the seat position sensor.
Refer to: Seat Position Sensor - Police (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
14. Disconnect the seat track motor electrical connector.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
15. Detach the wire harness retainers from the seat track motor.
m
16. NOTE: Seat components and wiring harnesses are removed for clarity.
Remove the bolts and the seat track motor.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
NOTE: Typical seat track shown, other seat tracks similar.
1. NOTE: Use the bolts from the old seat track motor.
Install the seat track motor bolts.

m
2. NOTICE: When using a drill to move the seat track, do not move the seat track to its forward or rearward end of
co
travel stops, otherwise a new seat track must be installed.
NOTE: Be sure to drive the seat track evenly or the track will bind during movement.
.
NOTE: Rotate the cables using 2 drills operating at similar speeds to most efficiently position the seat track.
gn
Insert the original seat track motor drive cables and drive the gearbox and seat track uniformly until the rear edge of the
upper and lower seat tracks are flush.
Use the General Equipment: Electric Drill
ia
rd
ca
3. The rear edges of the upper and lower seat track rails must align with each other on both sides of the seat.
m
4. Both sides.
Remove the seat track motor bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the long drive cable from the new seat track motor assembly.
m
6. NOTICE: Do not severely bend the short drive cable during installation or damage to the cable will occur.
Insert the short drive cable into the seat track gearbox. co
1. Position the seat track motor while inserting the short cable into the seat track gearbox.
2. Rotate the short drive cable to verify engagement into seat track gearbox.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. NOTICE: Do not cross-thread the bolts, they are load-bearing. If the bolts are cross-threaded, a new seat track
must be installed.
NOTE: Be sure the seat track motor rear inboard mounting tab is positioned under the seat belt anchor bracket.
NOTE: Seat track components and wiring harness are removed for clarity.
Install the seat track motor and install the new bolts in the sequence shown.
1. Install the rear inboard bolt.
2. Install the front inboard bolt.
3. Install the rear outboard bolt.
4. Install the front outboard bolt.
m
. co
gn
8. Attach the wire harness retainers to the seat track motor.

ia
rd
ca
9. Connect the seat track motor electrical connector.

m
10. Install the seat position sensor.
11.
Position the side airbag wire harness.
. co
Refer to: Seat Position Sensor - Police (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).

gn
2. Attach the electrical connector retainer to the seat track.
ia
rd
ca
12. Insert the new long drive cable into the seat track motor.
m
13. NOTE: The cable felt covering should not be visible when the cable is correctly engaged to the horizontal motor square
drive.
Verify engagement.
co
Push the cable into the seat track motor square drive while twisting back and forth.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. Insert the long drive cable into the seat track gearbox.
m
15. Install the long drive cable into the seat track motor guides.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
16. Install the side shield while engaging the retainers.

m
17. Install the side shield front screw.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
18. Install the side shield center screw and rear retainer.
m
19. Install the side shield rear screw.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
20. Attach the seat cushion cover rear J-clip to the seat track.
m
21. Install the clip and the recliner handle.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
22. Connect the electrical connector and install the seat control switch and bezel.
m
23. If equipped.
Install the clip and the manual lumbar knob. . co
gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat Track Motor
Electric Drill
Removal
1. NOTE: Positioning the seat fully upward provides access to service the seat track motor with the seat in the vehicle.
Move the front seat to the full upward position.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Depower the SRS.

3.
Disconnect the seat harness electrical connector(s).
1. Detach the wire harness retainer.
2. Release the locking tab(s) and rotate the position assurance lever(s).
m
4. Detach the electrical connector retainer(s) from the seat track motor.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Disconnect seat position sensor electrical connector.

m
6. NOTE: Seat components are removed for clarity.
co
NOTE: Seat track wire harness take-outs vary with seat option content. Note the wire harness routing, attachment points
and connections to the horizontal seat motor and bracket for installation.
.
Disconnect the seat track motor electrical connector, detach the wire harness retainers and position the wire harness
gn
aside.
ia
rd
ca
7. NOTE: Seat components and wiring harnesses are removed for clarity.
Remove the bolts and the seat track motor.

m
Installation
All seats co
1. NOTE: Typical seat track shown, other seat tracks similar.
.
NOTE: Use the bolts from the old seat track motor.
gn
NOTE: Seat side shield removed for clarity.
Install the seat track motor bolts.

ia

rd
ca
2. NOTICE: When using a drill to move the seat track, do not move the seat track to its forward or rearward end of
travel stops, otherwise a new seat track must be installed.
NOTE: Be sure to drive the seat track evenly or the track will bind during movement.
NOTE: Rotate the cables using 2 drills operating at similar speeds to most efficiently position the seat track.
Insert the original seat track motor drive cables and drive the gearbox and seat track uniformly until the rear edge of the
upper and lower seat tracks are flush.
Use the General Equipment: Electric Drill
m
. co
gn
3. The rear edges of the upper and lower seat track rails must align with each other on both sides of the seat.
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: Seat side shield removed for clarity.

Both sides.
Remove the seat track motor bolts.
m
5. NOTE: Install a new seat track if the block is not in place.
. co
Verify the block is in place at the rear of the inboard seat track rail.
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. To aid installation.
Pull the long drive cable on the new motor assembly out of the sheathing.
m
Insert the long drive cable into the seat track gearbox.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Rotate the long drive cable to verify engagement to seat track gearbox.
m
9. NOTICE: Do not severely bend the short drive cable during installation or damage to the cable will occur.
Insert the short drive cable into the seat track gearbox.
. co
1. Position the seat track motor while inserting the short cable into the seat track gearbox.
gn
2. Rotate the short drive cable to verify engagement to seat track gearbox.
ia
rd
ca
10. NOTICE: Do not cross-thread the bolts, they are load-bearing. If the bolts are cross-threaded, a new seat track
must be installed.
NOTE: Seat track components and wiring harness are removed for clarity.
Install the seat track motor and install the new bolts in the sequence shown.
1. Install the rear inboard bolt.
2. Install the front inboard bolt.
3. Install the rear outboard bolt.
4. Install the front outboard bolt.
m
. co
gn
ia
11. NOTE: Seat track components are removed for clarity.
NOTE: Seat track wire harness take-outs vary with seat option content. Note the wire harness routing, attachment points
rd
and connections to the horizontal seat motor and bracket for installation.
Connect the seat track motor electrical connector and engage the wire harness retainers.
ca
m
12. Connect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
13. Attach the electrical connector retainer(s) to the seat track motor.
m
14.
Connect the seat harness electrical connector(s).
1. Attach the wire harness retainer. co
2. Rotate the position assurance lever(s) to the locked position.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
15. Repower the SRS.

Driver seat with memory
16. Operate the seat track horizontal motor in both directions through the full range of travel to set the soft stops and avoid a
premature stopping point occurrence after the vehicle is returned to the customer.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Seat Track
Removal
1. Remove the front seat cushion and cover as an assembly.

2. If equipped with a multi-contour seat, remove the front seat cushion adjuster.
Refer to: Front Seat Cushion Adjuster - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and
Installation).
3. NOTE: This step is only necessary when the passenger seat is equipped with an original equipment OCS.
Remove the OCS.

Refer to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and
m
Installation).
Refer to: Occupant Classification System (OCS) Sensor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-20B) .
4. Remove the screws and the recline cover. . co

gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove the bolts and the front seat backrest.

m
Installation
All seats
1. NOTE: Transfer components to the new seat track as necessary.

. co
gn
Driver seat with memory

ia
Operate the seat in all directions through the full range of travel to set the soft stops and avoid a premature stopping
point occurrence after the vehicle is returned to the customer.
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seat
Removal
NOTE: Power driver seat shown, all others similar.
1. Police passenger seat.

Remove the bolt and the seat track travel restrictor.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2.
Move the seat to the full upward position and forward or rearward to access all of the seat bolts.
If a power seat cannot be positioned horizontally to access the front seat bolts, diagnose the inoperative
horizontal seat track motor.
Refer to: Front Seats (501-10A Front Seats, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
3. Depower the SRS.
4. Remove the front seat bolt covers.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5.
Disconnect the seat harness electrical connector(s).
1. Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer.
2. Release the locking tab(s) and rotate the position assurance lever(s).
m
6. Remove the bolts and the front seat.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Repower the SRS.


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-20A Seatbelt Systems 2017 Explorer
Front Seatbelt Anchor and Pretensioner
Removal
1. Depower the SRS.

2. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.

Refer to: B-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
3.
Remove the safety belt anchor and pretensioner.
2. Remove the bolt and the safety belt anchor and pretensioner.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
NOTE: During installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are accessible to
the occupants.
2. Repower the SRS.

3. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.

Refer to: Safety Belt System (501-20A) .

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-20A Seatbelt Systems 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Front Seatbelt Buckle - Police
Removal
NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver seat similar.

2.
Remove the safety belt buckle.
2. Detach the wire harness retainer.
3. Remove the bolt and the safety belt buckle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
the occupants.


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seatbelt Buckle
Removal

2.
Remove the front safety belt buckle.
2. Detach the wire harness retainers.
3. Remove the bolt and the safety belt buckle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
the occupants.


ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seatbelt Retractor and Pretensioner
Removal
1. Depower the SRS.

2. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.

Refer to: B-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
3. Remove the D-ring bolt and position the safety belt aside.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
NOTE: The spacer is part of the safety belt shoulder height adjuster and must be reused when a new component is
installed.
Remove the spacer from the D-ring bolt.

m
5.
Remove the safety belt retractor and pretensioner.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector(s). co
2. Remove the bolt(s) and the safety belt retractor and pretensioner.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
the occupants.
2. Repower the SRS.


m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Seats - Overview
Overview
Driver Power Seat - Without Memory
The 6-way driver power seat is equipped with the following motors:
Front height motor (serviced with seat track assembly)

Rear height motor (serviced with seat track assembly)
Horizontal motor (serviced separately from the seat track assembly)

m
Lumbar motor (serviced with power lumbar assembly)

co
.
Recliner motor (serviced with seat backrest assembly)
gn
Driver Power Seat - With Memory
The power driver seat is controlled by the DSM. The DSM is located on the driver seat track. PMI is required when a new DSM
ia
is installed. The DSM hard stop/soft stops must be set/reset any time a new DSM, driver seat track, horizontal motor or driver
seat backrest is installed.
rd
The memory system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat to 1 of 3 programmable positions. For information on
programming memory positions or recalling a stored memory position, refer to the Owner's Literature.
ca
The driver memory seat is equipped with the following motors:

Lumbar motor (vehicles not equipped with multi-contour seats only) (serviced with power lumbar assembly)
Passenger Power Seat
The 6-way passenger power seat is equipped with the following motors:

The 10-way passenger power seat is equipped with the following motors:

Heated Seats
This system allows on-demand, independent, electrical heating of each front seat.
The heated seat system consists of the following components:
Seat cushion heater mat

Seat backrest heater mat
FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") (includes heated seat switches)
FDIM (includes heated seat switches)
HVAC module
Climate Controlled Seats
This system allows on-demand, independent, electrical heating/cooling of each front seat.
The climate controlled seat system consists of the following components:
Blower motor, located within each front seat cushion and backrest
Air filter, integrated to each blower motor assembly (not serviceable)
Climate-controlled seat buttons, located on the FDIM (touchscreen)
FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") (includes climate controlled seat switches)
SCME, integral to the DSM
Cushion and backrest manifolds
Cushion and backrest foam pads
Cushion and backrest trim covers
m
Multi-Contour Seats
SCMG or SCMH is installed. co

This system allows on demand independent lumbar adjustment and/or massage of each front seat. PMI is required when a new
The multi-contour front seat system consists of the following components:

.
gn
SCMG, attached to the backrest of the front driver seat
SCMH, attached to the backrest of the front passenger seat
Multi-contour seat buttons, located on the FDIM (touchscreen)
Multi-contour seat control switch (part of the seat control switch)
ia
Front seat cushion adjuster, attached to each front seat frame (includes 4 inflatable air bladders and hoses)
Front seat power lumbar assembly, attached to each front seat backrest (includes air pump, 3 inflatable air bladders and
hoses)
rd

ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seats - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram - Memory Seat
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Network Message Chart - Memory Seat

DSM Network Input Messages
ca

Message Module
Key-in- BCM Provides the ignition status. This input is used for the easy entry/exit feature.
ignition
status
Personality BCM When the personality recall command is received from the BCM, the DSM stores or recalls the
recall associated memory seat position (1, 2 or 3). If a RKE transmitter has been programmed to a
memory position, this input is used to recall the associated memory seat position.
Memory DDM When the memory set switch (1, 2 or 3) is activated, the DDM sends this message to the DSM,
seat switch which then stores or recalls the associated memory seat position.
status
System Diagram - Heated Seats

m
Network Message Chart - Heated Seats

HVAC Module Network Input Messages
. co
gn
Message
Climate control FDIM The climate control requests message contains the heated seat
requests request information.
ia
Climate control FCIMB (Front Controls Interface The climate control requests message contains the heated seat
requests Module "B") request information.
rd
ca

FDIM Network Input Messages

Message Module
Climate control HVAC The HVAC module provides this message to the FDIM for the purpose of updating the
button status Module displayed status of the heated seat buttons on the FDIM (touchscreen).

FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") Network Input Messages

Message Module
Climate HVAC The HVAC module provides this message to the FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") for
control Module the purpose of updating the displayed status of the heated seat buttons on the FCIMB (Front
button Controls Interface Module "B").
status
System Diagram - Climate Controlled Seats
m
Network Message Chart - Climate Controlled Seats
. co
gn

SCME Network Input Messages

ia
Message
Climate control FDIM The climate control requests message contains the climate controlled
rd
requests seat request information.

Climate control FCIMB (Front Controls Interface The climate control requests message contains the climate controlled
requests Module "B") seat request information.
ca


Message Module
Climate control SCME The SCME provides this message to the FDIM for the purpose of updating the displayed
button status status of the climate controlled seat buttons on the FDIM (touchscreen).

FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") Network Input Messages

Message Module
Climate SCME The SCME provides this message to the FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") for the
control purpose of updating the displayed status of the climate controlled seat buttons on the FCIMB
button (Front Controls Interface Module "B").
status
System Diagram - Multi-Contour Front Seats
m
. co
gn
Network Message Chart - Multi-Contour Front Seats

ia

rd

Module
ca
Multi-contour seat SCMG/ The SCMG/ SCMH provides this message to the FDIM for the purpose of updating the
switch status SCMH displayed status of the multi-contour seat buttons on the FDIM (touchscreen).
Driver/passenger SCMG/ The SCMG and SCMH provide this message to the FDIM for the purpose of updating
multi-contour seat SCMH the displayed pressure of the multi-contour seat bladders and bolster pairs on the FDIM
position data (touchscreen).

SCMG/ SCMH Network Input Messages

Message Module
Multi-contour seat FDIM The multi-contour seat request message contains the requested multi-contour
request function(s) from the touchscreen.
Memory Seat Operation

The driver seat control switch provides a voltage signal to the DSM only when activated. This voltage signal causes the DSM to
power the appropriate motor until the input is removed. The motor circuits are normally grounded through the DSM. The DSM
internally switches the appropriate circuit from ground to voltage to operate the motors.
As the seat is adjusted, the DSM monitors the motor position sensors to record the current seat position. The DSM removes
voltage from the motor upon termination of the seat control switch input or if the DSM does not detect movement from the motor
while monitoring the position sensor during a memory recall operation.
If the DSM loses the signal from any of the motor position sensors, the affected seat motor operates in jog mode. Jog mode
allows limited operation of the affected seat motor using only the seat control switch. When the seat control switch is operated
in jog mode, the seat moves in the desired direction for one second, then stops. The seat control switch must be released, then
pressed again in order to move the seat for an additional second. Jog mode is an indication that there is a seat motor sensor
fault. If the memory seat is operating in jog mode, a DTC sets in the DSM.
DSM Hard Stop/Soft Stop
A hard stop occurs when one of the memory seat track or backrest axes physically reach the end of travel and can go no
further. A soft stop occurs when the seat stops before it physically reaches the end of travel. The hard stop is set by seat design
and cannot be changed or adjusted. The soft stop is set by the DSM. The seat track axes are forward/rearward, front up/down
and rear up/down. The backrest axis is recline forward/backward. To prevent unnecessary stress on the seat and motors, the
DSM sets soft stop positions, 2 for each moving axis. The DSM uses a preset distance from the hard stop to determine where
the soft stop occurs. When an axis reaches the hard stop and the switch is held for approximately one second, the DSM briefly
reverses direction and establishes the soft stop for that axis in that direction. The DSM uses this back up strategy to check
sensor integrity any time movement has stopped prematurely due to a sensor failure or obstruction.
m
Easy Entry/Exit
co
The easy entry/exit feature is a function of the DSM that moves the driver seat back approximately 50.8 mm (2 in) (unless seat
is already positioned at or near the end of travel) when the ignition is turned off. The DSM receives ignition off status over the
MS-CAN and operates the driver seat rearward. The DSM cancels this operation if a valid input command is received from the
driver seat control switch, memory set switch, exterior mirror control switch or if the function has been disabled.
.
gn
The DSM records the current seat positions before operating the seat for an easy exit operation. During easy entry operation
(when the ignition is turned on), the seat is returned to the recorded seat position prior to the easy exit operation. Easy entry
operation is cancelled if a valid input command is received by the DSM. A memory position recall using the memory set switch
also overrides the easy exit operation.
ia
The easy entry/exit feature can be enabled/disabled on the message center. For information on programming vehicle settings in
the message center, refer to the Owner's Literature.
rd
Power Seat Operation - Passenger and Driver (Without Memory)
The seat control switches contain normally-closed contacts which are grounded. An individual circuit is switched to voltage
ca
when a specific adjustment position is selected. The seat control switches are hard-wired directly to the applicable seat motors.
The motor direction is determined by the polarity of voltage supplied from the seat control switch.
Heated Seat Operation
The driver and passenger heated seat buttons are selected from the FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") and FDIM
(touchscreen). The heated seat system functions independently of the vehicle's climate control system. Each time the heated
seat button is pressed, the system decreases one setting (the sequence is high, med, low, off, high, etc.).
When activated, the FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") sends the request message to the HVAC module which
supplies voltage to the selected seat heater circuit. Each seat cushion heater mat and backrest heater mat is connected in a
series circuit to the HVAC module and powered by the output circuit for that seat. The HVAC module monitors inputs from a
temperature sensor located in each seat cushion heater mat, and maintains seat temperature by cycling the heater circuits
on/off. The heated seat remains ON until the heated seat switch button is pressed to cycle the HVAC module OFF or the
ignition is set to OFF.
If a fault is detected by the HVAC module, the module stops supplying voltage to that individual left or right seat that the fault
was detected on until the ignition is turned OFF and then ON.
Climate Controlled Seat Operation
The driver and passenger climate controlled seat buttons are selected from the FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B")
and FDIM (touchscreen). The climate controlled seat system functions independently from the vehicle's climate control system.
The seat cushion and backrest are each equipped with a blower motor assembly. As cabin air is drawn through each blower
motor, a Thermo-Electric Device (TED) heats or cools the air, which is then directed into the foam pad where it is distributed
along the surface of the cushion and backrest of the seat. Once the system is activated, the SCME uses a set of flexible
algorithms to control the heating/cooling modes and the blower speed dependant on the commanded climate controlled seat
settings.
The SCME monitors seat cushion and backrest temperatures while it supplies voltage and ground to both blower motors. The
SCME also supplies a variable voltage signal to control the blower speed. Cabin air enters the blower through an integrated
filter attached to the blower motor housing. Heated or cooled air exits the blower motor and flows through the foam pad.
Climate Controlled Seat Heating Characteristics
In heat mode, the blower motor can add up to 40–60° C (72–108° F) to the ambient inlet air temperature.
The system control settings are indicated next to each climate controlled seat heat switch button on the touchscreen.
The first setting is HIGH (3 indicators), the second setting is MED (2 indicators) and the third is LOW (1 indicator) then
OFF (no indicators).
When heating, the SCME varies the speed of the blower motors and the duty cycle of the integral Thermo-Electric
Device (TED) in order to reach and maintain the desired temperature determined by the system control settings.
Climate Controlled Seat Cooling Characteristics
In cool mode, the blower motors can remove up to 8° C (14° F) from the ambient air temperature entering the system.
The system control settings are based on the 3 indicators next to each climate controlled seat cool switch button on the
m
touchscreen. The first setting is HIGH (3 indicators), the second setting is MED (2 indicators) and the third is LOW (1
indicator) then OFF (no indicators).
co
When cooling, the SCME maintains a constant blower motor speed and a constant Thermo-Electric Device (TED) supply
voltage (duty cycle is determined by the switch setting) in COOL mode.
Climate Controlled Seat Recovery Mode

.
gn
NOTE: The presence of overtemperature faults (Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) B1153:4B, B1154:4B, B1151:4B and
B1152:4B) can be induced by incorrectly operating the climate controlled seat system after an initial heat setting has been
attained. If a heat setting is repeatedly turned off and on in an attempt to increase the seat temperature or repeatedly toggled
between heat and cool modes, an overtemperature condition can result and the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may be set.
ia
If the temperature of one of the blower motors rises above 110° C (229.8° F) in the heat mode or 65° C (148.9° F) in the cool
mode for more than 4 seconds, the SCME records an overtemperature DTC, removes voltage from the Thermo-Electric
rd
Devices (TEDs) (part of the blower motor assembly) and goes into recovery mode (blower only) for 30 seconds to cool down
the Thermo-Electric Devices (TEDs). The same occurs if a temperature difference of 60° C (108° F) or greater is detected
between the backrest and cushion blower motors on either front seat. The SCME continues to monitor the Thermo-Electric
ca
Devices (TEDs) while in recovery mode. If the temperature of the Thermo-Electric Devices (TEDs) does not drop to 105° C
(220.8° F) in the heat mode or 60° C (139.9° F) in the cool mode after 30 seconds, the system continues to cool the Thermo-
Electric Devices (TEDs) in recovery mode for up to 5 minutes. If the Thermo-Electric Devices (TEDs) cool down after 30
seconds, but before 5 minutes (checked at 4 second intervals), the system is operating normally. An overtemperature DTC is
still recorded even if the system recovers and is operating normally. This is more likely to occur during extreme cabin
temperatures with significant seat back sun load. If the system does not recover within 30 seconds in heat mode or within 5
minutes in cool mode, the SCME disables that seat (fault mode) and remains off until that feature is reactivated by the
customer. Also, if the SCME detects a temperature differential fault twice during the same ignition cycle, the SCME disables the
seat. When a fault causes a shutdown, the climate controlled seat indicators turn off and that seat is not operational until the
next ignition cycle.
Remote Start Climate Operation
Different climate control modes/preferences can be selected when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature. This can
be accessed through the message center. For additional information on how to set the remote start preferences, refer to the
Owner's Literature. When the driver seat and/or passenger seat is set to AUTO mode, the driver/passenger heated/climate
controlled seat activates in full heat mode when the outside temperature is less than 0° C (32° F) and full cool mode (climate
controlled seats only) when outside temperature is greater than 27° C (80° F) any time the vehicle is started using the remote
start feature. No heated/climate controlled seat adjustments are recognized during remote start operation. Once the ignition is
cycled ON, the heated/climate controlled seat turns off.
Multi-Contour Seat Operation
The multi-contour seats are independently controlled by the seat control switches (located on the outer side of the front seat
cushions) or the FDIM (touchscreen). The driver and passenger front seats each contain a total of 7 inflatable bladders: 4
cushion bladders and 3 backrest lumbar bladders. The pressures for the lumbar and cushion bladders are displayed on the
FDIM as a percentage of the maximum pressure.
There are 2 modes of operation: adjust or massage. Adjust mode allows pressure changes in one of the 3 lumbar bladders to
be inflated or deflated to a desirable feel. Massage mode provides a sequence of inflation and deflation of the lumbar and
cushion bladders to simulate a massage motion. When the massage mode is active, it will turn off (time-out) after 20 minutes of
operation.
NOTE: Refer to the Owner's Literature for information how to select the various modes using the seat control switch or
touchscreen buttons.
When in Adjust mode:
Each tap of the up or down buttons cycles through the following bladders: Upper lumbar, middle lumbar and lower
lumbar.
When the inflate/deflate buttons are pressed (or held), the pressure increases or decreases for the currently selected
bladder.
Pressing the mode select button toggles the seat to massage mode. The ignition must be on for massage mode to
function.
When in Massage mode:
Each tap of the up or down buttons cycles between backrest and cushion massage modes.
Each tap of the inflate/deflate buttons cycles between the intensity levels of massage (off, low and high).
Pressing the mode select button toggles the seat to adjust mode. Middle lumbar bladder will be selected automatically.
m
Each multi-contour seat can be restored to the original factory settings by pressing and holding the select button greater than
30 seconds. This resets all the adjust and massage settings (including any multi-contour driver seat settings associated to
memory personality 1, 2 or 3).
. co
Seat Control Switch - Without Memory
gn
The seat control switch contains normally closed contacts (which are grounded). When a specific adjustment position is
selected, an individual circuit is switched to voltage.
ia
Seat Control Switch - With Memory
The driver seat control switch is hard-wired to the DSM, which controls seat operation. When a specific seat adjustment
rd
position is selected, an individual circuit is switched to voltage.
Seat Control Switch - With Multi-Contour Seats

ca
The driver seat control switch is hard-wired to the DSM, which controls seat operation. When a specific seat adjustment
position is selected, an individual circuit is switched to voltage.
The driver and passenger seat control switches each contain a 5 position momentary contact switch which provides an analog
signal (stepped resistance) to the SCMG or SCMH. The resistance range for each multi-contour button is as follows:
Multi-Contour Switch Resistance

Select 26 to 54 ohms
Down 113 to 125 ohms
Up 196 to 221 ohms
Deflate 317 to 351 ohms
Inflate 483 to 533 ohms
No switch active 573 to 634 ohms
DSM
The driver seat control switch and power memory seat motors are hard-wired to the DSM. The DSM controls the operation of
the power memory seat. The DSM communicates on the MS-CAN. The SCME is integral to the DSM. PMI is required on both
the DSM and the SCME when a new DSM is installed. The DSM hard stop/soft stops must be set/reset any time a new DSM,
driver seat track or driver seat backrest is installed.
Memory Set Switch
The memory set switch (part of the driver door lock switch assembly) contains 3 momentary contact switches. It is hard-wired to
the DDM and is used to recall 1 of 3 memory positions stored in the DSM.
Driver Seat Track
There are 3 front seat track bi-directional motors present on power seat tracks. The horizontal (fore/aft) front seat track motor is
the only seat track motor which can be serviced separately from the seat track assembly. All other seat track motors (front
height, rear height) are serviced as part of the seat track assembly.
On vehicles equipped with the memory seat feature, each seat track motor contains a Hall-effect sensor which provides seat
track position information to the DSM for setting/obtaining desired preset seat memory positions. The seat track motors move
the power seat forward/backward and up/down depending on the polarity of voltage supplied from the DSM.
Passenger Seat Track
The passenger power seat is equipped with 3 front seat track bi-directional motors. The horizontal (fore/aft) front seat track
motor is the only seat track motor which can be serviced separately from the seat track assembly. All other seat track motors
m
(front height, rear height) are serviced as part of the seat track assembly. The seat track motors move the power seat
forward/backward and up/down depending on the polarity of voltage supplied from the seat control switch.
Front Seat Motor Cable - Police Vehicles Only

co
The horizontal (fore/aft) front seat track motor rotates 2 cables which drive each side of the seat track uniformly. The outboard
(long) cable can be serviced separately from the horizontal front seat track motor.
.
Driver Seat Backrest
gn
If equipped with power recline, the driver seat backrest contains a bi-directional motor which is integral to the seat backrest
frame assembly. If the vehicle is equipped with the memory feature, the seat backrest motor contains a Hall-effect sensor which
provides seat backrest position information to the DSM for setting/obtaining desired preset seat memory positions. The seat
ia
backrest motor moves the seat backrest forward/backward depending on the polarity of voltage supplied from the DSM (if
equipped with memory) or from the seat control switch.
rd
Passenger Seat Backrest
If equipped with power recline, the passenger seat backrest contains a bi-directional motor which is integral to the seat backrest
ca
frame assembly. The seat backrest motor moves the seat backrest forward/backward depending on the polarity of voltage
supplied from the seat control switch.
FDIM
The FDIM (touchscreen) contains the heated seat (or climate controlled seat) buttons.
FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B")
The FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") contains the heated seat (or climate controlled seat) buttons.
HVAC Module
The HVAC module receives heated seat requests from the FCIMB (Front Controls Interface Module "B") and FDIM.
When the heated seats are activated, the HVAC module monitors the seat cushion temperature sensor and supplies heater
current to the seat cushion and backrest heater mats until the desired setpoint temperature is reached. Once the setpoint
temperature is reached, the HVAC module cycles the heater circuits on/off as required to maintain the setpoint temperature.
Heater Mat
If equipped with heated seats, the cushion heater mats are each equipped with a temperature sensor (thermistor) which
provides feedback to the FCIM. The heater mats are serviced by installing a new backrest/cushion foam. The cushion and
backrest heater mats are connected in series.
SCME
If equipped with climate controlled seats, the SCME controls the operation of the climate controlled seat system. The SCME is
integral to the DSM. PMI is required on both the DSM and the SCME when a new DSM is installed.
SCMG
The SCMG controls the operation of the driver multi-contour seat. PMI is required when a new SCMG is installed. The SCMG
communicates on the MS-CAN. The SCMG controls the air pump (part of the front seat power lumbar assembly) which supplies
air pressure necessary to be diverted to the applicable air bladders/bolsters as required for the desired mode(s) of operation.
SCMH
The SCMH controls the operation of the passenger multi-contour seat. PMI is required when a new SCMH is installed. The
SCMH communicates on the MS-CAN. The SCMH controls the air pump (part of the front seat power lumbar assembly) which
supplies air pressure necessary to be diverted to the applicable air bladders/bolsters as required for the desired mode(s) of
operation.
Blower Motor
If equipped with climate controlled seats, the seat cushion and backrest are each equipped with a blower motor assembly
(Thermo-Electric Device (TED) and fan motor, serviced as an assembly). There is also a temperature sensor (thermistor) in
each blower motor which provides feedback to the SCME. The blower motor assembly is controlled by the SCME.
m
The front seat power lumbar assembly is mounted to the backrest (serviced as an assembly).
Front Seat Power Lumbar Assembly - Multi-Contour Seats
Front Seat Cushion Adjuster - Multi-Contour Seats

. co
The front seat power lumbar assembly includes an air pump, air hoses and bladders (serviced as an assembly).
gn
The front seat cushion adjuster includes air hoses and bladders (serviced as an assembly).

ia
rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Seats
DTC Chart: DDM

DDM DTC Chart

B1C03:23 Memory #1 Switch: Signal GO to Pinpoint Test F
Stuck Low
Stuck Low
Stuck Low
All other Diagnostic Trouble -
Codes (DTCs) REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
m
DTC Chart: DSM co

.
gn

DSM DTC Chart
ia

B1298:24 Steering Column Adjust Up Switch: Signal
Stuck High REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
rd
B1299:24 Steering Column Adjust Down Switch:

Signal Stuck High REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12A1:24 Steering Column Adjust Out Switch:
ca
Signal Stuck High REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12A2:24 Steering Column Adjust In Switch: Signal
Stuck High REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12A7:11 Steering Column Tilt Sensor A: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12A7:12 Steering Column Tilt Sensor A: Circuit
Short To Battery REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12A8:11 Steering Column Telescope Sensor A:
Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B12A8:12 Steering Column Telescope Sensor A:
Circuit Short To Battery REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1368:11 Adjustable Pedal Position Feedback
Sensor: Circuit Short To Ground REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1368:12 Adjustable Pedal Position Feedback
Sensor: Circuit Short To Battery REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1375:09 Steering Column Tilt Motor: Component
Failure REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1375:11 Steering Column Tilt Motor: Circuit Short
To Ground REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1375:12 Steering Column Tilt Motor: Circuit Short
To Battery REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1375:13 Steering Column Tilt Motor: Circuit Open
REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1375:1A Steering Column Tilt Motor: Circuit
Resistance Below Threshold REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B1375:31 Steering Column Tilt Motor: No Signal
REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B137D:09 Pedal Adjustment Motor: Component
Failure REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
B137D:11 Pedal Adjustment Motor: Circuit Short To
Ground REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
B137D:12 Pedal Adjustment Motor: Circuit Short To
Battery REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
B137D:13 Pedal Adjustment Motor: Circuit Open
REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
B137D:1A Pedal Adjustment Motor: Circuit
Resistance Below Threshold REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
B137D:31 Pedal Adjustment Motor: No Signal
REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
B137E:09 Steering Column Telescope Motor:
Component Failure REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B137E:11 Steering Column Telescope Motor: Circuit
Short To Ground REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
Short To Battery REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
Open REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B137E:1A Steering Column Telescope Motor: Circuit
Resistance Below Threshold REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
B137E:31 Steering Column Telescope Motor: No
Signal REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
B14C3:24 Seat Height Rear Down Switch: Signal GO to Pinpoint Test E
Stuck High
B14C4:24 Seat Height Rear Up Switch: Signal Stuck
High
B14C7:24 Adjustable Pedal Forward Switch: Signal
GO to Pinpoint Test E
. co
Stuck High REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
gn
B14C8:24 Adjustable Pedal Rearward Switch: Signal
Stuck High REFER to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).
B14CB:11 Seat Height Rear Position Feedback: GO to Pinpoint Test F
ia
B14CB:12 Seat Height Rear Position Feedback: GO to Pinpoint Test F

B14CE:09 Seat Horizontal Motor Output: Component GO to Pinpoint Test E
rd
Failure
B14CE:11 Seat Horizontal Motor Output: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test E
Short To Ground
ca

Short To Battery
Short To Ground or Open
B14CE:1A Seat Horizontal Motor Output: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test E
Resistance Below Threshold
B14CE:31 Seat Horizontal Motor Output: No Signal GO to Pinpoint Test F
B14CF:09 Seat Recline Motor Output: Component GO to Pinpoint Test E
Failure
B14CF:11 Seat Recline Motor Output: Circuit Short GO to Pinpoint Test E
To Ground
To Battery
To Ground or Open
To Battery or Open
B14CF:1A Seat Recline Motor Output: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test E
B14CF:31 Seat Recline Motor Output: No Signal GO to Pinpoint Test F
B14D0:09 Seat Height Front/Tilt Motor Output: GO to Pinpoint Test E
Component Failure
Circuit Short To Ground or Open
Circuit Short To Battery or Open
B14D0:1A Seat Height Front/Tilt Motor Output: GO to Pinpoint Test E
Circuit Resistance Below Threshold
B14D0:31 Seat Height Front/Tilt Motor Output: No GO to Pinpoint Test F
Signal
B14D2:09 Seat Height Rear Motor Output: GO to Pinpoint Test E
Component Failure
B14D2:11 Seat Height Rear Motor Output: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test E
Short To Ground
Short To Battery
Short To Ground or Open
B14D2:1A Seat Height Rear Motor Output: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test E
B14D2:31 Seat Height Rear Motor Output: No Signal GO to Pinpoint Test F
m
B1B89:11 Seat Slide Motor Speed/Position Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test F
B1B89:12 Seat Slide Motor Speed/Position Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test F
B1B91:11 Seat Tilt Motor Speed/Position Sensor:
B1B91:12 Seat Tilt Motor Speed/Position Sensor:
. co
gn
B1B93:11 Seat Recline Motor Speed/Position GO to Pinpoint Test F
Sensor: Circuit Short To Ground
B1B93:12 Seat Recline Motor Speed/Position GO to Pinpoint Test F
Sensor: Circuit Short To Battery
ia
B1B96:24 Seat Slide Forward Switch: Signal Stuck GO to Pinpoint Test E

High
rd
B1B97:24 Seat Slide Backward Switch: Signal Stuck GO to Pinpoint Test E

High
B1B98:24 Seat Tilt Up Switch: Signal Stuck High GO to Pinpoint Test E
ca
B1B99:24 Seat Tilt Down Switch: Signal Stuck High GO to Pinpoint Test E
B1C00:24 Seat Recline Up Switch: Signal Stuck GO to Pinpoint Test E
High
B1C01:24 Seat Recline Down Switch: Signal Stuck GO to Pinpoint Test E
High
U0100:00 Lost Communication with ECM/PCM "A": GO to Pinpoint Test X
U0140:00 Lost Communication with Body Control GO to Pinpoint Test K
Module: No Sub Type Information
U0212:00 Lost Communication with Steering
Column Control Module: No Sub Type REFER to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Diagnosis and Testing).
Information
U1000:00 Solid State Driver Protection Active - DIAGNOSE any other related DSM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble
Driver Disabled: No Sub Type Information Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U1000:00 returns, INSTALL a new DSM.
U2100:00 Initial Configuration Not Complete: No NOTE: This DTC indicates PMI has not been carried out on a newly installed module or configuration data
Sub Type Information has been lost. Presence of this DTC alone does not prevent basic seat operation from the seat control
switch.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, CARRY OUT PMI on the DSM. REPEAT the self-test and VERIFY successful
PMI. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
U3000:49 Control Module: Internal Electronic Failure INSTALL a new DSM.
DTC Chart: HVAC module


HVAC Module DTC Chart

B1034:11 Left Front Seat Heater Element: Circuit Short To Ground GO to Pinpoint Test I
B1034:15 Left Front Seat Heater Element: Circuit Short To Battery or GO to Pinpoint Test I
Open
B1036:11 Right Front Seat Heater Element: Circuit Short To Ground GO to Pinpoint Test J
B1036:15 Right Front Seat Heater Element: Circuit Short To Battery or GO to Pinpoint Test J
Open
B1038:11 Left Front Seat Heater Sensor: Circuit Short To Ground GO to Pinpoint Test I
B1038:15 Left Front Seat Heater Sensor: Circuit Short To Battery or GO to Pinpoint Test I
Open
B103A:11 Right Front Seat Heater Sensor: Circuit Short To Ground GO to Pinpoint Test J
B103A:15 Right Front Seat Heater Sensor: Circuit Short To Battery or GO to Pinpoint Test J
Open
All other Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the
(DTCs) procedure.
m
DTC Chart: SCME
co
.

SCME DTC Chart
gn

B1151:4B Passenger Seat Cushion: Over Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test O
ia
B1152:4B Passenger Seat Back: Over Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test P

B1153:4B Driver Seat Cushion: Over Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test M
B1154:4B Driver Seat Back: Over Temperature GO to Pinpoint Test N
rd
B1208:01 Driver Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test Q

B1208:98 Driver Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test Q
ca
Component or System Over Temperature

B1209:01 Driver Seat Back Temperature Sensor: General GO to Pinpoint Test S
Electrical Failure
B1209:98 Driver Seat Back Temperature Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test S
B120A:01 Passenger Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test R
B120A:98 Passenger Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test R
B120B:01 Passenger Seat Back Temperature Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test T
B120B:98 Passenger Seat Back Temperature Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test T
B14B9:11 Driver Seat Cushion Thermal Electric Device: GO to Pinpoint Test Q
Circuit Open
B14B9:1A Driver Seat Cushion Thermal Electric Device: GO to Pinpoint Test Q
B14BA:11 Driver Seat Back Thermal Electric Device: GO to Pinpoint Test S
Circuit Open
B14BA:1A Driver Seat Back Thermal Electric Device: GO to Pinpoint Test S
B14BB:11 Passenger Seat Cushion Thermal Electric GO to Pinpoint Test R
Device: Circuit Short To Ground
Device: Circuit Short To Battery
Device: Circuit Open
B14BB:1A Passenger Seat Cushion Thermal Electric GO to Pinpoint Test R
Device: Circuit Resistance Below Threshold
B14BC:11 Passenger Seat Back Thermal Electric Device: GO to Pinpoint Test T
Circuit Open
B14BC:1A Passenger Seat Back Thermal Electric Device: GO to Pinpoint Test T
B14BD:11 Driver Seat Cushion Blower: Circuit Short To GO to Pinpoint Test Q
Ground
B14BE:11 Driver Seat Back Blower: Circuit Short To GO to Pinpoint Test S
Ground
m
B14C0:11 Passenger Seat Cushion Blower: Circuit Short GO to Pinpoint Test R
To Ground
B14C2:11 Passenger Seat Back Blower: Circuit Short To GO to Pinpoint Test T
Ground
U0140:00 Lost Communication with Body Control Module:
U0257:00 Lost Communication with Front Controls /
co
GO to Pinpoint Test Y
GO to Pinpoint Test Z
.
Display Interface Module: No Sub Type
gn
Information
U1000:00 Solid State Driver Protection Active -Driver DIAGNOSE any other related DSM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. CLEAR the Diagnostic
Disabled: No Sub Type Information Trouble Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U1000:00 returns, INSTALL a new DSM.
ia
U2100:00 Initial Configuration Not Complete: No Sub Type NOTE: This DTC indicates PMI has not been carried out on a newly installed module or configuration
Information data has been lost.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, CARRY OUT PMI on the SCME. REPEAT the self-test and VERIFY
rd
successful PMI. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).

U3000:49 Control Module: Internal Electronic Failure INSTALL a new DSM.
ca
DTC Chart: SCMG

SCMG DTC Chart

B146F:00 Back Bladder System Electropneumatic GO to Pinpoint Test U
Failure: No Sub Type Information
B146F:04 Back Bladder System Electropneumatic GO to Pinpoint Test U
Failure: System Internal Failure
B1470:00 Cushion Bladder System GO to Pinpoint Test U
Electropneumatic Failure: No Sub Type
Information
B1470:04 Cushion Bladder System GO to Pinpoint Test U
Electropneumatic Failure: System
Internal Failure
B1471:11 Multi-Contour Seat Switch Input: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test U
Short To Ground
B1471:13 Multi-Contour Seat Switch Input: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test U
Open
B1471:2A Multi-Contour Seat Switch Input: Signal VERIFY there is no obstruction that may be causing the multi-contour seat switch to be stuck in a certain
Stuck In Range position. If OK, INSTALL a new seat control switch.
REFER to: Front Seat Control Switch (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
B1473:11 Pump Driver: Circuit Short To Ground GO to Pinpoint Test U
U1000:00 Solid State Driver Protection Activated - DIAGNOSE any other related SCMG Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble
Driver Disabled: No Sub Type Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U1000:00 returns, INSTALL a new SCMG.
Information REFER to: Driver Multi-Contour Seat Module [SCMG] (501-10 Front Seats) .
U2100:00 Initial Configuration Not Complete: No NOTE: This DTC indicates PMI has not been carried out on a newly installed module or configuration data has
Sub Type Information been lost. Presence of this DTC alone does not prevent basic seat operation from the seat control switch.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, CARRY OUT PMI on the SCMG. REPEAT the self-test and VERIFY successful
PMI.
U3000:49 Control Module: Internal Electronic INSTALL a new SCMG.
Failure REFER to: Driver Multi-Contour Seat Module [SCMG] (501-10 Front Seats) .
DTC Chart: SCMH

SCMH DTC Chart
m
B146F:00 Back Bladder System Electropneumatic GO to Pinpoint Test V
Failure: No Sub Type Information
B146F:04 Back Bladder System Electropneumatic
Failure: System Internal Failure
B1470:00 Cushion Bladder System
Electropneumatic Failure: No Sub Type
GO to Pinpoint Test V
GO to Pinpoint Test V
. co
Information
gn
B1470:04 Cushion Bladder System GO to Pinpoint Test V
Electropneumatic Failure: System
Internal Failure
B1471:11 Multi-Contour Seat Switch Input: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test V
Short To Ground
ia
B1471:13 Multi-Contour Seat Switch Input: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test V

Open
rd
B1471:2A Multi-Contour Seat Switch Input: Signal VERIFY there is no obstruction that may be causing the multi-contour seat switch to be stuck in a certain
Stuck In Range position. If OK, INSTALL a new seat control switch.
B1473:11 Pump Driver: Circuit Short To Ground GO to Pinpoint Test V
ca
U1000:00 Solid State Driver Protection Activated - DIAGNOSE any other related SCMH Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble
Driver Disabled: No Sub Type Codes (DTCs). REPEAT the self-test. If DTC U1000:00 returns, INSTALL a new SCMH.
Information REFER to: Driver Multi-Contour Seat Module [SCMG] (501-10 Front Seats) .
U2100:00 Initial Configuration Not Complete: No NOTE: This DTC indicates PMI has not been carried out on a newly installed module or configuration data has
Sub Type Information been lost. Presence of this DTC alone does not prevent basic seat operation from the seat control switch.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, CARRY OUT PMI on the SCMH. REPEAT the self-test and VERIFY successful
PMI.
U3000:49 Control Module: Internal Electronic INSTALL a new SCMH.
Failure REFER to: Driver Multi-Contour Seat Module [SCMG] (501-10 Front Seats) .
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Front Seats

Symptom Chart

No communication with the DDM Refer to the
Pinpoint Test REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).
No communication with the DSM Refer to the
Pinpoint Test REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).
No communication with the Refer to the

FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Pinpoint Test REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Module "B") Testing).

HVAC module Pinpoint Test REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).

SCME Pinpoint Test REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).

SCMG Pinpoint Test REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).

SCMH Pinpoint Test REFER to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).
The power seat is inoperative or Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test AA

does not operate correctly — Pinpoint Test
driver, 6-way, police
m
The power seat is inoperative or Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test AC
passenger, 6-way, except police
The power seat is inoperative or
does not operate correctly —
passenger, 6-way, police
The power seat is inoperative or
Refer to the
Pinpoint Test
Refer to the
co
GO to Pinpoint Test AB
.
gn
driver, 8-way, without memory
The power seat is inoperative or Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test W
driver, 10-way
ia
The power seat is inoperative or Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test B

passenger, 10-way
rd
The power lumbar is inoperative Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test C

— driver, without multi-contour Pinpoint Test
seats
The power lumbar is inoperative Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test D
ca
— passenger, without multi- Pinpoint Test

contour seats
An individual multi-contour seat Seat control Using a diagnostic scan tool, CARRY OUT self-test on the SCMG or SCMH. If any seat control
function is inoperative from the switch switch related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present, REFER to the SCMG or SCMH DTC
seat control switch — Chart. If no seat control switch related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present, INSTALL a
touchscreen control operates new seat control switch.
correctly REFER to: Front Seat Control Switch (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
The multi-contour seat is Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test U

inoperative/does not operate Pinpoint Test
correctly — driver
The multi-contour seat is Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test V
correctly — passenger
The memory seat does not Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test E
operate Pinpoint Test
horizontally/vertically/recline
using the seat control switch
The memory seat does not Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test F
operate using the memory SET Pinpoint Test
switch
The memory seat moves in two- Refer to the CARRY OUT the DSM self-test and RETRIEVE the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to
second intervals Pinpoint Test the DSM DTC Chart.
The memory seat does not move Refer to the CARRY OUT the DSM self-test and RETRIEVE the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). REFER to
to the correct memory position Pinpoint Test the DSM DTC Chart.
The memory seat does not Refer to the VERIFY the RKE transmitter is operating correctly and is associated to a memory position. REFER
operate when using the RKE Pinpoint Test to the Owner's Literature for information on associating a RKE transmitter. CARRY OUT the DSM
transmitter self-test and REFER to the DSM DTC Chart to diagnose any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
retrieved.
Easy entry/easy exit is Easy VERIFY the easy entry/exit feature is enabled in the message center. REFER to the Owner's
inoperative/does not operate entry/exit Literature for information on programming vehicle settings in the message center. If the easy
correctly feature is not entry/exit feature is enabled but still does not operate correctly, GO to Pinpoint Test G
enabled
Refer to the
Pinpoint Test
The heated seats are inoperative Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test H

— driver and passenger Pinpoint Test
The heated seat is Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test I

correctly — driver
The heated seat is Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test J
correctly — passenger
One or both climate controlled Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test L
seats are inoperative Pinpoint Test
A single climate controlled seat Excessive CARRY OUT the SCME self-test and retrieve any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
does not operate correctly — sunload or If any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present, REFER to the SCME DTC Chart.
exhibits poor airflow or extreme If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present, CHECK the affected seat cushion or
performance cabin backrest for correct installation of the climate controlled seat components (backrest or cushion
m
temperatures blower motor, air duct and foam pad) and CHECK for airflow restrictions (backrest or cushion
Incorrectly blower motor inlets and outlets, filters and ducts) and REPAIR as needed. RETEST the
installed system for normal operation.
backrest or
cushion
blower motor
Airflow
blockage
. co
Disconnected
air duct
gn
Pinpoint Test(s)
ia
The Power Seat is Inoperative or Does Not Operate Correctly — Driver, 8-way, Without Memory
rd

ca
REFER to: Front Seats - System Operation and Component Description (501-10A Front Seats, Description and Operation).
Possible Causes
Fuse
Seat control switch
Horizontal motor
Seat track
PINPOINT TEST A : THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — DRIVER, 8-WAY, WITHOUT MEMORY
WARNING: Incorrect repair techniques or actions can cause an accidental Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) deployment. Never
compromise or depart from these instructions. Failure to precisely follow all instructions could result in serious personal injury from an accidental
deployment.
A1
CHECK THE SEAT OPERATION
Attempt to operate the seat in all directions.
Is the seat inoperative in all directions?
Yes GO to A2
No If only the horizontal motor is inoperative, GO to A4
If only the front height motor is inoperative, GO to A6
If only the rear height motor is inoperative, GO to A8
A2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment.
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Driver Side Airbag In-line C3051.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Control Switch C3387.
Measure:

C3387-9 Ground
Yes GO to A3
No VERIFY BJB fuse 73 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short. GO to A10
m
A3
CHECK THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Measure:
C3387-7
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia
Yes INSTALL a new driver seat control switch.

GO to A10
rd
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to A10

ca
A4
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Horizontal Motor C362.
NOTE: The voltage being measured changes polarity depending upon which direction the seat control switch is activated.
While pushing the horizontal switch forward and rearward, measure:

C362-1 C362-3
Is the voltage greater than 11 volts when the seat control switch is operated in both directions?
Yes INSTALL a new horizontal motor.

REFER to: Front Seat Track Motor (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
GO to A10
No GO to A5
A5
CHECK THE SEAT HORIZONTAL MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C3387-6 C362-3
C3387-5 C362-1

GO to A10
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to A10
m
A6
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR
Ignition OFF.

. co
Disconnect: Driver Seat Front Height Motor C382.
gn
While pushing the front height switch upward and downward, measure:

ia

C382-1 C382-3
rd
ca
Is the voltage greater than 11 volts when the seat control s witch is operated in both directions?
Yes INSTALL a new driver seat track.

REFER to: Front Seat Track (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
GO to A10
No GO to A7
A7
CHECK THE SEAT FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C3387-1 C382-3
C3387-2 C382-1

GO to A10
A8
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT REAR HEIGHT MOTOR
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Rear Height Motor C363.
While pushing the rear height switch upward and downward, measure:

C363-1 C363-3
m
No
GO to A10
GO to A9
. co
A9
CHECK THE SEAT REAR HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
gn
Measure:

ia

C3387-8 C363-3
rd
C3387-10 C363-1
ca

GO to A10
A10
CHECK FOR SRS (SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition OFF.
Connect: Driver Side Airbag In-line C3051.
Connect all previously disconnected connectors.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Cycle the ignition OFF then ON.

Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform RCM self-test.
Are any RCM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) retrieved during self-test?
Yes
No Repair is complete. RETURN the vehicle to the customer.
The Power Seat is Inoperative or Does Not Operate Correctly — Passenger, 10-way
Possible Causes
Fuse
Seat control switch
Horizontal motor
Seat track
Seat backrest
m
co
PINPOINT TEST B : THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — PASSENGER, 10-WAY
.
gn
deployment.
B1
ia
Yes GO to B2
rd
No If only the recliner motor is inoperative, GO to B4

If only the horizontal motor is inoperative, GO to B6
If only the front height motor is inoperative, GO to B8
ca
If only the rear height motor is inoperative, GO to B10
B2
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Passenger Side Airbag In-line C339.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Control Switch C330.
Measure:

C330-11 Ground
Yes GO to B3
causes of the circuit short. GO to B12
B3
Measure:

C330-10 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new passenger seat control switch.

GO to B12
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to B12
B4
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT RECLINER MOTOR
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Recliner Motor C3189.
While pushing the recline switch forward and rearward, measure:

Positive Lead
. co
C3189-1 C3189-3
gn
ia
Yes INSTALL a new passenger front seat backrest frame. GO to B12

rd
No GO to B5
B5
CHECK THE SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
ca
Measure:

C330-1 C3189-3
C330-3 C3189-1

GO to B12
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to B12
B6
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Horizontal Motor C332.

C332-1 C332-3

GO to B12
No GO to B7
m
B7
Measure:

Positive Lead
. co
C330-17 C332-3
gn
C330-16 C332-1
ia
rd

ca

GO to B12
B8
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Front Height Motor C3074.

C3074-1 C3074-3
Yes INSTALL a new passenger seat track.
GO to B12
No GO to B9
B9
Measure:

C330-15 C3074-3
C330-14 C3074-1
m
GO to B12
B10
. co
gn
Ignition OFF.

ia
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Rear Height Motor C3075.
rd

ca

C3075-1 C3075-3

GO to B12
No GO to B11
B11
Measure:

C330-18 C3075-3
C330-19 C3075-1

GO to B12
B12
Ignition OFF.
Connect: Passenger Side Airbag In-line C339.
m
Ignition ON.

. co
gn
Yes
ia
rd
The Power Lumbar is Inoperative — Driver, Without Multi-Contour Seats
ca
Possible Causes

Seat control switch
Front seat power lumbar assembly
PINPOINT TEST C : THE POWER LUMBAR IS INOPERATIVE — DRIVER, WITHOUT MULTI-CONTOUR SEATS
deployment.
C1
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT LUMBAR MOTOR
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Lumbar Motor C3215.
While pushing the lumbar switch in both directions, measure:

C3215-A C3215-B
Yes INSTALL a new driver seat power lumbar assembly.

REFER to: Front Seat Power Lumbar Assembly (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
GO to C3
No GO to C2
C2
CHECK THE SEAT LUMBAR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Driver Seat Control Switch C3387 (8-way seat) or C369 (10-way seat).
If equipped with 8-way seat, measure:

C3387-4 C3215-B
C3387-3 C3215-A
m
If equipped with 10-way seat, measure:
. co
gn
C369-2 C3215-B
C369-6 C3215-A
ia
rd
ca

GO to C3
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to C3
C3
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes
The Power Lumbar is Inoperative — Passenger, Without Multi-Contour Seats
Possible Causes

Seat control switch
PINPOINT TEST D : THE POWER LUMBAR IS INOPERATIVE — PASSENGER, WITHOUT MULTI-CONTOUR SEATS
deployment.
D1
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT LUMBAR MOTOR
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Lumbar Motor C3216.

. co
gn
While pushing the lumbar switch in both directions, measure:

ia
C3216-A C3216-B
rd
ca
Yes INSTALL a new passenger seat power lumbar assembly.

REFER to: Front Seat Power Lumbar Assembly (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
GO to D3
No GO to D2
D2
CHECK THE SEAT LUMBAR MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C330-20 C3216-B
C330-2 C3216-A

GO to D3
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to D3
D3
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes
m
. co
The Memory Seat Does Not Operate Horizontally/Vertically/Recline Using the Seat Control Switch
gn
ia

rd

B14C3:24 Seat Height Rear Down Switch: Signal Stuck High If the seat control switch is active for greater than 2 minutes or is active during the self-test,
ca
the DSM sets this DTC.

B14C4:24 Seat Height Rear Up Switch: Signal Stuck High If the seat control switch is active for greater than 2 minutes or is active during the self-test,
B14CE:09 Seat Horizontal Motor Output: Component Failure If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14CE:11 Seat Horizontal Motor Output: Circuit Short To Ground If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14CE:12 Seat Horizontal Motor Output: Circuit Short To Battery If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14CE:14 Seat Horizontal Motor Output: Circuit Short To Ground or If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
Open disabled.
B14CE:15 Seat Horizontal Motor Output: Circuit Short To Battery or If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
Open disabled.
B14CE:1A Seat Horizontal Motor Output: Circuit Resistance Below If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
Threshold disabled.
B14CF:09 Seat Recline Motor Output: Component Failure If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14CF:11 Seat Recline Motor Output: Circuit Short To Ground If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14CF:12 Seat Recline Motor Output: Circuit Short To Battery If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14CF:14 Seat Recline Motor Output: Circuit Short To Ground or If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
Open disabled.
B14CF:15 Seat Recline Motor Output: Circuit Short To Battery or If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
Open disabled.
B14CF:1A Seat Recline Motor Output: Circuit Resistance Below If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
Threshold disabled.
B14D0:09 Seat Height Front/Tilt Motor Output: Component Failure If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14D0:11 Seat Height Front/Tilt Motor Output: Circuit Short To If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
Ground disabled.
Battery disabled.
Ground or Open disabled.
Battery or Open disabled.
B14D0:1A Seat Height Front/Tilt Motor Output: Circuit Resistance If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
Below Threshold disabled.
B14D2:09 Seat Height Rear Motor Output: Component Failure If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14D2:11 Seat Height Rear Motor Output: Circuit Short To Ground If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14D2:12 Seat Height Rear Motor Output: Circuit Short To Battery If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
disabled.
B14D2:14 Seat Height Rear Motor Output: Circuit Short To Ground If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
or Open disabled.
B14D2:15 Seat Height Rear Motor Output: Circuit Short To Battery If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
or Open disabled.
m
B14D2:1A Seat Height Rear Motor Output: Circuit Resistance Below If the current sensed by the DSM is within a specified range, the DTC is set and the output is
Threshold disabled.
B1B96:24 Seat Slide Forward Switch: Signal Stuck High If the seat control switch is active for greater than 2 minutes or was active during the self-test,
B1B97:24 Seat Slide Backward Switch: Signal Stuck High
B1B98:24 Seat Tilt Up Switch: Signal Stuck High

. co
If the seat control switch is active for greater than 2 minutes or was active during the self-test,
If the seat control switch is active for greater than 2 minutes or was active during the self-test,
gn
B1B99:24 Seat Tilt Down Switch: Signal Stuck High If the seat control switch is active for greater than 2 minutes or was active during the self-test,
B1C00:24 Seat Recline Up Switch: Signal Stuck High If the seat control switch is active for greater than 2 minutes or was active during the self-test,
ia
B1C01:24 Seat Recline Down Switch: Signal Stuck High If the seat control switch is active for greater than 2 minutes or was active during the self-test,
rd
Possible Causes
ca
Fuse
Seat control switch
Horizontal motor
Seat track
Seat backrest
DSM
PINPOINT TEST E : THE MEMORY SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE HORIZONTALLY/VERTICALLY/RECLINE USING THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
deployment.
E1
RETRIEVE THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Attempt to activate the seat control switch in all directions.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform DSM self-test. If the diagnostic scan tool does not communicate with the DSM,
Are any DSM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes For DTC B14C3:24, B14C4:24, B1B96:24, B1B97:24, B1B98:24, B1B99:24, B1C00:24 or B1C01:24, GO to E3
For DTC B14CE:31, B14CF:31, B14D0:31 or B14D2:31, GO to Pinpoint Test F
For DTC B14CE:XX, B14CF:XX, B14D0:XX or B14D2:XX, GO to E9
For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the DSM DTC Chart.
No GO to E2
E2
CHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) SEAT CONTROL SWITCH PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
While operating the seat control switch in all positions, monitor the following DSM seat control switch Parameter Identifications (PIDs) using a
diagnostic scan tool:
Front Tilt Switch (Down) (FTLT_SW_DN)
Front Tilt Switch (Up) (FTLT_SW_UP)
Recline Switch (Down) (REC_SW_DWN)
Recline Switch (Up) (REC_SW_UP)
Rear Tilt Switch (Down) (RTLT_SW_DN)
Rear Tilt Switch (Up) (RTLT_SW_UP)
Slide Switch (Backward) (SLIDE_SW_B)
Slide Switch (Forward) (SLIDE_SW_F)
Do the PID states agree with the switch positions?
Yes GO to E9
No GO to E3
E3
CHECK THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
m
Carry out the component test on the seat control switch.

Did the seat control switch pass the component test?
Yes GO to E4
. co
No INSTALL a new seat control switch.
gn
E4
ia
rd
Ignition OFF.

ca
Measure:

C369-10 Ground
Yes GO to E5
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to E37
E5
CHECK THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C369-11 Ground

Yes GO to E6
E6
CHECK THE CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH AND DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DSM C341A.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C369-17 Ground
C369-16 Ground
C369-13 Ground
m
C369-12 Ground
C369-14
. co Ground
gn
C369-15 Ground
ia
rd
C369-9 Ground
ca
C369-7 Ground
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to E37
No GO to E7
E7
CHECK THE CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH AND DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C369-17 Ground
C369-16 Ground
C369-13 Ground
C369-12 Ground
C369-14 Ground
C369-15 Ground
m
C369-9 . co Ground
gn
C369-7 Ground
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to E8
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to E37
E8
CHECK THE CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH AND DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C369-17 C341A-7
C369-16 C341A-8
C369-13 C341A-5
C369-12 C341A-6
C369-14 C341A-9
C369-15 C341A-10
C369-9 C341A-4
C369-7 C341A-3
m
. co
Yes GO to E36
gn
ia
E9
CHECK THE SEAT TRACK OPERATION USING DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) ACTIVE COMMANDS AND PARAMETER
IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Toggle the following DSM active commands ON and OFF using a diagnostic scan tool while monitoring the seat movement:
rd
Front Motor Up (FRONT_UP)

Front Motor Down (FRONT_DWN)
Seat Height Motor Up (H_MOT_U)
Seat Height Motor Down (H_MOT_D)
ca
Horizontal Motor Forward (HORZ_FWD)

Horizontal Motor Backward (HORZ_BWD)
Recline Motor Backward (RECL_BWD)
Recline Motor Forward (RECL_FWD)
Does the driver seat operate correctly?
Yes The condition is intermittent. CHECK for causes of an intermittent concern, particularly the pins and terminals of electrical connectors
that were disconnected. Do not install any new components at this time. Components should only be installed when directed
to do so in the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found.
No If no seat movement occurs, GO to E10
If no front vertical seat movement occurs, GO to E12
If no rear vertical seat movement occurs, GO to E18
If no horizontal seat movement occurs, GO to E24
If no recline seat movement occurs, GO to E30
E10
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE)
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DSM C341B.
Measure:
C341B-3 Ground
C341B-6 Ground
Yes GO to E11
E11
CHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: DSM C341C.
Measure:

m
C341C-3 Ground
C341C-6 Ground
. co
gn

ia
Yes GO to E36

rd
E12
CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
ca
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DSM C341A and C341F.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341F-1 Ground
C341F-2 Ground
Yes GO to E13
No GO to E14
E13
CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE WITH THE MOTOR DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341F-1 Ground
C341F-2 Ground
m
No INSTALL a new driver seat track.
GO to E37
E14
CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
. co
Measure:
gn
C341F-1 Ground
ia
C341F-2 Ground
rd
ca
Yes GO to E16
No GO to E15
E15
CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE MOTOR DISCONNECTED
Measure:

C341F-1 Ground
C341F-2 Ground

GO to E37
E16
CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C341F-1 C382-1
C341F-2 C382-3
m
Yes GO to E17
E17
CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION USING ACTIVE COMMANDS
. co
Connect: Driver Seat Front Height Motor C382.
gn
Connect: DSM C341A and C341F.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the following DSM active command Parameter Identifications (PIDs):
ia

rd
NOTE: During the following step, the voltage being measured changes polarity dependent upon which direction the seat control is activated.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, toggle the active commands FRONT_UP and FRONT_DOWN on and off and measure:
ca

C382-1 C382-3
Is the voltage greater than 11 volts when commanded ON in both directions and 0 volt when commanded OFF?

GO to E37
No GO to E36
E18
CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DSM C341A and C341C.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
C341C-1 Ground
C341C-2 Ground
Yes GO to E19
No GO to E20
E19
CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE WITH THE MOTOR DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
C341C-1
C341C-2
. co Ground
Ground
gn
ia

rd
No INSTALL a new driver seat track.

ca
GO to E37
E20
CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341C-1 Ground
C341C-2 Ground
Yes GO to E22
No GO to E21
E21
CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE MOTOR DISCONNECTED
Measure:

C341C-1 Ground
C341C-2 Ground

GO to E37
m
E22
CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
C341C-1
Positive Lead
. co
C363-1
Negative Lead
C341C-2 C363-3
gn
ia
rd
Yes GO to E23
ca
E23
CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION USING ACTIVE COMMANDS
Connect: Driver Seat Rear Height Motor C363.
Connect: DSM C341A and C341C.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, toggle the active commands H_MOT_U and H_MOT_D on and off and measure:

C363-1 C363-3

GO to E37
No GO to E36
E24
CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341F-5 Ground
C341F-6 Ground
m
Yes GO to E25
. co
No GO to E26
gn
E25
CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE WITH THE MOTOR DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Measure:

ca

C341F-5 Ground
C341F-6 Ground
No INSTALL a new driver seat horizontal motor.

GO to E37
E26
CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341F-5 Ground
C341F-6 Ground
Yes GO to E28
No GO to E27
E27
CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE MOTOR DISCONNECTED
Measure:

C341F-5 Ground
C341F-6 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes INSTALL a new driver seat horizontal motor.

GO to E37
ia

rd
E28
CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
ca
Measure:

C341F-5 C362-3
C341F-6 C362-1
Yes GO to E29
E29
CHECK THE HORIZONTAL MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION USING ACTIVE COMMANDS
Connect: Driver Seat Horizontal Motor C362.
Connect: DSM C341A and C341F.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, toggle the active commands HORZ_FWD and HORZ_BWD on and off and measure:

C362-1 C362-3
Yes INSTALL a new driver seat horizontal motor.

GO to E37
No GO to E36
E30
CHECK THE RECLINER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DSM C341A and C341B.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
. co
gn
C341B-1 Ground
C341B-4 Ground
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to E31
No GO to E32
E31
CHECK THE FRONT RECLINER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE WITH THE MOTOR DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Front Recliner Motor C3187.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341B-1 Ground
C341B-4 Ground
No INSTALL a new driver seat backrest frame. GO to E37
E32
CHECK THE FRONT RECLINER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341B-1 Ground
C341B-4 Ground
m
Yes GO to E34
No GO to E33
co
E33
CHECK THE RECLINER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE MOTOR DISCONNECTED
.
Disconnect: Driver Seat Recliner Motor C3187.
gn
Measure:

ia
C341B-1 Ground
C341B-4 Ground
rd
ca
Yes INSTALL a new driver seat backrest frame. GO to E37
E34
CHECK THE RECLINER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C341B-1 C3187-1
C341B-4 C3187-3
Yes GO to E35
E35
CHECK THE RECLINER MOTOR FOR CORRECT OPERATION USING ACTIVE COMMANDS
Connect: Driver Seat Recliner Motor C3187.
Connect: DSM C341A and C341B.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, toggle the active commands RECL_FWD and RECL_BWD on and off and measure:

C382-1 C382-3
m
Yes INSTALL a new driver seat backrest frame. GO to E37
No GO to E36
. co
E36
CHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) OPERATION
gn
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all of the DSM connectors.
Repair:
ia

rd
NOTE: Do not reconnect Driver Side Airbag In-line C3051 at this time.
ca
Reconnect all previously disconnected connectors.
Ignition ON.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DSM.
GO to E37
of any connector or pin issues. GO to E37
E37
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes
The Memory Seat Does Not Operate Using the Memory SET Switch

DSM DTC Fault Trigger Conditions
m
B14CB:11 Seat Height Rear If a short to ground condition is present on the affected motor's position sensor (Hall-effect) feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
Position Feedback: After a DTC is set, a memory recall is not possible but the seat control switch can operate the associated motor in two-second
Circuit Short To Ground increments.
B14CB:12 Seat Height Rear
Position Feedback:
co
If a short to voltage condition is present on the affected motor's position sensor (Hall-effect) feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
After a DTC is set, a memory recall is not possible but the seat control switch can operate the associated motor in two-second
Circuit Short To Battery increments.
.
B14CE:31 Seat Horizontal Motor During self-test, the DSM attempts to operate the appropriate seat track motor and uses the motor's position sensor to monitor
gn
Output: No Signal movement. If no motor movement is sensed, the DTC is set. The DSM retries motor operation on the next activation of the seat
control switch. If no movement is detected after 250 milliseconds, the DSM disables the output.
B14CF:31 Seat Recline Motor During self-test, the DSM attempts to operate the appropriate seat motor and uses the motor's position sensor to monitor
ia
B14D0:31 Seat Height Front/Tilt During self-test, the DSM attempts to operate the appropriate seat track motor and uses the motor's position sensor to monitor
Motor Output: No movement. If no motor movement is sensed, the DTC is set. The DSM retries motor operation on the next activation of the seat
Signal control switch. If no movement is detected after 250 milliseconds, the DSM disables the output.
rd
B14D2:31 Seat Height Rear Motor During self-test, the DSM attempts to operate the appropriate seat track motor and uses the motor's position sensor to monitor
ca
B1B89:11 Seat Slide Motor If a short to ground condition is present on the affected motor's position sensor (Hall-effect) feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
Speed/Position Sensor: After a DTC is set, a memory recall is not possible but the seat control switch can operate the associated motor in two-second
B1B89:12 Seat Slide Motor If a short to voltage condition is present on the affected motor's position sensor (Hall-effect) feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
B1B91:11 Seat Tilt Motor If a short to ground condition is present on the affected motor's position sensor (Hall-effect) feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
B1B91:12 Seat Tilt Motor If a short to voltage condition is present on the affected motor's position sensor (Hall-effect) feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
B1B93:11 Seat Recline Motor If a short to ground condition is present on the affected motor's position sensor (Hall-effect) feedback circuit, the DTC is set.
B1B93:12 Seat Recline Motor If a short to voltage condition is present on the affected motor's position sensor (Hall-effect) feedback circuit, the DTC is set.

DDM DTC Fault Trigger Conditions

B1C03:23 Memory #1 If a short to ground is sensed on the switch input circuit during the DDM self-test, the DTC is set. If activity is sensed on the input
Switch: Signal circuit for greater than 2 minutes, the DTC is set as continuous. With the DTC set, any input signal on the circuit is ignored.
Stuck Low
Stuck Low
Stuck Low
Possible Causes

Memory SET switch
Missing ignition status information
Horizontal motor
Seat track
Seat backrest
PINPOINT TEST F : THE MEMORY SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE USING THE MEMORY SET SWITCH
WARNING: Incorrect repair techniques or actions can cause an accidental Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) deployment. Never compromise or
depart from these instructions. Failure to precisely follow all instructions could result in serious personal injury from an accidental deployment.
F1
CHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) IGNITION POSITION FINAL STATUS PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) STATES
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the DSM IGN_FINAL PID while cycling the ignition from ON to OFF and back to ON.
m
Do the PID states agree?
Yes
No
GO to F2
To diagnose no power in run,

co
REFER to: Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components (211-05 Steering Wheel and Column Electrical Components, Diagnosis and
Testing).
.
gn
F2
Attempt to operate the memory seat in all directions.
ia
Place the memory seat in the middle of each range of travel.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform self-test on the DSM and DDM. If the diagnostic scan tool does not communicate to the DSM and/or DDM,
rd

ca
Yes For DTC B1C03:23, B1C04:23 or B1C05:23, GO to F4

For DTC B1B91:11, B1B91:12 or B14D0:31, GO to F10
For DTC B14CB:11, B14CB:12 or B14D2:31, GO to F13
For DTC B1B89:11, B1B89:12 or B14CE:31, GO to F16
For DTC B1B93:11, B1B93:12 or B14CF:31, GO to F19
For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the DSM or DDM DTC Chart(s) in this section.
No GO to F3
F3
MONITOR DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS) AND CHECK FOR CORRECT MEMORY SET SWITCH INPUTS
While activating the memory recall 1, 2 and 3 buttons, monitor the following DSM memory recall switch status Parameter Identifications (PIDs) using a diagnostic
scan tool:
Set Memory 1 (MEMORY_1).
Do the PID values agree with the switch button positions?
Yes GO to F9
No GO to F4
F4
CHECK THE MEMORY SET SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Driver Door Lock Control Switch C541.

While pressing and releasing the indicated memory recall button 1, measure the component side resistance of the driver door lock control switch using the
following table:

Action
C541, pin 5, Component Side
m
co
.
following table:
gn

Action
ia
rd
ca
following table:

Action
m
Are the resistances less than 20 ohms with the switch buttons pressed and greater than 10,000 ohms with the switch buttons released?
Yes GO to F5
No INSTALL a new door lock control switch. co
REFER to: Front Door Lock Control Switch (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
.
gn
F5
CHECK THE MEMORY SET SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
ia

C541-6 Ground
rd
ca
Yes GO to F6
F6
CHECK THE MEMORY SET CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Disconnect: DDM C501B.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C541-3 Ground
C541-4 Ground
C541-5 Ground
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit.

No GO to F7
F7
CHECK THE MEMORY SET SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C541-3 Ground
C541-4 Ground
m
C541-5
. co Ground
gn
ia
Yes GO to F8
rd

ca
F8
CHECK THE MEMORY SET SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C541-3 C501B-2
C541-4 C501B-3
C541-5 C501B-1
Yes GO to F22

F9
CHECK THE SEAT TRACK OPERATION USING DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) ACTIVE COMMANDS AND PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Toggle the following DSM active commands ON and OFF using a diagnostic scan tool while monitoring the seat movement:
Does the driver seat operate correctly?
Yes The condition is intermittent. CHECK for causes of an intermittent concern, particularly the pins and terminals of electrical connectors that
were disconnected. Do not install any new components at this time. Components should only be installed when directed to do so in
the pinpoint test. REPAIR any intermittent wiring, terminal or connector concerns found.
No DIAGNOSE the inoperative seat. GO to Pinpoint Test E
F10
CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
WARNING: Turn the ignition OFF and wait one minute to deplete the backup power supply. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment.
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
Measure:
. co
gn
C382-2 Ground
C382-4 Ground
ia
rd
ca
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to F23
No GO to F11
F11
CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C382-2 Ground
C382-4 Ground

Yes GO to F12
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to F23
F12
CHECK THE FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C382-2 C341F-9
Measure:

C382-4 C341A-19

m
GO to F23
F13
CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
co
.
gn
Ignition OFF.

ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Measure:

ca

C363-2 Ground
C363-4 Ground
Is any voltage present on any circuits?
No GO to F14
F14
CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C363-2 Ground
C363-4 Ground
Yes GO to F15
F15
CHECK THE REAR HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C363-2 C341A-18
Measure:
m
C363-4 C341F-9
. co
gn
GO to F23
ia
rd
F16
CHECK THE HORIZONTAL SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
ca
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C362-2 Ground
C362-4 Ground
Is any voltage present on any circuits?
No GO to F17
F17
CHECK THE HORIZONTAL SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C362-2 Ground
C362-4 Ground
Yes GO to F18
m
F18
CHECK THE HORIZONTAL SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
C362-2
Positive Lead
. co
C341F-9
Negative Lead
gn
Measure:

ia
C362-4 C341A-20
rd

ca

GO to F23
F19
CHECK THE RECLINER SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C3187-2 Ground
C3187-4 Ground
No GO to F20
F20 CHECK THE RECLINER SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND

Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3187-2 Ground
C3187-4 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to F21

ia
F21
CHECK THE RECLINER SENSOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
rd

ca
C3187-2 C341A-17
Measure:

C3187-4 C341F-9
Yes INSTALL a new driver seat backrest frame. GO to F23
F22
CHECK THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all of the DDM connectors.
Repair:
Ignition ON.
TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DDM.
F23
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
m
Yes
. co
gn
ia
Easy Entry/Easy Exit is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly

rd
ca
Possible Causes
Easy entry/exit feature is not enabled

Missing ignition status information
DSM
Verify the easy entry/exit feature is enabled in the message center. REFER to the Owner's Literature for information on programming vehicle settings in the
message center.
PINPOINT TEST G : EASY ENTRY/EASY EXIT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY

G1
CHECK THE DRIVER POWER SEAT OPERATION
Ignition ON.
Check the message center to verify the easy entry/exit feature is turned on.
Using the seat control switch, verify the driver power seat operates fully forward and backward.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the DSM self-test.
Are any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) received?
Yes REFER to the DSM DTC Chart.

No If disabled, ENABLE the easy entry/exit feature through the message center. REFER to the Owner's Literature. TEST the system for
normal operation. If OK, INSTRUCT the customer on correct system operation. GO to G2
G2
CHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) IGNITION POSITION FINAL STATUS PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) STATES
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the DSM IGN_FINAL PID while cycling the ignition from ON to OFF and back to ON.
Does the PID states match with ignition mode?
Yes INSTALL a new DSM.

No DIAGNOSE the ignition status concern.
The Heated Seats are Inoperative — Driver and Passenger
Possible Causes
Fuse
m
HVAC module
FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") not operating correctly
Touchscreen not operating correctly

. co
gn
PINPOINT TEST H : THE HEATED SEATS ARE INOPERATIVE — DRIVER AND PASSENGER
H1
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT OPERATION USING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCHES AND TOUCHSCREEN
Start the engine.
ia
Attempt to operate the heated seats using the touchscreen and FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") buttons.
Are the heated seats inoperative when using both the touchscreen and the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") buttons?
rd
Yes GO to H2
No If the heated seats are inoperative only from the touchscreen, DIAGNOSE the touchscreen concern. Refer to the appropriate section
ca
in Group 415 for the procedure.

If the heated seats are only inoperative from the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B"), DIAGNOSE the FCIM-B (Front
Controls Interface Module "B") concern. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
H2
CHECK FOR HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform HVAC module self-test.
Are any HVAC Module Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes REFER to the HVAC Module DTC Chart in this section.
No GO to H3
H3
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: HVAC Module C228B.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228B-1 Ground
Yes GO to H4
H4
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all of the HVAC module connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the HVAC module connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Ignition ON.
m
Yes
co
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HVAC module.
REFER to: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information,
.
gn
ia
The Heated Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly — Driver

rd

ca


B1034:11 Left Front Seat Heater Sets when the HVAC module senses the left front heater element current draw has exceeded a specified threshold. When
Element: Circuit Short To this DTC sets, the HVAC module disables the circuit until the ignition is cycled.
Ground
B1034:15 Left Front Seat Heater Sets when the HVAC module senses the left front heater circuit voltage is above a specified threshold when the driver is
Element: Circuit Short To active or the left front heater element current draw is less than a specified threshold. When this DTC sets, the HVAC module
Battery or Open disables the circuit until the ignition is cycled.
B1038:11 Left Front Seat Heater Sets when the HVAC module senses the left front heater sensor voltage is out-of-range low. When this DTC sets, the HVAC
Sensor: Circuit Short To module disables the circuit until the ignition is cycled.
Ground
B1038:15 Left Front Seat Heater Sets when the HVAC module senses the left front heater sensor voltage is out-of-range high. When this DTC sets, the HVAC
Sensor: Circuit Short To module disables the circuit until the ignition is cycled.
Battery or Open
Possible Causes

Heater mat
HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST I : THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — DRIVER
I1
Start the engine.
Attempt to operate the driver heated seat using the touchscreen and FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") buttons.
Is the driver heated seat inoperative when using both the touchscreen and the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") buttons?
Yes GO to I2
No If the driver heated seat is inoperative only from the touchscreen, DIAGNOSE the touchscreen concern. Refer to the appropriate section in
Group 415 for the procedure.
If the driver heated seat is only inoperative from the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B"), DIAGNOSE the FCIM-B (Front Controls
Interface Module "B") concern. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
I2
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
Are any HVAC module Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes For DTC B1034:11 or B1034:15, GO to I4

For DTC B1038:11 or B1038:15, GO to I5
. co
For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the HVAC Module DTC Chart.
gn
No GO to I3
ia
I3
Ignition OFF.

rd
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ca

C228B-1 Ground
Yes GO to I4
I4
CHECK THE HEATER ELEMENT POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: HVAC module C228B (if not previously disconnected).
Disconnect: Left Front Seat Cushion Heater C364.
Measure:
C364-1 Ground
Measure:

C364-1 C228B-16
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the driver seat cushion heater mat and ground; and less than 3 ohms between the driver seat cushion
heater mat and the HVAC module?
Yes GO to I8
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to I14
I5
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Left Front Seat Cushion Heater C364.
Measure:
. co
gn
C364-2 Ground
ia
Measure:
rd

C364-2 C228B-30
ca
Yes GO to I6
I6
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Disconnect: HVAC Module C228A.
Measure:

C364-3 Ground
Measure:

C364-3 C228A-23
Yes GO to I7
No REPAIR the open circuit or REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. GO to I14
I7
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C364-2 Ground
Yes REPAIR the circuit. GO to I14

No GO to I12
m
I8
CHECK THE HEATER ELEMENT GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Disconnect: Left Front Seat Backrest Heater C365.
Measure:
. co
gn
C365-2 Ground
ia
Is the resistance less than 0.5 ohm?

rd
Yes GO to I9
ca
I9
CHECK THE CUSHION HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Measure the component side resistance between:

Action
C364-1, Component Side

Ground
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Is the resistance between 0.6 and 2 ohms between pins 1 and 4; and greater than 10,000 ohms between pin 1 and ground?
Yes GO to I10
No INSTALL a new driver seat cushion heater mat. GO to I14
I10
CHECK THE BACKREST HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND

Action

Ground
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to I11
No INSTALL a new driver seat backrest heater mat. GO to I14
I11 CHECK THE CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE CUSHION HEATER MAT AND BACKREST HEATER MAT FOR AN OPEN AND SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C364-4 Ground
Measure:

C364-4 C365-1
heater mat and the backrest heater mat?
Yes GO to I13
I12
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND

Action
m
. co
gn

ia
Ground
rd
ca
Is the resistance between 300 and 300,000 ohms between pins 2 and 3; and greater than 10,000 ohms between pin 2 and ground?
Yes GO to I13
No INSTALL a new driver seat cushion heater mat. GO to I14

I13
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Ignition ON.
TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new HVAC module.
REFER to: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Control Module (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Removal
and Installation).
GO to I14
connector or pin issues. GO to I14
m
I14
Ignition OFF.
. co
gn
Ignition ON.
ia

rd
ca
Yes
The Heated Seat is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly — Passenger


B1036:11 Right Front Seat Heater Sets when the HVAC module senses the right front heater element current draw has exceeded a specified threshold. When
Element: Circuit Short To this DTC sets, the HVAC module disables the circuit until the ignition is cycled.
Ground
B1036:15 Right Front Seat Heater Sets when the HVAC module senses the right front heater circuit voltage is above a specified threshold when the driver is
Element: Circuit Short To active or senses the right front heater element current draw is less than a specified threshold. When this DTC sets, the HVAC
Battery or Open module disables the circuit until the ignition is cycled.
B103A:11 Right Front Seat Heater Sets when the HVAC module senses the right front heater sensor voltage is out-of-range low. When this DTC sets, the
Sensor: Circuit Short To HVAC module disables the circuit until the ignition is cycled.
Ground
B103A:15 Right Front Seat Heater Sets when the HVAC module senses the right front heater sensor voltage is out-of-range high. When this DTC sets, the
Sensor: Circuit Short To HVAC module disables the circuit until the ignition is cycled.
Battery or Open
Possible Causes

Heater mat
HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST J : THE HEATED SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — PASSENGER
J1
Start the engine.
Attempt to operate the passenger heated seat using the touchscreen and FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") buttons.
m
Is the passenger heated seat inoperative when using both the touchscreen and the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") buttons?
Yes GO to J2
No
in Group 415 for the procedure. co
If the passenger heated seat is inoperative only from the touchscreen, DIAGNOSE the touchscreen concern. Refer to the appropriate section
If the passenger heated seat is only inoperative from the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B"), DIAGNOSE the FCIM-B (Front
Controls Interface Module "B") concern. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
.
gn
J2
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
ia

rd
Are any HVAC module Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes For DTC B1036:11 or B1036:15, GO to J4

ca
For DTC B103A:11 or B103A:15, GO to J5

For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the HVAC Module DTC Chart.
No GO to J3
J3
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C228B-2 Ground
Yes GO to J4
J4
CHECK THE HEATER ELEMENT POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: HVAC Module C228B (if not previously disconnected).
Disconnect: Right Front Seat Cushion Heater C334.
Measure:

C334-1 Ground
Measure:

C334-1 C228B-17
m
Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms between the passenger seat cushion heater mat and ground; and less than 3 ohms between the passenger seat
cushion heater mat and the HVAC module?
Yes
No
GO to J8
REPAIR the circuit. GO to J14

. co
gn
J5
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
ia

rd
Disconnect: Right Front Seat Cushion Heater C334.
Measure:
ca

C334-2 Ground
Measure:

C334-2 C228B-15
Yes GO to J6
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to J14
J6
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:
C334-3 Ground
Measure:

C334-3 C228A-23
Yes GO to J7
No REPAIR the open circuit or REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. GO to J14
J7
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
C334-2
. co Ground

gn
Yes REPAIR the circuit. GO to J14

No GO to J12
ia
J8
CHECK THE HEATER ELEMENT GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
rd
Disconnect: Right Front Seat Backrest Heater C335.
Measure:
ca

C335-2 Ground
Is the resistance less than 0.5 ohm?
Yes GO to J9
J9
CHECK CUSHION HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND

Action

Ground
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to J10
No INSTALL a new passenger seat cushion heater mat. GO to J14
J10
CHECK THE BACKREST HEATED SEAT MAT FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND

Action

Ground
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to J11
No INSTALL a new passenger seat backrest heater mat. GO to J14
J11
CHECK THE CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE CUSHION HEATER MAT AND BACKREST HEATER MAT FOR AN OPEN AND SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:

C334-4 Ground
Measure:

C334-4 C335-1
cushion heater mat and the backrest heater mat?
Yes GO to J13
J12
CHECK THE HEATED SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND

Action
m
. co
gn

ia
Ground
rd
ca
Is the resistance between 300 and 300,000 ohms between pins 2 and 3; and greater than 10,000 ohms between pin 2 and ground?
Yes GO to J13
No INSTALL a new driver seat cushion heater mat. GO to J14

J13
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
NOTE: Do not reconnect Passenger Side Airbag In-line C339 at this time.
Ignition ON.
Yes
CHECK OASIS for any applicable Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs). If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test and FOLLOW
and Installation).
GO to J14
m
connector or pin issues. GO to J14
co
J14
.
Ignition OFF.
gn
Ignition ON.
ia

rd

ca
Yes
DTC: U0140:00
The DSM and the BCM communicate using the MS-CAN.


U0140:00 Lost Communication with Body Control Module: No Set by the DSM whenever it has lost communication to the BCM for 5 seconds or longer while DSM
Sub Type Information input voltage is between 10 and 15.5 volts.
Possible Causes
Module communication
DSM
BCM
PINPOINT TEST K : DTC: U0140:00

K1
VERIFY CUSTOMER CONCERN
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to K2
No The system is operating normally at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network traffic or intermittent fault condition.
K2
Ignition ON.
m
Yes GO to K3
No
K3
RECHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
co
NOTE: If new modules were installed prior to the DTC being set, the module configuration may be incorrectly set during PMI or the PMI may not have been
.
carried out.
gn
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
Using a diagnostic scan tool, repeat the DSM self-test.

ia
Yes GO to K4
rd
ca
K4
CHECK FOR DTC U0140:00 IN OTHER MODULES
carried out.
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Is DTC U0140:00 set in other modules?
Yes

No INSTALL a new DSM.

One or Both Climate Controlled Seats are Inoperative
Possible Causes

FDIM
FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B")
DSM
PINPOINT TEST L : ONE OR BOTH CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS ARE INOPERATIVE

L1
CHECK FOR SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the SCME self-test.
Were any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) retrieved?
Yes GO to the SCME DTC Chart.

No If the diagnostic scan tool did not communicate to the SCME,
Otherwise, GO to L2
m
L2
CHECK OPERATION OF THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) USING PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
NOTE: This step verifies the SCME is able to receive and process inbound command messages from the network and demonstrate if the SCME is
co
operational. This indicates the FDIM or FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") may not be sending the commands correctly.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the SCME Parameter Identifications (PIDs):
Driver Seat
.
Seat Cushion Temperature - Driver (SEAT_CSH_TMP_D)
gn
Seat Back Temperature - Driver (SEAT_BK_TMP_D)
Left Seat Back Heating Control (HEAT_BACK_L)
Left Seat Cushion Heating Control (HEAT_CUSH_L)
Front Passenger Seat

ia
Seat Cushion Temperature - Passenger (SEAT_CSH_TMP_P)

Seat Back Temperature - Passenger (SEAT_BK_TMP_P)
Right Seat Back Heating Control (HEAT_BACK_R)
rd
Right Seat Cushion Heating Control (HEAT_CUSH_R)
NOTE: The SCME active commands are limited to 15 seconds in the ON state.
ca
Operate the affected climate controlled seat using the active command while monitoring the appropriate Parameter Identifications (PIDs) for that seat.
When the command is in process the blower motor temperature Parameter Identifications (PIDs) on the affected seat should momentarily
increase. If no temperature increase is noted, verify the cushion/backrest blower filter is unobstructed and repeat the active command while
physically monitoring the blower for fan movement.
Do the PID states or cushion/backrest blower movement indicate climate controlled seat operation when using the active command?
Yes GO to L3

L3
USE THE FCIM-B (FRONT CONTROLS INTERFACE MODULE "B") BUTTONS AND MONITOR THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL
MODULE) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION) FOR A RESPONSE
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view the SCME Parameter Identifications (PIDs):
Climate Controlled Seat System State - Driver (CLIMATE_SEAT_D)
Climate Controlled Seat System State - Passenger (CLIMATE_SEAT_P)
Start the engine.
NOTE: Operation of the climate controlled seats repeatedly on and off or repeatedly switching between heat and cool modes may cause SCME
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to set, disabling one or both seat systems and may require Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) to be cleared before
seat operation may continue. It is recommended to allow time between modes for seat temperatures to return toward ambient temperatures before
continuing.
Attempt to operate the affected climate controlled seat in all modes using the appropriate buttons on the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B")
while monitoring the SCME PID CLIMATE_SEAT_D or CLIMATE_SEAT_P.
Do all the PID states match the climate controlled seat settings selected on the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B")?
Yes To diagnose the inoperative touchscreen button(s), Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
No If only the climate seat functionality is inoperative, INSTALL a new FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B"). Refer to the
appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure. If other features of the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") are also
inoperative, DIAGNOSE the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") concern.
REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) (412-00 Climate Control System -
DTC B1153:4B

m
B1153:4B Driver Seat Cushion: If the driver seat cushion blower motor temperature exceeds 110° C (230° F) in heat mode or 80° C (176° F) in cool mode for
Over Temperature more than 4 seconds the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
Possible Causes

Restricted cushion blower motor filter
. co
Crushed or restricted cushion foam pad
gn
Cushion blower motor
DSM
PINPOINT TEST M : DTC B1153:4B

ia
rd
M1
CHECK THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) FOR ON-DEMAND DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Start the vehicle and set the driver seat to HIGH heat.

ca
Was DTC B1153:4B retrieved on-demand during the self-test?
Yes GO to M2
No GO to M5
M2
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DSM C341E.
Disconnect: Driver Cushion Blower Motor C3035.
Disconnect: Driver Backrest Blower Motor C3034.
Measure:

C341E-6 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
Yes GO to M3
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to M22
M3
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Connect: Driver Cushion Blower Motor C3035.
Connect: Driver Backrest Blower Motor C3034.
Measure:

C341E-6 C341E-1
m
Compare the measured resistance value with the following table:
0-10° C (32-50° F)
Ambient Temperature
. co 2,782-1,663 ohms
Resistance
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms

gn
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
ia
rd
Is the resistance within the limits indicated?
Yes GO to M18
ca
No GO to M4
M4
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR

Action

m
Ambient Temperature Resistance

0-10° C (32-50° F)
10-20° C (50-68° F)
20-30° C (68-86° F)
. co 2,782-1,663 ohms
1,837-1,140 ohms
1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
gn
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
ia

rd
Yes REPAIR circuit VHS26 (VT) or RHS05 (YE/VT) for an open or high resistance. GO to M22
No INSTALL a new driver seat cushion blower motor.

REFER to: Front Seat Cushion Blower Motor (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
GO to M22
ca
M5
CONFIRM THE FAULT WHILE MONITORING THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) SEAT BACK TEMPERATURE - DRIVER
(SEAT_BK_TMP_D) AND SEAT CUSHION TEMPERATURE - DRIVER (SEAT_CSH_TMP_D) PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Set the driver seat to OFF.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, clear the SCME Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the SCME SEAT_BK_TMP_D and SEAT_CSH_TMP_D.
NOTE: A crushed seat cushion foam pad may be the cause of the fault making it necessary to occupy the seat to recreate and identify the fault.
Attempt to recreate the fault. Start the vehicle and set the driver seat to HIGH heat for at least 15 minutes while occupying the seat.
Do the Parameter Identifications (PIDs) increase incrementally (gradually) and stay within 15° C (27° F) of each other?
Yes The fault is not present at this time. The fault may have been set due to a past concern, incorrect use of the climate controlled seat system by
repeated switching between heat and cool modes or due to excessive passenger compartment temperature.
No If the SEAT_CSH_TMP_D PID increases incrementally and is greater than 15° C (27° F) difference from the SEAT_BK_TMP_D PID, GO to
M6
If the SEAT_CSH_TMP_D PID increases quickly (temperature "jumps" and does not increase incrementally) and is greater than 15° C (27° F)
difference from the SEAT_BK_TMP_D PID, GO to M16
M6
COMPARE OPERATION OF THE DRIVER AND PASSENGER SEATS
With the engine running, set both front seats to HIGH cool.
Note the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat cushion blower motor and compare it to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat cushion blower motor.
Carry out a wiggle test of the wire harnesses between the DSM and the driver seat cushion blower motor while monitoring blower operation. The blower should
operate consistently and not change speeds.
Is the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat cushion blower motor comparable to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat cushion blower motor
with no change in operation when carrying out the wiggle test?
Yes GO to M7
No If the airflow exhausting from the driver seat cushion blower motor is not comparable to the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat
cushion blower motor, GO to M8
If the driver seat cushion blower motor blower operation changed while carrying out the wiggle test, IDENTIFY and REPAIR the wiring fault.
M7
COMPARE OPERATION OF THE DRIVER AND PASSENGER SEATS WHILE OCCUPIED
Note the airflow exhausting from the driver seat cushion blower motor with the driver seat occupied and compare it to the airflow exhausting from the passenger
seat cushion blower motor with the passenger seat occupied.
Is the airflow exhausting from the driver seat cushion blower motor comparable to the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat cushion blower motor?
Yes GO to M16
No INSTALL a new driver seat cushion foam pad.
M8
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER FOR AN OBSTRUCTION OR RESTRICTED FILTER
m
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the driver seat cushion blower motor assembly for an obstruction or for a restricted filter.
Is the blower motor obstructed or the filter restricted?
Yes REMOVE the obstruction or INSTALL a new seat cushion blower motor.
. co
gn
No GO to M9
M9
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
ia
rd
Ignition OFF.

ca
Measure:

C341E-9 C3035-7
Yes GO to M10
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to M22
M10
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DSM C341D.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341D-9 Ground
Yes REPAIR the circuit. GO to M22

No GO to M11
M11
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341D-4 Ground
m
Yes GO to M12
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to M22
M12
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
. co
gn
C341D-4 C3035-3
C341D-9 C3035-4
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to M13
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to M22
M13
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER RESISTANCE
NOTE: The ohmmeter must be connected with the positive lead to pin 3 and the negative lead to pin 4 when measuring. Ohmmeter leads incorrectly connected
results in false readings and leads to incorrect identification of components that are not faulty.

Action
m
Is the resistance between 4,000 and 10,000 ohms?
Yes GO to M14
No INSTALL a new driver seat cushion blower motor. co
GO to M22
.
gn
M14
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE
ia

rd

Action
ca
Is the resistance between 240K and 400K ohms?

Yes GO to M15
No INSTALL a new driver seat cushion blower motor.

GO to M22
M15
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR INSTALLATION AND FOR CRUSHED SEAT CUSHION
Ignition OFF.
Remove the driver seat cushion cover.

REFER to: Front Seat Cushion Cover (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
Inspect the driver seat cushion for the following:

Blower motor correctly installed
Seat cushion foam pad crushed or restricted
Is the driver seat cushion blower motor correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad?
Yes INSTALL the driver seat cushion cover and seat. GO to M18
No Correctly INSTALL the driver seat cushion blower motor or INSTALL a new driver seat cushion foam pad. GO to M22
M16
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR AND WIRING
m
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
gn
C341E-6 C341E-1
ia

rd

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
ca
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms

30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to M18
No GO to M17
M17

Action
m

0-10° C (32-50° F)
10-20° C (50-68° F)
20-30° C (68-86° F)
. co 2,782-1,663 ohms
1,837-1,140 ohms
1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
gn
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
ia

rd
Yes REPAIR circuit VHS26 (VT) or RHS05 (YE/VT) for an open or high resistance. GO to M22
No INSTALL a new cushion blower motor.

GO to M22
ca
M18
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR HEATING/COOLING CIRCUITRY CURRENT DRAW
Connect all DSM, blower motor and body harness-to-seat harness connectors.
NOTICE: It may be necessary to open the seat wire harness conduit to allow placing the inductive current probe around the circuit as described in
the following step. Care must be taken when opening up the wire harness so as not to damage any wiring or connectors. Do not damage any wiring
or induce stress on any wiring or connectors. Close up the wire harness once repairs to the seat are complete.
NOTE: Use a commercially available inductive current probe (such as Electronic Specialties Current Probe/Multimeter 685 or a Fluke I410 [used with a digital
multimeter]) or the low current probe from the VMM available for use with IDS. If these are unavailable, the inductive current probe feature from a battery tester
may be substituted.
Place an inductive current probe around circuit CHS02 (YE/BU) near DSM C341D-1 and monitor the current draw.
Start the engine and set the driver seat to HIGH heat.
Is the current draw less than 11 amps?
Yes GO to M19
GO to M22
M19
CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR AND WIRING
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341D-1 C341D-6
Are the resistances between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
Yes GO to M21
No GO to M20
M20
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR

Action
m
. co
gn

ia
rd
ca
Is the resistance between 0.9 and 10 ohms?
Yes REPAIR circuit CHS02 (YE/BU) or RHS02 (BU/OG) for an open or high resistance. GO to M22
GO to M22
M21
CHECK THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Ignition ON.
TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DSM.
GO to M22
connector or pin issues. GO to M22
M22
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
m
Yes
co
.
gn
DTC B1154:4B
ia
rd
ca


B1154:4B Driver Seat Back: If the driver seat backrest blower motor temperature exceeds 110° C (230° F) in heat mode or 80° C (176° F) in cool mode for
Over Temperature more than 4 seconds the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
Possible Causes

Restricted backrest blower motor filter
Crushed or restricted backrest foam pad
Backrest blower motor
DSM
PINPOINT TEST N : DTC B1154:4B
N1
Start the vehicle and set the driver seat to HIGH heat.

Yes GO to N2
No GO to N5
N2
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341E-5 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to N3
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to N22

ia
N3
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR AND WIRING
rd
Measure:
ca

C341E-5 C341E-1

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to N18
No GO to N4
N4
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR

Action
m
. co C3034-8, Component Side
gn

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
ia
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms

20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
rd
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms

40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
ca
Yes REPAIR circuit CHS14 (GN) or CHS29 (WH/BU)/ RHS05 (YE/VT) for an open or high resistance. GO to N22
No INSTALL a new driver seat backrest blower motor. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
REFER to: Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor (501-10 Front Seats) .
If equipped with multi-contour seats, REFER to: Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-10 Front Seats)
.
GO to N22
N5
CONFIRM THE FAULT WHILE MONITORING THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) SEAT BACK TEMPERATURE - DRIVER
(SEAT_BK_TMP_D) AND SEAT CUSHION TEMPERATURE - DRIVER (SEAT_CSH_TMP_D) PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Set the passenger seat to OFF.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the SCME SEAT_BK_TMP_D and SEAT_CSH_TMP_D.
NOTE: A crushed seat backrest foam pad may be the cause of the fault making it necessary to occupy the seat to recreate and identify the fault.
Attempt to recreate the fault. Start the vehicle and set the driver seat to HIGH heat for at least 15 minutes while occupying the seat.
No If the SEAT_BK_TMP_D PID increases incrementally and is greater than 15° C (27° F) difference from the SEAT_CSH_TMP_D PID, GO to
N6
If the SEAT_BK_TMP_D PID increases quickly (temperature "jumps" and does not increase incrementally) and is greater than 15° C (27° F)
from the SEAT_CSH_TMP_D PID, GO to N16
N6
Note the airflow exhausting from the driver seat backrest blower motor and compare it to the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat backrest blower motor.
Carry out a wiggle test of the wire harnesses between the DSM and the driver seat backrest blower motor while monitoring blower operation. The blower should
operate consistently and not change speeds.
Is the airflow exhausting from the driver seat backrest blower motor comparable to the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat backrest blower motor
Yes GO to N7
No If the airflow exhausting from the driver seat backrest blower motor is not comparable to the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat
backrest blower motor, GO to N8
If the driver seat backrest blower motor operation changed while carrying out the wiggle test, IDENTIFY and REPAIR the wiring fault.
N7
Note the airflow exhausting from the driver seat backrest blower motor with the driver seat occupied and compare it to the airflow exhausting from the passenger
seat backrest blower motor with the passenger seat occupied.
m
Is the airflow exhausting from the driver seat backrest blower motor comparable to the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat backrest blower motor?
Yes
No
GO to N16
INSTALL a new driver seat backrest foam pad.
. co
gn
N8
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER FOR AN OBSTRUCTION OR RESTRICTED FILTER
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the blower of the driver seat backrest blower motor assembly for an obstruction or for a restricted filter.
ia
Is the blower obstructed or the filter restricted?

rd
Yes REMOVE the obstruction or INSTALL a new seat backrest blower motor. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
.
ca
No GO to N9
N9
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341E-10 C3034-7
Yes GO to N10
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to N22

N10
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341D-9 Ground
Yes REPAIR the circuit. GO to N22

No GO to N11
N11
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
m
Measure:
C341D-4
Positive Lead . co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
Yes GO to N12
ia
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to N22

rd
N12
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

ca

C341D-4 C3034-3
C341D-9 C3034-4
Yes GO to N13
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to N22
N13
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER RESISTANCE

Action
m
Yes
No
GO to N14
co
INSTALL a new driver seat backrest blower motor. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
.
.
GO to N22
gn
N14
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE
ia

rd

Action
ca

Yes GO to N15
.
GO to N22
N15
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR INSTALLATION AND FOR CRUSHED SEAT BACKREST
Ignition OFF.
Remove the driver seat backrest cover.

REFER to: Front Seat Backrest Cover (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
Inspect the driver seat backrest for the following:

Blower motor correctly installed
Backrest foam pad crushed or restricted
Is the driver seat backrest blower motor correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad?
Yes INSTALL the driver seat backrest cover and seat. GO to N18
No Correctly INSTALL the driver seat backrest blower motor or INSTALL a new driver seat backrest foam pad. GO to N22
m
N16
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
Measure:

ia
C341E-5 C341E-1
rd

ca

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to N18
No GO to N17
N17

Action
m

0-10° C (32-50° F)
10-20° C (50-68° F)
20-30° C (68-86° F)
. co 2,782-1,663 ohms
1,837-1,140 ohms
1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
gn
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
ia

rd
Yes REPAIR circuit CHS14 (GN) or CHS29 (WH/BU)/ RHS05 (YE/VT) for an open or high resistance. GO to N22
ca
.
GO to N22
N18
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR HEATING/COOLING CIRCUITRY CURRENT DRAW
may be substituted.
Place an inductive current probe around circuit CHS01 (GY/VT) near DSM C341D-5 and monitor the current draw.
Start the engine and set the driver seat to HIGH heat.
Yes GO to N19
.
GO to N22
N19
CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR AND WIRING
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341D-5 C341D-15
Yes GO to N21
No GO to N20
N20
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR

Action
m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes REPAIR circuit CHS01 (GY/VT) or RHS01 (WH/VT) for an open or high resistance. GO to N22
.
GO to N22
N21
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
Ignition ON.
GO to N22
connector or pin issues. GO to N22
N22
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.

. co
gn
Yes
ia

rd
DTC B1151:4B
ca


B1151:4B Passenger Seat If the passenger seat cushion blower motor temperature exceeds 110° C (230° F) in heat mode or 80° C (176° F) in cool mode
Cushion: Over for more than 4 seconds the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
Temperature
Possible Causes

Restricted cushion blower motor filter
Crushed or restricted cushion foam pad
DSM
PINPOINT TEST O : DTC B1151:4B

O1
Start the vehicle and set the passenger seat to HIGH heat.
Yes GO to O2
No GO to O5
O2
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Cushion Blower Motor C3040.
m
Disconnect: Passenger Seat Backrest Blower Motor C3039.
Measure:
C341E-4
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
C341E-2 Ground
gn
ia
rd
Yes GO to O3
ca
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to O22
O3
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Connect: Passenger Cushion Blower Motor C3040.
Connect: Passenger Seat Backrest Blower Motor C3039.
Measure:

C341E-4 C341E-2

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to O18
No GO to O4
O4
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR

Action
m
. co
gn
ia

rd

ca

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes REPAIR circuit VHS27 (WH/OG) or RHS10 (BU/OG) for an open or high resistance. GO to O22
No INSTALL a new passenger seat cushion blower motor.

GO to O22
O5
CONFIRM THE FAULT WHILE MONITORING THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) SEAT BACK TEMPERATURE - PASSENGER
(SEAT_BK_TMP_P) AND SEAT CUSHION TEMPERATURE - PASSENGER (SEAT_CSH_TMP_P) PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the SCME SEAT_BK_TMP_P and SEAT_CSH_TMP_P Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
NOTE: A crushed seat cushion foam pad may be the cause of the fault making it necessary to occupy the seat to recreate and identify the fault.
Attempt to recreate the fault. Start the vehicle and set the passenger seat to HIGH heat for at least 15 minutes while occupying the seat.
No If the SEAT_CSH_TMP_P PID increases incrementally and is greater than 15° C (27° F) difference from the SEAT_BK_TMP_P PID, GO to
O6
If the SEAT_CSH_TMP_P PID increases quickly (temperature "jumps" and does not increase incrementally) and is greater than 15° C (27° F)
difference from the SEAT_BK_TMP_P PID, GO to O16
O6
Note the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat cushion blower motor and compare it to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat cushion blower motor.
Carry out a wiggle test of the wire harnesses between the DSM and the passenger seat cushion blower motor while monitoring blower operation. The blower
should operate consistently and not change speeds.
Is the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat cushion blower motor comparable to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat cushion blower motor
Yes GO to O7
No If the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat cushion blower motor is not comparable to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat
m
cushion blower motor, GO to O8
If the passenger seat cushion blower motor operation changed while carrying out the wiggle test, IDENTIFY and REPAIR the wiring fault.
O7
COMPARE OPERATION OF THE DRIVER AND PASSENGER SEATS WHILE OCCUPIED co
Note the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat cushion blower motor with the passenger seat occupied and compare it to the airflow exhausting from the
driver seat cushion blower motor with the driver seat occupied.
.
gn
Is the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat cushion blower motor comparable to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat cushion blower motor?
Yes GO to O16
No INSTALL a new passenger seat cushion foam pad.
ia
rd
O8
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER FOR AN OBSTRUCTION OR RESTRICTED FILTER
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the blower of the passenger seat cushion blower motor assembly for an obstruction or for a restricted filter.
ca
Yes REMOVE the obstruction or INSTALL a new passenger seat cushion blower motor.
No GO to O9
O9
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341E-7 C3040-7
Yes GO to O10
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to O22
O10
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341D-11 Ground
m
Yes REPAIR the circuit. GO to O22
No GO to O11
Ignition OFF.
. co
O11
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Measure:
gn
C341D-3 Ground
ia
rd
Yes GO to O12
ca
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to O22
O12
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C341D-3 C3040-3
C341D-11 C3040-4
Yes GO to O13
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to O22
O13
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER RESISTANCE

Action
m
gn
Yes GO to O14
No INSTALL a new passenger seat cushion blower motor.
ia
GO to O22
rd
O14
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE
ca

Action

m
Yes GO to O15
No INSTALL a new passenger seat cushion blower motor. co
GO to O22
.
gn
O15
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR INSTALLATION AND FOR CRUSHED SEAT CUSHION
Ignition OFF.
Remove the passenger seat cushion cover.

ia
REFER to: Front Seat Cushion Cover (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
Inspect the passenger seat cushion for the following:

Passenger seat cushion blower motor correctly installed
rd
Passenger seat cushion seat cushion foam pad crushed or restricted
Is the passenger seat cushion blower motor correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad?
ca
Yes INSTALL the passenger seat cushion cover and seat. GO to O18
No Correctly INSTALL the passenger seat cushion blower motor or INSTALL a new passenger seat cushion foam pad.
GO to O22
O16
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341E-4 C341E-2

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to O18
No GO to O17
O17
Disconnect: Passenger Cushion Blower Motor C3040.

Action
m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes REPAIR circuit VHS26 (VT)/ (VHS27 (WH/OG) or RHS05 (YE/VT)/ RHS10 (BU/OG) for an open or high resistance. GO to O22

GO to O22
O18
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR HEATING/COOLING CIRCUITRY CURRENT DRAW
may be substituted.
Place an inductive current probe around circuit CHS07 (GY/BU) near DSM C341D-2 and monitor the current draw.
Start the engine and set the passenger seat to HIGH heat.
Yes GO to O19
GO to O22
O19
CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR AND WIRING
Ignition OFF.
m
Measure:
C341D-2
Positive Lead
. co
C341D-10
Negative Lead
gn
Yes GO to O21
ia
No GO to O20
rd
O20
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR
ca

Action

Yes REPAIR circuit CHS02 (YE/BU)/ CHS07 (GY/BU) or RHS02 (BU/OG)/ RHS07 (BU) for an open or high resistance. GO to O22

GO to O22
O21
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
NOTE: Do not reconnect Driver Side Airbag In-Line C3051 or Passenger Side Airbag In-line C339 at this time.
m
Ignition ON.
Yes
co
CHECK OASIS for any applicable Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs). If a TSB exists for this concern, DISCONTINUE this test and FOLLOW
.
gn
GO to O22
connector or pin issues. GO to O22
ia
O22
rd
Ignition OFF.
ca
Ignition ON.
Yes
DTC B1152:4B



B1152:4B Passenger Seat Back: If the passenger seat backrest blower motor temperature exceeds 110° C (230° F) in heat mode or 80° C (176° F) in cool mode
Over Temperature for more than 4 seconds the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
Possible Causes

Restricted backrest blower motor filter
Crushed or restricted backrest foam pad
DSM
PINPOINT TEST P : DTC B1152:4B
P1
Start the vehicle and set the passenger seat to HIGH heat.
m
Yes
No
GO to P2
GO to P5
. co
gn
P2
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
ia
Ignition OFF.
rd

ca
Disconnect: Passenger Backrest Blower Motor C3039.
Measure:

C341E-3 Ground
C341E-2 Ground
Yes GO to P3
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to P22
P3
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Connect: Passenger Backrest Blower Motor C3039.
Measure:

C341E-3 C341E-2

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
m
Yes GO to P18
No GO to P4
P4
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR
. co
gn

Action
ia
rd
ca

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes REPAIR circuit VHS36 (YE/BU) or RHS10 (BU/OG) for an open or high resistance. GO to P22
No INSTALL a new passenger seat backrest blower motor. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
.
GO to P22
P5
CONFIRM THE FAULT WHILE MONITORING THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) SEAT BACK TEMPERATURE - PASSENGER
(SEAT_BK_TMP_P) AND SEAT CUSHION TEMPERATURE - PASSENGER (SEAT_CSH_TMP_P) PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the SCME SEAT_BK_TMP_P and SEAT_CSH_TMP_P.
NOTE: A crushed seat backrest foam pad may be the cause of the fault making it necessary to occupy the seat to recreate and identify the fault.
Attempt to recreate the fault. Start the vehicle and set the passenger seat to HIGH heat for at least 15 minutes while occupying the seat.
m
No
co
If the SEAT_BK_TMP_P PID increases incrementally and is greater than 15° C (27° F) difference from the SEAT_CSH_TMP_P PID, GO to
P6
If the SEAT_BK_TMP_P PID increases quickly (temperature "jumps" and does not increase incrementally) and is greater than 15° C (27° F)
.
difference from the SEAT_CSH_TMP_P PID, GO to P16
gn
P6
ia
Note the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat backrest blower motor and compare it to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat backrest blower motor.
Carry out a wiggle test of the wire harnesses between the DSM and the passenger seat backrest blower motor while monitoring blower operation. The blower
rd
should operate consistently and not change speeds.
Is the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat backrest blower motor comparable to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat backrest blower motor
ca
Yes GO to P7
No If the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat backrest blower motor is not comparable to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat
backrest blower motor, GO to P8
If the passenger seat backrest blower motor blower operation changed while carrying out the wiggle test, IDENTIFY and REPAIR the wiring
fault.
P7
Note the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat backrest blower motor with the passenger seat occupied and compare it to the airflow exhausting from the
driver seat backrest blower motor with the driver seat occupied.
Is the airflow exhausting from the passenger seat backrest blower motor comparable to the airflow exhausting from the driver seat backrest blower motor?
Yes GO to P16
No INSTALL a new passenger seat backrest foam pad.
P8
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER FOR AN OBSTRUCTION OR RESTRICTED FILTER
Ignition OFF.
Inspect the blower of the passenger seat backrest blower motor assembly for an obstruction or for a restricted filter.

Yes REMOVE the obstruction or INSTALL a new passenger seat backrest blower. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
.
No GO to P9
P9
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER SPEED CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341E-8 C3039-7
m
Yes
No
GO to P10
REPAIR the circuit. GO to P22

. co
gn
P10
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.

ia
Ignition ON.
Measure:
rd

ca
C341D-11 Ground
Yes REPAIR the circuit. GO to P22

No GO to P11
P11
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341D-3 Ground
Yes GO to P12
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to P22
P12
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C341D-3 C3039-3
C341D-11 C3039-4
Yes GO to P13
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to P22
P13
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER RESISTANCE
m
Positive Lead
. co
Measurement /
Action
Negative Lead
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to P14
.
GO to P22
P14
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE

Action
m

gn
Yes GO to P15
ia
.
GO to P22
rd
P15
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR INSTALLATION AND FOR CRUSHED SEAT BACKREST
Ignition OFF.
ca
Remove the passenger seat backrest cover.

REFER to: Front Seat Backrest Cover (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
Inspect the passenger seat backrest for the following:

Passenger seat backrest blower motor correctly installed
Passenger seat backrest seat backrest foam pad crushed or restricted
Is the passenger seat backrest blower motor correctly installed and are there no signs of damage to the foam pad?
Yes INSTALL the passenger seat backrest cover and seat. GO to P18
No Correctly INSTALL the passenger seat backrest blower motor or INSTALL a new passenger seat backrest foam pad. GO to P22
P16
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMISTOR AND WIRING
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341E-3 C341E-2

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to P18
No GO to P17
P17
m
Positive Lead
. co
Measurement /
Action
Negative Lead
gn
ia
rd
ca

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes REPAIR circuit VHS36 (YE/BU) or RHS20 (GN/BU)/ RHS10 (BL/OG) for an open or high resistance. GO to P22
No INSTALL a new backrest blower motor. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
.
GO to P22
P18
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR HEATING/COOLING CIRCUITRY CURRENT DRAW
may be substituted.
Place an inductive current probe around circuit CHS06 (BU/BN) near DSM C341D-12 and monitor the current draw.
Start the engine and set the passenger seat to HIGH heat.
m
Yes GO to P19
.
GO to P22
. co
gn
P19
CHECK RESISTANCE OF THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR AND WIRING
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
ia

C341D-12 C341D-16
rd
ca
Yes GO to P21
No GO to P20
P20
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR

Action
m
Yes REPAIR circuit CHS06 (BU/BN) or RHS06 (WH) for an open or high resistance. GO to P22
No
co
INSTALL a new backrest blower motor. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
.
.
GO to P22
gn
P21
Ignition OFF.
ia
Repair:
rd

ca
NOTE: Do not reconnect Driver Side Airbag In-Line C3051 or Passenger Side Airbag In-line C339 at this time.
Ignition ON.
GO to P22
connector or pin issues. GO to P22
P22
Ignition OFF.

Ignition ON.
Yes
DTC B1208:01, B1208:98, B14B9:11, B14B9:12, B14B9:13, B14B9:1A and B14BD:11
m

DTC Description
B1208:01 Driver Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor:
If the driver seat cushion blower motor temperature is outside the maximum temperature range, the SCME
.
General Electrical Failure shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
gn
B1208:98 Driver Seat Cushion Temperature Sensor: If the driver seat cushion blower motor temperature is outside the maximum temperature range, the SCME
Component or System Over Temperature shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
B14B9:11 Driver Seat Cushion Thermal Electric If the outputs to the driver seat cushion thermal electric device are shorted to ground or current flow is
Device: Circuit Short To Ground above a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
ia
B14B9:12 Driver Seat Cushion Thermal Electric If the outputs to the driver seat cushion thermal electric device are shorted to voltage or current flow is
Device: Circuit Short To Battery below a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
B14B9:13 Driver Seat Cushion Thermal Electric If the outputs to the driver seat cushion thermal electric device are disconnected, open or current flow is
rd
Device: Circuit Open below a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
B14B9:1A Driver Seat Cushion Thermal Electric If the current flow of the outputs to the driver seat cushion thermal electric device is above a programmed
Device: Circuit Resistance Below Threshold threshold, the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
ca
B14BD:11 Driver Seat Cushion Blower: Circuit Short If the current to the driver seat cushion blower exceeds a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down
To Ground the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
Possible Causes

DSM
PINPOINT TEST Q : DTC B1208:01, B1208:98, B14B9:11, B14B9:12, B14B9:13, B14B9:1A AND B14BD:11
Q1
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: DSM C341D and C341E.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341D-4 Ground
C341D-1 Ground
C341D-6 Ground
C341D-9 Ground
Measure:

m
C341E-6 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
. co
C341E-9 Ground
gn
ia
rd
Are any voltages present?
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to Q13

ca
No GO to Q2
Q2
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341D-4 Ground
C341D-1 Ground
C341D-6 Ground
C341D-9 Ground
Measure:

C341E-6 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
C341E-9 Ground
m
Yes
No
GO to Q5
GO to Q3
. co
gn
Q3
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR DISCONNECTED
Measure:
ia

rd
C341D-4 Ground
C341D-1 Ground
ca
C341D-6 Ground
C341D-9 Ground
Measure:

C341E-6 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
C341E-9 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new cushion blower motor.

GO to Q13
No GO to Q4
Q4
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR
DISCONNECTED
m
Measure:
C341D-4
C341D-1
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
C341D-6 Ground
ia
rd
C341D-9 Ground
ca
Measure:

C341E-6 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
C341E-9 Ground
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to Q13

.
GO to Q13
Q5
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C341D-4 C3035-3
C341D-1 C3035-1
C341D-6 C3035-2
m
C341D-9
. co C3035-4
gn
Measure:
ia

rd
C341E-6 C3035-5
C341E-1 C3035-8
ca
C341E-9 C3035-7
Yes GO to Q6
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to Q13
Q6
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C3035-1 C3035-2
C3035-3 C3035-4
C3035-3 C3035-7
C3035-4 C3035-7
C3035-5 C3035-8
m
Yes
No
GO to Q7
REPAIR the affected circuits. GO to Q13

. co
gn
Q7
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMO-ELECTRIC DEVICE (TED)
ia

Action
rd
ca
Yes GO to Q8
GO to Q13
Q8
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR

Action
m
. co
gn
ia
Yes GO to Q9
rd

GO to Q13
ca
Q9 CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE


Action

m
Yes GO to Q10
No INSTALL a new cushion blower motor. co
GO to Q13
.
gn
Q10
ia

Action
rd
ca

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to Q11

GO to Q13
Q11
DETERMINE CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR OR SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) FAILURE
Remove the cushion blower motor from the driver seat.
Remove the cushion blower motor from the passenger seat and install it on the driver seat.
Connect: DSM C341D and C341E.
Start the engine and check operation of the driver seat climate controlled seat system.
m
Does the seat operate with the cushion blower motor from the other seat installed?
Yes
No
INSTALL a new seat cushion blower motor.
GO to Q13
GO to Q12
. co
gn
Q12
Ignition OFF.
ia
Repair:
rd

ca
NOTE: Do not reconnect Driver Side Airbag In-Line C3051 at this time.
Ignition ON.
GO to Q13
connector or pin issues. GO to Q13
Q13
Ignition OFF.

Ignition ON.
Yes
DTC B120A:01, B120A:98, B14BB:11, B14BB:12, B14BB:13, B14BB:1A and B14C0:11
m

DTC Description
B120A:01 Passenger Seat Cushion Temperature
Sensor: General Electrical Failure
B120A:98 Passenger Seat Cushion Temperature
If the passenger seat cushion blower motor temperature is outside the maximum temperature range, the
SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
If the passenger seat cushion blower motor temperature is outside the maximum temperature range, the
.
Sensor: Component or System Over SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
gn
Temperature
B14BB:11 Passenger Seat Cushion Thermal Electric If the outputs to the passenger seat cushion thermal electric device are shorted to ground or current flow is
Device: Circuit Short To Ground above a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
B14BB:12 Passenger Seat Cushion Thermal Electric If the outputs to the passenger seat cushion thermal electric device are shorted to voltage or current flow is
ia
Device: Circuit Short To Battery below a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
B14BB:13 Passenger Seat Cushion Thermal Electric If the outputs to the passenger seat cushion thermal electric device are disconnected, open or current flow
Device: Circuit Open is below a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
rd
B14BB:1A Passenger Seat Cushion Thermal Electric If the current flow of the outputs to the passenger seat cushion thermal electric device is above a
Device: Circuit Resistance Below Threshold programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
B14C0:11 Passenger Seat Cushion Blower: Circuit If the current to the passenger seat cushion blower exceeds a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts
ca
Short To Ground down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
Possible Causes

DSM
PINPOINT TEST R : DTC B120A:01, B120A:98, B14BB:11, B14BB:12, B14BB:13, B14BB:1A AND B14C0:11
R1
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341D-3 Ground
C341D-2 Ground
C341D-10 Ground
C341D-11 Ground
Measure:

m
C341E-4 Ground
C341E-2 Ground
. co
C341E-7 Ground
gn
ia
rd
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to R13

ca
No GO to R2
R2
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341D-3 Ground
C341D-2 Ground
C341D-10 Ground
C341D-11 Ground
Measure:

C341E-4 Ground
C341E-2 Ground
C341E-7 Ground
m
Yes
No
GO to R5
GO to R3
. co
gn
R3 CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR
DISCONNECTED
ia
Measure:

rd

C341D-3 Ground
C341D-2 Ground
ca
C341D-10 Ground
C341D-11 Ground
Measure:

C341E-4 Ground
C341E-2 Ground
C341E-7 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new cushion blower motor.

GO to R13
No GO to R4
R4
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR
DISCONNECTED
m
Measure:
C341D-3
C341D-2
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
C341D-10 Ground
ia
rd
C341D-11 Ground
ca
Measure:

C341E-4 Ground
C341E-2 Ground
C341E-7 Ground
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to R13
.
GO to R13
R5
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C341D-3 C3040-3
C341D-2 C3040-1
C341D-10 C3040-2
m
C341D-11
. co C3040-4
gn
Measure:
ia

rd
C341E-4 C3040-5
C341E-2 C3040-8
ca
C341E-7 C3040-7
Yes GO to R6
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to R13
R6
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C3040-1 C3040-2
C3040-3 C3040-4
C3040-3 C3040-7
C3040-4 C3040-7
C3040-5 C3040-8
m
Yes
No
GO to R7
REPAIR the affected circuits. GO to R13

. co
gn
R7
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR THERMO-ELECTRIC DEVICE (TED)
ia

Action
rd
ca
Yes GO to R8
GO to R13
R8
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR

Action
m
. co
gn
ia
Yes GO to R9
rd

GO to R13
ca
R9
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT CUSHION BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE

Action

m
Yes GO to R10
No INSTALL a new cushion blower motor. co
GO to R13
.
gn
R10
ia

Action
rd
ca

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to R11

GO to R13
R11
DETERMINE CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR OR SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) FAILURE
Remove the cushion blower motor from the passenger seat.
Remove the cushion blower motor from the driver seat and install it on the passenger seat.
Start the engine and check operation of the passenger seat climate controlled seat system.
m
Yes
No
INSTALL a new seat cushion blower motor.
GO to R13
GO to R12
. co
gn
R12
Ignition OFF.
ia
Repair:
rd

ca
NOTE: Do not reconnect Driver Side Airbag In-Line C3051 or Passenger Airbag In-Line C339 at this time.
Ignition ON.
GO to R13
connector or pin issues. GO to R13
R13
Ignition OFF.

Ignition ON.
Yes
DTC B1209:01, B1209:98, B14BA:11, B14BA:12, B14BA:13, B14BA:1A and B14BE:11
m

DTC Description
B1209:01 Driver Seat Back Temperature Sensor:
If the driver seat back blower motor temperature is outside the maximum temperature range, the SCME
shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
.
gn
B1209:98 Driver Seat Back Temperature Sensor: If the driver seat back blower motor temperature is outside the maximum temperature range, the SCME
Component or System Over Temperature shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
B14BA:11 Driver Seat Back Thermal Electric Device: If the outputs to the driver seat back thermal electric device are shorted to ground or current flow is above a
Circuit Short To Ground programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
ia
B14BA:12 Driver Seat Back Thermal Electric Device: If the outputs to the driver seat back thermal electric device are shorted to voltage or current flow is below a
Circuit Short To Battery programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
B14BA:13 Driver Seat Back Thermal Electric Device: If the outputs to the driver seat back thermal electric device are disconnected, open or current flow is below
rd
Circuit Open a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
B14BA:1A Driver Seat Back Thermal Electric Device: If the current flow of the outputs to the driver seat back thermal electric device is above a programmed
Circuit Resistance Below Threshold threshold, the SCME shuts down the driver seat system and sets this DTC.
ca
B14BE:11 Driver Seat Back Blower: Circuit Short To If the current to the driver seat back blower exceeds a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the
Ground driver seat system and sets this DTC.
Possible Causes

DSM
PINPOINT TEST S : DTC B1209:01, B1209:98, B14BA:11, B14BA:12, B14BA:13, B14BA:1A AND B14BE:11
S1
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341D-4 Ground
C341D-5 Ground
C341D-15 Ground
C341D-9 Ground
Measure:

m
C341E-5 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
. co
C341E-10 Ground
gn
ia
rd
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to S13

ca
No GO to S2
S2
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341D-4 Ground
C341D-5 Ground
C341D-15 Ground
C341D-9 Ground
Measure:

C341E-5 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
C341E-10 Ground
m
Yes
No
GO to S5
GO to S3
. co
gn
S3
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR
DISCONNECTED
ia
Measure:

rd

C341D-4 Ground
C341D-5 Ground
ca
C341D-15 Ground
C341D-9 Ground
Measure:

C341E-5 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
C341E-10 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new backrest blower motor. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
.
GO to S13
No GO to S4
S4
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR
m
DISCONNECTED
Measure:
C341D-4
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
C341D-5 Ground
gn
ia
C341D-15 Ground
rd
ca
C341D-9 Ground
Measure:

C341E-5 Ground
C341E-1 Ground
C341E-10 Ground
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to S13

GO to S13
S5
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C341D-4 C3034-3
C341D-5 C3034-1
C341D-15 C3034-2
m
C341D-9
. co C3034-4
gn
Measure:
ia

rd
C341E-5 C3034-5
C341E-1 C3034-8
ca
C341E-10 C3034-7
Yes GO to S6
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to S13
S6
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C3034-1 C3034-2
C3034-3 C3034-4
C3034-3 C3034-7
C3034-4 C3034-7
C3034-5 C3034-8
m
Yes GO to S7
No REPAIR the affected circuits. GO to S13

co
S7
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMO-ELECTRIC DEVICE (TED)
.
gn

Action
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to S8
.
GO to S13
S8
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR

Action
m
. co
gn
ia

rd
Yes GO to S9
ca
.
GO to S13
S9
CHECK THE DRIVER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE

Action
m
Yes GO to S10
No co
.
.
GO to S13
gn
S10
ia

rd
Action
ca

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to S11
.
GO to S13
S11 DETERMINE BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR OR SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) FAILURE
Remove the backrest blower motor from the driver seat. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
If equipped with multi-contour seats, REFER to: Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-10 Front Seats) .
m
Remove the backrest blower motor from the passenger seat and install it on the driver seat.
. co
Start the engine and check operation of the driver seat climate controlled seat system.
gn
.
GO to S13
ia
No GO to S12
rd
S12
Ignition OFF.
ca
Repair:
NOTE: Do not reconnect Driver Side Airbag In-Line C3051 at this time.
Ignition ON.
GO to S13
connector or pin issues. GO to S13
S13
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes
DTC B120B:01, B120B:98, B14BC:11, B14BC:12, B14BC:13, B14BC:1A and B14C2:11
m
co
.

gn

B120B:01 Passenger Seat Back Temperature Sensor: If the passenger seat back blower motor temperature is outside the maximum temperature range, the
ia
General Electrical Failure SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
B120B:98 Passenger Seat Back Temperature Sensor: If the passenger seat back blower motor temperature is outside the maximum temperature range, the
Component or System Over Temperature SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
rd
B14BC:11 Passenger Seat Back Thermal Electric If the outputs to the passenger seat back thermal electric device are shorted to ground or current flow is
Device: Circuit Short To Ground above a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
B14BC:12 Passenger Seat Back Thermal Electric If the outputs to the passenger seat back thermal electric device are shorted to voltage or current flow is
ca
Device: Circuit Short To Battery below a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
B14BC:13 Passenger Seat Back Thermal Electric If the outputs to the passenger seat back thermal electric device are disconnected, open or current flow is
Device: Circuit Open below a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
B14BC:1A Passenger Seat Back Thermal Electric If the current flow of the outputs to the passenger seat back thermal electric device is above a programmed
Device: Circuit Resistance Below Threshold threshold, the SCME shuts down the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
B14C2:11 Passenger Seat Back Blower: Circuit Short If the current to the passenger seat back blower exceeds a programmed threshold, the SCME shuts down
To Ground the passenger seat system and sets this DTC.
Possible Causes

DSM
PINPOINT TEST T : DTC B120B:01, B120B:98, B14BC:11, B14BC:12, B14BC:13, B14BC:1A AND B14C2:11
T1
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.

Ignition ON.
Measure:

C341D-3 Ground
C341D-12 Ground
C341D-16 Ground
C341D-11 Ground
m
Measure:
C341E-3
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
C341E-2 Ground
ia
C341E-8 Ground
rd
ca
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to T13
No GO to T2
T2
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C341D-3 Ground
C341D-12 Ground
C341D-16 Ground
C341D-11 Ground
Measure:

C341E-3 Ground
C341E-2 Ground
C341E-8 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to T5
No GO to T3
ia
T3
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR
rd
DISCONNECTED
Measure:
ca

C341D-3 Ground
C341D-12 Ground
C341D-16 Ground
C341D-11 Ground
Measure:

C341E-3 Ground
C341E-2 Ground
C341E-8 Ground
.
GO to T13
No GO to T4
m
T4
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE CUSHION BLOWER MOTOR
DISCONNECTED
Measure:

. co
gn
C341D-3 Ground
C341D-12 Ground
ia
rd
C341D-16 Ground
ca
C341D-11 Ground
Measure:

C341E-3 Ground
C341E-2 Ground
C341E-8 Ground
Yes REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to T13

GO to T13
T5
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Measure:

C341D-3 C3039-3
m
C341D-12 C3039-1
C341D-16
. co C3039-2
gn
C341D-11 C3039-4
ia
rd
ca
Measure:

C341E-3 C3039-5
C341E-2 C3039-8
C341E-8 C3039-7
Yes GO to T6
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to T13

T6
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
Measure:

C3039-1 C3039-2
C3039-3 C3039-4
C3039-3 C3039-7
C3039-4 C3039-7
m
C3039-5 C3039-8
. co
gn
Yes GO to T7
No REPAIR the affected circuits. GO to T13

ia
T7
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR THERMO-ELECTRIC DEVICE (TED)
rd

ca

Action

Yes GO to T8
.
GO to T13
T8
CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR

Action
m
. co
gn
ia
rd

ca
Yes GO to T9
.
GO to T13
T9
CHECK THE PASSENGER SEAT BACKREST BLOWER SPEED CONTROL RESISTANCE

Action
m
Yes GO to T10
No co
.
.
GO to T13
gn
T10
ia

rd
Action
ca

0-10° C (32-50° F) 2,782-1,663 ohms
10-20° C (50-68° F) 1,837-1,140 ohms
20-30° C (68-86° F) 1,260-806 ohms
30-40° C (86-104° F) 893-570 ohms
40-50° C (104-122° F) 630-428 ohms
Yes GO to T11
.
GO to T13
T11
DETERMINE BACKREST BLOWER MOTOR OR SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) FAILURE
Remove the backrest blower motor from the passenger seat. If not equipped with multi-contour seats,
If equipped with multi-contour seats, REFER to: Front Seat Backrest Blower Motor - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-10 Front Seats) .
m
Remove the backrest blower motor from the driver seat and install it on the passenger seat.
Connect: Passenger Backrest Blower Motor C3039.
co
Start the engine and check operation of the passenger seat climate controlled seat system.
.
gn
.
GO to T13
ia
No GO to T12
rd
T12
Ignition OFF.
ca
Repair:
NOTE: Do not reconnect Driver Side Airbag In-Line C3051 or Passenger Side Airbag In-Line C339 at this time.
Ignition ON.
GO to T13
connector or pin issues. GO to T13
T13
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes
The Multi-Contour Seat is Inoperative/ Does Not Operate Correctly — Driver
m
co
.
gn


ia
B146F:00 Back Bladder System During self-test, the system inflates each of the bladders in the back of the seat, then monitors for a change in pressure. If
Electropneumatic Failure: No the pressure change is not within the allowed threshold, this DTC sets.
rd
Electropneumatic Failure: the bladders successfully inflate, the system deflates the bladders while checking for a change in pressure. If the pressure
System Internal Failure change is not within the allowed threshold, this DTC sets.
ca
B1470:00 Cushion Bladder System During self-test, the system inflates each of the bladders in the seat cushion, then monitors for a change in pressure. If
B1471:11 Multi-Contour Seat Switch This DTC sets when the seat control switch (multi-contour) input circuit is shorted to ground. This DTC may be set on-
Input: Circuit Short To Ground demand or in continuous memory.
B1471:13 Multi-Contour Seat Switch This DTC sets when the seat control switch (multi-contour) input circuit is open. This DTC may be set on-demand or in
Input: Circuit Open continuous memory.
B1473:11 Pump Driver: Circuit Short To This DTC sets when the current draw for the air pump driver is too high for a predetermined time period. This DTC may
Ground be set on-demand or in continuous memory.
Possible Sources

Seat control switch
Front seat cushion adjuster
SCMG
Verify all the hose connections to the SCMG are correctly seated and not leaking and/or check for any signs of restrictions (kinked or pinched hoses).
PINPOINT TEST U : THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/ DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — DRIVER
deployment.
U1
CHECK THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
NOTE: If the diagnostic scan tool does not communicate to the SCMG,
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the SCMG self-test.
Yes For B1471:11, GO to U3

For B1471:13, GO to U5
For B1473:11, GO to U2
If B146F:00 and B1470:00 are both present, GO to U7
For B146F:00 or B146F:04, GO to U13
For B1470:00 or B1470:04, GO to U17
For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the SCMG DTC Chart.
No If the multi-contour seat is inoperative, GO to U7
If only the seat backrest bladder(s) are not operating correctly, GO to U13
If only the seat cushion bladder(s) are not operating correctly, GO to U17
U2
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP FEED FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
m
Ignition OFF.

. co
Disconnect: Left Multi-Contour Seat Control Pump C3383.
gn
Measure:

ia
C3383-1 Ground
rd

ca
Yes INSTALL a new front seat power lumbar assembly.

REFER to: Front Seat Power Lumbar Assembly - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and
Installation).
GO to U22
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to U22
U3
RECHECK THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) WITH SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Was DTC B1471:13 retrieved?
Yes INSTALL a new seat control switch.

No GO to U4
U4
CHECK THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C369-2 Ground
Yes GO to U21
U5
RECHECK THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) WITH JUMPER WIRE CONNECTED
TO SEAT CONTROL SWITCH CONNECTOR
m
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
C369-1 C369-2
ia
Ignition ON.

rd

ca
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. INSTALL a new seat control switch.
GO to U22
No REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to U6
U6
CHECK THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C369-1 C3385-15
C369-2 C3385-11

Yes GO to U21
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to U22
U7
VERIFY THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP OPERATES
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
NOTE: When in MASSAGE mode, the multi-contour seat control pump operates continuously.
Using the seat control switch or touchscreen, place the multi-contour seat into the MASSAGE mode.
Listen near the backrest to determine whether the multi-contour seat control pump is on.
Is the multi-contour seat control pump on?
Yes GO to U11
No GO to U8
U8
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP GROUND FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect: Left Multi-Contour Seat Control Pump C3383.
Measure:

co
.
gn
C3383-2 Ground
ia
Yes GO to U9
rd

ca
U9
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP FEED FOR VOLTAGE
NOTICE: The following step uses a test light to simulate normal circuit loads. Use only a Rotunda Test Lamp (SGT27000) or 250- 300mA
incandescent bulb test lamp. To avoid connector terminal damage, use the Rotunda Flex Probe kit for the test lamp probe connection to the
vehicle. Do not use the test lamp probe directly on any connector.
Connect:

C3383-1 C3383-2
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, toggle the SCMG PID Seat Bladder Pump Status (DRV_SBLADR_PMP) on while observing the test light.
Does the test light illuminate?

Installation).
GO to U22
No GO to U10
U10
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP FEED FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3385-3 C3383-1
Yes GO to U21
U11
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP HOSE FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION OR DAMAGE
Ignition OFF.
NOTE: The multi-contour seat control pump hose is the red hose located within the blue lock.
Visually inspect the multi-contour seat control pump hose for correct installation or damage and check the hose routing to make sure the entire length
of the hose is not restricted, bent, kinked or damaged.
m
Is the multi-contour seat control pump hose installed correctly with no damage?
Yes GO to U12
No REPAIR the hose or INSTALL a new front seat power lumbar assembly.
co
Installation).
GO to U22
.
gn
U12
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP OUTPUT
Disconnect the multi-contour seat control pump hose at the SCMG.
Remove the blue lock (with all 4 hoses)
ia
Disconnect the red hose from the blue lock.
Connect a suitable pressure gauge to the (red) multi-contour seat control pump hose.
rd
Ignition ON.
Using the seat control switch or touchscreen, place the multi-contour seat into the MASSAGE mode while observing the pressure gauge. Note the
ca
highest pressure obtained.
Ignition OFF.
Was the pressure equal to or greater than 169 kPa (24.5 psi)?
Yes GO to U23
Installation).
GO to U22
U13
INFLATE THE SUSPECT BACKREST BLADDER(S) WHILE MONITORING THE PRESSURE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, select and view the SCMG Parameter Identifications (PIDs) for the suspected bladder(s) as indicated in the table below:
Output State Control PID Pressure PID

Backrest Lumbar
DRV_UPPR_LUMB (Upper Lumbar Inflate Status) DRV_LUM_BLADR1 (Lumbar Bladder 1 Pressure)
DRV_MID_LUMB (Mid-Lumbar Bladder Inflate Status) DRV_LUM_BLADR2 (Lumbar Bladder 2 Pressure)
DRV_LOW_LUMB (Lower Lumbar Bladder Inflate Status) DRV_LUM_BLADR3 (Lumbar Bladder 3 Pressure)
NOTE: During this step, the multi-contour seat control pump is on continuously until the output state control PID is toggled back to the NONE mode
(off).
Using the diagnostic scan tool, toggle the suspected bladder(s) output state control PID to the INFLATE mode until the pressure PID reaches its
highest pressure reading. Note the highest pressure achieved.
Using the diagnostic scan tool, toggle the suspected bladder(s) output state control PID to the NONE mode.
Continue to observe the pressure Parameter Identifications (PIDs) for 2 minutes to check for system air leaks.
Did the suspected bladder(s) inflate to approximately 169 kPa (24.5 psi) and hold pressure within 7 kPa (1 psi) for 2 minutes?
Yes GO to U14
No GO to U16
U14
VENT THE SUSPECT BACKREST BLADDER(S) WHILE MONITORING THE PRESSURE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)

Backrest Lumbar
DRV_UPPR_LUMB (Upper Lumbar Inflate Status) DRV_LUM_BLADR1 (Lumbar Bladder 1 Pressure)
DRV_MID_LUMB (Mid-Lumbar Bladder Inflate Status) DRV_LUM_BLADR2 (Lumbar Bladder 2 Pressure)
DRV_LOW_LUMB (Lower Lumbar Bladder Inflate Status) DRV_LUM_BLADR3 (Lumbar Bladder 3 Pressure)
m
pressure reading. co
Using the diagnostic scan tool, toggle the suspected bladder(s) output state control PID to the VENT mode until the pressure PID reaches its lowest
.
Did the suspected bladder(s) pressure drop to approximately 100 kPa (14.5 psi)?
gn
Yes GO to U23
No GO to U15
ia
U15
CHECK THE BACKREST HOSE(S) FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION, RESTRICTION OR DAMAGE
rd
Ignition OFF.
Visually inspect the backrest hose(s) for correct installation or damage and check the hose routing to make sure the entire length of the hose is not
restricted, bent, kinked or damaged.
ca
Blue lock:
Yellow hose - Lumbar bladder 3 (lower)

Transparent green hose - Lumbar bladder 2 (middle)
Clear hose - Lumbar bladder 1 (upper)
Are the backrest hoses installed correctly with no damage or restrictions?
Yes GO to U23
No REPAIR the hose(s) or INSTALL a new front seat power lumbar assembly.
Installation).
U16
CHECK THE BACKREST HOSES FOR LEAKS
Ignition OFF.
NOTE: To disconnect the suspect hose(s), first remove the associated lock (with all the associated hoses) as an assembly. Once removed, individual
hose(s) can be removed from the lock.
Disconnect the suspect backrest hose(s) at the SCMG.
Blue lock:

Connect a suitable hand vacuum/pressure pump (with pressure gauge) to the suspect backrest hose.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the front seat power lumbar assembly, do not exceed 169 kPa (24.5 psi) during this step.
Pump the suspect backrest hose and bladder to 138 kPa (20 psi).
Continue to observe the pressure gauge for 2 minutes to check for system air leaks.
Did the suspected bladder(s) inflate to 138 kPa (20 psi) and hold pressure within 7 kPa (1 psi) for 2 minutes?
Yes GO to U23
No INSTALL a new front seat power lumbar assembly.
Installation).
U17
INFLATE THE SUSPECT CUSHION BLADDER(S) WHILE MONITORING THE PRESSURE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Ignition ON.

Seat Cushion
DRV_SC_INFLAT1 (Seat Cushion Bladder Inflate Status 1) DRV_SC_BLADDR1 (Seat Cushion Bladder 1)
m
(off).
. co
gn
ia
rd
Yes GO to U18
No GO to U20
ca
U18
VENT THE SUSPECT CUSHION BLADDER(S) WHILE MONITORING THE PRESSURE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)

Seat Cushion
pressure reading.
Yes GO to U23
No GO to U19
U19
CHECK THE CUSHION HOSE(S) FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION, RESTRICTION OR DAMAGE
Ignition OFF.
Visually inspect the cushion hose(s) for correct installation or damage and check the hose routing to make sure the entire length of the hose are not
restricted (bends, kinks, etc...).
Orange lock:
Black hose - Seat cushion bladder 4 (RH front)

Transparent blue hose - Seat cushion bladder 3 (RH rear)
Blue hose - Seat cushion bladder 2 (LH rear)
Green hose - Seat cushion bladder 1 (LH front)
Are the cushion hoses installed correctly with no damage or restrictions?
Yes GO to U23
No REPAIR the hose(s) or INSTALL a new front seat cushion adjuster.
REFER to: Front Seat Cushion Adjuster - Vehicles With: Multi-Contour Seats (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
U20
CHECK THE CUSHION HOSES FOR LEAKS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect the suspect cushion hose(s) at the SCMG.
m
Orange lock:

Green hose - Seat cushion bladder 1 (LH front) co
Connect a suitable hand vacuum/pressure pump (with pressure gauge) to the suspect cushion hose.
.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the front seat cushion adjuster, do not exceed 169 kPa (24.5 psi) during this step.
gn
Carefully pump the suspect cushion hose to approximately 138 kPa (20 psi).
ia
Did the suspected bladder(s) inflate to approximately 138 kPa (20 psi) and hold pressure within 7 kPa (1 psi) for 2 minutes?
Yes GO to U23
rd
No INSTALL a new front seat cushion adjuster.

ca
U21
CHECK THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SCMG connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SCMG connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
Reconnect all previously disconnected connectors and hoses.
Ignition ON.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCMG.
GO to U22
of any connector or pin issues. GO to U22
U22
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes
U23
CHECK THE SCMG (DRIVER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) OPERATION
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SCMG connectors.
Repair:
. co
Reconnect the SCMG connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
gn
Ignition ON.

ia

rd
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCMG.
ca
The Multi-Contour Seat is Inoperative/ Does Not Operate Correctly — Passenger


B1471:11 Multi-Contour Seat Switch This DTC sets when the seat control switch (multi-contour seat) input circuit is shorted to ground. This DTC may be set
Input: Circuit Short To Ground on-demand or in continuous memory.
B1471:13 Multi-Contour Seat Switch This DTC sets when the seat control switch (multi-contour seat) input circuit is open. This DTC may be set on-demand or
Input: Circuit Open in continuous memory.
B1473:11 Pump Driver: Circuit Short To This DTC sets when the current draw for the air pump driver is too high for a predetermined time period. This DTC may
Ground be set on-demand or in continuous memory.
Possible Sources

Seat control switch
Front seat cushion adjuster
SCMH
Verify all the hose connections to the SCMH are correctly seated and not leaking and/or check for any signs of restrictions (kinked or pinched hoses).
PINPOINT TEST V : THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT IS INOPERATIVE/ DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — PASSENGER
m
deployment.
NOTE: If the diagnostic scan tool does not communicate to the SCMH,
co
V1
CHECK THE SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
.
gn
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform the SCMH self-test.

ia
Yes For B1471:11, GO to V3

For B1471:13, GO to V5
For B1473:11, GO to V2
If B146F:00 and B1470:00 are both present, GO to V7
rd
For B146F:00 or B146F:04, GO to V13

For B1470:00 or B1470:04, GO to V17
For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs), REFER to the SCMH DTC Chart.
ca
No If the multi-contour seat is inoperative, GO to V7

If only the seat backrest bladder(s) are not operating correctly, GO to V13
If only the seat cushion bladder(s) are not operating correctly, GO to V17
V2
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP FEED FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Right Multi-Contour Seat Control Pump C3384.
Measure:

C3384-1 Ground

Installation).
GO to V22
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to V22
V3
RECHECK THE SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) WITH SEAT CONTROL
SWITCH DISCONNECTED
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes INSTALL a new seat control switch.

No GO to V4
V4
CHECK THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
m
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
. co
gn
C3388-9 Ground
ia

rd
Yes GO to V21
ca
V5
RECHECK THE SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS) WITH JUMPER WIRE
CONNECTED TO SEAT CONTROL SWITCH CONNECTOR
Ignition OFF.

C3388-20 C3388-9
Ignition ON.
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. INSTALL a new seat control switch.
GO to V22
No REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to V6
V6
CHECK THE SEAT CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3388-20 C3386-15
C3388-9 C3386-11
Yes GO to V21
m
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to V22
V7
VERIFY THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP OPERATES
Ignition OFF.
. co
Ignition ON.
gn
Using the seat control switch or touchscreen, place the multi-contour seat into the MASSAGE mode.
Listen near the backrest to determine whether the multi-contour seat control pump is on.
ia
Is the multi-contour seat control pump on?

rd
Yes GO to V11
No GO to V8
ca
V8
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP GROUND FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Right Multi-Contour Seat Control Pump C3384.
Measure:

C3384-2 Ground
Yes GO to V9
V9
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP FEED FOR VOLTAGE
NOTICE: The following step uses a test light to simulate normal circuit loads. Use only a Rotunda Test Lamp (SGT27000) or 250- 300mA
incandescent bulb test lamp. To avoid connector terminal damage, use the Rotunda Flex Probe kit for the test lamp probe connection to the
vehicle. Do not use the test lamp probe directly on any connector.
Connect:

C3384-1 C3384-2
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, toggle the SCMH PID Seat Bladder Pump Status (PAS_SBLADR_PMP) on while observing the test light.

Installation).
GO to V22
No GO to V10
V10
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP FEED FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
m
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

Positive Lead
. co
C3386-3 C3384-1
gn

ia
Yes GO to V21

rd
V11
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP HOSE FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION OR DAMAGE
ca
Ignition OFF.
NOTE: The multi-contour seat control pump hose is the red hose located within the blue lock.
Visually inspect the multi-contour seat control pump hose for correct installation or damage and check the hose routing to make sure the entire length
of the hose is not restricted, bent, kinked or damaged.
Is the multi-contour seat control pump hose installed correctly with no damage?
Yes GO to V12
Installation).
GO to V22
V12
CHECK THE MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT CONTROL PUMP OUTPUT
Disconnect the multi-contour seat control pump hose at the SCMH.
Remove the blue lock (with all 4 hoses)
Disconnect the red hose from the blue lock.
Connect a suitable pressure gauge to the (red) multi-contour seat control pump hose.
Ignition ON.
Using the seat control switch or touchscreen, place the multi-contour seat into the MASSAGE mode while observing the pressure gauge. Note the
highest pressure obtained.
Ignition OFF.
Was the pressure equal to or greater than 169 kPa (24.5 psi)?
Yes GO to V23
Installation).
GO to V22
V13
INFLATE THE SUSPECT BACKREST BLADDER(S) WHILE MONITORING THE PRESSURE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, select and view the SCMH Parameter Identifications (PIDs) for the suspected bladder(s) as indicated in the table below:

Backrest Lumbar
PAS_UPPR_LUMB (Upper Lumbar Inflate Status) PAS_LUM_BLADR1 (Lumbar Bladder 1 Pressure)
PAS_MID_LUMB (Mid-Lumbar Bladder Inflate Status) PAS_LUM_BLADR2 (Lumbar Bladder 2 Pressure)
PAS_LOW_LUMB (Lower Lumbar Bladder Inflate Status) PAS_LUM_BLADR3 (Lumbar Bladder 3 Pressure)
m
(off).
co
.
gn
Yes GO to V14
ia
No GO to V16
rd
V14
VENT THE SUSPECT BACKREST BLADDER(S) WHILE MONITORING THE PRESSURE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
ca

Backrest Lumbar
PAS_UPPR_LUMB (Upper Lumbar Inflate Status) PAS_LUM_BLADR1 (Lumbar Bladder 1 Pressure)
PAS_MID_LUMB (Mid-Lumbar Bladder Inflate Status) PAS_LUM_BLADR2 (Lumbar Bladder 2 Pressure)
PAS_LOW_LUMB (Lower Lumbar Bladder Inflate Status) PAS_LUM_BLADR3 (Lumbar Bladder 3 Pressure)
pressure reading.
Yes GO to V23
No GO to V15
V15
CHECK THE BACKREST HOSE(S) FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION, RESTRICTION OR DAMAGE
Ignition OFF.
Visually inspect the backrest hose(s) for correct installation or damage and check the hose routing to make sure the entire length of the hose is not
restricted, bent, kinked or damaged.
Blue lock:
Are the backrest hoses installed correctly with no damage or restrictions?
Yes GO to V23
No REPAIR the hose(s) or INSTALL a new front seat power lumbar assembly.
Installation).
V16
CHECK THE BACKREST HOSES FOR LEAKS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect the suspect backrest hose(s) at the SCMH.
Blue lock:

Connect a suitable hand vacuum/pressure pump (with pressure gauge) to the suspect backrest hose.
m
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the front seat power lumbar assembly, do not exceed 169 kPa (24.5 psi) during this step.
Pump the suspect backrest hose and bladder to 138 kPa (20 psi).
co
Did the suspected bladder(s) inflate to 138 kPa (20 psi) and hold pressure within 7 kPa (1 psi) for 2 minutes?
.
gn
Yes GO to V23
No INSTALL a new front seat power lumbar assembly.
Installation).
ia
V17
INFLATE THE SUSPECT CUSHION BLADDER(S) WHILE MONITORING THE PRESSURE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)
rd
Ignition ON.
ca

Seat Cushion
PAS_SC_INFLAT1 (Seat Cushion Bladder Inflate Status 1) PAS_SC_BLADDR1 (Seat Cushion Bladder 1)
(off).
Did the suspected bladder(s) inflate to approximately 169 kPa (24.5 psi) and hold pressure within 7 kPa (1 psi) over a time period of 2 minutes?
Yes GO to V18
No GO to V20
V18
VENT THE SUSPECT CUSHION BLADDER(S) WHILE MONITORING THE PRESSURE PARAMETER IDENTIFICATIONS (PIDS)

Seat Cushion
pressure reading.
Yes GO to V23
No GO to V19
m
V19
CHECK THE CUSHION HOSE(S) FOR CORRECT INSTALLATION, RESTRICTION OR DAMAGE
Ignition OFF.
Visually inspect the cushion hose(s) for correct installation or damage and check the hose routing to make sure the entire length of the hose are not
restricted (bends, kinks, etc...).
Orange lock:

. co
gn
Are the cushion hoses installed correctly with no damage or restrictions?

ia
Yes GO to V23
No REPAIR the hose(s) or INSTALL a new front seat cushion adjuster.
rd
ca
V20
CHECK THE CUSHION HOSES FOR LEAKS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect the suspect cushion hose(s) at the SCMH.
Orange lock:

Connect a suitable hand vacuum/pressure pump (with pressure gauge) to the suspect cushion hose.
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the front seat cushion adjuster, do not exceed 169 kPa (24.5 psi) during this step.
Carefully pump the suspect cushion hose to approximately 138 kPa (20 psi).
Did the suspected bladder(s) inflate to approximately 138 kPa (20 psi) and hold pressure within 7 kPa (1 psi) over a time period of 2 minutes?
Yes GO to V23
No INSTALL a new front seat cushion adjuster.
V21
CHECK THE SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SCMH connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SCMH connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
NOTE: Do not reconnect Passenger Side Airbag In-line C339 at this time.
Ignition ON.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCMH.
GO to V22
of any connector or pin issues. GO to V22
m
V22
Ignition OFF.
. co

gn
Ignition ON.
ia

rd
ca
Yes
V23
CHECK THE SCMH (PASSENGER MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT MODULE) OPERATION
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect the SCMH connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the SCMH connector. Make sure it seats and latches correctly.
Ignition ON.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new SCMH.
The Power Seat is Inoperative or Does Not Operate Correctly — Driver, 10-way
Possible Causes
Fuse
Seat control switch
Horizontal motor
Seat track
PINPOINT TEST W : THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — DRIVER, 10-WAY
m
deployment.
W1

. co
Yes GO to W2
gn
No If only the recliner motor is inoperative, GO to W4
If only the horizontal motor is inoperative, GO to W6
If only the front height motor is inoperative, GO to W8
If only the rear height motor is inoperative, GO to W10
ia
W2
rd
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C369-10 Ground
Yes GO to W3
causes of the circuit short. GO to W12
W3
Measure:

C369-11 Ground

GO to W12
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to W12
W4
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SEAT RECLINER MOTOR
Ignition OFF.
While pushing the recline switch forward and rearward, measure:

m
C3187-1 C3187-3
Yes INSTALL a new driver front seat backrest frame. GO to W12

. co
No GO to W5
gn
W5
CHECK THE SEAT RECLINER MOTOR CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
ia
Measure:
rd

C369-9 C3187-3
ca
C369-7 C3187-1

GO to W12
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to W12
W6
Ignition OFF.

C362-1 C362-3

GO to W12
No GO to W7
W7
Measure:

C369-14 C362-3
m
C369-15 C362-1
. co
gn

GO to W12
ia

rd
W8
ca
Ignition OFF.

C382-1 C382-3

GO to W12
No GO to W9
W9
Measure:

C369-16 C382-3
C369-17 C382-1

GO to W12
W10
m
Ignition OFF.

co
.
gn
C363-1 C363-3
ia
rd

ca
GO to W12
No GO to W11
W11
Measure:

C369-12 C363-3
C369-13 C363-1

GO to W12
W12
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes
m
DTC: U0100:00

. co
gn
The DSM and the PCM communicate using the HS-CAN1 and MS-CAN.

ia

rd
U0100:00 Lost Communication with ECM/PCM "A": No Set by the DSM whenever it has lost communication to the PCM for 5 seconds or longer while DSM
Sub Type Information input voltage is between 10 and 15.5 volts.
ca
Possible Causes
DSM
PCM
PINPOINT TEST X : DTC: U0100:00

X1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to X2
X2
Ignition ON.

Yes GO to X3
No
X3
RECHECK THE DSM (DRIVER FRONT SEAT MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
carried out.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, repeat the DSM self-test.
Yes GO to X4
X4
carried out.
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.

. co
gn
Yes INSTALL a new PCM. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 303 for the procedure.

ia
rd
DTC: U0140:00

ca
The SCME and the BCM communicate using the MS-CAN.


U0140:00 Lost Communication with Body Control Module: Set by the SCME whenever it has lost communication to the BCM for 5 seconds or longer while
No Sub Type Information SCME input voltage is between 10 and 15.5 volts.
Possible Causes
SCME
BCM
PINPOINT TEST Y : DTC: U0140:00

Y1
Ignition ON.

Yes GO to Y2
Y2
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to Y3
No
Y3
RECHECK THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
carried out.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, repeat the SCME self-test.
m
Yes GO to Y4
No
co
The system is operating correctly at this time. The DTC may have been set due to high network traffic or intermittent fault condition.
Y4
.
gn
carried out.
Ignition OFF.
ia
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
rd
ca
Yes

DTC: U0257:00
The SCME and the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") communicate using the HS-CAN3 and MS-CAN.


U0257:00 Lost Communication with Front Controls / Display Set by the SCME whenever it has lost communication to the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface
Interface Module: No Sub Type Information Module "B") while SCME input voltage is between 10 and 15.5 volts.
Possible Causes
SCME
PINPOINT TEST Z : DTC: U0257:00

Z1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to Z2
Z2
Ignition ON.
Does the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") pass the network test?
m
Yes GO to Z3
No
co
Z3
RECHECK THE SCME (FRONT SEAT CLIMATE CONTROL MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
.
gn
carried out.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, repeat the SCME self-test.

ia

rd
Yes GO to Z4
ca
Z4
carried out.
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Wait 10 seconds.
Yes INSTALL a new FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B"). Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
The Power Seat is Inoperative or Does Not Operate Correctly — Driver, 6-way, Police
Possible Causes
Fuse
Seat control switch
Horizontal motor
Seat track
PINPOINT TEST AA : THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — DRIVER, 6-WAY, POLICE
deployment.
AA1
Yes GO to AA2
m
No If only the horizontal motor is inoperative, GO to AA4
If only the front height motor is inoperative, GO to AA6
If only the rear height motor is inoperative, GO to AA8
AA2
co
.
gn
Ignition OFF.

ia
Measure:
rd

C360-4 Ground
ca
Yes GO to AA3
causes of the circuit short. GO to AA10
AA3
Measure:

C360-2 Ground

GO to AA10
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to AA10
AA4
Ignition OFF.

C362-1 C362-2

REFER to: Front Seat Track Motor - Police (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
GO to AA10
m
No GO to AA5
AA5
Measure:
. co
gn
C360-6 C362-2
C360-3 C362-1
ia
rd
ca

GO to AA10
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to AA10
AA6
Ignition OFF.

C382-1 C382-2

GO to AA10
No GO to AA7
AA7
Measure:

C360-1 C382-2
C360-8 C382-1
m

. co
GO to AA10
gn
AA8
ia
Ignition OFF.

rd
ca

C363-1 C363-5

GO to AA10
No GO to AA9
AA9
Measure:

C360-7 C363-5
C360-5 C363-1

GO to AA10
AA10
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.

. co
gn
Yes
ia
rd
The Power Seat is Inoperative or Does Not Operate Correctly — Passenger, 6-way, Police
ca
Possible Causes
Fuse
Seat control switch
Horizontal motor
Seat track
PINPOINT TEST AB : THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — PASSENGER, 6-WAY, POLICE
deployment.
AB1
Yes GO to AB2
No If only the horizontal motor is inoperative, GO to AB4
If only the front height motor is inoperative, GO to AB6
If only the rear height motor is inoperative, GO to AB8
AB2
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3197-4 Ground
Yes GO to AB3
m
causes of the circuit short. GO to AB10
AB3
Measure:
co
.
gn
C3197-2 Ground
ia

rd

GO to AB10
ca
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to AB10
AB4
Ignition OFF.

C332-1 C332-2

REFER to: Front Seat Track Motor - Police (501-10A Front Seats, Removal and Installation).
GO to AB10
No GO to AB5
AB5
Measure:

C3197-6 C332-1
C3197-3 C332-2

GO to AB10
m
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to AB10
AB6
co
Ignition OFF.
.
gn
ia

rd

C3074-1 C3074-2
ca

GO to AB10
No GO to AB7
AB7
Measure:

C3197-1 C3074-2
C3197-8 C3074-1

GO to AB10
AB8
Ignition OFF.

C3075-1 C3075-5
m
Yes INSTALL a new passenger seat track. co

GO to AB10
.
No GO to AB9
gn
AB9
ia
Measure:

rd

C3197-5 C3075-5
ca
C3197-7 C3075-1

GO to AB10
AB10
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Yes
The Power Seat is Inoperative or Does Not Operate Correctly — Passenger, 6-way, Except Police
Possible Causes
Fuse
m
Seat control switch
Horizontal motor
Seat track

. co
PINPOINT TEST AC : THE POWER SEAT IS INOPERATIVE OR DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY — PASSENGER, 6-WAY, EXCEPT POLICE
gn
deployment.
AC1
ia

rd
Yes GO to AC2
No If only the horizontal motor is inoperative, GO to AC4
ca
If only the front height motor is inoperative, GO to AC6

If only the rear height motor is inoperative, GO to AC8
AC2
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C3190-8 Ground
Yes GO to AC3
causes of the circuit short. GO to AC10
AC3
Measure:

C3190-10 Ground

GO to AC10
No REPAIR the circuit. GO to AC10
AC4
Ignition OFF.
m

. co

gn
C332-1 C332-3
ia

rd
GO to AC10
No GO to AC5
ca
AC5
Measure:

C3190-1 C332-3
C3190-2 C332-1

GO to AC10
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to AC10
AC6
Ignition OFF.

C3074-1 C3074-3

GO to AC10
No GO to AC7
m
AC7
Measure:

. co
gn
C3190-6 C3074-3
C3190-5 C3074-1
ia
rd
ca

GO to AC10
No REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to AC10
AC8
Ignition OFF.

C3075-1 C3075-3

GO to AC10
No GO to AC9
AC9
Measure:

C3190-9 C3075-3
C3190-7 C3075-1
m

No
GO to AC10
REPAIR the affected circuit. GO to AC10
. co
gn
AC10
Ignition OFF.
ia

rd
Ignition ON.
ca
Yes
Component Test(s)
Blower Motor Cooling Performance
NOTE: This test is intended to check the cooling mode performance of an operational climate controlled seat backrest or cushion blower motor and verify it is cooling
inlet air at the blower motor (ambient cabin air) between 6-8° C (10-14° F).
NOTE: Make sure the vehicle is out of direct sunlight and is in an area with a stable air temperature when testing the climate controlled seat system.
NOTE: For correct temperature measurements, the seat being tested should be occupied.
1. Using a diagnostic scan tool, monitor the following SCME Parameter Identifications (PIDs):
Seat Cushion Temperature - Driver (SEAT_CSH_TMP_D)
Seat Back Temperature - Driver (SEAT_BK_TMP_D)
Seat Cushion Temperature - Passenger (SEAT_CSH_TMP_P)
Seat Back Temperature - Passenger (SEAT_BK_TMP_P)
Climate Controlled Seat System State - Driver (CLIMATE_SEAT_D)
Climate Controlled Seat System State - Passenger (CLIMATE_SEAT_P)
2. Any initial PID value of greater than 205° C (401° F) or less than 2° C (36° F) indicates a system hardware failure. Do not proceed with this test. GO to
Symptom Chart or SCME DTC Chart for diagnostic direction.
3. Gain access to the seat cushion and backrest blower motors and use a suitable thermocouple temperature measuring device to monitor the air inlet
temperature.
Place the temperature probe near each blower motor air filter.
4. NOTE: The engine must be running to operate the climate controlled seat system and carry out this test.
Operate system in high cool mode and measure the temperature at the cushion blower motor filter using the thermocouple device.
Secure the temperature probe at the cushion blower motor and record the air inlet temperature.
5. Use a diagnostic scan tool to measure the cushion blower motor PID temperature and record the value.
Monitor the STATE Parameter Identifications (PIDs) to verify the system is operating. If during testing, a PID value indicates a fault has occurred (putting
the system into recovery mode) the seat has failed the test. Do not continue. Return to the diagnostic routine.
6. Subtract the cushion blower motor PID temperature from the cushion air inlet temperature and record the temperature difference value.
7. Continue to operate the system in high cool mode and use the thermocouple device to measure the temperature at the backrest blower motor filter.
Secure the temperature probe at the backrest blower motor and close the backrest trim cover before measuring and recording the air inlet temperature.
8. Use a diagnostic scan tool to measure the backrest blower motor PID temperature and record the value.
Monitor the STATE Parameter Identifications (PIDs) to verify the system is operating. If during testing, a PID value indicates a fault has occurred (putting
the system into recovery mode) the seat has failed the test. Do not continue. Return to the diagnostic routine.
9. Subtract the backrest blower motor PID temperature from the backrest air inlet temperature and record the value.
10. Compare the cushion and backrest calculated temperature values. The temperature difference should be between 6-8° C (10-14° F).
m
11. If the calculated temperature values are not within these specifications, check the climate controlled seat components for air duct or filter restrictions, blockages,
duct or electrical disconnections and for incorrect assembly. Repair as needed. If OK, carry out the SCME self-test and if any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
are retrieved, go to SCME DTC Chart for diagnostic direction. Return to the diagnostic routine.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs 2017 Explorer
Front Side Member
Removal
NOTICE: Frame members are a combination of High-Strength Low Alloy (HSLA) and Ultra High-Strength (UHSS) steels.
Because of this design feature, sectioning is not recognized by Ford Motor Company. Frame Members must be
replaced at the factory seams.
1. Restore vehicle to pre-accident dimensions as required.

Operation).
2. NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Front structure overview.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the component(s) at the factory joints.
Installation
NOTICE: Frame members are a combination of High-Strength Low Alloy (HSLA) and Ultra High-Strength (UHSS) steels.
Because of this design feature, sectioning is not recognized by Ford Motor Company. Frame Members must be
replaced at the factory seams.
Front structure overview.

m
2. Install replacement frame members at the factory seams and weld as required. Factory spot welds may be replaced with

co
MIG plug welds or resistance spot welds. Spot welds must equal factory welds in location and quantity.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
204-01 Front Suspension 2017 Explorer
Front Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal

2. NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove the stabilizer bar link nut. Damage to the stabilizer bar link ball joint
or boot may occur.
NOTE: To remove the stabilizer bar link lower nut, loosen the nut, then use the hex holding feature to prevent the
stabilizer bar link ball joint from turning while removing the stabilizer bar link lower nut.
m
1. Remove and discard the front stabilizer bar link lower nut.
2. Position aside the front stabilizer bar link.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
or boot may occur.
NOTE: To remove the stabilizer bar link upper nut, loosen the nut, then use the hex holding feature to prevent the
stabilizer bar link ball joint from turning while removing the stabilizer bar link upper nut.
1. Remove and discard the front stabilizer bar link upper nut.
2. Remove the front stabilizer bar link.
m
Installation
or boot may occur.

. co
1. NOTICE: Do not use power tools to install the stabilizer bar link nut. Damage to the stabilizer bar link ball joint
NOTE: To install the stabilizer bar link upper nut, use the hex holding feature to prevent the stabilizer bar link ball joint
gn
from turning while installing the stabilizer bar link upper nut.
1. Position the front stabilizer bar link.

2. Install the new front stabilizer bar link upper nut.
ia

rd
ca
or boot may occur.
NOTE: To install the stabilizer bar link lower nut, use the hex holding feature to prevent the stabilizer bar link ball joint
from turning while installing the stabilizer bar link lower nut.

2. Install the new front stabilizer bar link lower nut.
m
. co
gn
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Stabilizer Bar
204-592
Separator, Lower Arm Ball Joint
TKIT-2006C-FFMFLM
TKIT-2006C-LM
TKIT-2006C-ROW
300-OTC1585AE
Powertrain Lift
m
Wooden Block
Removal
co
.
gn
NOTE: Make sure the steering wheel is in the unlocked position.
NOTE: The stabilizer bushing and bracket are part of the stabilizer bar assembly. The stabilizer bar will not turn easily in the
bushing.
ia
1. Remove the wheels and tires.

rd
2. If equipped.
Remove the retainers and the skid plate.
ca
m
3. If equipped.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. If equipped.
m
5. On both sides.
Remove the wheel arch liner to front subframe retainers.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with 3.5L EcoBoost engine.
Remove the exhaust flexible pipe.

Refer to: Exhaust Flexible Pipe (309-00B Exhaust System - 3.5L EcoBoost (257kW/350PS), Removal and Installation).
7. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with 3.5L Duratec engine.
Remove the exhaust Y-pipe.


Refer to: Exhaust Y-Pipe (309-00D Exhaust System - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Removal and Installation).
or boot may occur.
1. On both sides.
Remove and discard the front stabilizer bar link lower nut.
2. On both sides.
Position aside the front stabilizer bar link.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
knuckle may result.
ca
NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent turning of the stud while removing the tie rod end nut.
1. On both sides.
Remove and discard the tie rod end nut.
2. On both sides.
Separate the tie rod end from the wheel knuckle.
Use Special Service Tool: 204-592 Separator, Lower Arm Ball Joint.
m
11. On both sides.
co
Remove and discard the lower control arm rearward nuts and bolts.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
12.
1. On both sides.
Remove and discard the lower control arm forward bolt.
2. On both sides.
Position the lower control arm aside.
m
13. NOTE: Front mounting location shown.
On both sides. co
Index-mark the subframe for reference during installation.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. NOTE: Rear mounting location shown.
On both sides.
m
15. Position the special tool under the front subframe assembly.
Use Special Service Tool: 300-OTC1585AE Powertrain Lift.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
16. Remove and discard the steering gear bolts.

m
17. On both sides.
Remove and discard the subframe bracket bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
18.
1. On both sides.
Remove and discard the subframe rearward bolt.
2. On both sides.
Remove the subframe bracket.
m
19. On both sides.
Remove and discard the subframe forward bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
20. Lower the rear of the subframe approximately 51 mm (2 in).

m
21. On both sides.
Remove and discard the stabilizer bar bracket bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
22. The stabilizer bar must be removed from the RH side of the vehicle.
Remove the stabilizer bar by guiding it between the subframe and the steering gear toward the RH side of the vehicle.
m
Installation
co
.
gn
1. The stabilizer bar must be installed from the RH side of the vehicle.
Install the stabilizer bar by guiding it between the subframe and the steering gear from the RH side of the vehicle.
ia
rd
ca
2. On both sides.
Install the new stabilizer bar bracket bolts.
m
3. Raise and align the subframe assembly to the witness marks made during removal.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. On both sides.
Install the new subframe forward bolt.
m
5.
1. On both sides.
Position the subframe bracket.
2. On both sides.
Install the new subframe rearward bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. On both sides.
Install the new subframe bracket bolts.
m
7. Install the new steering gear bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
8.
1. On both sides.
Position the lower control arm aside.
2. On both sides.
Install the new lower control arm forward bolt.
m
9. On both sides.
Install the new lower control arm rearward nuts and bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
1. On both sides.
Attach the tie rod end to the wheel knuckle.
2. On both sides.
Install the new tie rod end nut.
m
or boot may occur.
co
.
gn
1. On both sides.
Position the front stabilizer bar link.
2. On both sides.
Install the new front stabilizer bar link lower nut.
ia

rd
ca
Install the exhaust Y-pipe.


Install the exhaust flexible pipe.

15. On both sides.

Install the wheel arch liner to front subframe retainers.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
16. If equipped.
ca
m
17. If equipped.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
18. If equipped.
Install the skid plate and the retainers.
m
19. Install the wheels and tires.
20. Check and if necessary, adjust front toe.

co
Refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Disassembly and Assembly
Spring Compressor
Vise
Materials
Name Specification
Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound ESE-M1C171-A
XG-3-A
DISASSEMBLY
m
WARNING: Do not apply heat or flame to the shock absorber or strut tube. The shock absorber and strut tube are
gas pressurized and could explode if heated. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
co
WARNING: Keep all body parts clear of shock absorbers or strut rods. Shock absorbers or struts can extend
unassisted. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
.
gn
NOTICE: When installing a suitable spring compressor, use care not to damage the spring coating.
ia
1. Remove the front strut and spring assembly.

Refer to: Front Strut and Spring Assembly (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
rd
2. WARNING: Coil springs and strut assemblies are compressed under extreme load. Always use a spring
compressor for disassembly. Follow procedure instructions carefully and make sure the spring compressor has
ca
the correct spring plates or adapters. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly.
Use the General Equipment: Spring Compressor
Use the General Equipment: Vise
m
3. NOTE: Note the position of the components before removal.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut. co

NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the strut rod from turning while removing the strut rod nut.
.
Remove and discard the strut rod nut. Disassemble the front strut and spring assembly in the order shown.
gn
ia
rd
ca
ASSEMBLY
1. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
2. NOTE: Make sure the grease is applied completely around the strut shaft. Do not allow grease to make contact with the
strut rod threads.
Liberally apply the specified grease to the length of the strut shaft that makes contact with the jounce bumper plus an
additional 15 mm (0.5 in).
Material: Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound / XG-3-A (ESE-M1C171-A)
m
co
3. Make sure that the lower spring insulator is properly installed.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. NOTICE: Make sure the components are correctly aligned during assembly.
m
5. Tighten the strut rod nut.
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Install the front strut and spring assembly.

Refer to: Front Strut and Spring Assembly (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
WARNING: Do not apply heat or flame to the shock absorber or strut tube. The shock absorber and strut tube are
gas pressurized and could explode if heated. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Keep all body parts clear of shock absorbers or strut rods. Shock absorbers or struts can extend
unassisted. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.

m
2. If equipped.
Remove the upper strut tower cover.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
or boot may occur.
1. Remove and discard the front stabilizer bar link upper nut.
2. Position aside the front stabilizer bar link.
m
4. Detach the wheel speed sensor harness from the strut.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Remove and discard the lower strut-to-wheel knuckle nuts and bolts.
m
6. Remove and discard the upper strut mount nuts. Remove the front strut and spring assembly.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. Position the front strut and spring assembly and install the new upper strut mount nuts.
m
2. Install the new lower strut-to-wheel knuckle nuts and bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Attach the wheel speed sensor harness to the strut.

m
or boot may occur.
co
.
gn
2. Install the new front stabilizer bar link upper nut.
ia
rd
ca
5. If equipped.
Install the upper strut tower cover.
m
7. Check and if necessary adjust front camber.

co
Refer to: Front Camber Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System 2017 Explorer
Front Subframe
204-592
Separator, Lower Arm Ball Joint
TKIT-2006C-FFMFLM
TKIT-2006C-LM
TKIT-2006C-ROW
300-OTC1585AE
Powertrain Lift
Wooden Block
m
Removal
co
.
1. Using a suitable holding device, hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Remove the wheels and tires.

3. If equipped.
Remove the retainers and the deflector shield.
m
4. If equipped.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. If equipped.
m
6. On both sides.
Remove the wheel arch liner to front subframe retainers.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Remove the exhaust flexible pipe.



10. On both sides.

Remove and discard the stabilizer bar bracket-to-front subframe bolts.
m
. co
gn
knuckle may result.
NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent turning of the stud while removing the tie rod end nut.
ia
1. On both sides.
rd
Remove and discard the tie rod end nut.

2. On both sides.
Separate the tie rod end from the wheel knuckle.
Use Special Service Tool: 204-592 Separator, Lower Arm Ball Joint.
ca
m
12. NOTICE: Do not use a prying device or separator fork between the ball joint and the wheel knuckle. Damage to
co
the ball joint or ball joint seal may result. Only use the pry bar by inserting it into the lower arm body opening.
NOTICE: Use care when releasing the lower arm and wheel knuckle into the resting position or damage to the
ball joint seal may occur.
.
gn
NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the stud from turning while removing the lower ball joint nut.
1. On both sides.
Remove and discard the lower ball joint nut.
ia
2. On both sides.
Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
rd
ca
13.
1. Remove the EPAS gear flap heat shield bolt.
2. Position aside the EPAS gear flap heat shield.
m
14.
1. Remove the EPAS gear harness ground bolt.
co
2. Disconnect the EPAS gear harness electrical connectors.
.
3. Unclip the EPAS gear harness and position aside.
gn
ia
rd
ca
15. WARNING: Do not reuse steering column shaft bolts. This may result in fastener failure and steering column
shaft detachment or loss of steering control. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to
vehicle occupant(s).
1. Remove and discard the steering column shaft bolt.

2. Separate the steering column shaft coupler from the EPAS gear.
m
16. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-subframe bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
17. If equipped.
Remove the roll restrictor-to-subframe bolt.
m
18. If equipped.
co
Unclip the oil cooler hose retainer from the front subframe.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
19. If equipped.
Remove the PTU (power transfer unit) cooler line mounting bracket bolts.
m
20. NOTE: Front mounting location shown.
On both sides. co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
21. NOTE: Rear mounting location shown.
On both sides.
m
22. Position the special tool under the front subframe assembly.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
23. On both sides.

Remove and discard the front subframe bracket bolts.
m
24. On both sides.
co
Remove and discard the front subframe rearward bolts and the front subframe brackets.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
25. On both sides.

Remove and discard the front subframe forward bolts.
m
26. Lower the front subframe assembly from the vehicle.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. Raise and align the subframe assembly to the witness marks made during removal.
m
2. On both sides.
Install the new front subframe forward bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: Only tighten the bolts finger tight at this stage.
On both sides.
Position the front subframe brackets and install the new front subframe bracket bolts.
m
4. On both sides.
Install the new front subframe rearward bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. On both sides.
Tighten the new front subframe bracket bolts.
m
6. If equipped.
Install the PTU cooler line mounting bracket bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. If equipped.
Clip the oil cooler hose retainer to the front subframe.
m
8. If equipped.
Install the roll restrictor-to-subframe bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
9. Install the rear roll restrictor-to-subframe bolt.

m
10.
2. Install the new steering column shaft bolt.

. co
1. Attach the steering column shaft coupler to the EPAS gear.
gn
ia
rd
ca
11.
1. Position the EPAS gear harness and attach the clips.
2. Connect the EPAS gear harness electrical connectors.
3. Install the EPAS gear harness ground bolt.
m
12.
1. Position the EPAS gear flap heat shield.
2. Install the EPAS gear flap heat shield bolt.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
13. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the stud from turning while installing the lower ball joint nut.
1. On both sides.
Attach the lower ball joint to the wheel knuckle.
2. On both sides.
Install the new lower ball joint nut.
m
1. On both sides.
Attach the tie rod end to the wheel knuckle.
2. On both sides.
. co
Install the new tie rod end nut.
gn
ia
rd
ca
15. On both sides.

Install the new stabilizer bar bracket-to-front subframe bolts.
m
Install the exhaust Y-pipe. co

.
gn

ia
Install the exhaust flexible pipe.

rd
19. On both sides.

Install the wheel arch liner to front subframe retainers.
ca
m
20. If equipped.
Install the underbody shield and the retainers.. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
21. If equipped.
m
22. If equipped.
Install the deflector shield and the retainers. . co
gn
ia
rd
ca
23. Install the wheels and tires.

24. Check and if necessary, adjust front toe.

Refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Front Suspension
REFER to: Suspension System (204-00 Suspension System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
204-00 Suspension System - General Information 2017 Explorer
General Procedures
Front Toe Adjustment
Steering Wheel Holder

Wheel Alignment System
Adjustment
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level surface.
1. Steering wheel in straight ahead position.

Use the General Equipment: Steering Wheel Holder
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Using alignment equipment and the manufacturer's instructions, check the front toe setting on both sides.
Use the General Equipment: Wheel Alignment System
3.
1. On both sides.
Loosen the tie rod end jamb nut.
2. On both sides.
Position aside the steering gear boot clamp.
3. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the inner tie rod is rotated.
On both sides.
Rotate the inner tie rod until the toe reading is within specifications.
m
4. Recheck the toe settings and adjust as necessary.
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
205-D070 (D93P-1175-B)
Remover, Front Wheel Hub
Removal
m
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the brake disc.

4. NOTE: Push the halfshaft into the wheel hub to gain access for the removal of the wheel bearing and wheel hub bolts.
Using the special tool, press the halfshaft from the front wheel bearing and hub.
Use Special Service Tool: 205-D070 (D93P-1175-B) Remover, Front Wheel Hub.
m
5. Remove and discard the front wheel bearing and wheel hub bolts. Remove the front wheel bearing and wheel hub.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. NOTICE: The wheel knuckle bore must be clean enough to allow the wheel bearing and wheel hub to seat
completely by hand. Do not press or draw the wheel hub and bearing into place or damage to the bearing may
occur.
NOTICE: Make sure the wheel hub-to-wheel knuckle mating surfaces are clean and free of any adhesive. Failure
to clean the adhesive from both surfaces may cause bearing damage.
Clean and inspect the wheel hub-to-wheel knuckle mating surfaces.

m
Installation
1. NOTE: Only tighten the bolts finger tight at this stage. co

Position the front wheel bearing and wheel hub and install the new front wheel bearing and wheel hub bolts finger tight.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. NOTE: Push the halfshaft into the wheel hub to gain access for the removal of the wheel bearing and wheel hub bolts.
Tighten the new front wheel bearing and wheel hub bolts.
m
3. Install the brake disc.
co
4. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. Tighten the nut to specification
before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage occurs if the wheel bearing is loaded with
.
the weight of the vehicle applied.
gn
NOTICE: The wheel hub nut contains a one-time locking chemical that is activated by the heat created when it is
ia

rd
While an assistant applies the brake, install the new wheel hub nut.
ca
m
co

.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal

2. Disconnect the electrical connector and detach the wiring retainers.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: Make sure that the sensor housing area is clean and free of foreign material before the sensor is removed.
Using compressed air, clean the sensor housing area.

m
4. Detach the wiring retainers, remove the bolt and the front wheel speed sensor.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTICE: Before installing a new sensor, inspect the sensor housing to make sure the sensor cavity is clean and
free of foreign material or damage to the sensor may occur.
Clean and inspect the sensor housing cavity.

m
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
303-04C Fuel Charging and Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
3.5L Duratec
m
. co
gn
Item Description
ia
1 Fuel rail
2 Fuel injector
rd
3 Throttle Body (TB)

ca
FPDM (fuel pump driver module)

m
Item
1 FPDM (fuel pump driver module)
Comments:
Description
. co
The FPDM (fuel pump driver module) is located behind the RH C-pillar trim
gn
panel.
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
System Operation
Operation.
Operation.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
about these,
For a PCM DTC,

Testing).
Symptom Charts.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Fuel Filler Door Spring
Removal
1. Remove the fuel filler door assembly.

Refer to: Fuel Filler Door Assembly (501-03 Body Closures, Removal and Installation).
2.
Remove the fuel filler door spring.
1. Using a screw driver, press the tab upwards to release the fuel filler door spring from the fuel filler door assembly.
2. Remove the fuel filler door spring.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Fuel Filler Door
Removal
1. Open the fuel filler door.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2. Using a screwdriver, pry the retaining tab back and slide the fuel filler door from the fuel filler door hinge.
ca
Installation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Fuel Injectors
1. The fuel injectors are serviced with the fuel rail.

Refer to: Fuel Rail (303-04C Fuel Charging and Controls - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Fuel Level Sender
Removal
1. WARNING: Before beginning any service procedure in this section, refer to Safety Warnings in section 100-
Refer to: Gasoline and Gasoline-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information,
2. Remove the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit.

Refer to: Fuel Pump and Sender Unit (310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
3.
Release the locking tab and remove the Fuel Level Sender.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Fuel Level Sensor
310-123
Locking Ring, Fuel Tank
TKIT-2004J-F
TKIT-2005U-LM
Removal
1. NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation steps.
Remove the fuel tank.

Refer to: Fuel Tank (310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: To avoid introducing contamination into the fuel tank use compressed air to clean the Fuel Level Sensor
connections, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Using the lock ring tool, unlock and remove the Fuel Level Sensor lock ring.
Use Special Service Tool: 310-123 Locking Ring, Fuel Tank.
m
4. Carefully lift the Fuel Level Sensor out of the fuel tank enough to disconnect the internal fuel tube-to-Fuel Level Sensor
quick release coupling.
co
Procedures).
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. NOTE: The Fuel Level Sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and filter.
NOTE: Inspect the mating surfaces of the Fuel Level Sensor flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Wipe
clean with a lint free towel. Install a new Fuel Level Sensor or fuel tank if the Oring seal contact area is bent, scratched
or corroded.
Remove the Fuel Level Sensor.

m
6. NOTE: The Fuel Level Sensor must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and filter.
co
NOTE: Inspect the mating surfaces of the Fuel Level Sensor flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces. Wipe
clean with a lint free towel. Install a new Fuel Level Sensor or fuel tank if the Oring seal contact area is bent, scratched
or corroded.
.
gn
Remove and discard the Fuel Level Sensor ring.
ia
rd
ca
7. NOTE: This step is only neccassary when replacing the fuel level sensor float arm.

m
8. NOTE: This step is only neccassary when replacing the fuel level sensor float arm.
co
Release the locking tab and remove the fuel level sensor float arm.
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure to install a new Fuel Level Sensor O-ring seal.
NOTE: Make sure the alignment tabs on the Fuel Level Sensor and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the Fuel Level
Sensor lock ring.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Fuel Lines
Removal

2. Remove the fuel tank.

3. Remove the rear subframe.

Refer to: Rear Subframe - FWD (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Rear Subframe - AWD (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
4.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel lines after releasing the fuel system pressure. When
m
disconnecting or removing any fuel lines, carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container.
Disconnect the fuel and vapor tube quick release couplings.

Remove the bolts.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
co.
gn
ia
5. Remove the nut and the brake line cover.

rd
ca
6.
Disconnect the brake line fittings.
Remove the stud.
Remove the pin-type retainer.
m
7.
Disconnect the rear brake line fittings.
Release the brake line brackets.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. Release the brake line bracket.

m
9.
Release the brake line bracket.
Remove the bolt and the fuel line bundle.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
310-123
Locking Ring, Fuel Tank
TKIT-2004J-F
TKIT-2005U-LM
Removal
Remove the fuel tank.
m
2. NOTE: To avoid introducing contamination into the fuel tank use compressed air to clean the Fuel Pump and Sender
Unit connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
co
Disconnect the electrical connector, the fuel feed quick release coupling and fuel vapor tube quick release coupling.
.
Procedures).
gn
ia
rd
ca
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Using the lock ring tool, unlock and remove the Fuel Pump and Sender unit lock ring.
Use Special Service Tool: 310-123 Locking Ring, Fuel Tank.
m
4.
co
NOTE: The Fuel Pump and Sender Unit must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and filter.
Carefully lift the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit out of the fuel tank enough to access the internal fuel tube-to-Fuel
.
Pump and Sender Unit quick release coupling.
gn
Disconnect the internal fuel tube-to-Fuel Pump and Sender Unit quick release coupling.
ia
rd
ca
5. NOTE: If the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit does not clear the fuel tank opening, insert a screwdriver into the empty rod
hole and slightly pull the screwdriver inboard until the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit aligns with the fuel tank opening.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
NOTE: The Fuel Pump and Sender Unit must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and filter.
Completely remove the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit from the fuel tank.
m
6. NOTE: Inspect the mating surfaces of the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
bent, scratched or corroded.
Remove and discard the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit ring.
. co
Wipe clean with a lint free towel. Install a new Fuel Pump and Sender Unit or fuel tank if the Oring seal contact area is
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. Loosely install a 12" (minimum length) zip-tie to the internal fuel tube at the quick release coupling. Leave the tail of the
zip tie on to allow the tube to be retrieved while the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit is being installed.
m
2. NOTE: Make sure to install a new Fuel Pump and Sender Unit O-ring seal.
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit lock ring.

. co
NOTE: Make sure the alignment tabs on the Fuel Pump and Sender Unit and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the

gn
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
NOTE: The FPDM is located behind the RH C-pillar trim panel.
1. Remove the C-Pillar Trim Panel.

Refer to: C-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: C-Pillar Trim Panel - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
2. Disconnect the FPDM electrical connector. Remove the FPDM nuts and then remove the FPDM.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
1. Install the FPDM, then install and tighten the FPDM nuts. Connect the FPDM electrical connector.
m
2. Install the C-Pillar Trim Panel.
co
Refer to: C-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: C-Pillar Trim Panel - Vehicles With: Inflatable Seatbelts (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
Fuel Rail
Removal


3. Remove the upper intake manifold.

Refer to: Upper Intake Manifold (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the fuel rail jumper tube bracket bolt.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5. Disconnect the fuel rail fuel feed tube quick release coupling.
Procedures).
m
6. Disconnect the fuel injector electrical connectors.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove the fuel rail retaining bolts and then remove the fuel rail.
m
. co
gn
8. Remove the fuel injector retaining clips and then remove the fuel injectors from the fuel rail.
ia
rd
ca
9. Remove and discard all of the fuel injector O-ring seals.

m
Installation
fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seals.

. co
1. NOTICE: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary O-rings can cause the
NOTICE: The upper and lower fuel injector O-ring seals are similar in appearance, but are not interchangeable.
gn
NOTE: Make sure that new fuel injector O-ring seals are installed.
Install the new fuel injector O-ring seals and the fuel injector retaining clips onto the fuel injectors. Lubricate the new fuel
injector O-ring seals with clean engine oil.
ia
rd
ca
2. Install the fuel injectors into the fuel rail.

m
3. Install the fuel rail, then install and tighten the fuel rail retaining bolts.
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Connect the fuel injector electrical connectors.

m
5. Connect the fuel rail fuel feed tube quick release coupling.
Procedures).
co
.
gn
ia
rd
ca
6. Install the fuel rail jumper tube bracket bolt.

m
7. Install the upper intake manifold.
8. Reconnect the battery.

co
Refer to: Upper Intake Manifold (303-01C Engine - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
.
gn
9. Pressurize the fuel system.
ia

rd
ca
ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
310-00C Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS) 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Overview
The fuel system consists of:
a two-speed mechanical returnless fuel system (MRFS).

has a fuel pump module that operates on 10 or 12 volts depending on load, that supplies fuel under pressure to the fuel
rail.
uses a dual-container (saddle-type) fuel tank.
has a fuel level sensor assembly.
a fuel tank filler pipe assembly, which cannot be modified in any way, that also contains a misfuel inhibitor device to
permit only unleaded fuel to be pumped into the tank.
has an Easy Fuel™ (capless) fuel tank filler pipe assembly, which cannot be modified in any way and is serviced only by
the installation of a new fuel tank filler pipe assembly.
has a supplemental refueling adapter located in the spare tire compartment.
has a FTP sensor (part of the fuel vapor tube assembly).
has a fuel pump control module located behind the RH C-pillar trim panel.
a fuel pump module containing:
m
the electric fuel pump which provides pressurized fuel to the fuel rail.
the fuel level sender.
a check valve which maintains system pressure after the pump is shut off.
co
a pressure relief for overpressure protection in the event of restricted fluid flow.
a lifetime fuel filter providing filtration to protect the fuel injectors from foreign material.
.
Fuel Pump Shut-off Feature
gn
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, the vehicle is equipped with a Fuel Pump and Sender Unit Shut-off Feature that
is initiated by the event notification signal.
The event notification signal is a signal provided by the RCM to the Fuel Pump Control Module. Signal communication between
ia
the RCM and the Fuel Pump Control Module allows the PCM to shut-off the Fuel Pump.
Should the vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, the vehicle may be restarted by first turning the ignition to the
rd
OFF position and then turn the ignition to the ON position. In some instances the vehicle may not start the first time and may
take one additional ignition cycle.
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
310-D009 (D95L-7211-A)
Fuel Pressure Test Kit
Check
NOTE: This Fuel System Pressure Check is for the low pressure side of the system.

m
3. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel jumper tube quick connect coupling.
Procedures).
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Adapter and the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel tube and the fuel jumper tube.
Use Special Service Tool: 310-D009 (D95L-7211-A) Fuel Pressure Test Kit.
m
5. NOTE: The fuel pump control module electrical connector was previously disconnected to release the fuel system
Reconnect the fuel pump control module electrical connector.

. co
pressure and must be reconnected to test the fuel system pressure.
6. Reconnect the battery ground cable.

gn
7. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for fuel leaks prior to completing the fuel system
pressure test.
ia
NOTE: After completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the Fuel Pressure Test Kit and release
any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
rd
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional information, refer to
Specifications in this section.
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Fuel System
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Fuel System
for information regarding Ford-specific diagnostic practices.
NOTE: The following procedure diagnoses a slow to fill concern only. For all other concerns, refer to Refer to Powertrain
Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.

Symptom Chart
m
Slow to fill Fuel tank filler pipe Refer toGO to Pinpoint Test A
Fuel tank filler pipe vent tube, if
equipped
EVAPsystem
co
Fuel tank inlet check valve (part of
.
the fuel tank)
gn
Fuel level vent valve (part of the fuel
tank)
Fuel system fresh air inlet
ia
All other fuel system Fuel system components Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
concerns (PC/ED) manual.
rd
ca
Diagnostic Routine(s)
Slow to Fill
Under normal operation, fuel should flow at a steady rate through the fuel tank filler pipe into the fuel tank. As fuel enters the
fuel tank air is vented through the filler pipe or the ORVR system.
PINPOINT TEST A : SLOW TO FILL

A1
CHECK COMPONENTS FOR SIGNS OF DAMAGE
Visually inspect the following components for signs of damage:
Fuel tank filler pipe
Fuel tank filler pipe vent tube, if equipped
EVAP system
Fuel tank inlet check valve (part of the fuel tank)
Fuel level vent valve (part of the fuel tank)
Was the cause of the concern found?
Yes REPAIR or INSTALL new components to correct the concern.

No GO to A2
A2
CHECK THE SYSTEM FOR ANY EVAP (EVAPORATIVE EMISSION) DTC'S
Connect the scan tool.
Check the system for any EVAP DTC's.
Are any DTC's present?
Yes Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.
No GO to A3
A3
MONITOR THE FTP WHILE FILLING THE FUEL TANK
Monitor the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) reference value while filling the fuel tank. Refer to the Reference Values in
the Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manual.Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
(PC/ED) manual.
m
Is FTP within specification?
Yes GO to A5
No GO to A4
. co
gn
A4
MONITOR THE FTP WHILE FILLING THE FUEL TANK WITH THE EVAP SYSTEM DISCONNECTED
Disconnect the fuel tank-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling at the EVAP canister.
REFER to: Quick Release Coupling (310-00C Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
ia
Monitor the FTP reference value while filling the fuel tank. Refer to Powertrain Control/Emissions Diagnosis
rd
(PC/ED) manual.
Is FTP within specification?

ca
Yes GO to A6
No GO to A5
A5
CHECK THE FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE ASSEMBLY FOR BLOCKAGE OR RESTRICTION
Remove the fuel tank filler pipe assembly.
REFER to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
Inspect the fuel tank filler pipe and fuel tank filler pipe vent tube (if equipped) for a blockage or restriction.
Is the fuel tank filler pipe or fuel tank filler pipe vent tube (if equipped) blocked or restricted?
Yes If possible, REPAIR the blockage or restriction. If the blockage or restriction cannot be repaired,
INSTALL a new fuel tank filler pipe or fuel tank filler pipe vent tube.
REFER to: Fuel Tank Filler Pipe (310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
No GO to A6
A6
CHECK THE FRESH AIR LINE FOR BLOCKAGE OR RESTRICTION
Separate the fresh air hose vent cap from cross member.
Remove the fresh air hose vent cap from the tube.
Inspect the tube and cap for blockages (mud, spider nests, etc.).
Is the fresh air hose vent cap or hose blocked or restricted?
Yes Disconnect and blow-out rubber fuel vapor tube that connects to the rear-most port of the canister
with compressed air. Replace the fresh air hose vent cap.
No GO to A7
A7
CHECK THE FUEL TANK EVAP LINE FOR BLOCKAGE OR RESTRICTION
Disconnect the large 0.7 cm (5/8 in) EVAP line connector at the upper front canister where it connects from the
fuel tank to the carbon canister assembly inlet.
REFER to: Quick Release Coupling (310-00C Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS),
m
Is there presence of liquid fuel in the line?
Yes GO to A8
co
No GO to A9
.
gn
A8
CHECK THE FUEL TANK EVAP LINE CONNECTION AT THE BOTTOM FUEL PUMP MODULE FLANGE
ia
Lower the fuel tank.
Partially remove the fuel pump module and inspect the connection.
rd
Is the fuel tank EVAP line disconnected?

ca
Yes Repair the connection, replace the EVAP canister and the canister purge valve.
No Replace the EVAP canister, the EVAP canister purge valve, the fuel vapor tube assembly and the
fuel tank.
REFER to: Evaporative Emission Canister (303-13C Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec
REFER to: Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (303-13C Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L
REFER to: Fuel Tank (310-01C Fuel Tank and Lines - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
.
A9
CHECK THE FUEL TANK INLET CHECK VALVE
Inspect the fuel tank inlet check valve for restriction or sticking.
Is the fuel tank inlet check valve restricted or sticking?
Yes If possible, REPAIR the restriction. If the restriction cannot be repaired, INSTALL a new fuel tank.
Installation).
No INSTALL a new fuel tank.
Installation).
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
The fuel tank and lines consists of:
n saddle-type fuel tank.

fuel and vapor lines in an integrated bundle assembly.
quick connect fuel and vapor tube couplings.
a Mechanical Returnless Fuel System (MRFS).
a Fuel Pump (FP) module containing:
the electric FP which provides pressurized fuel to the fuel rail.
the fuel level sender.
a check valve which maintains system pressure after the pump is shut off.
a pressure relief for overpressure protection in the event of restricted fluid flow.
a lifetime fuel filter providing filtration to protect the fuel injectors from foreign material.
The vehicle:
has a serviceable fuel level sender mounted on the fuel pump module.
has a fuel tank filler pipe which contains a misfuel inhibitor device to permit only unleaded fuel to be pumped into the fuel
m
tank.
has an Easy Fuel (capless) fuel tank filler pipe assembly, which cannot be modified in any way.
has a lifetime in tank fuel filter serviced as part of the fuel pump.
has fuel tubes (liquid and vapor) combined in a bundle.
quick connect fuel and vapor tube couplings.
has a FPDM that shuts off fuel in the event of a collision.
. co
Fuel Pump Shut-off Feature
gn
NOTE: Refer to the Description and Operation, Intelligent Access with Push Button Start in Section 419-01A to review the
procedures for achieving the various ignition states (ignition OFF, ignition in ACCESSORY, ignition ON and ignition START) on
vehicles with this feature.
ia
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, the vehicle is equipped with a Fuel Pump and Sender Shut-off Feature that is
initiated by the event notification signal.
rd
The event notification signal is a signal provided by the RCM to the FPDM. Signal communication between the RCM and the
FPDM allows the PCM to shut-off the Fuel Pump.
ca
Should the vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, the vehicle may be restarted by first turning the ignition to the
OFF position and then turn the ignition to the ON position. In some instances the vehicle may not start the first time and may
take one additional ignition cycle.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
292-00004
Fuel Tanker 100 GPM
Removal
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation steps.

m
3. NOTE: The supplemental refueling adapter is located in the spare tire well.
tank filler pipe.

. co
Install the supplemental refueling adapter and a length of semi-rigid fuel drain tube into the Easy Fuel™ (capless) fuel
gn
ia
rd
ca
4. Attach the Fuel Storage Tanker to the fuel drain tube and drain as much fuel as possible from the Easy Fuel™ (capless)
fuel tank filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the fuel tank inlet spout.
Use Special Service Tool: 292-00004 Fuel Tanker 100 GPM.
5. Remove the information bezel.

m
6. Remove the RHR wheel and tire.
7. Remove the retainers and the RHR wheel liner.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
8. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tank filler pipe. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Release the clamp and position the fuel filler pipe hose aside.
m
. co
gn
ia
9. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube quick release coupling
rd
Procedures).
ca
10. Remove the bolt and the fuel tank filler pipe from the vehicle.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Installation
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Removal
1. Remove the fuel tank.

2.
1. Disconnect the EVAP fuel vapor tube electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the EVAP quick connect coupling.
3. Detach the EVAP fuel vapor tube from the fuel tank retainer.
4. Remove and discard foam pad.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Fuel Tank
300-OTC1585AE
Powertrain Lift
Removal
All vehicles
m
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation steps.

co
.
gn
3. Drain the fuel tank.
Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00C Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), General
Procedures).
ia
4. Remove the muffler and tailpipe.

Refer to: Muffler and Tailpipe (309-00C Exhaust System - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and Installation).
rd
AWD
ca
5. Remove the bolts and the brace.

m
6. NOTE: Support the driveshaft.
Remove the center support bearing bracket bolts.

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
7. Remove and discard the rear drive unit pinion flange bolt and washer assemblies.
m
8. NOTICE: Do not remove driveshaft from the pinion flange by pulling on the driveshaft tube. Damage to the CV-
joint can result.
1. Mark the driveshaft and RDU flange alignment.

co
2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the driveshaft from the RDU flange.
.
3. Remove the driveshaft from the RDU flange.
gn
ia
rd
ca
All vehicles
9. Remove the EVAP canister.

Refer to: Evaporative Emission Canister (303-13C Evaporative Emissions - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
10. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank filler pipe quick release coupling.
Procedures).
m
11. Release the fresh air hose vent cap from the body.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
12. Release the fuel feed tube-to-fuel tank jumper tube lock.
m
13. Disconnect the fuel feed tube-to-fuel tank jumper tube.
Procedures).
. co
Refer to: Spring Lock Couplings (310-00C Fuel System - General Information - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), General
gn
ia
rd
ca
14. Position a powertrain lift under the fuel tank.

15. Remove and discard the bolts, lower the fuel tank and disconnect the electrical connector.
m
16. Remove the fuel tank from the vehicle.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Gasoline and Gasoline-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel
system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even
when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these
WARNING: Clean all fuel residue from the engine compartment. If not removed, fuel residue may ignite when the
engine is returned to operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
m
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an evaporative emission
(EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
co
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the event of fuel
spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition sources. Failure to follow these
.
gn
WARNING: Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting
vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel
may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
ia
WARNING: Avoid contact with fuel during a visual inspection for fuel leaks with the engine running. Do not work
on the fuel system until the pressure has been released and the engine has cooled. Fuel in the high-pressure fuel
rd
system is hot and under very high pressure. High-pressure fuel may cause cuts and contact with hot fuel may cause
burns. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Gateway Module A (GWM)
Removal
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the GWM following the on-screen instructions.
2.
Remove the nuts and the GWM.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
2. Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the GWM following the on-screen instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
414-02 Generator and Regulator 2017 Explorer 1
Generator - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)
Removal
NOTE: The radial arm adapter is a serviceable item on the 3.5L Duratec base vehicles. Do not replace the generator if the
radial arm adapter is the only concern.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

Radial arm adapter removal only - 3.5L Duratec base vehicles
2.
1. Position the B+ wire protective cover.
2. Remove the radial arm adapter nut cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
NOTICE: When installing the B+ terminal nut to the generator, finger-start the nut before tightening or component
damage may occur.
3.
1. Remove the nut and position the B+ wire.
2. Remove the nut and the radial arm adapter.
m
Generator removal
4. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud. co

Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (303-03C Engine Cooling - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS), Removal and
Installation).
.
Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (303-03D Engine Cooling - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS), Removal and
gn
Installation).
5.
1. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise.
ia
2. Position the accessory drive belt aside.

rd
ca
6. NOTICE: When installing the B+ terminal nut to the generator, finger-start the nut before tightening or
component damage may occur.
Position the B+ wire protective cover, remove the nut and position the B+ wire. Disconnect the generator electrical
connector.
m
. co
gn
7.
1. Remove the generator bolt.
ia
2. Remove the generator nut.

3. Remove the stud and the generator.
rd

ca
Installation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Removal
NOTE: Vehicle with 3.5L Duratec engine shown, others vehicles similar.
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative battery post.

2. Remove the BJB cover.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. NOTE: The generator current sensor must be installed in the proper position and orientation to function correctly. Note
the orientation and position of the generator current sensor tape tab.
Remove the nut and position the battery cable. Disconnect the generator current sensor electrical connector. Index-mark
the battery cable at the generator current sensor. Remove and discard the tape securing the generator current sensor to
the battery cable and remove the generator current sensor.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Generic Function Module (GFM)
Removal

2. Remove the screws and the RH instrument panel insulator.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
3. Remove the lower GFM bracket screws.

m
4.
Position the upper GFM bracket.
1. Remove the upper GFM bracket screw.
2. Lower the GFM and bracket.
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
5.
Remove the GFM.
1. Disconnect the GFM electrical connetor.
2. Remove the GFM bolts.
m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without:
Programmable Driver Seat - Overview
Overview
Standard power window features include one-touch up and one-touch down (front doors only).
The window control switch:
can be used to raise or lower all windows from the master window control switch or the individual side window from the
corresponding individual door switch.
can automatically lower/raise the LH or RH front windows when the corresponding front window control switch is
momentarily pressed/pulled to the second detent position and released.
has a rear passenger window lock-out feature.
The HVAC module controls the rear window defrost relay (located in the BJB). The HVAC module activates the rear window
defrost relay when the rear window defrost switch (integral to the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B")) is pressed. If
equipped, the rear window defrost can also be activated/deactivated by using a touchscreen interface or voice commands.
When the rear window defrost relay is active, the rear window defrost grid is energized.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without:
Programmable Driver Seat - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram - Rear Window Defrost
m
. co
gn
ia
Network Message Chart - Rear Window Defrost

rd

Body Control Module (BCM) Network Input Messages
ca

Message Module
Climate APIM (if The climate control requests message contains the rear window defrost request information. When
control equipped) the rear window defrost function is requested using voice command or the button is selected on the
requests touchscreen, this input is used to activate the rear window defrost system.


Message
Climate control FCIM-B (Front Controls When the rear window defrost button is selected, this input is used to
requests Interface Module "B") activate the rear window defrost system.
Delayed Accessory Power

Voltage is supplied to the power window system by the accessory delay relay, located in BCM. The accessory delay relay is
integral to the BCM and not serviceable separately. The BCM activates the accessory delay relay whenever the ignition is ON,
or whenever the ignition is changed from ON to OFF while the LH and RH front doors are closed.
The BCM deactivates the accessory delay relay when:
the LH or RH front door is ajar and the ignition is turned OFF.

ten minutes have elapsed since the ignition status has changed from ON to the OFF position.
Front Door Power Window Operation
NOTE: A new front window motor cannot operate in one-touch up mode, and the bounce-back feature is disabled prior to
initialization. If the switch is actuated to the auto UP position and released, window movement stops when the up contact in the
front window control switch is released. If the front window motor is removed from the window regulator drum housing, or if a
new front window motor is installed, it must be initialized.
Refer to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without:
Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
The front window motors only operate when the accessory delay relay is active. The high current required to move the front
windows are supplied through dedicated B+ and motor ground inputs.
The window control switch(es) sends 2 separate signals to the window motor: up and down. When the window control switch is
pressed to the first detent position, a 12-volt signal is sent to the window motor to request an up or down operation. When auto
m
up or auto down is requested (switch pressed to the second detent position), the window control switch provides a 12-volt
signal on both the up and down line simultaneously. During an auto up or auto down request, the window motor determines
intended window direction by the signal first received. If the window control switch is pressed too quickly to the second detent
co
position (less than 5 milliseconds of time between first detent signal and second detent signal), the window motor is not be able
to determine the intended direction request and does not operate until the window control switch is released and pressed again.
The up and down contacts are floating within the window control switch when the switch is in the neutral position. The up and
.
down feeds to the window motor are all low current.
gn
When the front window motor is operating in auto or manual mode and the window control switch is held in the opposite
direction, the glass movement pauses for a half second, then changes direction.
The front window motors have a security override feature. If an obstacle is detected in the window opening as the window glass
ia
is moving upward, the window motor automatically reverses direction and moves the glass toward the bounce-back position (in
both manual up and one-touch up modes). Once the window motor stops the glass at its bounce-back position, and within 2
rd
seconds the switch is released, then held in the auto UP position, the window motor moves the glass up with no bounce-back
protection (security override). If the switch is released before the window glass reaches the fully CLOSED position, the window
motor stops with bounce-back automatically enabled for the next window up movement. If the ignition is turned to OFF or
ca
START (without delayed accessory), the window motor stops. The only exception is when an obstacle is detected in the
window opening while delayed accessory power is not present. In this case the window motor bounces back, then stops. Ice,
contaminant buildup and environmentally induced tight spots in the front window seals are all possible conditions that can
activate the bounce-back feature. If an obstruction occurs between 4 mm (0.15 in) and 200 mm (7.87 in) of window opening,
the bounce-back position is 250 mm (9.84 in) of window opening. If an obstruction occurs at a position more than 200 mm (7.87
in) of window opening, the bounce-back position is 50 mm (1.96 in) below where the obstruction occurred.
Passenger Rear Power Windows Lock- Out
When the lock-out switch (part of the master window control switch) is in the LOCK position, the rear passenger power windows
only operate from the master window control switch.
Rear Window Defrost
When the rear window defrost switch (part of the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B")) is activated, a message is sent
to the GWM through the HS-CAN3. From there, the message is sent to the HVAC module through the MS-CAN. When the
HVAC module receives the request, it grounds the control circuit to activate the rear window defrost relay (located in the BJB).
When the rear window defrost relay is activated, the rear window defrost grid is energized and heats the window glass.
Remote Start - Rear Window Defrost Operation
If equipped, the customer can select different climate control modes/preferences when the vehicle is started using the remote
start feature. This can be accessed through the message center. For additional information on setting the remote start
preferences, refer to the Owner's Literature. When the rear defrost is set to AUTO mode, the rear window defrost activates
when the outside temperature is less than 0°C (32°F) and the vehicle is started using the remote start feature. No climate
control adjustments are recognized during remote start operation. Once the ignition is cycled to the ON position, the climate
control system returns to the previous settings (last ignition ON cycle) and adjustments can be made normally. If the previous
setting was off, the climate control system turns off.
Master Window Control Switch
The master window control switch is supplied voltage whenever the accessory delay relay is active.
When operating any passenger power window from the master window control switch, low current voltage signals are
sent to the corresponding passenger window control switch to move the window up or down.
The master window control switch supplies low current voltage to the rear power windows when the lock-out switch is in
the UNLOCK position.
Passenger Window Control Switch - Front
The RH window control switch provides low current voltage signals to the RH window regulator motor to move the window up or
down.
Passenger Window Control Switch - Rear
The rear window control switches receive voltage (high current circuit) from the delayed accessory relay whenever it is active.
The rear window control switches receive voltage (low current circuit) from the master window control switch when the lock-out
switch is in the UNLOCK position. The rear window control switches each have a dedicated ground circuit. The rear window
m
control switches contain 2 relays, which when at rest (inactive), provide a ground path to their respective power window motor
circuit(s).
co
When a rear window control switch is activated, the corresponding relay located within the rear window control switch is
energized which supplies voltage (high current) to operate the power window motor in the desired direction.
Window Regulator Motor - Front

.
gn
The front power window motor(s) contains integral electronics that control and monitor the glass movement (for obstacle
detection and one-touch up/down functionality). The front power window motor inputs contain these circuits:
Battery voltage (high current circuit to operate the motor for glass movement)
ia
Ignition voltage (low current circuit to power the logic of the integral electronics within the power window motor)
Ground (circuit provides ground for motor operation as well as logic of the integral electronics within the power window
motor)
rd
Up (low current voltage signal comes from the window control switch when activated to move the glass upward (or
anytime the window control switch is placed in the second detent position))
Down (low current voltage signal comes from the window control switch when activated to move the glass downward (or
ca
anytime the window control switch is placed in the second detent position))
Window Regulator Motor - Rear
The rear power window motors are bi-directional. Window direction is determined by the polarity of the voltage and ground
being supplied to the motor from the window control switch.
The FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B") contains the rear window defrost button. PMI is required if installing a new
module.
HVAC Module
The HVAC module controls the rear window defrost relay. The HVAC module requires PMI when it is replaced.
FDIM
If equipped, the FDIM contains a redundant rear window defrost button on the touchscreen display. The FDIM plugs directly
into the APIM, and does not communicate directly on any network.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without: Programmable Driver Seat
DTC Chart: HVAC Module


B1C83:12 Rear Defog Relay: Circuit Short To Battery GO to Pinpoint Test H
B1C83:14 Rear Defog Relay: Circuit Short To Ground or If the rear window defrost is inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test H
Open If the rear window defrost does not shut off automatically, GO to
Pinpoint Test I
All other Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
(DTCs)
m
Symptom Chart(s)
Symptom Chart: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
co
.

Symptom Chart
gn

All power windows are Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test A
ia
inoperative from the master Pinpoint Test

window control switch
Both rear power windows Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test B
rd
are inoperative Pinpoint Test
The LH front and rear power Wiring, REPAIR circuit GD233 (BK) for an open.
windows are both terminals or
ca
inoperative connectors
The RH front and rear power Wiring, REPAIR circuit GD348 (BK/YE) for an open.
windows are both terminals or
inoperative connectors
A single power window is Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test C

inoperative - LH front Pinpoint Test
A single power window is Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test D

inoperative - RH front Pinpoint Test
A single power window is Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test E

inoperative - LH rear Pinpoint Test
A single power window is Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test F

inoperative - RH rear Pinpoint Test
The one-touch up/down Window GO to Pinpoint Test G

feature is inoperative control
switch
The defrost system does not Voice VERIFY the rear window defrost operation using the instrument panel rear window defrost switch. If the rear
respond to voice command recognition window defrost is still inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test H If the rear window defrost operates, DIAGNOSE the
(if equipped) system voice recognition system. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
The defrost system does not Touchscreen VERIFY the rear window defrost operation using the instrument panel rear window defrost switch. If the rear
respond to touchscreen window defrost is still inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test H If the rear window defrost operates, DIAGNOSE the
command (if equipped) touchscreen. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
The defrost system is Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test H
inoperative Pinpoint Test
The defrost system does not Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test I

shut off automatically Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Test(s)
All Power Windows are Inoperative From the Master Window Control Switch
REFER to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without: Programmable Driver Seat - System
Operation and Component Description (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Description and Operation).
Possible Causes
Fuse
Master window control switch
BCM
m
VERIFY BCM fuse 23 (10A) is OK.
A1
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
. co
PINPOINT TEST A : ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE FROM THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Disconnect: Master Window Control Switch C504.

gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:

ia

C504-10 Ground
rd
ca
Yes INSTALL a new master window control switch.

REFER to: Driver Door Window Control Switch (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
No VERIFY BCM fuse 23 (10A) is OK. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit
short. If OK, GO to A2
A2
CHECK THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: BCM C2280C.
Measure:

C504-10 C2280C-30
Yes GO to A3

A3
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the BCM connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the BCM connectors and all previously disconnected system connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern.
Both Rear Power Windows are Inoperative
m
co
.
Possible Causes
gn
Circuit breaker

ia
Verify the lock-out switch is in the UNLOCK position.

rd
PINPOINT TEST B : BOTH REAR POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE

B1
CHECK THE REAR WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
ca
Disconnect: LH Rear Window Control Switch C701.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C701-1 Ground
Yes GO to B3
No GO to B2
B2
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Ignition OFF.
Connect: LH Rear Window Control Switch C701.
INSTALL a fused jumper wire in place of BCM circuit breaker 38 (30A).
Ignition ON.
Attempt to operate the power windows in both directions from each of the rear door window control switches.
Did the jumper wire fuse open during the test?
Yes REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
No If the rear power windows did operate with the fused jumper wire in place, INSTALL a new circuit breaker.
If the power windows did not operate with the fused jumper wire in place, REPAIR circuit CBP38 (GY/BU) for an open.
B3
CHECK THE REAR WINDOW LOCK-OUT CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C504-3 C701-5
m
A Single Power Window is Inoperative - LH Front

. co
gn
ia
Possible Causes
rd
Fuse
ca
Power window motor
PINPOINT TEST C : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - LH (LEFT-HAND) FRONT

C1
CHECK THE POWER TO THE LH (LEFT-HAND) FRONT WINDOW MOTOR
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: LH Front Power Window Motor C524.
Measure:

C524-1 Ground
Yes GO to C2
No VERIFY BCM fuse 25 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the cause
of the circuit short. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without:
C2
CHECK THE LH (LEFT-HAND) FRONT WINDOW MOTOR DELAYED ACCESSORY FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C524-3 Ground
Yes GO to C3
No REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
C3
CHECK THE LH (LEFT-HAND) FRONT WINDOW MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C524-2 Ground

. co
gn
Yes GO to C4
No REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
ia
C4
CHECK THE VOLTAGE SIGNAL FROM THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
rd
Ignition ON.
While pulling and releasing the master window control switch in the (UP) direction, measure:
ca

C524-4 Ground
While pressing and releasing the master window control switch in the (DOWN) direction, measure:

C524-5 Ground
Are the voltages greater than 11 volts when the master window control switch is pressed, and 0 volt when the switch is released?
Yes MAKE SURE there are no mechanical binding conditions preventing the glass mechanism from operating correctly. If a mechanical
binding issue is found, REPAIR as necessary. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
If no mechanical binding condition exists, INSTALL a new LH front power window motor.
REFER to: Front Door Window Regulator Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
No GO to C5
C5
CHECK FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE WINDOW MOTOR AND THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C524-4 C504-17
C524-5 C504-18

DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
No REPAIR the circuit in question. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the LH front window motor.
m
A Single Power Window is Inoperative - RH Front

. co
gn
ia
Possible Causes
Fuse
rd

RH front window control switch
Power window motor
ca
PINPOINT TEST D : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - RH (RIGHT-HAND) FRONT

D1
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) FRONT WINDOW OPERATION FROM THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition ON.
Attempt to operate the RH front window from the master window control switch.
Does the RH front window operate from the master window control switch?
Yes GO to D7
No GO to D2
D2
CHECK THE HIGH CURRENT VOLTAGE FEED CIRCUIT TO THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) FRONT WINDOW MOTOR FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: RH Front Power Window Motor C608.
Measure:

C608-1 Ground
Yes GO to D3
No VERIFY BCM fuse 26 (30A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the cause
of the circuit short. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
D3
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) FRONT WINDOW MOTOR DELAYED ACCESSORY FEED CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C608-3 Ground
m
Yes GO to D4
No REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
co
.
D4
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) FRONT WINDOW MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
gn
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

ia

C608-2 Ground
rd
ca
Yes GO to D5
No REPAIR the circuit. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
D5
CHECK THE VOLTAGE SIGNAL FROM THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition ON.

C608-4 Ground

C608-5 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 11 volts when the master window control switch is pressed, and 0 volt when the switch is released?
binding issue is found, REPAIR as necessary. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
If no mechanical binding condition exists, INSTALL a new RH front power window motor.
No GO to D6
D6
CHECK FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE WINDOW MOTOR AND THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C608-4 C504-12
C608-5 C504-11
m

co
.
DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
gn
No REPAIR the circuit in question. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
ia
rd
D7
CHECK THE VOLTAGE FEED CIRCUIT TO THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: RH Front Window Control Switch C648.

ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C648-6 Ground
Yes GO to D8
D8
CHECK FOR AN OPEN BETWEEN THE WINDOW MOTOR AND THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) FRONT WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C608-4 C648-3
C608-5 C648-4
Yes INSTALL a new RH window control switch.

REFER to: Passenger Door Window Control Switch (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
No REPAIR the circuit in question. DE-INITIALIZE, then INITIALIZE the RH front window motor.
A Single Power Window is Inoperative - LH Rear
m
NOTE: If both rear windows are inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test B

co
.
Possible Causes
gn
LH rear window control switch
Power window motor
ia
PINPOINT TEST E : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - LH (LEFT-HAND) REAR

rd
E1
CHECK THE WINDOW OPERATION FROM THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition ON.
Attempt to operate the LH rear window from the master window control switch.
ca
Does the LH rear window operate from the master window control switch?
Yes GO to E2
No GO to E3
E2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE FROM THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH LOCK-OUT CIRCUIT
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C701-5 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new LH rear window control switch.

REFER to: Rear Door Window Control Switch (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
No REPAIR the lock-out circuit for an open.
E3
CHECK THE LH (LEFT-HAND) REAR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C701-1 Ground
Yes GO to E4
E4
CHECK THE LH (LEFT-HAND) REAR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
m
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
C701-3
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
Yes GO to E5
ia

rd
E5
CHECK THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION
Ignition ON.
ca

C701-6 Ground

C701-7 Ground
Yes GO to E7
No GO to E6
E6
CHECK THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.

Measure:

C504-16 C701-7
C504-15 C701-6

E7
CHECK THE POWER WINDOW UPWARD AND/OR DOWNWARD OPERATION
To check downward window operation, momentarily connect fused jumper wires:
m
C701-1 C701-8
C701-4 . co C701-3
gn
To check upward window operation, momentarily connect fused jumper wires:

ia

rd
C701-1 C701-4
C701-8 C701-3
ca
Does the LH rear window move up and/or down?
Yes REMOVE the jumper wires. INSTALL a new LH rear window control switch.
No REMOVE the jumper wires. GO to E8
E8
CHECK THE POWER WINDOW CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: LH Rear Power Window Motor C703.
Measure:

C701-4 C703-1
C701-8 C703-2
binding issue is found, REPAIR as necessary. If no mechanical binding condition exists, INSTALL a new LH rear power window
motor.
REFER to: Rear Door Window Regulator Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
A Single Power Window is Inoperative - RH Rear
m
Possible Causes

. co
RH rear window control switch
gn
Power window motor
PINPOINT TEST F : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - RH (RIGHT-HAND) REAR

F1
ia
Ignition ON.
Attempt to operate the RH rear window from the master window control switch.
rd
Does the RH rear window operate from the master window control switch?
ca
Yes GO to F2
No GO to F3
F2
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: RH Rear Window Control Switch C801.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C801-5 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new RH rear window control switch.

F3
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) REAR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C801-1 Ground
Yes GO to F4
F4
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) REAR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C801-3 Ground

. co
gn
Yes GO to F5
ia
F5
Ignition ON.
rd

ca

C801-6 Ground

C801-7 Ground
Yes GO to F7
No GO to F6
F6
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C504-13 C801-7
C504-14 C801-6

F7

C801-1 C801-8
m
C801-4 C801-3
. co
gn

C801-1 C801-4
ia
C801-8 C801-3
rd
ca
Does the RH rear window move up and/or down?
Yes REMOVE the jumper wires. INSTALL a new RH rear window control switch.
No REMOVE the jumper wires. GO to F8
F8
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: RH Rear Power Window Motor C803.
Measure:

C801-4 C803-1
C801-8 C803-2
binding issue is found, REPAIR as necessary. If no mechanical binding condition exists, INSTALL a new RH rear power window
motor.
The One-Touch Up/Down Feature Is Inoperative
Possible Causes
Front power window motor not initialized

Window control switch
Power window motor
m
PINPOINT TEST G : THE ONE-TOUCH UP/DOWN FEATURE IS INOPERATIVE
G1
INITIALIZE THE SUSPECT POWER WINDOW
Carry out the initialization procedure on the suspect power window. co
REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows, Vehicles Without: Programmable Driver
Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
.
gn
Is the one-touch up/down feature operating correctly?
Yes The system is operating normally at this time. The window lost initialization.
No If the LH front window one-touch up/down feature is inoperative, INSTALL a new master window control switch.
ia
If the concern is still present, INSTALL a new LH power window motor.

rd
If the RH front window one-touch up/down feature is inoperative from the RH front window control switch, INSTALL a new RH front
window control switch.
If the concern is still present, INSTALL a new RH power window motor.
ca
If the RH front window one-touch up/down feature is inoperative from the master window control switch, INSTALL a new master
If the concern is still present, INSTALL a new RH power window motor.
The Defrost System is Inoperative


B1C83:12 Rear Defog Relay: Circuit Short To Battery This DTC sets when the HVAC module detects a short to voltage on the rear window defrost relay control
circuit.
B1C83:14 Rear Defog Relay: Circuit Short To Ground This DTC sets when the HVAC module detects a short to ground or an open in the rear window defrost
or Open relay control circuit.
Possible Causes
Fuse
Rear window defrost relay
FCIM-B (front controls interface module B)
HVAC module
Rear window defrost grid
Rear window glass

Inspect the rear window defrost grid and electrical connectors for damage.
PINPOINT TEST H : THE DEFROST SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE

H1
CHECK THE REAR WINDOW DEFROST GRID VOLTAGE
Disconnect: Rear Window Defrost Grid C402A.
Start the engine.
Activate the rear defrost switch.
Measure:
m
C402A-1 . co Ground

gn
Yes GO to H2
No VERIFY BJB fuse 12 (40A) is OK. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. If OK,
GO to H3
ia
H2
CHECK THE REAR WINDOW DEFROST GRID GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
rd
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Window Defrost Grid C402B.

ca
Measure:

C402B-1 Ground
Yes CARRY OUT the Grid Wire Test in this section. REPAIR the rear window defrost grid or INSTALL a new rear window glass if necessary.
REFER to: Heated Window Grid Wire Repair (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
H3
CHECK THE VOLTAGE SUPPLY TO THE REAR WINDOW DEFROST RELAY
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Rear Window Defrost Relay.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Ground
Rear Window Defrost Relay, socket pin 1
Ground
m
. co
gn

ia
rd
Yes GO to H4
ca
No REPAIR the circuit or INSTALL a new BJB as necessary.
H4
CHECK THE HVAC (HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING) MODULE OUTPUT
NOTICE: The following step uses a test lamp to simulate normal circuit loads. Use only a Rotunda Test Lamp (SGT27000) or 250- 300mA incandescent bulb
test lamp. To avoid connector terminal damage, use the Rotunda Flex Probe kit for the test lamp probe connection to the vehicle. Do not use the test lamp
probe directly on any connector.
Start the engine.
Connect:

Action
m
Activate the rear window defrost switch.
Yes
No
GO to H5
GO to H6
. co
gn
H5
CHECK THE REAR WINDOW DEFROST RELAY
Carry out the rear window defrost relay component test.
ia
Did the rear window defrost relay pass the component test?
rd
Yes REPAIR the open rear window defrost relay output circuit.
No INSTALL a new rear window defrost relay.

ca
H6
CHECK THE REAR DEFROST SWITCH (CC_SW_R_DEF) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view FCIM-B (front controls interface module B) PIDs (Parameter Identifications).
Monitor the CC_SW_R_DEF PID while pressing and releasing the rear window defrost switch.
Does the PID agree with the rear window defrost switch status?
Yes GO to H7
No INSTALL a new FCIM-B (front controls interface module B). Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the procedure.
H7
CHECK THE REAR WINDOW DEFROST RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Ground

No GO to H8
m
H8
CHECK THE REAR WINDOW DEFROST RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
Positive Lead
C228A-25
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to H9
H9
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the HVAC module connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the HVAC module connectors and all previously disconnected rear window defrost system connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.

and Installation).
The Defrost System Does Not Shut Off Automatically


m
Possible Causes

. co
HVAC module
gn
PINPOINT TEST I : THE DEFROST SYSTEM DOES NOT SHUT OFF AUTOMATICALLY
I1
Disconnect: Rear Window Defrost Relay
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Measure:

ca

C402A-1 Ground
No GO to I2
I2
Start the engine.
Connect:

Action
m
Yes GO to I3
. co
I3
gn
Ignition OFF.
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Connect:
ca

Action

Yes REPAIR the short to ground in the rear window defrost relay control circuit.
No GO to I4
I4
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
and Installation).
Component Test- Grid Wire Test

. co
gn
1. Using a bright lamp in the vehicle, inspect the grid wire from the exterior. A broken grid wire appears as a brown spot.
2. Run the engine at idle. Activate the rear window defrost switch. The indicator light should come on.
3. Working in the vehicle with a voltmeter, contact the broad red-brown stripes of the rear glass window (positive lead to B+ side and the negative lead to ground
side). The meter should read 10-13 volts. A lower voltage reading indicates a loose ground connection.
ia
4. Contact a good ground point with the negative lead of the meter. The voltage reading should not change.
5. With the negative lead of the meter grounded, touch each grid line of the heated rear window glass at its midpoint with the positive lead. A reading of
rd
approximately 6 volts indicates the line is good. A reading of 0 volt indicates the line is broken between the midpoint and the B+ side of the grid line. A reading
of 12 volts indicates the circuit is broken between the midpoint of the grid line and ground.
6. Pinpointing the exact position of the break can be accomplished (if the voltmeter reads 0 volt when the midpoint of the grid line is touched with the positive lead
ca
of the voltmeter) by moving the positive lead of the voltmeter toward the B+ side of the grid line and touching the grid line until the voltmeter reads 12 volts. If
the voltmeter reads 12 volts when the midpoint of the grid line is touched with the positive lead of the voltmeter, simply move the positive lead of the voltmeter
toward the ground connection of the grid line and touch the grid line until the voltmeter reads 0 volt.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver
Seat - Overview
Overview
Standard power window features include one-touch up and one-touch down (front doors only).
can be used to raise or lower all windows from the master window control switch or the individual side window from the
corresponding individual door switch.
can automatically lower/raise the LH or RH front windows when the corresponding front window control switch is
momentarily pressed/pulled to the second detent position and released.
defrost relay when the rear window defrost switch (integral to the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B")) is pressed. The
rear window defrost can also be activated/deactivated by using a touchscreen interface or voice commands. When the rear
window defrost relay is active, the rear window defrost grid is energized.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver
Seat - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram - Power Windows
Front Power Windows
m
. co
gn
Network Message Chart - Front Power Windows

Passenger Door Module (PDM) Network Input Messages
ia

Message Module
rd
Passenger DDM When activating the front passenger window from the master window control switch, the
window passenger window command is sent from the DDM to the PDM.
ca
command

m

. co
gn
Message Module
Climate APIM The climate control requests message contains the rear window defrost request information.
control When the rear window defrost function is requested using voice command or the button is
requests selected on the touchscreen, this input is used to activate the rear window defrost system.
ia
Climate FCIM-B (Front When the rear window defrost button is selected, this input is used to activate the rear window
control Controls defrost system.
rd
requests Interface
Module "B")
ca
integral to the BCM and not serviceable separately. The BCM activates the accessory delay relay whenever the ignition is ON,
or whenever the ignition is changed from ON to OFF while the LH and RH front doors are closed.
the LH or RH front door is ajar and the ignition is OFF.

ten minutes have elapsed since the ignition status has changed from ON to the OFF position.
Power Window Operation - Front
NOTE: If the vehicle battery is disconnected while the window is moving, the one-touch up and one-touch down feature (and
obstacle detection) is disabled prior to initialization.
Refer to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver
Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
The power windows operate when the delayed accessory relay is active. The delayed accessory relay (non-serviceable) is
located in the BCM. Both front windows are equipped with obstacle detection and one-touch up and one-touch down
functionality. If an obstacle is detected as the window glass is moving upward, the window motor automatically reverses
direction and moves the glass downward.
Driver Door Window Operation
The master window control switch communicates to the DDM through a LIN. When commanded by the master window control
switch, the DDM supplies power and ground to operate the driver door window regulator motor in the desired direction. The
DDM monitors the window glass position through feedback from 2 Hall-effect sensors (integral to the driver door window
regulator motor). If there is an issue with the Hall-effect sensor circuit(s), the DDM only moves the window in 500 ms intervals
(the master window control switch must be released and activated again to move the window).
Passenger Door Window Operation
The master window control switch communicates to the DDM through a LIN. The DDM communicates to the PDM through the
MS-CAN.
When commanded by the master window control switch or the passenger door window control switch, the PDM supplies power
and ground to operate the passenger door window regulator motor in the desired direction. The PDM monitors the window
glass position through feedback from 2 Hall-effect sensors (integral to the passenger door window regulator motor). If there is
an issue with the Hall-effect sensor circuit(s), the PDM only moves the window in 500 ms intervals (the passenger or master
window control switch must be released and activated again to move the window).
Rear Door Window Operation
The rear window control switches contain 2 relays, which when at rest (inactive), provide a ground path to their respective
power window motor circuit(s). The rear window control switches receive voltage (high current circuit) from the delayed
m
accessory relay whenever it is active. When the rear window control switches receive a voltage signal from the master window
control switch and/or when the rear door window control switch is activated, the rear door window control switch supplies high
current voltage (and ground) to operate the power window motor in the desired direction.
Passenger Windows Lock-Out

co
.
gn
Global Open
The RKE can be used to operate the windows when the ignition is off and the accessory delay feature is not active. Within a
ia
short time after unlocking the vehicle doors with the RKE transmitter, press and hold the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
until the windows begin moving. The windows automatically open. Pressing the lock or unlock button while the windows are
moving stops window movement.
rd
Rear Window Defrost

ca
Remote Start - Rear Window Defrost Operation
The customer can select different climate control modes/preferences when the vehicle is started using the remote start feature.
This can be accessed through the message center. When the rear defrost is set to AUTO mode, the rear window defrost
activates when the outside temperature is less than 0°C (32°F) and the vehicle is started using the remote start feature. No
climate control adjustments are recognized during remote start operation. Once the ignition is cycled to the ON position, the
climate control system returns to the previous settings (last ignition ON cycle) and adjustments can be made normally. The rear
defrost may remain on after the ignition is cycled on. If the previous setting was off, the climate control system turns off. For
additional information on setting the remote start preferences, refer to the Owner's Literature.
The master window control switch receives voltage whenever the delayed accessory relay is active. The master window control
switch is grounded through the DDM. The master window control switch communicates to the DDM through a LIN.
The master window control switch supplies low current voltage signal through momentary contacts to activate the internal
relays within each of the rear passenger window control switches to operate the rear windows.
Passenger Door Window Control Switch
The passenger door window control switch contains momentary contacts (one for each window switch direction). The PDM
provides a return (ground) for the passenger door window control switch. When the control switch is activated, a ground signal
is supplied to the PDM to operate the passenger door window regulator motor in the desired direction.
Rear Door Window Control Switch
circuit(s).
The door window regulator motor(s) are bi-directional. Window direction is determined by the polarity of the voltage being
supplied to the motor from the associated door module. The door window regulator motor contains 2 Hall-effect sensors. The
Hall-effect sensor power supply and return circuits are provided by the associated door module.
Rear Door Window Regulator Motor
m
The rear door window regulator motors are bi-directional. Window direction is determined by the polarity of the voltage and
ground being supplied to the motor from the window control switch.

co
module.
.
gn
HVAC Module
ia
The FDIM contains a redundant rear window defrost button on the touchscreen display. The FDIM plugs directly into the APIM,
rd
and does not communicate directly on any network.

ca
The DDM receives power window commands from the master window control switch through a LIN. The DDM supplies voltage
and ground to operate the driver door window regulator motor.
The DDM also communicates master window control switch requests to the PDM through the Medium Speed Controller Area
Network (MS-CAN) to operate the passenger door window regulator motor. PMI is required if installing a new module.
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
The PDM receives power window commands from the passenger door window control switch or from the DDM through the
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN). The PDM supplies voltage and ground to operate the passenger door
window regulator motor. PMI is required if installing a new module.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver Seat


B1C83:12 Rear Defog Relay: Circuit Short to Battery GO to Pinpoint Test A
B1C83:14 Rear Defog Relay: Circuit Short to Ground or If the rear window defrost is inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test A
Open If the rear window defrost does not shut off automatically, GO to
Pinpoint Test B
All other Diagnostic Trouble Codes - Refer to the appropriate section in Group 412 for the procedure.
(DTCs)
m
DTC Chart: Driver Door Module (DDM)

DDM DTC Chart
. co
gn
B1088:83 LIN Bus "B": Value of GO to Pinpoint Test C
Signal Protection
Calculation Incorrect
ia
B1088:87 LIN Bus "B": Missing GO to Pinpoint Test C

Message
rd
B117E:07 Front Power Window Up: INITIALIZE the driver door window regulator motor.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front
Windows/Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
B117E:16 Front Power Window Up: GO to Pinpoint Test C
ca
Circuit Voltage Below

Threshold
B117E:4B Front Power Window Up: WAIT 10 minutes to allow the window motor to cool. INITIALIZE the driver door window regulator motor.
Over Temperature REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front
VERIFY the DTC is no longer present. If the DTC returns, INSPECT the window seals, glass runs and window
regulator for a binding condition. REPAIR as necessary.
B117E:92 Front Power Window Up: INITIALIZE the driver door window regulator motor.
Performance or Incorrect REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front
Operation Windows/Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
B1189:29 Front Window Position GO to Pinpoint Test C
Sensor: Signal Invalid
B12C5:71 Front Window Lifter Motor GO to Pinpoint Test C
Up Relay: Actuator Stuck
B12C8:71 Front Window Lifter Motor GO to Pinpoint Test C
Down Relay: Actuator
Stuck
B13F1:4B Driver Power Window CLEAR the DTC. WAIT 10 minutes to allow the window motor to cool. INITIALIZE the driver door window regulator
Motor: Over Temperature motor.
REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front
VERIFY the DTC is no longer present. If the DTC returns, INSPECT the window seals, glass runs and window
regulator for a binding condition. REPAIR as necessary.
C1B14:11 Sensor Supply Voltage A: GO to Pinpoint Test C
C1B14:15 Sensor Supply Voltage A: GO to Pinpoint Test C
Open
U2013:24 Switch Pack: Signal Stuck CLEAR the DTC. TEST the system for normal operation from the driver door window control switch. If any individual
High switches within the driver door window control switch are inoperative or the DTC returns, INSTALL a new driver door
All other -
Diagnostic REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems, Diagnosis and
Trouble Codes Testing).
(DTCs)
DTC Chart: Passenger Door Module (PDM)

PDM DTC Chart

B117E:07 Front Power Window Up: INITIALIZE the passenger door window regulator motor.
Mechanical Failure REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front
B117E:16 Front Power Window Up: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test D
m
B117E:4B Front Power Window Up: Over WAIT 10 minutes to allow the window motor to cool. INITIALIZE the passenger door window regulator
Temperature motor.
B117E:92 Front Power Window Up:

co
VERIFY the DTC is no longer present. If the DTC returns, INSPECT the window seals, glass runs and
window regulator for a binding condition. REPAIR as necessary.
INITIALIZE the passenger door window regulator motor.
.
Performance or Incorrect REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front
gn
Operation Windows/Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
B1189:29 Front Window Position Sensor: GO to Pinpoint Test D
Signal Invalid
B12C5:71 Front Window Lifter Motor Up GO to Pinpoint Test D
ia
Relay: Actuator Stuck

B12C8:71 Front Window Lifter Motor Down GO to Pinpoint Test D
rd
B13F2:4B Passenger Power Window WAIT 10 minutes to allow the window motor to cool. INITIALIZE the passenger door window regulator
Motor: Over Temperature motor.
ca
VERIFY the DTC is no longer present. If the DTC returns, INSPECT the window seals, glass runs and
window regulator for a binding condition. REPAIR as necessary.
C1B14:11 Sensor Supply Voltage A: GO to Pinpoint Test D
C1B14:15 Sensor Supply Voltage A: GO to Pinpoint Test D
Circuit Short To Battery or Open
U2002:24 Switch: Signal Stuck High GO to Pinpoint Test D
Trouble Codes REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
(DTCs) Diagnosis and Testing).
Symptom Chart(s)

Symptom Chart

Sources
Both front door power Fuse DIAGNOSE any related DDM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) first. REFER to the DDM DTC Chart in
windows are inoperative from Wiring, this section.
the master window control terminals If there are no related Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present, INSTALL a new driver door window
switch or control switch.
connectors REFER to: Driver Door Window Control Switch (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Master Installation).
window
control
switch
DDM
Both rear passenger power Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test H

windows are inoperative the
Pinpoint
Test
A single power window is Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test C

inoperative/does not operate the
correctly -LH front Pinpoint
Test
A single power window is Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test D

correctly - RH front Pinpoint
Test
A single power window is Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test F

correctly - LH rear Pinpoint
Test
m
A single power window is Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test G
correctly - RH rear
The one-touch up/down

feature is inoperative
Pinpoint
Test
Refer to
the
GO to Pinpoint Test E
. co
Pinpoint
gn
Test
The global open function is RKE VERIFY the RKE lock/unlock function operates correctly using all of the RKE transmitters. To diagnose any
inoperative transmitter inoperative RKE transmitters,
concern REFER to: Locks, Latches and Entry Systems (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems,
ia
Door Diagnosis and Testing).

window INITIALIZE the inoperative door window.
not REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front
rd
initialized Windows/Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
The defrost system is Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test A

inoperative the
ca
Pinpoint
Test
The defrost system does not Refer to GO to Pinpoint Test B

shut off automatically the
Pinpoint
Test
The defrost system does not Refer to VERIFY the rear window defrost operation using the instrument panel rear window defrost switch. If the
respond to voice command the rear window defrost is still inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test A If the rear window defrost operates,
only Pinpoint DIAGNOSE the inoperative voice command system. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415 for the
Test procedure.
The defrost system does not Refer to VERIFY the rear window defrost operation using the instrument panel rear window defrost switch. If the
respond to touchscreen the rear window defrost is still inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test A If the rear window defrost operates,
command only Pinpoint DIAGNOSE the inoperative touchscreen command system. Refer to the appropriate section in Group 415
Test for the procedure.
Pinpoint Test(s)

REFER to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver Seat - System Operation and
Component Description (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Description and Operation).


circuit.
Possible Causes
Fuse
HVAC module
Rear window glass
m
PINPOINT TEST A : THE DEFROST SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE

A1
Start the engine.

. co
gn
Measure:

ia

C402A-1 Ground
rd

ca
Yes GO to A2
GO to A3
A2
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C402B-1 Ground
A3
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Ground
m
Ground
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to A4
A4
Start the engine.
Connect:

Action
m
Yes
No
GO to A5
GO to A6
. co
gn
A5
ia
rd

ca
A6
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to A7
A7
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Ground

No GO to A8
m
A8
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
Positive Lead
C228A-25
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to A9
A9
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

and Installation).


m
Possible Causes

. co
HVAC module
gn
PINPOINT TEST B : THE DEFROST SYSTEM DOES NOT SHUT OFF AUTOMATICALLY
B1
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Measure:

ca

C402A-1 Ground
No GO to B2
B2
Start the engine.
Connect:

Action
m
Yes GO to B3
. co
B3
gn
Ignition OFF.
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Connect:
ca

Action

No GO to B4
B4
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
and Installation).
A Single Power Window Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - LH Front

. co
gn

ia
rd

ca

B1088:83 LIN Bus "B": Value of Signal This DTC sets when the DDM has received invalid data from the driver door window control switch.
Protection Calculation Incorrect
B1088:87 LIN Bus "B": Missing Message This DTC sets when the DDM has lost communication from the driver door window control switch.
B117E:16 Front Power Window Up: Circuit This DTC sets when the DDM senses the driver window regulator motor circuit voltage is too low.
B1189:29 Front Window Position Sensor: This DTC sets when the DDM detects a difference with one or both of the Hall-effect sensor circuit(s). When this DTC
Signal Invalid is present, the front window only operates in short steps.
B12C5:71 Front Window Lifter Motor Up This DTC sets when the DDM detects the UP relay (integral to the DDM) is stuck or a short to voltage is present in the
Relay: Actuator Stuck UP window motor circuit. When this DTC is present, the front window does not operate.
B12C8:71 Front Window Lifter Motor Down This DTC sets when the DDM detects the DOWN relay (integral to the DDM) is stuck or a short to voltage is present in
Relay: Actuator Stuck the DOWN window motor circuit. When this DTC is present, the front window does not operate.
C1B14:11 Sensor Supply Voltage A: Circuit This DTC sets when the DDM detects a short to ground in the Hall-effect sensor power supply circuit. When this DTC
Short To Ground is present, the front window only operates in short steps.
C1B14:15 Sensor Supply Voltage A: Circuit This DTC sets when the DDM detects a short to voltage or open in the Hall-effect sensor power supply circuit. When
Short To Battery or Open this DTC is present, the front window only operates in short steps.
Possible Causes

Driver door window regulator motor
DDM
PINPOINT TEST C : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY- LH (LEFT-HAND) FRONT
C1
CHECK FOR DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform DDM self-test.
Are any DDM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes For DTC C1B14:11, GO to C9

For DTC B1189:29 or C1B14:15, GO to C7
For DTC B117E:16, B12C5:71 or B12C8:71, GO to C3
For DTC B1088:83 and B1088:87, GO to C14
For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),
No GO to C2
C2
CHECK THE DRIVER'S FRONT WINDOW SWITCH - DRIVER'S DOOR (DF_WINDSW_DD) PID (PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION)
Using a diagnostic scan tool, view DDM Parameter Identifications (PIDs).
Monitor the DDM PID DF_WINDSW_DD while pressing and releasing the driver door window control switch in the up and down positions.
m
Does the PID status agree with the driver door window control switch as it is pressed and released?
Yes GO to C3
No INSTALL a new master window control switch. co

.
gn
C3
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE WINDOW UP/DOWN CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Driver Door Window Regulator Motor C547.

ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Measure:

ca
C547-1 Ground
C547-4 Ground

No GO to C4
C4
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE WINDOW UP/DOWN CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C547-1 Ground
C547-4 Ground
Yes GO to C5
C5
CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE WINDOW UP/DOWN CIRCUITS
Measure:

C547-1 C501A-13
C547-4 C501A-14
m
. co
Yes GO to C6
gn
C6
CHECK THE DDM (DRIVER DOOR MODULE) OUTPUT
ia
NOTICE: The following step uses a test light to simulate normal circuit loads. To avoid connector terminal damage, use the Flex Probe Kit for the
test light probe connection to the vehicle. Do not use the test light probe directly on any connector.
rd
NOTE: Because the power window motor electrical connector (Hall-effect sensor input) is disconnected, the DDM only activates the window output for
approximately 500 ms then turns off.
Connect: DDM C501A.

ca
Ignition ON.
Connect:

C547-1 C547-4
Activate the driver door window control switch in the up and down positions while observing the test light.
Does the test light momentarily illuminate when the driver door window control switch is activated in both up and down positions?
Yes INSTALL a new driver door window regulator motor.

No GO to C20
C7
CHECK THE HALL-EFFECT POWER AND RETURN CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.

Ignition ON.
Measure:

C547-3 C547-6
Yes GO to C11
No GO to C8
C8
CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE HALL-EFFECT POWER AND RETURN CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

m
C547-3 C501A-16
C547-6 C501A-22
. co
gn
Yes GO to C20
ia

rd
C9
CHECK THE HALL-EFFECT POWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
ca
Measure:

C501A-16 Ground
Yes GO to C20
No GO to C10
C10
CHECK THE HALL-EFFECT POWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE POWER WINDOW MOTOR DISCONNECTED
Measure:

C501A-16 Ground

C11
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HALL-EFFECT SIGNAL CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C547-2 Ground
C547-5 Ground
m
Yes
No
REPAIR the circuit in question.
GO to C12
. co
gn
C12
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HALL-EFFECT SIGNAL CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
ia
Measure:

rd

C547-2 Ground
C547-5 Ground
ca
Yes GO to C13
C13
CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE HALL-EFFECT SIGNAL CIRCUITS
Measure:

C547-2 C501A-21
C547-5 C501A-11

TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to C20
C14
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C504-10 Ground
m
Yes GO to C15
No
co
VERIFY BCM fuse 23 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, REFER to the Wiring Diagrams manual to identify the
possible causes of the circuit short.
.
C15
CHECK THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
gn
Connect:
ia

C504-10 C504-1
rd
ca
Yes GO to C17
No GO to C16
C16
CHECK THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C504-1 C501A-17
Yes GO to C20

C17
CHECK THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C504-5 Ground

No GO to C18
C18
CHECK THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
m
C504-5 Ground

. co
gn
Yes GO to C19
ia
C19
CHECK THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Measure:
rd

ca
C504-5 C501A-5

CLEAR the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs). TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, GO to C20
C20
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the DDM connectors.
Repair:
Ignition ON.

FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new DDM.
A Single Power Window Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - RH Front

m
B117E:16 Front Power Window Up: Circuit This DTC sets when the PDM senses the passenger front window regulator motor circuit voltage is too low.
B1189:29 Front Window Position Sensor:
Signal Invalid
B12C5:71 Front Window Lifter Motor Up
co
This DTC sets when the PDM detects a difference with one or both of the Hall-effect sensor circuit(s). When this DTC is
present, the front window only operates in short steps.
This DTC sets when the PDM detects the UP relay (integral to the PDM) is stuck or a short to voltage is present in the
UP window motor circuit. When this DTC is present, the front window does not operate.
.
B12C8:71 Front Window Lifter Motor This DTC sets when the PDM detects the DOWN relay (integral to the PDM) is stuck or a short to voltage is present in
gn
Down Relay: Actuator Stuck the DOWN window motor circuit. When this DTC is present, the front window does not operate.
C1B14:11 Sensor Supply Voltage A: This DTC sets when the PDM detects a short to ground in the Hall-effect sensor power supply circuit. When this DTC is
Circuit Short To Ground present, the front window only operates in short steps.
C1B14:15 Sensor Supply Voltage A: This DTC sets when the PDM detects a short to ground in the Hall-effect sensor power supply circuit. When this DTC is
ia
Circuit Short To Battery or Open present, the front window only operates in short steps.
U2002:24 Switch: Signal Stuck High This DTC sets when the PDM detects the window control switch is stuck in the UP or DOWN position or a short to
ground is present on the input circuit for greater than 10 seconds.
rd
Possible Causes
ca

Passenger door window control switch
Passenger door window regulator motor
PDM
PINPOINT TEST D : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - RH (RIGHT-HAND) FRONT
D1
CHECK FOR PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
Ignition ON.
Using a diagnostic scan tool, perform PDM self-test.
Are any PDM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) present?
Yes For DTC C1B14:11, GO to D16

For DTC B1189:29 or C1B14:15, GO to D14
For DTC B117E:16, B12C5:71 or B12C8:71, GO to D10
For DTC U2002:24, GO to D6
For all other Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs),
No GO to D2
D2
CHECK THE WINDOW OPERATION FROM THE PASSENGER DOOR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Attempt to operate the RH door window from the passenger door window control switch.
Does the RH door window operate correctly from the passenger door window control switch?

No GO to D3
D3
CHECK THE PASSENGER DOOR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Passenger Door Window Control Switch C648.
Carry out the passenger door window control switch component test.
Did the passenger door window control switch pass the component test?
Yes GO to D4
No INSTALL a new passenger door window control switch.
D4
CHECK THE WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH UP/DOWN CIRCUITS
Ignition ON.
m
To check downward window operation, momentarily connect a fused jumper wire:

C648-3
. co Ground
To check upward window operation, momentarily connect a fused jumper wire:

gn
C648-2 Ground
ia
rd
Does the window operate upward and downward when the fused jumper wire is in place?
Yes REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to D5

ca
No REMOVE the fused jumper wire. GO to D9
D5
CHECK THE WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH RETURN CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C648-1 C652A-17
Yes GO to D21
D6
CHECK THE WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.

Measure:

C652A-8 Ground
C652A-9 Ground
Yes GO to D7
No GO to D8
D7
CHECK THE WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Carry out the window control switch component test.

m
Did the passenger door window control switch pass the component test?
Yes
No
GO to D21
INSTALL a new passenger door window control switch.
co
.
gn
D8
CHECK THE WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH DISCONNECTED
Measure:
ia

rd
C652A-8 Ground
C652A-9 Ground
ca
Yes INSTALL a new passenger door window control switch.

D9
CHECK THE WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C648-2 C652A-8
C648-3 C652A-9
Yes GO to D10
D10
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE WINDOW UP/DOWN CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: PDM C652A (if not previously disconnected).
Disconnect: Passenger Door Window Regulator Motor C623.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
m
C623-1 Ground
C623-4 Ground
. co
gn

ia
No GO to D11
rd
D11
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE WINDOW UP/DOWN CIRCUITS
ca
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C623-1 Ground
C623-4 Ground
Yes GO to D12
D12
CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE WINDOW UP/DOWN CIRCUITS
Measure:

C623-1 C652A-13
C623-4 C652A-14
Yes GO to D13
D13
CHECK THE PDM (PASSENGER DOOR MODULE) OUTPUT
NOTE: Because the power window motor electrical connector (Hall-effect sensor input) is disconnected, the PDM only activates the window output for
approximately 500 ms then turns off.
Connect: PDM C652A.
m
Ignition ON.
Connect:
C623-1
Positive Lead
. co
C623-4
Negative Lead
gn
Activate the passenger door window control switch in the up and down positions while observing the test light.
Does the test light momentarily illuminate when the window control switch is activated in both up and down positions?
ia
Yes INSTALL a new passenger door window regulator motor.

rd
No GO to D21
ca
D14
CHECK THE HALL-EFFECT POWER AND RETURN CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C623-3 C623-6
Yes GO to D18
No GO to D15
D15
CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE HALL-EFFECT POWER AND RETURN CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C623-3 C652A-16
C623-6 C652A-22
Yes GO to D21
D16
CHECK THE HALL-EFFECT POWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
Ignition OFF.
m
Measure:
C652A-16
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
Yes GO to D21
ia
No GO to D17
rd
D17
CHECK THE HALL-EFFECT POWER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PASSENGER DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR
DISCONNECTED
ca
Measure:

C652A-16 Ground

D18
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE IN THE HALL-EFFECT SIGNAL CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C623-2 Ground
C623-5 Ground

No GO to D19
D19
CHECK FOR A SHORT TO GROUND IN THE HALL-EFFECT SIGNAL CIRCUITS
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C623-2 Ground
C623-5 Ground
m
. co
gn
Yes GO to D20

ia
D20
CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE HALL-EFFECT SIGNAL CIRCUITS
rd
Measure:

ca

C623-2 C652A-21
C623-5 C652A-11

D21
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the PDM connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the PDM connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
Ignition ON.
FOLLOW TSB instructions. If no Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) address this concern, INSTALL a new PDM.
The One-Touch Up/Down Feature Is Inoperative
m
Possible Causes
Window regulator motor not initialized

DDM
PDM
. co
gn
PINPOINT TEST E : THE ONE-TOUCH UP/DOWN FEATURE IS INOPERATIVE
E1
INITIALIZE THE SUSPECT POWER WINDOW
Carry out the initialization procedure on the suspect power window.
REFER to: Power Door Window Initialization - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open and Close Front Windows/Programmable Driver Seat (501-11 Glass,
ia
Frames and Mechanisms, General Procedures).
Is the one-touch up feature operating correctly?

rd
Yes The system is operating normally at this time. The window lost initialization.
No If the one-touch up feature is inoperative for the LH front window, INSTALL a new master window control switch.
ca
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, INSTALL a new DDM.
If the one-touch up feature is inoperative for the RH front window when using the master window control switch only, INSTALL a new
master window control switch.
If the one-touch up feature is inoperative for the RH front window when using the RH front window control switch, INSTALL a new RH
front window control switch.
TEST the system for normal operation. If the concern is still present, INSTALL a new PDM.
A Single Power Window Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - LH Rear
NOTE: If both rear windows are inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test H
Possible Causes
LH rear door window control switch
LH rear door window regulator motor
PINPOINT TEST F : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - LH (LEFT-HAND) REAR
F1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to F2
No GO to F3
F2
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
Measure:
C701-5
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia

rd
F3
ca
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C701-1 Ground
Yes GO to F4
F4
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C701-3 Ground
Yes GO to F5
F5
Ignition ON.

C701-6 Ground

m
C701-7 Ground
Yes GO to F7
. co
No GO to F6
gn
F6
ia
Ignition OFF.

rd
Measure:

ca
C504-16 C701-7
C504-15 C701-6

F7
Ignition ON.

C701-1 C701-8
C701-4 C701-3

C701-1 C701-4
C701-8 C701-3
m
F8
Ignition OFF.
co
.
gn
Measure:

ia
C701-4 C703-1
C701-8 C703-2
rd
ca
motor.
A Single Power Window Is Inoperative/Does Not Operate Correctly - RH Rear
NOTE: If both rear windows are inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test H
Possible Causes

RH rear door window control switch
RH rear door window regulator motor
PINPOINT TEST G : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE/DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - RH (RIGHT-HAND) REAR
G1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to G2
No GO to G3
G2
Ignition OFF.
m
Ignition ON.
Measure:
C801-5
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn

ia
rd
G3
Ignition OFF.
ca
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C801-1 Ground
Yes GO to G4
G4
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C801-3 Ground
Yes GO to G5
G5
Ignition ON.

C801-6 Ground

m
C801-7 Ground
Yes GO to G7
. co
No GO to G6
gn
G6
ia
Ignition OFF.

rd
Measure:

ca
C504-13 C801-7
C504-14 C801-6

G7
Ignition ON.

C801-1 C801-8
C801-4 C801-3

C801-1 C801-4
C801-8 C801-3
m
No REMOVE the jumper wires. GO to G8
G8
Ignition OFF.
co
.
gn
Measure:

ia
C801-4 C803-1
C801-8 C803-2
rd
ca
motor.
Both Rear Passenger Power Windows Are Inoperative
Possible Causes
Circuit breaker
PINPOINT TEST H : BOTH REAR PASSENGER POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE

H1
CHECK THE REAR WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C701-1 Ground
Yes GO to H3
No GO to H2
m
H2
Ignition OFF.
Connect: LH Rear Window Control Switch C701.

. co
Ignition ON.
gn
Attempt to operate the power windows in both directions from each of the rear door window control switches.

ia
No If the rear power windows did operate with the fused jumper wire in place, INSTALL a new circuit breaker.
If the power windows did not operate with the fused jumper wire in place, REPAIR circuit CBP38 (GY/BU) for an open.
rd
H3
ca
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C504-3 C701-5

Component Test- Grid Wire Test
1. Using a bright lamp in the vehicle, inspect the grid wire from the exterior. A broken grid wire appears as a brown spot.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open Driver Window - Overview
Overview
Standard power window features include one-touch down operation (LH front window only) when the master window control
switch is momentarily pressed to the second detent and released.
may be used to manually raise or lower all windows from the master window control switch or the individual side window
from the corresponding door switch.
defrost relay when the rear window defrost switch (integral to the FCIM-B (Front Controls Interface Module "B")) is pressed.
When the rear window defrost relay is active, the rear window defrost grid is energized.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open Driver Window - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
m
. co
gn
ia

rd

ca

Message
Climate control FCIM-B (Front Controls When the rear window defrost button is selected, this input is used to
requests Interface Module "B") activate the rear window defrost system.
integral to the BCM and not serviceable separately. The BCM activates the accessory delay relay whenever the ignition is in the
RUN or the ACC position, or when the ignition is changed from RUN or ACC to the OFF position and the LH and RH front doors
are closed.
the LH or RH front door is ajar and the ignition is in the OFF or key-out position.
ten minutes have elapsed since the ignition was changed from ACC or RUN to the OFF position.
Power Window Operation
The power windows operate when the delayed accessory relay is active. The LH front power window is equipped with a one-
touch down feature (controlled by the master window control switch integral electronics). This allows the LH front power window
to be completely lowered when the master window control switch is pressed to the second detent position and then released.
The RH front and both rear power windows can be operated from the master window control switch or the passenger door
Passenger Rear Power Windows Lock- Out
Police Option
For police vehicles only, there is an in-line connector which, if disconnected, disables the LH and RH rear window operation
except from the master window control switch (regardless of the lock-out switch position).
Rear Window Defrost
The master window control switch is supplied voltage whenever the accessory delay relay is active.
m
The master window control switch:
downward.
co
contains integral electronics to control the one-touch down operation of the LH front power window.
supplies high current voltage and ground directly to the LH front power window motor to move the window upward and
when operating any passenger power window from the master window control switch, low current voltage signals are
.
sent to the corresponding passenger window control switch to move the window up or down.
gn
supplies low current voltage to the rear power windows when the lock-out switch is in the UNLOCK position.
Passenger Window Control Switch - Front

ia
The RH front window control switch receives voltage (high current circuit) from the delayed accessory relay whenever it is
active. The RH front window control switch recieves voltage (low current circuit) from the master window control switch and also
has a dedicated ground circuit. The window control switch contains 2 relays, which when at rest (inactive), provide a ground
rd
path to the power window motor circuit(s).
When the window control switch is activated, the corresponding relay located within the RH front window control switch is
ca
Passenger Window Control Switch - Rear
circuit(s).
Window Regulator Motor
The power window motors are all bi-directional. Window direction is determined by the polarity of the voltage and ground being
supplied to the motor from the window control switch.
module.
HVAC Module
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open Driver Window


B1C83:12 Rear Defog Relay: Circuit GO to Pinpoint Test G
Short To Battery
B1C83:14 Rear Defog Relay: Circuit If the rear window defrost is inoperative, GO to Pinpoint Test G
Short To Ground or Open If the rear window defrost does not shut off automatically, GO to Pinpoint Test H

Trouble Codes (DTCs) REFER to: Climate Control System - Vehicles With: Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (412-
00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
m
Symptom Chart(s)
co
.
gn

Symptom Chart

ia
All power windows are inoperative Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test A

Pinpoint Test
rd
Both rear power windows are Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test B

inoperative Pinpoint Test
A single power window is inoperative - Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test C

ca
LH front Pinpoint Test
A single power window is inoperative - Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test D

RH front Pinpoint Test
A single power window is inoperative - Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test E

LH rear Pinpoint Test
A single power window is inoperative - Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test E

RH rear Pinpoint Test
The one-touch down feature is Window control INSTALL a new master window control switch.
inoperative switch REFER to: Driver Door Window Control Switch - Police (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms,
The defrost system is inoperative Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test G
Pinpoint Test
The defrost system does not shut off Refer to the GO to Pinpoint Test H
automatically Pinpoint Test
Pinpoint Test(s)
All Power Windows are Inoperative
REFER to: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Vehicles With: One-Touch Open Driver Window - System Operation and Component Description (501-11 Glass, Frames
and Mechanisms, Description and Operation).
Possible Causes
Circuit breaker
BCM
PINPOINT TEST A : ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE

A1
CHECK ALL WINDOW OPERATION FROM THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition ON.
Attempt to operate each window from the master window control switch.
Do any of the windows operate from the master window control switch?
Yes GO to the Symptom Chart to diagnose the inoperative window(s).

No GO to A2
A2
m
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Master Window Control Switch C535B.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

. co
gn
C535B-3 Ground
ia

rd
REFER to: Driver Door Window Control Switch - Police (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
No GO to A3
ca
A3
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Attempt to operate each individual power window in both directions from the master window control switch as well as from each passenger door
No If the power windows did operate with the fused jumper wire in place, INSTALL a new circuit breaker.
If the power windows did not operate with the fused jumper wire in place, GO to A4
A4
CHECK THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH VOLTAGE CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: BCM C2280C.
Measure:

C535B-3 C2280C-36
Yes GO to A5
A5
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect and inspect all the BCM connectors.
Repair:
Reconnect the BCM connectors and all previously disconnected system connectors. Make sure they seat and latch correctly.
m
No
co
.
gn
Both Rear Power Windows are Inoperative
ia

rd
Possible Causes
ca

In-line connector disconnected (police vehicles only)
PINPOINT TEST B : BOTH REAR POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE

B1
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: Master Window Control Switch C535A.
Measure:

C535A-3 C701-5

No For police vehicles, VERIFY in-line connector C3206 is connected. If connected, REPAIR the circuit. If not connected, the system is
operating correctly. The in-line connector, when disconnected, disables the rear window operation except from the master window
control switch.
For non-police vehicles, REPAIR the circuit.
A Single Power Window is Inoperative - LH Front
Possible Causes

Power window motor
PINPOINT TEST C : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - LH (LEFT-HAND) FRONT

C1
Ignition OFF.
m
Disconnect: Master Window Control Switch C535B.
Measure:
C535B-1
Positive Lead
. co
Ground
Negative Lead
gn
Yes GO to C2
ia

rd
C2
Ignition ON.
ca

C535B-3 C535B-2
C535B-4 C535B-1

C535B-3 C535B-4
C535B-2 C535B-1
Does the LH front window move up and/or down?
Yes REMOVE the jumper wires. INSTALL a new master window control switch.
No REMOVE the jumper wires. GO to C3
C3
Ignition OFF.
Disconnect: LH Front Power Window Motor C540.
Measure:

C535B-4 C540-1
C535B-2 C540-2
m
Yes
co
MAKE SURE there are no mechanical binding conditions preventing the glass mechanism from operating correctly. If a mechanical
binding issue is found, REPAIR as necessary. If no mechanical binding condition exists, INSTALL a new LH front power window
motor.
.
gn
A Single Power Window is Inoperative - RH Front

ia
rd
ca
Possible Causes

Power window motor
PINPOINT TEST D : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - RH (RIGHT-HAND) FRONT

D1
Ignition ON.
Attempt to operate the RH front window from the master window control switch.
Does the RH front window operate from the master window control switch?
Yes GO to D2
No GO to D4
D2
CHECK FOR VOLTAGE FROM THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C604-5 Ground
Yes INSTALL a new RH window control switch.

REFER to: Passenger Door Window Control Switch - Police (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
No GO to D3
D3
CHECK THE MASTER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C604-5 C535A-10
m

co
.
gn
D4
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Measure:

ca

C604-1 Ground
Yes GO to D5
D5
CHECK THE RH (RIGHT-HAND) WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C604-3 Ground
Yes GO to D6
D6
Ignition ON.

C604-6 Ground

C604-7 Ground
Is the voltage greater than 11 volts when the master window control switch is pressed; and 0 volt when the switch is released?
Yes GO to D8
m
No GO to D7
D7
Ignition OFF.

. co
gn
If equipped with manual rear windows, measure:

C535A-13 C604-7
ia
C535A-14 C604-6
rd
ca

D8
Ignition ON.

C604-1 C604-8
C604-4 C604-3

C604-1 C604-4
C604-8 C604-3
Does the RH front window move up and/or down?
Yes REMOVE the jumper wires. INSTALL a new RH front window control switch.
REFER to: Passenger Door Window Control Switch - Police (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
No REMOVE the jumper wires. GO to D9
D9
Ignition OFF.
m
Measure:
C604-4
C604-8
Positive Lead . co
C636-1
C636-2
Negative Lead
gn
ia

rd
binding issue is found, REPAIR as necessary. If no mechanical binding condition exists, INSTALL a new RH front power window
motor.
ca
A Single Power Window is Inoperative - LH Rear
Possible Causes

Power window motor
PINPOINT TEST E : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - LH (LEFT-HAND) REAR

E1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to E2
No GO to E3
E2
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C701-5 Ground
m
REFER to: Rear Door Window Control Switch - Police (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and Installation).
Ignition OFF.
. co
E3
gn
Ignition ON.
Measure:
ia

rd
C701-1 Ground
ca
Yes GO to E4
E4
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C701-3 Ground
Yes GO to E5
E5
Ignition ON.

C701-6 Ground

C701-7 Ground
Yes GO to E7
No GO to E6
E6
m
Ignition OFF.

Positive Lead
. co
C535A-18 C701-7
gn
C535A-17 C701-6
ia
rd

ca

E7
Ignition ON.

C701-1 C701-8
C701-4 C701-3

C701-1 C701-4
C701-8 C701-3
No REMOVE the jumper wires. GO to E8
E8
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C701-4 C703-1
m
C701-8 C703-2
. co
gn
ia
motor.
rd

ca
A Single Power Window is Inoperative - RH Rear
Possible Causes

Power window motor
PINPOINT TEST F : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - RH (RIGHT-HAND) REAR

F1
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to F2
No GO to F3
F2
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

C801-5 Ground

m
F3
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:
. co
gn
C801-1 Ground
ia

rd
Yes GO to F4
ca
F4
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C801-3 Ground
Yes GO to F5
F5
Ignition ON.

C801-6 Ground

C801-7 Ground
Yes GO to F7
No GO to F6
F6
Ignition OFF.
m
C535A-15 C801-7
C535A-16 . co C801-6
gn

ia

rd

ca
F7
Ignition ON.

C801-1 C801-8
C801-4 C801-3

C801-1 C801-4
C801-8 C801-3
F8
Ignition OFF.
Measure:

C801-4 C803-1
m
C801-8 C803-2
. co
gn
ia
motor.
rd
ca


circuit.
Possible Causes
Fuse
HVAC module
Rear window glass

PINPOINT TEST G : THE DEFROST SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE

G1
Start the engine.
Measure:

C402A-1 Ground
m
Yes GO to G2
GO to G3
G2
. co
Ignition OFF.
gn
Measure:
ia

C402B-1 Ground
rd
ca
G3
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Ground
Ground
m
. co
gn

ia
rd
Yes GO to G4
ca
G4
Start the engine.
Connect:

Action
m
Yes
No
GO to G5
GO to G6
. co
gn
G5
ia
rd

ca
G6
Ignition ON.
Yes GO to G7
G7
Ignition OFF.
Ignition ON.
Measure:

Ground

No GO to G8
m
G8
Ignition OFF.
Measure:
Positive Lead
C228A-25
gn
ia
rd
ca
Yes GO to G9
G9
Ignition OFF.
Repair:

and Installation).


m
Possible Causes

. co
HVAC module
gn
PINPOINT TEST H : THE DEFROST SYSTEM DOES NOT SHUT OFF AUTOMATICALLY
H1
Disconnect: Rear Window Defrost Relay
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Measure:

ca

C402A-1 Ground
No GO to H2
H2
Start the engine.
Connect:

Action
m
Yes GO to H3
. co
H3
gn
Ignition OFF.
ia
Ignition ON.
rd
Connect:
ca

Action

No GO to H4
H4
Ignition OFF.
Repair:
m
and Installation).
Component Test(s)
. co
gn
Grid Wire Test
1. Using a bright lamp in the vehicle, inspect the wire grid from the exterior. A broken grid wire appears as a brown spot.
ia
rd
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
415-00B Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Vehicles With: SYNC 2017 Explorer
Without Touchscreen 1FM5K7D8XHGA343
Removal and Installation Procedure revision date:
05/6/201556
Global Positioning System Module (GPSM)
Removal
Using a diagnostic scan tool, begin the PMI process for the GPSM following the on-screen instructions.
2. Remove the IPC.

Refer to: Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) (413-01 Instrumentation, Message Center and Warning Chimes, Removal and
Installation).
3.
Release the clips and remove the GPSM.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Installation
Using a diagnostic scan tool, complete the PMI process for the GPSM following the on-screen instructions.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
501-12 Instrument Panel and Console 2017 Explorer 1FM5K7D8XHGA34356
Glove Compartment
Removal
1. Release the clips and remove the RH instrument panel side trim panel.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
2. Detach the glove compartment dampener from the glove compartment bin.
m
3. Remove the passenger knee air bag.
co
Refer to: Passenger Knee Airbag (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
.
gn
Remove the 2 glove compartment hinge pins.

ia
rd
ca
5. Open the glove compartment door and remove.

m
Installation

. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Grille Mounted Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps
Removal

2. Remove the nuts and the grille mounted flashing LED lamp.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
Installation
ca

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
General Procedures
Group Flash Pattern Programming
Activation
1. WARNING: Police Package warning lights are a high-intensity Light-Emitting Diode (LED) type. Do not stare
directly at these lights, as doing so may cause temporary blindness and/or eye damage. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTE: When cycling through flash patterns, most flash patterns include an off/on pattern followed by an inverse on/off
pattern. Setting the LEDon one side to the on/off and the other to off/on creates the alternating pattern effect which
should not be confused with synchronization which applies to the pattern timing between LED groups. For proper
synchronization, the correct flash patterns must be selected for the individual flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
Refer to the Explorer, Taurus Police Interceptor Modifier Guide for specific flashing LED patterns.
Activate the flashing Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) in the group to be programmed.
2. Locate the pattern programming circuits at inline C4231.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
3. To change the flashing pattern for park/turn/WARN, grille, front corner, front auxiliary and exterior mirror flashing Light
ca
Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and high beam wig-wags:

To cycle forward to the next pattern, connect 12 volts to pin 2 of inline C4231 for less than 1 second.
To cycle back to the previous pattern, connect 12 volts to pin 2 of inline C4231 for greater than 1 second.
4. To change the flashing pattern for rear quarter glass, tail lamp, high mount and decklid flashing Light Emitting Diodes
(LEDs):
To cycle forward to the next pattern, connect 12 volts to pin 2 of inline C4231 for less than 1 second.
To cycle back to the previous pattern, connect 12 volts to pin 2 of inline C4231 for greater than 1 second.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.co
m
Halfshaft Seal LH
Base Part Number: 7H260
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Handle
307-582A
Cover Axle Seal Installer
TKIT-2008AS-FLM
m
Puller
Punch
Removal
. co
gn
2. Remove the front LH halfshaft.

Refer to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
ia
3. Using a punch, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal.

Use the General Equipment: Punch
rd
ca
4. Using a puller, remove the halfshaft seal.

Installation
1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the special tool.

Use Special Service Tool: 205-153 (T80T-4000-W) Handle. , 307-582A Cover Axle Seal Installer.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2. Using the special tool, install the LH halfshaft seal.

ca
3. Install the front LH halfshaft.

Refer to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Removal
1. NOTE: The RH halfshaft seal for AWD vehicles is part of the transfer case.
To install a new RH halfshaft seal for AWD vehicles, refer to Intermediate Shaft Seal.
Refer to: Intermediate Shaft Seal (308-07D) .
Refer to: Intermediate Shaft Seal (308-07C Power Transfer Unit - 3.5L Duratec (209kW/284PS)/3.5L EcoBoost
Installation
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
205-153 (T80T-4000-W)
Handle
307-582A
Cover Axle Seal Installer
TKIT-2008AS-FLM
m
Puller
Punch
Removal
. co
gn
2. Remove the front RH halfshaft.

Refer to: Front Halfshaft RH - FWD (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
ia
3. Using a punch, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal.

Use the General Equipment: Punch
rd
ca
4. Using a puller, remove the halfshaft seal.

Installation
1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the special tool.

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
2. Using the special tool, install the RH halfshaft seal.

ca
3. Install the front RH halfshaft.

Refer to: Front Halfshaft RH - FWD (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).

m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - Overview
Overview
The power lock/unlock feature locks or unlocks the doors upon a customer request from a door lock control switch, the keyless
entry keypad (if equipped), the passive entry system (if equipped) or a RKE transmitter. Each door can also be locked manually
using the mechanical access opening just above the door latch.
If equipped, the passive entry feature automatically locks or unlocks the doors, or releases the liftgate latch (manual liftgate) or
power opens the liftgate (power liftgate).
If equipped with the police package, an independent liftgate unlock feature is incorporated as part of the liftgate latch release.
The liftgate latch can only be released using the liftgate lock cylinder or by pressing the liftgate unlock button in the overhead
console or the blue liftgate button on the RKE transmitter and, within 45 seconds, pressing the liftgate release button located on
the liftgate.
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
System Diagram
m
. co
gn
ia
rd
ca


Message Module
Vehicle speed PCM The BCM uses the vehicle speed data for the autolock and auto-unlock features.
RKE data RTM Provides the BCM with the lock/unlock status of the driver door latch. The lock/unlock status is
used for the illumination of the door lock status indicator.
Door lock DDM/ PDM Provides the BCM with lock/unlock requests based on the input from the door lock control
switch status switch.

IPC Module Network Input Messages

Module
Message center feature IPC Provides the BCM configuration settings selected by the driver of the vehicle, such
m
configuration as autolock and auto-unlock settings.
Power Door Locks

co
The BCM controls the door locks using a series of integrated relays (driver door unlock/passenger doors unlock/all doors lock).
.
When the relays are not energized, ground is provided on both circuits to the lock motors within the latches. When an unlock
gn
relay energizes, voltage is provided to one side of the lock motor to unlock the door(s). When the lock relay energizes, the
polarity is reversed and the motors lock the doors.
On vehicles not equipped with a memory seat, the BCM sends voltage signals to the door lock control switches. When a door
ia
lock control switch is pressed, the voltage signal is routed to ground, indicating a request to lock/unlock the doors.
On vehicles equipped with a memory seat, the DDM and PDM send voltage signals to the door lock control switches. When a
rd
door lock control switch is pressed, the voltage signal is routed to ground, indicating a request to lock/unlock the doors. When
the DDM or PDM detects a lock or unlock request, a message is sent over the CAN to the BCM to lock or unlock the doors.
ca
Based on input from the door lock control switches, the keyless entry keypad (if equipped), the passive entry system (if
equipped) and the RKE transmitter, the BCM unlocks the driver door, unlocks all the doors or locks all the doors.
Switch Inhibit Feature
The switch inhibit feature prevents unauthorized access to the vehicle from the door lock control switches or the liftgate release
switch. The BCM ignores the input from both door lock control switches and the interior liftgate release switch 20 seconds after
the vehicle is electronically locked. If any of these switches are activated while they are inhibited, a chime sounds and a
message displays in the message center to indicate the switches are inhibited. The BCM enables the function of these switches
when the vehicle is electronically unlocked by another feature.
This feature can be configured on/off through the message center.
Power Door Locking Feedback
The exterior lamps and horn provide visual and audible feedback when unlocking and locking the doors under certain
circumstances. Refer to the following table:
NOTE: The mislock feature (if equipped) sounds the horn twice (no turn signal flash) if the hood, liftgate or any door is ajar
when the lock button is pressed on a valid programmed RKE transmitter. This feature can be configured on/off through the
message center.
Action Status of Status of Status Visual/Audible Feedback
Door(s) Liftgate of Hood
Press the lock button on the door Open Closed Closed A short flash of the turn signals after all the doors are
lock control switch closed.
Press 7/8 and 9/0 on the keyless Closed Closed Closed A short flash of the turn signals.
entry keypad
Press the unlock button on a RKE Closed Closed Closed A long flash of the turn signals.
transmitter
Press the lock button on a RKE Closed Closed Closed A short flash of the turn signals.
transmitter
Press the lock button on a RKE Open Closed Closed A short flash of the turn signals after all the doors are
transmitter closed.
Press the lock button on a RKE Closed Open Closed A short flash of the turn signals after the liftgate is
transmitter closed.
Press the lock button on a RKE Closed Closed Open A short flash of the turn signals after the hood is
transmitter closed.
Press the lock button on a RKE Closed Closed Closed The horn chirps once and the turn signals flash twice.
transmitter twice within 3 seconds
m
Press the lock button on a RKE Open Closed Closed The horn immediately chirps and after all the doors
transmitter twice within 3 seconds are closed, the turn signals flash twice.
Press the lock button on a RKE Closed Open Closed The horn immediately chirps twice and after the
Press the lock button on a RKE
Closed Closed
. co
Open
liftgate is closed, the turn signals flash twice.
The horn immediately

Workshop Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Workshop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alphabetical Index

About This Manual

Active Torque Coupling Configuration

Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe

Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe

(209kW/284PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control - Overview

Operation, 206-09 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and Stability Control)

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module

Blind Spot Information System - Overview

Blind Spot Information System

Catalyst Monitor Sensor

Catalytic Converter LH

Condenser - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)

Coolant Inlet Pipe

Cylinder Head LH

Cylinder Head RH

Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor

Driveshaft Angle Measurement

Electronic Engine Controls - Component Location

Engine Cooling - System Operation and Component Description

Engine Emission Control - Component Location

Engine Emission Control - Component Location

Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection

Exhaust System - Overview

Exhaust System - Overview

Front Controls Interface Module B (FCIMB)

Information - Vehicles Without: SYNC)

Information - Vehicles With: Touchscreen Display)

Front Seats - System Operation and Component Description

Front Stabilizer Bar Link

Front Strut and Spring Assembly

Fuel Pump Driver Module (FPDM)

Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor

Fuel System - General Information - 2.3L EcoBoost (201kW/273PS)

Fuel System Pressure Check

Fuel System Pressure Release

(Diagnosis and Testing, 501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms)

Instrument Panel and Interior Switches Illumination - Overview

Keyless Entry Keypad

Knock Sensor (KS)

Lane Keeping System - Component Location

Automatic Transmission - 6F50/6F55)

Main Control Cover - 3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS)

Main Control Valve Body

(257kW/350PS)/3.7L Duratec (227kW/301PS))

Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot

Overdrive Clutch Assembly

Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)

Pinpoint Test - DTC: AA

Pinpoint Test - DTC: AD

Pinpoint Test - DTC: AG

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve

Programmable Driver Seat

Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

Quarter Window Flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED) Lamps

Quick Release Coupling

Rear Parking Aid Camera

Rear Quarter Panel Speaker

Roof Opening Panel Glass

Roof Opening Panel Shield

Roof Opening Panel

307-05 Automatic Transmission External Controls)

Starting System - System Operation and Component Description